JP7397289B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Slot machines have been known as one type of gaming machine (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-016110

The problem to be solved by the present invention is to improve the performance of a gaming machine.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following solving means (the structure of the corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses).
The present invention
has a reel (31);
It has a start switch (41),
It has a stop switch (42),
It has a predetermined lamp (game start display LED 79d) that can notify that the start switch operation is valid,
has an RWM (53) area,
It is possible to execute a predetermined pseudo game effect in which the reels can be temporarily stopped by operating a stop switch ,
In a game in which a predetermined pseudo game performance is performed, and a predetermined lottery result is determined by an internal lottery, a test corresponding to the predetermined lottery result is performed until all reels temporarily stop as a predetermined pseudo game performance. If all reels temporarily stop as a predetermined pseudo game effect without executing the process for outputting the signal, and then the predetermined pseudo game effect ends, a test signal corresponding to the predetermined lottery result is output. Enables processing to be executed,
When the start switch is operated to trigger the internal lottery of the certain game, a predetermined process for outputting an external signal corresponding to the number of bets is executed before a predetermined pseudo game effect execution process. possible,
There is a case where a predetermined pseudo game production is ended by operating a start switch in a predetermined situation where all reels are temporarily stopped as a predetermined pseudo game production,
In certain situations, a specified lamp does not indicate that the start switch operation is valid;
If the game media granting conditions are met, the game media granting process can be executed.
It is characterized by

According to the present invention, the performance as a gaming machine can be improved.

1 is a block diagram schematically showing control of a slot machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, in the present embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view illustrating how medals inserted from the medal slot pass through the insertion sensor in the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a voltage drop when a power outage occurs in the first embodiment (A) using a time chart. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the insertion sensor and the passage of medals in the first embodiment (B). FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating on/off of the input sensor using a time chart in the first embodiment (B). FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram when medals are ejected from the medal payout device in the first embodiment (C). FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing how the payout sensor is turned on (detected)/off (non-detected) when medals are sent out from the medal payout device in the first embodiment (C). In the first embodiment (C), it is a diagram showing on/off of the payout sensor in a time chart. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view schematically showing a main control board and a board case in a second embodiment. In the second embodiment, (a) is a plan view showing a board case housing a main control board. (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA, showing example 1 of the gate trace. (c) is a sectional view taken along the line AA, showing example 2 of the gate trace. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating the flow of processing when a disconnection occurs between the main control board and the sub-control board in the third embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, it is a sectional view (schematic diagram) explaining the movement of the stop button of the stop switch, (a) shows a no-load state, and (b) shows when the detection sensor is turned on from off. (c) shows the state in which the stop button is pressed to the deepest position, and (d) shows the state when the stop button is released from being pressed and the detection sensor changes from on to off. FIG. 7 is a time chart showing the relationship between the movement of a stop button and the excitation state of a motor in the fourth embodiment, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2. In the fifth embodiment, it is a time chart showing the relationship between power on/off and voltage level, (a) shows power off after main program startup, and (b) shows power off before main program startup. Indicates power off. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device showing the state before the last ejected medal contacts the fixed shaft and the movable shaft, and (b) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device before the last ejected medal contacts the fixed shaft and the movable shaft. FIG. 6 is a plan view of the medal dispensing device showing a state in which the hopper disk has rotated more advanced than in (a) before coming into contact with the movable shaft; In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device showing a state in which the last ejected medal is in contact with the fixed shaft and the movable shaft, and (b) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device that is moved by being pushed by the last ejected medal. FIG. 3 is a plan view of the medal payout device showing a state in which the shaft has moved. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal payout device showing the state at the moment the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section, and (b) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device after ejecting the last ejected medal. FIG. 3 is a plan view of the medal payout device showing a state in which the rotation of the hopper disk is stopped. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the drive signal of a hopper motor, the drive state of a hopper motor, and the discharge situation of medals from a discharge part in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the operation|movement of the main control board, the driving state of a hopper motor, the detection state of a payout sensor, and the discharge timing of a medal in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of payout processing in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the flow of payout processing in a 6th embodiment. FIG. 7 is a side sectional view of the slot machine with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the main control board and the sub-control board. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitor on the sub-control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment; ) shows Example 1, and (b) shows Example 2. In the seventh embodiment, when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed, it is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitor on the sub-control board, (c ) shows Example 3, and (d) shows Example 4. FIG. 22 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower front part of the housing of the slot machine (section A in FIG. 22) with the front door closed in the eighth embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating the gap between the cabinet and the front door. be. In the ninth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the types of special combinations (accessories) and end conditions, and (b) is a diagram showing the types of gaming states and the prescribed number of each gaming state, (c) is a diagram showing a number table for internal lottery and advantageous section lottery in setting 1. It is a figure which shows the effect determination table used commonly by non-RT and RT (non-AT) in 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the effect determination table used both in RB inside and BB inside in a 9th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of the test pattern display of management information display LED in 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of the test pattern display of management information display LED in 10th Embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display board, (B) is a diagram showing management information display LED, and (C) is a diagram showing setting value display LED. It is. 11 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b and segments A to G and P in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. It is a figure which shows the output port in 11th Embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between an interrupt, an LED display counter value, a digit signal, and a segment signal. Further, (B) is a diagram showing an LED display request flag. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, names, etc. of data stored in RWM. 2A and 2B are diagrams illustrating the concept of a difference counter value, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the relationship between a difference counter value and an advantageous section, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2. It is a flowchart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) by the main control board. This is a flowchart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 in FIG. 38. This is a flowchart showing the power return processing (M_POWER_ON) in step S213 in FIG. 38. It is a flowchart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in an 11th embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the game start setting process (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG. 41. This is a flowchart showing the AT game number counter updating process in step S281 in FIG. 41. 42 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section transfer lottery process in step S283 in FIG. 41. 45 is a flowchart showing advantageous section transition processing in step S347 of FIG. 44. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing AT lottery processing in step S355 of FIG. 45. FIG. This is a flowchart showing the AT initial number of games determination process in step S363 in FIG. 46. 42 is a flowchart showing the push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG. 41. This is a flowchart showing the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) due to winning in step S294 in FIG. 41. 42 is a flowchart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG. 41. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example 1 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. 50; 51 is a flowchart showing example 2 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. 50; It is a flowchart which shows interrupt processing (I_INTR). 54 is a flowchart showing power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG. 53. FIG. This is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S453 in FIG. 53. 11 is a flowchart showing sub-difference sheet number counter management processing in the eleventh embodiment. 57 is a flowchart showing sub-difference sheet number counter management processing in the eleventh embodiment, and is a flowchart continuing from FIG. 56. In the twelfth embodiment, (A) shows the accessory condition device and the operation end condition, (B) shows the specified number for each RT, and (C) shows the winning number for each winning number. It is a front view, a top view, and a right side view showing an outline of a composition including a reel and a stop switch in a 13th embodiment. In the fourteenth embodiment (A), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (A), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing (M_MAIN) in 14th Embodiment (B). In the fourteenth embodiment (B), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (B), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and display end of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing (M_MAIN) in 14th Embodiment (C). It is a flowchart which shows the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) by winning a prize in 14th Embodiment (C). In the fourteenth embodiment (C), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum game time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (C), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and display end of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing (M_MAIN) in 14th Embodiment (D). In the fourteenth embodiment (D), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and display end of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (D), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed. It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) in 14th Embodiment (E). In the fourteenth embodiment (E), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (E), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed. It is a front view showing an outline of a composition including a reel, an operation instruction lamp, and a stop switch in a 14th embodiment (F). In the fourteenth embodiment (F), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (F), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (G), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum game time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (G), it is a time chart showing the timing of display start and display end of push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the medal addition process in 15th Embodiment (A). It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the medal addition process in 15th Embodiment (B). It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the medal addition process in 15th Embodiment (C). It is a schematic diagram seen from the front of a medal selector, a chute passage 48, and a chute sensor 49 in a 16th embodiment. It is a front view of the passage formation member in 17th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the passage forming member in a 17th embodiment. It is a left side view of the passage forming member in a 17th embodiment. FIG. 86 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 85 of the passage forming member in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing main storage areas of RWM explained in the eighteenth embodiment. 12 is a time chart (Example 1) showing the output timing of external signal 4 and external signal 5 in the 18th embodiment. 12 is a time chart (Example 2) showing the output timing of external signal 4 and external signal 5 in the 18th embodiment. 12 is a flowchart (Example 1) showing external signal output processing in the 18th embodiment. 344 is a flowchart (example 1) showing external signal output processing in the eighteenth embodiment, and is a flowchart following FIG. 344. 12 is a flowchart (Example 2) showing external signal output processing in the 18th embodiment. 12 is a flowchart (Example 3) showing external signal output processing in the 18th embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine in a 19th embodiment (A). In the 19th embodiment, it is a time chart showing the relationship between a setting change state, a setting change end sound, a lamp effect, and one game time to be described later. It is an external perspective view of the Pachinko gaming machine seen from the front side (player side). It is an external perspective view of the Pachinko gaming machine seen from the back side. It is a block diagram of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining the flow of startup after turning on the power of the Pachinko game machine. 101 is a flowchart showing the setting change process in step S702 of FIG. 100. FIG. It is a flowchart showing the flow of one game in the Pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the board cases (upper case and lower case) and the main control board as seen from the front side. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the board cases (upper case and lower case) and the main control board as seen from the rear side. FIG. 3 is an external perspective view showing a state in which the main control board is housed in the board case. FIG. 3 is a front view of the main control board housed in the board case, viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is a front view of the main control board housed in the board case, viewed from the rear (back) side. FIG. 3 is a side cross-sectional view showing the fitted state of the upper case and the lower case, in which (a) shows the temporarily fitted state (before sliding movement), and (b) shows the fully fitted state (after sliding movement). . FIG. 7 is a plan view of the vicinity of the side wall viewed from the lower case side in a temporarily fitted state. FIG. 3 is a plan view showing a state in which the harness is connected to the connector of the main control board. It is a front view showing the harness and its connector terminal in detail. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing an example of hiding lead wires related to starting. FIG. 3 is a side cross-sectional view showing the positional relationship among the upper case of the board case, the cover, the setting key insertion slot, and the setting change (reset) switch. It is a figure showing the pattern arrangement of the reel in a 23rd embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a display window, effective lines, etc. in a twenty-third embodiment. It is a diagram (1) showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payouts, etc. in the 23rd embodiment. It is a diagram (2) showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payout pieces, etc. in the 23rd embodiment. It is a diagram (3) showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payout pieces, etc. in the 23rd embodiment. It is a diagram (4) showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payouts, etc. in the 23rd embodiment. It is a diagram (5) showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payouts, etc. in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure (6) showing the symbol combination of the winning combination, the number of payout pieces, etc. in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure (1) showing a condition device and a winning combination in a 23rd embodiment. It is a diagram (2) showing a condition device, winning combination, etc. in a 23rd embodiment. It is a diagram (3) showing a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in a 23rd embodiment. It is a diagram (4) showing a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in a 23rd embodiment. It is a figure showing the number table (non-RT) in a 23rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the number table (RT1) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the position number table (while 1BB is operating and RB is not inside) in 23rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the position number table (1BB in operation and inside RB) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the position number table (during 1BB operation and RB operation) in a 23rd embodiment. It is a figure showing RT transition in a 23rd embodiment. It is a diagram showing the transition of the main game state in the 23rd embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram (1) showing the contents of RWM in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram (2) showing the contents of RWM in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram (3) showing the contents of RWM in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram (4) showing the contents of RWM in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram (5) showing the contents of RWM in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram (6) showing the contents of RWM in the twenty-third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a pattern stop signal set (S_IF_SET) in a 23rd embodiment. It is a figure showing suspension acceptance specification table 1 (TBL_ORD_INF1) and suspension acceptance specification table 2 ((TBL_ORD_INF1)) in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the start of standby performance (M_TARPIC_EXE) in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure showing a reel production data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT) in a 23rd embodiment. It is a diagram showing reel performance execution timer tables 1 to 8 (TBL_TARPIC_TM1 to TM8) in the twenty-third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game completion check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S753 of FIG. 139. It is a flowchart showing the process at the end of the main game state game in step S941 of FIG. 148. 150 is a flowchart showing advantageous section end preparation (M_ADVEND_STBY) in step S957 of FIG. 149. It is a flowchart which shows interrupt processing (I_INTR) in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows reel drive management (I_REEL_ADM) in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET) in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) in a 23rd embodiment. 155 is a flowchart following FIG. 154. It is a figure showing an acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP) in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows reel drive pulse update (I_PULSE_INC) in a 23rd embodiment. It is a figure showing a reel drive pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE) in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows deceleration start inspection (I_REDUCE_CHK) in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the addictive prevention output in a 23rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows confrontation production output control in a 23rd embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating volume settings in a twenty-third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing volume setting in administrator mode in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the hardware structure of a main CPU. 165 is a diagram showing the structure of the ROM and RWM in FIG. 164 in more detail; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the A to F, H, L, and Q registers, and (B) is a diagram showing the structure of the F register. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an instruction, and (B) is a diagram illustrating execution of the instruction. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the type (1) of instructions in the twenty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the type (2) of instructions in the twenty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a type (3) of instructions in the twenty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the type (4) of instructions in the twenty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the contents of RWM that stores data regarding an advantageous section (AT) in the twenty-fourth embodiment. It is a figure showing the content (1) of RWM in a 25th embodiment. It is a figure showing the content (2) of RWM in a 25th embodiment. It is a figure showing the content (3) of RWM in a 25th embodiment. It is a figure showing definition data (1) in a 25th embodiment. It is a figure showing definition data (2) in a 25th embodiment. It is a figure showing definition data (3) in a 25th embodiment. It is a figure showing definition data (4) in a 25th embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an overview of various tables used in the twenty-fifth embodiment. It is a diagram showing a first reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1). It is a diagram showing the first reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1) (1). It is a diagram showing the first reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1) (2). It is a diagram showing the first reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1) (3). It is a diagram showing a second reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2). It is a diagram showing the second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2) (1). It is a diagram showing the second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2) (2). It is a diagram showing the second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2) (3). It is a diagram showing the third reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3). It is a diagram showing the third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3) (1). It is a diagram showing the third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3) (2). It is a diagram showing the third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3) (3). It is a diagram showing a payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL). It is a flowchart showing reel stop reception check (M_STOP_PIC). It is a flowchart showing the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. 194. It is a flowchart showing the reel symbol data set (M_PICDAT_SET) in step S1033 of FIG. 195. 197 is a flowchart showing table selection (R_TBL_SEL) in step S1043 of FIG. 196. 197 is a flowchart showing 4-bit data acquisition (M_4BITDAT_GET) in step S1045 of FIG. 196. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing bit count (M_BIT_COUNT) in step S1052 of FIG. 196. It is a flowchart which shows 1 line display judgment (M_LINE_JUDGE). 200 is a flowchart showing designated data acquisition (M_SELDAT_SET) in step S1103 in FIG. 200. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing RB operation management in the twenty-fifth embodiment. It is a figure showing the composition of RWM53 in a 26th embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the symbol control data table (TBL_PIC_DAT), and (B) is a diagram showing the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH). It is a diagram showing the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1) (1). It is a diagram showing the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1) (2). It is a diagram showing the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1) (3). It is a diagram showing the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1) (4). It is a diagram showing the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1) (5). It is a diagram showing the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) (1). It is a diagram showing the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) (2). It is a diagram showing the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) (3). It is a diagram showing the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) (4). It is a diagram showing the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) (5). It is a diagram showing the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3) (1). It is a diagram showing the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3) (2). It is a diagram showing the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3) (3). It is a diagram showing the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3) (4). It is a diagram showing the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3) (5). It is a figure showing the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) (1) in the 26th embodiment. It is a figure showing the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) (2) in the 26th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows main processing in a 26th embodiment. 223 is a flowchart showing the start switch reception process in step S1133 of FIG. 222. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the reel rotation start preparation process in step S1142 of FIG. 223. 223 is a flowchart showing reel stop control in step S1135 in FIG. 222. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing symbol array address buffer setting in step S1165 of FIG. 225. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing display determination processing in step S1137 of FIG. 222. In the 27th embodiment, it is a diagram showing example 1 of a symbol arrangement table. It is a figure showing example 2 of a symbol arrangement table in a 27th embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a display window, effective lines, and RWM area in the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a figure showing the pattern arrangement in a 28th embodiment. It is a diagram showing a first reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) in the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a diagram showing a second reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2) in the 28th embodiment. It is a diagram showing a third reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3) in the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a figure showing the winning combination definition in a 28th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in a 29th embodiment. It is a figure showing the contents of RWM in a 30th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in a 30th embodiment. 239 is a flowchart showing a reel stop acceptance check in step S1312 of FIG. 238. 239 is a flowchart showing input inspection in step S1313 of FIG. 238. 239 is a flowchart showing the all reel stop check in step S1316 of FIG. 238. It is a flowchart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in a 31st embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the contents of RWM in a 32nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in a 32nd embodiment. 245 is a flowchart showing a reel stop reception check in step S1361 of FIG. 244. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing preparation for a step-out test in step S1374 of FIG. 245. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the step-out test in step S1382 of FIG. 246. 247 is a flowchart showing waiting for stop acceptance in step S1387 of FIG. 246. It is a figure showing the contents of RWM in a 33rd embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing each signal input to input port 0 in the 33rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in a 33rd embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a modification of main processing (M_MAIN) in the 33rd embodiment. It is a figure showing the content (1) of RWM in a 34th embodiment. It is a figure showing the content (2) of RWM in a 34th embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a stop switch determination table (TBL_STPBTN_CHK), and (b) is a diagram showing a stop acceptance determination table. It is a flowchart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in a 34th embodiment. 257 is a flowchart showing a reel stop reception check in step S1421 of FIG. 256. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the suspension acceptance check in step S1432 of FIG. 257. It is a diagram showing a stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN). It is a flowchart which shows reel stop reception check in a 35th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop switch 42, the stop order of the reels 31, the stop display of symbols, and the output of the tenpai sound in the 36th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop switch 42, the stop order of the reels 31, the stop display of symbols, and the output of the tenpai sound in the 36th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop switch 42, the stop order of the reels 31, the stop display of symbols, and the output of the tenpai sound in the 36th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in a 36th embodiment. It is a figure showing the symbol arrangement of reel 31 in a 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (1) showing types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, number of payouts, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (2) showing types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, number of payouts, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (3) showing types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, number of payouts, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (4) showing types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, number of payouts, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (5) showing types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, number of payouts, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (6) showing types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, number of payouts, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (7) showing types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, number of payouts, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (8) showing types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, number of payout pieces, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the pattern design combination in 37th Embodiment. It is a diagram (1) showing a condition device number, a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (2) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (3) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (4) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (5) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 37th embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram (6) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (7) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (8) showing the condition device number, condition device, winning combination, etc. in the 37th embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram (9) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (10) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram (11) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 37th embodiment. It is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 37th embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing non-RT and non-internal. It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 37th Embodiment, and is a figure (2) which shows non-RT and non-interior. It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 37th Embodiment, and is a figure (1) which shows RT1 and non-interior. It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 37th Embodiment, and is a figure (2) which shows RT1 and non-interior. It is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 37th embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing non-RT and inside 1BB. It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 37th Embodiment, and is a figure (2) which shows non-RT and inside 1BB. It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 37th Embodiment, and is a figure (1) which shows RT1 and 1BB inside. It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 37th Embodiment, and is a figure (2) which shows RT1 and 1BB inside. It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 37th Embodiment, and is a figure (1) which shows 1BB operation and RB not inside. It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 37th Embodiment, and is a figure (2) which shows 1BB operation and RB not inside. It is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 37th embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing RT2 (1BB in operation and inside RB). It is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 37th embodiment, and is a diagram (2) showing RT2 (1BB in operation and inside RB). It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 37th Embodiment, and is a figure (1) which shows 1BB operation and RB operation. It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 37th Embodiment, and is a figure (2) which shows 1BB operation and RB operation. It is a figure showing RT transition in a 37th embodiment. It is a figure showing the instruction function in a 37th embodiment. In the 37th embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of an image display when it is decided to execute AT in a non-RT and 1BB internal game and an attempt is made to win 1BB. It is an RT transition diagram in a 38th embodiment. In the 38th embodiment, it is a time chart showing the relationship between RT transition, the start and end of an advantageous section, and the presence or absence of AT winning. It is a diagram (1) showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payout pieces, etc. in the 39th embodiment. It is a figure (2) showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payout pieces, etc. in the 39th embodiment. It is a diagram (3) showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payout pieces, etc. in the 39th embodiment. It is a figure (4) showing the pattern combination of the winning combination, the number of payout pieces, etc. in the 39th embodiment. It is a diagram (5) showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payout pieces, etc. in the 39th embodiment. It is a figure (6) showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payout pieces, etc. in the 39th embodiment. It is a figure (7) showing the symbol combination of the winning combination, the number of payout pieces, etc. in the 39th embodiment. It is a diagram (1) showing a condition device number, a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the 39th embodiment. It is a diagram (2) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 39th embodiment. It is a diagram (3) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 39th embodiment. It is a diagram (4) showing a condition device number, a condition device, a winning combination, etc. in the 39th embodiment. It is a diagram (5) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 39th embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram (6) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 39th embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram (7) showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 39th embodiment. It is a figure showing the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment, and is a figure (1) showing the specified number "2" during non-RT and non-internal. It is a figure showing the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment, and is a figure (2) showing the specified number "2" during non-RT and non-internal. It is a figure showing the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment, and is a figure (1) showing the specified number "3" during non-RT and non-internal. It is a figure showing the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment, and is a figure (2) showing the specified number "3" during non-RT and non-internal. It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 39th Embodiment, and is a figure (1) which shows the specified number "3" in RT1 and 1BBB. It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 39th Embodiment, and is a figure (2) which shows the specified number "3" in RT1 and 1BBB. It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 39th Embodiment, and is a figure (1) which shows the regulation number "3" in non-RT and 1 BBA. It is a figure showing the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment, and is a figure (2) showing the specified number "3" in non-RT and 1BBA. It is a figure showing the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment, and is a figure (1) showing the specified number "2" in non-RT and 1BBA. It is a figure showing the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment, and is a figure (2) showing the specified number "2" in non-RT and 1BBA. It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 39th Embodiment, and is a figure (1) which shows the specified number "2" in RT1 and 1BBB. It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 39th Embodiment, and is a figure (2) which shows the regulation number "2" in RT1 and 1BBB. It is a figure showing the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment, and is a figure (1) showing the specified number "3" during RBA operation. It is a figure which shows the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in 39th Embodiment, and is a figure (2) which shows the specified number "3" during RBA operation. It is a diagram showing a number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment, and is a diagram (1) showing the specified number "3" during RBB operation. It is a figure showing the number table (winning probability for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment, and is a figure (2) showing the specified number "3" during RBB operation. It is a figure showing RT transition in a 39th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start time process by main game state in 39th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows all stop processing by main game state in 39th embodiment. 338 is a flowchart showing advantageous section clear counter management processing in step S2615 of FIG. 337. 12 is a time chart showing an example of a slot machine in which push buttons are effectively managed using a timer in the 40th embodiment. 12 is a time chart showing an example of a slot machine in which push buttons are effectively managed using feedback commands in the 40th embodiment. It is a time chart (Example 1) showing push button effective management when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. It is a time chart (Example 2) showing push button effective management when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. It is a time chart (Example 3) showing push button effective management when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. It is a time chart (Example 4) showing push button effective management when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure explaining the structure of main CPU, ROM, and RWM in a 41st embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored in the used area of RWM in the 41st embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored outside the RWM usage area in the 41st embodiment. 347 is a diagram showing the address, label name, number of bytes, and name of data stored outside the used area of RWM in the 41st embodiment, and is a diagram following FIG. 347. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on a display board in the forty-first embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing management information display LEDs in the forty-first embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1 to 9 and segments A to G and P in the 41st embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing signals output from output ports 2 to 7 in the 41st embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the forty-first embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and the signal output from the output port 3 in the forty-first embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 2 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and the signal output from the output port 3 in the forty-first embodiment. _SC_LED_DSP2) and the signal output from the output port 6, and (C) is a diagram showing the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) in the 41st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows program start processing (M_PRG_START) in a 41st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) in a 41st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows irreversible error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in a 41st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in 41st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows setting change confirmation processing (M_RANK_CTL) in a 41st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows interrupt processing (I_INTR) in a 41st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in a 41st embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) in the 41st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in a 41st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in 41st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) in a 41st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flashing request flag generation process (S_LED_FLASH) in 41st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the blinking/nonapplicable item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in 41st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows ratio display timer update processing (S_RATE_TIME) in a 41st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) in a 41st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flashing bit test frequency table (TBL_FLASH_CHK) in a 41st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in the modification of 41st Embodiment. 12 is a diagram showing signals output from output ports 2 to 5 in a modification of the forty-first embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and signals output from output ports 3 and 6 in a modification of the 41st embodiment. FIG. It is a figure which shows the built-in memory of main CPU55 in 42nd Embodiment, (A) shows the outline of a built-in memory, and (B) shows a built-in register area. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of an F register. It is a figure showing the stack area in a 42nd embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing main instructions in the 42nd embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing aspects of an LDF instruction and an LD instruction. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an aspect of a CALLEX command. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a conventional CALL instruction and RET instruction. It is a flowchart which shows a program start (M_PRG_SET) in 42nd Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example using a CALLEX instruction and a jump instruction. In the 43rd embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example in which "7"-"7"-"7" is temporarily stopped on the middle line by a pseudo game effect. It is a time chart showing (example 1) drive signal control (of the motor) during a pseudo game performance. It is a time chart showing (example 2) drive signal control (of the motor) during a pseudo game performance. It is a time chart showing motor drive control of each reel during a pseudo game production. It is a flowchart showing the control of the lamp during a pseudo game performance. It is a diagram showing an example of shaking fluctuation during a pseudo game presentation. It is a diagram showing random delay processing after the end of the pseudo game performance. It is a diagram showing lighting/extinguishing of a pseudo game display lamp during a pseudo game presentation. It is a diagram showing a display indicating that a pseudo game presentation is in progress during a pseudo game presentation. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing the front appearance of the slot machine. It is a time chart showing a pseudo game display lamp and a pseudo game display. It is a time chart showing a signal during a pseudo game, a signal for proceeding with a pseudo game, etc. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a storage area of an RWM 53 in the forty-third embodiment. It is a flow chart showing game start set processing (M_GAME_SET) in the 43rd embodiment. 396 is a flowchart showing processing at the start of medal acceptance in step S2869 of FIG. 395. 397 is a flowchart showing the start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) in step S2889 of FIG. 396. 398 is a flowchart showing the pseudo game performance processing in step S2923 of FIG. 397. 152 is a flowchart showing external signal output in step S466 of FIG. 151 in the 43rd embodiment. 152 is a flowchart showing test signal output in step S842 of FIG. 151 in the 43rd embodiment. Example 1 of a flowchart following FIG. 400 is shown. Example 2 of a flowchart following FIG. 400 is shown. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example in which three reels (main reels) are visible from the display window (glass plate) in the 44th embodiment. This is an example in which the reel viewing area is formed within the area of the image display device. In the 44th embodiment, it is a figure which shows the example applicable to a video reel. In the 44th embodiment, it is a figure which shows the example applicable to a video reel. In the 44th embodiment, it is a figure which shows the example applicable to a video reel. In the 44th embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example that does not correspond to a video reel. In the 44th embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example that does not correspond to a video reel. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing example 1 of sub-reels (there is a risk of misidentification) in the 44th embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing example 2 of a sub-reel (possible misidentification) in the 44th embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing example 3 of sub-reels (possible misidentification) in the 44th embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing example 4 of sub-reels (no risk of misidentification) in the 44th embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing example 5 of sub-reels (no risk of misidentification) in the 44th embodiment. It is a front view of the Pachinko game machine in 45th embodiment. It is an external perspective view of the Pachinko game machine in a 45th embodiment seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 12 is a front view of the right base member in the forty-fifth embodiment with the upper portions of the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed. FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the right base member, seen from the right side, with the upper portions of the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed in the 45th embodiment. FIG. 12 is a rear view of the right base member in the forty-fifth embodiment with the upper portions of the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed. FIG. 12 is an enlarged front upper part view of the right base member with the upper portions of the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed in the 45th embodiment. FIG. 12 is an enlarged upper perspective view of the right base member, viewed from the left side, with the upper portions of the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed in the 45th embodiment. FIG. 12 is an enlarged view of the upper left side of the right base member with the upper portions of the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed in the 45th embodiment. FIG. 12 is an enlarged bottom view of the upper part of the right base member with the upper frame lamp cover removed in the 45th embodiment. 420 is an enlarged cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 420. FIG. 117 is a front view of the right base member in a state in which the upper frame lamp cover, the upper part of the right frame lamp cover, and the right frame lamp board are removed in the 45th embodiment, and is a view corresponding to FIG. 116. FIG. FIG. 12 is an enlarged rear view of the right base member in the forty-fifth embodiment, with the upper frame lamp cover removed and the right frame lamp cover attached. FIG. 12 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a lens portion of a right frame lamp cover in the forty-fifth embodiment. In the 45th embodiment, (a) is a time chart showing performance pattern 1 when the pachinko game machine loses, and (b) is a time chart showing performance pattern 2 when the pachinko game machine loses. In the 45th embodiment, it is a diagram explaining substantially the same color using a chromaticity diagram based on the CIE standard color system. In the 45th embodiment, it is a diagram explaining similar colors using a chromaticity diagram based on the CIE standard color system. 420 is a diagram showing a modification of the cross section taken along the line AA in FIG. 420, and corresponds to FIG. 424. It is an external perspective view of a slot machine in a modified example of the 45th embodiment, viewed from the front side (player side). In a modification of the 45th embodiment, (a) is a time chart showing performance pattern 1 for non-winning times in the slot machine, and (b) is a time chart showing performance pattern 2 for non-winning times in the slot machine. It is.

In this specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
“Bet” refers to betting medals (gaming media) in order to play a game. To bet medals, the player either inserts actual medals through the medal slot 47, or operates the bet switch 40 to bet credited (accumulated) medals.
On the other hand, "credit (also referred to as "storage")" is different from the above-mentioned "bet" and refers to the storage of medals inside the slot machine 10. In this specification, "credit" is used in a meaning that does not include "bet."
Furthermore, "insertion" refers to betting or crediting medals.
Further, the "regular number" refers to the number of bets that can be started (executed) in the game. For example, in a game where the specified number is "2" or "3", the game can be started with either the number of bets "2" or "3", and the game cannot be played with the number of bets "1".
Note that for convenience of explanation, the "prescribed number" may also be referred to as the "bet number."
On the other hand, the term "bet number" may refer to something other than the "specified number." For example, in a game with a specified number of "2" or "3", when one medal is inserted (before the game starts), the bet number is "1" (the number bet at that time).

"Care" means that the player inserts medals from the medal slot 47 (described later).
"Care bet" means that the player bets the medals by taking care of them from the medal slot 47.
"Care credit" means that the player credits the medals (adds credits) by taking care of the medals from the medal slot 47.
“Bet medal” refers to a medal that has been bet on.
"Reserved medals" refer to medals that have been credited (reserved).

A "storage bet" is a bet by which a player operates the bet switch 40 (described later) to place a part or all of the credited medals within the bettable range for the game in order to play the game. It means to do something.
"Automatic bet" refers to automatically betting the number of medals bet in the previous game by the control processing of the slot machine 10 when a replay wins.
Here, the fact that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed (meaning that it has stopped on the active line; the same applies hereinafter) is referred to as "winning a small winning combination". On the other hand, the "Regulations Concerning Certification and Type Testing of Gaming Machines (hereinafter simply referred to as the "Rules")" states that when a symbol combination corresponding to replay is displayed in a stopped state, a conditional device related to replay is activated. This is interpreted as not "winning". However, in the present application (this specification, etc.), replay is also treated as one of the winning combinations (replay winning combination), and the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is sometimes referred to as "replay winning."
“Settlement” refers to paying out bet medals and/or stored medals to the player. In this embodiment, the payment process is executed when the payment switch 43 (described later) is operated.

"Payout" refers to paying out medals to the player based on the winning combination, or paying out medals based on the above-mentioned settlement. When paying out medals to a player based on a winning combination, the medals are stored as credits (adding the stored medals, in other words, updating the electronic data stored in the RWM 53 (described later)), and paying out the medals. This includes both dispensing actual medals from a mouth (not shown). The payout of medals is controlled so that, for example, "50" medals are credited as a limit number, and medals in excess of "50" are actually paid out to the player.
Note that "payout" may also be referred to as "granting." Therefore, the "number of payouts" may be referred to as the "number of grants."

In this embodiment, the "gaming medium" is a medal, but in the case of an enclosed type (ECO) gaming machine, for example, electronic information (electronic medals, electronic data) is used as the gaming medium. Furthermore, "electronic information" refers to, for example, when you insert money (banknotes) into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and some or all of that electronic information can be used to play games on a gaming machine. Credit can be placed on a gaming machine as gaming media for playing games.
Note that "gaming media" may also be referred to as "gaming value."

Furthermore, when the game medium is electronic information, "paying out medals" means crediting (adding) to a game medium credit device provided in the game machine. Therefore, "paying out medals" does not only mean actually paying out medals from the hopper 35 (described later), but also crediting electronic information for the payout corresponding to the winning combination to the game media credit device ( It also includes processing for adding (addition).

When the game progresses from "N-1" game, "N" game, "N+1" game, etc. ("N" is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is "N" game. When the number is ``N'', the game with the ``N'' game is called the ``current game''. In addition, the "N-1" game is referred to as the "previous game." Furthermore, the "N+1" game is referred to as the "next game."

In this specification, a numerical value with "(B)" appended to the end of the number (especially 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, numbers with "(H)", "H", or "h" appended to the end of the numbers mean hexadecimal numbers. Specifically, for example, a numerical value that indicates "16" in decimal is written as "00010000 (B)" in binary, and "10 (H)", "10H", or "10h" in hexadecimal. . Further, a numerical value meaning a decimal number is written as "16 (D)" as necessary.
However, if it is clear whether it is a binary number, decimal number, or hexadecimal number, "(B)", "(D)", "(H)", "H" or "h" respectively. The trailing symbol may be omitted.

The "operation mode" of the stop switch 42 means the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed and/or the operation timing (the timing at which the stop switch is pressed to stop the target symbol on the active line).
Furthermore, the "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch 42 refers to a game that has a payout or a large number of payouts in a game where the game result (symbol combination that stops on an active line) is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. Refers to an operation mode in which symbol combinations are stopped, symbol combinations that move (promote) to an advantageous RT are stopped, or symbol combinations that do not shift (fall) to a disadvantageous RT are stopped. The "advantageous operation mode" is also referred to as a correct operation mode or a correct pressing order.

"Games in which the game results are advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42" are, for example, games in which one of the winning numbers "3" to "8" shown in FIG. This corresponds to the winning game). Although not shown in FIG. 58, for example, in a game in which multiple types of replays are won (double replay wins; games in which the so-called "push order replay" is won), the RT changes depending on the type of winning replay. This also applies to cases where

The "instruction function" refers to a function that instructs the player how to operate the stop switch 42. The instruction function is, in principle, a function for instructing the player on an advantageous operating mode of the stop switch 42.
In other words, the "instruction function" refers to a device that facilitates winning.
Note that "display" means to visually show the contents of the "instruction", and "notification" means to notify the player of the contents of the instruction. Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and a "notification function."

Further, the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 may not be limited to the notification of the most advantageous operation mode. The notification of the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be set as "activation of the instruction function," but the notification of any operation mode including the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be set as "instruction function activation." It may also be referred to as "operation".
For example, if the pressing order bells shown in winning numbers "3" to "8" in FIG. However, instead of this, it is assumed that depending on the order of pressing, there will be either 1, 3, 4, 10, or a missed prize (non-winning).
Here, notifying the pressing order for winning a 10-card combination is notifying an advantageous operating mode of the stop switch 42, and of course corresponds to "operation of an instruction function."
On the other hand, notifying the pressing order for winning a 1-card, 3-card, or 4-card winning combination may be referred to as "notification of an advantageous operation mode (activation of an instruction function)" or "advantageous operation mode It does not have to be "notice of".

The pressing order for winning a 4-card combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is the pressing order that does not allow a 10-card combination to win. However, since the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "4", and the difference in the number of coins for the game is "+1", this is an operation mode that increases the difference in number of coins, and is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation mode.
Similarly, the pressing order for winning a 3-card combination is not the most advantageous operation mode since it is the pressing order that does not allow a 10-card combination to win. However, since the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "3", and the difference number is maintained as it is (does not decrease the difference number), this is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation state.

Furthermore, similarly, the pressing order for winning a 1-card combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is the pressing order that does not allow a 10-card combination to win. Furthermore, this is an operation mode in which the number of payouts is "1" for the number of bets "3", reducing the difference in the number of coins. However, since it can be said to be an operating mode that does not leave out any winnings, it may not be said to be a disadvantageous operating mode.

In this embodiment, when the instruction function is activated when the push order bell is won, the operation mode (correct answer push order) in which the combination with the largest number of payouts wins is notified.
However, for example, when the difference counter value (described later) during the advantageous section approaches the upper limit (2400 (D)), but there is still room in the remaining number of games in the advantageous section (advantageous section clear counter value described later). It is conceivable that when the push order bell is won, the push order for winning a 3-card winning combination or a 4-card winning combination is notified as described above, and the difference counter value is controlled so as to maintain the current status.

Further, in this embodiment, the operation of the instruction function is limited to one prescribed number. For example, assume that the specified number of instruction functions to be activated is set to "3". In this case, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3" during AT, when the game is started with a bet number of "3" and the push order bell is won, the instruction function can be activated. On the other hand, when the game is started with the bet number "2", the instruction function cannot be activated even if the push order bell is won.

The "gaming section" includes a "normal section (non-advantageous section)" and an "advantageous section." In addition, the No. 5.9 machine had a "waiting section" (a gaming section that won the advantageous section lottery but has not yet transitioned to the advantageous section), but under the current No. 6 machine rules, the "waiting section" etc. is not provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and game sections other than the normal section and the advantageous section may be provided.
"Normal section" refers to signals related to the instruction function, specifically the press order instruction number and winning/replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct press order), which will be described later, on the peripheral board (for example, the sub-control board 80). ), and refers to a game period that does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (no processing related to the instruction function is executed). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the operation mode cannot be notified. However, in addition to the lottery of winning combinations, it is also possible to determine whether or not to move to an advantageous section (by lottery, etc.).

In the normal section, the instruction function must not be activated, so the push order instruction information cannot be displayed on a predetermined display device (such as an LED) electrically connected to the main control board 60, and the instruction function Since the signal related to this is not transmitted to the peripheral board, the image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 cannot display (notify) an advantageous operation mode.

On the other hand, the "advantageous section" is a game section that has performance related to the instruction function (in which the instruction function may be activated). It refers to a game section in which a signal related to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only when the push order instruction information is displayed so that the content (operation mode of the stop switch 42) can be identified. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section where the instruction function can be activated (the instruction function may be activated), that is, a game section where the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can be displayed (or may be displayed).
However, the sub-control board 80 cannot output an effect that is contrary to the contents of the instruction given by the main control board 60 or the signal related to the received instruction function.

Moreover, even if the advantageous section is a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, there is no need to activate the instruction function.
On the other hand, during the advantageous section, in a game where the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the instruction function may be always operated to display the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
AT (notification gaming state) is a gaming state in which the operating mode of the stop switch 42 is notified in a game where the gaming result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operating mode of the stop switch 42. Therefore, AT is always during the advantageous section and is never performed during the non-advantageous section.

Further, in a game where the operation mode of the stop switch 42 has an advantage/disadvantage in the game result, the AT may always (100%) notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42, but the AT may also notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 in a predetermined period. In order to keep the game within the range defined by the rules, it is conceivable not to notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 even if the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
For example, if the difference counter approaches the upper limit value during AT, but the number of AT games still remains, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 will not be notified temporarily in order to prolong the life of AT. (not activating the instruction function) is also conceivable.

Furthermore, various settings can be made regarding the relationship between the advantageous section and the AT. For example, the first option is to set "advantageous section=AT". In this case, winning in the advantageous section and winning in AT are equivalent. Then, AT starts from the first game in the advantageous section. Further, AT ends at the end of the advantageous section.

A second method is to set "AT≠advantageous section".
In this case, simply moving to an advantageous section will not satisfy the AT start (execution) conditions, and on the condition that it is in an advantageous section, whether or not to execute AT is determined by lottery etc. When it is decided to execute the AT, the AT may be executed until a predetermined termination condition for the AT is satisfied. In addition, if it is non-AT when moving to the advantageous section, for example, the main game state may be set to the normal section, omen, CZ (chance zone (period where it is easy to win AT)), etc.

When transitioning to a precursor after transitioning to an advantageous section, the transition may be made to the actual precursor, and after a predetermined number of games of the actual precursor are completed, the transition may be made to AT. Alternatively, at the time of transition to an advantageous section or after a transition to an advantageous section, it may be determined by lottery whether to use a real omen or a false omen, and if it is determined to be a real omen, the transition to AT may be made after the main omen ends. . Furthermore, when it is determined that the false sign is false, the advantageous zone may be maintained after the false sign ends, or the advantageous zone may be shifted to the normal zone.
Furthermore, when the AT termination condition is satisfied, both the AT and the advantageous section may be terminated. Alternatively, if the AT ends but the conditions for ending the advantageous section are not met, the advantageous section may be continued (non-AT and advantageous section). The same applies when AT is started at the same time as the advantageous section.

Further, when starting the advantageous section, the number of games played in the advantageous section is determined, and during the advantageous section, a lottery etc. related to the advantageous section is not executed.
Furthermore, when starting the advantageous section, the initial number of games in the advantageous section is determined, and during the advantageous section, a decision (by lottery, etc.) is made as to whether or not to add (add) the (remaining) number of games in the advantageous section. This can be mentioned.
Furthermore, when a predetermined end condition is set for an advantageous section, and the predetermined end condition for an advantageous section is met, even if the remaining number of games in the advantageous section (or the remaining number of games in AT) is reached, at that point One example is to end the advantageous section at .

Here, the "predetermined end condition" of the advantageous section means that the difference counter value described later exceeds "2400 (D)" or that the advantageous section clear counter (number of games played during the advantageous section) described later is " 1500 (D)''. When any of these conditions is met, it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, and the next game is shifted to the normal section (non-advantageous section). In this case, even if the final game is AT, the AT ends at the same time as the advantageous section ends.

In the advantageous section, an advantageous section display LED (also referred to as a "section indicator") 77, which will be described later, is turned on. The advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at all times during the advantageous section, or may be turned on when a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied after the transition to the advantageous section.
Here, the "predetermined lighting condition" includes, for example, a case where the instruction function is activated in a gaming state in which the game is in an advantageous section and the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1". Note that once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, it remains lit during the advantageous section.

In addition, "Section Sim (simulation) ball payout rate" means that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is always stopped and displayed (even when winning the "PB ≠ 1" combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is always stopped and displayed). If there are multiple types of symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination, the symbol combination that is most advantageous to the player (when the push order bell is won, the high bell that will give the maximum payout) will be selected. This is the ball payout rate when it is assumed that the display is stopped. In calculating the section Sim ball payout rate, the balls (number of payouts) due to accessory actions (1BB action, etc.) are not included. In addition, in a game that won a replay, if the number of bets is "3", the number of payouts will be counted as "0", and in a replay based on a winning replay (the next game of the game that won a replay), the number of bets will be counted as "0". It is calculated as "0" and the number of payouts as "x"("x" is the number of payouts in the game). Alternatively, the number of payouts for games that win replays and the number of bets for the next game may not be counted.
Furthermore, the "gaming state in which the section Sim ball payout rate exceeds 1" includes RT and main game states in which the section Sim ball payout rate is set to exceed "1."
Here, examples of RTs in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1" include RTs with a high replay winning probability.
Furthermore, assuming that CZ (chance zone), AT, pullback sections, etc. are usually provided as the main game state, the main game state in which the section Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1" is AT.

When ending the advantageous section, more specifically, in the final game of the advantageous section, for example, during the game end check process described later, or during the game start setting process for the next game of the last game of the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off. do. When the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt processing by executing an initialization process for the advantageous section display LED flag, which will be described later.

The "processing related to advantageous sections" includes, for example, the following processing.
1) Advantageous section (transition) lottery 2) Update of advantageous section clear counter (subtraction, clear)
3) Update the difference counter (calculation, clear)
4) Update of advantageous section type flag 5) Control of advantageous section display LED 77 (update of advantageous section display LED flag)

Further, the "processing related to the instruction function" includes, for example, the following processing.
1) Display of push order instruction information (operation of instruction function)
2) AT lottery 3) In the case of game number management type AT (specification that ends AT when the number of remaining games reaches "0"), update the AT game number counter (subtraction, addition, clearing)
4) For differential number management type AT (specification that ends AT when the remaining differential number becomes "0"), update the AT differential number counter (subtraction, addition, clear)

According to the current rules, it is stipulated that both the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function can be executed in one gaming state (RT) in one prescribed number, except for the following. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the specified number is "3", the process related to the advantageous section and the process related to the instruction function can be executed, and when the specified number is "2", the process related to the advantageous section and the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed. And so.
However, during the advantageous section, it is necessary to update the advantageous section clear counter and the difference counter, regardless of the specified number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result is non-winning (for example, when the winning number is "0" in FIG. 26 or FIG. 58, which will be described later), in other words, in the game when the conditional device is not activated, It is determined that processing related to advantageous sections (advantageous section transition lottery) is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process related to the advantageous section may be executed even if the lottery result is non-winning.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, even if the lottery result is non-winning, if the probability of non-winning is more than a predetermined value (when the probability is not extremely low; for example, "1/17500" or more), the instruction function is applied. The process (AT lottery process) is made executable.

Furthermore, as a result of executing the advantageous section transfer lottery (processing related to advantageous sections), if the advantageous section transfer lottery is won, the next game will be in the advantageous section. Therefore, in a game in which an advantageous section transition lottery (processing related to an advantageous section) is executed and the player wins in an advantageous section, it is not possible to perform notification of the correct answer pressing order (processing related to the instruction function).
However, there is no problem in performing the advantageous section transfer lottery (processing related to the advantageous section) and the AT lottery (processing related to the instruction function) in one game. Furthermore, for example, when a specific winning combination lottery result is obtained, it may be determined to be an advantageous section and AT (without executing a lottery).

The management information display LED (also referred to as "role ratio monitor" or "ratio display device") 74 consists of four LEDs, for example, as shown in FIG. It is composed of an LED that displays which item it is among the items using a predetermined symbol, etc., and a two-digit ratio segment (LED that displays the calculated ratio).

The management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the ratios of the following five items 1) to 5) at predetermined time intervals.
1) Either advantageous section ratio (cumulative total) (7U.) or designated accessory ratio (cumulative) (7P.) 2) Continuous accessory ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Accessory ratio (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Continuous role ratio (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Accessory ratio (cumulative total) (7A.)

For example, when displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative total), if the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." indicating the accessory ratio (cumulative total) is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed. Display in the ratio segment.
Here, the "cumulative total" refers to the total sum of numerical values that have been counted up to that point, and in this embodiment, counting is continued until the number of games has reached at least "175,000". When the cumulative total is less than "175,000" the number of games played, the ratio is displayed, for example, by a blinking display, and when it is more than "175,000" number of games, the ratio is displayed, for example, by a lighting display. Even after the total number of games exceeds "175,000", it continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
Furthermore, "6000 games" is the total number of games played for 15 sets, where one set is "400" times.

The "advantageous section ratio" refers to the ratio (ratio) of staying in the advantageous section to all gaming sections (non-advantageous section + advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games played in all the game sections is "1000" and the number of games played in the advantageous section between them is "700", the advantageous section ratio is "70%".
Further, the "instruction-inclusive accessory ratio" is the value obtained by dividing the sum of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts. In addition, in a slot machine that is not equipped with an accessory, the "instruction included accessory ratio" is the value obtained by dividing the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
The sum of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated is counted by the instruction-included accessory counter.

Furthermore, "the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function was activated" is determined based on the operation of the stop switch 42 according to the pressing order displayed by the activation of the instruction function, for example, the winning number " When 10 bells from ``3'' to ``8'' are won, ``10'' is added to the instruction-included accessory counter.
On the other hand, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if one bell is won in the example of FIG. ``1'' is added to .
Similarly, in a game where the instruction function is activated, if the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) because the stop switch 42 was pressed in a different order from the displayed pressing order, the instruction-inclusive accessory counter is not added to. In other words, the count value from the previous game remains the same.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 26, which will be described later, when the common bell (winning number "3") is won during AT, the instruction function is activated in the same way as when the pressing order bell is won, and the number of acquisitions display LED 78 is pressed. There are cases where forward instruction information (dummy) is displayed and cases where the instruction function is not activated. When the instruction function is activated when the common bell is won, the number of payouts in the game is added to the instruction-included accessory counter.

On the other hand, when the common bell is won and the instruction function is not activated, the number of payouts for the game is not added to the instruction-included accessory counter. However, the total number of payouts will be added to the counter. In this case, the sub-control board 80 may notify the correct pressing order using images or sounds.

"Continuous accessory ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when the first type special accessory (RB) is activated to the total number of payouts. Therefore, in this embodiment, it refers to "the number of payouts during 1BB operation relative to the total number of payouts."
For example, if the total number of payouts in ``6000'' number of games is ``2000 pieces'', and the number of payouts when the ``Class 1 special bonus (RB)'' is activated is ``500 pieces'', then The ratio (6000 games) is 25 (%).

Moreover, the "accessory object ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated to the total number of payouts. Here, the term "accessory object" refers to the above-mentioned first-class special accessory, as well as second-class special accessory (CB), also referred to as MB (2BB). Second-class accessory continuous operating device. CB ), SB (single bonus) is included.
In addition, in the above five items, if a gaming machine is not equipped with a function corresponding to that item, the ratio segment is displayed as "--" by lighting up.
For example, if "RB (Class 1 special accessory)" is not provided, there is no continuous accessory ratio, so when displaying ratio display numbers "2" and "4", the ratio segment is set to "--" ” is displayed on the display.
As described above, five types of ratios are displayed on the management information display LED 74, but as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 described later, a test pattern is displayed at a predetermined timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. do.

Further, the rules stipulate that the advantageous section ratio and the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio should be 70% or less. It is also stated that the ratio of accessories should be 70% or less, and it is stipulated that the ratio of consecutive accessories should be 60% or less.
Therefore, by looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information is within the legal range.

Note that a gaming machine with a specification in which the advantageous section ratio is 70% or less is referred to as a "7U" type, and a gaming machine with a specification in which the instruction-included accessory ratio is 70% or less is referred to as a "7P" type. A gaming machine with an advantageous section is either of the "7U" type or the "7P" type. In the case of the "7U" type, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed on the management information display LED 74, and in the case of the "7P" type, the instruction-included accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed.
In the "7U" type, the ratio of advantageous sections to all game sections must be 70% or less, but in the "7P" type, the total number of payouts due to the operation of the instruction function and the operation of the accessory is It is sufficient to make it 70% or less of the number of payouts, and for example, the entire period or most of the game period may be an advantageous period.

For example, when moving to a non-advantageous section, the settings should be set so that there is a 100% probability of winning the advantageous section lottery, and the setting should be set so that the probability of winning the advantageous section lottery is approximately 100% (for example, about 98%). Alternatively, it may be set to have a high probability (for example, 70%) of winning the advantageous section lottery.
The "7U" type cannot perform processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT lottery) by referring to the setting value itself, but the "7P" type can perform processing related to the instruction function by referring to the setting value itself. Is possible.
In the twelfth embodiment, which will be described later, most of the inside of BB2 is in the advantageous section, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform AT during this advantageous section.

Furthermore, the management information display LED 74 can also be applied to a pachinko game machine as a performance display monitor.
In this case, the management information display LED 74 (performance display monitor) is composed of a two-digit identification segment and a two-digit ratio segment, as in the case of a slot machine (player type gaming machine). Then, the base value in real time (during measurement) for each ``60,000'' out balls (``base value'' indicates how many safe balls are out of 100 out balls), and the ``60,000 out balls''. ” The base values of the first, second, and third base values are displayed sequentially for each item. For example, the real-time base value identification segment is displayed as "bL.", the previous base value identification segment is displayed as "b1.", and the two previous base value identification segment is displayed as "b2." and the identification segment of the base value three times before is displayed as "b3.".
In this way, the management information display LED 74 is applied not only to slot machines but also to pachinko gaming machines.

Hereinafter, one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram schematically showing the control of a slot machine 10, which is an example of a gaming machine in this embodiment. FIG. 1 is a block diagram common to the first to fifth embodiments.
Typical control boards provided in the slot machine 10 include a main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, etc. (this does not mean that it includes only those shown in FIG. 1). The appearance of the main control board 50 and the fact that the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 will be described in the second embodiment (FIGS. 9 and 10).

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 and peripheral equipment for playing the game, including operation switches such as the bet switch 40, are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection section into which signals such as operation switches are input, and the output port 52 is a connection section through which signals are sent to peripheral devices such as the motor 32.
In FIG. 1, peripheral devices for input are indicated by arrows that direct signals from the peripheral devices toward the main control board 50, and peripheral devices for output are indicated by arrows that direct signals from the main control board 50 to the peripheral devices. (The same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium that can store (update) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game and the like.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium that stores programs and various data (for example, data tables) necessary for playing the game.
The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (IC with a calculation function) provided on the main control board 50, and executes programs and calculations necessary for the progress of the game, and specifically, performs lottery of winning combinations, reel 31 The controller controls the drive and pays out when a prize is won.

Furthermore, an MPU including an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and registers is mounted on the main control board 50. Note that the RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be provided outside the MPU in addition to being mounted inside the MPU.
Note that an MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub CPU 85 is also mounted on the sub control board 80, which will be described later. Note that the RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided outside the MPU in addition to being mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, medals inserted through the medal slot 47 are sent into the medal selector.
The movement of the medals inserted through the medal slot 47 within the medal selector will be explained later with reference to FIG. 2 and the like.
As shown in FIG. 1, inside the medal selector, a passage sensor 46, a blocker 45, and an input sensor 44 (a pair of input sensors 44a and 44b) are provided (but not limited to these). These are electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The medals inserted through the medal slot 47 are first detected by the passage sensor 46.

Furthermore, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 46. The blocker 45 is for allowing/disallowing the insertion of medals, and when the insertion of medals is not permitted, it forms a medal passageway through which the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 are returned from the payout opening. do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage is formed to guide the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 47 to the hopper 35. The blocker 45 is, for example, a switching member that blocks an opening formed in a part of the medal passage in the medal selector (an opening leading to the medal return port) to form a medal passage for guiding the medals to the hopper 35 side. and an actuator for driving the switching member.

Here, the blocker 45 disables the insertion of medals during the game (from when the reels 31 start rotating until all the reels 31 stop and when a winning combination ends the payout corresponding to the winning combination). do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals at least when no game is being played.

In the medal selector, an input sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided further downstream of the blocker 45. In this embodiment, the input sensor 44 is composed of a pair of input sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance apart, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since a medal is detected by one input sensor 44a, the input sensor 44 is activated by the other input sensor 44b. It is configured to be detected by Then, it is determined whether or not the correct medal has been inserted based on the timing at which the pair of input sensors 44 are turned on and off, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 also includes a bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), a start switch 41, (left, middle, right) stop switches 42, and operation switches operated by the player. A settlement switch 43 is electrically connected.
Here, the "operation switch (or simply, "switch")" is used to turn on/off an electric signal based on the operation of the operating body by the player (operator) (receiving external force). This refers to a device (including an electric circuit and/or electric parts), and does not limit the shape of the operating body operated by the player.

When the operating switch is in the off state, for example, light from the light emitting element continues to enter the light receiving element (when the light receiving element continues to detect light, the operating switch is in the off state). Then, when a player or the like operates the operation switch (the operation body thereof), the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element. When this state is detected, an electrical signal indicating that the operation switch has been turned on is transmitted to the main control board 50. Note that, contrary to the above, when the operation switch is in the off state, the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element, and when the light from the light emitting element enters the light receiving element, the operation switch is in the on state. You may.

In this embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 is lever-shaped (therefore also referred to as a "start lever (switch) 41"), and includes a bet switch 40, a stop switch 42, and a settlement switch. The operating body 43 has a push button shape (therefore, it is also referred to as a "bet button (switch) 40", "stop button (switch) 42", and "settlement button (switch) 43"). In addition, in the fourth embodiment described later, the operating body (the part pressed by the player) of the stop switch 42 will be referred to as a "stop button 42a."

Although not shown in FIG. 1, an LED (light emitting means) is provided on the operating body of the operating switch and/or around or near the operating body. When the operation acceptance of the operation switch is permitted, for example, the LED corresponding to the operation switch emits blue light, and when the operation reception of the operation switch is not permitted, for example, the LED corresponding to the operation switch is emitted in blue. By emitting red light from an LED or the like, the permission/disapproval state of the operation switch is indicated to the player.

Specifically, for example, when all the reels 31 are rotating and the stop switches 42 can be operated, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit blue light to notify the player that they can be operated. Shown below. When one stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is controlled to stop. Thereafter, the remaining stop switches 42 become operable only when the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the reel 31 that has been controlled to stop has finished, and when the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 (the fourth embodiment) is turned off. Therefore, during that time, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit red light. When the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 ends and the detection sensor 42e corresponding to the stop switch 42 is turned off, the LED of the already operated stop switch 42 is turned off. Although the LEDs of the stop switches 42 that have not been operated yet are still emitting red light, they are caused to emit blue light.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch that is operated by the player when betting the stored medals for the current game. This embodiment includes a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal, and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three medals (maximum number, specified number).
Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a bet switch for two bets may be provided.

Note that the prescribed number is predetermined, for example, depending on when the accessory is not activated/when it is activated. Specifically, the number is set to 3 when the accessory is not activated, when the SB is activated, when 1BB is activated, and 2 when 2BB is activated, etc. By operating the 1-bet switch 40a twice, it is possible to insert two medals, and by operating it three times, it is possible to insert three medals. Also, when the specified number is 3, you can insert 3 medals at once by operating the 3-bet switch 40b, and when the specified number is 2, you can insert 3 medals at once by operating the 3-bet switch 40b. Two medals can be inserted at once. If the 3-bet switch 40b is operated in a state where less than the prescribed number has already been bet, the bet processing is performed so that the number of bets becomes three.

Further, the start switch 41 is an operation switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of the left, middle, and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, right) reels 31, and are operation switches operated by the player to stop the corresponding reels 31.
Further, the settlement switch 43 is an operation switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) medals bet and/or stored (credit) inside the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display board 75 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Note that in reality, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. In this way, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed between them.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected to each other with a harness or the like, but may be connected via another separate board (relay board, etc.). For example, one or more other boards (such as a relay board) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80.

The display board 75 is equipped with a credit number display LED 76 and an acquired number display LED 78.
The credit number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit.

In addition, the acquired number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the number of payouts (the number obtained by the player) when winning a winning combination, and, like the credit number display LED 76, it is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit. .
Note that the acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to turn off when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digits may be turned off and only the lower digits may be displayed as "0".

The acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, but when an error occurs, it functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error.
Furthermore, the obtained number display LED 78 functions as an LED for displaying push order instruction information (notifying an advantageous push order) in a game that notifies the push order during AT. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 in this embodiment is an LED that also displays the acquisition number, error details, and push order instruction information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it goes without saying that a dedicated LED or the like for displaying push order instruction information may be provided.
Note that during AT, notification of an advantageous pressing order is also performed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to a motor (stepping motor in this embodiment) 32 and the like of the symbol display device.
The symbol display device includes reels 31 (three in this embodiment) that display symbols, a motor 32 that drives each reel 31, and a reel sensor 33 that detects the position of the reel 31.

The motor 32 serves as a driving means for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by a reel control means 65, which will be described later. Here, the reel 31 is composed of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and a stop switch 42 that is operated when stopping the left reel 31 is a left stop switch 42. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated to stop the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (symbols forming symbol combinations corresponding to winning combinations) are printed is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel 31.
Further, each reel 31 is provided with one index (two or more indexes may be used). The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the circumferential side of the reel 31, and is used to detect whether or not the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether or not it has rotated once. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal of the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. When the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. Thereby, the symbol on the reference position at the moment the index is detected can be detected. Furthermore, from the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31, how many pulses should the (stepping) motor 32 be driven to stop the symbol at the number of symbols ahead, counting from the symbol on the reference position, on the effective line? It becomes possible to identify whether the

Further, a medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal dispensing device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when dispensing medals from the hopper 35 from a dispensing port, and a dispensing motor 36 for detecting medals dispensed from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that have been cleaned and accepted (determined to be normal) from the medal input port 47 are stored in the hopper 35.
In this embodiment, the payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 includes a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance apart. When a medal is paid out, a predetermined moving member (movable piece 39a in FIG. 7, which will be described later) is moved by the medal. The dispensing sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off by movement of a predetermined moving member. Based on whether the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off within a predetermined time range, it is determined whether the medals are correctly paid out.

For example, if it is not detected that the pair of payout sensors 37 are turned on even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, it is determined that no medals have been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected.
On the other hand, when at least one of the payout sensors 37 continues to output an on signal, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.
Note that the details of these operations will be explained later with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8.

When starting a game, the player inserts medals credited in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (storage bet) or inserts medals from the medal slot 47 (care bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with a prescribed number of medals for the game being bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 to be described later) receives this signal, it performs a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, and drives and controls all the motors 32 to control all the reels 31. Control it to rotate. As the reels 31 are rotated by the motor 32 in this manner, the symbols on the reels 31 are displayed moving up and down within the display window at a predetermined speed.

Then, by pressing the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 to be described later) receives this signal, it drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 to display the lottery result (internal lottery) of the winning combination lottery means 61. The stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed in accordance with the result determined by the means.

Then, the game result of the current game is displayed based on the symbol combination when all the reels 31 are stopped. Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination stops on the active line (when the winning combination is achieved), medals corresponding to the winning combination are paid out.

Next, the specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following combination lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in this embodiment are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to the means shown in this embodiment.

The winning combination lottery means 61 performs lottery (determination, selection) of winning numbers. Here, the "drawing of winning numbers by the prize drawing means 61" is the same as the "internal drawing" in the Entertainment Business Law Regulations (regulations regarding certification of gaming machines and type examination, etc., hereinafter simply referred to as "Rules"). The lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61 is the same as the "result determined by internal lottery" in the rules. Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as "internal lottery means 61" in accordance with the rules.
When the winning number is determined by the prize lottery means 61, the winning and replay condition device number and the prize condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and the winning and replay condition device becomes operable in the game. In addition, the accessory condition device will be determined. Therefore, the winning combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, or the like.

The winning lottery means 61 includes, for example, a random number generating means for lottery (hardware random numbers, etc.), a random number extracting means for extracting the random numbers generated by the random number generating means, and a random number extracting means based on the random number extracted by the random number extracting means. and winning number determining means for determining the winning number.

The random number generation means generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal notation). The random number is a random number that continues counting in the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle by a counter that counts once every 200n (nano) seconds, for example, and while the slot machine 10 is powered on, the random number is Continue counting.

The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination means determines the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random number value belongs by comparing the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with a lottery table to be described later.

The winning flag control means 62 controls on/off of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61. In this embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each role for all roles. When one of the winning combinations is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag for that winning combination is turned on (the winning flag is set). Note that there are two cases of winning a winning combination: a case where there is only one winning combination (single winning) and a case where there are multiple winning combinations (multiple winning).

The push order instruction number selection means 63 selects a push order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct push order) based on the lottery result of the winning number by the winning combination lottery means 61 (when a push order bell or a push order replay is won). decision).
The “push order” of the press order instruction numbers selected here means a press order (correct press order) that is advantageous for the player. For example, when a push order bell is won, it refers to the push order (correct answer push order) that makes the higher bell win the prize. In addition, when a replay duplicate win occurs, it refers to the push order that promotes to an advantageous RT or the push order that does not allow the RT to fall to a disadvantageous RT.

In this embodiment, each winning number is provided with a unique push order instruction number.
Then, when winning the push order bell or push order replay during AT, the main control board 50 displays the above-mentioned obtained number display LED 78 with push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number, specifically "=*"("*"=1, 2, . . .) information is displayed. In this manner, the function of displaying push order instruction information when a conditional device having an advantageous push order is activated is also referred to as an instruction function.
In addition, when winning the push order bell or push order replay during AT, the main control board 50 controls the sub control board at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined). 80, a command corresponding to the push order instruction number is transmitted.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it displays an image of the correct pressing order on the image display device 23.

Note that the push order instruction number selected by the main control board 50 can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 only during the advantageous interval (AT). Therefore, even if a push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selection means 63 in the normal section, the push order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub control board 80. Note that in the normal section, it is not necessary to select the push order instruction number.

The performance group number selection means 64 is for selecting the performance group number corresponding to the winning number to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Here, the performance group number corresponding to the winning number is determined in advance. When the winning number is determined by operating the start switch 41, the performance group number selection means 64 selects the performance group number corresponding to the winning number of the game, and the main control board 50 selects the performance group number corresponding to the winning number of the game. The number is sent to the sub control board 80. The sub-control board 80 outputs a performance related to the winning combination based on the received performance group number. The effect group number, unlike the above-mentioned push order instruction number, is selected every game and is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.

Further, the main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number of the game to the sub control board 80. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning numbers of the game. However, since the sub-control board 80 receives the performance group number for each game, it is possible to output the performance based on the received performance group number. However, even if the push order bell or push order replay is won, the correct push order cannot be determined from the presentation group number, so the sub-control board 80 will not notify the correct press order based on the presentation group number. . On the other hand, during AT, when the push order bell or push order replay is won, the push order instruction number is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 can notify the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number.

The reel control means 65 controls all (three) reels 31 to start rotating when receiving a command to start rotating the reels 31, particularly when detecting the operation of the start switch 41 in this embodiment. .
Further, after the winning numbers are determined by the winning combination lottery means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to the on/off of the winning flag in the current game, and generates a stop position determination table corresponding to the on/off of the winning flag. is selected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, and the motor 32 is The drive is controlled so that the reel 31 is stopped at the determined position.

For example, in a game where at least one winning flag is on, the reel control means 65 enables the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination (the winning flag is on) within the range of stop control of the reels 31. The reels 31 are stopped so as to be stopped on the line, and the reels 31 are stopped so as not to stop symbol combinations corresponding to combinations other than winning combinations (winning flags are turned off) on the effective line.

Here, "within the range of stop control of the reels 31" refers to the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reels 31 actually stop, or the amount of rotation of the reels 31 (number of moving symbols (frames)). means within range.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 revolutions per minute at constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is within 190 ms, except for a predetermined reel 31 (for example, the middle reel 31) during MB operation. is set to . As a result, in this embodiment, the maximum number of symbols to be moved from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to 4 symbols, excluding a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation.

On the other hand, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 75 ms. As a result, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the maximum number of symbols to be moved from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to one symbol.

At the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of stop control of the reels 31 is a symbol that should be stopped on a predetermined active line, when the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the symbol is controlled to stop at a predetermined valid line.
That is, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, if the symbol of the combination corresponding to the winning number does not stop on a predetermined active line, the reels 31 will be stopped until the reels 31 are stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, the symbols of the combination corresponding to the winning number are controlled to be stopped on a predetermined valid line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number will stop on the active line. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, control is performed so that symbol combinations of winning combinations that do not correspond to the winning numbers are not stopped on the active line (kick-off stop control).
Furthermore, in a game where multiple winning combinations are won (for example, when the push order bell is won), the priority order of winning combinations is determined in advance according to the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed and the timing at which the stop switches 42 are operated. According to a predetermined priority order, control is performed to stop the drawing of symbols related to the most prioritized winning combination.

The winning determination means 66 determines, when the reels 31 are stopped, whether or not the symbol combination of the reels 31 that has stopped on the active line is a symbol combination that corresponds to any winning combination.
Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the active line. Specifically, from the condition device activated in the game, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and/or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, a symbol combination that will stop on the active line before the reel 31 actually stops is determined in advance. Or, after the reels 31 have stopped, the symbol combinations that have stopped on the active line are determined in advance.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control commands) necessary for the production output by the sub-control board 80 to the sub-control board 80.
The control commands include, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, press order instruction number (only when AT is in progress and a winning number with the correct press order is won). , performance group number, RT (game status) information, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on winning combinations, etc.

In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during the game and while waiting for the game.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmitting means 71) unidirectionally communicates with the sub-control board 80 through parallel communication. Sends information (control commands) necessary for output.
Note that the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, but may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, or serial communication and parallel communication may be used together.

Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
The sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to peripheral devices for effects such as the following effect lamps 21 as shown in FIG. 1 via an input port 81 or an output port 82. However, peripheral devices for presentation are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data etc. taken in when the sub CPU 85 controls the performance.
Further, the ROM 84 is a storage medium that stores programs for holding a lottery related to a performance, various data, etc. as performance data.

The effect lamps 21 are made of, for example, LEDs, and are lit in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are met. Note that the production lamp 21 includes a back lamp that is placed on the inner circumference side of each reel 31 and illuminates the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three consecutive symbols visible from the display window) from behind. These include a fluorescent light that illuminates the symbols on the reels 31 from above, a frame lamp that is placed in front of the front door of the slot machine 10, and that blinks when a winning combination is won.

Further, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when predetermined conditions are met in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and displays various effect images during the game (correct answer pressing order, effects corresponding to the conditional devices activated in the game, etc.). It displays game information (the number of games played and the number of coins won when the accessory is activated or during the advantageous period (AT), etc.).

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing how the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47 pass through the input sensors 44a and 44b, and is a schematic diagram seen from the front. In FIG. 2, the inside of the medal selector is shown so as to be visible. Furthermore, the medals M indicate M1 to M4 depending on their positions. The position M1 indicates a state in which the medal M is placed in the medal placing portion 47b of the medal slot 47 (a state before being released). That is, at the position M1, when viewed from the front, the lowest point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M is in contact with the upper surface of the medal placing portion 47b.
In FIG. 2 (and FIG. 4, which will be described later), it is assumed that the entire approximately square portions indicated as input sensors 44a and 44b are the light receiving and emitting ranges (sensor eyes) of input sensors 44a and 44b, respectively. (This is not the housing of the input sensors 44a and 44b.)

Further, the position M2 indicates the position at the moment when the medal M is no longer visible when viewed from the front. That is, the position M2 is a position where the highest point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M overlaps with the upper surface of the medal placing portion 47b. For example, if it is assumed that the player releases the medal M when it is at the position M1, the medal M will fall from the position M1. Therefore, at position M2, it is in a state where it has been released from the player's hand and is falling (moving) downstream.
Note that the "upstream side" refers to the medal input port 47 side, and the "downstream side" refers to the input sensor 44b side (hopper 35 side). In terms of the positions of the medals M, from the upstream side to the downstream side, the order is M1→M2→M3→M4.

In the example of FIG. 2, the passage sensor 46 is arranged so that the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M when it is located at M2.
Furthermore, the position of M3 indicates the position at the moment (on) when the medal M is detected by the input sensor 44a. Further, the position M4 indicates the position at the moment when the medal M is no longer detected by the input sensor 44b (off).

The medal insertion slot 47 is a portion where the player inserts the medal M into the slot machine 10 (medal selector) when betting or crediting the medal M as a game medium. The medal slot 47 includes a medal guard part 47a and a medal placement part 47b. The medal holder 47b has a substantially curved surface (a curvature slightly larger than the circumferential edge of the medal M) extending perpendicularly to the plane of the drawing so that a plurality of stacked medals M (up to about 10 medals) can be placed at the same time. curved surface).

The substantially curved surface of the medal placing portion 47b and the surface of the medal guard portion 47a with which the medals M come into contact (the surface visible in FIG. 2) are formed to intersect substantially perpendicularly.
Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 2, the intersection of the medal placing portion 47b and the medal guard portion 47a has an opening through which one medal M can flow down. In a state where two medals M are piled up, the medal M does not fall from the opening, but when the thickness is the same as one medal M, the medal M is formed so as to flow down from the opening. For this reason, the player may, for example, place a plurality of stacked medals M on the medal placement part 47b, press the plurality of medals M toward the medal guard part 47a, and increase the pressing force. By weakening it, it is possible to drop the medals M placed on the medal placing portion 47b one by one into the medal selector from the opening.

When a medal M is inserted (released downward) from the medal slot 47, the medal M flows down the passage within the medal selector. Inside the medal selector, from the upstream side, a passage sensor 46, an input sensor 44a, and an input sensor 44b are provided. Further, the above-mentioned blocker 45 is provided between the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44a (in FIG. 2, below the input sensor 44a).

When the medal M enters the medal selector, it is first detected by the passage sensor 46. The passage sensor 46 is a sensor provided to determine the presence or absence of a medal jam or a trifling act, and detects the medal M for a predetermined period of time (predetermined) from the time when the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M. Furthermore, when the medal M is no longer detected after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is determined that it is normal. On the other hand, if the passage sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined period of time has passed after detecting the medal, it is determined that a medal retention error has occurred. Further, when the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M and then stops detecting the medal M before a predetermined time has elapsed, it is determined that the medal M has passed illegally.

When the medal M flows down within the medal passage, it reaches the position of the blocker 45. The blocker 45 is arranged on the lower surface side in the medal passage. When the blocker 45 is in the on state (the output port related to the blocker 45 among the output ports 52 is on), the blocker 45 forms a medal flow path such that the medal M can be detected by the input sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, it has the role of sending the medals M that have been moved from the upstream side to the input sensors 44a and 44b without sending them out of the medal path.

On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is in the off state (out of the output ports 52, the output port related to the blocker 45 is off), the blocker 45 moves in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the drawing in FIG. This creates an opening (pitfall) in the medal path. As a result, when the blocker 45 is in the OFF state, the medal M falls from this opening just before reaching M3 and is sent out of the medal path (M5 in FIG. 2). The medal M that has fallen from this opening is returned to the medal return slot (not shown) without being detected by the input sensor 44a.

For example, if the specified number of bets for the game have already been placed and the number of credits has reached the upper limit, no more bets or credits can be made for medals, so the blocker 45 is controlled to be in an OFF state. As a result, even if the medal M is inserted from the medal slot 47 in this state, it falls from the opening and is returned to the medal return slot.
On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the opening is blocked by the blocker 45, so the medals M flowing down in the medal passage pass over the blocker 45 and the input sensors 44a and 44b Can be moved to the side.

In this embodiment, the blockers 45 are arranged as shown in FIG. 2, but the arrangement is not limited to this. Regardless of the on/off state of the blocker 45, the passage sensor 46 can detect the medal M, and when the blocker 45 is in the on state, the medal M can be guided to the input sensors 44a and 44b, and , when the blocker 45 is in the off state, it is only necessary that the medal M can be sent to the medal return slot without being detected by the input sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, the blocker 45 may be located between the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44a.

Further, the passage sensor 46 only needs to be located upstream of the blocker 45, and even if the blocker 45 is in the off state, the passage sensor 46 may be located at a position where it can detect the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47. That's fine. In addition, in FIG. 2, the passage sensor 46 is arranged so that it can detect the medal M when it is located at M2, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to arrange the passage sensor 46 so as to detect the medal M when the medal M is moved.

The input sensors 44a and 44b are sensors for detecting the medals M that have passed through the blocker 45, and these two sensors are installed at a predetermined distance apart. First, when the medal M reaches the position M3, the upstream insertion sensor 44a can detect the medal M (turns from OFF to ON). When the medal M further flows down, the input sensor 44b detects the medal M (turns on from off). By determining the on/off timing of these two input sensors 44a and 44b, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal M is normal. When the medal M reaches the position M4, it is no longer detected by the input sensors 44a and 44b. The medals M that have passed through the input sensors 44a and 44b are sent to the hopper 35.

In FIG. 2, the medal selector is designed as follows.
First, from the moment when the medal M is at the M2 position, that is, the medal M becomes invisible when looking at the medal selector from the front, to the moment when the medal M is at the M4 position, that is, the moment when the medal M is no longer detected by the input sensor 44b. The time it takes to reach (the movement locus is indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 2) is set as time T2. Note that this is the value when the medal M is located at M1, the hand is released from the medal M (at an initial speed of "0"), and the medal is released downward. Therefore, the speed when the medal M is located at M2 exceeds "0".

Further, the acceleration of the medal M increases as it moves further downward from the position M2. On the other hand, in FIG. 2, an impact member (not shown in FIG. 2) is provided at a portion where the medal path curves from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction. When the medal M comes into contact with this impact member, the speed of the medal M is reduced and the medal M moves toward the input sensors 44a and 44b.
Then, the time from the moment when the medal M is located at M3 (the moment when it is detected by the input sensor 44a) to the moment when it is positioned at M4 (the moment when it is no longer detected by the input sensor 44b) is set as time T3. .

<First embodiment (A)>
FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a time chart for explaining the first embodiment (A) of the present embodiment.
FIG. 3 shows the voltage level when the power to the slot machine 10 is turned off (for example, when the power switch 11 is turned off or a power outage occurs).
In FIG. 3, the voltage when the power supply is normally turned on is defined as a supply level V0. At the supply level V0, the slot machine 10 operates normally.

FIG. 3 shows an example in which a power outage occurs (an event in which the power supply is cut off) occurs at time S11. In this embodiment, when a power outage occurs, the voltage drops to the power outage detection level V1 at time T0.
The time T0 from when a power outage occurs (time S11; supply level V0) to when a power outage is detected (time S12; power outage detection level V1) is at least 20 interrupts (1 interrupt time 2.235 ms x 20 Interrupt = 44.7 ms) or more.
On the main control board 50, a voltage monitoring device (not shown) (power-off detection circuit) is provided. When the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, the power-off detection level V1, a power-off detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51, and the power supply is detected by detecting whether or not the signal is input. Detect disconnection.

When the voltage further decreases from the power-off detection level V1 and becomes less than the driving voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55, the main CPU 55 cannot be driven (the operation of the main CPU 55 cannot be guaranteed).
The example in FIG. 3 shows an example in which the voltage level reaches the driving voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55 at time S13, and then decreases to Low. Since the main control board 50 cannot execute the power-off process when the voltage becomes less than the drive voltage limit V2, when the power-off occurs at time S11, the main control board 50 is configured so that the power-off process can be completed at least by time S13. It is set to .

Furthermore, the detection of a power outage is executed in the interrupt process that is executed every 2.235 ms, but when a power outage is detected in two consecutive interrupts, the power outage process is executed in the next interrupt process. Therefore, in FIG. 3, time S12 is the timing at which it is determined that the voltage is below the power-off detection level V1 in two consecutive interrupt processes, and it is detected that a power-off has occurred. Then, in the next interrupt processing, power-off processing is executed.
Note that in the interrupt processing, the following processing is executed. First, it is determined whether or not a power outage is detected, and when a power outage is detected, the process proceeds to power off processing (without proceeding to normal interrupt processing). In the power-off process, first, the output port 52 is turned off. The blocker 45 is turned off by the process of turning off the output port 52. Furthermore, the process of saving the stack pointer, setting the power-off processing completed flag (a flag for determining whether or not the power has been turned off normally), executing the checksum of the RWM53, and disabling writing of the RWM53, etc. After being executed sequentially, it enters a reset wait state (loop processing state). By design, this reset wait state is a state in which no processing is performed.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 3, the power-off process is executed in the next interrupt process after the interrupt process in which the power-off is detected (time S12), and the blocker 45 is turned off.
Note that the power-off process is not limited to being executed in the interrupt process following the interrupt process in which the power-off is detected, and the power-off process may be executed within the interrupt process in which the power-off is detected. In this case, "T1=S12-S11".

On the other hand, FIG. 3 also shows the medal positions (M2, M4) after the medals are inserted. In FIG. 2, it is assumed that the player releases his/her hand from the medal M while the medal M is at the position M1. Note that in this case, the medal M falls at an initial velocity of "0". Thereby, the medal M is released into the medal selector. In FIG. 3, the time S11 when the power is cut off is made to coincide with the time when the medal M reaches the position M2.

As shown in FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment when it is positioned at M4 is defined as T2, but similarly in FIG. 3, time T2 has elapsed from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 It is assumed that later, the medal M is located at M4.
In this case, the present embodiment is designed to satisfy the relationship "T2>T1".

Therefore, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process is executed before the medal M reaches M4, and the insertion sensor 44b no longer detects the medal M. Therefore, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the medal M is sent to the medal return slot (lower tray) without being detected by the input sensor 44b. Therefore, the medal M does not normally pass through the input sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, the medal M will be swallowed, but after the power is cut off (after time S11), the process of adding "1" to the medal M (adding "1" to the bet or credit) is executed. Not done. Thereby, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that a bet or credit process will be executed after a power outage occurs.

For example, in the case where a power cut occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, when the time T1 has elapsed (during power cutoff processing), when the medal M is located just before M4 in FIG. 2 (the medal M (after the medal M has passed the position M3), the medal M is detected by the input sensor 44a, but is not detected by the input sensor 44b, and the power is turned off.
Furthermore, in the case where a power cut occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, when time T1 has elapsed (during power cutoff processing), the medal M is located upstream from the position M3 in FIG. At this time, the medal M is not detected by either the input sensor 44a or the input sensor 44b, and the power is turned off.

Further, in FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment when the medal M is positioned at M3 is defined as time T2'.
In this case, it is preferable to design to satisfy the relationship "T2'>T1".
In the case where the above relationship is designed, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the blocker 45 is turned off by the time when the medal M reaches M3 as the power cut-off process is executed. ing. Therefore, the medal M is sent out of the medal passage without being detected by the input sensor 44a, and is sent to the medal return slot.

Here, differences between the prior art and the first embodiment (A) will be explained.
Conventionally, if a power cutoff occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the medal M has already passed the position of the insertion sensor 44b by the time the power cutoff is detected and the blocker 45 is turned off. Therefore, after the power is cut off, the process of adding "1" to the medal (bet process or credit process) is executed. However, it is not preferable to execute the medal addition process after a power outage occurs. This is because after a power outage occurs, all processing related to the progress of the game should be immediately stopped.
Therefore, if configured as in the first embodiment (A), even if the power is cut off at the moment when the player inserts the medal M from the medal slot 47 and the medal M is positioned at M2 (immediately after inserting the medal), Since the process of adding "1" to medals is not executed, the functionality of the slot machine 10 can be improved.

<First embodiment (B)>
The first embodiment (B) defines the relationship between the input sensors 44a and 44b and power-off.
FIG. 4 is a front view showing the process from when the medal M is detected by the input sensor 44a until it is no longer detected by the input sensor 44b. In FIG. 4, the arrow direction indicates the advancing (downward) direction of the medal M.
FIG. 4(a) shows a diagram at the moment when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. At this time, the input sensor 44a is turned on from off, and the input sensor 44b remains off. Note that this position corresponds to M3 in FIG.

Next, when the medal M advances to the left side in FIG. 4 and reaches the state shown in FIG. It becomes like this. Therefore, in FIG. 4B, the input sensor 44a is on, and the input sensor 44b is turned on from off.
In addition, in FIG. 4, even if the input sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M overlap, both the input sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M are shown by solid lines, but the medal M and the input sensor 44a and It does not represent the positional relationship of 44b. The input sensors 44a and 44b may be placed on the front side of the medal M in the direction perpendicular to the page of FIG. 4, or may be placed on the back side.

When the medal M advances further and reaches the state shown in FIG. 4(c), the medal M is detected by both the input sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, in this case, the input sensor 44a is on, and the input sensor 44b is also on.
Here, the diameter of the medal M is, for example, 25 mm (so-called 25 pi (φ)) in the general specification, and 30 mm (so-called 30 pi (φ)) in the special specification. Therefore, it is necessary to set the distance between the input sensors 44a and 44b so that the state shown in FIG. 4(c) can be achieved. Here, as will be described later, whether or not the state shown in FIG. 4(c), that is, the time during which both the input sensors 44a and 44b are on (detecting the medal M) is within a predetermined range. This determines whether or not a medal insertion error is determined. Therefore, the distance between the input sensors 44a and 44b also differs depending on how the time during which both input sensors 44a and 44b are on is set.

When the medal M further advances from the state shown in FIG. 4(c), the input sensor 44a stops detecting the medal M, as shown in FIG. 4(d). In this case, the input sensor 44a is turned off from on at the moment, and the input sensor 44b remains on. As the medal M advances further, the insertion sensor 44b no longer detects the medal M, as shown in FIG. 4(e). Therefore, in this case, the input sensor 44a remains off, and the input sensor 44b changes from on to off at the moment. Note that the position of the medal M in FIG. 4(e) corresponds to M4 in FIG.

FIG. 5 is a time chart showing on/off of the input sensors 44a and 44b. In FIG. 5, time S21 is the moment when the input sensor 44a is turned on from off (the input sensor 44b remains off), and corresponds to the timing in FIG. 4(a).
Next, the time at which the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M (turns on from off) (FIG. 4(b)) is S22. Furthermore, the time at which the insertion sensor 44a no longer detects the medal M (changes from on to off) (FIG. 4(d)) is S23. Further, the time at which the insertion sensor 44b no longer detects the medal M (changes from on to off) (FIG. 4(e)) is S24.

Here, if the time Ta (from time S21 to S23) during which the input sensor 44a detects the medal M is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts). (Condition 1) The main control board 50 determines that the passage of the medal M is normal, and when it is out of this range, it determines that there is a medal passage error.

Also, the time Tb (from time S22 to S23) during which both the input sensors 44a and 44b detect the medal M is within the range of 4.47 ms (2 interrupts) or more and less than 118.455 ms (53 interrupts). If so (condition 2), the main control board 50 determines that the passage of the medal M is normal, and if it is out of this range, it determines that there is a medal passage error.

Furthermore, if the time Tc (from time S22 to S24) during which the input sensor 44b detects the medal M is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts). (Condition 3) The main control board 50 determines that the passage of the medal M is normal, and when it is out of this range, it is determined as a medal passage error.
If all of the above conditions 1 to 3 are satisfied, the passage of the medal M is determined to be normal, and if at least one condition is not satisfied, a medal passage error is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, when both the input sensors 44a and 44b are turned off (time S24), "1" is subtracted from the input monitoring counter.
Here, the input monitoring counter becomes "+1" when the passage sensor 46 described above detects the medal M, and when the medal passes normally through the input sensors 44a and 44b (both input sensors 44a and 44b are turned off). This is a counter that is incremented by "-1" when the switch turns from "on" to "off" (therefore, at time S24). That is, during normal operation, "1" and "0" are repeated.
On the other hand, when the passage sensor 46 does not detect the medal M and only the input sensors 44a and 44b detect passage of the medal, the input monitoring counter becomes "-1" and the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passage error. do.

In addition, when the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M (insertion monitoring counter = "+1") and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b do not detect passage of the medal M, the passage sensor 46 further detects the medal M. However, when the input monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "2" or more, the main control board 50 determines that a medal jamming error has occurred. For example, if the normal value of the input monitoring counter is set to ``0'' to ``2'', when the input monitoring counter becomes ``3'' or higher, the main control board 50 may determine that a medal jam error has occurred. It will be done.
Note that the input monitoring counter is cleared when the blocker 45 changes from the off state to the on state.

In FIG. 5, at time S24, the insertion sensor 44b is turned off from on, the insertion monitoring counter is decremented by "1", and when it is determined that the medal M has passed normally, the main control board 50 controls the insertion of the medal. Execute processing (bet processing or credit processing). For example, if the number of bets is less than the specified number at that time, a process of adding "1" to the number of bets is executed. Specifically, if the specified number for the game is "3" and the number of bets at that time is "0", the number of bets is increased from "0" by adding "1" to the number of bets. Update to "1".

Furthermore, at that point, if the number of bets has already reached the specified number and the number of credits has not reached the maximum number of "50", the process of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed. For example, if the number of credits at that time is "10", the number of credits is updated to "11".
Note that when the number of bets reaches the specified number and the number of credits reaches the maximum number of "50", the main control board 50 turns off the blocker 45. Thereby, even if a medal M is inserted from the medal slot 47, the medal M is returned. In other words, in that case, even if the medal M is inserted, it will not be detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.

In addition to the on/off states of the input sensors 44a and 44b, FIG. 5 shows the timing when a power outage occurs and when a power outage is detected. FIG. 5 shows Examples 1 and 2, both of which take as an example a case where a power outage occurs at the timing when the input sensor 44a is turned on from off (time S21).
In Example 1, the power outage is detected after a time T1 has elapsed from the time S21 when the power outage occurred. Here, in Example 1, "T1>T3" is set. Therefore, when the input sensor 44a detects the medal M at the moment when the power is cut off, the process of adding "1" to the medal M has already been performed when the power cut-off process is started.

Here, the time T3 from time S21 to S24 can be expressed as "Ta+Tc-Tb". Therefore, the minimum time of time T3 corresponds to 4 interrupts and is "8.94 ms".
Further, the maximum time of time T3 corresponds to 113 interrupts and is "252.555 ms".
In example 1, the power-off process is always set to be executed after time S24 has elapsed. For this reason, for example, the time T1 from the occurrence of power-off (time S21) until the power-off process is executed is set to be equal to or longer than 114 interrupts.

With the above settings, even if a power outage occurs at the moment when the input sensor 44a detects the medal M (time S21), the power outage process will be executed after the process of adding "1" to the medal M is executed. , the medal M is normally bet or credited. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the medal M from being swallowed.

Further, in Example 2, contrary to Example 1, the power-off process is executed before the process of adding "1" to the medal M is executed. That is, in Example 2, the relationship is set to be "T1<T3".
As described above, the time T3 from time S21 to S24 is the minimum time and corresponds to four interrupts. Therefore, in order to satisfy the relationship "T1<T3", it is necessary to execute the power-off process within three interrupts from the occurrence of the power-off. However, since it is difficult to set the power-off process to be executed within three interrupts from the occurrence of a power-off, the minimum time Tc is set to be longer than four interrupts. For example, the minimum time of time Tc may be set to 15 interrupts. If the time T1 from the occurrence of power outage (time S21) to the power outage process is set to about 10 interrupts, when the power outage occurs at time S21, the power outage process will be executed before time S24. becomes possible.

When the power-off process is executed, the process of adding "1" to the medal M (bet or credit) is not executed thereafter. Therefore, in Example 2, even if the input sensor 44a detects the medal M at time S21 (when the power is cut off), the process of adding "1" to the medal M1 is not executed. As a result, there is a disadvantage that the medal M is swallowed, but as explained in the first embodiment (A), after the power is cut off, the process of adding "1" to the medal M etc. is not executed. , the power-off process can be executed as quickly as possible.

<First embodiment (C)>
The first embodiment (C) defines the relationship between the payout sensors 37a and 37b and power cutoff.
When adding medals to be paid out to credits, the hopper motor 36 is not driven, and the storage area for the number of credits provided in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is updated. Further, the value indicated by the credit number display LED 76 is updated so that the number corresponds to the number of credits stored in the storage area.

When the medals are to be paid out after the number of credits reaches the upper limit value "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out the medals from the hopper 35 (ejected from the payout port). In this case, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are configured to detect on/off status each time one medal is paid out. When the on/off detection result by the payout sensors 37a and 37b is within the normal range, it is determined that one medal M has been correctly paid out, and when the detection result is not within the normal range, the medal M The main control board 50 determines that the medal has not been paid out correctly, and the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

FIG. 6 is a plan view illustrating the operation when medals M are paid out from the medal payout device. Although not shown in FIG. 6, a hopper disk (a substantially disc-shaped rotating disk) is attached to the bottom of the hopper 35, and this hopper disk is rotated by the hopper motor 36. A plurality of openings capable of holding medals M are formed along the outer periphery of the hopper disk. The medal M in the hopper 35 is configured to enter into the opening of the hopper disk. When the hopper motor 36 is driven in this state, the hopper disk is rotated and the medals M held in the opening of the hopper disk are ejected one by one. A new medal M in the hopper 35 enters the empty opening after the medal M is ejected.

In FIG. 6, the medal M located at M1 is shown immediately after being ejected from the opening of the hopper disk. The fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b are both components of a medal payout device. The fixed shaft 38a is a shaft that does not move when the medals M are paid out. On the other hand, the movable shaft 38b is a shaft that moves back and forth every time one medal M is paid out. In the unloaded state, the movable shaft 38b is located at the position shown by the solid line in the figure, and is fixed by a spring (not shown in FIG. 6, which corresponds to the spring 39b in FIG. 7, which will be described later). It is biased toward the 38a side. The medal M (M1) immediately after being ejected from the opening of the hopper disk comes into contact with both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.
Note that when the medal M is placed at the position (M1) shown by the solid line in FIG. narrower than the diameter. Therefore, at this point, the medal M cannot pass between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.

A pushing force in the F1 direction in FIG. 6 is acting on the medals M discharged from the opening of the hopper disk. When a pushing force in the F1 direction is applied to the medal M, the medal M becomes movable in the F1 direction, and the pushing force pushes the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction in the figure. Note that the fixed shaft 38a does not move. As a result, the movable shaft 38b moves in the F2 direction in the figure while maintaining contact with the medal M. Further, the movable shaft 38b moves to a position where the medal M can pass between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b. In other words, the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal M. The position of the movable shaft 38b at this time is indicated by a two-dot chain line in the figure.

Thereby, the medal M passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and is ejected in the F1 direction (toward the medal payout port side) in the figure. The medal M at this time is shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 6 (M2). When the medal M is ejected, the force pushing the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction is released. As a result, the movable shaft 38b is returned to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 6 again by the force of the spring.

FIG. 7 is a plan view illustrating the on (detection)/off (non-detection) states of the payout sensors 37a and 37b when the medals M are paid out as described above in the medal payout device. FIG. 7 shows how the movable piece 39a moves in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (a) every time one medal M is paid out.

FIG. 7A shows the state of the movable piece 39a when the movable shaft 38b is located at the position shown by the solid line (initial position) in FIG. In the figure, the movable piece 39a is attached to be rotatably movable around the central axis, and is biased clockwise by a spring 39b.
When the movable piece 39a is biased clockwise in the figure, the movable shaft 38b in FIG. 6 is biased toward the fixed shaft 38a in the diagram.
When the movable piece 39a is urged clockwise in FIG. 7), it is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 7(a).

As shown in FIG. 7A, dispensing sensors 37a (upper side in the figure) and 37b (lower side in the figure) are arranged on the left side of the movable piece 39a in the figure. The movable piece 39a is formed to extend toward the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b, and when it is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 7(a), its tip is being detected by the dispensing sensor 37a. ing.
In addition, in FIG. 7, the housings of the sensors 37a and 37b are both shown, and the light receiving and emitting parts (eyes of the sensors) are not shown. In this point, it is different from the input sensors 44a and 44b of FIGS. 2 and 4, which show only the light receiving and emitting parts (eyes of the sensor).

Here, the dispensing sensor 37a is in an on state (for example, FIG. 7(a)) when it detects the movable piece 39a, and is in an off state (for example, in FIG. 7(b)) when it no longer detects the movable piece 39a. It is set to be.
Similarly, the dispensing sensor 37b is in an off state (for example, FIG. 7(a)) when it does not detect the movable piece 39a, and is in an on state (for example, FIG. 7(c)) when it detects the movable piece 39a. is set to .
In the state of FIG. 7A, the payout sensor 37a detects the movable piece 39a and is in an on state, and the payout sensor 37b does not detect the movable piece 39a and is in an off state.

As explained in FIG. 6, when the pushing force in the F1 direction in FIG. 6 acts on the medal M, the movable shaft 38b starts to move in the F2 direction in FIG. When the movable piece 39a moves, the movable piece 39a starts rotating counterclockwise in FIG. 7(a) against the biasing force of the spring 39b. When the movable piece 39a moves to the position shown in FIG. 7(b), the tip of the movable piece 39a comes out from inside the payout sensor 37a. As a result, the dispensing sensor 37a no longer detects the movable piece 39a, and is therefore turned off. Moreover, even if the movable piece 39a rotates to the position shown in FIG. 7(b), the tip of the movable piece 39a does not reach the payout sensor 37b. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7(b), the payout sensor 37a is in the off state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the off state.

In FIG. 6, when the movable shaft 38b further moves in the F2 direction and reaches the position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 6 (the position where the medal M can pass through the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b), 7, the movable piece 39a further rotates counterclockwise and reaches the position shown in FIG. 7(c). Thereby, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters into the payout sensor 37b, and the movable piece 39a is detected by the payout sensor 37b. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7(c), the payout sensor 37a is in the off state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the on state.

In FIG. 6, when the medal M is further ejected from the position M2, the force that urges the movable shaft 38b in the direction F2 in FIG. 6 disappears, so the movable shaft 38b moves to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. return. The return force at this time is due to the force of the spring 39b shown in FIG. As a result, the movable piece 39a rotates clockwise in FIG. 7, the tip of the movable piece 39a comes out of the payout sensor 37b, and the payout sensor 37b no longer detects the movable piece 39b. FIG. 7(d) shows the state at this time. In the state of FIG. 7(d), the payout sensor 37a is in an off state, and the payout sensor 37b is in an off state.

Then, when the movable piece 39a further rotates clockwise, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters into the payout sensor 37a, and the movable piece 39a is detected by the payout sensor 37a. This returns to the state (initial state) of FIG. 7(a). In the state of FIG. 7A, as described above, the payout sensor 37a is in the on state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the off state. Further, when returning to this position, the movable shaft 38b returns to the position indicated by the solid line in FIG.

FIG. 8 is a time chart showing on/off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b.
In FIG. 8, it is assumed that the medal payout process has started and the hopper motor drive signal is in the on state.
In FIG. 8, the state before time S31 is as shown in FIG. 7(a). When time S31 is reached, the state shown in FIG. 7B is reached, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off (the payout sensor 37b is turned off). Next, when time S32 is reached, the payout sensor 37b is turned on. This state is the state shown in FIG. 7(c). In FIG. 8, the time from time S31 to S32 is designated as Td.

The dispensing sensor 37a is in the off state and the dispensing sensor 37b is in the on state until time S33, at which time the dispensing sensor 37b is turned off. This state is the state shown in FIG. 7(d). In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S33 is designated as Te. Then, when time S34 is reached, the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 7A (initial position), and the payout sensor 37a is turned on. In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S34 is designated as Tf.

In the payout process, the main control board 50 monitors the on/off state time of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and determines that there is a medal payout error when the time is not within a predetermined time range.
For example, in FIG. 8, the time Td is set to less than 29.055 ms (13 interrupts). Therefore, if the payout sensor 37b turns on by the 12th interrupt after the payout sensor 37a turns off, it is determined to be normal, but if the payout sensor 37b turns on by the 12th interrupt, then the payout sensor 37b turns on. If there is no medal, it is considered a medal payout error.

Further, the time Te during which the payout sensor 37a is in the off state and the payout sensor 37b is in the on state is set to be greater than or equal to 11.175 ms (5 interrupts) and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, at time S32 (when the payout sensor 37b is in the on state), the time Te until the payout sensor 37b is in the off state is monitored, and if the time Te is not within the above predetermined time range, , the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal payout error.

Furthermore, after the payout sensor 37b is turned on (time S32), the time Tf from when the payout sensor 37b is turned off to when the payout sensor 37a is turned on (time S34) is 11.175 ms (5 interrupts). ) and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, at time S32 (when the payout sensor 37b is turned on), the time Tf from when the payout sensor 37b is turned off to when the payout sensor 37a is turned on is monitored, and the time Tf is determined. If the time is not within the predetermined time range, the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

Further, in FIG. 8, as in FIGS. 3 and 5, the time from the occurrence of power-off to the power-off processing is also displayed.
First, it is assumed that the power is cut off at time S31, that is, at the timing when the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, in the example of FIG. 3, an example was explained in which power-off is detected at the 20th interrupt, but in the example of FIG. 8 (first embodiment (C)), the When T1 has elapsed, the power off is detected and the power off process is executed.

Here, the maximum time (normally) of the time "Td+Tf" is "12+27=39" interrupts, so the time T1 from power-off to execution of power-off processing is set to, for example, 40 interrupts (89.4ms). Set. With this setting, even if the power is cut off at the moment when the payout sensor 37a is turned off, the power cutoff process can be started after the payout process for one medal is normally completed. That is, it can be set to "(Td+Tf)<T1".

Conventionally, there have been cases in which a power outage (power outage, etc.) occurs during the medal payout process. In this case, depending on the timing of the occurrence of the medal payout process and the power cutoff, it may be determined that the medals have been paid out even though the medals have not been paid out, which may cause a loss to the player.
In contrast, in the first embodiment (C), even if a power failure occurs during the medal payout process, the medals can be paid out correctly.

In particular, even if a power outage occurs when the medal payout process is started, that is, at time S31 in FIG. 8, the power outage is detected after the medal payout process is finished, and the process shifts to the power outage process. Therefore, the power-off process is not executed, for example, when the payout sensor 37a is in the off state or at the timing when the payout sensor 37b is in the on state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the power-off process from being executed in the middle of the medal payout process and the medal payout process being canceled before the (one) medal payout process is normally completed.

Note that if the time T1 is set longer than necessary, there is a risk that the next medal payout process will be executed. Therefore, the power-off process is executed at least before the next medal payout process is executed. In FIG. 8, for example, assuming that the cycle of one medal payout process is time T4 and the payout sensor 37a changes from the on state to the off state at the timing of time S35, it is set so that "T1<T4".

<Second embodiment>
The second embodiment relates to gate marks formed on the board case of the main control board 50.
In the prior art, the shape, size, position, etc. of the gate mark on the substrate case were determined by a mold designer during mold manufacturing solely from the convenience of mold manufacturing.
However, since the gate mark has an uneven surface, for example, even if a hole is drilled aiming at the gate mark, it may not be visually distinguishable (not noticed).

If the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is located directly below the gate trace, the main CPU 55 could be accessed by drilling a hole in the gate trace and passing a wire through the hole (e.g., if the main CPU 55 is placed directly under the gate trace). There was a risk that it would be carried out. In particular, if the gate mark is shaped to be thinner than other parts, it will be easier to drill holes than other parts.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, the gate marks on the board case are used to prevent theft from being carried out.

FIG. 9 is an exploded external perspective view showing the main control board 50 and the board case 56 (upper cover 57 and lower cover 58).
The board case 56 is composed of an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58, both of which are (injection) molded from transparent resin. Therefore, when the main control board 50 is housed inside, the state of the main control board 50 can be visually and clearly confirmed from outside the board case 56.

On the main control board 50, there are electronic components such as the above-mentioned main CPU 55, management information display LED 74 (4-digit LED, also referred to as "role ratio monitor" or "ratio display"), set value display LED 73, etc. It is installed. Note that many electronic components such as the above-mentioned RWM 53 and ROM 54 are mounted on the main control board 50, but illustration thereof is omitted in FIG. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 9, the main control board 50 is equipped with LEDs for confirming failure of the bet switches 40a and 40b, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, the passage sensor 46 in the medal selector, and the input sensors 44a and 44b. has been done. Note that the failure confirmation LED is not limited to this.
For example, the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 is off when the start switch 41 is off, and when the start switch 41 is operated (when the start switch 41 is operated and the sensor detects that it is on). ), the LED turns on (lights up).

In addition, the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 and the failure confirmation LEDs of other operation switches and sensors, which will be described later, are turned off when the operation switch is operated (when the sensor detects that it is on), and are turned off when the operation switch is turned off. It may be configured so that it lights up.

Furthermore, two LEDs are provided for confirming failure of the bet switches 40a and 40b, one for the bet switch 40a and one for the bet switch 40b, and are off when the bet switch 40 is not operated, and when the bet switch 40 is operated, The LED lights up when it receives the electrical signal at that time.
Furthermore, the passage sensor 46 and the input sensors 44a and 44b have a total of three failure confirmation LEDs for each sensor, and are off when no medals are detected, and turned on when a medal is detected. It is an LED.
Then, the administrator operates the start switch 41, for example, and checks whether a failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 mounted on the main control board 50 is turned on or off, thereby determining whether or not the start switch 41 is malfunctioning (energized). can be confirmed. The same applies to other switches or sensors.

Note that the above-mentioned failure confirmation LED may be turned on/off by operating the start switch 41, etc. when the front door is opened during normal operation (not changing settings or checking settings). . Alternatively, failure confirmation may be performed by opening the front door and performing a predetermined operation after a door open error occurs. Further, the light may be turned on/off at all times (even while changing or confirming settings) by operating the start switch 41 or the like.

Further, on the main control board 50, the model number of the board is displayed (printed, etc.). Although not shown in FIG. 9, model numbers and the like are similarly displayed on the upper surfaces of the RWM 53 and ROM 54.
Furthermore, screw holes 50a for passing screws are formed at the four corners of the main control board 50.
On the other hand, bosses 58c for screwing are formed at the four inner corners of the lower surface of the lower cover 58. When the main control board 50 is placed on the lower cover 58, the screw hole 50a and the boss 58c overlap, and the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower case 58 by passing a screw through the screw hole 50a and screwing it to the boss 58c. can do.

When the upper cover 57 is stacked on the lower cover 58 in this state, the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed in a shape that fits together (in FIG. 9, the specific shape of the fitting portion is not shown). ) Further, caulking portions 57a are provided on both left and right sides of the upper cover 57 in the figure. Similarly, caulking portions 58a are provided on the left and right sides of the lower cover 58 in the figure. In addition, in FIG. 9, illustration of the specific shape and detailed shape of the caulking portions 57a and 58b is omitted.

When the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together and caulked using the caulked parts 57a and 58a, the upper cover must be destroyed (or plastically deformed) at least in part at the caulked parts 57a and 58a. The cover 57 and lower cover 58 cannot be opened.
Thereby, the security of the main control board 50 can be ensured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, gate marks 57b are provided at two locations on the outer side of the upper surface of the upper cover 57. Note that in the board case 56 (the state in which the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted), the side where the main control board 50 is housed is referred to as the "inside", and the side exposed to the outside is referred to as the "outside". .
In FIG. 9, the gate traces 57b are provided at two locations, but the gate marks 57b are not limited to this and may be provided at any number of locations.

Here, the "gate" is the sprue used to pour resin (hot water) into the mold during resin molding, and the gate mark is the mark left at the boundary between the gate and the molded product after resin molding. be.
When the board case 56 (upper cover 57, lower cover 58) has a shape as shown in FIG. 9, it is low cost to use a mold that is divided vertically in FIG. Further, in the case of a multi-cavity mold, it is preferable to use a pin gate, and from the viewpoint of fluidity of the resin (hot water), it is preferable to provide the gate near the center of the molded product. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the gate positions of the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed on the top surface, not the side surface, as shown in FIG.

Furthermore, considering the cutting of the protrusion of the gate mark during molding, it is preferable that the gate mark is provided on the outside.
From the above, the gate trace 57b of the upper cover 57 is provided on the outer side of the upper surface.
Further, for the same reason as above, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is also provided on the outside of the lower surface (the surface opposite to the visible surface in FIG. 9). In addition, in FIG. 9, the gate marks 58b of the lower cover 58 are provided in two places like the gate marks 57b of the upper cover 57, but they may be provided in one place, or they may be provided in three or more places. Good too.

Furthermore, when resin (hot water) is poured into the mold from the gate, if the resin (hot water) does not spread uniformly within the mold and there is a difference in cooling time, there is a risk that the molded product will warp and deform. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the gate position of the molded product at a position where the resin (hot water) spreads uniformly within the mold. Furthermore, when gates are provided at multiple locations, it is preferable to make the distance from the end of the molded product to the gate and the distance between the gates as equal as possible.

In FIG. 10, (a) is a plan view showing the positional relationship between the gate trace 57b of the upper cover 57 of the board case 56, the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58, and the main control board 50. FIG. 10A shows a state in which the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 (a state in which the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58 and the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together). ) is a plan view seen from above. Further, the main control board 50 is illustrated as seen through from the upper surface side of the upper cover 57.

Furthermore, (b) shows Example 1 of a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in Figure (a), and (c) shows Example 2 of a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in Figure (a). shows. Note that hatching is omitted in these cross-sectional views for ease of viewing the drawings.
As shown in FIG. 10A, when the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56, from the two gate marks 57b to the upper cover 57 in the vertical direction (main control board 50 side) (just below), It is set so that the model number display, management information display LED 74, setting value display LED 73, and main CPU 55 (socket) are not located. As described above, although the RWM 53, ROM 54, and failure confirmation LED are also mounted on the main control board 50, it is preferable that the gate trace 57b is not located directly above these.

The reason for arranging the gate traces 57 as described above is as follows.
Even after the slot machine 10 is installed in the market, it is necessary to visually check whether the main control board 50 has been tampered with or not. In particular, it is necessary to check whether the main CPU 55 and the like (including the RWM 53 and ROM 54; the same applies hereinafter) is compliant and whether it has been altered by fraud. Furthermore, since the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 and the board case 56 is sealed as described above, it is necessary to visually check the main control board 50 from outside the board case 56. be.
The board case 56 housing the main control board 50 therein is attached to the inside of the housing of the slot machine 10, for example, on the inside of the back surface. This is to install it in a position where the numerical values displayed by the setting value display LED 73 and the management information display LED 74 can be easily seen.

Therefore, it is considered that the administrator of the slot machine 10 visually observes the board case 56 (main control board 50) from a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the upper cover 57. That is, it is considered that the board case 56 (main control board 50) is visually observed as shown in FIG. 10(a). For this reason, if the main CPU 55 or the like is arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate mark 57b, the visibility of the gate mark 57 may be obstructed. In particular, information displayed (printed, etc.) on the top surface of the main CPU 55, etc., can be visually viewed without being hindered in visibility.

Note that since the entire upper cover 57 is molded from transparent resin, visibility is not completely obstructed even if it is located directly below the gate mark 57b. However, as shown in (b) and (c) in FIG. 10, the cross section of the gate mark 57b becomes an uneven surface, which reduces visibility directly below the gate mark 57b (worse than a flat surface). That is true. Furthermore, in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 10(b), since the upper end surface of the protrusion 57d is a cut surface, it may become white due to stress during cutting of the resin. Therefore, in this case as well, visibility of the area directly below the gate trace 57b is hindered.

Moreover, since the upper surface of the upper cover 57 is a transparent smooth surface with no irregularities except for the gate marks 57b, even if a hole is made by, for example, tribbing, it can be easily noticed with the naked eye.
On the other hand, the gate trace 57b is an uneven surface obtained by cutting the resin. For this reason, if the gate hole 57b is drilled and then sealed with, for example, a resin material, it may not be possible to easily visually determine whether or not the gate trace 57b has been drilled. For this reason, there is a possibility that a crime may be carried out using the gate trace 57b.

On the other hand, when a hole is made in the gate trace 57b, if the main CPU 55 and the like are located in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate trace 57b, it becomes easier to tamper with the hole. Therefore, unless the main CPU 55 and the like are arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate trace 57b, it becomes difficult to access the main CPU 55 and the like, making it difficult to stealth.

In addition, the model number displayed (printed, etc.) on the surface of the main control board 50 is also important information in checking for fraud, so in order to make it easier to confirm (read) the model number, the model number is displayed. The gate trace 57b is not arranged directly above the area. Furthermore, when there is a gate mark 57b directly above the model number display, in order to prevent the model number display from being tampered with by drilling a hole in the gate mark 57b and accessing the inside of the board case 56, The gate mark 57b is not placed directly above the model number display.

Furthermore, regarding the setting value display LED 73, it is necessary to check the displayed numerical value when changing or confirming settings. Further, regarding the management information display LED 74, it is necessary to check the displayed numerical value in order to confirm whether the advantageous section ratio, accessory ratio, etc. are within appropriate ranges. Therefore, the gate trace 57b was not placed directly above these LEDs. Furthermore, in the same way as above, in order to make it difficult for the LEDs inside the board case 56 to be accessed by making a hole in the gate trace 57b using the gate trace 57b and to make it difficult for the LEDs to be stolen, it is possible to make a hole in the gate trace 57b. Avoid placing the gate trace 57b on top.

Regarding the above-mentioned failure confirmation LED, the administrator of the slot machine 10 operates an operation switch and checks whether the failure confirmation LED corresponding to the operation switch lights up, which improves visibility. For this reason, it is preferable that the gate trace 57b is not located directly above the failure confirmation LED. Similarly to the above, it is also possible to prevent the malfunction confirmation LED from being disposed in the vertical direction (directly below) of the gate trace 57b, thereby making it difficult for the user to commit a trifling act.

In FIG. 10, the cross-sectional views of Example 1 shown in (b) and Example 2 shown in (c) have the same outer shape of the gate trace 57b. In Example 1 of (b), the inner side of the upper surface of the gate trace 57b is left as a flat surface. On the other hand, in Example 2 of (c), the inner side of the upper surface of the gate trace 57b is formed into a protrusion shape (thick).
The outside of the gate mark 57b has a protrusion 57d at its center, and a recessed portion 57c formed in a cylindrical shape at its outer periphery. The boundary between the gate and the molded product is connected during molding, and this boundary is cut with a cutter when separating the molded product from the mold. Therefore, the upper end surface of the protrusion 57d is a cut surface by a cutter. There are two methods for cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product: one is to automatically cut the border using a molding machine during injection, and the other is to cut it in a post-process.

Here, when cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product, processing the cut surface into a completely smooth surface, in other words, creating a smooth surface with the height of the protrusion 57d almost "0" is costly. It is difficult and expensive. Therefore, the recessed portion 57c is formed so that even if some height remains in the projection 57d, it does not protrude above the outer side of the upper surface of the upper cover 57. Thereby, for example, when an assembly worker touches the upper cover 57, it is possible to prevent injury caused by the protrusion 57d.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), when the recessed portion 57c is provided in the gate trace 57, the thickness of the upper cover 57 becomes thinner by that amount. In this way, if there is even a thin part, it may become easy to make a hole in the recessed part 57c and access the inside of the board case 56.
Therefore, in Example 2 of FIG. 10(c), a protrusion 57e is provided on the opposite side (inner side) of the outer side of the upper surface where the gate mark 57b is provided to prevent the wall thickness from becoming thinner at the recessed portion 57c. There is. Unless the protrusion 57e is provided and a portion where the wall thickness is reduced is not provided, it is possible to make it difficult to drill a hole in the recessed portion 57c.

Further, the protrusion 57e not only contributes to countermeasures against fraud by preventing a portion of the thickness of the gate mark 57b from becoming thinner, but also functions as a dimple (reservoir) during molding. In FIG. 10(b), when resin (hot water) is injected from the gate of the mold (position corresponding to the protrusion 57d), if the resin (hot water) collides with the inside of the upper surface, the resin (hot water) The flow may change suddenly and become unable to flow stably. Therefore, by providing a dimple (pool of hot water) at a position facing the tip of the gate, when resin (hot water) is injected from the gate, the flow of resin (hot water) will be less likely to change suddenly. (hot water) will be able to flow stably. The protrusion 57e has various shapes such as a square cross section, a triangular cross section, a trapezoid cross section (in the case of FIG. 10(c)), and a dome cross section. Any shape may be used as long as it can prevent this.

Regarding the visibility of the gate mark 57b in the vertical direction (right below), a smooth lower side of the gate mark 57 is better than an uneven shape. Therefore, the shape shown in FIG. 10(b) is better than the shape shown in FIG. 10(c) in terms of visibility directly below the gate mark 57b. Furthermore, compared to the shape of FIG. 10(c), the shape of FIG. 10(b) simplifies the shape of the mold because it is not necessary to form a portion corresponding to the protrusion 57e in the mold. lower costs).

Further, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is also provided on the outside (lower side in FIG. 9). Furthermore, a protrusion 57d and a recess 57c shown in FIG. 10(b) are formed on the outside. This is because, as described above, it is convenient for the molding process to provide the projections 57d and the recesses 57c on the outside of the molded product.
Then, when the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58, the pin positions of the main CPU 55, etc. of the main control board 50 are set so as not to be located in the vertical direction of the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58. This is to prevent access to the pins of the main CPU 55 and the like by making a hole in the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58.
Note that when the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is shaped as shown in FIG. 10(c), the protrusion 57e in FIG. 10(c) will face the pin side of the main control board 50, It goes without saying that the pins protruding from the lower surface of the control board 50 and the protrusion 57e should be formed so as not to interfere with (contact with).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10(a), when the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together, the gate trace 57b on the upper cover 57 and the gate trace 58b on the lower cover 58 overlap in the vertical direction. It is preferable to arrange (shift) so that it does not occur. In particular, in the case of the gate marks 57b and 58b shown in FIG. 10(b), part of the gate marks 57b and 58b (the recessed part 57c) becomes thinner, but the thinner part is the upper cover. By arranging the lower cover 57 and the lower cover 58 at positions where they do not overlap, it is possible to prevent areas that are likely to be targeted from overlapping.
Furthermore, if the gate mark 57b on the upper cover 57 and the gate mark 58b on the lower cover 58 overlap in the vertical direction, the position of the gate mark on the other cover can be determined by simply looking at one cover. turn into. In order to prevent this, the gate marks 57b on the upper cover 57 and the gate marks 58b on the lower cover 58 are prevented from overlapping in the vertical direction.

<Third embodiment>
In the third embodiment, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, when communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is temporarily disabled (disconnection). This is related to processing when communication is restored after the communication has been completed, or when communication has failed due to the influence of noise, etc.).
As described above, the control command transmitting means 71 of the main control board 50 transmits commands such as the push order instruction number and information on the operated stop switch 42 to the sub control board 80. Then, the sub control board 80 outputs a performance based on the command received from the main control board 50, and updates the performance in accordance with the operation of the operation switch during the game.

Here, there is a possibility that a disconnection occurs between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, making communication impossible. Possible causes include poor contact and radio wave glitches. When the sub control board 80 no longer receives commands from the main control board 50, the presentation stops in its current state. Furthermore, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 determines whether there is a disconnection in communication between them. Therefore, even if a disconnection occurs between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, the main control board 50 will not be able to proceed with the game (operations of the bet switch 40, start switch 41, and stop switch 42). etc.), the command transmission process is continued to the sub-control board 80. On the other hand, when the sub-control board 80 does not receive a command from the main control board 50, it maintains the current performance state.
Note that even if there is a disconnection between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, for example, if AT is in progress, the main control board 50 will activate the instruction function to display the obtained number display LED 78 in the order of pressing. Display instruction information. Thereby, even if the sub-control board 80 is not functioning normally, the player can view the press order instruction information and operate the stop switches 42 in the correct press order.
Furthermore, the player can compare the push order instruction information displayed on the obtained number display LED 78 and the performance content (correct press order) displayed as an image on the image display device 23, so that the information on both pieces is inconsistent. When this happens, you can know that a problem has occurred in the image display by the sub-control board 80.

For example, in a case where a disconnection occurs during the "N" game and communication is restored during the "N+1" game, the sub control board 80 can receive commands sent from the main control board 50. Sometimes, it is not possible to suddenly switch the performance to the "N+1" game. Even when the communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 does not receive a command related to the operation of the start switch 41 (command notifying the start of the game), it indicates that the "N+1" game has started. This is because it cannot be determined. Therefore, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is restored after being disconnected, there is a possibility that the player may be misled depending on the content of the performance.
Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is restored after being disconnected, we do our best to avoid giving the player a misunderstanding, while giving the performance a sense of discomfort. Outputs a performance that appears to be non-existent.

FIG. 11 shows the operation of the main control board 50 (described as "main operation" in FIG. 11) and the display of effects by the sub-control board 80 (described as "sub-display" in FIG. 11) in the third embodiment. ), and shows five examples consisting of Pattern 1 (Example 1) to Pattern 5 (Example 5).
Patterns 1 to 5 all show examples in which communication becomes unavailable (disconnection occurs) during the "N" game, and communication is restored during the "N+1" game.
Furthermore, in the main operation of FIG. 11, "bet" means when the bet switch 40 is operated and a specified number of bets are validly placed. Furthermore, "start" means that the game is started by operating the start switch 41 after a specified number of bets have been placed. Furthermore, for example, "right stop" means that the right stop switch 42 has been operated (the right reel 31 has stopped).

Furthermore, in the sub-display, the "push order effect" means an effect that displays an image of the correct press order in a game in which a player wins a press order bell or a press order replay, for example. Specifically, for example, "right-left-middle display" means an effect that notifies that the correct pressing order is "right-left-middle". For example, "left center display" is an effect after the left stop switch 42 is operated, and indicates that the second stop switch to be operated is on the left and the third stop switch 42 to be operated is in the middle. It means a performance that informs people.
Furthermore, for example, the "right stop effect" is an effect that the right stop switch 42 has been operated (the right reel 31 has stopped) when a command indicating that the right stop switch 42 has been operated is received. means.

In pattern 1, when the start switch 41 is operated for the "N" game, the main control board 50 performs a lottery of the winning combination, as described above. In this game, this is an example in which the correct push order bell is won, with "right, left, center" being the correct push order. In this case, if the main control board 50 is in AT mode, the main control board 50 transmits a push order instruction number (command) corresponding to the correct push order "right left middle" to the sub control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives this command, it outputs a press order effect to the image display device 23 that displays the correct press order of "right, left, middle".
Although not shown, the main control board 50 displays, on the acquisition number display LED 78, push order instruction information corresponding to the correct push order "right, left, center" (operation of instruction function).

Next, it is assumed that the player looks at the correct pressing order and operates the right stop switch 42 as a first stop (right stop). As a result, the right reel 31 stops and a command to that effect is sent to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it outputs the effect (right stop effect) in which the right stop switch 42 is operated (the right reel 31 has stopped), and displays the right-left center display and the left center display (in addition, other Examples of the display include "-center left", "×center left", etc.).
Pattern 1 shows an example in which a disconnection occurs after the right reel 31 stops, and communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 becomes impossible (sub-disconnection). That is, this is an example in which communication becomes unavailable during the game.

The main control board 50 allows the game to proceed even if communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 becomes impossible (even if the sub-control board 80 is not functioning). The example of pattern 1 shows an example in which the left and middle stop switches 42 were each operated (the left and middle reels 31 stopped) after a wire breakage occurred in the "N" game. ).

Next, it is assumed that a bet operation for the "N+1" game number is performed and the start switch 41 is operated. In the "N+1" game, as in the "N" game, an example is shown in which the push order bell (or push order replay) in which "right, left, middle" is the correct push order is won. In addition, in the "N+1" game, as in the "N" game, an example is shown in which the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of right, left, middle, but if a winning combination is won with the correct pressing order of right, left, middle. It is not limited to , but any winning lottery result may be used.

It should be noted that when the push order bell (or push order replay) having the correct push order is won in the "N+1" game, the main control board 50 displays push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78. Therefore, even if the correct pressing order is not displayed as an image on the image display device 23, the player can operate the stop switch 42 in the correct pressing order based on the pressing order instruction information displayed on the obtained number display LED 78. Become.

In the "N+1" game, the player operates the right stop switch 42 first. After that, it is assumed that communication between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is restored before the second left stop switch 42 is operated.
As a result, when the player operates the left stop switch 42, which is the second stop switch 42, the command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving this command, the sub control board 80 updates the image display to correspond to the received command. That is, an image indicating that the left stop has been performed is displayed (left stop effect). Here, the sub control board 80 updates the effect as a continuation of the effect already displayed, that is, as a effect of the "N" game.

Therefore, in reality, the second stop switch 42 (left) for the "N+1" game is being operated, but the sub-control board 80 indicates that the second stop switch 42 (left) for the "N" game is being operated. Outputs the effect when operated. Since the second correct pressing order in the "N" game is to the left, in this example, the operations are performed in the correct pressing order. Therefore, the sub control board 80 outputs the left stop effect (pressing order correct effect) and outputs the final medium display effect.

Then, in the "N+1" game, when the last middle stop switch 42 is operated, a command to that effect is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives this command, it outputs a performance corresponding to the third stop of the "N" game, that is, a medium stop performance.
In addition, even if you win a role with a correct pressing order on the "N+1" game, and the correct pressing order is other than right, left, middle, under the situation of pattern 1, the effect will be output as described above. be done. In other words, in the "N+1" game, if the push order operated by the player is right, left, center, even if the push order corresponds to an incorrect push order, the push order will fail like pattern 2 described later. The performance is not output.

Furthermore, in the case of the "N+1" game, if the winning combination does not have a correct pressing order, or even if the winning combination is not won, if the pressing order operated by the player is right, left, center, then the above The same effect will be output. That is, even if the "N+1" game number does not have the correct pressing order, the sub-control board 80 (in the example of pattern 1) will display a message indicating that the left stop switch 42 has been operated after communication is restored. When a command is received, a left stop effect (pressing order correct effect) is output, and a middle display is further output.

Next, when a bet for the “N+2” game is made and the start switch 41 is operated to start the “N+2” game, the main control board 50 causes the sub control board 80 to “ N+2'' command corresponding to the start of the game number is transmitted. As a result, the sub-control board 80 outputs the effect at the start of the "N+2" game. Specifically, when the start switch 41 is operated, commands such as the production group number and the push order instruction number are transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives these commands, it performs a press order effect and a display of the correct press order, as at the start of the "N" game.

As described above, in pattern 1, until the third stop of the "N+1" game, the sub control board 80 operates based on the command received from the main control board 50 (for the "N+1" game). The effect continues to be output, and when the ``N+2'' game starts, the effect is updated to the effect for the ``N+2'' game.
In addition, the main control board 50 may transmit a command for the number of coins acquired to the sub-control board 80 at the end of the game, and the sub-control board 80 may also display an image of the number of coins acquired during AT. In such a case, the sub control board 80 cannot receive the command for the number of acquired coins at the end of the "N" game, that is, while the wire is disconnected. ” The number of acquired coins at the end of the game remains displayed. Then, when communication is restored and a command for the number of acquired coins is received at the end of the "N+1" game, the sub-control board 80 updates the image display to show the number of acquired coins at the end of the "N+1" game. .

In pattern 2, the main operation is the same as in pattern 1. Further, the timing of disconnection is the same as pattern 1, but the timing of communication restoration is different from pattern 2. Pattern 2 is an example in which communication is restored after the left stop, which is the second stop, in the "N+1" game.
In pattern 2, the main action and sub-display in the "N" game are the same as in pattern 1, so their explanation will be omitted.
Next, in the "N+1" game, the stop switches 42 are operated in the order of right, left and middle, but communication is assumed to be restored after the second stop on the left.

Immediately before communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 is outputting the right stop effect of the "N" game number and the middle left display. In this state, communication is restored and when the player operates the stop switch 42 (third stop) during the "N+1" game, the command is transmitted to the sub control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives a middle stop command while displaying the middle left display, it determines that the pressing order is incorrect and outputs a pushing order failure effect. Note that in the third embodiment, after the push order failure effect is output, subsequent press order effects and the like are not output.

In addition, in the "N+1" game, when it is assumed that the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pushing the middle left and right, the communication is restored after the middle left stop, and then the right stop is performed, so that the right stop command is changed to the sub control. When transmitted to the board 80, the push order failure effect is output in the same way as above. Since the sub-control board 80 is in the process of outputting the right stop effect and the left middle display, if it receives the right stop command at this point, it means that it has received the same stop command twice in one game. . Even in such a case, it is treated as a failure in the pressing order without giving an error notification, and the effect is output.
Then, as in pattern 1, when the "N+2" game number is started, the command at the time of starting the "N+2" game number is transmitted to the sub control board 80. As a result, the sub control board 80 starts producing the "N+2" game number.

In pattern 3, the main action and sub-display for the "N" game are the same as pattern 1.
Pattern 3 shows an example in which communication is restored after the first stop right and the second stop in the "N+1" game. Therefore, in the "N+1" game, after the communication is restored, a command for the left stop, which is the third stop, is sent to the sub control board 80. Since the sub-control board 80 outputs the "left middle display" for the "N" game, if it receives a left stop command in this state, it determines that it is the correct pressing order. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs a left stop effect (push order correct effect), and then outputs a middle display.

However, on the main control board 50 side, the "N+1" game ends the game at the third stop on the left. Next, when the game moves to the "N+2" game, and the command at the start of the "N+2" game is sent to the sub-control board 80, upon receiving the command, the sub-control board 80 starts the "N+2" game. Switch to the performance at the start. Therefore, the left stop effect and middle display that had been output until then are canceled. Also, even if a command for the start of the "N+2" game is received while the medium display is being output, an error notification etc. is not performed, and the effect at the start of the "N+2" game is output according to the received command. .

Pattern 4 is an example in which the remaining number of games during AT is displayed in the sub-display. Furthermore, in pattern 4, the main operation, disconnection timing, and communication recovery timing are the same as pattern 3.
The main control board 50 transmits a command for the number of remaining AT games to the sub control board 80 at the start of each game. When the sub control board 80 receives a command indicating the remaining number of games for AT from the main control board 50, it updates the display of the number of remaining games for AT. Note that during AT, the display of the remaining number of games is not displayed alone, but is output together with the press order effect of pattern 3.

In pattern 4, the main control board 50 transmits a command for the remaining number of games during AT to the sub control board 80 when the start switch 41 is operated (at the start of the game). Here, in the "N" game, it is assumed that the number of remaining AT games is 10 games.
At the start of the "N" game, the sub control board 80 displays the number of remaining games during AT (10 remaining games) based on the command received from the main control board 50.
Then, if the wire is disconnected in the middle of the "N" game and the disconnection state continues at the start of the "N+1" game, the main control board 50 will cause the sub Although the sub-control board 80 executes a process for transmitting a command for the remaining number of games (9 games) during AT to the control board 80, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (due to a disconnection). Therefore, for the "N+1" game, "10 remaining games" for the "N" game remain displayed.

Then, during the "N+1" game (after the middle left stop), the communication is restored, and when the game moves on to the "N+2" game, the main control board 50 connects to the sub control board 80 at the start of the "N+2" game. In contrast, a command indicating the remaining number of games (8 games) during AT is sent. When the sub control board 80 receives this command, it updates the display from the remaining 10 games to the remaining 8 games.

Pattern 5 is an example in which the main operation, disconnection timing, and communication recovery timing are the same as pattern 4, but the "N" game is played with only one remaining AT game.
At the start of the "N" game (when the start switch 41 is operated), the main control board 50 transmits a command for the remaining number of games (one game remaining) during AT to the sub control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives this command, it updates the display of the remaining two games (from the previous display of the remaining two games) to the display of the remaining one game.
If a disconnection occurs after the right stop of the "N" game, the main control board 50 determines that the number of remaining games during AT is 0 at the start of the "N+1" game (when the start switch 41 is operated). Although a command indicating that it is a game is sent to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (same as pattern 4). Therefore, at the start of the "N+1" game, the display that there is only one AT game left continues.

Further, when the sub-control board 80 ends AT, it outputs an AT end effect. The AT end effect is executed at the end of the game based on the reception (at the start of the game) of a command indicating that the remaining number of games during AT is 0 games.
However, in the example of pattern 5, the sub control board 80 has not received the command indicating that the remaining number of games during AT is 0 games, so the AT end effect is not output. Therefore, even at the end of the "N+1" game, the effect indicating that there is only one AT game remaining is output.

Then, when the "N+1" game is completed and the transition is made to the "N+2" game, the main control board 50 sends a command indicating a normal game (non-AT) to the sub control board 80 at the start of the "N+2" game. Send. Based on receiving this command, the sub control board 80 erases the display of "1 game remaining" and outputs a normal (non-AT) effect.
Furthermore, at the end of the AT, an image such as "Pachinko/pachislot is a game machine that can be enjoyed in moderation" is displayed to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game. However, in the case of pattern 5, since the sub-display has not returned to normal at the end of the "N+1" game, the image cannot be displayed. Therefore, as a countermeasure against this, the game history is managed on the sub-control board 80 side, and when the next game (in the example of FIG. An example of this is to display the image at the start of the process.

In the above patterns 1 to 5, when a disconnection occurs in the "N" game, the sub-control board 80 continues to output the effect immediately before the disconnection occurred in the "N" game until communication is restored, and "N+1 ” When communication is restored in the middle of the game, the continuation of the performance being output as the “N” game is output based on the command received in the “N+1” game. Therefore, for example, in pattern 1, when the left stop command is received after communication is restored on the "N+1" game, regardless of whether or not the stop switches 42 were actually operated in the correct pressing order, A press order effect will be output.

On the other hand, for example, in pattern 1, if a medium stop command is received after communication is restored in the "N+1" game, the pressing order of the effects currently being output, that is, the "N" game. Since the incorrect press order is used for the middle left display, the press order failure effect is output regardless of whether or not the stop switches 42 are actually operated in the correct press order. However, even if the push order failure effect is output in the "N+1" game, if the player operates the stop switch 42 according to the correct press order in the "N+1" game, the symbols will be advantageous to the player. Since the combinations are stopped and displayed, there is no disadvantage to the player.

As described above, when communication is restored in the "N+1" game, the "N+1" game outputs a performance that takes over the performance before the disconnection ("N" game), and the "N+2" game Reset the performance at the start (return to the correct performance). This makes it possible to minimize the output of unnatural performances and to prevent misunderstandings to players as much as possible in both games where disconnection has occurred and games where communication has been restored.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 11, communication was restored in the "N+1" game after a disconnection occurred in the "N" game, but communication was restored after two or more games had passed after the disconnection occurred. However, the result is the same as that shown in FIG.
For example, if a disconnection occurs in the "N" game and communication is restored in the "N+a" game (a = "2" or more), the disconnection occurs in the "N" game up to the "N+a-1" game. The previous performance continues to be output. Then, in the "N+a" game where the communication is restored, the continuation of the performance of the "N" game that has been continued to be output is executed based on the command received after the communication is restored. Next, at the start of the "N+a+1" game, the performance is updated to the effect (correct performance) at the start of the "N+a+1" game.

<Fourth embodiment>
When rotating and stopping the reel 31, the motor 32 performs acceleration, constant speed, deceleration, and stop processing, all of which are in an excited state. Then, when the rotation of the motor 32 is stopped, a state in which four phases are simultaneously excited (hereinafter referred to as a "four-phase excitation state") is set for a predetermined time (time T11 described later).
The fourth embodiment relates to the time relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a of the stop switch 42 and the four-phase excitation state when the motor 32 is stopped.
FIG. 12 is a sectional view showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the detection sensor 42e in the fourth embodiment. Note that hatching is omitted in FIG. 12 from the viewpoint of ease of viewing the drawing. Moreover, FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram for explaining the fourth embodiment, and does not mean that the actual product has a structure like that shown in FIG. 12. In FIG. 12, the process from when the stop button 42a is pressed until it returns to its original state is illustrated in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d). In the figure, the upper side is the player's side, and the lower side is the inside of the slot machine 10. In the figure, the side above the front door 12 is the side visible to the player.
Furthermore, the line where the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d is indicated by a dotted line. It is assumed that the moment when the tip of the moving piece 42d contacts the dotted line is the moment when the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d.

In FIG. 12(a), the stop button 42a is an operating body for the stop switch 42, and is operated by the player (pushed into the inside of the slot machine 10) when turning on the stop switch 42. The player side of the stop button 42a is arranged so as to protrude from the front door 12 provided at the front of the housing of the slot machine 10 by about several millimeters. When this part is viewed from the front on the player's side, it has a substantially cylindrical shape. In the no-load state, the stop button 42a is biased in the F3 direction (outward direction, toward the player) in FIG. The player side end of 42a protrudes from the front door 12. In this state, the lower surface portion of the stop button 42a (hereinafter referred to as the "flange-shaped portion") in the figure is in contact with the front door 12.
On the other hand, the stopper 42b is provided inside the front door 12 (inside the casing), and is a portion that comes into contact with the stop button 42a when the stop button 42a is pushed in, and prohibits further movement of the stop button 42a. It is.

A movable piece 42d that is movable integrally with the stop button 42a is provided on the lower surface side of the stop button 42a in the figure. Furthermore, a detection sensor 42e for detecting the movement of the moving piece 42d is arranged directly below the moving piece 42d. In the no-load state shown in (a) in the figure, when the stop button 42a is biased toward the front door 12 by the biasing force of the coil spring 42c, the tip of the moving piece 42d (lower end in the figure) is It is arranged at a position away from the detection sensor 42e. Therefore, in the state shown in (a) in the figure, the detection sensor 42e is not detecting the moving piece 42d and is in an off state.

Next, as shown in (b) in the figure, when the player wants to stop the rotation of the reels 31, the player pushes the stop button 42a in the F4 direction. As a result, the stop button 42a moves downward in the figure against the biasing force of the coil spring 42c. When the stop button 42a moves downward in the figure, the movable piece 42d, which is integral with the stop button 42a, also moves downward in the figure. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d enters into the detection sensor 42e. Then, when the tip of the moving piece 42d contacts the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state. FIG. 12(b) shows the positions of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state. At the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned on, the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a is not yet in contact with the stopper 42b, and there is a gap between the stop button 42a and the stopper 42b.

When the stop button 42a is further pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 12(b), the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a comes into contact with the stopper 42c, as shown in FIG. 12(c). This position is the deepest position when the stop button 42a is pressed. Moreover, in the state of FIG. 12(c), the state in which the tip of the moving piece 42d is detected by the detection sensor 42e is maintained, so the detection sensor 42e is in the on state.

When the player releases the push button 42a from the state shown in FIG. 12(c) (removes the force in the direction F4 in FIG. 12(c)), the urging force F3 of the coil spring 42c causes the stop button 42a to be pressed down. A force is applied to return it to its initial position. As a result, the stop button 42a and the moving piece 42d that is integral with the stop button 42a move upward in the figure. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d does not come into contact with the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, and the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state (FIG. 12(d)).

FIG. 12(d) shows the arrangement of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state. In the state shown in FIG. 12(d), the stop button 42a has not returned to the final position. When the stop button 42a is further returned from the state shown in FIG. 12(d), the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a comes into contact with the front door 12, and the stop button 42a stops at this position. This state is the state shown in FIG. 12(a), and is the no-load state of the stop button 42a.
Note that the state in FIG. 12(b) showing the timing at which the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state and the state in FIG. 12(d) showing the timing at which the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state are generally Although they are the same, there is no particular problem even if there is a slight deviation.

FIG. 13 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the excitation state of the motor 32 in the fourth embodiment, in which (a) shows example 1, and (b) shows example 2. show.
In FIG. 13(a), the stop button 42a is at the initial position in the no-load state (FIG. 12(a)), and the time at which the stop button 42a starts to be pressed is S41. S42 is the time when the stop button 42a is pressed and the detection sensor 42e is turned on from off, that is, when the state shown in FIG. 12(b) is reached. The stop button 42a is further pushed in from that position, and the time when the stop button 42a reaches the deepest position (when the state shown in FIG. 12(c) is reached) is defined as S43. The above times S41, S42, and S43 depend on the player's pressing speed and are not constant. If the stop button 42a is pushed slowly, the time from time S41 to S43 becomes longer, and if the stop button 42a is pushed quickly, the time from time S41 to S43 becomes shorter.

Next, at time S44, the depression of the stop button 42a is released. It is assumed that the stop button 42a is located at the deepest position at time S44.
When the stop button 42a is released from being pressed down, the spring force of the coil spring 42c acts to cause the stop button 42a to return to its initial position, as described above. It is assumed that the operator of the stop button 42a does not touch the stop button 42a from the moment the button 42a is released.
Then, the time when the detection sensor 42e turns from on to off, that is, when the state shown in FIG. 12(d) is reached, is defined as S45. Here, the time from time S44 to S45 is assumed to be T11.

The time T11 is a variable determined by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke (movement distance) of the stop button 42a from the deepest position to the position where the detection sensor 42e is turned off. In Example 1 of (a), the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a are designed so that the time T11 is 100 ms.

On the other hand, when it is detected that the stop switch 42 is turned on (specifically, the detection sensor 42e is turned on) (in the state shown in FIG. 12(b)), the reel control means 65 controls the reel 31 is executed, and the reel 31 is stopped at a position corresponding to the winning lottery result by the winning lottery means (result determined by the internal lottery means). As described above, the time from when the reel 31 stop control is started (from when the detection sensor 42e is turned on) until the reel 31 stops is as follows (except for the predetermined reel 31 during the MB game). It is set within 190ms (when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 21 symbols, the number of frames to be moved is within 5 frames, and when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 20 symbols, the number of frames to be moved is within 4 frames). Therefore, the time from when the reels 31 start decelerating to when the reels 31 stop is not constant because it varies depending on the lottery result and the position of the reels 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.

Furthermore, after moving the reel 31 to a predetermined position, the reel control means 65 keeps the motor 32 in a state in which four phases are simultaneously excited (braked) for a predetermined period of time (the four-phase excitation state described above). ).
Here, the motor 32 in this embodiment is a 4-phase stepping motor, and during rotation of the motor 32 (reel 31), for example, 1/2 phase excitation is performed (note that the motor 32 is not limited to 1/2 phase excitation. do not have). Therefore, even while the motor 32 is rotating, it is in one excitation state. When the rotational drive of the motor 32 is stopped, a four-phase excitation state is set.
In addition, when performing a bound stop after moving the reel 31 to a predetermined position (when making the reel 31 appear to vibrate at the stop position), the reel 31 should be in a three-phase excitation state, for example, instead of a four-phase excitation state. is also possible.

At the moment when the rotation of the motor 32 is stopped, there is a risk that the rotation of the motor 32 and the reel 31 will exceed the desired stop position due to the inertia of the rotation of the motor 32 and the reel 31. By setting it in a four-phase excitation state and generating static torque, it is prevented from moving from the stopped position due to inertia. When the motor 32 is in the four-phase excitation state, reception of the next operation of the stop switch 42 is not permitted. At the time of the first or second stop, the operation of the next stop switch 42 is permitted because the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 changes from the on state to the off state (returns to the state shown in FIG. 12(d)). ), and the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32, which has stopped its rotational drive, has ended.

The reason for controlling in this way is as follows.
In order to maintain the stop position of the reel 31, the motor 32 is controlled to a four-phase excitation state, but when controlled in this way, a larger load is applied than normal, so the load on the entire slot machine 10 is reduced. It gets bigger. Therefore, in order to reduce this load, after the four-phase excitation state of one motor 32 is finished, it is possible to accept the next operation of the stop button 42a.

In example 1 of FIG. 13(a), when the winning lottery result by the winning lottery means (the result determined by the internal lottery means) is a predetermined result (for example, when the push order bell is won), the 4-phase excitation state is activated. The excitation time T12 from start to end is set to 90 interrupts (2.235×90=201.15 ms). Here, when the lottery result is a predetermined result, the excitation time T12 of the 4-phase excitation state is set to "90 interrupts" because the excitation time T12 is always constant regardless of the lottery result. This means that it is not necessarily true.

Therefore, in Example 1 of the fourth embodiment, it is set so that "T11<T12".
Here, when the stop control of the reel 31 is started from time S42, the reel 31 stops within 190 ms. As mentioned above, when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "21", the number of moving frames during stop control is within 5 frames (minimum 1 frame), or when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "20", Since the number of moving frames during stop control is within 4 frames (minimum 1 frame), the reel 31 stops within approximately "40" to "190" ms from time S42.
On the other hand, the time from when the detection sensor 42e changes from the OFF state to the ON state until the stop button 42e reaches the deepest position and the pressing force of the stop button 42e is released (time from time S42 to S44) is , about "40" to "180" ms. Therefore, the time when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 is started and the time S44 when the stop button 42a is released from being pressed are close to each other (almost the same time).

Therefore, in Example 1, it is assumed that the four-phase excitation state is started at the timing when the stop button 42a is released from being pressed (time S44), and after the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state (time S45), It is designed so that the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends (time T12 elapses). Therefore, when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends, it can be set so that the next operation of the stop button 42a can be accepted.
In this way, if the detection sensor 42e is designed to turn off before the end of the four-phase excitation state, it is possible to allow the next operation of the stop button 42a to be accepted at the end of the four-phase excitation state. . This allows the game to proceed at high speed.

On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 13(b), from the moment when the stop button 42a that has reached the deepest point is released (time S44) until the detection sensor 42e is turned from on to off (at time S45). This is an example in which the time T11 (until reaching the target) is set to 300 ms. Therefore, the return time of the stop button 42a is three times longer than in Example 1. As described above, the return time of the stop button 42a can be set (adjusted) by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a.

On the other hand, in Example 2, the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is set to 45 interrupts (100.575 ms).
In Example 2, as in Example 1, it is assumed that the four-phase excitation state starts from the moment when the push button 42a that has reached the deepest part is released (time S44), and the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 is It is designed so that the detection sensor 42e is turned off after the excitation state ends. Therefore, when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, it can be set so that the next operation of the stop button 42a can be accepted.

In this way, by designing the four-phase excitation state to be completed when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, the next operation reception of the stop button 42a is permitted as soon as the detection sensor 42e is turned off. can do. This allows the game to proceed at high speed.
As described above, both Example 1 and Example 2 have advantages in terms of control.
Note that Examples 1 and 2 in FIG. 13 show examples in which the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is different. However, for example, when the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, if "T11<T12" is satisfied, the next stop button 42a can be accepted when the four-phase excitation state ends. Therefore, when the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, the game can be completed more quickly in Example 1.

<Fifth embodiment>
The fifth embodiment relates to the relationship between power on/off and program startup.
FIG. 14 is a time chart showing an outline of control in the fifth embodiment.
In FIG. 14, (a) is a diagram showing a state when power is cut off after starting the main program (program of the main control board 50). It is assumed that the power is turned on at time S51 and then turned off at time S55.
When the power is turned on at time S51 (when the power switch 11 is turned on in FIG. 1), power supply starts to both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, and the main control board 50 and The voltage level of the sub-control board 80 gradually increases and reaches the supply level V0 (the level when the power is on). Note that in FIG. 14, the voltage supply level V0, power-off detection level V1, and drive voltage limit V2 are the same as in FIG. 3 (first embodiment (A)).

After the power is turned on at time S51, the time when the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 reach the supply level V0 is defined as S52. Thereafter, the sub-program by the sub-control board 80 is activated from time S53 when time T22 has elapsed from time S52. Thereafter, the main program by the main control board 50 is started from time S54 when time T23 (T23>T22) has elapsed from time S52. In this way, the subprogram is started first and then the main program is started when the main control board 50 sends the first command to the sub control board 80 after power is turned on. This is to keep the sub-control board 80 side in a state where the command can be received.

Next, when a power outage (such as turning off the power switch 11 or a power outage) occurs at time S55, the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 gradually decrease. Even if the voltage level decreases, if the voltage is equal to or higher than the drive voltage limit V2, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 can execute the power-off process.
Further, when a power outage occurs at time S55, the voltage reaches the power outage detection level V1 at time T0 (20th interrupt) as in FIG. 3, and power outage is detected (time S56). Furthermore, after the power-off is detected, similarly to FIG. 3, the power-off process is executed, for example, after one interrupt. It is assumed that the power-off process ends at time S57.
After that, when time S58 is reached, the voltage falls below the drive voltage limit V2 and the program (processing) cannot be executed. Therefore, the power-off process is controlled to end before time S58 is reached.

When the main program starts at time S54, it sets the main CPU 55, checks the RWM 53, checks whether the previous power off was normal, checks the status of the setting key switch, etc., and then starts interrupt processing. . When the setting key switch is off, the power-off recovery process (initialization of a predetermined range of the RWM 53, etc.) is executed after starting the interrupt process. On the other hand, when the setting key switch is on, the process proceeds to the setting change process after starting the interrupt process.
As shown in FIG. 14(a), if a power-off occurs after starting the main program and the setting key switch is off, the power-off process is executed after the power-off recovery process is completed. do. This allows the program to terminate normally.
On the other hand, if a power-off occurs after starting the main program and the setting key switch is on, the power-off process is executed without starting the setting change process. This is because if the setting change process is executed after a power outage occurs, a problem may occur.

Furthermore, in order to properly execute the main program, the settings of the main CPU 55 and the check of the RWM 53 must be executed even if a power outage is detected at the same time as the main program is started.
Furthermore, after the main program is started, it is always executed until the interrupt is started even if the power is subsequently cut off. This is to detect power outage in interrupt processing. Note that, as in the first embodiment (A), for example, at the "N" interrupt, a voltage drop (power outage detection level V1) that is determined to have occurred is detected, and the next "N+1" game is started. However, when the voltage drop is detected, a power outage is detected at the "N+1" interrupt (it is determined that the power is out). Then, the power-off process is executed from the "N+2" interrupt.

In the example of FIG. 14A, the main program is started at time S54, and the power is turned off at time S55. However, even if a power outage occurs at the same time as time S54 (startup of the main program), the setting is such that the power outage process can be completed before the voltage reaches the drive voltage limit V2.
In FIG. 14A, the time T21 from power-on (time S51) until the voltage reaches the supply level V0 (time S52) is the period from when the power is turned off (time S55) until the voltage reaches the Low level. It is set to be shorter than the time T24.
Furthermore, time T23 (time from when the voltage reaches supply level V0 until the main program is activated) is set to be shorter than time T24.

FIG. 14(b) is an example in which power is cut off before the main control board 50 starts the main program. In the example of FIG. 14(b), the power is turned on at time S51, and the power is turned off at time S59. Here, time S59 is before time S54 in FIG. 14(a). That is, after the power necessary for starting the main program (supply level V0) is supplied, a power outage occurs before a predetermined time (time T23) has elapsed (before reaching time S54), and the voltage has decreased. This is an example. In such a case, the main program will not start. Therefore, after that, the voltage gradually decreases, and eventually the power becomes Low level.
Note that in the example of FIG. 14(b), when the power is turned on again, it can be started normally.
Although not shown in FIG. 14, it is possible that the power is cut off immediately after the subprogram starts (after time S53) and before time S54 (before the main program starts). It will be done.
If a power-off occurs at the above-mentioned timing, the subprogram executes the subprogram's power-off processing. Then, it is possible to complete the subprogram power-off process before the voltage supplied to the sub control board 80 reaches the drive voltage limit V2.
Further, since the power is cut off at the above-mentioned timing before the main program is started, the main program is not started as described above.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In this embodiment, a passage sensor 46 is provided. This is because the passage sensor 46 not only increases the accuracy of medal insertion determination, but also is effective as a countermeasure against fraud. However, the passage sensor 46 may not be provided, and only the pair of input sensors 44a and 44b may be provided.

(2) In FIG. 2, the input sensors 44a and 44b are configured to detect medals M moving in a substantially horizontal direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the input sensors 44a and 44b detect the medal M when it is falling substantially vertically downward.
(3) In FIG. 2, the blocker 45 is arranged on the lower surface side of the medal passage, but the blocker 45 is not limited thereto. Any device may be used as long as it has a function of sending the medals M out of the medal path before the medals M are detected by the input sensor 44a.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 2, the input sensors 44a and 44b are shown to detect slightly above the center position of the medal M when viewed from the front, but the actual product may be configured like this. does not mean. The input sensors 44a and 44b may be arranged in any manner as long as they can reliably detect the passing medals M.

(4) In FIG. 3, the time T2 is the time from the moment the medal M is positioned at M2 to the moment the medal M is positioned at M4, but it is not limited to this. For example, the medal M may be at position M1 in FIG. 2, and the time from the moment the medal is released to the time it reaches M4 may be T2, and "T2>T1" may be set. Alternatively, the time taken for the medal M to reach M4 from any predetermined position between M1 and M2 may be set to T2, and "T2>T1" may be set.

(5) In the first embodiment (A), when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process is executed before the medal M reaches M4. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process may be executed before the medal M reaches M3. That is, in this case, the medal M is not detected by the insertion sensor 44a due to the power-off process.
Alternatively, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the power cut-off process may be executed before the medal M reaches the insertion sensor 44b. In this case, the medal M is detected by the input sensor 44a, but is not detected by the input sensor 44b, and the power-off process is executed.

(6) Furthermore, in the first embodiment (A), a power outage occurs at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, and the time T1 from detecting the power outage to executing power outage processing (blocker off) An example of setting is to be shorter than the time required for the medal M to reach the position where the blocker 45 is installed from the position M2 (this time is referred to as "T2'"). With this setting, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is positioned at M2, the blocker 45 has already been turned off by the time the medal M reaches the blocker 45 position from the M2 position. Therefore, the medal can be prevented from passing through the input sensors 44a and 44b.
In addition, in the above, the position of the medal M2 may be the moment the hand is released at the position of M1, or a predetermined position between M1 and M2.

(7) As shown in FIG. 3, in the first embodiment (A), the power-off process (blocker off) is executed in the interrupt process following the interrupt process in which the power-off is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the power-off process (blocker off) may be set to be executed after, for example, "2" to "5" interrupt processes, counting from the interrupt process in which a power-off is detected. Alternatively, the power-off process (blocker off) may be executed by an interrupt process when a power-off is detected.
(8) In the first embodiment (A) of FIG. 3, the time T0 for the voltage to reach the maintenance level V1 from the supply level V0 when a power outage occurs is set to 20 interrupts, but this is not limited to this. Various settings can be made depending on the performance of the power supply.

(9) In the first embodiment (C) of FIG. 7, when the medal M is dispensed by the medal dispensing device, the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b detect the movable piece 39a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout sensors 37a and 37b may detect the medals M themselves to be paid out. For example, the payout sensors 37a and 37 may be arranged like the input sensors 44a and 44b shown in FIG. 4 to detect the passage of the medals M (to be paid out).

In addition, when the payout sensors 37a and 37b are arranged in this way, when the medal M passes through the payout sensors 37a and 37b,
Dispensing sensor 37a on, dispensing sensor 37b off (time S31')
Dispensing sensor 37a on, dispensing sensor 37b on (time S32')
Dispensing sensor 37a off, dispensing sensor 37b on (time S33')
Dispensing sensor 37a off, dispensing sensor 37b off (time S34')
Follow the progress.
Then, the time from time S31' to S34' is set to be shorter than time T1 (time from occurrence of power-off to execution of power-off processing).

(10) In the second embodiment, the gate mark 57b is formed so that the protrusion 57d and the recessed part 57c are on the outside, but conversely, it is formed so that the protrusion 57d and the recessed part 57c are on the inside. It is also possible. The same applies to the gate mark 58b on the lower cover 58. In this case, if the gate trace 57b is shaped as shown in FIG. 10(b), the outside of the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58 will be a smooth surface. On the other hand, if the shape shown in FIG. 10(c) is adopted, a protrusion 57e is formed on the outside of the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58.

(11) In the second embodiment, as an example of the board case 56, the main control board 50 is housed inside. However, the second embodiment can be applied not only to the main control board 50 but also to other control boards for which it is desired to prevent fraud, such as the board case of the sub-control board 80. As shown in FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 also includes an RWM 83, a ROM 54, a sub-CPU 85, etc., but on the upper surface of the upper cover in the board case of the sub-control board 80, at least One example is not to arrange the CPU 85, and furthermore, not to arrange the RWM 83 or ROM 54. Similarly, it is possible to prevent the model number display area of the sub-control board 80 from overlapping in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate trace.

(12) In the third embodiment, the push order effect during AT, the display of the operated stop switch 42 (stopped reel 31), and the remaining number of games during AT are given as examples. The third embodiment can be applied even when displaying the number of acquired coins and the remaining number of acquired coins in a game (BB game, etc.).
For example, the number of coins acquired at the start of game "N" is "200", the number of coins acquired at the start of game "N+1" is "209", and the number of coins acquired at the start of game "N+2" is " Assume that there are 218 pieces. It is also assumed that the main control board 50 transmits a command regarding the number of acquired coins to the sub-control board 80 at the start of each game.
As in the example shown in FIG. 11, it is assumed that a disconnection occurs during the "N" game, and communication is restored during the "N+1" game.

In this case, the sub-control board 80 displays "200" as the number of acquired coins in the "N" game. Further, at the start of the "N+1" game, a command regarding the number of acquired coins is not received (due to a disconnection), so the display of the acquired number of coins "200" is also maintained in the "N+1" game. Next, when the sub control board 80 receives a command regarding the number of acquired coins at the start of the "N+2" game, it updates the display to show the acquired number of coins "218" based on the command.

(13) FIG. 11 of the third embodiment shows an example in which the image display is returned to normal at the start of the "N+2" game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display may be restored to normal after all "N+1" game numbers are stopped or when a bet operation is performed thereafter. Alternatively, it is also possible to restore normal image display at a predetermined timing based on a command sent to the sub-control board 80 during or after a complete shutdown.

(14) In the third embodiment, for example, in the middle of the "N+1" game where the line is disconnected, there is a case where the player wins an additional (addition) lottery for the number of coins that can be obtained during AT or the number of games played. In this case, since the "N+1" game number is disconnected, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command based on winning the additional lottery. Therefore, in this case, for example, at the start of the "N+2" game, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the result after the additional (addition) lottery, and at the start of the "N+2" game, the sub control board 80 An example of this is displaying game information (number of coins that can be acquired and number of games played) after addition.

(15) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), for example, if the wire is disconnected after the first right stop of the "N" game, and the communication is restored before the first stop switch 42 of the "N+1" game is operated. is possible. Then, in the "N+1" game, it is assumed that the player makes the first stop on the right. In this case, when the sub-control board 80 receives the right first stop command for the "N+1" game, it means that it has received the stop command for the stop switch 42 that has already been operated, so it does not perform the press order failure effect. Output. Then, the image display may be restored to normal at the time of a bet operation after all the "N+1" games are stopped or at the start of the "N+2" games.

(16) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), when the number of acquired coins is displayed as an image during AT, the following method may be cited as an example of the process of updating the image display of the acquired number of coins before and after the disconnection.
When there is a payout process, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the number of acquired coins to the sub control board 80. Here, when a disconnection occurs during the "N" game, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the number of acquired coins for the "N" game. It is assumed that immediately before the disconnection of the "N" game, the sub-control board 80 was displaying "100" as the number of coins acquired during AT. Furthermore, it is assumed that the "N" game number and the "N+1" game number during AT will each acquire 10 coins.
In this case, the number of coins acquired during AT at the end of the "N" game should originally be "110", but it remains "100" (because of the disconnection). Then, it is assumed that communication is restored during the "N+1" game. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 is able to return the number of coins acquired during AT to a normal value based on the command for the number of acquired coins received during the payout process for the "N+1" game. Here, the value may be returned to the normal value at the time of the payout process for the "N+1" game, or it may be returned to the normal value at the start of the "N+2" game, as in the example of FIG. Furthermore, it may be updated to "110" during the payout process for the "N+1" game, and updated to "120" at the start of the "N+2" game.

(17) In this embodiment, the slot machine 10 is illustrated as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is also applicable to, for example, a pachinko gaming machine. In pachinko gaming machines, there is a starting hole (a winning hole that starts the symbol fluctuations by the symbol fluctuation display device and triggers the acquisition of random numbers for the jackpot lottery), an electric chew prize opening (when a game ball wins, the next winning hole is triggered). In order to make it easier, there are various winning openings such as an accessory that opens for a certain period of time and then closes.The electric chew is not limited to the shape of a tulip. provided. And it is possible to apply 1st Embodiment (B) in these winning a prize openings.

Specifically, for example, the starting hole includes a winning sensor (a sensor that first detects the game ball that has entered the starting hole) and an ejection sensor (a sensor that detects the game ball after being detected by the winning sensor). It is provided. In addition, the attacker is provided with a V winning sensor (a sensor that first detects the game ball that has won by the attacker) and a discharge sensor (a sensor that detects the game ball after being detected by the V winning sensor). .
For example, in the case of a starting opening, if the power is cut off at the moment when a game ball is detected by the winning sensor, the setting is made so that the discharge sensor can detect the game ball before the power cutoff process is executed. Thereby, even if the power is cut off at the moment when a game ball is detected by the winning sensor, the winning balls can be counted correctly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from not being paid out even though the game balls have entered the prize opening. The same applies to the attacker's V winning sensor and discharge sensor.

(18) In this embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of one of the gaming machines, but the slot machine 10 is a "reel-type gaming machine" installed in a No. 4 business store that is subject to the Entertainment Business Law. (So-called "pachislot gaming machines"), but can also be applied to, for example, casino machines and enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines) that do not use medals used for games as gaming media.

Here, the enclosed game machine (medalless game machine) can eliminate the medal payout device (unit including the hopper 35, hopper motor 36, and payout sensor 37) in FIG. 1, for example. Further, the medal slot 47 and the medal selector can also be made unnecessary. All of the electronic medals (electronic game media) awarded for winning combinations are stored in the credit number display LED 76. In this case, it is conceivable that the credit number display LED 76 is composed of, for example, five digits (a maximum of "99,999" electronic medals can be stored).
Even in such a casino machine or an enclosed gaming machine (medalless gaming machine), the present invention can be applied to all of the above-mentioned embodiments and the following embodiments, except for the first embodiment.

<Sixth embodiment>
The sixth embodiment relates to control of the medal payout device 15 by the main control board 50.
Here, FIGS. 15 to 17 are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the position of the hopper disk 101, the position of the medal, and the drive control of the hopper motor 36 in the sixth embodiment.
Further, FIG. 15(a) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device 15 showing the state before the last ejected medal comes into contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. FIG. 7 is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state in which the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is more advanced than in FIG.

Furthermore, FIG. 16(a) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device 15 showing a state in which the last ejected medal is in contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. 16(b) is a plan view of the last ejected medal. It is a top view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state in which the movable shaft 38b is moved by being pushed.
Further, FIG. 17(a) is a plan view of the medal dispensing device 15 showing the state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state in which the rotation of the disk is stopped.

In the sixth embodiment, the medal payout device 15 includes a hopper 35 that stores medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 that rotates the hopper disk 101. Further, as in the first embodiment, the medal payout device 15 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The main control board 50 then controls the driving of the hopper motor 36.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15 to 17, the hopper disk 101 is formed into a disk shape, and the hopper disk 101 has a holding portion that is an opening that can hold medals stored in the hopper. Eight pieces 102 are provided along the outer periphery of the hopper disk 101.
Furthermore, each holding portion 102 is formed in the shape of a circular hole passing through the hopper disk 101 from the upper surface to the lower surface. The medals stored in the hopper 35 are formed to enter into each holding part 102 from the upper opening of each holding part 102 and to be held by each holding part 102, respectively.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, when the hopper motor 36 is driven during the medal payout process, the hopper disk 101 shown in FIGS. 15 to 17 rotates clockwise. Then, when the hopper disk 101 rotates clockwise, the medals held in each holding section 102 move clockwise in an arc together with the hopper disk 101, and are sequentially ejected from the ejection section 103.
When a medal is discharged from the discharge section 103, the holding section 102 that held the medal becomes empty. Then, other medals stored in the hopper 35 newly enter into the empty holding section 102.

Further, as described in the first embodiment (C), the medal payout device 15 includes a fixed shaft 38a and a movable shaft 38b. In the sixth embodiment, the space between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b is a discharge section 103 from which medals are discharged.
As shown in FIG. 16(b), when the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, the movable shaft 38b moves and the distance between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal. and the movable shaft 38b. At this time, the medals will be ejected from the ejecting section 103.
Further, the moment when the medal passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 6), the medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103. It's a moment. When the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position, the payout sensor 37 detects that the medals have been ejected from the ejection section 103.

In addition, in one payout process, the last medal to be ejected from the dispensing unit 103 is referred to as the "last ejected medal", and in the next payout process, the medal to be ejected first from the dispensing part 103 is referred to as the "first medal". It is called "Ejection Medal".
In FIGS. 15 to 17, medals are indicated by two-dot chain lines. The medals marked with the letter "A" are the last medals to be ejected in one payout process, and the medals marked with the letter "B" are the first medals to be ejected in the next payout process.

In addition, the position of the holding section 102 where the last ejected medal is held at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103 in one payout process is referred to as the "first position", and The position of the holding unit 102 where the first ejected medal in the next payout process is held at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting unit 103 in the process is referred to as a "second position."
FIG. 17(a) shows the state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103 (the hopper disk 101, each holding section 102, each medal with letters "A" to "D", the fixed shaft 38a). , and the positional relationship of the movable shaft 38b). In FIG. 17(a), the position of the holding part 102 where the medal with the letter "A" was held is the first position, and the medal with the letter "B" is held. The position of the holding part 102 is the second position.

In the sixth embodiment, when the main control board 50 finishes one payout process, the holding part 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process is moved to the first position and the second position. The drive of the hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped when the hopper disk 101 is positioned between the
FIG. 17(b) shows a state in which the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped after the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103. In FIG. 17(b), the first position and the second position are each indicated by a broken line. Furthermore, in FIG. 17(b), the medals marked with the letter "B" are the first ejected medals in the next payout process. Then, as shown in FIG. 17(b), the hopper disk 101 is held in a state where the holding part 102 holding the medal with the letter "B" is located between the first position and the second position. rotation has stopped.

Here, in the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as the hopper motor 36.
Therefore, at the end of the payout process, the main control board 50 applies a current to the hopper motor 36 in the opposite direction to that used when discharging medals, so that the drive of the hopper motor 36 is abruptly stopped, and the hopper disk 101 The rotation of can be stopped suddenly.

Furthermore, as described above, when the medals are ejected from the ejecting section 103 and the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position, the payout sensor 37 detects this fact.
Therefore, when the payout sensor 37 detects that the last ejected medal has been ejected from the ejecting section 103, a current is applied to the hopper motor 36 in the opposite direction to that used when ejecting medals, and the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is controlled. When stopped suddenly, the holding section 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process can be stopped at the second position.

Furthermore, by passing current through the hopper motor 36 in the opposite direction to that used when discharging medals, the hopper motor 36 can be driven in the opposite direction, and the hopper disk 101 can be rotated in the opposite direction (rotated counterclockwise). .
Therefore, even if the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process passes the second position at the end of the payout process, the current is applied to the hopper in the opposite direction to that when discharging the medals. By flowing the motor 36, the hopper disk 101 can be reversely rotated and returned to the second position.
Then, by returning the holding portion 102 holding the first ejected medal to the second position, the first ejected medal can start moving from the same second position each time. As a result, the same operation can be performed for each payout process, so that the first ejected medals can be stably ejected.

Here, when a constant current is applied to the DC motor as the hopper motor 36, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually accelerates from a stopped state, and then reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a time chart showing the relationship among the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, the driving state of the hopper motor 36, and the state of medal discharge from the discharge section 103 in the sixth embodiment.
In FIG. 18, the upper line shows the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, the middle line shows the driving state of the hopper motor 36, and the lower line shows the medal ejection status from the ejection unit 103.

Further, the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is a digital signal output from a predetermined output port included in the main control board 50, and when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on from off, a constant current is applied to the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 changes from on to off, the current flowing through the hopper motor 36 becomes "0".
Furthermore, in FIG. 18, "stop" in the drive state of the hopper motor 36 indicates a state in which the rotation of the drive shaft is stopped, and "constant speed" in the drive state of the hopper motor 36 indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft is at a constant speed. (constant speed) is reached.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on from off, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually increases from "stop" and then reaches "constant speed."
Further, the portion where the line indicating the drive state of the hopper motor 36 is tilted upward to the right indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually accelerating.

In this way, in the hopper motor 36 using a DC motor, when the drive signal is turned on from off, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually accelerates.
Therefore, if the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal is stopped at the second position, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 will gradually accelerate until the holding section 102 reaches the first position. Therefore, it takes a longer time than the medal ejection interval at constant speed.
That is, when the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal is stopped at the second position, the time required from the start of driving the hopper motor 36 until the first ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103 is longer than the hopper motor. This is longer than the medal ejection interval when the drive shaft No. 36 is rotating at a constant speed.
This may give the player a feeling that the first (first) medal is delayed in being ejected.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the main control board 50 is configured such that, at the end of one payout process, the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process is located between the first position and the second position. The drive of the hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped in the positioned state.
If the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, the distance to reach the first position will be shorter than when it stops at the second position. . As a result, the time it takes to reach the first position is shorter than when stopping at the second position, so even if the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually accelerates, the first (first) medal It is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the discharge of the game is delayed.

Furthermore, when the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, two adjacent holding sections 102 on the hopper disk 101 are stopped as shown in FIG. 17(b). A portion corresponding to the space between the two is located in front of the discharge section 103.
As a result, a fraudulent act (goto act) in which a fraudulent instrument such as a wire is inserted through the medal dispensing port provided at the lower front of the front door 12 and attempts to access the holding portion 102 of the hopper disk 101 with this fraudulent instrument is carried out. Even if the hopper disk 101 is stolen, the corresponding portion between the two adjacent holding parts 102 on the hopper disk 101 acts as a barrier, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized instruments from accessing the holding parts 102.

Further, when the driving state of the hopper motor 36 is "constant speed", the hopper disk 101 rotates clockwise at a constant speed. At this time, the medals held in each holding section 102 are sequentially ejected from the ejecting section 103 at equal intervals.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 turns from on to off, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually decreases from "constant speed" and then reaches "stop."
In FIG. 18, the portion where the line indicating the drive state of the hopper motor 36 is diagonally downward to the right indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually decelerating.

In this way, in the hopper motor 36 using a DC motor, when the drive signal is turned from on to off, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually decelerates.
Then, the last ejected medal passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (ejecting section 103), and the movable shaft 38b returns to its original position, whereby the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103. When this is detected by the payout sensor 37, the main control board 50 turns the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 from on to off.
As a result, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually decelerates, and the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process is positioned between the first position and the second position. Then, the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, when the main control board 50 turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 from off, it then transmits a payout start command to the sub control board 80. This payout start command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has started the payout process.
On the other hand, upon receiving the payout start command, the sub control board 80 starts processing related to outputting the payout sound. Thereafter, output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, after the main control board 50 turns the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 from on to off, it then transmits a payout end command to the sub control board 80. This payout end command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has finished the payout process.
On the other hand, upon receiving the payout end command, the sub control board 80 ends the process regarding output of the payout sound. As a result, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 ends.

Here, the "payout sound" means a sound output from the sub-control board 80 side in accordance with the payout of medals. As the payout sound, for example, a sound such as "purururu" can be output from the speaker 22.
In addition, "processing related to outputting sound" refers to a series of processing such as selecting a sound to output, selecting a channel to output the selected sound, and outputting the selected sound from the speaker 22. It means something. By executing this series of processes, the payout sound is actually output from the speaker 22.

Then, when the main control board 50 turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36, it transmits a payout start command to the sub-control board 80, and upon receiving the payout start command, the sub-control board 80 performs processing related to the output of the payout sound. By starting , the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be started before the first ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting section 103 .

Further, when the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal for the hopper motor 36, it sends a payout end command to the sub-control board 80, and upon receiving the payout end command, the sub-control board 80 performs processing related to the output of the payout sound. By ending the process, when the ejection of medals from the ejection unit 103 is stopped, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be made to end.
This can give the player the impression that the medal payout and the payout sound are synchronized.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the relationship among the operation of the main control board 50, the driving state of the hopper motor 36, the detection state of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and the timing of ejecting medals from the ejecting section 103.
When a payout winning combination is won, the main control board 50 sets payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 and turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36.
For example, when a 10-piece winning combination is won and 10 medals are to be paid out, "10" is set in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 as data on the number of medals to be paid out.
That is, when paying out "N" medals (N≧1), "N" is set as payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Further, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 "starts" (starts driving) from a "stopped" state, goes through "acceleration", and reaches a "constant speed".
Note that at the end of one payout process, the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process is stopped between the first position and the second position. At the start of the process, the hopper motor 36 is made to reach a "constant speed" by the time the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal reaches the first position.
That is, the stop position of the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal is set so that the hopper motor 36 reaches a "constant speed" by the time the holding section 102 that holds the first ejected medal reaches the first position. are doing.

Then, after the hopper motor 36 goes from "stop" to "acceleration" to "constant speed", the holding part 102 that holds the first ejected medal reaches the first position. The medals are surely ejected from the ejecting section 103.
Furthermore, at the timing (a) in FIG. 19, both the payout sensors 37a and 37b are off.
Note that the timing of (a) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state of (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to be low active, unlike the first embodiment (C). That is, the dispensing sensor 37a is set so that it is off when it is detecting the movable piece 39a and on when it is not detecting the movable piece 39a.
On the other hand, the payout sensor 37b is set to be highly active similarly to the first embodiment (C). That is, the dispensing sensor 37b is set so that it is off when it is not detecting the movable piece 39a, and it is on when it is detecting the movable piece 39a.
Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, at the timing (a) in FIG. 19, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are both turned off.
Note that in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to low active, and the payout sensor 37b is set to high active. The on/off waveform is reversed.

Further, at the timing (b) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is moved by the medal pushing the movable shaft 38b, and the payout sensor 37a is turned on and the payout sensor 37b is turned off.
Note that the state (b) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (b) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
Furthermore, at the timing (c) in FIG. 19, the space between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal, and the payout sensor 37a is in the on state, and the payout sensor 37b is also in the on state. Become. At this time, the medals are ejected from between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (ejecting section 103).
Note that the state (c) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (c) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Furthermore, at the timing (d) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is biased by the spring 39b and is returning to its original position, and the dispensing sensor 37a is in the on state and the dispensing sensor 37b is in the off state. becomes.
Note that the state (d) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
Further, at the timing (e) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is urged by the spring 39b and returns to its original position, and the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b are both turned off. At this time, the main control board 50 determines that one medal has been ejected, and updates the payout number data.
Note that the state (e) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

When dispensing "N" medals, steps (a) to (e) in FIG. 19 are repeated until it is determined that the "N"th medal has been dispensed.
When determining that the "N"th medal has been ejected, the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal for the hopper motor 36.
Furthermore, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 undergoes "deceleration" and then comes to "stop."
This completes the payout process for "N" medals.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the flow of payout processing in the sixth embodiment.
In the payout process by the main control board 50, first, in step S101, payout number data is set. This process is a process of storing payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50. For example, when paying out "N" medals (N≧1), "N" is stored as the payout number data. Then, the process advances to the next step S102.

In step S102, the main control board 50 turns on the drive signal for the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 starts. Then, the process advances to the next step S103.
In step S103, the main control board 50 determines whether the payout sensor 37a is on. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to low active, and the state in which the movable piece 39a is not detected (the state in which the movable shaft 38b is moved by the medal) is turned on. It is set to be.

If "Yes" is determined in step S103, the process proceeds to the next step S104, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off. Here, if "Yes" in step S104, the process advances to the next step S105. On the other hand, if "No" is determined in step S104, an error occurs.
Here, when the payout sensor 37a is turned on from off, if the payout sensor 37b is already on, the result in step S104 is "No". In this case, it is possible that medals are jammed in the ejection section 103 (medal jam error). Furthermore, when a medal jamming error occurs, the error continues until the jammed medals are removed (the cause of the error is removed) and the reset switch is operated. Then, remove the stuck medal and operate the reset switch to clear the error.

Although not shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, if "No" continues for a predetermined time in step S103 (the predetermined time elapses with "No"), an error occurs. In this case, it is possible that the medals in the hopper 35 are empty (hopper empty error). Furthermore, when a hopper empty error occurs, the error continues until the hopper 35 is replenished with medals (the cause of the error is removed) and the reset switch is operated. Then, when the hopper 35 is replenished with medals and the reset switch is operated, the error is canceled.
In step S105, the main control board 50 again determines whether the payout sensor 37a is on. Here, if "Yes" in step S105, the process advances to the next step S106. On the other hand, if "No" is determined in step S105, an error occurs as in the case where "No" is determined in step S104.

In step S106, the main control board 50 determines whether the payout sensor 37b is on. If "Yes" is determined in step S106, the process advances to the next step S107, and the main control board 50 again determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. Here, if "Yes" in step S107, the process advances to the next step S108. On the other hand, if "No" is determined in step S107, an error occurs as in the case where "No" is determined in step S104 or S105.

Proceeding to step S108, the main control board 50 next determines whether the payout sensor 37b is off. If "Yes" is determined in step S108, the process advances to the next step S109, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is off. Further, if "Yes" is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S110, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off.
If "Yes" in step S110, the process advances to the next step S111. On the other hand, if "No" is determined in step S110, an error occurs as in the case where "No" is determined in steps S104, S105, or S107.

In step S111, the main control board 50 updates the payout number data. This process is a process in which "1" is subtracted from the payout number data stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and the data after the subtraction is stored as new payout number data.
In the next step S112, the main control board 50 determines whether the payout number data is "0" or not. Here, when "Yes" in step S112, the process advances to the next step S113, and the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal for the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 stops. Then, the payout process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if "No" in step S112, the process returns to step S103. As a result, the next medal will be paid out. Then, the process of returning from step S112 to S103 is repeated until the payout number data becomes "0".

Here, the medals discharged from the discharge section 103 are normally guided to a medal receiving tray through a passage called a medal chute.
However, in rare cases, the medals ejected from the ejecting section 103 may bounce off the inner wall of the medal chute and return to the ejecting section 103. At this time, the rebounding medal may hit the next medal that is about to be ejected from the ejecting section 103 and push back the medal that is about to be ejected.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, as in steps S103 to S110 in the flowchart of the payout process in FIG. do.
This makes it possible to detect an error in which a medal that is about to be ejected from the ejecting section 103 is pushed back.

For example, assume that one medal is about to be ejected, and this medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, causing the movable shaft 38b to move, so that the payout sensor 37a is on and the payout sensor 37b is off. (Timing of (b) in FIG. 19). At this time, it is assumed that a medal that was paid out before this medal bounces back and hits this medal, and this medal is pushed back and the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, "No" is returned in step S105 in FIG. 20, resulting in an error.
Further, for example, assume that the medal is pushed back at the timing (c) in FIG. 19 and the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, "No" is returned in step S107 in FIG. 20, resulting in an error.

<Modification of the sixth embodiment>
Although the sixth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is provided with eight holding portions 102, but the number of holding portions is not limited to eight. For example, the number of holding portions may be five, six, ten, etc. It can be set as appropriate depending on the situation.
(2) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is formed into a disk shape, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hopper disk 101 may be formed into a sprocket shape, for example. That is, the holding part 102 is not limited to a circular hole shape as long as it can hold a medal.

(3) In the sixth embodiment, the rotation direction of the hopper disk 101 during the medal dispensing process is clockwise, but the rotation direction is not limited to this. For example, the hopper disk 101 may rotate counterclockwise and the holding portion 102 The medals held in the memory may be sequentially ejected from the ejecting section 103.
(4) In the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as the hopper motor 36, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a stepping motor may be used as the hopper motor 36.

(5) The flow of the payout process in the sixth embodiment is not limited to the flow shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, but may be, for example, the flow shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21. Even with such a flow of payout processing, it is possible to detect the ejection of medals. However, in such a flow of the payout process, it is impossible to detect an error in which a medal that is about to be ejected next is pushed back by a medal that has bounced off the inner wall of the medal chute.
Note that the same step numbers are assigned to processes having the same content in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21.
(6) The first to sixth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to sixth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Seventh embodiment>
This relates to the arrangement of the main control board 50 attached to the inside of the cabinet 13 and the sub-control board 80 attached to the back surface of the front door 12.
FIG. 22 is a side sectional view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, and is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80.

The housing of the slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 that is open on the front side, and a front door 12 that is attached so that the opening of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed.
Further, the cabinet 13 is configured into a box shape with an open front side by assembling a bottom plate 13a, a back plate 13b, a right side plate, a left side plate, a top plate, and the like.
Furthermore, a medal payout device 15 is disposed at the lower inside of the cabinet 13 (above the bottom plate 13a). This medal dispensing device 15 is for dispensing medals, and includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 for rotating the hopper disk 101. We are prepared.

Further, inside the cabinet 13, above the medal payout device 15, a plate-shaped reel base 110 supported by the back plate 13b, the right side plate, and the left side plate is provided. A display device 14 is arranged.
Further, the symbol display device 14 includes a rectangular reel frame 14a, and three reels 31 are arranged in parallel inside this reel frame 14a.

Furthermore, a motor 32 is connected to the center of rotation of each reel 31, each motor 32 is fixed to a reel bracket, and each reel bracket is supported by a reel frame 14a.
Further, a transparent reel board case 121 is arranged on the reel frame 14a, and a reel control board 120 is housed within this reel board case 121. This reel control board 120 controls the driving of three motors 32.

Further, a transparent main board case 56 is disposed inside the cabinet 13 above the symbol display device 14. More specifically, the main board case 56 is fixed at a position above the symbol display device 14 on the front side of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 (inner surface side of the housing). The main control board 50 is housed within the main board case 56.
Further, the main control board 50 controls the progress of the game, and includes an input port 51, an output port 52, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like. Further, the main control board 50 is connected to the bet switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42, symbol display device 14, medal payout device 15, reel control board 120, sub control board via the input port 51 or output port 52. 80 etc. are electrically connected.

Further, the front door 12 is attached to cover the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 so as to be able to open and close the opening of the cabinet 13. More specifically, the left side of the front door 12 is attached to the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 via a hinge. The opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed by rotating the front door 12 about this hinge.

Further, a transparent display window is provided in the center of the front door 12. This display window is arranged at a position corresponding to the front of the symbol display device 14. The player can visually recognize the three symbols attached to each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 through the display window.
Further, on the front side (player side) of the front door 12 and below the display window, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a medal slot 47, etc. are arranged. .

Furthermore, at the lower part of the front side (player side) of the front door 12, there is a medal payout port through which medals paid out from the medal payout device 15 pass, and a medal payout port for receiving medals paid out from the medal payout port. A medal tray is arranged.
Further, at the upper part of the front side (player side) of the front door 12, a production lamp 21, a speaker 22, an image display device 23, etc. are arranged.

Further, a transparent sub-board case 87 is arranged at the upper part of the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the sub-board case 87 is fixed at a position on the back side of the front door 12 (inner surface side of the casing), above the symbol display device 14 and corresponding to the back side of the image display device 23. ing. The sub-control board 80 is housed within the sub-board case 87 .
Further, the sub-control board 80 controls the performance, and includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub-CPU 85, an electrolytic capacitor 86, and the like. Further, the sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the production lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, the main control board 50, etc. via the input port 81 or the output port 82. Based on the control command received from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 determines at what timing and what kind of effects to output, and according to the decision, outputs the effect lamps 21, speakers 22, Controls the output of the image display device 23.

As described above, the main board case 56 is disposed inside the cabinet 13 above the symbol display device 14, and the main control board 50 is housed within the main board case 56.
Further, on the back surface of the front door 12, above the symbol display device 14, a sub-board case 87 is arranged, and the sub-control board 80 is housed within this sub-board case 87.
As shown in FIG. 22, when the front door 12 is closed, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are arranged to face each other.
Further, when the front door 12 is closed, the distance between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 is set to be wider than the width of the reel control board 120 in the depth direction.

Here, on the sub-control board 80, an electrolytic capacitor 86 for power storage is arranged. Further, the electrolytic capacitor 86 is filled with an electrolytic solution. If the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 ruptures due to a malfunction, there is a risk that the filled electrolyte may be scattered. At this time, if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is placed in a position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, when this electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a malfunction, the scattered electrolyte will be released. There is a possibility that it may adhere to the main CPU 55 and cause the main CPU 55 to malfunction. Furthermore, there is a possibility that the main CPU 55 will be damaged due to the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, an electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the sub-control board 80.
As a result, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a malfunction and the electrolyte is scattered, the scattered electrolyte can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU 55, and the main CPU 55 can be prevented from malfunctioning. be able to. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the main CPU 55 from being damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts.
Furthermore, if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is placed in a position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, there is a possibility that the main CPU 55 will malfunction due to noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86. To prevent the main CPU 55 from malfunctioning due to noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86 by arranging the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the control board 80 at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. I can do it.

FIG. 23(a) shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing Example 1;
In FIG. 23A, the circle indicated by a broken line is a projection of the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 onto the main control board 50. In FIG.

In example 1 shown in FIG. 23(a), there is one electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80, which is arranged above the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 in the vertical direction, and in the horizontal direction It is arranged on the left side of the main CPU 55 on the control board 50.
In this way, by arranging the electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 at different positions both vertically and horizontally with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, The electrolytic capacitor 86 can be located at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

<Modification of seventh embodiment>
Although the seventh embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
(1) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is not limited to one, and may be two, for example, as shown in FIG. 23(b).
FIG. 23(b) shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing Example 2.

Similarly to FIG. 23(a), in FIG. 23(b), the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 projected onto the main control board 50 is shown by a broken line.
In FIG. 23(b), the upper left electrolytic capacitor 86 and the lower right electrolytic capacitor 86 are both arranged at different positions in the vertical and horizontal directions with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.
Accordingly, also in Example 2 of FIG. 23(b), each of the two electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

(2) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 may be four, for example, as shown in FIG. 24(c).
FIG. 24(c) shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing Example 3.
The electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is projected onto the main control board 50 and shown as a broken circle, as in FIGS. 23(a) and 23(b).

In FIG. 24(c), the sub-control board 80 includes four electrolytic capacitors 86, three of which are located at different positions both vertically and horizontally with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. It is located. Further, the remaining one electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged at the same position in the vertical direction, although it is different in the horizontal direction with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.
Even with this arrangement, the four electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 are located at positions other than the positions facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

(3) The electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 may be placed at a position away from the main control board 50, for example.
FIG. 24(d) shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing Example 4.
The projection of the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 and showing it as a broken line circle is the same as in FIGS. 23(a), (b) and 24(c).

In FIG. 24(d), similarly to FIG. 23(a), the number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is one, but unlike FIG. 23(a), the electrolytic capacitors on the sub-control board 80 86 is arranged at a position separate from the main control board 50.
In this way, even when the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged at a position away from the main control board 50, it can be arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. There will be.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 23(a), (b), 24(c) and (d), the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is placed in a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. By arranging the electrolytic capacitor 86 in the position shown in FIG. You can prevent it from happening.

(4) As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 of the second embodiment, a management information display LED 74 (also referred to as a "role ratio monitor") is arranged on the main control board 50. This management information display LED 74 displays management information such as advantageous section ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and accessory ratio.
In addition, the "advantageous section ratio" means the ratio of the advantageous section to the total gaming section (normal section + standby section + advantageous section), and the "continuous role item ratio" means the ratio of the first section to the total number of medals acquired. It means the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the special accessory (RB) is activated, and the "accessory ratio" means the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the accessory is activated to the total number of medals acquired.

Even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and also at a position other than the position facing the management information display LED 74, good.
As a result, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a malfunction and the electrolyte is scattered, the scattered electrolyte can be prevented from adhering to the management information display LED 74, and the management information displayed on the management information display LED 74 can be prevented. Information can be prevented from becoming unverifiable.
Furthermore, the management information display LED 74 can be prevented from being damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts.
(5) The first to seventh embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to seventh embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Eighth embodiment>
The eighth embodiment relates to the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 at the lower part of the housing of the slot machine 10.
FIG. 25 is an enlarged side sectional view of the lower front part of the housing of the slot machine 10 (section A in FIG. 22) with the front door 12 closed, and explains the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 25, a first closing portion 13c is provided at the lower part of the cabinet 13, and projects toward the front door 12 when the front door 12 is closed.
That is, the first closing portion 13c is a plate-shaped protrusion that protrudes forward from the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, and when the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c extends in the protruding direction. is the direction toward the front door 12.
Further, the first closing portion 13c is formed in a horizontally long shape extending from the right end to the left end of the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
Furthermore, the first closing portion 13c is formed of a sheet metal, and is fixed to the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 with screws.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, at a position below the first closing portion 13c in the lower part of the front door 12, there is a second closing portion 12a that protrudes toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed. is provided.
That is, the second closing portion 12a is a plate-shaped protrusion that projects rearward from the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is closed, the second closing portion 12a projects in the following direction. This is the cabinet 13 direction.

Further, the second closing portion 12a is arranged at a position lower than the first closing portion 13c.
Furthermore, the second closing portion 12a is formed in a horizontally long shape extending from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12.
Furthermore, like the first closing part 13c, the second closing part 12a is also formed of a sheet metal, and is fixed to the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 with screws.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, at a position above the first closing part 13c at the lower part of the front door 12, there is a third closing part 12b that protrudes toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed. is provided.
That is, like the second closing part 12a, the third closing part 12b is a plate-shaped protrusion that projects rearward from the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is closed, the third closing part 12b The protruding direction of the third closing portion 12b is toward the cabinet 13.

Further, like the second closing portion 12a, the third closing portion 12b is formed in a horizontally long shape extending from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12.
Furthermore, unlike the second closure part 12a, the third closure part 12b is arranged at a position above the first closure part 13c.
Furthermore, like the first closing part 13c and the second closing part 12a, the third closing part 12b is also formed of a sheet metal, and is fixed to the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 with screws.

When the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c is arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b.
Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed, the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 at the bottom of the housing is bent like the left and right sides of a U-shape are reversed, as shown in FIG. It will have a shape. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized acts (rogue acts) such as passing a wire through the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 into the inside of the housing to access the medal payout device 15 and the like.

Further, a door sensor for detecting opening of the front door 12 is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13. This door sensor is configured using an optical sensor having a light receiving and emitting section, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
Furthermore, a detection piece is provided on the front side of the left side panel of the cabinet 13 and is movable in the front and rear directions when the front door 12 is opened and closed. This detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12 when the front door 12 is closed, and is pushed forward by the spring when the front door 12 is opened.

Further, when the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed rearward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor is in a state where it is detecting the detection piece and is in an off state. That is, the door sensor is set to low active.
On the other hand, when the front door 12 is open, the detection piece is biased by the spring and pops out forward from inside the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor is in a state where it is not detecting the detection piece and is in an on state.

The main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is closed when the door sensor is off, and determines that the front door 12 is open when the door sensor is on.
In this way, the opening and closing of the front door 12 is detected by moving the detection piece in the front-back direction as the front door 12 is opened and closed, and the door sensor is turned on and off.

Further, when the front door 12 is opened from a closed state, the detection piece moves forward from the pushed state, enters the door sensor and comes out, and the door sensor changes from the off state to the on state.
The position of the front door 12 when the door sensor first detects opening of the front door 12 is referred to as a "detection start position."
Further, the time when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door 12 means the moment when the door sensor changes from the off state to the on state.

In the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion is located between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b not only when the front door 12 is closed but also when the front door 12 is at the detection start position. 13c are arranged.
That is, even at the moment when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state and the door sensor changes from the off state to the on state, the first blocking part 13c is disposed between the second blocking part 12a and the third blocking part 12b. It is formed like this.

Therefore, when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state, the door sensor first changes from the off state to the on state, and then the first blocking part 13c comes out from between the second blocking part 12a and the third blocking part 12b. It turns out.
When the door sensor is turned on, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is open and sends a door open command to the sub control board 80, and the sub control board 80 receives the door open command. When the front door 12 is received, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. notify that the front door 12 is open. This allows the hall clerk to be informed that the front door 12 is open.

Therefore, before the notification that the front door 12 is open starts, the first closing part 13c does not come out from between the second closing part 12a and the third closing part 12b, and the front door 12 opens. Even at the position where the notification starts, the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 is in a bent shape. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts (rogue acts) in which the medal dispensing device 15 or the like is accessed by passing the card through.

In the sixth embodiment, by stopping the holding part 102 that holds the first ejected medal between the first position and the second position, there is a space between two adjacent holding parts 102 on the hopper disk 101. The corresponding part can be positioned in front of the ejecting part 103, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as inserting a wire or the like from the medal dispensing port to access the holding part 102 of the hopper disk 101. As described above, by providing the configurations of both the sixth and eighth embodiments, it is possible to more firmly prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a wire or the like to access the medal payout device 15.

Here, the distance between the first blocking part 13c and the second blocking part 12a is "h1", the distance between the first blocking part 13c and the third blocking part 12b is "h2", and the distance between the second blocking part 12a and the second blocking part 12a is "h2". Let the distance to the third blocking part 12b be "h3", and the protrusion width (depth) of the second blocking part 12a be "w".
Further, the diameter of the medal is "d", and the thickness of the medal is "t".
Note that the size of a typical medal is 24.5 to 25.5 mm in diameter and 1.5 to 2.0 mm in thickness.
In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance "h2" between the first closing part 13c and the third closing part 12b and the thickness "t" of the medal is set to satisfy "h2>t". ing.

Here, when the hall clerk opens the front door 12 and replenishes the hopper 35 with medals, there is a case where the clerk drops the medals onto the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
In particular, in order to replenish the hopper 35 with medals from the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13, the medals may be dropped near the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, that is, near the first closing portion 13c.

At this time, if the setting is made so that "h2>t" is satisfied, even if the front door 12 is closed with the medals falling near the first blocking section 13c, the medals falling near the first blocking section 13c will still remain. , enters between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 or the cabinet 13. Moreover, there is no possibility that the front door 12 will not close due to medals being caught between the first closing part 13c and the third closing part 12b.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protruding width (depth) "w" of the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter "d" is set to satisfy "w<(d/2)". has been done.
By setting so that "w<(d/2)" is satisfied, it is possible to prevent medals from being placed on the second closing portion 12a.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the front door 12 from being closed with medals placed on the second closing portion 12a, and furthermore, it is possible to prevent the medals placed on the second closing portion 12a from closing the front door. 12 and the cabinet 13 can be prevented from being damaged.

<Modified example of the eighth embodiment>
Although the eighth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
(1) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is configured using an optical sensor having a light receiving and emitting section, but the door sensor is not limited thereto, and may be configured using a proximity sensor, for example.
Even when a door sensor is configured using a proximity sensor, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are detected not only when the front door 12 is closed but also when the front door 12 is at the detection start position. The structure is such that the first closing portion 13c is disposed between them.

(2) In the eighth embodiment, a detection piece is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 and is movable in the front and rear directions as the front door 12 is opened and closed. When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor, and when the front door 12 is opened, it pops out forward by being biased by the spring. So, I made it go out from inside the door sensor. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, a door sensor for detecting opening of the front door 12 may be provided on the front side of the left side panel of the cabinet 13, and a detection piece may be provided at a position corresponding to the door sensor on the front door 12. When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 enters the door sensor, and when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 comes out from inside the door sensor. You may also do so.

(3) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is provided on the cabinet 13 side, but the door sensor is not limited thereto, and may be provided on the front door 12 side, for example.
(4) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is in an OFF state when it is detecting a detection piece, and is in an ON state when it is not detecting a detection piece. That is, the door sensor was set to low active. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the door sensor may be in an on state when it is detecting a detection piece, and may be in an off state when it is not detecting a detection piece. That is, the door sensor may be set to high active.
In this case, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is closed when the door sensor is on, and determines that the front door 12 is open when the door sensor is off. Configure it as follows.

(5) In the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c is formed to be horizontally long from the right end to the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. Further, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are formed to be horizontally long from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the first closing portion 13c may be composed of two parts: a first member extending from the right end to the center of the bottom plate 13a, and a second member extending from the center to the left end of the bottom plate 13a, or may be divided into three parts. It may be constructed from three members.
The second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may also be configured from two members or three members, similarly to the first closing portion 13c.
In this way, the first closing part 13c, the second closing part 12a, and the third closing part 12b are not limited to being composed of one member, but may be composed of a plurality of members.

Further, the first closing portion 13c does not extend from the right end to the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, and for example, the first closing portion 13c is provided near the right end or near the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. It may have some parts that are not present.
Similarly, the lower back surface of the front door 12 may have a portion where the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are not provided.
In this way, even if there is a part where the first closing part 13c, the second closing part 12a, and the third closing part 12b are not provided, it is possible to enter the inside of the casing from the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as passing a wire to access the medal payout device 15 and the like.
Further, the first closing portion 13c may be a part of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, or may be a separate member from the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
Similarly, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be a part of the front door 12, or may be separate members from the front door 12.

(6) In the eighth embodiment, when the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c is arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b.
At this time, a gap may be formed between the first closing part 13c and the second closing part 12a, or the first closing part 13c and the second closing part 12a may be in contact with each other.
Similarly, a gap may be formed between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b, or the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b may be in contact with each other.
Further, the entire first closing portion 13c may be arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b, or a part of the first closing portion 13c may be arranged. Good too.

Furthermore, when the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c may be in contact with a position corresponding to between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b on the back surface of the front door 12. .
Further, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c may be provided on the front door 12 side, and the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be provided on the cabinet 13 side.
That is, a first closing portion 13c is provided that protrudes from the bottom of the back surface of the front door 12 toward the cabinet 13, and a first closing portion 13c is provided that protrudes from the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 toward the front door 12 from a position below the first closing portion 13c at the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. A protruding second closing portion 12a may be provided, and a third closing portion 12b may be provided that protrudes toward the front door 12 from a position above the first closing portion 13c at the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.

(7) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance “h2” between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b and the thickness “t” of the medal is set to satisfy “h2>t”. .
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to satisfy "h2<t", for example.
If "h2>t" is set, when the front door 12 is closed with a medal falling near the first blocking part 13c, the medal falling near the first blocking part 13c will be removed from the third blocking part 13c. It hits the rear end of 12b and is pushed into the cabinet 13. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 or the cabinet 13. Moreover, there is no possibility that the front door 12 will not close due to medals being caught between the first closing part 13c and the third closing part 12b.

(8) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protrusion width (depth) “w” of the second blocking portion 12a and the medal diameter “d” is set to satisfy “w<(d/2)”. did.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to satisfy "(d/2)<w<d", for example.
By satisfying "(d/2)<w", medals can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. Moreover, by satisfying "w<d", even if you try to close the front door 12 with a medal placed on the second blocking part 12a, the medal will be placed on the second blocking part 12a before the front door 12 closes. Since the placed medals hit the front end of the cabinet 13, the front door 12 does not close.
This allows the hall clerk to know that the medals are placed on the second closing part 12a, and in turn allows the hall clerk to know that the medals are placed on the second closing part 12a. It can be removed to close the front door 12.

(9) The relationship between the protruding width (depth) “w” of the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter “d”, and the relationship between the distance “h1” between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter. The relationship with the thickness "t" may be set to satisfy "(d/2)<w" and "h1<t".
As described above, by satisfying "(d/2)<w", medals can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. Furthermore, by satisfying "h1<t", even if you try to close the front door 12 with medals placed on the second blocking part 12a, the medals will be placed on the second blocking part 12a before the front door 12 closes. The front door 12 does not close because the placed medal hits the front end of the first closing portion 13c.
This allows the hall clerk to know that the medals are placed on the second closing part 12a, and in turn allows the hall clerk to know that the medals are placed on the second closing part 12a. It can be removed to close the front door 12.

(10) The relationship between the protrusion width (depth) “w” of the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter “d”, and the relationship between the distance “h1” between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter. The relationship with the thickness "t" may be set to satisfy "d<w" and "h1>t".
By satisfying "d<w", the entire medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. That is, the medal can be placed on the second closing part 12a without a part of the medal protruding from the second closing part 12a. Moreover, by satisfying "h1>t", a medal can be inserted between the first closing part 13c and the second closing part 12a.

Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed with a medal placed on the second blocking part 12a, the front door 12 closes with the medal being placed between the first blocking part 13c and the second blocking part 12a. It turns out. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 or the cabinet 13. Moreover, there is no possibility that the medals placed on the second closing part 12a will hit the first closing part 13c or the front end of the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 will not be closed.
(11) The first to eighth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to eighth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Ninth embodiment>
The ninth embodiment relates to stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side and control of output of effects on the sub control board 80 side.
FIG. 26(a) is a diagram showing the types of special prizes (accessories) and end conditions, and FIG. 26(b) is a diagram showing the types of gaming states and the prescribed number of each gaming state. (c) is a diagram showing a number table for internal lottery and advantageous section lottery in setting 1.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), in the ninth embodiment, as special prizes (accessory objects), BB (first-class accessory continuous operating device; first-class big bonus), RB (first-class special accessory), ;Regular Bonus), and MB (Second Class Continuous Actuation Device; Second Class Big Bonus).
Here, BB is a device that can operate RB continuously. That is, during the BB game, the RB game is executed continuously. Furthermore, during the RB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination increases. Furthermore, when the number of medals paid out during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game ends. Further, when the number of medals paid out during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game ends.

Moreover, MB is a device that can continuously operate CB (class 2 special accessory). That is, during the MB game, the CB game is executed continuously. Furthermore, during the CB game, regardless of the lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61, all the small winning combinations are won repeatedly, and the stop switch 42 is not operated for a specific reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31). The time from the moment when the reel 31 stops is within 75 ms (the maximum number of moving frames is 1 frame). Further, the CB game ends after one game, and when the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26(b), in the ninth embodiment, there are seven gaming states: non-RT, RT, RB inside, BB inside, RB game, BB game, and MB game. There is. The main control board 50 then controls the transition of these gaming states.
Here, the "specified number" means the number of medals inserted at which the start switch 41 can be operated (game can be started). In the ninth embodiment, the prescribed number during MB is set to "1", and the prescribed number in gaming states other than during MB is set to "3".

Further, "RT" means that the type (number) of conditional devices (accessories, replays, small winnings) to be selected as lottery targets and the winning probability thereof are a unique lottery state.
Furthermore, "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but it means that the type of conditional device to be selected for lottery and its winning probability are different from RT.
In any game state, when the RT start condition is satisfied, the next game is shifted to RT, and when the RT end condition is satisfied in RT, the next game is shifted to non-RT.

Furthermore, when a special prize is won, the winning information of the special prize is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the won special prize stops on the active line.
A game in which a special role has not been won is called a "non-internal" game, and a game in which a special role has been won but the symbol combination corresponding to the won special role has not stopped on the active line, that is, a special role has been won. A game in which information is carried over is called "internal play."

In addition, the probability that a desired symbol can be stopped on the active line from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops (maximum number of moving pieces) is calculated by "drawing". rate (PB).
If the stop switch 42 is not operated at an appropriate position of the reel 31 (at an operation timing that allows the target symbol to be stopped on the active line within the range of the maximum number of movement frames), the target symbol will be stopped on the active line (valid PB≠1 means that it is not possible to pull the ball up to the line.
On the other hand, no matter what position the reels 31 are at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42), it is possible to always stop (draw) the target symbol on the active line. It is called "PB=1".

Further, when BB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on the active line (BB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but the BB game starts from the next game. During the BB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination increases as the RB game is executed continuously. When the number of medals paid out during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game is ended and the next game returns to the gaming state before the transition to the BB game.
Furthermore, if the BB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the BB does not stop on the active line, the winning information on the BB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the BB stops on the active line. A gaming state in which BB winning information is carried over is called "BB internal".
Note that the timing of transition to the inside of the BB can be set as appropriate. For example, in the game in which the BB was won, after all the reels 31 have stopped, the reels 31 may be moved to the inside of the BB, and in the game in which the BB was won, the reels may not be moved to the inside of the BB, but in the next game, the reels 31 may be moved to the inside of the BB. You may move it inside.

Further, when RB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to RB stops on the active line (RB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but the RB game starts from the next game. During the RB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination increases. When the number of medals paid out during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game is ended and the next game returns to the gaming state before the transition to the RB game.
Furthermore, when an RB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the RB does not stop on the active line, the winning information of the RB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the RB stops on the active line. A gaming state in which RB winning information is carried over is called "RB internal".
Note that the timing of transition to the inside of the RB can be set as appropriate, similar to the timing of transition to the inside of the BB. For example, in the game in which the RB is won, after all the reels 31 have stopped, the reels 31 may be moved to the inside of the RB, or in the game in which the RB is won, the reels are not moved to the inside of the RB, and in the next game, the reels 31 are moved to the inside of the RB. You may move it inside.

Furthermore, if the MB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on the active line (MB wins), no medals will be paid out in the current game, but the MB game will start from the next game. During the MB game, the CB game is executed continuously. When the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game is ended and the next game returns to the gaming state before the transition to the MB game.

Furthermore, if the MB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the MB does not stop on the active line, the winning information of the MB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on the active line. A gaming state in which MB winning information is carried over is called "MB internal".
In addition, in the ninth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to MB is set to "PB=1", so if MB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to MB in the current game will always stop on the active line. , will never be inside the MB.

Furthermore, the conditional device (win) of the ninth embodiment can be broadly classified into a special winning combination (accessory object), a replay (replayed winning combination), and a small winning combination.
Furthermore, there are three types of special roles: BB, RB, and MB, two types of replays: Replay 1 and Replay 2, and minor roles: common bell, left correct answer bell, and middle correct answer bell. , right correct answer has seven types: bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2.
Note that the left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, and right correct answer bell are collectively referred to as "push order bells."
Furthermore, the "condition device" is a device that operates in accordance with the winning number determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. When one winning number is determined, one or more conditional devices corresponding to that winning number are activated, and the winning flag corresponding to the activated conditional device is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 26(c), in the ninth embodiment, any one winning number from "0" to "16" is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the winning number corresponds to the determined winning number. Any conditional device from non-winning to MB is activated.
In each of the two types of replays, you can win independently, and you cannot win multiple times with other conditional devices (combinations).
Furthermore, there are four types of bells: a common bell, a left correct bell, a middle correct bell, and a right correct bell, all of which can be won individually and cannot be won in combination with other winning combinations.

Furthermore, there are cases in which watermelon is won alone and cases in which watermelon is won in combination with BB.
Furthermore, Cherry 1 has cases in which it wins alone and cases in which it wins multiple times with BB, and Cherry 2 has cases in which it wins alone, cases in which it wins multiple times with RB, and cases in which it wins multiple times with BB. .
Also, BB has cases where it wins alone and cases where it wins multiple times with Watermelon, Cherry 1, or Cherry 2, but RB never wins alone and only wins multiple times with Cherry 2, and MB can only be won individually, and cannot be won in combination with other roles.

Further, "payout" means the number of medals to be paid out when the symbol combination corresponding to each conditional device is stopped (a winning combination is won).
In the ninth embodiment, for the left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, and right correct answer bell, the payout is different depending on the specified number 3 (playing state other than during MB) and the specified number 1 (playing state during MB), but otherwise, The payout is the same for the specified number 3 and the specified number 1.

In addition, the left correct answer bell is a push order bell in which the first stop on the left is the correct answer press order, and the first stop on the left is the incorrect answer press order, and with the specified number of 3, 8 medals will be paid out in the correct answer press order. , one medal will be paid out in the order of incorrect presses, and if the specified number is 1, 14 medals will be paid out in the order of correct presses, and 15 medals will be paid out in the order of incorrect presses.
Similarly, the middle correct answer bell is a press order bell in which the first stop in the middle is the correct answer press order and the first stop in the middle is the incorrect answer press order, and the right correct answer bell is a press order bell in which the first stop in the middle is the correct answer press order. , is a push order bell in which any other than the first stop on the right is an incorrect push order.
Note that the common bell is a bell that pays out eight medals regardless of the order in which it is pressed.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a winning combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61). This winning combination lottery means 61 performs a lottery of winning numbers. Then, when a winning number is determined by lottery by the combination lottery means 61, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.
Further, the lottery of winning numbers by the winning combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61) may be referred to as "internal lottery".
As shown in FIG. 26(c), in the ninth embodiment, one of the winning numbers "0" to "15" is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. Furthermore, winning numbers "0" to "15" correspond to condition devices "non-winning" to "MB", respectively. Then, when the winning number is determined, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.

For example, when the winning number "1" is determined, the "Replay 1" condition device corresponding to the winning number "1" is activated. Furthermore, when the winning number "8" is determined, the "Watermelon+BB" condition device corresponding to the winning number "8" is activated.
As explained in the first embodiment, the winning combination lottery means 61 includes a random number generation means, a random number extraction means for extracting the random numbers generated by the random number generation means, and a random number extraction means based on the random number extracted by the random number extraction means. and a winning number determining means for determining a winning number, and when the winning number is determined, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.
For example, in non-internal and internal cases, the random number extracted by the random number extraction means may be the same and the operating condition device may be the same, or even if the random number extracted by the random number extraction means is the same, the operating condition may be the same. The conditions and equipment used may differ.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the winning flag control means 62. This winning flag control means 62 controls on/off of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the result of lottery of winning numbers by the winning combination lottery means 61.
In the ninth embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each role for all roles. Then, when the winning number is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 turns on the winning flag of the winning combination included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number (sets the winning flag). .

For example, in non-RT, when the winning number "1" is determined by the drawing by the winning combination drawing means 61, the winning flag of "Replay 1" included in the condition device of "Replay 1" corresponding to the winning number "1" is The winning flag will be turned on, and the other winning flags will be turned off.
Similarly, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, "Cherry 1" and "BB" included in the condition device "Cherry 1 + BB" corresponding to the winning number "10"" are turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off.

In addition, winning information for roles other than special roles (BB, RB, MB) is not carried over, so even if you win a role that does not carry over winning information in this game and the winning flag for that role is turned on, that role will not be carried over. Regardless of whether the player wins or not, the winning flag is turned off at the end of the current game.
On the other hand, the winning information for special roles (BB, RB, MB) is carried over, so if you win a special role in this game and the winning flag of the winning special role is turned on, that special role will be The winning flag remains on until a prize is won, and when the special winning combination is won, the winning flag is turned off.

For example, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, "Cherry 1" and "BB" included in the condition device "Cherry 1 + BB" corresponding to the winning number "10" The two winning flags will be turned on, but if "BB" does not win in this game, regardless of whether "Cherry 1" wins in this game or not, "Cherry" will be turned on at the end of this game. The winning flag for "1" is turned off, and the winning flag for "BB" remains on. In this case, from the next game onwards, the game will move to the inside of the BB.

Also, for example, when the winning number "9" is determined in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 within BB, in addition to the winning flag of "BB" carried over, "Cherry" corresponding to the winning number "9" is added. The winning flag of "Cherry 1" included in the condition device of "1" is turned on. That is, the two winning flags "Cherry 1" and "BB" are turned on.
Therefore, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 (double winning of "Cherry 1 + BB"), and when the winning number "9" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 inside BB, ” (“Cherry 1” wins alone), the on/off state of the winning flag is the same.

Also, during the MB game, the winning flag control means 62 controls the winning flags of all the small winning combinations (common bell, left correct bell, middle correct bell, right correct bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2). turn on. For this reason, even though the winning combination was not won by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, it is in the same state as winning all the small winning combinations.
For example, during a MB game, when the winning number "0" is determined by the lottery by the winning number lottery means 61, the "non-winning" corresponding to the winning number "0" does not include any winning numbers, but all The winning flag for the small winning combination (the above seven small winning combinations) is turned on.
Also, for example, during a MB game, when the winning number "1" is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, "Replay 1" included in the "Replay 1" condition device corresponding to the winning number "1" In addition to the winning flag, the winning flags of all the small winnings (the seven small winnings mentioned above) are turned on.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a reel control means 65, and this reel control means 65 has a plurality of stop position determination tables corresponding to on/off of the winning flag. Equipped with. Further, each stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.
When a winning number is determined by a drawing by the winning combination means 61 and the winning flag control means 62 controls on/off of the winning flag of the winning combination included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number, the reel control means 65 selects a stop position determination table corresponding to on/off of the winning flag.

When the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the selected stop position determination table and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.
In addition, the stop position determination table selected when the winning flag of Replay 1 is on and the winning flags other than Replay 1 are off is such that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 1 stops on the active line, and The stopping position of each reel 31 is determined so that the symbol combinations corresponding to combinations other than Replay 1 do not stop on the active line.

Furthermore, the stop position determination table that is selected when the winning flag of the left correct answer bell is on and the winning flags other than the left correct answer bell are off is the stop position determination table that is selected when the stop switch 42 is operated at the first left stop. , when the symbol combination that results in the payout of 8 medals stops on the active line, and the stop switch 42 is operated other than the first stop on the left, the symbol combination that results in the payout of 1 medal stops on the active line. The stopping position of each reel 31 is determined as follows.

Further, the "internal lottery number" column in FIG. 26(c) shows the number of winning numbers in each gaming state. Divide the internal lottery number by "65536" to get the probability of winning.
For example, since the winning number "4" in non-RT is set to "3000", the winning number "4" is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT, and the winning number "4" corresponding to the winning number "4" is The probability that the conditional device of "correct answer bell" will operate is "3000/65536".

Further, in the column of "internal lottery number" in FIG. 26(c), the mark "*" indicates that advantageous section lottery is executable.
Here, the "advantageous section" means a game section that has performance related to the instruction function (in which the instruction function may be activated).
Further, the "instruction function" refers to a function of displaying (notifying) an "advantageous operation mode" to the player.
Furthermore, "activation of the instruction function" includes displaying the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is selected.

Furthermore, "advantageous section lottery" means a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section.
Then, when winning in the advantageous section lottery and moving to the advantageous section, it becomes possible to activate the instruction function, and when the push order bell is won, it becomes possible to notify the correct push order.
For example, the number "8000" of the winning number "3"("commonbell") in non-RT is marked with "*", but this is because in non-RT the winning number "3"("commonbell") is marked "*". When the winning number "3"("commonbell") is determined in the lottery, it means that the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 26(c), in non-RT, when the winning number "0" (non-winning) is determined, and when the winning number "4" to "6"("left correct answer bell", " When it is determined that the answer is "Middle Correct Answer Bell" or "Right Correct Answer Bell", the advantageous section lottery is not executed, but otherwise the advantageous section lottery can be executed.
Furthermore, within RT, RB, and BB, when the winning number is determined to be "4" to "6"("left correct bell", "middle correct bell", or "right correct bell"), Except for this, when the winning number is determined to be the same as the non-RT, advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, since BB's winning information is carried over within BB, when the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") is determined while inside BB, and when it is determined to be a winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") during BB, and during non-RT (non-internal). The on/off state of the winning flag is the same as when the winning number "10" (double winning of "Cherry 1+BB") is determined.
Furthermore, the number of winning numbers "10" (double winning of "Cherry 1 + BB") in non-RT (non-internal) and the number of winning numbers "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") in BB internal are set to the same "200".
Therefore, when the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") is determined within the BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

Also, when the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") is determined within RB, the winning flag of "Cherry 1" and the carried over winning flag of "RB" are turned on. .
Furthermore, "BB" and "RB" are both special prizes (official objects). The number set and the number set for the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") in the RB are set to the same number "200".
Therefore, even when the winning number "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") is determined within the RB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, when the winning number "12" (double winning of "Cherry 2 + RB") or winning number "13" (double winning of "Cherry 2 + BB") is determined as a non-RT, and if you win while inside RB or inside BB. This is the same as when the number "11"("Cherry2" wins alone) is determined in that the winning flag of "Cherry 2" and the winning flag of the special prize (official object) are turned on.
Furthermore, if you add up the numbers of winning numbers "12" (double winning of "Cherry 2 + RB") and winning numbers "13" (double winning of "Cherry 2 + BB") in non-RT, it will be "300", and RB internal middle and BB It matches the number ``300'' of the winning number ``11'' (single winning of ``Cherry 2'') in the inside.
Therefore, even when the winning number "11" (single winning of "Cherry 2") is determined in the RB or the BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, the column of “advantageous section lottery number” in FIG. 26(c) shows the number of winning numbers for each winning number. Divide the number of advantageous section drawings by "16384" to get the probability of winning.
For example, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT, RB inside, or BB inside, the probability of winning in the advantageous section lottery is as follows. It becomes "20/16384".
For example, in non-RT or RT, when the winning number "8" (double winning of "Watermelon + BB") is determined in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the probability of winning in the advantageous section lottery is "10000/16384". ”.

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to MB is set to "PB=1".
In addition, as shown in FIG. 26(c), MB lottery is held in non-RT and RT, but if MB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to MB in the current game always stops on the active line, so MB To shift to an MB game from the next game without becoming internal.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 26(c), during the MB game, the lottery of Replay 1 or Replay 2 is held, and regardless of the lottery result by the prize lottery means 61, all minor prizes are won twice. Become.

Therefore, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined during MB gaming, the winning flag of "Replay 1" and all the small roles (common bell, left correct bell, middle The seven winning flags (correct bell, right correct bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2) are turned on.
Similarly, when the winning number "2" (single winning of "Replay 2") is determined during the MB game, the winning flag of "Replay 2" and the winning flags of all the small winning combinations are turned on.

Then, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined during MB gaming, that is, when the winning flag of "Replay 1" and the winning flags of all small roles are turned on. In this case, the same stop position determination table is selected as when only the winning flag of the left correct answer bell is on. However, during the MB game, the specified number is 1 (one coin is inserted), and the payout is different from non-RT, and the payout is 14 or 15 coins.
As a result, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined during MB gaming, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the first stop on the left (when the pressing order is correct), 14 When the symbol combination that results in a payout of 15 medals stops on the active line and the stop switch 42 is operated at a position other than the first stop on the left (when the push order is incorrect), the symbol combination that results in a payout of 15 medals stops on the active line. Stop at active line.

Similarly, when the winning number "2" (single winning of "Replay 2") is determined during MB gaming, the same stop position determination table is selected as when only the winning flag of the right correct answer bell is on, and the right At the first stop (when the pressing order is correct), 14 pieces are paid out, and at times other than the first stop on the right (when the pressing order is incorrect), 15 pieces are paid out.
Then, in the first game during the MB game, a press order that results in a payout of 14 coins is reported, and in the second game during the MB game, a press order that results in a payout of 15 coins is reported.
As mentioned above, the condition for ending the MB game is set when the number of medals paid out exceeds 14, so by making such a notification, 29 medals will be paid out during the MB game. You can do it like this. Furthermore, since the specified number is set to "1" during the MB game, the player can obtain 27 medals, which is the sum of the payout number "29" minus the input number "2".

Furthermore, in order to notify the player of a pressing order that is advantageous to the player during the MB game, it is necessary to shift to an advantageous section.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26(c), in non-RT or RT, when the winning number "15" (single winning of "MB") is determined in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the advantageous section lottery is won. The probability is set to "16384/16384", that is, "100%".

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the effect group number selection means 64. This effect group number selection means 64 is for selecting the effect group number corresponding to the winning number and the number to be transmitted to the sub control board 80.
As shown in FIG. 26(c), the performance group number corresponding to the winning number is determined in advance. Specifically, production group numbers "0" to "3" are determined in correspondence with winning numbers "0" to "3", and production group numbers "4" and "4" are determined in correspondence to winning numbers "4" to "6". '' are determined, and production group numbers ``5'' to ``13'' are determined corresponding to winning numbers ``7'' to ``15''.
Then, when the winning number is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61, the performance group number selection means 64 selects the performance group number corresponding to the determined winning number.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a push order instruction number selection means 63. This pressing order instruction number selection means 63 selects the determined winning numbers when the winning numbers corresponding to the pressing order bells (left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, right correct answer bell) are determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. This is for selecting the pressing order instruction number (corresponding to the correct pressing order) corresponding to the pressing order.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a control command transmitting means 71. The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control commands) necessary for the production output by the sub-control board 80 to the sub-control board 80.
In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting means 71 sends, as control commands, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, a push order instruction number (when AT is in progress and when the correct answer is pressed). In addition to information such as the winning number (only when the winning number corresponding to the condition device with the , inside RB, inside BB, inside RB, inside BB, inside MB), the presentation group number, etc. are transmitted to the sub control board 80.

As a result, the sub-control board 80 side judges the gaming state on the main control board 50 side and the condition devices (excluding the left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, and right correct answer bell) operating in the winning combination lottery means 61. be able to.
In addition, on the sub-control board 80 side, it can be determined that the left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, or the right correct answer bell has been won based on the performance group number, but the left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, or the right correct answer bell It is not possible to determine which one of them won (in which order the correct answer was pressed).
Further, during AT, the correct pressing order can be notified by the pressing order instruction number.

Further, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects during the game and while waiting for the game.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmitting means 71) sends information (necessary for outputting effects) to the sub-control board 80 in one direction. control command).
Similar to the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
Further, the sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the production lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. via the input port 81 or the output port 82.

Furthermore, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes a performance output control means 91 and the like, and the ROM 84 of the sub control board 80 includes a performance determination table and the like.
Further, a plurality of performance determination tables are provided that define the performance to be output, and the performance output control means 91 determines the performance to be output using any of the performance determination tables, and determines the performance to be output using one of the performance determination tables. control to output.
That is, the production output control means 91 determines what kind of production to output at what timing based on the control command received from the main control board 50 and any production determination table, and performs the determination. Accordingly, the outputs of the production lamp 21, speaker 22, and image display device 23 are controlled.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a production determination table used in both non-RT (non-interior) and RT (non-AT and non-interior), and FIG. 28 is a production determination table commonly used in RB interior and BB interior. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 27, in the ninth embodiment, there are 18 types of presentation patterns ranging from "no presentation" to "continuous presentation". Furthermore, each production pattern from "Character Production (Enthusiasm)" to "Continuous Production" defines production with different content.
For example, the "confirmation performance" is a performance that lets the player know that he or she has won the special prize, and the "post-first-stop notification performance" is a performance after the first stop (after the first operation of the stop switch 42). It is a performance that is output at a timing, and the "left first stop performance" is a performance that instructs that the left stop switch 42 should be operated first, and the "continuous performance" is a performance that is output continuously over multiple games. This is the effect that is output.

Further, the column "Number of performance patterns distributed" in FIG. 27 shows the number of distribution patterns of each performance pattern when each performance group number is received. Dividing the number of performance patterns distributed by "256" gives the selection probability of each performance pattern. In addition, in FIG. 27, the name of the corresponding conditional device is written below each performance group number.
For example, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined in a lottery by the role lottery means 61 in non-RT, and the production group number "1" is transmitted, the probability of selecting "no production" is "128/256", the selection probability of "Character production (liveliness)" is "20/256", the selection probability of "Conversation production (liveliness)" is also "20/256", and the selection probability of "Cut-in production" is "20/256". The selection probability of ``(strong effect)'' is ``0/256''.

As described above, the control command transmitting means 71 sends information indicating the gaming state (non-RT, RT, inside RB, inside BB, inside RB, inside BB, inside MB) to the sub-control board 80; Send the production group number.
Then, the performance output control means 91 of the sub-control board 80 selects a performance determination table according to the gaming state based on the information indicating the gaming state received from the main control board 50, and combines the selected performance determination table with the main Based on the performance group number received from the control board 50, it is determined which performance pattern to output the performance, and the outputs of the performance lamp 21, speaker 22, and image display device 23 are controlled according to the determination.

Here, in non-RT (non-internal), if the winning number "14" (single winning of "BB") is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61 and the production group number "12" is transmitted, the production output is The control means 91 selects the performance determination table shown in FIG. 27 that is commonly used for non-RT and RT (non-AT), and changes the position in the column of performance group number "12" (single winning of "BB") in this performance determination table. The number is used to determine which performance pattern to output. As shown in FIG. 27, when "BB" is won alone in non-RT, "continuous performance" is selected with a probability of "40/256", for example.

On the other hand, if the winning number "0"("non-winning") is determined in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 within the BB and the production group number "0" is transmitted, the production output control means 91 will: Select the performance determination table shown in FIG. 28 that is used for both RB internal and BB internal, and use the number placed in the performance group number "0"("non-winning") column in this performance determination table to select which production. Decide whether to output the pattern performance. As shown in FIG. 28, when there is a "non-winning" within the BB, the "confirmed performance" is selected with a probability of "80/256", for example.
In this way, the performance output control means 91 controls the game in which "BB" is won alone by the role lottery means 61 in non-RT (non-inside) and the game in which "BB" is won alone by the role lottery means 61 during inside BB. A performance to be output is determined using a different performance determination table for each game. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each performance pattern are different.

In addition, in non-RT, when the winning number "14" (single winning of "BB") is determined in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 on the main control board 50 side The winning flag of "BB" included in the condition device of "BB" corresponding to " is turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the winning flag of "BB" is on and the other winning flags are off. This stop position determination table is referred to as a "BB-only stop position determination table."

The "stop position determination table for single BB" is used to stop each reel 31 so that the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on the active line, and so that the symbol combination corresponding to combinations other than BB does not stop on the active line. determining the position.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 controls the stop switch 42 based on the "BB single stop position determination table" and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated. The stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.

In addition, when the winning number is "0"("non-winning") in the drawing by the winning combination drawing means 61 inside the BB, on the main control board 50 side, the winning flag control means 62 selects the carried-over "BB". Keep the winning flag on and turn off the other winning flags. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the winning flag of "BB" is on and the other winning flags are off. That is, the same "BB single stop position determination table" is selected as when "BB" is won alone by the combination lottery means 61 in non-RT.
For this reason, when it becomes "non-winning" in the winning combination lottery means 61 in BB, the same stop control of the reel 31 is performed as when "BB" is won alone in the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT. Furthermore, "stop control of the same reels 31 is performed" means that if each stop switch 42 is operated in the same manner (pressing order and operation timing), each reel 31 will stop at the same position, and the same reel 31 will stop at the same position. This means that the stopping number will be displayed.

In this way, on the main control board 50 side, when "BB" is won alone by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT, and when "BB" is "not won" by the winning combination lottery means 61 inside BB, the same The stop position of the reel 31 is determined using the stop position determination table, but on the sub-control board 80 side, a different performance determination table is used to determine the performance to be output. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each performance pattern are different.
Thereby, even if the stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control board 80 side, and the effects can be diversified.
In addition, even if the same reel 31 is controlled to stop on the main control board 50 side and the same stop result is displayed, different effects are output on the sub control board 80 side, so it is possible to win a special prize. It is possible to enable the player to guess that the player is in the middle of the game.

Furthermore, by selecting different effect determination tables on the sub-control board 80 for when non-RT "BB" wins alone and when "non-winning" inside BB, "BB" during non-RT When winning, a performance determination table with a low probability of selecting a confirmed performance (a performance that lets the player know that he has won the BB) is selected, and when there is a "non-winning" within the BB, a performance with a high probability of selecting a confirmed performance is selected. A decision table can be selected.
As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that he or she has won "BB" in the game in which "BB" has been won. By making it easy for players to understand, it is possible to make the player aim to win the "BB" and to prevent the player from staying in the BB forever, thereby preventing the player from being at a disadvantage.

In addition, in non-RT, when the winning number "8" (double winning of "Watermelon + BB") is determined in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 and the production group number "6" is transmitted, the production output control means 91: Select the effect determination table shown in FIG. 27 that is commonly used for non-RT (non-internal) and RT (non-AT and non-internal), and win the duplicate effect group number "6" ("watermelon + BB") in this effect determination table. ) is used to determine which performance pattern to output. As shown in FIG. 27, when "Watermelon + BB" double wins in non-RT, for example, there is a probability of "50/256" that "Character production (Enjoyment)", "Conversation production (Enjoyment)", or "Cut-in production ( ``Strong effect)'' and select ``Continuous effect'' with a probability of ``30/256''.

On the other hand, if the winning number "7" (single winning of "Watermelon") is determined in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 within the BB and the production group number "5" is transmitted, the production output control means 91 , select the performance determination table shown in FIG. 28 that is used in both RB internal and BB internal, and use the number set in the performance group number "5" (single winning of "Watermelon") column in this performance determination table. , determine which performance pattern to output. As shown in FIG. 28, when "Watermelon" is won alone in the BB, for example, "Character production (Enjoyment)" or "Conversation production (Enjoyment)" is selected with a probability of "73/256", and "20 Select a continuous performance with a probability of "/256".
In this way, the effect output control means 91 controls the game in which "Watermelon + BB" is won twice by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT (non-inside), and the game in which "Watermelon" is won independently by the winning combination lottery means 61 during BB inside. The performance to be output is determined using a different performance determination table depending on the game played. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each performance pattern are different.

In addition, during the non-internal period, in order to maintain the player's expectations for winning "BB" for a long time by showing the player a continuous performance that spans multiple games, the continuous performance can be selected when "Watermelon + BB" is won twice. The probability is set high.
On the other hand, during BB, if the player is shown a continuous performance that spans multiple games, the winning of "BB" will be delayed and the player's medals will decrease, so "Watermelon" can be won individually. In order to make the player aim for the "BB" prize early, the selection probability of the continuous performance is set low at the time of the winning, and the selection probability of the confirmed performance at the time of "non-winning" is set high.
Note that the probability of winning each role and the number of coins to be paid out at the time of winning may be set in the BB so that the player's medals do not decrease, and then the selection probability of the continuous performance may be set high.

In addition, in non-RT (non-internal), when the winning number "8" (double winning of "Watermelon + BB") is determined in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 on the main control board 50 side , the two winning flags "Watermelon" and "BB" included in the "Watermelon + BB" condition device corresponding to the winning number "8" are turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags "Watermelon" and "BB" are on and the other winning flags are off. This stop position determination table is referred to as a "watermelon+BB overlapping stop position determination table."

"Watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table" is designed to allow symbol combinations corresponding to watermelon or BB to stop on active lines, and to prevent symbol combinations corresponding to roles other than watermelon and BB from stopping on active lines. The stopping position of the reel 31 is determined.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 controls the stop switch based on the "watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table" and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated. The stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to 42 is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.

In addition, when the winning number "7" (single winning of "Watermelon") is determined in the drawing by the winning combination drawing means 61 inside the BB, on the main control board 50 side, the winning flag control means 62 selects the carried-over winning number "7". While keeping the winning flag of "BB" on, in addition, turn on the winning flag of "Watermelon" included in the condition device of "Watermelon" corresponding to winning number "7", and win "Watermelon" and "BB". " Winning flags other than "" will be turned off. As a result, the two winning flags "Watermelon" and "BB" are turned on. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags "Watermelon" and "BB" are on and the other winning flags are off. That is, the same "Watermelon + BB overlap stop position determination table" as when "Watermelon + BB" is won twice by the combination lottery means 61 in non-RT is selected.

Therefore, when "Watermelon" is won alone by the winning combination lottery means 61 while inside BB, the same stop control of the reel 31 is performed as when "Watermelon + BB" is won twice by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT. .
In this way, on the main control board 50 side, when "Watermelon + BB" is won twice by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT, and when "Watermelon" is won independently by the winning combination lottery means 61 during BB, Although the same stop position determination table is used to determine the stop position of the reel 31, on the sub-control board 80 side, a different performance determination table is used to determine the performance to be output. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each performance pattern are different.

In addition, when you win "Cherry 1 + BB" multiple times in non-RT, and when you win "Cherry 1" alone in BB, when you win "Watermelon + BB" multiple times in non-RT, and when you win "Cherry 1" alone in BB, As in the case of winning "Watermelon" alone, the main control board 50 side determines the stop position of the reel 31 using the same stop position determination table, but the sub control board 80 side uses a different effect determination table. Use this to determine the performance to be output. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each performance pattern are different.

Furthermore, when you win "Cherry 2 + BB" or "Cherry 2 + RB" multiple times in non-RT, and when you win "Cherry 2" alone in BB or RB, you can win "Watermelon + BB" in non-RT. In the same way as in the case of multiple winnings and in the case of a single winning of "Watermelon" in the BB, the main control board 50 side determines the stopping position of the reel 31 using the same stopping position determination table, but the sub control On the board 80 side, a different effect determination table is used to determine the effect to be output. Therefore, the selection probabilities of each performance pattern are different.
Thereby, even if the stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control board 80 side, so it is possible to diversify the effects.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the number of allocations for each performance pattern is the same when "Watermelon" is won alone in non-RT and when "Watermelon" is won alone in BB. Therefore, the selection probabilities for each performance pattern are the same.
However, when "Watermelon" is won alone in non-RT, the winning flag of "Watermelon" is on and the corresponding stop position determination table is selected when the other winning flags are off. When "Watermelon" is won alone while inside BB, the two winning flags "Watermelon" and "BB" are on, and when the other winning flags are off, select the corresponding stop position determination table. do. Therefore, the stop control of the reels 31 is different when a "watermelon" is won alone in a non-RT and when a "watermelon" is won alone in the BB.
In this way, on the sub-control board 80 side, the selection probability of each performance pattern is the same when "Watermelon" is won alone in non-RT and when "Watermelon" is won alone in BB. , the stop control of the reel 31 is different on the main control board 50 side.

As explained above, in a plurality of gaming states, the random numbers extracted by the random number extraction means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are the same, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are the same. Therefore, when the same conditional device is activated, the stop control of the reels 31 (selected stop position determination table) for each gaming state is the same, but the selection probability of each performance pattern (selected performance determination table) is the same. ) may be different.

Furthermore, in a plurality of gaming states, the random numbers extracted by the random number extraction means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are different, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are the same, and the same conditions are met. When the device operates, the stop control of the reels 31 (selected stop position determination table) is the same for each gaming state, but the selection probabilities of each performance pattern (selected performance determination table) may be different. .

Furthermore, in a plurality of gaming states, the random numbers extracted by the random number extraction means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are different, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are different, and the same condition device When activated, the stop control of the reels 31 (selected stop position determination table) for each game state is the same, but the selection probability of each performance pattern (selected performance determination table) may be different.

<Modified example of the ninth embodiment>
Although the ninth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
(1) Types of combinations shown in the ninth embodiment, types of conditional devices, types of gaming states, prescribed numbers in each gaming state, payout when each winning combination, allocation of internal lottery numbers, advantageous section lottery settings The allocation of the number, the type of performance pattern, the allocation of the allocated number of each performance pattern, etc. are merely examples, and can be set as appropriate depending on the game content.

(2) In the ninth embodiment, only the number table for internal lottery and advantageous section lottery in setting 1 was shown, but six stages from setting 1 to setting 6 are provided as setting values, and each setting value has a different internal drawing. A number table for lottery and advantageous section lottery can be provided.
(3) In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information indicating the gaming state and the production group number to the sub-control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 side judges the gaming state and condition device on the main control board 50 side, and selects a production pattern with a probability according to the gaming state and condition device. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the control command transmitting means 71 may transmit to the sub-control board 80 a winning number determined by an internal lottery, or transmit information indicating a condition device corresponding to a winning number determined by an internal lottery. Good too. Then, on the sub-control board 80 side, the condition device on the main control board 50 side may be determined based on the received winning number and information indicating the condition device.

Further, for example, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits to the sub-control board 80 information indicating the condition device determined by internal lottery and information on the winning combination. Then, on the sub-control board 80 side, the gaming state on the main control board 50 side may be determined based on the information indicating the condition device and the information on the winning combination.
Furthermore, for example, if the sub control board 80 receives information indicating that "BB" has won, but does not receive information indicating that "BB" has won, the gaming state on the main control board 50 side will change. It can be determined that it is inside the BB.
Then, based on the gaming state on the main control board 50 side determined by the sub control board 80 side and the information indicating the performance group number, winning number, and condition device received from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 side You may also select a performance pattern.

(4) For example, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits to the sub-control board 80 information indicating on/off of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination and information on the winning combination. Then, on the sub-control board 80 side, the gaming state and condition device on the main control board 50 side may be determined based on the information indicating whether the winning flag is on/off and the information on the winning combination.
For example, if information indicating that the winning flag for "BB" is on is received, but information indicating that "BB" has won is not received, the gaming state on the main control board 50 side is in the BB internal state. It can be determined that

Also, since the lottery for "BB" is not performed while inside the BB, when information indicating that only the winning flag for "BB" is on is received while inside the BB, the internal lottery on the main control board 50 side is not performed. It can be determined that the winning number "0"("non-winning") has been determined.
Then, based on the gaming state on the main control board 50 side determined on the sub control board 80 side and the condition device on the main control board 50 side also determined on the sub control board 80 side, the production pattern is created on the sub control board 80 side. may be selected.

(5) In the ninth embodiment, "single winning" is used to mean winning only the roles other than the special role, and not winning the special roles at the same time, and "multiple winning" means winning only the roles other than the special role. , is used to mean that the special role and other roles other than the special role are won at the same time.
For example, the winning of "Watermelon + Control Role 1" in the BB is a double win in the sense that multiple types of roles are won at the same time, but the winning is only for roles other than the special role, and the special role is Since they are not elected at the same time, in the sense of the ninth embodiment, this is a single election.

Also, on the main control board 50 side, when "Watermelon + Controller 1 + BB" is won (duplicate winning) in non-internal and when "Watermelon + Controller 1" in BB is won (single winning), Since the on/off state of the winning flag is the same, the stopping position of the reel 31 is determined using the same stopping position determination table, but since the winning number and presentation group number are different, on the sub control board 80 side, A performance to be output is determined using a different performance determination table.
In addition, the "control combination" is a combination for changing the stop position determination table to be selected by changing the on/off state of the winning flag, thereby changing the stop control of the reels 31, and making it possible to win a prize. It's not a role for you.

(6) In the ninth embodiment, when the winning number "11" (single winning of "Cherry 2") is determined in RB or BB, advantageous section lottery can be executed, but multiple types of The advantageous section lottery may not be executed when winning a winning combination that overlaps with a special winning combination.
(7) The first to ninth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to ninth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Tenth embodiment>
The tenth embodiment relates to control of the display of the management information display LED 74.
The main CPU 55 is in a setting change state (setting change mode, setting changing), setting confirmation state for 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on power-on (for example, when power is turned on, when starting interrupt processing for the first time, when starting a program, etc.). (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation), in the RWM abnormal error state, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are controlled to be in a lighting state.
As described in the second embodiment, the management information display LED 74 is composed of four-digit LEDs, so when all the LEDs are lit, "8888" is displayed. This makes it possible to check whether there is any problem with the LED of the management information display LED 74.

Furthermore, when the setting key switch is on when the power is turned on, the device shifts to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed. Further, when the setting change state is entered, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on.
The 5 seconds from the predetermined timing based on power-on is set to be longer than the time required from power-on to transition to the setting change state if the setting key switch is turned on at power-on. There is.

Here, for example, suppose that the lighting period of all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is set to be shorter than the time required from power-on to transition to the setting change state. In this case, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are first turned on, then the management information is once displayed on the management information display LED 74, and then all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on again. For this reason, there is a possibility that the manager (the hall clerk) may suspect that there is some sort of malfunction with the gaming machine.

Therefore, the lighting period of all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is set to 5 seconds.
Note that the lighting period of all LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is not limited to 5 seconds, but may be any period of time that is longer than the time required from power-on to transition to the setting change state. It may be set to

The test pattern display of the management information display LED 74 will be further explained below.
In the tenth embodiment, the four-digit LEDs included in the management information display LED 74 are referred to as "digit 6,""digit7,""digit8," and "digit 9" in order from the left.
Furthermore, among the four-digit LEDs that the management information display LED 74 has, the two LEDs on the left (digits 6 and 7) are called "identification segments", and the two LEDs on the right (digits 8 and 9) are called "ratio segment". It is called "Seg."

Furthermore,
Digit 6: Upper digit of the identification segment Digit 7: Lower digit of the identification segment Digit 8: Upper digit of the ratio segment Digit 9: Lower digit of the ratio segment.
Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, each LED (digit) of the management information display LED 74 is an 8-segment LED consisting of segments A to G and segment DP.

The test pattern display on the management information display LED 74 is performed to confirm whether all segments (segments A to G and DP) are correctly lit and extinguished. Therefore, during the period (time) during which the test pattern is displayed, all segments are set to have a lit state and a non-lit state.
Further, when displaying the test pattern on the management information display LED 74, it is displayed at one of the following timings.
(1) Within 5 seconds from the specified timing based on power-on (2) Within 5 seconds from setting change start processing (3) Settings being changed (mode) (4) Settings being confirmed (mode) (5) RWM abnormal error in progress

As a test pattern, firstly, a predetermined display is switched every second and displayed for 5 seconds. Note that the time for maintaining one display is not limited to 1 second, and the display time of a test pattern is not limited to 5 seconds (any time other than 5 seconds is sufficient).
Then, the test pattern is set so that all the segments of all the LEDs are in a lit state and in a non-lit state during the 5 seconds which is the display time of the test pattern.
A second test pattern is to blink all segments of all LEDs. Even with this setting, all segments of all LEDs can be turned on and off with one blink (on and off).

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example 1 of test pattern display on the management information display LED 74.
In the test pattern displays of FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, which will be described later, lit segments are shown by solid lines, and unlit segments are shown by dotted lines. Furthermore, in the segment DP, the lighting state is indicated by a black circle, and the response to turning off the light is indicated by a white circle.
Furthermore, in the following description, "." indicates that the segment DP is in the lit state, and "." indicates that the segment DP is in the unlit state.

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 29, two types of display for each LED of the test pattern are provided.
One of them is a pattern that displays "0.". More specifically, this is a pattern in which segments A to F and DP are lit, and segment G is turned off.
The other pattern is to display "-." More specifically, the pattern is such that segment G is lit and segments A to F and DP are off.
Therefore, "0." and "-." have an inverse relationship between lit and unlit segments, respectively.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 29(a), "0." is displayed in the upper digits of the identification segment and the upper digits of the ratio segment, and "-." is displayed in the lower digits of the identification segment and the lower digits of the ratio segment.
Furthermore, in Example 1 shown in FIG. 29, the display state shown in FIG. 29(a) is maintained for one second. Note that the count for one second may be measured by the number of interrupt processing. For example, when you start the display in Figure 29(a), you set "447(D)" in the counter, and subtract "1" for each interrupt process, and when it reaches "0", An example of this is a) ending the display. As a result, the display shown in FIG. 29(a) can be maintained for "2.235×447=999.045 ms".

When the display for about 1 second in FIG. 29(a) ends, the display shifts to the display in FIG. 29(b).
Furthermore, the display in FIG. 29(b) is the display in FIG. 29(a) in which the LED displaying "0." and the LED displaying "-." are replaced. That is, in the display of FIG. 29(b), contrary to the display of FIG. 29(a), "-." is displayed in the upper digits of the identification segment and the upper digits of the ratio segment, and "-." is displayed in the lower digits of the identification segment and the lower digits of the ratio segment. is displayed as "0.".
Furthermore, as in the case of FIG. 29(a), the display state shown in FIG. 29(b) continues for one second (447 interrupt).

The display contents of FIGS. 29(a) and 29(b) are switched and displayed every second, and this is executed for 5 seconds. Therefore, in FIG. 29, (c) and (e) have the same display content as (a), and (d) has the same display content as (b).
When the display of the test pattern (5 seconds) ends, the display shifts to the normal ratio display.
In FIG. 29, (f) shows an example in which the advantageous section ratio is displayed as "7.U.5.0.". Further, instead of the advantageous section ratio, the accessory ratio may be displayed.

As described above, when "0." and "-." are displayed on the LED, it is possible to create a lighting state and a lighting-off state for all segments (A to G and DP). It is easy to visually determine if the light cannot be turned off or turned off.
Further, when displaying a ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment displays "0.-." or "-.0.". Therefore, there is no risk of confusing the test pattern with the original ratio display.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a second example of the test pattern display of the management information display LED 74.
In Example 1 of FIG. 29, the display contents were changed every second and the test pattern was displayed for 5 seconds. As described above, such a test pattern is suitable for displaying within 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on power-on or within 5 seconds from setting change start processing.
On the other hand, example 2 of the test pattern display shown in FIG. 30 is suitable for displaying the test pattern until a predetermined termination condition is met, such as during setting change, setting confirmation, or RWM abnormal error. .
It goes without saying that the test pattern display of FIG. 29 may be used to display the test pattern until a predetermined end condition is met.
Similarly, it goes without saying that the test pattern display of FIG. 30 may be used to display the test pattern display within a predetermined period after the test pattern display start condition is satisfied.

In Example 2 of FIG. 30, "8.8.8.8." is a state in which all segments of all LEDs are lit, and "*" is a state in which all segments of all LEDs are turned off. *.*.*."("*" indicates that segments A to G are off) are repeated alternately. In other words, this is a pattern in which "8.8.8.8." is displayed blinking.
In example 2 of FIG. 30, all segments are kept lit for 0.3 seconds as shown in FIG. 30(a), and then all segments are kept off for 0.3 seconds as shown in FIG. 30(b). Then, by repeating the lighting state shown in FIG. 30(a) and the off state shown in FIG. 30(b), a blinking state is obtained.

In the tenth embodiment, the blinking interval is set to 0.3 seconds. For example, if you set "134 (D)" as the initial value of the timer, and subtract "1" from the timer value every 2.235ms of interrupt processing, and when the timer value becomes "0", the lighting time or It is determined that the lights-out time has passed. Thereby, by counting the number of interrupts "134", it is possible to count "299.49" ms.

Also in the second example of the test pattern display in FIG. 30, by using "8." and "*.", it is possible to create a lit state and a non-lit state for all segments. Therefore, segment failure (unable to turn on or turn off) can be easily determined visually.
Further, when displaying the ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment displays "8.8.". For example, when the ratio reaches 88%, the display will blink regardless of the ratio, but in that case, "8.8." will be displayed and the segment DP will not light up. On the other hand, when displaying "8.8.", the segment DP is also lit, so there is no confusion between the two.

Note that each ratio displayed on the management information display LED 74 is updated (calculated) at the end of the game (after all the reels 31 have stopped and the payout process has ended). Then, in subsequent interrupt processing, the updated ratio is displayed. If a power outage occurs immediately before the ratio is updated and the test pattern is displayed for 5 seconds after the power is restored, the ratio will be updated (calculated) during the 5 seconds that the test pattern is displayed. Execute. Then, when the test pattern display ends and the ratio display starts, the updated ratio is displayed after the power is restored from the power-off.

<Eleventh embodiment>
FIG. 31(A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display board 75 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 31(B) is a diagram showing the management information display LED 74 in the eleventh embodiment. Moreover, the same figure (C) is a figure which shows the setting value display LED73 in 11th Embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 31(A), the credit display LED 76 is composed of digit 1a (upper digit) and digit 2a (lower digit). The acquisition number display LED 78 is composed of digit 3a (upper digit) and digit 4a (lower digit).
Here, "digit" means a display section (display), and in particular, in this embodiment, it is composed of seven segment LEDs (so-called 7 segments).
These digits 1a to 4a are all seven segment displays with dot segments (segment P). In particular, the segment P of digit 4a (lower digit of the number-of-achievement display LED 78) functions as the advantageous section display LED 77.

The digit 5a is composed of six dot LEDs, and these six dot LEDs are collectively referred to as a status display LED 79. In FIG. 1, the credit number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78 are shown, but the status display LED 79 is not shown. However, in reality, as shown in FIG. 31(A), a credit number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79 are mounted on the display board 75.
In the status display LED 79, the 1-bet display LED 79a to 3-bet display LED 79c are LEDs that each display the number of medals bet at that time. When one medal is bet, only the one bet display LED 79a lights up. When two medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the 2-bet display LED 79b are lit. When three medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a, 2-bet display LED 79b, and 3-bet display LED 79c are all configured to light up.

Moreover, the game start display LED 79d is an LED that lights up when medals are inserted and the start switch 41 becomes operable. Therefore, it does not light up when medals are not bet (or replay is not automatically inserted).
The insertion display LED 79e is an LED that lights up when a medal can be inserted. That is, the light is lit before the game ends and the medals for the next game are inserted, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. Note that even after the replay has been activated, it lights up when a bet is possible according to the number of credits. Then, when the number of bets is the maximum (when no more bets can be made), the insertion display LED 79e is turned off.

The replay display LED 79f is an LED that lights up when a replay win is made, and when an automatic bet is made based on a replay win, the replay display LED 79f lights up to inform the player that an automatic bet state is in place.
Note that the status display LED 79 not shown in FIG. 31(A) includes, for example, a payment display LED (an LED that lights up during payment processing), but its illustration is omitted in FIG. 31(A).

Further, in FIG. 31(B), the management information display LED 74 is the same as that shown in FIGS. 10, 29, and 30, and is composed of four digits 1b to 4b. These digits 1b-4b, like the above-mentioned digits 1a-4a, are a 7-segment display with dot segments (segment P). Digits 1b to 4b indicate the upper information type, the lower information type, the higher numerical value, and the lower numerical value, respectively.
Further, the segment P of digit 2b (lower information type) functions as a digit separator display LED. The digit separator display LED is used to clearly mark the separator between the information type and the numerical value.

Furthermore, the segments P of digits 1b to 4b can be lit when displaying a test pattern, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30.
Furthermore, in FIG. 31(C), the setting value display LED 73 is the same as that shown in FIG. ) consists of digit 5b.
Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5b) are mounted on the main control board 50.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b and segments A to G and P in this embodiment.
The 7-segment digit is composed of 7 bar-shaped segments A to G and one dot-shaped segment P. Note that an LED consisting of segments A to G without segment P may be referred to as "7 segments", and an LED consisting of 8 segments including segment P may be referred to as "8 segments"; however, in this specification, In the book, the term ``7-segment'' includes an LED made up of eight segments.

As shown in FIG. 32, for example, of the digit 1a, segments A to G constitute the seven upper digit segments of the credit number display LED 76, and segment P is unused. Similarly, each of segments A to G of digits 2a and 3a constitutes 7 segments of the lower digit of the credit number display LED and the upper digit of the earned number display LED 78, and segment DP is unused.
Furthermore, the segments A to G of the digit 4a constitute the lower 7 segments of the acquisition number display LED 78, and the segment P constitutes the advantageous section display LED 77.

Digit 5a is an LED that constitutes status display LED 79. As shown in FIG. 32, segment A of digit 5a corresponds to the 1 bet display LED 79a, segment B corresponds to the 2 bet display LED 79b, . . . segment F corresponds to the replay display LED 79f. Furthermore, segments G and P of digit 5a are not provided.

Digits 1b to 4b constitute a management information display LED 74, and segments 1b and 2b display information types of management information. Furthermore, segments 3b and 4b display numerical values corresponding to the information types displayed in segments 1b and 2b among the management information. Segments P of digits 1b, 3b, and 4b are normally off, but are lit when a test pattern is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30. Furthermore, the segment P of the digit 2b functions as a digit separator display LED for making the boundary between the digits 1b and 2b indicating the information type and the digits 3b and 4b indicating the numerical value clear and facilitating confirmation. Note that while the above-described test pattern is being displayed, the digit separator display LED may be repeatedly turned on and off like the segments P of other digits, or it may be kept on all the time.

Furthermore, among the digits 5b, segments A to G constitute seven segments of the set value display LED 73, and segment P is an LED that lights up during a setting change. That is, when the segment P of the set value display LED 73 is off, it indicates that the setting is being confirmed, and when the segment P is lit, it indicates that the setting is being changed. Note that the segment P of the setting value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to this usage. For example, the segment P of the set value display LED 73 may be a segment that lights up when the set value is confirmed during a setting change.

Further, FIG. 32 illustrates the structure of segment data. The segment data is 1-byte data, and the D0 bit corresponds to segment A, the D1 bit corresponds to segment B, . . . , and the D7 bit corresponds to segment P.
For example, when displaying "0" in digit 1a, segments A to F are turned on and segments G and P are turned off, so the segment data becomes "00111111(B)".

Furthermore, when displaying "1" in the digit 4a and lighting up the advantageous section display LED 77, segments B, C, and P are lit, so the segment data becomes "10000110 (B)."
Furthermore, before the game starts, when three medals are bet and the game can be started, the 1 bet display LED 79a, the 2 bet display LED 79b, the 3 bet display LED 79c, and the game start display LED 79d are lit. The segment data of 5a is "00001111(B)".

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the output port 52 in the eleventh embodiment. Note that the types of output ports are not limited to those shown in FIG. 33.
As the output ports 52 of the eleventh embodiment, one output port (output port 2) that transmits a digit signal and two output ports (output ports 3 and 4) that transmit segment signals are provided. .
Output port 3 is an output port that transmits segment signals of credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, and status display LED 79 (digits 1a to 5a).
Further, the output port 4 is an output port for transmitting segment signals of the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the setting value display LED 73.

In output port 2, digit 1 to 5 signals are assigned to bits D0 to D4, respectively. Here, the digit 1 signal includes both the digit 1a signal and the digit 1b signal, and the same applies to the digits 2 to 5 signals. Therefore, for example, when a signal of "1" is output from the D0 bit of output port 2, both digit 1a (credit number display LED 76 (upper digit)) and digit 1b (management information display LED 74 (information type upper digit)) are output. A drive signal is provided.

Furthermore, in output port 2, bits D5 to D7 are unused.
Output port 3 is an output port for segment A to P signals of digits 1a to 5a, and segment A to P signals are assigned to bits D0 to D7, respectively.
Similarly, output port 4 is an output port for segment A to P signals of digits 1b to 5b, and segment A to P signals are assigned to bits D0 to D7, respectively.
Furthermore, the output port 5 outputs external signals 1 to 5, a data strobe signal, a medal input signal, and a medal payout signal.

Here, the "external signal" is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (the hall computer 200, a data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external centralized terminal board 100. Specifically, for example, the advantageous section, AT, specific RT, external signals 1 to 3 indicating that the accessory is in operation, and external signal 4 indicating that an error has occurred in the slot machine 10 or a power outage has occurred, etc. , an external signal 5 indicating the opening of the front door of the slot machine 10 is provided.

Further, the data strobe signal is a signal sent to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the data strobe signal, it controls the sub-control data signal to be acquired from the buffer provided in the sub-control board 80 based on the rise of the data strobe signal.
Note that from output ports (not shown) other than output ports 2 to 5 shown in FIG. 33, for example, a signal of the motor 32, a signal of the blocker 45, a drive signal of the hopper motor 36, a condition device signal (so-called winning number) , sub-control data signals, test signals, etc. are output.

FIG. 34(A) is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupts, LED display counter values, digit signals, and segment signals in the eleventh embodiment. Further, FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an LED display request flag.
In this embodiment, the main control board 50 processes a main process (M_MAIN) (described later in FIG. 41) that is performed for each game, and an interrupt process (M_MAIN) that is performed once every 2.235 ms in parallel with this main process. I_INTR) (FIG. 53, which will be described later) is executed.

The LED display counter is a 1-byte data counter that is continuously updated every interrupt. The LED display counter is a counter for determining which digit among digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is to be lit. Regarding each bit of the LED display counter, the D0 bit is assigned to a digit 1 signal, the D1 bit is assigned to a digit 2 signal, . . . , the D4 bit is assigned to a digit 5 signal. In the first interrupt processing, dynamic lighting of digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit that is "1" on the LED display counter is lit.

The LED display counter of this embodiment takes a value of "00010000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter is updated by shifting the bit "1" of the LED display counter value by one digit to the right as the interrupt progresses from "1" to "2" and so on (for each interrupt). In addition, in FIG. 34, at the next interrupt after interrupt "5", the LED display counter is shifted to the right by one digit and becomes "00000000 (B)", but at the time of the interrupt, initialization processing of the LED display counter is performed, Set the LED display counter to "00010000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter repeats the value "5"→"4"→...→"1"→"5"→"4"→... for each interrupt process. That is, five interrupts constitute one cycle.

From the above, the LED display counter value is
"N" interrupt number: 00010000 (B)
“N+1” interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
"N+3" interrupt: 00000010 (B)
"N+4" interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
“N+6” interrupt: 00001000 (B)
:
becomes.

In the eleventh embodiment, five interrupts constitute one cycle, and digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 5b are lit. Specifically, in FIG. 34(A), for example, when the interrupt is "1", that is, when the LED display counter value is "00010000 (B)", a digit 5 signal is output. By outputting the digit 5 signal, digits 5a and 5b can be lit. Therefore, the status display LED 79 and the setting value display LED 73 can be turned on. At the time of the next interrupt "2", the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)", a digit 4 signal is output, and the lower digits of the acquired number display LED 78 and the numerical lower digits of the management information display LED 74 can be lit. .

Moreover, FIG. 34(B) is a diagram showing the data structure of the LED display request flag. The LED display request flag is data indicating a digit that is permitted to be lit. As shown in FIG. 34(B), the LED display request flag is 8-bit data in which the D0 bit corresponds to the digit 1 signal, the D1 bit corresponds to the digit 2 signal, ..., the D4 bit corresponds to the digit 5 signal. be. Each bit of the LED display request flag is made to match the bit of output port 2.
As shown in Figure 34(B), digits 1 to 5 can be lit during normal operation, digits 3 to 5 can be lit while changing settings, and digits 1 to 5 can be lit while checking settings. be. In addition. “Normal” refers to waiting for games and during games.

Then, in the interrupt process, the LED display counter and the LED display request flag are ANDed, and the digit corresponding to the bit that becomes "1" becomes the digit that lights up in the current interrupt process.
For example, if the LED display counter is "00010000 (B)" and the LED display request flag is "00011111 (B) (normal medium)", if the two are ANDed, it will be "00010000 (B)" and the digit 5 Only the signal becomes "1". However, during normal operation (while waiting for the game and during the game), the segment signal is output from the output port 3 and the status display LED 79 can be lit, but the segment signal is not output from the output port 4 and the set value display LED 73 is turned on. (digit 5b) is controlled so as not to light up.

On the other hand, during a setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal turns on (LED display counter is "00010000 (B)"), a segment signal is output from output port 4 and the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5b) is turned on. Enables lighting.
Also, while changing the settings, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 3 or 4 signal turns on (LED display counter is "00000100 (B)" or "00001000 (B)"), the digit 3 signal (acquisition number display LED 78) (upper digit) and digit 4 signal (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) are output, and the acquired number display LED 78 displays "88" (contents indicating that the setting is being changed).

Furthermore, when generating the segment signal of output port 3 at the interrupt timing when the LED display counter is "00001000 (B)" (interrupt "2" in FIG. 34), the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is referred to. To do this. Then, when the advantageous section display LED flag is on, the value obtained by ORing the generated segment signal and "10000000 (B)" is outputted from the output port 3 as a segment signal. Thereby, segment P (advantageous section display LED 77) of digit 4a can be lit.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, names, and contents of data stored in the RWM 53.
Note that the data shown in FIG. 35 is for use in explaining the eleventh embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

Address “F000(H)” is a storage area for setting value data (_NB_RANK). When the set value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the set value data. In this embodiment, the setting values are "1" to "6". Therefore, any value from "0(H)" to "5(H)" is stored as the set value data.
The set value display LED 73 displays "N", which is obtained by adding "1" to the set value data, as the set value.

Address “F010(H)” is a storage area for credit number data (_NB_CREDIT). The credit number data is data to be displayed on the credit number display LED 76. In this embodiment, any value from "0" to "50(D)" is stored as the credit number data.
Here, in this embodiment, a value obtained by converting the number of credits into a decimal number is stored as the number of credits data. For example, when the number of credits to be displayed is "29", the value "29 (H)" is stored. In other words, "00101001(B)" is stored in address "F010(H)". As a result, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of address "F010(H)" are data for displaying the lower digit of the number of credits ("9" in this example), and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are data for displaying the lower digit of the number of credits ("9" in this example). , is data for displaying the upper digit of the number of credits (“2” in this example). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of credits is "50 (D)", so the stored data values are in the range of "0" to "50".
In this embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 that stores the credit number data itself is not provided, but the credit number data is provided as display data of the credit number display LED 76.

Address “F011(H)” is a storage area for acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT). The acquisition number data is data to be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. In the acquisition number data, similarly to the credit number data described above, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 are data for displaying the lower digits, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are data for displaying the upper digits. It is data.
In this embodiment, when a small winning combination is won, the number of payouts corresponding to the winning small winning combination is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, so the payout number data corresponding to the winning small winning combination is stored as the winning number data. Specifically, when a small winning combination is won and medals are paid out, the acquired number data is added as the medals are paid out, and the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is updated. For example, when "1 (H)" is stored as the acquisition number data, "01" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

Here, in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address "F040 (H)" which will be described later, "8 (H)" is stored, for example, when an 8-card winning combination is won, and the payout number data is stored in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at the time of medal payout ( (including addition to credit) is decremented by "1" in the order of "8" → "7" → ... → "0" according to the number of payouts.
On the other hand, the acquired number data stored in the address "F011 (H)" is, for example, when an 8-card winning combination is won, "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "8"``1'' is added each time one medal is paid out. Therefore, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 also counts up in the order of "0" → "1" → "2" → . . . → "8".

Further, in this embodiment, "88" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 during the setting change. Therefore, during the setting change, display data for displaying "88" is stored as the acquisition number data. By displaying "88" on the acquisition number display LED 78, it is possible to identify from the front side of the gaming machine that the settings are being changed. Furthermore, by lighting all the segments as "88", it is possible to confirm that there are no segment defects (that there are no segments that cannot be lit). Note that the upper limit for the number of medals to be paid out is 15, so when "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, it can be understood that this is not a display of the number of medals to be paid out.

Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment described later, when the condition for instructing the specified number (the number of medals to be bet in this game) is met, the start switch 41 is 2), the specified number is instructed (displayed, notified) on the acquired number display LED 78. In this embodiment, "0A" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 to indicate the specified number "2". Therefore, when specifying the specified number, specified specified number display data for displaying "0A" is stored as the acquired number data. Although the details will be described later, the instruction prescribed number display data for displaying "0A" is "0B(H)".

Further, when winning a push order bell or the like during AT, push order instruction information is displayed on the winning number display LED 78. Press order instruction information corresponding to winning numbers "3" to "8" shown in FIG. 58, which will be described later, is "=1" to "=6", respectively. Therefore, when displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, the push order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data. Although details will be described later, the push order instruction numbers corresponding to the push order instruction information "=1" to "=6" are "A1(H)" to "A6(H)", respectively. For example, when displaying the push order instruction information in a game in which the winning number "3" is won, the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is stored as the acquisition number data. As a result, the push order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Further, when a predetermined error occurs, an error number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. Therefore, when a predetermined error occurs, error number display data for displaying the error number is stored as acquisition number data. For example, when the error number to be displayed is "HP", error number display data for displaying "HP" is stored as acquisition number data.

Address "F030(H)" is a storage area for the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION). The operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is a flag for determining whether or not replay and accessories are activated. For example, when 1BB is in operation, the D2 bit of the operating state flag is set to "1".
This operating state flag is updated in the game start setting process described later (step S317 in FIG. 42). For example, in step S313 of FIG. 42, when the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag described later is read and it is determined that the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to replay is stopped and displayed, and the operating state is Set the D0 bit of the flag to "1".
The replay operation state flag (D0 bit) is cleared in step S413 of FIG. 50 (game end check process), which will be described later.
Furthermore, the operational state flag of the accessory is also cleared in the game end check process (not shown in FIG. 50).

Address "F031 (H)" is a storage area for the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN). The symbol combination flag is a flag for determining the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed, and in this embodiment, replay is assigned to the D0 bit and 1BB is assigned to the D2 bit. Therefore, the replay and 1BB bits of the symbol combination display flag are respectively assigned to the same bits as the replay and 1BB bits assigned to the operating state flag.
During the main processing in FIG. 41, in step S291, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. Then, the symbol combination display flag is updated according to the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed. For example, when it is determined that the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to "1".
The symbol combination display flag is cleared at the start of the next game, specifically during the main process in FIG. 41, in step S279 (start switch acceptance process).

Address “F040(H)” is a storage area for payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). The payout number data becomes data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined (step S293 in FIG. 40). When a small winning combination is won, payout number data corresponding to the winning small winning combination is stored, and a medal payout process is executed. Here, each time one medal is paid out (adding "1" to the number of credits, or actually paying out one medal (from the hopper 35)), the payout number data is subtracted by "1". That is, it has a role as the number of times the payout process is executed. As a result, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout number data becomes "0".

The address "F041 (H)" is the storage area of the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). Similar to the payout number data, the payout number data buffer becomes data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined. Here, unlike the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is not subtracted every time one medal is paid out, and the initially stored value is maintained. This value is maintained until the next game's medal payout number update process (step S293 in FIG. 41). For example, when a small winning combination of 8 pieces is won in the game, "8 (H)" is stored as the payout number data buffer, and in the next game, when no winning combination is won, as the payout number data buffer. "0" is overwritten.

Address “F042(H)” is a storage area for automatic bet number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL). The automatic bet number data indicates the number of medals automatically bet upon replay winning, and in this embodiment, "2" or "3" is stored.
The automatic bet number data is set in step S325 during the game start setting process in FIG.
Address “F043(H)” is a storage area for bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). The bet number data indicates the number of bets in the current game, and in this embodiment, any one of "0" to "3" is stored. The bet number data is processed in the medal management process (detects the inserted medals and performs the bet process and credit addition process) in step S276 during the main process in FIG.

Address "F051(H)" is the storage area of the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP). The LED display counter is shown in FIG. 34(A), and as described above, is updated every time an interrupt process is performed.
Address "F052(H)" is a storage area for the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag is shown in FIG. 34(B), and takes a value corresponding to normal mode, setting change mode, or setting confirmation mode.

Address "F061 (H)" is a storage area for the advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND). The advantageous section type flag is a flag indicating whether the current game section is a normal section or an advantageous section.
The advantageous section type flag stores "00000000 (B)" when the section is a normal section, and the D0 bit becomes "1" when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section.
Note that the timing at which the advantageous section type flag is updated will be described later.

Address "F062(H)" is a storage area for the advantageous section display LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED). The advantageous section display LED flag is a flag indicating whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. When the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, the advantageous section display LED flag becomes "0", and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the advantageous section display LED flag becomes "1".
Note that the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at any time after the transition to the advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at the same time as the transition to the advantageous section).

On the other hand, even after shifting to the advantageous section, it is not necessary to light up the advantageous section display LED 77.
Specifically, firstly, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on at the time of transition to the advantageous section, but may be turned on afterwards (during the advantageous section).
Second, when transitioning to an advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on, and if the end condition of the advantageous section is met before the conditions for turning on the advantageous section display LED 77 are met, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even once. You may end the advantageous section without turning on the light.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the instruction function is activated (to notify the correct pressing order) in a gaming state where it is an advantageous section and the section Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1", the advantageous section is displayed. Turn on LED 77.
Furthermore, once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, it remains lit during the advantageous section.
Further, during the game end check process in the final game of the advantageous section, a process for turning off the advantageous section display LED 77 is executed. Specifically, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the process of initializing the advantageous section display LED flag storage area (the process of clearing the advantageous section display LED flag) is executed. As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt processing.

Furthermore, the lighting timing when lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 in a game that activates the instruction function is, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated (more specifically, after the reels 31 start rotating, until the rotation reaches a constant speed state).
However, it is not limited to this, and other lighting timings include, for example,
1) Before the start switch 41 is operated 2) After the start switch 41 is operated, all the reels 31 are in a constant speed state and the stop switch 42 can be operated,
3) When at least one reel 31 is stopped and at least one other reel 31 is rotating,
4) When all reels 31 are stopped,
5) After all the reels 31 have stopped (the game has ended), but before the payment switch 43 can be operated before the start of the next game.

However, when lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 in a game that activates the instruction function, the winning combination for the game must have been determined, so the period before the start switch 41 is operated (before the winning combination lottery) is excluded. .
When lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 in a game in which the instruction function is activated, the start switch 41 is operated and the winning combination is drawn. The timing at which the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before reaching the constant speed state is the shortest timing.

Address "F063 (H)" is the storage area of the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). The advantageous section clear counter is a decrement counter for counting the number of games played during the advantageous section. The advantageous section clear counter is "0" during the normal section, and is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value when transitioning to the advantageous section. Further, the advantageous section clear counter is set to be decremented by "1" per game not only during the advantageous section but also during the normal section. However, the minimum value is "0". For this reason, in the normal section, when the advantageous section clear counter (before subtraction) is "0", a counter is used in which even if "1" is subtracted, the value after the subtraction becomes "0". Therefore, during the normal period, "1" is subtracted for each game, but "0" is maintained. In other words, when "0" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is a normal section (non-advantageous section).

Further, when the game moves to the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value, so in the next game, the advantageous section clear counter becomes "1499 (D)".
Note that the advantageous section clear counter stores an initial value of "1500 (D)" at most, so it is composed of 2 bytes. In other words, when a value other than "0" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is an advantageous section.

Address "F065(H)" is the storage area of the difference counter (_SC_24HGAME). The difference counter is a counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number of sheets during the advantageous section, and is also referred to as "MY counter".
The difference counter does not simply store the cumulative value of the difference number itself, but stores "a value corresponding to" the cumulative value of the difference number. For example, when the difference in the number of sheets becomes a value corresponding to a minus value, that value is corrected to "0 (H)". Therefore, "accumulated value of difference number of sheets ≠ difference number counter value".
The difference counter is an increment counter for determining whether the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number of sheets in the advantageous section exceeds "2400 (D)". Therefore, the difference counter is composed of a 2-byte storage area.

It is sufficient for the difference number counter to count at least the cumulative value of the number of difference sheets during the advantageous section, and there is no need to count during the non-advantageous section (normal section).
Here, when updating the difference counter value on the condition that the game is in an advantageous section, it is necessary to perform a process of determining whether or not the game is in an advantageous section every game. Therefore, in this embodiment, the difference counter value is updated including during the non-advantageous section (normal section). In this way, the difference counter value can be updated every game without determining whether the game is in an advantageous section or not, so the processing can be simplified.

Furthermore, even when the difference number of coins becomes negative in the current game and the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number of coins becomes data of a carry-down, the difference number counter value is updated. However, if the difference counter value is negative data as a result of the calculation, the difference counter value is corrected to "0".

To give a specific example, (the difference counter value at the start of the first game is "0 (H)"),
1st game: When the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "0", the difference counter after calculation is "FFFD (H)", and the difference counter after correction is "0 (H)"
2nd game: Number of bets “3”, number of payouts “9”, difference counter after calculation “0006 (H)” (no correction)
3rd game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", difference counter after calculation "0003 (H)" (no correction)
4th game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "1", difference counter after calculation "0001 (H)" (no correction)
5th game: Number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", difference counter after calculation "FFFE (H)", difference counter after correction "0 (H)"
will be updated as follows.
In addition, even if the difference counter of the previous game is "0 (H)" and the difference counter of the current game is "0 (H)", the difference counter value that reflects the number of differences of the game concerned will be changed again. Since this is a calculated result, this case also corresponds to "updating" the difference counter.

As described above, when the difference counter value after the calculation is a value with a digit drop, the difference counter value is corrected to "0" (the initial value "0" is set). Note that a method for determining whether a downgrade has occurred will be described later.
By updating the difference counter value in this way, for example, when the number of payouts is larger than the number of bets, that is, when the difference number is increasing, the difference counter value increases as the game progresses. On the other hand, when the number of payouts is less than the number of bets, for example in a game during the normal period, the difference counter value will increase by the number of payouts when there is a payout based on winning a small role, but after that, the number of payouts will increase. If it becomes less than the number of bets, it will eventually become "0".

FIG. 36 is a diagram (slump graph) for explaining the concept of the difference counter value, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2. In FIG. 36, the horizontal axis is the number of games played, and the vertical axis is the number of differences.
Example 1 shows an example in which the number of differences initially progressed in a negative direction as the game progressed, but halfway through, for example, with the start of AT, the number of differences turned to increase. The difference counter counts the time when the difference number reaches its lowest value in the process of playing the game, so the range indicated by the arrow in the figure is counted by the difference number counter as the amount of increase in the difference number. be done. As described above, in this embodiment, the advantageous section ends when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" (the next game is controlled to be a game in the normal section).

Furthermore, when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)", the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, so for example, if the difference counter is exactly "2400 (D)" at the end of the current game, the current game In this case, the conditions for ending the advantageous section are not met.
Then, in the next game, assuming that the maximum number of difference in the number of coins in the gaming machine is obtained, the number of bets is "1" and the number of payouts is "15", so the difference in number of coins in the next game will be "+14", The difference counter value at the end of the next game will be "2414 (D)". When the difference counter is "2414 (D)", it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.
Therefore, the maximum value that the difference counter can take is "2414 (D)".

Note that the determination of whether the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" is not limited to reading the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53, but also by temporarily storing it in a register for updating, etc. This also includes determining the difference counter value (the same applies hereinafter).
In addition, when determining whether or not the value exceeds "2400 (D)" based on the difference counter value temporarily stored in the register, if it is determined that the value does not exceed "2400 (D)", The difference counter value of the register is stored (saved) in the RWM 53. On the other hand, when it is determined that the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", the difference counter value is not stored in the RWM 53, and the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53 is controlled to be cleared. It is also possible.

Furthermore, in Example 2, as in Example 1, the difference number progressed in a negative direction as the game progressed, but halfway through, for example, with the start of AT, the difference number turned to increase. . In example 2, even when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)", the cumulative value of the difference is not positive, but even in such a case, the advantageous section ends. In other words, regardless of the accumulated value of the number of differences as the game progresses up to that point, if the number of differences counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" counting from the time when the number of differences reaches the lowest value, the advantageous section is entered. (The next game will be controlled so that it will be a game in the normal section).

Note that when updating the difference counter during the normal section, there is a possibility that the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" even during the normal section. For example, such a situation may occur if the player wins a special prize many times and plays the special game repeatedly. In such a case,
1) A method of updating the difference counter value as it is until the advantageous section starts;
2) When the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", the difference counter value is temporarily reset to "0" at that point.
For example, when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during an advantageous section, when the difference counter is cleared based on the end of the advantageous section, the processing As long as the process is executed regardless of the difference, the difference counter will be cleared even if it exceeds "2400 (D)" during the normal period.

On the other hand, if the process of clearing the difference counter is a process specific to the advantageous section, the difference counter will not be cleared even if the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the normal section.
Note that when starting the advantageous section (first game of the advantageous section), the difference counter is cleared (the initial value is set to "0". Step S354 in FIG. 45, which will be described later). Therefore, it does not matter what the difference counter is before the start of the advantageous section.
and,
1) When the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the advantageous section,
2) When the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games,
satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section.
When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the difference counter is cleared (initialized). The reason why the difference counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous section is to prevent data (values) related to the advantageous section from being carried over to the normal section when the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section. The difference counter is cleared in step S435 in FIG. 51, which will be described later.

FIG. 37 is a diagram (slump flag) showing the relationship between the difference counter value and the advantageous section, in which (a) shows example 1 and (b) shows example 2.
In Example 1, in the normal section, the number of differences decreases as the game progresses, and the number of differences further decreases from the time when the advantageous section starts ("A" in the diagram) until proceeding to "B" in the diagram. An example is shown below. Note that AT is not started at the same time as the start of the advantageous section, and at the beginning of the advantageous section there is a CZ, precursor, or AT preparation (for example, when the RT state is a low probability state, the RT state is changed from a low probability state to a high probability state). In the case of a specification where the starting point is (while waiting for a replay win to win), the number of differences may decrease even after starting the advantageous section. Further, even if AT is started, if the situation continues where it is difficult to win the push order bell, the number of differences may decrease.

Since the difference counter value is initialized at the start of the advantageous section, it is "0" at point "A" in the figure. Further, as described above, under a situation where the number of differences is decreasing, the difference counter value maintains "0". Therefore, the difference counter value remains at "0" from point "A" to point "B" in the figure.
Also, an example is shown in which the number of differences starts to increase from point "B". As a result, the difference counter value also increases. When it is determined that the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" (when reaching point "C" in the figure), it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, and the advantageous section is ended. (Transition to normal section).

In this way, the difference counter starts counting positively from the point when the difference number reaches its lowest value ("B") after the start of the advantageous section, rather than from the number of differences from the start of the advantageous section. Medals will not be awarded to the player beyond the range where the number of balls increases (the range from "B" to "C" in FIG. 37(a)). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's gambling desire from being aroused.

The above points will be explained more specifically using numerical values as examples.
For example, if the specification is such that AT is started by lottery after starting an advantageous section, the number of differences may decrease as the game progresses when it is an advantageous section and non-AT.
For example, suppose that player X wins the advantageous section and starts the advantageous section, but AT does not start and the game is stopped when the difference becomes "-200 coins."

Next, it is assumed that player Y starts playing a game on the gaming machine, and when the difference becomes "-50 coins", he wins AT and starts AT. Then, after starting the advantageous section, if the advantageous section (AT) continues until the difference exceeds "+2400 medals", player Y will be able to obtain "2400 + 250 = 2650 medals". .
Therefore, as mentioned above, after starting the advantageous section, by setting the end condition "from the time when the difference number reaches the minimum value until it exceeds +2400 coins", for example, it is possible to prevent other players from getting hooked. We are trying to prevent people from being able to acquire such things, including those that are available to them, and to not encourage the desire for gambling.

Example 2 shown in FIG. 37(b) shows an example in which the difference number decreases in the normal section, turns positive from point "D" on the way, and then starts the advantageous section from point "E". In such a case, as described above, when the difference counter value is updated including the normal section, the difference counter value becomes positive at time "E" in the figure. However, at the start of the advantageous section ("E" in the figure), the difference counter value is initialized (cleared, ie, updated to "0").
Therefore, the increase before the advantageous section (the increase from "D" to "E") is not counted by the difference counter. Therefore, the difference counter continues to be counted positively from point "E", and when it exceeds "2400 (D)", the advantageous section ends.

The explanation returns to FIG. 35.
Address “F067(H)” is a storage area for the AT flag (_FL_AT_KND). The AT flag is a flag for determining whether or not the AT is in progress, and is set to "0" during non-AT, and set to "1" during AT. The timing at which the AT flag is set to "1" is when the AT lottery is won, and is executed in step S364 in FIG. 46, which will be described later. Further, the AT flag is turned off at the end of the final AT game, and is executed, for example, in a game end check process (step S415 in FIG. 50) to be described later. Further, the data that is cleared (initialized) at the end of the advantageous section includes an AT flag.

Address "F068 (H)" is the storage area of the AT game number counter (_CT_ART). The AT game number counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of games played during AT (including ART). Unlike the advantageous section clear counter, when the AT game number counter reaches "0", subsequent counting (subtraction) is stopped.
The AT game count counter is updated (subtracted) during the AT after the start switch 41 is operated during the main process (step S281 in FIG. 41, which will be described later).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the initial value of the number of AT games may exceed "255 (D)", the AT game number counter is composed of a 2-byte counter. When the maximum number of AT games is "255 (D)" or less, the AT game number counter may be configured from a 1-byte counter.
When starting AT (or when transitioning to AT preparation), an initial value is set in the AT game counter. The initial value may be a constant value, or may be determined by lottery or the like when AT is won. Furthermore, after determining the initial value, the number of AT games may be updated to "0" without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, the number of AT games may be added when a predetermined condition is met during AT, and the number of AT games may be increased when the player wins an additional lottery. In this case, the increased amount is added to the AT game counter.
This AT game count counter is also included in the data that is cleared at the end of the advantageous section.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the number-of-games management type AT is illustrated, an AT game number counter is provided. Therefore, in the case of the difference number management type AT, an AT difference number counter is provided in place of the AT game number counter. Then, at the start of AT, an initial value of the difference number of sheets that can be obtained is set. In addition, if you win an additional prize, the difference in the number of additional tickets will be added. Then, each time there is a payout, the difference number of coins for the game is subtracted, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT ends.

Next, each process during the game will be explained using a flowchart.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50. When the power is turned on, the program starts from the program start process shown in FIG. 38.
In FIG. 38, when the program is started in step S201, the main control board 50 initializes the registers in the next step S202. Specific processing includes, for example, setting the communication speed of the serial communication circuit provided in the main CPU 55, setting the type of interrupt (for example, setting it as a maskable interrupt, etc.), and parity bits added to control commands to be sent. setting (for example, setting to even parity). In other words, initial values necessary for normal operation of the slot machine 10 are set in various registers.

Next, the process advances to step S203, and the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value. In this embodiment, when the power is turned off, a power-off processing completed flag is stored (step S484 in FIG. 54, which will be described later). This power-off processing completed flag is a flag for determining whether or not the previous power-off was performed normally when the power is turned on. When it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S204, and when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S206.

In step S204, calculation of the checksum of the RWM 53 is executed. Specifically, the checksum calculation is executed for the same range as the checksum of the RWM 53 executed at the time of power-off processing (for example, the work area used by the program, the unused area, and the stack area).
In step S205, it is determined whether the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed. Specifically, the next address is designated from the address of the RWM 53 for which the checksum has been calculated at the current time, and it is determined whether the next address is the address for which the checksum is to be calculated. If it is determined that the checksum calculation has not been completed, the process returns to step S204 and continues. On the other hand, if it is determined that the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed, the process advances to step S206.

Further, in the subsequent processing, when data stored in multiple ranges (addresses) of the RWM 53 is to be initialized, similar processing is performed in the specified range of the RWM 53 in this embodiment.
Note that when it is determined in step S203 that the power-off processing completion flag is not a normal value, an abnormal value is set as power-off recovery data without executing checksum calculation of the RWM 53.

In step S206, the main control board 50 stores the power-off recovery data in a predetermined register (eg, B register). Here, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value and the checksum calculation (all ranges) of the RWM 53 has been completed normally, the normal value is stored as power-off recovery data. On the other hand, if the power-off processing completed flag is an abnormal value (“No” in step S203), or if it is determined that there is an abnormality when calculating the checksum (full range) of the RWM 53 in step S204, the power-off process is terminated. Store abnormal values as recovery data.

In the next step S207, level data of a predetermined input port 51 is stored in a predetermined register (eg, A register). Next, the process advances to step S208, and based on the level data of the predetermined input port 51, it is determined whether the designated switch is on. In this embodiment, the "designated switch" refers to a signal of a door switch (a switch that is turned on when the front door 12 (casing) is opened) among the predetermined input ports 51, and a set door switch. (The door provided on the setting key switch. Note that the setting door is not required.) Signals of the setting key switch (a switch that turns on when the setting key is inserted and rotated in a specified direction) There are three.

Then, the door switch signal is on (the front door 12 is opened), the setting door switch signal is on (the setting door is open), and the setting key switch signal is on. Allow settings to be changed only in certain cases. When all three specified switches are on, it is possible to proceed to the setting change process in step S212, but when at least one specified switch is not on, the process is not allowed to proceed to the setting change process in step S212. .
In other words, even when the door switch signal is off (the front door 12 is closed) or the setting door switch signal is off (the setting door is closed), the setting key switch signal is Since it is impossible for this to be turned on and there is a high possibility of fraud, the transition to the settings change process is not allowed.

Therefore, when it is determined in step S208 that all designated switches are on, the process advances to step S209, and when it is determined that they are not on, the process advances to step S211.
In step S209, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off recovery data is abnormal. This power-off recovery data is the data stored in the register in step S206.

When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is abnormal, the process proceeds to setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) in step S212, and when it is determined that it is not abnormal, the process proceeds to step S210. In step S210, it is determined whether the setting change prohibition flag is on. Here, the setting change prohibition flag is one of the data stored in the RWM 53, and is disabled during the period from the start switch acceptance process (step S279) to the game end check process (step S301) in FIG. 41, which will be described later. This is the flag to be used. Then, when the setting change prohibition flag is on, the process advances to step S211, and when it is not on, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) of step S212.
Note that in this embodiment, a setting change prohibition flag is provided, but if the configuration is such that the setting change is possible at all times, the setting change prohibition flag may not be provided. In that case, the process corresponding to step S210 becomes unnecessary.

In step S211, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off recovery data is a normal value. This process is equivalent to step S209. When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process advances to step S213 to perform power-off recovery processing (M_POWER_ON). On the other hand, if it is determined that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, an "E1" error occurs, and the process advances to step S214 to perform unrecoverable error processing.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 of FIG. 38.
First, in step S221, a "predetermined range" is stored in a register as the initialization range within the used area of the RWM 53. Here, "within the used area" refers to an area in the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing data related to the progress of the game. The range shown in FIG. 35 is entirely within the usage area. On the other hand, "outside the used area", which will be described later, refers to an area in the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing data that is not related to the progress of the game. Specifically, a storage area that stores data related to the display of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) can be mentioned.

In addition, the "predetermined range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been executed normally, and includes setting value data (address "F000 (H)"), gaming state (for example, RT state), winning The initialization range in which the flags, etc. of special winning combinations having , etc. are not initialized is defined as a "predetermined range".
Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment described later, if BB2 is in operation before the power is turned off (when the winning flag of BB2 is on), if the power is turned off normally, the setting change process will not be executed. However, the winning flag of BB2 is maintained.
On the other hand, the "predetermined range" does not include data regarding advantageous sections or AT. Therefore, in FIG. 35, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" are the targets of initialization here.

Next, the process advances to step S222, and the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off recovery data (the value stored in step S206) is a normal value. When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process advances to step S224, and the "predetermined range" stored in step S221 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S222 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process advances to step S223.
In step S223, the main control board 50 stores the "specific range" in the register as the initialization range within the usage area of the RWM 53. Here, the "specific range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power-off is not normal, and is the entire range within the usage area including the setting value data (address "F000(H)").

Then, the process proceeds to step S224, and initialization of the predetermined range set in step S221 or the specific range set in step S223 (within the used area of the RWM 53) is started. In the next step S225, it is determined whether the initialization started in step S224 has been completed. When it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process advances to step S226.

In step S226, the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) are saved. Note that the reason for saving the AF register is to save the F (flag) register here, but the AF register is saved due to the convenience of the instruction. The process then proceeds to step S227, where a predetermined range outside the used area is stored as the initialization range of the RWM 53. Further, the "predetermined range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been normally executed.

In the next step S228, similarly to step S222, it is determined whether the power-off recovery data (value stored in step S206) is a normal value. When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process advances to step S230, and the "predetermined range" stored in step S227 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S228 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process advances to step S229.
In step S229, the main control board 50 stores the "specific range" in the register as the initialization range outside the used area of the RWM 53. Here, the "specific range" is the initialization range when it is determined that the power outage is not normal, and is the entire range including the ring buffer etc. that stores the number of games and the number of payouts for displaying the ratio.
Then, the process proceeds to step S230, and initialization of the predetermined range set in step S227 or the specific range set in step S229 (outside the area used by the RWM 53) is started.

In the next step S231, it is determined whether the initialization started in step S230 has been completed. When it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process advances to step S232.
In step S232, the AF register saved in step S226 is restored. In the next step S233, interrupt processing startup settings are performed. Here, various registers corresponding to the interrupt processing specified in step S202 are set. Since this embodiment uses timer interrupt processing as the interrupt processing, processing for setting the timer interrupt cycle (in this embodiment, "2.235 ms") is included. Then, after the processing in step S233, interrupt processing is executed. In other words, the configuration is such that no interrupt processing is executed before "interrupt activation".
In the next step S234, an output request is set at the time of starting the setting change. This process is a process in which a control command to be sent to the sub-control board 80 is set (stored) in a register in order to notify the sub-control board 80 side that a setting change process is to be started.

Note that "output request set" means a process of setting a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Moreover, the control command here does not only mean the command actually transmitted, but also the command that is the source of the command actually transmitted.
Next, the process advances to step S235, and the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1. This process is a process of storing a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM 53).

Next, the process advances to step S236, and the main control board 50 executes a 2-byte time wait process (wait process) for starting the setting change. In this embodiment, the process waits until the number of interrupts reaches "224" ("1" is subtracted for each number of interrupts, and until the set number of interrupts reaches "0"). This waiting process is also called delay processing or standby processing because it does not allow the main processing to proceed further. Note that during this waiting time (during the 2-byte time waiting process), the main process is not allowed to proceed, but the interrupt process is executed.

In this way, the reason why the 2-byte time waiting process (wait process) is executed in step S236 is that the initialization process of the RWM 53 on the main control board 50 side is completed in a relatively short time, whereas the sub-control board 80 side Since the initialization process of the RWM 83 takes time, the main control board 50 side executes a 2-byte time waiting process. In particular, this is because the main control board 50 side cannot know whether the initialization process has been completed on the sub control board 80 side.

Therefore, while the sub-control board 80 side is still in the initialization process, the main control board 50 side has already completed the initialization process, and the process progresses further. It is possible to prevent the progress of the control process 80 from becoming out of synchronization.
Furthermore, after executing the output request set and control command set 1 at the start of setting change, the sub-control board 80 starts initializing the RWM 83, but the wait time is set to be sufficient for the initialization of the RWM 83 to be completed. do. As a result, after the initialization processing of the RWM 83 is completed on the sub-control board 80 side, the processing on the main control board 50 side proceeds to step S238 and subsequent steps.

Note that the control command for starting the setting change set in steps S234 and S235 is sent to the sub-control board 80 even during the 2-byte time waiting process in step S236. However, while the 2-byte time waiting process is being executed in step S236, the process does not proceed to steps S237 and subsequent steps (the main process does not proceed).

After the 2-byte time waiting process in step S236 ends, the process advances to step S237, and the setting change display data is stored as acquisition number data. Next, the process advances to step S238, and the value "00011100 (B)" corresponding to the setting change is stored in the LED display request flag.

Through the processing of steps S237 and S238, when interrupt processing is executed after these processing, the digits 3a, 4a, and 5b (obtained number display LED 78 and set value display LED 73) can be lit.
Specifically, in the interrupt process executed after the process of step S238, it is possible to display "8" in each of digits 3a and 4a ("88" is displayed in the acquired number display LED 78), and digit b5 (set value display) can be displayed. The current set value can be displayed on the LED 73).
Note that the acquisition number data and the LED display request flag are initialized by the initialization process in the used area of the RWM 53 in step S224, so the values before step S237 are "0".

Next, the process advances to step S239, and interrupt wait processing is executed. This process is a process that waits until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) has elapsed. Then, after one interrupt time has elapsed, the process advances to step S240.
In step S240, it is determined whether or not an operation of a setting change switch (not shown in FIG. 1) has been detected. Here, by determining the rising data of the input port 51 including the setting change switch, it is determined whether the setting change switch is turned on. When it is determined that the operation of the setting change switch has been detected, the process proceeds to step S241, and when it is determined that the operation has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S242.
In step S241, the setting value data (address "F000(H)") of the RWM 53 is stored (updated). When interrupt processing is executed after the setting value data is updated, the updated value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73.

In the next step S242, it is determined whether the operation of the start switch 41 has been detected. In this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated during a setting change, the setting value at that time is determined.
When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process advances to step S243, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S239.

In the above processing, step S239 (interrupt wait) is provided to clear the rising data of the setting change switch.
For example, if the process of step S239 is not provided, if it is determined in step S240 that the start-up data of the setting change switch is on, the setting value data is updated in step S241, and the start switch 41 is turned on in the next step S242. If it is determined that it is not, the process advances to step S240, and it is determined whether or not the start-up data of the setting change switch is on.

If interrupt processing is executed even once after it is determined that the setting change switch is on in step S240, the rising data of the setting change switch will be turned off. However, until the interrupt process is executed, it continues to be determined in step S240 that the rising data of the setting change switch is on. As a result, the set value data continues to increase by "2" or more even if the setting change switch is operated only once. Therefore, in step S239, interrupt wait processing is executed.

In step S243, it is determined whether a setting key switch (not shown in FIG. 1) has been turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned off, the process proceeds to step S244, where the acquisition number data is cleared (set to "0"). This is to erase the display of "88" indicating that settings are being changed. Next, the process advances to step S245, and a value "00011111 (B)" corresponding to normal mode is stored in the LED display request flag.

Due to the interrupt process executed after the process in step S244, the display of digits 3a and 4a (obtained number display LED 78) changes from "88" to "00".
Further, due to the interrupt process executed after the process of step S245, "0" is displayed in each of the digits 1a and 2a ("00" is displayed on the credit number display LED 76). Further, since the bit corresponding to digit 5 of the LED display request flag is "1", digit 5a (status display LED 79) can be lit. On the other hand, the digit 5b (set value display LED 73) does not light up because the setting is not being changed or confirmed.

Next, the process advances to step S246, and similarly to step S234, an output request is set at the end of the setting change. This process ends the setting change process and transfers the data corresponding to the determined setting value (specifically, the setting value data stored at address "F000(H)") to the sub-control board 80. This process sets a control command to be notified. Next, the process advances to step S247, and the main control board 50 executes control command set 1 similarly to step S235. Then, the process advances to step S248 and shifts to main processing (M_MAIN).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in step S213 in FIG.
First, in step S251, the stack pointer (SP register) is restored. Here, the stack pointer is an area (stack area) of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power outage (for example, register values, main processing instruction processing before interrupt processing, etc.) when a power outage occurs. Of these, it indicates the area (address) to be stacked next.
In the next step S252, the set value data is read and whether the range of the set value data is within the normal range (within the range of set value 1 to set value 6), in other words, whether the range of the set value data is within the range of "F000 (H)" It is determined whether the set value data is within the range of "0 (H)" to "5 (H)". When it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S253, and when it is determined that the set value data is not within the normal range, an "E6" error occurs and the process proceeds to step S264, where the process proceeds to irreversible error processing. .

Proceeding to step S253, an unused area within the used area of the RWM 53 is set in a register as an initialization range. Then, in the next step S254, the RWM 53 within the range set in step S253 is initialized. Here, it is possible that a value may be stored in the RWM 53 even in an unused area due to noise or the like. In the unlikely event that a value is stored in an unused area, it may lead to fraud or other fraudulent activity, so be sure to initialize the unused area when the power is turned on (usually once a day). There is.
In the next step S255, it is determined whether the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area within the used area) has been completed, and when it is determined that it has been completed, the process advances to step S256.

In step S256, the AF register is saved. This process is similar to the process in step S226 described above. In the next step S257, the initialization range of the unused area outside the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S258, the RWM 53 within the range set in step S257 is initialized.
In the next step S259, it is determined whether the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area outside the used area) has been completed, and when it is determined that it has been completed, the process advances to step S260. In step S260, the AF register is restored. This process is similar to the process in step S232 described above.

In the next step S261, a predetermined input port 51 is read. This process is a process for updating each data (level data, rising data, falling data) of the input port 51 before the power is turned off to the latest data.
Next, the process advances to step S262 and an interrupt is activated. This process is, for example, a process of setting a timer interrupt cycle, and is the same process as step S233 described above.
Next, the process advances to step S263, where the power-off processing completion flag is cleared, that is, set to "0". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In the above program start processing, setting change processing, and power recovery processing,
1) In the program start process of FIG. 38, if it is determined "No" in step S203 (when the power-off processing completed flag is an abnormal value), or if there is an abnormality during checksum calculation in step S204, step In S206, the abnormal value is stored as recovery data after the power is turned off. In this case, since the determination in step S209 is "Yes", the process proceeds to the setting change process (FIG. 39) in step S212.
In the setting change process of FIG. 39, since it is determined "No" in step S222 and step S228, the entire range inside and outside the usage area of the RWM 53 is initialized, that is, after "F000(H)" All data will be initialized.

2) In the program start process, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value and the checksum calculation has been performed normally, when proceeding to the setting change process, step S222 and step S222 in FIG. Since it is determined "Yes" in S228, the process proceeds to steps S224 and S230, respectively, and the specified range (inside the used area and outside the used area) of the RWM 53 is initialized.

3) In the program start process, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value and the checksum calculation is also performed normally, if the setting change process is not performed, the power-off process (step S213) is performed. 40). In this case, if the set value is normal in step S252 in FIG. 40, the initialization of the RWM 53 (inside the used area and outside the used area) at the time of normal power-on is executed. As described above, this initialization is a process of initializing the unused area of the RWM 53.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in this embodiment. The main process is a process for one game. While the game is in progress, the main process is repeated every game.
First, in step S271, a stack pointer is set. As mentioned above, the stack pointer refers to an area of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power outage (for example, register values, main processing instruction processing before interrupt processing, etc.) when a power outage occurs. Setting the stack pointer is a process of setting the register value to the initial value in the area of the RWM 53.

In the next step S272, game start setting processing (M_GAME_SET) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 42, which will be described later, and is a process of generating, updating, and saving an operating state flag.
In the next step S273, the bet medals are read. This process is a process of reading the number of medals that have been bet at the current time, and reads the bet number data or automatic bet number data.
In the next step S274, the presence or absence of bet medals is determined based on the bet number read in step S273.

When it is determined in step S274 that there are bet medals, the process proceeds to step S276, and when it is determined that there are no bet medals, the process proceeds to step S275 to perform a medal insertion waiting process, and then proceeds to step S276. In the medal insertion waiting process of step S275, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is on, and when it is on, processing such as shifting to the setting confirmation mode is performed.
In step S276, management processing of the inserted medals is performed. This process is a process for determining whether or not the medals have been taken care of, and determining whether or not the payment switch 43 has been operated.

In the next step S277, soft random number updating processing is performed. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding "1" at a time) a processing random number for processing (arithmetic processing) into a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used by the winning combination lottery means 61. The soft random number is a 16-bit random number having a range of "0" to "65535(D)". Note that as an updating method, processing may be performed in which an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) that is incremented at the time of an interrupt) is added to the value before updating.

In the next step S278, the main control board 50 determines whether the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process advances to step S279, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S273. Note that even if the start switch 41 is operated, if the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number for the game, "No" is determined in step S278.

In step S279, processing upon reception of the start switch is executed. This process is a process that sets a flag that settings cannot be changed, sets an output request when the reel 31 starts rotating, and sets the number of outputs for outputting a medal input signal as an external signal to a hall computer, etc. .
In the next step S280, the acquisition number data is cleared. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, even if the designated prescribed number display data and payout number data have been previously stored as the acquired number data, they are cleared.
Here, although the details will be described later, in the twelfth embodiment, a specified number may be instructed (displayed) on the obtained number display LED 78 before the start of the game. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the designated prescribed number display data may be stored as the acquired number data. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the acquired number data is cleared and a process is executed to display "00" on the acquired number display LED 78 (or turn it off).
Further, at the time of step S280, when the payout number data of the previous game is stored as the winning number data, the payout number data is cleared in step S280.

Next, the process advances to step S281, and the main control board 50 executes a process of updating the number of AT games. This process is a process shown in FIG. 43, which will be described later, and is a process for subtracting the number of AT games when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT. Therefore, this process is not executed during non-AT.
Further, during AT, whether or not to add the number of AT games is determined based on the winning combination lottery result by the winning lottery processing in step S282. For example, when a rare combination is won, the number of additional AT games may be determined. Therefore, when adding the number of AT games and adding the additional amount to the AT game number counter, it is executed after the process of step S282 (not shown in FIG. 41).
In addition, after receiving the start switch (step S279), the AT game number counter is updated in step S281, but this is not limited to this. After the winning combination lottery process in step S282 or after all reels 31 are stopped (after step S290). The AT game number counter may also be updated.
In addition, in the specifications of the difference number management type AT, when it has an AT difference number counter, the AT difference number counter is activated after all reels 31 have stopped and after the medal payout process due to winnings has been completed (after step S300). Update.

In step S282, the winning combination lottery means 61 executes a winning combination lottery (corresponding to the above-mentioned "internal lottery") at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. In addition, the random number value at the time of winning lottery is acquired in step S279. Then, in step S282, a process is performed to determine whether or not the acquired random number corresponds to any winning combination using the winning combination lottery table.

In the next step S283, the main control board 50 executes an advantageous section transition lottery process. This process is the process shown in FIG. 44, which will be described later. In this embodiment, an AT lottery is also executed during the advantageous section transfer lottery. As shown in FIG. 44, which will be described later, when the game is in an advantageous period but not in AT mode (for example, when the main game state is CZ), an AT lottery process is executed in step S348 in FIG.
Next, the process advances to step S284, and a push order instruction number setting (M_ORD_INF) is performed. This process is shown in FIG. 48, and when the instruction function is activated in the game during AT (the push order instruction number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78), a push order instruction number is generated, This is a process of displaying push order instruction information, etc.

In the next step S285, reel rotation start preparation processing is executed. This process executes processing to determine whether or not the minimum gaming time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed, and if the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step S286.
Here, the RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing the timer value of the minimum playing time (not shown in FIG. 35), and the initial value is "1834 (D) (2.235 ms x 1834 ≒ 4099 ms)". It is. In step S279, if it is determined that the minimum playing time is "0", an initial value "1834 (D)" is set as the minimum playing time (timer value). Then, the minimum gaming time is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt processing. When the process advances to step S285 for the next game, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time is "0", and when it is determined that it is "0", the process advances to step S286.

In step S286, the reel control means 65 drives and controls the motor 32 to start rotating the reel 31. When the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state, the operation of the stop switch 42 is permitted and the process proceeds to step S287.
In step S287, acceptance of stopping the reel 31 is checked. Here, it is detected whether or not an operation signal of the stop switch 42 is received, and when the operation signal is received, the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is The stopping position of the reel 31 is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.

In the next step S288, the reel control means 65 checks whether all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S289. In step S289, it is determined whether all the reels 31 have stopped, and when it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S290, and when it is determined that all the reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S287. .

In step S290, the acquisition number data is cleared (set to "0"). For example, by activating the instruction function during AT, push order instruction information (for example, "=1") may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. In this case, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 becomes "00" due to the interrupt process executed after the process in step S290.
Note that the acquisition number display LED 78 may be turned off. Specifically, "00010011 (B)" may be stored in the LED display request flag, or data for turning off the light may be provided as segment data and that data may be output.

In step S291, symbol display is determined. Here, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the active line.
In the next step S292, it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. If it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S304; if it is determined that a display error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S293. move on.
Here, since the reel 31 is stopped based on the stop position determination table, the reel 31 usually does not stop at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, as a result of the symbol display determination, if a symbol that should not originally be displayed (a kicking symbol) is displayed on the active line, it is determined that there is an abnormality ("E5" error), and the process proceeds to step S304. Executes unrecoverable error handling.

When it is determined in step S292 that no display error has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S293, a payout number update process is executed. This process is a process of storing the number of payouts in the game as the above-mentioned payout number data and payout number data buffer.
In the next step S294, the payout means 67 pays out medals (M_WIN_PAY) corresponding to the winning combination. This process is the process shown in FIG. 49, which will be described later. Next, the process advances to step S295, and interrupt wait processing is performed. In the next step S296, interrupt processing is prohibited. Through the processing in steps S295 and S296, the interrupt is prohibited immediately after the interrupt.

In the next step S297, the AF register is saved. This process is similar to step S256 in FIG. 40. Next, the process advances to step S298, and ratio setting processing is executed. This "ratio setting process" is a process of updating various counter values, calculating ratios, etc. in order to display five types of ratios on the management information display LED 74 (rotation ratio monitor). Then, in step S299, the AF register saved in step S297 is restored, and in the next step S300, interrupts are permitted (restarted). In this manner, when executing the ratio setting process, the AF register is saved and the interrupt process is prohibited before the process is executed.

Note that interrupt processing is prohibited during ratio set processing because ratio set processing uses a program stored outside the used area, and when a program outside the used area is being executed in the main process. This is because if interrupt processing is inserted into the program, programs in the used area and programs outside the used area will coexist, making the processing complicated.

Next, the process advances to step S301, and a game end check process (_M_GAME_CHK) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 50, which will be described later, and performs processing such as clearing the condition device (winning combination) flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S302, where an output request set at the end of the game is performed, and a control command set 1 is performed in the next step S303. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 that one game has ended.
When the process of step S303 is finished, the process returns to the beginning of the main process (step S248).

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the game start setting process (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG.
First, in step S311, a game standby display time is set (stored in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53). Since the game standby display time of this embodiment is set to "26846" interrupt (≈60000ms, that is, about 60 seconds (1 minute)), "26846" is set in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. When the game standby display time is set in step S301, from this point on, the value is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt process.

When the game standby display time becomes "0", the acquisition number data is cleared in step S275 (waiting for medal insertion) in FIG. 41. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. For example, even if the number of medals paid out in the previous game was "8" and the player made a payment by operating the payment switch 43 and ended the game, "00" will be displayed after about 1 minute. be done. This has the effect that the number of empty tables can be reduced by allowing the hall clerk or another player to recognize them as empty tables.
Note that instead of displaying "00" on the acquisition number display LED 78, the acquisition number display LED 78 (upper digits and lower digits) may be turned off, or the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78 may be turned off and the lower digit ``0'' may be displayed. In any case, it is only necessary to display a machine so that a hall clerk or another player can recognize it as an empty machine.

Next, the process advances to step S312, and initialization processing of the push order instruction number is executed. This process is a process for clearing the push order instruction number stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
In the next step S313, data of the symbol combination display flag is acquired. In the next step S314, it is determined whether the 1BB operation symbol is displayed. In this process, when the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB in the symbol combination display flag data is "1", it is determined as "Yes", and when it is "0", it is determined as "No". When it is determined that the 1BB activation symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S315, and when it is determined that it is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S316.

In step S315, the number of coins that can be obtained during 1BB operation (1BB game) is saved. This process is a process of storing the maximum number of coins obtainable in a 1BB game in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to step S316.
In step S316, an operating state flag is generated. This process is a process of generating the value of the operating state flag based on the symbol combination display flag.
In the next step S317, the operating state flag is updated, and in the next step S318, the operating state flag is stored. This process is a process of storing the generated operating state flag (at this point, for example, stored in the A register) at address "F030(H)" of the RWM 53. As a result, the previous operating state flag information is replaced with the operating state flag information updated in step S317.
For example, when a 1BB symbol combination is displayed (1BB winning), the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operating state flag changes from "0" to "1".

In the next step S319, it is determined whether RB operation has started. In addition, in this embodiment, in the 1BB game, the RB operation flag is turned off ("0") at the end of the 2nd game (or when winning twice), but when the end conditions of the 1BB game are not satisfied ( (when the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operating state flag is "1") is set to "1" in this game start setting process. If it is determined in step S319 that it is time to start RB operation, the process advances to step S320, and if it is determined that it is not time to start RB operation, the process advances to step S321.

In step S320, the number of games played and the number of prizes won during the RB operation are saved. This process saves (memorizes) "2 (H)" in the game count counter (not shown in FIG. 35) when the RB is activated, which is provided in the RWM 53, and when the RB is activated, which is provided in the RWM 53. This is a process of saving (memorizing) "2 (H)" in the winning number counter (not shown in FIG. 35). Then, the process advances to step S321.

In addition, the number of games played when RB is activated and the number of prizes won when RB is activated are both set to "2 (H)" as the initial value, and each time the number of games played or the number of prizes won increases by "1". This is a counter that is decremented by 1. However, the initial value of these counter values is not limited to this, and the initial value of these counter values is set to "0", and each time the number of games played or the number of prizes won increases by "1", it is incremented by "1", and these counter values are set to "2 ( H)" may be determined.

In the next step S321, it is determined whether a condition for specifying a specified number is satisfied. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, there is no case where a specified number is specified. However, in the twelfth embodiment, which will be described later, a specified number may be specified at the start of the game, so this process is included in this flowchart. If it is determined that the condition for specifying the specified number is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, and if it is determined that the condition for specifying the specified number is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S323.
In step S322, specified specified number display data is stored as acquisition number data. In the twelfth embodiment, there is a case where the specified number "2" is specified, and when the specified number "2" is specified, "0A" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. The instruction specified number display data for displaying "0A" is defined as "0B(H)" (details will be described later), and in this step S322, the obtained number data is "0B(H)". Remember.
Furthermore, when displaying the specified number "2", "0A" is displayed instead of "02" in order to avoid confusion with the payout number, error number, and push order instruction information.
The number of payouts is displayed as one of "01" to "15", and "A" is not displayed in the lower digit. Also, for error numbers, "A" is not displayed in the lower digits.

Here, the error numbers (numbers displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 when an error occurs) in this embodiment are as follows.
HP: Medal jam error HE: Medal empty error (No medal in hopper 35)
H0: Abnormality in the payout sensor 37 CE: Medal retention error CP: Illegal passage error of medals CH: Abnormality in the passage sensor 46 C0: Abnormality in the input sensor 44 C1: Abnormal medal insertion error FE: Sub-tank (not shown in FIG. 1) Full dE: Front door opened E1: Power failure recovery error E5: Display judgment error E6: Setting value error E7: Random number error

Note that the types of errors are not limited to the above. Furthermore, an error whose upper digit is "E" means an irrecoverable error.
As described above, since "A" is never displayed in the lower digit of the error number, there is no confusion between the error number and the designated specified number.
Further, the push order instruction information displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function is "=1" to "=6". Therefore, the push order instruction information and the prescribed number of instructions will not be confused.

In addition, in step S322, before storing the designated specified number display data as the number of acquisitions data, the number of payouts in the previous game may be stored as the number of acquisitions data (if a small winning combination was won in the previous game) ). Note that the payout number data is stored in step S399 of the medal payout process (described later in FIG. 49) due to winnings. Therefore, when storing the designated prescribed number display data, the previous payout number data may be overwritten. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and processing for clearing the acquisition number data may be provided before step S322 (for example, immediately before step S311).

In the next step S323, it is determined whether or not the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed based on the symbol combination display flag acquired in step S313. When it is determined that the replay symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state, the process proceeds to step S324, and when it is determined that the symbol combination in the replay is not displayed in a stopped state, the process proceeds to step S326.

In step S324, the main control board 50 reads the bet medals. This process is a process of reading the number of medals (bet number data) bet on in the previous game. Next, the process advances to step S325, and automatic bet number data is set. This process is a process of storing the bet number read in step S324 in the automatic bet number data.
Next, the process advances to step S326, and an output request for the operating state is set. In the next step S327, control command set 1 is executed. Specifically, information indicating that replay has been activated, that 1BB has been activated, etc. is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Note that "previously" (means before the filing of the present application and does not mean "publicly known"; the same applies hereinafter) refers to the time when the bet number is added, specifically, during the main process in FIG. 41, in step S276. In the medal management process, the acquisition count data was cleared. As a result, even if a small winning combination was won in the previous game and the payout number data at the time of winning the small winning combination was stored as the winning number data, the winning number data was cleared during the bet number adding process.
However, in this embodiment, before the medal management process is executed, when the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied, the specified specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data.
When a specified number is specified, it is necessary to prevent the specified specified number display data from being cleared during bet processing. In this embodiment, when the specified number is specified, the specified number is maintained at least until the start switch 41 is operated.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the acquisition number data is not cleared in the medal management process, but when the start switch 41 is operated, the acquisition number data is cleared in the process of step S280 in FIG.

However, the invention is not limited to this, and when the specified number is specified, the specified specified number display data is cleared after operating the start switch 41, but when the specified number is not specified, the same as before, when the number of bets is added, The acquisition number data may be cleared (in the medal management process). In this case, for example, in the process of adding the number of bets, before executing the process of clearing the acquired number data, it is determined whether or not the specified number has been specified in the current game, and when it is determined that the specified number has been specified. When it is determined that the prescribed number has not been specified, the acquired number data may be cleared.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the AT game number counter updating process in step S281 in FIG.
First, in step S331, it is determined whether the AT flag is on ("1"). When it is determined that the AT flag is on, the process advances to step S332, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended. That is, unless AT is in progress, the AT game count counter is not updated.

In step S332, it is determined whether the number of bets is "3". In this process, the bet number data or automatic bet number data of the RWM 53 is read and it is determined whether the bet number for the game is "3". When the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S333, and when the number of bets is not "3", the process according to this flowchart is ended. In this embodiment, the AT game number counter is updated (processing related to the instruction function is executed) only when a game is played with the number of bets (regular number) "3" during AT. In other words, even during AT, when a game is started with the number of bets (regular number) "2", the AT game number counter is not updated.
On the other hand, as will be described later, the advantageous section clear counter and difference counter are updated regardless of the number of bets.

Proceeding to step S333, the main control board 50 subtracts "1" from the value of the AT game number counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In the case of the difference number management type AT, even when an AT difference number counter is provided, the AT difference number counter is not subtracted (updated) if the bet number is not "3" even during AT.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section transfer lottery process in step S283 in FIG.
In addition, in this embodiment, the AT lottery process (step S348) is provided in the advantageous section transition lottery process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous zone transition lottery process and the AT lottery process may be executed independently. You can. For example, in FIG. 41, step S283 may be only the advantageous section transfer lottery process, and the AT lottery process may be executed after step S283.
First, in step S341, it is determined whether the number of bets (specified number) for the current game is "3". When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S342, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the process according to this flowchart is ended.
Therefore, when the number of bets (specified number) is "3", it is possible to execute the advantageous section transfer lottery in step S345 and the advantageous section transfer process (process related to the advantageous section) in step S347, which will be described later, and step S348 The AT lottery process (processing related to the instruction function) can be executed. However, when the number of bets (regular number) is not "3", these processes are not executed.

In step S342, it is determined whether the advantageous section type flag is "0". When it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "0" (it is a non-advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S343, and when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "1" (it is an advantageous section), step S348 Proceed to. When the advantageous section type flag is "1" (already in the advantageous section), the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed, but the AT lottery is performed.

In step S343, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery result in the current game is a target lottery result, that is, whether or not the winning winning combination is the lottery target in the advantageous section. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted here, for example, if you win a special role alone, if you win both a special role and a small role, or if you win a small role (rare small role), it is a target lottery result. to decide. In addition, the target lottery results do not include non-winners. This is because in a game in which the winning combination is not won (a game in which the conditional device is not activated), processing related to the advantageous section is not executed.
If it is determined in step S343 that the lottery result is a target lottery result, the process advances to step S344, and if it is determined that it is not a target lottery result, the process according to this flowchart is terminated (that is, the advantageous section lottery is not performed, or the advantageous zone is not selected). (Winner)

In step S344, it is determined whether or not the target lottery result is a specific lottery result. Here, a detailed explanation will be omitted, but for example, among the winning hands to be drawn, the middle cherry (winner alone or winning in combination with a special prize) may be set as a guaranteed winning hand (a winning hand) in the advantageous section transition lottery. If you win a middle-tier cherry, it may be determined that it is a specific lottery result.
If it is determined in step S344 that the result is a specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S347, and if it is determined that it is not a specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S345. In other words, if the result is not a specific lottery result, an advantageous section transfer lottery is performed, and if the result is a specific lottery result, an advantageous section transfer process (step S347) is executed without performing an advantageous section transfer lottery (always transfer to an advantageous section). do). Note that it is also possible to execute the advantageous section transfer lottery even if the result is a specific lottery result, and to set it so that there is a 100% probability of winning the advantageous section transfer lottery.

In step S345, an advantageous section transfer lottery is performed. As an advantageous section transition lottery, for example, a lottery may be conducted in the same way as a winning lottery, using a lottery table in which numbers are predetermined according to winning lottery results. For example, when the winning number is "A", there is a 35% probability of winning in the advantageous section, and when the winning number is "B", there is a 60% probability of winning in the advantageous section, etc. can be mentioned.
In addition, if the winning combination lottery result is not eligible for the lottery for the advantageous section, the answer in step S343 is "No", so if the result is "Yes" in step S343, that is, the winning lottery result is the lottery result for the advantageous section transfer lottery. In this case, in the advantageous section shift lottery, a lottery is conducted using a lottery table having a number of at least "1" or more. However, the probability of winning the advantageous section transition lottery is set to be 1/17500 or more.

Next, the process proceeds to step S346, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous section has been won in the lottery at step S345. When it is determined that the advantageous section has been won, the process proceeds to step S347, and when it is determined that the advantageous section has not been won, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S347, advantageous section transition processing is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 45, and is the process of setting flags and counters based on winning in the advantageous section.
In the next step S348, an AT lottery is performed. This process is the process shown in FIG. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
Note that, without being limited to the example of this embodiment, AT may always be started (without performing an AT lottery) when moving to an advantageous section. Alternatively, when transitioning to an advantageous section, the AT may always be non-AT, and after the transition to the advantageous section (for example, after playing a predetermined number of games), it may be determined whether or not to perform AT.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing advantageous section transition processing in step S347 of FIG.
First, in step S351, the main control board 50 turns on ("1") the advantageous section type flag. Next, the process proceeds to step S352, and the main control board 50 sets an initial value of the number of games played in the advantageous section to "1500 (D)" in the advantageous section clear counter.

In the next step S353, the difference counter is set to "0". If the difference counter continues to be updated during the normal period (non-advantageous period) and is always set to "0" at the end of the game when the period is not advantageous, the process of step S353 is not necessary. However, the initial value may be set to "0" to prevent noise.
Note that at the end of the advantageous section, initialization processing including the difference counter is executed, so that the difference counter is "0" at the start of the normal section. Therefore, in the case of a specification in which the difference counter is updated only during the advantageous section, the difference counter at the start of the advantageous section is "0", so it is possible to omit the process of step S353. .
On the other hand, in the case where the difference counter continues to be updated during the non-advantageous section as in the present embodiment, the difference counter may be positive even immediately before shifting to the advantageous section. Therefore, in step S353, the difference counter is set to "0". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the AT lottery process in step S348 of FIG.
First, in step S361, an AT lottery is executed based on the winning combination lottery result. As in step S345, this lottery may include performing an AT lottery using a lottery table in which the winning numbers are determined for each combination lottery result.
Note that the AT lottery does not necessarily need to be performed, and for example, a winning lottery result that is not determined to be AT and a winning lottery result that is always determined to be AT may be provided.
In the next step S362, the main control board 50 determines whether or not AT was won in the AT lottery in step S361. When it is determined that AT has been won, the process proceeds to step S363, and when it is determined that AT has not been won, the process proceeds to step S365.

In step S363, the main control board 50 executes an AT initial game count determination process. This process is the process shown in FIG. 47, which will be described later. Next, the process advances to step S364, and the main control board 50 sets the main game state to AT and turns on the AT flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
Here, the main game states of this embodiment include normal (non-advantageous section), CZ (advantageous section and non-AT), AT, and 1BB operation. Note that it is possible to provide a precursor as the main game state after winning AT and before starting AT, but in this embodiment, to simplify the explanation, when AT is won, AT is started immediately. shall be. Further, information on the main game state is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S362 that AT has not been won and the process proceeds to step S365, the main control board 50 sets the main game state to CZ. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the AT initial number of games determination process in step S363 in FIG.
In FIG. 47, in step S371, it is determined whether the winning combination in the current game is a confirmed winning combination. As described above, a rare combination such as middle cherry is set as the confirmed combination. When it is determined that the confirmed role has been won, the process proceeds to step S372, and when it is determined that the confirmed role has not been won, the process proceeds to step S373.
In step S372, the initial number of AT games is set to "100 (D)" and stored in the AT game number counter. On the other hand, in step S373, the initial number of AT games is set to "30 (D)" and stored in the AT game number counter. Then, the processing according to each of the flowcharts ends.

In the example shown in FIG. 47, the initial number of AT games is distributed depending on whether or not the confirmed winning combination has been won. A lottery may also be performed. In other words, even if the winning lottery result is one, any one of the plurality of game times may be selected.
Also, during AT, the AT game count determination process shown in FIG. 47 may be executed as an additional lottery for the AT game count. When winning the lottery for adding up the number of AT games, the determined number of additions is added to the AT game number counter.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG.
First, in step S381, it is determined whether an instruction condition (a condition for operating an instruction function) is satisfied. When the game is AT and a combination with an advantageous push order such as push order bell is won, it is determined that the instruction condition is satisfied.
Note that if you win the advantageous section in the current game ("Yes" in step S346 in FIG. 44) and win AT ("Yes" in step S362 in FIG. 46), you will win the advantageous section from the next game. This time, the game is not in an advantageous period. Therefore, since the instruction function cannot be activated in the current game, the result is "No" in step S381.
When it is determined in step S381 that the instruction condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S382, and when it is determined that the instruction condition is not satisfied, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In the next step S382, it is determined whether the number of bets in the current game is "3". In this process, it is determined whether the bet number is "3" by reading the bet number data or the automatic bet number data of the RWM 53.
When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S383, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the process according to this flowchart is ended. As described above, in the present embodiment, the condition for activating the instruction function (executing the process related to the instruction function) is set to be the number of bets "3" (a specified number of one). For this reason, for example, even if a game is started with the bet number "2" during AT and a winning combination with an advantageous push order (for example, push order bell) is won, the instruction function will not operate (the correct push order will be (not notified).

In the next step S383, a winning number (conditional device number) is set. The winning number (conditional device number) determined in the winning combination lottery process is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. Then, in step S383, the value stored in this storage area is stored in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S384, and a press order instruction number table (not shown) is set. Here, the start address of the push order instruction number table is stored in the HL register. Then, the process advances to the next step S385.

In step S385, designated address data is set. This process is a process in which the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is set as a new HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
That is, the data stored in the winning number (condition device number) is used as an offset value, and the offset value is added to the top address of the push order instruction number table to obtain data corresponding to the obtained address. As a result, the push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is stored in the A register.
Then, in step S386, the A register value (push order instruction number) is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 (an area for storing the press order instruction number; not shown in FIG. 35).
In the next step S387, the A register value (press order instruction number) is stored as acquisition number data.

In the eleventh embodiment, it is assumed that the winning combinations to be drawn are the same as those in FIG. 58 (twelfth embodiment), which will be described later. Then, when winning numbers "3" to "8" are won during AT, the push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is set. The relationship between the winning number and the push order instruction number stored in the winning number data is as follows.
Winning number “3”: Press order instruction number “A1 (H)”
Winning number “4”: Push order instruction number “A2 (H)”
Winning number “5”: Press order instruction number “A3 (H)”
Winning number “6”: Press order instruction number “A4 (H)”
Winning number “7”: Press order instruction number “A5 (H)”
Winning number “8”: Press order instruction number “A6 (H)”

For example, when the winning number "3" is won during AT, the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is stored as the acquisition number data by the push order instruction number setting process shown in FIG. As a result, the push order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. 55, which will be described later.

After step S387, the process proceeds to step S388, where it is determined whether the advantageous section display LED flag is on (lit). When it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is on, the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is not on, the process advances to step S389.
In step S389, it is determined whether the game state of the current game (RT or main game state) is a game state in which the section Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1". Note that whether or not the gaming state is such that the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1" is set in advance, and here it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the preset gaming state. Specifically, the data of the current RT and main game state is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, and by reading this data, the game state of the current game is determined to be a game state in which the zone Sim ball payout rate exceeds "1". Determine whether or not. When it is determined that the gaming state is such that the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1", the process proceeds to step S390, and when it is determined that the gaming state is not such that the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1", the process according to this flowchart is ended. do. In step S390, the advantageous section display LED flag is turned on. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by the interrupt processing executed after step S390. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in a game where the instruction function is activated, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is not yet lit and the section Sim ball output rate is in a gaming state exceeding "1", the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Since the conditions for lighting are met, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when winning in an advantageous section transition lottery, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on before the start of the next game. Alternatively, after moving to an advantageous section, before activating the instruction function, or even if the section Sim ball output rate is not in a gaming state exceeding "1", at any timing (when an arbitrarily set lighting condition is met) ), the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) for winning in step S294 in FIG.
First, in step S391, the main control board 50 acquires payout number data. This process is a process of storing the value of payout number data in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S392, and it is determined whether or not medals are to be paid out. Specifically, it is determined whether the payout number data (A register value) is "0" or not. When it is determined that the number is "0", that is, when it is determined that no medals are paid out, the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not "0", that is, when it is determined that medals are to be paid out, the process advances to step S393.

In step S393, the value of the number of credits data is acquired.
Next, the process advances to step S394, and it is determined whether the number of credits has reached a limit value. Specifically, when the number of credits data acquired in step S393 is "50 (D)", it is determined that the number of credits has reached the limit value, the process proceeds to step S398, and the number of credits data acquired is "50 (D)". (D)'', it is determined that the number of credits has not reached the limit value, and the process advances to step S395.

In step S395, a waiting time for credit addition is set. In this embodiment, in order to set the waiting time to about 100 ms, the number of interrupt processing times is set to "46" (46×2.235 ms=about 100 ms). Specifically, "00000000 (B)" is set as the B register value, and "00101110 (B)" is set as the C register value.
Next, the process advances to step S396, and a 2-byte time wait process is executed. This process is a process in which the BC register value is subtracted for each interrupt process and waits until it becomes "0".

When the 2-byte time waiting process in step S396 ends, the process advances to step S397, and "1" is added to the value of the number of credits data. As a result, the display on the credit number display LED 76 becomes "+1" due to the interrupt process executed after the process in step S397. For example, the display on the credit number display LED 76 changes from "08" to "09". After the process in step S397, the process advances to step S399.

When the process advances from step S394 to step S398, one medal payout process (processing for paying out actual medals from the hopper 35 to the player) is executed. In this process, the hopper motor 36 is driven, and when the on/off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b is detected at a predetermined timing as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, it is determined that one medal has been correctly paid out. to decide.
Through the above process, the number of credits is added until the number of credits reaches the limit value, and when the number of credits reaches the limit, the process of paying out actual medals from the hopper 35 is executed.

In step S399, "1" is added to the acquisition number data. As a result, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 becomes "+1". For example, the display on the acquisition number display LED 78 changes from "02" to "03".
In the next step S400, "1" is subtracted from the payout number data. In this step S400, only the payout number data is updated, and the value of the payout number data buffer is not updated.

Next, the process advances to step S401, and it is determined whether or not the medal payout has been completed. This process is a process for determining whether or not the updated payout number data has become "0". When it is determined that the payout number data is "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended, and when it is determined that the payout number data is not "0", the process returns to step S393 and continues the process.

In the above payout process, when performing the payout process to add "1" to the number of credits, a waiting time of about 100 ms is set by the processes of steps S395 and S396. Thereby, the display on the credit number display LED 76 can be shown to the player as if it is counting up. For example, the display on the credit number display LED 76 before credit addition is "08", and when 8 medals are added to this, "display "08" → 100ms standby process → display "09" → 100ms Standby processing→...→100ms standby processing→Display “16””. On the other hand, if a waiting time is not provided when adding "1" to the number of credits, the display will appear to change from "08" to "16" instantly.
Then, as in the present embodiment, when adding the number of credits, by executing a 2-byte time waiting process every time "1" is added, the payout sound ("Pururu...") is output from the sub-control board 80 side. ”) and the counting up of the number of credits can be synchronized.

On the other hand, when the number of credits exceeds the maximum number "50 (D)" and medals are actually paid out in the process of step S398, the 2-byte time waiting process of steps S395 and S396 is not provided.
This is because in order to actually pay out one medal, the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out one medal, so it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal. Therefore, when actually dispensing medals, the dispensing sound can be synchronized with the dispensing sound output from the sub-control board 80 side without providing a 2-byte time waiting process.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG.
First, in step S411, processing is performed to clear the flag of the condition device (also referred to as winning information, stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53). This process is a process for clearing conditions other than the special winning combination, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination has stopped on the active line, the processing for clearing the special winning winning condition equipment is also executed. In the next step S412, the replay display LED 79f is turned off. This process is a process of setting the bit corresponding to the replay of the medal management flag (not shown in FIG. 35) provided in the RWM 53 to "0". Next, the process advances to step S413, and the replay activation flag is cleared. This process is a process of setting the D0 bit of the operating state flag to "0".

In the next step S414, it is determined whether the AT game number counter has reached "0". Here, the AT game number counter is updated in step S281 (FIG. 43) during the main processing of FIG. 41, as described above. As described above, in this embodiment, the AT game count counter is updated after the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 41), but this is not limited to this. check processing) or during the processing of step S301 (for example, before step S414 in FIG. 50).
Furthermore, although this embodiment shows an example of a game number management type AT that updates the AT game number counter, in the case of a difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter is set to "0" in step S414. Decide whether it has happened or not. Note that the AT difference number counter is updated after the medal payout process (step S294 in FIG. 41) due to winning.
When it is determined that the AT game number counter is "0", the process advances to step S415, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process advances to step S416. In step S415, the AT flag is turned off.
Next, the process advances to step S416, and advantageous section counter management is executed. This process is a process for updating the advantageous section clear counter and the difference counter, and is the process shown in FIG. 51 or 52, which will be described later. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

51 and 52 are flowcharts showing advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. FIG. 51 shows Example 1, and FIG. 52 shows Example 2.
In advantageous section counter management, the following processing is executed.
1) Updating the advantageous section clear counter 2) Updating the difference counter 3) Determining whether the end conditions of the advantageous section are met 4) When the end conditions of the advantageous section are met, initialize (clear) the data related to the advantageous section. )
Further, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of the number of bets (regulated number).
Note that the present embodiment is configured such that advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of whether it is an advantageous section or a non-advantageous section (normal section). However, it may be configured such that it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in an advantageous section, and the advantageous section counter management is executed only when the vehicle is in an advantageous section.

In Example 1 of FIG. 51, in step S421, the address value of the advantageous section clear counter is stored in the HL register. Therefore, "F063(H)" is stored in the HL register.
In the next step S422, "1" is subtracted from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register. For example, the subtraction here is as follows.
"0010(H)" → "1" subtraction → "000F(H)"
"0001 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "0000 (H)" (zero flag = 1)
“0000 (H)” → “1” subtraction → “0000 (H)” (carry flag = 1)

As described above, even if "1" is subtracted from "0000(H)", no downflow occurs and "0000(H)" remains. In this way, no matter what value the value before subtraction is, since it is just one instruction (one step) to subtract "1", it is necessary to judge whether the count value before update is "0" or not. is not necessary, and there is no need to add the value of the carry flag after subtraction. Therefore, the time required to update the count value can be significantly reduced. In addition, by configuring in this way, it is possible to judge whether or not it is in an advantageous section from the value of the advantageous section clear counter, and to determine whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (for example, if the game in the advantageous section is 1500 There is no need to judge whether a game has been executed or not, whether an arbitrary ending condition has been satisfied, etc.).

In the next step S423, the main control board 50 determines whether the advantageous section clear counter value before the subtraction was "0". This process is determined based on whether the carry flag becomes "1" in the subtraction process of step S422.
When the carry flag becomes "1" (when the value before subtraction is "0"), the process advances to step S436, and when the carry flag is not "1" (when the value before subtraction is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S436. The process advances to step S424. Note that when the carry flag becomes "1" (when the value before subtraction is "0"), this means that the current game is not a game in an advantageous section (the current game is a game in a non-advantageous section (normal section)). ) means that

In step S424, the main control board 50 determines whether the subtraction result (after subtraction) in step S422 is "0". This process is determined based on whether the zero flag becomes "1" in the subtraction process of step S422. That is, it is determined whether the value before subtraction was "1".
When the zero flag becomes "1", the process advances to step S435, and when the zero flag is not "1" (when the subtraction result is not "0"), the process advances to step S425. In addition, when the zero flag becomes "1" (when the subtraction result is "0"), the current game ends the game in the advantageous section (the next game is a game in the non-advantageous section (normal section)) ) means.

In step S425, the value of the difference counter is acquired. This process is a process of reading the value of the difference counter and storing it in the HL register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S426, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not a replay activation symbol was displayed in the current game (whether or not the replay won a prize). In this process, it is determined whether the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is "1" or not, and when it is "1", it is determined that the replay activation symbol is displayed. When it is determined that the re-game activation symbol is displayed, the process advances to step S434, and when it is determined that the re-game activation symbol is not displayed, the process advances to step S427.

In step S427, a payout number data buffer is acquired. This process is a process of reading the payout number data buffer and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S428, a process of adding the number of payouts to the difference counter is executed. This process is a process of adding the A register value (payout number data buffer value) to the HL register value (difference counter) and storing the added value in the HL register.

Next, the process advances to step S429, and the value of bet number data is acquired. This process is a process of reading bet number data and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S430, the bet number is subtracted from the difference counter. This process is a process of subtracting the A register value from the HL register value and storing the subtraction result in the HL register. Here, when the HL register value becomes less than "0", the carry flag becomes "1".

In the next step S431, it is determined whether the subtraction result in step S430 is less than "0". In this process, it is determined whether the carry flag becomes "1" by the subtraction in step S430, and when the carry flag is "1", it is determined that the subtraction result is less than "0", and the process proceeds to step S432. move on. On the other hand, when the carry flag is not "1" (when the subtraction result is not less than "0"), the process advances to step S433.

In step S432, a process of clearing the HL register value (setting it to "0") is executed. Then, in the next step S433, the difference counter value is saved. This process is a process of storing the HL register value in the difference counter. Therefore, when the process moves to step S433 via step S432, the difference counter becomes "0".
In the next step S434, the main control board 50 determines whether the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value. The upper limit value of the difference counter is set to "2400 (D)". In this process, a comparison operation is performed between the HL register value and "2401(D)". In this comparison operation, when the HL register value is larger, the carry flag becomes "0", and when the HL register value is smaller, the carry flag becomes "1". Therefore, when the carry flag is "1" (when the HL register value is smaller), it is determined that the upper limit has not been exceeded, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper limit value is exceeded (when the carry flag is "0"), the process advances to step S435. Note that when the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value, the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied.
In step S435, the RWM 53 initializes the storage area regarding the advantageous section (clears the data regarding the advantageous section). Data related to advantageous sections include an advantageous section clear counter, an advantageous section type flag, a difference counter, an advantageous section display LED flag, an AT flag, an AT game count counter, and the like. Furthermore, information on the main game state can be mentioned. Note that the information regarding advantageous sections does not include RT status numbers, LED display counters, and the like. Specifically, in FIG. 35, "F000(H)" to "F052(H)" are not included.

For example, the data cleared in step S435 does not include the LED display counter.
Now assume that the LED display counter is to be cleared. In that case, the LED display counter becomes "0" when the advantageous section ends. Specifically, if the LED display counter is initialized to "00000010 (B)", the LED display counter should be updated to "00000001 (B)" in the next interrupt process, and the LED Even though it is possible to light up the LED corresponding to the display counter (specifically, the upper digit of the credit number display LED 76), the LED display counter ends up being "00010000 (B)". Therefore, the display of the LED whose LED display counter corresponds to "00000001(B)" is delayed, and there is a possibility that the LED appears to be turned off for a moment.

Furthermore, the data cleared in step S435 does not include, for example, the following data.
1) Excitation information of the motor 32 2) Error information when an error occurs 3) Data for displaying the management information display LED 74 (rot ratio monitor) (total number of games counter, total payout counter, etc.)
4) Timer value of minimum playing time (4.1 seconds) (set in step S285 in FIG. 41)
5) Input port 51 information 6) Control command buffer data 7) Stack area data 8) External signal information The above is an example of typical data, and the data that will not be cleared is limited to the above data. It doesn't mean that it will happen.

Next, the process advances to step S436, and the main control board 50 determines whether the advantageous section type flag is "0" (normal section). When the advantageous section type flag is "0", the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when the advantageous section type flag is not "0", particularly in this embodiment, when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "1" (advantageous section), the process advances to step S437. Note that the reason why the advantageous section type flag is set to "1" at this point is because the player won the transfer lottery for an advantageous section in this game, and the advantageous section type flag was set to "1" in step S351 in FIG. In this case, the determination in step S423 is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S436. On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S436 via step S435, the advantageous section type flag is cleared in step S435, so the determination in step S436 will not be "No."

In step S437, an initial value is set in an advantageous section clear counter. This process is a process of setting the advantageous section clear counter to "1500 (D)". Here, "1500 (D)" is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. Note that "F063(H)" is set in the HL register in step S421. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In the above advantageous section counter management, when updating the difference counter, the number of payouts is first added (step S428), and then the number of bets is subtracted (step S430). The reason for processing in this way is as follows.
For example, assume that when the difference counter is "2 (D)", the number of bets is "3 (D)" and the number of payouts is "9 (D)".
Here, when the number of bets is first subtracted from the difference counter, it becomes "-1 (D)" (actually, "FFFF (H)"), and the carry flag becomes "1". Then, when the payout number is added, "9 (D)" is added to "-1 (D)", so it becomes "8 (D)" and the carry flag is "1" (the carry is ).

The difference in the number of coins for this game is "+6", so just by adding the difference number of coins "+6" to the difference counter "2 (D)" before updating, the carry flag becomes "1" and the irregular A situation arises. In other words, the process of step S431 (whether or not the subtraction result is less than "0") cannot be determined based on whether the carry flag is "1" or not. If the carry flag is "1" or not, it would be determined "Yes" in step S431 even though no carry down has occurred, and the difference counter would be initialized in step S432. This will set the value. Note that the carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" in any case where a carry or a carry down occurs as a result of subtraction.

On the other hand, when the difference counter is "2 (D)", if you first add the payout number "9 (D)", the difference counter becomes "11 (D)" at that point, and then the bet is made. When the number is subtracted, it becomes "8 (D)". In this case, the carry flag is "0" because no downflow occurs.
For the above reasons, when updating the difference counter, if the number of payouts is first added and then the number of bets is subtracted, the determination process in step S431 can be executed by a simple process using the carry flag.

In addition, in the advantageous section counter management of this embodiment, the subtraction process (step S422) of the advantageous section counter is first executed, and when the value before subtraction is "0" (when "Yes" at step S423, that is, (when it is a non-advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S436 without executing the difference counter updating process (steps S425 to S430). Therefore, in this embodiment, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of whether the section is an advantageous section or a non-advantageous section, but when the section is a non-advantageous section, the difference counter update process is performed. Processing efficiency is improved by not executing . Therefore, the processing order is such that the advantageous section clear counter is first subtracted, and then the difference counter is updated. Of course, if the specification is such that it is determined whether or not it is in an advantageous section, and if it is in an advantageous section, the process of subtracting the advantageous section clear counter and updating the difference counter is performed, then the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted. It is also possible to execute the update process of the difference counter before the process.

Furthermore, even when the determination in step S426 is "Yes" (at the time of replay winning), the process of step S434 is executed. By doing this, even if a situation occurs where an abnormal value (a value exceeding 2400 (D)) is stored in the difference sheet counter due to noise etc. at the end of the game, "Yes" will be returned in step S434. , the advantageous section can be ended. On the other hand, if such confirmation is not necessary, the process of this flowchart may be terminated when "Yes" is obtained in step S426.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 51, it is determined in step S426 whether or not the replay activation symbol is stopped and displayed, and when it is determined that the replay activation symbol is stopped and displayed, the difference counter updating process (steps S427 to S430) is skipped to speed up the processing.
In particular, in a game where the replay activation symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the number of payouts for the game may be regarded as "0" (deemed number of payouts), and the number of bets for the next game may be regarded as "0", and the difference counter may be updated. . However, for example, if an SB (single bonus) is set as a winning combination during an advantageous period, and the SB is won, the next game is to play one SB game with a bet number of "1", but this SB game If you win a replay, the replay activation symbol may stop displaying. In this case, since the next game is not an SB game, the number of bets is "3" (other than the SB game, a game with a bet number of "1" is not possible). However, in this case, the number of deemed payouts in the SB game and the number of bets in the next game do not match, so the problem is how to count the difference counter.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the above problem can be solved by not updating the difference counter in a game in which the replay activation symbol is displayed in a stopped state.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a second example of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. In FIG. 52, the same step numbers are assigned to processes similar to those in FIG. 51.
In example 1 of FIG. 51, the number of payouts is first added to the difference counter, and then the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, the number of bets is first subtracted from the difference counter, and then the number of payouts is added to the difference counter.

In the example of FIG. 51, if the number of payouts is added after subtracting the number of bets from the difference counter, the carry flag may end up being "1" even if there is no downturn in the end, and the calculation result is It has been explained that it is no longer possible to determine whether the carry flag is "0" or not based on whether the carry flag is "1" or not.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter (step S430), and then the number of payouts is added (step S428), and in step S441, without referring to the value of the carry flag, It is determined whether the calculation result is less than "0".
Specifically, in step S441 of FIG. 52, the step S441 is determined depending on whether or not the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register (register that stores the upper digits) value of the HL register value is "1". It is determined whether the calculation result of is less than "0".

for example,
Difference counter value (HL register value) = 0000 (H) (before calculation)
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout number data = 0 (H)
Assume that
In this case, the difference counter value after the calculation is
0000(H)-3(H)=FFFD(H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111/1111 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (1111/1101 (B))
becomes.
Note that "/" indicates a break every 4 bits in binary notation.

In the above example, the HL register value before the calculation is "0000 (H)", but if the HL register value before the calculation is not "0000 (H)" and "The difference in the number of sheets in this game > HL register For example, if
Different number of sheets for this game = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0001 (H) (before calculation)
When , the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = FFFE (H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111/1111 (B))
L register value = FE (H) (1111/1110 (B))
becomes.

Furthermore, if the HL register value is not "0000 (H)" and "the difference in the number of coins in the current game <HL register value", for example, firstly,
Different number of sheets for this game = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0100 (H) (256 (D)) (before calculation)
When , the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 00FD (H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (1111/1101 (B))
becomes.

Also, secondly,
Different number of sheets for this game = 03 (H)
HL register value = 00FF (H) (255 (D)) (before calculation)
When , the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 00FC(H)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FC (H) (1111/1100 (B))
becomes.

Furthermore, thirdly,
Different number of sheets for this game = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0960 (H) (2400 (D)) (before calculation)
When , the HL register value after the operation is
HL register value = 095D (H) (after calculation)
becomes.
therefore,
H register value = 09 (H) (0000/1001 (B))
L register value = 5D (H) (0101/1101 (B))
becomes.

On the other hand, the upper limit value of the difference counter is "2400 (D)". Here, if "2400 (D)" is expressed in binary,
"0000/1001/0110/0000(B)"
becomes.
The upper limit value of the difference counter is "2400 (D)", so when a value exceeding "2400 (D)" is stored in the difference counter, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the difference number The counter is cleared (step S435 in FIGS. 51 and 52).
Furthermore, at the end of this game, the difference counter value reached "2400 (D)", but since it did not exceed "2400 (D)", it was determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section were not met, and the next game Suppose you have migrated. Then, in the next game, the difference in the number of coins will increase the most when the number of bets is "1" and the number of payouts is "15 (D)", so the difference in the number of coins in the game will be "14 (D)". becomes.
Therefore, the difference counter value in this case is "2414 (D)".
Here, if "2414 (D)" is expressed in binary,
"0000/1001/0110/1110(B)"
becomes.

Furthermore, when the difference counter value reaches "2414 (D)", it exceeds "2400 (D)", so the difference counter is cleared in the game and becomes "0 (D)".
From the above, the maximum value that the difference counter can take during the game is "2414 (D)", that is, "0000/1001/0110/1110 (B)".

Therefore, when the HL register value is "2414 (D)",
H register value = 0000/1001 (B)
L register value = 0110/1110 (B)
The D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value is "0".
Therefore, when the HL register value, that is, the difference counter value is in the range of "0(D)" to "2414(D)", the D7 bit of the H register value is always "0".

From the above, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value is always "0" and never becomes "1" except in the case of a downgrade.
In addition, in order for the D7 bit of the H register value to become "1", the difference counter value must become "32768 (D)", and the difference number must reach such a value, excluding downshifts. The advantageous section will not continue until the end.

On the other hand, as mentioned above,
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout number data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference counter) = 0000 (H) (before calculation)
If so, the HL register value after the calculation becomes "FFFD(H)".
Here, “FFFD(H)” is
"1111/1111/1111/1101 (B)"
It is.

therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1101 (B)
The D7 bit of the H register value is "1".
Similarly, before the operation,
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout number data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference counter) = 0002 (H)
In this case, when the difference counter is updated, the HL register value becomes "FFFF (H)".

Here, “FFFF(H)” is
"1111/1111/1111/1111 (B)"
It is.
therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1111 (B)
The D7 bit of the H register value is "1".
In this way, when a downgrade occurs, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value becomes "1".

From the above, as a result of updating the difference counter, when there is no digit down, the D7 bit of the H register value is "0", and when there is a digit down, the D7 bit of the H register value is "0". 1”.
Therefore, in step S441 of FIG. 52, when determining whether the calculation result is less than "0", it is determined whether the D7 bit of the H register value is "1". When the D7 bit of the H register value is "1", it is determined that the calculation result is less than "0".
In this way, it is possible to determine whether the calculation result is "0" without determining whether the carry flag is "1" as a result of the calculation.
Since it is determined whether the calculation result is "0" without using the carry flag, there is no problem even if the number of payouts is added to the difference counter value after subtracting the number of bets.

Also, as is clear from the above, even if the difference counter reaches the maximum value "2414 (D)", it is not limited to the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value, but also the D6 bit, D5 bit, and The D4 bit is also "0".
On the other hand, when a digit decrease occurs in the difference counter value, not only the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value but also the D6 bit, D5 bit, and D4 bit become "1".

Therefore, in step S441 in FIG. 52, instead of determining whether the D7 bit of the H register value is "1", it may be determined whether the D6 bit is "1". , it may be determined whether or not the D5 bit is "1", or it may be determined whether or not the D4 bit is "1". In either case, when the relevant bit is "1", the operation result is less than "0", and when it is not "1", the operation result is not less than "0".
Note that, as is clear from the above, in Example 1 (step S431) of FIG. 51 as well, the D7 bit (or D6, D5, or D4 bit) of the H register value is referenced to determine if the operation result is less than "0". It is also possible to determine whether or not there is.

Furthermore, as is clear from FIGS. 51 and 52, the advantageous section clear counter is updated (step S422), the difference counter is updated (steps S428 and S430), and whether the advantageous section clear counter is "0" or not is determined. The judgment (step S424), the judgment as to whether the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value (step S434), and the initialization of information regarding the advantageous section (step S435) are performed regardless of the number of bets (specified number) in the current game. , executed. Therefore, even if the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0" or the difference counter exceeds the upper limit as a result of playing a game with the number of bets (specified number) "2", the advantageous section ends. do.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55). As described above, the main control board 50 performs the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 53 at a period of 2.235 ms (however, the time period is not limited to this) in parallel with the main processing.
After proceeding to the interrupt processing in step S451, in step S452, as initial processing, register values are saved and duplicate interrupts are prohibited. Here, since the registers of the main CPU 55 used in the main processing are used in the interrupt processing, the current register values are saved in the stack area of the RWM 53. Furthermore, an interrupt prohibition flag is turned on so that the next interrupt process is not started during the interrupt process. This is done because, for example, a request to execute interrupt processing may be made during execution of power-off processing.

In the next step S453, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 54, which will be described later, and is a process for detecting whether or not a power-off detection signal has been input.
In the next step S454, the interrupt counter value is updated. Note that the interrupt counter value is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.
In the next step S455, timer measurement is performed. This process is a process that subtracts the time set in the main process. Specifically, for example, whether the minimum playing time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed or not is included.

Next, the process advances to step S456 to perform LED display control (I_LED_OUT). This process is a process shown in FIG. 55, which will be described later, and is a process in which the LEDs (digits 1 to 5) are lit according to the state of the slot machine 10.
Note that there are two types of errors that occur in the slot machine 10: unrecoverable errors and recoverable errors. For unrecoverable errors, an error display is output by the main process (for example, step S304 in FIG. 41), but for recoverable errors Errors are displayed using this LED display control each time an interrupt is processed.

Next, the process advances to step S457, and reading processing for the input port 51 is performed. As a result, whether or not the bet switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42, etc. have been operated, switch signals, input signals of various sensors are read, and data based on the input port 51 (level data, rising data, falling data) is generated and stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.

In the next step S458, it is determined whether the set value is within the normal range. Here, read the setting value data stored at address "F000 (H)" and check whether the range of the setting value data is within the normal range (whether the setting value data is within the range of "0" to "5"). ) to determine whether or not. When it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S459, and when it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S470, and the process proceeds to irreversible error processing. The error in this case is referred to as an "E6" error in this embodiment, and the fact that it is "E6" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

In step S459, a built-in random number check process is performed. In this embodiment, a flag is provided that is turned on when an error occurs in the built-in random number, and it is determined whether or not this flag is on.
Specifically, for example, when an abnormality in the clock frequency of the random number for lottery winnings is detected (such as when the random number update is slow), the error flag is turned on.
Then, the process proceeds to step S460, where it is determined whether an error has occurred in the built-in random number (whether the error flag is on or not), and when it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S461, where the error is detected. If it is determined that this has occurred, the process advances to step S470 to proceed to irreversible error processing. The error display content at this time is "E7".

In step S461, drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed for each reel 31 (left, middle, right), and includes stop, constant speed, acceleration, deceleration, start of deceleration, and standby depending on the operating state. When the drive control of the reel 31 is completed, the process advances to step S462, and port output processing is performed. In this process, the excitation output of the motor 32 (for reel), the hopper motor 36, and the excitation output of the blocker 45 are performed.

In the next step S463, input error checking processing is executed. This process is a process for determining whether there is any abnormality in the various sensors.
In the next step S464, control command transmission processing is performed. This process is a process of transmitting the set control command (unsent control command stored in the command buffer (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53) to the sub-control board 80.
Specifically, when a control command is set in the command buffer, this step S464 is executed in interrupt processing after that point (if the command buffer is empty, in principle, the next interrupt processing after that point). A control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

In the next step S465, data for the external signal stored in the RWM 53 is stored in a register. Then, in the next step S466, an external signal is output (transmission of the signal to the external centralized terminal board 100) from the output port 52 (output port 5 in FIG. 33).
Next, the process advances to step S467, and ratio display preparation processing is performed. This process is a process that updates a timer related to the ratio display of the management information display LED 74, outputs segment data, and the like.

In the next step S468, random number update processing is performed. Next, the process advances to step S469, where the register value saved in step S452 is restored, and the next interrupt is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of interrupt processing is restored, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

As shown in the above processing, the number of credits display LED 76, the number of acquisitions display LED 78, the status display LED 79 (79a to 79f), the setting value display LED 73, and the management information display LED 74 are turned on/off by the interrupt processing every 2.235 ms. controlled.
Furthermore, for each interrupt process, if a control command that has not yet been sent to the sub-control board 80 is stored in the command buffer, the process to send it is performed.

Note that during unrecoverable error processing, no interrupt processing is performed (interrupt processing is suspended until normal recovery occurs).
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that cannot normally occur, and processes based on the abnormal data (updating data in the RWM 53 based on data from the input port, sending control commands to the sub-control board 80), etc. are executed. To prevent this, interrupts themselves are prohibited.
When an unrecoverable error occurs and an unsent command is stored in the control command buffer, the command is not sent to the sub-control board 80. This is because the control command stored in the buffer may be incorrect.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG.
In step S481, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off detection signal was on in the previous interrupt process. Here, when the voltage falls below a predetermined value (in the example of FIG. 3, V1 or less), a predetermined input signal is detected by a voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit; not shown) provided on the main control board 50. Since a power-off detection signal is input to a predetermined bit of the port 51, it is detected whether or not the signal is input. Further, when the power-off detection signal is turned on, it is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
If it is determined in the previous interrupt processing that the power-off detection signal is on, the process advances to step S482, and if it is determined that it is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S482, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off detection signal is on in the current interrupt process. When it is determined that it is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is on, the process advances to step S483.
When it is determined "Yes" in both steps S481 and S482 (when the power-off detection signal is input for two consecutive interrupts), it is determined that a power-off has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S483 and subsequent steps.
In step S483, the outputs of all output ports 52 are turned off. Through this process, for example, when the motor 32 is being driven (while the reels 31 are rotating) or the hopper motor 36 is being driven (while medals are being paid out), the driving is stopped.
Next, the process advances to step S484, and the power-off processing completed flag is stored in the RWM 53. This process is a process of storing data indicating that normal power-off processing has been executed in the RWM 53.

In the next step S485, checksum data of the RWM 53 is calculated. This process calculates a checksum that includes the work area (RWM 53) used by the program, and examples of target program use areas include the program work area, unused area, and stack area.
Then, in the next step S486, it is determined whether or not calculation of the entire checksum range has been completed. If it is determined that the calculation has not been completed, the process returns to step S485 to continue calculation of the checksum. On the other hand, if it is determined that the checksum calculation has been completed, the process advances to step S487.

In step S487, the calculated checksum is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Here, the data stored in the RWM 53 is 1-byte data (also called complement data) that becomes "0" when all the data in the program use area and the value stored at the above-mentioned predetermined address are added at the time of checksum of the RWM 53. ).
When the checksum of the RWM 53 is executed at the start of the program, all data in the program use area of the RWM 53 in the same range as above and the checksum data are added. If the checksum data thus calculated is "0", it is determined to be a normal value, and if it is not "0", it is determined to be an abnormal value.
Next, the process advances to step S488, and a reset wait state is entered. When the voltage reaches a predetermined value, a reset signal is output from the voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit) provided on the main control board 50, so in step S488, the state waits for the output of the reset signal.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S456 in FIG.
First, in step S491, output ports 2 and 3 (see FIG. 33) are turned off. This process is a process for outputting "00000000(B)" from output ports 2 and 3. In the next step S492, output port 4 (see FIG. 33) is turned off. This process is also a process for outputting "00000000(B)" from the output port 4, similar to the above process.

In step S493, the LED display counter is updated. This process updates the bit "1" of the LED display counter by shifting it to the right by one digit.
In the next step S494, it is determined whether the LED display counter is "0" or not, and when it is determined that it is "0", the process proceeds to step S495, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S496. .
In step S495, the LED display counter is initialized. Here, processing is executed to change the LED display counter "00000000(B)" to "00010000(B)". Then, the process advances to step S496.
In step S496, the LED display counter and LED display request flag stored in the RWM 53 are acquired. Here, the value of the LED display counter is stored in the D register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the E register.

Next, the process advances to step S497, and error number display data, LED display data, and bet display data are acquired. Here, the storage area of the RWM 53 stores a storage area for storing error number display data when an error occurs, and LED display data indicating on/off of the game start display LED 79d to replay display LED 79f among the status display LEDs 79. A storage area and (1 to 3) a storage area for storing bet display data indicating on/off of the bet display LEDs 79a to 79c are provided.
Specifically, the LED display data is configured as follows.
D0: Unused D1: Unused D2: Unused D3: "1" when the game can be started, "0" when the game cannot be started
D4: "1" when medals can be inserted, "0" when medals cannot be inserted
D5: "1" when replay wins, "0" when replay does not win
D6: Unused D7: Unused Note that the D3 to D5 bits of the LED display data correspond to the segments D to F of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG.

Furthermore, the bet display data is structured as follows.
When 0 pieces are bet: 00000000
When betting 1 card: 00000001
When betting 2 cards: 00000011
When betting 3 cards: 00000111
Note that bits D0 to D2 of the bet display data correspond to segments A to C of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG. 32.
Then, in step S497, the error number display data is read and stored in the B register. Further, the LED display data is read and stored in the A register, and the bet display data is read and stored in the C register.

In the next step S498, the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (bet display data) are ORed (combined), and the result of the operation is set as segment data for the output port 3. When the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (bet display data) are ORed, data indicating whether the status display LED 79 is turned on or off is obtained. When there is a request to display digit 5 ("Yes" in step S516), this segment data is output from output port 3.
Next, the process advances to step S499, and the register in which segment data for output port 4 is set is cleared.

In the next step S500, the value obtained by ANDing the LED display counter value (D register value) and the LED display request flag value (E register value) is stored in the D register, and whether or not the value is "0" is stored. to judge. If it is determined to be "0", it is determined that there is no display request, and the process advances to step S516. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not "0", it is determined that there is a display request and the process proceeds to step S501.

In step S501, the LED segment table 2 is set. Here, the LED segment table of this embodiment includes LED segment table 1 that defines segment data when displaying an error number, and LED segment table 1 that defines segment data when displaying an error number, and (number of credits, number of payouts, setting value, display during setting change, press order) An LED segment table 2 defining segment data for displaying instruction information and specified number of instructions) is provided, and is stored in the used area of the ROM 54. Then, in step S501, the start address of the LED segment table 2 is read and the value is stored in the HL register.

Here, offset and segment data are defined in the LED segment table 2 set in step S501 as follows.
Offset "0": Segment data that displays "0" Offset "1": Segment data that displays "1" Offset "2": Segment data that displays "2" Offset "3": Displays "3" Segment data Offset "4": Segment data to display "4" Offset "5": Segment data to display "5" Offset "6": Segment data to display "6" Offset "7": Segment data to display "7" Segment data to display Offset "8": Segment data to display "8" Offset "9": Segment data to display "9" Offset "A": Segment data to display "=" Offset "B": "A" Segment data to display

For example, firstly, if payout number data "10 (H)" is stored in the acquisition number data, the offset of the upper digit of the payout number data is "1" and the offset of the lower digit is "0". becomes. As a result, when the digit 3a is lit, segment data that displays "1" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is lit, segment data that displays "0" is obtained.
For example, secondly, if the setting change display data "88 (H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digit of the setting change display data is "8", and the lower digit The offset of is "8". As a result, when the digit 3a is lit, segment data for displaying "8" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is lit, segment data for displaying "8" is obtained.

Furthermore, thirdly, for example, if the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digit of the push order instruction number will be "A", and the offset of the lower digit will be "A". The offset will be "1". As a result, when the digit 3a is lit, segment data for displaying "=" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is lit, segment data for displaying "1" is obtained.
Furthermore, fourthly, for example, if the instruction regulation number display data "0B(H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digit is "0" and the offset of the lower digit is "B". becomes. As a result, when the digit 3a is lit, segment data for displaying "0" is obtained, and when the digit 4a is lit, segment data for displaying "A" is obtained.

Next, the process advances to step S502, and first, setting value data is acquired. Here, the setting value data stored at address "F000(H)" is read and stored in the A register. Next, "1" is added to the A register value to generate set value display data and stored in the A register. This set value display data becomes an offset value when displaying the set value.
As will be described later, the segment data stored at the address (in the LED segment table 1 or 2) of the value obtained by adding the offset value to the start address value of the LED segment table 1 or 2 is acquired.
Next, the process advances to step S503, and it is determined whether there is a request to display set values. Here, if the D register value is "00010000 (B)" and the setting is being changed or confirmed, it is determined that there is a request to display the setting value. When it is determined that there is a request to display the set value, the process advances to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process advances to step S504.

In step S504, credit number data is acquired and stored in the A register. In the next step S505, an offset for upper digits is obtained. This process executes an operation of dividing the credit number data (A register value) obtained in step S504 by "10 (D)", stores the quotient value in the A register, and stores the remainder value in the E register. It is processing.
In the next step S506, it is determined whether there is a request to display the upper digits of the number of credits. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit (bit corresponding to digit 1a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined as "Yes". When it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit number, the process advances to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process advances to step S507.

In step S507, it is determined whether there is a request to display the lower digits of the number of credits. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit (bit corresponding to digit 2a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S513. . On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digits of the number of credits, the process advances to step S508.

In step S508, the acquisition number data is read and stored in the A register. Here, in the acquisition number data, the payout number data is stored at the timing when medals are paid out based on the winning of the small winning combination. Furthermore, at the timing when the settings are being changed, display data "88 (H)" is stored during the settings change. Furthermore, when it is time to instruct a specified number, specified specified number display data "0B(H)" is stored. Furthermore, at the timing when the instruction function is activated (the press order is notified), a press order instruction number "=x (x=any one of 1 to 6)" is stored. Then, any of these data is acquired and stored in the A register.

In the next step S509, it is determined whether this applies when an error is displayed. This process reads the B register value (error number display data stored in step S497), determines whether it is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", it is determined that an error is being displayed, and step S510 If the value is "0", it is determined that an error is not being displayed, and the process advances to step S511.
In step S510, an LED segment table 1 for error display is set. Note that a description of the specific configuration of the LED segment table 1 will be omitted. In step S510, processing is executed to store the start address of the LED segment table 1 in the HL register. Therefore, in this case, the start address of the LED segment table 1 is set (stored in the HL register) in place of the start address of the LED segment table 2 set in step S501.

In the next step S511, an offset for the upper digits is acquired. In this process, when an error is displayed (when the B register value is not "0"), an operation is performed to divide the B register value by "10 (D)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is is stored in the E register. On the other hand, when it is not an error display (when the B register value is "0"), the A register value (payout number data, setting change display data, instruction specified number display data, or push order instruction number) is set to "10 ( D)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the E register.

In the next step S512, it is determined whether there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED 78. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit (bit corresponding to digit 3a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. When it is determined that there is a display request, the process advances to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process advances to step S513.

Proceeding to step S513, the offset for the lower digits is acquired. This process is a process for storing data stored in the E register in the A register. That is, the upper digit values and lower digit values are exchanged between the A register and the E register. Then, the process advances to step S514.
In step S514, segment data is acquired. This process adds the data stored in the HL register (starting address of LED segment table 1 or 2) and the data (offset value) stored in the A register, and This process stores the segment data (of Table 1 or 2) in the C register.

In the next step S515, segment data for output port 4 is set. The data set here is segment data for displaying the set value (digit 5b). Since digits 1b to 4b are lit in the ratio display process (step S522) to be described later, segment data for digits 1b to 4b is not set here.
Therefore, in step S515, when the result in step S503 is "Yes" (set value display request), and the segment data for displaying the set value is acquired in step S514 and stored in the C register, the C register value is output. Set as segment data for port 4.

Next, the process advances to step S516, and it is determined whether there is a request to display digit 5 or not. Here, a request to display digit 5 is made when the D register value is "00010000 (B)". If it is determined that there is a request to display digit 5, the process advances to step S520, and if it is determined that there is no request to display digit 5, the process advances to step S517.

In step S517, segment data for output port 3 is set. Here, the C register value stored in step S514 is set as segment data for output port 3. Note that when "Yes" in step S516 (when there is a request to display digit 5), the data set in step S498 becomes the segment data for output port 3.

In the next step S518, data for the advantageous section display LED 77 is set. Here, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is obtained, and it is determined whether the value is "0" or not. If the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is not "0", it is determined whether the digit lit in the current interrupt process is digit 4a. When the D3 bit of the D register value is "1", it is determined that it is the timing to turn on the digit 4a. In this case, the data obtained by ORing the segment data set in step S517 and "10000000" is set as the segment data for output port 3. As a result, data is set that allows segment P (advantageous section display LED 77) of digit 4a to light up.

Next, the process advances to step S519, and the segment data for output port 4 set in step S515 is cleared. This is to prevent digit 5b (setting value display LED 73) from being lit when there is no request to display digit 5 ("No" in step S516).
The process then proceeds to step S520, where the digit signal is output from output port 2 and the segment signal is output from output port 3. Here, the D register value is set as digit data of output port 2 and output from output port 2.
Furthermore, the data of the segment signal output from the output port 3 is the data set in step S498 (when digit 5 is lit) or the data set in step S517 (when digits 1 to 4 are lit).

Next, the process advances to step S521, and a segment signal is output from output port 4. The data of the segment signal output from the output port 4 is the segment data set in step S515 (when there is a setting value display request) or the data cleared in step S519 (when there is no setting value display request). In other words, when the segment data for output port 4 is cleared in step S519, "00000000(B)" is output from output port 4.
Next, the process proceeds to step S522, where the process moves to ratio display processing (processing for lighting up the management information display LED 74). Note that in this embodiment, a description of the ratio display process will be omitted. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Next, the relationship between the advantageous section display LED 77 and a power outage (when a power outage occurs while the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on) will be explained.
In the interrupt process, when a power outage is detected in FIG. 54, the process proceeds to step S483 and subsequent steps, but in this case, the data stored in the RWM 53 is retained even after the power outage.
After the power is turned on, in the program start process (M_PRG_START) of FIG. 38, if the setting key switch is off, it is determined as "No" in step S208, so if the power-off recovery is normal, step The process advances to the power-off recovery process (M_POWER_ON; FIG. 40) in S213.

In the power-off recovery process of FIG. 40, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is set in step S253, and as described above, this range is an unused area of the RWM 53. Therefore, in FIG. 35, the advantageous section display LED flag at address "F062(H)" is not subject to initialization. The same applies to the LED display counter of address "F051(H)".

In the power-off recovery process of FIG. 40, when the initialization of the RWM 53 is completed, an interrupt is activated in step S262. Therefore, from step S262 onwards, the interrupt process shown in FIG. 53 is executed at intervals of 2.235 ms. When the interrupt process is executed, the LED display counter value is read in step S496 during the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. Further, when "No" in step S512, there is a request to display the digit 4a. In this case, if it is not an error display ("No" in step S509) and the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", the D7 bit of the segment data is set to "1" in step S518, and the segment Data is output (step S520). As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up.
As described above, when the power is cut off while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit again when the interrupt process is executed in the power cut recovery process.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch on after the power is turned off, the following occurs.
In the program start process of FIG. 38, if the setting key switch is on, "Yes" is determined in step S208, and the process moves to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET; FIG. 39) of step S212.
In FIG. 39, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is specified in step S221, and this initialization range also includes the advantageous section display LED flag of address "F062(H)". Note that when it is determined that the power-off recovery is not normal and the process proceeds to step S223, the entire range of the RWM 53 (including address "F062(H)") is initialized.

Therefore, by initializing the advantageous section display LED flag, even if "1" indicating lighting has been stored up to that point, it becomes "0" indicating turning off.
Thereafter, in step S233 of FIG. 39, an interrupt is activated. When the interrupt is activated, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 when the timing for lighting the set value display LED 73 comes in the LED display control (FIG. 55). Then, in step S240 in FIG. 39, the setting value becomes changeable (the setting value is changed when the setting change switch is turned on).

Furthermore, in the case where the interrupt processing is started in step S233 in FIG. 39 and the LED display control (FIG. 55) is executed, even when the timing for lighting up digit 4a comes, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag has already been set to "0'', the advantageous section display LED 77 remains off.
As described above, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch on and the setting change process is started, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up. Furthermore, even if the setting change processing is finished and the main processing is started, the advantageous section display LED 77 remains off.

In addition, in the main process of FIG. 41, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and a power outage occurs during the loop from step S286 to step S289, that is, while the reel 31 is rotating, the following will occur. .
When a power outage is detected in the interrupt process, all output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in FIG. 54, so the drive signal for the motor 32 for rotating the reel 31 is also turned off. As a result, the rotating reel 31 (motor 32) also stops due to the power cut.

Next, when power is supplied, the state returns to the state before the power was cut off through the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) of FIG. 40 described above. As a result, the same drive signal for the motor 32 as before power-off is output from the output port 52. Here, the drive signal for the motor 32 before the power is turned off is a signal that maintains a constant speed state. In this embodiment, it is assumed that when the motor 32 (reel 31) is in a constant speed state, one interrupt (2.235 ms) causes one step drive. However, even if a constant speed drive signal is output from the beginning to the motor 32 after the drive has been stopped, the motor 32 cannot be driven because its rotational torque is weak.

Therefore, since the reel 31 does not rotate, the index sensor 33 does not detect the index of the reel 31 (does not cut the index). When it is determined that the index is not detected for a certain period of time, it is determined that the reel 31 is not rotating, and the motor 32 is re-accelerated (re-operated). The motor 32 is accelerated by, for example, first driving one step at 20 interrupts (20 x 2.235 = 44.7 ms), then driving one step at 16 interrupts, and then driving one step at 12 interrupts, etc. This is a method of driving one step in gradually decreasing time. The acceleration state requires a time of about 100 steps, for example. Thereby, rotation of the reel 31 can be started.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on and an interrupt is activated in step S262 in FIG. 40, digits 1a to 5a are dynamically lit based on the value of the LED display counter. When the value is such that digit 3a lights up ("00000100 (B)" in FIG. 34), the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)" after 4 interrupts from that point, and digit 4a (advantageous section display LED 77) lights up. The timing has come.

On the other hand, the power is turned off before the index of the reel 31 is detected by the reel sensor 33 (for example, when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 with "1" to several steps remaining), and after the power is turned on. Even if it is determined that the index of the reel 31 is not detected by the reel sensor 33 and acceleration is performed again, as described above, it will take at least several dozen interruptions before the reel 31 (motor 32) reaches a constant speed state. It takes.
Therefore, after the power is turned on, the reel 31 enters a constant speed state after the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up. That is, when the stop switch 42 becomes ready for operation, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.

In addition, when the reel 31 stops at a position where the index of the reel 31 is relatively far from the reel sensor 33, several to dozens of interrupts will occur after the interrupt is activated until it is determined that the reel sensor 33 does not detect the index of the reel 31. It takes. Therefore, in this case, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up before the motor 32 accelerates again.
As described above, the advantageous section display LED 77 is set to light up before the reel 31 rotates again and returns to the constant speed state after the power is restored from the power cut.

In addition, in the main process of FIG. 41, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and a power failure occurs while the hopper motor 36 is being driven in the medal payout process for winning in step S294, the following will occur. . Note that, as described in the sixth embodiment, the hopper motor 36 is a DC motor.
In the medal payout process shown in FIG. 49, the hopper motor 36 is driven in step S398, and when each of the payout sensors 37a and 37b normally detects the movable piece 39a as shown in FIG. , S31 to S34), it is determined that one medal has been normally paid out. The hopper motor 36 continues to be driven until it is determined that medals corresponding to the number of payouts have been paid out.
During medal dispensing, if a power outage is detected in the interrupt process before all medals are dispensed, all output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in FIG. The drive signal is also turned off. As a result, the medal payout process is interrupted.

Next, when power is supplied, the process returns to step S294 (medal payout process due to winnings) of the main process (FIG. 41) through the power return process (M_POWER_ON) of FIG. 40 described above. As a result, the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is output from the output port 52 in the same way as before the power was cut off. Note that, as shown in FIG. 41, the main process does not proceed until the payout process due to winnings in step S294 is completed.
On the other hand, when the power is restored from the power-off, the lighting timing of the digit 4a (advantageous period display LED 77) arrives within four interrupts, as described above.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8, the time required to pay out one medal is approximately 100 ms, although it cannot be generalized. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up before returning to the medal payout process due to winnings after the power is cut off and before paying out the remaining medals. In other words, when the medal payout process for winning is completed after the power is restored from the power cut, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit at that point.

Further, as a method for preventing the advantageous section display LED 77 from turning off momentarily when there is a momentary power interruption, the following method can be mentioned.
As shown in FIG. 54, when a power outage is detected, the outputs of all ports 52 are turned off in step S483, so after this process, the digit signal from output port 2 and the segment signal from output port 3 are is not output. As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77, which is segment P of digit 4a, goes out.

Therefore, the process advances to step S488 in FIG. 54, and after waiting for reset, if the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", an on signal of the D3 bit (digit 4a) is output from the output port 2, and, An example of this is to output a D7 bit (segment P) on signal from output port 3. Note that in the loop processing after proceeding to step S488 in FIG. 54 and waiting for reset, no interrupt processing occurs, so the advantageous section display LED 77 in this case is always lit (statically lit). Thereby, even if a momentary power outage occurs, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section display LED 77 from turning off visually.
Alternatively, in the process of step S483 in FIG. 54, output ports 2 and 3 may not be turned off, but other output ports may be turned off. Even with this control, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section display LED 77 from turning off due to a momentary interruption.

In this embodiment, the segment P of digit 4a is set as the advantageous section display LED 77, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by dynamic lighting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous section display LED 77 may be composed of separate and independent LEDs. Then, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is statically lit and the output port corresponding to the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned off even when a power outage is detected, the advantageous section display LED 77 will be prevented from turning off in the event of a momentary power outage. can do.

Next, the display of the difference number of sheets on the sub-control board 80 side will be explained. The sub-control board 80 displays an image of the difference number of sheets on the image display device 23 during AT. Therefore, in this embodiment, the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 is provided with the following storage areas.
has the following:
1) AT flag 2) Sub difference number of coins counter 3) Pullback flag 4) Number of pullback games counter

The main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to turning on/off the AT flag to the sub control board 80 every game. Note that the command may be transmitted only when the AT flag on the main control board 50 side changes from off to on, and when it changes from on to off.
The sub-control board 80 receives the AT flag on/off information from the main control board 50 and turns on/off the AT flag provided on the sub-control board 80 side. Further, the sub-control board 80 stores information that the AT flag on the sub-control board 80 side has changed from off to on (AT flag rising data) and that it has changed from on to off (AT flag falling data). .

Furthermore, as described above, the main control board 50 updates the AT game number counter every game during AT, and when the AT game number counter reaches "0", ends AT. Further, when the difference counter becomes "2400 (D)" or when the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0", the AT (and advantageous section) ends.
The main control board 50 executes the initialization process of the difference counter when ending the AT and advantageous sections, so the difference counter becomes "0" when the game shifts from the next game to the normal section.

On the other hand, the sub control board 80 includes a sub difference number counter that counts the difference number of sheets during AT. The sub-difference number counter is "0" at the start of the AT (excluding when the AT is won and the AT is started during the pullback period, which will be described later), and thereafter, the difference number is updated every game. It should be noted that when a digit decrease occurs, unlike the difference counter of the main control board 50, it is not corrected to "0" and the digit remains as it is.

For example, when starting AT,
1st game: Non-winning role (difference number of sheets “-3”)
2nd game: Non-winning role (difference number of sheets “-3”)
3rd game: Winning the push order bell (difference number of sheets “+5”)
4th game: Non-winning role (difference number of sheets “-3”)
5th game: Winning the push order bell (difference number of sheets “+5”)
Assume that
In this case, the sub-difference number counter (2-byte counter) is
1st game: 0 (H) - 3 (H) = FFFD (H)
2nd game: FFFD (H) - 3 (H) = FFFA (H)
3rd game: FFFA (H) + 5 (H) = FFFF (H)
4th game: FFFF (H) - 3 (H) = FFFC (H)
5th game: FFFC (H) + 5 (H) = 0001 (H)
will be updated.

Note that when a replay win occurs, the sub-difference number counter is not updated, similar to the difference number counter. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub-difference number may be calculated by setting the number of payouts to "0" in the game at the time of replay winning, and setting the number of bets in the next game (at the time of replay) to "0".
Further, as described above, the difference number counter of the main control board 50 executes the initialization process when ending the advantageous section, but the sub difference number counter of the sub control means 80 does not change the AT (advantageous section). Even if the initialization process is completed, the initialization process may not be executed immediately and the count may not be stopped. When the sub control board 80 ends AT and continues counting the sub difference number counter, the sub control board 80 turns on the pullback flag (to "1").

The sub control board 80 determines the sub difference number counter value at the end of AT, and when the sub difference number counter value is less than (or less than) a predetermined value (for example, "2000 (D)"), the sub control board 80 determines the sub difference number counter value. Continue counting. On the other hand, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds the predetermined value (or is equal to or greater than the predetermined value), the sub difference number counter is cleared. If AT ends when the sub-difference number of sheets counter is close to the upper limit value, when AT is pulled back, the sub-difference number of sheets counter value may reach the upper limit value immediately, so in such a case, , so that the difference number of sheets is not carried over to the next AT.

The pullback flag is a flag for determining whether the AT was pulled back (whether or not the player won again) within a predetermined number of games (“50” games in this embodiment) after the end of the AT.
At the end of AT, the pullback flag is turned on and the pullback game counter is set to "50 (D)". The pullback game count counter is for counting the number of games (during the pullback period) after the AT ends. At the end of the AT, the pullback game counter is set to ``50 (D)'', and thereafter, if the AT is not won, ``1'' continues to be subtracted every game. Then, when the pullback game number counter reaches "0", the AT pullback has failed, the pullback flag is turned off, and the sub difference number of coins counter is cleared (initialized).
After the AT ends, the sub control board 80 updates the sub difference number counter when the pullback flag is on.

Also, during the pullback period (when the pullback flag is on), if you win a special prize such as BB and execute a special game such as a BB game, the pullback game count counter will be subtracted (updated) during the special game. )do not.
On the other hand, if the AT is won before the pullback game counter reaches "0", the AT pullback is successful, and in subsequent ATs, the number of coins inherited from the previous AT's difference number is displayed as an image.
for example,
The difference in the number of coins at the first AT: +1000 sheets The difference in the number of sheets from the end of the first AT until winning the second AT: -100 sheets, then the difference in the number of sheets at the start of the second AT is "+900 sheets". The image is displayed.

Further, an upper limit value that can be counted by the sub-difference sheet number counter is set. In this embodiment, the settings are as follows.
1) Upper limit during AT: 2414 (D)
2) When the symbol combination corresponding to the special prize stops during AT and the number of coins that can be obtained in the special game related to the special prize (estimated difference number of coins) is "250 (D)", the upper limit value: "2414 (D)" )-250(D)=2164(D)”
3) Upper limit during pullback period: 2000 (D)

As shown in 1) above, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds "2414 (D)" during AT, further counting of the sub difference number of sheets is stopped and the sub difference number counter is cleared.
In this embodiment, the sub-difference number counter value and the difference number of sheets displayed as images on the image display device 23 are linked (coinciding). For example, when the sub difference number counter reaches "1000 (D)" during AT, the image display device 23 displays an image such as "Number of sheets acquired during AT: 1000 sheets".

As described above, when the difference counter of the main control board 50 exceeds "2400 (D)", the AT (and advantageous section) ends. Therefore, as described above, the maximum value that the difference counter can take is "2414 (D)".
Therefore, for the sub-difference number counter on the sub-control board 80 side, the maximum value that can be counted is set to "2414 (D)" in accordance with the difference number counter of the main control board 50.
Since the maximum value of the sub difference number of sheets counter is "2414 (D)", the maximum number of difference sheets displayed as an image on the image display device 23 is "2414 sheets". As a result, it is possible to prevent an image displaying an excessively large difference in the number of sheets, and to prevent an image display that greatly arouses the desire for gambling.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26 (ninth embodiment), when the number of coins that can be acquired in the BB game is 250, if the BB is won during AT, and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is When it is stopped and displayed, the value of the sub-difference sheet counter at that time is determined. When the sub-difference number counter value exceeds the above-mentioned "2164 (D)", it will exceed "2414 (D)" at the end of the BB game, so when the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the sub-difference Clear the number of sheets counter (2) above).

In this case, the image display device 23 displays "Congratulations", "Congratulations", etc. as an image display corresponding to the difference in the number of sheets. In addition, in this way, instead of displaying "Congratulations" etc. from the beginning of the BB game, the sub difference number counter is not cleared at the start of the BB game, and the sub difference number counter is kept until it exceeds "2414 (D)". The counter may continue to count, and when it exceeds "2414 (D)", the sub-difference number counter may be cleared and an image such as "Congratulations" may be displayed.

Furthermore, the difference in number of sheets may increase during the withdrawal period. For example, there is a case where a special winning combination is won during the pullback period and the difference number counter value increases as a result of playing the special game.
In particular, if the specification is such that when a specific BB is won, the AT will be won, after the BB game ends, the game will shift to the AT. On the other hand, when the sub-difference number counter is close to the upper limit value at the end of the BB game, even if the difference number is taken over at AT after the BB game ends, the upper limit value will be reached immediately. Therefore, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds "2000 (D)" during the pullback period, the sub difference number counter is cleared. For example, if you win a BB with AT during the AT withdrawal period and play the BB game, if the sub difference number counter value exceeds "2000 (D)" at the end of the final BB game, Clear the sub difference number counter. As a result, the display of the difference number of sheets starts from "0" in the AT after the BB ends.

As described above, even if the special game is entered during the withdrawal period, the withdrawal game counter is not decremented during the special game. When a special winning combination is won during the pullback period, updating of the sub-difference number counter may be continued or may be interrupted during the special game. An example of suspending the update is, for example, if you win a BB with AT when the sub-difference number counter value during the withdrawal period is "1000 (D)", the sub-difference number counter value is set to "1000 (D)". Stop at. Even if "250" coins are obtained in the subsequent BB game, these "250" coins are not added to the sub-difference coin counter. Therefore, when the game shifts to AT after the end of the BB game, the difference in number of coins starts from "1000".

On the other hand, as an example of continuing to update the sub difference number counter, for example, when the sub difference number counter value during the withdrawal period is "1000 (D)", you win a BB with AT, and in the subsequent BB game " When the player obtains ``250'' pieces, the sub-difference number counter at the end of the BB game becomes ``1250 (D)''. Then, when the game shifts to AT after the end of the BB game, the difference in number of coins starts from "1250".
In addition, when continuing to update the sub-difference number counter, for example, if the sub-difference number counter value during the withdrawal period is "1800 (D)", you win a BB with AT, and in the subsequent BB game you win "250 (D)". When the number of coins is acquired, the sub-difference number counter at the end of the BB game becomes "2050 (D)", which exceeds "2000 (D)". Therefore, the sub difference number counter is cleared by the end of the BB game, and the display of the difference number starts from "0" at AT after the end of the BB game.

In addition, the sub-difference number counter may update the difference number of the game regardless of the number of bets, but in this embodiment, the difference number of the game is updated only when the game is started with a predetermined number of bets. Update the number.
Here, the difference counter of the main control board 50 is updated regardless of the number of bets in the game.
In contrast, in this embodiment, the condition for updating the sub-difference number counter is defined as when the number of bets (regular number) is "3", and when the game is started with the number of bets (regular number) "2". does not update the difference number of sheets in that game.

Next, the sub difference number counter management process will be explained using a flowchart.
FIGS. 56 and 57 are flowcharts showing sub-difference sheet number counter management processing in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart following FIG. 56.
In step S531 of FIG. 56, the sub control board 80 determines whether the AT flag is on (whether or not AT is currently in progress). When it is determined that the AT flag is on, the process advances to step S533, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not on, the process advances to step S532.

In step S532, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended. That is, during non-AT and when the pullback flag is off, the sub difference number counter is not updated.

In the next step S533, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not a bet command has been received from the main control board 50. When the start switch 41 is operated and the number of bets for the game is determined, the main control board 50 transmits a bet command that can determine the number of bets for the game to the sub-control board 80. When it is determined that this bet command has been received, the process advances to step S534.

In step S534, it is determined whether the number of bets (specified number) is "3" based on the received bet command. When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S535, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the process according to this flowchart is ended. As described above, in this embodiment, the sub difference number counter is updated only when the number of bets is "3". Therefore, even during the AT or withdrawal period, if the number of bets is other than "3", the sub-difference number counter is not updated in the game. As is clear from FIGS. 51 and 52, the difference counter on the main control board 50 side is updated regardless of the number of bets (specified number) in the game.

When the process proceeds from step S534 to step S535, the sub control board 80 subtracts the number of bets ("3") from the sub difference number counter. Next, the process advances to step S536, and the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not a payout command has been received. During the main process (M_MAIN) in FIG. 41, after the display determination is made in step S291, the main control board 50 transmits a payout command that allows the number of payouts to be determined to the sub control board 80.
When it is determined in step S536 that a payout command has been received, the process proceeds to step S537, and the sub control board 80 adds the number of payouts to the sub difference number counter.
In the next step S538, the sub control board 80 determines whether the AT flag is on. When it is determined that it is on, the process advances to step S539, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process advances to step S547 in FIG.

In step S539, it is determined whether or not the AT flag has been turned on in the current game (whether or not the AT flag has risen or not). When it is determined that the AT flag has been turned on in the current game, the process proceeds to step S540, and when it is determined that the AT flag has not been turned on in the current game (the rise of the AT flag is off), the process proceeds to step S543. Therefore, the process proceeds from step S539 to step S543 when it has been AT since before the previous game.

In step S540, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process advances to step S541, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended. For example, if the AT flag is turned on in the current game ("Yes" in step S539) and the pullback flag is off ("No" in step S540, that is, when the pullback period is not in progress), at this point the sub-difference number Since the counter is "0", there is no need to update the sub-difference sheet number counter, so the process according to this flowchart ends.

When the process proceeds from step S540 to step S541, the sub-control board 80 turns off the pullback flag. In the next step S542, the sub control board 80 clears the pullback game counter. Here, when "Yes" in step S539 and "Yes" in step S540, this corresponds to a case where AT is won during the pullback period. Therefore, in this case, the pullback flag is turned off and the pullback game counter is cleared.
Next, the process proceeds to step S543, and the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the sub difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value "2414 (D)". If it is determined that the sub difference number counter exceeds "2414 (D)", the process advances to step S546. Then, in step S546, the sub difference number counter is cleared. This may occur if the number of difference sheets increases during the pullback period after the end of AT and the sub difference number counter exceeds "2414 (D)".

On the other hand, in step S543, when it is determined that the sub-difference number counter does not exceed "2414 (D)", the process proceeds to step S544, and the sub-control board 80 stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to BB in the current game. Determine whether or not. Note that when the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the command is transmitted from the main control board 50.
“Yes” in this step S544 is a case where the BB with AT is won during the pullback period. In this flowchart, it is assumed that in a game where BB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed.
When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S545, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is not stopped and displayed, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S545, the sub control board 80 determines whether the sub difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)". When it is determined that the sub difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)", the process proceeds to step S546, where the sub difference number counter is cleared as described above, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S545 that the sub difference number counter does not exceed "2164 (D)" (while maintaining the sub difference number counter value), the process according to this flowchart is ended.

As mentioned above, if the BB game of this embodiment ends with a payout of more than 250 coins as shown in FIG. 26 (9th embodiment), the sub difference number of coins counter will be "2164 (D)" at the start of the BB game. If it exceeds , it will exceed "2414 (D)" (upper limit) by the final game of the BB game. Therefore, in the example of this flowchart, at the start of the BB game (before the start), it is determined whether the sub difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value during the BB game, and when it is determined that the sub difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value, the BB game This is to clear the sub-difference number counter before starting. Since the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 is based on the sub-difference number counter, in the BB game after the sub-difference number counter is cleared, the difference number itself is not displayed or the difference number is not displayed. Instead of displaying the number of sheets, for example, "Congratulations" or "Congratulations" is displayed.

When it is determined in step S538 that the AT flag is not on, and the process proceeds to step S547 in FIG. , that is, whether or not AT has been completed in the current game. If it is determined that the AT flag has been turned off in the current game, the process advances to step S548, and if it is determined that the AT flag has not been turned off in the current game (the falling edge of the AT flag is off), the process advances to step S551. .

In step S548, the sub control board 80 determines whether the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)". If it is determined that the sub-difference sheet number counter is less than "2000 (D)", the process advances to step S549. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not less than "2000 (D)", the process advances to step S557.

In step S549, the sub-control board 80 turns on the pullback flag. Next, the process proceeds to step S550, and the sub-control board 80 sets an initial value "50 (D)" to the pullback game counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
Through the above steps S548 to S550, if the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" at the end of AT, the pullback flag is turned on and the initial value of the number of pullback games is set to "50 (D)". Set. The reason why "50 (D)" is set as the initial value of the number of pullback games is to make the AT pullback within 50 games a continuous AT chance (a condition for carrying over the sub-difference number of coins to the next AT). Therefore, the number of pullback games is not limited to "50 (D)" but can be set to various values such as "30 (D)" or "100 (D)" depending on the specifications.
Also, if the sub-difference number counter is 2000 (D) or more at the end of AT, even if you pull back AT afterwards, there is a possibility that the sub-difference number counter will exceed the upper limit during AT after pulling back. is high, so in such a case, the pullback flag is not set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S548 that the sub difference number counter is not less than "2000 (D)" and the process proceeds to step S557, the sub control board 80 clears the sub difference number counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends. In other words, if the sub-difference number counter is equal to or greater than "2000 (D)" at the end of AT, the sub-difference number counter starts from the initial value "0" even if the AT is subsequently performed.

Further, when proceeding from step S547 to step S551, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the current game is in BB operation (BB game in progress). Note that the information on the operating state flag shown in FIG. 35 is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.
If it is determined in step S551 that the BB is not in operation, the process proceeds to step S552, and the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process advances to step S553, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S553, "1" is subtracted from the pullback game counter. In other words, during the pullback period, when the BB is in operation (BB game), the update (subtraction) process of the pullback game counter is not executed. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the pullback game number counter may be decremented even during the BB game during the pullback period.
In the next step S554, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the pullback game counter has reached "0". When it is determined that the pullback game number counter is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pullback game number counter is "0", the process advances to step S555.

In step S555, the pullback flag is turned off. In the next step S556, the pullback game counter is cleared. In addition, when "Yes" in step S554, since the pullback game number counter is "0", the clearing process of the pullback game number counter in step S556 may be omitted. However, when the answer is "No" in step S560, which will be described later, the pullback game counter is cleared via step S556.
Next, the process advances to step S557, and the sub control board 80 clears the sub difference number counter. In this way, when the pullback flag is off and the pullback game counter is "0" (cleared), the sub-difference number counter is cleared (set to "0"), and thereafter it remains "0" until AT starts. maintain.

When it is determined in step S551 that the BB is in operation and the process proceeds to step S558, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the current game is the last game in which the BB is in operation (BB game). The determination as to whether or not this is the final game of the BB game may be made by calculating the number of payouts from the start of the BB game on the sub-control board 80 side, or by calculating the number of payouts from the start of the BB game, or by calculating the number of payouts from the start of the BB game. The decision may be made based on the command that is sent.
When it is determined that it is the final game of the BB game, the process advances to step S559, and when it is determined that it is not the final game, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S559, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process advances to step S560, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S560, the sub control board 80 determines whether the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)". When it is determined that the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)", the process advances to step S561, and the pullback game number counter is reset to "50 (D)". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends. As a result, when a BB game is executed when the pullback flag is on, and the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" in the last game of the BB game, the pullback period (50 games) is restarted from the next game. ) will be newly set. In other words, when the number of withdrawal games is set to the initial value "50" after the AT ends, a BB game is executed during the withdrawal period, and the difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" in the final game of the BB game, , the number of pullback games is reset to "50".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S560 that the sub-difference sheet number counter is not less than "2000 (D)", the process advances to step S555. After step S555, the pullback flag is turned off, the pullback game counter is cleared, and the sub difference number counter is cleared. This ends the pullback period. In this way, in the final game of the BB game, if the withdrawal period is in progress, the sub-difference number of coins at that time is determined, and if the sub-difference number is "2000 (D)" or more, the withdrawal period ends. .

In the sub-difference number counter management described above, the sub-difference number counter is updated at the timing when a bet command is received. That is, the sub difference number of sheets is updated before all the reels 31 are stopped. On the other hand, since the difference counter is executed in the advantageous section counter management of the game completion check process, the subtraction of the bet number is also executed after all the reels 31 are stopped.
Therefore, the sub-difference number counter may also perform subtraction of the bet number and addition of the payout number after all reels 31 are stopped, similarly to the difference number counter.

Furthermore, even if the difference number at the end of the game becomes negative (even if a digit decrease occurs), the sub-difference number counter stores the value (the digit decrease value). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and similarly to the difference counter, when the sub difference number counter is negative at the end of the game (when a downturn occurs), it may be corrected to "0".
Furthermore, even if the specification is such that the sub difference number counter may be negative, the image display device 23 displays the difference number "0".

In this case, the following processing may be considered.
As described above, the sub difference number counter is a 2-byte counter, and its upper limit is "2414(D)" or "096E(H)". Therefore, the value of the most significant digit is "0 (H)". Therefore, by determining whether the value of the most significant digit is "0 (H)", it is possible to determine whether or not a digit has fallen. When it is determined that a digit drop has occurred (the value of the most significant digit is not "0 (H)"), the difference number of sheets to be displayed on the image display device 23 may be set to "0".

Further, in the examples of FIGS. 56 and 57, BB is taken as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same can be applied to a sub-bonus (AT that looks like a bonus (BB)). A sub-bonus is one in which the number of games played, the number of coins paid out, or the difference number of coins is set as an end condition. In this case, in step S544, it is determined whether the sub-bonus symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, in step S551, it is determined whether or not a sub-bonus game is being played. Furthermore, in step S558, it is determined whether or not this is the final game of the sub-bonus game.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described. In the twelfth embodiment, when a predetermined condition is met, a prescribed number (bet number) is instructed before the start of the game.
Note that the display of the push order instruction information is the operation of an instruction function (processing related to the instruction function), and here, the "instruction function" is a device that facilitates winning. Therefore, the specified number of instructions is not an operation of the instruction function (processing related to the instruction function). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specified number of instructions may be defined as one of the processes related to the instruction function.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the accessory condition device, the prescribed number for each RT, and the winning number in the twelfth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 58(A), the accessory condition device (special combination) includes BB1 and BB2. When BB1 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 stops, the game shifts to BB1 game. The BB1 game ends when more than 100 coins are paid out. After the BB1 game ends, the game shifts to non-RT.
Further, when BB2 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 stops, the game shifts to BB2 game. The BB2 game ends when more than 30 coins are paid out. After the BB2 game ends, the game shifts to non-RT.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), the RT includes non-RT, inside BB1, inside BB2, BB1 in operation, and BB2 in operation.
Non-RT continues until either BB1 or BB2 wins. If you win BB1 in a non-RT, you will move into BB1, and if you win BB2, you will move into BB2.
The inside of BB1 continues until the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 stops within BB1, the game shifts to BB1 operation, that is, BB1 game. Similarly, the inside of BB2 continues until the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 stops inside BB2, the game shifts to BB2 operation, that is, a BB2 game.
Note that the number of special winnings that can be carried forward is limited to one. Therefore, when BB1 is inside, BB2 will not win. Similarly, if BB2 is inside, BB1 will not be elected.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), the prescribed number is limited to "3" during BB1 operation and BB2 operation (accessory object operation). The game cannot be started with a bet number of "1" or "2".
On the other hand, the specified number in non-RT, inside BB1, and inside BB2 when the accessory is not activated is "2" or "3". As a result, the game can be started if the specified number is either "2" or "3".
In FIG. 58(C), the internal lottery number indicates the number when the denominator is "65536". For example, the winning probability of winning number "1" (normal replay) in non-RT is "9000/65536". Further, the advantageous section lottery number indicates the number when the denominator is "16384". Therefore, when the advantageous section lottery number is "16384", it means that the probability of winning the advantageous section is "16384/16384".
Further, as shown in FIG. 58(C), in non-RT, when the specified number is "2", BB2 is drawn, but BB1 is not drawn. On the other hand, when the specified number is "3", BB1 is drawn, but BB2 is not drawn.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 58(C), when the specified number of non-RTs is "3" or the specified number within BB2 is "3", an advantageous section can be drawn by lottery. In the lottery for advantageous sections, it is set so that the winning section is always won, except when the winning combination is not won. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to make the game section almost an advantageous section. In other words, the twelfth embodiment has the above-mentioned "7P" type specifications.

In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that the game is played within BB2 and with a specified number of "3". Then, AT is drawn at random within BB2, and when AT is won, AT is executed. Furthermore, it is assumed that BB2, whose winnings have been carried over, will not be allowed to win.
For example, if you are currently a non-RT, you need to move from a non-RT to inside BB2 (to win BB2 as a non-RT). In order to win BB2 in non-RT, it is necessary to play the game with the specified number of "2".
Therefore, if the current status is non-RT, the game is played with the specified number "2" to win BB2, and the game is moved to BB2 from the next game. Furthermore, since the lottery for the advantageous section is received within BB2 when the prescribed number is "3", the game is progressed with the prescribed number of "3" within BB2.

In addition, BB2, which won with the specified number "2," cannot stop displaying that symbol combination unless the specified number is "2." Similarly, BB1, which won with the specified number "3", cannot display that symbol combination on the active line unless the specified number is "3".
Therefore, if you win BB2 with the specified number "2" in a non-RT, move into BB2, and proceed with the game with the specified number "3", even if the winning combination is not won, BB2 The symbol combination corresponding to will not be stopped and displayed on the active line.
In this way, in the twelfth embodiment, the design combination that corresponds to the winning special prize is stopped, the symbol combination is moved to a special game, and the number of medals is increased in the special game. In other words, it is for creating the inside of the BB.

As shown in FIG. 58(C), non-RT players can win BB2 with a probability of about "1/5", so they can quickly move from non-RT players to BB2 players.
Furthermore, within BB2, when winning a small winning combination or a replay, there is a 100% probability that you will win an advantageous section. Therefore, within BB2, most of the gaming periods are advantageous periods. Note that it is of course possible to set the probability of winning in the advantageous section to less than 100%.

Further, the instruction function can be activated (processing related to the instruction function can be executed) only when a game is played with a specified number of players, particularly “3” in this embodiment. Therefore, if you win AT during the advantageous section inside BB2 and the AT is executed, if you start the game with the specified number "3" and win the push order bell, by activating the instruction function, , press order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. On the other hand, when the game is started with the specified number (bet number) "2" during AT, the instruction function is not activated even if the push order bell is won.

Further, as in the eleventh embodiment, even when a game is played with a specified number of "2" during AT, the difference counter is updated based on the number of bets and the number of payouts in the game, and Update the advantageous section clear counter. However, the AT game count counter (AT difference number counter in the case of a difference number management type AT) is not updated. On the other hand, when a game is played with the specified number "3" during AT, the difference counter, advantageous section clear counter, and AT game count counter (in the case of a difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter) Update about everything.
Further, regardless of the specified number, RT is always transferred when the transfer condition is satisfied (when the symbol combination that satisfies the transfer condition is stopped and displayed). On the other hand, the main game state (normal, CZ, AT, etc.) may be set so that any specified number can be transferred, or the game may be played with one specified number (for example, "3"). You may also set it so that it can be migrated only when.

Inside BB2, if a game is started with the specified number "2" due to a player's operation error and the winning combination is not won in that game, the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 that carries over winning can be stopped and displayed. becomes. On the other hand, if a player starts a game with the specified number of ``2'' due to an operational error and wins any of the winning combinations in that game, the winning combination in that game will have priority. The symbol combination corresponding to BB2, which has a winning status, is not stopped and displayed. However, if you win a replay in that game, the next game will also be played with a bet number of "2", so the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 that has the win will be stopped and displayed in the next game as well. there is a possibility.

If the game is started with the specified number "2" in BB2 and AT, and the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped and displayed, the BB2 game is started. Then, when the BB2 game ends, the game shifts to non-RT (AT). Then, in this non-RT, information corresponding to the specified number "2" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and the player is informed that the game should be played with the specified number "2" (specified number instruction). . This is to make the player play the game with the specified number "2", make BB2 win, and move the player into BB2. Therefore, in AT and non-RT, the prescribed number "2" is specified until BB2 is won.

As described above, when displaying information corresponding to the specified number "2" on the acquired number display LED 78, "0A" is displayed. Note that the instruction for the specified number of "2" is not limited to "0A", and may be any other display if it is not confused with any of the payout number, setting change display "88", error number, and push order instruction information. It may be. For example, since the maximum number of medals displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 is "15", for example, "22" may be displayed as information corresponding to the specified number "2".

Further, in this embodiment, the specified number is specified only during AT, and the specified number is not specified during non-AT. For example, when the game shifts to non-RT after finishing the BB2 game, if it is not AT at that time, the specified number is not specified. Therefore, in this case, it is necessary for the player to play the game with the prescribed number "2" and transfer it to the BB2 at his/her own discretion.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the case of a non-RT and non-advantageous section, if a game is played with the specified number of "3" and the player wins the small winning combination or replay, the player also wins in the advantageous section. Then, when it is a non-RT and advantageous section, the specified number "2" may be specified (even if it is a non-AT).
Furthermore, without being limited to the above, when transitioning to non-RT, the specified number "2" may be specified regardless of AT/non-AT, advantageous section/non-advantageous section.

Furthermore, in non-RT, when the player places a bet number of "2", the specified number may not be specified, and when the player places a bet number of "3", the specified number may be specified. In the main process of FIG. 41, the number of bets is determined in the medal management process of step S276, but if it is determined that the current number of bets is "2", the specified number "2" is not specified. (Execute the process to clear the acquired number data), and if the current bet number is "3", specify the specified number "2" (memorize the specified specified number display data as the acquired number data). Can be mentioned.

Further, when finishing the BB2 game and moving to non-RT, wait processing may be executed at the end of the last game of the BB2 game. During this wait process, the game cannot proceed (progress of the main process shown in FIG. 41). Therefore, after the wait process is completed, the process moves to the game start set process for the next game (non-RT), and the specified number is specified there.

In the non-RT during AT, the instruction of the specified number "2" continues until BB2 is won. Therefore, the game may be completed in one game, or may be played multiple times.
Further, as shown in FIG. 58(C), when playing a game with the specified number of "2" in non-RT, there is a possibility of winning a replay (normal replay, watermelon replay, cherry replay). When a replay is won as a result of playing a game with the specified number "2," it is optional whether or not to specify the specified number "2" in the next game. In non-RT and AT, the specified number "2" may be specified before the start of the game, regardless of whether the symbol combination corresponding to replay has stopped or not, until BB2 is won. Alternatively, when the symbol combination corresponding to replay is stopped and displayed, the player cannot arbitrarily select the specified number (number of bets) in the next game (replay), so it is recommended not to specify the specified number in that game. You may also do so.

This also applies, for example, when a symbol combination corresponding to replay is stopped and displayed as a result of playing a game with the specified number "3" in non-RT and AT. In the next game (re-game), the player cannot arbitrarily select the prescribed number (bet number), so the prescribed number may not be specified in this case as well. Alternatively, even if the number of bets in the game cannot be selected, the specified number "2" may be specified for the purpose of calling attention.
If a game is played with the specified number "2" in non-RT and AT, and you win BB2 and move to BB2 from the next game, you will not be able to specify the specified number unless you change to non-RT again. will not be carried out.

Further, the timing for instructing the specified number is after all the reels 31 have stopped, and when there is a payout based on winning a small winning combination, after the payout process is finished, and the start switch 41 for the next game is operated. before (for example, before it becomes possible to bet on medals (before bets are accepted)). Therefore, after a payout is made based on the winning of a small winning combination in the final game of the BB2 game, the specified number "2" is specified before the start of the next game (non-RT). As shown in FIG. 42 (11th embodiment), in step S321 of the game start setting process (MS_GAME_SET), the main control board 50 sets a specified number of instruction conditions when the game is non-RT and AT. It is determined that it satisfies the requirements.

If it is determined in step S321 of FIG. 42 that the instruction condition for the specified number is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, where "0B (H)” is memorized.
As a result, in the subsequent LED display control (FIG. 55), at the timing of lighting up digit 3a (the upper digit of the obtained number display LED 78), the upper digit of the specified specified number display data "0B (H)" is set in step S511. The offset “0(H)” is acquired, and segment data for displaying “0” is acquired based on the LED segment table 2 in step S514. By outputting this segment data from the output port 3 in step S520, "0" is displayed on the digit 3a (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

Furthermore, at the timing of lighting up the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78), the lower digit offset "B(H)" is acquired in step S513 from the specified specified number display data "0B(H)". In step S514, segment data for displaying "A" is acquired based on the LED segment table 2. By outputting this segment data from the output port 3 in step S520, "A" is displayed on the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

In the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, the game start setting process in step S272 is a process before it becomes possible to bet and before the start switch 41 is operated. Before the switch 41 is operated, the specified number of instructions is displayed.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 42, after the designated specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data in step S322, automatic bet number data is set in step S325. Therefore, when specifying the specified number in the next game when a replay prize is won, the specified number is specified before the automatic bet is made. This makes it possible to quickly instruct the player about the prescribed number.
Further, in FIG. 41, when the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S278, the acquisition number data (specified number display data) is cleared in step S280. As a result, in the interrupt processing after step S280, "00" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

Here, the information "0A" corresponding to the specified specified number "2" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and when the game is played with the specified number "2", the specified function is not activated even during AT. It doesn't work. That is, even if the player wins the push order bell in the game, the push order instruction information is not displayed on the winning number display LED 78. This is because, in this embodiment, the processing related to the instruction function is limited to the case where the specified number is "3". Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated after the information "0A" corresponding to the designated specified number "2" is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78, the obtained number display LED 78 The display is "00".

On the other hand, in AT and non-RT, the information "0A" corresponding to the designated specified number "2" was displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, but the game was played with the specified number "3" and the push order bell was won. When this happens, press order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. This process is executed in step S284 in FIG. Therefore, in this case, the obtained number display LED 78 displays the information "0A" corresponding to the designated specified number "2" before the start of the game, and when the start switch 41 is operated (with the specified number "3"), " After displaying "00", if the push order bell is won, push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed.

Further, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, it is cleared in step S290 (after all reels are stopped) in FIG. 41. Note that since the acquisition number data is cleared in step S280 after operating the start switch 41, the process of step S290 may be skipped in a game in which push order instruction information is not displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Then, when a small winning combination is won and the medal payout process due to the winning is executed in step S294, the acquired number data is incremented by "1", so the acquired number display LED 78 displays the number of paid out. Ru.

Then, when proceeding to the game start setting process in step S272 of the next game, as described above, when the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied, information corresponding to the specified specified number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Furthermore, when displaying the information corresponding to the specified specified number, the specified specified number display data is stored as the obtained number data, but at this point, the payout number data of the previous game may be stored as the obtained number data. Therefore, before storing the information corresponding to the designated specified number, clearing processing of the acquired number data may be executed. For example, in FIG. 42, before step S311, clearing processing of acquisition number data may be executed.

In addition, in AT and non-RT, even though the specified number "2" was specified, he ignored it and played the game with the specified number "3", winning BB1, moving into BB1, Furthermore, it is conceivable to execute a BB1 game.
In order to suppress such behavior, for example, processing related to the instruction function may not be executed within BB1. Further, in the BB1 game, the payout rate may be set to be less than "1" so that the number of medals cannot be increased in the BB1 game.
Furthermore, since it is up to the player to decide which specified number to play, even if the specified number is ``3'' in a game where the specified number is ``2'' in an AT and non-RT game, the game will not be played. No penalty will be imposed on the person.

In the above example, when specifying the specified number, the specified specified number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (on the main control board 50 side), but the invention is not limited to this. In addition to displaying on the number display LED 78, the designated specified number may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like (on the sub-control board 80 side).
Here, the display start timing when displaying the specified number of instructions on the liquid crystal display device 23 etc. may be set to be almost the same as the display start timing of displaying the specified number of instructions on the acquired number display LED 78 (before the start of the game). It will be done.
Further, the timing at which the display ends after the specified specified number is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like may be the same as or may be different from the timing at which the display ends after the specified specified number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
The display end timing after displaying the prescribed number of instructions on the liquid crystal display device 23 etc. is as follows.
(1) When the start switch 41 is operated (2) When all reels 31 are stopped (3) When the start switch 41 is operated in a game with a specified number of "2" (4) All reels in a game with a specified number of "2" (5) After winning BB2 in a game with the specified number "2" (6) When all reels 31 stop in a game with the specified number "2" and winning BB2, etc.
In addition, when the designated designated number is displayed on a dedicated display, it is possible to continue to display the designated designated number as an image on the image display device 23 or the like over a plurality of games.

<13th embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 are three.
On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 are each four.
FIG. 59 is a front view, a top view, and a right side view showing an outline of the configuration including the reel 31 (31A to 31D) and the stop switch 42 (42A to 42D) in the thirteenth embodiment. In the front view, the reels 31A to 31D are shown unobstructed by the front surface of the front door 12. Further, in the plan view, the reel 31 located behind the front surface of the front door 12 is shown so as to be visible. Further, in the right side view, illustration of the medal slot 47 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 59, a control panel 12c is provided on the front side of the front door 12, and an operation button 24 and a medal slot 47 are arranged on the control panel 12c. The medal slot 47 is the same as that shown in FIG. Further, although not shown in FIG. 1, the operation button 24 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80, and is capable of bidirectional communication with the sub-control board 80. For example, at least a portion of the operation button 24 is formed so that it can be illuminated, and the lighting mode of the operation button 24 can be controlled by controlling the sub-control board 80. Further, when the operation button 24 is operated, the signal thereof is input to the sub-control board 80.
A start switch 41 and four stop switches 42A to 42D are arranged below the control panel 12c of the front door 12.

In the front view of FIG. 59, a vertical line passing through the midpoints of the four reels 31A to 31D is a line L1 (center line). Line L1 is located at an intermediate position between reels 31B and 31C. The distances between the reels 31A and 31B, between the reels 31B and 31C, and between the reels 31C and 31D are all W1 (uniform). Therefore, the reels 31A and 31B and the reels 31C and 31D are arranged at symmetrical positions with respect to the line L1.
Further, among the four stop switches 42A to 42D, the distances between stop switches 42A and 42B, between stop switches 42B and 42C, and between stop switches 42C and 42D are all W2 (uniform). The line L1 is arranged so as to pass through an intermediate position between the stop switches 42B and 42C.

Further, the gap W2 between the stop switches 42 may be the same as the gap W1 (W2=W1), may be larger than the gap W1 (W2>W1), or may be smaller than the gap W1 (W2<W1).
Furthermore, in the front view, a vertical line passing through the left end of the leftmost reel 31A is a line L2, and a vertical line passing through the right end of the rightmost reel 31D is a line L3. In this case, the leftmost stop switch 42A is arranged on the right side (closer to the center) of the line L2, and the rightmost stop switch 42D is arranged on the left side (closer to the center) than the line L3.

Furthermore, in the front view, if the interval (distance between centers) of the reels 31 is W3, then the distance between the reels 31A and 31B, between the reels 31B and 31C, and between the reels 31C and 31D is all W3 (constant). It is.
Furthermore, if the distance between the stop switches 42 (distance between centers) is W4, then the distance between the stop switches 42A and 42B, between the stop switches 42B and 42C, and between the stop switches 42C and 42D is all W4 (constant distance). ).

Furthermore, as shown in the front view of FIG. 59, a part of the spherical body (operating portion) at the tip of the start switch 41 is arranged to intersect with the line L2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the spherical body (operating part) at the tip of the start switch 41 may be placed on the left side (outside) of the line L2 without intersecting the line L2, or the spherical body (operating part) at the tip of the start switch 41 may be placed on the left side (outside) of the line L2 without intersecting the line L2. It may be placed on the right side (closer to the center).
Further, in the front view, the medal slot 47 is arranged so that the medal slot 47 intersects with the line L4. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the medal slot 47 may be arranged on the right side (outside) of the line L4 so as not to intersect with the line L4, for example. Alternatively, the medal slot 47 may be arranged on the left side (closer to the center) of the line L4.

The operation button 24 is formed to be horizontally long, and a line that touches the left end of the operation button 24 is a line L4, and a line that touches the right end of the operation button 24 is a line L5.
In this case, in the front view, the stop switch 42A is arranged so that a part of the leftmost stop switch 42A intersects the line L4. Further, the stop switch 42D is arranged so that a part of the rightmost stop switch 42D intersects the line L5.

Further, as shown in the plan view, an index 12d is formed on the control panel 12c. The index 12d is formed by engraving, printing, etc., and in the example shown in FIG. 59, has the shape of an arrow pointing toward the stop switch 42 side. Further, the left index 12d is arranged on the center line of the stop switch 42A (it may be slightly deviated from the center line). Further, the right index 12d is arranged on the center line of the stop switch 42D (it may be slightly deviated from the center line).

With the above arrangement, the player can operate the leftmost stop switch 42A using the left end of the operation button 24 as a guide. Similarly, the rightmost stop switch 42D can be operated using the right end of the operation button 24 as a guide.
Alternatively, the player can operate the stop switch 42A using the left index 12d as a guide. Similarly, the stop switch 42D can be operated using the right index 12d as a guide.

When there are three reels 31 and three stop switches 42, as shown in FIG. 58 (twelfth embodiment), a maximum of "3!=6" selection pressing orders can be provided. On the other hand, when there are four reels 31 and four stop switches 42, a maximum of "4!=24" selection pressing orders can be provided.
The greater the number of presses of the stop switch 42, the more the base during non-AT (when the accessory is not activated and during non-AT, the number of out cards per 100 in sheets. For example, the number of out sheets per 100 in sheets) If the number of out cards is 50, the base is 50.) can be lowered.

When the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is 4, the number of bells to be pressed in the lottery is 1234 bells (stop switches 42A → 42B → 42C → 42D indicate the correct pressing order), 1243 bells, etc. ., 4312 bells, and 4321 bells. As shown in FIG. 58, if the number of winning positions for each pressing order bell is the same, the winning number for each pressing order bell may be set to "1500". In this way, since the number of winning positions for each push order bell can be set to "1/4", the probability that the push order operated by the player will match the correct push order when the push order bell is won can be reduced accordingly. can do.

Here, when the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is three, images such as "123" or "left center right" can be displayed during AT. Therefore, it is easy to intuitively understand the order in which the correct answers are pressed.
On the other hand, when the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is four, the following method can be cited as to how to notify the correct pressing order during AT.

For example, a first method is to set the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D to "1", "2", "3", and "4", respectively, and notify the order of the stop switches 42 to be operated. It will be done. For example, when the stop switches 42 are pressed in the order of stop switches 42C, 42D, 42A, and 42B, "3412" is notified (at least one of image display, audio display, and lamp color notification). ). Alternatively, the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D may be set to "A," "B," "C," and "D," respectively, and in the above example, "CDAB" may be notified.

A second method is to apply a color to the base of the reel 31 and/or the stop switch 42 for identification.
For example, the color of the base of the reel 31A and/or the stop switch 42A is white, the color of the base of the reel 31B and/or the stop switch 42B is blue, the color of the base of the reel 31C and/or the stop switch 42C is yellow, The color of the base of the reel 31D and/or the stop switch 42D is red (each is a different color). In the above example, instead of the notification "3412", the notification may be "yellow red white blue" (at least one of image display, audio display, and lamp color notification).

Furthermore, as a third method, the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated fourth (last) among the stop switches 42 to be operated from the first to fourth is displayed darkly (or hidden). can be mentioned. In this case, "brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated first > brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated second ≧ corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated third One example of this is to set the brightness of the image ≧ the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated fourth.
When the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the first stop switch 42 is darkened (or hidden), and the image corresponds to the stop switch 42 to be operated fourth. An example of this is to make the brightness of the image to be the same as the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated third.
For example, when the pressing order of "3412" is to be displayed as an image as in the above example, "3●12" is first displayed as an image. In addition, "●" is an image corresponding to the "4th" press order, and it may be darkened (hidden) so that the character "4" is not visible at all, or the "4" character may be hidden. It may be dimmed to the extent that the characters are distinguishable.

When the image "3●12" is displayed, the image is displayed in the same way as when selecting 6, so it becomes easier for the player to intuitively understand the pressing order. When the first stop switch 42C is operated, any of the following 1) to 3) may be executed.
1) Change the display of "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to "●", and change the previous "●" to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34●2".
2) Change "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to a display such as "-" or "○", and change the previous "●" to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34-2" or "34○2".
3) Change "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to blank (no image), and change the previous "●" to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34*2"("*" means blank).

Furthermore, after the second stop, images such as "34●●", "34--", "34○○", and "34**" may be displayed in the same way as above.
Further, after the third stop, images may be displayed as "●4●●", "-4--", "○4○○", and "*4**".
Alternatively, after the third stop, the image of the push order itself may be erased.
Note that even if the order of all the presses is displayed as "4312" as an image as in the first method described above, after the stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 will be displayed. It is preferable to erase the stop switch 42 as described in 1) to 3) above, since this makes it easier to understand which stop switch 42 has been operated. Specifically, after displaying the image "4312", "43●2" (after operating the stop switch 42C) → "43●●" (after operating the stop switch 42D) → "4●●●" (after operating the stop switch 42B) After the operation), an image may be displayed ("●" may also be "○", "-", or "*" as described above).

Furthermore, a fourth method is to notify the pressing order using a four-character compound word. For example, when the pressing order is announced using "Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter" as one of the four-character idioms, the correct pressing order is "Spring→Summer→Autumn→Winter."
When the pressing order is "3412" as described above, an example is to notify (display an image or sound) "Autumn/Winter/Spring/Summer" as in the first method.
Alternatively, as in the third method, an image may be displayed as "Autumn/Spring/Summer" before the first stop, and "Autumn/Winter/Summer" after the first stop.
In addition, in any of the first to fourth methods, if a mistake occurs in the pressing order, the image of the pressing order may continue to be displayed, or the image of the pressing order may be displayed as is. You may also delete the image.

In the thirteenth embodiment, when a push order bell with 24 options is provided as described above, 24 types of push order instruction numbers and push order instruction information are provided. For example, if the press order instruction information is "A1" to "A9", "AA", "AC", "AF", "F1" to "F9", "FA", "FC", "FF", 24 types can be provided.

Although the eleventh to thirteenth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
A. Eleventh Embodiment (1) In the non-advantageous section, the lottery for the advantageous section was performed only when the winning lottery result became the target lottery result. The reason for this setting is that, as mentioned above, when the lottery result is non-winning (when the conditional device does not operate as a result of the internal lottery), the advantageous section transfer lottery, which is the processing related to the advantageous section, is performed. This is because we thought it would be preferable not to do so. Therefore, it does not necessarily have to be set in this way, and the advantageous section transition lottery may be executed when the winning combination is not won.

(2) In the eleventh embodiment, the AT lottery process was executed after the advantageous section transfer lottery. Here, a winning lottery result (winning number) that is always determined to be in an advantageous section is set, and when the winning lottery result is determined, the advantageous section transfer process (Figure 45) is executed without executing the advantageous section transfer lottery. You may. Similarly, a lottery result (winning number) that is always determined by AT is provided, and when the lottery result is determined, AT set processing (steps S363 and S364 in FIG. 46) is performed without executing the AT lottery. may be executed.
In addition, we provide a lottery result (winning number) that is always determined to be an advantageous section and AT, and when the winning lottery result is determined, the advantageous section transfer process and AT lottery process are not executed. AT set processing may also be executed.
Further, in the case where a winning lottery result (winning number) that does not win the advantageous section transition lottery is provided, the advantageous section transition lottery may be executed even when the winning lottery result is obtained. In this case, the winning number in the advantageous section may be set to "0".

(3) When the AT is won, the initial number of AT games is determined, the number of games is stored in the AT game number counter, and when the AT game number counter becomes "0", the AT is ended. However, the AT is not limited to such an AT that manages the number of games, but may also be an AT that manages the number of differential cards. In the case of a difference number management type AT, when an AT is won, an initial value of the obtainable difference number is determined and stored in an AT difference number counter (different from the difference number counter). Then, each time there is a payout, the difference number is subtracted from the AT difference number counter, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT ends.
In the case of such a differential number management type AT, the AT difference number counter is subtracted when the specified number is one (for example, "3"), but when it is another specified number (for example, "2"), the AT Do not subtract the difference number counter.

(4) In the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) of FIG. 39, the setting is set to a state where the setting can be changed after the initialization process is executed. Therefore, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is on before the power is turned off, when the setting change process is started, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off before the setting change becomes possible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an advantageous section may be displayed after the state in which settings can be changed (after "Yes" in step S242 in FIG. 39) and before proceeding to main processing (before step S248). Clearing (initialization) processing of the LED flag may also be executed. In this way, it becomes possible to control the advantageous section display LED 77 to turn off after the set value is determined.

(5) One advantageous section clear counter and one difference counter were provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two advantageous section clear counters and two difference counters (important counters) may be provided to confirm consistency.
For example, a first advantageous section clear counter and a second advantageous section clear counter are provided as advantageous section clear counters. During the advantageous section, both the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear counter are updated every time the game is played. Further, for example, in the determination in step S424 in FIGS. 51 and 52, the first advantageous section clear counter is determined. When it is determined that the first advantageous section clear counter is "0", it is determined whether the value of the second advantageous section clear counter is "0" or not, or whether the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear counter are Determine whether or not the counter has the same value. If it is determined that the values are "0" or the same value, the process advances to step S435.

The same applies to the difference counter.
A first difference counter and a second difference counter are provided as difference counters. Then, each time a game is played, both the first difference counter and the second difference counter are updated. Further, for example, in the determination in step S434 in FIGS. 51 and 52, the first difference counter is determined. When it is determined that the first difference counter exceeds the upper limit, it is determined whether the second difference counter exceeds the upper limit or whether the first difference counter and the second difference counter have the same value. to judge. If it is determined that the values exceed the upper limit or are the same, the process advances to step S435.

If you judge the advantageous section clear counter value and/or the difference counter value as described above, even if the counter value becomes an abnormal value (incorrect value) due to the influence of noise, the advantageous section clear counter value is "0" and/or whether the difference counter value exceeds the upper limit value can be determined more accurately.
Note that if the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear counter do not match, or if the first difference counter and second difference counter do not match, an error message will be displayed and the game will not proceed. (main processing) can be stopped.

(6) In the sub-difference number management process of FIG. 56, it is determined in step S544 that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, and the process proceeds to step S545, where it is determined that the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)". When the sub difference number counter is cleared, in that BB game, a special performance different from the normal BB game may be output. A special effect during the BB game can suggest to the player that the sub-difference number counter has been cleared.

In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the sub-difference number counter is not judged, and in the BB game, the sub-difference number counter is set to, for example, "2000 (D)" (this is an example of a threshold value, and this value ) may be determined. When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter has exceeded "2000 (D)", the sub-difference number counter is cleared and a special effect (a performance indicating that the sub-difference number counter has been cleared) is performed from the next game. You can also output it.

Furthermore, in the above case, if a power outage occurs during a game in which the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2000 (D)" during a BB game (the special effect has not been output yet), the power will be restored from the power outage. The special effect may be output from the game played. In this case, at the time of recovery from the power cut, the sub difference number counter value and the fact that a BB game is in progress may be read to determine whether or not to output a special effect.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during the rotation of the reels 31 of a game in which the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2000 (D)" during a BB game, the above-mentioned special effect may be output from the game that returns from the power outage. good. Therefore, in this case, if there is no power outage, a special effect will be output from the next game, but if there is a power outage while the reels 31 are rotating, a special effect will be output from that game. Become.

(7) Play the game with the specified number "2" during AT (the instruction function does not operate when the specified number is "2"), win the push order bell, and accidentally operate the stop switch 42 in the correct push order. , When a small winning combination is paid out and the difference sheet counter exceeds ``2400 (D)'', at the end of the game, an effect indicating the end of AT, such as an image display such as ``END'', can be output. preferable. This is to prevent AT from ending in a game in which the correct pressing order is not reported and giving the player a sense of discomfort.

(8) On the other hand, as mentioned above, in order to prevent AT from ending in a game where the correct pressing order is not announced, for example, if you play a game with the specified number "2", you will win the pressing order bell. Even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order, the number of payouts for the game is set to ``2'' or less (the difference in the number of coins for the game is ``0'' or less), so that the AT does not end in the game. It's okay.

(9) As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the sub-difference number counter continued counting during the BB game. However, the invention is not limited to this, and when winning a BB during AT and moving to BB gaming, the sub-difference number counter may not be updated (updating of the sub-difference number counter may be interrupted during BB gaming). .
In this case, for example, before step S531 in FIG. 56, it is determined whether the BB is in operation (determined by the operation state flag). Then, when the BB is in operation, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
Further, when the sub-difference number counter is not updated during the BB game, the processes of step S551 and steps S558 to S561 in FIG. 57 are unnecessary. If "No" in step S547, the process advances to step S552.

B. Twelfth Embodiment (1) Similarly to the eleventh embodiment, in FIG. 58, when a winning combination is not won, the transition lottery for an advantageous section (processing related to an advantageous section) is not executed. As mentioned above, this takes into account the rules. Therefore, if the rules are not taken into consideration, the advantageous section transition lottery may be executed when the winning combination is not won.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 58, the advantageous section transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous section) is limited to one specified number (in the example of FIG. 58, the specified number is "3") in one gaming state (RT). I decided to do it. This was done in consideration of the fact that according to the rules, the transfer lottery for advantageous sections (processing related to advantageous sections) is limited to one specified number in one gaming state (RT). Therefore, unless this point is taken into consideration, advantageous section transition lottery may be executed with a plurality of specified numbers in one gaming state (RT).

(2) In the twelfth embodiment, the specified number "2" is specified for non-RT and AT. However, when the game is the final game of the AT game, it is not necessary to specify the specified number.
(3) In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that the game is played within BB2, and it is irregular for BB2 to win and shift to the BB2 game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specification may be such that after executing AT within BB2, when the AT termination condition is satisfied, BB2 is won and the BB2 game is executed. In this case, when the AT end condition is satisfied within BB2, after the end of the game that satisfies the AT end condition (after all reels 31 have stopped and the payout process has been executed when a small prize is won), Before the start of the next game (non-AT) (before bets can be made), the specified number "2" is instructed, and the player is encouraged to win BB2. In the twelfth embodiment, BB2 is won with a specified number of “2”, so the specified number for winning BB2 is “2”, but for example, if a BB is provided that wins with a specified number of “1” In order to win the BB, the specified number "1" is specified.
Further, the BB game with such specifications may be a BB game in which medals increase or a BB game in which medals decrease.

(4) When specifying the specified number, it was executed in the game start setting process (step S322 in FIG. 42). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be executed in the game end check process (FIG. 50). For example, in a BB2 game, it is determined whether or not it is the final game of the BB2 game, and if it is the final game, the specified number of games for the next game is specified during the game end check process. However, in the final game of the BB2 game, when a small winning combination is won and a payout is made, and the number of payouts is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, the prescribed number is indicated after the number of payouts is displayed. Note that if the LED for indicating the specified number is a dedicated LED, the specified number for the next game can be instructed to the dedicated LED while the number of payouts is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Furthermore, when executing a freeze in the final game of the BB2 game, when instructing the specified number of games for the next game at the end of the game, the timing is before executing the freeze, during the execution of the freeze, or after the end of the freeze. It may be.

(5) As in the twelfth embodiment, when a game can be executed with any one of a plurality of prescribed numbers, the function of the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b can be changed. For example, in a game during an advantageous period, in a situation where it is advantageous to play with the specified number "3" (for example, in the case of inside BB2 in FIG. 58), the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b is set only for 3 bets. It can also be set to a button. That is, when the number of credits is "3" and it is during the advantageous period and in a situation where it is advantageous to play the game with the specified number "3", when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, the setting is made so that "3" bet is placed. do. On the other hand, when the number of credits is "2", in a situation where it is advantageous to play the game with the specified number "3" during the advantageous period, even if the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, "2" bet will not be placed. Set it as follows.

Alternatively, even if it is possible to play the game with the specified number of "3", if the number of credits is "2" and the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, the setting is made so that "2" is bet. Good too. In particular, in FIG. 58, in non-RT and AT, it is preferable to set the bet so that when the number of credits is "2" and the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, "2" bet is placed.

(6) When setting most of the game sections to be advantageous sections as in the twelfth embodiment, the instruction function can be activated at any timing. For example, a difference number counter (different from a difference number counter) capable of counting the minus number of difference numbers is provided, and the ball output rate for a predetermined period is calculated. When the ball output rate for a predetermined period reaches a predetermined lower limit value (the predetermined lower limit value is set higher than the legal lower limit value, for example), an instruction function is activated to increase the ball output rate. Good too. Then, when the ball output rate increases and recovers to the reference value, the operation of the instruction function is terminated.
Activating the instruction function when a predetermined lower limit value is reached may or may not be included in "AT". However, since the instruction function is still activated, this corresponds to processing related to the instruction function.

(7) In the twelfth embodiment, the obtained number display LED 78 is used as the LED for displaying information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be set to other existing LEDs, or a dedicated LED may be separately provided to display information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions.
When a separate LED is provided exclusively for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions, even if the start switch 41 is operated after displaying the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions in the game start set process, the specified number of instructions will not be displayed. It is not necessary to delete the information corresponding to . Further, even if all the reels 31 are stopped, a small winning combination is won, and medals are paid out, there is no need to erase the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions.
In addition, when a dedicated LED is provided to display information corresponding to the specified specified number, the specified specified number will not be confused with the number of payouts, error numbers, etc., so the specified number can be specified in any display format. I can do it. For example, if the designated specified number is "2", it is possible to display "2".

(8) In the twelfth embodiment, an example was given in which the specified number “2” is specified, but depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the specified number “1” or “3” may be specified. Conceivable. If the specification has the possibility of specifying any of the specified numbers "1" to "3", the display of the obtained number display LED 78 when specifying the specified number "1" is set to "A1", and the specified number is set to "A1". For example, the display indicating "2" may be set as "A2", and the display indicating the specified number "3" may be set as "A3".

C. 13th Embodiment (1) In the front view of FIG. 59, the line L1 is set to pass through the centers of the four reels 31 and the centers of the four stop switches 42. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the four stop switches 42 may all be arranged to the right of the position shown in FIG. 58, for example, so that a part of the stop switch 42B intersects the line L1. On the contrary, all four stop switches 42 may be placed to the left of the position shown in FIG. 58, for example, so that a part of the stop switch 42C intersects the line L1.

(2) As shown in the front view of FIG. 59, Roman numerals from "1" to "4" are written below the four reels 31, but the Roman numerals may be used as lamps. In this case, for example, when the next stop switch to be operated is 42C, a lamp with the Roman numeral "3" may be turned on.
Furthermore, the ranges in which the Roman numerals from "1" to "4" are written are given different colors, and the stop switches 42A to 42D can also be given colors corresponding to the Roman numerals "1" to "4". Can be mentioned. In the example described above, the color of the stop switch 42A is white, the color of the stop switch 42B is blue, the color of the stop switch 42C is yellow, and the color of the stop switch 42D is red. In this case, the range of Roman numeral "1" is white, the range of Roman numeral "2" is blue, the range of Roman numeral "3" is yellow, and the range of Roman numeral "4" is red. It will be done.

(3) Furthermore, a portion including the periphery of the reel 31 may be constituted by the image display device 23. Then, as described above, each stop switch 42 is given a different color. In this case, when notifying the push order, for example, when specifying the stop switch 42B (blue), the area around the reel 31B may be illuminated in blue.

(4) In the front view of FIG. 59, the interval W3 between the reels 31 is set longer than the interval W4 between the stop switches 42.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the interval W3 between the reels 31 and the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set to be substantially the same. Alternatively, the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set longer than the interval W3 between the reels 31.

(5) In the thirteenth embodiment, a maximum of 24 selections of pressing orders can be provided as the pressing order bell. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to provide a first stop push order bell. Here, in the prior art, there are three choices for the first stop pressing order bell. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to set four options. When displaying an image of the correct pressing order when the first stop pressing order bell is won, for example, if the stop switch 42 that is the correct answer is the stop switch 42C, an image of "XX1x" may be displayed.

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide a first stop and second stop push order bell (a push order bell in which the correct push order is set for the first stop and the second stop). For example, the first stop is set as the stop switch 42C, the second stop as the stop switch 42A, and the third stop and fourth stop as arbitrary (any of the stop switches 42B and 42D may be used). In this case, the correct answer pressing order can be set to 12 choices. Furthermore, when displaying the correct answer press order as an image, in the above example, "2x1x" may be displayed as an image. After the stop switch 42C is operated, an image such as "2×-×" may be displayed.

D. Others All the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
The fourteenth embodiment relates to the timing of display start and end of display of push order instruction information.
Hereinafter, fourteenth embodiments (A) to (G) in which the display start or display end timings of the press order instruction information are different will be described.

<Fourteenth embodiment (A)>
60 and 61 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (A).
FIG. 60 shows the timing of display start and end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the display start and end timings of the push order instruction information are shown.

Here, the hardware configuration in the fourteenth embodiment (A) is similar to the hardware configuration shown in FIGS. 31 to 35 of the eleventh embodiment.
In addition, the main process (M_MAIN), push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF), medal payout by winning (M_WIN_PAY), interrupt process (I_INTR), and LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the fourteenth embodiment (A) are the same as those in the fourteenth embodiment (A). The main processing (M_MAIN) in FIG. 41 of the embodiment, the push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) in FIG. 48, the medal payout by winning in FIG. 49, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. ).
In the fourteenth embodiment (A), similarly to the eleventh embodiment, when the push order bell is won during AT, push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

If the input port reading process is executed in step S457 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 53 and the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then "Yes" is selected in step S278 of the main process (M_MAIN) in FIG. becomes.
Further, as shown in FIG. 41, if "Yes" is determined in step S278, then the lottery process (step S282), the advantageous section transition lottery process (step S283), and the pressing order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) (step S284) are performed. ).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 48, in the push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF), if the conditions for activating the instruction function are met, that is, if a combination with an advantageous push order such as push order bell is won during AT. , a pressing order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is generated, and this is stored as acquisition number data. Then, by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after this process, press order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), similarly to the eleventh embodiment, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed every 2.235 ms. Furthermore, dynamic lighting of digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is performed so that 5 interrupts constitute one cycle.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum gaming time has elapsed, or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. Regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reels 31 start rotating, more specifically, the push order instruction number is stored as the obtained number data. Within 5 interrupts (2.235 x 5 = 11.175 ms), the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 will start.

After the push order instruction number is stored as acquisition number data, the push order instruction information may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 at the first interrupt, or the press order instruction information may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 at the fifth interrupt. Information may also be displayed.
Although not shown in FIG. 41, control command set 1 is executed between the push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 and the preparation for starting reel rotation in step S285. In the control command set 1 between this push order instruction number set and preparation for starting reel rotation, the production group number or the push order instruction number is stored as a control command in the control command buffer. Then, by transmitting a control command (step S464) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after this process, the control command stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), the control command is composed of a first control command and a second control command. Both the first control command and the second control command are 1-byte data. Further, the first control command is data indicating the type of control command, and the second control command is data indicating parameters (variables). One control command is composed of 2-byte data of the first control command and the second control command.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), two sets of 8-bit parallel communication lines are used, and one parallel communication line transmits the first control command to the sub-control board 80, and the other parallel communication line transmits the first control command to the sub-control board 80. 2 control command to the sub control board 80. This makes it possible to transmit a control command consisting of 2-byte data to the sub-control board 80 in one interrupt process.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), a 64-byte storage area is secured in the RWM 53 as a control command buffer. As described above, since one control command is composed of 2-byte data of the first control command and the second control command, 32 control commands can be stored in the control command buffer. Then, by transmitting the control command during interrupt processing, the untransmitted control commands stored in the control command buffer are transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the order in which they were stored.
Note that if a control command is stored when the control command buffer is empty, the control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 when the control command is transmitted during the next interrupt processing at that time.

From the above, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum gaming time has elapsed, or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. Regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) or not, the push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reels 31 start rotating. The push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80 in about one interrupt (2.235 ms).

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), the sub-control board 80 includes a first sub-control board (sub-main control board) and a second sub-control board (sub-sub-control board). The first sub-control board and the second sub-control board are control boards subordinate to the main control board 50, and control the selection and output of performances during gaming and during game standby. Further, the second sub-control board is a control board subordinate to the first sub-control board. The main control board 50 sends control commands to the first sub-control board in one direction, and the first sub-control board and the second sub-control board communicate bidirectionally.

Furthermore, the first sub-control board determines, based on the control commands transmitted from the main control board 50, what kind of effect to output at what timing. Then, the first sub-control board transmits a control command regarding the determined effect to the second sub-control board.
Furthermore, peripheral devices for presentation such as a presentation lamp 21, a speaker 22, and an image display device 23 are electrically connected to the second sub-control board. Then, the second sub-control board selects a performance based on the control command transmitted from the first sub-control board, and controls the peripheral equipment for performance to output various performances.

Specifically, upon receiving the control command transmitted from the main control board 50, the first sub control board stores (saves) the received control command in a predetermined storage area.
In addition, the first sub-control board executes sub-main processing every 16 ms, and analyzes the control command in the loop processing during this sub-main processing, and as a result, when it determines that it is a control command related to an image. stores an image command in the command buffer according to the analysis result.
Further, the first sub-control board transmits the image command stored in the command buffer to the second sub-control board in command sending processing (executed before loop processing) during the next sub-main processing.

Therefore, after the main control board 50 sends the push order instruction number as a control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board receives the image command, it takes 32 ms (= cycle of sub-main processing It takes about 16ms x 2).
The second sub-control board then executes drawing processing based on the received image command and displays the image on the image display device 23.
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), the second sub-control board executes the drawing process at 30 fps (frames per second). Therefore, it takes about 33.33 ms to display one image on the image display device 23.

As described above, after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number as a control command to the first sub control board, the second sub control board sends an image instructing the push order (push order instruction image) to the image display device. It takes about 65.33 ms (=32 ms+33.33 ms) until the image is displayed on 23.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. Before this occurs, that is, before the rotation of the reels 31 reaches a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 is ready for operation, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started.

On the other hand, for example, if the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) one second before the minimum gaming time elapses, it will take about one second from the turn on (operation) of the start switch 41 until the reels 31 start rotating. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started before the reels 31 start rotating.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum gaming time has elapsed, or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. Regardless of whether it is turned on (operated) or not, the acquisition number display LED 78 starts displaying the push order instruction information, and then the image display device 23 starts displaying the push order instruction image.

Although not shown in FIG. 41, control command set 1 is executed between the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 and the all reel stop check in step S288. In the control command set 1 between the reel stop acceptance check and the all reel stop check, a control command related to the operation of the stop switch 42 and a control command related to the stop position of the reel 31 are stored in the control command buffer. Then, by transmitting a control command (step S464) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after this process, the control command stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

Furthermore, the first sub-control board analyzes the received control command, and as a result, determines that it is a control command related to the operation of the first stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped first). When this happens, an image command corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42 is transmitted to the second sub-control board.
Similarly, when it is determined that the control command is related to the operation of the second stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to stop second), the image command corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is When it is determined that the control command is related to the operation of the third stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stops last), the control command is sent to the second sub-control board. Send the image command to the second sub-control board.

When the second sub-control board receives an image command corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42, the second sub-control board displays an image corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42 (for example, prompting the operation of the second stop switch 42). (push order instruction image) is displayed on the image display device 23.
Similarly, when an image command corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is received, an image corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 (for example, a press order instruction image prompting the operation of the third stop switch 42) is displayed. Displayed on the image display device 23.

Further, when an image command corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch 42 is received, for example, the display of the push order instruction image is finished, and the image corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch 42 (for example, all reels 31 are stopped) is displayed. (an image corresponding to the state) is displayed on the image display device 23.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 ends after the third stop switch 42 is turned on.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, when all the reels 31 stop ("Yes" in step S289), the acquisition number data is cleared (step S290). For example, assume that when the push order bell is won during AT, push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. In this case, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 becomes "00" due to the interrupt process executed after the process in step S290.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, when all the reels 31 are stopped, the display of the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 ends.
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is first completed, and then the push order instruction on the acquisition number display LED 78 is completed. The information display ends.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 41, in step S294, medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) is executed based on winnings. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 49, "1" is added to the acquisition number data in step S399 during medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) for winning. As a result, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 is increased by "+1" by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S399. For example, the display on the acquisition number display LED 78 changes from "00" to "01".
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, when medals are paid out, the number of acquired medals is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

In the fourteenth embodiment (A), when the push order bell is won during AT and the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, all the reels 31 stop. Then, the acquisition number data is cleared and the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "00". Thereafter, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 remains at "00" until the medals are paid out. For example, when there is a payout of 10 medals, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 will be "00" → "01" → "02" → ... → "09" → "10" when the medals are paid out. Count up.

As explained above, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), when the winning combination lottery process (step S282) and the advantageous section transition lottery process (step S283) are executed, the push order instruction number set (step S284) is executed next. do.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated). After this is done and before the reels 31 start rotating, display of the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 can be started. That is, after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated), it is possible to immediately start displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78.

<Fourteenth embodiment (B)>
The fourteenth embodiment (B) is different from the fourteenth embodiment (A) in the timing at which the display of push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 starts, and the push order instruction information is displayed at the start of rotation of the reel 31. This is the start of the process.
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (B), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (B) shown in FIG. 62, steps that are different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers. .

In FIG. 41, the process is executed in the order of setting the push order instruction number, preparing to start reel rotation, and starting reel rotation, but in the 14th embodiment (B), as shown in FIG. Processing is executed in the order of number set and reel rotation start.
That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), the order of steps S284 and S285 is reversed from that in FIG. 41, and the push order instruction number set is executed after preparation for starting reel rotation is executed.

Input port reading processing is performed in step S457 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 53, and if the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then "Yes" is selected in step S278 of the main processing (M_MAIN) in FIG. becomes.
Further, as shown in FIG. 62, if "Yes" is determined in step S278, the winning lottery process (step S282), the advantageous section transition lottery process (step S283), the control command set 1 (step S601), and the reel rotation start. Preparation (step S285) and push order instruction number setting (M_ORD_INF) (step S284) are executed.

In step S601, control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, an effect group number or a push order instruction number is stored as a control command in a control command buffer. After step S601, the process advances to step S285.
Further, in step S285, preparations for starting reel rotation are executed. In this preparation for starting the reel rotation, first, it is determined whether the timer value of the minimum gaming time (the minimum time from when the reel 31 starts rotating until the reel 31 starts rotating in the next game) is "0".

The RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing the timer value of the minimum playing time. Further, the initial value of the timer value is “1834(D) (2.235ms×1834≈4099ms)”. Furthermore, the timer value is decremented by "1" every interrupt processing (2.235 ms). When it is determined that the timer value is not "0", it is determined again whether the timer value is "0" or not, and when it is determined that the timer value is "0", the initial value of the timer value is Set, and proceed to step S284.
In this manner, in preparation for starting reel rotation in step S285, it is determined whether the minimum gaming time has elapsed, and when it is determined that the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S284.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), once the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 is executed, the process proceeds to step S602.
In step S602, control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, control commands related to the operation of the stop switch 42 and control commands related to the stop position of the reel 31 are stored in a control command buffer. After step S602, the process advances to step S288.
Note that the control command set 1 is executed between the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 and the all reel stop check in step S288, as described in the fourteenth embodiment (A).
Other than the above, the flowchart of the eleventh embodiment is the same as that of FIG. 41.

FIGS. 63 and 64 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (B).
FIG. 63 shows the timing of display start and end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is operated after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, and FIG. 64 shows the timing when the start switch 41 is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed. It shows the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information starts and ends when the push order instruction information is pressed.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the advantageous section transfer lottery process in step S283 is executed, the process proceeds to step S601, and control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, an effect group number or a push order instruction number is stored as a control command in a control command buffer. Then, by the interrupt processing executed after this processing, the production group number or the push order instruction number stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), as shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the start switch 41 is operated before the minimum gaming time has elapsed, or the start switch 41 is operated after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. Regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reels 31 start rotating, more specifically, after the push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer, one interrupt (2. The push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board) in about 235 ms).

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the control command set 1 in step S601 is executed, preparation for starting reel rotation in step S285 is executed, and then the push order instruction number set in step S284 is executed.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), as shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum gaming time has elapsed, or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. Regardless of whether or not is turned on (operated), the display of push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 will start when the reels 31 start rotating.

Further, as described in the fourteenth embodiment (A), after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the first sub control board, the second sub control board instructs the image display device 23 in the push order. It takes about 65.33 ms to display an image. Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. Before this becomes possible, display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 will start.
On the other hand, for example, if the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) one second before the minimum gaming time elapses, it will take about one second from the turn on (operation) of the start switch 41 until the reels 31 start rotating. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 64, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 starts before the reels 31 start rotating.

Furthermore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. Display of the push order instruction image on the display device 23 is started.
On the other hand, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum gaming time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. Then, display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is started.
That is, depending on whether the start switch 41 is operated before or after the minimum game time has elapsed, the display of push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 and the push order instruction on the image display device 23 are performed. The order of the images from the start of display is reversed.

Here, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum gaming time has elapsed or whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. After the start switch 41 was turned on (operated) and before the reels 31 started rotating, the display of the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 was started. That is, after the start switch 41 was turned on (operated), the display of push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 was immediately started.

However, if the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the win number display LED 78 is too early, the start switch 41 may be turned on due to winning a winning combination with an advantageous push order such as the push order bell in the winning lottery (internal lottery). (Operation) The player will immediately know after performing the operation.
Although this does not have an advantageous pressing order, there is a risk of discouraging players who have been waiting for the winning of the rare combination, which is a condition for determining the additional number of AT games.

Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when it is determined that the minimum playing time has elapsed, by storing the push order instruction number as the number of acquisition data, when the reels 31 start rotating, the number of presses on the number of acquisition display LEDs 78 is displayed. Start displaying order instruction information.
As a result, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the timing to start displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum gaming time has elapsed. , it is possible to prevent a player who has been waiting for winning a rare combination from being disappointed immediately after operating the start switch 41.

In addition, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, it is determined that the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the push order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data, and then the 5th interrupt (2.235 x5=11.175 ms), the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 will start.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), before storing the push order instruction number as acquisition number data, the push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer and the sub control board 80 (first sub control board) is stored. However, it takes approximately 65.33 ms from the time the main control board 50 sends the push order instruction number to the first sub control board until the second sub control board displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23. It takes time.

In this way, the time required from storing the push order instruction number as acquisition number data to displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is set as "X", and the main control board 50 sets the push order instruction number as "X". If "Y" is the time required for the second sub-control board to display the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 after sending it to the first sub-control board, then "X<Y" is satisfied. It is set to .
Furthermore, when the cycle of the interrupt processing is "T" and the number of digits to be dynamically lit by the interrupt processing is "N", the press order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data, and then the number of acquisition display LEDs 78 is pressed. It takes a maximum of "T×N" time to display the order instruction information. Therefore, it is set to satisfy "T×N<Y".
As a result, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, the display of push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is first started, and then the push order instruction information on the image display device 23 is started. The display of the instruction image is started.

<Fourteenth embodiment (C)>
The fourteenth embodiment (C) is different from the fourteenth embodiments (A) and (B) in the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 ends, and the push order instruction information is displayed when the medals are paid out. The display ends.
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (C), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (C) shown in FIG. 65, steps that are different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers. .

In FIG. 41, when it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped in step S289, the process proceeds to step S290 and the obtained number data is cleared, but in the fourteenth embodiment (C), as shown in FIG. When it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S291, and the symbol display is determined without clearing the acquired number data.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), the medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) (step S603) due to winning is different from FIGS. 41 and 49 of the eleventh embodiment.

Input port reading processing is performed in step S457 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 53, and if the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then "Yes" is selected in step S278 of the main processing (M_MAIN) in FIG. becomes.
Further, as shown in FIG. 65, if "Yes" is determined in step S278, then the winning lottery process (step S282), the advantageous section shift lottery process (step S283), and the pressing order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) (step S284) , control command set 1 (step S601), and preparation for starting reel rotation (step S285).
Note that step S601 is the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (B).

In addition, in FIG. 65, the control command set 1 (step S602) is executed after the reel stop reception check (step S287), and then the all reel stop check (step S288) is executed. This is similar to FIG. 62 in (B).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 65, when it is determined in step S289 that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S291, where symbol display is determined. That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), after all the reels 31 are stopped, the obtained number data is maintained without being cleared.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) due to winning in the fourteenth embodiment (C), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 49 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (C) shown in FIG. 66, steps that are different from those in FIG. 49 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 49 are given the same step numbers. .

As shown in FIG. 66, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), when the payout number data is acquired in step S391, the process proceeds to step S611, where the payout number data is stored as the acquisition number data, and then the process proceeds to step S392. That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), payout number data is stored as acquisition number data between step S391 and step S392.
Further, as shown in FIG. 66, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), when one medal payout process is executed in step S398, the process proceeds to step S400, and "1" is subtracted from the payout number data. Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), unlike the eleventh embodiment shown in FIG. 49, "1" is not added to the acquisition number data between step S398 and step S400.

FIGS. 67 and 68 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (C).
FIG. 67 shows the timing of display start and end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the display start and end timings of the push order instruction information are shown.
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), even after all the reels 31 are stopped, the obtained number data is maintained without being cleared. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, even after all the reels 31 have stopped, the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") continues to be displayed on the obtained number display LED 78.

In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), when the payout number data is stored as the acquisition number data in step S611 of FIG. 66, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is performed during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) that is executed after this processing. Accordingly, the number of acquired medals (for example, "10" when 10 medals are paid out) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
For this reason, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is not displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 until the medals are paid out. Subsequently, when medals are paid out, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 switches from the push order instruction information to the acquired number (for example, from "=1" to "10").
Note that the timing of starting to display the number of acquired medals, the timing of transmitting the push order instruction number as a control command, and the timing of starting and ending the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 are as described in the fourteenth embodiment ( This is the same as A).

In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), even after all the reels 31 are stopped, the number of wins data is maintained without being cleared, and the number of payouts is used as the number of wins data in step S611 of medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) by winning in FIG. 66. Store data.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, even after all the reels 31 have stopped, the push order instruction information can continue to be displayed on the obtained number display LED 78.
Furthermore, until it is time to pay out medals, the press order instruction information continues to be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and when medals are paid out, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 is switched from the press order instruction information to the acquired number, so that the acquired number is displayed. Although the LED 78 is used as a display for pressing order instruction information and the number of acquired coins, it can be arranged so as not to interfere with the display of the acquired number of coins.

<Fourteenth embodiment (D)>
The fourteenth embodiment (D) is different from the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (D) in the timing at which the acquisition number display LED 78 starts displaying the push order instruction information, and the reels 31 can be stopped. When the button is pressed, the display of press order instruction information is started.
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (D), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (D) shown in FIG. 69, steps that are different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 41 are assigned the same step numbers. .

As shown in FIG. 69, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), when the rotation of the reel 31 is started in step S286, the process proceeds to step S604, and it is determined whether or not the reel 31 can be stopped. That is, it is determined whether the rotation of the reel 31 has reached a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted. When it is determined that the reel 31 can be stopped, the process proceeds to step S284, and a push order instruction number set (M_ORG_INF) is executed.
The contents of the process in the push order instruction number set (M_ORG_INF) in step S284 are the same as those in the eleventh embodiment and the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (C).
Further, the contents of the processing in the control command set 1 in steps S601 and S602 are the same as those in the fourteenth embodiment (B) and (C).

FIGS. 70 and 71 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (D).
FIG. 70 shows the timing of display start and end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the display start and end timings of the push order instruction information are shown.
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), when the reels 31 can be stopped, the push order instruction number set is executed, so as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the game starts before the minimum gaming time elapses. Regardless of whether the switch 41 is turned on (operated) or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has elapsed, when the reels 31 can be stopped, the push order instruction information is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78. is started.

Also, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), similarly to the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (C), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum playing time has elapsed, the After the reels 31 start rotating and before the reels 31 can be stopped, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started, and the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time elapses. ), as shown in FIG. 71, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 starts before the reels 31 start rotating.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), similarly to the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (C), the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. Regardless of whether this is the case, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 starts before the reels 31 can be stopped.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum playing time has elapsed, when the reels 31 become stoppable; , the display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum gaming time has elapsed. First, the image display device 23 starts displaying the push order instruction image, and then the acquisition number display LED 78 starts displaying the push order instruction information.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 can be delayed until the reels 31 can be stopped, so as in the fourteenth embodiment (B), , it is possible to prevent a player who was waiting for winning a rare combination from being disappointed immediately after operating the start switch 41.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), although the timing to start displaying the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is delayed, when the reels 31 can be stopped, the push order instruction information is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78. , the pressing order instruction information can be notified to the player before the player operates the stop switch 42.

<Fourteenth embodiment (E)>
The fourteenth embodiment (E), like the fourteenth embodiment (B), starts displaying the push order instruction information when the reels 31 start rotating, and like the fourteenth embodiment (C), medals are paid out. The display of the push order instruction information is then terminated.
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (E), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 62 in the fourteenth embodiment (B) and FIG. 65 in the fourteenth embodiment (C). .
In FIG. 72, steps S271 to S286 are the same as those in FIG. 62 of the fourteenth embodiment (B), and steps S287 to S303 are the same as those in FIG. 65 of the fourteenth embodiment (C).

FIGS. 73 and 74 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (E).
FIG. 73 shows the timing of display start and end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the display start and end timings of the push order instruction information are shown.
As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, in the fourteenth embodiment (E), similarly to FIGS. 63 and 64 of the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the reels 31 start rotating, the order of presses on the obtained number display LED 78 is The display of the instruction information is started, and the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is ended when medals are paid out, similarly to FIGS. 67 and 68 of the fourteenth embodiment (C).

Note that the timing to start displaying the number of acquired medals, the timing to send the push order instruction number as a control command, and the timing to start and end the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 are as described in the 14th embodiment (B ).
In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment (E), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (B), when it is determined that the minimum playing time has elapsed, the push order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data, so that the reel 31 At the start of rotation, display of push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time has elapsed, the timing to start displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum playing time has elapsed. , it is possible to prevent a player who was waiting for winning a rare combination from being disappointed immediately after operating the start switch 41.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (E), as in the fourteenth embodiment (C), even after all the reels 31 are stopped, the data on the number of wins is maintained without being cleared, and the medal payout (M_WIN_PAY ), the payout number data is stored as the acquisition number data in step S611.
Therefore, even after all the reels 31 are stopped, the push order instruction information can continue to be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 until medals are paid out.Furthermore, when medals are paid out, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 can be continued. Since the pressing order instruction information is switched to the number of acquired coins, although the acquired number display LED 78 is used as a display for both the pressing order instruction information and the acquired number of coins, it is possible to prevent the display of the acquired number of coins from being obstructed.

<Fourteenth embodiment (F)>
FIG. 75 is a front view schematically showing a configuration including the reel 31, stop switch 42, and operation instruction lamp 25 in the fourteenth embodiment (F).
As shown in FIG. 75, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), a stop instruction lamp 25 is provided below each reel 31. As shown in FIG. This stop instruction lamp 25 instructs the reel 31 to stop, and is constituted by an LED lamp.

A stop instruction lamp 25 that is provided below the left reel 31 and lights up when instructing to stop the left reel 31 is the left stop instruction lamp 25.
Similarly, a stop instruction lamp 25 that is provided below the middle reel 31 and lights up when instructing to stop the middle reel 31 is the middle stop instruction lamp 25.
Further, the stop instruction lamp 25 is provided below the right reel 31 and lights up when instructing the right reel 31 to stop.
Then, the sub-control board 80 controls lighting/extinguishing of each stop instruction lamp 25.

Here, the sub-control board 80 includes a first sub-control board and a second sub-control board, and the stop instruction lamp 25 is electrically connected to the second sub-control board.
The second sub-control board controls lighting/extinguishing of each stop instruction lamp 25 and displays an image on the image display device 23 based on the control command sent from the first sub-control board.

Specifically, when the conditions for activating the instruction function are met, that is, when a winning combination with an advantageous pressing order such as pressing order bell is won during AT, the main control board 50 activates the control during main processing (M_MAIN). In command set 1, a push order instruction number as a control command is stored in a control command buffer.
Then, by transmitting a control command (step S464) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) to be executed after this processing, the main control board 50 transfers the push order instruction number as a control command stored in the control command buffer to the first sub Send to control board.

Further, upon receiving the control command transmitted from the main control board 50, the first sub-control board stores (saves) the received control command in a predetermined storage area.
Furthermore, the first sub-control board executes sub-main processing every 16 ms, and analyzes the control command in the loop processing during this sub-main processing, and as a result, if it determines that it is the push order instruction number. , store lamp control commands and image commands according to the analysis results in a command buffer.

Further, the first sub-control board transmits the lamp control command and image command stored in the command buffer to the second sub-control board in the command transmission process during the next sub-main process.
Therefore, similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (A), after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number as a control command to the first sub-control board, the second sub-control board sends a lamp control command and an image. It takes about 32 ms (=16 ms cycle of sub-main processing x 2) until the command is received.

Then, the second sub-control board controls the lighting/extinguishing of the (left, center, right) stop instruction lamps 25 based on the received lamp control command, and performs drawing processing based on the received image command. The image is displayed on the image display device 23.
For example, when receiving a lamp control command and an image command indicating a left first stop, the second sub-control board turns on the left stop instruction lamp 25 and turns off the middle stop instruction lamp 25 and the right stop instruction lamp 25. At the same time, an image prompting the user to operate the left stop switch 42 is displayed on the image display device 23.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), the second sub-control board executes an interrupt process every 1 ms, and controls lighting/extinguishing of each stop instruction lamp 25 in this interrupt process.
Therefore, the second sub-control board takes about 1 ms after receiving the lamp control command sent from the first sub-control board until it lights up the stop instruction lamp 25 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped. It takes.

Further, as described above, it takes about 32 ms from the time the main control board 50 sends the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board receives the lamp control command.
Therefore, it takes about 33 ms (=32 ms+1 ms) from when the main control board 50 sends the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board turns on the stop instruction lamp 25.

Also, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (A), the second sub-control board performs drawing processing at 30 fps (frames per second), so one image is displayed as an image. It takes about 33.33 ms to display on the device 23.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (A), after the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub-control board, the second sub-control board It takes about 65.33 ms (=32 ms+33.33 ms) until the push order instruction image is displayed on the display device 23.
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), the stop instruction lamp 25 is lit first, and then the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.

FIGS. 76 and 77 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (F).
FIG. 76 shows the timing of display start and end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the display start and end timings of the push order instruction information are shown.

Although not shown, in the fourteenth embodiment (F) as well, similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (B), after preparing to start reel rotation, the push order instruction number setting is performed.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, in the 14th embodiment (F) as well, as in the 14th embodiment (B), whether the start switch 41 is operated before the minimum playing time has elapsed. Or, regardless of whether it is after the elapse of time, when the reels 31 start rotating, the display of the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is started.

Although not shown, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), when turning on the third stop switch 42 is detected, the acquisition number data is cleared. Then, by the interrupt processing executed after this processing, the display on the acquired number display LED 78 becomes "00".
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, when the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated), the display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 ends.
Note that the timing to start displaying the number of acquired medals and the timing to transmit the push order instruction number as a control command are the same as in the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (E).

Further, as described above, it takes about 33 ms from the time when the main control board 50 sends the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board turns on the stop instruction lamp 25. It takes about 65.33 ms after the main control board 50 sends the control command to the first sub-control board until the second sub-control board displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23.

Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. The instruction lamp 25 lights up, and then a push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.
On the other hand, for example, if the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) one second before the minimum gaming time elapses, it will take about one second from the turn on (operation) of the start switch 41 until the reels 31 start rotating. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 77, before the reels 31 start rotating, the stop instruction lamp 25 is first turned on, and then a push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.

Furthermore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. lights up, and finally, a push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.
On the other hand, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum gaming time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. An order instruction image is displayed, and finally, push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), similarly to the fourteenth embodiments (B) and (E), when it is determined that the minimum playing time has elapsed, the push order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data. As a result, when the reels 31 start rotating, the display of the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum playing time has elapsed, the timing to start displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum playing time has elapsed. , it is possible to prevent a player who has been waiting for winning a rare combination from being disappointed immediately after operating the start switch 41.

As shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the stop instruction lamp 25 is lit first. After that, a push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.
Both the stop instruction lamp 25 and the image display device 23 are controlled by the second sub-control board, but since it is necessary to execute drawing processing in order to display an image on the image display device 23, the stop instruction lamp 25 and the image display device 23 are controlled by the second sub-control board. 25 lights up faster.

<Fourteenth embodiment (G)>
The fourteenth embodiment (G) is different from the fourteenth embodiment (F) in that it includes a dedicated 7-segment display (7 segments) for displaying the push order instruction information, and that the timing at which the display of the push order instruction information ends is different from that of the fourteenth embodiment (F). The rest is the same as the fourteenth embodiment (F).
Note that a dedicated 7-segment display for displaying push order instruction information is referred to as a push order instruction LED.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), a storage area for press order instruction data is secured in the RWM 53. The push order instruction data is data for displaying push order instruction information on the push order instruction LED.

FIGS. 78 and 79 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (G).
FIG. 78 shows the timing of display start and end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, and FIG. 41 is turned on (operated), the display start and end timings of the push order instruction information are shown.

In the fourteenth embodiment (G) as well, similarly to the fourteenth embodiments (B) and (F), after preparing to start reel rotation, the push order instruction number setting is performed.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, in the fourteenth embodiment (G) as well, as in the fourteenth embodiments (B) and (F), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated), the minimum game Regardless of whether the time has elapsed or not, the display of the push order instruction information starts when the reels 31 start rotating.
In the fourteenth embodiment (G), a push order instruction number is set in the storage area of push order instruction data of the RWM 53. As a result, in the interrupt process executed after this process, press order instruction information is displayed on the press order instruction LED.

In addition, in the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (F), since the push order instruction information was displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, by clearing the acquisition number data by the time of paying out medals, the acquisition number display LED 78 It was possible to display the number of medals earned.
On the other hand, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), the push order instruction data is maintained without being cleared even when medals are paid out, so as shown in FIGS. Pressing order instruction information (for example, "=1") continues to be displayed on the order instruction LED.

Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), when the payout of medals is completed, the push order instruction data is cleared. Then, by the interrupt processing executed after this processing, the display of the push order instruction LED becomes "00".
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the display of the push order instruction information on the push order instruction LED ends after the medals are paid out.

In this manner, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), the push order instruction information is not displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, but is displayed on the dedicated push order instruction LED, so that the push order instruction information is not displayed when medals are paid out. Even if the process is continued, the display of the number of acquired medals can be prevented.
Furthermore, the timing of starting to display the number of acquired medals, the timing of transmitting the push order instruction number as a control command, the timing of starting and ending the display of the operation instruction lamp 25, and the start of displaying the push order instruction image on the image display device 23. The timing of display termination is the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (F).

<Summary of the 14th embodiment>
The push order instruction information is transmitted from the time when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) until the time when the reel 31 can be stopped (the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted). If displayed, the correct pressing order can be notified to the player before the player turns on (operates) the stop switch 42.
Therefore, the timing to start displaying the push order instruction information is as follows.
1) When the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) 2) After the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts rotating 3) When the reel 31 starts rotating 4) After the reel 31 starts rotating , and before the reel 31 can be stopped. 5) When the reel 31 can be stopped.

In addition, when displaying the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78, if the display of the push order instruction information is finished from the time when the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) until the time when the medals are paid out, the medals can be displayed. It is possible to prevent the display of the number of acquired coins from being obstructed.
Therefore, the timing at which the display of the press order instruction information ends is as follows:
1) When the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) 2) When the third stop switch 42 is turned off after being turned on (when the player releases his hand from the third stop switch 42)
3) When all reels 31 are stopped 4) When medals are paid out.
In addition, when displaying the push order instruction information on a dedicated push order display LED, the display of the push order instruction information may be continued when medals are paid out, and the display of the push order instruction information may be ended after the medals are paid out. .

Furthermore, before the sub control board 80 (second sub control board) displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23, the main control board 50 generates a control command, and the main control board 50 sends the sub control board 80 to the sub control board 80. It takes a certain amount of time to transmit the control command to the sub-control board 80, receive and analyze the control command on the sub-control board 80, and perform drawing processing and display on the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board).
Therefore, even if the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information on the obtained number display LED 78 and transmits the control command to the sub control board 80 at the same time, the push order instruction image is not displayed on the image display device 23. will be delayed.

Also, depending on whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the rotation of the reels 31 and the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 may be started. The order of may be changed.
Therefore, the timing to start displaying the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is as follows:
1) After the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts rotating; 2) After the reel 31 starts rotating and before the reel 31 can be stopped.

Furthermore, the period from when the main control board 50 sends the control command to the sub-control board 80 to when the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board) finishes displaying the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is also , it takes a certain amount of time.
Therefore, the timing at which the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 ends is after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated).
Then, the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, the display end timing of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, the display start timing of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23, and the push order The timing for ending the display of the instruction image on the image display device 23 is not limited to the combinations shown in the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (G), and can be set in any appropriate combination.

In addition, in a game where push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, even if a press order error occurs during the game, the push order instruction information will be displayed until a predetermined time after turning on (operating) the third stop switch 42. may continue to be displayed as is, or the display of the press order instruction information may be terminated when a press order error occurs.
Similarly, in a game in which a press order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23, even if a press order error occurs midway through, the press order instruction will continue until a predetermined time after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated). The image may continue to be displayed as is, or the display of the push order instruction image may be terminated when a press order error occurs.

In addition, when a replay prize is won when 3 medals are inserted, 3 medals are automatically bet and the game can start, so the 1 bet display LED 79a, 2 bet display LED 79b, 3 bet display LED 79c, game start display LED 79d, and replay display LED 79f lights up.
At this time, when the third stop switch 42 is operated and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the 1-bet display LED 79a lights up, and the 2-bet display LED 79b, the 3-bet display LED 79c, and the game start display. The LED 79d and the replay display LED 79f are turned off.

Thereafter, the 2-bet display LED 79b and the 3-bet display LED 79c are lit in sequence, and finally the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, the 3-bet display LED 79c, the game start display LED 79d, and the replay display LED 79f are lit.
When a replay prize is won when 3 coins are inserted, the 1 bet display LED 79a lights up, and when the 2 bet display LED 79b, the 3 bet display LED 79c, the game start display LED 79d, and the replay display LED 79f are turned off, the pressing order The display on the acquisition number display LED 78 of instruction information may be terminated.

In addition, when winning a small prize, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 ends when the third stop switch 42 is turned on, when the third stop switch is turned off, when all reels 31 are stopped, or when medals are paid out. However, when winning a replay prize, when the 1-bet display LED 79a lights up and the 2-bet display LED 79b, 3-bet display LED 79c, game start display LED 79d, and replay display LED 79f are turned off, the pressing order of the winning number display LED 78 The display of the instruction information may be ended.
That is, the display end timing of the push order instruction information may be made different between when a minor winning combination is won and when a replay winning is achieved.
Of course, the display end timing of the push order instruction information may be the same when winning a small winning combination and when winning a replay prize.

Although the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned content, and for example, the following modifications are possible.
(1) In the fourteenth embodiment (A), two sets of 8-bit parallel communication lines are used, the first control command is transmitted to the sub control board 80 through one parallel communication line, and the first control command is transmitted to the sub control board 80 through the other parallel communication line. By sending two control commands to the sub-control board 80, a control command consisting of two bytes of data can be sent to the sub-control board 80 in one interrupt process.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, a control command consisting of 2-byte data may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 using only one set of 8-bit parallel communication lines.
In this case, the first control command and the second control command may be sequentially transmitted by transmitting the control command during one interrupt process. Thereby, a control command consisting of 2-byte data can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in one interrupt process.

Alternatively, the first control command may be transmitted when the control command is transmitted during one interrupt process, and the second control command may be transmitted when the control command is transmitted during the next interrupt process. Thereby, a control command consisting of 2-byte data may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in two interrupt processes.
Furthermore, the control commands may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 not only by parallel communication but also by serial communication.
Furthermore, control commands may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 by electrical connection, or control commands may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 by connection using optical communication means. Good too.

(2) In the fourteenth embodiment (A), the main control board 50 transmits a push order instruction number as a control command to the sub control board 80 (first sub control board), and The board) executed a drawing process based on the received push order instruction number and displayed the push order instruction image on the image display device 23.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main control board 50 transmits the condition device number as a control command to the sub-control board 80 (first sub-control board), and the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board) The drawing process may be executed based on the received condition device number, and the press order instruction number may be displayed on the image display device 23.

For example, the main control board 50 transmits the effect group number as a control command to the sub control board 80 (first sub control board), and the sub control board 80 (second sub control board) receives the received effect group number. The pressing order instruction number may be displayed on the image display device 23 by executing the drawing process based on the above.
(3) The first to fourteenth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to fourteenth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<15th embodiment>
The fifteenth embodiment relates to the timing of addition processing for medals inserted from the medal slot 47.
Hereinafter, fifteenth embodiments (A) to (C) in which the timing of medal addition processing differs will be described.

<Fifteenth embodiment (A)>
The configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (A) is similar to the configuration of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.
That is, when a medal is inserted through the medal slot 47, the medal flows down the medal path in the medal selector. A passage sensor 46, an input sensor 44a, and an input sensor 44b are provided on the medal passage in the medal selector from the upstream side. Further, a blocker 45 is provided between the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44a.

The medals inserted through the medal slot 47 first pass through the path sensor 46 and then reach the blocker 45 . Further, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the medals flowing down the medal path pass through the blocker 45 and then reach the positions of the input sensors 44a and 44b.
The input sensors 44a and 44b are installed at a predetermined distance apart.
Before the medal reaches the positions of the input sensors 44a and 44b, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
Furthermore, when the medals flow down the medal path, the input sensor 44a first changes from off to on, and the input sensor 44b remains off.

When the medal further flows down the medal path, the input sensor 44a remains on, and the input sensor 44b is turned on from off.
After that, as more medals flow down the medal path, the input sensor 44a changes from on to off, and the input sensor 44b remains on.
After that, as more medals flow down the medal path, the input sensor 44a remains off, and the input sensor 44b changes from on to off.
The medals that have passed through the input sensors 44a and 44b reach the hopper 35.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the execution timing of the medal addition process in the fifteenth embodiment (A).
At the timing (a) in FIG. 80, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
At the timing (b) in FIG. 80, the input sensor 44a is on and the input sensor 44b is off.
The state (b) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (a) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Furthermore, if the state (b) in FIG. 80 continues for a predetermined period of time or more, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred, and sends an error command to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

At the timing (c) in FIG. 80, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both on.
The state (c) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (b) or (c) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Furthermore, if the state of (c) in FIG. 80 continues for a predetermined period of time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passage error and sends an error message to the sub-control board 80, as in the case of (b) in FIG. Send a command. When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

At the timing (d) in FIG. 80, the input sensor 44a is off and the input sensor 44b is on.
The state (d) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Furthermore, if the state of (d) in FIG. 80 continues for a predetermined period of time or more, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passage error, and the sub-control Send an error command to the board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

At the timing (e) in FIG. 80, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
The state (e) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (e) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Furthermore, when the state shown in (e) in FIG. 80 is reached, the main control board 50 determines that a medal has been inserted, and executes a process of adding "1" to the medal (bet process or credit process).
Here, when the state of (e) in FIG. 80 is reached and the number of bets is less than the specified number, the main control board 50 executes the process of adding "1" to the number of bets. For example, if the specified number for the game is "3" and the number of bets at that time is "1", the number of bets is increased from "1" to "2" by adding "1" to the number of bets. Update to.

In addition, when the state of (e) in Figure 80 is reached, if the number of bets has already reached the specified number and the number of credits has not reached the maximum number of "50", the main control The board 50 executes a process of adding "1" to the number of credits. For example, if the number of credits at that time is "20", the number of credits is updated to "21".
Furthermore, when the state shown in FIG. 80 (e) is reached, the main control board 50 transmits an input command to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the input command, it outputs an input sound from the speaker 22.
If a medal passage error occurs before the state (e) in FIG. 80 is reached, the main control board 50 does not perform the process of adding "1" to the medals and does not send the input command.

Furthermore, when a plurality of medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, steps (a) to (e) in FIG. 80 are repeated.
Then, in the state (e) in FIG. 80, when the number of bets reaches the specified number by executing the process of adding "1" to the number of bets, the main control board 50 controls the operation of the start switch 41. The game is brought into a state where it can be accepted (game can be started), and the game start display LED 79d is turned on.

<Fifteenth embodiment (B)>
The fifteenth embodiment (B) is different from the fifteenth embodiment (A) in the execution timing of the process of adding "1" to medals.
Note that the configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (B) is also similar to the configuration of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the execution timing of the medal addition process in the fifteenth embodiment (B).
Since (a) to (c) in FIG. 81 are the same as (a) to (c) in FIG. 80, explanations are omitted, and (d) and (e) in FIG. 81 are as follows. Since this is different from (d) and (e) in FIG. 80, it will be explained below.

At the timing (d) in FIG. 81, the input sensor 44a is off and the input sensor 44b is on.
The state (d) in FIG. 81 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
In the fifteenth embodiment (B), when the state shown in FIG. 81 (d) is reached, the main control board 50 determines that a medal has been inserted, and performs a process of adding "1" to the medal (bet process or credit process). ). At this time, if the number of bets is less than the specified number, the number of bets will be added by 1, and if the number of bets has already reached the specified number, the number of credits will be increased to the maximum number of 50. When the number of credits has not been reached, the process of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed, as in the fifteenth embodiment (A).

Furthermore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), when the state shown in (d) in FIG. 81 is reached, the main control board 50 transmits an input command to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the input command, it outputs an input sound from the speaker 22.
However, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), if the state of (d) in FIG. 81 continues for a predetermined period of time or more, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passage error and sends an error command to the sub control board 80. . When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), after the process of adding "1" to the medal is executed and the insertion sound is output, there is a case where it is determined that a medal passing error has occurred and an error sound is output.
In this way, when the state of (d) in FIG. 81 is reached, the process of adding "1" to the medal is executed and the input sound is output, and after that, the state of (d) in FIG. 81 is maintained for a predetermined time or longer. If the error sound is output continuously, the error sound will be output after the insertion sound is output, so even if an error occurs, the player can be notified by the insertion sound that medals have been inserted. .
Note that when a medal passing error occurs in the state of (b) or (c) in FIG. 81, the main control board 50 does not perform the process of adding "1" to the medal, and does not send the input command.

At the timing (e) in FIG. 81, the input sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
Furthermore, when a plurality of medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, steps (a) to (e) in FIG. 81 are repeated.
Then, by executing the process of adding "1" to the number of bets, when the number of bets reaches the specified number, the main control board 50 operates the start switch 41 in the state (e) in FIG. The game is set in a state where it can be accepted, and the game start display LED 79d is turned on.
For this reason, in the 15th embodiment (B), the process of adding "1" to the medal is executed, the timing for outputting the input sound is set to a state in which operation of the start switch 41 can be accepted, and the game start display LED 79d is turned on. The timing is different.

Here, as explained in the fifteenth embodiment (A), the process of adding "1" to the medal is performed at the timing (e) in FIG. 80 (when both the input sensors 44a and 44b are turned off). It is common to carry out
However, if the medal flows down the medal path to the position shown in (d) in FIG. 81, the medal enters the hopper 35 because it has already passed through the blocker 45.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), at the timing of (d) in FIG. 81 (when the input sensor 44b remains on and the input sensor 44a changes from on to off), the medal is "1". Executes addition processing. Thereby, it is possible to prevent medals from entering the hopper 35 even though the medal adding process has not been executed, so-called swallowing of medals.

Furthermore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), as described above, if the state of (d) in FIG. After transmitting the error command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22. In this case, when the error sound is output, the medal addition process has already been executed and the input sound has been output, so the error can be canceled and the medals stuck in the medal selector can be put into the hopper 35. Thereby, it is possible to avoid putting the player at a disadvantage.

Further, when medals are continuously inserted from the medal slot 47 and the number of credits reaches the maximum number of "50", the 51st medal comes off the medal path at the position of the blocker 45. The medals are returned from the medal payout port 16.
At this time, at the timing when the 50th medal is in the state (d) in FIG. 81 (the input sensor 44a is off and the input sensor 44b is on), the process of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed, and the blocker is Turn off 45. Thereby, the 51st medal can be reliably returned from the medal payout port 16 without being swallowed.

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), in the state of (d) in FIG. 81, by executing the process of adding "1" to the number of bets, when the number of bets reaches a specified number, the start switch 41 is operated. will be ready to accept. At this time, when the start switch 41 is operated, the main control board 50 transmits a start command to the sub control board 80. Then, upon receiving the start command, the sub control board 80 outputs a sound effect from the speaker 22.

Here, as in the fifteenth embodiment (A), at the timing (e) in FIG. 80, when the start switch 41 is brought into a state in which operation can be accepted and the input command is sent to the sub-control board 80, There is a possibility that the input sound and the sound effect based on the operation of the start switch 41 overlap.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), the input command is sent to the sub-control board 80 at the timing (d) in FIG. 81, and the start switch 41 is operated at the timing (e) in FIG. Make it available for reception. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the input sound and the sound effect based on the operation of the start switch 41 from overlapping.

<Fifteenth embodiment (C)>
The fifteenth embodiment (C) is the same as the fifteenth embodiment (B) in the execution timing of the process of adding "1" to the medal, but the output timing of the input sound is different from the fifteenth embodiment (B). They are different.
Note that the configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (C) is also similar to the configuration of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the execution timing of the medal addition process in the fifteenth embodiment (C).
(a) to (c) in FIG. 82 are the same as (a) to (c) in FIGS. 80 and 81, so explanations are omitted, and (d) and (e) in FIG. Since this is different from (d) and (e) in FIGS. 80 and 81, it will be explained below.

At the timing (d) in FIG. 82, the input sensor 44a is off and the input sensor 44b is on.
The state (d) in FIG. 82 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
In the fifteenth embodiment (C), when the state shown in (d) in FIG. 82 is reached, the main control board 50 determines that a medal has been inserted, and processes the addition of "1" to the medal (bet processing or credit processing). ). At this time, if the number of bets is less than the specified number, the number of bets will be added by 1, and if the number of bets has already reached the specified number, the number of credits will be increased to the maximum number of 50. When the number of credits has not been reached, the process of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed, as in the fifteenth embodiment (A) and (B).

However, in the fifteenth embodiment (C), unlike the fifteenth embodiment (B), the main control board 50 does not transmit the input command to the sub control board 80 at the timing (d) in FIG.
In the fifteenth embodiment (C), the main control board 50 transmits the input command to the sub control board 80 at the timing (e) in FIG. When the sub-control board 80 receives the input command, it outputs an input sound from the speaker 22.

Here, it is assumed that the state of (d) in FIG. 82 continues for a predetermined time or more, and the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passage error and sends an error command to the sub control board 80. Assume that the sub-control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.
In this case, the process of adding "1" to the medal is executed, but the error sound is output without outputting the input sound. This allows priority to be given to error notification.

Then, when the error is cleared, the main control board 50 transmits an input command to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 outputs an input sound from the speaker 22 based on the received input command. This allows the player to be informed that medals have been inserted, thereby making the player feel at ease.
Further, in the state of (e) in FIG. 82, when the number of bets reaches the specified number by executing the process of adding "1" to the number of bets, the operation of the start switch 41 is made ready to be accepted, The lighting of the game start display LED 79d is the same as in the fifteenth embodiments (A) and (B).

<Sixteenth embodiment>
The sixteenth embodiment relates to a chute passage 48 that guides the medals that have passed through the input sensors 44a and 44b of the medal selector to the hopper 35, and a chute sensor 49 provided in the middle of the chute passage 48.
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the medal selector, the chute passage 48, and the chute sensor 49, and the medals M input from the medal input port 47 pass through the input sensor 44a, input sensor 44b, and chute sensor 49, and enter the hopper. FIG.

The chute passage 48 is a passage that guides the medals M that have passed through the input sensors 44a and 44b of the medal selector to the hopper 35, and is connected to the downstream side of the medal passage of the medal selector. The medals M inserted from the medal input port 47 reach the hopper 35 through the medal passage of the medal selector and the chute passage 35.

The chute sensor 49 is a sensor provided to determine the presence or absence of a medal jam or a trifle, and is configured using an optical sensor having a light receiving and emitting section, and is placed at a predetermined position in the middle of the chute path 48. and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
Since the chute passage 48 is a passage that guides the medals M that have passed through the input sensors 44a and 44b to the hopper 35, the chute sensor 49 is arranged downstream from the input sensors 44a and 44b.

In the 16th embodiment, the input monitoring counter adds "1" ( This is a counter that is subtracted by 1 (-1) when the shoot sensor 49 detects passage of the medal M. Therefore, during normal operation, the input monitoring counter repeats "1" and "0".
Note that the timing at which the input monitoring counter is incremented by "1" is the timing at which the input sensor 44b turns from on to off (timing shown in FIG. 4 and FIGS. 80 to 82 (e)).
Furthermore, the timing of adding "1" to the input monitoring counter is not limited to the timing when the input sensor 44b changes from on to off, but also the timing when the input sensor 44a changes from off to on (as shown in FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82). (b) timing), the timing at which the input sensor 44a changes from on to off (timing at (c) in FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82), or the timing at which the input sensor 44b changes from off to on. (The timing shown in FIG. 4 and FIGS. 80 to 82 (d)) may be used. This is because if the medal M reaches these timings, it is considered that the medal M will enter the hopper 35.
Furthermore, when the medal M passes through the chute sensor 49, the chute sensor 49 changes from off to on to off, but the timing at which the input monitoring counter is decremented by "1" is the timing at which the chute sensor 49 changes from on to off. be.

Further, when the input sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal M (the input monitoring counter = "+1") and the chute sensor 49 does not detect the passage of the medal M, the input sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal M. When the passing of the medal is further detected, the input monitoring counter becomes "+2", and the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passing error.
Furthermore, when the input sensors 44a and 44b do not detect the passage of the medal M, and only the chute sensor 49 detects the passage of the medal M, the input monitoring counter becomes "-1", and the main control board 50 It is determined to be a passing error.

Note that the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passing error not only when the input monitoring counter becomes "+2" or "-1". For example, the main control board 50 may determine that a medal passing error occurs when the input monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "+2" or more or a predetermined value of "-1" or less.
Further, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has occurred when the shoot sensor 49 continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shoot sensor 49 detected the medal M. When the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal retention error, it stops the progress of the game until the error is cleared.

As shown in FIG. 83, the medals M inserted from the medal input port 47 pass through the medal passage and the chute passage 48 to reach the hopper 35. At this time, it passes through the input sensor 44a, input sensor 44b, and chute sensor 49.
Here, it is assumed that the medal M is jammed at the tip of the chute passage 48. In FIG. 83, the position M1 indicates the position of the medal M placed in the medal slot 47, the position M2 indicates the position of the medal M stuck at the tip of the chute passage 48, and the position M3 indicates the position of the medal M placed in the medal slot 47. The position of the second medal M from the tip of the path 48 is shown, and the position M4 shows the position of the third medal M from the tip of the chute path 48.

As shown in FIG. 83, in the sixteenth embodiment, when a medal M is jammed at the tip of the chute passage 48, the chute is moved to a position where the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the chute passage 48 can be detected. A sensor 49 is arranged.
Therefore, when a medal M is jammed at the tip of the chute path 48, the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the chute path 48 is detected by the chute sensor 49, and if this condition continues for a predetermined period of time or more, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal retention error and stops the progress of the game until the error is cleared.

For example, assume that three medals M are inserted from the medal slot 47 when the specified number is "3" and the number of bets and the number of credits are both "0". In this case, when the input sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the third medal M, the main control board 50 sets the start switch 41 to a state in which operation can be accepted (game can be started), and the game start display LED 79d lights up. At this time, if the first medal M (M2) gets stuck at the tip of the chute passage 48, the third medal M (M4) is detected by the chute sensor 49. If this state continues for a predetermined period of time or more, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has occurred and stops the progress of the game. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game with the medals M stuck in the chute passage 48.

Note that the position of the chute sensor 49 is not limited to a position where it can detect the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the chute passage 48 when the medal M is jammed at the tip of the chute passage 48. If the specified number is "N", the chute sensor 49 should be placed at a position where it can detect the Nth medal M from the tip of the chute passage 48 when the medal M is jammed at the tip of the chute passage 48. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game with the medals M stuck in the chute passage 48.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
The seventeenth embodiment relates to a payout medal passage 134 that guides medals ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout port 16.
84 is a front view of the passage forming member 130, FIG. 85 is a rear view of the passage forming member 130, FIG. 86 is a left side view of the passage forming member 130, and FIG. 87 is a side view of the passage forming member 130. It is a sectional view taken along the line AA.

The slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an open front, and a front door 12 that closes the opening of the cabinet 13.
Further, a medal payout device 15 is arranged inside the cabinet 13 in the lower part.
Furthermore, a medal slot 47, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, etc. are arranged at the center of the front surface of the front door 12, and a medal selector is located on the back side of the front door 12 at a position corresponding to the medal slot 47. is located.
Further, a medal payout port 16 is provided at the bottom of the front door 12, a medal receiving tray is provided at the bottom front of the front door 12 to receive the medals paid out from the medal payout port 16, and A passage forming member 130 is attached to the lower part.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the passage forming member 130 is formed in a bent shape, and is attached to a predetermined position at the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12, thereby forming a return medal passage 132 and a payout medal passage. 134.
Furthermore, the return medal passage 132 is a passage that guides medals that are not allowed to be inserted by the blocker 45 of the medal selector to the medal payout port 16.
Further, the payout medal passage 134 is a passage that guides medals ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout port 16.
Note that the return medal passage 132 and the payout medal passage 134 merge in the middle to form one passage.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, an upper medal receiving opening 131 is provided at the upper part of the passage forming member 130. This upper medal receiving opening 131 is an opening for receiving medals that are not allowed to be inserted by the blocker 45, and is an opening that becomes the upstream end of the return medal passage 132, and is closed when the front door 12 is closed. It is formed so as to be located below the blocker 45 of the medal selector.
The medals that are not allowed to be inserted by the blocker 45 pass through the upper medal receiving port 131, are guided by the return medal passage 132, pass through the medal payout port 16, and are stored in the medal receiving tray.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, a lower medal receiving opening 133 is provided below the center of the passage forming member 130 and at a position to the left when viewed from the front (to the right when viewed from the back). ing. The lower medal receiving opening 133 is an opening for receiving medals ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15, and is an opening at the upstream end of the dispensing medal passage 134, and is an opening at the front door. 12 is formed so as to be located in front of the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15 in a closed state.
The medals ejected from the ejection part 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 pass through the lower medal receiving port 133, are guided by the dispensing medal passage 134, pass through the medal dispensing port 16, and are stored in the medal receiving tray. .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the lower medal receiving opening 133 is formed on the back side of the passage forming member 130, and the lower medal receiving opening 133 is formed on the front side of the passage forming member 130, forming the back side of the front door 12. Boards are placed. In this way, there is a distance corresponding to the depth of the passage forming member 130 from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12.
Here, the medals M ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 pass through the lower medal receiving port 133 and pass through the dispensing medal passage 134 to a position opposite to the lower medal receiving port 133 on the back surface of the front door 12. It hits and bounces off. At this time, if the distance from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is short, the medals M that bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 and the medals M that are next ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15. There is a possibility that the medals M collide with each other.

Therefore, in the 17th embodiment, as shown in FIG. ≧2D”.
That is, the distance "L1" from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is set to be more than twice the diameter "D" of the medal M.
This makes it difficult for the medal M that bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 to collide with the medal M that is ejected next from the ejection part 103 of the medal payout device 15.

That is, the medals M ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 head toward the back surface of the front door 12 (to the right in FIG. 87) while falling downward due to gravity. Therefore, the medals M ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 hit the back surface of the front door 12 at a position lower than the ejected position. Furthermore, the medals M that have bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 fall downward due to gravity and head toward the lower medal receiving opening 133 (leftward in FIG. 87).
If the distance "L1" from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is set to be more than twice the diameter "D" of the medal M, the medals will not be ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15. It is possible to secure a sufficient height difference between the medal M that hits the back surface of the front door 12 and bounces off and heads toward the lower medal receiving opening 133, so that the medals M do not collide. You can make it less difficult.

Furthermore, if the medals M are ejected one after another at short intervals from the ejection part 103 of the medal dispensing device 15, even if the distance "L1" from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is the diameter "D" of the medal M. Even if it is set to twice or more, there is a possibility that the medals M ejected from the ejection section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 and the medals M that bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 will collide with each other.

Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, after the medal M ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 hits the back surface of the front door 12 and rebounds, the next medal M is ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15. It is set.
That is, the interval at which medals M are ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15, the ejection speed of the medals M from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15, and the distance from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12. is set so that the above relationship is satisfied.

In this way, the medal M ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 bounces off the back surface of the front door 12 at a position lower than the ejected position, and after falling to an even lower position, the next medal M is ejected from the medal dispensing device 15. If the medals are ejected from the no. 15 ejecting section 103, a sufficient distance and height difference between the two medals can be ensured, and it is possible to make it difficult for the medals M to collide.
Here, when the medal M that bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 collides with the medal M that is ejected from the ejection part 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 next, the medal There is a possibility that the medal M gets stuck in the passage 134.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, the medals M are set so as to be difficult to collide with each other, thereby preventing the medals M from clogging in the vicinity of the lower medal receiving opening 133 or in the payout medal passage 134. .
In addition, in this embodiment, the settings are made such that the medal M that bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 and the medal M that is ejected next from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 are unlikely to collide. However, when a large number of medals M are continuously ejected from the ejection unit 103, this does not mean that all the medals M before and after will not collide, but at least the first medal M and the second medal M will not collide. It is sufficient as long as there is no collision. When winning a small winning combination, two medals are most often paid out, so if the setting is made so that the first medal M and the second medal M are less likely to collide, it is possible to place them near the lower medal receiving opening 133. This is because the medals M can be prevented from becoming clogged in the payout medal passage 134.

Further, as described in the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is provided with a plurality of holding parts 102 along the outer periphery of the hopper disk 101, which can hold the medals M stored in the hopper. There is.
Then, when the following conditions (a) and (b) are met, or when the conditions (a) and (c) are met, two or more medals M are consecutively released from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15. It will be ejected.
(a) Medals M are held in two adjacent holding parts 102 of the hopper disk 101, respectively.
(b) When the number of medals remaining until the upper limit of the number of credits is reached is "N" and the number of medals M paid out by winning is "M", "(MN)≧2" is satisfied.
(c) The payment switch 43 was operated when the number of credits was "2" or more.

For example, in FIG. 17(b) of the sixth embodiment, medals M are held in the holding part 102 located at the position of the letter "B" and the holding part 102 located at the position of the letter "C", respectively. When there is, the above condition (a) is satisfied even if the medal M is not held in the holding section 102 located at the position of the letter "D".
For example, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, the medal M is not held in the holding part 102 located at the position of the letter "B", but the holding part 102 located at the position of the letter "C" 102 and the holding unit 102 located at the position of the letter "D", when the medal M is held respectively, the above condition (a) is satisfied.

Furthermore, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, the holding section 102 is located at the position of the letter "B", the holding section 102 is located at the position of the letter "C", and the holding section 102 is located at the position of the letter "D". When the medals M are held in the holding portions 102 located at the respective holding portions 102, the condition (a) above is satisfied.
Of course, the above condition (a) is also satisfied when the medals M are held in all the holding parts 102 in the hopper disk 101, respectively.

Also, for example, when the upper limit of the number of credits is "50" and the number of credits is "47", the remaining number of credits until reaching the upper limit of the number of credits is "3", and at this time, the number of payouts If a small winning combination of "5" or more is won, the above condition (b) is satisfied.
Furthermore, for example, when the number of credits has already reached the upper limit of "50", the remaining number of credits until reaching the upper limit of the number of credits is "0", and at this time, the number of payouts is "2". ” or more wins, the above condition (b) is satisfied.

From the above, for example, in FIG. 17(b) of the sixth embodiment, at least the holding part 102 located at the position of the letter "B" and the holding part 102 located at the position of the letter "C" have medals, respectively. If the condition (b) or (c) above is satisfied in a situation where M is held, two or more medals M will be continuously ejected from the ejection section 103 of the medal payout device 15.
Further, for example, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, the medal M is not held in the holding section 102 located at the position of the letter "B", but at least the medal M is held at the position of the letter "C". Even when the above conditions (b) or (c) are satisfied in a situation where medals M are held in the holding part 102 and the holding part 102 located at the position of the letter "D", medals are paid out. Two or more medals M are successively ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the device 15.

Further, the medals M ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 may bounce off the back surface of the front door 12 and return to the vicinity of the lower medal receiving opening 133. If the returned medals M pass through the lower medal receiving opening 133, they fall inside the cabinet 13 and cannot be paid out to the player.
Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the height of the peripheral edge of the lower medal receiving port 133 is "L2" and the thickness of the medal M is "T", "L2≧T" ”.

That is, the height "L2" of the peripheral edge of the lower medal receiving opening 133 is set to be equal to or greater than the thickness "T" of the medal M.
As a result, even if the medals M ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal dispensing device 15 bounce off the back surface of the front door 12 and return to the vicinity of the lower medal receiving port 133, the returned medals M will not be able to reach the lower medal receiving port. 133 and not pass through the lower medal receiving opening 133.

Further, since the hopper disk 101 of the medal payout device 15 is arranged to be inclined with respect to the horizontal plane, the medals M are ejected from the discharge section 103 of the medal payout device 15 in an inclined state with respect to the horizontal plane. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the lower medal receiving port 133 and the payout medal passage 134 are also inclined in accordance with the inclination of the medals M to be ejected.

Here, the height direction is a direction perpendicular to the front and back surfaces of the medal M that has been ejected in an inclined state. In the 17th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the height of the payout medal passage 134 is "L2" and the diameter of the medal M is "D", "L2<D" is satisfied. It is set. That is, the height "L2" of the payout medal passage 134 is set to be less than the diameter "D" of the medal M.

Thereby, even if the medal M that bounced off the back surface of the front door 12 rotates within the payout medal path 134, the front and back surfaces of the medal M can be prevented from becoming parallel to the vertical plane within the payout medal path 134. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the medals M from blocking the payout medal passage 134.
Note that all the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<18th embodiment>
The eighteenth embodiment relates to external signal transmission processing.
In the 18th embodiment, signals indicating on/off can be output as external signals 4 and 5.
In the 18th embodiment, the external signal 4 is a setting key switch on signal (setting key switch signal), a signal indicating that an error has been detected, a signal indicating that an error is being displayed, or a signal indicating that the power switch 11 is on. This is a signal indicating that the power has been turned on (that the power has been turned on).
Further, the external signal 5 is a signal indicating that the front door 12 of the slot machine 10 is opened (door switch ON signal).

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing the main storage areas of the RWM 53 described in the 18th embodiment.
The input port 0 level data at address "F00A(H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating whether input port 0 is on/off. Each bit of input port 0 is configured as follows.
D0: Setting switch signal (“1” when on, “0” when off)
D1: Reset switch signal (“1” when on, “0” when off)
D2: Setting key switch signal (“1” when on, “0” when off)
D3: Door switch signal (“1” when on, “0” when off)
D4: Unused D5: Unused D6: Power-off detection signal D7: Full detection signal

Here, the "power-off detection signal" of the D6 bit is input when a power-off occurs (for example, when "Yes" is determined in step S482 in FIG. 54 (11th embodiment)). It's a signal.
Although not shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 10 includes a sub-tank for storing medals overflowing from the hopper 35. Furthermore, it is equipped with a full sensor that turns on when a medal comes into contact with the sub-tank when it becomes full. Then, when the full sensor is turned on, a full detection signal is input to the D7 bit of input port 0.
Although not shown in FIG. 88, in addition to the storage area for input port 0 level data, each bit of input port 0 is changed from off (during the previous interrupt processing) to on (during the current interrupt processing). The input port rise data storage area is used to store data indicating that the input port is rising, and the data indicating that each bit of input port 0 has changed from on (during the previous interrupt processing) to off (during the current interrupt processing). It is also possible to provide a storage area for input port falling data for storage.

Furthermore, the input port 51 shown in FIG. 1 is not limited to input port 0, and for example,
(1) Input port 1 into which operation switch signals such as the bet switch 40 (40a and 40b), start switch 41, stop switch 42, and settlement switch 43 are input;
(2) Input port 2 into which signals from the passage sensor 46, input sensor 44, payout sensor 37, reel sensor 33, etc. are input
Equipped with etc.
A storage area for input port level data corresponding to each input port is provided. Furthermore, as described above, it is also possible to provide a storage area for input port rising data and input port falling data for each input port.
Furthermore, if only a storage area for input port level data is provided (in a case where a storage area for input port rising data and input port falling data is not provided), the storage area for input port level data in this interrupt processing is In addition, a storage area for input port level data from the previous interrupt processing may be provided.

The external signal 4 output time at power-off recovery at address "F013(H)" is a storage area for a timer value that counts the time for outputting external signal 4 at power-off recovery. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, when the power switch 11 is turned on and the main control board 50 detects recovery from power-off, "136 (D)" is set as an initial value in the address "F013 (H)". and is decremented by 1 for each interrupt. Then, it is determined that the external signal 4 is to be turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) until this value becomes "0".
Furthermore, in the 18th embodiment, the interrupt cycle is "2.235 ms", similar to the other embodiments. Therefore, "136" interrupt corresponds to "303.96ms". As a result, when recovering from a power-off, the external signal 4 is turned on for approximately 300 ms (a signal indicating that it is on can be output as the external signal 4).

The external signal 4 management time at address "F014(H)" is a storage area for timer values for managing the output time of the external signal 4. In this embodiment, the initial value "24 (D)" is set when starting the output of the external signal 4 (excluding when returning from the power cut mentioned above), and is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt. . Then, it is determined that the external signal 4 is to be turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) until this value becomes "0".
Further, "24" interrupt corresponds to "53.64ms". As a result, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least "50" ms or more (a signal indicating "on" can be output as the external signal 4).

The external signal 5 management time at address “F015(H)” is a storage area for a timer value for managing the output time of the external signal 5. In this embodiment, an initial value "24 (D)" is set when outputting the external signal 5 is started, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. Then, it is determined that the external signal 5 is to be turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5) until this value becomes "0".
Similarly to the above, the "24" interrupt corresponds to "53.64ms". As a result, the external signal 5 is turned on for at least "50" ms or more (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5).

Further, in this embodiment, the external signal 4 output time, external signal 4 management time, and external signal 5 management time at the time of power-off recovery are all 1-byte timers because they measure "255 (D)" or less. These timer values are then subtracted by timer measurement in step S455 during the interrupt processing in FIG.
Here, in the 18th embodiment, the above three timers are arranged at addresses "F013(H)" to "F015(H)". Therefore, in the timer measurement, in the first step, "F013 (H)" is set as the measurement start timer address. Also, set "3" as the number of 1-byte timers. As a result, all timers including addresses "F013(H)" to "F015(H)" are subtracted by "1" by the timer measurement process.
Also, when the subtraction process is executed when the timer value is "0", in other words, when "0" is subtracted from "00(H)", the result is "00(H)". .

The error number at address "F051(H)" is a storage area for storing the number corresponding to the detected error when an error is detected. As shown in FIG. 88, when no error is detected, the value of address "F051(H)" is "0(D)". For example, when an "E5" error is detected, a value "105 (D)" corresponding to the detected error is stored in the address "F051 (H)".
In FIG. 88, "E0" to "E7" are illustrated as error numbers.
Here, in the eleventh embodiment described above, "E1", "E5", "E6", and "E7" errors are illustrated as unrecoverable errors. In contrast, the errors “E0” to “E7” in the eighteenth embodiment (FIG. 88) all correspond to recoverable errors.

When these recoverable errors occur, the progress of the game is, in principle, stopped. Further, even when at least one reel 31 is rotating, error detection is executed for at least some errors (in the example of the 18th embodiment, "E7", "E6", and "E5" errors). When an error is detected during the rotation of at least one reel 31, the game continues to progress until all reels 31 stop, and when all reels 31 stop, an error state ( (error display), and the progress of the game is stopped. Then, when the error is removed by the hall clerk, the progress of the game is resumed. Of course, if any of the errors "E7", "E6", and "E5" occur while the reels 31 are rotating, the progress of the game will be stopped (stop control is not performed by operating the stop switch 42). ) is also possible.

In FIG. 88, the "E0" error is an error that occurs when the input sensor 44 determines that medals have accumulated.
The "E1" error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the medals have not passed through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b in the correct order.
The "E2" error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the sub tank is full.
The "E3" error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the medals in the hopper 35 are empty.
The "E4" error is an error that occurs when the payout sensor 37 determines that medals are stuck (stuck) in a situation where a medal payout signal is being output.
The "E5" error is an error that occurs when the payout sensor 37 is turned on in a situation where no medal payout signal is output.
The "E6" error is an error that occurs when the input sensor 44b detects a medal in a situation where the blocker 45 does not form a medal flow path.
The "E7" error is an error that occurs when it is determined that medals have accumulated in the selector passage.

When any of the above errors is detected, the number corresponding to the detected error is stored in address "F051(H)". When an error number is stored at address "F051(H)", it becomes possible to display an error corresponding to the stored error number. For example, the segment data corresponding to the number stored at the address "F051(H)" may be output to the acquired number display LED 78, and an error number may be displayed. Specifically, when the error field code "101 (D)" is stored in the address "F051 (H)", the digit At the lighting timing of 3, lighting data of digit 3 and segment data for displaying "E" as lighting are output. Furthermore, at the lighting timing of digit 4, the lighting data of digit 4 and segment data for displaying "1" as lighting are output.

Also, when any error number is stored in the address "F051 (H)" (when it is not "0"), external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as external signal 4). ).
After eliminating the error that has occurred, the hall clerk turns on the reset switch. When it is detected that the reset switch has been turned on, it is determined whether the error that occurred has been removed. When it is determined that the error that has occurred has not been removed, the current status (error display) is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined that the error that occurred has been removed (no error has occurred), the error number stored at address "F051 (H)" is cleared. When the error number of the address "F051(H)" is cleared, the error display (display of the error number using digits 3 and 4) ends.
Although the above is an example of displaying the error number on the earned number display LED 78 based on the other embodiments described above, the error number is not limited to this, and may be displayed on the credit number display LED 76, or the error number may be displayed on the credit number display LED 76. A dedicated LED may be provided and the information may be displayed on the LED.

The error detection flag at address "F294 (H)" is a storage area for remembering that an error has been detected, in case it is not possible to immediately transition to the error state when an error is detected. It is. In the example of FIG. 88, bits D0 to D2 in the storage area of address "F294(H)" are used as detection flags for "E7", "E6", and "E5" errors, respectively. The "E7", "E6", and "E5" errors are all errors that may be detected even when at least one reel 31 is rotating.

Here, even if the reels 31 are rotating, for example, it is determined by interrupt processing whether an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error has occurred. When the occurrence of these errors is detected while the reels 31 are rotating, the bit corresponding to the error in the error detection flag is set to "1". When the error detection flag is "1", external signal 4 is output.
However, even if these errors are detected while the reels 31 are rotating, the error state (error display) does not occur immediately at that point, but only after all reels 31 have stopped. The system enters an error state before the payout process is executed.

When all the reels 31 are stopped and any bit of the error detection flag is "1", the corresponding error number is stored in the address "F051(H)". When an error number is stored at address "F051(H)", the stored error number is displayed. Furthermore, when the error detection flag is stored at address "F294(H)" and then the error number is stored at address "F051(H)", when should the error detection flag at address "F291(H)" be cleared? is optional. For example, first, the error detection flag is not cleared until the error is removed. In this case, after the error detection flag is stored and after all reels 31 have stopped, the external signal 4 is turned on based on either the error detection flag or the error number (external signal 4 indicates on). (enables signal output). When it is determined that the error has been removed, both the error detection flag and error number are cleared. When the error detection flag and error number are cleared, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4). However, even if both the error detection flag and error number are cleared, if the setting key switch is turned on, external signal 4 will not be turned off (external signal 4 will be turned off). (does not output a signal indicating this).

Second, after storing the error detection flag at address "F294(H)", when the error number is stored at address "F051(H)", the error detection flag at address "F291(H)" is cleared. There are many things you can do. In this case, after the error detection flag is stored, the external signal 4 is turned on based on the error detection flag until the error number is stored (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). ). Further, when the error number is stored and the error detection flag is cleared, the external signal 4 is turned on based on the error number (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). Thereafter, when it is determined that the error has been removed, the error number is cleared. As a result, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4). However, even if both the error detection flag and error number are cleared, if the setting key switch is turned on, external signal 4 will not be turned off (external signal 4 will be turned off). (does not output a signal indicating this).

Note that when an error is detected while the reel 31 is rotating, etc., it cannot immediately shift to the error state (error display) (it cannot shift to the error state until all reels 31 have stopped). Since it is necessary to turn on the external signal 4 (to make it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4), an error detection flag is provided.
Therefore, when an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error occurs in a situation where the reel 31 is stopped or can immediately shift to an error state, "1" is stored in the error detection flag. Whether or not to do so is optional. To simplify processing, even when an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error occurs under a situation where it is possible to transition to an error state, "1" is stored in the error detection flag. Good too. Alternatively, when an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error occurs, if the error state cannot be immediately entered (for example, when at least one reel 31 is rotating), the error detection flag is set to "1". '', and when the situation is such that it is possible to immediately shift to an error state (eg, waiting for a game), the error number may be stored, but "1" may not be stored in the error detection flag.

In the above storage area of RWM53, the storage areas of addresses "F00A(H)", "F013(H)" to "F015(H)", and "F051(H)" are storage areas within the used area. . In contrast, the storage area at address "F294(H)" is a storage area outside the used area. Further, a program for detecting errors is stored in a control area of the ROM 54 outside the used area.

89 and 90 are time charts showing the output timing of external signal 4 and external signal 5. FIG. 89 shows example 1, and FIG. 90 shows example 2.
In Example 1 of FIG. 89, (a) shows the relationship between on/off of the setting key switch and the output of the external signal 4. When it is detected that the setting key switch is turned on, the external signal 4 is immediately turned on (a signal indicating that the setting key switch is turned on can be outputted as the external signal 4). The minimum value of the time t1 from when the setting key switch is turned on until the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) is "0" ms. Therefore, when it is detected that the setting key switch is turned on, the external signal 4 is immediately turned on (a signal indicating that the setting key switch is turned on can be outputted as the external signal 4).
Further, whether or not the setting key switch is on is detected in the interrupt processing. For example, during the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 53 (11th embodiment), when the level data of input port 0 is read in the input port reading processing of step S457 and the level data of the setting key switch is "1", the external Turn on signal 4 (enable to output a signal indicating on as external signal 4).

Further, once the setting key switch is turned on, the external signal 4 is turned on for 50 ms or more (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) (t3 in the figure). Therefore, even if the setting key switch is turned on and then turned off immediately (for example, after "10" ms have elapsed), the external signal 4 remains on (external (It is possible to output a signal indicating ON as signal 4).
When the setting key switch is turned off, the condition is that 50 ms or more have elapsed since the external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as external signal 4). , turns off the external signal 4 (enabling output of a signal indicating off as the external signal 4). If 50 ms or more have passed since the external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4), the external signal 4 will be turned off as soon as the setting key switch is detected to be off. (It is possible to output a signal indicating OFF as the external signal 4) (t2 in the figure).

Therefore, after detecting the on of the setting key switch and turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 4), turn off the setting key switch before "50" ms elapses. When detected, the external signal 4 is turned off after a minimum of "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4).
On the other hand, after detecting that the setting key switch is turned on and turning on external signal 4 (a signal indicating ON can be output as external signal 4), turn off the setting key switch after 50 ms or more has elapsed. When detected, it is possible to immediately turn off the external signal 4 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4).

(b) shows the relationship between error detection/non-detection and the output of the external signal 4. "Error detection" here corresponds to the fact that any bit in the error detection flag of address "F294 (H)" is "1", and "non-detection of error" means that the error concerned This corresponds to the detection flag being "0".
When "1" is stored in the error detection flag, it is possible to immediately turn on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating that it is on can be output as the external signal 4). The minimum value of the time t1 from when "1" is stored in the error detection flag until the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) is "0" ms.
Further, once "1" is stored in the error detection flag, the external signal is turned on for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating "on" can be outputted as the external signal 4) (time t3). Further, when the error detection flag is cleared, it is possible to turn off the external signal 4 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4) (time t2). Note that the error detection flag is cleared when, as described above, the error is removed, and when the error number is stored although the error is not removed.

Therefore, after detecting that the error detection flag has become "1" and turning on external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating on as external signal 4), before "50" ms has elapsed. When it is detected that the error detection flag has become "0", the external signal 4 is turned off after at least "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4. ).
On the other hand, after detecting that the error detection flag became "1" and turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4), more than "50" ms has passed. When it is detected that the error detection flag has become "0", it is possible to immediately turn off the external signal 4 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4).

(c) shows the relationship between error display/non-display and the output of the external signal 4. Here, "error display" means that the error number of address "F051(H)" has a value other than "0" (in the example of FIG. 88, any value from "100(D)" to "107(D)") ) is stored, and "hidden error" corresponds to the value of the error number being "0". Note that a storage area may be provided for storing a flag indicating display/non-display of errors, but as in this embodiment, data stored in the storage area for displaying error numbers may be provided. By determining whether to display or hide errors, it is possible to reduce the amount of storage space used.

When a value other than "0" is stored in the error number, it is possible to immediately turn on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). The minimum value of the time t1 from when a value other than the error number "0" is stored until the external signal 4 is output is "0" ms.
Also, once a value other than "0" is stored in the error number, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) (time t3). In addition, after a value other than "0" is stored in the error number, the error number When cleared, it is possible to immediately turn off the external signal 4 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4) (time t2).

Therefore, if the error number is memorized and the error number is cleared before "50" ms has passed after turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4), After at least "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4).
On the other hand, if the error number is cleared after 50 ms or more has passed after the error number is memorized and the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4), It is possible to immediately turn off the external signal 4 (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(d) shows the relationship between power on/off and the output of the external signal 4. Here, various detection methods can be used to determine whether the power is turned on (whether the power switch 11 in FIG. (H)" corresponds to the time when the initial value "136 (D)" of the external signal 4 output time upon power-off recovery is stored.
When the power is turned on (when the initial value is stored in the output time of external signal 4 at power-off recovery), it is possible to immediately turn on external signal 4 (indicates on as external signal 4). (can output signals). The minimum value of the time t1 from when the initial value is stored in the external signal 4 output time at the time of power-off recovery until the external signal 4 is output is "0" ms.
Also, when the initial value is stored in the external signal 4 output time at power-off recovery, the external signal 4 is turned on for "300" ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) ( Time t3). "300" ms here corresponds to the number of interrupts "136". In addition, when the output time of external signal 4 becomes "0" at power-off recovery, it is possible to immediately turn off external signal 4 (it is possible to output a signal indicating off as external signal 4). (Time t2).

Therefore, the initial value is stored in the external signal 4 output time at the time of power-off recovery, and after the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4), the power switch 11 is turned off. When this is detected (when the D7 bit of the input port 0 level data becomes "1"), the external signal 4 is turned off after "300" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4 (the external (It is possible to output a signal indicating OFF as signal 4).
On the other hand, the initial value is stored in the external signal 4 output time at power-off recovery, and after the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4), the output time of the external signal 4 is " When 300'' ms has elapsed, even if the power switch 11 remains on, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(e) shows the relationship between opening/closing of the front door 12 and the output of the external signal 5. Here, "the front door 12 is opened" corresponds to the time when it is detected that the door switch is turned on. In particular, in the 18th embodiment, this corresponds to when the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data (or input port 0 rising data) becomes "1".
When it is detected that the door switch is turned on, the external signal 5 can be turned on immediately (a signal indicating that the door switch is turned on can be outputted as the external signal 5). The minimum value of the time t1 from when the door switch is turned on until the external signal 5 is output is "0" ms.
Further, when it is detected that the door switch is turned on, the external signal 5 is turned on for at least 50 ms (a signal indicating that the door switch is turned on can be output as the external signal 5) (time t3). As a result, even if the front door 12 is closed immediately after the front door 12 is opened, the external signal 5 remains on for at least 50 ms (external signal 5 indicates on). signal can be output).

Therefore, after detecting that the door switch was on and turning on the external signal 5 (making it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 5), the off state of the door switch was detected before "50" ms had elapsed. In this case, the external signal 5 is turned off after at least "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 5 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 5).
On the other hand, after detecting that the door switch was turned on and turning on the external signal 5 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5), it was detected that the door switch was turned off after 50 ms or more had elapsed. In this case, it is possible to immediately turn off the external signal 5 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 5).

The output destination of external signal 4 or external signal 5 is a hall computer, etc., but external signal 4 or 5 is turned on for 50 ms or more (a signal indicating ON can be output as external signal 4 or 5). ), the hall computer (data lamp) etc. can reliably receive the external signals 4 and 5. Therefore, even if a fraudulent act such as turning on the setting key switch momentarily (for example, about 5 to 10 ms) or a fraudulent act including momentarily opening the front door 12, the hall The external signal 4 or 5 can be received by a computer or the like.

Example 2 shown in FIG. 90 is a modification of Example 1 shown in FIG. 89.
In FIG. 90,
The time t1 from when the setting key switch shown in (a) is turned on until the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4);
The time t1 from when the error detection flag shown in (b) becomes "1" to when the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4);
The time t1 from when the error number shown in (c) is stored until the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4);
Time t1 from when the door switch shown in (e) is turned on to when the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5)
are both set to "0" ms.

In addition, in FIG. 90, the interval of time t1 is illustrated as exceeding "0", but in reality, for example, in (a), the timing when the setting key switch is turned on from off and the timing of external signal 4 are changed. The timing at which the output turns from off to on is almost the same (the timing at which the setting key switch turns from off to on, and the timing at which the output of external signal 4 turns from off to on is within 2 divisions). .
Also, the time t3 for turning on the external signals 4 shown in (a) to (c) in the figure and the external signal 5 shown in (e) in the figure (making it possible to output signals indicating ON as the external signals 4 and 5) is a minimum of 50 ms. This point is similar to the example in FIG. 89.
Furthermore, the time t3 in which the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be outputted as the external signal 4) in FIG. 89(d) is "300" ms, as in the example of FIG.

Furthermore,
The time t2 from when the setting key switch shown in (a) is turned off to when the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4);
A time t2 from when the error detection flag shown in (b) is cleared to when the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4);
Time t2 from when the error number shown in (c) is cleared until turning off the external signal 4 (enabling output of a signal indicating off as the external signal 4);
The time t2 from when the external signal 4 output time becomes "0" at the time of power-off recovery shown in (d) until the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4);
Time t2 from the time when the off-state of the door switch shown in (e) is detected until the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5)
are all "50" ms.

To do this, for example, a timer is set to manage the output time of the external signal 4 when the setting key switch is turned off, when the error detection flag is cleared, or when the error number is cleared. Set the value "24 (D)", subtract "1" from the timer value for each interrupt processing, and turn off external signal 4 when the timer value reaches "0" (turn off external signal 4). ).
Similarly, when the off-state of the door switch is detected, a timer value "24 (D)" for managing the output time of the external signal 5 is set, and "1" is subtracted from the timer value for each interrupt processing, When the timer value reaches "0", the external signal 5 may be turned off (a signal indicating off may be outputted as the external signal 5).

Next, the output of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5 will be explained based on a flowchart. 91 to 94 are flowcharts showing external signal output processing.
91 and 92 are flowcharts showing example 1 of external signal output processing. Further, FIG. 92 is a flowchart following FIG. 91. Furthermore, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing example 2 of external signal output processing. Furthermore, FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing example 3 of external signal output processing.
The external signal output process (step S3221) is a process that is inserted between step S455 (timer measurement) and step S456 (LED display control) in FIG. 53, for example.

First, example 1 of external signal output processing will be described.
In FIG. 91, in step S3231, it is determined whether the setting key switch is on. In this process, it is determined whether the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data is "1" or not, and when it is "1", it is determined that the setting key switch is on. When it is determined that the setting key switch is on, the process advances to step S3237, and when it is determined that the setting key switch is not on, the process advances to step S3232.

In step S3232, it is determined whether an error has been detected. In this process, it is determined whether any bit of the error detection flag is "1". If it is determined that any bit of the error detection flag is "1", the process advances to step S3237; if it is determined that any bit is not "1" (no error has been detected), the process advances to step S3233.
In step S3233, it is determined whether an error is being displayed. This process reads the error number and determines whether it is "0" or not. If it is "0", it is determined that no error is being displayed and the process proceeds to step S3234; if it is a value other than "0", it is determined that an error is being displayed and the process proceeds to step S3237.

In step S3234, it is determined whether "300" ms have passed since the power was turned on. As mentioned above, when recovery from power off is detected, the initial value "136 (D)" is set to the external signal 4 output time at power off recovery at address "F013 (H)", and It is subtracted by "1". In step S3234, it is determined whether or not the external signal 4 output time at power-off recovery is "0", and if it is "0", "300" ms have passed since the power was turned on. After determining that, the process advances to step S3235. On the other hand, if the external signal 4 output time upon power-off recovery is not "0", the process advances to step S3241.

In step S3235, it is determined whether or not the output time of the external signal 4 has passed a predetermined time. Here, the external signal 4 management time of address "F014(H)" is set to "24(D)" in step S3240, which will be described later. Then, in step S3235, it is determined whether or not this external signal 4 management time is "0", and when it is determined that it is "0" (when it is determined that the output time of external signal 4 has elapsed), The process advances to step S3236, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process advances to step S3241.
In step S3236, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). The process then proceeds to step S3242 (in FIG. 92).

On the other hand, if it is determined "Yes" in step S3231, S3232, or S3233, and the process proceeds to step S3237, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch has been turned from OFF to ON in the current interrupt process. In this interrupt processing, whether or not the D2 bit (setting key switch signal) of the input port 0 level data is turned on is determined by, for example, firstly, if the input port 0 rising data is present, the input port 0 rising data is It is determined whether the D2 bit of is "1" or not. Second, save the input port 0 level data from the previous interrupt processing, and make sure that the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data is "0" in the previous interrupt processing, and the input port 0 level data in the current interrupt processing. When the D2 bit is "1", it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned on from off in the current interrupt processing. If it is determined that the setting key switch has changed from off to on, the process advances to step S3240, and if it is determined that the setting key switch has not changed from off to on, the process advances to step S3238.

In step S3238, it is determined whether the error detection flag has changed from off to on. Here, for example, by saving the error detection flag from the previous interrupt processing and performing a comparison operation with the error detection flag from the current interrupt processing, the error detection flag can be changed from OFF to ON during the current interrupt processing. Determine whether or not. If it is determined that the error detection flag has changed from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3240, and if it is determined that the error detection flag has not changed from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3239.

In step S3239, it is determined whether the error number has changed from being hidden ("0") to being displayed (other than "0"). Here, for example, by saving the error number from the previous interrupt processing and comparing it with the error number from the current interrupt processing, we can determine whether the error number from "0" to "0" is different from "0" during the current interrupt processing. determine whether it has become. If it is determined that the error number has changed from "0" to a value other than "0", the process advances to step S3240; if it is determined that the error number remains "0", the process advances to step S3241.

When the process proceeds from step S3237, S3238, or S3239 to step S3240, the external signal 4 management time of address "F014(H)" is set to "24(D)", which corresponds to an output time of "50" ms, as an initial value. . Then, the process advances to step S3241.
In step S3241, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). The process then proceeds to step S3242 (in FIG. 92).
In step S3242, it is determined whether the door switch is on. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data is "1", and when it is "1", it is determined that the door switch is on. When it is determined that the door switch is on, the process advances to step S3245, and when it is determined that the door switch is not on, the process advances to step S3243.

In step S3243, it is determined whether the output time of external signal 5 has elapsed. Here, the external signal 5 management time of address "F015(H)" is set to "24(D)" in step S3246, which will be described later. Then, in step S3243, it is determined whether or not this external signal 5 management time is "0". When it is determined that it is "0", the process advances to step S3244, and when it is determined that it is not "0", step Proceed to S3247.
In step S3244, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is on, and the process proceeds to step S3245, it is determined whether the door switch has been turned on from off in the current interrupt processing. In this interrupt processing, whether or not the D3 bit (door switch signal) of the input port 0 level data is turned on is determined by, for example, firstly, if the input port 0 rising data is present, the input port 0 rising data is Determine whether the D3 bit is "1". Second, save the input port 0 level data from the previous interrupt processing, and make sure that the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data is "0" in the previous interrupt processing, and the input port 0 level data in the current interrupt processing. When the D3 bit is "1", it is determined that the door switch has been turned on from off in the current interrupt process. When it is determined that the door switch has been turned on from off, the process advances to step S3246, and when it is determined that the door switch has not been turned on from off, the process advances to step S3247.

In step S3246, the external signal 5 management time of the address "F015(H)" is set to "24(D)" corresponding to the output time of "50" ms as an initial value. Then, the process advances to step S3247.
In step S3247, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing example 2 of external signal output processing.
In the example of FIG. 92,
(1) As shown in step S3237, when the setting key switch is turned on from off,
(2) As shown in step S3238, when the error detection flag is turned on from off,
(3) As shown in step S3239, when a new error number is stored, the output time of external signal 4 is set.
On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 93, the current interrupt processing is based on whether the setting key switch is on, whether the error detection flag is on, and whether or not the error number is stored. to control the output of the external signal 4.

In FIG. 93, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIGS. 91 and 92. In the example of FIG. 93, steps different from those of FIGS. 91 and 92 are not provided.
In the example of FIG. 93,
(1) When it is determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch is on (when the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data of address "F00A(H)" is "1"),
(2) In step S3234, if "300" ms has not elapsed since the power was turned on (external signal 4 output time at power-off recovery of address "F013(H)" is not "0"),
(3) When it is determined in step S3233 that an error is being displayed (when the error number stored in address "F051(H)" is other than "0"),
(4) In step S3232, when an error is being detected (when any bit of the error detection flag at address "F294(H)" is "1")
respectively, proceed to step S3240 and store the number of interrupts "24 (D)" corresponding to the output time of the external signal 4 "50" ms at the address "F014 (H)".

Therefore, in the previous interrupt processing, for example, it was determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch was on, and in step S3240, "24 (D)" was set to the external signal 4 management time of address "F014 (H)". Thereafter, if it is determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch is on in the current interrupt processing, the process proceeds to step S3240 and the external signal 4 management time "24(D)" is reset. When it is determined in step S3234 that "300" ms have not elapsed since the power was turned on, when it is determined that an error is being displayed in step S3233, and when it is determined that an error is being detected in step S3233. The same is true. After step S3240, the process advances to step S3241.

If it is determined in step S3232 that error detection is not in progress, the process advances to step S3235. In step S3235, it is determined whether the output time of external signal 4 "50" ms has elapsed. Here, as described above, when the external signal 4 management time of the address "F014(H)" is "0", it is determined that the output time of the external signal 4 "50" ms has elapsed. If the output time of external signal 4 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3236, where external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as external signal 4), and if the output time of external signal 4 has elapsed. If not, the process advances to step S3241 and turns on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4).

Next, the process advances to step S3242, where it is determined whether the door switch is on. When it is determined that the door switch is on, the process advances to step S3246, and when it is determined that the door switch is not on, the process advances to step S3243.
In step S3246, "24(D)" is set to the external signal 5 management time of address "F015(H)". In this case, similarly to the above, it is determined that the door switch is on in the previous interrupt processing, and "24 (D)" is set as the external signal 5 management time in step S3246. If it is determined in S3242 that the door switch is on, the external signal 5 management time "24 (D)" is reset in step S3246. Then, the process advances to step S3247.

In step S3243, it is determined whether the output time of external signal 5 "50" ms has elapsed. Here, as described above, when the external signal 5 management time of the address "F015(H)" is "0", it is determined that the output time of the external signal 5 "50" ms has elapsed. When it is determined that the output time of the external signal 5 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3244, where the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 5), and the output time of the external signal 5 is If it is determined that the elapsed time has not elapsed, the process advances to step S3247 and the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating that it is on can be output as the external signal 5). Then, the processing according to each of the flowcharts ends.

As described above, in Example 1 of FIG. 91, whether the setting key switch is turned on from off, whether the error detection flag is turned on from off, and whether the error number is from "0" to anything other than "0" is determined. In each judgment as to whether or not the external signal 4 management time is set as "Yes", the external signal 4 management time is set for each interrupt processing, and thereafter, "1" is subtracted from the external signal 4 management time for each interrupt processing, and the external signal 4 management time is set to "0". ”, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4).
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 93, when the setting key switch is on, when the error detection flag is "1", and when an error number other than "0" is stored, the external signal 4 continues to be on (a signal indicating that it is on can be output as external signal 4). When the setting key switch is off, the error detection flag is "0", and "0" is stored as the error number, when the external signal 4 management time reaches "0", the external Turn off signal 4 (make it possible to output a signal indicating off as external signal 4).

In other words, the external signal 4 is turned on until "50" ms has passed since the setting key switch is off, the error detection flag is "0", and "0" is stored as the error number. (A signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). Therefore, for example, if an error is detected or the setting key switch is turned on for a moment (for example, just the "3" interrupt), the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off is set as the external signal 4). Even if the conditions (enabling output) are met, the external signal 4 can be turned on for at least 50 ms (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4).

In the external signal output processing (interrupt processing) shown in FIG. 93, after the timer value "24 (D)" is set for external signal 4 in step S3240, when the next interrupt processing is executed, The timer value is subtracted from "24(D)" to "23(D)". After that, in the external signal output process of the next interrupt process, if the conditions for turning on the external signal 4 (enabling output of a signal indicating on as the external signal 4) are met, the process advances to step S3240 and again, A timer value "24(D)" is set.

Thereafter, the timer value is subtracted for each interrupt process, but if the condition for turning on external signal 4 (enabling output of a signal indicating on as external signal 4) is no longer met, processing in step S3240 is performed. Since the timer does not pass through, the timer value eventually becomes "0 (D)". When the timer value becomes "0 (D)", it is determined as "Yes" in step S3235, so the process proceeds to step S3236 and turns off external signal 4 (outputs a signal indicating off as external signal 4). possible).

By doing this, the external signal 4 is turned on (turns on as the external signal 4) from when the conditions for turning on the external signal 4 (enabling the output of a signal indicating on as the external signal 4) are met. ). Then, as long as the conditions for turning on external signal 4 (enabling output of a signal indicating on as external signal 4) are met, turn on external signal 4 (outputting a signal indicating on as external signal 4). possible). Next, when the conditions for turning on external signal 4 (enabling output of a signal indicating that it is on as external signal 4) are no longer met, the timer value is set to "0 (D)" for each interrupt process. It is subtracted by "1 (D)". The external signal 4 is turned on until the timer value reaches "0 (D)" (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). Then, when the timer value becomes "0 (D)", the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4).

The above also applies to the external signal 5.
In the external signal output process (interrupt process) shown in FIG. 93, after the timer value "24 (D)" related to external signal 5 is set in step S3246, when the next interrupt process is executed, the timer value is "24(D)" is subtracted from "23(D)". After that, in the external signal output process of the next interrupt process, when the door switch is on (when the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (enabling output of a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5)) , the process advances to step S3246, and the timer value "24(D)" is set again.

After that, the timer value is subtracted for each interrupt processing, but the condition that the door switch is turned off (turns on external signal 5 (makes it possible to output a signal indicating on as external signal 5) is no longer met) ), the process of step S3246 is not passed through, so the timer value ultimately becomes "0(D)". When the timer value becomes "0 (D)", it is determined as "Yes" in step S3243, and the process proceeds to step S3244 to turn off external signal 5 (outputs a signal indicating off as external signal 5). possible).

By doing this, the external signal 5 is turned on from the time the door switch is turned on (the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (to be able to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5) is met). (A signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5). Then, as long as the conditions for turning on the external signal 5 (to output a signal indicating that it is on as the external signal 5) are met, turn on the external signal 5 (outputting a signal indicating that it is on as the external signal 5). possible). Next, when the conditions for turning on external signal 5 (enabling output of a signal indicating on as external signal 5) are no longer met, the timer value is set to "0 (D)" for each interrupt process. It is subtracted by "1". The external signal 5 is turned on until the timer value reaches "0 (D)" (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5). Then, when the timer value becomes "0 (D)", the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 5).
In example 2 of FIG. 93 above, there is no need to generate rising data and there is no need to check the level data etc. from the previous interrupt processing, so the external signal output processing can be simplified and the hall computer can It is possible to secure the time during which the signal indicating that signal 4 or 5 is on can be received.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing example 3 of external signal output processing. In FIG. 94, the steps that perform the same processing as those in FIG. 93 are given the same numbers, and the steps that perform different processing are underlined.
In example 3 of FIG. 94, when determining whether to output external signal 4, first, in step S3251, whether or not the external signal 4 management time of address "F014 (H)" is "0" is determined. to judge. If it is not "0", the process advances to step S3241 and the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). On the other hand, if the external signal 4 management time is "0" and the output conditions for the external signal 4 are satisfied in the judgments of steps S3231, S3234, S3233, and S3232, the process advances to step S3240 and the address "F014 (H )", the external signal 4 management time is set to "24 (D)", which corresponds to the output time "50" ms, and the process proceeds to step S3241. On the other hand, if it is determined in steps S3231, S3234, S3233, and S3232 that the output conditions for external signal 4 are not satisfied, the process advances to step S3236 and turns off external signal 4 (as external signal 4). (It is possible to output a signal indicating off).

Regarding the external signal 5, in the same way as above, when determining whether to output the external signal 5, first in step S3252, the external signal 5 management time of the address "F015 (H)" is set to "0". Determine whether it exists or not. If it is not "0", the process advances to step S3247 and the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 5). On the other hand, if the external signal 5 management time is "0" and it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is on, the process advances to step S3246, and the external signal 5 management time of the address "F015(H)" is is set to "24 (D)" corresponding to the output time of "50" ms, and the process advances to step S3247. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is not on, the process proceeds to step S3244 and turns off the external signal 5 (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 5).

In this way, in example 3 of FIG. 94, when the set timer value (external signal 4 management time or external signal 5 management time) is "0" and the output condition of external signal 4 or 5 is satisfied, the timer Set the value. Even if the set timer value reaches "0", the timer value is set again if the output condition of external signal 4 or 5 is satisfied.
Similarly to Example 2 in FIG. 93, the method of Example 3 in FIG. 94 also does not generate rising data and does not require checking the level data etc. from the previous interrupt processing, so external signal output processing is performed. It is possible to ensure the time during which the hall computer can receive a signal indicating that the external signal 4 or 5 is turned on, while simplifying the process.

Although the 18th embodiment has been described above, the 18th embodiment is not limited to the above-mentioned content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible for the 18th embodiment.
(1) When the setting key switch is on, when an error is detected, or when any of the error indications is satisfied, external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as external signal 4). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may turn on each individual external signal (for example, external signals 4, 6, and 7) (make it possible to output a signal indicating ON as external signals 4, 6, and 7). It's okay. Also, a specific external signal (for example, external signal 5 or 6) may be turned on when either or both of the setting key switch and the door switch are on. It may also be possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5 or 6).

(2) The various timer values of addresses "F013(H)" to "F015(H)" are decremented by "1" for each interrupt processing, but this is not limited to this, and "N (N≧2)" The value may be subtracted by "N" for every "N" interrupts, or "1" may be subtracted for every "N" interrupts. For example, after setting "12 (D)" as the external signal 4 management time or the external signal 5 management time, "1" may be subtracted every two interrupts.
(3) The various modifications and numerical values described in the 18th embodiment are merely examples, and can be designed as appropriate. For example, in FIG. 89, the times t1 and t2 have a minimum of "0" ms, so they can be set variously, such as "5" ms, "10" ms, etc.

In addition, in FIG. 89, time t3 ((a), (b), (c), and (e) in the figure) is a minimum of "50" ms, so for example, "75" ms or "100" ms. etc., various settings can be made.
In particular, at time t3 in FIGS. 89 and 90 ((a), (b), (c), and (e) in FIGS. 89 and 90), the hall computer etc. reliably receives external signals 4 and 5. The time may be as long as possible, and depending on the performance of the hall computer etc., it may be less than 50 ms.
Furthermore, the time t2 in FIG. 90 is not limited to "50" ms, and can be set in various ways according to specifications and the like.

(4) When the setting key switch was turned on from off, or when the setting key switch was on, external signal 4 was turned on (it was possible to output a signal indicating on as external signal 4), but the setting It may be configured such that the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) when the change mode or setting confirmation mode is entered.
Here, as in the 18th embodiment, when the setting key switch is turned on from off or when the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on is used as the external signal 4). When configured to enable output), even if the setting key switch is turned from off to on while the reel 31 is rotating, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on is output as the external signal 4). possible).
On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the external signal 4 is turned on when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is entered (a signal indicating that it is on can be output as the external signal 4), the reel Even if the setting key switch turns from off to on while the setting key switch is rotating, the external signal 4 is turned off based on the status of the setting key switch (it is possible to output a signal indicating off as the external signal 4) do). However, there may be cases where the external signal 4 is turned on based on an error (a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is on can be output).

(5) In the 18th embodiment, any one of the following: when the setting key switch is on, when an error is detected, when an error is being displayed, or when "300" ms have not elapsed since the power was turned on. When these two conditions were met, the external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating that it was on could be output as the external signal 4). However, it is not necessary to provide all of these conditions; the external signal 4 is turned on only under one or some conditions, for example, when the setting key switch is on (a signal indicating that it is on can be output as the external signal 4) ) may be configured. In other words, the configuration does not turn on the external signal 4 (does not enable output of a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4) even under other conditions, such as when 300 ms have not elapsed since the power was turned on. You can also use it as
(6) All embodiments and various modifications described in this specification, including the 18th embodiment, are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Nineteenth embodiment>
The nineteenth embodiment relates to a setting change completion sound.
The settings change end sound will be explained in the case where the gaming machine is a slot machine (19th embodiment (A)) and the case where the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine (19th embodiment (B)). do.
In addition, in the following explanation, "setting change state (also referred to as "setting change mode" or "setting change processing in progress")" is a state in which setting values can be changed and the game is started (proceeding). ) is in a gaming state where it cannot be played. Note that in the setting change state, it is also possible to end the process without changing the setting value.
Further, "setting confirmation state (also referred to as "setting confirmation mode" or "setting confirmation processing in progress")" is a state in which setting values cannot be changed but current setting values can be confirmed. In the settings confirmation state, the game cannot be started (proceeded) similarly to the settings change state.
On the other hand, "normal state (also referred to as "normal mode")" refers to a state other than the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. In the normal state, the game can be started (proceeded) except in special circumstances such as an error occurring.

<Nineteenth embodiment (A): When the gaming machine is a slot machine>
FIG. 95 is a block diagram schematically showing the control of the slot machine 10 in the nineteenth embodiment (A), and corresponds to FIG. 1 of the first embodiment.
95, a door switch 17, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, and a setting change (reset) switch 153 are provided as components not shown in FIG. Note that although the above configuration is not illustrated in FIG. 1, this does not mean that the above configuration is not provided in the first embodiment.
Note that the setting key insertion slot 151, the setting key switch 152, and the setting change (reset) switch 153 do not necessarily need to be provided on the main control board 50, and may be provided as separate devices.

The door switch 17 is attached to either the cabinet 13 or the front door 12 in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 22, the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 are normally closed, but the front door 12 is opened when changing settings or confirming settings. The door switch 17 is a switch that is turned on when the front door 12 is opened, and detects the opening of the front door 12. When the door switch 17 detects that the front door 12 is opened, a door open error is notified.
Further, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, and a setting change (reset) switch 153 are mounted on the main control board 50.
The setting key switch 152 is a switch that is turned on by inserting the setting key from the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise. This is the switch used.

Furthermore, the setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that serves as both a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch operated when changing a set value in a setting change state. The reset switch is a switch that is operated to restore the state before the error occurred after the error has been removed.
In the following description, it will be referred to as "setting change (reset) switch 153,""setting change switch 153," and "reset switch 153."
In this embodiment, the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 are provided integrally, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 may be provided separately.

When transitioning to the setting confirmation state, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151 with the power turned on and rotated, for example, 90 degrees clockwise. This turns on the setting key switch 152. When the door switch 17 is turned on while the power is turned on and the setting key switch 151 is turned on, the state shifts to a setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (even if the setting change switch 153 is operated, the setting value does not change), but the current setting value can be confirmed. The current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73. When the setting key is rotated counterclockwise and the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state is ended.

In addition, when the power is off, insert the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 151, rotate the setting key 90 degrees clockwise, turn on the setting key switch 152, and turn on the power switch 11. It becomes possible to shift to the setting change state (setting change processing in FIG. 39).

When the slot machine 10 is powered on as described above, a checksum is executed (step S204) as shown in FIG. Step S209) or when the setting change is possible (Step S210), it becomes possible to move to the setting change process (setting change state).

In the nineteenth embodiment, the "designated switch" in step S208 is two switches: the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152.
Alternatively, in addition to the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152, a setting door switch (a switch that is turned on when a cover provided to cover the setting key insertion slot 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 is opened) is used. If provided, there are three switches including a set door switch.
In the following description, it is assumed that no setting door switch is provided, and the designated switches are the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152.

Then, in step S208 in FIG. 38, only when the door switch 17 is on and the setting key switch 152 is on, a determination of "Yes" is made in step S208, and a transition to the setting change state is enabled. On the other hand, when only one of the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152 is on, or when both switches are off, the determination in step S208 is "No", and the setting is changed. will not migrate.
As a result, when the front door 12 is not opened or the setting key is not inserted, the setting change state will not be entered in a situation where there is a high possibility of tampering.

In addition, in FIG. 38, "starting the setting change state" is defined firstly when "Yes" is determined in step S209 or "No" is determined in step S210. . In this case, the "setting change state" also includes the processes in steps S221 to S233 in FIG. 39.
Or, secondly, in FIG. 39, when an output request at the time of starting a setting change is set in step S234 and control command set 1 is executed in step S235 (a command is sent to the sub-control board 80 to start a setting change). An example of this is to set "the start of the settings change state" to "when the settings change state is started".

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the period immediately before step S221 in FIG. 39 may be defined as the "start of the setting change state." Further, the period immediately after step S231 (at the end of initialization) may be defined as the "start of the setting change state." Furthermore, the time when the interrupt is activated in step S233, or immediately after step S233 (immediately before step S234) may be defined as the "start of the setting change state."

Furthermore, in FIG. 39, "the end of the setting change state" may be determined when the setting key switch 152 is turned off in step S243.
Or, secondly, in FIG. 39, when an output request at the time of ending the setting change is set in step S246 and control command set 1 is executed in step S247 (a command is sent to the sub-control board 80 to end the setting change). An example of this is to define "the end of the settings change state" when the
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time when "Yes" is determined in step S242 (when the start switch 41 is operated and the set value is determined) may be defined as "the end of the setting change state".

Furthermore, as will be described later, the setting change state may be terminated on the condition that the front door 12 is closed, in other words, on the condition that the door switch 17 is turned from on to off. In this case, even if the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state does not end while the front door 12 is open (when the door switch 17 is on).
Further, if the front door 12 is closed at the time when the setting key switch 152 is turned off (when the door switch 17 is off), the setting change state may not be ended. This is to prevent cheating.
In the following description, in the nineteenth embodiment (A), the time when "Yes" is determined in step S243 in FIG. ”.

In steps S246 and S247 in FIG. 39, when a command indicating that the setting change has been completed is sent to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 receives the command. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it outputs a setting change end sound and visually indicates the end of the setting change (output by the production lamp 21).
Here, in the present embodiment, the setting change end sound corresponds to outputting a sound from the speaker 22 saying "setting change is finished."

There are various ideas regarding the speed at which words (Japanese) can be spoken, but if you follow the idea that a speed of about 300 characters per minute is appropriate, then the message ``Finish changing settings.'' For example, "T01", which is the time from the start of audio output to the end of audio output, may be set to about "2000" ms.
FIG. 96 is a time chart showing the relationship between a setting change state, a setting change end sound, a lamp effect, and one game time, which will be described later, in the nineteenth embodiment.
When the sub-control board 80 receives a command indicating that the setting change has been completed, it immediately outputs a setting change completion sound. Here, in FIG. 39, if it is determined "Yes" in step S243, in the first interrupt processing (FIG. 53) after "Yes" is determined in step S243, the setting change is completed in step S464. command is sent.

Then, in the sub-control board 80, interrupt processing is executed independently on the sub-control board 80 side, and for each interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not a control command (a command indicating that the setting change has been completed) has been received. ing. When it is determined that a command indicating that the setting change has been completed is received, it starts outputting a setting change completion sound.
In order to go through the above process, at least one interrupt (referring to the interrupt by the main control board 50. The time for one interrupt is "2.235" ms.) from the time when "Yes" is determined in step S243 in FIG. Afterwards, the sub-control board 80 starts outputting the setting change end sound or starts outputting the setting change end sound. In other words, after the determination in step S243 in FIG. 39 is "Yes", the setting change end sound is not output until at least one interrupt has elapsed.

In FIG. 96, the timing at which the setting change state changes from on to off is when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, as described above. However, after the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the main control board 50 sends a command to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 receives the command, and starts outputting the setting change completion sound. Since the time is extremely short, in FIG. 96, the end timing of the setting change state and the output start timing of the setting change end sound are made to coincide.

In addition to the above-mentioned setting change end sound, as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, the effect lamp 21 is lit in a predetermined lighting mode ("lighting" is a concept that includes blinking. Also, "lighting mode") is a concept that includes lighting colors.) Executes lighting effects.
Here, when lighting the effect lamp 21, at least the lighting mode is not the same as when lighting the effect lamp 21 at the time of winning a special role (accessory object). For example, if it is determined that lamp A of the production lamps 21 is to be lit in lighting mode a as a production to indicate that the special role has been won, the production lamp 21 is set to be lit in lighting mode a to indicate that the setting change has been completed. In the case of lighting, a lamp other than lamp A may be turned on. In this case, as long as a lamp different from lamp A is lit, it may be lit in the same manner as the one used to indicate winning the special winning combination.

In addition, when lighting the effect lamp 21 as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, the lamp A may be turned on. However, the lighting mode in this case is different from the lighting mode when indicating winning the special winning combination.
As described above, when lighting the production lamp 21 to indicate that the setting change has been completed, it is necessary to confirm that the special award has been won (the special award has been won in the game, or The lighting mode is made to be different from the lighting mode of the performance lamp 21 in the performance to notify that the winning has been carried over. As a result, when the game is started immediately after finishing the setting change, even if the production lamp 21 is lit to indicate that the setting change has been finished, the player will not be able to win the special role. This can prevent confusion.

Further, it is preferable that the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is different from the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 21 indicating that the special winning combination has been won, so that the two do not get confused. In other words, the lighting pattern of the production lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is set to a lighting pattern that is not used for other productions, and when the lighting pattern is seen, it is a production that indicates the completion of the setting change. It is preferable to make it easy to understand.
Furthermore, for the production lamp 21, the lighting pattern indicating that the setting change has been completed is made the same as the lighting pattern indicating that the special role has been won, and for other lamps other than the production lamp 21, the setting change is made. The lighting pattern indicating that the game has ended and the lighting pattern indicating that the special winning combination has been won may be different.
Specifically, for example, to indicate that the setting change has been completed, the production lamp 21 and the other lamps are all lit up, and to notify that the special prize has been won, the production lamp 21 is turned on. One example is to turn on the lamp, but not to turn on the other lamps. In this way, by checking the lighting pattern of the production lamp 21 and the other lamps (lamps of the gaming machine in general), the administrator can grasp the state.

Furthermore, when lighting the effect lamp 21 as an effect to indicate that the setting change has been completed, as a general rule, it is possible to output the setting change end sound at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started before outputting the setting change end sound. Alternatively, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is started but before the output of the setting change end sound is ended. Furthermore, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is finished.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 96, in the following embodiment, the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is turned on at the same time as the output of the setting change end sound is started.
Also, if the lighting time of the production lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is set to "T02",
T01>T02
T01=T02
T01<T02
However, as shown in FIG. 96, in this embodiment, it is assumed that "T01<T02". For example, when the time T01 is set to approximately "2000" ms as described above, the time T02 may be set to, for example, approximately "2500" ms to approximately "4000" ms.

Next, a case will be considered in which the setting change state is ended, the state is shifted to the normal state (a state in which the game can be started), and the game is immediately started.
In the following, as shown in FIG. 96, the time required from the moment the setting change state ends until the game starts (until the game start conditions are met) (preparation time until the game starts) is referred to as "T11". do. Further, the time (one game time) from the start of the game to the end of the game (after the game start conditions are met) is defined as "T12".
In the setting change state, as shown in FIG. 39, the data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared, so even if there is bet data and credit data, for example, before the start of the setting change, these are also cleared. . Therefore, immediately after the setting change state ends, the number of bets is "0" and the number of credits is also "0". Therefore, after the setting change state ends, as shown in FIG. 2, it is necessary to insert the medals M from the medal slot 47 and bet the specified number before starting the game.

Here, in the normal game (when the accessory is not activated), the number of bets "3" is the generally used regulation number, but in the 19th embodiment (A), the minimum bet number "1" is the regulation number. , it is assumed that the game can be started with the number of bets "1". Note that when the prescribed number is "1", the game can be started earlier than when the prescribed number is "2" or "3".
In FIG. 2, when the medal M is at position M1 and is released into the medal selector, it passes through the passage in the medal selector and reaches the input sensors 44a and 44b, as described in the first embodiment. Detected. When the input sensors 44a and 44b determine that the medal has passed normally, a bet of "1" is placed.

In FIG. 2, the time from when medals M are inserted from position M1 until they are detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b and when the prescribed number is bet corresponds to the preparation time "T11" for starting the game. The preparation time "T11" in this case does not take into account the operation time for closing the front door 12 or canceling the door open error.)
Here, when the specified number is "1", it is necessary to insert one medal, when the specified number is "2", it is necessary to insert two medals, and when the specified number is "3", it is necessary to insert one medal. Requires the insertion of 3 medals. In Figure 2, the time from the state of medal M1 until one medal is inserted and a "1" bet is made is "T11a", and the time from the state of medal M1 until a "2" bet is made after two medals are inserted. Let's say "T11b" and the time from when 3 medals are inserted until a "3" bet is made is "T11c".
T11a<T11b<T11c
becomes.
However, since it is possible to insert two or three medals in succession, T11b (when the specified number is "2") is shorter than twice the time of T11a (when the specified number is "1"). It is believed that there is. Similarly, T11c (when the specified number is "3") is considered to be shorter than three times the time T11a (when the specified number is "1").

When a prescribed number of bets is placed, the game can be started by operating the start switch 41, so in this embodiment, it is assumed that the start switch 41 is operated at the moment when "1" is bet. Therefore, the time from when the specified number of bets is placed until the start switch 41 is operated is set to "0".
In FIG. 41, when the start switch 41 is operated ("Yes" in step S278), rotation of the reel 31 is started in step S286.
Here, the motor 32 accelerates the reel 31 to reach a speed of 80 rotations per minute. When a speed of 80 revolutions per minute is reached, a constant speed state is maintained at that speed. Operation of the stop switch 42 is prohibited until the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state, and after the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state, operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted.
The time from when the start switch 41 is operated (after the reels 31 start rotating) until the stop switch 42 can be operated is defined as "T12a".

Next, it is assumed that the first stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when it becomes possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42. In other words, the time from the moment when it becomes possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42 until the first stop switch 42 is operated is set to "0".
When the stop switch 42 is operated, as shown in FIG. Before the process ends, it may be possible to accept the next operation of the stop switch 42 (this example will be described later). Let the total time of these be "T12b".
When the four-phase excitation state ends, the next (second) stop switch 42 can be operated. Here, it is assumed that the second stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 to be stopped first ends and the next stop switch 42 can be operated. In other words, the time from when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that stops first ends until the second stop switch 42 is operated is set to "0".

When the second stop switch 42 is operated, the operation of the third stop switch 42 can be accepted after the time "T12b" which is the reel stop control time and the four-phase excitation state time has elapsed, as described above. becomes. Here, it is assumed that the third stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the four-phase excitation state of the second motor 32 ends and the next operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted. In other words, the time from when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that stops second ends until the third stop switch 42 is operated is set to "0".
When the third stop switch 42 is operated, the time "T12b" which is the reel stop control time and the time of the four-phase excitation state is required, similarly to the above.

Note that the moment when the last reel 31 stops may be defined as the end of one game, but in the nineteenth embodiment (A), when the time of the four-phase excitation state for the last reel 31 ends, It is determined that one game has been completed (if there is no payout).
Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to any combination in the game stops, the game is determined to have ended when the payout process ends, specifically, when the process in FIG. 49 ends.
Note that when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 42, automatic bet processing is executed at the start of the next game. Therefore, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the end of the game is determined not as the end of automatic bet processing but as the end of the four-phase excitation state for the third reel 31.

For example, firstly, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and the process of adding to the credits is executed, the end of the process of adding to the credits is determined as the end of the game.
Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination has stopped and the actual medal payout process has been executed, the payout of the last medal (drive of the hopper 36) is finished, and "Yes" in step S401 in FIG. '' (when it is determined that the payout number data is ``0'') is determined as the end of the game. However, immediately after the setting change ends, the number of credits is "0", and even if you start playing immediately after the setting change state ends and you win a small role with a maximum payout number of "15", All medals paid out will be credited. Therefore, medals are never actually paid out in one game immediately after the setting change ends.
The time period from when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and the 4-phase excitation state of the motor 32 for the third reel 31 is finished to when the payout of medals (addition to credits) is finished is "T12c". shall be.
However, when the winning combination is not won (when no medals are paid out), "T12c=0".

Further, when a performance (such as a performance announcing a winning combination) is output when all the reels 31 are stopped, the performance time is not included in one game time. For example, even if a performance is output for several seconds after all reels 31 stop, when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends when the last reel 31 stops (at that point, all reels 31 stop), (Even if the performance that started output at the time is continued), one game is assumed to end. That is, the end of one game is based on the control by the main control board 50.

As described above, when the player performs the operation to start the game immediately after the end of the setting change state and starts the game, the preparation time "T11" is required until the game starts.
Furthermore, one gaming time "T12" is, as mentioned above,
(1) Time “T12a” from when the start switch 41 is operated (after the reel 31 starts rotating) until the stop switch 42 can be operated
(2) Time from when the first stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops and the time in the four-phase excitation state "T12b"
(3) Time from when the second stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops and the time in the four-phase excitation state "T12b"
(4) Time from when the third stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops and the time in the four-phase excitation state "T12b"
(5) “T12c” is the time required to complete the payout of medals (addition to credits) when winning a small prize.
It takes.
Therefore,
T12=T12a+3×T12b+T12c
becomes.
Note that it is assumed that the three "T12b" times are the same.

Further, when the start switch 41 is operated, a winning combination is drawn (step S282 in FIG. 41), and if a special winning role (accessory item) is won in this drawing, a freeze (also called "freeze effect") is performed. .) may be chosen.
"Freeze" in this case refers to a state in which the progress of the game is stopped for a certain period of time. Therefore, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated, a winning combination is drawn, a special winning combination is won, and it is decided to perform a freeze as an effect corresponding to winning the special winning combination, the reels 31 start rotating. do not. After the freeze ends, the reels 31 start rotating. Note that when the progress of the game is stopped due to freeze, the sub-control means 80 outputs an effect using the image display device 23 or the like.
If the freeze time in this case is "T12d", one game time "T12" when the freeze is executed is "T12a+T12b×3+T12c+T12d".

Next, the shortest time for one game time "T12" will be considered. In order for one game time to become the shortest time, freezing will not be executed and no winning combination will be won.
Therefore, the shortest time for one game time "T12" is "T12a+3×T12b".
First, the specified number is set to "1", and the time from when the medal M is inserted (dropped) into the medal selector from the position M1 in FIG. 2 until the bet is placed (the time required to start the game) It is assumed that "T11" is approximately "800" ms at the shortest.
Further, it is assumed that the time "T12a" from when the start switch 41 is operated until the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and when the operation of the stop switch 42 is permitted is approximately 1200 ms.

Furthermore, the time "T12b" from when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is controlled to stop and the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends (the next operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted) is as follows. As shown in FIG. 13, the shortest time is approximately 140 ms (the reel stop control time is approximately 40 ms at the shortest, and the four-phase excitation state is approximately 100 ms at the shortest). Assume that
In this case, "T11+T12" which is the time required to start one game and one game time (minimum time) is "800 (T11) + 1200 (T12a) + 140 x 3 (T12b x 3)" = "2420" ms It will be about.
When medals are paid out after all reels 31 have stopped, or when a freeze is executed when the start switch 41 is operated, one game time "T12" is longer than the above-mentioned time.

On the other hand, as described above, when the setting change state is finished, the setting change end sound is output for a time of "T01" (approximately 2000 ms), and the effect lamp 21 is activated to notify the end of the setting change. The lighting is output for a time "T02" (for example, about "2500" to "4000" ms).
Therefore, when a game is started immediately after the setting change state ends, the setting change end sound "T01" that is output immediately after the setting change state ends, the preparation time "T11" for starting the game, and one game. The relationship with time “T12 (minimum time)” is
T01<T11+T12
becomes.
As a result, even if you perform an operation (preparation) to start a game from the moment you finish the setting change state and start a game at the moment when you are ready to start the game, the game will end. This means that the output of the setting change completion sound has already been completed.
FIG. 96 shows the relationship between the above times "T01", "T11", and "T12".

Here, in the above example, after the stop switch 42 is operated and the four-phase excitation state ends, the next operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the stop switch 42 is operated, it may be possible to accept the next operation of the stop switch 42 before ending the four-phase excitation state. By controlling in this manner, the game can be completed more quickly. For example, after the stop switch 42 is operated (the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted), the next operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted during the next interrupt process.
In this case, of the above-mentioned "T12b" time, the time of the four-phase excitation state can be considered to be approximately "0", so "T12b (minimum time) = 40 (ms)".
Therefore, "T11+T12", which is the time required to start one game and one game time (minimum time) in this case, is "800 (T11) + 1200 (T12a) + 40 x 3 (T12b x 3)" = "2120 ” ms.
Therefore, even when controlled in this way, "T01<T11+T12" is satisfied.

In addition, the performance timing of the slot machine 10 is when the start switch 41 is operated (when the reels 31 start rotating), when the first stop switch 42 is operated (when the first reel 31 is stopped), and when the second stop switch 42 is operated (when the first reel 31 is stopped). When the second reel 31 is stopped) and when the third stop switch 42 is operated (when all reels 31 are stopped), an effect that finally announces the winning combination of the game (the most important effect for the game) is output. This is often done when all the reels 31 are stopped.
Therefore, when all reels 31 are stopped, when outputting an effect announcing the winning combination of the game, the effect will be output after the setting change end sound is output, so when all reels 31 are stopped, The effect and the setting change completion sound do not overlap (do not overlap). Therefore, even if the game is started immediately after the setting change state is finished, the effect when all the reels 31 are stopped can be accurately understood.

However, if there is an effect to be output when the start switch 41 or the first or second stop switch 42 is operated, the output timing of the effect and the output timing of the setting change end sound may overlap.
Here, the speaker 22 of this embodiment includes a plurality of channels. The channel for outputting the setting change end sound is set to be different from the channel for outputting the winning combination notification effect. As a result, even if the winning combination notification effect is output from the speaker 22 after the output of the setting change end sound has started, the setting change end sound will not be deleted midway. However, it is possible that the setting change completion sound and the winning role announcement sound may overlap.

In addition, the lighting time T02 of the production lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is as follows.
T02<T11+T12
T02=T11+T12
T02>T11+T12
Both cases are possible. However, as described above, if the lighting of the performance lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is not confused with the lighting of the performance lamp 21 as an announcement performance of the winning combination, no problem will arise.

In addition, the preparation time "T11" before starting the game is the time to close the front door 12 after finishing the setting change state and eliminate the door open error (an error indicating that the front door 12 is open). It does not take into account the time required to do so.
When the setting change state is finished, at least the front door 12 should be in the open state. Therefore, even if the setting change state is ended, the slot machine 10 side detects a door open error and issues an error notification. It is not possible to proceed (start) the game when a door open error occurs. When a door open error occurs, the blocker 45 is controlled to be off (a state in which medals are returned), so even if medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, no bet is made. Even if a bet is placed, the game will not start even if the start switch 41 is operated.

To cancel the door open error, close the front door 12 and turn off the door switch 17. Although it is possible to configure the door open error to be resolved the moment the door switch 17 is turned off, generally the key is inserted into a key insertion slot provided in the front door 12 for opening the front door 12. By inserting the key and rotating the key in the opposite direction (for example, counterclockwise) to open the front door 12, the door open error is resolved (the error notification is terminated). Therefore, the preparation time "T11" for starting the game after the end of the setting change state includes the operation time for closing the front door 12, inserting the key, and canceling the door open error. This is because the game cannot be started even if the door open error has occurred.

Note that when ending the setting change state on the condition that the setting key switch 152 is turned off, it is possible to end the setting change state even if the front door 12 is open. Therefore, in this case, the output of the setting change end sound is started with the front door 12 open, and the lighting of the production lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is also started.

On the other hand, it is also possible to adopt a specification in which the setting change state does not end unless the front door 12 is closed. In this case, simply turning off the setting key switch 152 does not end the setting change state, but closing the front door 12 (turning off the door switch 17) is set as one of the conditions for ending the setting change state. Note that the setting change state may be ended simply by closing the front door 12. In this case, when the front door 12 is closed (when the door switch 17 is turned off), output of the setting change completion sound is started. Alternatively, the setting change state may end when the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is canceled. In this case, when the door open error is cleared, the output of the setting change completion sound is started.

Even if the setting change state ends when the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is canceled, as described above, the time from the end of the setting change to the end of one game is "T11 + T12". Since the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound is shorter than "T01", the output of the setting change end sound ends before one game ends immediately after the setting change ends.
Furthermore, if the setting key switch 152 is turned off, even if the front door 12 is open, if the setting change state is to be ended, the output of the setting change end sound is started while the front door 12 is open. Therefore, even if you close the front door 12 afterwards, cancel the door open error, and end one game after the time "T11+T12", the output of the setting change end sound will end before the end of the game. .
Furthermore, if the (operation) time from the end of the settings change state to the time when the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is canceled is "T10", the time from the end of the settings change state until the start of one game is The preparation time is "T10+T11". Therefore, it goes without saying that "T01<T10+T11+T12".

The above is a case where the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound is set to be shorter than the time "T11+T12" from the end of the setting change state to the end of one game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The relationship between the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound and the time "T11+T12" from the end of the setting change state to the end of one game can be set in various ways as follows.
(1) Set the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound to be shorter than the average time "T11+T12" when the winning combination result is non-winning.
(2) Set the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound to be shorter than the average time "T11+T12" when a special winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery result. In addition, when a special winning combination is won in the winning lottery result, the above-mentioned freeze may or may not be executed, so the average time thereof is "T12". For example, when winning a special prize, if a freeze is executed with a probability of ``p''%, and a freeze is not executed with a probability of ``100-p''%, the average value of 1 gaming time ``T12'' is:
"Average one game time without freeze T12 x (100-p)/100" + "Average one game time with freeze T12 x p/100"
becomes.

<Nineteenth embodiment (B): When the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine>
Next, the relationship between the setting change state, setting change end sound, and one game time in the Pachinko gaming machine will be explained.
First, an overview of Pachinko gaming machines will be explained.
FIG. 97 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 viewed from the front side (player side). Further, FIG. 98 is an external perspective view of the Pachinko gaming machine 500 viewed from the back side. In addition, in FIG. 98, illustration of the unit including the image display device 543 and the game board 504 is omitted, and the glass door 505 is shown so as to be visible from the back side. Further, in FIG. 98, illustrations of board cases other than the main board case 550 are appropriately omitted.
Furthermore, FIG. 99 is a block diagram of the Pachinko gaming machine 500.

In a hall, the pachinko gaming machine 500 is generally installed on an island. The pachinko gaming machine 500 first includes an outer frame 501 and a front frame 502. The outer frame 501 is a frame body formed so as to surround the outer periphery of the Pachinko gaming machine 500. Further, the front frame 502 is attached to the front side (player side) of the outer frame 501 in FIG. 97. The front frame 502 is attached to the outer frame 501 so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 501 by a hinge mechanism 503 provided at the upper left end of the outer frame 501 in FIG. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine 500 is installed on an island, the outer frame 501 is fixed to the island, but the front frame 502 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 501, and the back side of the front frame 502 It becomes accessible.

The front frame 502 is provided with a game board 504. Although not shown, the game board 504 is provided with an image display device 543, nails, accessories, a windmill, various prize openings (including a starting opening 532 to be described later), and the like. Further, the portion of the front frame 502 other than the game board 504 is provided with a presentation lamp 541, a speaker 542, an upper plate 506, a lower plate 507, a firing handle 508, and the like.

A key insertion slot 521 is formed on the right side edge of the front frame 502 in FIG. 97 .
When the front frame 502 is closed to the outer frame 501 (the state shown in FIG. 97), by inserting the key from the key insertion slot 521 and performing an unlocking operation between the outer frame 501 and the front frame 502. , the front frame 502 can be opened forward (towards the player) with respect to the outer frame 501 about the hinge mechanism 503 as a central axis. When the front frame 502 is opened to the outer frame 501, the game board 504, glass door 505, production lamp 541, speaker 542, upper plate 506, lower plate 507, and firing handle attached to the front frame 502 side The entire body including 508 moves forward with respect to the outer frame 501.
When the front frame 502 is opened, a frame opening switch 523, which will be described later, is turned on. When the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, a frame opening error is notified.

The glass door 505 is attached to the front surface of the game board 504 so as to be openable and closable so as to cover the game area. For example, this is to solve the problem when game balls become clogged in the game area. By inserting a key into the key insertion slot 521 and performing an unlocking operation on the glass door 505, the lock between the glass door 505 and the game board 504 is released, and the glass door 505 can be opened. When the glass door 505 is opened, a door opening switch 522, which will be described later, is turned on. When the door opening switch 522 is turned on, it is configured to notify a door opening error.

In the block diagram of FIG. 99, the pachinko gaming machine 500 includes a main control board (main board, main control board) 530, which corresponds to the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10, and a sub-control board, which corresponds to the sub-control board 80 of the slot machine 10. A control board (effect control board, effect board) 540 is provided.
The main control board 530, the payout control board 520, and the sub-control board 540 each include a CPU, RWM, ROM, etc., similarly to the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 of the slot machine 10. In FIG. 99, illustration of the CPU, RWM, ROM, etc. is omitted.

Based on turning on the power switch 511, the power supply board 510 controls the supply of power.
The power supply board 510 and the payout control board (also referred to as "prize ball control board") 520 are connected to a harness (consisting of one or more lead wires (also referred to as "signal wires")). . It is assumed that the boards shown in FIG. 99 are all connected by harnesses. Although the relay board is not shown in FIG. 99, in reality, each board shown in FIG. 99 may be connected directly or via a relay board. There is.
A firing board 512 is connected to the power supply board 510. The launch board 512 is a board for driving and controlling the launch device 513. The firing device 513 is a device that launches a game ball onto the game board 504 (game area). When the firing handle 508 is operated, the operation is detected and the firing device 513 is driven and controlled to launch the game ball into the game area.

A payout control board 520 is connected to the power supply board 510. A payout device 524 is connected to this payout control board 520. The payout device 524 is a device that lends game balls corresponding to the requested number when there is a request for ball lending from the CR unit, and also pays out prize balls corresponding to the winnings when the game balls win. be. The payout control board 520 and the CR unit are connected via an external terminal board 525.

A door opening switch 522 and a frame opening switch 523 are electrically connected to the payout control board 520. Note that the door opening switch 522 and the frame opening switch 523 may be connected to the main control board 530.
As described above, when the glass door 505 is opened, the door open switch 522 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530. When the main control board 530 detects that the door open switch 522 is turned on, the sub control board 540 issues a notification of a door open error, for example.
Furthermore, when the front frame 502 is opened, the frame release switch 523 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530. When the main control board 530 detects that the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, the sub control board 540 issues a notification of a frame opening error, for example.

A starting port switch 533 is connected to the main control board 530 for detecting a win to a starting port 532, which is one of the winning ports provided in the gaming area of the game board 504. When a game ball enters the starting hole 532 and the main control board 530 detects that the starting hole switch 533 is turned on, a random value is obtained as described later and a judgment of success or failure is executed (lottery process). Then, based on the result of the validity judgment, the variation time and stop symbols of the special symbols of the special symbol display device 531 are determined, and the variation pattern and the stop symbols of the special symbol display device 531 are controlled to correspond to the determined results.

In addition, on the game board 504, there are general winning holes and big winning holes (winning holes that become jackpots and are opened during special games) as winning holes other than the starting hole 532. The explanation will be omitted in the nineteenth embodiment (B).
Further, the special symbol display device 531 is provided on the game board 504, and is a device that displays the result of the judgment based on the turning on of the starting port switch 533 using a special symbol. In other words, the "special symbol" is a symbol that displays whether the result of the determination is a win or a non-win, depending on the stopped symbol after variation. The special symbol display device 531 is composed of, for example, a 7 segment display.
In addition, the flow from the start of variation of the special symbol to the stop will be described later.

The main control board 530 is provided with a setting key switch 535 having a setting key insertion slot 534 and a setting change (reset) switch 536. Note that the setting key insertion slot 534, the setting key switch 535, and the setting change (reset) switch 536 do not necessarily need to be provided on the main control board 530, and may be provided as separate devices.
The setting key switch 535 is a switch into which a predetermined setting key is inserted through the setting key insertion slot 534, and is turned on by rotating the key 90 degrees clockwise, for example.

The setting change (reset) switch 536 is a switch that serves as both a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch operated when changing a setting value during a setting change state. The reset switch is a switch that is operated to restore the state before the error occurred after the error has been removed. In the following description, it will be referred to as "setting change (reset) switch 536,""setting change switch 536," and "reset switch 536."
In this embodiment, the setting change switch 536 and the reset switch 536 are provided integrally, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting change switch 536 and the reset switch 536 may be provided separately.
In the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the power is off, insert the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 534, turn the setting key to turn on the setting key switch 535, and turn on the reset switch 536. By turning on the power switch 511, it is possible to shift to a setting change state.

When the setting change state is entered, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 537. The set value display LED 537 is the same as the set value display LED 73 in the slot machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, and is composed of, for example, a 7-segment display.
Then, when changing the setting value, the setting change switch 536 is operated. Each time the setting change switch 536 is operated (pressed), the setting value is incremented by 1. For example, when the setting value is in 6 levels, each time the setting change switch 536 is pressed, the setting value increases from 1 to 2.・The set value changes cyclically as follows: → "5" → "6" → "1" →... Then, when the setting key is turned counterclockwise, for example, and the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the setting value is determined and the setting change state ends. When the setting change state is completed, the setting value displayed on the setting value display LED 537 also goes out.

In addition, when the power is off, insert the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 534, rotate the setting key, turn on the power switch 511 while the reset switch 536 is off, and it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation state. Become. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 537. Then, when the setting key is turned to turn off the setting key switch 535, the setting confirmation state ends. When the setting confirmation state ends, the setting value displayed on the setting value display LED 537 also goes out.
Note that, unlike the slot machine 10, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, even if the setting key switch 535 is turned on after the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 500 does not shift to the setting confirmation state and the setting value is not displayed.

The management information display LED 538 corresponds to the management information display LED (winning ratio monitor) 74 in the slot machine 10, and in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, it is called a performance display monitor as described above. The management information display LED 538 is composed of four 7-segment segments similarly to the management information display LED 74.

The sub-control board 540 is connected to the main control board 530, and is a board for determining the presentation content based on commands sent from the main control board 530, and for controlling the output of the determined presentation. Although FIG. 99 shows one sub-control board 540, in reality, the sub-control board 540 is divided into a sub-main board (a board for controlling the entire performance) and a sub-sub board (for example, an image display board). (a board for controlling the image display of the device 23);

Similar to the slot machine 10, the performance peripheral equipment includes a performance lamp 541, a speaker 542, and an image (liquid crystal) display device 543, and their outputs are controlled by a sub-control board 540.
As shown in FIG. 97, at least a portion of the presentation lamp 541 is attached to cover the outer peripheral edge of the front frame 502. Further, the speaker 542 is attached to the upper side of the front frame 502. Furthermore, the image display device 543 is installed so that an image is displayed approximately in the center of the game area of the game board 504.

Next, control processing of the Pachinko gaming machine 500 will be explained.
FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating the process of starting up the pachinko gaming machine 500 after it is powered on.
When the power switch 511 is turned on and the power is turned on, in step S701, the main control board (specifically, corresponding to the main CPU) 530 determines whether the conditions for transition to the setting change state are satisfied. to judge. In this embodiment, the conditions for transition to the setting change state are set such that the frame release switch 523 is on, the setting change key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is on. If it is determined that all of these conditions are satisfied, the process advances to step S702, and if it is determined that all three switches are not on, the process advances to step S703. In step S702, the process moves to setting change processing (setting change state). Then, when the setting change processing is completed, the process advances to step S709.

In step S703, the main control board 530 determines whether the conditions for transition to the setting confirmation state are satisfied. In this embodiment, the conditions for transition to the setting confirmation state are set such that the frame release switch 523 is on, the setting change key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is off. When it is determined that these conditions are met, the process advances to step S704, and when it is determined that these conditions are not satisfied, the process advances to step S706.

Proceeding to step S704, a setting confirmation state is entered, and the main control board 530 reads the setting value data stored in the RWM and displays the current setting value on the setting value display LED 537. Next, the process advances to step S705, and it is determined whether the setting key switch 535 is turned off. When it is determined that the setting key switch 535 is turned off, it is determined that the conditions for ending the setting confirmation state are satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S710. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key switch 535 is not off, the process returns to step S704 and the setting confirmation state (display of setting values) is continued.

When the determination in step S703 is "No" and the process proceeds to step S706, the main control board 530 determines whether the reset switch 536 is on. When it is determined that the reset switch 536 is on, the process advances to step S709, and when it is determined that the reset switch 536 is not on, the process advances to step S707.
In step S707, it is determined whether the RWM of the main control board 530 is normal. When the power is turned off, the information at the time of power-off is stored in the RWM of the main control board 530, and the next time the power is turned on, it is determined whether the information at the time of power-on matches the information at the time of power-off. do. When they match, it is determined that the RWM is normal, and when they do not match, it is determined that the RWM is abnormal. When it is determined that the RWM is normal, the process advances to step S708, and when it is determined that the RWM is not normal, the process advances to step S709.
In step S708, state recovery processing is executed. This process is a process for restoring the solenoid state, the state of the special symbol display device 531, etc. to the state when the power was turned off. Then, the process advances to step S710.

When the setting change process (setting change state) in step S702 is finished, when it is determined that the reset switch 536 is on in step S706, or when it is determined that RWM is not normal in step S707, the process proceeds to step S709. Then, the RWM clearing process is executed. This process is a process for clearing data stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM (a process for initializing the predetermined storage area). Note that the data to be cleared does not include setting value data. Then, the process advances to step S710.

In step S710, timer interrupts are enabled. This process is a process for enabling interrupt processing. Therefore, after interrupt processing is permitted in step S710, when the interrupt processing timing arrives, the interrupt processing is executed.
In the next step S711, random number update processing (random number counter increment processing) is executed. This random number is used for various lotteries (selection of stop symbols, selection of effects, etc.).

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the setting change process in step S702 of FIG. In this embodiment, the time when the process of step S721 is started is the start time of the setting change process (setting change state).
In step S721, the main control board (main CPU) 530 reads the set value written in the RWM and determines whether the set value is within a normal range. In this embodiment, the values stored in the RWM corresponding to the setting values "1" to "6" are "0" to "5".

For example, if the value stored in RWM is "0", the set value is "1". Therefore, in step S722, it is determined whether the value stored in the RWM is within the range of "0" to "5", and when it is determined that it is within the range, the process proceeds to step S724. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value stored in the RWM is not within the range of "0" to "5", "0" is stored in the RWM. When the value of RWM is "0", the set value is "1". The setting value "1" becomes a basic setting value as described later. Then, the process advances to step S724.

In step S724, the main control board 530 displays the setting value corresponding to the value stored in the RWM on the setting value display LED 537. For example, when the RWM value is "0", "1" is displayed on the set value display LED 537.
Next, the process advances to step S725, and the main control board 530 determines whether the setting change switch 536 has been operated. When it is determined that the setting change switch 536 has been operated, the process advances to step S726, and when it is determined that the setting change switch 536 has not been operated, the process advances to step S729. In step S726, "1" is added to the set value. For example, if the set value display LED 537 had previously displayed "1", the display is updated from "1" to "2" through the process of step S726, and the set value data stored in the RWM is changed to "0". ” to “1”. In the example of FIG. 101, when the setting value "6" is displayed in step S724, if it is determined in step S725 that the setting change switch 536 has been operated, the process skips step S726 and proceeds to step S727. shall be held.

In step S727, it is determined whether the set value exceeds the upper limit. For example, if the set value "6" is displayed in step S724 and it is determined in step S725 that the setting change switch 535 has been operated, it is determined in step S727 that the upper limit value has been exceeded. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting change switch 536 has been operated in step S725 when the set value "1" to "5" is displayed in step S724, it is determined that the upper limit of the set value has been exceeded in step S727. is not judged.
If it is determined in step S727 that the upper limit of the set value has been exceeded, the process advances to step S728, and if it is determined that the upper limit has not been exceeded, the process advances to step S729.

In step S728, basic setting values are set. That is, "0" is stored as RWM setting value data, and "1" is displayed on the setting value display LED 537. Then, the process advances to step S729.
In step S729, the main control board 530 determines whether the conditions for terminating the setting change process (setting change state) are satisfied. In this embodiment, when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, it is determined that the conditions for terminating the setting change processing are satisfied. Therefore, in step S729, the main control board 530 determines whether the setting key switch 535 is on, and when determining that the setting key switch 535 is on, returns to step S724, and determines that the setting key switch 535 is off. If so, the process advances to step S730.

In step S730, the setting value display of the setting value display LED 537 is hidden.
Next, the process advances to step S731, and the main control board 530 sends a setting change end command to the sub control board 540. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
When the sub-control board 540 receives the setting change end command, it outputs a setting change end sound from the speaker 542 and executes a process of lighting the production lamp 541 to indicate that the setting change has ended.

The timing at which the setting change state in the pachinko gaming machine 500 ends is as follows.
(1) When "Yes" is determined in step S729 (when it is detected that the setting key switch 535 is turned off).
(2) When the setting value display by the setting value display LED 537 is hidden in step S730.
(3) When a setting change end command is sent in step S731.
However, in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the end timing of the setting change state is "when it is detected that the setting key switch 535 is turned off" in (1) above. It is determined that
Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the above (2) and (3) may be determined as the end timing of the setting change state.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the flow of one game in the pachinko gaming machine 500.
In the pachinko game 500, the start timing of one game may be one of the following.
(1) When a game ball is fired by the firing device 513 toward the game area of the game board 504. In this case, one game will start even if the game ball has not arrived within the game area.
(2) When the game ball is fired by the firing device 513 toward the game area of the game board 504 and the game ball enters the game area. Although not shown in FIG. 97, a rail is provided in the range from the lower side of the gaming area to the left side to the upper left for guiding the gaming ball fired by the firing device 513 into the gaming area. ing. The moment the game ball comes off the rail (the moment the game ball enters the game area) is defined as the start time of one game.

(3) When the game ball enters the starting hole 532 provided in the game area. Or, when the game ball enters the starting port 532 provided in the gaming area and the starting port switch 533 is turned on.
As described above, there are various possible starting points for starting one game in the pachinko gaming machine 500, but in this embodiment, in the case of (3) above, "the game ball is placed in the starting hole 532". The start timing of one game is set as "when the game enters".
Further, the timing at which one game ends is when the fluctuation of the special symbol display device 531 is completed and the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

In step S741, the main control board (main CPU) 530 continues to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the starting port 532, that is, whether the starting port switch 533 has been turned on. When it is determined that the starting port switch 533 is turned on, the process advances to step S742.
In step S742, various lottery processes are executed at the timing when the starting port switch 533 is turned on. A random number value is extracted at the timing when the starting port switch 533 is turned on, and based on the extracted random number value, a jackpot lottery (judgment as to whether it is a jackpot or a miss), a special symbol lottery (stop symbols of special symbols) (a lottery to determine which symbol to use) and a variable pattern lottery (a lottery to determine the varying time of the special symbol).

In the next step S743, a prize ball process (prize ball payout process) based on the winning into the starting hole 532 is executed. Here, the payout control board 520 drives and controls the payout device 524 to pay out a predetermined number of game balls.
Note that among the various lottery processes executed in step S742, at least some lottery results including variable time are transmitted to the sub-control board 540. When the sub-control board 540 receives the lottery result of the current game, it controls the production lamp 541, the speaker 542, and the image display device 543 so as to correspond to the lottery result.

Next, the process proceeds to step S744, and the main control board 530 starts changing the special symbol by the special symbol display device 531 based on the lottery result in step S742. In addition, the special symbol display device 531 can change the special symbol on the condition that the previous special symbol has finished changing at that point, and if the special symbol is in the process of changing, the next special symbol will change. The variation is suspended, and after the variation of the currently varying special symbol is completed, the variation of the next special symbol is started.

Further, in step S745, the sub-control board 540 causes the image display device 543 to change the decorative pattern. The variation of the decorative symbols corresponds to a part of the performance in this game.
Here, the device that directly shows the result of the jackpot lottery in step S742 is the special symbol display device 531, and the stop symbols after the change by the special symbol display device 531 include special symbols corresponding to the jackpot (for example, “7 ”) and a special symbol (for example, “-”) corresponding to the miss.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern is changed by the image display device 543 so as to be linked (synchronized) with the change in the special pattern. When stopping at a special symbol corresponding to a jackpot, the decorative symbol is also stopped at a decorative symbol such as "777" corresponding to a jackpot. On the other hand, when stopping at a special symbol corresponding to a loss (non-winning), the decorative symbol is also stopped at a decorative symbol corresponding to a loss (a symbol other than the decorative symbol corresponding to a jackpot). The special symbol display device 531 is composed of a small 7-segment display, but the image display area of the image display device 543 that displays decorative symbols is larger than the image display area of the special symbol display device 531 (for example, when playing games) It is formed to a size that occupies more than half of the area. Thereby, the player can confirm whether or not the current game is a jackpot by looking at the stopping state of the decorative symbols.

The variation of the decorative pattern in step S745 is controlled to be within the variation time determined by the lottery in step S742. Then, when the variation of the decorative symbol is completed, the process advances to step S746, and the main control board 530 varies the special symbol for the variation time determined by the lottery, and then changes the special symbol so that it becomes the stop symbol determined by the lottery. finish.
Next, the process advances to step S747, and special symbol post-stop processing is executed. The post-stop processing includes, for example, processing for moving to a special game when the current game is a jackpot.

In the nineteenth embodiment (B) of the pachinko gaming machine, similarly to the nineteenth embodiment (A) of the slot machine, after the setting change state ends, a setting change end sound is emitted and a lamp indicating the end of the setting change is turned on. Execute. Furthermore, when it is assumed that a game is started at the same time as the setting change state ends, the output of the setting change end sound is configured to end before the game ends.
As mentioned above, if it is assumed that the setting change state is ended when the determination is "Yes" in step S729 in FIG. When the control board 540 receives the command, it starts outputting a setting change completion sound from the speaker 542.

The time from when it is determined "Yes" in step S729 until the output of the setting change end sound (and the predetermined lighting of the production lamp 541) starts is longer than "0" ms, for example, in step S729. The timing is approximately when one interrupt time (for example, "4" ms in the case of the Pachinko gaming machine 500) has elapsed since the "Yes" decision. In other words, after the determination in step S729 is "Yes", the setting change completion sound is not output until at least one interrupt has elapsed.
As in the nineteenth embodiment (A), the setting change end sound outputs a sound saying "setting change is finished." Further, if the time from the start of output to the end of output of the voice saying "Settings change is finished" is set to "T01" as in the nineteenth embodiment (A), the time "T01" is the same as in the nineteenth embodiment (A). ) may be set to about 2000 ms.

In addition to the above-mentioned setting change completion sound, the control section 540 executes a performance that lights up the performance lamp 541 in a predetermined lighting manner as a performance indicating that the setting change has been completed.
Here, when the effect lamp 541 is to be lit, at least the lighting mode should not be the same as that when the effect lamp 541 is to be lit at the time of a jackpot. For example, if it is determined that lamp A of the production lamps 541 is to be lit in lighting mode a to indicate that the jackpot has been won, the production lamp 541 will be lit as a production to indicate that the setting change has been completed. In this case, a lamp other than lamp A may be turned on. In this case, as long as a lamp different from lamp A is lit, it may be lit in the same manner as the one used to indicate a jackpot.

Further, when lighting the effect lamp 541 as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, the lamp A may be turned on. The lighting mode in this case is different from the lighting mode when indicating a jackpot.
As described above, when lighting the effect lamp 541 as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, the lighting mode of the effect lamp 541 is made not to be the same as the lighting mode of the effect lamp 541 when a jackpot is achieved. As a result, when a player starts playing immediately after finishing a setting change, even if the effect lamp 541 is turned on to indicate that the setting change has ended, the player will not misunderstand that he has hit the jackpot. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the lighting pattern of the production lamp 541 indicating that the setting change is completed is different from the lighting pattern of the production lamp 541 when a jackpot is achieved, so that the two do not get confused. In other words, the lighting pattern of the production lamp 541 that indicates that the setting change has been completed is set to a lighting pattern that is not used for other productions (or is used very infrequently), and if you see the lighting pattern, you can change the setting. It is preferable to make it easy to understand that this is a performance that signifies the end of.
Furthermore, for the production lamp 541, the lighting pattern indicating that the setting change has been completed may be the same as the lighting pattern when a jackpot is achieved, but for other lamps other than the production lamp 541, the setting change is not allowed. The lighting pattern indicating the end of the game may be different from the lighting pattern when the jackpot is reached.
Specifically, for example, to indicate that the setting change has been completed, the effect lamp 541 and the other lamps are all lit up, and when a jackpot is achieved, the effect lamp 541 is turned on, but the other lamps are turned on. One example is to prevent the light from turning on. In this way, by checking the lighting pattern of the performance lamp 541 and the other lamps (lamps of the gaming machine in general), the administrator can grasp which state the game machine is in.

Furthermore, when turning on the effect lamp 541 as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, as a general rule, the effect may be output at the same time as the setting change end sound. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started before outputting the setting change end sound. Alternatively, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is started but before the output of the setting change end sound is ended. Furthermore, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is finished.
In the nineteenth embodiment (B), the effect lamp 541 indicating that the setting change has been completed is turned on at the same time as the output of the setting change end sound is started.

Further, if the lighting time of the production lamp 541 indicating that the setting change is completed is set to "T02" as in the 19th embodiment (A),
T01>T02
T01=T02
T01<T02
However, in this embodiment, it is assumed that "T01<T02". For example, when the time "T01" is set to approximately "2000" ms as described above, the time "T02" may be set to, for example, approximately "2500" ms to approximately "4000" ms.

Next, a case will be described in which the game is started as soon as possible after the setting change state is finished.
In addition, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the configuration is such that the firing device 513 cannot be operated to launch the game ball into the game area during the setting change state. Therefore, at least unless the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the game ball cannot be launched into the game area.

However, the configuration is not limited to this, and even in the setting change state, it is possible to operate the firing device 513 and launch the game ball into the game area. In this case, even if a game ball enters any of the winning holes during the setting change state, control may be performed so that the prize ball is not paid out. Furthermore, even if a game ball enters the starting hole 532, the jackpot lottery is not executed, and the special symbol display device 531 and the image display device 543 do not vary the decorative symbols. It will be done.

In the setting change state, at least the front frame 502 is open as described above, but first, a case will be described assuming that the game is possible even when the front frame 502 is open.
The timing for starting the game is when the game ball enters the starting hole 532, as described above.
First, if the preparation time before starting the game is "T21", the game ball is guided to the launchable position in the launcher 513, the game ball is launched from the launchable position, and the time until the game ball enters the starting hole 532. The total time becomes time "T21".
In this case, the time "T21" is considered to be approximately "2000" ms.
In the above assumption, it is assumed that the first game ball fired from the firing device 513 enters the starting hole 532.

When the game ball enters the starting hole 532, it is determined as "Yes" in step S741 in FIG. , stops the variation of the special symbol (step S746). Here, in FIG. 102, the time from the time when "Yes" is determined in step S741 to the end of the process in step S746 is one gaming time, and this one gaming time is defined as "T22".
First, when a game ball enters the starting port 532 in a state where there are no reserved balls, one game time "T22" is determined from a range of approximately "10,000" to "30,000" ms, for example. shall be. Therefore, the shortest time for one game time "T22" is "10000" ms.

Note that a shortening function is known that increases time efficiency by shortening the variation time of special symbols when the number of reserved balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, three), but in this embodiment, the setting Since this is the state after the end of the change state, there are no reserved balls. Therefore, in one game time "T22", the special symbol variation time shortening function is not taken into consideration.

From the above, the time required to start the game immediately after ending the setting change state is "T21+T22".
The shortest time of "T21+T22" is approximately "12000" ms.
Therefore,
T01 (time when setting change end sound is output) < T21 + T22 (preparation time to start the game + 1 minimum time for the game)
becomes.

Furthermore, when lighting the effect lamp 541 to indicate that the setting change has been completed immediately after the setting change state ends (at the same time as the output of the setting change end sound starts), the lighting time T02 of the effect lamp 541 and "T21+T22 ” The relationship between
T02 (approx. “2500” to “4000” ms) <T21+T22
becomes.
As a result, even if you start playing immediately after ending the setting change state, the output of the setting change end sound will end before you end one game, and the production lamp will indicate the end of the setting change. This means that the lighting of 541 has ended.
FIG. 96 shows the time relationship at this time.

Further, the above-mentioned one game does not take into account the time required to close the front frame 502 after the end of the setting change state, or the operation time required to resolve the frame open error after closing the front frame 502.
Similar to the slot machine 10, when the setting change state is finished, at least the front frame 502 should be in the open state. Therefore, even if the setting change state is ended, the pachinko gaming machine 500 detects a frame opening error and issues an error notification. When a slot opening error is being reported, the game cannot be started. Note that when a frame opening error occurs, the first thing to do is not to operate the firing device 513. Second, although the firing device 513 is in an operable state, even if a game ball enters the starting port 532 (even if a game ball is detected by the starting port switch 533), the game does not start (lottery process (not executing, not starting fluctuation of the special symbol display device 531, not paying out prize balls).

To cancel the frame opening error, close the front frame 502 and turn off the frame opening switch 523. Furthermore, by inserting the key into the key insertion slot 521 and performing a predetermined operation, the frame opening error is resolved (the error notification is ended). Therefore, the preparation time "T21" from the end of the setting change state to the start of the game includes the operation time for closing the front frame 502, inserting a key, and canceling the frame opening error. Assuming that the time required to resolve the frame opening error by closing the front frame 502 and turning off the frame opening switch 523 after the setting change state ends is "T20",
T01 (output time of setting change end sound) <T20+T21+T22
T02 (lighting time of production lamp 541) <T20+T21+T22
becomes.

Note that in the above example, the setting change state is ended when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this, and closing the front frame 502 (turning off the frame opening switch 523) It is also possible to end the setting change state on the condition that the frame opening error has been cleared (operation such as inserting the key into the key insertion slot 521 and rotating it in a predetermined direction). In this case, when the front frame 502 is closed and the frame opening error cancellation operation is completed, the setting change state ends and the output of the setting change end sound is started. Note that the setting change state may be ended by closing the front frame 502 on the condition that the frame opening switch 523 is turned off (without performing an operation to cancel the frame opening error). In this case, when the frame opening switch 523 is turned off, the setting change state is ended and a setting change end sound is output.

Therefore, even if the setting change state ends when the front frame 502 is closed and the frame open error is canceled, as described above, the time from the end of the setting change until the end of one game is " Since the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound is shorter than "T21+T22", the output of the setting change end sound ends before one game is finished immediately after the setting change ends.

The above is a case where one game time "T22" is finished in the shortest time.
On the other hand, the relationship between the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound and the time "T21+T22" from the end of the setting change until the end of one game can be set in various ways as shown below. .
(1) Set the output time “T01” of the setting change end sound to be shorter than the total time of the average one game time “T22” when you lose the jackpot lottery (non-winning) and the preparation time “T21” Set.
For example, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device 531 when it loses is in the range of "T22 (min1)" to "T22 (max1)", and the average time is "T22 (avg1)",
T01<T21+T22(avg1)
One example is to set it to .

(2) The output time "T01" of the setting change end sound is set shorter than the total time of the average one game time "T22" when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery and the preparation time "T21".
For example, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device 531 when a jackpot occurs is in the range of "T22 (min2)" to "T22 (max2)", and the average time is "T22 (avg2)",
T01<T21+T22(avg2)
One example is to set it to .

<Twentieth embodiment>
The 20th embodiment relates to a board case of a control board.
As a board case for accommodating a control board, double door type and sliding type are known, and the 20th embodiment is a sliding type board case.
In the sliding method, the exposed area of the control board is smaller than in the double door method, so the number of points that can be accessed by unauthorized persons can be reduced accordingly.
Further, in the twentieth embodiment, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are configured to slide while the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560. Therefore, the surface of the main control board 530 that is exposed during sliding movement is a solder surface.
Note that in the control board, the surface on which the CPU, connectors, and other electronic components are mounted is referred to as the "component surface," and the surface to which the legs of the electronic components are soldered is referred to as the "solder surface."

In the 20th embodiment, a board case 550 for accommodating a main control board 530 in a pachinko gaming machine 500 will be taken as an example. However, the board case 550 of the 20th embodiment is not limited to this, and the board case 550 of the 20th embodiment is not limited to the main control board 530 in the pachinko gaming machine 500, but can also be used for the payout control board 520, the sub control board 540, and other control boards equipped with a CPU. It can be applied to cases that house control boards that require security.

Furthermore, the board case 550 of the 20th embodiment is not limited to the control board of the pachinko gaming machine 500, but also the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10, the sub-control board 80, and a control board equipped with other CPUs for security purposes. It can be applied to cases that house control boards that require
Specifically, the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10 is formed in the same or similar shape to the main control board 530 of the pachinko gaming machine 500, and the board case 550 (upper case 560 and lower case 570) of the 20th embodiment is formed. ) can be accommodated.
Note that the board case 56 shown in the second embodiment (FIGS. 9 and 10) can also be applied to the main control board 530 of the pachinko gaming machine 500 and other control boards. Furthermore, although the second embodiment and the twentieth embodiment may be implemented independently, it is also possible to implement the second embodiment and the twentieth embodiment simultaneously.

FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the board case 550 (upper case 560 and lower case 570) and main control board 530, viewed from the front side. Further, FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the board case 550 (upper case 560 and lower case 570) and the main control board 530, viewed from the rear side.
Furthermore, FIG. 105 is an external perspective view of the main control board 530 housed in the board case 550, viewed from the front side. Furthermore, FIG. 106 is a front view of the state in which the main control board 530 is housed in the board case 550, viewed from the front side. Further, FIG. 107 is a front view of the state in which the main control board 530 is housed in the board case 550, viewed from the rear (back) side.

Here, the "front side" refers to the component side of the main control board 530, and the "rear (back) side" refers to the solder side of the main control board 530.
Furthermore, the "upper" in "upper case 560" refers to the component side of the main control board 530, and may also be referred to as "front case (or cover)" or "component side case (or cover)." .
Furthermore, the "lower" in "lower case 570" refers to the solder side of the main control board 530, and refers to the "rear (back) side case (or cover)" and the "solder side case (or cover)". It may also be called.
Furthermore, FIGS. 103 and 106 show a state in which a cover 561 is attached to the upper case 560, and FIG. 105 shows the upper case 560 without the cover 561.

As shown in FIG. 103, the main control board 530 includes the above-described setting change (reset) switch 536 and a setting key insertion slot 534. Furthermore, connectors 539a to 539h are provided for harness connection to other boards, electronic components, or electronic equipment. The various parts shown in the 20th embodiment such as FIG. 103 are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto.
Furthermore, holes 530a are formed at the four corners of the main control board 530 for screwing when the main control board 530 is attached (fixed) to the upper case 560.

On the other hand, in the upper case 560, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, the connectors 539a to 539h of the main control board 530, the setting change (reset) switch 536, and the setting key insertion slot 534 have appropriate gaps. Openings 563a to 563i are formed through which the openings 563a to 563i can be passed.
Further, a cover 561 is attached to the upper case 560 so as to be openable and closable at a portion where the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion slot 534 are exposed when the main control board 530 is attached. Note that in this embodiment, the opening and closing of the cover 561 is not detected by a sensor, but it is also possible to detect the opening and closing of the cover 561 by a sensor. Then, it is possible to shift to the setting change state on the condition that the sensor is on (cover 561 is open), or it is set on the condition that the sensor is on (cover 561 is open). The changed state may be terminated.

Caulking portions 562 and 572 are provided at one end of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570, specifically, at the left edge when viewed from the front in FIG. 103, respectively. The caulking portions 562 and 572 are used for sealing (caulking) the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 when they are fitted together. After sealing (caulking), the fitting between the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 cannot be released unless the caulking portion 562 on the upper case 560 side is destroyed.
Furthermore, in FIG. 103, side walls 565 and 571 are provided at the ends of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 opposite to the one end side (the side where the caulking parts 562 and 572 are provided, respectively). It is being These side walls 565 and 571 come into contact when upper case 560 and lower case 570 are fitted together.

In FIG. 104, bosses 564 (four bosses) are provided on the back side of the upper case 560. In FIG. 104, two bosses 564 are visible. The spacing between the four bosses 564 is the same as the spacing between the four holes 530a of the main control board 530. Furthermore, a screw hole is formed in the boss 564.
In the state shown in FIG. 104, when the main control board 530 is placed against the back side of the upper case 560, the four holes 530a of the main control board 530 and the screw holes of the four bosses 564 of the upper case 560 overlap.

Furthermore, in this state, the connector 539a of the main control board 530 passes through the opening 563a of the upper case 560, and its connector surface is exposed to the front side of the upper case 560.
Similarly, connectors 539b and 539c of main control board 530 pass through opening 563b of upper case 560, and their connector surfaces are exposed to the front side of upper case 550.
Furthermore, connectors 539d, 539e, and 539f of main control board 530 pass through openings 563c, 563d, and 563e of upper case 560, respectively, and their connector surfaces are exposed to the front side of upper case 560.

Furthermore, connectors 539g and 539h of main control board 530 pass through openings 563f and 563g of upper case 560, respectively, so that their connector surfaces are exposed to the front side of upper case 560.
In this way, all the connectors provided on the main control board 530 pass through the opening formed in the upper case 560 and are exposed to the front side of the upper case 560. 105 and 106 show the state at this time.
Further, in this case, the gaps between each of the connectors 539a to 539h and each of the openings 563a to 563g are set to be appropriate gaps, so that each of the connectors 539a to 539h is connected to each of the openings 563a to 563g. 563g without resistance, and after passing through, so that there is no unnecessary gap between each connector 539a to 539h and each opening 563a to 563g (for example, the gap between the connector and the opening) The design value is approximately 0.5 mm). As a result, it is difficult to use the gap between the connector and the opening to perform a tampering operation.

Furthermore, the setting change (reset) switch 536 and setting key insertion slot 534 of the main control board 530 penetrate openings 563h and 563i formed in the upper case 560, respectively, and are contacted (accessed) from the front side of the upper case 560. ) (see FIG. 105); however, since a cover 561 is attached over these setting change (reset) switch 536 and setting key insertion slot 534 as shown in FIGS. 103 and 106, I have not been exposed to. However, the board case 550 (upper case 560 and lower case 570) including the cover 561 is made of transparent resin, and the setting change (reset) switch 536 and setting key insertion slot 534 can be visually confirmed from the outside of the cover 561. It becomes.
In the above state, if screws are inserted into the holes 530a (4 locations) from the solder side of the main control board 530 and screwed to the bosses 564 of the upper case 560, the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560. be done.

Accordingly, even when upper case 560 and lower case 570 are fitted together, main control board 530 moves together with upper case 560.
In this way, the structure is such that the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560 before the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted together, so when the upper case and the lower case 570 are fitted, the upper There is no relative movement between the case 560 and the main control board 530. Therefore, openings 563a to 563g that are slightly larger than the outer dimensions of the connectors 539a to 539h of the main control board 530 are formed on the upper case 560 side, and the connectors 539a to 539h pass through the openings 563a to 563g. By adopting such a structure, it is possible to create a structure in which no unnecessary gaps are created between each of the connectors 539a to 539h and each of the openings 563a to 563g. For example, even if the positional relationship between the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 is shifted due to an act of rubbing after the upper case 560 and the lower case 5670 are fitted together, the upper case 560 and the main control board 530 may Since the connectors 539a to 539h do not shift relative to each other, it is not possible to increase the gap between each connector 539a to 539h and each opening 563a to 563g, for example. Thereby, it is possible to suppress misbehavior.

Next, a method of fitting the upper case 560 to which the main control board 530 is attached and the lower case 570 will be described.
FIG. 108 is a side sectional view showing the fitted state of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570, (a) shows the temporarily fitted state (before sliding movement), and (b) shows the fully fitted state ( (after moving the slide).
In FIG. 108, the cross-sectional area is not hatched for ease of viewing the drawing. Further, in the figure, the upper case 560 is shown by a solid line, and the lower case 570 is shown by a two-dot chain line.
As shown in FIGS. 103, 104, and 108, the upper case 560 is provided with a side wall 565, and the lower case 570 is provided with a side wall 571.

Moreover, as shown in FIGS. 103, 104, and 108, the lower edge of the upper case 560 in the longitudinal direction (lower case 570 side) is referred to as a lower edge 560a. Moreover, the edge in the longitudinal direction of the lower case 570 is referred to as an outer edge 570a.
When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are overlapped, the shapes of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are formed so that they overlap in the positional relationship shown in FIG. 108(a). When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are overlapped, the lower edge 560a of the upper case 560 and the outer edge 570a of the lower case 570 are formed in contact with each other. This position is referred to as a "temporary fitted state". In the temporarily fitted state, the gap L between the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 is formed to be about several tens of mm (for example, about "10" to "30" mm). ing.
Further, in the temporarily fitted state, upper case 560 and lower case 570 can be separated at any time. In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 108(a), the upper case 560 can be moved in a direction away from the lower case 570 without any interference with parts or the like.

FIG. 109 is a plan view of the side wall 565 and the vicinity of the side wall 571 viewed from the lower case 570 side in the temporarily fitted state.
In the temporarily fitted state, as shown in FIG. 109, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 have a gap L, so one end of the solder surface of the main control board 530 is visible from this gap L. There is. Here, in the connectors of the main control board 530, if the legs of the connector 539g are called connector legs 539g' and the legs of the connector 539h are called connector legs 539h', these connector legs 539g' and 539h' are arranged in the longitudinal direction. There are two rows of legs (see Figure 104).
In the temporarily fitted state, as shown in FIG. 109, only one outer row of connector legs 539g' and 539h' is exposed. In other words, even in the temporarily fitted state, all of the connector legs 539g' and 539h' are not exposed, but only a portion thereof is exposed.

The lower case 570 is configured to be slidable relative to the upper case 560 from the temporarily fitted state shown in FIG. 108(a). Note that the direction of sliding movement is the longitudinal direction of the board case 550, which is the left direction in FIG. 108(a).
When lower case 570 is slid relative to upper case 560, upper case 560, main control board 530, and lower case 570 can be moved without interference until the end of the slide movement. Then, as shown in FIG. 108(b), it can be slid to a position where the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 come into contact. The state shown in FIG. 108(b) is the final fitted state. Note that FIG. 107 shows a state in which the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 are in contact (full fitted state).

In the fully fitted state, engagement members (not shown) formed on the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 engage with each other. This makes it impossible to move the upper case 560 in a direction away from the lower case 570 with respect to the lower case 570. However, in this state, it is possible to slide the lower case 570 with respect to the upper case 560 in the opposite direction to the above, and by sliding in the opposite direction, the fully mated state can be returned to the tentatively mated state at any time. be able to.

In the temporarily fitted state shown in FIG. 108(a), the caulking portion 562 of the upper case 560 and the caulking portion 572 of the lower case 570 are misaligned in the vertical direction; In the fitted state, the caulking portion 562 of the upper case 560 and the caulking portion 572 of the lower case 570 overlap, allowing caulking using both. If the caulking part 562 and the caulking part 572 are caulked at this position, unless the caulking part 562 of the upper case 560 is cut (destroyed), the main case 560 and the lower case 570 will not be separated or the upper case 560 will be separated. On the other hand, it is no longer possible to slide the lower case 570 and return it to the temporarily fitted state shown in FIG. 108(a).

However, it is conceivable that the lower case 570 may be slid with respect to the upper case 560 to return to the temporarily fitted state by some method, thereby exposing the solder surface of the main control board 530.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 109, if not all of the connector legs are exposed, but only a part of the connector legs are exposed, it is possible to make it difficult to tamper with the connector legs.
Furthermore, even in the temporarily fitted state, not all connector legs are exposed; in the example of the 20th embodiment, the exposed connector legs are connector legs 539g' and 539h'; The legs of 539a, 539b, 539c, 539d, 539e, and 539g are not exposed.

When a sliding method is adopted for the board case 550, the sliding direction is usually the longitudinal direction of the board case. In this case, the amount of sliding movement is related to the number of exposed connector legs.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, the connector is arranged near the outer periphery of the main control board 530. For example, if a connector is provided in the center of the main control board 530, the opening of the upper case 560 corresponding to the connector has no choice but to be approximately square-shaped with four sides surrounded by side walls. However, if the connector is arranged inside a substantially square-shaped interior surrounded by side walls on four sides, it becomes difficult to insert and remove the connector. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, connectors 539a to 539h are arranged near the outer peripheral edge of the main control board 530.

Specifically, in FIG. 103, a connector 539a is arranged near the left edge of the main control board 530, connectors 539b, 539c, 539d, 539e, and 539f are arranged near the upper edge, and connectors 539g and 539h are arranged near the right edge. was placed.
Each of the connector openings 563 of the upper case 560 has a structure in which there is no wall at least on the outside. For example, as shown in FIG. 105, the periphery of the opening 563a through which the connector 539a passes has a substantially concave shape with no side wall on the left side (outside) in the figure.
Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the periphery of the opening 563b through which the connectors 539b and 539c pass has a substantially concave shape with no side wall on the upper (outside) side in the figure.

Furthermore, the peripheries of the openings 563c, 563d, and 563e through which the connectors 539d, 539e, and 539f pass, respectively, are approximately L-shaped with no side walls on the upper and right sides (outside) in FIG. .
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 105, the periphery of the openings 563f and 563g through which the connectors 539g and 539h pass, respectively, has a side wall only on the left side (inside) in the figure. This makes it easy to insert and remove the connector.

Furthermore, when the connectors are arranged as described above with respect to the main control board 530, when the lower case 570 is slid as in this embodiment, the first exposed legs of the connectors are the legs of the connectors 539g and 539h. feet (539g' and 539h').
Furthermore, when the amount of sliding movement is made larger than in this embodiment, the legs of the connector 539f are exposed next.

Therefore, in this embodiment, among the connectors of the main control board 530, the legs of the connectors 530a to 539f are not exposed even if the lower case 570 is slid relative to the upper case 506. For example, in FIG. 105, if the connector group of connectors 539d, 539e, and 539f is arranged further to the left in the figure (closer to connectors 539b and 539c), the amount of sliding movement can be increased more than in this embodiment. Even if provided, it is possible to configure the connector 539f so that its legs are not exposed.

Further, when the lower case 570 is slid relative to the upper case 560 as in this embodiment, the legs of the connectors 539g and 539h arranged near the right edge of the main control board 530 in FIG. 105 are easily exposed. . Therefore, in this embodiment, when the lower case 570 is slid relative to the upper case 560, the legs of the connectors 539g and 539h (connector legs 539g' and 539h') are exposed; Rather than exposing all of the feet, only a portion of the feet are exposed, making it as difficult as possible for the foot to tumble.

It is preferable that the number of connectors in which at least some of the legs are exposed due to sliding movement be as small as possible.
Also, when the number of rows of legs of one connector is "N" (N is an integer greater than or equal to 2), the number of exposed legs should be "N-1" or less (that is, not all of them are exposed). It is preferable. Furthermore, when the number of rows of legs of the connector is "1", it is preferable that the legs of the connector are configured not to be exposed.
Alternatively, when the number of pins of the connector is "N", that is, the number of legs of the connector is "N", the "n"th ("n" ≤ "N-1") of the "N" pins is ''), but the pins after the "n+1"th pin are not exposed (that is, all the pins are configured not to be exposed).
Furthermore, among the pins of the connector, at least one pin serving as a reference may be configured so as not to be exposed. By preventing at least one pin from being exposed, it can be made more difficult to tamper with than when all pins are exposed.

Further, when the main control board is the main control board 530 in the pachinko gaming machine 500, as shown in FIG. Since it is electrically connected to the control board 540 and the like, it is connected to these boards, electronic components, and the like. Connections are made using lead wires. Further, a plurality of lead wires are combined into one harness, a connector terminal is attached to the end of the harness, and this connector terminal is connected to a connector on the main control board 530.
Here, among the lead wires connected to the main control board 530, the lead wire that should particularly ensure security is the lead wire into which the signal of the starting port switch 533 (signal related to the lottery) is input. Therefore, the connector to which the signal of the starting port switch 533 is input should be configured so that its connector legs are not exposed even when it is slid (at least one row of legs is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed). is preferred.

Furthermore, with respect to the connector connected to the payout control board 520, from the viewpoint of preventing the payout from occurring, the legs of the connector are not exposed even if the connector is slid (at least one leg row is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed). It is preferable to configure it so that it is not exposed.
Furthermore, a lead wire that supplies power to the main control board 530 (a lead wire that is connected to the power supply board 510 if the power supply board 510 and the main control board 530 are directly connected), a lead wire that supplies power to the sub control board 540, For each connector to which the connected lead wires and the lead wires connected to the board for outputting external signals are connected, make sure that at least one foot row is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed. It is preferable to configure

On the other hand, when the main control board is the main control board 50 in the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to a display device, a medal payout device, etc.
Of the lead wires connected to the main control board 50, the lead wire that should particularly ensure security is the lead wire into which the signal of the start switch 41 (signal related to the lottery) is input. Therefore, for the connector to which the lead wire to which the signal of the start switch 41 is input is connected, even if the connector is slid, the legs of the connector are not exposed (at least one row of legs is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed). It is preferable to configure it as follows.

Furthermore, the lead wire through which the signal from the input sensor 44 is input also requires security from the viewpoint of preventing credit fraud. Therefore, for the connector to which the lead wire to which the signal of the input sensor 44 is input is connected, even if it is slid, the legs of the connector will not be exposed (at least one row of legs will not be exposed, or at least one pin will be It is preferable to configure it so that it is not exposed.

Furthermore, each connector is connected to a lead wire connected to the medal dispensing device, specifically a lead wire for outputting a drive signal for the hopper motor 36, and a lead wire for inputting a signal from the dispensing sensor 37. Also, from the viewpoint of preventing unloading problems, it is preferable to configure the connector so that its connector legs are not exposed even if it is slid (at least one row of legs is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed). .
In addition, as in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, there is a connector having a lead wire related to the power supply, a connector having a lead wire connected to the sub-control board 80, and a lead connected to the board for transmitting external signals. It is preferable that each connector to which each line is connected is configured so that at least one leg row is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed.

<21st embodiment>
The twenty-first embodiment relates to the thickness (diameter) of a lead wire (also referred to as a "signal wire").
In the 21st embodiment, the lead wire related to starting is made the thinnest, and within one connector terminal having the lead wire related to starting, at least one other lead wire having the same thickness as the lead wire related to starting is provided, In addition, by providing at least one lead wire that is thicker than the lead wire related to starting, it is difficult to identify the lead wire related to starting, and it is possible to suppress misbehavior (starting illegally or starting at an intentional timing). It is something to do.

Here, in the Pachinko gaming machine 500, the lead wire related to starting corresponds to the lead wire connecting the starting port switch 533 and the main control board 530.
Further, in the slot machine 10, a lead wire related to starting corresponds to a lead wire that connects the start switch 41 and the main control board 50.
Note that the "starting lead wire" is actually composed of two wires, one of which serves as a starting signal line and the other one serves as a GND line. In this embodiment, the starting signal line is referred to as a "starting-related lead wire" and does not include the GND line. However, the GND wire may be included in the lead wires other than the lead wires related to starting.

FIG. 110 is a plan view showing a state in which harnesses B to H are connected to connectors 539b to 539h of main control board 530, respectively.
Note that in FIG. 110, illustration of the board case 550 is omitted. Further, although the main control board 530 is illustrated in FIG. 110, the present invention is not limited to the main control board 530, and can be applied to the main control board 50 as well. In other words, the twenty-first embodiment can be applied to both the slot machine 10 and the Pachinko gaming machine 500.
Further, the connector terminals attached to the tips of harnesses B to H are respectively referred to as "harness B connector terminal" to "harness H connector terminal."

The connector 539a is normally a connector to which no cable or the like is connected. The connector 539a is a connector that is connected to a verification device when gaming machine enforcement authorities use the verification device to check data stored in the CPU, ROM, and RWM.
Further, connectors 539b to 539h are concave connectors mounted on the main control board 530, and harness B connector terminals to harness H connector terminals (convex connectors) are connected to these connectors, respectively.
Further, FIG. 111 is a front view showing in detail each harness B to H and the harness B to H connector terminal.
Each of the harnesses B to H is composed of a plurality of lead wires, and in FIG. 111, each lead wire is numbered. For example, harness B consists of nine lead wires 1 to 9 in the first row (top row in the diagram) and nine lead wires 10 to 18 in the second row (bottom row in the diagram). It is a harness that

Each connector terminal of harnesses B, C, D, G, and H consists of two rows. On the other hand, each connector terminal of harnesses E and F consists of one row.
Note that the harnesses and connector terminals shown in FIG. 111 are merely examples, and the connector terminals may be configured, for example, in three or more rows. Further, the number of lead wires in one row is determined depending on the purpose (number of signal wires), and is not limited to what is shown in FIG. 111, and may be one or more than 10. .
Note that even if it is composed of one lead wire, it will be referred to as a "harness."
Furthermore, in addition to harnesses in which each lead wire is separated (regardless of whether they are bundled or not), such as discrete wire cables, there are also harnesses that have separate lead wires, such as flat cables and ribbon cables. This also includes those in which all the lead wires are integrally connected (regardless of whether they are separable or not).

Moreover, in FIG. 111, two types of thickness are illustrated as lead wires. In the figure, lead wires indicated by single circles indicate thin lead wires, and lead wires indicated by double circles indicate thick lead wires. Here, the "thickness of the lead wire" refers to the diameter of the lead wire. Therefore, for example, if the thickness of a lead wire indicated by a single circle is a diameter D1, and the thickness of a lead wire indicated by a double circle is a diameter D2, "D1<D2".
In the example of FIG. 111, two types of lead wire thickness are shown, but the harness is not limited to this, and the harness may be constructed from lead wires of three or more different thicknesses.

In FIG. 111, lead wires related to starting (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, lead wires connecting the starting port switch 533 and the main control board 530; in the case of the slot machine 10, the lead wires connecting the start switch 41 and the main control board 530) ) is the seventh lead wire of harness D. As the lead wire for starting, the thinner one of the two thicknesses is used. This is to make the lead wires related to starting as inconspicuous as possible by using thin lead wires. Furthermore, by using thin lead wires, the wires are more likely to break in the event of fraudulent activity (modification, etc.), making it easier to detect abnormalities. In other words, thick lead wires are less likely to break even in the event of fraudulent activity compared to thin lead wires, and if a bundle of thick lead wires is bundled, even if a part breaks, it will be difficult to detect. This is because it is difficult.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lead wire related to starting may be a thick lead wire. Alternatively, when lead wires of three different thicknesses are used, a lead wire of an intermediate thickness may be used as the lead wire for starting.
Note that there are cases where only two lead wires related to starting and its GND wire are connected to one connector terminal.
On the other hand, the harness D shown in FIG. 111 has a lead wire (No. 7) related to starting and a plurality of other lead wires.

Further, in the harness D including the lead wire (No. 7) related to starting, at least one lead wire having the same thickness as the lead wire (No. 7) related to starting is provided. Even if it is known that a lead wire related to starting is included in the connector D, this is to make it difficult to identify which lead wire it is (to make it difficult to make mistakes). In this example, lead wires No. 2, No. 4, and No. 8 are made to have the same thickness as lead wire No. 7 (a lead wire related to starting).

Furthermore, a No. 8 lead wire of the same thickness is arranged adjacent to the No. 7 lead wire of the harness D. This is to make it difficult to identify the lead wire related to starting by arranging the lead wire of the same thickness adjacent to the lead wire related to starting. In the example of FIG. 111, the No. 8 lead wire located on the right side of the No. 7 lead wire in the harness D is made to have the same thickness as the No. 7 lead wire, but this is not limited to this. The thickness of the wire may be the same as the thickness of the No. 7 lead wire. Alternatively, the thickness of the No. 3 lead wire may be set to be the thickness of the No. 7 lead wire. In the harness D, the lead wires "adjacent" to the No. 7 lead wire correspond to the No. 3, No. 6, and No. 8 lead wires in the example of FIG. 111. At least one of these lead wires is set to have the same thickness as the No. 7 lead wire.

Further, the harness D is provided with one or more lead wires having a thickness different from the lead wire (No. 7) related to starting. In the example of FIG. 111, lead wires No. 1, No. 3, No. 5, and No. 6 have different thicknesses from the lead wire (No. 7) related to starting. By including a lead wire having a thickness different from that of the lead wire related to starting in one connector terminal (harness D connector terminal), it is possible to make it more difficult to identify the lead wire related to starting.

In addition to lead wires related to starting, important signal wires, specifically lead wires related to inputting game media, lead wires related to payout, lead wires for transmitting external signals, etc., are also used to prevent tampering. From the viewpoint of It is preferable.
Furthermore, it is preferable that the lead wire for starting and the lead wire for power supply are arranged so as not to be adjacent to each other. This is to make the lead wires related to starting less susceptible to noise.
Here, "not adjacent" means that, for example, if lead wire No. 7 of harness D is a lead wire related to starting, wires No. 3, 6, and 8 of harness D are not set as lead wires for power supply. This can be mentioned.

Further, as in this embodiment, for example, when the harness G connector terminal and the harness H connector terminal are arranged in a straight line on the main control board 530 and the distance between both connector terminals is short, When the lead wire of the harness H is set as the lead wire for starting, it is preferable that the No. 1 lead wire of the harness H is not set as the lead wire for the power supply.
On the other hand, even if the harness G connector terminal and the harness H connector terminal are lined up in a straight line on the main control board 530, if there is a certain distance between the two connector terminals, the fifth lead of the harness G There is no problem even if the wire is set as a lead wire for starting, and the No. 1 lead wire of harness H is set as a lead wire for power supply.

Furthermore, when a connector terminal of a harness including a lead wire related to starting is adjacent to a connector terminal of another harness, the harness including the lead wire related to starting is placed below the other harness, and It is preferable to wire the lead wires so that they are hidden from the outside as much as possible.
FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing an example of hiding lead wires related to starting. In FIG. 112, in order to simplify the drawing, harness D and harness E both consist of one row of lead wires, harness D consists of three lead wires, and harness E consists of five lead wires. Illustrated. It is assumed that the lead wire of the harness D that is closest to the harness E is set as the lead wire related to starting.
In this case, the direction in which the harness D extends is set to the harness E side, and the harness E is wired so as to pass above the harness D. Thereby, the lead wire for starting the harness D is hidden from the outside as much as possible, and security can be improved.

<Twenty-second embodiment>
The twenty-second embodiment relates to a setting change state. Although the description of the 22nd embodiment partially overlaps with that of the 19th embodiment, it will be explained anew.
First, in the case of the slot machine 10, before shifting to the setting change state, check whether the door switch 17 is on, whether the setting key switch 152 is on, and whether the reset switch 153 is on. It is possible to move to the setting change state on the condition that all these switches are on. If only some of the three switches are on, or if all the switches are off, the setting change state does not occur. As a result, even if the setting key switch 152 is accessed by illegally drilling a hole in the front door 12 with a drill or the like, the setting change state will not be entered unless the door switch 17 is turned on.

Further, even if the door switch 17, setting key switch 152, and reset switch 153 are all turned on after the power is turned on, the setting change state does not occur. When the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on, it is possible to shift to a setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the current setting value can be checked, but the setting value cannot be changed. Note that in the case of transitioning to the setting confirmation state, the condition may be that the door switch 17 is on. Furthermore, in the case of transitioning to the setting confirmation state, the condition may be that the reset switch 153 is off.

Further, the conditions for ending the setting change state are set that the setting key switch 152 is turned from on to off, and that the door switch 17 is on. As a result, it is possible to eliminate a situation in which the setting change state ends before the door switch 17 is turned off, that is, the front door 12 is not opened (a state in which there is a high possibility of misbehavior).
Here, in the present embodiment, it is possible to enter the setting change state on the condition that the door switch 17 is on, and it is possible to end the setting change state on the condition that the door switch 17 is on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. First, the setting change state can be entered on the condition that the door switch 17 is on, and the on/off state of the door switch 17 is not determined when the setting change state ends. You can.

Second, when transitioning to the setting change state, it is not determined whether the door switch 17 is on or off, but at the end of the setting change state, it is determined whether the door switch 17 is on or off, and if the door switch 17 is not on. It may also be possible to prevent the setting change state from ending.
Furthermore, thirdly, when transitioning to the setting change state, it is not determined whether the door switch 17 is on or off, but if the door switch 17 is not on, the set value will not be changed even if the setting change switch 153 is operated. It may be set to
Fourthly, when transitioning to the setting change state, it is not determined whether the door switch 17 is on or off, and during the setting change state, the setting value can be changed by operating the setting change switch 153; If the door switch 17 is not turned on when the start switch 41 is operated to confirm the value, the set value may not be confirmed (the new set value will not be stored in the RWM 53). .

In addition, in order to shift to the setting change state in the slot machine 10, the power is turned on while the reset switch 153 is turned on. After moving to (setting change processing), the current setting value stored in the RWM 53 is cleared before the setting value becomes changeable. In this case, the set value data becomes "0". Therefore, the setting value at the start of the setting change state is "1".

In addition, when the reset switch 153 is turned on and the power switch 11 is turned on in order to shift to the setting change state, the information displayed on the management information display LED 73 (role ratio monitor) in the storage area of the RWM 53 is Such data is not cleared. The data related to the information displayed on the management information display LED 73 includes a game count counter, a payout count counter (including a ring buffer), and each ratio data.

In the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the power is turned on, whether or not the frame release switch 523 is on, whether the setting key switch 535 is on, and whether or not the reset switch 536 is on is checked. It is possible to shift to a setting change state on the condition that these three switches are on. If only some of the three switches are on, or if all the switches are off, the setting change state does not occur. As a result, in an illegal state where the front frame 502 is not open, even if the setting key switch 535 is turned on, the setting change state does not occur.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 98, the back side of the Pachinko gaming machine 500 is not configured in a closed state (see FIG. 22) like the slot machine 10, but is in an open state.
Therefore, depending on the situation of the island installed in the hall, it is conceivable that the player could sneak around to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 and access the main control board 530 without opening the front frame 502. However, if the frame release switch 523 is not on, it is determined that the state is not normal, and the state is not changed to the setting change state (setting values cannot be changed).

Moreover, even if the frame release switch 523 is turned on, the setting key switch 535 is turned on, and the reset switch 536 is turned on after the power is turned on, the setting change state does not occur. Furthermore, even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting key switch 535 is turned on after the power is turned on, the setting change state does not change, and the setting confirmation state does not change. do not.
In the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, as described above, when the power is turned on with the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting key switch 535 turned on (the reset switch 536 is in the off state), , it is possible to move to the setting confirmation state.

Further, in a case where opening of the front frame 502 and opening of the glass door 505 can be detected separately as in this embodiment, when both the front frame 502 and the glass door 505 are open at the same time (i.e., the door A specification may be adopted in which transition to the setting change state or setting confirmation state is permitted when the release switch 522 is on and the frame release switch 523 is on.
By setting in this way, the function of the set values can be inspected without performing any extra steps in the manufacturing process of the pachinko game machine 500. Furthermore, even if the glass door 505 is removed from the pachinko machine 500 during board maintenance work in the hall after the pachinko machine 500 is installed in the hall, the settings can be changed or checked in parallel with the board maintenance. Therefore, convenience can be improved.

Furthermore, when transitioning to the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the door open switch 522 (the switch that is turned on when the glass door 505 is opened) is not detected. Therefore, when transitioning to the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the glass door 505 may be open or closed. However, when transitioning to the settings change state or settings confirmation state, the glass door 505 is to be closed, and when transitioning to the settings change state or settings confirmation state, it is determined whether the door open switch 522 is on or off, and it must be off. It may be possible to shift to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state under the condition that.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 106, the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are covered with a cover 561. In order to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 534, it is necessary to open the cover 561.
Therefore, a sensor (hereinafter referred to as a "cover sensor") that detects the opening and closing of the cover 561 may be provided, and a transition to the setting change state or setting confirmation state may be made possible on the condition that the cover sensor is on.

The pachinko gaming machine 500 is similar to the slot machine 10 in that in the setting change state, the setting value can be changed each time the setting change switch 536 is operated.
Furthermore, in the slot machine 10, operating the start switch 41 is the operation to confirm the setting value, but in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, turning off the setting key switch 535 is the operation to confirm the setting value, and , is an operation to end the setting change state.
Furthermore, in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, the setting change state can be ended on condition that the setting key switch 535 is turned from on to off and the frame opening switch 523 is on. As a result, it is possible to eliminate a situation in which the setting change state ends with the frame release switch 523 turned off, that is, the front frame 502 is not opened (a state in which there is a high possibility of misbehavior).

In this embodiment, the setting change state can be entered on the condition that the frame release switch 523 is on, and the setting change state can be terminated on the condition that the frame release switch 523 is on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. First, it is possible to shift to the setting change state on the condition that the frame release switch 523 is on, and when the setting change state ends, the on/off state of the frame release switch 523 is not determined. You may also do so.

Second, when transitioning to the setting change state, it is not determined whether the frame release switch 523 is on or off, but when the setting change state ends, it is determined whether the frame release switch 523 is on or off, and the frame release switch 523 is turned on. Otherwise, the setting change state may not be terminated.
Furthermore, thirdly, when transitioning to the setting change state, it is not determined whether the frame release switch 523 is on or off, but if the frame release switch 523 is not on, even if the setting change switch 536 is operated, the setting value will not change. You can also set it so that it does not occur.

Fourthly, when transitioning to the setting change state, it is not determined whether the frame release switch 523 is on or off, and during the setting change state, the set value can be changed by operating the setting change switch 536. If the frame release switch 523 is not turned on when the setting key switch 535, which is an operation for confirming the set value, is turned off, the set value will not be confirmed (the new set value will not be stored in RWM). May be set.

Furthermore, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, even if the power is turned on with the reset switch 536 turned on in order to shift to the setting change state, the management information display LED (performance The data related to the information displayed on the display monitor) 538 is not cleared. The data related to the information displayed on the management information display LED 538 is a base value.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 be provided on the back side of the front frame 502 on the side closer to the hinge mechanism 503. In this way, it is possible to prevent the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 from being easily accessible even if the front frame 502 is slightly opened.
For example, in FIG. 98, the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are arranged inside the cover 561, but when the main control board 530 is viewed from the front, the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting The change (reset) switch 536 is arranged on the right side within the area of the main control board 530. Thereby, the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 can be placed closer to the hinge mechanism 503. In FIG. 98, since the left side in the figure is the open side, if it is formed as shown in FIG. can be placed.

In the slot machine 10, similarly to the above, the setting key insertion slot 151 and setting change (reset) switch 153 are connected to the rotation axis of the front door 12 when the front door 12 is opened, on the main control board 50. It is preferable to arrange them so that they are close to each other. For example, if the main control board 50 is arranged as shown in FIG. 22, and when the front door 12 is viewed from the front (player) side, the left side is the rotation axis side of the front door 12 and the right side is the open side. If you open the door 12 and look at the main control board 50, it will appear as shown in FIG. 10(a). Therefore, if the setting key insertion slot 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are placed on the left side in FIG. A switch 153 can be arranged.

Furthermore, as a measure to prevent the transition to the setting change state due to trivia, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, after inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 534, rotate the setting key counterclockwise. The configuration may be such that the setting key switch 535 is turned on. In this case, by configuring the settings key so that it can be rotated clockwise and configured so that it does not shift to the settings change state when the settings key is rotated clockwise, the transition to the settings change state can be made difficult to understand. be able to.
In particular, when opening the front frame 502 by inserting a key into the key insertion slot 521, if the front frame 502 is opened by rotating the key clockwise, it is possible to open the front frame 502 by rotating the key clockwise. The direction of rotation of the key and the direction of rotation of the setting key are opposite, making it difficult to understand the transition to the setting change state.

The same applies to the slot machine 10 as described above.
The setting key switch 152 may be configured to be turned on by rotating the setting key counterclockwise after inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 151. In this case, by configuring the settings key so that it can be rotated clockwise and configured so that it does not shift to the settings change state when the settings key is rotated clockwise, the transition to the settings change state can be made difficult to understand. be able to.
In particular, when opening the front door 12, if the structure is such that the front door 12 is opened by rotating the key clockwise, the rotation direction of the key when opening the front door 12 and the rotation direction of the setting key can be changed. and are in the opposite direction, making it difficult to understand the transition to the setting change state.

FIG. 113 is a side cross-sectional view showing the positional relationship among the upper case 560 of the board case 550, the cover 561, the setting key insertion slot 534, and the setting change (reset) switch 536. Note that in FIG. 113, similar to FIG. 108, the cross section is not hatched from the viewpoint of ease of viewing the drawing.
As shown in FIGS. 105 and 113, the highest surface of the upper case 560 is surface S1, and the opening surface of setting key insertion slot 534 and setting change (reset) switch 536 is surface S2. In this case, the surface S2 is formed lower than the surface S1. By forming it in this way, for example, when attempting to access the setting key insertion slot 534 or the setting change (reset) switch 536 by inserting a wire-like object from the outside, it is possible to Accessing S2 becomes more difficult. Therefore, it is possible to suppress setting mistakes.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 113, when the cover 561 is attached to the top surface of the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536, the surface S3 (FIG. 113) which is the top surface of the cover 561 is , is arranged at a position lower than the surface S1 of the upper cover 560.
By forming it in this way, when an attempt is made to access the setting key insertion slot 534 or the setting change (reset) switch 536, an attempt is made to insert a wire-like object between the upper cover 560 and the cover 561, or the cover Even if an attempt is made to open the 561, it is made difficult to do so, so it is possible to suppress the setting mistake.

Although the nineteenth to twenty-second embodiments have been described above, these embodiments are not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
A. Nineteenth Embodiment (1) In the nineteenth embodiment, a settings confirmation completion sound may be output when the settings confirmation state ends. For example, it may output a voice saying "Setting confirmation is finished."
Furthermore, if you start playing at the same time as the setting confirmation state ends,
a) End the output of the setting confirmation end sound before the end of the game at the earliest.
b) The output of the setting confirmation end sound is ended before the end of the game when the game is ended in the average time of one game.
c) Before the end of the game when the game is completed in the average time of one game in the game that won the special prize (in the case of slot machine 10) or the game that became a jackpot (in the case of pachinko gaming machine 500) , ends the output of the setting confirmation completion sound.
One example is to set it as follows.

(2) Furthermore, at the same time as the setting confirmation state ends, an effect indicating that the setting confirmation state has ended is outputted by the effect lamp 21 (in the case of the slot machine 10) or the effect lamp 541 (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500). It's okay. In this case, as in the nineteenth embodiment, the performance time by the lamp is
a) End the lamp performance before the end of the game at the earliest.
b) End the lamp effect before the end of the game when the game ends in the average time of one game.
c) Before the end of the game when the game is completed in the average time of one game in the game that won the special prize (in the case of slot machine 10) or the game that became a jackpot (in the case of pachinko gaming machine 500) , ends the lamp display.
Examples include:

(3) When the setting change state is finished (or when the setting confirmation state is finished as in the example above), the setting change (or confirmation) end sound and lamp effect are output, but these setting changes (or confirmation) The end sound and lamp effect are controlled by the sub-control board 80 or 540.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when ending the setting change (or confirmation) state, an output device controlled by the main control board 50 or 530 outputs an output indicating that the setting change (or confirmation) state has ended. You may.

(4) In the slot machine 10, the setting key insertion slot 151 (setting key switch 152) and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are provided on the main control board 50, but the present invention is not limited to this, and they are provided separately from the main control board 50. A setting change board may be provided, and a setting key insertion slot 151 (setting key switch 152), a setting change (reset) switch 153, and a setting value display LED 73 may be provided on this setting change board.
The same applies to the pachinko gaming machine 500. A setting change board is provided separately from the main control board 530, and a setting key insertion slot 534 (setting key switch 535), a setting change (reset) switch 536, and a setting value display LED 537 are provided on this setting change board. Good too.

(5) Although we have shown an example of outputting the sound "Settings change has finished" as the settings change completion sound, it is not necessarily limited to this wording; for example, "Settings have been updated" etc. There may be.
(6) In the 19th embodiment, an example is shown in which the game starts immediately after the setting change state ends, but during actual hall operation, it is assumed that the game starts immediately after the setting change state ends. I haven't. For example, it is assumed that a hall manager changes settings and then tries out one game. In such a case, while confirming that the setting change state has been correctly completed by outputting the setting change end sound and the effect lamp, be careful not to confuse the notification by the setting change end sound and the effect lamp with the effect output during the game. One of the objectives is to

B. 20th Embodiment (1) In the 20th embodiment, the lower edge 560a of the upper case 560 and the outer edge 570a of the lower case 570 are brought into contact with each other to enable sliding movement. However, there are various methods of engaging the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 before sliding movement, and the method is not limited to that shown in FIG. 108. Furthermore, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 may have a shape that allows them to overlap with a certain degree of freedom when they are overlapped. Alternatively, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 may overlap only at specific positions.

(2) How are the connectors 539a to 539h arranged on the main control board 530, and which connector legs are set to be exposed when the upper case 560 and lower case 570 are temporarily fitted? , various methods can be mentioned.
When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 slide as in this embodiment, the connector legs 539g' and 539h' are exposed first, as shown in FIG. 109. Therefore, in the case of the connector 539a provided on the main control board 530 at a symmetrical position to the connectors 539g and 539h, its connector legs are not exposed even if the amount of sliding movement increases.

Therefore, for example, on the main control board 530, as shown in FIG. 103, from the connector 539a side (left side in the figure), connectors important in terms of security (connectors with signal lines related to starting, signals related to reception and payout of game media) connectors with signal lines, connectors with signal lines related to output of external signals, and connectors with signal lines related to presentation) are arranged in sequence, and connectors with signal lines that are not so important in terms of security are adopted as connectors 539g and 539h. This can be mentioned.

(3) Although the board case 550 has the crimped parts 562 and 572 as an example, the present embodiment can be applied to the board case 550 that does not have the crimped parts. For example, the board case that houses the sub-control board 540 of the Pachinko gaming machine 500 may not have a caulking part, but the 20th embodiment can be applied to such a board case as well.

C. 21st Embodiment (1) The types and numbers of connectors and the types and numbers of harnesses (connector terminals) shown in the above embodiments are examples, and are not limited to these.
For example, in FIG. 111, harnesses B and C may be composed entirely of thick lead wires, or may be composed entirely of thin lead wires.
Further, although the harness E has shown an example in which only thin lead wires are arranged in one row, it may be a harness and a connector terminal in which two or more rows of thin lead wires are arranged.
Furthermore, the harness and connector terminals may be arranged in any number of rows, and the number of lead wires (terminals) in one row may be any number.
Further, in a harness in which thick lead wires and thin lead wires are mixed in one row, it is sufficient that the number of thick lead wires in one row is one or more, and the number of thin lead wires in one row is also one or more.

(2) In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, a set of lead wires connected to one connector of the main control board 530 is referred to as "one harness."
For example, harness G connected to connector 539g is one harness, and harness H connected to connector 539h is one harness. When the harness G and the harness H are tied into one at the end, this is called a "harness group" and not a "single harness."

(3) When the main control board 530 and other boards are connected by a harness, a specific connector is mounted on the main control board 530, and a harness consisting of N lead wires is connected to the specific connector. Assume that the connector terminals are connected.
On the other hand, at the other end of the harness, the N lead wires are divided into Nx wires (Nx≧1) and Ny wires (Ny≧1), and a connector terminal X is attached to the tip of the Nx lead wires. The connector terminal X is connected to another board, and the connector terminal Y (≠connector terminal It is assumed that the line is connected to the same board or a different board).
In this case, "one harness" in this embodiment refers to a set of N lead wires connected to the main control board 530 side.

D. 22nd Embodiment (1) In the pachinko gaming machine 500, it is possible to shift to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state when the power is turned on, but similarly to the slot machine 10, the setting key switch 535 must be turned on after the power is turned on. It may also be possible to shift to the settings confirmation state. In this case as well, it is possible to determine whether or not the frame opening switch 523 is on, and to shift to the setting confirmation state on the condition that it is on.

(2) As described above, a setting change board may be provided as a separate board from the main control board 50 or 530. In this case, in the case of the slot machine 10, the setting is changed to the side of the open axis of the front door 12 (closer to the open axis) inside the casing, in other words, to the side away from the open end when viewed from the player side. Preferably, the substrate is arranged. Similarly, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, the setting is made on the back side of the front frame 502 on the side of the hinge mechanism 503 (closer to the hinge mechanism 503), in other words, on the side away from the open end when viewed from the player side. It is preferable to arrange a modified board. With this arrangement, the setting key insertion slots 151, 534 and the setting change (reset) switches 153, 536 can be arranged at positions far from the open end. Furthermore, even in this case, it is preferable that the main control board 50 or 530 be placed far from the open end.

In particular, although the main control board 50 or 530 is equipped with a management information display LED 74 or 538, respectively, it is preferable that the information displayed by the management information display LED 74 or 538 is not easily visible. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the management information display LED 74 or 538 on the main control board 50 or 530 at a position away from the open end, and also arrange the main control board 50 or 530 at a position away from the open end.
However, simply by arranging the management information display LED 74 or 538 on the main control board 50 or 530 at a position away from the open side, the information displayed by the management information display LED 74 or 538 can be made not to be easily visible. is also possible. Similarly, even if the management information display LED 74 or 538 is mounted approximately at the center of the main control board 50 or 530, the management information display can be performed simply by positioning the main control board 50 or 530 away from the open end. It is also possible that the information displayed by display LEDs 74 or 538 is not easily visible.

E. All the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification, including the 19th to 22nd embodiments, are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<23rd embodiment>
Next, a twenty-third embodiment will be described.
The meanings of terms in the twenty-third embodiment are as follows.
"RT" means that the type (number) of winning combinations to be drawn and the winning probability are unique to the lottery, and "RT transition" means a transition from one RT to another RT. This means that the winning probability of at least one replay to be drawn will vary. Therefore, the type of replay and the probability of winning for one RT are values specific to that RT, and the types of replay and the probability of winning for one RT will not be the same. do not have. However, it is acceptable for one RT and another RT to have the same total replay winning probability.

In this embodiment, the RT includes a non-RT and an RT1, as shown in FIG. 131, which will be described later.
Note that "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to "RT0". Therefore, in this specification, "RT" includes non-RT.
Moreover, in this embodiment, a 1BB game (1BB operating state) and an RB game (RB operating state) are provided as special games (accessories operating state). Strictly speaking, 1BB games (1BB operating state) and RB games (RB operating state) are not included in RT, but they may be one type of RT.

In addition, RB in this embodiment is a winning combination drawn during the general game of the 1BB game (meaning a game other than the RB game), and if the RB is won during the general game of the 1BB game and the RB wins. , during the 1BB game, transition from the general game to the RB game. For this reason, the RB that is drawn in the general game of the 1BB game is also referred to as "SRB (shift RB)".

Furthermore, it has a main gaming state which is a different concept from RT and whose transition is controlled by the main control board 50 like RT. The main game states of this embodiment include main game states 0 to 5, as shown in FIG. 132, which will be described later.
RT and the main game state have cases in which they are linked and cases in which they are not linked. For example, when the transition conditions for both RT and main game state are satisfied, both RT and main game state are transitioned. On the other hand, when the transition conditions for RT are satisfied but the transition conditions for the main game state are not satisfied, only RT is transitioned while the main game state remains unchanged. On the contrary, when the transition conditions for the main game state are satisfied but the transition conditions for RT are not satisfied, only the main game state is transitioned while leaving RT unchanged.

In the 23rd embodiment, the winning combination lottery means 61 performs a lottery of "winning numbers". Therefore, the winning number lottery means 61 is also referred to as "winning number lottery (determination, selection) means". The winning numbers of this embodiment include winning numbers "1" to "41" as shown in FIG. 126, which will be described later.
When the winning number is determined, a "condition device number" corresponding to the winning number is generated. For example, in FIG. 126, when the winning number "1" is determined, the winning and replay condition device number "1" is generated.

The "condition device number" (also referred to as "winning information") includes an "accessory condition device number" and a "winning and replay condition device number." In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 122, which will be described later, "1" to "17" are provided as accessory condition device numbers. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 123 to 125, which will be described later, "1" to "24" are provided as winning and replay condition device numbers.
Then, when the winning number is determined and a conditional device number is generated, the conditional device corresponding to that conditional device number is activated, and the symbol combination of the role corresponding to the activated conditional device can be stopped and displayed on the active line. becomes.
Note that 1BB and RB in this embodiment may not win in a winning game, so they may be inside 1BB and RB, respectively.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the left reel 31 may be referred to as the first reel 31, the middle reel 31 may be referred to as the second reel 31, and the right reel 31 may be referred to as the third reel 31.
In particular, in the names of the RWM 53 described later, the first reel 31, the second reel 31, and the third reel 31 are called.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in the twenty-third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 114, in this embodiment, each reel 31 consists of 20 frames.
In FIG. 114, the symbol numbers are also illustrated. For example, on the left reel 31, the symbol with symbol number 0 is "Replay". Furthermore, in FIG. 114, the symbol numbers when the reels 31 rotate in reverse are also displayed. The symbol numbers when the reels 31 rotate in reverse will be described later.

Further, in the 23rd embodiment, the maximum number of symbols to be moved from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reels 31 stop is set to "4". For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated just before the No. 1 "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 passes the active line, the symbol will be moved up to 4 symbols from that symbol to the No. 5 "Replay". It becomes possible to stop on the effective line.
Therefore, for example, if four specific symbols are arranged at five symbol intervals on one reel 31, the specific symbols can always be stopped on the active line no matter where the stop switch 42 is operated. For example, on the left reel 31, "Replay" is placed at No. 5, No. 10, No. 15, and No. 0. That is, the "replay" on the left reel 31 is arranged with four symbols at intervals of five symbols. Therefore, for the left reel 31, no matter at what timing the left stop switch 42 is operated, the "replay" can always be stopped at the active line. Note that such a symbol arrangement may be referred to as a "PB=1" arrangement.

On the left reel 31, "Bell A" and "Watermelon" are each arranged in "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, "Replay", "Bell A", and "Cherry" are each arranged in "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Bell A", and "Bell B" are each arranged in "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the left reel 31, the number 3 “Black BAR”, the 8th “special map top”, the 13th “red 7”, and the 18th “blue BAR” are the sum of these 4 symbols, “PB = 1 ” arrangement. Therefore, no matter at what timing the left stop switch 42 is operated, it is possible to stop any one of the "black BAR", "special map top", "red 7", or "blue BAR" on the effective line.
Similarly to the left reel 31, the middle reel 31 also has a ``Black BAR'', ``Blue BAR'', ``Red 7'', or ``Special Figure Top'' arranged in a ``PB=1'' arrangement with the sum of these four symbols.
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, the "Blue BAR" or "Special Figure Bottom" is arranged in "PB=1" with the sum of these two symbols.

FIG. 115 is a diagram showing the display window (transparent window) 18, the positional relationship of each reel 31, and the effective line (display line that displays symbol combinations).
The reel 31 arranged inside can be seen through the display window 18.
In this embodiment, three reels 31 (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31) are provided in parallel in the horizontal direction. Furthermore, each reel 31 is arranged so that three consecutive symbols can be seen from the display window 18. Therefore, a total of nine symbols (pieces) are arranged so as to be visible from the display window 17 of the slot machine 10.

Further, FIG. 115 illustrates the names of symbol positions in this specification. In this specification, for each reel 31, the symbol positions when stopped that can be seen from the display window 18 are referred to as "upper row," "middle row," and "lower row" in order from the top. ”, “middle left row”, and “lower left row”.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 115, valid lines are set for nine symbols visible from the display window 18.
Here, the "valid line" is a line where symbols are lined up when the reels 31 are stopped, a symbol combination line (display line) that forms a symbol combination, and a symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations. This is the line that will win the prize when the line stops on that line. In this embodiment, the prescribed number is three in any gaming state, and the active line is set to be the same in any gaming state.
The effective line in the 23rd embodiment is a so-called linear line descending to the right ("upper left row" - "middle middle row" - "lower right row"). Lines other than this are invalid lines.
Note that the prescribed number may be different for each gaming state (for example, the prescribed number during 1BB operation may be set to "2", etc.). Furthermore, the position and number of active lines may be varied for each gaming state or for each specified number (for example, a plurality of active lines may be provided for a specific specified number).

FIGS. 116 to 121 are diagrams showing the types of winning combinations (such as winning winning numbers drawn by the winning lottery means 61), symbol combinations, and the number of coins to be paid out in the twenty-third embodiment.
The roles can be broadly classified into special roles, replays (replayed roles), and small roles.
The symbol combinations and the number of coins to be paid out at the time of winning are determined for each role. When all the reels 31 are stopped, when the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination stops on the active line (the winning combination is won, the same applies hereinafter), the number of medals corresponding to that winning combination is paid out (dividend (profit)). ) is given).
However, the number of coins paid out when winning a special winning combination is set to 0 coins. In addition, in replay, medals are automatically inserted and the game can be played again.

In FIGS. 116 to 121, "3 pieces (1)" corresponds to the time when the accessory is not activated, and especially in the 23rd embodiment, games other than 1BB game (for example, 1BB game in a state where 1BB is not won) This corresponds to a state where the winning information (conditional device number) of 1BB is carried over, etc.). In addition, in the 23rd embodiment, since there is a case where AT is executed during a 1BB game, games other than the 1BB game are non-AT. Therefore, in the 23rd embodiment, games other than the 1BB game may be referred to as "normal games (accessories not activated, non-AT)". However, even in a normal game, there are cases of advantageous sections and cases of non-advantageous sections.
Further, "3 coins (2)" corresponds to the time when RB is not activated while 1BB is in operation (during 1BB game). Furthermore, "3 pieces (3)" corresponds to when 1BB is in operation (during 1BB game) and RB is in operation (during RB game).
For example, in Figure 116, 1BB with the winning number "001" becomes a lottery target when the specified number is 3 (1) (when the accessory is not activated), but when the specified number is 3 (2) and the specified number is 3. (3) means that it is not eligible for lottery.

The winning numbers “001” to “017” shown in FIG. 116 correspond to special winning combinations (official objects). In this embodiment, one type of 1BB and 16 types of RB (RBA to RBP) are provided as special winnings.
In the 23rd embodiment, only 1BB is drawn when the accessory is not activated, and RB is not drawn, so there is no case where there is a transition from when the accessory is not activated to when the RB is activated.
If 1BB is won and 1BB is won when the accessory is not activated, no medals will be paid out in the current game, but the next game will shift to 1BB activation (1BB game) corresponding to a special game.

Further, during 1BB operation (1BB game), RB is drawn. If the RB wins and the RB wins during the 1BB operation, no medals will be paid out in the current game, but the next game will shift to the RB operation (RB game) during the 1BB operation (1BB game).
In addition, in the 23rd embodiment, the time when 1BB is in operation and RB is not in operation may be referred to as "general game of 1BB game".
When the termination condition of the RB operation is satisfied, when the termination condition of the 1BB operation is satisfied, the 1BB operation is terminated and the game shifts to the time when the accessory is not activated (normal game). On the other hand, when the termination condition for RB operation is satisfied, but when the termination condition for 1BB operation is not satisfied, the process shifts to 1BB operation (and when RB is not activated).

The winning numbers "018" to "047" shown in FIG. 117 all correspond to replays (replay winnings). In the twenty-third embodiment, replays 01 to 10 are provided as types of replays. As shown in FIG. 117, when the accessory is not activated (3 pieces (1)), all of Replays 01 to 10 are eligible for lottery. On the other hand, when 1BB is in operation and RB is not in operation (3 sheets (2)), only Replay 01 is selected for lottery. Furthermore, when RB is activated (3 pieces (3)) while 1BB is activated, replay will not be drawn.

FIGS. 118 to 121 show small winning combinations of the 23rd embodiment. As the small winnings of the 23rd embodiment, small winnings 01 to 34 are provided.
Of the minor prizes 01 to 34, the number of coins paid out for minor prizes 01 to 12 at the time of winning is set to 15, and when the so-called push order bell is won (small prizes A group (described later) (small prizes A1 to A6), This is the winning combination of the small winning combination B group (small winning combinations B1 to B6) (when winning small winning combinations B1 to B6).
In addition, for minor prizes 13 to 24, the number of coins paid out at the time of winning is set to 3, and it is a low bell when the so-called push order bell is won (when the minor prize A group (small prize A1 to A6) is won). It is a role.
Furthermore, for small prizes 25 to 33, the number of coins to be paid out at the time of winning is set to one, and the so-called low bell when winning the push order bell (when winning small prize B group (small prizes B1 to B6)). It's a role.
Furthermore, the small winning combination 34 is a winning combination that is subject to a lottery when the RB is activated (at the time of 3 pieces (3)) during the 1BB activation.

In each of the above-mentioned roles, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role does not stop on the active line in a game where the winning role is won, the roles that will be carried over to the next game and the subsequent games and the roles that will not be carried over are determined.
The hands carried over are 1BB and RB in this embodiment. Since the symbol combinations of 1BB and RB are both set to "PB≠1", there is a case where a game in which 1BB or RB is won does not win a prize. When 1BB or RB is won, the winning information of 1BB or RB is controlled to be carried over to the next game or later in the game until 1BB or RB is won, respectively.

On the other hand, when winning a small winning combination or a replay, the winning winning combination is valid only in the current game, and the winning is not carried over to the next game or later. That is, in a game in which these winning combinations are won, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be won, but regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won, at the end of the game, The rights related to that winning role shall be extinguished.
In the 23rd embodiment, when a winning number including a minor winning combination or a replay is won, it is set so that one of the replays or the minor winning combination always wins, and there is no chance of losing a prize. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is of course possible to provide a small winning combination ("PB≠1") that may be missed.

122 to 125 are diagrams showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc.
First, the winning numbers are drawn in the winning combination lottery means 61. The winning numbers include, for example, winning numbers "1" to "41" as shown in FIG. 126, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 126, for example, when the winning number "1" is won, the condition device "Replay A" corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number "1" becomes operational.
Further, for example, when the winning number "25" is won, the condition device "1BB" corresponding to the accessory condition device number "1" becomes operable.

Here, as shown in FIG. 138, which will be described later, the RWM 53 includes a storage area (address "F0A9(H)") that can store winning and replay condition device numbers, and a storage area that can store accessory condition device numbers. (address “F0AA(H)”). For example, assume that the winning number "11" is won when the accessory is not activated. In this case, by storing the value of the winning number ("11") in the address "F0A9(H)", the winning and replay condition device number can be updated. Further, for example, assume that the winning number "25" is won when the accessory is not activated. In this case, the value obtained by performing a predetermined operation on the value of the winning number (in the 23rd embodiment, "1" which is the value obtained by subtracting "24" from the winning number) is stored in the address "F0AA(H)". This makes it possible to update the accessory condition device number.

In the 23rd embodiment, the winning number won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 is compared with "25", and if it is determined that it is less than "25", the winning number is written to the address "F0A9 (H)". Make it memorizable. In addition, if it is determined that it is not less than "25", the accessory condition device number can be derived from the winning number by a predetermined calculation (as described above, in the 23rd embodiment, "24" is subtracted). Control processing is performed to enable storage of the accessory condition device number at the address "F0AA(H)". In particular, as in the 23rd embodiment, this is an effective derivation method when the total number of accessory condition device numbers "17" is smaller than the total number of winning and replay condition device numbers "24". .

FIG. 122 shows an accessory (especially 1BB or RB in the 23rd embodiment) condition device.
For example, the 1BB condition device corresponding to the accessory condition device number "1" is an accessory condition device that becomes operational when 1BB is won. When this 1BB condition device is activated, it becomes possible to win the winning combination of 1BB.
In addition, the remarks column in FIG. 122 shows the operation end conditions of the accessory condition device. The 1BB condition device continues until the number of acquired medals exceeds 170, and when the number of acquired medals exceeds 170, the operation termination condition of the 1BB condition device is satisfied and the operation of the 1BB condition device is terminated.
Similarly, the RBA condition device to RBP condition device all end based on 12 games, 8 wins, or the end of operation of the 1BB condition device.

123 to 125 show winning and replay condition devices. Among the winning and replay condition device numbers, “1” to “9” are condition device numbers related to replay, and “10” to “24” are condition device numbers related to small winnings.
For example, when the replay B condition device corresponding to winning and replay condition device number "2" is activated, the winning combination includes replays 01 and 02, so replays 01 and 02 can win. Note that when a condition device is activated, not all of the winning combinations corresponding to that condition device can be won; for example, when the Replay B condition device is activated, Replay 02 can be won in the 23rd embodiment. becomes.
Therefore, in the 23rd embodiment, even if multiple types of replays are won multiple times, only one of the replays wins. Similarly, as will be described later, multiple types of small winning combinations may be won over and over again, but even in this case, only one of the small winning combinations can be won (no duplicate winnings).

When the Replay A condition device corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number “1” is activated, only Replay 01 can win a prize. The symbol combinations of Replay 01 are the winning numbers “018” to “021” in FIG. 117. Therefore, "Replay" - "Blue BAR/Black BAR/Red 7/Special Map Top" - "Bell A" stops on the valid line. When the middle reel 31 stops and "Blue BAR/Black BAR/Red 7/Top Top" stops on the active line (middle middle row), "Replay" stops on the middle upper row. Further, when the right reel 31 stops and "Bell A" stops on the active line (lower right row), "Replay" stops on the upper right row. Therefore, when the symbol combination of Replay 01 stops on the valid line (Replay 01 wins), "Replay" - "Replay" - "Replay" (upper replay) stops on the upper line (invalid line).

When the Replay B condition device is activated, Replay 02 becomes a winning prize. The symbol combination of Replay 02 is the winning number "022" in FIG. 117. Therefore, "replay" - "replay" - "replay" (replay downward to the right) stops at the effective line.
When the Replay C condition device is activated, Replay 03 or 10 can be won. Here, the reason why "weak cherry" is written in the notes column is because it can be a stopped form of a so-called square cherry ("cherry" is stopped at the lower left row). Note that the lower left row is not an effective line. The symbol on the left reel 31 of Replay 03 is "Bell A", but when the number 4 "Bell A" on the left reel 31 is stopped on the active line (upper left row) in Fig. 114, the symbol on the left reel 31 is "Cherry". stops at the lower left (invalid line).

In the Replay D1 condition device, the reason why "Strong Cherry 1" is written in the remarks column is because it is possible for the cherry to become a so-called middle cherry ("cherry" stopped at the middle left row). Note that the middle left row is not a valid line. The same applies to "strong cherry 2" of the replay D2 condition device and "strong cherry 3" of the replay D3 condition device.
When the Replay D1 condition device is activated, the winning combination Replay 03, 04, or 10 can be won. Among these, the symbol combination of Replay 04 is "Black BAR" - "Red 7/Cherry" - "Replay/Bell B" as shown in the winning numbers "027" to "030" in FIG. 117. Then, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the No. 3 "Black BAR" is stopped on the effective line (upper left row), and the No. 2 "Cherry" is stopped on the middle left row.

Furthermore, when the Replay D2 condition device is activated, Replays 02, 03, 04, or 10, which are winning combinations, can be won, and when the Replay D3 condition device is activated, Replays 03, 04, 05, or 10 can be won.
Then, when the Replay D2 condition device or the Replay D3 condition device is activated, and Replay 04 wins, the second “cherry” stops at the middle left row when the left reel 31 stops, similarly to when the Replay D1 condition device is activated.

When the Replay E condition device is activated, Replay 06, which is the winning combination, can be won. The symbol combination of Replay 06 is "Watermelon" - "Replay/Watermelon" - "Red 7/Watermelon/Special Figure Top/Black BAR" as shown in FIG. 117. Here, since the "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 has "PB=1", the "Watermelon" always stops on the active line. Further, the “Watermelon” on the middle and right reels 31 has “PB≠1”, but if you press the “Watermelon” with your eyes, the “Watermelon” can be stopped on the active line.
When the Replay F condition device is activated, Replay 07, which is the winning combination, can be won.

When the Replay G condition device is activated, the winning combination Replay 08 or 09 can be won. Here, in order to win Replay 08, when the left reel 31 stops, press the button so that the number 8 "Special Map Top" stops at the upper left row, and when the right reel 31 stops, the number 16 " If you press your eyes so that "Replay" stops at the lower right row, Replay 08 will win, and "Tokuzu Upper" and "Tokuzu Lower" will stop at the upper left and middle left rows. Furthermore, "Tokuzu Upper" and "Tokuzu Lower" also stop at the upper right row and the middle right row. This stop type is referred to as the "strongest cherry" in the 23rd embodiment.

In FIG. 124, when the small winning combination A1 condition device to the small winning combination A6 condition device are activated, any of the small winning combinations 01 to 06 or small winning combinations 13 to 24 included in the winning combination can be won.
Here, when the small winning combination A1 condition device to the small winning combination A6 condition device are activated during the 1BB game (1BB operation), and the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order, the 15-card winning combination (included in the winning combination) If any of the minor winning combinations 01 to 06) is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in an incorrect pressing order (a pressing order other than the correct pressing order), a 3-card winning combination (minor winning combinations 13 to 06 included in the winning combination) is activated. 24) will win the prize.
On the other hand, when the accessory is not activated, there is no correct pressing order when the small win A1 condition device to the small win A6 condition device are activated. When the accessory is not activated, when the minor winning combination A1 condition device to the minor winning combination A6 condition device are activated, a 3-card winning combination is won even if they are pressed in the order.

Note that the small win A1 condition device to the small win A6 condition device can only operate when RB is not activated while 1BB is in operation. Therefore, the small win A1 condition device to the small win A6 condition device operate during the general game of the 1BB game (other than the RB game).
Here, the relationship between the small winning combinations A1 to A6 condition devices and the correct pressing order during 1BB operation is as follows.
Small role A1 condition device: 123 (left middle right)
Small role A2 condition device: 132 (left and right middle)
Small role A3 condition device: 213 (middle left and right)
Small role A4 condition device: 231 (middle right left)
Small role A5 condition device: 312 (right left center)
Small role A6 condition device: 321 (right middle left)

For example, when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated during a 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct pressing order of "123", in order to win the small winning combination 01, "Watermelon" - " Cherry” - Stop “Bell A”. As a result, "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell A" are stopped on the lower line (invalid line).
In addition, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect pressing order "132", when the left first stop, the correct pressing order is at this point, so when the left reel 31 stops, a "watermelon" (small role) is displayed on the active line. 01) is stopped. Next, at the second stop on the right, since it is the order of incorrect pressing at this point, out of the winning combinations 13 to 17, the small winning combination 17 whose left reel 31 is "Watermelon" is stopped on the active line. That is, when the second right stop is made, the "replay" is stopped at the lower right stage. Furthermore, when the middle third stop occurs, "Red 7/Replay" is stopped at the middle middle stage.

On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect pressing order "213" or "231", when the middle first stop occurs, it becomes the incorrect pressing order at this point, so for example, the small winning combination 14 is stopped on the active line. Therefore, when the middle first stop occurs, "Bell A" is stopped at the middle middle stage. Further, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "Replay" is stopped at the upper left stage, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A/Bell B" is stopped at the lower right stage.
In addition, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect pressing order "312" or "321", when the right first stop occurs, the incorrect pressing order is reached at this point, so for example, the small winning combination 17 is stopped on the active line. Therefore, when the first stop is made on the right, the "replay" is stopped on the lower right. Furthermore, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "Watermelon" is stopped on the upper left row, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Red 7/Replay" is stopped on the middle row.

As described above, when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated during the 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order "123", a 15 winning combination is won. On the other hand, when the 1BB game is not in progress, that is, in the 23rd embodiment, when the accessory is not activated (1BB not inside and 1BB inside), even if the small role A1 condition device is activated, the correct answer is There is no pressing order. Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "123" when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated when the accessory is not activated, a 3-card winning combination is won (without a 15-card winning combination). Examples of the winning three-card winning combination include the small winning combination 14 or 17 with "PB=1".

The above is the same for the minor winning combination A2 to minor winning combination A6 condition devices (condition device numbers "11" to "15").
When the small winning combination A2 condition device is activated during a 1BB game, if the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct pressing order "132", the small winning combination 02 which is a 15-card winning combination will be won, and the winning combination other than "132" in the pressing order will be won. When the stop switches 42 are operated in the order in which they are pressed, any three-card combination included in the winning combination is won.
Furthermore, when the small winning combination A2 condition device is activated when the accessory is not activated, any 3-card combination included in the winning combination will be played regardless of the pressing order (because there is no correct pressing order). Let them win.

When the small winning combination A3 condition device is activated during a 1BB game, if the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct pressing order "213", the small winning combination 03, which is a 15-card winning combination, will be won, and the winning combination other than the pressing order "213" will be won. When the stop switches 42 are operated in the order in which they are pressed, any three-card combination included in the winning combination is won.
Furthermore, when the small winning combination A3 condition device is activated when the accessory is not activated, any 3-card combination included in the winning combination will be played regardless of the pressing order (because there is no correct pressing order). Let them win.

When the small winning combination A4 condition device is activated during the 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct pressing order "231", the small winning combination 04, which is a 15-card winning combination, will be won, and the winning combination other than "231" in the pressing order will be won. When the stop switches 42 are operated in the order in which they are pressed, any three-card combination included in the winning combination is won.
Furthermore, if the small winning combination A4 condition device is activated when the accessory is not activated, any three-card combination included in the winning combination will be played regardless of the pressing order (because there is no correct pressing order). Let them win.

When the small winning combination A5 condition device is activated during a 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct pressing order "312", the small winning combination 05, which is a 15-card winning combination, will be won, and the winning combination other than "312" in the pressing order will be won. When the stop switches 42 are operated in the order in which they are pressed, any three-card combination included in the winning combination is won.
Furthermore, if the small winning combination A5 condition device is activated when the accessory is not activated, no matter which pressing order (because there is no correct pressing order), any 3-card winning combination included in the winning combination will be played. Let them win.

When the small winning combination A6 condition device is activated during a 1BB game, if the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct pressing order "321", the small winning combination 06, which is a 15-card winning combination, will be won, and the winning combination other than the pressing order "321" will be won. When the stop switches 42 are operated in the order in which they are pressed, any three-card combination included in the winning combination is won.
Furthermore, when the small winning combination A6 condition device is activated when the accessory is not activated, any 3-card combination included in the winning combination will be played regardless of the pressing order (because there is no correct pressing order). Let them win.

In addition, inside the SRB during 1BB operation, the small win B1 condition device to the small win B6 condition device (condition device numbers "16" to "21") were activated, and the stop switches 42 were operated in the correct pressing order. When a 15-card winning combination (any of the small winning combinations 07 to 12 included in the winning combination) is won, and the stop switch 42 is operated in an incorrect pressing order (a pressing order other than the correct pressing order), 1 A winning combination (any of the small winning combinations 25 to 33 included in the winning combination) wins a prize.
On the other hand, when the accessory is not activated, and when the SRB is not inside the 1BB operation, there is no correct pressing order when the small role B1 condition device to the small role B6 condition device are activated. When the accessory is not activated, and when the SRB is not inside when 1BB is activated, when the small role B1 condition device to the minor role B6 condition device are activated, one winning combination will be won even if they are pressed in the order of pressing.
Note that the winning and replay condition device numbers "16" to "21" are drawn only when RB is not operating while 1BB is operating.

When the small win B1 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct answer press order "123", "Watermelon" is placed on the active line in order to win the small win 07. ” - “Cherry” - “Bell B” is stopped. As a result, "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell B" are stopped on the lower line (invalid line).
In addition, when the small role B1 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect press order of "132", at the time of the left first stop, at this point the correct press order Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the "watermelon" (a symbol forming the small winning combination 07) is stopped on the active line. Next, at the time of the second right stop, since the order of incorrect pressing is at this point, the small winning combination 28, for example, where the left reel 31 is "Watermelon" among the winning combinations 25, 26, and 28, is stopped on the active line. That is, at the second stop on the right, "Bell A" is stopped at the lower right stage. Furthermore, when the middle third stop occurs, "Bell B/Watermelon" is stopped at the middle middle stage.

On the other hand, when the small role B1 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect release order of "213" or "231", at the time of the middle first stop, at this point Since this is an incorrect pressing order, for example, in order to stop the small winning combination 25 on the active line, when the first stop is made in the middle, "Blue BAR/Black BAR/Red 7/Tokuzu Top" is stopped in the middle middle row. Furthermore, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "Replay" is stopped at the upper left stage, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Black BAR/Red 7/Watermelon/Special Figure Top" is stopped at the lower right stage.
In addition, when the small role B1 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect release order of "312" or "321", when the right first stop occurs, at this point Since this is an incorrect pressing order, for example, the small winning combination 25 is stopped on the active line in the same way as above.

In addition, in a game in which the small winning combination B1 to B6 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and while the SRB is not inside, there is no correct answer pressing order. Therefore, for example, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the press order "123" when the small winning combination B1 condition device is activated during a 1BB game and SRB is not inside, (without winning the small winning combination 07 which is a 15-card winning combination) ) Win a prize for one card. Examples of the winning one-card winning combination include small winning combinations 25 and 28 where "PB=1".
Similarly, when the 1BB game is not in progress, that is, when the accessory is not activated (1BB not inside and 1BB inside), there is no correct answer pressing order in the game in which the small role B1 condition device is activated. Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "123" when the small win B1 condition device is activated when the accessory is not activated, the small win 07 ( Instead of winning a 15-card winning combination (for example, a small winning combination of 25 or 28 with "PB=1"), a 1-card winning combination (for example, a small winning combination of 25 or 28 with "PB=1") is allowed to win.

The above also applies to the operation of the small win B2 condition device to the small win B6 condition device.
When the small winning combination B2 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order "132", the small winning combination 08, which is a 15-piece winning combination, is won, and the correct pressing order When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "132", the small winning combination 08 is not won, but any one-card winning combination included in the winning winning combination is won.
Furthermore, if the small winning B2 condition device is activated during a 1BB game and SRB is not inside or when the accessory is not activated, no matter which pressing order (because there is no correct pressing order), the small winning 08 To win any one-card combination included in the winning combination without winning the winning combination.

When the small winning combination B3 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order "213", the small winning combination 09, which is a 15-card winning combination, is won, and the correct pressing order When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "213", the small winning combination 09 is not won, but any one-card winning combination included in the winning winning combination is won.
Furthermore, if the small winning B3 condition device is activated during a 1BB game and SRB is not inside or the accessory is not activated, no matter which pressing order is used (because there is no correct pressing order), the small winning B3 condition device is activated. To win any one-card combination included in the winning combination without winning the winning combination.

When the small winning combination B4 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct pressing order "231", the small winning combination 10, which is a 15-card winning combination, is won, and the correct pressing order When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "231", the small winning combination 10 is not won, but any one-card winning combination included in the winning winning combination is won.
Furthermore, if the small winning B4 condition device is activated during a 1BB game and the SRB is not inside or the accessory is not activated, no matter which pressing order (because there is no correct pressing order), the small winning 10 To win any one-card combination included in the winning combination without winning the winning combination.

When the small winning combination B5 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order "312", the small winning combination 11, which is a 15-card winning combination, is won, and the correct pressing order When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "312", the small winning combination 11 is not won, but any one-card winning combination included in the winning winning combination is won.
Furthermore, if the small winning B5 condition device is activated during a 1BB game and the SRB is not inside or the accessory is not activated, no matter which pressing order (because there is no correct pressing order), the small winning 11 To win any one-card combination included in the winning combination without winning the winning combination.

When the small winning combination B6 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order "321", the small winning combination 12, which is a 15-card winning combination, is won, and the correct pressing order When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "321", the small winning combination 12 is not won, but any one-card winning combination included in the winning winning combination is won.
Furthermore, if the small winning B6 condition device is activated during a 1BB game and SRB is not inside or when the accessory is not activated, no matter which pressing order (because there is no correct pressing order), the small winning 12 To win any one-card combination included in the winning combination without winning the winning combination.

The small role C condition device is a condition device that becomes operable when the winning number "22" is won during RB operation (gaming). When the small winning combination C condition device is activated, any one of the small winning combinations 01 to 12 (15 pieces) included in the winning winning combination is won. In this case, which of the 15 winning combinations to win is arbitrary, but for example, the small winning combinations to be won may be varied depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.
The small win D condition device is a condition device that becomes operable when the winning number "23" is won during the RB operation. When the small winning combination D condition device is activated, any one of the small winning combinations 13 to 24 (3-card winning combination) included in the winning combination is won. In this case, which three-card winning combination is selected arbitrarily, but for example, the small winning combination may be changed depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.
The small win E condition device is a condition device that becomes operable when the winning number "24" is won during RB operation. When the small winning combination E condition device is activated, any one of the small winning combinations 25 to 34 (one-card winning combination) included in the winning winning combination is won. In this case, which one-card winning combination can be won is arbitrary, but for example, the small winning combinations to be won can be varied depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.

126 to 130 show the winning probabilities determined by the lottery table when the winning numbers are drawn by the winning combination lottery means 61, and show the number of winning numbers for each RT (gaming state) and each set value. This is a diagram (number table). Dividing the numerical values shown in FIGS. 126 to 130 by "65536" gives the probability of winning. For example, in FIG. 126, the winning number "1" is set to "4338" in common to all settings, so the probability of winning is "4338/65536."
In FIGS. 126 to 130, for example, if the winning number "1" in FIG. 126 is won, the winning and replay condition device number "1", that is, the replay A condition device becomes operational, and replay 01 becomes possible to win.

Note that the setting value refers to a value displayed on the setting value display LED 73 in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, and is different from the information stored in the RWM 53 as setting value information. Specifically, the setting value information stored in the RWM 53 is in the range of "0" to "5" in the twenty-third embodiment. For example, when the setting value information stored in the RWM 53 is "0", the value displayed on the setting value display LED 73 is "1", and when the setting value information stored in the RWM 53 is "1", the value displayed on the setting value display LED 73 is "1". The value displayed on the setting value display LED 73 is "2", and when the setting value information stored in the RWM 53 is "2", the value displayed on the setting value display LED 73 is "3", and the value displayed on the RWM 53 is "2". When the stored setting value information is "3", the value displayed on the setting value display LED 73 is "4", and when the setting value information stored in the RWM 53 is "5", the value displayed on the setting value display LED 73 The value displayed is "6".

Moreover, the winning combination lottery means 61 executes the winning lottery drawing using the winning combination lottery table. For example, in FIG. 126, winning number 1 (Replay A) indicates that the setting number "4338" is common from setting 1 to setting 6, but in such a case, winning number 1 (Replay A) ) is a winning number, one number "4338" is stored in the winning combination lottery table. On the other hand, when at least some of the numbers are different between settings 1 and 6, such as winning number 3 (replay C), the numbers that correspond to the set values are stored in the winning combination lottery table.
Specifically, in the winning lottery table, for example, "940 (D)" is stored in the 2-byte addresses "XXX0 (H)" and "XXX1 (H)" corresponding to setting 1, and "940 (D)" is stored in the 2-byte addresses of the corresponding addresses "XXX2 (H)" and "XXX3 (H)", and the addresses "XXX4 (H)" and "XXX5 (H)" corresponding to setting 3 are stored. "940(D)" is stored in the 2-byte address of ". In addition, "950 (D)" is stored in the 2-byte addresses "XXX6 (H)" and "XXX7 (H)" corresponding to setting 4, and "950 (D)" is stored in the 2-byte addresses "XXX8 (H)" and "XXX8 (H)" corresponding to setting 5. “950(D)” is stored in the 2-byte address of “XXX9(H)”. Furthermore, "960(D)" is stored in the 2-byte address of address "XXXA(H)" and "XXXB(H)" corresponding to setting 6. Note that the above “XXX0(H)” to “XXXB(H)” indicate consecutive arbitrary addresses in the ROM 54.

For example, when the setting value information is "1" (that is, setting 2), the address "XXX0 (H)" is used as the reference address, the value obtained by doubling the setting value information is used as the offset value, and the address "XXX2 (H)" is set. and "940 (D)" stored in "XXX3 (H)", compare and calculate the random number and the set number "940 (D)", and check whether winning number 3 (Replay C) has been won. Decide whether or not. In the above example, since the digit is 2 bytes, the value obtained by doubling the setting value information is used as the offset value. However, if the arranging number is 1 byte, the setting value information is doubled. It can be used as an offset value without having to do so. In this way, by using a specific address as a reference address and setting the setting value information or a value obtained by doubling the setting value information as an offset value, it is possible to obtain a numeric value corresponding to the setting value information. .

In a game where the special winning combination (1BB) has not been won, if the winning number "25" is won in the current game and the 1BB condition device is activated, if the winning combination 1BB does not win, The winnings will be carried over to the next game. From the next game onward (within 1BB), the winning number "25" will not be drawn, but the winning numbers "1" to "21" will be drawn. When any of the winning numbers "1" to "21" is won within 1BB, the condition device corresponding to the winning number won in the current game becomes operable, and the accessory condition device does not operate. On the other hand, if none of the winning numbers "1" to "21" are won within 1BB, the 1BB condition device related to 1BB that carries over the winning will become operational, and 1BB will be able to win. .

The same applies to RB, which is another special role.
In a game when RB is not won in a 1BB game, in a game in which one of the winning numbers "26" to "41" is won in the current game and the RBA~RBP condition device is activated, the winning combination RBA~ If the RBP does not win, the winning will be carried over to the next game. Then, from the next game onwards (within SRB), the winning numbers "26" to "41" will not be drawn, but the winning numbers "10" to "21" will be drawn. When any of the winning numbers "10" to "21" is won within the SRB, the condition device corresponding to the winning number won in the current game becomes operable, and the RBA to RBP condition devices do not operate. On the other hand, if none of the winning numbers "10" to "21" are won within the SRB, the RBA-RBP condition device related to RBA-RBP that carries over the winning becomes activated and the winning number is not won. RBA to RBP that have been entered can win prizes.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a number table for non-RT. In non-RT, 1BB is drawn for the accessory (winning number "25"), but RB is not drawn. RB is drawn at the time of 1BB operation (during 1BB game) which will be described later.
In addition, in non-RT, winning numbers "1" to "9" corresponding to replay wins are all subject to lottery. In addition, the winning numbers "10" to "21" corresponding to the winning of the small role will be selected for lottery. Note that the winning numbers "10" to "27" are eligible for lottery in any RT (gaming state) except when the RB is activated.
Winning numbers "22" to "24" are eligible for lottery only when the RB is activated during a 1BB game, which will be described later, and are not eligible for lottery in other RTs (gaming states).

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a number table in RT1. The difference between RT1 and non-RT is that the winning number "9" (Replay G) is not drawn. Other than that, it is the same as non-RT.
In addition, in both non-RT and RT1, during 1BB non-internal, 1BB (winning number "25") is drawn according to the numbers shown in Figures 126 and 127, respectively, and after winning the winning number "25" In non-RT and RT1 (within 1BB), 1BB (winning number "25") is not drawn. That is, the number "19930" shown in FIGS. 126 and 127 becomes "0" after winning 1BB.

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a numeral table for non-internal RB (SRB) during 1BB operation. The time when RB is not inside while 1BB is in operation corresponds to the time when the RB is not inside the 1BB game.
In this gaming state, winning number "25" (1BB) is not drawn, but all RBs (winning numbers "26" to "41") are drawn. In this embodiment, all RBs are set to the same number "1807" in all setting values.
Furthermore, replays are not drawn when 1BB is in operation and is not inside the RB. Therefore, the numbers set for the winning numbers "1" to "9" are set to "0".
As with the non-RT and RT1 mentioned above, the winning numbers "10" to "21" are selected for the lottery for the small prize. In addition, the winning numbers "22" to "24" corresponding to small winning combinations during the RB game are not drawn.

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a table of numbers inside the RB (SRB) during 1BB operation. RB inside while 1BB is in operation corresponds to RB non-inside while 1BB is in operation, and corresponds to the normal game of 1BB game.
While RB is in operation, RB is not drawn in addition to 1BB, so the numbers set for winning numbers "25" to "41" are all "0".
Furthermore, when the RB is inside when 1BB is in operation, the winning number "1" (Replay A) is drawn, unlike when the RB is not inside when 1BB is in operation.
FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a number table when 1BB is in operation and RB is in operation. While 1BB is operating and RB is operating, only winning numbers "22" to "24" are drawn.

The ball payout rate in each of the above gaming states will be explained.
There are various definitions of the ball output rate, but in the 23rd embodiment, the ball output rate is defined as "number of out coins/number of in coins".
Here, the "number of coins in" refers to the number of coins bet, and in the twenty-third embodiment, it is "3" in any gaming state.
Further, the "number of coins out" means the number of coins to be paid out, and in terms of design, refers to the expected value of the number of coins to be paid out. For example, in a game where the instruction function is activated (a game that notifies the correct pressing order), when the winning numbers "10" to "21" are won (when the pressing order bell is won), the high bell (in the 23rd embodiment) 15 bells) will be awarded.
Specifically, when the number of coins in is "3" and the number of coins out is "1", the ball payout rate is approximately "0.33".
Further, when the number of coins in is "3" and the number of coins out is "3", the ball output rate is "1".
Furthermore, when the number of coins in is "3" and the number of coins out is "9", the ball output rate is "3".

Also, when the winning numbers "10" to "15" are won when the accessory (1BB) is not activated, a 3-card winning combination will always be won, and when the accessory (1BB) is not activated, the winning number "16" to "21" is won. In this case, one hand always wins the prize.
Furthermore, during a 1BB game, when the RB is not internal and is not AT (a game in which the instruction function does not operate), when winning numbers "10" to "15" are won, there is a probability of "1/6" that the high bell ( It is assumed that 15 bells) will win a prize, and a cheap bell (3 bells) will win a prize with a probability of 5/6. The reason why "1/6" is set is to set the probability of winning when the stop switch 42 is operated at random since there are six options in the pressing order. Furthermore, when the winning numbers "16" to "21" are won during a 1BB game when the RB is not internal and when the winning number is not AT, one bell is always won.

Furthermore, during a 1BB game, when the RB is inside and there is no AT (a game in which the instruction function does not work), when winning numbers "10" to "15" are won, there is a probability of "1/6" that the high bell (15 It is assumed that the low bell (3 bells) wins the prize with a probability of "5/6". In addition, when the winning numbers "16" to "21" are won during 1BB gaming and when the RB is not AT, the high bell (15 bells) will be won with a probability of "1/6" and the winning number will be "5". It is assumed that a cheap bell (one bell) will win with a probability of ``/6''.

Furthermore, when the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the first method is to set the number of out pieces in the current game to ``0'' and the number of in pieces in the next game to ``0''. A second method is to set the number of coins out in the current game to "3" and the number of coins in for the next game to be "3". In the example below, the latter is used for calculation.
Furthermore, although the ball payout rate differs depending on settings 1 to 6, the ball payout rate will be calculated using setting 1 as an example below.

In non-RT, the total number of winning numbers "1" to "9" corresponding to replay winnings is "8982".
Further, the total number of winning numbers "10" to "15" corresponding to the winning of the small winning combination A group is "16800".
Furthermore, the total number of winning numbers "16" to "21" corresponding to the winning of the small winning group B is "19824".
In the non-RT gaming state, games with winning numbers "10" to "15" always win a 3-card combination, and games with winning numbers "16" to "21" always win a 1-card combination.
Therefore, the expected value of the number of coins paid out per game is
3 x (8982/65536) + 3 x (16800/65536) + 1 x (19824/65536)
≒1.483 (sheets)
becomes.
In addition, the ball payout rate is
1.483/3≒0.494
becomes.

Next, while 1BB is in operation and RB is not inside, the ball payout rate is calculated separately for AT time and non-AT time.
First, during AT, games in which winning numbers "10" to "15", which correspond to the winnings of group A, win will result in a payout of 15 coins, and games in which winning numbers "16" to "21" will win, will pay out 15 coins. One coin will be paid out.
Therefore, the expected value of the number of coins paid out per game is
15 x (16800/65536) + 1 x (19824/65536)
≒4.148 (sheets)
becomes.
In addition, the ball payout rate is
4.148/3≒1.383
becomes.

In addition, when 1BB is active and RB is not inside, and when it is not AT, in a game where winning numbers "10" to "15" corresponding to the winning of the small role A group are won, there is a probability of "1/6" that 15 There is a probability of ``5/6'' that 3 pieces will be paid out. Furthermore, in games where winning numbers "16" to "21" are won, one coin will be paid out.
Therefore, the expected value of the number of coins paid out per game is
15 x (16800/65536) x (1/6) + 3 x (16800/65536) x (5/6) + 1 x (19824/65536)
≒1.584 (sheets)
becomes.
In addition, the ball payout rate is
1.584/3=0.528
becomes.

Next, during the 1BB operation and inside the RB, the ball payout rate is calculated separately for AT and non-AT times.
First, during AT, a game in which winning numbers "10" to "15", which correspond to the winning of small prize group A, will result in a payout of 15 coins, and a game in which winning numbers "16" to "21" will win, will result in a payout of 15 pieces. The payout will be 15 pieces.
Therefore, the expected value of the number of coins paid out per game is
15×(16800/65536)+15×(19824/65536)
≒8.383 (sheets)
becomes.
In addition, the ball payout rate is
8.383/3≒2.794
becomes.

In addition, when 1BB is active and inside RB, when non-AT, in a game where winning numbers "10" to "15" corresponding to the winning of small role A group are won, there is a probability of "1/6" that 15 coins will be won. The payout is 3 cards with a probability of "5/6". Furthermore, in a game where the winning numbers "16" to "21" are won, 15 coins will be paid out with a probability of "1/6", and 1 coin will be paid out with a probability of "5/6".
Therefore, the expected value of the number of coins paid out per game is
15 x (16800/65536) x (1/6) + 3 x (16800/65536) x (5/6) + 15 x (19824/65536) x (1/6) + 1 x (19824/65536) x (5/ 6)
≒2.290 (sheets)
becomes.
In addition, the ball payout rate is
2.290/3≒0.763
becomes.

Furthermore, during 1BB operation and RB operation, the ball payout rate is the same in non-AT and AT.
As shown in Figure 130, when 1BB is in operation and RB is in operation, the number set for winning number "22" is "3310" and the number of payouts is 15, and the number set for winning number "23" is "16230" and the number of payouts is 15. is 3 pieces, the number placed for the winning number ``24'' is ``19825'', and the number of payouts is 1 piece.
Therefore, the expected value of the number of coins paid out per game is
15 x (3310/65536) + 3 x (16230/65536) + 1 x (19825/65536)
≒1.803 (sheets)
becomes.
In addition, the ball payout rate is
1.803/3≒0.601
becomes.

In the above, when the ball payout rate exceeds "1", it is a game state in which the number of medals increases, and when the ball payout rate is less than "1", it is a game state in which the number of medals decreases.
Therefore, the ball output rate exceeds "1" (the number of medals increases) at the AT time when 1BB is in operation and the RB is not inside, and at the AT time when 1BB is in operation and the RB is inside.
On the other hand, when 1BB is not activated, when 1BB is activated and RB is not inside and it is not AT, when 1BB is activated and RB is not inside and it is not AT, and when 1BB is activated and RB is activated, the ball is not put out. The rate falls below "1" (medals decrease).
Therefore, the size relationship of the ball payout rate is as follows:
(1) When 1BB is not activated (ball output rate "0.494")
(2) During non-AT when 1BB is in operation and RB is not inside (ball output rate "0.528")
(3) When 1BB is operating and RB is operating (ball output rate "0.601")
(4) When 1BB is operating and RB is not at AT (ball output rate "0.763")
(5) AT when 1BB is in operation and RB is not inside (ball output rate "1.383")
(6) AT when 1BB is operating and RB is inside (ball output rate "2.794")
becomes.

From the above,
(1) When the RB is not activated during AT, the ball output rate exceeds "1", but during non-AT, the ball output rate does not exceed "1".
(2) Even during AT, if the RB is placed in a prize and the RB is activated, the ball payout rate will be less than "1".
(3) When 1BB is activated during non-AT, the ball output rate is higher than when 1BB is not activated during non-AT.
Therefore, for example, even if you win 1BB without having the right to execute AT and move on to the 1BB game, the ball payout rate will be less than "1" during both the general game and the RB game of the 1BB game, so the medal cannot be increased.
Furthermore, during non-AT, the ball payout rate is higher when 1BB is activated than when 1BB is not activated. However, since the AT lottery is executed only within 1BB (when 1BB is not activated), the AT lottery cannot be received when 1BB is activated. Therefore, when 1BB is activated during non-AT, the player is at a disadvantage.
Also, during AT (when 1BB is activated), if the RB is inside, a 15-piece winning combination can be won when the small winning combination B1 to B6 condition device is activated. Therefore, during AT (when 1BB is activated), when the RB is inside, it is more advantageous to the player than when the RB is not inside.
Although the above-mentioned ball output rate was calculated using setting 1, the magnitude relationship of the ball output rate is the same for other setting values (settings 2 to 6).

FIG. 131 is a diagram showing RT transition in the twenty-third embodiment.
Non-RT and RT1 correspond to when 1BB is not activated. Non-RT and RT1 continue until the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed. In the 23rd embodiment, the transition timing of RT is set when the symbol combinations are stopped and displayed, that is, when all the reels 31 are stopped (when all the reels 31 are stopped).
For non-RT and RT1, 1BB (winning number "25" mentioned above) is drawn, but if you win 1BB and it is only within 1BB, RT will not be transferred and the non-RT or RT1 will be maintained respectively. . Then, when the 1BB symbol combination is stopped and displayed in non-RT or RT1, the game shifts to 1BB operation and RB non-inside (general game of 1BB game).

When 1BB is activated and RT is not inside, RBA (winning number "26") to RBP (winning number "41") are drawn, as shown in FIG. 123 described above. Then, if any one of RBA to RBP is won and the winning RBA to RBP is not won, the game moves to RB when 1BB is activated. When 1BB is activated and RB is inside, this continues until the RB symbol combination that carries over winning is stopped and displayed. Then, when the RB symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to 1BB operation and RB operation (RB game).
In addition, if you win RB while 1BB is activated and RB is not inside, and the RB symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the relevant game, the RB will be won when 1BB is activated and RB is activated without moving to RB inside. Transition.

As shown in FIG. 122, the operation of the 1BB condition device (1BB game) ends when more than 170 medals are acquired. Additionally, if the RB condition device is activated while the 1BB condition device is in operation (when transitioning to RB gaming), the game will continue until 12 games or 8 wins, provided that the number of medals acquired does not exceed 170. do. When the RB condition device is activated, if 12 games or 8 winning combinations have been won, and more than 170 medals have not been acquired due to the activation of the 1BB condition device, the 1BB condition device is activated again. Transition occurs when the RB condition device is activated and the RB condition device is not activated. In addition, if more than 170 medals are acquired by operating the 1BB condition device, either when the 1BB condition device is activated and the RB condition device is not activated, or when the 1BB condition device is activated and the RB condition device is activated, (Even if 12 games or 8 wins have not been reached after the RB condition device is activated), the operation of the 1BB condition device is ended (ends the 1BB game).

After the operation of the 1BB condition device is completed, the process shifts to RT1. RT1 continues until 1400 games are played or until the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed. When moving to RT1, each game and the number of games are counted and stored in the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) of address "F00A(H)" which will be described later. When the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed in RT1, as described above, the state shifts to 1BB operation and RB non-internal state. On the other hand, when 1400 games are played in RT1, the game shifts to non-RT. Once the game shifts to non-RT, 1BB is won again, and when the 1BB operation ends, the game shifts to RT1.
In the 23rd embodiment, it is set that non-RTs are more likely to win AT than RT1. Therefore, when "1400" games are played in RT1, the so-called ceiling has been reached, and it becomes easier to win AT in non-RT.

Further, an advantageous section may end during RT1, and at the end of the advantageous section, the section type number, advantageous section clear counter, difference counter (MY counter), and data related to AT are cleared. On the other hand, the number of games played in RT1 (the above-mentioned "_CT_RT_GAME") is not cleared. For example, when the 1200th game of RT1 satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section, the next game will be the 1201st game of RT1 and the non-advantageous section.
Furthermore, in the 23rd embodiment, even if the game changes from RT1 to non-RT based on the completion of 1400 games, the main game state described below does not change. For example, in the 1400th game of RT1, if the player is staying in main game state 1, the next game will be non-RT and main game state 1.

However, when the conditions for transitioning to the main gaming state are satisfied in the 1400th game of RT1, the main gaming state will of course be transitioned.
For example, first, in main game state 1, when RT1 and the number of RT games are the 1400th game, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the advantageous section ends in the current game, and the next game is , becomes non-RT and main game state 0.
Second, if AT is won in the main game state 1 and RT1 and the number of RT games is the 1400th game, the next game will be non-RT and main game state 2 (AT precursor).

Here, the transition determination of the advantageous section in the twenty-third embodiment is performed in the non-advantageous section of the non-RT or RT1. In particular, in determining the transition to the advantageous section in the 23rd embodiment, the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is made when winning numbers "1" to "4" and "6" to "21" are won. ing. Therefore, in the non-advantageous section of non-RT or RT1, most players will move to the advantageous section after playing several games. Once an advantageous section is won, the transition to an advantageous section will not be determined unless the end conditions of the advantageous section are satisfied and the transition is made to a non-advantageous section. Note that the transition to the advantageous section may be determined by lottery based on winning numbers.

Further, the AT lottery of the twenty-third embodiment is executed in a non-RT or RT1 advantageous section. Furthermore, in the 23rd embodiment, carrying over the winning of 1BB is a condition for executing the AT lottery. In other words, the AT lottery is not executed when 1BB is not won and when 1BB is in operation. The AT lottery is executed when winning numbers "3" to "9" are won, which correspond to winnings in Rare Replay.
In FIG. 127 (RT1), the winning probability of AT is, for example,
The settings are as follows: Replay F condition device activated < Replay C condition device activated < Replay E condition device activated < Replay D (D1 to D3) condition device activated < Replay G condition device activated.

Specifically, for example, when the Replay F condition device is activated: AT winning probability 10-30%
Replay C condition device activated: AT winning probability 15-30%
Replay E condition device activated: AT winning probability 20-35%
Replay D1 condition device activated: AT winning probability 30-50%
Replay D2 condition device activated: AT winning probability 40-50%
Replay D3 condition device activated: AT winning probability 35-80%
Replay G condition device activated: AT winning probability 100%
It is set as follows. The reason why there is a range in each winning probability is that, for example, the winning probability is different depending on the performance stage (low probability, normal probability, high probability, etc.) when the conditional device is activated.

Furthermore, when a non-AT and RT1 player plays 1400 games and reaches a so-called ceiling and shifts to a non-RT, an AT is drawn with the winning probability as shown below, for example.
Replay F condition device activated: AT winning probability 90%
Replay C condition device activated: AT winning probability 90%
Replay E condition device activated: AT winning probability 90%
Replay D1 condition device activated: AT winning probability 75%
Replay D2 condition device activated: AT winning probability 80%
Replay D3 condition device activated: AT winning probability 85%
Replay G condition device activated: AT winning probability 100%
Therefore, it is set that non-RTs are more likely to win AT than RT1.

After winning AT in non-RT or RT1 and meeting the AT start conditions (for example, after the AT standby counter reaches "0"), the 1BB symbol combination is stopped and displayed and 1BB is in operation ( When the player shifts to 1BB gaming), it becomes possible to start AT. Then, AT continues until the 1BB operation ends.
In non-RT or RT1, even if you stop displaying the 1BB symbol combination without having the right to execute AT (without winning AT) and move to 1BB operation, when the push order bell is won (winning number "10" to "21") is not displayed (the instruction function does not operate).
On the other hand, if you are a non-RT or RT1, have the right to execute AT (winning AT), stop displaying the 1BB symbol combination after meeting the AT start conditions, and transition to 1BB operation. , AT is executed, and when a winning number having a correct pressing order is won, the correct pressing order for winning a 15-card winning combination (high bell) is displayed (instruction function is activated).
Note that even if you have the right to execute AT, in situations where the AT start conditions are not met (for example, when the AT precursor counter is greater than "0" or when the AT wait counter is greater than "0"). ), the 1BB symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and even if the 1BB is in operation, AT is not executed. That is, when the push order bell is won, the advantageous push order is not displayed (the instruction function does not operate).

Here, when the AT is in progress and the RB is not inside with 1BB in operation, when winning numbers "10" to "15" (small winning combination A1 to small winning combination A6) are won, the correct answer pressing order will be displayed. (activation of instruction function).
On the other hand, during AT, when 1BB is activated and RB is not inside, the instruction function does not operate even if winning numbers "16" to "21" (minor combinations B1 to B6) are won. As mentioned above, when 1BB is activated and RB is not inside, there is no correct pressing order when the small role B1 to B6 condition device is activated, and no matter which pressing order the stop switch 42 is operated, 1 piece is issued. This is because the winning combination wins (the 15-card winning combination does not win).
On the other hand, when the AT is in progress and the RB is in operation with 1BB in operation, if the winning numbers "10" to "15" (small winning combination A1 to small winning combination A6) are won, the correct answer pressing order will be displayed. (The instruction function is activated).
Similarly, when AT is in progress and the RB is in operation with 1BB in operation, if the winning numbers "16" to "21" (minor combinations B1 to B6) are won, the order in which the correct answers are pressed will be displayed (instruction function is activated).

In addition, the winning probability setting of RB during 1BB operation is "28912" in total, and the winning probability is about 44%. Therefore, when the 1BB is in operation, the RB is won early. However, during AT, the 23rd embodiment is based on the premise that the game is played without winning the winning RB. When the RB enters the RB during operation of 1BB, as shown in FIG. 129, the sum of the winning numbers "1" and "10" to "21" is "50424" at setting 1, for example. Therefore, there is a probability of approximately 23% that the player will not win, and in the game in which the game is not won, there is a possibility of winning the RB. In the game where the game is non-winning and has the possibility of winning RB, an effect is output to the player indicating that the game has a possibility of winning RB. When this effect is output, the player operates the stop switch 42 to stop the RB from winning. In addition, in a game in which there is a possibility of winning RB, the display on the main control board 50 side (for example, the number of wins display LED 78) does not notify the pressed position etc. (the instruction function does not operate).
If the RB wins during the 1BB operation, the game shifts to the RB game. As mentioned above, in the RB game, the ball payout rate is lower than in the general game of the 1BB game. In RB games, the game ends after 12 games or 8 winning combinations, and if the conditions for ending the 1BB game (obtaining more than 170 medals) are not met at that point, the player can play the regular 1BB game again. return.

FIG. 132 is a diagram showing the transition of the main game state in the twenty-third embodiment.
The main game states of the twenty-third embodiment include main game states 0 to 5.
Main gaming state 0 is a non-advantageous section, and main gaming state 1 to main gaming state 5 are advantageous sections.
Furthermore, main gaming states 2 and 3 are non-AT gaming states, although the AT is won. Moreover, the main game state 4 is a game state during AT. Furthermore, main gaming states 0, 1, and 5 are non-AT gaming states in which no AT is won.

The main game state 0 is a non-advantageous period and a non-AT state. In the main game state 0, an advantageous section lottery and an AT lottery are executed. In main game state 0, if the player wins in the advantageous section and is not AT, the main game state 1 is entered. On the other hand, in the main game state 0, when the player wins the advantageous section and wins the AT, the game shifts to the main game state 2.

In main game state 1, the advantageous section lottery is not executed, but the AT lottery is executed. When AT is won, the game shifts to main game state 2. Furthermore, when an AT is won, the number of AT sets is also randomly selected, and the number of AT sets determined by the lottery is stored in the AT set number counter. The "AT set number" is a counter that determines how many times main game state 4 (AT and 1BB operation) is to be executed.
On the other hand, in main game state 1, when the end conditions of the advantageous section are met without winning AT (for example, when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, or when you win the falling lottery of the advantageous section ), the state shifts to main game state 0.

Note that even if the conditions for transitioning to main gaming state 0 are satisfied in main gaming state 1, RT does not transition. For example, in RT1 and main game state 1, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, unless 1400 games have been reached in RT1, the next game will be in RT1 and main game state 0.
Main game state 2 is a game state that is an AT precursor. At the time of AT winning, the number of AT precursor games is determined, for example, by lottery, and is set in the AT precursor counter. Then, the main game state 2 is executed until the AT precursor counter becomes "0". When the AT precursor counter becomes "0", the game shifts to main game state 3.

Main game state 3 is a game state during AT preparation. Main game state 3 continues until the AT standby counter becomes "0" and the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed. Here, in the 23rd embodiment, when AT has multiple sets, when the main game state 4 (1BB operation and AT), which will be described later, is finished and the main game state 3 is returned, the 1BB symbol combination is quickly set. In order to prevent the number of balls from increasing too much, instead of displaying a stopped display and moving to main game state 4, in order to adjust (reduce) the number of balls to a certain extent and then move to main game state 4, A certain number of games in the main game state 3 is ensured. For example, when moving from main game state 4 to main game state 3, the AT standby counter is set to one of "1" to "8" (determined by lottery), and the game winning 1BB, small role, or Subtract "1" for games that do not win replays. Then, when the AT standby counter reaches "0", if it is within 1BB, notification is made to stop displaying the symbol combination of 1BB.
The reason why the ball output adjustment (reduction) is performed in the main game state 3 is that if a plurality of sets of AT are executed in succession, it is likely to result in non-conformity in the test shooting test. In the test shooting test, for example, the ball payout rate must be less than 220% over a given number of 400 games. Therefore, when performing multiple sets of AT, after one set of AT ends, there is a game period in which no AT is performed (a period in which ball output adjustment (reduction) is performed), and then the next set of AT is started. I'm trying to execute it.

Further, in the main game state 3, an AT set number counter addition lottery is executed. For example, when a rare combination (winning numbers "2" to "9") is won in main game state 3, an additional lottery for the number of AT sets is executed. When the AT set number addition lottery is won, the winning AT set number is added to the AT set number counter.
In main game state 3, when the AT standby counter reaches "0", in subsequent games where the winning and replay condition device number is "0", "Aim for the "Blue BAR"! ” is displayed as an image. In addition, “Aim for the “Blue BAR”! '' is displayed on the condition that the winning of 1BB has been carried over or the winning of 1BB has been carried over. This prompts the player to stop displaying the 1BB symbol combination.

In addition, "Aim for the "Blue BAR"! If the player is unable to stop and display the 1BB symbol combination in a game that displays the image "Aim for the Blue BAR" in subsequent games where the winning and replay condition device number is "0". ! ” is displayed as an image. Also, first, aim for the “Blue BAR”! After displaying the image "Aim for the 'Blue BAR'!", you may not perform the additional lottery for the number of AT sets. Even after the image is displayed, the AT set number addition lottery is executed until the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed. However, the winning probability of the additional lottery for the number of AT sets is set so that there is no benefit to the player even if the number of 1BB symbol combinations is intentionally extended. (The counter is set lower than before it reached 0).

When the AT standby counter becomes "0" in the main game state 3 and the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed, the main game state 4 is entered. Main game state 4 corresponds to 1BB operation (1BB game) and AT. Therefore, main game state 4 is executed until the number of acquired medals exceeds 170 (see FIG. 122). When the number of medals acquired exceeds 170 in main game state 4, it is determined that the end conditions for main game state 4 are satisfied, and the main game state is changed based on the values of the AT set number counter and ending counter at that time. 3 (AT preparation), main game state 5 (AT pullback), or main game state 0 (non-advantageous section).
The AT set number counter is decremented by "1" each time the main game state 4 ends. When the AT set number counter is "0", it is determined that the user does not have the right to execute AT, and when the AT set number counter is "1" or more, it is determined that the user has the right to execute AT.

The ending counter is set based on the values of the difference counter (also referred to as "MY counter") and the advantageous section clear counter, which have been described in other embodiments. The advantageous section must end when the difference counter reaches "2400 (D)" or when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches "1500" games. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the difference counter value exceeds "1951 (D)" or when the advantageous section clear counter value becomes less than "200 (D)", the ending counter is set to "2". do.
Then, when the ending counter is equal to or greater than "1" at the end of the main game state 4, "1" is subtracted. When the ending counter changes from "1" to "0", it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section (and AT) are satisfied, and the state shifts to main game state 0. With this setting, the advantageous section can be completed before the difference counter value reaches "2400 (D)" and before the advantageous section clear counter reaches "0".

On the other hand, when the main game state 4 ends, unless the AT set number counter is "1" or more and the ending counter changes from "1" to "0", the main game state 3 is entered. When the main game state 3 is entered, one AT standby counter value is determined by lottery from "0" to "8" and set.
Furthermore, when the AT set number counter is "0" at the end of main game state 4, the main game state 5 (AT pullback) is entered. The main game state 5 is non-AT, but when the AT is won in the main game state 5, the data of the number of coins acquired and the number of sets in the previous AT are taken over and the image is displayed on the image display device 23.

When the main game state 5 is entered, a predetermined value, for example, "50 (D)" is set in the AT pullback counter, and "1" is subtracted every game. The conditions for ending the main game state 5 are that the AT pullback counter becomes "0" or that the AT is won.
When the AT pullback counter reaches "0", the advantageous section clear counter value is determined, and when the advantageous section clear counter value is less than "600 (D)", the advantageous section is ended and the main game state is entered. Transition to 0. If the advantageous section clear counter value is less than "600 (D)", if you subsequently move to AT, there is a risk that you will not be able to continue AT due to the small number of remaining games in the advantageous section. , ends the advantageous section. As described above, if the player moves to the main game state 0, he will win the advantageous section again after playing several games, and at least move to the main game state 1.

On the other hand, when the AT pullback counter reaches "0" in main game state 5, if the advantageous section clear counter value is "600 (D)" or more, the main game is played without ending the advantageous section. Move to state 1. Then, the AT lottery continues.
Further, if the AT is won before the AT pullback counter reaches "0" in the main game state 5, the state shifts to the main game state 3. In addition, when AT is won in main game state 5, it may shift to main game state 2 (AT precursor), but in this embodiment, it shifts to main game state 3 (AT preparation). When the main game state 3 is entered, the AT standby counter value is randomly selected in the same manner as described above, and the value determined by the lottery is stored in the AT standby counter.

In addition, in main game state 4 or 5, when transitioning to main game state 0 before the advantageous section clear counter reaches "0", and in main game state 1, before the advantageous section clear counter reaches "0", the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0". When transitioning to the main game state 0 based on winning the fall lottery of the section, before the advantageous section clear counter management in Fig. 51 is executed, the advantageous section clear counter (regardless of the previous value) is A process of storing "1" is executed (preparation for ending the advantageous section shown in FIG. 150, which will be described later). As a result, when the advantageous section clear counter management shown in FIG. 51 is subsequently executed, the value of the advantageous section clear counter value before subtracting "1" is "1", and the value after subtracting "1" is "0". Therefore, it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, and the process proceeds from step S424 to step S435, where RWM clear processing based on the end of the advantageous section is executed.

In addition, even if the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed in main game state 0 or 1, it does not shift to main game state 4 (AT). Therefore, in this case, the main game state is 0 or 1, 1BB is activated and non-AT.

133 to 138 are diagrams showing main data according to the 23rd embodiment among the data stored in the RWM 53 in the 23rd embodiment. Note that the data shown in FIGS. 133 to 138 are part of the data, and in addition to the data shown, various data is stored in the RWM 53. In addition, in the following explanation (especially the RWM name), "#" refers to all of "1" (first reel 31) to "3" (third reel 31), and "#" refers to all of "1" to "3". It can refer to any one of the following.
Furthermore, the numerical value shown in parentheses in the "address" column indicates the number of bytes of that storage area.

In FIG. 133, the RT status number (_NB_RT_STS) at address "F009(H)" is a storage area that stores data indicating the current RT, and "0" is stored when it is a non-RT, and it is RT1. "1" is stored when the time is reached. As shown in FIG. 131, in the 23rd embodiment, there is a case where the transition from RT1 to non-RT occurs. For example, at the end of a game that has reached "1400" games in RT1, "0" is stored as the RT state number. be done.
Further, when the 1BB operation termination condition is satisfied and the transition is made to RT1, "1" is stored as the RT state number at the end of the game in which the 1BB operation termination condition is satisfied.

The number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) at address "F00A(H)" is a storage area of a counter for counting the number of games played in RT1. When the 1BB operation is completed and the transition is made to RT1, "1400 (D)" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is subtracted every time one game is played. When the number of RT games becomes "0", it is determined that the conditions for transition to non-RT are satisfied.
The accessory condition device number (_NB_CND_BNS) at the address "F00D(H)" is a storage area that stores data indicating the type of accessory currently in operation. The value stored here corresponds to the accessory condition device number shown in FIG. 122. For example, "0" is stored when the accessory is not activated, "1" is stored when 1BB is activated, and "2" is stored when RBA is activated.

The number of coins that can be obtained at the time of 1BB operation (_CT_BIG_PAT) at address "F00E (H)" is a storage area that stores the remaining number of coins that can be acquired at the time of 1BB operation (1BB game). When 1BB is activated, "170 (D)" is stored in this storage area. Then, while the 1BB is in operation (during the 1BB game), the value of this storage area is subtracted every time a medal is paid out. When the value of this storage area becomes "0" during 1BB operation, it is determined that the termination condition for 1BB operation is satisfied.

The number of games played when the RB is activated (_CT_BONUS_PLAY) at the address "F00F(H)" is a storage area that stores a counter that counts the number of games played when the RB is activated. When the RB is activated, "12 (D)" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is subtracted for every "1" game when the RB is activated. Then, when the number of games during the RB operation becomes "0", the condition for ending the RB operation is satisfied.
The number of winnings when the RB is activated (_CT_BONUS_WIN) at the address "F010(H)" is a storage area that stores a counter that counts the number of winnings when the RB is activated. When the RB is activated, "8 (D)" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is subtracted every time the winning combination is won when the RB is activated. Then, when the number of winnings during the RB operation becomes "0", the condition for ending the RB operation is satisfied.

Input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) at address "F012(H)" is a storage area that stores on/off of the signals of the start switch 41 and stop switch 42. In the current interrupt processing, the signals of the start switch 41 and (left, middle, right) stop switches 42 are judged, and when they are on, "1" is stored, and when they are off, "0" is stored. Input port level data A (previous) (_PT_IN_A_BK) at address "F015(H)" is a storage area that stores the value of input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) in the previous interrupt process.

Input port rise data A at address "F017(H)" is a storage area that stores whether or not the signals of the start switch 41 and stop switch 42 rise. When the level data of the previous interrupt processing is "0" and the level data of the current interrupt processing is "1", "1" is stored as the rising data. On the other hand, when the level data in the previous interrupt processing is "1" and the level data in the current interrupt processing is "1", the rising data is "0". Similarly, when the level data during the previous interrupt processing is "0" and the level data during the current interrupt processing is "0", the rising data is "0". Furthermore, when the level data of the previous interrupt processing is "1" and the level data of the current interrupt processing is "0", the rising data is "0" (in this case, the falling data is "0"). 1”).

In FIG. 134, the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR1) at address "F019(H)" is a storage area that stores which phase of the motor 32 related to the first reel is to be excited. In the first reel motor signal data, "1" corresponds to on (excitation is applied) and "0" corresponds to off (excitation is not applied). Based on the data stored in this storage area, the motor 32 is excited in port output processing during interrupt processing (step S462 in FIG. 151, which will be described later).
In this embodiment, the first reel corresponds to the left reel 31, the second reel corresponds to the middle reel 31, and the third reel corresponds to the right reel 31.

Further, among the first reel motor signal data, the D0 bit corresponds to φ1, the D1 bit corresponds to φ2, the D2 bit corresponds to φ3, and the D3 bit corresponds to φ4. One pulse data selected from a reel drive pulse table shown in FIG. 158, which will be described later, is stored in the first reel motor signal data. For example, as shown in FIG. 158, in the current interrupt process, when excitation is applied to turn on φ0 and φ3, pulse data “00001001(B)” at address “1100(H)” is changed to address “F019(H)”. H)".

The second reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR2) at address "F01A(H)" is a storage area that stores which phase of the motor 32 related to the second reel (middle reel 31) is to be excited. Its contents are the same as the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR1) at address "F019(H)".
Similarly, the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3) at address "F01B(H)" is a storage area that stores which phase of the motor 32 related to the third reel (right reel 31) is to be excited. Its contents are the same as the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR1) at address "F019(H)".

The first reel specified symbol position search waiting time (_TM2_TARPIC_WAIT) at address "F039 (H)" is a timer value for measuring the waiting time to start decelerating the first reel 31 when executing a standby effect. This is the storage area of At the start of execution of the standby performance, a predetermined value is stored in this storage area, and is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process. Then, on condition that the value of this storage area becomes "0", stopping of the first reel 31 is permitted. In other words, when the value of this storage area is not "0", the first reel 31 is kept rotating without being stopped.

Specifically, the reel performance execution timer table corresponding to the stopped symbol is selected from the reel performance execution timer tables 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 145, which will be described later. For example, in FIG. 144, which will be described later, if the stop symbol is determined to be "middle row black BAR" corresponding to standby effect number 1, the reel effect execution timer table corresponding to standby effect number 1 is set as shown in FIG. In the middle, reel performance execution timer table 1 (_TBL_TARPIC_TM1) is selected. In the reel performance execution timer table 1, the designated symbol position search waiting time for the first (left) reel 31 is "14112 (D)", so this value is stored in the address "F039 (H)". .
When a predetermined value is stored in the first reel designated symbol position search waiting time of address "F039 (H)", "1" is subtracted for each interrupt processing, and when the value becomes "0", the waiting time It is determined that the period has passed. Note that instead of subtracting "1" for each interrupt processing, a specification may be adopted in which "1" is subtracted for each plurality of interrupt processing.

Here, in the twenty-third embodiment, one rotation (rotation of 360 degrees) of the reel 31 at constant speed corresponds to "336" steps of the motor 32. Since the motor 32 is driven one step every two interrupts, one rotation (360 degree rotation) of the reel 31 at constant speed corresponds to "672" interrupts.
Therefore, in FIG. 145, for example, when the reel performance execution timer table 1 (_TBL_TARPIC_TM1) (standby performance 1) is selected, the left reel 31 first stops, and then the middle reel 31 rotates approximately once ( 670'' interrupt). Furthermore, after the middle reel 31 stops, the right reel 31 stops after approximately two rotations (after the "1340" interruption). Similarly, when another reel performance execution timer table is selected, after the first reel 31 stops, the second reel 31 stops after approximately one rotation or more than one rotation. Further, after the second reel 31 stops, the third reel 31 stops after rotating approximately two or more times.
Also, the time from when the second reel 31 stops to when the third reel 31 stops is longer than the time from when the first reel 31 stops until the second reel 31 stops. It has been set for a long time. This gives the player a sense of anticipation as to which symbol the third reel 31 will stop at, and gives the player time to enjoy watching the symbols of the reel 31 that stopped first and second (a sense of accomplishment). becomes possible.

The above address "F039 (H)" is the storage area for the first (left) reel specified symbol position search waiting time, but also for the second (middle) reel specified symbol position search waiting time and the third (right) reel. Addresses "F03B(H)" and "F03D(H)" are provided as storage areas for the designated symbol position search waiting time, respectively.
For example, when reel performance execution timer table 1 (_TBL_TARPIC_TM1) is selected in FIG. =14782(D)" is stored. Similarly, "14112+2010=16122(D)" is stored in the address "F03D(H)" as the third (right) reel designated symbol position search waiting time.

The waiting time (_TM2_WAIT) of address "F041 (H)" carries over the winning information of 1BB, and if the symbol combination of 1BB can be stopped and displayed at the second stop, in other words, the symbol combination of 1BB is ten-paisu. (when the symbols forming the 1BB symbol combination stop at the active line at the second stop and the third stop has not yet occurred), the storage area for the waiting time until the third stop operation is permitted. be.
Here, "Tenpai" means, taking 1BB as an example, when one reel 31 is rotating and the remaining two reels 31 are stopped, the symbols constituting the symbol combination of 1BB are (on the active line). When the symbols constituting the symbol combination of 1BB are stopped and displayed when the one reel is stopped, the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed (1BB wins). For example, when the one reel 31 is the right reel 31, this corresponds to a case where "Blue BAR (upper left row)" - "Blue BAR (middle middle row)" - "Rotating" appears on the active line.

This waiting time is not set in a state where the stop display of the 1BB symbol combination is permitted (main game state 3 and when the AT standby counter is "0"), but in other cases, the 1BB symbol combination The waiting time is set at the timing when the machine is full (at the second stop). The initial value is "896(D)". Then, the waiting time is subtracted for each interrupt processing, and when it becomes "0", the third stop operation is accepted.
Note that the interrupt cycle in the twenty-third embodiment is "1.117" ms.
Further, in the 23rd embodiment, it is set so that 1BB does not reach tenpai unless the game is such that the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB can be stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even in a game where the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB cannot be stopped and displayed, it may be possible to make 1BB tenpai. For example, it is possible to make 1BB tenpai in a game when a small winning combination is won. In a game where the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB cannot be stopped and displayed, it is also possible not to set the standby time even if 1BB is at tenpai.

"896 (D)" is set as the waiting time, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt, so the waiting time is about 1 second (1.117 x 896 = about 1000 ms) from the timing when the symbol combination of 1BB is tenpai. A process (a process in which the third reel 31 is not stopped even if the third stop switch 42 is operated; in other words, a process in which the stop operation of the third stop switch 42 is not accepted) is executed.
Note that one rotation (rotation of 360 degrees) of the reel 31 corresponds to "336" steps of the motor 32 in the twenty-third embodiment, as described above. Furthermore, in the 23rd embodiment, one step of the motor 32 corresponds to two interrupts (2.234 ms), and the time it takes for the motor 32 to drive ``336'' steps, in other words, the time it takes for the reel 31 to make one rotation, is: "2.234x336=750.624ms".
Therefore, the waiting time from the timing when the symbol combination of 1BB is full (approximately 1000 ms)>1 rotation time of reel 31 (approximately 751 ms)
It becomes.
By setting in this manner, it is possible to minimize the waiting time and prevent the player from winning 1BB due to an unexpected stop operation.

On the other hand, it is preferable to set the waiting time to, for example, the time required for the reel 31 to rotate four times (about 3 seconds) or less. For example, if the third reel 31 does not stop because the waiting time has not elapsed when the third stop switch 42 is operated, the player should be careful again to stop the third stop switch 42. This is because it is desirable that the waiting time has elapsed by the time the operation is attempted.

135 to 137, FIG. 135 shows data on the first reel 31, FIG. 136 shows data on the second reel 31, and FIG. 137 shows data on the third reel 31.
In FIG. 135, the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) at address “F04D(H)” is a storage area that stores data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 related to the first reel 31. In this embodiment, the excitation update timing is set to occur once every two interrupt processes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, excitation may be updated for each interrupt process. If it is possible to update the excitation for each interrupt process, the cycle of the interrupt process may be set to every "2.235" ms. When excitation is performed once in multiple interrupt processes as in this embodiment, the D7 bit is assigned as a flag for determining whether it is the excitation update timing. In this embodiment, when the D7 bit is "1", it indicates the de-energized update timing, and when it is "0", it indicates the excitation update timing.
The D7 bit of this data is determined for each interrupt process, and when it is "0", it is updated to "1", and when it is "1", it is updated to "0".

Furthermore, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 represent the reel drive state number. As shown in FIG. 135, "0" indicates stop, "1" indicates deceleration, "2" indicates acceleration, "3" indicates start of acceleration, "4" indicates start of deceleration, and "5" indicates constant speed. For example, when the interrupt process is a non-excitation update timing and the reel drive state is constant speed ("5"), "10000101 (B)" is stored.

The first reel drive state of the above address "F04D(H)" is about the motor 32 related to the first reel 31, but data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 related to the second reel 31 is stored. As a storage area, the driving state (_WK_RL2_STS) of the second reel at address "F058(H)" (FIG. 136) is provided.
Further, as a storage area for storing data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 related to the third reel 31, the drive state of the third reel (_WK_RL3_STS) at address "F063(H)" (FIG. 137) is provided. .

The first reel motor index (_FL_RL1_MT_IDX) at address "F04E(H)" is a storage area that stores the on/off state of the motor index signal of the first reel 31, and the signal acquired in the previous interrupt process is stored in the D4 bit. The signal obtained in the current interrupt processing is stored in the D0 bit.
Here, the motor index 1 signal is a signal that is on when the reel sensor 33 is detecting the index of the first reel 31, and is off when the reel sensor 33 is not detecting the index of the first reel 31. It is.
Therefore, for example, when the first reel motor index is "00000000 (B)", the motor index 1 signal is off in both the previous interrupt process and the current interrupt process (the reel sensor 33 detects the index). (not). Furthermore, when the first reel motor index is "00000001 (B)", the motor index 1 signal was off in the previous interrupt processing, and the motor index 1 signal is on in the current interrupt processing (reel sensor 33 (detected the index) (rising).

Furthermore, when the first reel motor index is "00010001 (B)", it means that the motor index 1 signal is on in both the previous interrupt process and the current interrupt process.
Furthermore, when the first reel motor index is "00010000 (B)", the motor index 1 signal was on in the previous interrupt processing, and the motor index 1 signal is off in the current interrupt processing (falling edge). means.

The first reel motor index at the above address "F04E(H)" is a storage area for the left reel 31, but the storage area for the reel motor index for the second reel 31 is at address "F059(H)" (Fig. 136) second reel motor index (_FL_RL2_MT_IDX) is provided.
Further, as a storage area indicating the reel motor index of the third reel 31, a third reel motor index (_FL_RL3_MT_IDX) at address "F064(H)" (FIG. 137) is provided.

The first reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL1_PLSOUT) at address "F04F(H)" is a storage area that stores a value corresponding to the number of interrupts to switch the excitation of the motor 32 related to the first reel 31. Specifically, in the acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP) shown in FIG. 156, which will be described later, the value corresponding to the current step is stored in this storage area. For example, in the case of the first step during acceleration, the value "25 (D)" corresponding to the address "1058 (H)" is stored in this storage area. Then, "1" is subtracted every 2 interrupt processing, and when it becomes "0", the next second step value "25 (D)" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is subtracted every 2 interrupt processing. Subtract by 1. Furthermore, during deceleration, the value "90 (D)" corresponding to the address "1050 (H)" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is subtracted every two interrupt processes. However, when the reel 31 is stopped, at a constant speed, or when it starts decelerating, "1" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is not subtracted during interrupt processing.

The first reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL1_PLSOUT) at the above address "F04F(H)" is a storage area for the motor 32 related to the first reel 31, but the drive pulse for the motor 32 related to the second reel 31 is As a storage area for the output counter, a second reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL2_PLSOUT) is provided at address "F05A(H)" (FIG. 136).
Furthermore, as a storage area for the drive pulse output counter for the motor 32 related to the third reel 31, a third reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL3_PLSOUT) is provided at address "F065(H)" (FIG. 137).

The first reel drive pulse switching number (_CT_RL1_PLSCHG) at address “F050(H)” is a storage area that stores the number of drive pulse switching times when the motor 32 related to the first reel 31 is accelerated. As shown in FIG. 156 (acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP)), which will be described later, when the reel 31 is accelerated, the pulses are switched eight times from the 1st step to the 8th step. Therefore, the initial value of the first reel drive pulse switching count is set to "9", and when "1" is first subtracted and becomes "8", the above-mentioned first reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL1_PLSOUT) is , the value "25(D)" corresponding to the first step is stored. As described above, the first reel drive pulse output counter is decremented by "1" every two interrupt processes during acceleration or deceleration. When the first reel drive pulse output counter reaches "0", "1" is subtracted from the number of times the first reel drive pulse is switched. In this way, each time the first reel drive pulse output counter reaches "0", it is decremented by "1" until the number of times the first reel drive pulse is switched becomes "0".

The first reel drive pulse switching count (_CT_RL1_PLSCHG) of the above address "F050(H)" is a storage area for the motor 32 related to the first reel 31, but it is a storage area for the motor 32 related to the second reel 31. As such, the number of times the second reel drive pulse is switched (_CT_RL2_PLSCHG) is provided at the address "F05B(H)" (FIG. 136).
Further, as a storage area for the motor 32 related to the third reel 31, the number of times the third reel drive pulse is switched (_CT_RL3_PLSCHG) is provided at address "F066(H)" (FIG. 137).

The first reel rotation defect detection counter (_CT_RL1_BAD) at address "F051(H)" is a storage area of a counter for determining whether the rotation of the first reel 31 is normal or abnormal (step-out). The first reel rotation defect detection counter stores "0" as an initial value when the first reel 31 reaches a constant speed. When the first reel 31 is at a constant speed, "1" is added, and when the value after adding "1" becomes "0" (that is, the value before addition is "255 (D)") (If the digit is carried forward and the zero flag = "1" as a result of adding "1"), it is determined that the rotation of the first reel 31 is not normal.
After the first reel 31 reaches a constant speed, when it is determined that the value of the first reel motor index (_FL_RL1_MT_IDX) has changed, the first reel rotation defect detection counter is cleared.

The first reel rotation defect detection counter (_CT_RL1_BAD) at the above address “F051(H)” is a storage area for the first reel 31, but the storage area for the second reel 31 is at the address “F05C(H)”. ” (FIG. 136), a second reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL2_BAD) is provided.
Further, as a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel rotation defect detection counter (_CT_RL3_BAD) is provided at address "F067(H)" (FIG. 137).

The step number (_NB_RL1_STEP) of one symbol on the first reel at the address "F052(H)" is a storage area that stores the step number when the first reel drive state is constant speed or starts decelerating.
When the first reel motor index (_FL_RL1_MT_IDX_) rises, "3" is stored as an initial value (design value).
Further, when the first reel drive state is constant speed or deceleration start, "1" is subtracted at the excitation update timing, and when it becomes "0", it is determined that the movement has been by one symbol.
When it is determined that the symbol has moved by one symbol, if the symbol number is "2", "7", "12", or "17", "16 (D)" is stored as the initial value, and otherwise When the symbol number is , "17 (D)" is stored as the initial value.
The number of steps in one rotation of the motor 32 in the 23rd embodiment is "336", and the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "20", so for 4 symbols, the number of steps per symbol is "16", For 16 symbols, the number of steps for one symbol is "17" (4×16+16×17=336). That is, since each symbol is allocated to 16 steps at approximately equal intervals, when the reel 31 stops, it is configured to stop at the center of the symbol as much as possible.

The step number (_NB_RL1_STEP) of one symbol on the first reel at the above address "F052(H)" is the storage area for the first reel 31, but the storage area for the second reel 31 is the step number (_NB_RL1_STEP) at the address "F05D(H)". H)” (FIG. 136), the step number (_NB_RL2_STEP) of one symbol on the second reel is provided.
Further, as a storage area for the third reel 31, the step number (_NB_RL3_STEP) of one symbol of the third reel is provided at address "F068(H)" (FIG. 137).

The first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) at address “F053(H)” is a storage area that stores the symbol number of the first reel 31 that is currently passing. “255(D)(FF(H))” is stored as the initial value. When it is determined that there has been a change in the first reel motor index (_FL_RL1_MT_IDX), "10 (D)" is stored at the time of rise (D0 bit is "1", D4 bit is "0"). At the falling edge (the D0 bit is "0" and the D4 bit is "1"), "0" is stored.

In this way, "255 (D)" is stored as the initial value until the value of the first reel motor index changes. When it is determined that there has been a change in the value of the first reel motor index, "10 (D)" is stored at the time of rising, and "0" is stored at the time of falling.
In addition, the first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) is incremented by 1 every time it is determined that it has moved by one symbol after "10 (D)" or "0" is stored. .

The first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) of the above address "F053(H)" is the storage area for the first reel 31, but the address "F05E" is the storage area for the second reel 31. (H)” (FIG. 136), the second reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC) is provided.
Further, as a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) is provided at address "F069(H)" (FIG. 137).

The first reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) at address "F054(H)" is a storage area that stores the symbol number of the stop position (4-phase excitation is applied). “255(D)(FF(H))” is stored as the initial value. Then, when the first stop switch 42 is operated and the stop position is determined, the determined symbol number is stored in this storage area.

The first reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_PL1_STPPIC) at the above address "F054(H)" is the storage area for the first reel 31, but the address "F05F" is the storage area for the second reel 31. (H)” (FIG. 136), the second reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL2_STPPIC) is provided.
Further, as a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL3_STPPIC) is provided at address "F06A(H)" (FIG. 137).

The first reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL1_PLUS) at address “F055(H)” is a storage area of a counter for determining the excitation phase of the first reel 31. The first reel drive pulse data search counter is incremented by "1" at each excitation update timing. Further, when the first reel 31 rotates in the forward direction, "0" is added, and when the first reel 31 rotates in the reverse direction, "254 (D) (FE (H))" is added. For example, when the counter value stored up to that point is "100 (D)", it becomes "101 (D)" by adding "1". Further, when the first reel 31 is rotating in the reverse direction, "254 (D)" is added, resulting in "99 (D)". In other words, adding "254(D)" is the same as subtracting "1". In this way, the first reel drive pulse data search counter takes a value in the range of "0" to "255 (D)".

Furthermore, when the first reel drive pulse data search counter value is ANDed with "00000111 (B)", the values of "0" to "255 (D)" are "0" to "7". ” value. Then, drive pulse data corresponding to values of "0" to "7" are set. For example, when the value after conversion is "7", the drive pulse stored at address "1107 (H)" which corresponds to the offset value "7" of the reel drive pulse data table (TBL_REEL_PULSE) in FIG. Data "00001000(B)" is set, and excitation to turn on φ3 is executed.

The first reel drive pulse data retrieval counter (_CT_RL1_PLUS) at the above address "F055(H)" is a storage area for the first reel 31, but the counter (_CT_RL1_PLUS) for searching address "F060(H)" is a storage area for the second reel 31. A second reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL2_PLUS) is provided in "H)" (FIG. 136).
Further, as a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL3_PLUS) is provided at address "F06B(H)" (FIG. 137).

The first reel rotation start wait counter (_CT_RL1_WAIT) at address "F056(H)" is a counter for random delay of the first reel 31 after the standby performance.
Here, "random delay" will be explained.
When a standby effect is executed and the reels 31 are automatically stopped without the player operating the stop switch 42, if all the reels 31 are rotated at the same time (all at once) after the reels 31 have automatically stopped, the eye press assist will be activated. It may lead to Therefore, when restarting the reels 31 after automatically stopping the reels 31 by a standby effect, a delay time at the start of rotation is set for each reel 31, so that the rotation start timing of each reel 31 is random (separate). Set it so that Such control is called "random delay."

When the standby effect is not executed, "0" is stored in this storage area. Furthermore, when the standby effect is executed, a value is determined by lottery or the like from among the values "0" to "335 (D)", and the determined value is stored. Then, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt processing, and when it becomes "0", restarting of the first reel 31 is permitted.

The first reel rotation start wait counter (_CT_RL1_WAIT) at the above address "F056(H)" is the storage area for the first reel 31, but the storage area for the second reel 31 is at the address "F061(H)". ” (FIG. 136), a second reel rotation start wait counter (_CT_RL2_WAIT) is provided.
Further, as a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel rotation start wait counter (_CT_RL3_WAIT) is provided at address "F06C(H)" (FIG. 137).

In FIG. 138, the section type number (_NB_ADV_KND) at address "F070(H)" is a storage area that stores a number indicating whether or not it is an advantageous section. When it is an advantageous section, "1" is stored, and when it is a non-advantageous section, "0" is stored. This storage area is the same storage area as the advantageous section type flag at address "F061(H)" shown in FIG. 35 in the eleventh embodiment.
The AT flag (_FL_AT) of address "F078(H)" is a flag for determining whether or not AT has won. When AT is won, "1" is stored, and when AT is not won, "0" is stored. This storage area is the same storage area as the AT flag at address "F067(H)" shown in FIG. 35 in the eleventh embodiment.

The advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR) at address "F07A(H)" is a storage area for a counter (decrement counter) for the number of games played in the advantageous section. When shifting to the advantageous section, the initial value "1500 (D)" is set, and during the advantageous section, "1" is subtracted for each game. When the value becomes "0", the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. This storage area is the same storage area as the advantageous section clear counter at address "F063(H)" shown in FIG. 35 in the eleventh embodiment.

The difference counter (also referred to as "MY counter") (_CT_MY) at address "F07C(H)" is a counter (increment counter) that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number during the advantageous section.
The difference counter does not simply store the cumulative value of the difference number itself, but stores "a value corresponding to" the cumulative value of the difference number. For example, when the difference in the number of sheets becomes a value corresponding to a minus value, the value is corrected to "0 (H)". Therefore, "cumulative value of difference number of sheets ≠ difference number counter value". In other words, the difference counter stores a value that indicates "0" when the cumulative value of the difference number decreases the most during the advantageous section.

Further, when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. Therefore, the maximum value that the difference counter can take is "2399 (D)" in the current game, and "2414 (D)" when 15 coins are paid out in the next game.
Note that the difference counter only needs to count the cumulative value of the difference number during the advantageous section, and does not need to count during the non-advantageous section (normal section), but continues to count including the non-advantageous section. It may also be a counter.
This storage area is the same storage area as the difference counter at address "F065(H)" shown in FIG. 35 in the eleventh embodiment.

The main gaming state number (_NB_GAM_STS) at address "F07E(H)" is a storage area that stores the number of the main gaming state. As shown in FIG. 132, in the twenty-third embodiment, main game states 0 to 5 are provided, and the number of the main game state in which the player is currently staying is stored in this storage area. When there is a transition to the main game state, the value of this storage area is updated.
The AT precursor counter (_CT_AT_ZN) at address "F080(H)" is a storage area for a counter for the number of AT precursor games. When AT is won, the number of AT precursor games is determined, for example, from a range of "0" to "33", and the determined number of games is stored in this storage area. Then, in the AT precursor, that is, the main gaming state 2, "1" is subtracted from the AT precursor counter every game, and when it becomes "0", it is determined that the end condition of the AT precursor (main gaming state 2) is satisfied. do.

The ending counter (_CT_ENDING) of the address "F097 (H)" is set when the AT set number counter value described below is "1" or more, and when the difference counter value exceeds "1951 (D)" or This is a storage area for a counter that is set to an initial value of "2" when the section clear counter value becomes less than "200 (D)".
Then, when the ending counter is equal to or greater than "1" at the end of main game state 4, "1" is subtracted. When the ending counter changes from "1" to "0", it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section (and AT) are satisfied, and the state shifts to main game state 0. Therefore, after the ending counter is set to "2", up to two sets of AT can be executed, including AT when the ending counter is set to "2".

The AT wait counter (_CT_AT_WAIT) at address "F098(H)" is a storage area of a counter for managing AT activation. If the AT set number counter is "1" or more, after the main game state 4 (AT) ends, the main game state 3 (AT preparation in progress) is entered. In this main game state 3, the value that manages whether or not to permit the stop display of the 1BB symbol combination is the AT standby counter value. In other words, it is a counter for reducing a certain number of balls in the main game state 3. The AT standby counter is determined from a range of "0" to "8" and stored, for example, when the main game state 4 shifts to the main game state 3.

In main game state 3, the AT standby counter value is subtracted by 1 in a game in which 1BB is won, or in a game in which a small winning combination or replay is not won within 1BB (a game in which 1BB can be won). . Then, after the AT standby counter reaches "0", in games where the 1BB symbol combination can be stopped and displayed (games that have not been won in small roles or replays), an effect that encourages winning of 1BB (for example, "Aim for the 'Blue BAR'!" etc.) is output. When the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed, the main game state 4 is entered.

In addition, in the main game state 3, if 1BB is won before the AT standby counter reaches "0", the main game state 3 remains and the main game state 4 (AT) is not entered. Therefore, 1BB is in operation and non-AT (AT in preparation). In this case, the AT standby counter is reset after the 1BB operation is completed. Note that the previously stored AT standby counter may be inherited without being reset. By doing this, even if the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped and displayed by mistake, it is possible to prevent further disadvantage to the player.

The AT set number counter (_CT_AT_SET) at address "F09C(H)" is a storage area that stores the AT set number. When an AT is won, the number of AT sets is determined by lottery, and the determined number of AT sets is stored in this storage area. Further, in main game state 3 (AT preparation), an AT set number addition lottery is executed according to the winning combination, and when this addition lottery is won, the winning addition number is added to an AT set number counter.

Also, at the end of main game state 4, it is determined whether the AT set number counter is "1" or more, and if the AT set number counter is "1" or more, it is determined that the AT continuation condition is satisfied. When the AT set number counter is "0", it is determined that the AT continuation condition is not satisfied, and the main game state 5 is entered. When shifting from main game state 4 to main game state 3, the AT set number counter is decremented by "1".
Also, even if the number of AT sets is "1" or more, if the ending counter changes from "1" to "0" at the end of main game state 4, the end conditions of the advantageous section (AT) are met. The AT set number counter is cleared at the same time as the judgment is made and the state shifts to main game state 0. Here, as an example of a method of transitioning to the main game state 0 and a method of clearing the AT set number counter, the RWM initialization process (step S435 in FIG. 51) that is executed at the end of the advantageous period by the advantageous period clear counter management can be mentioned.

The AT withdrawal counter (_CT_AT_BACK) at address "F09D(H)" is a storage area for a counter of the number of remaining games that will be an AT withdrawal. When shifting from main game state 4 to main game state 5, an initial value "50 (D)" is set, and in main game state 5, "1" is subtracted every game. When the AT pullback counter reaches "0" without winning the AT, it is determined that the end condition of main game state 5 is satisfied, and the main game state 0 or 1 is entered.
Further, when an AT is won in main game state 5 and the game moves to main game state 3, the AT pullback counter is cleared.

The standby performance type (_WK_PRD) at address "F09E(H)" is a storage area that stores the type of standby performance number.
Here, the "standby effect" in the 23rd embodiment means that the reels 31 are rotated in reverse when the start switch 41 is operated, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, " This is a reel effect (also referred to as a freeze effect) that stops and displays "Black BAR". As a standby effect, when the start switch 41 is operated, the reels 31 are rotated in the forward direction, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a set of "black BAR") is stopped and displayed without the player operating the stop switch 42. May contain things. Alternatively, as a standby effect, the reels 31 are rotated forward when the start switch 41 is operated, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a set of "black BAR") is stopped and displayed without the player operating the stop switch 42. It may consist only of things.

The standby performance includes cases in which it is performed as a performance to indicate that AT winning is confirmed (for example, by stopping display of "Black BAR" set and "Red 7" set), or as a performance that stimulates AT winning expectation level (for example, , ``Stopping and displaying a set of ``watermelons,'' etc.).
When it is decided to execute a standby effect, if any standby effect number from "1" to "4" (address "F0A0(H)" to be described later) is determined, "2" is memorized. , "3" is stored when any of the three-way numbers from "5" to "8" (address "F0A1(H)" to be described later) is determined. Further, at the start of standby performance (M_TARPIC_EXE) in FIG. 143, which will be described later, it is cleared in step S835.

The search counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV) at the address "F09F(H)" is a storage area that stores data that determines whether the rotation is forward rotation or reverse rotation in the standby performance. When the standby performance is forward rotation, "0" is stored, and when it is reverse rotation, "FE (H)" is stored.
When starting a standby effect, it is determined whether the value stored in the above-mentioned standby effect type (_WK_PRD) is "0", and if it is not "0", that is, the standby effect (in the 23rd embodiment, When performing reverse rotation), "FE(H)" is stored in the search counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV).
Furthermore, when the standby performance ends, this storage area is cleared ("0" is stored).

The standby performance number (_NB_PRD_NO) at the address “F0A0(H)” is a storage area for a number that manages the standby performance that indicates AT winning confirmation. As shown in FIG. 138, "1" to "4" are stored depending on the stopped symbol. Note that the standby performance number "4" corresponds to the number at which the "Red 7" set is once stopped and displayed, and then changed again to stop and display the "Black BAR" set. The number of winning AT sets and the symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed by standby performance are set to be related.

The triple role number (_NB_TRIO) of the address "F0A1 (H)" is a storage area for numbers that manage standby effects that indicate the AT winning expectation level. For example, in the main game state 1, when a rare replay (winning numbers "3" to "9" in FIG. 126) is won, a three-way winning number is determined by lottery and set at the end of the game. For example, when the triple winning number "5" is determined, the middle stage "Watermelon" set is stopped and displayed as a standby effect when the start switch 41 is operated to start the next game. The AT winning expectation level and the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed by the standby performance are set to be related.

The winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) at address "F0A9(H)" is a memory that stores the winning number when the winning number is determined in the current game and the replay and winning condition device that operates in the current game is determined. It is an area. As shown in FIG. 126, when winning numbers "1" to "24" are won, "1" to "24" are respectively stored as winning and replay condition device numbers for the game.
The accessory condition device number (_NB_CRRT_BNS) at the address "F0AA(H)" is a storage area that stores the accessory condition device number when the accessory is won. As shown in FIG. 126, when winning numbers "25" to "41" are won, "1" to "17" are respectively stored as accessory condition device numbers for the game.

The minimum gaming time (_TM2_GAME) at the address "F0AB(H)" is a timer that monitors the minimum gaming time for one game, and when it is determined that the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the number of interrupts "3672(D)" is set. In order to count, an initial value is set (step S767 in FIG. 140, which will be described later). Note that the minimum game time in this embodiment is set to approximately "4.1" seconds (1.117ms x 3672≈4100ms).
When the minimum playing time is set in the current game, the reels 31 start rotating in the next game on the condition that the minimum playing time is "0".

Among the above data of the RWM 53, when the advantageous section ends, the data regarding the advantageous section and AT are cleared.
In addition, in the 23rd embodiment, similarly to the 11th embodiment, the game end check process (FIG. 148) is executed at the end of the game, and the advantageous section clear counter management in step S945 is executed. Advantageous section clear counter management is similar to the process shown in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52.

Therefore, when the advantageous section clear counter ("_CT_ADV_CLR" of address "F07A(H)") becomes "0"("Yes" in step S424 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52), the process advances to step S435. Then, the data of the RWM 53 regarding the advantageous section and AT is cleared.
In the 23rd embodiment, the data cleared at the end of the advantageous section includes the section type number (_NB_ADV_KND), AT flag (_FL_AT), difference counter (MY counter) (_CT_MY), AT precursor counter (_CT_AT_ZN), and ending counter. (_CT_ENDING), AT standby counter (_CT_AT_WAIT), AT set number counter (_CT_AT_SET), AT pullback counter (_CT_AT_BACK), standby performance type (_WK_PRD), standby performance number (_NB_PRD_NO), and triple role number (_NB_TRIO).
On the other hand, data that is not cleared at the end of the advantageous period includes the RT state number (_NB_RT_STS), the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME), and the main gaming state number (_NB_GAM_STS).
Therefore, as described above, the current game is the 1000th game of RT1, and when the advantageous section ends in the current game, the next game will be the non-advantageous section and the 1001st game of RT1.

Further, the RT status number (_NB_RT_STS) and the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) are not initialized even by turning the power on/off or changing settings.
Therefore, for example, even if the power is turned off at the 1000th game of RT1 and the setting change process is executed before returning, the first game after returning will start from the 1001st game of RT1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the setting change process is executed, the RT status number (_NB_RT_STS) is not initialized, but the RT game count (_CT_RT_GAME) may be initialized. Alternatively, when the setting change process is executed, both the RT status number (_NB_RT_STS) and the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) may be initialized.

Furthermore, the RT status number (_NB_RT_STS) and the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) are not initialized only by turning the power on/off, but when the setting change process is executed, at least the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) is initialized. Good too.
Note that when the power is turned on/off, the number of games (non-AT) displayed as an image on the image display device 23 is set to "0". This point will be discussed later.

Next, in the twenty-third embodiment, each process during a game will be explained using a flowchart.
FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) by the main control board 50. This flowchart corresponds to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment. In FIG. 139, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 41. Further, in FIG. 139, steps different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined under the step number.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 41 will be mainly explained.
In FIG. 139, if it is determined in step S278 that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process advances to step S751 and a start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) is executed. It is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated when the D6 bit of the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) at the address "F017(H)" in FIG. 133 becomes "1".

Then, when the process proceeds to the start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) of step S751, the process moves to the process shown in FIG. 140, which will be described later.
Next, the process advances to step S752, and a reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 146, which will be described later. Then, a reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) is executed for each reel 31 until it is determined in the next step S289 that all reels 31 have stopped.
Further, in FIG. 139, the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) (step S753) in the twenty-third embodiment executes the process shown in FIG. 148, which will be described later.

FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) in step S751 of FIG. 139.
In step S761, a lottery process for winning combinations is executed. This process is a process in which winning numbers are drawn by the winning combination lottery means 61. For example, when the current game is non-RT, the winning number is determined according to the number table shown in FIG. When the winning number is determined, the winning and replay condition device number corresponding to the determined winning number is stored in the storage area of address "F0A9 (H)", and the accessory condition device number corresponding to the determined winning number is stored. , is stored in the storage area at address "F0AA(H)".

In the next step S762, the main control board 50 determines the shift to an advantageous section. As described above, when the winning numbers "1" to "4" and "6" to "21" are won, it is decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section.
Here, when it is decided to move to the advantageous section, the section type number (address "F070(H)") is set to "1".

In the next step S763, processing at the start of the game in the main game state is executed. This process executes processes such as lottery and counter updating according to the main game state of the current game.
For example, when the main game state is 0, 1, or 5, an AT lottery is executed. As described above, when a rare replay (any of the winning numbers "3" to "9") is achieved, an AT lottery with a set number "1" or more may be executed. When AT is won, the AT flag (address "F078(H)") is set to "1" and the number of AT sets determined by lottery is stored in address "F09C(H)".

Moreover, when the main game state 2 is, "1" is subtracted from the AT precursor counter (address "F080(H)").
Furthermore, when the main game state is 3, "1" is subtracted from the AT standby counter (address "F098(H)").
Furthermore, when the main game state is 5, "1" is subtracted from the AT pullback counter (address "F09D(H)").

In the next step S764, a symbol stop signal set (S_IF_SET) is executed. This process is shown in FIG. 141, which will be described later, and is a process for outputting a test signal regarding the operation timing and pressing order of the stop switch 42 to the testing machine side. Note that when the gaming machine is actually installed in a hall (store), the gaming machine is not connected to the testing machine, so the test signal is not actually received by the testing machine. However, since the symbol stop signal set (S_IF_SET) exists in the main processing program, test signals regarding the operation timing and pressing order of the stop switch 42 are sent every game even after the gaming machine is installed in the hall. The processing itself for outputting is executed.
In the next step S765, a standby effect start (M_TARPIC_EXE) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 143, which will be described later, and corresponds to the process of executing a standby effect when the start switch 41 is operated.

In the next step S766, the main control board 50 determines whether the minimum gaming time has elapsed. This process is a process for determining whether the value stored at the address "F0AB(H)" is "0". When it is determined that the minimum gaming time has become "0", the process advances to step S767. In step S767, the initial value of the minimum playing time "3672 (D)" is stored in the address "F0AB (H)". From this point on, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt process, and in step S766 of the next game, it is determined whether the minimum game time has become "0". In the next step S768, the main control board 50 sets an acceleration start state. This process is a process of storing "3" (00000011 (B)) indicating the start of acceleration in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS). It is. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the symbol stop signal set (S_IF_SET) in step S764 in FIG.
Here, prior to explaining FIG. 141, suspension acceptance specification tables 1 and 2 will be explained.
FIG. 142 is a diagram showing the symbol stop signal table, (A) shows the symbol stop signal table 1 (TBL_ORD_INF1), and (B) shows the symbol stop signal table 2 (TBL_ORD_INF2).

As shown in FIG. 141(A), two types of symbol stop signal data are stored in the stop acceptance specification table 1 (TBL_ORD_INF1). Furthermore, each symbol stop signal data is composed of four pieces of data.
First, the symbol stop signal data when "accessory condition device number = 1, main game state number 3 and AT standby counter = 0" in (1) is data "0, 16, 7, 2". . Here, "Accessories condition device number = 1, main game state number 3 and AT standby counter = 0" means that it is inside 1BB, main game state 3 (AT preparing), and AT standby counter is "0", that is, it is possible to win 1BB.
This data is for aiming at the valid line by matching "Blue BAR".
The four pieces of symbol stop signal data are "press order, left reel 31 stop operation position, middle reel 31 stop operation position, right reel 31 stop operation position".

First, the press order data has "0" to "5". "0" indicates the push order 123, "1" indicates the push order 132, . . . , "5" indicates the push order 321. Here, each symbol stop signal data in the stop reception specification table 1 (TBL_ORD_INF1) in (A) is actually symbol stop signal data for a game in which the instruction function is not activated, but the pressing order is It is set to 123. Note that instead of the push order 123, push order data indicating another push order may be used.
Further, the stop operation position of the left reel 31, the stop operation position of the middle reel 31, and the stop operation position of the right reel 31 all indicate the symbol number aimed at the lower row.
For example, among the symbol stop signal data (1) of the stop acceptance specification table 1, the data indicating the stop operation position of the left reel 31 is "16". Here, as shown in Figure 114, if you aim so that the 16th "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 stops at the lower left row, the 18th "Blue BAR" can stop on the active line (upper left row). Become.
In the above example, data indicating the stop operation position centered on the lower stage is stored, but data indicating the stop operation position centered on the middle stage or the upper stage may be stored. In either case, the effective line in this embodiment is an irregular line that descends to the right, whereas the data indicating the stop operation position is set in a horizontal straight line (it is not set along the effective line). When the test machine performs a test according to the test signal, it is possible to stop the test machine at a predetermined timing regardless of the effective line. Thereby, the processing burden on the testing machine side and the processing burden on the gaming machine side can be reduced.

Further, among the symbol stop signal data, data indicating the stop operation position of the middle reel 31 is "7". If you aim so that the number 7 "Watermelon" on the middle reel 31 will stop at the middle lower row, the number 8 "Blue BAR" will be able to stop on the active line (middle middle row).
Furthermore, among the symbol stop signal data, data indicating the stop operation position of the right reel 31 is "2". If you aim so that the 2nd "Blue BAR" on the right reel 31 will stop at the lower right row, this "Blue BAR" will be able to stop on the active line (lower right row).
Therefore, the above-mentioned symbol stop signal data is data for aiming to line up the "Blue BAR" in the push order 123.

In addition, if it is a game in which 1BB is inside and no small role or replay has been won in the current game, if each reel 31 is stopped based on the above symbol stop signal data, "Blue BAR" will be aligned. Stop display. On the other hand, even if it is within 1BB, in a game where you have won either a small role or a replay in the current game, even if you stop each reel 31 based on the above symbol stop signal data, the "Blue BAR" Matching is not displayed.

Further, the symbol stop signal data "0, 6, 127, 127" in (2) is symbol stop signal data under conditions other than the above (1). This symbol stop signal data is symbol stop signal data in which the "Blue BAR" is not aligned.
In the symbol stop signal data "0, 6, 127, 127", "0" is data indicating the pressing order 123 as described above. Further, the data indicating the stop position of the left reel 31 is "6". Here, as shown in FIG. 114, if you aim so that the No. 6 "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 stops at the lower left row, the No. 18 "Blue BAR" will not stop on the active line.
Furthermore, the data "127" indicating the stop operation positions of the middle and right reels 31 means that the operation timing is irrelevant (any operation position). Therefore, since the left reel 31 is set so that the "blue BAR" does not stop on the active line, this means that the operation timing of the stop switch 42 of the middle and right reels 31 is arbitrary. Although the data indicating the stop operation positions of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 is "127", it is also possible to store data indicating a predetermined stop operation position instead of an arbitrary operation position. It is.

As described above, the symbol stop signal is a signal that includes the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the stop operation position of each reel 31, and is a test signal sent to the test machine. Upon receiving this symbol stop signal (test signal), the testing machine executes a simulation in which the stop switch 42 is operated in accordance with this symbol stop signal. Then, when a simulation is executed in which the stop switch 42 is operated according to the symbol stop signal, it is determined (confirmed) whether or not the reel 31 stops at the correct position, and whether or not the ball payout rate is within the appropriate range. Make judgments (confirmations). Furthermore, by outputting the symbol stop signal before determining whether or not the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the testing machine can perform a stop operation immediately after the minimum gaming time has elapsed.

In addition, six types of symbol stop signal data are stored in the stop reception specification table 2 (TBL_ORD_INF2) in FIG. Compatible.
When winning number "10" is won during AT, or when winning number "16" is won during AT and inside SRB, symbol stop signal data "0, 127, 127, 127" corresponding to press order 123 is selected. ” is selected.
Also, when you win the winning number "11" during AT, or when you win the winning number "17" during AT and inside SRB, the symbol stop signal data "1, 127, 127" corresponding to the push order 132 , 127'' is selected.
Furthermore, when the winning number "12" is won during AT, or when the winning number "18" is won during AT and inside SRB, the symbol stop signal data corresponding to the push order 213 is "2, 127, 127, 127'' is selected.

Furthermore, when you win the winning number "13" during AT, or when you win the winning number "19" during AT and inside SRB, the symbol stop signal data "3,127,127" corresponding to the push order 231 , 127'' is selected.
Similarly, when you win the winning number "14" during AT, or when you win the winning number "20" during AT and inside SRB, the symbol stop signal data corresponding to the push order 312 is "4, 127, 127, 127'' is selected.
Furthermore, in the same way, when you win the winning number "15" during AT, or when you win the winning number "21" during AT and inside SRB, the symbol stop signal data "5,127" corresponding to the push order 312 , 127, 127'' is selected.

In this way, in a game where push order notification is performed during AT, processing is required to output push order data corresponding to the push order and stop operation position data indicating that the stop operation position is arbitrary. executed. By outputting stop operation position data indicating that the stop operation position is arbitrary, the discrepancy between the test on the testing machine side and the gaming method played by the player after the gaming machine is actually installed in the hall is confirmed. It becomes possible to reduce the amount.

Returning to FIG. 141, the symbol stop signal set (S_IF_SET) will be explained.
First, in step S771, the stop reception designation table 2 shown in FIG. 141(B) is set.
In the next step S772, it is determined whether there is a push order instruction. Here, when winning a small winning combination A group during AT, or when winning a small winning combination B group during AT and inside SRB, the push order instruction number (in FIGS. 133 to 138) is stored in the specified storage area of the RWM 53. (not shown) is stored, this press order instruction number is stored in the A register. When the A register value is not "0", it is determined to be "Yes" (pressing order is instructed), and when it is "0", it is determined to be "No" (pressing order is not instructed).
When it is determined that there is a push order instruction, the process advances to step S773, and when it is determined that there is no push order instruction, the process advances to step S775.

In step S773, an offset value is set. Here, it is assumed that the push order instruction numbers are set to "1", "2", ..., "6" for the six push orders of push orders 123, 132, ..., 321, respectively. . In this case, the offset values are "0", "1", . . . , "5". Therefore, "1" is subtracted from the A register and an offset value is set.
Next, the process advances to step S774, and symbol stop signal data corresponding to the offset value is acquired. For example, the symbol stop signal data corresponding to the offset value "0" is "0, 127, 127, 127" in FIG. 142(B), and the symbol stop signal data corresponding to the offset value "1" is "1". , 127, 127, 127'', and the symbol stop signal data corresponding to the offset value ``5'' is ``5, 127, 127, 127''. Then, the process advances to step S781.

On the other hand, when the process advances from step S772 to step S775, the stop reception designation table 1 is set. This process is a process of setting the suspension acceptance specification table 1 in place of the suspension acceptance specification table 2 initially set in step S771.
Next, the process advances to step S776, and it is determined whether the winning and replay condition device number is "0". In this process, it is determined whether the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) stored at the address "F0A9(H)" is "0". When it is determined that there is "0" (that is, when the minor winning combination or replay has not been won in the current game), the process advances to step S7777, and when it is determined that there is not "0", the process advances to step S780.

In step S777, it is determined whether or not the accessory condition device number is "1" (whether or not 1BB has been won). In this process, it is determined whether the accessory condition device number (_NB_CRRT_BNS) stored in the address "F0AA(H)" is "1". When it is determined that it is "1", the process advances to step S778, and when it is determined that it is not "1", the process advances to step S780.

In step S778, it is determined whether or not winning of 1BB is permitted in the current game. Here, "1BB winning is permitted" corresponds to the main game state 3 (AT preparation in progress) and the AT standby counter being "0". Therefore, whether the value of address "F07E (H)" (main game state number) is "3" or not, and whether the value of address "F098 (H)" (AT standby counter) is "0" or not. to judge. When it is determined that the main game state number is 3 and the AT standby counter is "0", the process advances to step S779, and when it is determined that the main game state number is 3 and the AT standby counter is not "0", the process advances to step S780.
In step S779, symbol stop signal data "0, 16, 7, 2" is acquired. Then, the process advances to step S781. On the other hand, in step S780, symbol stop signal data "0, 6, 127, 127" is acquired. Then, the process advances to step S781.

In the next step S781, a serial communication circuit data register is set. Here, the address of the transmission register in the serial communication circuit of the chip included in the main CPU 55 is stored in a predetermined register.
Next, the process advances to step S782, and processing for outputting the push order of the test signals is executed. The processing here is, for example, when the symbol stop signal data is "0, 16, 7, 2", the push order data "0" is written to the address of the transmission register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S783, and processing for outputting the stop operation position of the first reel 31 (left reel 31 in this embodiment) among the test signals is executed. The process here is, for example, when the symbol stop signal data is "0, 16, 7, 2", the stop operation position of the left reel 31 "16 (D)" is written to the address of the transmission register. be.

Next, the process advances to step S784, and processing for outputting the stop operation position of the second reel 31 (in this embodiment, the middle reel 31) is executed. The processing here is, for example, when the symbol stop signal data is "0, 16, 7, 2", the stop operation position "7" of the middle reel 31 is written in the address of the transmission register.
Next, the process advances to step S785, and processing for outputting the stop operation position of the third reel 31 (right reel 31 in this embodiment) is executed. The process here is, for example, when the symbol stop signal data is "0, 16, 7, 2", the stop operation position "2" of the right reel 31 is written to the address of the transmission register.
Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In steps S782 to S785, the push order and the stop operation position of the reel 31 are written in the transmission register, thereby executing processing for transmitting these data to the test machine. Note that in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 151, which will be described later, processing for transmitting these data to the test machine may be executed when the test signal is output in step S842.

As described above, in a situation where winning of 1BB is permitted, the symbol stop signal data is transmitted to make winning of 1BB possible, and in a situation where winning of 1BB is not permitted, a symbol stop signal data is sent to prevent winning of 1BB. Send symbol stop signal data. As a result, it is possible to transmit a test signal in accordance with the player's playing style in the market. Therefore, it is possible to bring the ball released in the test machine closer to the ball released in the market.

It should be noted that the process shown in FIG. 141 is one of the processes in the main process, so it is performed every game. When the slot machine 10 and the test machine are electrically connected, a symbol stop signal (test signal) is output to the test machine every game by the process shown in FIG. 141.
On the other hand, even when the slot machine 10 and the test machine are not connected, for example when the slot machine 10 is installed in a hall, the process shown in FIG. 141 is executed every game. However, since the slot machine 10 and the test machine are not connected, the symbol stop signal (test signal) is not output to the outside.

FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the start of standby performance (M_TARPIC_EXE) in step S765 in FIG.
First, in step S821, the standby effect type is acquired. This process is a process of storing data of the standby effect type (_WK_PRD) at address "F09E(H)" in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S822, and it is determined whether the standby effect type is "0". Here, it is determined whether the A register value is "0". Then, when it is determined that the A register value is "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended, and when it is determined that the A register value is not "0", the process advances to step S823. When the standby effect type is "0", it means that there is no standby effect when the start switch 41 is operated, and when it is not "0", it means that there is a standby effect.

In step S823, "-2" is stored in the search counter update correction data. This process is a process of storing "FE(H)" in the search counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV) of address "F09F(H)". "FE(H)" is data for reverse rotation.
“Control command set 1” in the next step S824 is a process for transmitting a command to the sub-control board 80, similar to step S303 in FIG. 41 (eleventh embodiment), for example. Here, information on the standby performance number (_NB_PRD_NO) of the address “F0A0(H)” or the triple role number (_NB_TRIO) of the address “F0A1(H)” is transmitted to the sub control board 80.
In the next step S825, "0" is stored in the triple role number (_NB_TRIO) of "F0A1(H)".

Next, the process proceeds to step S826, based on the reel effect data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT), the # reel symbol number (for stop position) of addresses "F054(H)", "F05F(H)" and "F06A(H)" Save the specified position (stop position of reel 31) in (_NB_RL#_STPPIC).
FIG. 144 is a diagram showing the reel performance data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT) stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. 144, the designated position (stop position) corresponding to the standby performance number is stored in the reel performance data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT). This "designated position (stop position)" corresponds to the symbol number.
For example, in the figure, addresses "1000 (H)" to "1002 (H)" are designated stop symbol positions on each reel 31 when the standby performance number (_NB_PRD_NO) is "1" (all "black BAR"). shows. The value "8 (H)" stored in the address "1000 (H)" indicates the designated stop symbol position on the left reel 31, and "8 (H)" in the address "1001 (H)" indicates the designated stop symbol position on the middle reel 31. "3(H)" of the address "1002(H)" indicates the designated stop symbol position of the right reel 31.

Further, the symbol number during forward rotation and the symbol number during reverse rotation are different. In the 23rd embodiment, the index (also referred to as "initial" or "detection piece") provided on each reel 31 is within a range of approximately half the circumference (approximately 180 degrees) of the entire circumference (360 degrees) of the reel 31. is formed. The current position of the reel 31 can be determined when the reel 31 rotates about half a revolution depending on whether the index is detected or not.
Although the details will be described later, in steps S897 and S899 in FIG. 155 (reel drive control), the reference symbol number when the rise of the # reel motor index is detected (when the index is detected) is set to "10". ing. Similarly, the reference symbol number when the fall of the #th reel motor index is detected is set to "0".

Therefore, when the reel 31 is rotating in the forward direction, the symbol with symbol number "10" (for example, "Replay" on the left reel 31 in FIG. 114) is displayed at the moment when the rising of the # reel motor index is detected. It is determined that it has passed the middle stage.
Similarly, when the reel 31 is rotating forward, the moment the falling of the # reel motor index is detected, the symbol with symbol number "0" (for example, in the left reel 31 in FIG. 114, "Replay") ) is judged to have passed through the middle stage.

On the other hand, when the reel 31 is rotating in the opposite direction, if it is determined that the symbol with symbol number "10" is passing at the moment when the rise of the # reel motor index is detected, in reality, As shown in FIG. 114, the symbol with symbol number "1" during forward rotation is passing. Similarly, if it is determined that the symbol with symbol number "0" is passing at the moment when the falling of the # reel motor index is detected, in reality, symbol number "11" during forward rotation is You will be able to pass through the middle stage.
In this way, as shown in FIG. 114, when the reel 31 rotates forward and backward, the symbol numbers that pass through the middle stage are different when the # reel motor index rises and falls (9 symbols). This means that there is a discrepancy between the two. Therefore, in the reel effect data table of FIG. 144, the stop position is stored in consideration of this deviation. For example, if it is determined that the reels 31 are to be stopped at symbol number "8" when rotating in reverse, they can actually be stopped at symbol number "3" as shown in FIG. 114.

The reel performance data table in FIG. 144 defines the stop symbol position during standby performance, that is, when the reels 31 rotate in reverse. For example, in Fig. 144, if the stop symbol position when the standby performance number is "1" is set as "8, 8, 3", the actual position is "Black BAR (number "3" during forward rotation) - "Black BAR (No. 3 during forward rotation) - Black BAR (No. 8 during forward rotation) stops.
The same applies to standby performance numbers "2" to "8" other than "1".
For example, when the standby performance number is "2", the stop symbol position is "18, 18, 8", but the symbol number "18" when rotating in reverse is the symbol number "13" (red 7) when rotating forward. The symbol number "8" during reverse rotation corresponds to the symbol number "3" (red 7) during forward rotation.
As described above, in step S826 in FIG. 143, the reel symbol number (for the stop position) is stored based on the reel effect data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT).

The explanation returns to FIG. 143.
After step S826, the process advances to step S827, and the designated symbol position search waiting time is saved. In addition, as mentioned above, the "designated symbol position search waiting time" is the waiting time (after starting the standby effect (rotating the reels 31) until searching the designated symbol position (stop position) of the reels 31). In other words, it is approximately the rotation time of the reel 31).
FIG. 145 is a diagram showing reel performance execution timer table 1 (TBL_TARPIC_TM1) to reel performance execution timer table 8 (TBL_TARPIC_TM8) stored in ROM54. The data values shown in FIG. 145 are decimal numbers. Reel performance execution timer table 1 (TBL_TARPIC_TM1) to reel performance execution timer table 8 (TBL_TARPIC_TM8) correspond to standby performance numbers "1" to "8", respectively. For example, when the standby performance number is "1", the reel performance execution timer table 1 (TBL_TARPIC_TM1) is used.
In addition, in FIG. 145, for example, addresses "1018(H)" and "1019(H)", "101A(H)" and "101B(H)", and "101C(H)" and "101D(H)" indicate the timer values of the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31, respectively. In addition, although FIG. 145 shows how much the timer value is larger than the timer value of the left reel 31 based on the timer value of the left reel 31, in reality, the address "1018 (H)" The timer values of "1019(H)", "101A(H)" and "101B(H)", "101C(H)" and "101D(H)" are "14112(D)" and "14782(D)". , 16122 (D)''.

This timer value specifies the waiting time until the reel 31 starts decelerating. For example, when the standby performance number is "1", the left reel 31 indicates that it is possible to start decelerating after "14112 (D)" has passed since the start of the standby performance, that is, after "1.117 x 14112 = approximately 15763ms" has elapsed. ing.
Note that this timer value is also subtracted while the reels 31 are accelerating in the standby performance. As shown in FIG. 156, which will be described later, the acceleration process of the reel 31 requires a total of "62 times x 2 interruptions = approximately 139 ms" for the first to eighth steps. The timer value of each reel 31 is set to at least a time longer than the time required for this acceleration process.
Further, in the reel performance execution timer tables 1 to 4, the standby time of the middle reel 31 is set longer than the standby time of the left reel 31. Furthermore, the standby time of the right reel 31 is set longer than the standby time of the middle reel 31. As a result, when the reels 31 stop, they stop in the order of "left -> middle ->right." Further, in the reel performance execution timer tables 5 to 8, the standby time of the middle reel 31 is set longer than the standby time of the right reel 31. Furthermore, the standby time of the left reel 31 is set longer than the standby time of the middle reel 31. Thereby, when the reel 31 stops, it stops in the order of "right → middle → left".
In this way, by setting the standby time of each reel 31 in the reel production execution timer table, the order in which the reels 31 are stopped can be determined, and the order and timing in which the reels 31 are stopped can be regularized. .
On the other hand, if the standby time for each reel 31 is not set, it will not be possible to secure a sufficient constant speed time after starting the reel 31, and the necessary effects will not be output while the reel 31 is rotating. . Furthermore, if the reels 31 are stopped in the order in which the designated symbol positions arrive at the stop positions, the reels may be stopped in random order, for example, in the order of "right → left → center."

Furthermore, the difference between the waiting time of the reel 31 that stops first and the waiting time of the reel 31 that stops second is "670" interrupt in reel performance execution timer table 1 and "670" interrupt in reel performance execution timer table 2 to 4. 1008" interrupt is set to "1176" interrupt in reel performance execution timer tables 5 to 8. The number of interruptions per rotation of the reel 31 is "672" as described above. Therefore, after the first reel 31 stops, the second reel 31 is set to stop after rotating approximately one rotation or more.
Furthermore, the difference between the waiting time of the reel 31 that stops second and the waiting time of the reel 31 that stops third is "1340" interrupt in reel performance execution timer table 1 and "1340" interrupt in reel performance execution timer tables 2 to 4. 1008" interrupt, "1176" interrupt in reel performance execution timer tables 5 to 7, and "1848" interrupt in reel performance execution timer table 8. Therefore, after the second reel 31 stops, the third reel 31 is set to stop after rotating approximately two or more times.

For example, even if the middle reel 31 loses synchronization after the left reel 31 has stopped (it is determined that an abnormality has occurred by the second reel rotation failure detection counter), the set timer value will remain unchanged during this time. It will be subtracted. Then, in the case where it is difficult to reach a constant speed after the step-out and the middle reel 31 cannot be stopped even if the timer value reaches "0", the timer value of the right reel 31 becomes "0". ”, the right reel 31 is stopped before the middle reel 31 as an irregularity. Therefore, the stopping order of the reels 31 in this case is "left → right → middle." By responding in this manner to irregularities such as a step-out, it is possible to prevent the time required for standby performance from being inadvertently extended due to a step-out. This makes it possible to shorten the time it takes to start playing the game.

Furthermore, in the fourth timer value of each reel performance execution timer table, for example, reel performance execution timer table 1, the values stored at addresses "101E (H)" and "101F (H)" are shows the waiting time. For example, when the standby performance number is "1", restarting is possible after "1.117 x 5371 = approximately 5999 ms" has elapsed after a complete stop.
In step S827 of FIG. 143, for example, when the standby effect number is "1", the first reel designated symbol position search wait time (_TM2_TAR1_WAIT) of the addresses "F039(H)" and "F03A(H)" is set to " 14112 (D)" is stored, and "14782 (D)" is stored in the second reel specified symbol position search wait time (_TM2_TAR2_WAIT) of addresses "F03B (H)" and "F03C (H)", and address "F03D "16122(D)" is stored in the third reel specified symbol position search waiting time (_TM2_TAR3_WAIT) of "(H)" and "F03E(H)".

In the next step S828, acceleration start is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Disable interrupts.
(2) Store "10000011 (B)" in the A register.
(3) Store the A register value in the first reel drive number (_WK_RL1_STS) of address "F04D(H)".
(4) Store the A register value in the second reel drive number (_WK_RL2_STS) at address "F058(H)".
(5) Store the A register value in the third reel drive number (_WK_RL3_STS) at address "F063(H)".
(6) Enable interrupts.
This is because if an interrupt process occurs between (3) and (5) above, the reels 31 will not start rotating all at once. For this reason, interrupt processing is not performed while the reel drive number is being updated.
Through the above processing, the first reel drive number (_WK_RL1_STS) to the third reel drive number (_WK_RL3_STS) all become "10000011 (B)", and when they become "00000011 (B)" in the next interrupt processing, Acceleration of each reel 31 is actually executed.

At the start of acceleration, the lower four digits of the reel drive number are "0011 (B)", but when the next acceleration starts, they become "0010 (B)", and when the speed reaches constant speed, they become "0101 (B)".
After the reels 31 reach a constant speed, the constant speed state is maintained until the reel designated symbol position search waiting time set in step S827 is reached, and when the reel designated symbol position search waiting time reaches "0", Start decelerating the reels. When the reel 31 starts decelerating, the reel drive number becomes "0100 (B)" and when the reel 31 enters the deceleration state, it becomes "0001 (B)". Then, when the reel 31 stops, the reel drive number becomes "0000(B)".

In the next step S829, a check for completion of all reels 31 is executed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store "0" in the A register.
(2) Perform a logical sum (OR) operation between the A register value and the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS). Then, the result of the logical sum is stored in the A register.
(3) Perform a logical OR operation between the A register value and the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS). Then, the result of the logical sum is stored in the A register.
(4) Perform a logical OR operation between the A register value and the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS). Then, the result of the logical sum is stored in the A register.
(5) Perform a logical product (AND) operation between the A register value and "01111111 (B)".

Here, when all the reels 31 stop, the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS), the second reel driving state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the third reel driving state (_WK_RL3_STS) are all "10000000 (B)" or " 00000000(B)”. Therefore, in the calculation (5) above, the calculation result becomes "0" only when all the reels 31 are stopped.
In addition, in the above calculation (5), the number used to calculate the logical product to determine whether all the reels 31 have stopped is not limited to "01111111(B)", but may also be "00001111(B)". , the same calculation result as above can be obtained. In other words, by determining whether the lower four bits are "0", it is possible to determine whether all reels 31 have stopped.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, actual reel drive control is executed once every two interrupts, so the most significant bit of the reel drive status (_WK_RL#_STS) changes to "0" or "1" for each interrupt process. Become. Therefore, not limited to such specifications, for example, if the most significant bit is always "0", "11111111 ( B)" can also be used.

In the next step S830, it is determined whether all the reels 31 have stopped. In this process, when the calculation result in (5) above is "0" (when the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped.
When it is determined in step S830 that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S831, and when it is determined that all the reels 31 have not stopped in step S830, the above process of step S829 is executed again.
In step S831, a performance end waiting time is set. This process is a process of acquiring the performance end wait time corresponding to the standby performance number in the current standby performance from the reel performance execution timer table (TBL_TARPIC_TM1 to 8) and storing it in the BC register. For example, when the standby performance number for the current standby performance is "1", it is stored by the addresses "101E (H)" and "101F (H)" of the reel performance execution timer table 1 (TBL_TARPIC_TM1) in FIG. 145. The value "5371 (D)" (waiting time at the end of the performance) is stored in the BC register.

Next, the process advances to step S832, and a 2-byte time wait is executed. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the BC register value for each interrupt process until the BC register value becomes "0".
When the BC register value becomes "0", the 2-byte time wait is ended and the process proceeds to step S833.
In step S833, a standby effect type RWM address is set. This process is a process of storing "F0A0(H)", which is the address of the standby performance number (_NB_PRO_NO), in the HL register.
In the next step S834, it is determined whether the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (namely, the standby performance number (_NB_PRO_NO)) is "4". When it is determined that the value is "4", the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not "4", the process advances to step S835.
Here, when the standby effect number "4" is selected as the standby effect, as shown in FIG. 144, it is a standby effect in which "red 7" is aligned and then "black BAR" is aligned. Therefore, when the standby performance number is "4", the process proceeds to the next process without clearing the data related to the standby performance start process or initializing the symbol number.

On the other hand, when proceeding to step S835, search for the standby effect type (_WK_PRD) of the address "F09E(H)", the standby effect number (_NB_PRO_NO) of the address "F0A0(H)", and the address "F09F(H)" Clear the counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV). Specifically, a process of storing "0" in each of the above addresses is executed.
Next, the process proceeds to step S836, and the data of the symbol number (for the passing position) and the symbol number (for the stopping position) are initialized.
in particular,
1st reel symbol number (for passing position) of address “F053 (H)” (_NB_RL1_PASPIC),
1st reel symbol number (for stop position) of address “F054 (H)” (_NB_RL1_STPPIC),
2nd reel symbol number (for passing position) of address “F05E (H)” (_NB_RL2_PASPIC),
2nd reel symbol number (for stop position) of address “F05F(H)” (_NB_RL2_STPPIC),
3rd reel symbol number (for passing position) of address “F069 (H)” (_NB_RL3_PASPIC),
3rd reel symbol number (for stop position) of address “F06A(H)” (_NB_RL3_STPPIC)
The initial value "11111111(B)" (FF(H)) is stored in all of the FF(H).

Next, the process advances to step S837, and a random delay time is set. This process is executed by counting the first reel rotation start wait counter (_CT_RL1_WAIT) at address "F056(H)", the second reel rotation start wait counter (_CT_RL2_WAIT) at address "F061(H)", and the second reel rotation start wait counter (_CT_RL2_WAIT) at address "F06C(H)". The third reel rotation start wait counter (_CT_RL3_WAIT) is set to a value determined by lottery. Specifically, any one value from "0" to "335(D)" is determined, and the value is stored in each of the above three addresses. When the value is stored in the above address, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt processing, and when the value becomes "0", the reels 31 can be restarted.

The above standby performance start process shown in FIG. 143 is executed before determining whether or not the minimum gaming time has elapsed (step S766), as shown in FIG. 140. In other words, the standby performance start process is executed even if the minimum game time has not elapsed. After the standby performance ends, it is determined in step S766 whether or not the minimum gaming time has elapsed. In the 23rd embodiment, since the standby effect is executed according to the timer value shown in FIG. 145, the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) will always have elapsed by the time the standby effect ends.
In this way, when executing a standby effect, it starts without waiting for the minimum playing time, so even if the standby effect is executed close to the closing time of the hall, for example, it will not cause unpleasant feelings to the player. It is possible to reduce the possibility of this happening.

FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) in step S752 of FIG. 139.
First, in step S791, it is determined whether the wait time (_TM2_WAIT) stored by the addresses "F041(H)" and "F042(H)" is "0" (whether the zero flag is "1" or not). to decide. If it is "0", the process advances to step S792, and if it is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended. In other words, unless the waiting time (_TM2_WAIT) stored by the addresses "F041(H)" and "F042(H)" is "0", the reel 31 will not be stopped even if the stop switch 42 is operated. Not executed.

The reason for controlling in this way is as follows.
In the 23rd embodiment, a non-RT or a 1BB non-internal player in RT1 will win 1BB with a relatively high probability (with "19930/65536"), as shown in FIGS. 126 and 127. If you win 1BB and it becomes inside 1BB, the symbol combination of 1BB will be stopped and displayed in games where you have not won a small role or replay in the game (games where the winning and replay condition device number is "0"). It becomes possible.
On the other hand, in the 23rd embodiment, AT is executed in a 1BB game. For this reason, when it is not AT, you do not want to win 1BB even if it is inside 1BB. Even if 1BB is won during non-AT, the 1BB game itself will be executed, but AT will not be executed. Furthermore, since the AT lottery is not executed while 1BB is in operation, it is disadvantageous for the player if 1BB is in operation during non-AT. When the 1BB is activated, the ball payout rate is slightly higher than when the 1BB is not activated, as described above, but since it is a gaming period in which the AT lottery is not executed, it is actually disadvantageous to the player.

Therefore, when the stop display of the 1BB symbol combination is not permitted, specifically when the main game state is not "3" (AT preparation), or even when the main game state is "3", AT standby When the flag is not "0", in order to avoid as much as possible the symbol combination of 1BB from being stopped and displayed, the symbol combination of 1BB is tenpai (when the two reels 31 are stopped, the symbol "Blue BAR" related to 1BB is A period is provided in which, even if the third stop switch 42 is operated, the stop operation does not become effective when the third stop switch 42 is operated.

In step S791, it is determined that the waiting time is "0", and when the process proceeds to step S792, a check is performed for all motors to pass the index. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) in the A register.
(2) Perform a logical sum (OR) operation between the A register value and the second reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC). Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register.
(3) Perform a logical sum (OR) operation between the A register value and the third reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC). Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register.
(4) Add "1" to the A register value.

Here, the first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC), the A register value and the second reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC), and the third reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) are , before there is a change in the #th reel motor index, it is "FF (H)", that is, "11111111 (B)".
Therefore, if at least one data is "11111111(B)", the calculation result up to (3) above will be "11111111(B)", and as shown in (4), adding "1" will result in "0". become. Therefore, before there is a change in the #th reel motor index for at least one reel 31, the above calculation result will be "0", and after there is a change in the #th reel motor index for all reels 31, the above calculation result will be "0". The calculation result will be a value other than "0".

As mentioned above, when there is a change in the # reel motor index, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) will be set to "10 (D)" (at the rising edge) or "0" (at the falling edge). time) is memorized. Then, each time it is determined that the symbol has moved by one symbol, "1" is subtracted from the #th reel symbol number (for passing position). In this way, after the # reel motor index changes, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) changes from "0" (00000000 (B)) to "19 (D)" (00010011 (B)). It will be a cycle. Therefore, after the change of the #th reel motor index, the above logical OR operation of (1) to (3) will not result in "11111111(B)".

Further, as another method for the above calculation (4), there is a method of performing a logical product (AND) calculation with "11100000(B)". With this method, if the calculation result is not "0", it is possible to determine "No" in step S793, which will be described later. Furthermore, as another method for the above calculation (4), there is a method of performing a calculation of "1" bit shift to the left. With this method, if the calculation result is not "0", it is possible to determine "No" in step S793, which will be described later. In other words, before there is a change in the # reel motor index, the upper 3 bits of the # reel symbol number (for passing position) are "111", so in the calculation in (4) above, the upper 3 bits are It is determined whether at least one bit of the bits is "1". If there is a "1" in the upper three bits, it is not possible to accept the stop switch 42 in step S793, which will be described later, and if there is no "1" in the upper three bits, it can be determined that the stop can be accepted. becomes.

Next, the process advances to step S793, and it is determined whether or not it is possible to accept a stop of the stop switch 42. This determination is made by determining whether or not the above calculation (4) in step S792 is "0" (zero flag is "1"). In other words, when there is a change in the #th reel motor index for all the reels 31, acceptance of the stop switch 42 is permitted.
In step S793, when it is determined that the stop switch 42 can be accepted, the process proceeds to step S794, and when it is determined that the stop switch 42 can not be accepted, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S794, the operation of the stop switch 42 (corresponding to the reel 31 that has not yet been controlled to stop) is performed based on the values of the D0 to D2 bits of the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of the address "F017 (H)". Determine whether it has been done or not. When it is determined that the stop switch 42 has been operated, the process advances to step S795, and when it is determined that the stop switch 42 has not been operated, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S795, the stop position is determined based on the lottery results of the current game (addresses "F0A9(H)" and "F0AA(H)") and the reel position at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated.
Next, the process advances to step S796, and the process moves to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET).

FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S796 of FIG. 146.
As mentioned above, this flowchart restricts the 1BB symbol combination from being stopped and displayed when the 1BB symbol combination is full and the situation allows the 1BB symbol combination to be stopped and displayed. However, in a situation where it is not desired to stop displaying the 1BB symbol combination, the waiting time until the third stop switch 42 becomes effective is set. If the waiting time is set here and the third stop switch 42 is operated before the waiting time has elapsed, the result in step S791 of FIG. 146 is "No" and the stop control of the third reel 31 is not executed.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the second stop switch 42 has been stopped. Here, in step S794 of FIG. 146, it is determined whether the stop switch 42 determined to have started is the second stop switch 42 (the second stop switch 42 operated). If it is determined in step S801 that it is after the second stop, the process advances to step S802, and if it is determined that it is not after the second stop, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S802, it is determined whether 1BB can be won. Specifically, at the time of the second stop, it is determined whether the symbol combination of 1BB has reached the active line or not. For example, when determining whether or not you have reached tenpai, after the second reel 31 has stopped, the "Blue BAR" (symbols that make up the 1BB symbol combination) on the first reel 31 and the second reel 31 are both on the active line. When it is stopped, it is determined that 1BB is full (1BB can win). On the other hand, even before the second reel 31 stops (regardless of whether it has stopped or not), it may be determined whether or not the second reel 31 is full. For example, when the first reel 31 stops, the "blue BAR" is stopped on the active line, and the second stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "blue BAR" of the second reel 31 can be stopped on the active line. When this happens, it is determined that 1BB is tenpai (1BB can win).
When it is determined that 1BB is possible to win, the process proceeds to step S803, and when it is determined that 1BB is not possible to win, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S803, it is determined whether the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) of the current game is "0". Here, it is determined whether the value of address "F0A9(H)" is "0". When it is determined that the winning and replay condition device number is "0", the process proceeds to step S804, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended.
Therefore, even if it is determined in step S802 that 1BB is full, the waiting time is not set in step S810 since the answer in step S803 is "No" in the game when the small winning combination is won. In the 23rd embodiment, in a game in which a small winning combination is won, small winning combination priority control (in a game in which the winning of 1BB is carried over and a small winning combination is won, the winning of the small winning combination is prioritized and control that does not allow winning of 1BB) is executed, so 1BB will never win. Therefore, there is no need to provide a waiting time in a game where the player wins a small prize.
In step S804, the accessory condition device number (_NB_CRRT_BNS) is acquired. This process is a process of acquiring the value of address "F0AA(H)" and storing it in the A register.
In the next step S805, it is determined whether the acquired accessory condition device number is less than "2", in other words, whether it is "1". Here, a comparison operation is performed between the A register value and "2", and when it is determined that the A register value is smaller, it is determined as "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S806, and when it is determined as "No", the main Finish the process according to the flowchart.

In the 23rd embodiment, the symbol combination of 1BB is not tenpai unless the accessory condition device number is "1". Therefore, when the accessory condition device number is "0" in the current game, it is configured such that "No" is determined in step S802. Therefore, in step S805, it is not determined whether the accessory condition device number is "1" (of course, it is not determined whether the accessory condition device number is "1" in step S805). ), it is determined whether or not it is less than "2".

In step S806, the main game state number is acquired. This process is a process of storing the value of the main gaming state (_NB_GAM_STS) at address "F07E(H)" in the A register. Then, the process advances to step S807, and it is determined whether the A register value is "3" (AT preparation in progress). Here, a comparison operation is performed between the A register value and "3", and if the A register value and "3" are the same value, it is determined as "Yes". When it is determined that the main game state number is "3", the process advances to step S808, and when it is determined that it is not "3", the process advances to step S809.

In step S808, the value of the AT wait counter (_CT_AT_WAIT) of address "F098(H)" is acquired. Then, it is determined whether the AT standby counter value is "0" or not. When the AT standby counter value is "0", the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the AT standby counter is not "0", the process advances to step S809.
In step S809, "896(D)" is stored in the HL register. Next, the process advances to step S810, and the HL register value (896(D)) is stored in the wait time (_TM2_WAIT) of addresses "F041(H)" and "F042(H)". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
When the waiting time is stored in addresses "F041(H)" and "F042(H)", "1" is subtracted for each interrupt processing. Further, it is determined whether the time set here becomes "0" in step S791 of FIG. 146.
In the above processing, when the main game state is "3" and the AT standby counter is "0", no standby time is stored. That is, in this case, winning of 1BB is permitted.

FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S753 of FIG. 139.
First, in step S941, main game state game end processing is executed. This process is a process for determining whether or not the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, and is a process shown in FIG. 149, which will be described later.
Next, the process advances to step S942, and 1BB operation management is executed. 1BB operation management is a process of determining whether or not the termination condition of the 1BB game is satisfied when the current game is a 1BB game. Specifically, based on whether or not the D2 bit of the operation state flag (in the 23rd embodiment, like the 11th embodiment, "FL_ACTION" shown in FIG. 35 is provided) is "1", Determine whether 1BB is in operation.
When it is determined that 1BB is in operation, the number of coins that can be obtained when 1BB is in operation ("_CT_BIG_PAY" of address "F00E(H)") is read, and it is determined whether or not it has become "0".
Then, when it is determined that the obtainable number of coins has become "0" (when the obtainable number of coins satisfies the 1BB operation termination condition), processing is executed to clear the D2 bit of the operation state flag.

Next, the process advances to step S943, and it is determined whether or not the RB is in operation. Here, it is determined whether the RB is in operation by determining whether or not the D3 bit of the operation state flag (FIG. 35) is "0". When it is determined that the RB is not in operation (the RB operation state flag is "0"), the process advances to step S945, and when it is determined that the RB is in operation, the process advances to step S944.

In step S944, RB operation management is executed. This process determines whether the number of games played when the RB is activated for the address "F00F(H)" has reached "12", or the number of wins when the RB is activated for the address "F010(H)" has reached "8". However, when it is determined that the number of RB games is less than "12" and the number of winnings of the small winning combination is less than "8", the process of step S944 is ended and the process proceeds to step S945. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S944 that the number of RB games has reached either "12" or the number of small winnings has reached "8", the D3 bit of the operating state flag is set to "0". , the process advances to step S945.
Step S945 executes advantageous section clear counter management. This process is the process shown in FIG. 51 or 52 shown in the eleventh embodiment, and includes updating processing of the advantageous section clear counter and difference counter, initialization processing when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, etc. Execute. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the process at the end of the main game state game in step S941 of FIG. 148.
First, in step S951, it is determined whether the advantageous section clear counters (_CT_ADV_CLR) for addresses "F07A(H)" and "F07B(H)" have become less than "600". When it is determined that it is less than "600", the process advances to step S952, and when it is determined that it is not less than "600", the process advances to step S955.
In step S952, it is determined whether the main game state 1 (advantageous section normal (non-AT)) is present. This process is a process for determining whether or not the main gaming state number of address "F07E(H)" is "1". When it is determined that the main game state 1 is present, the process advances to step S957, and when it is determined that the main game state 1 is not, the process advances to step S953.

In step S953, it is determined whether the main game state 5 (AT pullback) is reached. This process is a process for determining whether or not the main gaming state number of address "F07E(H)" is "5". When it is determined that the main game state is 5, the process proceeds to step S954, and when it is determined that the main game state is not 5, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S954, it is determined whether the AT pullback counter is "0". This process is a process for determining whether or not the value of address "F09D(H)" is "0". When it is determined that the AT pullback counter is "0", the process advances to step S957, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended.

On the other hand, when the process advances from step S951 to step S955, it is determined whether or not the end conditions for main game state 4 are satisfied. This process determines whether the number of coins that can be acquired at the time of 1BB operation of address "F00E (H)" is "0" or not, and if it is "0", it is the end condition of main game state 4 (1BB operation). It is determined that the following is satisfied. When it is determined that the end conditions for main game state 4 are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S956, and when it is determined that the end conditions for main game state 4 are not satisfied, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S956, it is determined whether the ending counter has changed from "1" to "0". This process determines whether the ending counter of address "F097(H)" has been updated from "1" to "0" in the current game. When it is determined that the ending counter has changed from "1" to "0", the process advances to step S957, and when it is determined that the ending counter has not changed from "1" to "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S957, advantageous section end preparation (M_ADVEND_STBY) is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 150, which will be described later. Then, after executing preparations for ending the advantageous section, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section end preparation (M_ADVEND_STNBY) in step S957 of FIG. 149.
In step S961, "1" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter. This process executes the following process.
(1) Store "1 (H)" in the HL register. As a result, the H register value becomes "0 (H)" and the L register value becomes "1 (H)".
(2) Next, store the L register value "1 (H)" in the lower address (F07B (H)) of the advantageous section clear counter, and store the H register value "0 (H)" in the upper address (F07A (H)). ” to remember.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends. From the above, the upper byte of the advantageous section clear counter becomes "00000000 (B)" and the lower byte becomes "00000001 (B)".

By storing "1" in the advantageous section clear counter through the preparation for ending the advantageous section as described above, it becomes unnecessary to store data indicating whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied at a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
If data indicating whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53, the capacity of the RWM 53 will be compressed to that extent.
Further, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, it is necessary to store data indicating that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied at a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Furthermore, for each game, it is necessary to perform a process of reading the data stored at the predetermined address and determining whether or not the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met. Therefore, the program capacity is required accordingly, and the capacity of the ROM 54 is compressed.

On the other hand, in the 23rd embodiment, "1" is simply stored in the advantageous section clear counter in preparation for the end of the advantageous section, and "1" is subtracted in step S422 in the advantageous section counter management that is executed thereafter, for example, in FIG. When the process is executed, the value before subtraction is "1" and the value after subtraction is "0", so the result is "No" in step S423 and "Yes" in step S424, and the process advances to step S435. , the RWM 53 can be cleared at the end of the advantageous section.

FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) in the 23rd embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 53 in the 11th embodiment. In FIG. 151, the same steps as those in FIG. 53 are given the same step numbers.
In FIG. 151, the reel drive control in step S461 in FIG. 53 is referred to as reel drive management (I_REEL_ADM) in step S841, and this specific process will be described in detail.
Further, in FIG. 151, a test signal output is provided in step S842. Note that in FIG. 53 of the eleventh embodiment, this process is omitted, but this does not mean that the test signal output is not provided in the eleventh embodiment.
The test signal output in step S842 may include the output of data on the push order in the current game and the designated position of the reel 31. Further, for example, output such as condition device information may be included, but the explanation will be omitted in the twenty-third embodiment.

Furthermore, in the twenty-third embodiment, the interrupt period is "1.117" ms, which is different from the other embodiments (2.235 ms).
Here, when the interrupt period is "2.235" ms, the drive control of the reel 31 is executed for each interrupt (for example, step S461 in FIG. 53 in the 11th embodiment), but in the 23rd embodiment When the interrupt cycle is "1.117" ms, drive control of the reel 31 (processing after step S872 in FIG. 154, which will be described later) is executed once every two interrupts.

FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing reel drive management (I_REEL_ADM) in step S841 of FIG. 151.
Here, the program shown in FIG. 152 (including FIGS. 153, 154 to 155, 157, and 159 to be described later) is used not only for reel control during standby performance but also for normal reel control. Therefore, it is possible to execute normal reel control and standby performance (reverse rotation of the reels 31) with the program shown in FIG. 152 without providing a program dedicated to standby performance.
In FIG. 152, in step S851, the number of reels is set. Note that the number of reels is "3". Here, processing is performed to store "00000100 (B)" in the C register.
In the next step S852, reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 153, which will be described later, and is a process in which the value of the reel drive state to be controlled or its address is stored in each register. Through the process of step S852, each register value becomes as follows.
A register value: Value of the reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS) of the reel 31 to be controlled DE register value: Address of the reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS) of the reel 31 to be controlled HL register value: To be controlled Address of reel drive status (_WK_RL#_STS) of reel 31

In the next step S853, reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) is executed. This process is a process of actually accelerating, constant speed, decelerating, stopping, etc. the reels, and is a process shown in FIGS. 154 to 155, which will be described later.
In the next step S854, it is determined whether the processes of steps S852 and S853 have been executed for all reels 31. In this process, first, the C register value is shifted to the right by "1". For example, since the initial value is "00000100 (B)" as described above, in the first step S854, it is shifted to the right by "1" to become "00000010 (B)". Next, it is determined whether the value after being shifted by "1" to the right has become "0". When it is determined that it is "0", it is determined that the processes of steps S852 and S853 have been executed for all reels 31, and the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not "0", the process returns to step S852.

FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET) in step S852 of FIG. 152.
First, in step S861, a start RWM address request is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), that is, "F04D(H)" in the HL register.
(2) Store the C register value in the A register. Note that the initial value of the C register value is "00000100 (B)" as described above.
(3) Shift the A register value to the right by "1" and store the result in the A register. As a result, in the first calculation, the A register value becomes "00000010 (B)".
(4) Multiply the A register value by "11 (D)" and store the multiplication result in the A register. Here, when "00000010(B)" or "2(D)" is multiplied by "11(D)", it becomes "22(D)" or "16(H)".

Note that this "11(D)" is based on the address interval stored in the RWM 53. Specifically, the address for storing the first reel drive state is "F04D(H)", and various information regarding the first reel is stored up to "F057(H)". Further, the address for storing the second reel driving state is "F058(H)", and various information regarding the second reel is stored up to "F062(H)". Furthermore, the address for storing the third reel driving state is "F063(H)", and various information regarding the third reel is stored up to "F06D(H)".
In this way, the interval between the address "F04D(H)" for storing the first reel drive state and the address "F058(H)" for storing the second reel drive state is "11" addresses, and This is because the interval between the address "F058(H)" for storing the reel drive state and the address "F063(H)" for storing the third reel drive state is "11" addresses. As a result, by repeating the same process in subsequent processes, it becomes possible to obtain, for example, reel drive state information for the reel to be controlled.

Furthermore, various pieces of information for each reel 31 are also arranged at the same intervals. For example, the address of the first reel drive pulse output counter is the address "F04E(H)" which is obtained by adding "2" to the address "F04D(H)" of the first reel drive state. Similarly, the address of the second reel drive pulse output counter is the address "F05A(H)" which is obtained by adding "2" to the address "F058(H)" of the second reel drive state. Furthermore, similarly, the address of the third reel drive pulse output counter is the address "F065(H)" which is obtained by adding "2" to the address "F063(H)" of the third reel drive state. The same applies to other information.
As a result, in step S881 (FIG. 154) described later, for example, "6" is added to the address of the #th reel drive state to obtain the address of the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC). However, for example, for the first reel 31, add "6" to the address "F04D(H)" of the first reel drive state, and add "6" to the address "F053(H)" of the first reel symbol number (for passing position). )” can be obtained. Similarly, for the second reel 31, add "6" to the address "F058(H)" of the second reel drive state, and obtain the address "F05E(H)" of the second reel symbol number (for passing position). can be found.
In this way, by repeatedly executing the same module, processing for three reels can be executed.

Next, the process advances to step S862, and designated address data is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the A register value to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register. In the first calculation, the A register value is "16(H)", so adding "16(H)" to the HL register value "F04D(H)" results in "F063(H)".
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
(3) Store the H register value in the D register.
(4) Store the L register value in the E register.
With this process,
A register value: Value of the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) HL register value: Address value of the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) (H register value is the upper address, L register value is the lower address) "F063 (H )”
DE register value: “F063 (H)” which is the address value of the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) (D register value is the upper address, E register value is the lower address)
becomes.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

The reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET) in FIG. 153 is executed three times in total until it is determined "Yes" in step S854 in FIG. 152.
The second calculation using the reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET) is as follows.
(1) Step S861
a) Store the address of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), that is, "F04D(H)" in the HL register.
b) Store the C register value in the A register. The second time, the C register value is "00000010(B)".
c) Shift the A register value to the right by '1' and store the result in the A register. As a result, the A register value becomes "00000001(B)".
d) Multiply the A register value by "11 (D)" and store the multiplication result in the A register. Here, when "00000001(B)" or "1(D)" is multiplied by "11(D)", it becomes "11(D)" or "0B(H)".

(2) Step S862
a) Add the A register value to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register. In the second calculation, the A register value is "0B(H)", so adding "0B(H)" to the HL register value "F04D(H)" results in "F058(H)". Become.
b) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
c) Store the H register value in the D register.
d) Store the L register value in the E register.
With this process,
A register value: Value of the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) HL register value: Address value of the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) (H register value is the upper address, L register value is the lower address) "F058 (H )”
DE register value: "F058 (H)" which is the address value of the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) (D register value is the upper address, E register value is the lower address)
becomes.

The third calculation of the reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET) is as follows.
(1) Step S861
a) Store the address of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), that is, "F04D(H)" in the HL register.
b) Store the C register value in the A register. The third time, the C register value is "00000001 (B)".
c) Shift the A register value to the right by '1' and store the result in the A register. As a result, the A register value becomes "00000000(B)".
d) Multiply the A register value by "11 (D)" and store the multiplication result in the A register. Here, when "00000000(B)" is multiplied by "11(D)", it becomes "0".

(2) Step S862
a) Add the A register value to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register. Here, in the third calculation, the A register value is "0", so adding "0" to the HL register value "F04D(H)" results in "F04D(H)".
b) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
c) Store the H register value in the D register.
d) Store the L register value in the E register.
With this process,
A register value: The value of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) HL register value: The address value of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) (H register value is the upper address, L register value is the lower address) "F04D (H )”
DE register value: "F04D (H)" which is the address value (D register value is the upper address, E register value is the lower address) of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS)
becomes.

154 and 155 are flowcharts showing the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) in step S853 of FIG. 152. FIG. 155 is a flowchart following FIG. 154.
In FIG. 154, in step S871, it is determined whether the current interrupt processing is excitation update timing. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) Exclusive OR (XOR) operation is performed on the A register value (value of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS)) and "10000000 (B)", and the operation result is stored in the A register.
As a result, when the D7 bit of the A register value before the operation is "0", the operation becomes "1", and when the D7 bit of the A register value before the operation is "1", the operation becomes "0". ”. Further, bits D0 to D6 do not change before and after the operation.
(2) Store the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value (the address indicated by the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS)).
(3) Determine whether the D7 (most significant) bit stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is "0" or not, and if it is "0", determine that it is excitation update timing. .

From the above, the D7 bit of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) takes a value of "0" or "1" for each interrupt process. Therefore, the D7 bit becomes "0" once every two interrupts, and the excitation update timing arrives.
When it is determined that it is the excitation update timing, the process proceeds to step S872, and when it is determined that it is not the excitation update timing, the process according to this flowchart is ended. In other words, the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) processing from step S872 onwards is executed once every two interrupts. Therefore, the counters and data updated in the processing after step S872 can be updated every two interrupts. Note that control for driving the motor 32 (output processing from the output port) is executed for each interrupt.

In the next step S872, a reel rotation start standby counter is acquired. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Save the HL register value to the stack area.
(2) Add "9" to the HL register value to make the HL register value the address value of the #th reel rotation start wait counter (_CT_RL#_WAIT).
Next, the process advances to step S873, and the counter value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is counted down (subtracted by "1").
In addition, the # reel rotation start wait counter (_CT_RL#_WAIT) stores "0" when there is no standby effect, and when there is a standby effect, the counter for the random delay of # reel 31 after the standby effect is stored. A counter value is stored.
Then, the process advances to step S874, and it is determined whether there is a standby time when the reel rotation starts. Here, if the value before the subtraction of "1" in step S873 is not "0" (the carry flag does not become "1"), it is determined that there is no standby at the start of reel rotation, and the process proceeds to step S875. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a standby at the start of reel rotation, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In the next step S875, it is determined whether the reels 31 are stopped. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The value saved in the stack area (the address value of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS)) is restored to the HL register.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
(3) When the A register value is "0", it is determined that the reels 31 are stopped.
Note that when the process proceeds to step S875, the D7 bit of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) is "0".
If it is determined in step S875 that the reel 31 is not stopped, the process proceeds to step S876, and if it is determined that the reel 31 is stopped, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S876, it is determined whether the reels 31 are accelerating or decelerating. Here, when the A register value (value of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS)) is less than "3", it is determined that the reel 31 is accelerating or decelerating.
When it is determined that the reel 31 is accelerating or decelerating, the process advances to step S882, and when it is determined that the reel 31 is not accelerating or decelerating, the process advances to step S877.

In step S877, it is determined whether the reel 31 is at a constant speed or has started decelerating. Here, it is determined whether the A register value is "0" or not, and when it is not "0", it is determined that the reel 31 is at a constant speed or has started decelerating, and when it is "0", the reel 31 is 31 is determined to be at a constant speed or not to start deceleration.
When it is determined that the reel 31 is at a constant speed or has started to decelerate, the process advances to step S892, and when it is determined that the reel 31 is at a constant speed or has not started to decelerate, the process advances to step S878.
In step S878, acceleration set processing is executed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the L register. Note that since the E register value is the lower address value of the reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS), the address of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) is stored in the HL register by this process.
(2) Store "2(D)" at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the value indicating the reel driving state becomes "2" (a value corresponding to acceleration).

In the next step S879, the reel drive pulse output counter and the number of reel drive pulse switching times are initialized. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store "1" at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value. Here, the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value becomes the address of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT).
(2) Store "9" at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "3" to the HL register value. Here, the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "3" to the HL register value is the address of the #th reel drive pulse switching number (_CT_RL#_PLSCHG).

Next, the process advances to step S880, and it is determined whether or not standby performance is in progress. In this process, it is determined whether the standby performance type (_WK_PRD) of the address "F09E(H)" is "0" or not, and if it is "0", it is determined that the standby performance is not in progress. When it is determined that the standby performance is not in progress, the process advances to step S881, and when it is determined that the standby performance is in progress, the process advances to step S882.
In step S881, the symbol number (for the passing position) and the symbol number (for the stop position) are initialized. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the initial value "255 (D)" (FF (H)) at the address obtained by adding "6" to the HL register value. Here, the address obtained by adding "6" to the HL register value is the address of the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC).
(2) Store the initial value "255 (D)" (FF (H)) at the address obtained by adding "7" to the HL register value. Here, the address obtained by adding "7" to the HL register value is the address of the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC).

In the next step S882, "1" is subtracted from the reel drive pulse output counter. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Set the HL register value to the address of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT).
(2) Subtract "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
Next, the process advances to step S883, and it is determined whether the reel drive pulse output counter is "0". This process determines whether the result of subtracting "1" in (2) above is "0". When it is determined that it is "0", the process advances to step S884, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In the next step S884, it is determined whether the number of reel drive pulse switching is "0". Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Set the HL register value to the address value of the #th reel drive pulse switching count (_CT_RL#_PLSCHG).
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
(3) Store the A register value in the B register.
(4) When it is determined that the A register value is "0", it is determined that the number of reel drive pulse switching is "0".
When it is determined that the number of reel drive pulse switching is "0", the process advances to step S914 (FIG. 155), and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process advances to step S885.

In step S885, "1" is subtracted from the number of times the reel drive pulse is switched. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (the address of the #th reel drive pulse switching count (_CT_RL#_PLSCHG)). Also, the value subtracted by "1" is stored in the A register.
In the next step S886, an acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP) is set.
FIG. 156 is a diagram showing the acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP).
In FIG. 156, the numerical value "90 (D)" at the address "1050 (H)" indicates the pulse output counter value during deceleration. Further, each numerical value of the addresses "1058 (H)" to "1051 (H)" indicates the pulse output counter value for the 1st to 8th steps during acceleration.
Then, in step S886, the start address "1050 (H)" of the acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP) is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S887, designated data is acquired from the acceleration/deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP). This process stores the data (pulse output counter value) stored at the address of the value obtained by adding the A register value (#th reel drive pulse switching number) to the HL register value (1050 (H)) in the B register. This is the process of
Next, the process advances to step S888, and the reel drive pulse output counter is saved. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the L register.
(2) Store the D register value in the H register.
Through this process, the address of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) is stored in the HL register.
(3) Store the B register value (pulse output counter value) at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value.
Here, the address indicated by the HL register value is the address of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS), and the address obtained by adding "2" to this is the address of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT). It becomes the address.

In the next step S889, it is determined whether acceleration has ended. In this process, it is determined whether the A register value (#th reel drive pulse switching number) is "0" or not, and if it is "0", it is determined that acceleration has ended. When it is determined that the acceleration has ended, the process advances to step S890, and when it is determined that the acceleration has not ended, the process advances to step S892.
In step S890, constant speed is set. This process stores "5" at the address (#th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS)) indicated by the HL register value.
In the next step S891, the reel rotation defect detection counter is cleared. This process is a process of storing "0" in the address of the value obtained by adding "4" to the HL register value (the address of the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD)).
In the next step S892, the reel drive pulse is updated (I_PULSE_INC). This process is the process shown in FIG. 157, which will be described later.

Next, the process advances to step S893, and it is determined whether or not the reel 31 is moving at a constant speed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the L register.
(2) Store the data stored in the address (#th reel motor index (_FL_RL#_MT_IDX)) indicated by the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value in the A register.
(3) Add "4" to the HL register value. As a result, the HL register value becomes the address of the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD).
(4) When the data stored at the address indicated by the DE register value is "5", it is determined that the speed is constant.
Here, the address indicated by the DE register value is the address of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) in step S888.
When it is determined that the vehicle is at a constant speed, the process advances to step S894, and when it is determined that the vehicle is not at a constant speed, the process advances to step S903.

In step S894, "1" is added to the reel rotation defect detection counter. This process is a process of adding "1" to the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
Next, the process advances to step S895 in FIG. 155, and it is determined whether or not a reel rotation defect is detected. This process determines whether the result of adding "1" to the reel rotation defect detection counter in step S894 is "0", and if it is "0" (when the zero flag is "1"), , it is determined that a reel rotation failure is detected.
When it is determined that the reel rotation is not required, the process advances to step S878 and the acceleration process is executed again. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel rotation failure is not detected, the process advances to step S896.

In step S896, it is determined whether there is a change in the #th reel motor index (motor index # signal). In this process, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the motor index # signal based on the A register value (value of the #th reel motor index (_FL_RL#_MT_IDX)), and when it is determined that there is a change, the process proceeds to step S897. If it is determined that there is no change, the process advances to step S903.
In step S897, the standard symbol number "10" and the standard step number "3" when passing the index are set. This process is a process of storing "10 (D)" in the D register and "3 (D)" in the E register.
Here, "10 (D)" stored in the D register is a value that is subsequently stored in the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC). Further, "3 (D)" stored in the E register is a value that will be stored in the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of one symbol on the #th reel after this, and both are designed values.

In the next step S898, it is determined whether or not it is time for the #th reel motor index to rise. This process is based on the A register value (value of the #th reel motor index (_FL_RL#_MT_IDX)), and when the D0 bit is "1" and the D4 bit is "0", the rise of the #th reel motor index I decide it's time. If it is determined that it is the rising time of the #th reel motor index, the process advances to step S900, and if it is determined that it is not the time that the #th reel motor index is rising, the process advances to step S899.

In step S899, the reference drawing number "0" and the reference step number "3" at the time of passing the index are set. This process is a process of storing "0" in the D register and "3(D)" in the E register. In other words, "0" is stored in the value that becomes the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC), and "3 (D )” is memorized.
In the next step S900, the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD) is cleared. This process is a process of storing "0" in the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (address of the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD)).

In the next step S901, the #th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PLUS) is acquired. This process is a process of storing data stored at the address of the value obtained by adding "4" to the HL register value in the A register.
Here, the HL register value is the address value of the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD) as described above, and when "4" is added to this address value, the #th reel drive pulse data search counter This is the address value of (_CT_RL#_PLUS).

In the next step S902, the reference symbol number and reference step number when passing the index are stored. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value at the address of the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value. Here, the address of the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value is the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of the 1st symbol on the #th reel. The E register value "3" is stored at this address.
(2) Store the D register value at the address of the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value. Here, the address of the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value is the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC). The D register value ("10 (D)" set in step S897 when the #th reel motor index rises, "0" set in step S899 when it falls) is stored in this address. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
As described above, when steps S896 to S902 are executed, the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of one symbol of the #th reel and the number of the #th reel every time the #th reel motor index rises and falls. A reference value (design value) is set for each symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC).

In this manner, in the 23rd embodiment, both the rising and falling times of the reel motor index are detected, and the step number and passing position symbol number of one symbol are updated respectively, so that only when the reel motor index is rising is detected. In some cases, the reel 31 can be stopped before it rotates once, compared to the case where the reel 31 is detected. Furthermore, even if there is a problem in the rotation of the reel 31, it can be corrected immediately.
As described above, the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) is executed regardless of whether it is normal (forward rotation) or standby performance (reverse rotation). Therefore, in step S898, it is determined whether or not it is the rising time, regardless of whether it is the normal time (forward rotation) or the standby performance (reverse rotation), and in step S902, it is determined whether it is the rising time or the rising time. Predetermined values are set depending on the time.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S893 that the speed is not constant, and if it is determined in step S896 that there is no change in the #th reel motor index, the process advances to step S903. In step S903, it is determined whether the index has passed (or not after the reel sensor 33 has detected the index). Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data stored at the address of the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value is stored in the A register.
The HL register value is the address value of the # reel rotation defect detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD), and when "2" is added to this address value, the value of the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) is It becomes the address value.
(2) Add "1" to the value stored in the A register.
(3) If the result of adding "1" in (2) above is "0", it is determined that the #th reel motor index has not changed from its initial value, and therefore the index has not passed.

Here, as mentioned above, the initial value "255 (D)" (FF (H)) is stored in the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC), and the # reel motor index When the value changes, "0" or "10(D)" is stored in step S902, and after that, "0" to "19(D)" are cycled. In other words, after the value of the # reel motor index changes, if the reel 31 is rotating normally, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) becomes "255". (D)" (if the acceleration process is executed again due to step-out, "255 (D)" will be stored again as the initial value).
Therefore, if "1" is added to the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and it becomes "0", it can be determined that the # reel motor index has not changed yet. becomes.

In step S903, if it is determined that the index has been passed, the process advances to step S904, and if it is determined that the index has not been passed yet, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S904, the number of steps per symbol is subtracted by "1". Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add "1" to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register. Here, the HL register value before adding "1" is the address value of the # reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL#_BAD), so if "1" is added, the number of steps for one symbol on the # reel (_NB_RL #_STEP) address value.
(2) Subtract "1" from the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.

In the next step S905, it is determined whether or not the symbol has moved by one symbol. Here, as a result of subtracting "1" in step S904, when the value of the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of 1 symbol on the #th reel becomes "0" (when the zero flag becomes "1"), It is determined that it has moved by one symbol. When it is determined that the symbol has moved by one symbol, the process advances to step S906, and when it is determined that the symbol has not moved by one symbol (the above subtraction result is not "0"), the process advances to step S909.
In step S906, the number of steps per symbol "16 (D)" is stored. This process is a process of storing "16 (D)" at the address indicated by the HL register value (the number of steps for one symbol on the #th reel (_NB_RL#_STEP)).

In the next step S907, the symbol number is updated. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add "1" to the HL register value and store the added value in the HL register. As a result, the address indicated by the HL register value becomes the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC).
(2) Execute special addition processing to add "1" to the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. Here, "special addition processing" means that in this example, the upper limit value is set to "19 (D)" (corresponding to the maximum value of the symbol number), and "1 (D)" is set to "19 (D)". This is an operation that results in "0" when added. Specifically, the calculation is performed as follows.
Example 1) 0+1=1
Example 2) 10+1=11
Example 3) 19+1=0
Thereby, it is possible to cycle between "0" and "19 (D)" without determining whether the symbol number is the maximum value or not.

Next, the process advances to step S908, and the number of steps per symbol is corrected. In addition, in step S906, "16 (D)" is stored in the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of one symbol of the #th reel.
Here, in the 23rd embodiment, the number of steps for one symbol is set to "16" for the four symbols whose symbol numbers are "2", "7", "12", and "17", and the number of steps for one symbol is set to "16", and for the other 16 symbols , the number of steps for one symbol is set to "17".
Therefore, in step S908, the symbol number after the update in step S907 is determined, and when the symbol number is "2", "7", "12", and "17", the number 1 of the #th reel is determined in step S906. The number of steps of the symbol (_NB_RL#_STEP) is maintained at "16 (D)". On the other hand, when the symbol number is other than the above four symbol numbers, "17 (D)" is stored in the number of steps of one symbol on the #th reel (_NB_RL#_STEP).
Note that the number of steps for one revolution of the reel 31 is set to "336" in accordance with the number of steps of the motor 32. Moreover, the number of symbols is "20". Therefore, by setting the number of steps to ``16'' for 4 symbols and ``17'' for 16 symbols,
16×4+17×16=336
It is set so that

In the next step S909, it is determined whether the deceleration starting symbol position has been reached. Here, in order to compare the passing symbol number and the deceleration start symbol, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the HL register value (#th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC)) and use the subtraction result as the HL register value. As a result, the HL register value becomes the address of the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of one symbol on the #th reel.
Furthermore, the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the B register. Note that the reason why the number of steps for one symbol on the #th reel is stored in the B register is to use it in the process of deceleration start test (I_REDUCE_CHK) in step S910, which will be described later.
(2) Add "1" to the HL register value and set the result of the addition as the HL register value. As a result, the HL register value becomes the address of the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC).
(3) Store the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
(4) Add "1" to the HL register value and set the result of the addition as the HL register value.
(5) Compare the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (# reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) and the A register value, and if the values are the same, it is judged as "Yes". do.

In the next step S910, a deceleration start test (I_REDUCE_CHK) is executed. This process is a test to determine whether the conditions for starting deceleration are satisfied, and is the process shown in FIG. 159, which will be described later.
Then, in the next step S911, it is determined whether or not it is time to start deceleration. In this process, if the zero flag is "1" as a result of the deceleration start test in step S910, it is determined that deceleration is to start.
Although details will be described later, when the standby performance type is "0", the zero flag becomes "1". In addition, when the standby performance type is not "0" (during reverse rotation standby performance), the # reel designated symbol position search wait time (TM2_TAR#_WAIT) is "0" and the current step number is "13" ( design value), the zero flag becomes "1".

When it is determined that it is time to start deceleration, the process advances to step S912, and when it is determined that it is not time to start deceleration, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S912, deceleration is set. This process is a process of storing "1" in the A register.
In the next step S913, pulse data during deceleration is set (4 phases on). This process is a process of storing "00001111(B)" in the B register.
In the next step S914, the reel drive state is set. This process is a process of storing the A register value at the address indicated by the DE register value. Here, the DE register value is the address of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS). As a result, the #th reel drive state becomes "1" (a value indicating deceleration).

Next, the process advances to step S915, and a reel drive pulse is set. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#).
In the next step S916, it is determined whether the deceleration starting state has changed to the decelerating state. In this process, it is determined whether the B register value is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", it is determined that the vehicle has entered deceleration from the start of deceleration. If it is determined that the deceleration has progressed from the start of deceleration, the process advances to step S917, and if it is determined that this has not been the case, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
As mentioned above, in step S913, "00001111 (B)" is stored in the B register, so when proceeding to step S916 via step S913, it is determined that it is not "0", and the deceleration is in progress from the start of deceleration. It is judged that. On the other hand, when the determination in step S884 is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S914, the B register value is "0" in step S884, so the determination in step S916 is "No".
In step S917, an output request when the reel rotation is stopped is set. This process is a process for transmitting the symbol number of the reel 31 to be stopped to the sub-control board 80. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the reel drive pulse update (I_PULSE_INC) in step S892 of FIG. 154.
First, in step S921, "1" is added to the reel drive pulse data search counter. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add "8" to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register. Here, the HL register value before adding "8" is the address value of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS), and when "8" is added, the HL register value becomes the address value for the #th reel drive pulse data search. This is the address value of the counter (_CT_RL#_PULS).
(2) Add "1" to the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
Here, for example, if the value stored in the # reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PULS) is "255 (D)", the result of adding "1" is "0". becomes.

Next, the process advances to step S922, and search counter update correction data is added. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the value of the search counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV) at address "F09F(H)" in the A register. Here, when the value of the search counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV) is "0", it means forward rotation data, and when it is "FE (H)", it means reverse rotation data. It means that.
(2) Add the A register value to the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (#th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PULS)), and store the addition result in the A register.

Here, when the reel 31 is rotating forward, the A register value is "0", so the A register value is the same value as the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value before addition.
On the other hand, when the reel 31 is rotating in the reverse direction, the A register value is "FE (H)", so in effect, the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value before addition is "2". ” will be subtracted.
for example,
Value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value: 100 (D)
A register value: FE (H) or 254 (D)
When
The A register value becomes "98 (D)".

In the next step S923, the #th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PULS) is updated. This process is a process of storing the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value.
Through the processes of steps S921 to S923 described above, the #th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PULS) is incremented by "1" during forward rotation, and "1" is subtracted during reverse rotation.
Next, the process advances to step S924, and an offset for reel drive pulse data search is generated. This process is a process of executing a logical product (AND) operation between the A register value and "00000111(B)". Then, the result of the AND operation is stored in the A register.
The A register value is the value of the #th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL#_PULS), and is a value in the range of "0" to "255(D)". When this value and "00000111 (B)" are subjected to a logical product (AND) operation, the result of the operation becomes a value between "0" and "7".

Specifically, for example, it is as follows.
Example 1) When the A register value is "00000000 (B)", when it is ANDed with "00000111 (B)", it becomes "00000000 (B)".
Example 2) When the A register value is "00000010(B)", when it is ANDed with "00000111(B)", it becomes "00000010(B)".
Example 3) When the A register value is "000100001(B)", when it is ANDed with "00000111(B)", it becomes "00000001(B)".
Example 4) When the A register value is "111111111 (B)", when it is ANDed with "00000111 (B)", it becomes "00000111 (B)".
That is, the maximum value after the logical product (AND) operation is "00000111 (B)" (7 (D)).

Next, the process advances to step S925, and a reel drive pulse table is set. This process is a process of storing the address of the reel drive pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE) in the HL register.
FIG. 158 is a diagram showing the reel drive pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE). As shown in FIG. 158, eight types of reel drive pulse data are stored in the reel drive pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE). The upper 4 bits (D4 to D7 bits) of the reel drive pulse data are unused bits. Further, the D0 bit corresponds to the data of φ0, the D1 bit corresponds to the data of φ1, the D2 bit corresponds to the data of φ2, and the D3 bit corresponds to the data of φ3. Further, "1" indicates on, and "0" indicates off.
For example, "00001001(B)" stored at address "1100(H)" means that φ0 and φ3 are on. Note that φ0 to φ3 correspond to excitation phases of a four-phase stepping motor.
Then, in step S925, "1100 (H)", which is the start address of the reel drive pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE), is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S926, reel drive pulse data is acquired. This process is a process in which the result of adding the A register to the HL register value is set as the HL register value, and the value of the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the B register.
Here, the A register value is the offset value generated in step S924 (a value obtained by converting the reel drive pulse in the range of "0" to "255 (D)" to "0" to "7").
For example, when the A register value is "1", the value "00000001 (B)" of "1101 (H)" which is obtained by adding "1 (H)" to the HL register value "1100 (H)" is stored in the B register. Remember.
Next, the process advances to step S927, and reel drive pulse data is set. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the deceleration start test (I_REDUCE_CHK) in step S910 of FIG. 155.
First, in step S931, it is determined whether the standby effect type is "0". Here, it is determined whether the value stored in the standby performance type (_WK_PRD) of address "F09E (H)" is "0" or not, and if it is "0", it is determined as "Yes". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not "0", the process advances to step S932.
In step S932, it is determined whether the search waiting period is "0". In this process, it is determined whether or not the #th reel specified symbol position search waiting time (_TM2_TAR#_WAIT) is "0", and when it is "0", it is determined as "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S933. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S933, the number of deceleration start steps is set to "13 (D)". Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Set "13 (D)" in the A register.
(2) Perform a comparison operation with the B register value.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Note that the B register value is the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of one symbol on the #th reel, which was stored in step S909 of FIG. 155. If the result of the comparison operation is "0", the zero flag becomes "1". When the zero flag becomes "1", "Yes" is determined in step S911 in FIG. 155. In other words, it is set to start deceleration when the current number of steps reaches "13 (D)" (design value).

Next, control specific to the twenty-third embodiment of the sub-control board 80 will be explained.
(1) Output to prevent addiction In the twenty-third embodiment, an output to prevent addiction may be performed after one set of AT is completed and before the start of the next set. Here, in the 23rd embodiment, the "output to prevent addiction" corresponds to displaying on the image display device 23 an image such as "Pachinko/pachislot is a game that can be enjoyed in moderation. Be careful not to get addicted to it." do. In addition to displaying images, a message such as ``Pachinko and pachislot are games that should be enjoyed in moderation. Be careful not to get addicted to them.'' may also be output. It may be possible to perform only image display, only audio, or both image display and audio, but it is understood that it is preferable to perform at least image display.
Since the output to prevent getting addicted is generally executed when more than a certain number of medals are paid out, in the 23rd embodiment, one set of AT (main game state 4, 1BB activated) is completed. At that time, if the output conditions for preventing getting hooked are met, the hook preventing output is executed.

FIG. 160 is a flowchart for controlling the jamming prevention output during AT by the sub-control board 80.
First, in step S971, it is determined whether or not AT is in progress. When it is determined that AT is in progress, the process advances to step S972, and when it is determined that AT is not in progress, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
The sub control board 80 receives commands related to the main gaming state from the main control board 50. When a command indicating that the main game state is "4" is received, it is determined that AT is in progress.

In step S972, it is determined whether a notification indicating that AT will be continued has been output. In the 23rd embodiment, when the next AT has been determined, in other words, when the AT set number counter is "1" or more, a notification indicating that AT will be executed next time is provided during AT. There are cases where it is output (when notifying AT continuation) and cases where it is not output.
The sub control board 80 receives an AT set number counter command from the main control board 50. There is no case where an AT continuation notification is output under a situation where the next AT is not determined (when the AT set number counter is "0"), but under a situation where the next AT is determined (when the AT set number counter is "0"), an AT continuation notification is not output. (When the counter is "1" or more), it is determined whether or not to output an AT continuation notification by, for example, a lottery. When it is decided to output the AT continuation notification, the effect for outputting the AT continuation notification is selected and the effect is output.

An example of outputting the AT continuation notification is, for example, a production in which a main character and an enemy character confront each other and the main character wins. When the main character and the enemy character confront each other and the main character wins, the next AT will be determined and the current AT will not end the AT. If the player does not operate the stop switch 42, there is a possibility that the advantageous section itself will end during the current AT due to the advantageous section clear counter management. Furthermore, when a main character and an enemy character face off and a presentation in which the main character loses is output, there are cases where the AT ends with the current AT and cases where the AT continues.

In step S972, if it is determined that the AT continuation notification has been output, the process advances to step S973, and if it is determined that the AT continuation notification has not been output, the process advances to step S974.
In step S973, the AT continuation notification flag is turned on. Note that the AT continuation notification flag is provided in the storage area of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80, and is a flag for determining whether AT continuation has been notified.

In step S974, it is determined whether one set of AT has been completed. This judgment is made based on a command sent from the main control board 50, when the end condition of the main game state "4" is satisfied (at the end of the operation of the 1BB game (at the end of the game)), one set of AT is judged to have ended. When it is determined that one set of AT has been completed, the process advances to step S975, and when it is determined that it has not been completed, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S975, it is determined whether the AT continuation notification flag is on. If it is determined that the AT continuation notification flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S976, and if it is determined that it is on, the process proceeds to step S977.

In step S976, an AT end effect is output. Here, the "AT end performance" is a performance that suggests ending AT and transitioning to non-AT. Therefore, even if the AT set number counter is "1" or more at this point, if the AT continuation notification flag is not on, in other words, if the AT continuation notification is not output during the current set of AT, Output AT end effect. Note that even if the AT end effect is output, the AT does not necessarily end.

Next, the process advances to step S978, and the above-mentioned addictive prevention effect is output.
In the next step S979, it is determined whether the AT set number is present (whether the AT set number counter is equal to or greater than "1"). When it is determined that there is no AT set number, the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of AT sets is present, the process advances to step S980.
In step S980, an AT revival effect is output. That is, although the AT end effect was output in step S976, a reversal effect for denying the AT end effect is output.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S975 that the AT continuation notification flag is on, the process proceeds to step S977, where the AT continuation notification flag is cleared, and the process according to this flowchart is ended. Note that when going through step S977, since the AT continuation notification has already been output, there is no need to output an AT revival effect like step S980. However, at the end of one set of AT, it is of course possible to output a new effect indicating that AT will continue.

Further, the AT end effect in step S976, the addictive prevention effect in step S978, and the AT recovery effect in step S980 may be outputted sequentially at predetermined time intervals without any operation by the player. Alternatively, after outputting the AT end performance and the addictive prevention performance, wait for the player to operate the operation switches (bet switch 40, start switch 41, settlement switch 43), and when the operation switch is operated, proceed to step S979. You may proceed.
Further, the sinking prevention output in step S978 is secured for a certain period of time. For example, when proceeding to step S978, a predetermined timer value is set, the predetermined timer value is subtracted for each interrupt processing, and the process of step S978 is performed on the condition that the predetermined timer value becomes "0". One example is to terminate.
Specifically, it is preferable that the output to prevent getting stuck continues for at least 3 seconds.
Furthermore, if the power is cut off while the immersion prevention information is being output, the immersion prevention information will not be output when the power is restored. If the power is turned off while the addictive prevention message is being output and then the power is restored, the above-mentioned predetermined timer value is cleared (has been cleared).

Therefore, even if the specification is such that the process moves from step S978 to S979 when the operation switch is operated, if the predetermined timer value is not "0" at the time the operation switch is operated, the step Continue to output S978's addictive prevention. Then, when the predetermined timer value becomes "0", the process proceeds to step S979.
Further, even if the predetermined timer value reaches "0" after starting the addictive prevention output in step S978, if the operation switch is not operated, the addictive prevention output may be maintained, or , the display may be switched to a demonstration screen displaying the logo of the gaming machine manufacturer.

Furthermore, when the 1BB game ends, the main control board 50 executes a wait process (also referred to as "freeze process" or "standby process") for about 1 second. While this wait process is being executed, no matter which operation switch is operated, control based on that operation will not be executed. Furthermore, the blocker 45 is controlled so that even if medals are inserted while this wait process is being executed, the medals are returned. The reason why the control of the main control board 50 is different from the control of the sub-control board 80 is that the power is cut off while the wait process is being executed (for example, 0.3 seconds after the start of the wait process). The point is that, if the power is restored after that (when the power is restored without transitioning to the setting change mode), the wait process continues to be executed. The timer managed on the main control board 50 side is not cleared when the power is turned off during wait processing and then the power is restored (power restoration without shifting to setting change mode). On the other hand, when the power is returned to the setting change mode, the wait processing timer value is cleared.

By controlling as described above, the output to prevent addictive play is ensured for a certain period of time, so that the image display to prevent addictive play can be reliably shown to the player.
Note that the wait process by the main control board 50 is for about 1 second, and if the output for preventing getting stuck is about 3 seconds, the operation of the operation switch will be valid even if the output for preventing getting stuck is completed once the wait process is finished. become. Therefore, when the operation switch is operated immediately after the wait process ends, the next effect may be executed while continuing the output to prevent immersion. For example, after starting the output to prevent addicting in step S978, the wait process by the main control board 50 is completed, the operation switch is enabled, and the AT revival effect in step S980 is output based on the operation of the bet switch 40, for example. In such a case, while outputting the prevention message, an AT revival effect is outputted.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the output of the addictive prevention is conditioned on the output of the AT end effect. Therefore, in the case of "Yes" in step S975, since the AT end effect is not output (step S976 is not executed), the immersion prevention display is also not output.

As described above, when the player is notified of the continuation of the next AT at the end of one set of AT (when the player knows that the AT will continue), the addictive prevention output is not executed. In other cases, since the addictive prevention message is output on the condition that the AT end screen is output, it is possible to make it impossible to determine whether to continue AT based on the presence or absence of the addictive prevention output.
In other words, if the AT ends when the addictive prevention signal is output, and if the AT does not end unless the addictive prevention signal is output, the continuation of the AT will be determined by the presence or absence of the addictive prevention output.
Furthermore, when the player knows that he is going to continue playing AT, outputs to prevent him from getting addicted to the game have little effect, so there is no need to output any unnecessary outputs.

(2) Output of confrontation performance (variation in output timing of performance ending)
In the twenty-third embodiment, during AT, a confrontation effect may be output as an effect indicating whether or not AT will continue next time.
The confrontation performance of the 23rd embodiment is a performance in which the main character faces off against the enemy character, and if the main character wins, the AT will continue next time as well. Here, when the protagonist side character outputs a victory effect, it means that the AT continuation notification described above has been output, and the AT continuation notification flag is turned on. On the other hand, if the enemy character wins, it is not certain that AT will continue next time. However, even if the enemy character wins, it does not mean that AT ends with the current set. If the enemy character wins, the AT continuation notification flag is not turned on at that point.

When outputting a confrontation performance, in a game that outputs the conclusion of the confrontation performance (a performance indicating whether the main character wins or not), the output timing of the performance is controlled as follows.
First, in a game that outputs an effect indicating whether or not the main character wins, a timer starts counting when the start switch 41 is operated. Timer measurement is performed by a timer on a sub-main board of the sub-control board 80. In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 includes a sub-main board and an image control board (sub-sub board) which is a board belonging to a lower level of the sub-main board and is specialized for controlling the image display device 23. Be prepared.

Next, the sub-main board of the sub-control board 80 receives a command from the main control board 50 indicating that all the reels 31 have stopped. The sub-main board determines whether the timer value has exceeded 10 seconds, and when it determines that 10 seconds have elapsed, sends a command to the sub-sub board to allow image progression (whether the main character wins or not). In other words, a command to permit the output of the conclusion of the confrontation performance) is transmitted. When the sub-sub board receives the command, it outputs an effect indicating whether the main character wins or not.
On the other hand, when a command indicating that all reels 31 have stopped is received and the timer value has not exceeded 10 seconds, the timer waits until the timer value has exceeded 10 seconds. Then, when the timer value exceeds 10 seconds, the sub-main board transmits the above command to the sub-sub board.
Note that "10 seconds" is an example, and various settings such as 5 seconds and 15 seconds can be made.

FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing control of confrontation effect output.
First, in step S991, it is determined whether the start switch 41 has been operated. When the start switch 41 is operated, a command indicating that the start switch 41 has been operated is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 (sub-main board). , it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process advances to step S992.
Here, when the sub-main board receives a command indicating that the start switch 41 has been operated, it selects the performance to be output in the current game and transmits a command corresponding to the selected performance to the sub-sub board. The sub-sub board controls the output of the effect based on the received command (command corresponding to the effect). Further, when the sub-main board receives a command indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated from the main control board 50, it transmits a command indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated to the sub-sub board. When the sub-sub board receives a command indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated, it switches the effect as necessary (it may not switch depending on the content of the effect).

In step S992, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game that outputs the outcome of the confrontation performance. In this process, it is determined whether or not a confrontation performance has already been output before the previous game, and the current game corresponds to a game in which a performance indicating the conclusion of the confrontation performance is output. When it is determined that the game is a game that outputs the conclusion of the confrontation performance, the process proceeds to step S993, and when it is determined that the game is not a game that outputs the conclusion of the confrontation performance, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S993, the sub-main board sets a timer value. Then, the timer value is subtracted for each interrupt process. For example, assuming that the interrupt period of the sub-main board is 1 ms, one example is to set the timer value to "10000 (D)" and subtract "1" each time the interrupt is processed. Then, the process advances to step S994.
In step S994, it is determined whether all reels 31 have stopped. When all the reels 31 stop, a command indicating that all the reels 31 have stopped (hereinafter referred to as "all reel stop command") is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 (sub-main board). Therefore, when the all reels stop command is received, it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that the all reel stop command has been received, the process advances to step S995.

In addition, in the main process, the determination as to whether all the reels 31 have stopped is executed in step S289 in FIG. 139.
Here, the following patterns may be used to determine that all the reels 31 have stopped.
(1) When the level data of the stop switch 42 that was last operated to stop is OFF.
(2) When the level data of the all stop switch 42 is off.
(3) When the level data of the all stop switch 42 is off and the level data of the other switches (bet switch 40, start switch 41, and settlement switch 43) are off.
(4) In addition to any of the above (1) to (3), when the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) of all reels 31 is information indicating stop (“0”).
In the 23rd embodiment, when the above conditions (2) + (4) are satisfied, the main control board 50 determines that all reels 31 have stopped, and sends an all reel stop command to the sub-main board. .

In step S995, it is determined whether the timer value has become "0". When it is determined that the timer value has not become "0", the process waits until it is determined that the timer value has become "0". If it is determined that the timer value has become "0", the process advances to step S996. In step S996, the sub-main board transmits a command to the sub-sub board to permit output of the conclusion of the confrontation effect. When the sub-sub board receives the command, it outputs the outcome of the confrontation performance. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, if the timer value is "0" when the command to stop all reels is received (when 10 seconds or more have passed since the start switch 41 was operated), the battle will begin after receiving the command to stop all reels. The outcome of the performance is output. On the other hand, if the timer value is not "0" when the command to stop all reels is received, wait until the timer value becomes "0" even after receiving the command to stop all reels. The conclusion of the confrontation performance is output.
In the 23rd embodiment, even after the timer value reaches "0", the ending of the showdown effect is not output until the command to stop all reels is received; however, the present invention is not limited to this. '', the ending of the showdown may be output even before receiving the command to stop all reels.

As described above, the all reel stop command is issued when the level data of the all stop switch 42 is off and the # reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) of all reels 31 is information indicating stop. The information is configured to be transmitted from the control board 50 to the sub-main board.
As a result, in a game that outputs the conclusion of a confrontation performance, the player presses and holds the last stop switch 42 (meaning the last stop switch 42 operated (operated); the same applies hereinafter) and releases it at the timing. (However, the condition is that 10 seconds have elapsed since the start switch 41 was operated), it becomes possible to output the conclusion of the confrontation performance.
Therefore, if a player who does not want to see the end of the showdown right away continues to press the last stop switch 42 (unless he releases his hand), the end of the showdown will not be output. Then, at the timing when the last stop switch 42 is released, the conclusion of the confrontation performance can be output.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the all reel stop command may be transmitted when the last stop switch 42 is turned on (when the rising data of the last stop switch 42 is turned on). In this way, it becomes possible to output the conclusion of the confrontation performance at the timing when the last stop switch 42 is turned on.

(3) Setting the volume The twenty-third embodiment is configured so that the volume from the speaker 22 can be set. The tone setting includes an administrator (manager) mode in which the installation manager (hall manager) of the slot machine 10 sets the tone, and a player mode in which the player playing the game with the slot machine 10 sets the tone. .
In FIG. 162, (A) shows an image displayed by the image display device 23 indicating an administrator mode related to tone settings, and (B) shows an image displayed by the image display device 23 indicating a player mode related to tone settings. FIG.

In (A) of the figure, the tone setting in the administrator mode is a setting change state that can be executed by turning on the setting key switch and turning the power on/off, or the setting key when the power is turned on/off. This is one of the system menus that can be executed under at least one setting confirmation state that can be executed by turning on the switch.
There are three sound levels that can be selected in the administrator mode: "loud,""standard," and "low" (of course, the volume is not limited to these three levels).
When the administrator selects the volume using the cross key of the slot machine 10 and presses the chance button, the volume is determined.
Although not shown in FIG. 1, on the sub-control board 80, a cross key (also referred to as a "selection button") and a chance button (also referred to as a "production button" or a "determination button") are electrically connected. connected. The cross key is a switch that is operated when moving the cursor position on a menu screen or the like. Further, the chance button is a switch that is operated when developing a performance, and is also used as a switch that is operated when determining an object selected on a menu screen or the like.

In administrator mode, when the volume is changed using the cross key, a test sound is output at the changed volume. The test sound may be, for example, a cursor movement sound, or a predetermined sound (pattern) may be output. For example, if the currently selected volume is "Normal" and the cursor position is changed from "Volume" to "Loud" using the four-way controller, the test will be performed at the volume corresponding to "Loud". Output sound. This allows the administrator to understand how "loud" the volume is. Similarly, when the cursor position is changed from "normal" to "low", the test sound is output at the volume corresponding to "low". In this way, the administrator can confirm the level of the set volume.

Further, the volume of the test sound is based on the volume of a predetermined performance sound. Here, the "predetermined effect sounds" include, for example, the game start sound output when the start switch 41 is operated, the stop sound output when the stop switch 42 is operated, the tenpai sound of a symbol combination, the winning sound of a role ( or payout sound), BGM sound during AT, etc.
Therefore, for example, if the volume is set to "Standard" in the administrator mode and the volume is set to "Volume 3" in the player mode (described later), and the volume of the test sound is 80 decibels, The volume of the predetermined performance sound will also be set to approximately 80 decibels. On the other hand, the error sound will be described later.

Further, in the case where, for example, "Large" is selected in the administrator mode, even if the cursor position is moved further upward by operating the cross key, the cursor position remains "Large". However, when "loud" is selected and the cursor is moved upward by operating the cross key, the test sound is output again at the volume corresponding to "loud".
Then, when any one of "loud", "standard", and "low" volume is selected, operating the chance button may confirm the volume. Note that when one of the volume levels "Large", "Standard", and "Low" is selected, if the cursor position is moved to the right using the cross key, "Close" can be selected. If you move the cursor to "close" and press the chance button, you can confirm with that volume. In this case, the volume setting in administrator mode is ended and the screen returns to the system menu (not shown). Also, if the cursor position can be moved to the settings of other items (for example, energy saving mode, etc.) instead of "Close", move the cursor position to "Setting other items" and operate the chance button. Then, the volume indicated by the cursor position at that time may be set. In this case, the volume setting in the administrator mode is ended, and the process moves to setting other items (not shown).

The volume selected in the administrator mode can be stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80. This predetermined area is configured so that it will not be erased by changing settings or turning off the power. With this configuration, once the volume is set, the hall side can omit the work of setting the volume again. Furthermore, even if an unrecoverable error occurs on the main control board 50 side and the storage area containing the setting values is initialized by clearing the RWM 53 due to a setting change, the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80 The predetermined area may not be initialized. Also, when selecting the volume in administrator mode, for example, when you move the four-way controller to "Large" among "Large", "Standard", and "Small", "Large" will be displayed in the specified area. Alternatively, when the volume is determined, data corresponding to "loud" may be stored in the predetermined area.

After the volume is set in the administrator mode as described above, the player can set the volume while waiting for a game. FIG. 162(B) illustrates the display screen (player mode) at this time.
When the player operates, for example, the cross key during game standby, a menu screen is displayed (not shown in FIG. 162), and by selecting "tone setting" from the menu screen, it is possible to move to the volume setting screen.
The volume setting in player mode can be set in five levels from "Volume 1" to "Volume 5." Moving the cursor with the cross key to select the volume and confirming the volume with the chance button is the same as in the administrator mode. Note that in the administrator mode, a test sound corresponding to the selected volume was output each time the cursor was moved, but this is not done in the player mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a test sound corresponding to the selected volume may be output in the player mode as well as in the administrator mode.

FIG. 162(C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the volume setting value in administrator mode and the volume setting value in player mode. In the figure, for example, when the volume is set to "loud" in the administrator mode and the volume is set to "volume 5" in the player mode, the volume is set to "100" (reference value). Note that each numerical value shown in FIG. 162(C) indicates a value corresponding to the volume, and does not indicate a decibel (dB) itself.
In the example of FIG. 162(C), the maximum volume is "100" and the minimum volume is "20". Note that the volume and the range between the maximum value and minimum value in each mode are not limited to these, and can be set in various ways.
As shown in FIG. 162(C), one of the characteristics of the twenty-third embodiment is that when the player selects "Volume 1", the volume is set to "loud" in the administrator mode. However, the minimum volume is set to "20". In this way, when the lowest volume (volume 1) is selected in the volume setting in the player mode, the minimum volume is set regardless of the volume setting value in the administrator mode.

In other words,
a) When the volume is set to "loud" in administrator mode and "volume 1 (minimum volume)" in player mode (setting pattern A),
b) When the volume is set to "Standard" in administrator mode and "Volume 1 (minimum volume)" in player mode (setting pattern B),
c) When the volume is set to "low" in administrator mode and "volume 1 (minimum volume)" in player mode (setting pattern C), the volume of the predetermined performance sound to be output. are both "20" and the same.
However, this is not limited to this, and settings may be made slightly different, such as setting the volume for setting pattern A to "22", setting the volume for setting pattern B to "21", and setting the volume for setting pattern C to "20". You may.
In any case, the volumes of the predetermined effect sounds output in the case of setting patterns A to C are approximately the same ("substantially the same" is a concept that includes "the same"). For example, when the maximum volume is set to "100", the minimum volume is set within a range of "±3" with "20" as the standard.

Therefore, if a player wants to play the game at the lowest possible volume, by selecting "Volume 1", the player can play the game at the minimum volume without being affected by the difference in volume settings between halls. I can do it.
Note that the minimum volume of "20" means that a player with normal hearing can hear the character's lines, the correct order of presses, "Aim!", etc. in a typical hall environment (a somewhat noisy environment). The volume is audible.

As shown in FIG. 162(C), one of the characteristics of the twenty-third embodiment is the degree of change in volume. For example, if the volume is set to "Standard" in the administrator mode, and you change it from "Volume 1" to "Volume 2" in the player mode, the volume will change from "20" to "50" (increase amount "30"). On the other hand, when changing from "volume 4" to "volume 5" in the player mode, the volume changes from "80" to "90" (increase amount "10"). In this way, when changing from the minimum volume "Volume 1" to "Volume 2", the amount of increase will be larger than when changing from a volume other than "Volume 1" to one level higher. It is set. Therefore, by changing the minimum volume to another volume, it is possible to immediately change the volume to a higher volume.
In the example of FIG. 162(C), when the volume is set to "low" in the administrator mode, when changing from "volume 1" to "volume 2" in the player mode, and when the volume is set to "low" in the player mode, In both cases where the volume is changed from a volume other than "1" to one level higher, the volume increase amount is set to "5". In this way, depending on the volume setting in the administrator mode, the amount of increase may not be the largest when changing from "volume 1" to "volume 2" in the player mode.
On the other hand, if the volume is set to "low" in administrator mode, the volume in player mode can be changed to, for example,
Volume 1:20
Volume 2:30
Volume 3:35
Volume 4:40
Volume 5:45
It is also possible to set it as follows, so that the amount of increase is greatest when changing from "volume 1" to "volume 2."

In the twenty-third embodiment, if the volume is not set in the player mode after setting the volume in the administrator mode, the volume in the player mode is set to "volume 5" as a default.
Furthermore, if the time without playing a game (game standby state) continues for 10 minutes, the previous volume setting in the player mode is cleared and returns to the default "volume 5". This is to return the volume to the default when the player is replaced. Therefore, the default of the player mode may be "volume 3" or the like.
Furthermore, when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on/off, the volume of the player mode is set to the default "volume 5".
On the other hand, the volume in administrator mode remains at its previous value unless it is reset. For example, if you set the volume to "low" in administrator mode, the volume will remain "low" even after you turn the power on/off, change settings, or confirm settings.

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing volume setting control in administrator mode.
First, in step S1001, the current volume is read. For example, "0" for "small", "1" for "standard", and "2" for "large" are stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 83, and this volume setting data is read. Next, the process advances to step S1002, and the current volume is displayed as an image. For example, when the volume data stored in the RWM 83 is "1", an image is displayed to show that the current setting value is "standard" as in the example of FIG. 162(A).
Next, the process advances to step S1003, and it is determined whether the cross key has been operated. If it is determined that it has been operated, the process advances to step S1004; if it is determined that it has not been operated, the process advances to step S1007.

In step S1004, it is determined whether the volume setting can be changed. For example, when the current volume setting is "standard" and further up is selected using the cross key, it is determined that the volume setting can be changed. On the other hand, when the current volume setting is "loud" and further up is selected using the cross key, it is determined that the volume setting cannot be changed. If it is determined that the volume setting can be changed, the process advances to step S1005, and if it is determined that the volume setting cannot be changed, the process advances to step S1006.
In step S1005, the volume setting value is updated. As described above, when the current volume setting is "standard" and further up is selected using the cross key, the volume setting is updated to "loud". Then, the process advances to step S1006.

In step S1006, a test sound is output at the currently set volume. As described above, for example, when the volume is changed from "standard" to "loud", the test sound is output at the volume corresponding to "loud" after the change. On the other hand, if the current volume is set to "loud" and a higher volume is selected using the four-way controller ("No" in step S1004), the current volume is set to "loud". Outputs a test sound at a volume corresponding to .
Next, the process advances to step S1007, and it is determined whether the chance button has been operated. When it is determined that the chance button has been operated, the process according to this flowchart (volume setting in administrator mode) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the chance button has not been operated, the process returns to step S1003.

The above volume settings are for predetermined sound effects. On the other hand, the volume of the error (recoverable error and non-recoverable error) sound is fixed and is configured not to change depending on the volume setting in the administrator mode or player mode. This is because, for example, a person who performs a trifle may set the volume to the minimum volume in the above-mentioned player mode before performing the trifle.
For example, for error sounds, the volume may be uniformly set to "100" when set to "loud" in administrator mode and set to "volume 5" in player mode ( For example, error sounds are uniformly set to "90" decibels).
However, the present invention is not limited to this. Although the volume of the error sound cannot be changed in the player mode, the volume of the error sound may be settable in the administrator mode. However, even if the error sound is set to the lowest volume in the administrator mode, the error sound will still be set at a volume that is loud enough to be heard by those around you.
Additionally, when the volume ("loud", "standard", "low") is set in the administrator mode shown in FIG. (the volume may change depending on the volume). Alternatively, a dedicated menu screen for setting the volume of the error sound may be provided in the administrator mode.

(4) Performance when the symbol combination of 1BB is full When 1BB is full, the sub-control board 80 outputs a flash (light emission by the performance lamp 21) and a sound (sound from the speaker 22). The flash and tenpai sound are executed regardless of whether the conditions for transition to main game state 4 (AT, 1BB operation) are satisfied. As a result, the player can know the fact that 1BB has become full even if 1BB has become full by chance while playing the game.

Furthermore, as described above, when 1BB is full and the conditions for transition to main game state 4 are satisfied, the third reel 31 does not stop even if the third stop switch 42 is operated. Although no time is set, if the conditions for transition to main game state 4 are not satisfied, the waiting time is set (steps S809 to S810 in FIG. 147). Thereby, it is possible to prevent 1BB from being won due to the player's unexpected stop operation.

Also, if you meet the conditions for transitioning to AT, as mentioned above, "Aim for the Blue BAR!"" is displayed as an image, and a voice saying "Aim!" is also output.
Here, during the game, there are many cases where the conditions for transition to main game state 4 are not satisfied, so when the above-mentioned flash and tenpai sound are output every time 1BB becomes tenpai, the player can: There is also a possibility that the flash and tenpai sound may be recognized as an effect to avoid winning the 1BB prize.
However, if you meet the conditions for transitioning to main game state 4, you can "Aim for the Blue BAR!" ” image and the sound “Aim!” are output, so even if the flash and Tenpai sound are output at the same time, the player can recognize that it is okay to win 1BB in this game. can.

In addition, when 1BB becomes tenpai, if the conditions for transition to main game state 4 are not met, a flash and tenpai sound will be output, and if the conditions for transition to main game state 4 are met, these flashes and tenpai will be output. It is possible that no sound is output. However, since the rules do not allow effects that do not stop the symbol combinations, in the 23rd embodiment, when 1BB is full, regardless of whether the conditions for transition to main game state 4 are satisfied or not. It uniformly outputs a flash and a tempai sound.

(5) Production during 1BB gaming (when AT start conditions are met/unsatisfied) The sub control board 80 displays the 1BB symbol combination in a stopped state when the transition conditions to main gaming state 4 are met. At this time, AT (1BB game) will be started from the next game.
In the case of shifting to main game state 4 (AT, 1BB game), before winning SRB, when winning small winning combination A group (winning numbers "10" to "15"), the correct answer pressing order is notified. Examples of the notification method include displaying an image of the correct press order and outputting by voice which stop switch 42 is to be operated next.
On the other hand, when moving to main game state 4 (AT, 1BB game), before winning SRB, even if you win the small winning group B (winning numbers "16" to "21"), press the correct answer. Do not announce order. This is because in a game where the SRB is not won, even if the small winning combination B group is won, there is no correct pressing order (pressing order for winning the high bell) (see FIG. 125).

Then, when moving to main game state 4 (AT, 1BB game), if you win SRB and become inside SRB, both when winning small role A group and when winning small role B group. , to notify the correct answer press order. SRB winnings are carried over to the next game, so when you win SRB for the first time. In the next game after the game in which SRB is won, the correct pressing order will be notified when the small winning combination B group is won.

On the other hand, even if the conditions for shifting to main game state 4 (AT, 1BB game) are not satisfied, when the 1BB symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the 1BB game is started. However, even if 1BB is won, the main gaming state does not shift, so for example, when 1BB is won in RT1 and main gaming state 1, 1BB is activated and the main gaming state 1 is entered.

When shifting to the 1BB game without shifting to the main gaming state 4, the main control board 50 does not operate the instruction function, and the sub control board 80 does not execute AT. Therefore, even if you win a small winning combination that has the correct pressing order (small winning group A for non-SRB, small winning group A and small winning group B for internal SRB), the winning number display LED 78 will show the correct pressing order. The instruction number is not displayed, and the correct pressing order is not reported on the effect output device such as the image display device 23.
Further, when the game shifts to the 1BB game without shifting to the main game state 4, the sub control board 80 maintains the normal performance content during non-AT (the performance content up to that point). Therefore, from the player's perspective, it feels like the normal game (non-AT, non-special game) is continuing even during the 1BB game.

(6) Display of the number of games played in RT1 (non-AT) As mentioned above, in RT1, the number of games played is counted, and when the number of games played in RT1 reaches "1400", it is determined that the end condition of RT1 is satisfied. Shift to non-RT.
RT1 starts at the end of 1BB operation (end of AT). Therefore, the number of games played in RT1 is essentially the number of games played in non-AT.
In the twenty-third embodiment, the number of non-AT games is displayed as an image on the image display device 23. Thereby, the player can easily know how many games have passed since he became a non-AT. Furthermore, it is possible to easily know how many games remain until reaching the so-called ceiling of "1400" games (games before transitioning to non-RT).

Note that during RT1, the advantageous section may end and move to a non-advantageous section, but the number of games played in RT1 ("_CT_RT_GAME" of address "F00A(H)") is not cleared at the end of the advantageous section. Therefore, even if there is a transition from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section during RT1, the number of games played in RT1 is maintained and continues to be counted even after the transition to the non-advantageous section. The same holds true when shifting from this non-advantageous section to an advantageous section.

Furthermore, in the 23rd embodiment, the number of non-AT games displayed as an image on the image display device 23 is calculated using the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 without using the data of the number of RT games "_CT_RT_GAME" of the address "F00A(H)". I remember it. When the 1BB operation ends, the initial value "0" is set as the number of non-AT games (increment counter) in the RWM 83, and this number of games is updated as the games are completed, and is stored in the image display device 23 as the number of non-AT games. do.
However, when the power is turned on/off, the sub-control board 80 initializes the predetermined area of the RWM 83 when the power is turned off, regardless of whether the setting change process is executed or not. The AT game count data is also initialized (cleared). Therefore, upon recovery from power-off, the number of non-AT games displayed on the image display device 23 becomes "0".
In addition, on the menu screen that can display the specifications of the gaming machine, the gaming history, etc., it is possible to display the number of non-AT games as one of the gaming histories, and this gaming number is the number of gaming times displayed as an image on the image display device 23. (displayed based on the data of the number of non-AT games stored in the RWM 83). Therefore, when the power is turned on/off, the number of non-AT games displayed on the menu screen also becomes "0".

Therefore, for example, when the number of games played by RT1 on the RWM 53 (main control board 50 side) "_CT_RT_GAME" is "100" and the number of games played by non-AT displayed on the image display device 23 is "100", the power is turned on. /When turned off, the number of games "_CT_RT_GAME" of RT1 maintains "100" but becomes "0" displayed on the image display device 23. Next, when the first game is executed, the number of games "_CT_RT_GAME" of RT1 is updated to "101", and the number of games displayed on the image display device 23 is updated to "1". In this way, when the power is turned on/off, the number of games played in RT1 "_CT_RT_GAME" in the RWM 53 and the number of games played in non-AT displayed on the image display device 23 (the number of games stored in the RWM 83) are changed. become different. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing how many games remain until the ceiling is reached first thing in the morning (when the hall opens).

Furthermore, in the twenty-third embodiment, even when the setting change process is executed, the RT status number "_NB_RT_STS" and the number of games played in RT1 "_CT_RT_GAME" are not cleared. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the setting change process is executed, the number of games played in RT1 "_CT_RT_GAME" may be cleared. If you clear RT1's number of games "_CT_RT_GAME" when you execute the setting change process, the data of RT1's number of games "_CT_RT_GAME" after the setting change process and the number of non-AT games displayed on the image display device 23 and will match. By configuring this way, it becomes possible to know the number of games played from the first thing in the morning (when the hall opens) to the number of games played until the ceiling is reached, so it is possible to determine whether or not a player will play on that machine first thing in the morning. It becomes possible to use it as motivation (use it as judgment material).

Although the twenty-third embodiment has been described above, the twenty-third embodiment is not limited to the above content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible for the twenty-third embodiment.
(1) When the small winning group A is won, it is a winning role that has a correct pressing order during 1BB operation, and the small winning group B is a winning role that has a correct pressing order within SRB while 1BB is operating. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the small winning combination B group may also have a correct pressing order during 1BB operation (regardless of whether it is inside the SRB), like the small winning combination A group.
On the contrary, for the small winning combination A group, like the small winning combination B group, only when 1BB is in operation and inside the SRB, the winning combination may have a correct pressing order.

(2) The ball payout rates when 1BB is not activated, when non-AT and 1BB is activated, and when AT and 1BB are activated are merely examples, and are not limited to the above embodiments. However, in order to prevent the transition to 1BB operation (1BB game) even though AT has not been won, it is preferable that the ball output rate when not AT and 1BB operation is less than "1". .
On the other hand, when the 1BB is activated, even if it is a non-AT game machine, the payout rate is set higher than when the 1BB is not activated, thereby creating an advantageous situation for the player. The following principles will be met.

(3) In the above embodiment, the AT lottery is not executed when non-AT and 1BB is operating, or when AT and 1BB is operating, but the AT lottery is not executed even when non-AT and 1BB is operating. May be executed. However, in order to prevent the 1BB from being activated easily during non-AT, it is preferable to set the AT winning probability when non-AT and 1BB is operating to be lower than the AT winning probability when 1BB is not operating.
Furthermore, while AT and 1BB are in operation, it is possible to perform an additional lottery for the number of AT sets.

(4) Even if the SRB is inside while AT and 1BB is in operation, in the 23rd embodiment, it is assumed that the game is completed without making the SRB win. This is because if you win the SRB and move on to the RB game, the ball payout rate will decrease.
Here, when the AT, 1BB is activated and the SRB is full inside the SRB, a waiting time may be set using the process shown in FIG. 147 in order to avoid winning the SRB.
On the other hand, if you shift to a 1BB game without having the right to execute AT, and you win an SRB, even if the SRB is full, processing to avoid winning the SRB (setting the waiting time) ) does not need to be executed.
Furthermore, when the AT and 1BB are activated and the SRB is at full capacity inside the SRB, a process to alert the player by outputting a flash or a sound may be executed in the same way as when 1BB is at full capacity.

(5) In the above embodiment, when the conditions for transition to AT are not met, the standby time when 1BB is full is set to "896 (D)" (approximately 1000 ms). The reason is that the time required for one rotation of the reel 31 at constant speed is "1.117 x 2 x 336 = approximately 750 ms", so the waiting time is set longer than the one rotation time of the reel 31. . With this setting, when the "Blue BAR" symbol on the third reel 31 reaches the active line for the first time after operating the second stop switch 42, the waiting time has not yet elapsed. Even if the third stop switch 42 is operated at the right timing, winning of 1BB can be avoided.
However, the waiting time is not limited to this, and the waiting time can be set arbitrarily. For example, in order to secure enough time to avoid winning 1BB, it may be set to about 3 seconds.

(6) In the example of the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in FIG. 147, the standby time is stored in step S810 on the condition that it is determined that the stop operation of the second stop switch 42 has been performed in step S801. In this case, the determination in step S802 is determined as "Yes" when the second stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when 1BB is at tenpai, or when the second reel 31 actually stops and 1BB is actually at tenpai. There are two methods for determining "Yes" when the above is done, and either method may be used.
For example, in the case where it is determined "Yes" in step S802 before the second reel 31 actually stops, there is a case where the second reel 31 has not stopped yet at the time of step S810, and a case where the second reel 31 is For example, it may have already stopped.

(7) Setting the standby time when 1BB is tenpai and not stopping the third reel 31 during the standby time can also be used in the specifications within 1BB.
Here, "1BB internal medium spec" means that the game is executed while carrying over the winning of 1BB, and both non-AT and AT are executed with 1BB internal medium spec. In the case of 1BB internal medium spec, it is assumed that the game will proceed without winning 1BB. In such a case, the waiting time can be set as shown in step S810 of FIG. 147, and the configuration can be configured such that the transition to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) does not occur unless the waiting time has elapsed, as shown in step S791 of FIG. For example, it is possible to effectively prevent the 1BB from entering the 1BB operating state from inside the 1BB.

(8) The standby effect was performed by rotating the reels 31 in reverse. However, the rotation direction of the reels 31 in the standby performance is not limited to this, and the rotation direction of the reels 31 may be normal rotation. When the standby effect is executed in forward rotation (when the reels 31 are not rotated in reverse), the storage area for search counter update correction data at address "F09F(H)" in FIG. 138, the storage area in FIG. 143, The process of step S823 (storage of search counter update correction data) and the process of step S933 in FIG. 159 (correction of the number of deceleration start steps) are no longer necessary.
However, if the standby effect is performed in reverse rotation, the player can easily recognize that it is a standby effect. Further, even if the standby effect is performed in the normal rotation, if it is performed at a rotation speed different from the rotation speed of the normal game, the player can easily recognize that it is a standby effect.
Furthermore, in the standby performance, the symbol number at which each reel 31 should be stopped is set in advance using the reel performance data table shown in FIG. be. In other words, even if the stop results before the execution of the standby effect (previous game) are inconsistent, the standby effect causes a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a set of "black BARs") to be stopped and displayed. That is, it is not necessary to stop the preparation roll in the previous game of the game in which the standby performance is executed.

(9) The addictive prevention output is not limited to the example described above, and may be executed even when an AT continuation notification is output, for example. Alternatively, even if the AT end effect is not output, the addictive prevention output may be executed.

(10) In the showdown effect output control shown in FIG. 161, in this example, a timer value is set based on the start switch 41 being operated (steps S991 and S993). However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the timer value may be set (the timer may be counted) based on the operation of other operation switches, such as the bet switch 40 or the first or second stop switch 42.
Also, instead of setting the timer value (starting the timer count) when one of the operation switches is operated, it is also possible to start the timer count from a predetermined timing after the operation switch is operated. good.

For example, firstly, when the operation switch is the bet switch 40, the timer may start counting one second after the bet switch 40 is operated.
Second, when the operation switch is the start switch 41, the timer may start counting at the timing when the output of the current game effect is started after the start switch 41 is operated.
Thirdly, when the operation switch is the first or second stop switch 42, when the reel 31 corresponding to the first or second stop switch 42 is stopped or when the first or second stop switch 42 is operated. The timer may start counting at the timing when the effect based on is started.

(11) In addition, in the 23rd embodiment, when the timer value is "0", the timing for outputting the conclusion of the confrontation performance is when the third stop switch 42 is turned from on to off (when the hand is released). ). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if another (already operated) stop switch 42 is operated before the third stop switch 42 is switched from on to off, even if the third stop switch 42 is switched from on to off. The ending of the confrontation performance may not be output. For example, while the player himself/herself is holding down the third stop switch 42 to prevent the output of the ending of the showdown performance, a neighboring player (friend) may operate another stop switch 42 as a prank. It is possible to provide a new game in which the effect ending is no longer output.

(12) Furthermore, in a game that outputs the conclusion of a confrontation performance, when the payout process is executed based on the third stop switch 42 being turned from on to off, and a hopper error (no medals) occurs, The output of the performance ending is interrupted and the continuation of the performance ending is output after the hopper error is canceled, or the performance ending is output again from the beginning after the hopper error is canceled.
Further, when the third stop switch 42 is turned off from on and the payout process is executed just before the timer value becomes "0", the timer is counted even during the execution of the payout process. Therefore, if the timer value becomes "0" during the payout process, the effect ending will be output based on the timer value becoming "0" (regardless of whether the payout process has ended or not). be done.

(13) Furthermore, in the game that outputs the ending of the confrontation performance, the output of the performance ending is started based on the third stop switch 42 turning from on to off; however, the present invention is not limited to this. is turned on, or when the third stop switch 42 is turned from on to off, for example, the icon of the push button (sub-button) is displayed as an image (the effect ending is not output at this point), and the push button The effect ending may be output when is operated.

(14) In the example of FIG. 132, in main game state 5 (AT pullback), if the AT pullback counter is "0" and the advantageous section clear counter is less than "600", the transition to main game state 0 is made. I made it. However, the invention is not limited to this, and when the AT pullback counter reaches "0" in main game state 5, the advantageous section clear counter is cleared regardless of the value of the advantageous section clear counter, and the transition to main game state 0 is made. You may. Furthermore, in the main gaming state 1, if the game is highly accurate, the main gaming state 1 may not be ended (not transferred to the main gaming state 0) even if the advantageous section clear counter becomes less than "600".
(15) In the twenty-third embodiment, since the number of reels 31 is three, it is determined in step S801 in FIG. 147 whether or not it is after the second stop. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case where the reel is configured with four reels 31 as shown in FIG. 59 (13th embodiment), in step S801 of FIG. 147, it is determined whether or not it is after the third stop. It turns out.

(16) In the twenty-third embodiment, the volume setting in the administrator mode is set to three levels, but the volume setting is not limited to this, and may be set to any number of levels (for example, five levels, 10 levels, etc.). Further, although the volume setting in the player mode is set to 5 levels, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to any number of levels (for example, 3 levels, 10 levels, etc.).
(17) The numerical values (setting values, timer values, etc.) mentioned in the twenty-third embodiment are merely examples, and do not mean that the present invention is limited to these values.
(18) The twenty-third embodiment can be implemented alone or in combination with the other first to twenty-second embodiments.

<24th embodiment>
FIG. 164 is a diagram showing the hardware configuration of the main CPU 55 in the slot machine 10 of FIG. 1.
Further, FIG. 165 is a diagram showing the structure of the ROM 54 and RWM 53 in FIG. 164 in more detail.
In the 24th embodiment, when expressing the address of the built-in memory or the data stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 in hexadecimal, "(H)" (the initial letter of "hexadecimal") indicating hexadecimal is added. .

In FIG. 164, the main CPU 55 consists of a 1-chip microprocessor (MPU) (hereinafter also simply referred to as a "chip" as necessary), and includes an ALU (arithmetic unit) 55d and a built-in memory. including (but not limited to). Note that the term "built-in memory" refers to user memory unless otherwise specified.
The main CPU 55 executes programs, performs calculations, etc. necessary for the progress of the game. Specifically, it executes control processing for the inserted medals, lottery processing for winning combinations, drive control processing for the reels 31, and payout processing when a prize is won.

The ALU 55d is an arithmetic unit of the main CPU 55 that executes logical operations, four arithmetic operations, and the like. Further, as shown in FIG. 164, an internal bus (including an address bus, a data bus, and a control bus) 55a in the main CPU 55 is connected to the ALU 55d, and the internal bus 55a is connected to a predetermined storage area in the built-in memory. linked. Here, "connect" refers to forming a path through which information can be communicated (the same applies hereinafter). The entire storage area of the built-in memory may be connected to the internal bus 55a, or a part of the storage area of the built-in memory (for example, excluding a storage area provided with confidentiality) may be connected to the internal bus 55a. You can leave it there.

When a predetermined storage area in the built-in memory is connected to the internal bus 55a and the ALU 55d, the information stored in the predetermined storage area is output (sent) to the outside by a program executed by the main CPU 55. Is possible.
Note that the above-mentioned "program executed by the main CPU 55" is a program stored in the built-in memory (for example, ROM 54) within the main CPU 55 or stored outside the main CPU 55 (slot machine 10); This includes both cases where the program is configured to be able to be executed.

Although not shown in FIG. 164, the memory area of the main CPU 55 is divided into a boot area and a user area. The boot area is a storage area used by the chip manufacturer, and may include a boot ROM, boot RWM, and the like.
For example, the boot ROM may store a program for checking security, a program for diagnosing a failure, a program for performing authentication and verification, and the like. Further, the boot RWM may be used as a work area (data area, stack area, etc.) for the boot program.

The user area is a storage area used by the manufacturer of the slot machine 10 (however, not all of the user area is necessarily used by the manufacturer of the slot machine 10), and includes a (built-in) ROM 54 and a (built-in) RWM 53. , a built-in register area 56, a decode area 57, and the like. Note that the ROM, RWM, and other storage means may be provided outside the one-chip microprocessor (on the main control board 50) instead of being provided inside the one-chip microprocessor.

As shown in FIG. 164, the user area of the built-in memory is composed of storage areas from addresses "0000(H)" to "FFFF(H)". Here, the "1" address of the user area has a storage capacity of "1" byte. Therefore, the entire user area is "65536" bytes.
The addresses of the ROM 54 and the unused area following it in the user area, the RWM 53 and the unused area following it, the built-in register area 56 and the unused area following it, the decode area 57 and the unused area following it, are in the user area. It is continuous.
Note that in the user area, the storage capacity of the ROM 54 and RWM 53 and the storage capacity of each area shown in FIGS. 164 and 165 are examples, and the storage capacity is not limited thereto.

The ROM 54 is a storage area that stores a program (user program) created by the user, that is, the manufacturer of the slot machine 10.
The storage capacity of the ROM 54 is set to approximately "12 Kbytes" in this embodiment, and has a continuous storage area from addresses "0000(H)" to "2FFF(H)".
As shown in FIG. 165, the storage area of the ROM 54 has a used area and an unused area. Furthermore, both the used area and the outside of the used area have a control area and a data area. Note that the control area of the usage area may be referred to as a first control area, and the control area outside the usage area may be referred to as a second control area.

"Used area" refers to a storage area where information other than information necessary to prevent unauthorized modification or other changes is stored or will be stored (same for ROM 54 and RWM 53).
Further, the "control area" refers to a storage area other than the data area among the used areas, and is an area where various programs executed by the main control board 50 are stored. The control area may also be referred to as a "program area." Specifically, programs related to game progress and performance (programs for executing main processing (for example, FIG. 41) and interrupt processing (for example, FIG. 53)) are stored. Therefore, the commands of the programs shown in FIGS. 168 to 171, which will be described later, are stored in the control area of the used area of the ROM 54.
Furthermore, "data area" refers to a storage area in which only information other than the program is stored or will be stored in the used area, and is an area where data used when the program is executed is stored. be.

Furthermore, in a control area outside the use area (second control area), there are programs that are not related to the progress of the game, such as a program for controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74 (winning ratio monitor), a program used during testing, and Programs and the like for preventing fraud are stored.
Further, the program management area of the ROM 54 is an area that stores information and the like necessary for the main CPU 55 to execute a user program. A header, manufacturer code, product code, program code end address, etc. are stored in the program management area.

The RWM 53 is used as a work area for user programs. The RWM 53 has a backup function, and the information stored in the RWM 53 can be retained even after the chip (slot machine 10) is powered off.
As shown in FIG. 165, the storage area of the RWM 53 has a used area and a non-used area, similar to the ROM 54. Furthermore, both the used area and the outside of the used area have a work area and a stack area, respectively.
The work area in the usage area of the RWM 53 includes a storage area for storing data necessary for the game, as shown in FIG. 35 (11th embodiment) and FIGS. 133 to 138 (23rd embodiment), for example. (Note that in FIG. 35, a part of the storage area for data regarding advantageous sections overlaps with FIG. 138.)

In addition, among the areas used by the RWM 53, the stack area is used to save the value of a register and then return the value to the register, or when executing a predetermined instruction, the stack area is used to save the value of a register and then return the value to the register. This is an area used for storing the address of the caller to return to (also referred to as a return address or return address).
Furthermore, in the work area outside the area used by the RWM 53, there is data for displaying the ratio on the management information display LED 74 (winning ratio monitor), specifically, a ring buffer, a number of games counter, a number of payouts counter, and ratio data. It has storage areas such as
The storage capacity of the RWM 53 is set to approximately "1 Kbyte" in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and has a storage area of addresses "F000(H)" to "F3FF(H)".

Here, as shown in FIG. 165, the work area in the used area of the RWM 53 has a range of addresses "F00(H)" to "F1CF(H)", but FIG. As shown in FIGS. 133 to 138 (23rd embodiment), most of the storage areas for storing data necessary for the progress of the game are storage areas with the upper address "F0 (H)".
On the other hand, the storage area of the data for displaying the ratio on the management information display LED 74 (rotation ratio monitor) is the storage area whose upper address is "F2 (H)".

In FIG. 164, the built-in register area 56 that is continuous from the RWM 53 across an unused area has a storage area with addresses "FE00(H)" to "FEBF(H)" in this embodiment, and in the 24th embodiment It has a storage capacity of 192 bytes.
Furthermore, the decode area 57 that is continuous from the built-in register area 56 with an unused area in between is a storage area consisting of "46 bytes" of addresses "FED0(H)" to "FEFD(H)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 164, the main CPU 55 is provided with a general-purpose register area (storage area). The general-purpose register area may be provided outside the built-in memory, or may be provided within the built-in memory, for example, within the built-in register area 56.
The registers provided in the general-purpose register area consist of A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, F register, H register, L register, and Q register (1 byte each) (however, (The types of registers are not limited to these.) Other general-purpose registers include SP (stack pointer), but a description thereof will be omitted in the twenty-fourth embodiment.

The above-described ROM 54, RWM 53, built-in register area 56, decode area 57, and general-purpose registers are connected to an internal bus 55a and can be accessed by a program (main program) executed by the main CPU 55. Therefore, the information stored in the ROM 54 can be read by the main program. Further, the main program can read information stored in the RWM 53 and write information to the RWM 53. Furthermore, information in the built-in register area 56 can be read by the main program (however, only in some areas). Further, the main program can read information from the decode area 57 and write information to the decode area 57. Similarly, the main program can read information from and write information to registers.

Furthermore, even if data is stored in the registers when the power switch 11 is turned off, these register values are initialized to "0" when the power switch 11 is turned on.
In the 24th embodiment, when the power switch 11 of the slot machine 10 is turned on, the Q register value is "0 (H)" at the time the power is turned on, but from immediately after the power is turned on until the user program is started. The initial value "F0(H)" is stored in the Q register at a predetermined timing between the two.

Furthermore, when the power switch 11 is turned on after the power is turned off, the unused area of the user area is initialized. Here, data may be stored even in an unused area due to noise or the like. In the unlikely event that a value is stored in an unused area, it may lead to fraud or other fraud. For these reasons, the unused area is initialized when the power is turned on (usually once a day).

FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining the register in detail. In the figure, (A) indicates registers A to F, H, L, and Q.
In the main CPU 55 of this embodiment, A, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers (seven registers) can be used as registers for temporarily storing data during calculation. Further, the F register is a flag register having a carry flag and a zero flag. Furthermore, as described above, the Q register is a register in which the upper address "F0 (H)" of the work area in the used area of the RWM 53 is stored and is used when issuing an instruction.
Here, the A register and F register, the B register and C register, the D register and E register, and the H register and L register are respectively referred to as pair registers. Note that the F register is a register for storing the value of a specific flag, and a 2-byte value is not stored in the AF register together with the A register.

The A register is used to store a 1-byte value. For example, the A register is used in the process shown in step S772 in FIG. 141 (23rd embodiment).
On the other hand, 2-byte data may be stored in the BC register, DE register, and HL register as pair registers. Here, when 2-byte data is stored in the BC register, the B register is the upper one and the C register is the lower one. Similarly, when 2-byte data is stored in the DE register, the D register is the upper one and the E register is the lower one. Similarly, when 2-byte data is stored in the HL register, the H register becomes the upper register and the L register becomes the lower register.

For example, as an example of storing 2-byte data in the BC register, in step S831 of FIG. For example, data) is stored in a BC register.
Note that even when storing 1-byte data, a pair register may be used. For example, in step S395 of FIG. 49 (11th embodiment), in order to store the number of interrupt processing times "46", "00000000(B)" is stored in the B register, and "00101110(B)" (46(D) is stored in the C register. )) is stored as an example. The reason why data is stored in a pair register consisting of 2 bytes even if it is 1 byte data is to reuse the program for 2-byte wait processing.

On the other hand, the BC register is not always used as a pair register, but may be used alone. For example, as shown in step S497 in FIG. 55 (eleventh embodiment), there is an example in which error number display data is stored in the B register and bet display data is stored in the C register.
The above also applies to the DE register and the HL register.

The F register is called a flag register. FIG. 166(B) is a diagram showing the structure of the F register.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 166(B), the "D0" bit (lowest bit) of the F register is set to the carry flag (C). Here, the "carry flag (C)" is a flag that becomes "1" when a downflow or a carry (also referred to as overflow) occurs as a result of an operation.
Note that in this embodiment, the carry flag may be abbreviated as "C". In this embodiment, "C" means a carry flag and does not mean a C register. When referring to the C register, it is called "C register." However, in instructions to be described later, the BC register may be referred to as "BC".
Furthermore, in the instructions described later, "C" means "when the carry flag becomes "1" (when a carry occurs)". On the other hand, "NC" means "when the carry flag is not "1" (when no carry occurs)".

For example, in step S434 in FIG. 51 (eleventh embodiment), the carry flag changes in response to a comparison operation between the HL register value (difference counter value) and "2401(D)". In step S434 of FIG. 51, in the comparison operation between the HL register value and "2401(D)", a process of subtracting "2401(D)" from the HL register value is executed. Therefore, when the HL register value is "2400 (D)" or less, the carry flag becomes "1", and when the HL register value becomes "2401 (D)" or more, the carry flag becomes "0".
For example, if the HL register value is "2400 (D)",
"2400 (D)" - "2401 (D)" = "-1 (D)", carry flag = "1"
becomes.
Also, if the HL register value is "2402 (D)",
"2402(D)" - "2401(D)" = "1(D)", carry flag = "0"
becomes.

Therefore, since the operation result is "1", no underflow occurs and the carry flag is "0" (the D0 bit of the F register is "0").
On the other hand, if the HL register value is "2402(D)",
"2401 (D)" - "2402 (D)" = "-1 (D)" (Actually, "FFFF (H)"
As a result, a digit decreases and the carry flag becomes "1" (the D0 bit of the F register becomes "1").

Further, even if the calculation result does not have a carry-over or a carry-over, the carry flag may become "1".
For example, in the process of step S422 in FIG. 51 (eleventh embodiment), a special operation is performed to maintain "0000(H)" without causing a downgrade even if "1" is subtracted from "0000(H)". Execute. However, in the process of step S422, when "1" is subtracted from "0000(H)", the carry flag becomes "1".
Once the carry flag becomes "1", another operation is executed next, and the carry flag is maintained until it becomes "0" (the process of clearing the carry flag is not executed).

Further, as shown in FIG. 166(B), the "D7" bit (most significant bit) of the F register is set to the zero flag (Z). Here, the "zero flag (Z)" is a flag that becomes "1" when the calculation result becomes "0".
Furthermore, in the instructions to be described later, "Z" means the condition "when the zero flag becomes "1" (when the operation result is "0")". On the other hand, "NZ" means the condition "when the zero flag is not "1" (when the calculation result is not "0")".
For example, in the process of step S422 in FIG. 51 (11th embodiment), if the value before calculation is "0001 (H)" and "1" is subtracted and becomes "0000 (H)", the zero flag is It becomes "1".

Similar to the carry flag, once the zero flag becomes "1", another operation is executed next, and the zero flag is maintained until it becomes "0" (the process to clear the zero flag is not executed).
Note that in the F register, in this embodiment, only the D0 bit (carry flag) and D7 bit (zero flag) are used, and the D1 to D6 bits are unused. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to use other bits of the F register for other flags.

Further, as described above, the Q register is a register in which "F0(H)" (the upper address of the working area of the used area in the RWM 53) is stored, and in the 24th embodiment, among the storage areas of the RWM 53, , is used in an instruction to read data whose upper address is "F0 (H)". In particular, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, most of the upper addresses of the work area within the used area of the RWM 53 are set to "F0(H)". For example, the first "F000(H)" is set in the setting value data (_NB_RANK) as shown in FIG. 35 (eleventh embodiment).

In the examples shown in FIG. 35 and FIGS. 133 to 138 (23rd embodiment), the upper address of the storage area where each data is stored is "F0##(H)"("#" is " Any value from "0" to "F".). When "F0 (H)" is once stored in the Q register, when the command specifies the upper address "F0 (H)" in the storage area of the RWM 53, the Q register is designated.
In addition, in the area used by RWM53, if the main upper address of the work area is not "F0 (H)", for example, if it is "E1 (H)", then the Q register will contain "E1 (H)". (H)” is stored.

In addition, when "F0 (H)" is stored in the Q register, for example, in the used area of the RWM 53, predetermined data related to the progress of the game is stored in a storage area whose upper address is other than "F0 (H)". If you need to access the data, the following methods are available:
For example, first, the address where the data to be read is stored is stored in the HL register, and the program instruction specifies the HL register value (instruction to read the contents stored in the HL register). Can be mentioned.

Second, when accessing data in a storage area whose upper address is other than "F0 (H)", temporarily change the Q register value from "F0 (H)" to another value (the data you want to access is stored). The data in the storage area of the upper address can be accessed by changing the address to a higher-order address (the higher-order address) and then specifying the Q register with an instruction. After this instruction is completed, for example, the Q register value may be returned to "F0(H)".

FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining the command "LDQ A, (20(H))".
This instruction corresponds to an instruction to save (memorize) the content (also referred to as "contents" or "data"; the same applies hereinafter) stored at address "F020 (H)" at address A. do.
Here, the entire description "LDQ A, (20(H))" is referred to as an "instruction."
Furthermore, when the instruction is actually stored in the ROM 54, it is encoded (binarized data of "0" or "1") and stored. Binarized data in the form in which instructions are stored in the ROM 54 is referred to as an "instruction code."

Further, the command includes command information and identification information. In this example, "LDQ A," corresponds to command information, and "(20(H))" corresponds to identification information.
In the instruction "LDQ A, (20(H))", "LD" means transfer, "Q" refers to the upper address, and "(20(H))" refers to the lower address to be accessed. . The operand of the instruction (variable to be operated on) is specified within the parentheses of the identification information, and becomes the lower address to be accessed. Further, "A" indicates the register (in this example, the A register) as the storage destination.
Therefore, the data stored in the A register becomes the contents of address "F020(H)".

In the above case, it is assumed that data "n" is stored at address "F020(H)" as shown in FIG. 167(B). In this case, "n" is stored in the A register by the instruction "LDQ A, (20(H))". If some data is stored in the A register before saving "n", the A register is overwritten with "n".

Next, specific examples of instructions in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described.
FIGS. 168 to 171 are diagrams showing types of instructions in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and show 37 types, numbered 1 to 37. Note that these commands are just examples, and the commands are not limited to the 37 types shown in FIGS. 168 to 171, and many more commands are provided.
First, the first and second instructions indicate "JTQ" instructions.
The first "JTQ NZ, (k), e" is the content stored at the address where the content of the Q register is the upper one and k is the lower one (hereinafter, the content stored at the address that is the target of the operation is , abbreviated as "target address value." be.

Moreover, the last "e" indicates the migration destination address. For example, when the migration destination address is "0010(H)", "e" is written as "0010(H)" (2 bytes).
Furthermore, "NZ" is a conditional symbol in a branch instruction. Conditional symbols for branch instructions explained below include the following.
NZ: When the operation result is not "0", in other words, when the zero flag is not "1" Z: When the operation result is "0", in other words, when the zero flag is "1" NC: When the operation result is a digit If the result is not a down digit, in other words, the carry flag is not "1" C: If the operation result is a down digit, in other words, the carry flag is "1"

In the above instruction, to determine whether the target address value is "0", "0" is subtracted from the target address value (target address value - "0"), and if the zero flag is not "1", then , determines that the target address value is not "0", and moves to e (address).
For example, when determining whether the content stored in address "F001(H)" is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", moving to address "0010(H)", The command is "JTQ NZ, (01(H)), 0010(H)".
In this case, whether the content stored in the address with the Q register value "F0(H)" as the upper one and "01(H)" as the lower one, that is, the address "F001(H)" is "0" or not. to judge.
And here:
"Contents of address "F001(H)"" - "0"
Calculate.

For example, when "1(H)" is stored in "F001(H)", "1-0≠0" and the zero flag is "0". Therefore, it is determined that the content stored at address "F001(H)" is not "0", and the process is shifted to address "0010(H)".
On the other hand, if, for example, "0(H)" is stored at address "F001(H)", "0-0=0" and the zero flag becomes "1". Therefore, it is determined that the content stored at address "F001(H)" is "0", and the process ends (the process does not move to address "0010(H)", but the next command (specific (The instruction stored at the address consecutive to the instruction is executed).

In addition, as a method to judge whether the target address value is "0" or not, "0" is subtracted from the contents stored in the target address, and if the zero flag is "1", the contents stored in the target address are subtracted. The method of determining whether the content stored in the target address is "0" (or, if the zero flag is not "1", the content stored at the target address is not "0") is to If the condition has the condition symbol "Z", similar calculations are performed.

Furthermore, the contents stored in the RWM 53 do not change before and after executing the above instruction. When the instruction "JTQ NZ, (k), e" is executed, the contents stored at the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower are not changed before and after the instruction.
Furthermore, even if an interrupt processing cycle arrives during the execution of an instruction, the interrupt processing is not executed until the instruction is completed. When an interrupt processing cycle arrives during the execution of an instruction, the interrupt processing waits until the instruction is completed, and then the interrupt processing is executed after the instruction is completed.

Depending on the operation executed by the instruction, the zero flag or carry flag will have a value corresponding to the operation result of the instruction, but the value of the zero flag or carry flag corresponding to the operation result of the instruction will not change until the instruction is completed. It is necessary to In other words, after the zero flag or carry flag changes due to the execution of an instruction, interrupt processing is executed before the instruction finishes, and the zero flag or carry flag changes due to the interrupt processing (the result of the operation of the instruction does not change). Corresponding zero flags and carry flags are corrupted by operations based on interrupt processing). To prevent this, interrupt processing is not executed while an instruction is being executed.

In the 24th embodiment, not only the first above-mentioned instruction but also all the instructions shown in FIGS. 168 to 171, interrupt processing is not executed while the instruction is being executed even if the interrupt processing cycle has arrived. , executes interrupt processing after the instruction is completed.
For example, if there is no interrupt disabled period between at least the "N"th instruction and the "N+1"th instruction, and the "N"th instruction and the "N+1"th instruction are executed consecutively, If the interrupt processing cycle comes while the Nth instruction is being executed, the interrupt processing will not be executed until the Nth instruction is completed, and the interrupt processing will be executed after the Nth instruction is completed. do. Furthermore, while this interrupt processing is being executed, the "N+1"-th instruction is not executed. After the interrupt processing is completed, the "N+1"th instruction is executed.
On the other hand, if the interrupt prohibition period is set between at least the "N"th instruction and the "N+1"th instruction, and the "N"th instruction and the "N+1"th instruction are executed consecutively. In , when the interrupt processing cycle comes while the "N"th instruction is being executed, the interrupt processing is not executed after the "N"th instruction is completed, and the interrupt processing is started after the interrupt prohibition period ends. Execute. Here, the above-mentioned interrupt prohibition period corresponds to, for example, the period from the DI instruction to the EI instruction.
Note that the instructions shown in FIGS. 168 to 171 may be executed not only in the main processing but also in the interrupt processing.

The second instruction "JTQ Z, (k), e" is the same as the first instruction except that the condition symbol "NZ" in the first instruction is changed to "Z". be. In this instruction, contrary to the first instruction, when the content of the Q register is determined to be "0" stored at the address where the upper address is set and k is the lower address, that is, the zero flag is "1". If so, the process moves to e (address). On the other hand, if it is determined that the target address value is not "0", the process ends.

An example of the second command is step S803 in FIG. 147 (23rd embodiment). In step S803, it is determined whether the value (winning and replay condition device number) stored in the address "F0A9(H)" is "0". If it is determined that the value is "0", the process advances to step S804. Therefore, for example, if the instruction in step S804 is stored at address "0011(H)", the instruction in step S803 is "JTQ Z, (A9(H)), 0011(H)".

The third and fourth instructions indicate "RTQ" instructions.
These instructions are the same as the first and second instructions in determining whether the contents stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower are "0". This command differs from the first and second commands in that it moves to the caller when the conditions specified in the command are met.
First, the third "RTQ NZ, (k)" judges whether the content stored at the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower is "0", and returns "0". If not (NZ), the process ends and the process returns to the calling source.
Here, when moving to the caller after the instruction ends, as in this third instruction, at the start of the instruction, the address (caller; 2 bytes) to return to after the end of the instruction is stored in the stack area. do.

The method for determining whether it is "0" is the same as the "JTQ" command described above, and calculates "target address value - "0".
Then, the third "RTQ NZ, (k)", when it is determined that the target address value (the content stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower) is not "0", Then, if the zero flag is not "1", the process ends and the process returns to the caller, and if the zero flag is "1", the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored in the address consecutive to the instruction) is executed. (instructions) are executed.
In addition, the fourth "RTQ Z, (k)" ends processing and moves to the caller when the zero flag is "1", and when the zero flag is not "1", it executes the next instruction (specifically This is an instruction to execute an instruction stored at an address consecutive to the instruction.

An example of the fourth command is step S808 in FIG. 147 (23rd embodiment). In step S808, it is determined whether the value of address "F098(H)" (AT standby counter) is "0" or not, and if it is "0", the process moves to step S289 in FIG. 139, which is the calling source. do. Therefore, for example, if the instruction in step S289 is stored at address "0021(H)", the instruction in step S808 in FIG. 147 becomes "RTQ Z, (98(H))", and the stack area is , "0021(H)" which is the address of the caller is saved.

The fifth to eighth instructions indicate "RCP" commands.
The fifth instruction "RCP NZ, A, n" compares the A register value (indicates the contents stored in the A register. The same applies hereinafter) and "n", and if the zero flag is not "1", This is an instruction that ends processing and moves to the caller. Note that the comparison between the A register value and "n" is the same for the 6th to 8th instructions.
"Comparison" in this RCP instruction calculates "A register value - 'n'".
Example 1)
A register value = 6
n=5
If so, the command becomes "RCP NZ, A, 5".
In this case, an operation is performed to subtract "5" from the A register value.
Therefore,
6-5=1 (≠0)
Therefore, the zero flag is "0".
Since the zero flag is "0", the process moves to the address (2 bytes) saved in the caller, that is, the stack area.
Example 2)
A register value = 4
n=5
If so, the command becomes "RCP NZ, A, 5".
In this case, an operation is performed to subtract "5" from the A register value.
Therefore,
4-5=-1(FF(H))(≠0)
Therefore, the zero flag is "0".
Since the zero flag is "0", the process moves to the address (2 bytes) saved in the caller, that is, the stack area.
Example 3)
A register value = 5
n=5
If so, the command becomes "RCP NZ, A, 5".
In this case, an operation is performed to subtract "5" from the A register value.
Therefore,
5-5=0
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Since the zero flag is "1", it does not move to the caller, that is, the address (2 bytes) stored in the stack area, but moves to the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address following the instruction). ).

Furthermore, in the above instruction (the same applies to the 6th to 8th instructions below), the operation of subtracting "n" from the A register value is executed, but the A register value does not change even after the operation. . For example, in Example 1 above, even if the operation of subtracting n "5" from the A register value "4" is performed, the A register value remains "4".
In this way, since the A register value is not changed by the RCP instruction, the A register value can continue to be used after the RCP instruction.

The sixth instruction "RCP Z, A, n" is different from the fifth instruction in that it is an instruction that moves to the calling source when the zero flag is "1". The comparison between the A register value and "n" is the same as in the fifth instruction.
Further, the seventh instruction "RCP NC, A, n" is an instruction that compares the A register value with "n" and moves to the caller if the carry flag is not "1".

An example of this command is step S805 in FIG. 147 (23rd embodiment). In step S805, the accessory condition device number is stored in the A register value, and "n" is "2". Therefore, step S805 becomes the command "RCP NC, A, 2".
here,
Example 1)
For example, when the A register value (accessory condition device number) is "2" (at the time of RBA winning or when RBA winning information is being carried over),
2-2=0
Therefore, the carry flag is "0".
Therefore, since the carry flag is "0", the process moves to the calling source. In this case, the caller is the address where the command in step S289 in FIG. 139 is stored after the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) (FIG. 146).
Example 2)
For example, when the A register value (accessory condition device number) is "0",
0-2=-2(FE(H))
Therefore, the carry flag is "1".
Therefore, since the carry flag is "1", the next instruction (instruction in step S806) is executed without moving to the calling source.
Example 3)
For example, when the A register value (accessory condition device number) is "3",
3-2=1
Therefore, the carry flag is "0".
Therefore, since the carry flag is "0", the process moves to the calling source. In this case, the caller is the address where the command in step S289 in FIG. 139 is stored after the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) (FIG. 146).
Furthermore, the 8th "RCP C, A, n" is an instruction in which "NC" in the 7th instruction is changed to "C", and when the carry flag is "1", it is transferred to the caller. However, when the carry flag is "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, an instruction stored at an address subsequent to the instruction).

The 9th and 10th "LDWQ" instructions are instructions for storing predetermined values at two consecutive addresses. In this instruction, "LD" means transfer as described above, and "W" indicates that the target address is 2 addresses.
This instruction can be executed even when there is no free space in the register (a value is stored in the register). It can also be used, for example, when temporarily stored data is actually adopted and stored.
The ninth instruction "LDWQ (k), (k')" is an address with the contents of the Q register as upper and "k'" as lower, and an address that adds "1" to that address, in other words. For example, the contents stored at an address where the contents of the Q register are upper and "k'+1" are lower, and the contents stored at an address where the contents of the Q register are upper and "k" is lower, and "1" is stored at the address. In other words, this is an instruction to save the contents of the Q register at an upper address and "k+1" at a lower address.

for example,
Contents stored in upper address "Q" and lower address "k'": x
Contents stored in upper address "Q" and lower address "k'+1": y
In that case,
Save “x” in the storage area of upper address “Q” and lower address “k”,
This is an instruction to save "y" in the storage area of upper address "Q" and lower address "k+1".

The 10th instruction "LDWQ (k), mn" is an address with the contents of the Q register as upper and "k" as lower, and an address that adds "1" to that address, in other words, the Q register This is an instruction to store "mn" (a 2-byte value) at an address with the contents of "k+1" as the upper order and "k+1" as the lower order.
This instruction is used, for example, when storing a 2-byte timer value in a 2-byte storage area.

An example of this command is, for example, in step S767 of FIG. 140 (23rd embodiment), the initial value of the minimum playing time "3672 (D)" is added to the addresses "F0AB(H)" and "F0AC(H)". An example of this is the process of storing .
Here, since "3672(D)" = "0E58(H)", the instruction in the above example becomes "LDWQ (AB(H)), 0E58(H)" and is placed at address "F0AB(H)". “0E(H)” is saved, and “58(H)” is saved in “F0AC(H)”.

This command is also used, for example, when setting the initial value of the number of coins acquired during 1BB operation. For example, in FIG. 133 (23rd embodiment), the number of coins that can be acquired for 1BB in the 23rd embodiment is 170, so the storage area that stores the number of coins that can be acquired for 1BB is 1-byte storage at address "F00E (H)". It has become an area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of coins that can be obtained for 1BB is 256 or more, the storage area for storing the number of coins that can be acquired for 1BB is 2 bytes. Then, at the start of the 1BB game, the initial value of the number of obtainable coins (2-byte value) during the 1BB operation is stored in the storage area.

The 11th and 12th indicate "JTWQ" commands. This instruction is an instruction that determines whether the contents stored in two consecutive addresses are "0" or not, and shifts the processing to address "e" depending on the determination result. This instruction may be used, for example, to determine whether a 2-byte timer has elapsed.
First, the 11th instruction "JTWQ NZ, (k), e" writes the contents of the Q register to the upper address, "k" to the lower address, and sets "1" to the address. Determine whether the content of the added address, in other words, the content (i.e. 2-byte data) stored at the address with the content of the Q register as the upper and "k+1" as the lower, is "0" or not, If it is not "0", the process is transferred to e (address), and if it is "0", the process is not transferred to e (address) and the next instruction (specifically, the instruction This is an instruction that executes instructions stored in consecutive addresses.

Here, to determine whether it is "0", calculate "2-byte data value - 0", and if the zero flag is "1", the 2-byte data value is "0". I judge that there is. The same applies to the following 12th to 14th instructions.
The 12th instruction "JTWQ Z, (k), e" differs from the 11th instruction in that if the 2-byte data is "0", the process moves to e (address). .
An example of this command is step S766 in FIG. 140 (23rd embodiment). Step S766 is a process of determining whether the 2-byte data stored at addresses "F0AB(H)" and "F0AC(H)" is "0". When it is determined that the value is "0", the process moves to e (address), in this example, the address where the next instruction in step S767 is stored. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", the process does not proceed to e (address), but in this example, proceeds to the address where the next instruction in step S766 is stored.

The 13th and 14th instructions are "RTWQ" instructions. This instruction is an instruction that determines whether the contents (2-byte data) stored in two consecutive addresses are "0" or not, and moves to the calling source according to the determination result. In other words, the 11th and 12th instructions above move to e (address) if the conditions specified in the instruction are met, but the 13th and 14th instructions move to e (address) if the conditions specified in the instruction are met. This instruction is different from the 11th and 12th instructions in that if the specified conditions are met, the instruction is transferred to the calling source. Like the 11th and 12th instructions, this instruction may also be used, for example, to wait for a 2-byte timer.

The 13th instruction, "RTWQ NZ, (k)", writes the contents of the Q register to the contents stored at the upper address and "k" to the lower address, and to the address obtained by adding "1" to that address. Determine whether the stored content, in other words, the content (i.e. 2-byte data) stored at an address with the contents of the Q register as upper and "k+1" as lower, is "0" or not, If it is not "0", it moves to the caller, and if it is "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address consecutive to the instruction in question). be.
An example of this command is step S791 in FIG. 146 (23rd embodiment). In step S791, it is determined whether the contents (waiting time) of addresses "F041(H)" and "F042(H)" are "0" (whether the zero flag is "1" or not), and "0" is determined. If not, the process according to the flowchart of FIG. 146 is ended, and the process moves to the calling source, in this example, the address where the instruction of step S289 in FIG. 139 is stored. On the other hand, it is determined whether the contents (waiting time) of addresses "F041(H)" and "F042(H)" are "0" (whether the zero flag is "1" or not), and it is determined that they are "0". If so, the instruction in step S792 in FIG. 146 (the next instruction in step S791) is executed.
In addition, the 14th instruction "RTWQ Z, (k)" moves to the caller if the 2-byte data value is "0", and if it is not "0", the next instruction ( Specifically, this instruction differs from the 11th instruction in that it executes an instruction stored at an address consecutive to the instruction. Other than that, it is the same as the 13th instruction.

In FIG. 169, the 15th and 16th "ICPLDS" instructions are instructions that compare the target register value and "n" (1-byte value) and execute predetermined processing according to the calculation result.
First, the 15th instruction "ICPLDS A,n" compares the contents stored in the A register with "n". This 15th command includes patterns 1 to 3 shown below (however, it is not limited to these three patterns).

<Pattern 1>
The value obtained by adding "1" to the contents stored in the A register is compared with "n", and if "A register value + 1" exceeds "n", the value of "n" is added to the A register. Set the value.
Here, the value obtained by adding "1" to the A register value is subtracted from "n"("n" - "A register value + 1"), and when the carry flag becomes "1", the A register value is If the value of "n" is set and the carry flag does not become "1", the value of "n" is not set in the A register.
This command, for example, adds "1" to some counter every time a predetermined condition is met (for example, for each game), and when that value exceeds "n" (upper limit), maintains that state. There are cases where it continues. Specifically, when a parameter (for example, number of games played) reaches a ceiling, the ceiling state is maintained, and when the ceiling state is reached, a specific lottery is executed every game.

<Pattern 2>
a) If the content stored in the A register is less than "1", add "1" to the content stored in the A register (A register value = A register value + 1) and end the process. do.
b) If the content stored in the A register is "1" or more, set the A register to "n" (1-byte value) (A register value = "n") and end the process.
Here, "1" is subtracted from the content stored in the A register (A register value - "1"), and when the carry flag is "1", the content stored in the A register is "1". ”. Alternatively, "0" is subtracted from the contents stored in the A register (A register value - "0"), and if the zero flag is "1", the contents stored in the A register are less than "1". It is determined that
Also, if "1" is subtracted from the content stored in the A register (A register value - "1"), and the carry flag is "0", the content stored in the A register becomes "1". It is determined that this is the above.

<Pattern 3>
a) If the content stored in the A register is less than "n" (1 byte value), add "1" to the content stored in the A register and end the process.
b) If the content stored in the A register is "n", the process is immediately terminated.
c) If the content stored in the A register exceeds "n", set the A register to "n" (1-byte value) and end the process.

Here, "n" is subtracted from the content stored in the A register (A register value - "n"), and when the carry flag is "1", the content stored in the A register is "n". ”.
Also, subtract "n" from the content stored in the A register (A register value - "n"), and if the zero flag is "1", the content stored in the A register is "n". I judge that there is.
Furthermore, "n" is subtracted from the contents stored in the A register (A register value - "n"), and when the carry flag is "0" and the zero flag is "0", the A register It can be determined that the contents stored in the file exceed "n".

The 16th instruction "ICPLDS (HL),n" means that "A" (A register value (1 byte data)) in the 15th instruction is changed to "(HL)" (HL register value (2 byte data)). ). Other than that, it is the same as the 15th instruction.
Note that the HL register is often used to store 2-byte data (for example, an address value, etc.), and one example thereof is "HL" in the above instruction. However, the instruction is not limited to this, and may be an instruction that specifies another pair of registers (BC register, DE register). In this case, they become "ICPLDS (BC), n" and "ICPLDS (DE), n", respectively.
This also applies to instructions (26th, 29th, and 30th) that specify the "HL" register, which will be explained below.

The 16th instruction will be explained below, although some of the explanation will overlap with the 15th instruction.
"ICPLDS (HL),n" compares "n" with the contents stored in the HL register. Examples of this command include patterns 1 to 3 shown below (however, the command is not limited to these three patterns).

<Pattern 1>
The value obtained by adding "1" to the contents stored in the HL register is compared with "n" (1 byte value), and if "HL register value + 1" exceeds "n", the HL register is Set the value of “n” to . When "n" is set in the HL register, the H register value becomes "0" and the L register value becomes "n".
Here, the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value is subtracted from "n"("n" - "HL register value + 1"), and when the carry flag becomes "1", the value is added to the HL register. If the value of "n" is set and the carry flag does not become "1", the value of "n" is not set in the HL register.

<Pattern 2>
a) If the content stored in the HL register is less than "1", add "1" to the content stored in the HL register (HL register value = HL register value + 1) and end the process. do.
b) If the content stored in the HL register is "1" or more, set "n" (1 byte value) in the HL register (HL register value = "n") and end the process.
Here, "1" is subtracted from the content stored in the HL register (HL register value - "1"), and when the carry flag is "1", the content stored in the HL register is "1". ”. Alternatively, subtract "0" from the content stored in the HL register (HL register value - "0"), and if the zero flag is "1", the content stored in the HL register is less than "1". It is determined that
Also, if "1" is subtracted from the content stored in the HL register (HL register value - "1"), and the carry flag is "0", the content stored in the HL register becomes "1". It is determined that this is the above.

<Pattern 3>
a) If the content stored in the HL register is less than "n" (1 byte value), "1" is added to the content stored in the HL register and the process ends.
b) If the content stored in the HL register is "n", the process is immediately terminated.
c) If the content stored in the HL register exceeds "n", set "n" (1-byte value) in the HL register and end the process.

Here, "n" is subtracted from the content stored in the HL register (HL register value - "n"), and when the carry flag is "1", the content stored in the HL register is "n". ”.
Also, subtract "n" from the content stored in the HL register (HL register value - "n"), and if the zero flag is "1", the content stored in the HL register is "n". I judge that there is.
Furthermore, "n" is subtracted from the contents stored in the HL register (HL register value - "n"), and when the carry flag is "0" and the zero flag is "0", the HL register It can be determined that the contents stored in the file exceed "n".

The "JCPQR" instruction, which is the 17th to 20th instruction, subtracts "n" (1 byte value) from the contents of the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower, and depending on the result, e This is an instruction to move processing to (address).
This "JCPQR" instruction allows conditional branching without using the A register or the HL register, so it can be executed even in a situation where there are not enough registers.

First, the 17th instruction "JCPQR NZ, (k), n, e" reads "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored at the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower. If the result of subtracting is not "0", this is an instruction to move the process to e (address).
This instruction calculates "target address value - 'n'", and when the zero flag is not "1", the process moves to e (address), and when the zero flag is "1", the next instruction ( Specifically, the instruction stored at an address consecutive to the instruction is executed.
In addition, the 18th instruction "JCPQR Z, (k), n, e" extracts "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored at the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower. If the result of subtraction is "0", this is an instruction to move the process to e (address).
This instruction calculates "target address value - 'n'", and when the zero flag is "1", the process moves to e (address), and when the zero flag is not "1", the next instruction ( Specifically, the instruction stored at an address consecutive to the instruction is executed.

Furthermore, the 19th instruction "JCPQR NC, (k), n, e" reads "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored at the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower ), if no carry occurs (if the carry flag is "0"), this is an instruction to move the processing to e (address).
This instruction calculates "target address value - 'n'", and when the carry flag is "0", the process moves to e (address), and when the carry flag is "1", the next (Specifically, an instruction stored at an address consecutive to the instruction) is executed.
Furthermore, the 20th instruction "JCPQR C, (k), n, e" extracts "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored at the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower. This is an instruction to move processing to e (address) if a carry occurs as a result of subtracting (carry flag is "1").
Here, we calculate "target address value - 'n'", and when the carry flag is "1", the process moves to e (address), and when the carry flag is not "1", the next instruction (Specifically, an instruction stored at an address consecutive to the instruction) is executed.

In FIG. 170, the 21st to 24th instructions are "RCPQ" instructions.
The "RCPQ" instruction is an instruction that subtracts "n" from the target address value and ends the process according to the subtraction result.
Therefore, the "RCPQ" instruction terminates processing if the conditions specified in the instruction are met, and, like the "JCPQR" instruction, which is the 17th to 20th instruction, the "RCPQ" instruction is an instruction that moves to e (address). It differs from

Since the "RCPQ" instruction is an instruction that directly compares target address values, it can be executed even when there is no free space in the register, similar to the above-mentioned "JCPQR" instruction.
The 21st instruction "RCPQ NZ, (k), n" is the result of subtracting "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored at the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower. , if it is not "0", it is an instruction that ends the process (the next instruction starts from the return address stored in the stack area).
Here, "target address value - 'n'" is calculated, and if the zero flag is not "1", the process ends, and if the zero flag is "1", the next instruction (stored in the stack area) is executed. An instruction other than the instruction corresponding to the return address (specifically, an instruction stored at an address consecutive to the instruction) is executed.
In addition, the 22nd instruction "RCPQ Z, (k), n" subtracts "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored at the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower. If the result is "0", this is an instruction to end the process.
Here, we calculate "target address value - 'n'", and when the zero flag is "1", the process ends, and when the zero flag is not "1", the next instruction (stored in the stack area) is executed. An instruction other than the instruction corresponding to the return address (specifically, an instruction stored at an address consecutive to the instruction) is executed.

Furthermore, the 23rd instruction "RCPQ NC, (k), n" extracts "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored at the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower. If no carry occurs as a result of subtraction (carry flag is "0"), an instruction is issued to end the process (the next instruction starts from the return address stored in the stack area). be.
Here, we calculate "target address value - 'n'", and if the carry flag is not "1", the process ends, and if the carry flag is "1", the next instruction (stored in the stack area) is executed. Executes an instruction other than the instruction corresponding to the current return address (specifically, an instruction stored at an address consecutive to the instruction).
Furthermore, the 24th instruction "RCPQ C, (k), n" subtracts "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored at the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower. As a result, if the number is less than "n", the process is terminated (the next instruction starts from the return address stored in the stack area).
Here, we calculate "target address value - 'n'", and when the carry flag is "1", the process ends, and when the carry flag is not "1", the next instruction (stored in the stack area) is executed. Executes an instruction other than the instruction corresponding to the return address currently being stored (specifically, an instruction stored at an address consecutive to the instruction).

The 25th instruction, "LDQ (k), (k')", saves the contents of the Q register at the upper address and k' at the lower address. This is an instruction to save to a lower address.
for example,
Contents stored in upper address "Q" and lower address "k'": x
In that case,
This is an instruction to save "x" in the storage area of upper address "Q" and lower address "k".
This instruction is used when it is desired to move the value of a predetermined RWM address (copy source) to another address (copy destination) in a situation where no register is available.

The 26th "CLRHL (HL),n" sets (clears) the contents of each address to "0" from the address indicated by the HL register to "n" addresses, in other words, to "HL+n" addresses. It is a command. In this case, the content before saving the "0" is not looked at, and the "0" is saved regardless of whether the content of the address where the "0" is saved is "0" or not.

Such processing, for example, as in step S435 in FIG. 51 (eleventh embodiment), sequentially updates the contents of a series of addresses (addresses for storing data regarding the advantageous section and AT) of the RWM 53 as " Used when setting the value to 0.
It can also be used to execute RWM clearing of a predetermined range of addresses at the start of a game.
Furthermore, although "n" in this instruction is a 1-byte value, for example, if "n" can also be applied to a 2-byte value, RWM clearing of a predetermined range of addresses when changing settings (for example, It can also be used in step S224 in FIG. 39 (eleventh embodiment).

FIG. 172 is a diagram showing addresses of the RWM 53 for storing data regarding advantageous sections and AT in the twenty-fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 172, the addresses for storing data regarding the advantageous section and AT, in other words, the addresses to be initialized in the RWM initialization process in step S435 of FIG. 51, are arranged consecutively. do. Then, in the process of step S435, a process of saving "0" in the storage area from address "F070(H)" to "F07B(H)" is executed. For example, in the example of FIG. 172, it is "CLRHL (F070(H)), B(H)".

Furthermore, in the instruction "CLRHL (F070(H)), B(H)", the HL register value at the beginning of the instruction is "F070(H)", but the value of the HL register after the end of this instruction is is also “F070(H)”. That is, this instruction does not change the HL register value. As a result, when the HL register value is used in the next instruction, it can be used as is.

On the other hand, in the prior art, when the reference address is stored in the HL register and data at addresses from the reference address to "n" addresses are sequentially cleared, the following processing is performed.
For example, as shown above, if the HL register value is "F070(H)" and you want to clear the data at the address up to address "B(H)", that is, up to "F07B(H)",
Save “0” at the address indicated by the HL register value (F070(H)) ↓
HL register value = HL register value + 1
Save “0” at the address indicated by the HL register value (F071(H)) ↓
HL register value = HL register value + 1
Save “0” at the address indicated by the HL register value (F072(H)) ↓
:
↓
HL register value = HL register value + 1 (F07B(H))
“0” is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (F07B(H)).

Therefore, when "0" is saved in the storage area from address "F070(H)" to "F07B(H)", the HL register value at the end of the instruction is "F07B(H)".
Therefore, in order to execute some instruction again using "F070(H)" as the reference address in the next instruction, it was necessary to save "F070(H)" in the HL register again.
On the other hand, in the instruction "CLRHL (HL), n", the initially set HL register value is maintained even after the instruction ends, so there is no need to return the HL register value to the reference address value. Therefore, it is possible to reduce program capacity and processing time.

In FIG. 170, the 27th instruction "DCPLDQ (k), 0" is "1" if the content stored at the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower is not "0". This is an instruction to subtract .
Here, to determine whether the contents stored at the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower, calculate "target address value - "0", and the zero flag is "1". ”, it is determined that the content stored in the target address is “0”. Then, if it is not "0", "1" is subtracted.

The following two patterns are possible for this command.
<Pattern 1>
If the contents stored at the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k is lower are "0", "1" is not subtracted.
<Pattern 2>
If the carry flag becomes "1" as a result of subtracting "1", "0" is stored in the target address. In this case, it means that the content before subtraction is "0".
Any of these may be adopted.

The 28th instruction "DCPWLDQ (k), 0" is an address with the contents of the Q register as the upper part and k as the lower part, and the address +1 (an address with the contents of the Q register as the upper part and "k+1" as the lower part). ) is not "0", this is an instruction to subtract "1".
This 28th instruction differs from the 27th instruction, which subtracts "1" from 1-byte data, in that it subtracts "1" from 2-byte data. Other points, such as Pattern 1 and Pattern 2 above, also apply to this instruction.

The 29th and 30th instructions indicate "LDWQ" instructions.
The 29th instruction "LDWQ (k), (HL+d)" saves the contents of the address "HL+d (1-byte value)" in an address with Q register as upper and k as lower, and writes "HL+d( This is an instruction to save the contents of the address "1 byte value)+1" at address +1 (an address where the Q register is upper and "k+1" is lower), with Q register as upper and lower.
This instruction may be used, for example, to take out a value from the input port 51 and save it to a target address.

for example,
HL=51(H)
d=1
Contents of F052(H) (HL+d) = 1(H)
Contents of F053(H) (HL+d+1) = 2(H)
k=60(H)
In this case, the value "1 (H)" stored in the address "F052 (H)" is stored in the address "F060 (H)", and the value "1 (H)" stored in the address "F053 (H)" is stored in the address "F060 (H)". The value "2(H)" is stored in the address "F061(H)".

The 30th instruction "LDWQ (HL+d), (k)" is an instruction in which "k" and "HL+d" are reversed from the above 29th instruction, and the Q register is Save the contents of the address with k as the low order in the address "HL+d (1 byte value)", and save the contents of the address with the Q register as the high order and k as the low order +1 (the address with the Q register as the high order and "k+1" as the low order) ) is stored at the address "HL+d (1 byte value)+1".
This command may be used, for example, when writing data directly from a target address when outputting to the output port 52.
for example,
k=60(H)
Contents of F060(H) = 1(H)
Contents of F061(H) = 2(H)
HL=51(H)
d=1
In this case, the value "1(H)" stored in the address "F060(H)" is stored in the address "F052(H)" and the content "2(H)" of the address "F061(H)" is stored. H)” is stored at address “F053(H)”.

In FIG. 171, "cc" in the 31st to 36th instructions indicates either "NZ" or "Z".
In the 31st instruction, "JT NZ, (DE), e" is an instruction that calculates the contents of the DE register, and if it is not "0", moves the processing to e (address), and returns "0". If so, it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address next to the instruction) without moving the process to e (address).
Here, "calculating the contents of the DE register" is a calculation for determining whether the DE register value is "0". In this embodiment, "DE register value - "0"" is calculated, and if the zero flag is not "1", it is determined that the contents of the DE register are not "0".

On the other hand, "JT Z, (DE), e" is an instruction opposite to the above, which calculates the contents of the DE register, and if it is "0", in other words, if the zero flag is "1", is an instruction that transfers processing to e (address), and if the zero flag is not "1", processing does not transfer to e (address) and the next instruction (specifically, the next instruction after the This is an instruction to execute the instruction stored at the address.
Note that in the 31st instruction, "DE" is used to specify the register that stores 2-byte data, but the instruction is not limited to this, and the BC register or HL register may be specified. In this case, they will be "JT cc, (BC), e" and "JT cc, (HL), e", respectively.
This also applies to the 32nd instruction below.

The 32nd instruction differs from the 31st instruction, which moves the processing to e (address), in that the processing ends if the instruction conditions are met. The rest is the same as the 31st instruction.
In the 32nd instruction, "RT NZ, (DE), e" calculates the contents of the DE register, and if it is not "0", ends the process (the next instruction is stored in the stack area). If it is "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the next address of the instruction).
Here, "calculating the contents of the DE register" is the same as above.
Also, "RT Z, (DE), e" calculates the contents of the DE register, and if it is "0", ends the process (the next instruction is the return address stored in the stack area). If it is not "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address next to the instruction).

In the 33rd instruction, "JTQ NZ, (k), e" calculates the contents stored at the address with Q register as upper and k as lower, and if it is not "0", e (address ), and if it is "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address following the instruction).
Here, "calculate the contents stored at the address where Q register is upper and k is lower" means to calculate "the contents of the address indicated by the target register - '0'", and the zero flag is set to '1'. If not, it is determined that the contents stored at the address where Q register is upper and k is lower is not "0".

On the other hand, in the 33rd instruction, "JTQ Z, (k), e" calculates the contents stored in the address with Q register as upper and k as lower, and if it is "0", The process moves to e (address), and if it is not "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address following the instruction). Here, in the same way as above, we calculate "the content of the address indicated by the target register - '0'", and if the zero flag is "1", the data is saved at the address with Q register as upper and k as lower. It is determined that the content is "0".

The 34th instruction differs from the 33rd instruction, which moves the processing to e (address), in that the processing ends if the instruction conditions are met. The rest is the same as the 33rd instruction.
In the 34th instruction, "RTQ NZ, (k)" calculates the contents stored in the address with Q register as upper and k as lower, and if it is not "0", ends the process ( The next instruction starts from the return address stored in the stack area), and if it is "0", the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address consecutive to the instruction) This is an instruction to execute.
Also, "RTQ Z, (k)" calculates the contents stored in the address where the Q register is the upper one and k is the lower one, and if it is "0", it ends the process (the next instruction is an instruction that starts from the return address stored in the stack area), and if it is not 0, executes the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address consecutive to the instruction) It is.
These instructions calculate "the contents of the address indicated by the target register - '0'" and terminate the process depending on the value of the zero flag.

The 35th "RTW" instruction is an instruction that determines whether the content stored in the target register is "0" or not, and terminates the process according to the determination result.
This instruction may be used, for example, to store a timer value in a register and to determine whether or not the timer value has elapsed.
In the 35th instruction, "ss" indicates either the BC register, DE register, or HL register.
For example, the instruction "RTW NZ, (BC)" calculates the contents of the BC register, and if it is not "0", ends the process (the next instruction starts from the return address stored in the stack area). If the instruction is "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address following the instruction).

Here, "calculating the contents of the BC register" is a calculation for determining whether or not the BC register value is "0". In this embodiment, "BC register value - "0"" is calculated, and if the zero flag is not "1", it is determined that the contents of the BC register are not "0". "RTW NZ, (DE)" which calculates the contents of the DE register and "RTW NZ, (HL)" which calculates the contents of the HL register are also similar to the above.

Further, "RTW Z, (BC)" is an instruction that calculates the contents of the BC register and ends the process if it is "0". The contents of the BC register are calculated by calculating "BC register value - "0", and if the zero flag is "1", it is determined that the contents of the BC register are "0". "RTW Z, (DE)" which calculates the contents of the DE register and "RTW Z, (HL)" which calculates the contents of the HL register are also similar to the above.

The 36th "RBITQ" instruction is an instruction that determines whether a predetermined bit of the content stored in the target address is "0" or not, and terminates the process according to the determination result. This instruction does not directly judge (look at) the register value, so it can be used even when there is no free space in the register.
In the 36th instruction, "RBITQ NZ, b, (k)" selects "b" (any one of 0 to 7 bits) from the contents stored at the address where Q register is upper and k is lower. is not "0", the process ends (the next instruction starts from the return address stored in the stack area), and "b" (any of bits 0 to 7) is "0". In some cases, it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, an instruction stored at an address subsequent to the instruction).
For example, an instruction to determine whether or not the D1 bit is "0" is "PBITQ NZ,1,(k)". Here, "0" is subtracted from the target bit value, and if the zero flag is "0", it is determined that the target bit value is not "0".

On the contrary, "RBITQ Z, b, (k)" is "b" (any of 0 to 7 bits) of the contents stored at the address where Q register is the upper part and k is the lower part. If it is "0", it is an instruction to end the process. In this case as well, "0" is subtracted from the target bit value, and if the zero flag is "1", it is determined that the target bit value is "0".

The 37th "BITQ" instruction determines which bit of the content stored at the target address is set (is it "1") or how many bits are set (which bit is "1"). This is a command to find out how many there are.
"BITQ A, (k)" is an instruction to check the position of the content of "A" among the contents stored at the address where Q register is upper and k is lower.
The following two patterns are mainly considered for this command.

<Pattern 1>
As pattern 1, it is checked whether a specified bit in the contents stored at the target address is "1".
For example, if the instruction is "BITQ 3, (k)", it is an instruction to check whether the D3 bit of the contents stored at the address where Q register is upper and k is lower is "1". Become.
<Pattern 2>
Further, as pattern 2, the number of bits that are "1" is searched for among the contents stored at the target address, and the number of bits that are "1" is stored in the A register.

The instructions Nos. 1 to 37 described above are binarized (encoded) and stored in the ROM 54 as instruction codes. As shown in FIG. 167(A), since an instruction consists of instruction information and identification information, when the instruction is coded, it consists of an instruction information code and an identification information code.
Here, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, when an instruction is coded, the code including the most significant bit of the instruction code is defined as the instruction information code.
If the code including the most significant bit of the instruction code is an instruction information code, the main CPU 55 can quickly determine which instruction to execute when reading the instruction code from the most significant bit. becomes.
Examples of the arrangement of instruction codes include "(instruction information code) (identification information code) (instruction information code)" or "(instruction information code) (identification information code)".

However, the present invention is not limited to the above, and when an instruction is coded, the least significant bit of the instruction code may be determined to include the instruction information code.
In this case, the instruction code arrangement may be, for example, "(identification information code) (instruction information code)" or "(instruction information code) (identification information code) (instruction information code)". In this case, when reading the instruction code, by first reading the code that includes the least significant bit, the main CPU 55 can quickly determine which instruction should be executed for that instruction code. Become.

Although the twenty-fourth embodiment has been described above, the twenty-fourth embodiment is not limited to the above content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible for the twenty-fourth embodiment.
(1) Although the initial value of the Q register is set to "F0 (H)", it is not limited to this, and varies depending on the upper address value of the work area in the area used by the RWM 53. For example, when the upper address of the work area in the used area of the RWM 53 is set to "E1(H)", the initial value of the Q register becomes "E1(H)".
(2) The bits corresponding to the carry flag (C) and zero flag (Z) in the F register shown in FIG. 166(B) are merely examples, and the bits are not limited thereto. For example, the D3 bit may be a carry flag (C) and the D4 bit may be a zero flag (Z).
(3) In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the instructions are not limited to those illustrated in FIGS. 168 to 171, and many more instructions are provided for executing the program of the slot machine 10.
Further, the commands illustrated in FIGS. 168 to 171 are not limited to the illustrated descriptions.
(4) In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the slot machine 10 (FIG. 1) is used as an example of the gaming machine, but it can also be implemented with a pachinko gaming machine 500 (FIG. 99).

<25th embodiment>
Next, a twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The twenty-fifth embodiment is, first, an invention regarding a method for determining a winning combination (symbol combination that stops on an active line). Second, the invention relates to a method of determining the number of payouts when winning a small winning combination.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the basic configuration of the slot machine 10 is the same as that of the twenty-third embodiment. Therefore, the twenty-fifth embodiment includes FIGS. 114 to 163.
Note that in this specification (including all embodiments) and the claims, "when the reels 31 or symbols are stopped" means that when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel is operated to stop, the stop switch 42 is stopped. When the stop operation of the symbol is detected (when the level data or rising data is turned on), when the stop position of the symbol is determined based on the stop operation of the stop switch 42, after the stop position of the symbol is determined. When the symbols (reels 31) have not yet stopped (when they are about to stop, for example when decelerating), the output state to the motor 32 is set to the excitation state (for example, the 4-phase excitation state (fourth phase excitation state) for stopping the reels 31). ), the same applies in this paragraph below), when the excitation state for stopping the reels 31 is finished, when the reels 31 are actually stopped, or when the symbols are stopped and displayed ( It is assumed that the meaning (any meaning) includes everything after the excitation state for stopping the reel 31 has ended (when no excitation output is being performed to the motor 32).
Therefore, when the reels 31 or the symbols are referred to as "when they are stopped," it does not necessarily mean that the reels 31 or the symbols are actually stopped.

Also, although this partially overlaps with what was explained at the beginning of the first embodiment, to explain it again, in all of this specification and claims, "payout" refers to actually putting medals into a hopper. This includes not only paying out from 35 but also adding credits. Furthermore, if the gaming machine is a managed gaming machine that does not use medals (sometimes referred to as an enclosed gaming machine, a medalless gaming machine, or an ECO gaming machine; the same applies hereinafter), electronic gaming media must be provided. Also included.
Therefore, in this specification (including all embodiments) and claims, "disbursement" can also be referred to as "granting." Therefore, for example, the "payout number table" can also be referred to as the "grant number table."

173 to 175 are diagrams showing the contents of the RWM 53 in the twenty-fifth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 173 to 175 include some of the contents already explained in the other embodiments described above.
In FIGS. 173 to 175, the numerical value written in parentheses below the address indicates the number of bytes of the storage area of the address (same as in FIGS. 133 to 138).
In FIG. 173, the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) at address "F00C(H)" is a storage area for flags for determining whether or not the accessory is activated, and the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) at address "F00C(H)" is a storage area for flags for determining whether or not the accessory is activated. This corresponds to the status flag.
In the 25th embodiment, the D3 bit corresponds to 1BB and the D4 bit corresponds to RB (RBA to RBP). Similar to the eleventh embodiment, the operating state flag is updated in the game start setting process (step S272 in FIG. 139). It is also cleared in the game end check process (not shown in FIG. 148).

The number of games played (_CT_BONUS_PLAY) when the RB is activated at the address "F00F(H)" and the number of prizes won when the RB is activated (_CT_BONUS_WIN) at the address "F010(H)" are shown in FIG. 133 (25th embodiment), respectively. It has the same storage area as the original. In the 25th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 202, which will be described later, the method of updating the number of winnings during RB operation is different from other embodiments.

The stop reception information data (_PT_STOP_STS) at the address “F01E(H)” is a storage area that stores whether or not the stop switch 42 can accept the stop switch 42.
First (left) to third (right) stop switches 42 are assigned to bits D0 to D2 of the stop acceptance information data, respectively. The value is "0" before the reel 31 starts rotating and from the start of the reel 31 rotation until the speed becomes constant and the stop switch 42 can be operated. When the stop switch 42 can be operated, the value is "1". ”.
Note that "until the stop switch 42 can be operated" means that the index sensor corresponding to the reel 31 is detected and the symbol number is stored (until any reel 31 that does not detect an index) (even if there is another reel 31 whose index has been detected, the other reel 31 may be stopped), or the index sensor corresponding to all reels 31 is detected and the symbol number is stored. Examples include until the end.
Particularly in this embodiment, after storing the minimum gaming time in the RWM 53 in step S767 in FIG. 140 (23rd embodiment), "00000111 (B)" is set as the initial value in the stop reception information data. For example, when the first (left) stop switch 42 is operated, the bit corresponding to the first stop switch 42 in the stop reception information data becomes "0" and is updated to "00000110 (B)".
This stop acceptance information data may be used to mask bits other than bits D0 to D2 of input port rise data A (FIG. 133).

The payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at address "F023(H)" and the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) at address "F024(H)" are respectively the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) shown in FIG. 35 (11th embodiment). This is the same storage area as the payout number data buffer (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) and payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL).
To explain again, when any of the minor winning combinations wins and the number of coins to be paid out is determined, the number of coins to be paid out (same value) is stored in the number of coins to be paid out data and the number of coins to be paid out data buffer, respectively. The payout number data is subtracted by "1" each time one medal is paid out (including addition of credits), and becomes "0" when the payout process is completed. On the other hand, the payout number data buffer is not subtracted even if the payout process is executed, and the initial value is maintained even after the payout process. The payout number data buffer is updated (overwritten) at the end of the next game. The payout number is updated using the value of this payout number data buffer, and the above-mentioned instruction included accessory ratio (cumulative), continuous accessory ratio (6000 games), accessory ratio (6000 games), continuous accessory ratio (cumulative total), accessory ratio (cumulative total) can be calculated.

The reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at the address "F0AD(H)" is a storage area of a flag for determining whether or not the stop of the reel 31 has been accepted. When the reel stop reception has not been completed, the value is "1", and when the reel stop reception has been completed, the value is "0". Therefore, when the stoppage of any reel 31 is not accepted while the reels 31 are rotating, the value is "00000111(B)", and for example, when the stoppage of the first (left) reel 31 is received, the value is "00000110(B)". becomes.

The stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) at the address "F0AF(H)" is a storage area that stores the reel number during control or when a stop is accepted. It is "0" when the reel 31 is not being controlled or when stopping is not accepted, for example, when the third stop switch 42 is operated and the stopping of the third reel 31 is accepted, or when the stopping of the third reel 31 is being controlled. becomes "00000011(B)" (3(D)).

The control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) at address "F0B4(H)" is a storage area that stores the symbol number stopped at the reference position. Here, the reference position in the twenty-fifth embodiment is "lower stage". Furthermore, the line from "lower left row" to "lower middle row" to "lower right row" is referred to as a "reference line" in the twenty-fifth embodiment.
On the other hand, in FIGS. 135 to 137, the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) indicates the symbol number of the symbol stopped in the middle row.
Therefore,
"Control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) = "#th reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC)" - "1"
The relationship is as follows.
Specifically, when the first (left) reel 31 is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 115(A), the first reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL1_STPPIC) is "13(D)( Red 7)", and the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) becomes "12 (D) (Bell B)".

In Figures 174 and 175, the stop symbol data (1st group to 9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) at addresses "F0B7 (H)" to "F0BF (H)" determine the symbol combination that stops on the active line. This is a storage area for storing data (stop symbol data) for
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 121, as a role,
1BB
RB (RBA~RBP)
Replay (Replay 01 to Replay 10)
Small role (small role 01 to small role 34)
is provided.
The symbol group related to the symbol combination of the winning combination is determined as follows.
Symbol group 1: RBA to RBH activation symbols Symbol group 2: RBI to RBP activation symbols Symbol group 3: 1BB activation symbols, and Replay 01 to Replay 07 activation symbols Symbol group 4: Replay 08 to Replay 10 activation symbols Symbol group 5: Small Win 01 - Small win 08 working symbols Symbol group 6: Small win 09 - Small win 16 working symbols Symbol group 7: Small win 17 - Small win 24 working symbols Symbol group 8: Small win 25 - Small win 32 working symbols Symbol group 9 : Small winning combination 33 and small winning combination 34 working symbols In addition, in FIGS. 174 and 175, it is written as "working symbol", but "working symbol" has the same meaning as "symbol combination". Hereinafter, these will be referred to as "symbol combinations" or "operating symbols" as necessary. Further, a symbol combination determined to be stopped or a symbol combination that is actually stopped may be referred to as a "stopped symbol combination."

The stop symbol data (first group) and the stop symbol data (second group) correspond to RBA to RBP.
For example, when all the reels 31 are stopped, when the stopped symbol data (first group) is "00000000 (B)", it means that the symbol combinations RBA to RBH are not stopped on the active line. On the other hand, when all the reels 31 are stopped, when the stopped symbol data (first group) is "00000010 (B)", it means that the RBB symbol combination is stopped on the active line.
Further, in the stop symbol data (third group), the D0 bit corresponds to 1BB, and the D1 to D7 bits correspond to Replay 01 to Replay 07, respectively.

Furthermore, in the stop symbol data (fourth group), bits D0 to D2 correspond to replays 08 to 10, respectively. Bits D4 to D7 are unused.
Further, bits corresponding to minor winning combinations 01 to 34 are assigned to each bit of the stopping symbol data (fifth group) to stopping symbol data (ninth group). Bits D2 to D7 of the stop symbol data (ninth group) are unused.
Then, the non-payout roles (1BB, RB, and Replay) are assigned to the stopped symbol data (first group) to the stopped symbol data (fourth group), and the stopped symbol data (fifth group) to the stopped symbol data (fourth group) are assigned. 9), a small role with a payout is assigned.
In this way, by dividing the storage area of the stopped symbol data, when any symbol combination of a winning combination that has a payout stops on the active line, it is possible to simplify the determination of the number of coins to be paid out. It is possible to simplify the counting of the number of small winnings when the object (RB) is in operation (details will be described later).
In addition, in the stop symbol data (fifth group) to stop symbol data (ninth group) that have payouts, the D0 to D7 bits (minor role 01 to minor role 08) of the stop symbol data (fifth group) and the stop symbol The D0 to D3 bits (minor win 09 to minor win 12) of the data (sixth group) correspond to a payout of 15 pieces.
Furthermore, the D4 to D7 bits (minor role 13 to minor role 16) of the stop symbol data (6th group) and the D0 to D7 bits (minor role 17 to minor role 24) of the stop symbol data (7th group) are , corresponds to a payout of 3 pieces.
Furthermore, the D0 to D7 bits (minor role 25 to minor role 32) of the stopped symbol data (8th group) and the D0 to D1 bits (minor role 33 to minor role 34) of the stopped symbol data (9th group) are as follows: This corresponds to paying out one coin.

In the 25th embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated, a winning lottery process is performed (step S761 in FIG. 140), and based on the winning number, the accessory condition device number is saved and the winning and replay condition device number After saving, set the initial value to the stop pattern data (_WK_STOP_PIC). Here, the bit corresponding to all operating symbols of the stop symbol data (first group) to stop symbol data (ninth group) is set to "1".
in particular,
Stop symbol data (1st group): 11111111 (B)
Stop symbol data (2nd group): 11111111 (B)
Stop symbol data (3rd group): 11111111 (B)
Stop symbol data (4th group): 00000111 (B)
Stop symbol data (5th group): 11111111 (B)
Stop symbol data (6th group): 11111111 (B)
Stop symbol data (7th group): 11111111 (B)
Stop symbol data (8th group): 11111111 (B)
Stop symbol data (9th group): 00000011 (B)
Set to .

Then, after the stop position of the reel 31 is determined (this may be after the reel 31 actually stops), the bit corresponding to the winning that has no longer a possibility of stopping on the active line is updated to "0". . For example, when the left reel 31 stops and the symbol that stops on the active line is "Replay", as shown in FIG. 116, there is a possibility that all RB (RBA to RBP) symbol combinations will stop on the active line. It disappears. In this case, when the left reel 31 stops and the symbol that stops on the active line is "Replay",
Stop symbol data (1st group): 00000000 (B)
Stop symbol data (2nd group): 00000000 (B)
will be updated to.

Also, for example, when the middle reel 31 stops and the symbol that stops on the active line is "Red 7", the symbol combinations RBA to RBH and RBM to RBP of RB are valid, as shown in FIG. Eliminates the possibility of stopping in the line. On the other hand, among RB, symbol combinations RBI to RBL have the possibility of stopping on the active line. Therefore, when the middle reel 31 stops in this case,
Stop symbol data (1st group): 00000000 (B)
Stop symbol data (2nd group): 00001111 (B)
will be updated to.

In this way, after the stop position of each reel 31 is determined, the stop symbol data (first group) to stop symbol data (ninth group) are updated, and after the stop position of all reels 31 is determined, the stop symbol data (first group) to stop symbol data (ninth group) are updated. When all of the symbol data (first group) to stop symbol data (ninth group) are "00000000 (B)", the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination in the game does not stop on the active line (the winning combination is It is determined that the applicant has not won a prize.
On the other hand, when any bit of the stop symbol data (first group) to stop symbol data (ninth group) is "1", the symbol combination of the combination corresponding to the bit stops on the active line. It is determined that
Furthermore, when any bit of the data from the stop symbol data (first group) to stop symbol data (fourth group) is "1", it is determined that there is no medal payout in the game.
On the other hand, if any bit of the data from the stopped symbol data (fifth group) to the stopped symbol data (ninth group) is "1", it is determined that medals will be paid out in the game. .

Here, in this embodiment,
Small role 01 - Small role 12: Payout of 15 pieces Small role 13 - Small role 24: Payout of 3 pieces Small role 25 - Small role 34: Payout of 1 piece.
Therefore, when any bit of the stop symbol data (fifth group) or any of the D0 to D3 bits of the stop symbol data (sixth group) is "1", it is determined that 15 pieces are paid out. .
Also, if either the D4 to D7 bits of the stopped symbol data (6th group) or the D0 to D7 bits of the stopped symbol data (7th group) are "1", it is determined that 3 pieces are paid out. .
Furthermore, when either the D0 to D7 bits of the stopped symbol data (8th group) or the D0 to D1 bits of the stopped symbol data (9th group) are "1", it is determined that one piece is paid out. Ru.

176 to 179 are diagrams showing definition data in the twenty-fifth embodiment. In the definition data, "EQU" is an assembler instruction that defines a symbol as having an integer value, and means "equal."
FIG. 176 shows reel symbol definitions and symbol definitions.
The reel symbol definition shows the relationship between symbols and numerical values for the 10 types of symbols in the 25th embodiment. For example, the "Blue BAR" symbol is "@ZGR_01" when represented by a symbol, and "0" when represented by a numerical value.
In addition, the symbol definition shows the relationship between each symbol and numerical value of symbol group 1 to symbol group 9. For example, "@_PIC1" is a symbol indicating the first group of symbols. As described above, for example, the first symbol group consists of RBA to RBH, and each bit (D0 to D7) corresponds to RBA to RBH, respectively. For example, the D0 bit of the numerical value of the first group of symbols is a bit corresponding to RBA.

FIGS. 177 to 179 show definition data of each operating symbol among symbol group 1 to symbol group 9. Each bit of each symbol group matches the bit corresponding to each operating symbol of the stop symbol data (first group) to stop symbol data (ninth group).
As mentioned above, for example, the D0 bit of the stop symbol data (first group) is the bit corresponding to the RBA operating symbol, but the numerical value of the symbol "@SRB_A" indicating the RBA operating symbol among the first symbol group is It is defined as "00000001(B)" where the D0 bit is "1". Similarly, the numerical value corresponding to the RBB operating symbol "@SRB_B" is set to "00000010 (B)" where the D1 bit is "1", and the numerical value corresponding to the RBH operating symbol "@SRB_H" is , the D7 bit is set to "1", which is "10000000 (B)".

In addition, in the definition data, "@SRB" is a symbol indicating the shift RB (SRB) operating symbol, and substantially refers to the RBA operating symbol to RBP operating symbol.
Further, for example, "@SRB_A_H" refers to the RBA operation symbol to the RBH operation symbol. The numerical value is "11111111 (B)", which is equivalent to the case where all the bits of the stop symbol data (first group) are "1".
Furthermore, "@1BB" is a symbol indicating the 1BB activation symbol.
Furthermore, "@REP" is a symbol indicating a replay activation symbol. For example, "@REP_01" is a symbol indicating the replay 01 activation symbol.
Further, in FIG. 178, “@WIN” is a symbol indicating a small winning combination symbol. For example, "@WIN_01" is a symbol indicating the small winning combination 01 activation symbol.
As described above, the symbols and numerical values of each operating symbol of each symbol group are defined.

FIG. 180 is a diagram showing an overview of various tables used in the twenty-fifth embodiment.
Note that all the tables described below are stored at predetermined addresses in the ROM 54.
The reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH) shown in FIG. 180(A) specifies the start address (offset value) of the target table for each reel 31 when searching for a stop symbol on each reel 31. This is a table for
For example, when searching for a stopped symbol on the first reel 31, the value (offset value) stored at the address "1200 (H)" is referred to. Since the offset value is "3 (H)", the offset value "3 (H)" is added to the address "1200 (H)" indicating the first reel 31 of the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH). The address “1203(H)” indicated by the value is specified as the first address of the first reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1). As shown in FIG. 180(B), the first reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) is stored at addresses "1203(H)" to "120C(H)" (details will be described later), and the first address is The address is "1203(H)".

Further, when searching for a stopped symbol on the second reel 31, the value (offset value) stored at the address "1201(H)" is referred to. Since the offset value is "39 (H)", the offset value "39 (H)" is added to the address "1201 (H)" indicating the second reel 31 of the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH). The address “123A(H)” indicated by the value is specified as the start address of the second reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2) (FIG. 180(B)).
Similarly, when searching for a stopped symbol on the third reel 31, the value (offset value) stored at address "1203(H)" is referred to. Since the offset value is "8D (H)", the offset value "8D (H)" is added to the address "1202 (H)" indicating the third reel 31 of the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH). The address “128F(H)” indicated by the value is specified as the start address of the third reel symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_3) (FIG. 180(B)).

As described above, the three addresses of the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH) store offset values for specifying the leading addresses of the symbol array tables of the first to third reels 31, respectively.
Then, a first reel symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_1) corresponding to the first reel 31, a second reel symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_2) corresponding to the second reel 31, and a third reel symbol array table corresponding to the third reel 31. (TBL_PICARG_3) is provided.
These # reel symbol arrangement tables (TBL_PICARG_#) are tables used when specifying symbols that stop on active lines from symbol numbers that stop at reference positions (details will be described later).

Further, as shown in FIG. 180(B), a # reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_#) is provided at an address following the # reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_#).
Each data of the #th reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_#) is composed of reel symbol data information, reel symbol data information + table offset, and symbol data. Details of these data will be described later.

FIG. 181 is a diagram showing the first reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1). FIG. 181 also shows the reel symbol definition shown in FIG. 176.
Here, the data stored in each address of the # reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_#) is referred to as "symbol data." This "design data" is data that allows identification of the type of design.
The first reel symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_1), the second reel symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_2) and the third reel symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_3), which will be described later, are all tables consisting of "10" addresses, and "10" Symbols 0 to 19 (20 symbols) are specified by address. In other words, two pieces of symbol data are specified with one address.

In FIG. 181, "*16" indicates the upper 4 bits. For example, in the address "1203 (H)", the upper 4 bits are "@ZGR_08" (2nd symbol, "Cherry") and the lower 4 bits are "@ZGR_02" (3rd symbol, "Black BAR"). Show that something is true.
As shown in FIG. 114, on the left reel 31, the second symbol is "Cherry" and the third symbol is "Black BAR".
According to the definition data, "@ZGR_08" is "7(H)", that is, "0111(B)". Further, "@ZGR_02" is "1(H)", that is, "0001(B)".
Therefore, in the address "1203(H)", the upper 4 bits are "0111(B)" and the lower 4 bits are "0001(B)", so in reality, "0111/0001(B)" is (The "/" indicates the boundary between the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits.)

Here, for example, when the left (first) reel 31 stops, if the symbol that stops at the reference position (lower row) is the number 1 "Watermelon", the symbol that stops on the active line is the number 3 "Black BAR". (See FIGS. 114 and 115).
In this case, when the number 1 "Watermelon" stops at the reference position (lower row), the value corresponding to the symbol that stops on the active line is determined by the program (flowchart) described later at the address "1203 (H)". It is configured to be specified as the value of the lower 4 bits (“@ZGR_02”, that is, “black BAR”).
For example, when the number 2 "cherry" stops at the reference position (lower row), the value corresponding to the symbol that stops on the active line is the value of the upper 4 bits of the address "1204 (H)", that is, "@ ZGR_05'' (Bell A).

As shown in FIG. 181, in this embodiment, 20 symbol data are stored in 10 addresses. That is, in one address, the upper 4 bits specify 1 symbol data, and the lower 4 bits specify 1 symbol data. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the ROM 54 that stores symbol data. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 181, there are 10 types of symbols (@ZGR_01 to @ZGR_10), which is less than 16 types, so "0000(B)" to "1010(B)" It can be expressed as a range. Therefore, since it is possible to store the information in the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits, the capacity of the ROM 54 can be reduced.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and 20 symbol data may be stored in 20 addresses. In this case, one symbol data is stored per one address. This example is shown in FIG. 228 (Example 1 of the 27th embodiment), which will be described later.

182 to 184 are diagrams showing the first reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1). In FIGS. 182 to 184, as well as FIGS. 186 to 188 and FIGS. 190 to 192, which will be described later, ";//" means that there is no address that stores the value. For example, the address "120F(H)" is an address that stores the value corresponding to "Blue BAR" of the first group of symbols, but it also corresponds to "Black BAR" to "Special Figure Bottom" of the first group of symbols. There is no address that stores a value, and the next address "1210 (H)" is an address that stores the value of the reel symbol data information of the second group of symbols. In other words, since the drawings are for ease of explanation, not all data shown in the drawings is stored in the ROM 54 (data written with ";//" and definitions are not stored in the ROM 54). (The data is not stored in ROM 54).

Note that an address is also provided for the content of ";//", and when data is stored, "0" is stored. In that case, reel symbol data information and table offset data (for example, "120D(H)" and "120E(H)"), which will be described later, become unnecessary. Specifically, symbol combination data corresponding to each symbol (for specifying the symbol combination having each symbol) is stored in a predetermined order. For example, in the first group of symbols, if the symbol combination data includes "Blue BAR" on the left reel 31, the address is "XXX0(H)", and if the symbol combination data includes "Black BAR" on the left reel 31, the address is "XXX1". (H)", ..., if the symbol combination data includes "Top of special pattern" on the left reel 31, the address is "XXX8(H)", and if the symbol combination data includes "Top of special pattern" on the left reel 31, For example, symbol combination data can be stored for each symbol group at address intervals corresponding to the number of symbols (10 addresses in this example), such as address "XXX9(H)". However, in this example, even if the data is "0", it will be stored in the ROM 54, so although the capacity of the ROM 54 will increase, it will be easier to re-verify the data stored in the ROM 54. become.

Here, in each address of the # reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_#), for example, taking symbol group 1 in the first reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1) in FIG. 182, the first address "120D (H) ” and the data stored in the D7 and D6 bits of “120E(H)” are referred to as “reel symbol data information”.
Furthermore, the data stored in bits D5 to D0 of address "120E(H)" is referred to as "table offset".
Furthermore, the data stored at address "120F(H)" is referred to as "symbol combination data."

First, bits D0 to D7 of the address "120D(H)" and bits D6 and D7 of the next address "120E(H)" correspond to reel symbol data information and correspond to 10 types of symbols.
in particular,
(1) Reel symbol data information of address “120D (H)” D7: Blue BAR
D6: Black BAR
D5: Red 7
D4: Replay D3: Bell A
D2: Bell B
D1: Watermelon D0: Cherry (2) Reel symbol data information of address "120E (H)" D7: Special map top D6: Special map bottom.

This means that the symbol data corresponding to the bit "1" among the reel symbol data information is stored at the address following the addresses "120D(H)" and "120E(H)". For example, among the reel symbol data information stored in addresses "120D(H)" and "120E(H)", only the D7 bit of the reel symbol data information stored in address "120D(H)" is "1". ”. Therefore, the symbol combination data ("Blue BAR" data) regarding the D7 bit of the reel symbol data information of the address "120D(H)" is stored at the next address "120F(H)".

Furthermore, the lower 6 bits (D0 to D5) of the data at address "120E(H)" are the table offset value.
For example, the table offset value stored at address "120E(H)" is "3(H)". In this embodiment, the reel symbol data information and the table offset value are expressed separately in order to make it easier to understand the reel symbol data information and the table offset value. For example, in the data of the address "120E(H)", the reel symbol data information is "00000000(B)" and the table offset value is "03(H)". The address "120E(H)" actually stores data obtained by ORing the reel symbol data information and the table offset value, that is, "00000011(H)".

The above reel symbol data information and reel symbol data information + table offset are the same for symbol groups 2 to 9 groups. Furthermore, the same applies to each of symbol group 1 to symbol group 9 of the second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2) (Figures 186 to 188) and the third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3) (Figures 190 to 192). .

Here, symbol group 1 of the first reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1) shown in FIG. 182 will be explained in more detail.
The D0 to D7 bits of the first address "120D(H)" and the D6 and D7 bits of the next address (120E(H)) indicate which symbols on the first (left) reel 31 are the symbol combinations of symbol group 1. Indicates whether the pattern is part of a .
The symbol combinations of symbol group 1 are:
RBA: "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Black BAR"
RBB: "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Red 7"
RBC: "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Watermelon"
RBD: "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Special map top"
RBE: "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Black BAR"
RBF: "Blue BAR" - "Black BAR" - "Red 7"
RBG: "Blue BAR" - "Black BAR" - "Watermelon"
RBH: "Blue BAR" - "Black BAR" - "Tokuzu Top"
(See FIG. 116).

Therefore, in the symbol combinations of symbol group 1, all the symbols on the first (left) reel 31 are "blue BAR".
From this, the D7 bit of address "120D(H)" corresponding to "Blue BAR" is "1", and the other D6 to D0 bits are "0".
Similarly, bits D7 and D6 of address "120E(H)" are "0".
Further, the table offset value indicated by the lower 6 bits of the address "120E(H)" indicates the numerical value up to the address of the next symbol group (in this example, symbol group 2). The table offset value stored at the address "120E(H)" is "3(H)", but the address "1211(H)" which is the addition of "3(H)" to the address "120E(H)" is , this is the address where the table offset of the second group of symbols is stored.
Similarly, the address "1211(H)" stores an offset value "3(H)" up to the address where the table offset of the third group of symbols is stored. That is, the address "1211 (H)" + "3 (H)" = "1214 (H)" (address storing the table offset of the 3rd group of symbols).
Furthermore, in the same way, the offset value "8 (H)" to the address storing the table offset of the 4th symbol group is stored in the address "1214 (H)". That is, the address "1214 (H)" + "8 (H)" = "121C (H)" (address storing the table offset of the 4th symbol group) (the explanation will be omitted hereafter).

In this way, the first two addresses are
First address: Reel symbol data information for "Blue BAR" to "Cherry" Next address: Reel symbol data information for "Tokuzu Top" and "Tokuzu Bottom" and the table offset of the next symbol group are stored. The offset value to the address is memorized.
In this way, the "next address" stores two completely different data: the reel symbol data information and the offset value to the address where the table offset of the next symbol group is stored. Control processing is not hindered because the corresponding bits of the data are different. If such a storage method is adopted, the capacity of the ROM 54 can be reduced.
If the number of symbols is 8 or less, the reel symbol data information is stored in the "first address" and the offset value to the address where the table offset of the next symbol group is stored is stored in the "next address". You may. Also, if the number of symbols is 9 or more, the reel symbol data information is stored at the "first address", the reel symbol data information is also stored at the "next address", and the next address is stored at the "next address". It is possible to adopt various patterns, such as storing the offset value up to the address where the table offset of the symbol group is stored (in this case, there are three addresses in total).

Furthermore, the next address "120F (H)" stores symbol combination data for specifying what symbol combination has the "Blue BAR" symbol on the first (left) reel 31. There is.
As described above, in the eight symbol combinations of symbol group 1, the symbols on the first (left) reel 31 are all "blue BAR". Therefore, "@SRB_A_H" (RBA to RBH) indicating the type of winning in which the first (left) reel 31 is "Blue BAR" is stored in the address "120F(H)".
In addition, as shown in FIG. 177, "@SRB_A_H" means the operating symbols related to all of the symbol group 1, and the value corresponding to this symbol is "11111111 (B)". Therefore, in reality, "11111111(B)" is stored in address "120F(H)".

Of the first reel symbol combination table, the second group of symbols is also defined in the same way as the first group of symbols.
Next, the third group of symbols in the first reel symbol combination table will be explained.
First, bits D7 to D0 of address “1213(H)” and bits D7 and D6 of address “1214(H)” are
(1) Reel symbol data information of address “1213 (H)” D7: “1” (Blue BAR)
D6: "1" (black BAR)
D5: "0" (red 7)
D4: "1" (replay)
D3: "1" (Bell A)
D2: "0" (Bell B)
D1: "1" (watermelon)
D0: “0” (cherry)
(2) Reel symbol data information of address “1214 (H)” D7: “1” (on special map)
D6: "0" (lower special map)
It becomes.
Therefore, among the three symbol groups (1BB or the symbol combinations of Replay 01 to Replay 07), the symbols on the first (left) reel 31 are "Blue BAR,""BlackBAR,""Replay," and "Bell A." , "watermelon", or "on the special map".

in fact,
1BB: "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR"
Replay 01: "Replay" - "Blue BAR/Black BAR/Red 7/Special Map Top" - "Bell A"
Replay 02: "Replay" - "Replay" - "Replay"
Replay 03: "Bell A" - "Red 7/Cherry" - "Replay/Bell B"
Replay 04: "Black BAR" - "Red 7/Cherry" - "Replay/Bell B"
Replay 05: “Special map top” – “Replay” – “Bell A”
Replay 06: "Watermelon" - "Replay/Watermelon" - "Red 7/Watermelon/Special Map Top/Black BAR"
Replay 07: "Replay" - "Replay" - "Bell A"
(See FIGS. 116 and 117).

Of the reel symbol data information, symbol combination data corresponding to the bit (symbol) that is "1" is stored at addresses after address "1215 (H)".
in particular,
(1) Reel symbol data information of address “1213 (H)” D7: “1” (Blue BAR) → Address “1215 (H)”
D6: "1" (black BAR) → Address "1216 (H)"
D5: "0" (red 7) → No address (no symbol combination data)
D4: "1" (Replay) → Address "1217 (H)"
D3: "1" (Bell A) → Address "1218 (H)"
D2: "0" (Bell B) → No address (No symbol combination data)
D1: "1" (watermelon) → address "1219 (H)"
D0: "0" (cherry) → No address (no symbol combination data)
(2) Reel symbol data information of address “1214 (H)” D7: “1” (on special map) → address “121A (H)”
D6: "0" (lower special pattern) → No address (no pattern combination data)
It becomes.

First, symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Blue BAR" is stored at address "1215(H)". In the 3rd symbol group, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Blue BAR" is 1BB as described above, so "@1BB" is stored in the address "1215 (H)". has been done. “@1BB” is “00000001(B)” as shown in FIG. 177, and the value is stored at address “1215(H)”.
Next, symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "black BAR" is stored at address "1216 (H)". In the symbol group 3, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Black BAR" is Replay 04 as described above, so "@REP_04" is in the address "1216 (H)". remembered. “@REP_04” is “00010000(B)” as shown in FIG. 177, and the value is stored at address “1216(H)”.

In addition, since there is no symbol combination in the symbol group 3 in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Red 7", there is no symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Red 7". There is no address where symbol combination data for identification is stored.
At the next address "1217(H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "Replay" is stored. In the symbol group 3, the symbol combinations in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Replay" are Replay 01, Replay 02, and Replay 07 as described above, so the address "1217 (H)" is , "@REP_01 OR @REP_02 OR @REP_07" are stored. “@REP_01 OR @REP_02 OR @REP_07” is “00000010(B)” OR “00000100(B)” OR “10000000(B)” as shown in Figure 177, so the address is “1217(H)” ``10000110(B)'' is stored in .

At the next address "1218 (H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Bell A" is stored. In the symbol group 3, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Bell A" is Replay 03 as described above, so "@REP_03" is in the address "1218 (H)". remembered. “@REP_03” is “00001000(B)” as shown in FIG. 177, and the value is stored at address “1218(H)”.
In addition, since there is no symbol combination in the symbol group 3 in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Bell B", there is no symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Bell B". There is no address where symbol combination data for identification is stored.

At the next address "1219(H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "Watermelon" is stored. In the 3rd symbol group, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Watermelon" is Replay 06 as described above, so "@REP_06" is stored in the address "1219 (H)". has been done. As shown in FIG. 177, "@REP_06" is "01000000 (B)", so that value is stored in the address "1219 (H)".

Furthermore, since there is no symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "cherry" in the third symbol group, a symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "cherry" is specified. There is no address where symbol combination data for is stored.
At the next address "121A(H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "Top" is stored. In the symbol group 3, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Top" is Replay 05 as described above, so the address "121A (H)" is "@REP_05". is memorized. “@REP_05” is “00100000(B)” as shown in FIG. 177, and the value is stored at address “121A(H)”.

In addition, since there is no symbol combination in the 3rd symbol group where the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Special Figure Bottom", there is no symbol combination where the symbol on the first (left) reel 31 is "Cherry". There is no address where symbol combination data for identification is stored.
As described above, reel symbol data information, reel symbol data information + table offset, and symbol combination data are stored for other symbol groups as well.
The first reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1) is provided with addresses "120D(H)" to "1239(H)" (FIGS. 180, 182 to 184).

FIG. 185 is a diagram showing the second reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2), and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 181 of the first reel 31. FIG. 185 also shows the reel symbol definition shown in FIG. 176.
For example, when the second (middle) reel 31 stops, if the symbol that stops at the reference position (lower row) is the number 1 "Cherry", the symbol that stops on the active line is the number 2 "Watermelon" (Fig. 114 and FIG. 115).
In this case, when the number 1 "cherry" stops at the reference position (lower row), the value corresponding to the symbol that stops on the active line is determined by the program (flowchart) described later at the address "123A (H)". It is configured to be specified as the value of the lower 4 bits. The lower 4 bits of the address "123A(H)" correspond to "@ZGR_07", that is, "watermelon" (see FIG. 114).
Also, when the number 2 "Watermelon" stops at the reference position (lower row), the value corresponding to the symbol that stops on the active line is identified as the value of the upper 4 bits of the address "123B (H)". It is configured to The upper 4 bits of address "123B(H)" correspond to "@ZGR_02", that is, "black BAR".

186 to 188 are diagrams showing the second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2), and are diagrams corresponding to FIGS. 182 to 184 of the first reel 31.
The second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2) will be explained using the symbol group 4 in FIG. 187 as an example.
The D0 to D7 bits of the first address "1255 (H)" and the D6 and D7 bits of the next address "1256 (H)" indicate which symbols on the second (middle) reel 31 are the symbol combinations of the four symbol groups. Indicates whether the pattern is part of a .
The symbol combinations of the 4 symbol groups are:
Replay 08: "Special map top" - "Replay" - "Replay"
Replay 09: “Bell A” – “Red 7/Cherry” – “Blue BAR/Special Map Bottom”
Replay 10: “Replay” – “Red 7/Cherry” – “Bell B”
(See Figure 117).

Therefore, in the symbol combinations of the 4 symbol groups, the symbols on the second (middle) reel 31 are "Replay", "Red 7", or "Cherry".
From this, of the reel symbol data information of address "1255 (H)", the D5 bit corresponding to "Red 7", the D4 bit corresponding to "Replay", and the D0 bit corresponding to "Cherry" are "1". The other bits of the reel symbol data information are "0".
Also, since the address "125B(H)" where the table offset of the symbol group 5 is stored is five places ahead from the address "1256(H)" where the table offset of the symbol group 4 is stored, the address "1256(H)" is 5 places ahead. The table offset value stored in "(H)" is "5(H)".

In the 4th symbol group, there is no symbol combination in which the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "Blue BAR" or "Black BAR", so the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "Blue BAR" or "Black BAR". There is no address where symbol combination data for specifying the symbol combination "Black BAR" is stored.
The first address “1257 (H)” following address “1255 (H)” and address “1256 (H)” specifies a symbol combination in which the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is “Red 7”. The symbol combination data for is stored. In the 4th symbol group, the symbol combinations in which the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "Red 7" are Replay 09 and Replay 10, so the address "1257 (H)" is "@REP_09 OR @REP_10". ' is memorized. As shown in Figure 178, "@REP_09" is "00000010(B)" and "@REP_10" is "00000100(B)", so the address "1257(H)" is "00000110(B)". ' is memorized.

At the next address "1258 (H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol of the second (middle) reel 31 is "Replay" is stored. In the symbol group 4, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "Replay" is Replay 08, so "@REP_08" is stored in the address "1258 (H)". As shown in FIG. 178, since "@REP_08" is "00000001 (B)", that value is stored at address "1258 (H)".
Next, since there is no symbol combination in the symbol group 4 in which the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "Bell A", "Bell B" or "Watermelon", the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is There is no address where symbol combination data for specifying symbol combinations such as "Bell A", "Bell B", or "Watermelon" is stored.

At the next address "1259 (H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol of the second (middle) reel 31 is "cherry" is stored. In the symbol group 4, the symbol combinations in which the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "Cherry" are Replay 09 and Replay 10, so the address "1259 (H)" is "@REP_09 OR @REP_10". is memorized. As shown in Figure 178, "@REP_09" is "00000010(B)" and "@REP_10" is "00000100(B)", so the address "1259(H)" is "00000110(B)". ' is memorized.

Next, in the 4th symbol group, since there is no symbol combination in which the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "on special symbol", the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "on special symbol". There is no address where symbol combination data for specifying symbol combinations is stored.
Furthermore, since there is no "special pattern lower" on the second (middle) reel 31 (see FIG. 114), a symbol combination in which the symbol on the second (middle) reel 31 is "special pattern lower" is specified. There is no address where symbol combination data for is stored.
As described above, the second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2) is composed of addresses "1244(H)" to "128E(H)" (FIG. 180, FIG. 186 to FIG. 188).

FIG. 189 is a diagram showing the third reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3), and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 181 of the first reel 31. FIG. 189 also shows the definition data of the reel symbols shown in FIG. 176.
For example, when the right (third) reel 31 stops, if the symbol that stops at the reference position (lower row) is the number 1 "Replay", the symbol that stops on the active line also becomes the number 1 "Replay" ( (See FIGS. 114 and 115).
In this case, when the number 1 "Replay" stops at the reference position (lower row), the value corresponding to the symbol that stops on the active line is determined by the program (flowchart) described later at the address "128F (H)". It is configured to be specified as the value of the lower 4 bits. The lower 4 bits of address "128F(H)" correspond to "@ZGR_04", that is, "replay" (see FIG. 114).
Also, when the No. 2 "Blue BAR" stops at the reference position (lower row), the value corresponding to the symbol that stops on the active line is determined to be the value of the upper 4 bits of the address "1290 (H)". is configured to be The upper 4 bits of address "1290(H)" correspond to "@ZGR_01", that is, "blue BAR".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 181, FIG. 185, and FIG. 189, in the # reel symbol arrangement table, the symbol numbers specified by the start addresses are different.
Specifically, at the first address "1203(H)" of the first reel symbol arrangement table, symbol data is stored starting from the second symbol. This is because when the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the symbol number of the symbol on the active line on the left reel 31 is number 2.
Further, at the start address "123A(H)" of the second reel symbol arrangement table, symbol data is stored starting from the number 1 symbol. This is because when the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the symbol number of the symbol on the active line on the middle reel 31 is number 1.
Furthermore, at the start address "128F(H)" of the third reel symbol arrangement table, symbol data is stored starting from symbol No. 0. This is because when the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the symbol number of the symbol on the active line on the right reel 31 is number 0.

In this way, by shifting the symbol data stored in the symbol arrangement table (taking into consideration the difference) and storing it as necessary, corrections can be made for each acquired control symbol number (BF_PICTURE). There is no need to add or subtract differences. Therefore, by simple calculation based on the symbol number of the symbol stopped at the reference position (lower row), it becomes possible to obtain the symbol data on the active line, thereby simplifying the program processing and reducing the capacity of the ROM 54. I can do it.
Further, the order of symbol data stored in the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31 is determined according to the reference line and the active line. Note that the reference line (reference position) and effective line can be freely determined. However, the reference line is preferably a horizontal line.
Here, the effective line in this embodiment is "upper left row"-"middle middle row"-"lower right row" as shown in FIG. Further, the reference line is "lower left row" - "lower middle row" - "lower right row". Therefore, in the first reel symbol arrangement table, the difference is "+2", in the second reel symbol arrangement table, the difference is "+1", and in the third reel symbol arrangement table, the difference is "0". In other words, the difference refers to the amount of deviation (number of stages) between the position of the effective line and the reference position.
Therefore, for example, if the active line is "left middle row" - "middle middle row" - "right middle row", the difference between the symbol arrangement tables of each reel 31 will be "+1". In this case, in the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31, symbol data is stored in order starting from the number 1 symbol. Also, for example, when the reference line is the middle line ("middle left" - "middle middle" - "middle right") and the effective line is "middle left" - "middle middle" - "middle right", , the differences in the symbol arrangement tables of each reel 31 are all "0" (there is no difference). In this case, the symbol data of each reel 31 is stored in the symbol arrangement table in order starting from the symbol number 0.
The above also applies to FIG. 228 (Example 1 of the 27th embodiment), which will be described later.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 229 (Example 2 of the 27th Embodiment), which will be described later, in each symbol arrangement table of the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31, the symbol data of symbol number "0" is There is also a method in which the difference data corresponding to each reel 31 is stored in order. When acquiring the symbol data, the symbol data of the symbol on the active line is acquired by adding or subtracting the difference data of the reel 31 to the symbol number of the symbol stopped at the reference position. In this case, even if there is a change in the effective line, it is only necessary to change the difference data, so the number of development steps can be reduced.

In FIG. 229 (Example 2 of the 27th embodiment), the difference data corresponds to the above-mentioned "difference" value. That is, in the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31, the difference data of the left reel 31 is "+2", the difference data of the middle reel 31 is "+1", and the difference data of the right reel 31 is "0".
Therefore, as described above, when the reference line is "lower left" - "lower middle" - "lower right" and the effective line is, for example, "middle left" - "middle middle" - "middle right", The difference data of the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31 is "+1". Also, when the reference line is, for example, the middle line ("left middle row" - "middle middle row" - "right middle row"), and the effective line is, for example, "left middle row" - "middle middle row" - "right middle row" In this case, the difference data of the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31 is "0". In this case, there is no need to provide differential data, and there is no need to add or subtract differential data.

190 to 192 are diagrams showing the third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3), and are diagrams corresponding to FIGS. 182 to 184 of the first reel 31.
The third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3) will be explained using the symbol group 5 in FIG. 191 as an example.
The D0 to D7 bits of the first address "12B5 (H)" and the D6 and D7 bits of the next address "12B6 (H)" indicate which symbols on the third (right) reel 31 are the symbol combinations of the five symbol groups. Indicates whether the pattern is part of a .
The symbol combinations of symbol group 5 are:
Small role 01: "Watermelon" - "Cherry" - "Bell A"
Small role 02: "Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Blue BAR/Special map bottom"
Small role 03: "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell A"
Small role 04: "Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Bell A"
Small role 05: "Bell A" - "Replay" - "Blue BAR/Special map bottom"
Small role 06: "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Blue BAR/Special map bottom"
Small role 07: "Watermelon" - "Cherry" - "Bell B"
Small role 08: "Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Black BAR/Red 7/Watermelon/Special map top"
(See Figure 118).

Therefore, the symbols on the third (right) reel 31 in the symbol combinations of the five symbol groups are "Bell A", "Blue BAR", "Special Figure Bottom", "Bell B", "Black BAR", and "Red 7". , ``Watermelon'' or ``Special Map''.
From this, among the reel symbol data information of address "12B5 (H)", D7 bit corresponding to "Blue BAR", D6 bit corresponding to "Black BAR", D5 bit corresponding to "Red 7", The D3 bit corresponding to "Bell A", the D2 bit corresponding to "Bell B", and the D1 bit corresponding to "Watermelon" are "1".
In addition, among the reel symbol data information of the address "12B6 (H)", the D7 bit corresponding to "special pattern top" and the D6 bit corresponding to "special pattern bottom" are "1".
Furthermore, the address "12C0 (H)" where the table offset of the 6th group of symbols is stored is 10 addresses ahead from the address "12B6 (H)" where the table offset of the 5th symbol group is stored, so the address "12B6 The table offset value stored in "(H)" is "0A(H)".

Since there is no symbol combination in the symbol group 5 in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Replay", it is necessary to specify the symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Replay". There is no address where symbol combination data is stored.
Also, since "cherry" is not provided on the right reel 31 (see FIG. 114), symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "cherry" is stored. There are no addresses provided.
First, the first address "12B7 (H)" following the addresses "12B5 (H)" and "12B6 (H)" specifies a symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Blue BAR". The symbol combination data for this purpose is stored. In the 5th symbol group, the symbol combinations in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Blue BAR" are minor winnings 02, minor winnings 05, and minor winnings 06, so the address "12B7 (H)" is , "@WIN_02 OR @WIN_05 OR @WIN_06" are stored. As shown in Figure 178, "@WIN_02" is "00000010 (B)", "@WIN_05" is "00010000 (B)", and "@WIN_06" is "00100000 (B)", so “00110010(B)” is stored at address “12B7(H)”.

At the next address "12B8(H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is "Black BAR" is stored. In the 5th symbol group, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Black BAR" is a small winning combination of 08, so "@WIN_08" is stored in the address "12B8 (H)". There is. As shown in FIG. 178, since "@WIN_08" is "10000000 (B)", that value is stored in the address "12B8 (H)".
At the next address "12B9(H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is "Red 7" is stored. In the 5th symbol group, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Red 7" is a small winning combination of 08, so the address "12B9 (H)" has "10000000 ( B)" is stored.

The next address "12BA(H)" stores symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Bell A." In the 5th symbol group, the symbol combinations in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Bell A" are minor winnings 01, minor winnings 03, and minor winnings 04, so the address "12BA (H)" is , "@WIN_01 OR @WIN_03 OR @WIN_04" are stored. As shown in Figure 178, "@WIN_01" is "00000001(B)", "@WIN_03" is "00000100(B)", and "@WIN_04" is "00001000(B)". “00001101(B)” is stored at address “12BA(H)”.

At the next address "12BB(H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is "Bell B" is stored. In the 5th symbol group, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Bell B" is the small winning combination 07, so "@WIN_07" is stored in the address "12BB (H)". There is. As shown in FIG. 178, since "@WIN_07" is "01000000(B)", that value is stored in the address "12BB(H)".
The next address "12BC(H)" stores symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Watermelon". In the 5th symbol group, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Watermelon" is a small winning combination of 08, so "@WIN_08" is stored in the address "12BC (H)". . As shown in FIG. 178, since "@WIN_08" is "10000000 (B)", that value is stored in the address "12BC (H)".

The next address "12BD(H)" stores symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Top of special symbol". In the 5th symbol group, the symbol combination in which the symbol on the third (right) reel 31 is "Top of the special symbol" is the small winning combination 08, so the address "12BD(H)" is the same as the address "12BC(H)". ” stores “10000000(B)”.
At the next address "12BE(H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is "Special Figure Lower" is stored. In the 5th symbol group, the symbol combinations in which the symbol on the 3rd (right) reel 31 is "Special symbol bottom" are small winnings 02, 05, and 06, so the address is "12BE (H)". "@WIN_02 OR @WIN_05 OR @WIN_06" is stored. As shown in Figure 178, "@WIN_02" is "00000010 (B)", "@WIN_05" is "00010000 (B)", and "@WIN_06" is "00100000 (B)", so “00110010(B)” is stored at address “12BE(H)”.
As described above, the third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3) is composed of addresses "1299(H)" to "12DE(H)" (FIG. 180, FIG. 190 to FIG. 192).

FIG. 193 is a diagram showing the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL). In the 25th embodiment, after the symbol combination that stops on the active line is determined, in other words, after the stop positions of all reels 31 are determined and the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) are updated, the symbol combination is It is determined whether or not there is a payout corresponding to , using this payout number table.
First, "6" stored at address "1400(H)" means the number of inspections. This means checking whether or not there is a payout is performed up to six times.
These six times are
1st time: Small role 01 to small role 08 (15 pieces) (stop symbol data (5th group) D0 to D7)
2nd time: Small role 09 to small role 12 (15 pieces) (stop symbol data (6th group) D0 to D3)
3rd time: Small role 13 to small role 16 (3 pieces) (D4 to D7 of stop symbol data (6th group))
4th time: Small role 17 to small role 24 (3 pieces) (stop symbol data (7th group) D0 to D7)
5th time: Small role 25 to small role 32 (1 piece) (stop symbol data (8th group) D0 to D7)
6th time: Small role 33 to small role 34 (1 piece) (D0 to D1 of stop symbol data (9th group))
corresponds to
In particular, (in the stop symbol data (6th group), D0 to D3 bits (minor winnings 09 to 12) and D4 to D7 bits (minor winnings 13 to 16) have different payout numbers, Inspect separately.

In the next address "1401 (H)", the upper 3 bits (*32) indicate the number of bytes to be transferred, and the lower 5 bits indicate the number of coins to be paid out. Here, since the upper 3 bits are "0*32", it is "000 (B)", and the lower 5 bits are "01111 (B)" because the number of coins to be paid out is "15 (D)". Therefore, "00001111(B)" is actually stored in address "1401(H)".

The structure of the number of transferred bytes and the number of payouts is the same for addresses "1403(H)", "1405(H)", "1407(H)", "1409(H)", and "140B(H)". . For example, in "1407 (H)", the upper 3 bits (number of bytes to be transferred) are "1*32", so it is "001 (B)", and the lower 5 bits (number of payout coins) are "3 (D)". Therefore, it becomes "00011(B)". Therefore, "00100011(B)" is stored in address "1407(H)".

Here, the "number of bytes to be moved" means the number of bytes to be moved from the address of the stop symbol data. In this example, the initial value of the address of the stop symbol data is the address "F0BB (H)" of the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5). Since the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) to stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) are combinations without payouts (RB, 1BB, or replay), they are subject to inspection to see if they have payouts. It won't be. Therefore, the initial value of the stop symbol data to be inspected becomes the address of the stop symbol data (fifth group). In this embodiment, the payout process can be simplified by organizing the symbol groups of the winning combinations (small winning combinations) that have payouts into the fifth to ninth groups.
Therefore, for example, the number of transition bytes specified by the address "1401 (H)" is "0", but this is the transition from the address "F0BB (H)" of the stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5). It means not to let it happen.
Also, since the number of transition bytes specified by the address "1403 (H)" is "1", "1" is added to the address "F0BB (H)" of the stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5). Therefore, the address to be inspected is "F0BC (H)" (stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)).

Furthermore, "designated data" means bits (inspection data) corresponding to the symbol combination to be inspected. For example, since the address "1402(H)" is "@_PIC5", it is "11111111(B)" as shown in FIG. 176.
In this case, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) when all reels 31 are stopped and the data stored at address "1402 (H)", that is, the inspection data of the stop symbol data (fifth group) "11111111(B)" are ANDed. When the calculation result is "0", it is determined that there is no payout corresponding to the symbol combination of the fifth group. On the other hand, if the calculation result is not "0", it is determined that the value stored in the lower 5 bits of the address "1401(H)", that is, "15" coins will be paid out.

At the next address "1403(H)", the number of transferred bytes is "1" and the number of payouts is "15". Further, the specified data (address “1404(H)”) is “@WIN_09_12”. Therefore, if the result of ANDing the stop symbol data (6th group) at the address "F0BC (H)" and "@WIN_09_12", that is, "00001111 (B)" (Fig. 178), is not "0", then 15 It means paying out a piece.
As mentioned above, the stop symbol data (6th group) includes small roles 09 to 16, but among these small roles, the number of payouts when winning small roles 09 to 12 is 15 pieces. Yes, the number of coins paid out when winning small prizes 13 to 16 is 3, so at address "1404 (H)", 15 coins will be paid out as minor prizes 09 to 12. is specified.

At the next address "1405(H)", the number of transferred bytes is "0" and the number of payouts is "3". Further, the specified data (address “1406(H)”) is “@WIN_13_16”. Therefore, if the result of ANDing the stop symbol data (6th group) of address "F0BC (H)" and "@WIN_13_16", that is, "11110000 (B)" (Fig. 178), is not "0", then 3 It means paying out a piece.
As described above, for the addresses "1407(H)" to "140C(H)", the number of transition bytes, acquired data, and specified data are determined for the remaining small winning combinations and the number of payouts.

Next, control processing (program) in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be explained using a flowchart.
FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_PIC). In the 25th embodiment, when the process proceeds to step S752 in FIG. 139 (23rd embodiment), the process proceeds to the flowchart in FIG. 194.
Note that in FIG. 194, step S1013 is the same as step S792 in FIG. 146. Further, step S1014 is the same as step S793 in FIG. 146. Furthermore, step S1017 is the same as step S794 in FIG. 146.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 194, after step S1012, the process of step S791 in FIG. 146 (determination as to whether the standby time has elapsed) is executed.

Here, the standby process shown in step S791 in FIG. 146 is to set a waiting time when 1BB is full when the conditions for allowing winning of 1BB are not satisfied (steps S809 and S810 in FIG. 147); This is a determination as to whether or not the waiting time has elapsed.
On the other hand, the waiting time shown in step S1012 in FIG. 194 is a determination as to whether or not the interrupt waiting process in step S1011 has ended.
In addition, in FIG. 194, when proceeding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024, the process in FIG. It is assumed that the process No. 195 is executed.

The processing in FIG. 194 will be described below, although some of the explanation overlaps with the explanation in FIG. 146.
The reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_PIC) in FIG. 194 is a process that determines whether or not the stop switch 42 can accept a stop, and when an operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, shifts to a stop symbol set process.
In FIG. 194, in step S1011, interrupt wait processing is executed. The interrupt wait process is the same as the process in step S239 in FIG. 39 (eleventh embodiment). However, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the interrupt cycle is "1.1175" ms, similar to the twenty-third embodiment. Then, in the next step S1012, it is determined whether the next interrupt has arrived (whether the waiting time for waiting for an interrupt has become "0"). When it is determined that the next interrupt has not arrived, this flowchart ends. On the other hand, after starting the interrupt wait process in step S1011, when the next interrupt arrives, the process advances to step S1013.

Note that this interrupt wait processing prevents the plurality of reels 31 from stopping at the same time even when a plurality of stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time. This is because stop control is executed for one reel 31 in the processing after step S1015, and then when the process returns to step S794, the rising data A is cleared by the interrupt wait processing in step S1011.
Furthermore, since the processes from step S1012 onwards are executed all at once, it is possible to prevent the interrupt process from being executed (make it difficult to execute) until the next interrupt wait process (step S1011). As a result, after the rise data A is first obtained in step S1016, an interrupt process is inserted between the time when the rise data A is obtained in step S1016, and the data obtained in the first step S1016 and the next step S1016 are processed. It is possible to avoid discrepancies between the acquired data and the acquired data.

In step S1013, all motor index passing checks are performed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) (Fig. 135) in the A register.
(2) Perform an OR (logical sum) operation between the A register value and the second reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC) (Fig. 136). Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register.
(3) Perform an OR (logical sum) operation between the A register value and the third reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) (Fig. 137). Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register.
(4) Add "1" to the A register value.

Here, the first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC), the second reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC), and the third reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) are Before there is a change in the motor index, it is "FF (H)", that is, "11111111 (B)".
Therefore, if at least one data is "11111111(B)", the calculation result up to (3) above will be "11111111(B)", and as shown in (4), adding "1" will result in "0". become. Therefore, before there is a change in the #th reel motor index for at least one reel 31, the above calculation result is "0", and after there is a change in the #th reel motor index for all reels 31, The result of the above calculation is a value other than "0".

In addition, when there is a change in the # reel motor index, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) is set to "10 (D)" (at the time of rising) or " 0" (at falling edge) is stored. Then, each time it is determined that the symbol has moved by one symbol, "1" is subtracted from the #th reel symbol number (for passing position). In this way, after the # reel motor index changes, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) changes from "0" (00000000 (B)) to "19 (D)" (00010011 (B)). It will be a cycle. Therefore, after the #th reel motor index changes, the OR operation of (1) to (3) above will not result in "11111111(B)".

Next, the process advances to step S1014, and it is determined whether or not it is possible to accept a stop of the stop switch 42. This determination is made by determining whether or not the above calculation (4) in step S1013 is "0" (zero flag is "1"). When it is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 cannot be accepted. In other words, when there is a change in the #th reel motor index for all reels 31, acceptance of the stop of the stop switch 42 is permitted.
In step S1014, if it is determined that the stop switch 42 can be accepted, the process advances to step S1015, and if it is determined that the stop switch 42 cannot be accepted, the process goes to step S1021.

In step S1015, the first reel number and first reel bit are set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address "F0AD(H)" of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) in the HL register.
(2) Store "00000001(B)" in the B register.
Here, the B register value is a value corresponding to the value (any one of "1" (first reel 31) to "3" (third reel 31)) of the stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL).
(3) Store "00000001(B)" in the C register.
Here, the C register value is a value corresponding to the stop switch 42. When the C register value is "00000001 (B)", it corresponds to the first (left) reel 31, when it is "00000010 (B)", it corresponds to the second (middle) reel 31, and "00000100 (B)". This corresponds to the third (right) reel 31.

Next, the process advances to step S1016, and input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of address "F017(H)" in FIG. 133 is obtained. Here, the value of input port rising data A is stored in the A register.
In the next step S1017, it is determined whether or not the stop switch 42 rises (whether the rise data of the stop switch 42 is on).
Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Perform an AND operation on the data (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) stored at the address (F0AD(H)) indicated by the HL register value and the A register value (input port rising data A). . The calculation result is stored in the A register value.
(2) Perform an AND (logical product) operation on the A register value and the C register value. Store the operation result in the A register value.

Here, for example, when the loop processing of steps S1016 to S1019 is performed for the first time, the C register value is "00000001 (B)", so the rising data of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first (left) reel 31 is A. Stored in register value.
Also, when the loop processing is performed for the second time, the C register value is updated to "00000010 (B)", and the rise data of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the second (middle) reel 31 is stored in the A register value. be done.
Furthermore, when the loop process is performed for the third time, the C register value is updated to "00000100 (B)", and the rise data of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (right) reel is stored in the A register value. be done.
Further, in step S1019 where the loop processing is performed for the third time, the C register value is updated to "00001000 (B)", and it is determined that the processing of all reels 31 has been completed ("Yes" in step S1019).
(3) As a result of the calculation in (2) above, when it is determined that it is not "0" (zero flag≠"1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 has been turned on, and the process proceeds to step S1022. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the calculation is "0" (zero flag="1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 is not turned on, and the process proceeds to step S1018.

In step S1018, the next reel number and reel bit are set. This process is a process of adding "1" to the B register value. Therefore, during the first loop of steps S1016 to S1019, "00000001(B)" is updated to "00000010(B)", and during the second loop, "00000010(B)" is updated to "00000011(B)". Updated.

Next, the process advances to step S1019, and it is determined whether or not processing has been completed for all reels 31.
Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Perform a shift operation to shift the C register value to the left by "1". Therefore, in the first loop, "00000001(B)" is updated to "00000010(B)", in the second loop, "00000010(B)" is updated to "00000100(B)", and in the third loop, The time is updated from "00000100(B)" to "00001000(B)".
(2) When the D3 bit of the C register value is "1", it is determined as "Yes" (the processing of all reels 31 has been completed).
If the determination in step S1019 is "No", the process returns to step S1016, and if the determination is "Yes", the process advances to step S1020.

In step S1020, a reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is acquired. At this point, the address value of the reel stop flag is stored in the HL register (step S1015), so the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S1021, and the stop reception information data (_PT_STOP_STS) is saved. This process is a process of storing the A register value at address "F01E(H)" (stop reception information data (_PT_STOP_STS)). Through this process, the value of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) and the value of the stop reception information data (_PT_STOP_STS) become the same.
Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

On the other hand, in step S1017, it is determined that the stop switch 42 is turned on, and when the process proceeds to step S1022, acceptance of the stop switch 42 is executed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Update the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) to the latest information.
Here, the A register value (the value obtained by ANDing the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) and the input port rise data A in step S1017, and then ANDing the result and the C register value), and the reel stop flag ( _FL_STOP_LP), performs an XOR (exclusive OR) operation, stores the result in the A register, and stores the A register value in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP).

For example, in step S1017,
Reel stop flag: 00000111 (B)
Input port rising data A: 00000001 (B)
When , ANDing the two results in "00000001(B)".
Further, if the C register value is "00000001(B)", ANDing the two results in "00000001(B)".
Furthermore, when this value is XORed with the reel stop flag "00000111 (B)", it becomes "00000110 (B)". This value becomes the reel stop flag after updating.
(2) Update the stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) to the latest information. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the stop/control reel number data.

Next, the process advances to step S1023, and symbol combination control is executed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Set the reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIGS. 135 to 137) to "start deceleration", that is, "4 (D)".
(2) Save the symbol number that becomes the stop position in the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) (FIGS. 135 to 137).
(3) The value obtained by subtracting "1" from the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) is stored in the A register value. In addition, when "1" is subtracted from the symbol number "0", the subtraction (special subtraction) is executed so that it becomes "19 (D)" (the maximum value of the symbol number).
This process is an operation to obtain the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) (lower row) by subtracting "1" from the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) (middle row). At this point, the control symbol number is stored in the A register. For example, when the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) is "4", "3" is stored as the control symbol number. Moreover, when the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) is "0", "19" is stored as the control symbol number.
Then, the process advances to step S1024, stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) (FIG. 195).

In the example of FIG. 194, even if a plurality of stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time, reel stop control can be executed for one reel 31.
Here, "simultaneous pressing" refers to a case where the rising data of a plurality of (two in this example) stop switches 42 are turned on in the same interrupt process.
less than,
1. When the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously while all the reels 31 are rotating 2. When the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle and right reels 31 are rotating, and the middle and right stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time.3. An example will be described in which the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously when the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle and right reels 31 are rotating.

1. When the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time while all the reels 31 are rotating In FIG. 194, if it is determined "Yes" in step S1014 and the process proceeds to step S1015, as described above,
(1) Store the address "F0AD(H)" of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) in the HL register.
(2) Store "00000001(B)" in the B register.
(3) Store "00000001(B)" in the C register.

In the next step S1016, the value of input port rising data A is stored in the A register. Here, when the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously, the input port rise data A (A register value) is "00000011 (B)".
In the next step S1017, the following processing is executed.
(1) Perform an AND operation on the data (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) stored at the address (F0AD(H)) indicated by the HL register value and the A register value (input port rising data A). . The calculation result is stored in the A register value.
At this point, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000111 (B)". Therefore, when this value is ANDed with the A register value "00000011(B)", it becomes "00000011(B)". The value after this calculation becomes the A register value.
(2) Perform an AND (logical product) operation on the A register value and the C register value, and store the operation result in the A register value. Therefore, the AND operation result "00000001(B)" of the A register value "00000011(B)" and the C register value "00000001(B)" is set as the A register value.

Then, in step S1017, since the result of the above calculation is not "0" (zero flag≠"1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 has risen, and the process proceeds to step S1022.
In step S1022, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is updated to the latest information.
Here, the A register value (00000001 (B)) and the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) (00000111 (B)) are XORed (exclusive OR), and the result of the operation is "00000110 (B)" in the A register. and stores the A register value in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP).
Next, the B register value (00000001 (B)) is stored in the stop/control reel number data.

As described above, when the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously while all the reels 31 are rotating, the stop control of the left reel 31 corresponding to the operation of the left stop switch 42 is executed. In other words, the stop control of the middle reel 31 corresponding to the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is not executed at this timing.
Further, through the process of step S1022, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is updated to data "00000110 (B)" indicating that the left stop switch 42 has been accepted "0".
Furthermore, when the process returns to step S752 again after executing the stop control of the left reel 31, generally one interrupt time has elapsed, so the rising data A has been cleared. However, even before one interrupt time has elapsed, when the process advances to step S752, the rising data A is cleared in steps S1011 and S1012, so unless the middle stop switch 42 is operated again, the middle reel No. 31 stop control is not executed.

2. When the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle and right reels 31 are rotating, and the middle and right stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time. Proceeding, as mentioned above,
(1) Store the address "F0AD(H)" of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) in the HL register.
(2) Store "00000001 (B)" in the B register.
(3) Store "00000001(B)" in the C register.

In the next step S1016, the value of input port rising data A is stored in the A register. Here, since the middle and right stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time, the input port rising data A (A register value) is "00000110 (B)".
In the next step S1017, the following processing is executed.
(1) Perform an AND operation on the data (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) stored at the address (F0AD(H)) indicated by the HL register value and the A register value (input port rising data A). . The calculation result is stored in the A register value.
At this point, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000110 (B)". Therefore, when this value is ANDed with the A register value "00000110(B)", it becomes "00000110(B)". The value after this calculation becomes the A register value.
(2) Perform an AND (logical product) operation on the A register value and the C register value, and store the operation result in the A register value. Therefore, the AND operation result "00000000(B)" of the A register value "00000110(B)" and the C register value "00000001(B)" is set as the A register value.

Then, in step S1017, since the result of the above calculation is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 is not turned on, and the process proceeds to step S1018.
In step S1018, "1" is added to the B register value. Therefore, the B register value is updated to "00000010(B)".
Next, the process advances to step S1019, and it is determined whether or not processing has been completed for all reels 31.
Here, first, a shift operation is performed to shift the C register value to the left by "1". Therefore, the C register value is updated to "00000010(B)".
Next, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit of the C register value is "1". Since it is not "1" here, the determination is "No" and the process advances to step S1016.

In the second step S1016, the value of input port rising data A is stored in the A register. Therefore, the A register value becomes "00000110(B)".
In the next step S1017, the following processing is executed.
(1) Perform an AND operation on the data (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) stored at the address (F0AD(H)) indicated by the HL register value and the A register value (input port rising data A). . The calculation result is stored in the A register value.
At this point, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000110 (B)". Therefore, when this value is ANDed with the A register value "00000110(B)", it becomes "00000110(B)". This value becomes the A register value.
(2) Perform an AND (logical product) operation on the A register value "00000110 (B)" and the C register value "00000010 (B)" and store the result of the operation in the A register value. Therefore, the A register value becomes "00000010(B)".

Then, in step S1017, since the result of the above calculation is not "0" (zero flag≠"1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 has risen, and the process proceeds to step S1022.
In step S1022, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is updated to the latest information. This process performs an XOR (exclusive OR) operation on the A register value “00000010 (B)” and the value “00000110 (B)” of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP), and the result is “00000100 (B)”. is stored in the A register, and the A register value is stored in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP).
Next, the B register value (00000010 (B)) is stored in the stop/control reel number data.

As described above, when the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle and right stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously while the middle and right reels 31 are rotating, the middle reel corresponding to the operation of the middle stop switch 42 No. 31 stop control is executed. In other words, the stop control of the right reel 31 corresponding to the operation of the right stop switch 42 is not executed at this timing.
Further, through the process of step S1022, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is updated to data "00000100 (B)" indicating that the left and middle stop switches 42 have been accepted "0".
Furthermore, when the process returns to step S752 again after executing the stop control of the middle reel 31, the rise data A is cleared as described above, so unless the right stop switch 42 is operated again, the right reel 31 Stop control is not executed.

3. In the case where the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle and right reels 31 are rotating, and the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time, in FIG. As you proceed,
(1) Store the address "F0AD(H)" of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) in the HL register.
(2) Store "00000001(B)" in the B register.
(3) Store "00000001(B)" in the C register.

In the next step S1016, the value of input port rising data A is stored in the A register. Here, since the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time, the input port rising data A (A register value) is "00000011 (B)".
In the next step S1017, the following processing is executed.
(1) Perform an AND operation on the data (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) stored at the address (F0AD(H)) indicated by the HL register value and the A register value (input port rising data A). . The calculation result is stored in the A register value.
At this point, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000110 (B)". Therefore, when this value is ANDed with the A register value "00000011 (B)", it becomes "00000010 (B)". The value after this calculation becomes the A register value.
(2) Perform an AND (logical product) operation on the A register value and the C register value, and store the operation result in the A register value. Therefore, the AND operation result "00000000(B)" of the A register value "00000010(B)" and the C register value "00000001(B)" is set as the A register value.

Then, in step S1017, since the result of the above calculation is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 is not turned on, and the process proceeds to step S1018.
In step S1018, "1" is added to the B register value. Therefore, the B register value is updated to "00000010(B)".
Next, the process advances to step S1019, and it is determined whether or not processing has been completed for all reels 31.
Here, first, a shift operation is performed to shift the C register value to the left by "1". Therefore, the C register value is updated to "00000010(B)".
Next, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit of the C register value is "1". Since it is not "1" here, the determination is "No" and the process advances to step S1016.

In the second step S1016, the value of input port rising data A is stored in the A register. Therefore, the A register value becomes "00000011(B)".
In the next step S1017, the following processing is executed.
(1) Perform an AND operation on the data (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) stored at the address (F0AD(H)) indicated by the HL register value and the A register value (input port rising data A). . The calculation result is stored in the A register value.
At this point, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000110 (B)". Therefore, when this value is ANDed with the A register value "00000011 (B)", it becomes "00000010 (B)". This value becomes the A register value.
(2) Perform an AND (logical product) operation on the A register value "00000010 (B)" and the C register value "00000010 (B)" and store the result of the operation in the A register value. Therefore, the A register value becomes "00000010(B)".

Then, in step S1017, since the result of the above calculation is not "0" (zero flag≠"1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 has risen, and the process proceeds to step S1022.
In step S1022, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is updated to the latest information. This process performs an XOR (exclusive OR) operation on the A register value “00000010 (B)” and the value “00000110 (B)” of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP), and the result is “00000100 (B)”. is stored in the A register, and the A register value is stored in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP).
Next, the B register value (00000010 (B)) is stored in the stop/control reel number data.

As described above, when the left reel 31 is stopped and the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed simultaneously while the middle and right reels 31 are rotating, the middle reel corresponding to the operation of the middle stop switch 42 No. 31 stop control is executed. In other words, even if the left stop switch 42 corresponding to the already stopped left reel 31 is operated, the stop control of the left reel 1 is not executed.
Further, through the process of step S1022, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is updated to data "00000100 (B)" indicating that the left and middle stop switches 42 have been accepted "0".
As described above, even if the stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time, only one reel 31 can be controlled to stop.

FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. 194.
This process is a process of updating the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) based on the reel 31 that will stop this time.
In step S1031, the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is saved. This process is a process of storing the A register value in the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE). Here, the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is stored in the A register value in step S1023 of FIG. 194.

In the next step S1032, the number of symbol groups is set. Since the symbol group of this embodiment consists of the first group to the ninth group, this process is a process of storing "9" in the B register. Next, the process advances to step S1033, and reel symbol data set (M_PICDAT_SET) is executed. This process is shown in FIG. 196, which will be described later, and is a process of identifying any one address in the # reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_#) and acquiring the symbol combination data stored in that address. . The symbol combination data obtained through this process is stored in the A register.
Furthermore, after storing "9" in the B register in step S1032, the B register value is saved in the stack area before executing the next step S1033. After executing the reel symbol data set (M_PICDAT_SET) in step S1033, the B register value saved in the stack area is restored. This is because in step S1033, the B register is newly used and the value stored in the B register is used again.

Next, the process advances to step S1034, and the RWM address of the stop symbol data corresponding to the symbol group to be updated is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address "F0B6 (H)" which is "1" address before the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) in the HL register.
(2) Add the B register value to the HL register value. Then, the result of the addition is set as the HL register value.

Here, in step S1032, "9" is stored in the B register, so in the first step S1034,
HL register value = HL register value "F0B6 (H)" + "9 (H)" = "F0BF (H)"
This becomes the address of the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9). Furthermore, in step S1036, which will be described later, "1" is subtracted from the B register value, and steps S1033 to S1036 are repeated until the B register value becomes "0". As a result, the reel symbol data set (M_PICDAT_SET) is repeatedly executed from the stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) to the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1).

In step S1035, the stop symbol data is saved. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Perform an AND (logical product) operation between the A register value (symbol combination data acquired in step S1033) and the data (stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC)) stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register.
(2) The A register value is stored in the address (stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC)) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is updated.

Next, the process advances to step S1036, and it is determined whether or not processing for the number of symbol groups has been completed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value and use the subtraction result as the B register value.
(2) When the B register value is "0", it is determined as "Yes" (processing for the number of symbol groups has been completed), and this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined "No" (processing for the number of symbol groups has not been completed), the process returns to step S1033 and executes the reel symbol data set (M_PICDAT_SET) corresponding to the next symbol group.

FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the reel symbol data set (M_PICDAT_SET) in step S1033 of FIG. 195.
As described above, before executing this flowchart, the B register value is saved in the stack area.
The reel symbol data set is a process of acquiring symbol combination data corresponding to the current symbol group. For example, this process is
Stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) = “1” (1st (left) reel)
Control pattern number (_BF_PICTURE) = “3” (symbol number that stops at the bottom)
3rd group (B register value = “3”)
shall be.
The following example explains the case where processing is performed under the above conditions.
Stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) = one of “1”, “2”, or “3” Control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) = one of “0” to “19” B register value = “0” to “ 9, symbol combination data can be obtained in the same manner.

As mentioned above, when the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is "3", the symbol number that stops on the active line is "5", and the corresponding symbol becomes "Replay".
In this case, by processing the reel symbol data set, data "@REP_01 OR @REP_02 OR @REP_07" at address "1217 (H)" in FIG. 182, that is, "10000110 (B)" is stored in the A register. becomes.

In FIG. 196, in step S1041, stop/control reel number data is acquired. This process is a process of storing stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) in the A register.
In the next step S1042, a reel symbol search table address offset table (FIG. 180(A)) is set. This process is a process of storing an address "11FF(H)" obtained by subtracting "1" from the start address of the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH) in the HL register.
Next, the process advances to step S1043, and table selection (R_TBL_SET) is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 197, which will be described later. Through this process, the HL register contains the start address of the # reel symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_#), specifically,
1203 (H): Start address of the 1st reel symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_1) 123A (H): Start address of the 2nd reel symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_2) 128F (H): Start of the 3rd reel symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_3) Any value of address is stored.

Next, the process advances to step S1044, and a control symbol number is acquired. This process is a process of storing the value stored in the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) in the A register.
In the next step S1045, 4-bit data acquisition (M_4BITDAT_GET) is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 198, which will be described later. When this process is executed, the symbol data corresponding to the symbol on the active line is stored in the A register.
In the next step S1046, the number of reel symbol data searches is set. This process is a process of storing the A register value (symbol data) in the C register value. The C register value that stores the symbol data is used in the bit number count (M_BIT_COUNT) described later.

Next, the process advances to step S1047, and the offset of the symbol combination table is set. This process is a process of storing "11(D)" in the A register value. For example, the first address of the first reel symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_1) is "1203 (H)", but from this position to the address "120E (H)" where the first table offset is stored is "11". Since there is an address, it is set to "11".

In the next step S1048, designated address data is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the A register value to the HL register value. Then, the result of the addition is set as the HL register value.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
Here, if "1203 (H)" (the first address of the first reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1)) is stored in the HL register in step S1043,
HL register value = 1203 (H) + 11 (D) = 120E (H)
becomes.
Therefore, the A register value becomes "00000011(B)". As described above, of the data at address "1203(H)", the upper 2 bits are reel symbol data information, and the lower 6 bits indicate the table offset value.

Next, the process advances to step S1049, and an offset for the next symbol combination table is generated. This process performs an AND (logical product) operation between the A register value and "00000011 (B)". Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register. As a result, in the above example, the A register value becomes "00000011 (B)".
In the next step S1050, it is determined whether a symbol combination table of the number of symbol groups has been obtained. In this process, "1" is subtracted from the B register value, and if the subtraction result is not "0", it is determined as "No" (the symbol combination table of the number of symbol groups has not been acquired).
Here, the loop processing of steps S1048 to S1050 will be described using an example in which the HL register value is "120E(H)" and the B register value is, for example, "3" as in the above example.
(1) First time In step S1048,
HL register value = 1203 (H) + 11 (D) = 120E (H)
becomes.
In step S1049,
A register value = 3 (H)
becomes.
In step S1050,
B register value = 3-1 = 2
becomes.
Therefore, the determination is "No" and the process returns to step S1048.

(2) Second time In step S1048,
HL register value = 120E (H) + 3 (D) = 1211 (H)
becomes.
In step S1049,
A register value = 00000011 (B)
becomes.
In step S1050,
B register value = 2-1 = 1
becomes.
Therefore, the determination is "No" and the process returns to step S1048.

(3) Third time In step S1048,
HL register value = 1211 (H) + 3 (D) = 1214 (H)
becomes.
In step S1049,
A register value = 8 (H) (00001000 (B))
becomes.
In step S1050,
B register value = 1-1 = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the determination is "Yes" and the process advances to step S1051.
As a result, the table offset "8 (H)" for the third group of symbols is stored in the A register.
Further, when the result in step S1050 is "Yes", the HL register value is saved in the stack area. The HL register value at this point is an address value that stores "reel symbol data information + table offset".

In step S1051, the reel symbol combination table is corrected. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value. So, for example, in the above example,
HL register value = 1214 (H) - 1 (H) = 1213 (H)
becomes.
Next, the process advances to step S1052, and a bit number count (M_BIT_COUNT) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 199, which will be described later, and is a process of counting how many bits are "1" in the reel symbol data information. For example, when the number of bits is counted for data "11011010(B)" at address "1213(H)", it is counted as "5". After the bit number count is executed, the bit number is stored in the A register.
After completing the bit count in step S1052, the HL register value and BC register value are restored from the stack area.

In the next step S1053, it is determined whether the test final bit is on. In this process, it is determined whether the carry flag is "1" or not, and when the carry flag is "1", the determination is "Yes".
The details will be described later, but in the bit number count (M_BIT_COUNT), the reel symbol data information is shifted by 1 to the left by the number corresponding to the symbol to be stopped this time. The structure is such that the carry flag becomes "1" when the card is released. For example, among the reel symbol data information "11011010 (B)" of address "1213 (H)", if the symbol to be stopped this time is "Replay", shift to the left "1" four times corresponding to "Replay" do. Therefore, in this case, the carry flag becomes "1" at the fourth "1" shift to the left.
If it is determined in step S1053 that the carry flag is not "1", the process advances to step S1054, and if it is determined that the carry flag is "1", the process advances to step S1055. In other words, in step S1053, it is determined whether or not there is a symbol combination on the left reel 31 that includes "replay" and belongs to the third group. In this case, when the carry flag is not "1", it is determined that the symbol combination is not present, and when the carry flag is "1", it is determined that the symbol combination is present.
In step S1054, reel symbol data is set. This process executes an XOR (exclusive OR) operation between the A register value and the A register value to set the A register value to "0". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

On the other hand, in step S1055, designated address data is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the A register value to the HL register value. The result of the addition is set as the HL register value.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
Here, the HL register value is a value saved when the result in step S1050 is "Yes", and is an address storing reel symbol data information and table offset. Further, the A register value stores the number of bits turned on in the bit number count in step S1052. For example, when the HL register value is "1214 (H)" and the A register value is "3 (H)", the HL register value becomes "1217 (H)".
Therefore, the data at address "1217(H)" is "@REP_01 OR @REP_02 OR @REP_07", that is, "10000110(B)", and this value is stored in the A register.

FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing table selection (R_TBL_SEL) in step S1043 in FIG. 196.
In FIG. 197, designated address data is set in step S1061. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the A register value to the HL register value. The result of the addition is set as the HL register value.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
In step S1042 in FIG. 196, "11FF(H)" is stored in the HL register. Further, the A register value is the value of stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL), and is any one of "1", "2", or "3".
Therefore, by the process of step S1061, the HL register value becomes one of "1200(H)", "1201(H)", or "1202(H)".
Also, by the process (2) above, one of the offset values shown in FIG. 180(A) is stored in the A register.

Next, the process advances to step S1062, and a designated address is set. This process is a process of adding the A register value to the HL register value and using the result of the addition as the HL register value. For example, when the HL register value is "1200 (H)" and the A register value (offset value) is "3 (H)", the HL register value will be "1203 (H)", and the first reel symbol arrangement This is the start address of the table (TBL_PICARG_1). Also, when the HL register value is "1201 (H)" and the A register value (offset value) is "39 (H)", the HL register value becomes "123A (H)" and the second reel symbol This is the start address of the array table (TBL_PICARG_2). Furthermore, when the HL register value is "1202 (H)" and the A register value (offset value) is "8D (H)", the HL register value is "128F (H)", and the third reel This is the start address of the symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_3).
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing 4-bit data acquisition (M_4BITDAT_GET) in step S1045 of FIG. 196.
This process is a process that uses the # reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_#) based on the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) corresponding to the symbol to be stopped to obtain the symbol data of the symbol to be stopped on the active line.
For example, in a game in which it is determined that the symbol to be stopped on the active line is No. 3 "Black BAR" based on the acceptance of the stop operation of the left reel 31, the lower 4 of the address "1203 (H)" in FIG. The symbol data "@ZGR_02" corresponding to the bit data is acquired. As shown in the reel symbol definition in FIG. 181, "@ZGR_02" is symbol data corresponding to "Black BAR". Furthermore, the actual value of “@ZGR_02” is “1 (H)” as shown in the reel symbol definition.

In FIG. 198, in step S1071, the table offset is generated. This process is a process for executing an instruction to shift the A register value to the right by "1".
Here, before this process, the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is stored in the A register in step S1044 of FIG. 196.
Therefore, if the A register value is, for example, "00000001 (B)" (odd number), shifting to the right by "1" causes the carry flag to become "1". Further, if the A register value is, for example, "00000010 (B)" (an even number), when shifted to the right by "1", the carry flag becomes "0". Furthermore, if the A register value is, for example, "00000011 (B)" (odd number), shifting to the right by "1" causes the carry flag to become "1".
Then, the value after being shifted by "1" to the right is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1072, specified data is acquired. This process is a process in which data stored at an address obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the A register.
Here, the head address of the #th reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_#) is stored in the HL register in step S1043 of FIG. 196 (FIG. 197). Further, the A register value is a value obtained by shifting the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) to the right by "1". Therefore, when the HL register value is, for example, "1203 (H)" (see Figure 181) and the A register value is, for example, "1" (control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is "3"), the A The register value is the data at the address “1204(H)”, that is, “@ZGR_05 * 16 + @ZGR_04”.
Here, as shown in Figure 181, "@ZGR_05" (upper 4 bits) is "0100 (B)" (4 (H)), and "@ZGR_04" (lower 4 bits) is "0011 (B)". ” (3(H)), so the A register value becomes “0100/0011(B)”.

In the next step S1073, it is determined whether the table data search number is an odd number. In this process, it is determined by the process of step S1071 whether the carry flag is "1" or not, and when the carry flag is "1", it is determined that the number is an odd number. When it is determined that the table data search number is an odd number, the process advances to step S1075, and when it is determined that the table data search number is not an odd number, the process advances to step S1074.
In step S1074, even data is obtained. This process is a process of exchanging the upper 4 bits and lower 4 bits of the data (A register value) acquired in step S1072.
For example, when the A register value is "0100/0011(B)" as in the above example, when the process of step S1074 is executed, it becomes "0011/0100(B)".

In step S1075, designated data is generated. This process is a process of executing an AND (logical product) operation between the A register value and "00001111 (B)" and storing the result of the operation in the A register value. This process masks the upper 4 bits.
For example, when the A register value is "01000011(B)" as shown above, an AND (logical product) operation is performed between this value and "00001111(B)", and the A register value becomes "00000011(B)". )”.
Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the bit number count (M_BIT_COUNT) in step S1052 of FIG. 196.
Here, immediately before the bit number counting process, the HL register value is the data updated in step S1051 of FIG. , "120D(H)" in FIG. 182).
Further, the C register value is the 4-bit data acquired in the 4-bit data acquisition in step S1045 through the process in step S1046 in FIG. 196.

In FIG. 199, in step S1081, the number of inspections is set. This process is a process of adding "1" to the C register value and setting the result of the addition as the C register value.
In the next step S1082, "0" is set as the initial value of the number of on bits. This process is a process in which the A register value is set to "0" by performing an XOR (exclusive OR) operation on the A register value and the A register value.
Next, the process advances to step S1083, and the number of times of processing is set. This process is a process of storing "8" in the B register. "8" here is a value corresponding to the number of bits.

In the next step S1084, test data is acquired. This process is a process of storing data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the D register. Therefore, the D register value becomes reel symbol data information.
Next, the process advances to step S1085, and it is determined whether the relevant bit is on. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Perform an operation to shift the D register value to the left by "1".
(2) As a result of the above calculation, if the carry flag is "1", it is determined as "Yes".

If it is determined in step S1085 that the bit is on, the process advances to step S1086, and if it is determined that the bit is not on, the process advances to step S1087.
In step S1086, "1" is added to the number of on bits. This process is a process of adding "1" to the A register value.
In the next step S1087, "1" is subtracted from the number of inspections. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the C register value and using the subtraction result as the C register value.
Next, the process advances to step S1088, and it is determined whether or not to end the inspection. This process determines whether the C register value is "0" (whether the zero flag is "1"). When it is determined that the C register value is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that the test is to be completed, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the inspection is not to be completed, the process advances to step S1089.

In step S1089, it is determined whether the number of times of processing has been completed. In this process, "1" is subtracted from the B register value, it is determined whether the subtraction result is "0", and when it is determined that it is "0", it is determined that the number of times of processing has been performed. If it is determined that the number of times of processing has not been completed, the process advances to step S1085. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of times of processing has been completed, the process advances to step S1090.
In step S1090, "1" is added to the HL register value, and the value after the addition is set as the HL register value. Then, the process advances to step S1083.

The above bit number counting process will be explained using a specific example.
Although an example will be described below, the process can be executed in the same manner as described below regardless of the symbols of any group on any reel 31.
In this specific example,
HL register value = 1213 (H) (3 groups of symbols on the first reel 31)
C register value = 3 (replay) (“4” by step S1081)
shall be.
in this case,
(1) First time Step S1083: B register value = 8 (initial value)
Step S1084: D register value “11011010(B)” (symbol data stored at address “1213(H))”
Step S1085: Shift the D register value to the left by "1", carry flag = 1, therefore "Yes"
Step S1086: A register value=0+1=1
Step S1087: C register value = 4-1 = 3
Step S1088: Zero flag≠1, therefore “No”
Step S1089: B register value = 8-1 = 7, therefore "No"
(2) Second time Step S1085: Shift the D register value to the left by "1", carry flag = 1, therefore "Yes"
Step S1086: A register value=1+1=2
Step S1087: C register value = 3-1 = 2
Step S1088: Zero flag≠1, therefore “No”
Step S1089: B register value = 7-1 = 6, therefore "No"
(3) Third time Step S1085: Shift the D register value to the left by "1", carry flag ≠ 1, therefore "No"
Step S1087: C register value = 2-1 = 1
Step S1088: Zero flag≠1, therefore “No”
Step S1089: B register value = 6-1 = 5, therefore "No"
(4) Fourth time Step S1085: Shift the D register value to the left by "1", carry flag = 1, therefore "Yes"
Step S1086: A register value=2+1=3
Step S1087: C register value = 1-1 = 0
Step S1088: Zero flag = 1, therefore "Yes" (processing completed)
becomes.

In this case, when the bit count is finished and the process proceeds to step S1053 in FIG. 196, since the carry flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S1055.
In step S1055,
HL register value = HL register value “1214 (H)” + A register value “3 (H)” = 1217 (H)
A register value = Data of address "1217 (H)" indicated by HL register value = @REP_01 OR @REP_02 OR @REP_07 (10000110 (B))
becomes.
As described above, in the bit number counting, when a stopped symbol is determined, symbol combination data of the Nth group of the #th reel 31 corresponding to the stopped symbol is specified.

Next, how the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is updated by the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) shown in FIG. 195 when each stop switch 42 is operated will be explained using a specific example.
In the following explanation,
1. Examples of non-winning roles 1-1. When the left stop switch 42 is stopped 1-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped 1-3. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped 2. Example of winning a special role (RBA) 2-1. When the left stop switch 42 is stopped 2-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped 2-3. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped 3. Example of winning in Replay (Replay 01) 3-1. When the left stop switch 42 is stopped 3-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped 3-3. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped 4. Example of winning a small role (when the pressing order is correct when the pressing order bell is won) 4-1. When the left stop switch 42 is stopped 4-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped 4-3. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped 5. Example of winning a small role (when the pressing order is incorrect when winning the pressing order bell) 5-1. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped 5-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped 5-3. The operation of stopping the left stop switch 42 will be explained in order.

1. When a winning combination is not won In this example, in a game where the winning number “26” is determined as a result of the lottery, the left stop occurs when the symbol number “18” is passing through the middle row of the left reel 31. The switch 42 is operated, and then, when the symbol with symbol number "17" is passing through the middle stage of the middle reel 31, the middle stop switch 42 is operated, and then the middle stage of the right reel 41 is moved to the middle stage with symbol number "19". When the stop switch 42 is operated while the symbol is passing,
Symbol control number when left reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 1 (Watermelon)
Symbol control number when middle reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 0 (Bell A)
Symbol control number when right reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 2 (Blue BAR)
shall each cease.
In this case, the symbol combination on the active line is "Black BAR (No. 3)" - "Cherry (No. 1)" - "Blue BAR (No. 2)", and the winning combination is non-winning.
In addition, the initial value of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00001111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000011 (B)"
It is.

1-1. At the time of stop operation of the left stop switch 42 In the stop symbol set of FIG. 195, in step S1031, "1" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
(1st time)
Through the process of step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "black BAR" does not exist in the 9 group of symbols on the left reel 31 (see address "1236 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) at the address indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "00000011 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

(2nd time)
Through the process of step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "black BAR" does not exist in the symbol group 8 on the left reel 31 (see address "1230(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) at the address indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

(3rd time)
Through the process of step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "black BAR" does not exist in the symbol group 7 on the left reel 31 (see address "122B(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) at the address indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

(4th time)
Through the process of step S1033, symbol combination data "01000000(B)" (@WIN_15) at address "1226(H)" is stored in the A register. This means that the small winning combination 15 exists in the symbol group 6 on the left reel 31 as a "black BAR".
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) at the address indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "01000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

(5th time)
Through the process of step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "black BAR" does not exist in the symbol group 5 on the left reel 31 (see address "1220(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) at the address indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

(6th time)
Through the process of step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "black BAR" does not exist in the 4th symbol group of the left reel 31 (see address "121B(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) at the address indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "00001111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

(7th time)
Through the process in step S1033, symbol combination data "00010000(B)" (@REP_04) at address "1216(H)" is stored in the A register. This means that Replay 04 exists as a "black BAR" in the third symbol group on the left reel 31.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00010000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) at the address indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00010000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

(8th time)
In step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "black BAR" does not exist in the second group of symbols on the left reel 31 (see address "1210(H)").
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) at the address indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

(9th time)
In step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "black BAR" does not exist in the first symbol group of the left reel 31 (see address "120D(H)").
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) at the address indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the determination is "Yes", so the stop symbol set is ended.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the left stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00010000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "01000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
From the above, when the "black BAR" stops on the active line when the left stop switch 42 is stopped, there is a possibility of stopping the symbol combinations of the 3rd or 6th symbol group, but the symbol combinations of the other symbol groups It can be seen that there is no possibility of stopping the symbol combination.

Next, the reel symbol data set (FIG. 196) in step S1033 during the stop symbol setting in FIG. 195 will be explained by giving an example.
Among the above, the fourth step S1033 (symbol group 6) is taken as an example. Note that the B register value in this case is "6".
In FIG. 196, in step S1041, stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL), that is, "1" is stored in the A register.
In the next step S1042, "11FF(H)" is stored in the HL register.
Next, the process advances to step S1043, and table selection (R_TBL_SET) is executed. Through this process, the leading address "1203(H)" of the first reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) is stored in the HL register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1044, and the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE), that is, "1" is stored in the A register.
In the next step S1045, 4-bit data acquisition (M_4BITDAT_GET) is executed. Through this process, symbol data "00000001 (B)" corresponding to "black BAR" is stored in the A register.
In the next step S1046, the A register value (symbol data) is stored in the C register value. Therefore, the C register value becomes "00000001(B)".

Next, the process advances to step S1047, and "11(D)" (offset value) is stored in the A register value.
In the next step S1048, the HL register value = "1203 (H)" (starting address of the first reel symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_1)) + "11 (D)" (offset value) = "120E (H)". .
Further, the A register value becomes the table offset value of the lower 6 bits of the data at address "120E(H)", and becomes "00000011(B)".

In the next step S1049, an AND (logical product) operation is performed on the A register value and "00000011 (B)", and the result of the operation is stored in the A register. As a result, the A register value becomes "00000011 (B)".
In the next step S1050, "1" is subtracted from the B register value, and if the subtraction result is not "0", it is determined as "No" (the symbol combination table of the number of symbol groups has not been acquired).
Here, at the beginning,
HL register value = 120E (H)
B register value = 6
It is.
Therefore, the loop processing from steps S1048 to S1050 is as follows.
(1st time)
HL register value = 120E (H)
A register value = 3 (H)
B register value=6-1=5 (determined as “No” and returns to step S1048)
(2nd time)
HL register value = 120E (H) + 3 (D) = 1211 (H)
A register value = 3 (H)
B register value=5-1=4 (determined as "No" and returns to step S1048)
(3rd time)
HL register value = 1211 (H) + 3 (D) = 1214 (H)
A register value = 8 (H) (00001000 (B))
B register value = 4-1 = 3 (determined as “No” and returns to step S1048)

(4th time)
HL register value = 1214 (H) + 8 (D) = 121C (H)
A register value = 5 (H) (00001000 (B))
B register value = 3-1 = 2 (determined as “No” and returns to step S1048)
(5th time)
HL register value = 121C (H) + 5 (D) = 1221 (H)
A register value = 4 (H)
B register value=2-1=1 (determined as “No” and returns to step S1048)
(6th time)
HL register value = 1221 (H) + 4 (D) = 1225 (H)
A register value = 7 (H)
B register value = 1-1 = 0 (determined as “Yes” and proceeds to step S1051)

Here, the HL register value "1225 (H)" is saved in the stack area.
In step S1051, the HL register value = "1225 (H)" - "1 (H)" = "1224 (H)".
In step S1052, a bit number count (M_BIT_COUNT) is executed. Here, the number of bits is counted for data "01111010(B)" at address "1224(H)". In this example, since it is counted as "1", the A register value becomes "1".
Thereafter, the HL register value and BC register value are restored from the stack area.

In the next step S1053, since the carry flag is "1", the determination is "Yes".
In step S1055, the data stored at the address indicated by the value "1226(H)" obtained by adding the A register value "1" to the HL register value "1225(H)" is stored in the A register.
Therefore, data "@WIN_15" at address "1226(H)", ie, "01000000(B)" is stored in the A register.
This A register value "01000000 (B)" is then ANDed with the initial value "11111111 (B)" stored in the stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) in the stop symbol set (_M_STOPPIC_SET). (logical product) is calculated. As a result, the data of the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) is updated from "11111111 (B)" to "01000000 (B)".

Next, a specific example of 4-bit data acquisition (M_4BITDAT_GET) (FIG. 198) in step S1045 in the above example will be described.
Before this process,
A register = 1 (control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE))
HL register = 1203 (H) (starting address of 1st reel symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_1))
It becomes.
In FIG. 198, in step S1071, the A register value is shifted to the right by "1". As a result, the carry flag becomes "1". Further, the A register value becomes "00000000(B)".

In step S1072, the data stored at the address obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the A register. Since the HL register value is "1203 (H)" and the A register value is "0", the A register value after the operation is the data "@ZGR_08*16 + @ZGR_02" at the address "1203 (H)", i.e. It becomes "0111/0001(B)".
In step S1073, the carry flag is "1" according to the above calculation, so the process advances to step S1075.
In step S1075, an AND (logical product) operation is performed between the A register value and "00001111 (B)". As a result, the A register value becomes "0000/0001(B)", and symbol data "00000001(B)" corresponding to the "black BAR" is stored.

Next, a specific example of the bit number count (M_BIT_COUNT) (FIG. 199) in step S1052 of FIG. 196 in the above example will be described.
Immediately before counting the number of bits,
HL register = 1224 (H) (data updated in step S1051 in FIG. 196)
C register = 00000001 (B) (symbol data acquired in 4-bit data acquisition (step S1045) in Figure 196)
It becomes.
In FIG. 199, in step S1081, "1" is added to the C register value, and the result of the addition is set as the C register value. As a result, the C register value becomes "2".
In step S1082, the A register value is set to "0".
In step S1083, "8" is stored in the B register.

In step S1084, the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value "1224(H)" is stored in the D register. Therefore, the D register value becomes "01111010(B)".
In step S1085, the D register value is shifted to the left by "1". As a result, since the carry flag is "0", it is determined as "No" and the process proceeds to step S1087.
In step S1087, "1" is subtracted from the C register value. As a result, the C register value becomes "1".
The process advances to step S1088, and since the C register value is not "0", it is determined as "No", and the process advances to step S1089.
In step S1089, "1" is subtracted from the B register value. As a result, the B register value becomes "7", which is not "0", so the process returns to step S1085.

In step S1085, the D register value is shifted to the left by "1". Since the carry flag is "1", the determination is "Yes".
Therefore, the process advances to step S1086, and "1" is added to the A register value. As a result, the A register value becomes "1".
In step S1087, "1" is subtracted from the C register value. As a result, the C register value becomes "0".
Proceeding to step S1088, since the C register value is "0", the determination is "Yes", and the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Then, when the process proceeds to step S1053 in FIG. 196, it is determined that the last bit to be checked is on, and the process proceeds to step S1055.
In step S1055, designated address data is set.
Here, the value "1226 (H)" obtained by adding the A register value "1" to the HL register value "1225 (H)" returned from the stack area is set as the HL register value, and the value is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. Store the data in the A register. Therefore, the A register value becomes the data at address "1226(H)", that is, "01000000(B)".

1-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above,
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE): 0 (Bell A)
Symbol that stops on the active line: “Cherry (No. 1)”
shall be.
Also, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) at this point is as described above.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00010000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "01000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
It is.

In this case, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "0" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, symbol combination data "00000001(B)" at address "128E(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000001 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, symbol combination data "00110000(B)" of address "1289(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00110000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, symbol combination data "00000010(B)" of address "127F(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Cherry" does not exist in the 6th symbol group of the middle reel 31 (see address "125F(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("01000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, symbol combination data "01000001(B)" at address "125E(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01000001 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000110(B)" at the address "1259(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000110 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "00011000(B)" at the address "1253(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00011000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) (00010000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00010000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "cherry" does not exist in the second group of symbols on the middle reel 31 (see address "1248 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "cherry" does not exist in the first symbol group of the middle reel 31 (see address "1244(H)").
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the determination is "Yes", so the stop symbol set is ended.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the middle stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00010000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
From the above, when the "Black BAR" stops on the active line when the left reel 31 stops, and when the "Watermelon" stops on the active line when the middle reel 31 stops, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 04. It can be seen that there is a possibility of stopping.

1-3. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped When the right stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above,
Pattern control number (_BF_PICTURE): 2 (Blue BAR)
Symbols that stop on the active line: "Blue BAR (No. 2)"
shall be.
In this case, when the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "2" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the symbol group 9 on the right reel 31 (see address "12DA(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000110(B)" of the address "12D3(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10000110 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "00011010(B)" of the address "12CA(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00011010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000000 (B)" of the address "12C1 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("01000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00110010(B)" at the address "12B7(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00110010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010(B)" at the address "12B1(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000001(B)" at the address "12A7(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000001 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("00010000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the second group of symbols on the right reel 31 (see address "129F(H)").
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the first symbol group of the right reel 31 (see address "1299(H)").
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the determination is "Yes", so the stop symbol set is ended.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the right stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
From the above, when the left reel 31 stops, "Black BAR" stops on the active line, when the middle reel 31 stops, "Watermelon" stops on the active line, and when the right reel 31 stops, "Black BAR" stops on the active line. When the "Blue BAR" stops, it can be seen that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination does not stop on the active line (the winning combination is non-winning).

2. When winning a special role Next, updating of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) when winning a special role will be explained.
In this example, the left stop switch 42 is operated when the winning number "26" is determined as the winning number "26" as a result of the lottery, and the symbol number "16" is passing through the middle row of the left reel 31. Then, the middle stop switch 42 is operated while the symbol with symbol number "5" is passing through the middle row of the middle reel 31, and after that, the symbol with symbol number "7" is passing through the middle row of the right reel 31. If the right stop switch 42 is operated while the player is in the position, RBA will win a prize.
Symbol control number when left reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 16 (Watermelon)
Symbol control number when middle reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 7 (Bell B)
Symbol control number when right reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 8 (Black BAR)
shall each cease.
In this case, the symbol combination on the active line is "Blue BAR (No. 18)" - "Blue BAR (No. 8)" - "Black BAR (No. 8)".
In addition, the initial value of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00001111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000011 (B)"
It is.

2-1. When the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop When the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "16 (D)" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010(B)" at the address "1238(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000011 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000010 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the symbol group 8 on the left reel 31 (see address "1230(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the symbol group 7 on the left reel 31 (see address "122B(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the 6th group of symbols on the left reel 31 (see address "1224(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the symbol group 5 on the left reel 31 (see address "1220(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the 4th symbol group of the left reel 31 (see address "121B(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00001111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, symbol combination data "00000001(B)" at address "1215(H)" is stored in the A register. This means that 1BB exists as a "blue BAR" in the third symbol group on the left reel 31.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000001 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, the symbol combination data "11111111(B)" at the address "1212(H)" is stored in the A register. This means that in the second group of symbols on the left reel 31, RBI to RBP exist as "blue BAR".
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "11111111 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "11111111 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, the symbol combination data "11111111(B)" at the address "120F(H)" is stored in the A register. This means that RBA to RBH exist as "blue BAR" in the first symbol group of the left reel 31.
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "11111111 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "11111111 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the determination is "Yes", so the stop symbol set is ended.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the left stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000001 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000010 (B)"
From the above, when the "Blue BAR" stops on the active line when the left reel 31 stops, there is a possibility that the symbol combinations of symbol group 1 to symbol group 3 and symbol group 9 will stop, but symbol group 4 ~ It can be seen that there is no possibility of stopping the symbol combinations of the 8 symbol groups.

2-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above,
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE): 7 (Bell B)
Symbols that stop on the active line: "Blue BAR (No. 8)"
shall be.
In this case, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "7" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In step S1033 (first time), "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the 9th group of symbols on the middle reel 31 (see address "128B(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000010 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, symbol combination data "00000111(B)" at address "1283(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000111 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, symbol combination data "00010000(B)" of address "1279(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00010000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000000 (B)" at the address "1271 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the 5th symbol group of the middle reel 31 (see address "125A(H)").
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the 4th symbol group of the middle reel 31 (see address "1255(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, symbol combination data "00000011(B)" at address "124E(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000011 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) (00000001 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the second group of symbols on the middle reel 31 (see address "1248(H)").
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001111(B)" at the address "1246(H)" is stored in the A register. This means that in the first group of the middle reel 31, there are RBA to RBD as the "Blue BAR" symbols.
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001111 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00001111 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the determination is "Yes", so the stop symbol set is ended.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the middle stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00001111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000001 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
From the above, when the "Blue BAR" stops on the active line when the left reel 31 stops, and when the "Blue BAR" stops on the active line when the middle reel 31 stops, RBA to RBD and 1BB It can be seen that there is a possibility of stopping the corresponding symbol combination.

2-3. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped When the right stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above,
Pattern control number (_BF_PICTURE): 8 (black BAR)
Symbols that stop on the active line: "Black BAR (No. 8)"
shall be.
In this case, when the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "8" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In step S1033 (first time), symbol combination data "00000001(B)" at address "12DC(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000001 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, symbol combination data "00010001(B)" of address "12D4(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00010001 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "01100000(B)" of the address "12CB(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01100000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001100(B)" of the address "12C2(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001100 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000000 (B)" at the address "12B8 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "01000000(B)" at the address "12A8(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("00000001 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00011111(B)" of the address "12A1(H)" is stored in the A register. This means that in the second group of symbols on the right reel 31, there are RBI to RBM as "black BAR" symbols.
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00011111 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, symbol combination data "00010001(B)" of address "129B(H)" is stored in the A register. This means that RBA or RBE exists in the first group of symbols on the right reel 31 as a "black BAR" symbol.
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00010001 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00001111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. )(_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000001(B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the determination is "Yes", so the stop symbol set is ended.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the right stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000001 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
From the above, when the left reel 31 stops, the "Blue BAR" stops on the active line, when the middle reel 31 stops, the "Blue BAR" stops on the active line, and when the right reel 31 stops, the "Blue BAR" stops on the active line. When the "black BAR" stops, it can be seen that the symbol combination corresponding to the RBA stops on the active line.

3. When winning a prize in a replay Next, updating of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) when winning a prize in a replay will be explained.
In this example, the left stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol number "11" is passing through the middle row of the left reel 31 in a game in which the winning number "1" is determined as a result of the lottery. After that, the middle stop switch 42 is operated while the symbol number "5" is passing through the middle row of the middle reel 31, and after that, the symbol number "2" is passing through the middle row of the right reel 31. Replay 01 will win if the right stop switch 42 is operated when
Symbol control number when left reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 13 (red 7)
Symbol control number when middle reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 7 (Bell B)
Symbol control number when right reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 4 (Bell A)
shall each cease.
In this case, the symbol combination on the active line is "Replay (No. 15)" - "Blue BAR (No. 8)" - "Bell A (No. 4)".
In addition, the initial value of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00001111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000011 (B)"
It is.

3-1. When the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop When the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "13 (D)" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000011 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "11000001 (B)" at the address "1233 (H)" is stored in the A register. This means that in the group of 8 symbols on the left reel 31, there are small winnings 25, 31, and 32 as winnings having "replay" symbols.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "11000001 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "11000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "11001100(B)" at the address "122E(H)" is stored in the A register. This means that in the group of 7 symbols on the left reel 31, there are small winnings 19, 20, 23, and 24 as winnings having "replay" symbols.
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "11001100 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) at the address indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "11001100 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10100000(B)" at the address "1228(H)" is stored in the A register. This means that in the group of 6 symbols on the left reel 31, the small winning combination 14 and the small winning combination 16 exist as winning combinations having "replay" symbols.
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10100000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) at the address indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "10100000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) at the address indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, symbol combination data "00000100(B)" of address "121D(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000100 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) (00001111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000100 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000110 (B)" at the address "1217 (H)" is stored in the A register. This means that in the symbol group 3 on the left reel 31, Replay 01, Replay 02, and Replay 07 exist as combinations having the "Replay" symbol.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10000110 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "10000110 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the determination is "Yes", so the stop symbol set is ended.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the left stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "10000110 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000100 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "10100000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "11001100 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "11000001 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"

3-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above,
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE): 7 (Bell B)
Symbols that stop on the active line: "Blue BAR (No. 8)"
shall be.
In this case, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "7" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the 9th group of symbols on the middle reel 31 (see address "128B(H)").
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, symbol combination data "00000111(B)" at address "1283(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000111 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("11000001 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "00010000(B)" at the address "1279(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00010000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("11001100 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000000 (B)" at the address "1271 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("10100000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "10000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the 5th symbol group of the middle reel 31 (see address "125A(H)").
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the 4th symbol group of the middle reel 31 (see address "1255 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) ("00000100 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000011(B)" at the address "124E(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000011 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("10000110 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000010 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "Blue BAR" does not exist in the second group of symbols on the middle reel 31 (see address "1248 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001111(B)" at the address "1246(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001111 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00001111 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the determination is "Yes", so the stop symbol set is ended.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the middle stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000010 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "10000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000001 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
Therefore, at the time of the second stop, the winning combinations that have the possibility of winning are Replay 01, Minor Prize 16, and Minor Prize 25.

3-3. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped When the right stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above,
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE): 4 (Bell A)
Symbol that stops on the active line: “Bell A (No. 4)”
shall be.
In this case, when the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "4" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010(B)" at the address "12DE(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001000(B)" of the address "12D7(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00000001 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001100(B)" of the address "12C4(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001100 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("10000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001101(B)" at the address "12BA(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001101 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "10100010(B)" at the address "12AB(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10100010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("00000010 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000010 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. )(_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000(B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the determination is "Yes", so the stop symbol set is ended.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the right stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000010 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
From the above, "Replay" stops on the active line when the left reel 31 stops, "Blue BAR" stops on the active line when the middle reel 31 stops, and "Replay" stops on the active line when the right reel 31 stops. It can be seen that when "Bell A" stops, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 01 stops on the active line.

Next, in order to explain "4. When winning a small winning combination (when pressing order bell is correct when pressing order bell is won)", reel stop control when pressing order bell is winning will be explained.
Here, an example will be explained in which the winning number "10" is determined as a result of the lottery.
In the 23rd embodiment cited in the 25th embodiment, when the push order bell (winning numbers "10" to "21") is won, the small role is won with "PB = 1" and there is no loss. It is set as follows.
Generally, the following methods can be used to control the stoppage of the reels 31 when a plurality of small winning combinations with different payout numbers, such as the winning number "10", are won repeatedly.
As a first priority, if all the symbols (on the reel 31) constituting the winning symbol combination can be stopped on the active line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.

Next, when it is not possible to stop all the symbols constituting the winning symbol combination on the active line (when the first priority cannot be adopted), the second priority is "quantity priority" or " The reels 31 are controlled to stop by either "Number Priority".
Here, "priority on the number of pieces" means to give priority to the symbol on the reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts out of the symbol combinations of the winning combinations that have been won twice, and to stop (draw) it on the active line. means. Therefore, when the winning number "10" is won, the small winning combination 01 corresponds to the symbol combination with the largest number of paid out pieces (15 pieces).
On the other hand, "number priority" means that the symbols on the reel 31 are stopped on the active line so that the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped on the active line is maximized.
In this embodiment, since the number of active lines is one, it is not possible to stop the symbol combinations corresponding to all winning roles on the active line (first priority), so the number of winning combinations cannot be stopped on the active line (first priority). 31 is stopped.
When the pressing order bell is won, if the pressing order is correct, the reel 31 is controlled to stop with priority given to the number of pieces, and when the pressing order is incorrect, the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped with priority given to the number of pieces.

In the game when the small win A1 condition device is activated (during the 1BB game), when the first stop is on the left, the pressing order is correct at this point, so "Watermelon" is stopped on the active line (upper row). As shown in FIG. 114, the "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 is arranged in 4 pieces at 5 symbol intervals (hereinafter referred to as "PB=1" arrangement), so the left stop switch 42 is operated at any timing. Even if the watermelon is set to 1, the watermelon can be stopped at the upper stage by setting PB=1.

Next, when it is the middle second stop, the pressing order is correct at this point, so "cherry" is stopped at the effective line (middle stage). As shown in FIG. 114, since the "cherry" on the middle reel 31 is arranged in "PB=1", no matter which timing the middle stop switch 42 is operated, "PB=1" will cause the "cherry" to be placed in the middle row. can be stopped.
Furthermore, when it is the third stop on the right, the pressing order is correct, so "Bell A" is stopped at the effective line (lower row). As shown in FIG. 114, "Bell A" on the right reel 31 is arranged in "PB=1", so no matter which timing the right stop switch 42 is operated, "PB=1" and "Bell A" can be stopped at the bottom.

On the other hand, when the first stop on the left is followed by the second stop on the right, the pressing order is incorrect at this point, so the symbol on the left reel 31 is "Watermelon" and it is included in the small win A1 condition device. Any of the winning combinations (excluding the minor combination 01) is stopped on the active line.
As shown in FIG. 124, the winning combinations (excluding the small combination 01) included in the small combination A1 condition device are as follows:
Small role 13: "Red 7" - "Bell A" - "Bell A/Bell B"
Small role 14: "Replay" - "Bell A" - "Bell A/Bell B"
Small role 15: "Black BAR" - "Bell A" - "Bell B"
Small role 16: "Replay" - "Blue BAR / Black BAR / Red 7 / Special map top" - "Blue BAR"
Small role 17: "Watermelon" - "Red 7/Replay" - "Replay"
It is.

Therefore, the small winning combination 17 whose symbol on the left reel 31 is "Watermelon" is stopped.
As shown in FIG. 114, "Replay" on the right reel 31 is arranged in "PB=1", so no matter when the right stop switch 42 is operated, "PB=1" and "Replay" on the lower row are arranged. can be stopped.
Furthermore, when the middle third stop occurs, "Red 7/Replay" is stopped on the effective line (middle stage). As shown in FIG. 114, "Replay" on the middle reel 31 is arranged in "PB=1", so no matter when the middle stop switch 42 is operated, "PB=1" and "Replay" on the middle reel are arranged. An example of this is to specify that the "replay" is to be stopped at the effective line. Therefore, the small winning combination 17 can be won. Incidentally, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at a timing when "Red 7" can be stopped at the effective line, it is of course possible to stop "Red 7" at the effective line.

On the other hand, in a game when the small role A1 condition device is activated (during 1BB game), if the first stop is in the middle, the pressing order will be incorrect at this point, so the small role will be on the active line (middle stage). Any of the symbols related to 13 to 17 of small winning combinations is stopped. In this case, "Bell A" is stopped on the valid line by executing the number priority. "Bell A" on the middle reel 31 is arranged in "PB=1", so no matter what timing the middle stop switch 42 is operated, "PB=1" will stop "Bell A" in the middle row. can.
Next, when the second stop is on the left, one each of "Red 7", "Replay", and "Black BAR" are provided, so there is no superiority or inferiority, and any one can be determined. Therefore, the "replay" with the "PB=1" arrangement is stopped at the effective line (upper row).
Next, at the third stop on the right, "Bell A/Bell B" is stopped at the effective line (lower stage). Regarding the right reel 31, since both "Bell A" and "Bell B" are arranged in "PB=1", either one may be stopped.

On the other hand, when it is the second stop on the right after the middle first stop, "Bell B" is stopped at the lower stage based on quantity priority. As described above, “Bell B” on the right reel 31 is arranged in “PB=1”.
Further, at the third stop on the left, either "Red 7", "Replay" or "Black BAR" is stopped. For example, it may be determined that a "replay" with a "PB=1" arrangement is to be stopped. In addition, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at a timing when "Red 7" or "Black BAR" can be stopped on the effective line, "Red 7" or "Black BAR" may be stopped on the effective line, respectively. Of course.

In addition, in a game when the small win A1 condition device is activated (during a 1BB game), if the first stop is on the right, the pressing order will be incorrect at this point, so the active line (lower row) will have the small win 13~ Any of the symbols related to the small winning combination 17 is stopped. In this case, "Bell B" is stopped on the valid line by executing the number priority.
Next, when it is the second stop on the left, either "Red 7", "Replay" or "Black BAR" is stopped. In this case, similarly to the above, it may be determined that the "replay" in the "PB=1" arrangement is to be stopped at the effective line (upper row).
Then, at the middle third stop, "Bell A" is stopped at the effective line (middle stage).
On the other hand, when it is the second middle stop after the first right stop, "Bell A" is stopped at the effective line (middle stage).
Next, at the third stop on the left, either "Red 7", "Replay" or "Black BAR" is stopped. In this case, similarly to the above, it may be determined that the "replay" in the "PB=1" arrangement is to be stopped at the effective line (upper row).

As mentioned above, when the small role A1 condition device is activated during 1BB gaming,
Press order 123: Small role 01 prize (15 pieces)
Press order 132: Small role 17 prizes (3 pieces)
Press order 213: Small role 14 prizes (3 pieces)
Press order 231: Small role 14 prizes (3 pieces)
Press order 312: Small role 14 prizes (3 pieces)
Press order 321: Small role 14 prizes (3 pieces)
becomes.

Furthermore, when the winning number "10" is won during a normal game (during a non-special game), there is no correct pressing order, so the reels 31 are controlled to stop based on number priority.
For example, if you win the winning number "10" during a normal game and the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "123", at the first stop on the left, the "Replay" will be stopped at the active line (upper row) due to number of pieces priority. let
Next, at the time of the middle second stop, either "Bell A" or "Blue BAR/Black BAR/Red 7/Top Top" is stopped. Here, if you stop "Blue BAR/Black BAR/Red 7/Special Map Top" related to small winning combination 16 on the active line, when the right reel 31 stops, "Blue BAR" will be placed in "PB≠1". Therefore, there is a possibility that it may not be possible to stop on the effective line. Therefore, at the middle second stop, "Bell A" is stopped at the effective line (middle stage).
Next, at the third stop on the right, "Bell A/Bell B" is stopped at the effective line (lower stage). This results in a prize of 14 small winnings.

4. When winning a small role (when the pressing order is correct when winning the pressing order bell)
Next, updating of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) at the time of stop operation of each stop switch 42 when a small winning combination is won will be explained.
In this example, in FIG. 124, the winning number "10" is won during a 1BB game, and in a game in which the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, the stop switch is operated with the correct pressing order "123", and the winning number is 15 pieces. It is assumed that the small role 01 wins.
In addition, the left stop switch 42 is operated while the symbol with symbol number "8" is passing through the middle row of the left reel 31, and after that, the symbol with symbol number "8" is passing through the middle row of the middle reel 31. When the middle stop switch 42 was operated, and then when the symbol with symbol number "2" was passing through the middle stage of the right reel 31, the right stop switch 42 was operated.
Symbol control number when left reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 9 (Bell A)
Symbol control number when middle reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 10 (Bell A)
Symbol control number when right reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 4 (Bell A)
shall each cease.
In this case, the symbol combination on the active line is "Watermelon (No. 11)" - "Cherry (No. 11)" - "Bell A (No. 4)".
In addition, the initial value of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00001111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000011 (B)"
It is.

4-1. When the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop When the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "9 (D)" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000011 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "00011010(B)" at the address "1234(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00011010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00011010(B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, symbol combination data "00000011(B)" of address "122F(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000011 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000011 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, symbol combination data "00000010(B)" of address "122A(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) at the address indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000010 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, symbol combination data ``11001011(B)'' of address 1223(H)'' is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "11001011 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) at the address indicated by the HL register value (initial value is "11111111 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "11001011 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) (00001111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, symbol combination data "01000000(B)" of address "1219(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "01000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the determination is "Yes", so the stop symbol set is ended.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the left stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "01000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "11001011 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000010 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000011 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00011010 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"

4-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above,
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE): 10 (Bell A)
Symbol that stops on the active line: "Cherry (No. 11)"
shall be.
In this case, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "10 (D)" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, symbol combination data "00000001(B)" at address "128E(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000001 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, symbol combination data "00110000(B)" of address "1289(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00110000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00011010 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00010000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, symbol combination data "00000010(B)" of address "127F(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000011 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000010 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("00000010 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, symbol combination data "01000001(B)" of address "125E(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01000001 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("11001011 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "01000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000110(B)" at the address "1259(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000110 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, symbol combination data "00011000(B)" of address "1253(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00011000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("01000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the determination is "Yes", so the stop symbol set is ended.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the middle stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "01000001 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000010 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00010000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
Therefore, at the time of the second stop operation, the winning combinations that have a winning possibility are the small winning combination 01, the small winning combination 07, the small winning combination 18, and the small winning combination 29.

4-3. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped When the right stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above,
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE): 4 (Bell A)
Symbol that stops on the active line: “Bell A (No. 4)”
shall be.
In this case, when the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "4" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010(B)" at the address "12DE(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001000(B)" of the address "12D7(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00010000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000010 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001100(B)" of the address "12C4(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001100 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001101(B)" of the address "12BA(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00001101 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("01000001 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "10100010(B)" of the address "12AB(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10100010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. )(_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000(B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the determination is "Yes", so the stop symbol set is ended.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the right stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000001 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
From the above, when the left reel 31 stops, "Watermelon" stops on the active line, when the middle reel 31 stops, "Cherry" stops on the active line, and when the right reel 31 stops, "Bell" stops on the active line. It can be seen that when "A" stops, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 01 stops on the active line.

5. When winning a small role (when the pressing order is incorrect when winning the pressing order bell)
In this example, in FIG. 124, the winning number "10" is determined during the general game of the 1BB game, and in the game in which the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, the stop switch is operated in the incorrect release order "321", and the above-mentioned As in the example, it is assumed that the symbol combination "Replay" - "Bell A" - "Bell B" of the small winning combination 14, which is a three-card winning combination, wins.
Also, the left stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol with symbol number "1" is passing through the middle row of the left reel 31, and when the symbol with symbol number "7" is passing through the middle row of the middle reel 31. The middle stop switch 42 is operated, and the right stop switch 42 is operated while the symbol with symbol number "19" is passing through the middle row of the right reel 31 (the order of pressing is right → middle → left).
Symbol control number when left reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 3 (Black BAR)
Symbol control number when middle reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 9 (replay)
Symbol control number when right reel 31 stops (_BF_PICTURE): 0 (Bell B)
shall each cease.
In this case, the symbol combination on the active line is "Replay (No. 5)" - "Bell A (No. 10)" - "Bell B (No. 0)".
In addition, the initial value of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00001111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000011 (B)"
It is.

5-1. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped When the right stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above,
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE): 0 (Bell B)
Symbols that stop on the active line: “Bell B (number 0)”
shall be.
In this case, when the right stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "0" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000011 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, symbol combination data "01110011(B)" of address "12C5(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "0" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("11111111(B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "01110011 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, symbol combination data "01000000(B)" of address "12BB(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "01000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, symbol combination data "00000100(B)" of address "12B3(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000100 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) ("0001111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000100 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "00011000(B)" of the address "12AC(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00011000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00011000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("11111111 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. )(_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000(B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the determination is "Yes", so the stop symbol set is ended.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the right stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00011000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000100 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "01000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "01110011 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"

5-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped When the middle reel 31 is stopped, as described above,
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE): 9 (Replay)
Symbols that stop on the active line: “Bell A (No. 10)”
shall be.
In this case, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "8 (D)" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, symbol combination data "00000010(B)" of address "128D(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000010 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "11000000 (B)" at the address "1286 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "11000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "01100100(B)" of the address "127D(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01100100 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, symbol combination data "01111011(B)" of address "1275(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "01111011 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("01110011 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "01110011 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, symbol combination data "10101110(B)" of address "125D(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10101110 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("01000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) ("00000100 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("00011000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the determination is "Yes", so the stop symbol set is ended.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the middle stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "01110011 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"

5-3. When the left stop switch 42 is stopped When the left stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above,
Pattern control number (_BF_PICTURE): 3 (black BAR)
Symbols that stop on the active line: "Replay (No. 5)"
shall be.
In this case, when the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "3 (D)" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In step S1033 (first time), "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BF(H)" (address of stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "11000001 (B)" at the address "1233 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "11000001 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "11001100(B)" at the address "122E(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD(H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "11001100 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10100000(B)" at the address "1228(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC(H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10100000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("01110011 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00100000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BB(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, symbol combination data "00000100(B)" of address "121D(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BA(H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000100 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000110 (B)" at the address "1217 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10000110 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00000000 (B)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and the determination is "Yes", so the stop symbol set is ended.

Through the above processing, the stop symbol data when the left stop switch 42 is stopped is as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00100000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000 (B)"
Therefore, the data indicates that the small winning combination 14 has won.

By determining the stop symbol data as described above, even if a power outage occurs, the game can be restarted correctly using the already stored stop symbol data after recovering from the power outage.
For example, as shown in FIG. 194, when it is decided to determine the stop position ("Yes" in step S1017), the stop position is determined and the stop symbol data is updated (step S1035 in FIG. 195). ) (the stop symbol set in step S1024 in FIG. 194) is completed. Even if a voltage of 12V is applied, the interrupt processing is not executed (by the interrupt wait processing), so the determination of the stop position and the stopping The symbol data is updated. Therefore, even if the power-off process is executed after the process and the reels 31 do not stop at the determined stop position, the stop symbol data has already been updated, so when the power is restored afterwards, Normal payout processing can be executed.

Furthermore, even if a plurality of stop switches 42 are operated at the same time in a situation where all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, only one stop switch 42 will be operated. When it is decided to determine the position ("Yes" in step S1017 in FIG. 194), the process including determining the stop position and updating the stop symbol data (step S1035 in FIG. 195) (FIG. 194) Even if the reel 31 does not stop at the determined stop position when the voltage drops to a level at which the power-off process is executed until the stop symbol set in step S1024 is completed, the reel 31 Since there is only one reel 31, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a plurality of reels 31 do not stop at the determined stop position.

Furthermore, even if, for example, a power outage occurs after the stop switch 42 corresponding to the left reel 31 is operated under a situation where all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, and the power outage process is executed. , Since the stop symbol data has been updated, after the power is restored, the stop symbol data is updated based on the stop operation of the middle reel 31 and the stop operation of the right reel 31 using the stop symbol data before the power cut. update can be resumed (games can be resumed).

Generally, the data that can be held in one register is 1 byte data, and there are seven types of general-purpose registers that can be used in the 1-chip microprocessor (Z80) of the gaming machine (main control board 50). In this way, in order to hold symbol combination data having a number of stopped symbol data exceeding the types of general-purpose registers (nine in this embodiment), it is necessary to store the stopped symbol data in the RWM 53. be.
If the stop symbol data is stored in the general-purpose register, if the power is cut off and then the power is restored, the stop symbol data (the value stored in the general-purpose register) will be cleared (set to the initial value). (For example, it is set to "0".) For this reason, when the stop symbol data is stored in the general-purpose register, for example, if the power is cut off after the stop switch 42 corresponding to the left reel 31 is operated and the power cut-off process is executed, after the power is restored, , there is a high possibility that the game will not be able to be resumed.
Furthermore, when the stop symbol data is stored in the RWM 53, the stop symbol data is updated each time the stop switch 42 is operated. This can be confirmed by inspecting the stopped symbol data.

As described above, when a symbol combination that stops on the active line is specified, the number of payouts is determined based on the stopped symbol data.
FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing one line display determination (M_LINE_JUDGE). This process is executed after all reels 31 have stopped and before the payout process. For example, this corresponds to the process of step S291 in FIG. 139.
Through this process, the payout number is determined from the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC).
In FIG. 200, in step S1101, a payout number table is set. This process is a process of storing the top address "1400 (H)" of the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) shown in FIG. 193 in the HL register.

Next, the process advances to step S1102, and the stop symbol data 5 ("5" means the fifth group) RWM address is set. This process is a process of storing the address "F0BB(H)" of the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) in the DE register.
In this embodiment, there is no combination that has a payout at the time of winning in the stopped symbol data (first group) to the stopped symbol data (fourth group), and there is no combination that has a payout at the time of winning. Only in group 9) there is a combination that has a payout when winning. Therefore, in order to determine whether any bit of the stop symbol data (fifth group) to stop symbol data (ninth group) is "1", the stop symbol data (fifth group) is set as an initial value. group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5).

Next, the process advances to step S1103, and specified data acquisition (M_SELDAT_SET) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 201, which will be described later, and is a process of specifying specified data corresponding to the number of payouts from the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL).
Next, the process advances to step S1104, and data on the number of coins to be paid out is saved. Here, at the end of the process in step S1103, a value corresponding to the number of coins to be paid out is stored in the A register. Therefore, this process is a process of storing the A register value in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at address "F023(H)".
Next, the process advances to step S1105, and the payout number buffer is saved. This process is a process of storing the A register value in the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) at address "F024(H)". Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing specified data acquisition (M_SELDAT_SET) in step S1103 in FIG. For reference, FIG. 201 also shows the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) shown in FIG. 193.
In FIG. 201, in step S1111, the number of inspections is set. This process is a process of storing data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the B register. The HL register value is "1400 (H)" and the data stored at the address "1400 (H)" is "6 (H)", so "6 (H)" is stored in the B register. Ru.
When inspecting the number of dispensed sheets,
1st time: 15 pieces of stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) (11111111 (B))
2nd time: 15 pieces of stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) (00001111 (B))
3rd time: 3-piece combination of stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) (11110000 (B))
4th time: Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) 3-piece combination (11111111 (B))
5th time: 1 piece of stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) (11111111 (B))
6th time: 1 piece of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) (00000011 (B))
The number of inspections is set to ``6'' because the inspection is performed a maximum of 6 times.

In the next step S1112, the table address is updated. In this process, "1" is added to the HL register value, and the value after adding "1" is set as the HL register value. As a result, the HL register value becomes "1401 (H)".
Next, the process advances to step S1113 and table data is acquired. This process is a process of storing data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register. In the first step S1113, the HL register value is "1401(H)", so the data stored at address "1401(H)" is "0*32+15" (actually, "00001111(B )'') is stored in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S1114, and the A register value is divided by "32(D)". Then, the quotient is stored in the A register and the remainder is stored in the C register. As a result, the first time, the A register value is "0" and the C register value is "15 (D)". This C register value corresponds to the number of coins to be paid out when there is a winning combination.

Next, the process advances to step S1115 and RWM data is acquired. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the DE register value (address value of stopped symbol data) to the A register, and let the result of the addition be the DE register value.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the DE register value in the A register.
Therefore, in the first step S1115, the DE register value is "F0BB(H)" stored in step S1102 in FIG. 200, and the A register value is "0", so the DE register value after addition is It is “F0BB(H)”.
Next, if the data (stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) stored at the address indicated by "F0BB(H)" is, for example, "00000001(B)", the A register value is "00000001(B)". )”.

Next, the process advances to step S1116 and the table address is updated. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add "1" to the HL register value, and use the result after adding "1" as the HL register value. In the first step S1116, the HL register value before this process is "1401 (H)", so by adding "1", the HL register value becomes "1402 (H)".
(2) Perform an AND (logical product) between the A register value and the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. If the result of the AND operation is "0", the zero flag becomes "1", and if it is not "0", the zero flag does not become "1".
Here, the value "@_PIC5" stored at the address "1402(H)" corresponds to a value in which all bits of the stop symbol data (fifth group) are set to "1" (see FIG. 176). Therefore, by ANDing this value and the A register value (actual value of stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)), it can be determined whether any of the winning combinations in the 5th group has won. It becomes possible.

Next, the process advances to step S1117 to set acquired data. This process is a process of storing the C register value in the A register.
In the next step S1118, it is determined whether there is designated data. Here, if the zero flag is not "1" (as a result of the calculation in step S1116), it is determined that designated data exists. When it is determined that there is designated data, the process according to this flowchart is ended, and when it is determined that there is no designated data, the process advances to step S1119.

In step S1119, it is determined whether the number of tests has been completed. In this process, if the result of subtracting "1" from the B register value is not "0", it is determined as "No" (the number of tests is completed and not performed). When it is determined that the number of tests has been completed, the process advances to step S1120, and when it is determined that the number of tests has not been completed, the process returns to step S1112.
In step S1120, no acquired data is set. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the A register value. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
Here, when the process advances to step S1120, the number of tests has been completed, so the B register value is "0". Therefore, the A register value becomes "0". This A register value corresponds to the number of coins to be paid out. In this way, when a symbol combination with no payout number is displayed in a stopped state, it is possible to store the payout number data by using the data "0" for the number of tests.

Next, the one-line display determination shown in FIG. 200 will be explained using a specific example.
In this example, it is assumed that the small winning combination 19 has won (the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 19 has stopped).
Therefore, before the 1-line display judgment is executed,
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): 00000000 (B)
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): 00000000 (B)
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): 00000100 (B)
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): 00000000 (B)
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): 00000000 (B)
It becomes.
In addition, even if the symbol combination actually stopped on the active line is different from the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 19 due to a malfunction of the motor 32 or a power cut, the stopped symbol data (7th group) ( Since the data stored in _WK_STOP_PIC7) is "00000100 (B)", payout control corresponding to the small winning combination 19 can be executed.

In this case, in step S1101 (set payout number table) in FIG. 200, "1400 (H)" is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1102 (stop symbol data 5RWM address set), "F0BB (H)" is stored in the DE register value.
When the process proceeds to step S1103 (obtain specified data), the process proceeds to step S1111 (set number of inspections) in FIG. 201, and "6" is stored in the B register value.
In the next step S1112 (table address update), the HL register value is updated to "1401 (H)".
In the next step S1113 (table data acquisition), data "15(D)" stored at address "1401(H)" is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1114 (division), the A register value "15 (D)" is divided by "32 (D)", the quotient "0" is stored in the A register, and the remainder "15 (D)" is stored in the C register. to be memorized.
In the next step S1115 (RWM data acquisition), the A register value "0" is added to the DE register value "F0BB(H)", so the DE register value remains "F0BB(H)".
Next, the data (stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) "00000000 (B)" stored at the address "F0BB (H)" is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1116 (table address update), the HL register value is updated to "1402 (H)".
Furthermore, AND (logical product) is performed between the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the value "11111111 (B)" stored at the address indicated by the HL register value "1402 (H)". As a result, the zero flag becomes "1".
In step S1117 (obtained data set), the C register value "15 (D)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1118 (specified data available?), since the zero flag is "1", it is determined as "No", and the process advances to step S1119.
In step S1119 (Is the number of tests completed?), "1" is subtracted from the B register value and updated to "5". Since the B register value is not "0", the determination is "No" and the process returns to step S1112.

In step S1112 (second time) (table address update), the HL register value is set to "1403 (H)".
In the next step S1113 (table data acquisition), data "47(D)" stored at address "1403(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1114 (division), the A register value "47 (D)" is divided by "32 (D)". As a result, the quotient "1 (D)" is stored in the A register, and the remainder "15 (D)" is stored in the C register.
In step S1115 (RWM data acquisition), the A register value "1 (H)" is added to the DE register value "F0BB (H)" to set the DE register value to "F0BC (H)".
Then, the data stored in "F0BC(H)" (data "00000000(B)" of stop symbol data (sixth group)) is stored in the A register.

In step S1116 (table address update), the HL register value is updated to "1404 (H)".
Further, the A register value "00000000(B)" and the value "00001111(B)" stored at the address "1404(H)" indicated by the HL register value are ANDed. As a result, the zero flag becomes "1".
In step S1117 (obtained data set), the C register value "15 (D)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1118 (specified data available?), since the zero flag is "1", it is determined as "No", and the process advances to step S1119.
In step S1119 (Is the number of tests completed?), the B register value is subtracted by "1" and updated to "4". Since the B register value is not "0", the determination is "No" and the process returns to step S1112.

In step S1112 (third time) (table address update), the HL register value is updated to "1405 (H)".
In the next step S1113 (table data acquisition), data "3(D)" stored at address "1405(H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1114 (division), "3(D)" is divided by "32(D)". As a result, the quotient "0" is stored in the A register, and the remainder "3(D)" is stored in the C register.
In step S1115 (RWM data acquisition), the A register value "0(H)" is added to the DE register value "F0BC(H)" to set the DE register value to "F0BC(H)".
Then, the data stored in "F0BC(H)" (data "00000000(B)" of stop symbol data (sixth group)) is stored in the A register.

In step S1116 (table address update), the HL register value is updated to "1406 (H)".
Further, the A register value "00000000 (B)" and the value "11110000 (B)" stored at the address "1406 (H)" indicated by the HL register value are ANDed. As a result, the zero flag becomes "1".
In step S1117, the C register value "3(D)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1118, since the zero flag is "1", the determination is "No", and the process advances to step S1119.
In step S1119, the B register value is subtracted by "1" and updated to "3". Since the B register value is not "0", the determination is "No" and the process returns to step S1112.

In step S1112 (fourth time) (table address update), the HL register value is updated to "1407 (H)".
In the next step S1113 (table data acquisition), data "35 (D)" stored at address "1407 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1114 (division), "35(D)" is divided by "32(D)". As a result, the quotient "1" is stored in the A register, and the remainder "3 (D)" is stored in the C register.
In step S1115 (RWM data acquisition), the A register value "1 (H)" is added to the DE register value "F0BC (H)" to set the DE register value to "F0BD (H)".
Then, the data stored in "F0BD(H)" (data "00000100(B)" of stop symbol data (seventh group)) is stored in the A register.

In step S1116 (table address update), the HL register value is updated to "1408 (H)".
Further, the A register value "00000100 (B)" and the value "11111111 (B)" stored at the address "1408 (H)" indicated by the HL register value are ANDed (logical product). As a result, the zero flag becomes "0".
In step S1117, the C register value "3(D)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1118, since the zero flag is "0", it is determined that designated data exists, and the process advances to step S1104 in FIG. 200. Note that, at this point, "3(D)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1104 in FIG. 200, the A register value "3 (D)" is stored in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at the address "F023 (H)".
In the next step S1105, the A register value "3 (D)" is stored in the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) at address "F024 (H)".
Through the above processing, when the small winning combination 17 is won, the payout number "3 (D)" is stored in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) and the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL).

As described above, first, it is determined whether any of the symbol combinations that make up the 15-card winning combination is stopped and displayed, and it is determined that any of the symbol combinations that make up the 15-card winning combination are not stopped and displayed. If so, then it is determined whether any symbol combination constituting a three-card combination has been stopped and displayed. In addition, in the above example, it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning combination 19 that forms the 3-card winning combination is stopped and displayed, so that the subsequent processing is not executed. If it is determined that any of the symbol combinations to be played is not stopped and displayed, then it is determined whether any of the symbol combinations constituting the one-card winning combination are stopped and displayed.
On the other hand, it is determined whether any of the symbol combinations making up the 15-card winning combination has been stopped and displayed, and if it is determined that any of the symbol combinations making up the 15-card winning combination has been stopped and displayed, the 3-card winning combination is displayed. It is not determined whether any of the constituent symbol combinations are stopped and displayed. With this configuration, processing time can be shortened.

In addition, whether or not any of the symbol combinations constituting the 15-piece combination is displayed in a stopped state can be determined using the two addresses of the stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) and the stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6). The judgment is made based on the data (however, for the stop symbol data (sixth group), some bit data of the address). In this way, if symbol combination data that gives the same number of payouts cannot be stored in one address, by arranging consecutive addresses, it is possible to continuously check whether there is symbol combination data that pays out, for example, 15 pieces. You can make a judgment. In other words, between the stopped symbol data (fifth group) and the stopped symbol data (sixth group), there is an address for storing symbol combination data constituting a 3-card winning combination and symbol combination data constituting a 1-card winning combination. has not been established.

Furthermore, since the bits are consecutive for the same number of payouts at the same address, for example, if the bit for a 15-card winning combination is "X" and the bit for a 3-card winning combination is "Y", then "XXXYYXXX (B) '', the bit "Y" is not placed between multiple bits "X". If the bit "X" for a 15-card hand and the bit "Y" for a 3-card hand are placed in the same address, they would be arranged as, for example, "XXXXXXYYY(B)" or "YYYXXXXXX(B)". .
By arranging the bits in this way, it is possible to prevent errors in the number of coins to be paid out during the development stage.
Further, by making a judgment based on the symbol combinations that result in a large number of payout pieces, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. For example, although the winning number is actually determined to be "10" and the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 01 is stopped and displayed, due to noise, not only the bit corresponding to the small winning combination 01 but also the bit corresponding to the small winning combination 25 is displayed. Even if the corresponding bit is also "1", when judging from the symbol combination with a large number of payouts, the number of payouts will be determined when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to minor winning combination 01 is stopped and displayed. Since this ends, 15 pieces corresponding to the small winning combination 01 can be paid out.

FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing RB operation management in the twenty-fifth embodiment. This process corresponds to step S944 in FIG. 148 (23rd embodiment). As shown in FIG. 148, in the game completion check process (M_GAME_CHK), if the RB operation state flag is not "0"("No" in step S943), RB operation management is executed.
In the example shown in FIG. 202, the number of winnings during RB operation is updated based on the stopped symbol data.
In FIG. 202, in step S1201, it is determined whether the RB is in operation. Here, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is "1", and when it is "1", it is determined that the RB is in operation. When it is determined that the RB is in operation, the process advances to step S1201, and when it is determined that the RB is not in operation, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S1202, "1" is subtracted from the number of games played when the RB is activated. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the number of games played during RB operation (_CT_BONUS_PLAY).
In the next step S1203, it is determined whether the number of games played during the RB operation is "0". In this process, it is determined whether or not the zero flag has become "1" in the process of step S1202, and when the zero flag is "1", it means that the number of games during the RB operation has become "0".
If the number of games played during RB operation is not "0", the process advances to step S1204, and if it is "0", the process advances to step S1211.

In the next step S1204, it is determined whether the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) is "0". If it is "0", the process advances to step S1205, and if it is not "0", the process advances to step S1209.
In step S1205, it is determined whether the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) is "0". If it is "0", the process advances to step S1206, and if it is not "0", the process advances to step S1209.
In the next step S1206, it is determined whether the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) is "0". If it is "0", the process advances to step S1207, and if it is not "0", the process advances to step S1209.
In step S1207, it is determined whether the stop symbol data (eighth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) is "0". If it is "0", the process advances to step S1208, and if it is not "0", the process advances to step S1209.
Next, in step S1208, it is determined whether the stop symbol data (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) is "0". If it is not "0", the process advances to step S1209, and if it is "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S1209, "1" is subtracted from the number of winnings during RB operation. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the number of winnings (_CT_BONUS_WIN) during RB operation.
Next, the process advances to step S1210, and it is determined whether the number of winnings during the RB operation has become "0". In this process, it is determined whether or not the zero flag has become "1" in the process of step S1209, and when the zero flag is "1", it means that the number of winnings during the RB operation has become "0".
If the number of winnings during RB operation is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended, and if it is "0", the process advances to step S1211.

When the process advances to step S1211, the RB operation state flag is cleared because the RB operation termination condition is satisfied. This process is a process of setting the D4 bit of the operating state flag to "0". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
As described above, when updating the number of winnings during RB operation, it is possible to update using the stopped symbol data (fifth group) to stopped symbol data (ninth group). If any of the stopped symbol data (fifth group) to stopped symbol data (ninth group) is not "0", it means that a winning combination (in this embodiment, any of the minor winning combinations 01 to 34) that has a payout has been won. This is because the condition for updating the number of winnings when RB is activated is satisfied.

<26th embodiment>
The twenty-sixth embodiment shows a modification of the twenty-fifth embodiment.
Furthermore, in the 26th embodiment, the symbol arrangement, the type of winning combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination, the payout number corresponding to the winning combination, and the definition data (FIGS. 176 to 179) are the same as in the 25th embodiment.
FIG. 203 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RWM 53 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. The types of RWM 53 in FIG. 203 are those used in the following explanation, and are not meant to be limited to these.
In FIG. 203, the same storage areas as in the twenty-fifth embodiment (FIGS. 173 to 175) have the same addresses. The description of the storage areas at the same addresses as in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be omitted unless particularly necessary.

The symbol array address buffers 1 to 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1 to 3) indicated by addresses “F0A0(H)” to “F0A5(H)” are storage areas that store addresses for specifying symbol combination data when the reels 31 are stopped. It is. The symbol array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1) for "F0A0(H)" and "F0A1(H)" is for the first (left) reel 31, and the symbols for "F0A2(H)" and "F0A3(H)" The array address buffer 2 (_BF_PICARG_ADR2) is for the second (middle) reel 31, and the symbol array address buffer 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR3) for "F0A4 (H)" and "F0A5 (H)" is for the third (right) reel. It is for 31.
When the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the leading address "1200 (H)" of the symbol control data table (TBL_PIC_DAT) (described later) is stored in the symbol array address buffer.
Further, when accepting a stop, any address of the # reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_#) (described later) is stored in the symbol array address buffer.

In FIG. 204, (A) is a diagram showing the symbol control data table (TBL_PIC_DAT), and (B) is a diagram showing the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH).
The data stored in each address of the symbol control data table corresponds to the initial values of the stop symbol data (first group) to stop symbol data (ninth group) of the twenty-fifth embodiment.
The symbol groups (first group to ninth group) in the twenty-sixth embodiment are the same as those in the twenty-fifth embodiment. That is,
Group 1: RBA to RBH
Group 2: RBJ to RBP
Group 3: 1BB, Replay 01 to Replay 07
Group 4: Replay 08 to Replay 10 (D0 to D2), unused (D3 to D7)
Group 5: Small role 01 to small role 08
Group 6: Small role 09 to small role 16
Group 7: Small roles 17 to 24
Group 8: Small role 25 to small role 32
Group 9: Minor roles 33 to 34 (D0 to D1), unused (D2 to D7)
It becomes.

For example, "11111111 (B)" is stored in the address "1200 (H)", and this value corresponds to the initial value "11111111 (B)" of the stop symbol data (first group).
Therefore, bits D4 to D7 of the data at address "1203 (H)" (group 4 of symbols) and bits D2 to D7 of the data (group 9 of symbols) of address "1208 (H)" are "0". The other bits are "1".

The reel symbol search table address offset table is a data table for specifying the start address of the #th reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_#).
The details will be explained later, but
1st reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1): Address “1300 (H)” ~ “13B3 (H)”
2nd reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2): Address “13B4 (H)” to “1467 (H)”
3rd reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3): Address “1468(H)” to “151B(H)”
It consists of
In the reel symbol search table address offset table, the address value immediately before the top address of the #th reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_#) is specified.

FIGS. 205 to 209 are diagrams showing the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1).
Further, FIGS. 210 to 214 are diagrams showing the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2).
Furthermore, FIGS. 215 to 219 are diagrams showing the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3).
The # reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_#) shows, for each reel 31, which role is the symbol of the symbol number that corresponds to the symbol of the # reel 31 for the symbol number of the symbol that stops on the active line. This is defined for all groups 1 to 9.
The symbol combination data stored in each address of these # reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_#) is the symbol combination stored in each address of the # reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_#) in the 25th embodiment. It is similar to data.

Regarding the left reel 31, when the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the symbol on the active line corresponds to symbol number 2, "Cherry". Therefore, after address "1300(H)",
Address "1300 (H)" - "1308 (H)": 2nd symbol "Cherry" (1st group - 9th group)
Address “1309(H)” to “1311(H)”: No. 3 pattern “Blue BAR” (1st group to 9th group)
Address “1312(H)” to “131A(H)”: No. 4 pattern “Bell A” (1st group to 9th group)
:
Address “1399 (H)” ~ “13A1 (H)”: No. 19 pattern “Bell A” (1st group to 9th group)
Address “13A2(H)” to “13AA(H)”: No. 0 symbol “Replay” (1st group to 9th group)
Address “13AB(H)” to “13B3(H)”: No. 1 pattern “Watermelon” (1st group to 9th group)
The first reel symbol search table is configured in this order.

Further, nine addresses are assigned to each symbol, and each corresponds to the first to ninth groups. For example, in the second pattern "cherry",
Address "1300 (H)" is the first group,
Address “1301(H)” is the second group,
:
Address "1308(H)" is assigned to the 9th group.
Therefore, in the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1), the number of symbols "20" x the number of symbol groups "9" = "180" addresses (1300 (H) to 13B3 (H)) are assigned. The same applies to the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) and the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3).

Furthermore, the symbol combination data stored in each address is such that when the symbol of the symbol number stops on the active line when the reel 31 stops, the symbols constituting the symbol combination of which role in the Nth group of symbols It determines what it can become.
For example, the symbol combination data for the address "1300 (H)" is "0", but this means that when the left reel 31 stops and the number 2 "Cherry" stops on the active line, the first group's winning combination (RBA ~RBH) means that it cannot be a symbol that constitutes a symbol combination.
On the other hand, the symbol combination data of address "1307(H)" (eighth group) is "@WIN_27 OR WIN_30" (00100100(B)). Therefore, when the number 2 "cherry" stops when the left reel 31 stops, it means that it can become a symbol that constitutes the symbol combination of the small winning combination 27 and the small winning combination 30 among the winnings in the 8th group. (See Figure 121).
Therefore, the same symbols on the same reel 31 have the same symbol combination data. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 205, addresses "131B(H)" to "1323(H)" store symbol combination data for the 5th symbol "Replay", but the same "Replay" symbol A certain address "1348 (H)" to "1350 (H)" (10th symbol "Replay"), address "1375 (H)" to "137D (H)" (15th symbol "Replay"), address "13A2" (H)” to “13AA(H)” (number 0 symbol “Replay”) are also the same as the symbol combination data of addresses “131B(H)” to “1323(H)”.

As described above, the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1) stores symbol combination data starting from the second symbol (cherry). This is because when the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the symbol on the active line on the left reel 31 is number 2.
On the other hand, in the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) shown in FIGS. 210 to 214, symbol combination data is stored starting from the number 1 symbol "Cherry". This is because when the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the symbol on the active line on the middle reel 31 is number 1.
Similarly, in the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3), symbol combination data is stored starting from the 0th symbol "Bell B". This is because when the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the symbol on the active line on the right reel 31 is number 0.
In this way, the symbol data to be stored in the left, middle, and right reel symbol search tables is stored with an offset (difference) (shifting the symbol number). By doing so, there is no need to perform correction (add or subtract the difference) for each acquired control symbol number (BF_PICTURE). Therefore, it is possible to simplify program processing and reduce the capacity of the ROM 54.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 229 (Example 2 of the 27th embodiment) described later, in each symbol arrangement table of the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31, symbol data with symbol number "0" There is also a method in which the difference data corresponding to each reel 31 is stored in order. When acquiring the symbol data, the symbol data of the symbol on the active line is acquired by adding or subtracting the difference data of the reel 31 to the symbol number of the symbol stopped at the reference position. In this case, even if there is a change in the effective line, it is only necessary to change the difference data, so the number of development steps can be reduced.

Note that the effective line in this embodiment is shown in FIG. 115, so in the left, middle, and right reel symbol search tables, the offset (difference) is set to "+2" for the left reel 31 and "+2" for the middle reel 31. "+1" and the right reel 31 is "0". In other words, the offset value indicates the amount of deviation (number of stages) between the position of the effective line and the reference position.
Therefore, for example, if the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) indicates a symbol that stops at the bottom row, and the active line is "left middle row" - "middle middle row" - "right middle row", each of the left, middle, and right reels In the symbol search table, each offset is "+1".
For example, if the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) indicates a symbol that stops in the middle row, and the active line is "left middle row" - "middle middle row" - "right middle row", each reel on the left, middle, and right In the symbol search table, the offset becomes unnecessary (or "0").

Next, a specific example of the symbol array address buffer in the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described.
For example, assume that "Replay (No. 5)" - "Cherry (No. 16)" - "Bell B (No. 0)" stops on the active line.
In this case, the symbol array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1) contains the address "131A(H)" which is the one before the start address "131B(H)" of the 5th symbol (replay) in the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1). ' is memorized.
In addition, the symbol array address buffer 2 (_BF_PICARG_ADR2) contains the address "143A(H)" which is the one before the start address "143B(H)" of the 16th symbol (cherry) in the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2). is memorized.
Furthermore, the symbol array address buffer 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR3) contains the address "1467 (H)" which is the one before the start address "1468 (H)" of the symbol No. 0 (Bell B) in the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3). )” is memorized.
Note that the process by which the above value is stored will be described later.

220 and 221 are diagrams showing the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) in the twenty-sixth embodiment.
In the twenty-sixth embodiment, one address is provided for each combination, and the number of payouts is stored. Set the address "1600 (H)" to the payout number of RBA of symbol group 1 as "0", and sequentially write the addresses of all the roles of symbol group 1, all the symbols of symbol group 2, ..., all the symbols of symbol group 9. The number of payouts is stored in each machine.
In addition, in the 4th symbol group, in order to correspond to the bits, the addresses "1618(H)" to "161A(H)" are set to Replay 08, Replay 09, and Replay 10 corresponding to the D0 to D2 bits, and the address "161B( H)" to "161F(H)" are unused areas corresponding to bits D3 to D7.
For example, when winning a small winning combination 01, the address "1620 (H)" is specified, and "15 (D)" stored in the address "1620 (H)" is the number of coins to be paid out. Stored in data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL).

Next, control processing in the twenty-sixth embodiment will be explained using a flowchart.
FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing main processing in the twenty-sixth embodiment. The flowchart in FIG. 222 mainly shows the processing according to the twenty-sixth embodiment, and does not mean that only the processing shown in FIG. 222 is performed.
The main process is a process that the main control board 50 executes once per game, and is, for example, a process corresponding to FIG. 139 of the 23rd embodiment.
In FIG. 222, the game start process in step S1131 corresponds to steps S271 and S272 in FIG. 139, and updates the operating state flag, etc. (see FIG. 42, for example).
In the next step S1132, medal acceptance start processing is executed. This process is, for example, the process shown in steps S273 to S276 in FIG. When the is operated, the number of bets is updated.

In the next step S1133, start switch acceptance processing is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 223, which will be described later, and executes the same process as step S751 in FIG. 139. Specifically, when it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, a predetermined lottery process or the like is executed. However, in FIG. 223, which will be described later, the process shown in FIG. 140 is simplified.
Next, the process advances to step S1134, and rotation of the reel 31 is started. In the next step S1135, reel stop control is performed. This process is shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and is a process for stopping the corresponding reel 31 at a predetermined position based on the winning number when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected.
In the next step S1136, it is determined whether or not all reels 31 have stopped (corresponding to step S289 in FIG. 139), and when it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped, the process advances to step S1137, and all reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that there is no such information, the process returns to step S1135.

In step S1137, display determination processing is performed. This process is shown in FIG. 227, which will be described later, and corresponds to step 291 in FIG. 139.
In the next step S1138, a game end check process is performed. This process corresponds to step 753 in FIG. 139. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the start switch reception process in step S1133 of FIG. 222.
In FIG. 223, in step S1141, a game start process is executed. This process is a process for executing a lottery for winning numbers (combinations), a lottery for advantageous sections (AT), etc., and corresponds to the process including steps S761 to S768 in FIG. 140.
In the next step S1142, reel rotation start preparation processing is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 224, which will be described later, and is a process for setting initial values in the above-mentioned symbol array address buffers 1 to 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1 to 3). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the reel rotation start preparation process in step S1142 of FIG. 223.
In FIG. 224, in step S1151, a symbol control data table (TBL_PIC_DAT) is set. This process is a process of storing the start address "1200 (H)" of the symbol control data table in the HL register.
Next, the process advances to step S1152, and the address of the symbol control data table is stored in the symbol array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1). This process is a process of storing the HL register value (1200 (H)) in the symbol array address buffer 1 at the address "F0A0 (H)".
In the next step S1153, the address of the symbol control data table is stored in the symbol array address buffer 2 (_BF_PICARG_ADR2). This process is a process of storing the HL register value (1200 (H)) in the symbol array address buffer 2 at address "F0A2 (H)".
In the next step S1154, the address of the symbol control data table is stored in the symbol array address buffer 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR3). This process is a process of storing the HL register value (1200 (H)) in the symbol array address buffer 3 at address "F0A4 (H)". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
With the above processing, the initial value at the start of reel rotation is
Symbol array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1): 1200 (H)
Symbol array address buffer 2 (_BF_PICARG_ADR2): 1200 (H)
Symbol array address buffer 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR3): 1200 (H)
is memorized.

FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the reel stop control in step S1135 of FIG. 222.
In FIG. 225, in step S1161, it is determined whether the stop switch 42 has been operated on the rotating reel 31 or not. A detailed explanation of this process will be omitted, but as shown in FIG. 194 of the 25th embodiment, the input port rising data A is detected, and the rising data of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the rotating reel 31 is turned on. If so, it is determined "Yes" in step S1161.
When it is determined in step S1161 that the stop switch 42 has been operated, the process advances to step S1162, and when it is determined that the stop switch 42 has not been operated, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S1162, the value corresponding to the (operated) stop switch 42 is stored in the stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL). For example, in the case of the left stop switch 42, "1" is stored.
In the next step S1163, a stop symbol determination process is executed. This process is a process that determines the stop position of the reel 31 based on the timing when the stop switch 42 is operated, the winning number in the game, etc. Through this process, the symbol number to be stopped in the middle row is stored in the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC).
In the next step S1164, the symbol number is stored in the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE). This process calculates a control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) by subtracting "1" from the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) and stores it. In addition, in this calculation, when "1" is subtracted from "0", a special calculation is executed to obtain "19(D)".
Next, the process advances to step S1165, and a symbol array address buffer is set. This process is shown in FIG. 226, which will be described later, and is a process of acquiring and storing a reel symbol arrangement table address. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the symbol array address buffer set in step S1165 of FIG. 225.
In FIG. 226, in step S1171, stop/control reel number data is acquired. This process is a process of storing the value stored in the stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S1172, and the RWM address is set in the symbol array address buffer according to the stop/control reel number data. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the A register value and the A register value, and use the result of the addition as the A register value. In other words, this process is a process of doubling the A register value.
(2) Store the address "F09E (H)" value, which is shifted by "2" addresses from the address "F0A0 (H)" of the symbol array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1), in the DE register.
(3) Add the A register value to the DE register value. The result of the addition is set as the DE register value.
As a result, for example, when the stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) is "1", the DE register value becomes "F0A0(H)".
Further, when the stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) is "2", the DE register value becomes "F0A2(H)".
Furthermore, when the stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) is "3", the DE register value becomes "F0A4(H)".
Through the process of step S1172, the address of the symbol array address buffer (_BF_PICARG_ADR#) corresponding to the reel 31 is stored in the DE register.

In the next step S1173, a reel symbol search table address offset table is set. This process is a process of storing in the HL register a value "1207 (H)" obtained by subtracting "2" from the start address "1209 (H)" of the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH).
In the next step S1174, a reel symbol arrangement table address corresponding to the stop/control reel number data is acquired. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the A register value to the HL register value, and use the result of the addition as the HL register value.
For example, when the A register value is "2", the HL register value is "1209 (H)".
Further, when the A register value is "4", the HL register value is "120B(H)".
Furthermore, when the A register value is "6", the HL register value is "120D(H)".
Therefore, the address of the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH) corresponding to the reel 31 is stored in the HL register (see FIG. 204(B)).

(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the HL register value.
For example, when the HL register value is "1209(H)", the HL register value becomes "12FF(H)".
Further, when the HL register value is "120B(H)", the HL register value becomes "13B3(H)".
Furthermore, when the HL register value is "120D(H)", the HL register value becomes "1467(H)".

Next, the process advances to step S1175, and a reel symbol arrangement table address corresponding to the control symbol number is acquired. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data stored in the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) in the A register.
(2) Multiply the A register value by 9 and store the calculation result in the A register. Here, multiplying by "9" corresponds to the number of symbol groups.
(3) Add the A register value to the HL register value, and use the result of the addition as the HL register value.

The above process will be explained using specific examples (Example 1 to Example 3).
(Example 1)
On the left reel 31, when the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is "10" (number 12 "Bell B" stops on the active line),
12FF(H)+10×9(D)(5A(H))=1359(H)
This is the address immediately before the leading address "135A(H)" corresponding to No. 12 "Bell B" on the left reel 31.
(Example 2)
Also, on the middle reel 31, when the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is "10" (the 11th "cherry" stops on the active line),
13B3(H)+10×9(D)=140D(H)
This is the address immediately before the first address "140E(H)" corresponding to the number 11 "Cherry" on the middle reel 31.
(Example 3)
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, when the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is "10" (number 10 "Bell B" stops on the active line),
1467(H)+10×9(D)=14C1(H)
This is the address immediately before the first address "14C2(H)" corresponding to the number 10 "Bell B" on the right reel 31.
In this manner, in step S1175, the first address value of the leading address corresponding to the stopped symbol number of the reel 31 is stored in the HL register.

Next, the process advances to step S1176, and a symbol array address buffer corresponding to the stop/control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) is acquired. This process is a process of storing the HL register value at the address indicated by the DE register value.
Note that, as shown in step S1172,
Stop/control reel number data “1” → DE register value “F0A0(H)”
Stop/control reel number data “2” → DE register value “F0A2 (H)”
Stop/control reel number data “3” → DE register value “F0A4 (H)”
It is.
Therefore, in the case of the left reel 31, in the above example 1, "1359 (H)" is stored in the symbol array address buffer 1 at the address "F0A0 (H)".
Further, in the case of the middle reel 31, in the above example 2, "140D(H)" is stored in the symbol array address buffer 2 at the address "F0A2(H)".
Furthermore, in the case of the right reel 31, in the above example 3, "14C1 (H)" is stored in the symbol array address buffer 3 at the address "F0A4 (H)".
Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, by storing the address value where the symbol combination data is stored in the symbol array address buffer of each reel, even if a power outage occurs, the data will already be stored after the power is restored from the power outage. The game can be restarted correctly using the correct address value.
For example, in a situation where all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, even if the power is cut off after the stop switch 42 corresponding to the left reel 31 is operated and the power cut-off process is executed, the symbols Since the address value where the symbol combination data of the left reel 31 is stored is stored in the array address buffer 1, after the power is restored, based on the stop operation of the middle reel 31 and the stop operation of the right reel 31, The process of storing address values in the symbol array address buffers 2 and 3 can be restarted (the game can be restarted).

Note that if the address value where the symbol combination data is stored (the value stored in the symbol array address buffer) is stored in a general-purpose register, if the power is turned off and the power is restored, the address will be saved. The value (the value stored in the general-purpose register) is cleared (set to the initial value; for example, set to "0"). For this reason, when the address value where the symbol combination data is stored is stored in a general-purpose register, for example, a power outage occurs after the stop switch 42 corresponding to the left reel 31 is operated, and the power outage process is executed. In this case, there is a high possibility that the game will not be able to be resumed after the power is restored.
In addition, if a symbol array address buffer is provided in the RWM 53 and the address value where symbol combination data is stored is stored, the address value will be stored in the symbol array address buffer each time the stop switch 42 is stopped. At the development stage, it is possible to check whether the stop position is correct for each stop operation by checking the symbol array address buffer of the RWM 53.

FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the display determination process in step S1137 of FIG. 222.
This process is a process of determining symbol combination data based on the address value stored in the symbol array address buffer, and determining whether or not the combination corresponding to the symbol combination data has a payout.
In FIG. 227, in step S1181, the number of symbol groups is set to "9". This process stores "9" in the B register and "8" in the C register. "8" in the C register is a value corresponding to the number of bits.
In the next step S1182, the symbol array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1) is obtained. This process is a process of storing the symbol combination data stored in the symbol array address buffer 1 in the HL register.

Next, the process advances to step S1183, and first reel symbol arrangement table data corresponding to the number of symbol groups is obtained. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the B register value to the HL register value and use the addition result as the HL register value.
(2) The symbol combination data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register value.
For example, when the HL register value is "12FF (H)", "12FF (H) + 9 (H) = 1308 (H)", so "@WIN_33" stored at address "1308 (H)" That is, "00000001(B)" is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1184, the symbol array address buffer 2 (_BF_PICARG_ADR2) is obtained. This process is a process of storing the symbol combination data stored in the symbol array address buffer 2 in the HL register.
Next, the process advances to step S1185, and a logical AND operation is performed on the second reel symbol arrangement table data according to the number of symbol groups. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the B register value to the HL register value and use the addition result as the HL register value.
(2) Execute an AND (logical product) operation between the symbol combination data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value and the A register value. The result of the operation is set as the A register value.

In the next step S1186, the symbol array address buffer 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR3) is acquired. This process is a process of storing the symbol combination data stored in the symbol array address buffer 3 in the HL register.
Next, the process advances to step S1187, and a logical AND operation is performed on the third reel symbol arrangement table data according to the number of symbol groups. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the B register value to the HL register value and use the addition result as the HL register value.
(2) Execute an AND (logical product) operation between the symbol combination data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value and the A register value. The result of the operation is set as the A register value.
Note that at this point, when the calculation result is "0", the zero flag becomes "1".

Through the processing of steps S1181 to S1187, for example, when the B register value is "9", the symbol combination data of the 9th group of the stop symbol data of the left reel 31 and the 9th group of the stop symbol data of the middle reel 31 are combined. The symbol combination data of the group and the symbol combination data of the ninth group of the stop symbol data of the right reel 31 are ANDed.
Specifically, for example,
B register value = 9
Symbol array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1) = 12FF (H) (2nd symbol (cherry))
Symbol array address buffer 2 (_BF_PICARG_ADR2) = 13B3 (H) (No. 1 symbol (cherry))
Symbol array address buffer 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR3) = 1482 (H) (3rd symbol (red 7))
When it is,
Design combination data for address “1308 (H)” (@WIN_33)
AND
Design combination data for address “13BC(H)” (@WIN_33)
AND
Design combination data for address “148B(H)” (@WIN_33)
Therefore, the logical product data becomes "@WIN_33" (00000001(B)).
On the other hand, if any of the symbol combination data of the address "1308 (H)", the address "13BC (H)", or the address "148B (H)" is "0", then the AND As a result of the calculation, the logical product data becomes "0".

Next, the process advances to step S1188, and it is determined whether or not the logical product data is "0". In this process, it is determined whether the zero flag is "1" or not, and when the zero flag is "1", the determination is "Yes". When it is determined that the logical product data is "0", the process advances to step S1195, and when it is determined that the logical product data is not "0", the process advances to step S1189.
In step S1195, "1" is subtracted from the number of symbol groups. This process executes the process of subtracting "1" from the B register value.
In the next step S1196, it is determined whether the number of symbol groups has become "0". This process determines whether the result of subtracting "1" from the B register in step S1195 is "0". When the B register value after subtracting "1" is "0", it is determined as "Yes" (the number of symbol groups has become "0").
When it is determined in step S1196 that the number of symbol groups is "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of symbol groups is not "0", the process returns to step S1182.

On the other hand, when the process advances from step S1188 to step S1189, a payout number table address corresponding to the number of symbol groups is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Multiply the B register value by the C register value "8". Then, the multiplication result is stored in the BC register.
(2) In the HL register, store the results of subtracting "8" from the top address "1600 (H)" of the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) and further subtracting "1". Therefore, "15F7(H)" is stored in the HL register.
(3) Add the BC register value to the HL register value.
Next, the process advances to step S1190, and "1" is added to the table address. This process is a process of adding "1" to the HL register value and using the addition result as the HL register value.

Here, in steps S1189 and S1190,
"1600 (H)" - "8 (H)" - "1 (H)" + B register value (value of symbol group) x C register value "8" (number of data included in one symbol group) + "1 (H)”
= "1600 (H)" + (value of symbol group - 1) x (number of data included in one symbol group "8")
is being calculated.
Examples 1 and 2 are given below as specific examples.
(1) Example 1
If the B register value is “1” (symbol group 1) when proceeding to step S1189,
1600(H)+(1-1)×8=1600(H)
Then, the start address of the first group of symbols is specified.
(2) Example 2
If the B register value is "5" (symbol group 5) when proceeding to step S1189,
1600(H)+(5-1)×8=1600(H)+20(H)(32(D))
=1620(H)
Then, the start address of the 5th group of symbols is specified.

In the next step S1191, the logical product data is shifted to the right by "1". This process is a process of shifting the bit of the A register value to the right by "1".
Then, in the next step S1192, it is determined whether the carry flag has become "1" by the above-mentioned rightward shift process by "1". When it is determined that the carry flag has become "1", the determination is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S1193. On the other hand, if it is determined that the carry flag is not "1", the process returns to step S1190.

In step S1193, it is determined whether the number of coins to be paid out is "0". In this process, it is determined whether or not the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the payout number is "0". When it is determined that the number of payouts is "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of payouts is not "0", the process advances to step S1194.
In step S1194, payout number data is saved. This process is a process of storing the value indicated by the address indicated by the HL register value in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Examples 1 and 2 are given as specific examples of steps S1190 to S1192.
(1) Example 1 (when the symbol combination of small role 33 is stopped)
In the first step S1190, when the B register value is "9" and the AND data is "@WIN_33" (00000001 (B)), the HL register value becomes "1640 (H)".
When the logical product data "00000001 (B)" is shifted to the right by 1 bit in the next step S1191, the carry flag becomes "1", and therefore "Yes" is determined in step S1192. Therefore, in step S1194, the data "1" stored at the address "1640(H)" indicated by the HL register value is stored as payout number data.

(2) Example 2 (when the symbol combination of small role 03 is stopped)
In the first step S1190, when the B register value is "5" and the AND data is "@WIN_03" (00000100 (B)), the HL register value becomes "1620 (H)".
In the next step S1191, when the AND data "00000100(B)" is shifted to the right by 1 bit to become "00000010(B)", the carry flag is "0", so it is determined "No" in step S1192. , the process returns to step S1190.
In step S1190 (second time), the HL register value becomes "1621 (H)". In the next step S1191, if the logical product data "00000010(B)" is shifted one bit to the right and becomes "00000001(B)", the carry flag is "0", so it is determined "No" in step S1192. and returns to step S1190.
In step S1190 (third time), the HL register value becomes "1622 (H)". In the next step S1191, when the logical product data "00000001(B)" is shifted to the right by 1 bit, the carry flag becomes "1", so the determination in step S1192 is "Yes". Therefore, in step S1194, the data "15 (D)" stored at the address indicated by the HL register value "1622 (H)" is stored as payout number data.

The above display determination process will be explained using specific examples (the following first example and second example).
(Example 1)
In a game where the winning number "10" has been determined by lottery, the left stop switch 42 is operated while the symbol number "10" is passing through the middle row of the left reel 31, and then the middle reel 31 is The middle stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol with symbol number "9" is passing through the middle row, and then the right stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol with symbol number "3" is passing through the middle row of the right reel 31. As a result of the operation, "Watermelon (No. 11)" - "Cherry (No. 11)" - "Bell A (No. 4)" are stopped on the active line, and Small Win 01 (15 pieces) is won. do.
In this case, the symbol array address buffer set of FIG. 226 is as follows.
1. left reel 31
In step S1171, the A register value becomes "1" (stop/control reel number data).
In step S1172,
(1) A register value = 1 x 2 = 2
(2) DE register value = F09E (H)
(3) DE register value = DE register value + A register value = F0A0 (H)
In step S1173,
HL register value = 1207 (H)
becomes.
In step S1174,
(1) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 1209 (H)
(2) HL register value = value of address indicated by HL register value = 12FF (H)
becomes.
In step S1175,
(1) A register value = “9” (control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE))
(2) A register value = A register value x 9 = 81 (D) (51 (H))
(3) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 1350 (H)
becomes.

2. middle reel 31
In step S1171, the A register value becomes "2" (stop/control reel number data).
In step S1172,
(1) A register value = 2 x 2 = 4
(2) DE register value = F09E (H)
(3) DE register value = DE register value + A register value = F0A2 (H)
In step S1173,
HL register value = 1207 (H)
becomes.
In step S1174,
(1) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 120B (H)
(2) HL register value = value of address indicated by HL register value = 13B3 (H)
becomes.
In step S1175,
(1) A register value = “10 (D)” (control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE))
(2) A register value = A register value x 9 = 90 (D) (5A (H))
(3) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 140D (H)
becomes.

3. right reel 31
In step S1171, the A register value becomes "3" (stop/control reel number data).
In step S1172,
(1) A register value = 3 x 2 = 6
(2) DE register value = F09E (H)
(3) DE register value = DE register value + A register value = F0A4 (H)
In step S1173,
HL register value = 1207 (H)
becomes.
In step S1174,
(1) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 120D (H)
(2) HL register value = value of address indicated by HL register value = 1467 (H)
becomes.
In step S1175,
(1) A register value = “4 (D)” (control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE))
(2) A register value = A register value x 9 = 36 (D) (24 (H))
(3) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 148B (H)
becomes.

From the above,
Symbol array address buffer 1: 1350 (H)
Symbol array address buffer 2: 140D (H)
Symbol array address buffer 3: 148B (H)
becomes.
In this case, in FIG. 227, in step S1181,
B register value = 9
C register value = 8
Set.
(1st time)
In step S1182,
HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1)
becomes.
In the next step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 9 (H) (HL + B) = 1359 (H)
A register value = 0 (value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value)
becomes.

In the next step S1184,
HL register value = 140D (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In the next step S1185,
HL register value = 140D (H) + 9 (H) (HL + B) = 1416 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 00000001 (B) (@WIN_33)
A register value = data indicated by the address of HL register value (@WIN_33) AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 9 (H) (HL + B) = 1494 (H)
A register value = HL register value (@WIN_34) AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, the answer in step S1188 is "Yes", and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 9-1 = 8
becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "No" (B register value≠0), and the process returns to step S1182.

(2nd time)
In step S1182, the HL register value becomes 1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 8 (H) (HL + B) = 1358 (H)
A register value = 00011010 (B) (@WIN_26 OR @WIN_28 OR @WIN_29)
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 140D (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 140D (H) + 8 (H) (HL + B) = 1415 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 00110000 (B) (@WIN_29 OR @WIN_30)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 00010000 (B)
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 8 (H) (HL + B) = 1493 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 00001000 (B) (@WIN_28)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, the answer in step S1188 is "Yes", and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 8-1 = 7
becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "No" (B register value≠0), and the process returns to step S1182.

(3rd time)
In step S1182, the HL register value becomes 1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 7 (H) (HL + B) = 1357 (H)
A register value = 00000011 (B) (@WIN_17 OR @WIN_18)
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 140D (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 140D (H) + 7 (H) (HL + B) = 1414 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 0000010 (B) (@WIN_18)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 00000010 (B)
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 7 (H) (HL + B) = 1492 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, the answer in step S1188 is "Yes", and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 7-1 = 6
becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "No" (B register value≠0), and the process returns to step S1182.

(4th time)
In step S1182, the HL register value becomes 1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 6 (H) (HL + B) = 1356 (H)
A register value = 00000010 (B) (@WIN_10)
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 140D (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 140D (H) + 6 (H) (HL + B) = 1413 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 6 (H) (HL + B) = 1491 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 00110000 (B) (@WIN_13 OR @WIN_14)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, the answer in step S1188 is "Yes", and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 6-1 = 5
becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "No" (B register value≠0), and the process returns to step S1182.

(5th time)
In step S1182, the HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1). In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 5 (H) (HL + B) = 1355 (H)
A register value = 11001011 (B) (@WIN_01_02 OR @WIN_04 OR @WIN_07_08)
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 140D (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 140D (H) + 5 (H) (HL + B) = 1412 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 01000001 (B) (@WIN_01 OR @WIN_07)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 01000001 (B)
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 5 (H) (HL + B) = 1490 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00001101 (B) (@WIN_01 OR @WIN_03 OR @WIN_04)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 00000001 (B)
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag≠“1”.
Therefore, "No" is obtained in step S1188, and the process proceeds to step S1189.
In step S1189,
BC register value = B register value (value of symbol group) × C register value (number of data included in one symbol group) = 5 × 8 = 40 (D) (28 (H))
HL register value = 15F7 (H)
HL register value = HL register value + BC register value = 15F7 (H) + 28 (H) = 161F (H)
becomes.

In step S1190,
HL register value = 161F (H) + 1 (H) = 1620 (H)
becomes.
In step S1191, when the A register value "00000001 (B)" is shifted to the right by 1, it becomes "00000000 (B)" and the carry flag becomes "1".
In step S1192, since the carry flag is "1", it is determined as "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S1193.
In step S1193,
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 15 (D)
Therefore, it is determined that the number of payouts is not "0", and the process advances to step S1194.
In step S1194, "15 (D)" is stored in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL).
As described above, when the minor winning combination 01 is won, the address "1620 (H)" of the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) is specified and the payout number "15 (D)" is stored.

Next, as a second example of the display determination process, in a game where the winning number "26" is determined by the winning combination lottery, when the symbol number "10" is passing through the middle row of the left reel 31, the left stop The switch 42 is operated, and then, when the symbol with symbol number "2" is passing through the middle row of the middle reel 31, the middle stop switch 42 is operated, and then the symbol number "3" is passing through the middle row of the right reel 31. When the right stop switch 42 was operated while the symbols were passing, "Watermelon (No. 11)" - "Black BAR (No. 3)" - "Bell A (No. 4)" stopped on the active line. , an example of a winning role is shown. This symbol combination differs from the symbol combination of the first example only in the symbols on the middle reel 31.
First, regarding the middle reel 31, the symbol arrangement address buffer set shown in FIG. 226 results in the following.

In step S1171, the A register value becomes "2" (stop/control reel number data).
In step S1172,
(1) A register value = 2 x 2 = 4
(2) DE register value = F09E (H)
(3) DE register value = DE register value + A register value = F0A2 (H)
In step S1173,
HL register value = 1207 (H)
becomes.
In step S1174,
(1) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 120B (H)
(2) HL register value = value of address indicated by HL register value = 13B3 (H)
becomes.
In step S1175,
(1) A register value = “2 (D)” (control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE))
(2) A register value = A register value x 9 = 18 (D) (12 (H))
(3) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 13C5 (H)
becomes.

Therefore,
Symbol array address buffer 1: 1350 (H)
Symbol array address buffer 2: 13C5 (H)
Symbol array address buffer 3: 148B (H)
becomes.
In this case, in FIG. 227, in step S1181,
B register value = 9
C register value = 8
Set.
(1st time)
In step S1182,
HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1)
becomes.
In the next step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 9 (H) (HL + B) = 1359 (H)
A register value = 0 (value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value)
becomes.

In the next step S1184,
HL register value = 135C (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In the next step S1185,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) + 9 (H) (HL + B) = 13CE (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 9 (H) (HL + B) = 1494 (H)
A register value = HL register value (@WIN_34) AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, the answer in step S1188 is "Yes", and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 9-1 = 8
becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "No" (B register value≠0), and the process returns to step S1182.

(2nd time)
In step S1182, the HL register value becomes 1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 8 (H) (HL + B) = 1358 (H)
A register value = 00011010 (B) (@WIN_26 OR @WIN_28 OR @WIN_29)
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) + 8 (H) (HL + B) = 13CD (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00000111 (B) (@WIN_25 OR @WIN_26 OR @WIN_27)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 00000010 (B)
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 8 (H) (HL + B) = 1493 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 00001000 (B) (@WIN_28)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, the answer in step S1188 is "Yes", and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 8-1 = 7
becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "No" (B register value≠0), and the process returns to step S1182.

(3rd time)
In step S1182, the HL register value becomes 1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 7 (H) (HL + B) = 1357 (H)
A register value = 00000011 (B) (@WIN_17 OR @WIN_18)
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) + 7 (H) (HL + B) = 13CC (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 00010000 (B) (@WIN_21)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 7 (H) (HL + B) = 1492 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, the answer in step S1188 is "Yes", and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 7-1 = 6
becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "No" (B register value≠0), and the process returns to step S1182.

(4th time)
In step S1182, the HL register value=1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 6 (H) (HL + B) = 1356 (H)
A register value = 00000010 (B) (@WIN_10)
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) + 6 (H) (HL + B) = 13CB (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 10000000 (B) (@WIN_16)
A register value = data indicated by the address of HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 6 (H) (HL + B) = 1491 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 00110000 (B) (@WIN_13 OR @WIN_14)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, the answer in step S1188 is "Yes", and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 6-1 = 5
becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "No" (B register value≠0), and the process returns to step S1182.

(5th time)
In step S1182, the HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1). In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 5 (H) (HL + B) = 1355 (H)
A register value = 11001011 (B) (@WIN_01_02 OR @WIN_04 OR @WIN_07_08)
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) + 5 (H) (HL + B) = 13CA (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 5 (H) (HL + B) = 1490 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00001101 (B) (@WIN_01 OR @WIN_03 OR @WIN_04)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, the answer in step S1188 is "Yes", and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 5-1 = 4
becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "No" (B register value≠0), and the process returns to step S1182.

(6th time)
In step S1182, the HL register value becomes 1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 4 (H) (HL + B) = 1354 (H)
A register value = 0
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) + 4 (H) (HL + B) = 13C9 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 4 (H) (HL + B) = 1491 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, the answer in step S1188 is "Yes", and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 4-1 = 3
becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "No" (B register value≠0), and the process returns to step S1182.

(7th time)
In step S1182, the HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1). In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 3 (H) (HL + B) = 1353 (H)
A register value = 01000000 (B) (@REP_06)
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) + 3 (H) (HL + B) = 13C8 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 00000010 (B) (@REP_01)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 3 (H) (HL + B) = 148E (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 10100010 (B) (@REP_01 OR @REP_05 OR @REP_07)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, the answer in step S1188 is "Yes", and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 3-1 = 2
becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "No" (B register value≠0), and the process returns to step S1182.

(8th time)
In step S1182, the HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1). In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 2 (H) (HL + B) = 1352 (H)
A register value = 0
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) + 2 (H) (HL + B) = 13C7 (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 2 (H) (HL + B) = 148D (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, the answer in step S1188 is "Yes", and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 2-1 = 1
becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "No" (B register value≠0), and the process returns to step S1182.

(9th time)
In step S1182, the HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1). In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 1 (H) (HL + B) = 1351 (H)
A register value = 0
becomes.

In step S1184,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
becomes.
In step S1185,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) + 1 (H) (HL + B) = 13C6 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 11110000 (B) (@SRB_E_H)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
becomes.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 1 (H) (HL + B) = 148C (H)
Data indicated by address of HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
becomes.
Therefore, the zero flag is "1".
Therefore, the answer in step S1188 is "Yes", and the process advances to step S1195.
B register value = 1-1 = 0
becomes.
The result in step S1196 is "Yes" (B register value=0), and the processing according to this flowchart ends.
As a result, the payout number data remains "0".

<27th embodiment>
The twenty-seventh embodiment relates to a symbol arrangement table.
FIGS. 228 and 229 are diagrams showing symbol arrangement tables in the twenty-seventh embodiment. The symbol arrangement table stores symbol data corresponding to a symbol number in each address. In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the specific contents of the symbol data stored in each address will be omitted.
The symbol arrangement table in the twenty-fifth embodiment is configured as follows.
(1) 1st reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) (Figure 181)
1203 (H): 2nd symbol + 3rd symbol 1204 (H): 4th symbol + 5th symbol:
120B (H): 18th symbol + 19th symbol 120C (H): 0th symbol + 1st symbol (2) 2nd reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2) (Figure 185)
123A (H): 1st symbol + 2nd symbol 123B (H): 3rd symbol + 4th symbol:
1242 (H): 17th symbol + 18th symbol 1243 (H): 19th symbol + 0th symbol (3) 3rd reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3) (Figure 189)
128F (H): No. 0 symbol + No. 1 symbol 1290 (H): No. 2 symbol + No. 3 symbol:
1297 (H): 16th symbol + 17th symbol 1298 (H): 18th symbol + 19th symbol

As can be seen from the above, regarding the first (left) reel 31, the number 2 symbol (higher 4 bits) is stored at the top address (1203(H)). The reason for this setting is that the reference position of the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is the lower row, so on the left reel 31, when the symbol number 0 stops at the lower row, which is the reference position, it will move to the active line (upper row). This is because the second symbol stops.
Further, regarding the second (middle) reel 31, the number 1 symbol (upper 4 bits) is stored at the top address (123A(H)). This is because on the middle reel 31, when the No. 0 symbol stops at the lower row, which is the reference position, the No. 1 symbol stops at the active line (middle row).
Similarly, regarding the third (right) reel 31, the number 0 symbol (upper 4 bits) is stored at the top address (128F(H)). This is because on the right reel 31, the reference position and the position on the active line match.

In the examples of FIGS. 181, 185, and 189 in the 25th embodiment, two symbol data (one symbol data in the upper 4 bits and one symbol data in the lower 4 bits) is stored per address.
On the other hand, when storing one symbol data at one address, the configuration is as shown in FIGS. 228 and 229.
In the symbol arrangement table of the twenty-seventh embodiment, to simplify the explanation, the symbol data of the left reel 31 starts from address "1000 (H)", and the symbol data of the middle reel 31 starts from address "1100 (H)". ”, and the symbol data on the right reel 31 starts from address “1200 (H)”.

FIG. 228 is a diagram illustrating an example (Example 1) in which one symbol per address is used as data in the symbol array table of the twenty-fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 228, the symbol data on the left reel 31 is stored in order from the top address, starting with the symbol data with symbol number 2. Further, the symbol data on the middle reel 31 is stored in order from the leading address, starting from the symbol data with symbol number 1. Furthermore, the symbol data of the right reel 31 is stored in order from the top address, starting with the symbol data of symbol number 0.

In this way, by shifting the symbol number of the symbol data at the start address in the symbol arrangement table of the left, middle, and right reels 31, the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the reference position (position on the reference line) can be changed to the offset value. As a result, it is possible to obtain the symbol number of the symbol that stops on the active line.
For example, when the left reel 31 stops and a symbol with symbol number 0 stops at the reference position (lower row), the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the active line (upper row) is "1000 (H) (starting address value)". ” + “0 (symbol number)” = “1000 (H)”, it is possible to acquire the symbol data (for symbol number 2) stored at the address “1000 (H)”.
Similarly, when the symbol with symbol number 10 stops at the reference position (lower row) when the left reel 31 stops, the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the active line (upper row) is "1000 (H)" + "10 ( D)"="100A(H)", it is possible to acquire the symbol data (for symbol number 12) stored at the address "100A(H)".

Regarding the middle reel 31, for example, when the symbol with symbol number 0 stops at the reference position (lower row) when the middle reel 31 stops, the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the active line (middle row) is "1100 (H) ( It is possible to obtain the symbol data (for symbol number 1) stored at the address "1100 (H)" by "start address value)" + "0 (symbol number)" = "1100 (H)". .
Similarly, when the symbol number 10 stops at the reference position (lower row) when the middle reel 31 stops, the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the active line (middle row) is "1100 (H)" + "10 ( D)"="110A(H)", it is possible to acquire the symbol data (for symbol number 11) stored at the address "110A(H)".

Regarding the right reel 31, when the symbol with symbol number 0 stops at the standard position (lower row) of the right reel 31, the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the active line (lower row) is "1200 (H) (first It is possible to obtain the symbol data (for symbol number 0) stored at the address "1200 (H)" by "address value)" + "0 (symbol number)" = "1200 (H)".
Similarly, when the symbol with symbol number 10 stops at the reference position (lower row) when the right reel 31 stops, the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the active line (lower row) is "1200 (H)" + "10 ( D)"="120A(H)", it is possible to acquire the symbol data (for symbol number 10) stored at the address "120A(H)".

Note that the effective line in this example is "upper left row" - "middle middle row" - "lower right row", so the symbol data is shifted as described above, but the effective line is, for example, "upper left row" in the form of a V line. ” - “lower middle row” - “upper right row”,
(1) Symbol arrangement table for left reel 31 1000 (H): For symbol number 2 1001 (H): For symbol number 3:
(2) Symbol arrangement table for middle reel 31 1100 (H): For symbol number 0 1101 (H): For symbol number 1:
(3) Right reel 31 symbol arrangement table 1200 (H): For symbol number 2 1201 (H): For symbol number 3:
And it is sufficient.

FIG. 229 is a diagram showing an example (Example 2) in which the symbol data of the left, middle, and right reels 31 is not shifted in the symbol arrangement table. Further, in this example, the reference line is "upper left row"-"upper middle row"-"upper right row" (the effective line is the same as in FIG. 228).
As shown in FIG. 229, in each of the symbol arrangement tables for the left, middle, and right reels 31, symbol data is stored in order starting from the symbol data for symbol number 0.
On the other hand, in this example, the difference data is stored at the final address.
In the case of Example 2, by adding the difference data to the symbol number that stops at the reference position, it is possible to obtain the symbol number that stops at the active line.

For example, when the symbol with symbol number 0 stops at the reference position of the left reel 31, "1000 (H) (starting address value)" + "0 (symbol number)" + "0 (difference data)" = "1000 ( H)” makes it possible to acquire the symbol data (for symbol number 0) stored at the address “1000(H)”.
Similarly, when the symbol with symbol number 10 stops at the reference position of the left reel 31, the address "100A (H)" + "10 (D)" + "0" = "100A (H)" is used. It is possible to acquire the data (for symbol number 10) stored in "(H)".

Regarding the middle reel 31, when the symbol with symbol number 0 stops at the reference position of the middle reel 31, "1100 (H) (starting address value)" + "0 (symbol number)" + "1 (difference) Data)"="1101(H)", it is possible to obtain the data (for symbol number 1) stored at the address "1101(H)".
Similarly, when the symbol with symbol number 10 stops at the reference position of the middle reel 31, it is stored in "1100 (H)" + "10 (D)" + "1" = "110B (H)". It is possible to acquire data (for symbol number 11).

Furthermore, regarding the right reel 31, when the symbol with symbol number 0 stops at the reference position of the right reel 31, "1200 (H) (starting address value)" + "0 (symbol number)" + "2 ( Difference data)"="1202(H)", it is possible to obtain the data (for symbol number 2) stored at address "1202(H)".
Similarly, when the symbol number 10 stops at the reference position on the right reel 31, the address "120C(H)" is set to "1200(H)" + "10" + "2" = "120C(H)". It is possible to acquire the data (for symbol number 12) stored in ".
As mentioned above, in order to obtain the symbol number of a symbol that stops on the active line from the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the reference position, there are two methods: Examples include a method of storing the symbol data in the array data without shifting it and acquiring the symbol number using the difference data.

In the above twenty-seventh embodiment, in example 1 of FIG. 228, the symbol numbers of the symbol data specified by the start address are different. In this way, the symbol data to be stored in the symbol arrangement tables of the first reel 31, the second reel 31, and the third reel 31 are stored with the symbol numbers shifted (in consideration of the difference, the symbol data is stored). ), it becomes unnecessary to perform correction (add or subtract the difference) for each acquired control symbol number (BF_PICTURE). Therefore, it is possible to simplify program processing and reduce the capacity of the ROM 54.

On the other hand, as in Example 2 of FIG. 229, in each symbol arrangement table of the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31, symbol data is stored in order starting from symbol number 0, and the symbol data is acquired. When doing so, if the difference data of the reel 31 is added or subtracted from the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the reference position, even if there is a change in the active line, you can simply change the difference data. This makes it possible to reduce development man-hours.

Further, in the example of the twenty-seventh embodiment (including the twenty-fifth embodiment), the effective line does not change depending on the specified number. On the other hand, if the effective line changes depending on the specified number, for example, do as follows.
First, in the case of Example 1 (including the 25th embodiment) in FIG. 228, a symbol arrangement table may be provided for each specified number.
Furthermore, in the case of Example 2 in FIG. 228, difference data may be provided for each specified number. In particular, in the case of Example 2 in FIG. 228, the symbol arrangement table does not change depending on the specified number (the symbol arrangement table remains the same even if the specified number changes), so it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage area.

Further, in the example of the twenty-seventh embodiment (including the twenty-fifth embodiment), the number of effective lines is one, but if the number of effective lines is multiple, for example, the following procedure is used. .
First, in the case of Example 1 (including the 25th embodiment) in FIG. 228, a symbol arrangement table may be provided for each active line.
Furthermore, in the case of Example 2 in FIG. 228, difference data may be provided for each effective line. In particular, in the case of Example 2 in FIG. 228, the symbol arrangement table does not change even if the number of active lines increases (the symbol arrangement table remains the same even if the number of effective lines changes), so the increase in storage area is suppressed. be able to.
Furthermore, in the case where the position and number of active lines change depending on the specified number, in the case of example 1 of FIG. 228 (including the 25th embodiment), a symbol arrangement table is provided for every active line, In the case of the specified number, it is possible to specify which (one or more) symbol arrangement table to use.
Similarly, in the case of Example 2 in FIG. 228, it is possible to provide difference data for every effective line, and specify which (one or more) difference data to use, for example, in the case of a predetermined number of valid lines. Can be mentioned.

<28th embodiment>
In the twenty-fifth to twenty-seventh embodiments described above, there is one effective line.
On the other hand, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a case will be described in which there are a plurality of effective lines.
FIG. 230 is a diagram showing the display window 18, effective lines, and RWM area in the twenty-eighth embodiment. In the figure, (A) shows the relationship between each symbol in the display window 18 and the RWM area, and (B) shows the relationship between the valid lines L1 to L5 and the RWM area.
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, nine symbols of "3x3" are displayed in the display window 18, similar to the twenty-third embodiment shown in FIG. 115.

As shown in (A) in the figure, one RWM (memory) area is provided for each stop position (symbol). For example, in the left reel 31, the RWM area of the upper row "1" is determined as "_WK_PIC_LFT1", the RWM area of the middle row "2" is determined as "_WK_PIC_LFT2", and the RWM area of the lower row "3" is determined as "_WK_PIC_LFT3". Therefore, nine RWM areas corresponding to a total of nine stop positions (symbols) are also provided. Furthermore, each RWM area is composed of 2 bytes.
Further, as shown in (B) in the figure, an RWM area is provided for each effective line. There are five effective lines L1 to L5 in the twenty-eighth embodiment. For example, the RWM area of the effective line L1 downward to the right is "_WK_PIC_L1".
Furthermore, an RWM area "_WK_ALL_PIC" for all effective lines is provided. “_WK_ALL_PIC” is a value obtained by performing an OR (logical sum) operation on “_WK_PIC_L1” to “_WK_PIC_L5”.

FIG. 231 is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement in the twenty-eighth embodiment. In the 23rd embodiment shown in FIG. 114, the number of symbols per reel 31 is "20", but in the 28th embodiment, the number of symbols is "21".
Further, FIG. 232 is a diagram showing the first reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 181 in the twenty-fifth embodiment.
Further, FIG. 233 is a diagram showing the second reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2) in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 185 in the twenty-fifth embodiment.
Furthermore, FIG. 234 is a diagram showing the third reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3) in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 189 in the twenty-fifth embodiment.

In FIG. 232, in the first symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) of the left reel 31, symbol data for each symbol is provided in order from the top address, from symbol number "0" to "20" in FIG. 231 ( Along with the addresses "1200(H)" to "1228(H)"), the last two data are symbol data of symbol numbers "0" and "1". Therefore, the symbol data at address "122A(H)" is the same as the symbol data at address "1200(H)", and the symbol data at address "122C(H)" is the same as the symbol data at address "1201(H)". are the same.
Similarly to the first symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_1), the second symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_2) on the middle reel 31 and the third symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_3) on the right reel 31 are sequentially assigned symbol numbers "0" from the top address. '', symbol data with symbol number "1", . . . , symbol data with symbol number "20", symbol data with symbol number "0", and symbol data with symbol number "1" are arranged.

For example, when the left reel 31 stops, a "Bell" with symbol number "0" on the upper row, a replay with symbol number "1" on the middle row, and a "blank" with symbol number "2" on the lower row,
_WK_PIC_LFT1=00001000(B), 00000001(B)(Bell)
_WK_PIC_LFT2=00000011(B), 00000001(B)(Replay)
_WK_PIC_LFT3=00000000 (B), 00000000 (B) (blank)
is memorized.
The same applies when the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are stopped.
Further, when each reel 31 stops, the following method can be mentioned as a method for storing symbol data in each storage area.
(Example 1) Method using the upper row as a reference For example, when the left reel 31 stops, the address corresponding to the symbol data of the symbol to be stopped at the upper row is specified. Specifically, if the address corresponding to the symbol data of the symbol that stops on the upper row is "1200 (H)", "_WK_PIC_LFT1" stores the symbol data stored in the address "1200 (H)". do.
Next, in "_WK_PIC_LFT2", the symbol data stored in the address "1202(H)", which is obtained by adding "2(H)" to the above address "1200(H)", is stored.

Further, "_WK_PIC_LFT3" stores the symbol data stored at the address "1204(H)" which is the address "1200(H)" plus "4(H)".
In addition, when the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the upper row is "0", the symbol data stored at address "1200 (H)" is used instead of the symbol data stored at address "122A (H)". do. Similarly, when the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the top row is "1", the symbol data stored at address "1202(H)" is used instead of the symbol data stored at address "122C(H)". use.

(Example 2) Method using the lower row as a reference For example, when the left reel 31 stops, the address corresponding to the symbol data of the symbol to be stopped at the lower row is specified. Specifically, if the address corresponding to the symbol data of the symbol that stops at the bottom is "1204 (H)", "_WK_PIC_LFT3" stores the symbol data stored in the address "1204 (H)". do.
Next, in "_WK_PIC_LFT2", the symbol data stored in the address "1202(H)" obtained by subtracting "2(H)" from the address "1204(H)" is stored.
Further, "_WK_PIC_LFT1" stores the symbol data stored at the address "1200(H)" which is obtained by subtracting "4(H)" from the address "1204(H)".

In addition, when the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the bottom is "0", the symbol data stored at address "122A (H)" is used instead of the symbol data stored at address "1200 (H)". do. Similarly, when the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the top row is "1", the symbol data stored at address "122C (H)" is used instead of the symbol data stored at address "1202 (H)". use.
In either method of Example 1 or Example 2 above, for each reel 31, symbol data of one row can be used as a reference to obtain symbol data of other rows.
Then, as shown in FIGS. 232 to 234, symbol combination data exceeding the number of symbol numbers is stored (the symbol combination data of symbol number 0 is stored again next to the symbol combination data of symbol number 20, and Next, by storing the symbol combination data of symbol number 1 again), for example, even if the symbol number 0 stops in the lower row, the symbol combination of symbol number 20 will stop in the middle row. It becomes possible to easily obtain the data and the symbol combination data of symbol number 19 that will stop at the upper stage.

Next, a method of specifying symbol combination data that stops on an active line will be explained.
For example, let the symbol data of the left reel 31 of the symbol combination data "_WK_PIC_L1" of the active line L1 be "_WK_PIC_L1_L", the symbol data of the middle reel 31 be "_WK_PIC_L1_C", and the symbol data of the right reel 31 be "_WK_PIC_L1_R". The other valid lines L2 to L5 are similarly provided.
First, as a result of the lottery, "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" is determined as a winning number that can be stopped on the active line, and when the symbol number 20 is passing through the middle row of the left reel 31. The left stop switch 42 is operated, and then the middle stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol with symbol number 1 is passing through the middle stage of the middle reel 31, and then the symbol number 3 is passed through the middle stage of the right reel 31. When the right stop switch 42 was operated while the reels were passing, when all the reels 31 stopped,
"1" (upper left): Symbol number "0" (bell)
"2" (middle left): Symbol number "1" (replay)
"3" (lower left): Design number "2" (blank)
"4" (middle upper row): Design number "2" (bell)
"5" (middle middle row): Design number "3" (blue cherry)
"6" (lower middle row): Symbol number "4" (replay)
"7" (upper right row): Design number "4" (bell)
"8" (middle right): Symbol number "5" (replay)
"9" (lower right row): Design number "6" (red cherry)
Suppose that stops.

In this case, the symbol data stored in the storage area corresponding to each stop position is
_WK_PIC_LFT1:00001000(B), 00000000(B)
_WK_PIC_LFT2:00000011(B), 00000001(B)
_WK_PIC_LFT3:00000000(B), 00000000(B)
_WK_PIC_CEN1:00111000(B), 00000001(B)
_WK_PIC_CEN2:00110000(B), 00000000(B)
_WK_PIC_CEN3:00110011(B), 00000000(B)
_WK_PIC_RIG1:00111001(B), 00000001(B)
_WK_PIC_RIG2:00110010(B), 00000000(B)
_WK_PIC_RIG3:00110000(B), 00000000(B)
becomes.

Regarding effective line L1,
_WK_PIC_L1_L=_WK_PIC_LFT1:00001000(B), 00000000(B)
_WK_PIC_L1_C=_WK_PIC_CEN2: 00110000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L1_R=_WK_PIC_RIG3: 00110000 (B), 00000000 (B)
becomes.
Then, the value obtained by performing an AND (logical product) operation between the upper bytes (three) and an AND operation between the lower bytes (three) is set as "_WK_PIC_L1".
Specifically, the upper byte is "00001000(B)" AND "00110000(B)" AND "00110000(B)".
Further, "00000000(B)" AND "00000000(B)" AND "00000000(B)" is the lower byte. The calculation result is set as "_WK_PIC_L1".
therefore,
_WK_PIC_L1: 00000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
becomes.

Furthermore, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is updated by performing an OR (logical sum) operation on this data and "_WK_ALL_PIC". "_WK_ALL_PIC" is "0" before the first operation.
In the OR operation, an OR operation is performed between upper 1-byte data and an OR operation between lower 1-byte data.
Therefore,
_WK_ALL_PIC =00000000(B), 00000000(B)
becomes.

Next, regarding the effective line L2,
_WK_PIC_L2_L=_WK_PIC_LFT1: 00001000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L2_C=_WK_PIC_CEN1:00111000(B), 00000001(B)
_WK_PIC_L2_R=_WK_PIC_RIG1:00111001(B), 00000001(B)
becomes.
therefore,
_WK_PIC_L2:00001000(B), 00000000(B)
becomes.
In addition, "_WK_ALL_PIC" after updating (performs OR operation with "_WK_ALL_PIC" at the time of effective line L1),
_WK_ALL_PIC =00001000(B), 00000000(B)
becomes.

Regarding effective line L3,
_WK_PIC_L3_L=_WK_PIC_LFT2:00000011(B), 00000001(B)
_WK_PIC_L3_C=_WK_PIC_CEN2: 00110000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L3_R=_WK_PIC_RIG2:00110010(B), 00000000(B)
becomes.
therefore,
_WK_PIC_L3:00000000(B), 00000000(B)
becomes.
Also, "_WK_ALL_PIC" after updating is
_WK_ALL_PIC =00001000(B), 00000000(B)
becomes.

Regarding effective line L4,
_WK_PIC_L4_L=_WK_PIC_LFT3:00000000(B), 00000000(B)
_WK_PIC_L4_C=_WK_PIC_CEN3:00110011(B), 00000000(B)
_WK_PIC_L4_R=_WK_PIC_RIG3:00110000(B), 00000000(B)
becomes.
therefore,
_WK_PIC_L4:00000000(B), 00000000(B)
becomes.
Also, "_WK_ALL_PIC" after updating is
_WK_ALL_PIC =00001000(B), 00000000(B)
becomes.

Regarding effective line L5,
_WK_PIC_L5_L=_WK_PIC_LFT3: 00000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L5_C=_WK_PIC_CEN2: 00110000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L5_R=_WK_PIC_RIG1:00111001(B), 00000001(B)
becomes.
therefore,
_WK_PIC_L5:00000000(B), 00000000(B)
becomes.
Also, "_WK_ALL_PIC" after updating is
_WK_ALL_PIC =00001000(B), 00000000(B)
becomes.
As described above, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is calculated when the symbol combination data of the five active lines L1 to L5 are calculated (synthesized), and this symbol combination data becomes the data of the symbol combination that stops on any of the active lines. .

FIG. 235 is a diagram showing the winning combination definition in the twenty-eighth embodiment.
Execute an AND (logical AND) operation on the upper byte of "_WK_ALL_PIC" and the small win or replay role definition one by one, and if it is "0", it is determined that the corresponding win has not been won, and if it is "0" If not, it is determined that the role has won.
Also, perform an AND (logical product) operation on the lower byte of "_WK_ALL_PIC" and the role definition of the accessory one by one, and if it is "0", it is determined that the accessory has not won, and "0" If not, it is determined that the accessory has won a prize.

In addition, the above judgment may be performed for all small roles, replays, and accessories, but if the specification is such that there will be no duplicate winnings, as soon as it is determined that the winning role has been won, subsequent The calculation may be canceled.
In the above example, the upper byte of "_WK_ALL_PIC" is "00001000 (B)", so when you perform an AND operation with the small win or replay role definition, when you AND the small win B role definition, the result is "00001000 (B)". ” ≠ “0”, and it is determined that the small role B has won.
Also, since the lower byte of "_WK_ALL_PIC" is "00000000 (B)", the result is "0" even if it is ANDed with the winning combination definition of any of the characters.

Also, as a result of the lottery, if the design combination corresponding to the small role C (red cherry) or the small role D (blue cherry) is determined to be a winning number that can be stopped and displayed, there will be no duplicate winnings. , when the left reel 31 stops, regardless of whether "red cherry" or "blue cherry" stops at "1" (upper left row), "2" (middle left row), or "3" (lower left row), the payout is The number of sheets is uniform (for example, 2 sheets).
On the other hand, in a game where the symbol combination corresponding to minor role C or minor role D is determined to be a winning number that can be stopped and displayed as a result of the winning lottery, if the specification is such that there will be duplicate winnings, the left reel 31 will stop. Sometimes, if the "red cherry" or "blue cherry" stops at "2" (left middle row), it will be a single win on the active line L3. On the other hand, if the "red cherry" or "blue cherry" stops at "1" (upper left row), it will be a duplicate win on the active lines L1 and L2. Similarly, if the "red cherry" or "blue cherry" stops at "3" (lower left row), it will be a duplicate win on active lines L4 and L5.
In the case of a single winning, two coins will be paid out, and in the case of a duplicate (double) winning, four coins will be paid out.
In such a case, the following method may be used to calculate the number of coins to be paid out.

(First method)
Small winnings C (red cherries) and small winnings D (blue cherries) are made so that they do not win individually (“red cherries” and “blue cherries” do not stop on the middle left row), and only double winnings occur (on the left reel 31). When stopping a "red cherry" or "blue cherry", one example is to stop at either the upper left row or the lower left row.
In this case, if the number of coins to be paid out when winning a minor role C or minor role D is set to "2", when winning a minor role C or minor role D, there will always be two duplicate wins, so the number of coins to be paid out should be set in advance. An example of this is to set the number to "4".

(Second method)
When winning the small winning combination C or the small winning combination D, the stopping position of the "blue cherry" or "red cherry" symbol on the left reel 31 may be determined.
For example, the symbol data of "_WK_PIC_LFT1", "_WK_PIC_LFT2", and "_WK_PIC_LFT3" are judged, and if the symbol data of "_WK_PIC_LFT2" (left middle row) is the symbol data corresponding to minor role C or minor role D, 2 The payout will be in pieces.
On the other hand, when the symbol data of "_WK_PIC_LFT1" or "_WK_PIC_LFT3" (upper left row or lower left row) is the symbol data corresponding to the minor winning combination C or the minor winning combination D, four pieces may be paid out.

(Third method)
For example, the winning combination and the number of coins to be paid out may be determined for each active line.
When the "(red or blue) cherry" stops at the middle left row when the left reel 31 stops, only the symbol combination data "_WK_PIC_L3" becomes data other than "0". As a result, it is determined that two coins will be paid out.
On the other hand, when "(red or blue) cherry" stops at the upper left row when the left reel 31 stops, the symbol combination data of "_WK_PIC_L1" and the symbol combination data of "_WK_PIC_L2" are data other than "0". Become. As a result, it is determined that two coins are to be paid out based on the symbol combination data of "_WK_PIC_L1", and it is determined that two coins are to be paid out based on the symbol combination data of "_WK_PIC_L2". Then, the total of both is set as a payout of 4 pieces.

When set in this way, it can also be used, for example, when it is set so that the small winning combination C or D (cherry) and the small winning combination A (bell) are won in duplicate.
For example, when the left reel 31 stops, "Red Cherry" with symbol number 3 stops on the upper row, and "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" stops on the active line L3, the number of Bell payouts Assuming that there are 8 pieces,
Symbol combination data of "_WK_PIC_L1": Payout of 2 pieces Symbol combination data of "_WK_PIC_L2": Payout of 2 pieces Symbol combination data of "_WK_PIC_L3": Payout of 8 pieces, making it possible to pay out a total of 12 pieces.

Further, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of coins to be paid out in one game is set to, for example, 15 coins, and the number of coins to be paid out when winning a small prize C or D alone is set to 8 coins.
In this case, when the small winning combination C or the small winning combination D wins alone, 8 pieces will be paid out.
In addition, when winning the small winning combination C or the small winning combination D twice, the number of coins will be 8×2=16, but the upper limit of 15 coins will be given priority and 15 coins will be paid out. Specifically, a method is to perform a comparison operation between the calculation result "16" of "8+8" and the upper limit value "15", and if the upper limit value is exceeded, the upper limit value is set.

Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, the initialization timing of the storage areas "_WK_PIC_LFT1" to "_WK_PIC_RIG3", "_WK_PIC_L1" to "_WK_PIC_L3", and "_WK_ALL_PIC" is, for example, after the payout process is completed, and the next time This is until it becomes possible to stop the reels 31 in the game. For example, it may be set at a predetermined timing after the end of the payout process, a predetermined timing after the start switch 41 is operated, or a predetermined timing after the reels 31 start rotating.

Furthermore, in the 28th embodiment, nine storage areas "_WK_PIC_LFT1" to "_WK_PIC_RIG3" and "_WK_ALL_PIC" shown in FIG. It is also possible not to provide it.
In this case, the following calculation method may be used.
First, the value obtained by performing an AND (logical product) operation between the upper bytes (three) of "_WK_PIC_LFT1", "_WK_PIC_CEN2", and "_WK_PIC_RIG3" and an AND operation between the lower bytes (three) is stored in the HL register, for example. (For example, store the upper byte in the H register and the lower byte in the L register value.)
Furthermore, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is updated by performing an OR (logical sum) operation on this data and "_WK_ALL_PIC". The initial value of “_WK_ALL_PIC” is “0”.
In the OR operation, an OR operation is performed between upper 1-byte data and an OR operation between lower 1-byte data.
As a result, the symbol combination data on the active line L1 is reflected in "_WK_ALL_PIC".

Next, the value obtained by performing an AND (logical product) operation between the upper bytes (3) of "_WK_PIC_LFT1", "_WK_PIC_CEN1", and "_WK_PIC_RIG1" and an AND operation between the lower bytes (3) is stored in the HL register. Remember.
Furthermore, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is updated by performing an OR (logical sum) operation on this data and "_WK_ALL_PIC".
As a result, the symbol combination data on the active line L2 is reflected in "_WK_ALL_PIC".
Next, the value obtained by performing an AND (logical product) operation between the upper bytes (3) of "_WK_PIC_LFT2", "_WK_PIC_CEN2", and "_WK_PIC_RIG2" and an AND operation between the lower bytes (3) is stored in the HL register. Remember.
Furthermore, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is updated by performing an OR (logical sum) operation on this data and "_WK_ALL_PIC".
As a result, the symbol combination data on the valid line L3 is reflected in "_WK_ALL_PIC".

Next, the value obtained by performing an AND (logical product) operation between the upper bytes (3) of "_WK_PIC_LFT3", "_WK_PIC_CEN3", and "_WK_PIC_RIG3" and an AND operation between the lower bytes (3) is stored in the HL register. Remember.
Furthermore, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is updated by performing an OR (logical sum) operation on this data and "_WK_ALL_PIC".
As a result, the symbol combination data on the active line L4 is reflected in "_WK_ALL_PIC".
Next, the value obtained by performing an AND (logical product) operation between the upper bytes (3) of "_WK_PIC_LFT3", "_WK_PIC_CEN2", and "_WK_PIC_RIG1" and an AND operation between the lower bytes (3) is stored in the HL register. Remember.
Furthermore, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is updated by performing an OR (logical sum) operation on this data and "_WK_ALL_PIC".
As a result, the symbol combination data on the active line L5 is reflected in "_WK_ALL_PIC".
If the calculation is performed as described above, there is no need to provide the storage areas "_WK_PIC_L1" to "_WK_PIC_L5", so the storage area of the RWM 53 can be reduced.

Although the twenty-fifth to twenty-eighth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and can be modified in various ways, such as the following.
(1) For example, in the 25th embodiment, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is composed of nine pieces (first group to ninth group) based on the number of 1BB, RB, replay, and small roles. Various settings can be made depending on the type and number of winnings.
For example, when the number of winning combinations is 8 or less, the stop symbol data can be composed of 1-byte data.

In addition, in the 25th embodiment, in order to separate replays and small winnings, bits D3 to D7 of the stop symbol data (fourth group) are left unused, and the bits corresponding to small winnings 01 and later are replaced with the stop symbol data (fourth group). Group 5) and thereafter. However, this is not limited to this, and the D3 bit of the stop symbol data (4th group) is set as the minor winning symbol 01 winning symbol, the D4 bit is the minor winning symbol 02 winning symbol, etc., and unused bits are eliminated, and RWM storage of the stopping symbol data is performed. May save space.
In this case, when calculating the payout number data, it is possible to AND the data of the stop symbol data (fourth group) and "11111000 (B)" to mask the data related to the replay activation symbol. .

Or, contrary to the above,
Stop symbol data (5th group): Small role 01 winning symbol to small role 08 winning symbol (15 pieces paid out)
Stop symbol data (6th group): Small role 09 winning symbol to small role 12 winning symbol (15 pieces paid out)
Stop symbol data (7th group): Small role 13 winning symbols to small role 20 winning symbols (3 pieces paid out)
Stop symbol data (8th group): Small role 21 winning symbol to small role 24 winning symbol (3 pieces paid out)
Stop symbol data (9th group): Small role 25 winning symbol to small role 32 winning symbol (1 payout)
Stop symbol data (10th group): Small role 33 winning symbol to small role 34 winning symbol (1 payout)
It is also possible to divide the data so that one stop symbol data does not include data with different payout numbers.
In addition, in this case, it is preferable that the addresses of the stop symbol data (fifth group) to stop symbol data (tenth group) are continuous.

(2) In the designated data acquisition (M_SELDAT_SET) shown in FIG. 201, when it is determined in step S1118 that designated data exists, the flowchart is ended. However, for example, when the specifications include duplicate winnings of small winning combinations, the flowchart is not ended even if it is determined that there is designated data, and the number of coins to be paid out is determined for all stopped symbol data. On the other hand, in a specification in which there is no duplicate winning of small winning combinations, as shown in FIG. 201, the flowchart can be ended at the time when it is determined that there is designated data.
Furthermore, in the case where the specifications include multiple winnings of small winning combinations, and the maximum number of coins to be paid out in one game is set to 15, the following method may be used.
Firstly, when it is determined that a 15-piece winning combination (the maximum number of paid-out pieces in one game) such as the small winning combination 01 has been won, the acquisition of designated data is ended as in the present embodiment.

Second, the number of paid out pieces is determined for all the stopped symbol data, and each time it is determined that a small role has been won, the number of paid out pieces is added up and stored (for example, the number of paid out pieces data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) or A Finally, if the total value exceeds "15 (D)", the number of coins to be paid out should be corrected to "15 (D)" (set to the upper limit). It will be done. Alternatively, each time it is determined that a small role has won, the number of paid out coins is added up, and it is determined whether the total value exceeds "15 (D)", and the total value exceeds "15 (D)". In this case, the number of coins to be paid out is corrected to "15 (D)" and the specified data acquisition is ended, and when the total value does not exceed "15 (D)", the specified data acquisition is continued.

(3) In the 27th embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 232 to 234, the address of each symbol combination data in the reel symbol arrangement table is composed of 2 bytes. However, the invention is not limited to this, and when the number of symbol combinations is 8 or less, it can be configured from 1 byte.

(4) In the twenty-fifth embodiment, for example, the following process may be executed after execution of the stop symbol set (FIG. 195) and before proceeding to the one line display determination (FIG. 200).
In the example shown in FIG. 173, replay is not provided in the operating state flag, but as shown in FIG. 35 (eleventh embodiment), a flag related to replay is provided in the D0 bit of the operating state flag, for example.
Then, after all the reels 31 have stopped, the operating state flags are checked, and if the operating state flags related to replay, 1BB, and RB are on, the process does not proceed to the 1-line display determination (FIG. 200). Thereby, it is possible to proceed to the one-line display determination only when a small winning combination is won or when a winning combination is not won.

(5) In FIG. 229, a storage area for differential data is provided at the final address of the symbol arrangement table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it goes without saying that the difference data may be stored outside the symbol arrangement table.

(6) In Figure 173, the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of the address “F00C(H)” will be “1” if it is determined that there is a winning of a small winning combination (a winning combination with a payout), and if there is no winning. A bit area may be provided that becomes "0" when the determination is made. In that case, in a game when the RB is in operation, it is determined whether the data in the bit area is "1" or not, and if it is "1", the number of winnings when the RB is in operation at the address "F010 (H)". (for example, by subtracting ``1'' or adding ``1''), and when it is ``0'', the number of winnings when the RB is activated is not updated.

(7) As shown in step S1017 in FIG. 194, the stop position was determined based on the rise data of the stop switch 42. Here, it is also possible to employ level data instead of rise data.
However, when level data is used instead of rise data, for example, the stop switch 42 continues to be operated before the reel 31 reaches a certain speed, and then the reel 31 reaches a certain speed and the reel 31 is stopped. The reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 that continues to be operated is controlled to stop at the timing when it becomes possible to accept the reel. For this reason, the reels 31 will stop regardless of the player's skill. In this case, by adjusting the timing at which the reel 31 stop operation can be accepted, it becomes possible to stop symbol combinations that require eye presses (for example, the 1BB symbol combination) regardless of the player's skill. In some cases. On the other hand, if the stop position is determined based on the rising data, the above problem does not occur. Therefore, from this point of view, it is preferable to determine the stop position based on the rising data.

(8) In the example of FIG. 194, the stop position is determined based on the rise data of the stop switch 42, and the stop position is determined from when it is decided to determine the stop position (when "Yes" is determined in step S1017). An interrupt wait process was executed (step S1011) so that no interrupt process was performed until the process including updating the symbol data (step S1035 in FIG. 195) (stop symbol set in step S1024 in FIG. 194) was completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of interrupt waiting processing, interrupts may be prohibited so that interrupt processing is not executed during that period.

(9) In the 25th embodiment, the update of the stop symbol data was executed from the 9th group. However, the process is not limited to this, and may be executed starting from the first group.
Specifically, in FIG. 195, "9" is set in the B register in step S1032, and "1" is subtracted from the B register value in step S1036. Instead, "1" is set in the B register in step S1032. , and in step S1036, the process of adding "1" to the B register value may be executed. In this case, in step S1036, when the B register value after adding "1" becomes "10 (D)", the process may be terminated.
Note that the above also applies to the display determination process (FIG. 227) in the twenty-sixth embodiment. Specifically, in FIG. 227, "9" is set in the B register in step S1181, "1" is subtracted from the B register value in step S1195, and whether or not the B register value is "0" is determined in step S1196. judged. Instead, "1" is set in the B register in step S1181, "1" is added to the B register value in step S1195, and it is determined whether the B register value is "10 (D)" in step S1196. If the B register value becomes "10 (D)", the process may be terminated.

(10) In the above embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of one of the gaming machines, but the slot machine 10 is a "reel-type gaming machine" installed in a No. 4 business establishment that is subject to the Entertainment Business Law. (so-called "pachislot gaming machines"), but can also be applied to casino machines, for example. Furthermore, regardless of whether the gaming machine is a reel-type gaming machine or not, the present invention can also be applied to a managed gaming machine that does not use medals.
(11) All the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification, including the 25th to 28th embodiments, are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<29th embodiment>
Hereinafter, in the description of the 29th to 36th embodiments, the left reel 31 will be referred to as the first reel 31, the middle reel 31 will be referred to as the second reel 31, and the right reel 31 will be referred to as the third reel 31.
In addition, in the description of the 29th to 36th embodiments, the left stop switch 42 is referred to as the first stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42 is referred to as the second stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 is referred to as the third stop switch 42. There are cases where it is called.

Furthermore, in the description of the 29th to 36th embodiments, "#" may refer to all of "1" to "3" or may indicate any one of "1" to "3". have
Further, in FIGS. 237, 243, 249, 253, and 254, which will be described later, the numerical value shown in parentheses in the "address" column indicates the number of bytes of the storage area.
Furthermore, in FIGS. 237, 243, 249, 253, and 254, which will be described later, "D0" to "D7" respectively indicate bits D0 to D7 of 8-bit data.

In the 29th embodiment, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed before the predetermined period for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the reels 31 has elapsed, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) is This is to execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY).
Here, the "four-phase excitation output" has the same meaning as the "four-phase excitation state" in the fourth embodiment and FIG. 13.
Moreover, the "predetermined period for performing four-phase excitation output" has the same meaning as "the time from the start of the four-phase excitation state to the end of the four-phase excitation state" in the fourth embodiment and FIG. 13.

In this embodiment as well, like the other embodiments, the slot machine 10 includes three reels 31 (left reel 31, middle reel 31, right reel 31), and three reels 31 corresponding to each reel 31. stop switches 42 (left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, right stop switch 42).
Furthermore, the symbol arrangement of the reels 31, the active line, the type of winning combination, the symbol combination of the winning combination, the number of payouts, the condition device, the winning combination, RT, and the main game state are the same as in the twenty-third embodiment.
Furthermore, in this embodiment as well, similarly to the fourth embodiment and the twenty-third embodiment, the motor 32 for rotating the reel 31 is a four-phase stepping motor, and while the reel 31 and motor 32 are rotating, A 1-2 phase excitation output is performed in which 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation are alternately performed, and when stopping the reel 31 and motor 32, a 4-phase excitation output is performed in which 4 phases are simultaneously excited.

Furthermore, in this embodiment as well, as in the twenty-fifth embodiment, all motor index passing checks are performed in step S1013 of the reel stop reception check (M_STOP_CHK) (FIG. 194) during the main process (M_MAIN).
Here, for all reels 31, after there is a change in the # reel motor index, the first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) (Figure 135), the second reel symbol number (for passing position) The values of (_NB_RL2_PASPIC) (FIG. 136) and the third reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) (FIG. 137) are all values other than "FF(H) (11111111(B))". Therefore, if "1" is added to the result of sequential OR operation of these values, the result will be a value other than "0".

Further, in step S1014 in FIG. 194, it is determined whether or not it is possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42 (stop acceptance). When the calculation result in step S1013 is a value other than "0", the result is "Yes" in step S1014. Thereafter, when the stop switch 42 is operated, "Yes" is determined in step S1017 in FIG. 194, and the process proceeds to step S1022, where the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted.

Also in this embodiment, as explained in the fourth embodiment and the twenty-third embodiment, when the stop switch 42 is operated (the stop button 42a of the stop switch 42 is pressed), the detection sensor 42e is turned on from off. Then, the signal of the stop switch 42 changes from off to on, and "1" is stored in the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) at address "F012(H)".
For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the signal of the left stop switch 42 changes from off to on, and "1" is stored in the D0 bit of input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV). At this time, if the middle stop switch 42, right stop switch 42, and start switch 41 are not operated, the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) becomes "00000001 (B)".

Further, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated, the signal of the middle stop switch 42 is turned on from off, and "1" is stored in the D1 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV). At this time, if the left stop switch 42, right stop switch 42, and start switch 41 are not operated, the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) becomes "00000010(B)".

Furthermore, when the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 are operated, the signals of both the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 turn from off to on, and input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) ``1'' is stored in both the D0 bit and D1 bit of . At this time, if the right stop switch 42 and the start switch 41 are not operated, the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) becomes "00000011 (B)".

Then, when the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) changes from "0" to "1" and "1" is stored in the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of the address "F017(H)", the stop switch 42 It is determined that the operation has been accepted.
For example, when the D0 bit of input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) during the previous interrupt processing is "0" and the D0 bit of input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) during the current interrupt processing is "1". , "1" is stored in the D0 bit of input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP). Thereby, it is determined that the operation of the left stop switch 42 has been accepted.

Also, when the D1 bit of input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) during the previous interrupt processing is "0" and the D1 bit of input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) during the current interrupt processing is "1". , "1" is stored in the D1 bit of input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP). Thereby, it is determined that the operation of the middle stop switch 42 has been accepted.

Furthermore, both the D0 bit and the D1 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) at the time of the previous interrupt processing are "0", and the D0 bit and the D1 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) at the time of the current interrupt processing. When both the D1 bits are "1", "1" is stored in both the D0 bit and the D1 bit of the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP). Thereby, it is determined that the two operations of the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 have been accepted at the same time.

Note that in this embodiment as well, the cycle of interrupt processing is set to "1.117 ms" similarly to the twenty-third embodiment. Then, during this "1.117ms", when both the signals of the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 turn from off to on, both the D0 bit and the D1 bit of the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) are set to " 1'' is stored, and it is determined that the two operations of the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 have been accepted at the same time.

Further, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal of the stop switch 42 is changed from off to on, but it may be changed from on to off. That is, the signal of the stop switch 42 is not limited to active high, but may be active low. Then, when the signal of the stop switch 42 changes from on to off, it may be determined that the operation of the stop switch 42 has been accepted.
In other words, "the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted" means that the signal of the stop switch 42 is turned on from OFF when it is active high, and the signal of the stop switch 42 is changed from OFF to ON when it is active low. means going from on to off. The same applies not only to the stop switch 42 but also to other switches.

Then, in step S1022 in FIG. 194, when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted ("1" is stored in the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)), the process advances to the next step S1023.
In step S1023, "4 (D)" indicating "start of deceleration" is stored in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIGS. 135 to 137).

In addition, in step S1023, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the winning combination result of the current game and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, and the stop position of the reel 31 is determined according to the determined stop position. The symbol number is stored in the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) (FIGS. 135 to 137).

For example, when winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated, and the small winning combination 01, which pays out 15 pieces, or the small winning number 13, which pays out 3 pieces. You can win any one of 17 to 17.
Here, when the small win A1 condition device is activated during the general game of the 1BB game (when 1BB is activated) and the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order (left middle right), the small win 01 (15 coins) is activated. When a winning combination (win) is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in an incorrect pressing order (a pressing order other than the correct pressing order), one of the small winning combinations 13 to 17 (3-card winning combination) is won.
On the other hand, when the accessory is not activated, there is no correct pressing order when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, and even if both of them are pressed in the pressing order, any one of the small winning combinations 13 to 17 (3-card winning combination) is Win a prize.
Then, when the small win A1 condition device is activated when the accessory is not activated, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, the symbols constituting the small win 13, for example, are moved from the active line to within the range of the maximum number of moving pieces. is located, the symbol number of that symbol is stored in the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC).

Furthermore, in step S909 of the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) (FIG. 154) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after the process of step S1023, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC), When it is determined that the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) is the same value, the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) (Figure 134) is set to "00001111(B)" (4-phase on) is stored, and "1(D)" indicating "deceleration" is stored in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIGS. 135 to 137). .
Then, in the port output process in step S462 during the interrupt process (I_INTR) to be executed thereafter, φ1 of the motor 32 is A four-phase excitation output is performed to simultaneously excite the four phases of ~φ4. This applies a brake to the motor 32 and stops the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32.

In this way, when the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for stopping position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) become the same value, the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #), the deceleration pulse data "00001111(B)" is stored, and four-phase excitation output is performed.
Therefore, even if the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, the four-phase excitation output is not immediately performed.

Note that this is not limited to the case where the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for stopping position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) become the same value. The symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for stopping position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) are the same value, and the step number of 1 symbol on # reel 13 (_NB_RL#_STEP ) reaches a predetermined value (for example, "3"), the deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" is stored in the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#), and the 4-phase excitation output is It may also be done.

Further, in this embodiment, the four-phase excitation output is performed every "1.117ms" interrupt processing while "00001111(B)" is stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#).
Furthermore, at the start of deceleration, "90 (D)" corresponding to the address "1050 (H)" (pulse output counter during deceleration ) (FIG. 156) is stored, and thereafter, the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) is subtracted by "1" every two interrupts.

Then, when the value of the # reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) becomes "0", "00000000 (B)", which is the pulse data at the time of stop, is stored in the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#). At the same time, "0 (D)" indicating "stop" is stored in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS). This ends the four-phase excitation output.

In this way, while the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) is "1" or more and "00001111 (B)" is stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#), , the 4-phase excitation output continues, the value of the # reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) becomes "0", and "00000000 (B)" is stored in the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#). Then, the four-phase excitation output stops.
In addition, the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) becomes "0", the stop pulse data "00000000 (B)" is stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#), and the #th A state in which "0 (D)" indicating "stop" is stored in the reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) and the four-phase excitation output has ended is a state in which the reel 31 is stopped.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the interrupt processing cycle is set to "1.117ms", and the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) is subtracted by "1" every two interrupts. .
Therefore, it takes "1.117 x 2 x 90 = 201.06 ms" for the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) to go from "90 (D)" to "0 (D)". Therefore, the four-phase excitation output continues for "201.06 ms", and after "201.06 ms" has elapsed, the four-phase excitation output ends.
That is, in this embodiment, the "predetermined period" for performing four-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 corresponds to "201.06 ms".

Note that the period of the interrupt processing is not limited to "1.117 ms", and the subtraction of the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) is not limited to every two interrupts.
For example, the cycle of the interrupt processing may be set to "2.235 ms" and the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) may be subtracted by "1" for each interrupt.

Furthermore, when the stop switch 42 is released (the player's hand is released from the stop button 42a of the stop switch 42 that had been pressed, and the stop button 42a returns to its original position (the position shown in FIG. 12(a))), , the detection sensor 42e goes from on to off, the signal of the stop switch 42 goes from on to off, and "0" is stored in the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) at address "F012(H)". be done.
That is, "the stop switch 42 is released" means that the signal of the stop switch 42 is turned off from on when it is active high, and the signal of the stop switch 42 is turned off when it is active low. It means to turn on from. The same applies not only to the stop switch 42 but also to other switches.

In the present embodiment, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped last is accepted, before a predetermined period for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the reel 31 to be stopped last has elapsed. (For example, the timing when the 4-phase excitation output is performed to stop the third reel 31, or the timing before the 4-phase excitation output is performed to stop the third reel 31) Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and after the predetermined period (after the end of the four-phase excitation output), the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed. Execute medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY).
For this reason, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped last is released during the predetermined period (during 4-phase excitation output) during which the 4-phase excitation output is being performed to stop the reel 31 to be stopped last. Also, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, but the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed after the predetermined period has elapsed (after the end of the four-phase excitation output).

Further, in this embodiment, if the operation of any one of the start switch 41 and the three (left, middle, right) stop switches 42 is accepted, "No" is returned in step S1307 in FIG. 236, and the step Since the process does not proceed to S291 and subsequent steps, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed regardless of whether or not the predetermined period for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the reel 31, which is to be stopped last, has elapsed. .
Then, when a predetermined period of time for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the reel 31 to be finally stopped has elapsed, and the start switch 41 and the three (left, middle, right) stop switches 42 are released, as shown in FIG. Since the answer in step S1307 is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S291 and subsequent steps, the display determination process and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning can be executed.

FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the twenty-ninth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 in the twenty-third embodiment.
In the flowchart of the twenty-ninth embodiment shown in FIG. 236, steps that are different from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 139 are given the same step numbers.

Furthermore, in the main processing (M_MAIN) of the twenty-ninth embodiment, the processing from step S295 to step S300 in FIG. 139 is executed, but the illustration of the processing from step S295 to step S300 is omitted in FIG. 236.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly explained.

As shown in FIG. 236, in the 29th embodiment, after executing the reel stop reception check (M_STOP_CHK) in step S752, the process proceeds to step S1301, and the main control board 50 checks the address "F012(H)" of the RWM 53. The data stored in input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) is stored in the A register. Then, the process advances to the next step S1302.

In step S1302, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation on the A register value and the mask data "01000111 (B)" and stores the result in the A register. Then, the process advances to the next step S1303.
Here, the mask data "01000111 (B)" used in step S1302 is data for masking (setting to "0") bit data other than the D0 bit, D1 bit, D2 bit, and D6 bit. That is, by performing a logical product (AND) operation on input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) and "01000111 (B)", the D0 bit (left stop switch signal), D1 bit (middle stop switch signal), Bit data other than the D2 bit (right stop switch signal) and the D6 bit (start switch signal) can be masked (set to "0").

In step S1303, the main control board 50 performs a logical sum (OR) between the A register value and the data stored in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) (FIG. 135) of the address "F04D(H)" of the RWM 53. Perform the calculation and store the result in the A register. Then, the process advances to the next step S1304.
In step S1304, the main control board 50 performs a logical sum (OR) between the A register value and the data stored in the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) (FIG. 136) of the address "F058(H)" of the RWM 53. Perform the calculation and store the result in the A register. Then, the process advances to the next step S1305.

In step S1305, the main control board 50 performs a logical sum (OR) between the A register value and the data stored in the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) (FIG. 137) at address "F063(H)" of the RWM 53. Perform the calculation and store the result in the A register. Then, the process advances to the next step S1306.

In step S1306, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation between the A register value and the mask data "01111111 (B)". Then, the process advances to the next step S1307.
Here, the mask data "01111111 (B)" used in step S1306 is data for masking (setting to "0") the bit data of the D7 bit. That is, by performing a logical product (AND) operation between the data of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) and "01111111 (B)", the D7 bit (data indicating whether it is the excitation update timing) is obtained. It can be masked (set to "0").

In step S1307, it is determined whether the zero flag is "1". That is, it is determined whether the result of the logical product (AND) operation in step S1306 is "0".
Then, when the zero flag is "1" (the result of the AND operation in step S1306 is "0"), it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, and the result is "Yes" in step S1307, and the display judgment in step S291 is made. Proceed to. This makes it possible to execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in the subsequent step S294.

In other words, when the data of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), the data of the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the data of the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) are data indicating a stop, all It is determined that the reels 31 have stopped, and display determination and medal payout processing at the time of winning can be executed.

On the other hand, if the zero flag is not "1", it is determined that one of the reels 31 is not stopped, "No" is obtained in step S1307, and the process returns to the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) in step S752. In this case, the processing from step S752 onwards will be repeated. As a result, the process does not proceed to the display determination in step S291, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 is also not executed.

In other words, if any of the data of the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS), the data of the second reel driving state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the data of the third reel driving state (_WK_RL3_STS) is not data indicating stop. , does not execute the medal payout process when winning a prize.
For example, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 have stopped, and the right reel 31 has received the operation of the right stop switch 42 but is still in the state of starting deceleration or is decelerating (during 4-phase excitation output). In some cases, the medal payout process upon winning is not executed.

Here, when the D0 bit, D1 bit, D2 bit, and D6 bit of input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) are all "0", that is, the left stop switch signal, middle stop switch signal, When both the right stop switch signal and the start switch signal are off, the result of the AND operation in step S1302 is "00000000 (B)".

Further, when the first reel driving state (_WK_RL1_STS), the second reel driving state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the third reel driving state (_WK_RL3_STS) are all "00000000 (B)" or "10000000 (B)", that is, , when all reels 31 are stopped, the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) are sequentially ORed, and the result is The result of performing an AND operation on the mask data "01111111 (B)" is "00000000 (B)".

Therefore, the reason why the result of the AND operation in step S1306 is "00000000 (B)" is because the left stop switch signal, middle stop switch signal, right stop switch signal, and start switch signal are all off. , and only when all reels 31 are stopped. Then, only at this time, "Yes" is determined in step S1307, and the display determination in step S291 and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 can be executed.

Also, when one or more of the left stop switch signal, middle stop switch signal, right stop switch signal, and start switch signal is on, that is, the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42. , and the start switch 41, the result of the AND operation in step S1306 is "00000000(B)" even if all the reels 31 are stopped. "do not become.

Specifically, for example, even if the four-phase excitation output of the motors 32 of all reels 31 including the motor 32 of the reel 31 to be stopped last is completed, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped last is not operated. If it remains accepted, the result of the AND operation in step S1306 will not be "00000000(B)".
In this case, since "No" is obtained in step S1307, neither the display determination in step S291 nor the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 is executed.

For example, even if the four-phase excitation output of the motors 32 of all reels 31 including the motor 32 of the reel 31 to be stopped last (for example, the right reel 31) is finished, the reel 31 to be stopped last (for example, the right reel 31) In a situation where the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to is accepted, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stopped first (for example, the left reel 31) is operated, and then the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stopped first is operated. Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stopped last is released while operating the reel 42, the stop switch corresponding to the reel 31 that stopped first is still being operated, so the logical product (AND) calculation in step S1306 is performed. The result is not "00000000(B)".

In this case as well, since the answer is "No" in step S1307, neither the display determination in step S291 nor the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 is executed.
In this way, in a situation where any of the stop switches 42 is operated, by preventing the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 from being executed, the number of credits can be changed at the timing desired by the player. addition or payout of medals from the hopper 35.

Furthermore, even if the left stop switch signal, middle stop switch signal, right stop switch signal, and start switch signal are all off, that is, the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, right stop switch 42, and start switch Even if all the reels 41 are released, if there is one or more reels 31 that are not stopped, the result of the AND operation in step S1306 will not be "00000000 (B)".

Specifically, for example, even if all the stop switches 42 including the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped last and the start switch 41 are released, the motor 32 of the reel 31 to be stopped last is 4-phase excited. If the output is not completed, the result of the AND operation in step S1306 will not be "00000000(B)".
In this case, since "No" is obtained in step S1307, neither the display determination in step S291 nor the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 is executed.

Here, for example, if the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated, and the small winning combination 01 becomes a payout of 15 pieces, or a small winning number 01 becomes a payout of 3 pieces. It is assumed that any one of the small winning combinations 13 to 17 becomes possible to win.
Furthermore, the two reels 31 stop (the excitation output for stopping the reels 31 ends), the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, and three pieces are paid out. It is assumed that the symbol combination (FIG. 119) corresponding to the small winning combination 13 can be stopped and displayed.

Under such circumstances, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, before the predetermined period for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31 has elapsed. (For example, the timing when the 4-phase excitation output is performed to stop the third reel 31, or the timing before the 4-phase excitation output is performed to stop the third reel 31). Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the eye reel 31 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.
Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released during the predetermined period when the four-phase excitation output is being performed to stop the third reel 31, medals will not be paid out at the time of winning. Processing (M_WIN_PAY) is not executed.
Then, after a predetermined period for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31 has elapsed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 49, in the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning, the number of credits data is acquired in step S393, and in the next step S394, the acquired number of credits data is "50 (D)". Determine whether it exists or not. That is, it is determined whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50".
When the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50", "Yes" is determined in step S394, and the process proceeds to one medal payout process in step S398. In this case, the process does not proceed to the process of adding the number of credits in step S397.

On the other hand, if the number of credits has not reached the upper limit value "50", the answer is "No" in step S394. In this case, the process proceeds to step S397 for adding the number of credits, and does not proceed to step S398 for paying out one medal.
Further, when the process proceeds to step S398, one medal payout process, as explained in the first embodiment (C), a process of outputting a drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is executed, the hopper motor 36 is driven, and the actual medals are dispensed from the hopper 35. Further, by detecting whether the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on or off, it is determined that one medal has been paid out from the hopper 35.

In this way, in the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when winning a prize, the process of adding the number of credits is executed until the number of credits reaches the upper limit "50", and once the number of credits reaches the upper limit "50". , executes a process of outputting a drive signal for the hopper motor 36, drives the hopper motor 36, and pays out actual medals from the hopper 35.
Furthermore, common processing is executed up to the middle when driving the hopper motor 36 to pay out medals from the hopper 35 and when adding up the number of credits. This makes it possible to simplify the processing and reduce the amount of ROM used by the program.

That is, when the number of credits is the upper limit "50", the winning number "10" is won by the prize drawing means 61, the minor prize A1 condition device is activated, and the two reels 31 are stopped. In a game in which the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 13 in which three medals are awarded is stopped and displayed, the third reel is After the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 is accepted, at a predetermined timing before the elapse of a predetermined period for performing excitation output to stop the third reel 31, the third reel 31 is activated. Even if the corresponding stop switch 42 is released, after a predetermined period of excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 has elapsed, a drive signal output process is executed to output a drive signal for the hopper 35. do.

As a result, the hopper motor 36 is not driven while the motor 32 (stepping motor) is being energized in four phases, and the hopper motor 36 can be driven after the four-phase excitation of the motor 32 is completed. The current necessary to drive the motor 36 can be secured.

On the other hand, when the number of credits is "0", the winning number "10" is won by the prize drawing means 61, the minor prize A1 condition device is activated, and the two reels 31 are stopped. In a game in which the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 13 in which three medals are awarded is stopped and displayed, the third reel is After the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 is accepted, at a predetermined timing before the elapse of a predetermined period for performing excitation output to stop the third reel 31, the third reel 31 is activated. Even if the corresponding stop switch 42 is released, an addition process for adding the number of credits is executed after a predetermined period of time during which excitation output is performed to stop the third reel 31.

In this case, the drive signal output process for the hopper 35 is not executed, but the number of credits is By executing the addition process, it is possible to standardize the process up to the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning. That is, since the processing up to the medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be shared without determining the number of credits at the start of the game, the amount of ROM used by the program can be reduced.

Also, for example, if the winning number "10" is won in the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated, and the small winning number 01 is paid out of 15 pieces, or the small winning number is 01, which pays out 3 pieces. Suppose that any of the winning combinations 13 to 17 becomes possible to win.
Furthermore, the two reels 31 stop, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 (third reel 31) is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 13 results in a payout of three pieces. (FIG. 119) can now be stopped and displayed.

Under such a situation (in which two reels 31 are stopped), even if the predetermined period of 4-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31 has elapsed, the third reel 31 If the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 continues to be accepted, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed. Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.

In this way, in a game where symbol combinations for which medals are paid out (granted) are stopped and displayed, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continued to be operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY ) is not executed and the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning becomes executable.
Thereby, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

In addition, regardless of whether or not a predetermined period for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31 has elapsed, one of the start switch 41 and three (left, middle, right) stop switches 42 If any of these operations is accepted, "No" is returned in step S1307 in FIG. 236, and the process does not proceed to steps S291 and subsequent steps, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.
Then, when the start switch 41 and all three (left, middle, right) stop switches 42 are released and a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which four-phase excitation output is performed to stop the third reel 31, as shown in FIG. Since the answer in step S1307 is "Yes" and the process advances to steps S291 and subsequent steps, it becomes possible to execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning.

In this way, in a game where symbol combinations for which medals are paid out (granted) are displayed in a stopped state, the start switch 41 and any one of the three (left, middle, right) stop switches 42 are continuously operated. , the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and when the start switch 41 and all three (left, middle, right) stop switches 42 are released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed. It becomes possible.
Thereby, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

Note that even if the power switch 11 is unintentionally turned off and the power-off process is executed while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is being operated, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is operated. By turning on the power switch 11 while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is being operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning will not be executed and the third reel 31 will be dealt with. When the stop switch 42 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning becomes executable.
Thereby, even if the power is cut off at an unintended timing, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at the timing desired by the player.

Similarly, for example, even if the four-phase excitation output of the motors 32 of all the reels 31 including the motor 32 of the reel 31 to be stopped last (for example, the right reel 31) has finished, the reel 31 to be stopped last (for example, the right reel 31 ), the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stopped first (for example, the left reel 31) is operated, and then the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stopped first is operated. When the stop switch 42 corresponding to the last stopped reel 31 is released while the switch 42 is being operated, even if the predetermined period for performing the four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31 has elapsed, Do not execute medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when winning a prize. Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stopped first (for example, the left reel 31) is released (at least all stop switches are released), the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed. Become.
Thereby, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

Also, in this embodiment, similarly to the sixth embodiment, the medal dispensing device 15 includes a hopper 35 that stores medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper disk 101 that rotates the hopper disk 101. It is equipped with a hopper motor 36 for detecting medal dispensing, and dispensing sensors 37a and 37b for detecting medal dispensing.
Furthermore, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to the medal payout device 15 and controls the drive of the hopper motor 36.

Further, the hopper motor 36 is a DC motor (direct current motor), and when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on and current is applied to the hopper motor 36, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually accelerates from a stopped state. , it eventually reaches a constant speed (constant speed). Thereafter, when the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually decelerates from a constant speed state and eventually stops.
Note that when stopping the rotation of the drive shaft, it is also possible to suddenly stop the rotation of the drive shaft by passing current through the hopper motor 36 in the opposite direction to that when dispensing medals.

Here, the maximum value of the current required to output four-phase excitation to the motor 32 (stepping motor) in order to stop the reel 31 is set to "500 to 800 mA" for each motor 32. .
Further, the maximum value of the current required to drive the hopper motor 36 is set to "2.5 to 4.0 A (2500 to 4000 mA)".
Furthermore, when the lamps and LEDs (for example, the credit number display LED 76, the acquisition number display LED 78, etc.) controlled by the main control board 50 are turned on, a current of "1 A" is required.

When a current exceeding 10A flows on the main control board 50 side, the protection circuit provided in the main control board 50 determines that it is an overcurrent (overload) and turns off the power. It is set as follows.
When the power is turned off at this time, the power-off processing may not be executed. Suppose that during a game (for example, the number of credits is "50", the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, all reels 31 are stopped, and a symbol combination is given that gives three medals). is stopped and displayed, and such a power outage occurs immediately before executing the medal payout process (processing to drive the hopper motor 36 to pay out medals) at the time of winning, and the power outage process is executed. If this is not done, an unrecoverable error will occur even after the power is turned off, and after the unrecoverable error is cleared (by executing the settings change process), the game will be resumed in the state it was in when the power was turned off. The player may not be able to do so (for example, the process of awarding three medals is not executed), which may put the player at a disadvantage.

Note that the fuse of the power supply board may be configured to blow when an overcurrent flows on the main control board 50 side. In this case, if the fuse blows, even if the power switch 11 is turned on, the device will not be able to recover from the power-off state (it will break down).
Further, on the sub-control board 80 side, power supply is managed separately from that on the main control board 50 side.

In this way, the maximum value of the current required to drive the hopper motor 36 (DC motor) is equal to the maximum value of the current required to provide a four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 (stepping motor) to stop the reel 31. It is set larger than the maximum value.
Therefore, when driving the hopper motor 36, in order to ensure the necessary current, it is preferable not to perform any other control that requires a large current.

Therefore, as described above, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, before the predetermined period for performing the four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31 has elapsed. (For example, at the timing when the 4-phase excitation output is being performed to stop the third reel 31, or the timing before the 4-phase excitation output is being performed to stop the third reel 31), 3 Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the eye reel 31 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed after a predetermined period has elapsed. I have to.

As a result, the hopper motor 36 (DC motor) is not driven while the motor 32 (stepping motor) is being energized in four phases, and the hopper motor 36 is driven after the four-phase excitation of the motor 32 is completed. Therefore, the current necessary to drive the hopper motor 36 can be secured. That is, the current necessary to drive the hopper motor 36 can be reliably secured, and in turn, the hopper motor 36 can be reliably driven.

Furthermore, as described in the twenty-third embodiment, in the reel drive management (I_REEL_ADM) (FIGS. 151 and 152) in step S841 during the interrupt processing (I_INTR), the right reel 31, middle reel 31, and left reel 31 are , the drive control of the motors 32 (stepping motors) of the three reels 31 is sequentially performed. As a result, drive control of three motors 32 can be executed with one interrupt process.
In the port output process (FIG. 151) of step S462 during the interrupt process (I_INTR), drive signals can be output to three motors 32 simultaneously.

This makes it possible to start the rotation of the three reels 31 and the motor 32 all at once, and then rotate them all at a constant speed.
In addition, when the three reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, if the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted, the operation is performed while the other two reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed. It is possible to perform a four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 for which the rotation is stopped.

Furthermore, when the three reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, when any two stop switches 42 are operated quickly in sequence, the remaining one reel 31 is rotated at a constant speed. 4-phase excitation is output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 whose operation was accepted first to stop the rotation, and regardless of whether the 4-phase excitation output is finished or not, the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 whose operation was accepted first is operated later. It is possible to perform a four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 for which the rotation is stopped.

Furthermore, before the first reel 31 stops and a predetermined period for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the second reel 31 has elapsed (for example, the four-phase excitation output to stop the second reel 31 The operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted at the timing when the phase excitation output is being performed or the timing before the four-phase excitation output is performed to stop the second reel 31. In this case, the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 can be executed even before the predetermined period has elapsed.
In this way, in order to stop one of the reels 31, before the predetermined period for outputting four-phase excitation to the motor 32 of that reel 31 has elapsed, the operation of the other stop switch 42 is accepted and the stop switch is activated. By enabling four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the reel 42, the game can proceed smoothly.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the maximum value of the current required to provide four-phase excitation output to one motor 32 (stepping motor) is "500 to 800 mA," so three motors 32 have four-phase excitation output. The maximum value of current required to perform excitation output is "1500 to 2400 mA".
Since the maximum value of current required to drive one hopper motor 36 is "2500 to 4000 mA", the maximum value of current required to drive one motor 32 with four-phase excitation output. is smaller than the maximum value of current required to drive one hopper motor 36. Further, the maximum value of current required to provide four-phase excitation output to three motors 32 is smaller than the maximum value of current required to drive one hopper motor 36.
Therefore, even if four-phase excitation output is applied to three motors 32 at the same time, sufficient current can be secured to stop them.

Although the twenty-ninth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, in step S1301, the data stored in the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) of the address “F012(H)” of the RWM 53 is stored in the A register. Not exclusively.
For example, the data of the input port 51 to which the left stop switch signal, middle stop switch signal, right stop switch signal, and start switch signal are input may be directly stored in the A register.

(2) In the above embodiment, in step S1302, the logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and the mask data "01000111 (B)" is performed, but the invention is not limited to this.
For example, data indicating on/off of the signal of the 3-bet switch 40b is stored in the D3 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) of the address "F012(H)" of the RWM 53. Similarly, data indicating on/off of the signal of the 1-bet switch 40a is stored in the D4 bit, data indicating on/off of the signal of the settlement switch 43 is stored in the D5 bit, and data indicating the on/off of the signal of the settlement switch 43 is stored in the D7 bit. Data indicating on/off of No. 17 signals is stored.

Then, in step S1301, data of input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is stored in the A register, and in the next step S1302, a logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and mask data "11111111 (B)" is performed. You may go.
As a result, in addition to the start switch 41, left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, and right stop switch 42, even when any of the signals from the 1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b, and door switch 17 are on, It is possible to make the determination "No" in step S1307 in FIG. 236. That is, it is possible to prevent the process from proceeding to the display determination in step S291 in FIG. 236 or the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294.

(3) In the above embodiment, in step S1306, the logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and the mask data "01111111(B)" is performed, but the invention is not limited to this.
For example, even if "00001111(B)" is used as the mask data in step S1306, the same calculation result as above can be obtained.
In addition, in this embodiment, the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) is executed once every two interrupts, so the D7 bit of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) is set to "0" or "1" for each interrupt process. ”. Therefore, not limited to such specifications, for example, if the D7 bit of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) is always "0", "11111111 (B)" is set as mask data in step S1306. It is also possible to use

(4) For example, when the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) of the reel 31 to be stopped last becomes "10000000 (B)" or "00000000 (B)", it is assumed that the 4-phase excitation output has ended. It may be determined that the reel 31 has stopped.
Then, input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "00000000 (B)", and the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) of the reel 31 that stops last is "10000000 (B)" or "00000000 (B)". )”, the process may proceed to the display determination in step S291 in FIG. 236 or the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294.

(5) For example, when the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) of the reel 31 to stop last becomes "00000000 (B)", that is, the data of φ1 to φ4 of the motor 32 are all "0" When , it may be determined that the four-phase excitation output has ended, and it may be determined that the reel 31 has stopped.
Then, when the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "00000000 (B)" and the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) of the reel 31 that stops last is "00000000 (B)", The process may proceed to the display determination in step S291 of 236 or the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294.

(6) For example, when the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) of all the reels 31 becomes "00000000 (B)", the 4-phase excitation output of all the motors 32 ends, and all the reels 31 may be determined to have stopped.
That is, the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR1), the second reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR2), and the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3) are sequentially ORed, and the result is "00000000 (B)". '', it may be determined that the four-phase excitation output of all the motors 32 has ended and all the reels 31 have stopped.
Then, when the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "00000000 (B)" and the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) of all the reels 31 is "00000000 (B)", as shown in FIG. The process may proceed to the display determination in step S291 or the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294.

(7) For example, when the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) of the reel 31 to be stopped last becomes "00000000 (B)", it is determined that the four-phase excitation output has ended, and the reel 31 may be determined to have stopped.
Then, when the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "00000000 (B)" and the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) of the reel 31 that stops last is "00000000 (B)" , the process may proceed to the display determination in step S291 in FIG. 236 or the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294.
Note that, once again, the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) is updated (subtracted) by interrupt processing. This point also applies to other embodiments.

(8) For example, when the # reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) of all reels 31 becomes "00000000 (B)", the 4-phase excitation output of all motors 32 ends, and all It may be determined that the reels 31 have stopped.
That is, the first reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL1_PLSOUT), the second reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL2_PLSOUT), and the third reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL3_PLSOUT) are sequentially ORed, and the result is "00000000. (B)'', it may be determined that the four-phase excitation output of all the motors 32 has ended and all the reels 31 have stopped.
Then, when the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "00000000 (B)" and the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) of all reels 31 is "00000000 (B)", The process may proceed to the display determination in step S291 of 236 or the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294.

(9) In the above embodiment, after the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted, before a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which four-phase excitation output is performed to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, At the timing when the 4-phase excitation output is being performed to stop the reel 31, or the timing before the 4-phase excitation output is being performed to stop the reel 31), the operation of the other stop switch 42 is accepted, and other operations are performed. Although four-phase excitation output can be executed to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42, the present invention is not limited thereto.
For example, after the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted, the operation of the other stop switch 42 is not allowed until a predetermined period for outputting four-phase excitation to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42 has elapsed. may not be accepted and the stop control of the other reels 31 may not be executed.

In addition, from the time the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted until the start of four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42, the operation of other stop switches 42 is not accepted. First, the stop control of the other reels 31 may not be executed.
Furthermore, during a predetermined period in which four-phase excitation output is being performed to the motor 32 of one of the reels 31, the operation of the other stop switches 42 is not accepted, and the stop control of the other reels 31 is not executed. You can also do it.

Here, as in the above embodiment, after the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted, before a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which four-phase excitation output is performed to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 ( For example, the operation of the other stop switch 42 is received at the timing when the 4-phase excitation output is being performed to stop the reel 31, or the timing before the 4-phase excitation output is being performed to stop the reel 31, If the motors 32 of the reels 31 corresponding to other stop switches 42 are enabled to perform four-phase excitation output, the order in which the stop switches 42 are operated and the order in which the reels 31 are stopped may be reversed.

Specifically, for example, when the three reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, it is assumed that the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 are quickly operated in this order. It is assumed that the operation of the left stop switch 42 is accepted, and then, before the left reel 31 stops, the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted. At this time, the number of moving symbols (number of sliding frames) from when the operation of the left stop switch 42 is accepted until the left reel 31 stops is set to "4", and after the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted. , it is assumed that the number of symbols to be moved until the middle reel 31 stops is set to "0". In such a case, the middle reel 31 may stop first, and then the left reel 31 may stop.

Therefore, after the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted, the operation of the other stop switch 42 is not allowed until the predetermined period for outputting four-phase excitation to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42 has elapsed. By not accepting this and not executing stop control for the other reels 31, it is possible to prevent the order of operation of the stop switch 42 and the order of stopping the reels 31 from being switched.

Similarly, from the time the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted until the start of four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42, the operation of the other stop switches 42 is not allowed. Even when the stop switch 42 is not accepted and the stop control of the other reels 31 is not executed, it is possible to prevent the order in which the stop switches 42 are operated and the order in which the reels 31 are stopped from being switched.
Also, during the predetermined period when the motor 32 of one of the reels 31 is being outputted with four-phase excitation, the operation of the other stop switches 42 is not accepted and the stop control of the other reels 31 is not executed. , it is possible to prevent the order in which the stop switches 42 are operated and the order in which the reels 31 are stopped from being switched.

(10) In the above embodiment, when stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, a four-phase excitation output is provided to the motor 32 (stepping motor) as an excitation output for stopping the reel 31. However, the present invention is not limited to this. do not have.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, the excitation output for stopping the reel 31 may be, for example, a one-phase excitation output, a two-phase excitation output, or a three-phase excitation output. You can. Also, first, a two-phase excitation output is performed to apply a weak brake, and then the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32 is stopped by switching from the two-phase excitation output to a four-phase excitation output and applying a strong brake. You may also do so.
(11) The first to twenty-ninth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to twenty-ninth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Thirtieth embodiment>
In the 30th embodiment, based on the data stored in the # reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) (FIG. 237) of the RWM 53, a predetermined period of time has elapsed for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the reel 31. Determine whether or not. Furthermore, during the predetermined period of time during which the four-phase excitation output is performed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed. Then, when the data stored in the # reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) becomes "0", it is determined that the predetermined period for performing the 4-phase excitation output has passed (the 4-phase excitation output has ended), and then , executes the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when winning a prize.

The symbol arrangement of the reels 31, the active line, the type of winning combination, the symbol combination of the winning combination, the number of payout pieces, the condition device, the winning combination, RT, and the main game state are the same as in the twenty-third embodiment.
FIG. 237 is a diagram showing main data according to the 30th embodiment among the data stored in the RWM 53 in the 30th embodiment. Note that the data shown in FIG. 237 is a part of the data, and in addition to the data shown, various data is stored in the RWM 53.
In FIG. 237, the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) at address "F005(H)" includes the input sensor 1 signal (D0 bit), input sensor 2 signal (D1 bit), which is input to each bit of input port 2, This is a storage area that stores the on/off state of the full detection signal (D3 bit) and the cancellation release signal (D4 bit).

The input sensor 1 signal is a signal that is turned on when the input sensor 44a (FIG. 2) detects a medal, and is turned off when no medal is detected.
Further, the input sensor 2 signal means a signal that is turned on when the input sensor 44b (FIG. 2) detects a medal, and is turned off when no medal is detected.
Furthermore, it is equipped with a sub-tank that accommodates medals overflowing from the hopper 35, and a full sensor that turns on when a medal comes into contact with the sub-tank when this sub-tank is full, and a full detection signal is sent to the medal from the full sensor. This signal turns on when the medal touches the medal, and turns off when the medal does not touch the medal.

Furthermore, it is possible to perform a normal game and a special game (1BB game) that is advantageous to the player, and when the normal game shifts to a special game, it will be stopped at the end of the special game, and the progress of the game will be stopped. is possible. The conditions for stopping the game are not limited to the end of the special game, and can be set as appropriate. It is also equipped with a stop cancellation switch, and when the conditions for stopping the game are met, by operating the stop cancellation switch, the stoppage can be canceled and the game can be continued. The stop release signal means a signal that turns on when the stop release switch is operated and turns off when it is released. Note that the stop release switch can also be used as other switches such as the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14.

In the current interrupt processing, the signals input to each bit of input port 2 are read, and the on/off status of the input sensor 1 signal, input sensor 2 signal, full detection signal, and stop cancellation signal is determined and turned on. When it is off, "1" is stored in the corresponding bit, and when it is off, "0" is stored in the corresponding bit.

In FIG. 237, the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) at address "F006(H)" includes a setting/reset switch signal (D1 bit) input to each bit of input port 4, a settlement switch signal (D3 bit), This is a storage area for storing on/off states of a 1-bet switch signal (D4 bit), a 2-bet switch signal (D5 bit), a 3-bet switch signal (D6 bit), and a start switch signal (D7 bit).
The setting/reset switch signal means a signal from the setting change (reset) switch 153, which serves both as a setting change switch and a reset switch.

The settlement switch signal means a signal that turns on when the settlement switch 43 is operated and turns off when it is released.
Further, the 1-bet switch signal means a signal that is turned on when the 1-bet switch 40a is operated and turned off when it is released.

Furthermore, the 3-bet switch signal means a signal that turns on when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated and turns off when it is released.
Furthermore, it is equipped with a 2-bet switch for inserting two medals, and the 2-bet switch signal means a signal that turns on when the 2-bet switch is operated and turns off when it is released.
Furthermore, the start switch signal means a signal from the start switch 41.

In the current interrupt process, the signals input to each bit of input port 4 are read, and the settings/reset switch signal, settlement switch signal, 1 bet switch signal, 2 bet switch signal, 3 bet switch signal, and start It determines whether the switch signal is on or off, and when it is on, "1" is stored in the corresponding bit, and when it is off, "0" is stored in the corresponding bit.

In FIG. 237, the input port 3 level data (_PT_IN3_OLD) at address “F00A(H)” includes the first stop switch signal (D0 bit) and the second stop switch signal (D1 bit) input to each bit of input port 3. ), and the on/off status of the third stop switch signal (D2 bit).

The #th stop switch signal means a signal that is turned on when the #th stop switch 42 is operated and turned off when it is released.
In this interrupt processing, the signals input to each bit of input port 3 are read, and the on/off status of the first stop switch signal, second stop switch signal, and third stop switch signal is determined. When it is off, "1" is stored in the corresponding bit, and when it is off, "0" is stored in the corresponding bit.

In FIG. 237, the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) at address “F007(H)” is a storage area that stores data for managing the stop order of the reels 31.
In step S1311 in FIG. 238, which will be described later, reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) is initialized (cleared, initial value "0" is set). Thereafter, each time step S1323 in FIG. 239, which will be described later, is executed, the value of the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) is incremented by "1". Then, when the value of the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) becomes the number of reels "3", the result becomes "Yes" in step S1315 of FIG. 238, which will be described later.

In FIG. 237, the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) at address "F008(H)" is a storage area that stores data indicating the reel number at the time of stop reception.
When the first stop switch signal is turned on (the operation of the first stop switch 42 is accepted), in step S1322 in FIG. D)" is stored.

Furthermore, when the second stop switch signal is turned on (the operation of the second stop switch 42 is accepted), in step S1322 in FIG. 2(D)" is stored.
Furthermore, when the third stop switch signal is turned on (the operation of the third stop switch 42 is accepted), in step S1322 of FIG. 239, which will be described later, "3(D)" is stored.

In FIG. 237, the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) at address “F020(H)” is a timer that manages the four-phase excitation output time of the first reel 31. That is, it is a storage area that stores data for measuring a predetermined time period for performing four-phase excitation output for stopping the first reel 31.
When the first reel 31 starts decelerating (when the four-phase excitation output of the first reel 31 to the motor 32 starts), the initial value "108 (D)" is set to the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME). . Thereafter, each time the interrupt process is executed, the value of the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) is decremented by "1". Further, when the value of the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) is "1" or more, a four-phase excitation output is performed to the motor 32 of the first reel 31 for each interrupt process. Then, when the value of the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) becomes "0", the four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the first reel 31 ends.

In this embodiment, the cycle of interrupt processing is set to "2.235 ms", and the value of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt processing.
Therefore, it takes 2.235 x 108 = 241.38 ms for the value of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) to change from 108 (D) to 0 (D). The four-phase excitation output continues for "241.38ms", and after "241.38ms" passes, the four-phase excitation output ends.
That is, in this embodiment, the "predetermined period" for performing four-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 corresponds to "241.38 ms".

Further, in FIG. 237, the second reel management timer (_WK_RL2_TIME) at address “F030(H)” is a timer that manages the four-phase excitation output time of the second reel 31. That is, this is a storage area that stores data for measuring a predetermined time period for performing four-phase excitation output for stopping the second reel 31.
Furthermore, in FIG. 237, the third reel management timer (_WK_RL3_TIME) at address “F040(H)” is a timer that manages the four-phase excitation output time of the third reel 31. That is, this is a storage area that stores data for measuring a predetermined time period for performing four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31.
These contents are the same as the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) of address "F020(H)".

FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the 30th embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 in the 23rd embodiment.
In the flowchart of the 30th embodiment shown in FIG. 238, steps that are different from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 139 are given the same step numbers.

Also, in the main processing (M_MAIN) of the 30th embodiment, the processing from step S295 to step S300 in FIG. 139 is executed, but the illustration of the processing from step S295 to step S300 is omitted in FIG. 238.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly explained.

As shown in FIG. 238, in the 30th embodiment, after executing the start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) in step S751, the process proceeds to step S1311, where the main control board 50 initializes the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER). (Clear, set initial value "0"). Then, the process advances to the next step S1312.
Proceeding to step S1312, the main control board 50 executes a reel stop reception check. This process is the process shown in FIG. 239, which will be described later. When the reel stop reception check in step S1312 is completed, the process advances to step S1313.

Proceeding to step S1313, the main control board 50 executes an input test. This process is the process shown in FIG. 240, which will be described later. When the input check in step S1313 is completed, the process advances to step S1314.
In step S1314, the main control board 50 determines whether input port level data is present (the carry flag of the flag register is set to "1").
When the process proceeds to step S1337 in FIG. 240, which will be described later, "1" is set in the carry flag bit of the flag register. The carry flag set in step S1337 serves as a flag indicating that input port level data is present.
Note that the flag register is updated when some arithmetic processing is executed. Therefore, even if the carry flag bit is "1", it may be updated to "0" by another calculation process.

Input sensor 1 signal, Input sensor 2 signal, Stop cancellation signal, 1st stop switch signal, 2nd stop switch signal, 3rd stop switch signal, Setting/reset switch signal, Settlement switch signal, 1 bet switch signal, 2 bet switch If either the signal, 3 bet switch signal, or start switch signal is on, a flag indicating that input port level data is present is set in step S1337 of FIG. "1" is set).

On the other hand, when all of the above signals are off, step S1337 in FIG. 240, which will be described later, is skipped, so the flag indicating that input port level data is present is not set.
Note that in step S1337 of FIG. 240, which will be described later, the signal to be checked when setting the flag indicating that input port level data is present is not limited to the above signals, and can be set as appropriate.
For example, some of the above-mentioned signals, such as the cancellation release signal and the setting/reset switch signal, do not need to be checked when setting the flag indicating that input port level data is present.
Conversely, in addition to the above signals, signals from other switches such as the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152 may be checked when setting the flag indicating that input port level data is present.

Then, in step S1314, if the carry flag bit is set to "1", it is determined that input port level data is present ("Yes"), and the process returns to step S1313. In this case, the processing in steps S1313 and S1314 is repeated.
Note that returning to the input check in step S1313, when some arithmetic processing is executed, the flag register is updated. As a result, even if the carry flag bit is "1", it may be updated to "0" by another calculation process.

On the other hand, if the carry flag bit is not set to "1" in step S1314, it is determined that there is no input port level data ("No"), and the process proceeds to the next step S1315.
Thereby, when any of the above signals is on, the process does not proceed to step S1315, but when any of the above signals is off, the process can proceed to step S1315.

Proceeding to step S1315, the main control board 50 determines whether the value of the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) and the number of reels "3" are the same value. That is, it is determined whether the stop control has been executed for all reels 31 or not.
Here, if it is determined that the value of the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) and the number of reels "3" are not the same value, the process returns to step S1312. Thereby, the processing from step S1312 to step S1315 is repeated until the stop control is executed for all reels 31. When it is determined that the value of the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) and the number of reels "3" are the same value, it is determined that the stop control has been executed for all reels 31, and the process advances to step S1316.

Proceeding to step S1316, the main control board 50 executes an all reel stop check. This process is the process shown in FIG. 241, which will be described later. When the all reel stop check in step S1316 is completed, the process proceeds to step S291.
In step S291, the main control board 50 executes display determination. That is, it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has been stopped and displayed. Then, the process advances to the next step S292.

Furthermore, if the result in step S292 is "No" and the process in step S293 is executed, the process advances to step S294.
Proceeding to step S294, the main control board 50 executes medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning. That is, when the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added, and when the number of credits has reached the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven and the actual Dispense the medals from the hopper 35. Note that the determination as to whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50" is made, for example, in step S394 in FIG. 49.

FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing the reel stop reception check in step S1312 of FIG. 238.
In step S1321, the main control board 50 determines whether a stop request has been received. That is, it is determined whether the operation of any one of the first to third stop switches 42 to 42 has been accepted.
Specifically, the main control board 50 outputs the D0 bit (first stop switch signal), D1 bit (second stop switch signal), and D2 bit of the input port 3 level data (_PT_IN3_OLD) at address "F00A(H)". (third stop switch signal) is on. Then, step S1321 is repeated until the stop is accepted, and when the stop is accepted, the process advances to the next step S1322.

Proceeding to step S1322, the main control board 50 stores stop reel number data according to the stop switch signal.
Specifically, when the first stop switch signal is on (the operation of the first stop switch 42 is accepted), "1 (D)" indicating the first reel 31 is set in the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL). Remember.

Further, when the second stop switch signal is on (operation of the second stop switch 42 is accepted), "2 (D)" indicating the second reel 31 is stored in the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL).
Furthermore, when the third stop switch signal is on (the operation of the third stop switch 42 is accepted), "3 (D)" indicating the third reel 31 is stored in the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL).
After storing the stop reel number data corresponding to the stop switch signal, the process advances to the next step S1323.

In step S1323, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the value of the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) at the address "F007(H)". Then, the process advances to the next step S1324.
Proceeding to step S1324, the main control board 50 executes processing when accepting a stop. In this process, the stop position of the ## reel 31 is determined based on the winning combination result of the current game and the position of the ## reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the ## stop switch 42 is accepted, and the determined stop position is determined. The symbol number corresponding to the position is stored in the # reel symbol number (for the stop position). Furthermore, the stopped symbol data for determining the symbol combination to be stopped on the active line is updated. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

More specifically, in the process at the time of accepting the stop in step S1324 of FIG. 239, the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the twenty-fifth embodiment is executed. That is, for the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 determined to be on in step S1321, the winning combination result of the current game and the operation of the stop switch 42 are accepted by the processing corresponding to steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. 194. The stopping position of the reel 31 is determined based on the instantaneous position of the reel 31, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stopping position is stored in the reel symbol number (for stopping position). Furthermore, by processing corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. 194, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) for determining the symbol combination that stops on the active line is updated. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Note that the # reel symbol number (for passing position) and the # reel symbol number ( When it is determined that the values (for the stop position) have become the same value, the # reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) is set to the initial value "108 (D)", and the #4 reel 31 motor 32 is stopped. Start phase excitation output.
Also, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) and the # reel symbol number (for stopping position) will be the same value, and the step number of one symbol on the # reel 13 will be a predetermined value (for example, " 3), the #th reel management timer may be set to the initial value "108 (D)" and the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 may be started.

FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing the input test in step S1313 of FIG. 238.
In step S1331, the main control board 50 acquires the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) (FIG. 237) at address "F005(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to the next step S1332.

Proceeding to step S1332, the main control board 50 determines whether the input sensor 1 signal, input sensor 2 signal, and stop cancellation signal are on.
Specifically, check whether the D0 bit (input sensor 1 signal), D1 bit (input sensor 2 signal), and D4 bit (discontinuation release signal) of the acquired input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) are "1". to judge.
Then, in step S1332, if it is determined that any signal is on, the process advances to step S1337, and if it is determined that any signal is off, the process advances to the next step S1333.

In step S1333, the main control board 50 acquires the data stored in the input port 3 level data (_PT_IN3_OLD) (FIG. 237) at the address "F00A(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to the next step S1334.
Proceeding to step S1334, the main control board 50 determines whether the first stop switch signal, the second stop switch signal, and the third stop switch signal are on.

Specifically, the D0 bit (first stop switch signal), D1 bit (second stop switch signal), and D2 bit (third stop switch signal) of the acquired input port 3 level data (_PT_IN3_OLD) are "1". Determine whether it exists or not.
Then, in step S1334, if it is determined that any signal is on, the process advances to step S1337, and if it is determined that any signal is off, the process advances to the next step S1335.

In step S1335, the main control board 50 acquires the data stored in the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) (FIG. 237) at address "F006(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to the next step S1336.
Proceeding to step S1336, the main control board 50 determines whether the setting/reset switch signal, settlement switch signal, 1 bet switch signal, 2 bet switch signal, 3 bet switch signal, and start switch signal are on. .

Specifically, the D1 bit (setting/reset switch signal), D3 bit (settlement switch signal), D4 bit (1 bet switch signal), and D5 bit (2 bet switch signal) of the acquired input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) ), the D6 bit (3 bet switch signal), and the D7 bit (start switch signal) are determined to be "1".
Then, in step S1336, if it is determined that any signal is on, the process advances to step S1337, and if it is determined that any signal is off, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S1337, the main control board 50 sets a flag indicating that input port level data is present. Specifically, the carry flag bit of the flag register is set to "1". Here, if a flag (carry flag) indicating that input port level data is present is set, "Yes" will be obtained in step S1314 of FIG. 238. On the other hand, if step S1337 is skipped, the flag (carry flag) indicating that input port level data is present is not set, so the result is "No" in step S1314 in FIG. 238. Then, when step S1337 is executed, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing the all reel stop check in step S1316 of FIG. 238.
In step S1341, the main control board 50 sets the address of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) according to the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL).
Specifically, in step S1341, the main control board 50 first stores the data stored in the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) of the address "F008(H)" of the RWM 53 in the A register.

Here, at the time of proceeding to step S1316, the reel number of the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is stored in the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) of the address "F008 (H)". has been done.
For example, when the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is the third (right) stop switch 42, at the time of proceeding to step S1316, the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) at address "F008 (H)" “3(D)” indicating the third (right) reel 31 is stored in .

Next, "F010(H)", which is the result of subtracting "16(D)" from the address "F020(H)" of the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME), is stored in the HL register. This "F010(H)" becomes the reference address.
Next, the A register value is multiplied by "16 (D)" and the result is stored in the A register.
Next, the A register value is added to the HL register value and the result is stored in the HL register.
Then, the process advances to the next step S1342.

Proceeding to step S1342, the main control board 50 determines whether the data stored in the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) is "0".
Then, the process of step S1342 is repeated until the data stored in the # reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) becomes "0", and the data stored in the # reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) becomes "0". When the value becomes "0", the process according to this flowchart ends.
In this way, in this embodiment, when the data of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 becomes "0", this flowchart Terminates processing.

Specifically, in step S1342, the main control board 50 determines whether the data stored in the address (#th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME)) indicated by the HL register value is "0". do.
Then, when the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is not "0"("No"), the process of step S1342 is executed again. That is, the process of step S1342 is repeated.

On the other hand, when the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is "0"("Yes"), the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Furthermore, when the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (#th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME)) becomes "0", the process proceeds to the display determination in step S291 of FIG. Proceed to the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY).
As a result, after a predetermined period of outputting four-phase excitation to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 has elapsed, display judgment and medal payout processing at the time of winning (M_WIN_PAY) are performed. becomes executable.

More specifically, for example, "3 (D)" indicating the third (right) reel 31 is stored in the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) (FIG. 237) of the address "F008 (H)" of the RWM 53. Suppose that That is, it is assumed that the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is the third (right) stop switch 42 . In this case, "3(D)" is first stored in the A register by the process of step S1341.

Next, "F010(H)", which is the result of subtracting "16(D)" from the address "F020(H)" of the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME), is stored in the HL register. This "F010(H)" becomes the reference address.
Next, "48(D)", which is the result of multiplying the A register value "3(D)" by "16(D)", is stored in the A register.
Next, "F040(H)", which is the result of adding the A register value "48(D)" to the HL register value "F010(H)", is stored in the HL register.

Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1342, and the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value "F040(H)", that is, the data stored in the third reel management timer (_WK_RL3_TIME), is determined to be "0". Make a judgment as to whether or not.
Here, if the data stored in the address (third reel management timer (_WK_RL3_TIME)) indicated by the HL register value is not "0"("No"), the process of step S1342 is executed again. That is, the process of step S1342 is repeated. In this case, the process does not proceed to steps S291 and subsequent steps in FIG. 238.

On the other hand, when the data stored in the address (third reel management timer (_WK_RL3_TIME)) indicated by the HL register value is "0"("Yes"), the process according to this flowchart is ended.
Further, when the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (third reel management timer (_WK_RL3_TIME)) becomes "0", the process advances to step S291 in FIG. 238, and then to step S294.
As a result, after a predetermined period of outputting four-phase excitation to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 has elapsed, display judgment and medal payout processing at the time of winning (M_WIN_PAY) are performed. becomes executable.

Here, for example, if the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated, and the small winning combination 01 becomes a payout of 15 pieces, or a small winning number 01 becomes a payout of 3 pieces. It is assumed that any one of the small winning combinations 13 to 17 becomes possible to win.
Furthermore, when two reels 31 are stopped (in a situation where the excitation output for stopping the reels 31 has ended for the two reels 31), the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is activated. It is assumed that the operation is accepted and the symbol combination (FIG. 119) corresponding to the small winning combination 13 that results in a payout of three pieces can be stopped and displayed.

Under such circumstances, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, before the predetermined period for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31 has elapsed. (For example, the timing when the 4-phase excitation output is performed to stop the third reel 31, or the timing before the 4-phase excitation output is performed to stop the third reel 31). Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the eye reel 31 is released, "No" is returned in step S1342 of FIG. 241, and the process does not proceed from step S291 of FIG. 238 onward, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning is Not executed.
That is, when the data stored in the # reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) for the third reel 31 is "1" or more, four-phase excitation is performed to stop the third reel 31. Since the output continues and step S1342 in FIG. 241 is repeated, the process does not proceed to step S291 in FIG. Processing (M_WIN_PAY) is not executed.

Then, when the data stored in the # reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) for the third reel 31 becomes "0", the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 ends. However, since the answer is "Yes" in step S1342 of FIG. 241 and the process proceeds to step S291 of FIG. 238, it becomes possible to execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in the subsequent step S294.
In addition, in the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when winning a prize, the process of adding the number of credits is executed until the number of credits reaches the upper limit "50", and when the number of credits reaches the upper limit "50", the hopper A process of outputting a drive signal for the motor 36 is executed, the hopper motor 36 is driven, and actual medals are paid out from the hopper 35. Note that the determination as to whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49.

In this way, in this embodiment as well, similarly to the twenty-ninth embodiment, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, the fourth reel 31 is stopped. Before the predetermined period for outputting phase excitation has elapsed (for example, the timing when outputting four-phase excitation to stop the third reel 31, or the timing when outputting four-phase excitation to stop the third reel 31) Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released at the timing before the output is performed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) is not executed. Execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY).

As a result, the hopper motor 36 (DC motor) is not driven while the motor 32 (stepping motor) is being energized in four phases, and the hopper motor 36 is driven after the four-phase excitation of the motor 32 is completed. Therefore, the current necessary to drive the hopper motor 36 can be secured. That is, the current necessary to drive the hopper motor 36 can be reliably secured, and in turn, the hopper motor 36 can be reliably driven.

In addition, in this embodiment, switches to which signals are input to the input port 3 and the input port 4 (setting/reset switch 153, settlement switch 43, 1 bet switch 40a, 2 bet switch, 3 bet switch 40b, start switch 41, (Left, middle, right) stop switch 42) If any operation is accepted, "Yes" is returned in step S1314 in FIG. 238, and the process does not proceed to steps S1315 and subsequent steps, so the process is finally stopped. The medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed regardless of whether or not a predetermined period for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the reels 31 has elapsed.

Then, when all switches for inputting signals to input port 3 and input port 4 are released, "No" is returned in step S1314 in FIG. 238, and the process proceeds to step S1315 and subsequent steps. When a predetermined period of time for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the game has elapsed, display determination processing and medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.
Thereby, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

Further, the present embodiment includes a #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) that stores data for measuring a predetermined time period for performing four-phase excitation output for stopping the #th reel 31. This #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) is a storage area dedicated to data that measures a predetermined time for performing four-phase excitation output.
Then, when the data stored in the # reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) is "1" or more (not "0"), the 4-phase excitation output of the motor 32 of the # reel 31 is continued, When the data stored in the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) becomes "0", the four-phase excitation output of the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 is ended.

As a result, by checking the data stored in the # reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME), it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined period for outputting 4-phase excitation to the motor 32 of the # reel 31 has elapsed (4-phase It is possible to easily determine whether excitation output is being performed or not.
In particular, in this embodiment, only the data of the # reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is checked. It is possible to simplify the process for determining whether or not this is the case, and to reduce the amount of ROM used by the program.

Note that when two reels 31 are stopped (in a situation where the excitation output for stopping the reels 31 has ended for the two reels 31), the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is turned off. In a situation where the operation is accepted and the symbol combination for which medals are paid out (granted) can be stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 remains accepted. Suppose it continues.

In this case, "Yes" is determined in step S1334 in FIG. 240, and a flag (carry flag) indicating that input port level data is present is set in step S1337. Then, the answer is "Yes" in step S1314 of FIG. 238, and the processes of steps S1313 and S1314 are repeated, and since the process does not proceed to steps S1315 and subsequent steps, a four-phase excitation output is performed to stop the third reel 31. Even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.
Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, "No" is returned in step 1314 of FIG. 238, and the process proceeds to step S1315 and subsequent steps, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed. It becomes possible.

Similarly, for example, even if the four-phase excitation output of the motors 32 of all the reels 31 including the motor 32 of the reel 31 to be stopped last (for example, the right reel 31) has finished, the reel 31 to be stopped last (for example, the right reel 31 ), the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stopped first (for example, the left reel 31) is operated, and then the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stopped first is operated. When the stop switch 42 corresponding to the last stopped reel 31 is released while the switch 42 is being operated, even if the predetermined period for performing the four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31 has elapsed, Do not execute medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when winning a prize.
Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stopped first (for example, the left reel 31) is released (at least all stop switches are released), the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed. Become.

In this way, in a game where symbol combinations for which medals are paid out (granted) are stopped and displayed, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continued to be operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY ) is not executed and the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning becomes executable.
Similarly, in a game where symbol combinations for which medals are paid out (granted) are stopped and displayed, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to any reel 31 is continued to be operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is stopped. If the stop switch 42 corresponding to all the reels 31 is released without being executed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning becomes executable.
Thereby, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

Note that even if the power switch 11 is unintentionally turned off and the power-off process is executed while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is being operated, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is operated. By turning on the power switch 11 while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is being operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning will not be executed and the third reel 31 will be dealt with. When the stop switch 42 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning becomes executable.
Thereby, even if the power is cut off at an unintended timing, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at the timing desired by the player.

Further, in this embodiment, after the number of bets that can execute the game have been placed, the main control board 50 first sends the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) of the address "F005(H)" of the RWM 53 (FIG. 237). It acquires the data stored in , and determines whether the acquired data is "0" or not.
Furthermore, when it is determined that the acquired data is "0", next the data stored in the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) (Fig. 237) at address "F006 (H)" of RWM53 is A logical product (AND) operation is performed on the acquired data and "01111111(B)", and it is determined whether the result is "0".
Furthermore, when it is determined that the result of the above-mentioned AND operation is "0", it is then determined whether the rising data of the start switch 41 is on.

When it is determined that the start-up data of the start switch 41 is on, control to start the rotation of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is executed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) at address "F005(H)" is not "0", it is determined that the result of the above AND operation is not "0". In this case, the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.
As a result, after the number of bets that can be executed for the game have been bet, and in a situation where the operation of the bet switch 40 (1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b) is accepted, the start switch 41 cannot be operated. If the request is accepted, the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 can be prevented from being executed.

Furthermore, this embodiment also includes the setting key switch 152 as described in the eleventh embodiment and the nineteenth embodiment (A).
Then, as described in the eleventh embodiment and the nineteenth embodiment (A), with the power turned on and no bet number placed, the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on. If you turn on the setting key switch 152 by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 151 and turning it, for example, 90 degrees clockwise (when the signal of the setting key switch 152 turns on), the setting confirmation state will be displayed. (Settings confirmation mode).

Note that when the number of bets has been bet, "Yes" is returned in step S274 of FIG. 41, and the process does not proceed to the medal insertion waiting process of step S275. Therefore, even if the setting key switch 152 is turned on, the setting confirmation state is not reached. Does not migrate.
In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (even if the setting change switch 153 is operated, the setting value does not change), but the current setting value can be confirmed. The current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73. When the setting key is rotated counterclockwise and the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state is ended.

As described above, in this embodiment, when executing the rotation start control of the reel 31, the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) at the address "F005(H)" and the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) at the address "F006 The data stored in the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) of "(H)" is checked, but the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked.

For example, the data of the input port to which the setting key switch 152 signal is input is not checked, the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the setting key switch 152 signal is input is not checked, and the setting key switch 152 is not checked. Among the data of the input port to which the signal of 152 is input, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked, and the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input. Among them, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 may not be checked.

Therefore, the signal from the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal from the setting key switch 152 is on) after the number of bets that can be executed for the game (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) has been placed. If the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off) and the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 can be executed. shall be.

Here, even if the bet switch 40 is released after operating the bet switch 40, there is a possibility that the operation of the bet switch 40 will continue to be accepted due to deterioration of the bet switch 40.
While the operation of the bet switch 40 is still being accepted, in this embodiment, even if the start switch 41 is operated, the rotation start control of the reels 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.

Similarly, even if you release the payment switch 43 after operating the payment switch 43, due to deterioration of the payment switch 43, the operation of the payment switch 43 continues to be accepted, and the start switch 41 is operated, rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.
Thereby, even if the player operates the start switch 41, the reels 31 do not rotate, so the player can recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10. When the player informs the hall clerk of this fact, the hall clerk can also recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10.
Note that even if the operation of the bet switch 40 or the settlement switch 43 continues to be accepted, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 will issue an error notification. This is because if an error notification is made in such a case, there is a risk that the player will feel troubled.

Furthermore, it is normally unthinkable that the setting key switch 152 is turned on (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) during the game. 152 signal is on), there is a high possibility that it is noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) when the number of bets that can be executed for the game (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) is bet. If the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted in a situation where the front door 12 is closed (door switch 17 is off) and the front door 12 is closed (door switch 17 is off), the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is performed. be executable.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted due to noise.

On the other hand, in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, external signal 4 for notifying an error etc. By outputting the format shown in FIG. 33)), it is possible to notify the hall computer, etc. Therefore, a hall clerk or the like can understand that some kind of error has occurred in the slot machine 10 that outputs the predetermined external signal.
Note that in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal that can specify that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on (for example, external signal It may be configured to output external signals (other than external signals 1 to 5)).

In addition, in this embodiment, the main control board 50 first outputs the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) of the address "F005(H)" of the RWM 53 (Fig. 237 ) and determines whether the acquired data is "0" or not.
Furthermore, when it is determined that the acquired data is "0", next the data stored in the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) (Fig. 237) at address "F006 (H)" of RWM53 is A logical product (AND) operation is performed on the acquired data and "11111111(B)", and it is determined whether the result is "0".
Furthermore, when it is determined that the result of the above-mentioned AND operation is "0", it is then determined whether the rising data of the #th stop switch 42 is on.

Then, when it is determined that the rising data of the #th stop switch 42 is on, control to stop the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is executed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) at address "F005(H)" is not "0", it is determined that the result of the above AND operation is not "0". In this case, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is not executed.
As a result, when the operation of the ## stop switch 42 (for example, the left stop switch 42) is accepted under a situation where the plurality of reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted. Additionally, stop control of the #th reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31) based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 (for example, the left stop switch 42) can be prevented from being executed.

Furthermore, as described above, in this embodiment, when executing the stop control of the #th reel 31, the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) at the address "F005(H)" and the address " The data stored in the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) of "F006(H)" is checked, but the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked.

For example, the data of the input port to which the setting key switch 152 signal is input is not checked, the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the setting key switch 152 signal is input is not checked, and the setting key switch 152 is not checked. Among the data of the input port to which the signal of 152 is input, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked, and the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input. Among them, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 may not be checked.

Therefore, the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on), and the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off). ), if the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is accepted, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 can be executed.

Here, even if the start switch 41 is released after the start switch 41 is operated, there is a possibility that the operation of the start switch 41 will continue to be accepted due to deterioration of the start switch 41.
Then, while the operation of the start switch 41 is still being accepted, in this embodiment, even if the #stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #stop switch 42 is executed. do not.

Similarly, even though the bet switch 40 is released after operating the bet switch 40 (1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b), the operation of the bet switch 40 continues to be accepted due to deterioration of the bet switch 40. or when the operation of the settlement switch 43 continues to be accepted due to deterioration of the settlement switch 43 even though the settlement switch 43 is released after operating the settlement switch 43. Also, even if the #th stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is not executed.

Thereby, even if the ##th stop switch 42 is operated, the ##th reel 31 does not stop, so the player can recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10. When the player informs the hall clerk of this fact, the hall clerk can also recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10.
Note that even if the operations of the bet switch 40, start switch 41, and settlement switch 43 are still accepted, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 issues an error notification. This is because if an error notification is made in such a case, there is a risk that the player will feel troubled.

Furthermore, it is normally unthinkable that the setting key switch 152 turns on (the signal of the setting key switch 152 turns on) during the game, and even if the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 turns on). 152 signal is on), it is likely to be noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed, the signal from the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal from the setting key switch 152 is on), and the front door 12 is closed ( When the operation of the ##th stop switch 42 is accepted under the condition (the door switch 17 is off), the ##th reel 31 can be stopped based on the operation of the ##th stop switch 42.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted due to noise.

On the other hand, in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, external signal 4 for notifying an error etc. By outputting the format shown in FIG. 33)), it is possible to notify the hall computer, etc. Therefore, a hall clerk or the like can understand that some kind of error has occurred in the slot machine 10 that outputs the predetermined external signal.
Note that in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal that can specify that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on (for example, external signal It may be configured to output external signals (other than external signals 1 to 5)).

Although the 30th embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
(1) In the above embodiment, in the all reel stop check, only the data of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 was checked; It is not limited to this.
For example, in the all reel stop check, the data of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) for all reels 31 may be checked.

Specifically, in the all reel stop check, first, the data stored in the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) is stored in the A register.
Next, a logical sum (OR) operation is performed between the A register value and the data stored in the second reel management timer (_WK_RL2_TIME), and the result is stored in the A register value.
Next, a logical sum (OR) operation is performed between the A register value and the data stored in the third reel management timer (_WK_RL3_TIME), and the result is stored in the A register value.

Then, it is determined whether the A register value is "0" or not, and when it is determined that the A register value is not "0"("No"), the timer is stored in the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME). Returning to the process of storing data in the A register. That is, the process after the process of storing the data stored in the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) in the A register is repeated. In this case, the process does not proceed to steps S291 and subsequent steps in FIG. 238.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the A register value is "0"("Yes"), the all reel stop check is completed, the process proceeds to step S291 in FIG. 238, and then proceeds to step S294. As a result, display determination and medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning are sequentially executed.

Here, when the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 are rotating at a constant speed, it is assumed that the middle stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42 are quickly operated in this order. It is assumed that the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted, and then, before the middle reel 31 stops, the operation of the right stop switch 42 is accepted. At this time, the number of moving symbols (number of sliding frames) from when the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted until the middle reel 31 stops is set to "4", and after the operation of the right stop switch 42 is accepted. , it is assumed that the number of symbols to be moved until the right reel 31 stops is set to "0". In such a case, the right reel 31 may stop first, and then the middle reel 31 may stop.

In other words, the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 stops second (first), and the reel 31 corresponding to the second operated stop switch 42 stops third (last). It may stop.
In this case, as in the above embodiment, in the all reel stop check, only the data of the # reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is checked. However, it cannot be determined that the four-phase excitation output for all reels 31 has been completed.

Therefore, as in this modification (1), in the all reel stop check, by checking the data of the # reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) for all reels 31, the operation order of the stop switch 42 can be determined. Even if the order in which the reels 31 are stopped is changed, it can be determined that the four-phase excitation output for all reels 31 has been completed, and a predetermined period for performing four-phase excitation output for all the reels 31 has elapsed. After that, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.

(2) In the above embodiment, in step S1337 of FIG. 240, the carry flag bit of the flag register is set to "1" as a flag indicating that input port level data is present, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, predetermined information may be stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 as a flag indicating that input port level data is present.
In this case, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is not cleared when some arithmetic processing is executed like the bit data of the flag register. Prior to S1331, processing for clearing predetermined information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is executed.

(3) In the above embodiment, when the plurality of reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the operation of the ##th stop switch 42 is accepted. It is assumed that the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 is not executed.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the operation of the ## stop switch 42 is accepted under a situation where the plurality of reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, Stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #stop switch 42 may be made executable.

As a result, for example, even though the left stop switch 42 was operated first and the middle stop switch 42 was operated second, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, due to deterioration of the start switch 41, etc., the start switch 41 continues to be accepted, it is possible to prevent it from being determined that the middle stop switch 42 has been operated first.

In particular, in an AT machine, if it is determined that the middle stop switch 42 was operated first even though the left stop switch 42 was operated first, there will be a mistake in the order of presses, which will put the player at a disadvantage. However, even if the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, by making it possible to execute the stop control of the ##th reel 31 based on the operation of the ##th stop switch 42, it is possible to prevent a situation where the push order is incorrect during AT. Occurrence can be prevented.

Specifically, for example, during a general game of a 1BB game (when 1BB is activated), in a game in which the winning number "10" is won by the prize lottery means 61 and the small prize A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated, the correct answer is determined. The pressing order is left, middle right, but if it is determined that the middle stop switch 42 was operated first even though the left stop switch 42 was operated first, the pressing order will be incorrect and the small Any one of the winning combinations 13 to 17 (3-card winning combination) wins.
This puts the player at a disadvantage, but even if the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, by making it possible to execute the stop control of the left reel 31 based on the operation of the left stop switch 42, it is possible to press the correct answer. Since the small winning combination 01 (15-card winning combination) is won, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the pressing order is incorrect during AT.
For example, the same applies when the winning number "16" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the small winning combination B1 condition device (FIG. 125) is activated.

Note that, as in this modification, even if it is possible to execute the stop control of the ##th reel 31 based on the operation of the ## stop switch 42 in a situation where the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the setting key Regardless of whether the signal of the switch 152 is on or off, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 may be made executable. Further, when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 may not be executed.

(4) For example, the operation of the first stop switch 42 is accepted, and then, under the situation where the operation of the first stop switch 42 is still accepted, the operation of the second stop switch 42 can be accepted. At the same time, based on the operation of the second stop switch 42, the stop control of the corresponding reel 31 may be made executable.

As a result, for example, even though the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 have been operated in this order, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated, due to deterioration of the stop switch 42, etc., the left stop switch 42 continues to be accepted, it is possible to prevent it from being determined that the right stop switch 42 has been operated second.

In particular, in an AT machine, when the stop operation is performed in the order of the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, and right stop switch 42, even though the middle stop switch 42 is operated second, the right If it is determined that the stop switches 42 have been operated, the order of presses will be incorrect and the player will be disadvantaged. By making it possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42 and to execute the stop control of the corresponding reel 31 based on the operation of the other stop switch 42, it is possible to prevent mistakes in the pressing order during AT. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.

Specifically, for example, during a general game of a 1BB game (when 1BB is activated), in a game in which the winning number "10" is won by the prize lottery means 61 and the small prize A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated, the correct answer is determined. The pressing order is left, middle right, but if it is determined that the right stop switch 42 was operated second even though the middle stop switch 42 was operated second, the pressing order would be incorrect. , any one of small winning combinations 13 to 17 (3-card winning combination) wins.
This puts the player at a disadvantage, but even if the operation of the left stop switch 42 is accepted, by making it possible to execute the stop control of the middle reel 31 based on the operation of the middle stop switch 42, it is possible to control the stop of the middle reel 31 based on the operation of the middle stop switch 42. Since the small winning combination 01 (15-card winning combination) is won in the pressing order, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the pressing order is incorrect during AT.
For example, the same applies when the winning number "16" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the small winning combination B1 condition device (FIG. 125) is activated.

Note that, as in this modification, even if the stop control of the reels 31 based on the operation of the second stop switch 42 is made executable under a situation where the operation of the first stop switch 42 is still being accepted, The stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 may be made executable regardless of whether the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on or off. Further, when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, the stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 may not be executed.

(5) In the above embodiment, when stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, a 4-phase excitation output is provided to the motor 32 (stepping motor) as an excitation output for stopping the reel 31. However, the present invention is not limited to this. do not have.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, the excitation output for stopping the reel 31 may be, for example, a one-phase excitation output, a two-phase excitation output, or a three-phase excitation output. It's okay. Also, first, a two-phase excitation output is performed to apply a weak brake, and then the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32 is stopped by switching from the two-phase excitation output to a four-phase excitation output and applying a strong brake. You may also do so.

(6) The contents and arrangement of each bit of the input port 2-4 level data shown in FIG. 237 are merely examples, and the contents and arrangement are not limited to these. The content and arrangement of each bit of the input port 2-4 level data can be set as appropriate.
For example, the D4 bit of the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) at the address "F005(H)" may be left unused without storing the on/off status of the cancellation release signal.

Also, for example, regarding the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) at address "F006(H)", the D1 bit may not store the setting/reset switch signal on/off, and the D0 to D2 bits may be left unused. .
Furthermore, for example, the ON/OFF states of the first to third stop switch signals may be stored in the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) of "F006(H)", respectively.
Furthermore, the flowchart of the input test in FIG. 240 can be changed as appropriate depending on the content and arrangement of each bit of the input port 2-4 level data.

Note that it is preferable that the input port into which the signal from the setting key switch 152 is input is different from the input port into which the signals from the bet switch 40, start switch 41, and stop switch 42 are input; 41. The signal from the setting key switch 152 may be input to the input port to which the signal from the stop switch 42 is input.
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the data stored in the input port 2 to 4 level data storage area of the RWM 53 is acquired to determine whether each signal is on or off, but the data stored in the RWM 53 is acquired. Instead, the signals input to the input ports 2 to 4 may be directly obtained to determine whether each signal is on or off.

(7) In the input inspection flowchart of FIG. 240, in step S1331, the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) of the address "F005(H)" is acquired, and in step S1332, the input sensor 1 signal, input sensor 2 signal, Although it has been determined whether the signal and the cancellation release signal are on, for example, the processes in steps S1331 and S1332 may not be performed.

Also, for example, the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) of "F006(H)" store the on/off of the first to third stop switch signals, and the D3 bit stores the settlement switch signal, A 1 bet switch signal is stored in the D4 bit, a 2 bet switch signal is stored in the D5 bit, a 3 bet switch signal is stored in the D6 bit, and an on/off state of the start switch signal is stored in the D7 bit.
For example, in the input inspection flowchart of FIG. 240, steps S1331 to S1334 may not be performed, and only steps S1335 to S1337 may be performed.
(8) The various modifications shown in the first to thirtieth embodiments and the first to thirtieth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<31st embodiment>
In the 31st embodiment, based on the data stored in the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) (FIG. 134) of the RWM 53, a predetermined period of time has elapsed for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the reel 31. Determine whether or not. Furthermore, during the predetermined period of time during which the four-phase excitation output is performed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed. Then, when the data stored in the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) becomes stop pulse data "00000000 (B)", a predetermined period for performing 4-phase excitation output has elapsed (4-phase excitation output is After that, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed.

The symbol arrangement of the reels 31, the active line, the type of winning combination, the symbol combination of the winning combination, the number of payout pieces, the condition device, the winning combination, RT, and the main game state are the same as in the twenty-third embodiment.
FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the 31st embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 in the 23rd embodiment.
In the flowchart of the 31st embodiment shown in FIG. 242, steps that are different from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 139 are given the same step numbers.

Also, in the main processing (M_MAIN) of the 31st embodiment, the processing from step S295 to step S300 in FIG. 139 is executed, but the illustration of the processing from step S295 to step S300 is omitted in FIG. 242.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly explained.

As shown in FIG. 242, in the 31st embodiment, after the start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) in step S751 is executed, the process then proceeds to step S1351.
Proceeding to step S1351, the main control board 50 executes a reel stop reception check. This process is similar to the reel stop reception check (M_STOP_CHK) in FIG. 194 of the 25th embodiment.
Specifically, by processing corresponding to steps S1016 to S1017 in FIG. 194, data of input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of address "F017(H)" in FIG. 133 is acquired, and D0 to D2 bits (left, It is determined whether either the middle or right stop switch signal) is on. Thereby, it is determined whether the operation of any of the stop switches 42 has been accepted.

Furthermore, when it is determined that the operation of one of the stop switches 42 has been accepted, the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the instantaneous position of the reel 31, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stop position is stored in the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (FIGS. 135 to 137). do.
Furthermore, by processing corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. 194, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) for determining the symbol combination that stops on the active line is updated.
Then, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (for the passing position) (from FIG. When it is determined that the # reel symbol number (for stop position) and the # reel symbol number (Fig. 137) are the same value, the deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" is added to the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) (Fig. 134). (4 phases on). As a result, four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 is started.

Note that the # reel symbol number (for passing positions) and the # reel symbol number (for stopping positions) are the same value, and the step number of one symbol on the # reel 13 is a predetermined value (for example, " 3), the deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" may be set in the # reel motor signal data to start the 4-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the # reel 31. .
When the reel stop reception check in step S1351 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1352.

Proceeding to step S1352, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the reel stop reception check in step S1351 has been completed for all reels 31. That is, it is determined whether or not the operations of all stop switches 42 have been accepted.
Here, if it is determined in step S1352 that the reel stop reception check for all reels 31 has not been completed, the process returns to step S1351. In this case, the processes of step S1351 and step S1352 are repeated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1352 that the reel stop reception check for all reels 31 has been completed, the process proceeds to the next step S1353.

In step S1353, the main control board 50 stores the data stored in the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) of the address "F012(H)" of the RWM 53 in the A register. Then, the process advances to the next step S1354.
Proceeding to step S1354, the main control board 50 determines whether any stop switch signal is on (operation of any stop switch 42 is accepted).

Specifically, the main control board 50 performs an AND operation on the A register value and "00000111 (B)" and determines whether the result is "0" or not. Thereby, it is determined whether any of the stop switch signals is on, that is, whether the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted.
If the result of the above logical AND operation is not "0", it is determined that one of the stop switch signals is on (operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted), and in step S1354, " “Yes” and the process returns to step S1353.
On the other hand, if the result of the above logical AND operation is "0", it is determined that all stop switch signals are off (no operation of any stop switch 42 is accepted), and in step S1354 The answer is "No" and the process advances to step S291.

Here, when the operation of at least one of the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, and right stop switch 42 is accepted, at least one stop switch signal is turned on, and the input port level data A ( At least one of the D0 to D2 bits of _PT_IN_A_LV) becomes "1".
Further, when at least one of the D0 to D2 bits of input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "1", the result of the above-mentioned AND operation will not be "0".
If the result of the above logical AND operation is not "0", the result is "Yes" in step S1354, and the process returns to step S1353. That is, the processes of step S1353 and step S1354 are repeated. In this case, since the process does not proceed to step S291 and subsequent steps, the display determination is not performed, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning is also not performed.

On the other hand, when the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, and right stop switch 42 are all released, the left stop switch signal, middle stop switch signal, and right stop switch signal are all turned off. , D0 to D2 bits of input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) all become "0".
Further, when the D0 to D2 bits of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) are all "0", the result of the above logical AND operation is "0".
If the result of the above logical product operation is "0", the result is "No" in step S1354, and the process proceeds to step S291.

Proceeding to step S291, the main control board 50 executes display determination.
Specifically, it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line. Furthermore, when a symbol combination for which medals are paid out (awarded) is stopped and displayed on the active line, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of awards) is determined. Then, the process advances to step S292.
Note that the determined number of medals to be paid out (number of medals awarded) may be stored (saved) only in a predetermined register and not stored (saved) in the RWM 53, or even if it is stored (saved) in the RWM 53. good.

Further, if "No" is determined in step S292 and the process in step S293 is executed, the process advances to step S1355.
In step S1355, the main control board 50 determines whether four-phase excitation is being output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42.
Specifically, the main control board 50 acquires the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) (FIG. 134) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42, and uses that value. is "0".

Then, when the value of the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) is not "0", it is determined that 4-phase excitation is being output, the result is "Yes" in step S1355, and the process of step S1355 is executed again. .
On the other hand, when the value of the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) is "0", it is determined that the four-phase excitation output is not in progress, "No" is obtained in step S1355, and the process proceeds to step S294.

Here, it is assumed that the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is the right stop switch 42. In this case, in step S1355, the main control board 50 acquires the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3) (FIG. 134) corresponding to the right reel 31.
In addition, when the right reel 31 starts decelerating, the deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" (4-phase on) is stored in the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3), and a predetermined period of time for performing 4-phase excitation output has elapsed. Then, the stop pulse data "00000000 (B)" is stored in the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3).

Then, when the value of the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3) is not "0", the result is "Yes" in step S1355, and the process of step S1355 is executed again. That is, the process of step S1355 is repeated. In this case, the process does not proceed to step S294, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning is not executed.
On the other hand, when the value of the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3) is "0", "No" is determined in step S1355, and the process proceeds to step S294. This makes it possible to execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when winning a prize.

Proceeding to step S294, the main control board 50 executes medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning. That is, when the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added, and when the number of credits has reached the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven and the actual Dispense the medals from the hopper 35. Note that the determination as to whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49.

Here, for example, if the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated, and the small winning combination 01 becomes a payout of 15 pieces, or a small winning number 01 becomes a payout of 3 pieces. It is assumed that any one of the small winning combinations 13 to 17 becomes possible to win.
Furthermore, the two reels 31 stop, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, and the symbol combination (Fig. 119) corresponding to the small winning combination 13 that results in a payout of three pieces stops. Suppose that it is now possible to display.

Under such circumstances, even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, the third reel The # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) corresponding to reel 31 is deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" (4-phase on ) is stored, the answer is "Yes" in step S1355 of FIG. 242, and the process does not proceed to step S294, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.

That is, when deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" is stored in the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) corresponding to the third reel 31, the third reel 31 is stopped. Since the 4-phase excitation output continues and step S1355 in FIG. 242 is repeated, the process does not proceed to step S294. Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the medal payout process at the time of winning does not proceed. (M_WIN_PAY) No processing is performed.

Then, when the data stored in the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) corresponding to the third reel 31 becomes stop pulse data "00000000 (B)", the third reel 31 is stopped. The four-phase excitation output for this purpose is completed, and the result in step S1355 of FIG. 242 is "No", and the process proceeds to step S294, so that the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.
In addition, in the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when winning a prize, the process of adding the number of credits is executed until the number of credits reaches the upper limit "50", and when the number of credits reaches the upper limit "50", the hopper A process of outputting a drive signal for the motor 36 is executed, the hopper motor 36 is driven, and actual medals are paid out from the hopper 35. Note that the determination as to whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49.

In this way, in this embodiment as well, similarly to the 29th embodiment and the 30th embodiment, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, the third reel 31 is Before a predetermined period of time for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31 has elapsed (for example, the timing when four-phase excitation output is being performed to stop the third reel 31, or the timing when the third reel 31 is stopped) Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released at the timing before the 4-phase excitation output for After the elapsed time, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed.
As a result, the hopper motor 36 (DC motor) is not driven while the motor 32 (stepping motor) is being energized in four phases, and the hopper motor 36 is driven after the four-phase excitation of the motor 32 is completed. Therefore, the current necessary to drive the hopper motor 36 can be secured. That is, the current necessary to drive the hopper motor 36 can be reliably secured, and in turn, the hopper motor 36 can be reliably driven.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the # reel 31 starts decelerating, the deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" (4-phase on) is stored in the #-reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#), and the 4-phase excitation When the predetermined period of output has elapsed, stop pulse data "00000000 (B)" is stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#).
Then, when the deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" is stored in the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#), the 4-phase excitation output of the motor 32 of the # reel 31 is continued, and the # reel When the data stored in the motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) reaches the stop pulse data "00000000 (B)", the four-phase excitation output of the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 is terminated.

As a result, by checking the data stored in the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#), it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined period for outputting 4-phase excitation to the motor 32 of the # reel 31 has elapsed (4-phase It is possible to easily determine whether excitation output is being performed or not.
In particular, in this embodiment, only the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is checked, so the four-phase excitation output is completed. It is possible to simplify the process for determining whether or not this is the case, and to reduce the amount of ROM used by the program.

Further, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, "No" will be returned in step S1354 of FIG. 242. Since the process proceeds to step S291, the display determination is executed even under the situation where the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is being performed. Then, in the display judgment, it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, and when the symbol combination for which medals are paid out (granted) is stopped and displayed on the active line, the medal Determine the number of payouts (number of grants).

Furthermore, after determining the number of medals to be paid out (number of awards) in step S291, the process advances to step S1355, and the data stored in the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) corresponding to the third reel 31 is checked. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 has been completed.
Then, when the data stored in the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) corresponding to the third reel 31 becomes stop pulse data "00000000 (B)", the third reel 31 is stopped. It is determined that the four-phase excitation output for this purpose has been completed, and the result is "No" in step S1355 of FIG. 242, and the process proceeds to step S294, where it becomes possible to execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning.

In this way, in this embodiment, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, it will not occur under the situation where the four-phase excitation output is being performed to stop the third reel 31. However, the display judgment is executed to determine the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals awarded), and after that, when the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is completed, the medal payout process (at the time of winning) is completed. M_WIN_PAY).
As a result, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of awards) can be determined before the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is finished, so the stop corresponding to the third reel 31 can be determined. The time from when the switch 42 is released to when the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) is executed at the time of winning can be shortened.

In addition, in a situation where two reels 31 have stopped, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 has been accepted, and the symbol combination for which medals are paid out (granted) can be stopped and displayed. Assume that the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted.

In this case, the answer is "Yes" in step S1354 of FIG. 242, and steps S1353 and S1354 are repeated, and the process does not proceed to steps S291 and subsequent steps. Even after the period has elapsed, the display determination is not performed, therefore the number of payouts is not determined, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.
Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, "No" is returned in step 1354 of FIG. 242, and the process proceeds to step S291 and subsequent steps, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed. It becomes possible.

Specifically, for example, when the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated, and the small winning combination 01, which is a payout of 15 pieces, or a payout of 3 pieces. Suppose that any of the small winning combinations 13 to 17 becomes possible to win.
Furthermore, the two reels 31 stop (the excitation output for stopping the reels 31 ends), the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, and three pieces are paid out. It is assumed that the symbol combination (FIG. 119) corresponding to the small winning combination 13 can be stopped and displayed.

Under such a situation, assume that the operation of any stop switch 42 or start switch 41 including the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted.
In this case, the answer is "Yes" in step S1354 of FIG. 242, and steps S1353 and S1354 are repeated, and the process does not proceed to steps S291 and subsequent steps. Regardless of whether the period has elapsed or not, display determination is not performed, therefore the number of payouts is not determined, and medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning is not executed.

Then, when all stop switches 42 and start switches 41 including the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 are released, "No" is returned in step 1354 of FIG. 242, and the process proceeds to step S291 and thereafter. When a predetermined period of time for performing four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31 has elapsed, the result in step S1355 of FIG. 242 becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step S294, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning occurs. becomes executable.

In this way, in a game in which symbol combinations for which medals are paid out (awarded) are stopped and displayed, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continued to be operated, the display determination and the winning medal If the payout process (M_WIN_PAY) is not executed and the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the display determination and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning become executable.
Thereby, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

Note that even if the power switch 11 is unintentionally turned off and the power-off process is executed while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is being operated, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is operated. By turning on the power switch 11 while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is being operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning will not be executed and the third reel 31 will be dealt with. When the stop switch 42 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning becomes executable.
Thereby, even if the power is cut off at an unintended timing, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at the timing desired by the player.

Similarly, for example, even if the four-phase excitation output of the motors 32 of all the reels 31 including the motor 32 of the reel 31 to be stopped last (for example, the right reel 31) is finished, the reel 31 to be stopped last (for example, the right reel 31) ), the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stopped first (for example, the left reel 31) is operated, and then the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stopped first is operated. If the stop switch 42 corresponding to the last stopped reel 31 is released while the switch 42 is being operated, even if the predetermined period for performing the four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31 has elapsed, Do not execute medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when winning a prize. Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stopped first (for example, the left reel 31) is released (at least all stop switches are released), the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed. Become.
Thereby, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

Although the 31st embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
(1) In the above embodiment, in step S1355, only the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is checked. Not exclusively.
For example, in step S1355, the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) for all reels 31 may be checked.

Specifically, in step S1355, first, the data stored in the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR1) is stored in the A register.
Next, a logical sum (OR) operation is performed between the A register value and the data stored in the second reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR2), and the result is stored in the A register value.
Next, a logical sum (OR) operation is performed between the A register value and the data stored in the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3), and the result is stored in the A register value.

Then, it is determined whether the A register value is "0" or not, and when the A register value is not "0", it is determined that the motor 32 of one of the reels 31 is being outputted with four-phase excitation, and the step The answer is "Yes" in S1355, and the process in step S1355 is executed again. In this case, the process does not proceed to step S294.
On the other hand, when the A register value is "0", it is determined that the motor 32 of any reel 31 is not outputting four-phase excitation, and the result in step S1355 is "No", and the process proceeds to step S294. As a result, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed.

Here, as explained in the modification (1) of the 30th embodiment, the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 stops second, and the second operated stop switch 42 stops. The reel 31 corresponding to the switch 42 may stop third (last).
In this case, as in the above embodiment, only the data of the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 may be checked in step S1355. , it is not possible to determine that the four-phase excitation output for all reels 31 has been completed.

Therefore, as in this modification (1), in step S1355, by checking the data of the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) for all the reels 31, the operation order of the stop switch 42 and the reel 31 Even if the stop order of the reels 31 and 4-phase excitation output is reversed, it can be determined that the 4-phase excitation output for all reels 31 has been completed, and after a predetermined period of time for performing the 4-phase excitation output for all the reels 31 has elapsed. , it is possible to execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when winning a prize.

(2) In the above embodiment, when stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, a 4-phase excitation output is provided to the motor 32 (stepping motor) as an excitation output for stopping the reel 31. However, the present invention is not limited to this. do not have.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, the excitation output for stopping the reel 31 may be, for example, a one-phase excitation output, a two-phase excitation output, or a three-phase excitation output. It's okay. Also, first, a two-phase excitation output is performed to apply a weak brake, and then the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32 is stopped by switching from the two-phase excitation output to a four-phase excitation output and applying a strong brake. You may also do so.
(3) The first to thirty-first embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to thirty-first embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<32nd embodiment>
In the 32nd embodiment, even if the operation of the third (last) stop switch 42 is accepted and the operation of the stop switch 42 continues to be accepted, the number of medals to be paid out (granted) is After determining the number of medals to be paid out, it is determined whether or not any stop switch 42 is operated, and if it is determined that none of the stop switches 42 is operated, a prize is awarded. This is to execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time.

The symbol arrangement of the reels 31, the active line, the type of winning combination, the symbol combination of the winning combination, the number of payout pieces, the condition device, the winning combination, RT, and the main game state are the same as in the twenty-third embodiment.
FIG. 243 is a diagram showing main data according to the 32nd embodiment among the data stored in the RWM 53 in the 32nd embodiment. Note that the data shown in FIG. 243 is part of the data, and in addition to the data shown, various data is stored in the RWM 53.
In FIG. 243, the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) at address “F067(H)” is a storage area that stores data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the first (left) reel 31.

Two bits D0 to D1 indicate the driving state of the motor 32 of the first reel 31. As shown in FIG. 243, "0 (D)" indicates that the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is in a constant speed state and that the reel sensor 33 of the first reel 31 has detected the index. "1 (D)" indicates that the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is accelerating or in a constant speed state, and the reel sensor 33 of the first reel 31 has not yet detected the index. “3(D)” indicates that the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is out of step.

The D2 bit indicates whether or not it is time to execute a standby effect; "1" indicates that a standby effect is being executed, and "0" indicates that a standby effect is not being executed.
The D3 bit indicates whether or not it is the time to start deceleration; "1" indicates that it is the time to start deceleration, and "0" indicates that it is not the time to start deceleration.

The D5 bit indicates whether or not the reel is preparing to step out (a state in which an abnormality has occurred in the rotation of the reel 31); "1" indicates that the reel is preparing to step out; Indicates that it is not preparing to step out.
The D6 bit indicates whether or not the reel sensor 33 of the first reel 31 has detected the index; "1" indicates that it has detected it, and "0" indicates that it has not detected it.
The D7 bit indicates whether the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is stopped or decelerated; "1" indicates that it is not stopped or decelerated (accelerating or in a constant speed state); ” indicates that the vehicle is stopped or decelerating.

At the start of the standby performance, the D2 bit of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is set to "1".
Further, when the operation of the first stop switch 42 is accepted, the D3 bit of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is set to "1" (deceleration start state is entered).
Furthermore, when updating the first reel symbol number (for passing position), if the first reel symbol number (for passing position) falls below "0", the D5 bit of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is set to "1" is set.

Further, the signal from the reel sensor 33 of the first reel 31 is referred to as a first reel sensor signal. The first reel sensor signal is turned on when the reel sensor 33 of the first reel 31 is sensing the index, and turned off when the reel sensor 33 of the first reel 31 is not sensing the index. Then, when the first reel sensor signal changes from on to off, the D6 bit of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is set to "1".
Further, when the first reel 31 starts rotating, "81 (H)"("10000001(B)") is set in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS).

Furthermore, when the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is in a constant speed state and the D6 bit is "1", the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is set to "80 (H)"("10000000 (B )") is set.
Furthermore, in the deceleration start state (when the D3 bit is "1"), when the first reel symbol number (for passing position) and the first reel symbol number (for stopping position) become the same value, the first “0(H)” (“00000000(B)”) is set in the reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS). That is, at the start of the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the first reel 31, "0 (H)" is set in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS).
Note that the first reel symbol number (for passing position) and the first reel symbol number (for stopping position) are the same value, and the step number of one symbol on the first reel 13 is a predetermined value (for example, "3"), the first reel drive state may be set to "0 (H)".

Also, when the D5 bit of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is "1" and the D6 bit is "0", the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is set to "83 (H)"("10000011(B)'') is set.
Furthermore, when the D6 bit of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is "1", "0" is set to the D5 bit and D6 bit of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS).

In FIG. 243, the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) at address "F077(H)" is a storage area that stores data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the second (middle) reel 31, The third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) of "H)" is a storage area that stores data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the third (right) reel 31. These contents are the same as the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) of address "F067(H)".

In FIG. 243, the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) at address "F090(H)" includes the first stop switch signal (D0 bit) and the second stop switch signal (D1 bit) input to each bit of input port 2. ), the third stop switch signal (D2 bit), the first reel sensor signal (D4 bit), the second reel sensor signal (D5 bit), and the third reel sensor signal (D6 bit). It is an area.

The ## stop switch signal is turned on when the ## stop switch 42 is operated (the stop button 42a is pushed in), and the ## stop switch signal is turned on when the ## stop switch 42 is released (the pressed stop button 42a is released and returned to its original state). position) and turns off.
The #th reel sensor signal is turned on when the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 detects the index, and is turned off when the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 detects no index.
Then, in interrupt processing, the signals input to each bit of input port 2 are read, and the on/off status of each signal is determined. If it is on, "1" is stored in the corresponding bit, and when it is off, If so, "0" is stored in the corresponding bit.

FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the 32nd embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 in the 23rd embodiment.
In the flowchart of the 32nd embodiment shown in FIG. 244, steps that are different from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 139 are assigned the same step numbers.

Also, in the main processing (M_MAIN) of the 32nd embodiment, the processing from step S295 to step S300 in FIG. 139 is executed, but the illustration of the processing from step S295 to step S300 is omitted in FIG.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly explained.

As shown in FIG. 244, in the 32nd embodiment, after the start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) in step S751 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1361.
Proceeding to step S1361, the main control board 50 executes a reel stop reception check. This process is the process shown in FIG. 245, which will be described later. When the reel stop reception check in step S1361 is completed, the process advances to step S291.

Proceeding to step S291, the main control board 50 executes display determination.
Specifically, it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line. Further, when a symbol combination for which medals are paid out (awarded) is stopped and displayed on the active line, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of awards) is determined. Then, the process advances to step S292.
Note that the determined number of medals to be paid out may be stored (saved) only in a predetermined register and not stored in the RWM 53, or may be stored in the RWM 53.

Further, if "No" is determined in step S292 and the process in step S293 is executed, the process advances to step S1362.
Proceeding to step S1362, the main control board 50 determines whether any stop switch signal is on (operation of any stop switch 42 is accepted).

Specifically, in step S1362, the main control board 50 first stores the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) (FIG. 243) at address "F090(H)" of the RWM 53 in the A register. do.
Next, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation on the A register value and "00000111 (B)", and determines whether the result is "0" (the zero flag is "1") or not. to judge. Thereby, it is determined whether any of the stop switch signals is on, that is, whether the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted.

When the result of the above logical AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), one of the stop switch signals is on (the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted). The determination result is "Yes" in step S1362, and the process of step S1362 is executed again. That is, the process of step S1362 is repeated.
On the other hand, when the result of the above AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), all stop switch signals are off (no operation of any stop switch 42 is accepted). The determination result is "No" in step S1362, and the process advances to step S294.

Here, when the operation of at least one of the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, and right stop switch 42 is accepted, at least one stop switch signal is turned on, and the input port 2 level data ( At least one of the D0 to D2 bits of _PT_IN2_OLD) becomes "1".
Further, when at least one of the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) is "1", the result of the above-mentioned AND operation does not become "0" (the zero flag does not become "1").
If the result of the above logical AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), "Yes" is determined in step S1362, and the process of step S1362 is repeated. In this case, the process does not proceed to step S294, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning is not executed.

On the other hand, when the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, and right stop switch 42 are all released, the left stop switch signal, middle stop switch signal, and right stop switch signal are all turned off. , the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) all become "0".
Further, when the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) are all "0", the result of the above-mentioned AND operation is "0" (the zero flag becomes "1").
Then, when the result of the above-mentioned AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), "No" is obtained in step S1362, and the process proceeds to step S294.

Proceeding to step S294, the main control board 50 executes medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning. That is, when the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added, and when the number of credits has reached the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven and the actual Dispense the medals from the hopper 35. Note that the determination as to whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49.

FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the reel stop acceptance check in step S1361 of FIG. 244.
In step S1371, the main control board 50 executes a reel drive state inspection.
First, the data stored in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) (FIG. 243) at address "F067(H)" of the RWM 53 is stored in the A register.
Next, perform a logical sum (OR) operation between the A register value and the data stored in the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) (Fig. 243) of the address “F077 (H)” of the RWM53, and use the result. Store in A register.

Next, perform a logical sum (OR) operation between the A register value and the data stored in the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) (Fig. 243) of the address “F087 (H)” of the RWM53, and use the result. Store in A register.
Finally, a logical product (AND) operation is performed between the A register value and "83 (H)"("10000011(B)").
Then, the process advances to the next step S1372.

Proceeding to step S1372, the main control board 50 determines whether all the reels 31 are stopped or decelerating.
Specifically, whether or not the result of the AND operation of the A register value and "83 (H)"("10000011(B)") in step S1371 is "0" (the zero flag is "1"). to judge.

When the result of the above logical AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that all the reels 31 are stopped or decelerating, and the result is "Yes" in step S1372. The process according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, if the result of the above AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), the motor 32 of any reel 31 is not stopped or decelerating (accelerating or in a constant speed state). ), the result is "No" in step S1372, and the process advances to the next step S1373.

Here, it is assumed that the motors 32 of the two reels 31 have already stopped (stopped). Further, although the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (last) reel 31 has been accepted, the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of that reel 31 has not yet been performed (4-phase excitation before output). That is, it is assumed that the motor 32 of the third (last) reel 31 is still in a constant speed state.
In this case, the #th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 243) of the two stopped reels 31 is "00000000 (B)", but the driving state of the third (last) reel 31 is "00000000 (B)". Since the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 243) is "10001000 (B)", the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 243) of all reels 31 is ORed. ) The result of the calculation is "10001000(B)".

Therefore, the result of the AND operation of "10001000 (B)" and "83 (H)"("10000011(B)" is "10000000 (B)", which is not "0" (the zero flag is Therefore, the result in step S1372 is "No" and the process advances to the next step S1373.
Therefore, the process does not proceed to step S291 in FIG. 244, so the display determination is not performed and the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals awarded) is not determined.

It is also assumed that the motors 32 of the two reels 31 have already stopped (stopped, the four-phase excitation output for stopping the reels 31 has ended). Then, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (last) reel 31 is accepted, and the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of that reel 31 has already been performed (after the 4-phase excitation output ). That is, it is assumed that the motor 32 of the third (last) reel 31 has also already stopped.
In this case, the #th reel driving states (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 243) of the three reels 31 are all "00000000 (B)", so the #th reel driving states (_WK_RL #_STS ) (FIG. 243) is subjected to a logical sum (OR) operation, and the result is "00000000 (B)".

Therefore, the result of the AND operation of "00000000 (B)" and "83 (H)"("10000011(B)" is "00000000 (B)", which becomes "0" (the zero flag is 1), the result is "Yes" in step S1372, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Therefore, the process advances to step S291 in FIG. 244, so that the display determination is executed and the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals awarded) can also be determined.

Further, when proceeding to step S1373 in FIG. 245, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has detected the index for all reels 31.
Specifically, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation on the A register value and "03(H)"("00000011(B)"), and the result is "0" ( The zero flag is "1"). Thereby, it is determined whether or not the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has detected the index for all the reels 31.

When the result of the above logical AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), it is determined that the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has not detected the index for at least one reel 31. , the result is "No" in step S1373, and the process advances to the next step S1374.
On the other hand, when the result of the above AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 is in a constant speed state for all reels 31 after index detection. It is determined that there is, "Yes" in step S1373, skipping step S1374, and proceeding to step S1375.

Here, for all reels 31, when the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has detected the index, the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 243) is is also "80 (H)"("10000000(B)").
In this case, the result of performing a logical sum (OR) operation on the #th reel drive states (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 243) of the three reels 31 is "10000000 (B)".
Therefore, at the time of proceeding to step S1373, the A register value is "10000000 (B)".

Therefore, in step S1373, when the A register value is ANDed with "03(H)"("00000011(B)"), the result becomes "0" (the zero flag is "1"). ”), and the answer in step S1373 is “Yes”, so step S1374 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1375.
Therefore, the process of step S1375 (the process when accepting the stoppage) can be executed, so that the stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 can be executed.

Further, it is assumed that the motor 32 of all three reels 31 is in a constant speed state, but the reel sensor 33 has not yet detected the index of at least one reel 31 (before detection).
In this case, the #th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 243) of the reel 31 before the index detection is "81 (H)"("10000001(B)"), so the three reels 31 are The result of performing a logical sum (OR) operation on the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 243) is "10000001 (B)".
Therefore, at the time of proceeding to step S1373, the A register value is "10000001 (B)".

Therefore, in step S1373, when the A register value is ANDed with "03(H)"("00000011(B)"), the result is "00000001(B)" and "0 ” (the zero flag does not become “1”), the result in step S1373 is “No” and the process advances to step S1374.
Therefore, the process of step S1374 (preparation for step-out test) is performed, and the process of step S1375 (process at the time of stop reception) is not performed, so the stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 is also not performed.

Further, when the reel 31 is in a constant speed state, the #th reel driving state (_WK_RL#_STS) is "10000000 (B)", and when the reel 31 is stopped, the #th reel driving state ( _WK_RL#_STS) is "00000000(B)".
Therefore, in situations where one reel 31 has already stopped (the four-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 has ended) and the remaining two reels 31 are in a constant speed state, or when two reels 31 31 has already stopped (the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 has ended) and the remaining one reel 31 is in a constant speed state, the #th reel driving state of the three reels 31 remains unchanged. (_WK_RL#_STS) When a logical sum (OR) operation is performed and a logical product (AND) operation is performed between the result and "00000011 (B)", the same result "00000000 (B)" is obtained.
As a result, even if there is a reel 31 that has already stopped, it can be determined in the same process whether the stoppage can be accepted or not, so the process can be simplified and the amount of ROM used by the program can be reduced. can be reduced.

Proceeding to step S1374, the main control board 50 executes step-out test preparation. This process is the process shown in FIG. 246, which will be described later. Then, when the step S1374 preparation for the step-out test is completed, the process proceeds to step S1375.
Proceeding to step S1375, the main control board 50 executes processing when accepting a stop. In this process, the stop position of the ## reel 31 is determined based on the winning combination result of the current game and the position of the ## reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the ## stop switch 42 is accepted, and the determined stop position is determined. The symbol number corresponding to the position is stored in the # reel symbol number (for the stop position). Furthermore, the stopped symbol data for determining the symbol combination to be stopped on the active line is updated. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

More specifically, in the process when accepting a stop in step S1375 in FIG. 245, processes corresponding to steps S1016, S1017, S1022, S1023, and S1024 in FIG. 194 of the twenty-fifth embodiment are executed.
That is, the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of the address "F017(H)" in FIG. 133 is obtained by the process corresponding to step S1016 in FIG. 194.
Next, by processing corresponding to step S1017 in FIG. 194, it is determined whether or not the stop switch 42 rises (whether the rise data of the stop switch 42 is on).
Furthermore, if it is determined that the stop switch 42 has risen (corresponding to "Yes" in step S1017 in FIG. 194), steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. Through the process, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the winning combination result of the current game and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, and a symbol number is assigned according to the determined stop position. , stored in the reel symbol number (for stop position).
Furthermore, by processing corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. 194, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) for determining the symbol combination that stops on the active line is updated.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Note that the # reel symbol number (for passing position) and the # reel symbol number ( When it is determined that the values (for the stop position) have become the same value, the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 is started.
Also, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) and the # reel symbol number (for stopping position) will be the same value, and the step number of one symbol on the # reel 13 will be a predetermined value (for example, "3''), four-phase excitation output may be started to stop the motor 32 of the #th reel 31.

FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing preparation for step-out testing in step S1374 in FIG. 245 and step S1404 in FIG. 248, which will be described later.
In step S1381, the main control board 50 sets the address "F067(H)" of the RWM 53 in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) (FIG. 243). Then, the process advances to the next step S1382.

Proceeding to step S1382, the main control board 50 refers to the address set in step S1381 and executes a step-out test for the first (left) reel 31. This process is the process shown in FIG. 247, which will be described later. When the step-out test in step S1382 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1383.
In step S1383, the main control board 50 sets the address "F077(H)" of the RWM 53 in the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) (FIG. 243). Then, the process advances to the next step S1384.

Proceeding to step S1384, the main control board 50 refers to the address set in step S1383 and executes a step-out test for the second (middle) reel 31. This process is shown in FIG. 247, which will be described later, and has the same content as step S1382. When the step-out test in step S1384 is completed, the process advances to step S1385.
In step S1385, the main control board 50 sets the address "F087(H)" of the RWM 53 in the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) (FIG. 243). Then, the process advances to the next step S1386.

Proceeding to step S1386, the main control board 50 refers to the address set in step S1385 and executes a step-out test for the third (right) reel 31. This process is shown in FIG. 247, which will be described later, and has the same content as step S1382 and step S1384. When the step-out test in step S1386 is completed, the process advances to step S1387.
Proceeding to step S1387, the main control board 50 executes a stop acceptance wait. This process is the process shown in FIG. 248, which will be described later. Then, when the wait for stop acceptance in step S1387 ends, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the step-out test in steps S1382, S1384, and S1386 in FIG. 246.
In step S1391, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is an out-of-step state. When it is determined that the step is out of step, the process proceeds to the next step S1392, and when it is determined that the step is not out of step, step S1392 is skipped and the process according to this flowchart is ended.

Proceeding to step S1392, the main control board 50 sets parameters for re-accelerating the reel 31 determined to be out of step. As a result, an excitation output is applied to the motor 32 of the reel 31 determined to be out of step to accelerate it again. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing the wait for stop acceptance in step S1387 of FIG. 246.
In step S1401, the main control board 50 executes a reel drive state inspection. This process is similar to step S1371 in FIG. 245.
That is, the data stored in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) (FIG. 243) of the address "F067(H)" of the RWM 53 is stored in the A register.
Next, perform a logical sum (OR) operation between the A register value and the data stored in the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) (Fig. 243) of the address “F077 (H)” of the RWM53, and use the result. Store in A register.

Next, perform a logical sum (OR) operation between the A register value and the data stored in the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) (Fig. 243) at address "F087 (H)" of the RWM53, and use the result. Store in A register.
Finally, a logical product (AND) operation is performed between the A register value and "83 (H)"("10000011(B)").
Then, the process advances to the next step S1402.

Proceeding to step S1402, the main control board 50 determines whether the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has detected the index for all reels 31. This process is similar to step S1373 in FIG. 245.
In other words, perform a logical AND operation between the A register value and "03(H)"("00000011(B)"), and check whether the result is "0" (the zero flag is "1") or not. Decide whether or not. Thereby, it is determined whether or not the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has detected the index for all the reels 31.

When the result of the above logical product operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), it is determined that the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 is not after index detection for at least one reel 31, "No" is determined in step S1402, and the process advances to the next step S1403.
On the other hand, when the result of the above AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 is in a constant speed state for all reels 31 after index detection. It is determined that there is, "Yes" in step S1402, skipping steps S1403 and S1404, and ending the process according to this flowchart.

Proceeding to step S1403, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is an out-of-step state. If it is determined that the step is out of step, the process proceeds to the next step S1404, and if it is determined that the step is not out of step, the process returns to step S1401.
Proceeding to step S1404, the main control board 50 executes step-out test preparation. This process is the process shown in FIG. 246 described above. Then, when the step S1404 preparation for the step-out test is completed, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In this way, in this embodiment, two reels 31 stop (the four-phase excitation output for stopping the reels 31 ends), and the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (last) reel 31 is turned off. When the operation is accepted and the 4-phase excitation output is performed to stop the motor 32 of the reel 31, the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (Fig. 243) of the three reels 31 changes to is also "00000000(B)", so the result of performing a logical sum (OR) operation on these is "00000000(B)".
Then, the result of the AND operation of "00000000(B)" and "83(H)"("10000011(B)" is "00000000(B)", so in step S1372 of FIG. 245 Since the answer is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the display determination in step S291 in FIG. 244, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals awarded) can be determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the period for performing the four-phase excitation output to stop the motor 32 of the third reel 31 has not elapsed (even if the four-phase excitation output is in progress), the four-phase excitation At the time when the output is started, the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) of the third reel 31 becomes "00000000 (B)", so it becomes "Yes" in step S1372 of FIG. Since the process advances to the display determination in step S291, it becomes possible to determine the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals awarded).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted (even if the stop switch 42 remains pressed without being released), When the 4-phase excitation output is started, the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) of the third reel 31 becomes "00000000 (B)", so "Yes" is determined in step S1372 in FIG. The process proceeds to display determination in step S291 of 244, and the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals awarded) can be determined.
As a result, it is possible to shorten the time from when the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted until the number of medals to be paid out (the number of awards) is determined, and the subsequent payout of medals ( grant) can be executed smoothly.

For example, in a game where the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 during AT and the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated, two reels 31 stop in the order of the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31. Then, the operation of the right stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (last) right reel 31 is accepted, and the symbol combination (Fig. 118) corresponding to the small winning combination 01 that results in a payout of 15 pieces can be stopped and displayed. Suppose that
Under such circumstances, if the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the third reel 31 is started, even if the period for performing the 4-phase excitation output has not elapsed, Even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the eye reel 31 continues to be accepted, the number of medals to be paid out can be determined.

In addition, the number of medals to be paid out is determined in step S291 of FIG. 244, and then the process proceeds to step S1362, where the number of medals to be paid out is determined and is stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) (FIG. 243) at address "F090(H)" of the RWM 53. Based on the data, it is determined whether the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted.

If it is determined in step S1362 that the operation of any stop switch 42 (all stop switches 42 including the last operated stop switch 42) has not been accepted, the process proceeds to step S294, and the winning medal is Execute the payout process (M_WIN_PAY). As a result, the number of medals determined in step S291 (the number of medals awarded) is paid out (awarded). At this time, if the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added, and if the number of credits has reached the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven and the actual medal is is discharged from the hopper 35. Note that the determination as to whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49.
Thereby, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

Note that even if the power switch 11 is unintentionally turned off and the power-off process is executed while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is being operated, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is operated. By turning on the power switch 11 while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is being operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning will not be executed and the third reel 31 will be dealt with. When the stop switch 42 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning becomes executable.
Thereby, even if the power is cut off at an unintended timing, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at the timing desired by the player.

Similarly, for example, even if the four-phase excitation output of the motors 32 of all the reels 31 including the motor 32 of the reel 31 to be stopped last (for example, the right reel 31) has finished, the reel 31 to be stopped last (for example, the right reel 31 ), the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stopped first (for example, the left reel 31) is operated, and then the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stopped first is operated. When the stop switch 42 corresponding to the last stopped reel 31 is released while the switch 42 is being operated, even if the predetermined period for performing the four-phase excitation output to stop the third reel 31 has elapsed, Do not execute medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) when winning a prize. Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stopped first (for example, the left reel 31) is released (at least all stop switches are released), the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed. Become.
Thereby, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

Further, in this embodiment, each reel 31 is provided with a #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 243) in which data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 can be stored.
Then, in step S1373 of FIG. 245, the main control board 50 calculates the logical sum (OR) of the #th reel drive states (_WK_RL#_STS) of the three reels 31, and the result of the logical sum (OR) operation and "03(H)"("00000011(B)''), and it is determined whether the result is ``0'' (the zero flag is ``1'').
Thereby, it is determined whether or not the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has detected the index for all the reels 31.

For all reels 31, when the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has detected the index, the result of the above-mentioned AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"). In this case, "Yes" is determined in step S1373, and the process proceeds to step S1375, where it becomes possible to execute the process at the time of accepting the stop, so that it becomes possible to perform stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42.

That is, when all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and after the index has been detected for all the reels 31, the #th reel drive states (_WK_RL#_STS) of the three reels 31 are logically summed (_WK_RL#_STS). When the result is ANDed with "03(H)"("00000011(B)"), the result becomes "0" (the zero flag becomes "1"). At this time, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 can be executed.
In other words, when all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, if the index has been detected for all the reels 31, "Yes" is determined in step S1373, and the process advances to step S1375, where the diagram of the twenty-fifth embodiment 194, steps S1016, S1017, S1022, and S1023 are executed.

On the other hand, when the reel sensor 33 has not yet detected the index for any reel 31 (before detection), the result of the above AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"). It won't happen. In this case, "No" is determined in step S1373, and the process proceeds to step S1374, where preparations for a step-out test are performed. Then, the process does not proceed to step S1375, so the process at the time of accepting the stop is not executed, and the stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 is not executed.

That is, even if all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, if the index has not yet been detected for any reel 31, the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS ), and if you AND the result and "03(H)"("00000011(B)"), the result will not be "0" (the zero flag is "1"). "do not become). At this time, even if the stop switch 42 is operated, stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is not executed.
In other words, even if all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, if the index has not yet been detected for any reel 31, the result in step S1373 is "No", and in this case, the 25th implementation Processing corresponding to step S1016, step S1017, step 1022, and step S1023 in FIG. 194 of the configuration is not executed.

In this way, for all the reels 31, it can be determined by a simple calculation whether the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has detected the index, that is, whether or not stop can be accepted. Processing can be simplified and the amount of ROM used by programs can be reduced.

Although the 32nd embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) For example, in step S1373 in FIG. 245, first, input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of address "F017(H)" in FIG. When it is determined that the stop switch 42 has risen, the A register value and "03(H)"("00000011(B)") are determined. By performing the logical product (AND) operation of It may be determined whether or not after index detection.

That is, it is first determined whether the stop switch 42 has been operated, and then it is determined whether the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has detected the index for all reels 31. good.
If the result of the above-mentioned AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is "1"), "No" is determined in step S1373, and the process proceeds to step S1374, where the result of the above-mentioned AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is "1"). is "1"), "Yes" is determined in step S1373, step S1374 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1375.

Also, as in this modification (1), in step S1373 in FIG. When determining whether or not the reel sensor 33 has detected the index, the process corresponding to step S1022 and step S1023 in FIG. 194 of the twenty-fifth embodiment is executed in the stop reception process in step S1375 in FIG. 245. do. That is, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the winning combination result of the current game and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stop position is determined. Store in reel symbol number (for stop position).

(2) In the above embodiment, when it is determined in step S1362 in FIG. 244 whether or not the operation of any stop switch 42 is accepted, and it is determined that the operation of any stop switch 42 is not accepted. The process proceeds to the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 in FIG. 244, but the process is not limited thereto.

For example, input the start switch signal to input port 2, and store the on/off of the start switch signal in any bit of the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) (Fig. 243) at address "F090 (H)" of RWM53. possible.
Furthermore, in step S1362 of FIG. 244, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start switch 41 and any of the three stop switches 42 is accepted, based on the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD). to decide.

When it is determined that the operation of any switch is accepted, the process of step S1362 is repeated, and when it is determined that the operation of none of the switches is accepted, the process of winning at step S294 in FIG. 244 is repeated. The process may proceed to the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY).
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) from being executed not only when the operation of the stop switch 42 but also the start switch 41 is accepted.
Then, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

(3) In step S1362 in FIG. 244, it is determined whether the operation of the stop switch 42 (the last operated stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, and the stop switch 42 ( If it is determined that the last operated stop switch 42) has not been accepted, the process may proceed to the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at step S294 in FIG. 244.

For example, in a game where the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 during AT and the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated, two reels 31 stop in the order of the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31. Then, the operation of the right stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (last) right reel 31 is accepted, and the symbol combination (Fig. 118) corresponding to the small winning combination 01 that results in a payout of 15 pieces can be stopped and displayed. Suppose that
Under such circumstances, if the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the third reel 31 is started, even if the period for performing the 4-phase excitation output has not elapsed, Even if the state in which the operation of the stop switch 42 (last operated stop switch 42) corresponding to the eye reel 31 continues to be accepted, the number of medals to be paid out can be determined.

In addition, the number of medals to be paid out is determined in step S291 of FIG. 244, and then the process proceeds to step S1362, where the operation of the stop switch 42 (the last operated stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted. Determine whether or not.
If it is determined in step S1362 that the operation of the stop switch 42 (the last operated stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 is not accepted, the process proceeds to step S294, and the winning medal is Execute the payout process (M_WIN_PAY). As a result, the number of medals determined in step S291 (the number of medals awarded) is paid out (awarded).

At this time, if the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added, and if the number of credits has reached the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven and the actual medal is is discharged from the hopper 35. Note that the determination as to whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49.
Thereby, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

(4) In the above embodiment, when stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, a 4-phase excitation output is provided to the motor 32 (stepping motor) as an excitation output for stopping the reel 31. However, the present invention is not limited to this. do not have.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, the excitation output for stopping the reel 31 may be, for example, a one-phase excitation output, a two-phase excitation output, or a three-phase excitation output. You can. Also, first, a two-phase excitation output is performed to apply a weak brake, and then the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32 is stopped by switching from the two-phase excitation output to a four-phase excitation output and applying a strong brake. You may also do so.

(5) In the above embodiment, the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) is set to "0 (H)" at the start of the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31. For example, the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) may be set to "0 (H)" at the end of the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31.
(6) The first to thirty-second embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to thirty-second embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<33rd embodiment>
In the 33rd embodiment, two reels 31 stop (the excitation output for stopping the reels 31 ends), the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, and the medals are Even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted when the symbol combination for which the payout (grant) is to be made is stopped and displayed, three After the four-phase excitation output for stopping the eye reel 31 is completed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed. Then, after the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, there is a case where an effect regarding the game result is output.

Furthermore, the 33rd embodiment differs from the 23rd embodiment in the type of winning combination, the symbol combination of the winning combination, the number of payouts, the condition device, and the active line.
Specifically, in the 33rd embodiment, the roles can be broadly classified into special roles (accessories), replays (replayed roles), and small roles. In addition, the special prize is 1BB (first-class prize continuous operation device; first-class big bonus), and the small prizes are bell, watermelon, and cherry.

Also, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is set to "Red 7" - "Red 7" - "Red 7", and the symbol combination corresponding to Replay is set to "Replay" - "Replay" - "Replay". , the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is set to "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell", and the symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon is set to "Watermelon" - "Watermelon" - "Watermelon", which corresponds to the cherry. The symbol combination to be performed is set to "cherry" - "ANY" - "ANY".
Note that "ANY" means that any symbol may be used (any symbol).

The effective lines include five lines: an upper line, a middle line, a lower line, an upward line to the right, and a downward line to the right.
When the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped and displayed on the active line, no medals are paid out in the current game, but the 1BB game is started from the next game.
Furthermore, if 1BB is won, but the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is not stopped and displayed on the effective line, the winning information of 1BB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped and displayed on the effective line. A gaming state in which winning information of 1BB is carried over is called "1BB inside".

Furthermore, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed on the active line, medals are automatically inserted and the game can be played again.
Further, the number of bells to be paid out is set to 15, the number of watermelons to be paid out is set to 7, and the number of cherries to be paid out is set to 1.
In addition, both Replay and Bell are won individually and cannot be won in combination with other roles.
Furthermore, watermelon has cases in which it is won alone and cases in which it is won in combination with 1BB, and cherry has cases in which it is won singly and cases in which it is won in combination with 1BB.
Furthermore, 1BB has cases in which it is won alone and cases in which it is won in combination with watermelon or cherry.

Further, in the 33rd embodiment, one of the winning numbers "0" to "7" is determined by a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. Then, when the winning number is determined, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated.
Winning number ``0'' corresponds to non-winning, winning number ``1'' corresponds to single winning of replay, winning number ``2'' corresponds to single winning of Bell, winning number ``3'' corresponds to The winning number "4" corresponds to a single winning of a watermelon, and the winning number "4" corresponds to a single winning of a cherry.
In addition, the winning number "5" corresponds to a single win of 1BB, the winning number "6" corresponds to a double win of "1BB + watermelon", and the winning number "7" corresponds to a double win of "1BB + cherry". handle.

For example, when the winning number "1" is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the replay condition device corresponding to the winning number "1" is activated, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay can be stopped and displayed.
Further, when the winning number "7" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the "1BB + cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, and the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB or cherry is selected. The symbol combination can be stopped and displayed.
In addition, in the game where the winning number "7" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the symbol combination corresponding to cherry can be stopped and displayed, but the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is configured not to be stopped and displayed. Good too.

FIG. 249 is a diagram showing main data according to the 33rd embodiment among the data stored in the RWM 53 in the 33rd embodiment.
In FIG. 249, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at address “F0AD(H)” is a storage area that stores data indicating whether or not the operation (stop operation) of the stop switch 42 corresponding to each reel 31 has been accepted. be.

The D0 bit indicates whether or not the stop operation for the first (left) reel 31 has been accepted; "0" indicates that the stop operation has not been accepted; and "1" indicates that the stop operation has been accepted. (accepted).
Furthermore, the D1 bit indicates whether or not the operation to stop the second (middle) reel 31 has been accepted, and the D2 bit indicates whether or not the operation to stop the third (right) reel 31 has been accepted. These contents are similar to the D0 bit.

Note that the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at address "F0AD(H)" in FIG. 249 is different from the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at address "F0AD(H)" in FIG. 173 by bits "0" and "1". is reversed. That is, in FIG. 173, "1" indicates that the stop operation has not been accepted, and "0" indicates that the stop operation has been accepted (already accepted), but in FIG. , indicates that the stop operation has been accepted (accepted), and "0" indicates that the stop operation has not been accepted.

When the operation of the left stop switch 42 is accepted, the D0 bit of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is set to "1". Similarly, when the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted, the D1 bit is set to "1", and when the operation of the right stop switch 42 is accepted, the D2 bit is set to "1".
Further, at a predetermined timing (for example, every time a game ends or every time a game starts), the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is initialized (cleared, set to the initial value "00000000 (B)").

FIG. 250 is a diagram showing each signal input to input port 0 in the 33rd embodiment.
Note that the types and arrangement of signals input to input port 0 shown in FIG. 250 are merely examples, and the types and arrangement of signals input to input port 0 can be set as appropriate.
Alternatively, the RWM 53 may be provided with a level data storage area corresponding to input port 0, and the data stored in this level data storage area may be acquired and used for processing.
FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the 33rd embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 in the 23rd embodiment.
In the flowchart of the 33rd embodiment shown in FIG. 251, steps that are different from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 139 are assigned the same step numbers.

Also, in the main processing (M_MAIN) of the 33rd embodiment, the processing from step S295 to step S300 in FIG. 139 is executed, but the illustration of the processing from step S295 to step S300 is omitted in FIG. 251.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly explained.

As shown in FIG. 251, in the 33rd embodiment, once the start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) in step S751 is executed, the process then proceeds to step S1411.
Proceeding to step S1411, the main control board 50 determines whether a stop request has been received. That is, it is determined whether the operation of any one of the first to third stop switches 42 to 42 has been accepted.
Specifically, the main control board 50 acquires the data of input port 0, and sets the D0 bit (first stop switch signal), D1 bit (second stop switch signal), and D2 bit (third stop switch signal). Determine whether any of them are on. Then, step S1411 is repeated until the stop is accepted, and when the stop is accepted, the process advances to the next step S1412.

Proceeding to step S1412, the main control board 50 executes processing when accepting a stop. In this process, the stop position of the # reel 31 is determined based on the winning combination result and the position of the # reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the # stop switch 42 is accepted, and the stop position of the # reel 31 is determined based on the determined stop position. The symbol number is set to the # reel symbol number (for the stop position) (FIGS. 135 to 137). Furthermore, the stopped symbol data for determining the symbol combination to be stopped on the active line is updated.

More specifically, in the process at the time of accepting the stop in step S1412 of FIG. 251, the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the twenty-fifth embodiment is executed. That is, for the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 determined to be on in step S1411, the winning combination result of the current game and the operation of the stop switch 42 are accepted by the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. 194. The stopping position of the reel 31 is determined based on the instantaneous position of the reel 31, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stopping position is stored in the reel symbol number (for stopping position). Furthermore, by processing corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. 194, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) for determining the symbol combination that stops on the active line is updated.

Note that the # reel symbol number (for passing position) and the # reel symbol number ( When it is determined that the values for the stop position) have become the same value, the # reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) (Figures 135 to 137) is set to the deceleration pulse output counter "90 (D)" (Figure 156). Set the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) (Fig. 134) to the deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" (4 phases on), and set the # reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) ( 135 to 137), "1 (D)" indicating "deceleration" is set.

Also, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) and the # reel symbol number (for stopping position) will be the same value, and the step number of one symbol on the # reel 13 will be a predetermined value (for example, " 3), set the deceleration pulse output counter "90 (D)" to the # reel drive pulse output counter, and set the deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" to the # reel motor signal data. ", and "1 (D)" indicating "deceleration" may be set in the #th reel drive state.

Thereafter, four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 is started.
Further, in this embodiment, the cycle of the interrupt processing is set to "1.117 ms", and the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) is subtracted by "1" every two interrupts.
Then, when the value of the # reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) becomes "0", the pulse data at the time of stop "00000000 (B)" is added to the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) (Fig. 134). and sets the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) to "0 (D)" indicating "stop". This ends the four-phase excitation output.

After executing the stop reception process in step S1412, the process advances to step S1413, where the main control board 50 determines whether or not four-phase excitation output is in progress.
Specifically, when it is determined in step S1411 that the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 has been accepted, and the process for stopping the motor 32 of the first (left) reel 31 is executed in step S1412, In step S1413, it is determined whether the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is outputting four-phase excitation.

When it is determined that the 4-phase excitation output is in progress, the process of step S1413 is executed again, and when it is determined that the 4-phase excitation output is not in progress (the 4-phase excitation output has ended), the next step S1414 is executed. Proceed to.
Here, when it is determined in step S1411 that the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 has been accepted, in step S1413, the value of the first reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL#_PLSOUT) (FIG. 135) is "0". ” By determining whether or not, it is possible to determine whether or not the four-phase excitation output of the motor 32 of the first (left) reel 31 has been completed.

Further, in step S1413, the first (left) reel 31 is It is also possible to determine whether the four-phase excitation output of the motor 32 has ended.
Furthermore, in step S1413, the motor 32 of the first (left) reel 31 is It is also possible to determine whether or not the four-phase excitation output has ended.

In this embodiment, the process of step S1413 is repeated until it is determined in step S1413 that the four-phase excitation output of the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 has been completed, and the process does not proceed to the next step S1414.
For this reason, during the period when a four-phase excitation output is being performed to the motor 32 of one of the reels 31, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the other reel 31 is not accepted, and the stop control of the other reel 31 is not executed. .
For example, during a period in which four-phase excitation output is being performed to the first (left) reel 31, the second (middle) stop switch 42 and the third (right) stop switch 42 are not operated. Stop control of the middle) reel 31 and the third (right) reel 31 is also not executed.

Proceeding to step S1414, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the operation of the stop switch 42 (stop operation) has been accepted for all reels 31.
If it is determined in step S1414 that the stop operation has not been accepted for at least one reel 31, the process returns to step S1411. In this case, the processing from step S1411 to step S1414 is repeated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1414 that the stop operation has been accepted for all reels 31, the process advances to step S291.

Here, in step S1414, the main control board 50 stores the data stored in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at address "F0AD(H)" in FIG. 249 in the A register, and stores it as "00000111(B)". compare.
If the two values are not the same, it is determined that the stop operation has not been accepted for at least one reel 31, the result is "No" in step S1414, and the process returns to step S1411.
On the other hand, if both are the same value, it is determined that the stop operation has been accepted for all reels 31, and the result is "Yes" in step S1414, and the process proceeds to step S291.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, each time a stop operation for one reel 31 is accepted, it is determined in step S1413 whether or not 4-phase excitation output is in progress, and when it is determined that 4-phase excitation output has ended, , the next reel 31 stop operation can be accepted.
As a result, while outputting four-phase excitation to the motor 32 of any one of the reels 31, an operation to stop the other reel 31 cannot be accepted.

Proceeding to step S291, the main control board 50 executes display determination.
Specifically, it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line. Furthermore, when a symbol combination for which medals are paid out (awarded) is stopped and displayed on the active line, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of awards) is determined. Then, the process advances to step S292.

Further, if "No" is determined in step S292 and the process in step S293 is executed, the process advances to step S294.
Proceeding to step S294, the main control board 50 executes medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning. That is, when the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added, and when the number of credits has reached the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven and the actual Dispense the medals from the hopper 35. Note that the determination as to whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49. Then, the process advances to step S1415.

Proceeding to step S1415, the main control board 50 determines whether the signal at input port 0 is off.
Specifically, the main control board 50 acquires the data of input port 0 and determines whether it is "00000000(B)".
Then, when the data of input port 0 is not "00000000 (B)", it is determined that any signal is on (operation of any switch including the stop switch 42 is accepted), and step S1415 The answer is "No", and the process of step S1415 is executed again.

On the other hand, when the data of input port 0 is "00000000 (B)", it is determined that all the signals are off (no operation of any switch including the stop switch 42 is accepted), and the step "Yes" is determined in S1415, and the process advances to the next step S1416.
Proceeding to step S1416, the main control board 50 sets a command related to the end of the game (game end command) in the command buffer. Furthermore, once the game end command is set in the command buffer, it is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in an interrupt process that is executed thereafter.

Furthermore, upon receiving the game end command, the sub control board 80 may execute an effect regarding the game result.
Specifically, for example, it is assumed that the winning number "5" is won in a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the 1BB condition device corresponding to the winning number "5" is activated. In this case, when the start switch 41 is operated and the winning lottery means 61 performs a lottery and the 1BB condition device is activated, a command related to the operation of the 1BB condition device (1BB activation command) is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board. 80. Thereby, it can be determined that the 1BB condition device has been activated on the sub-control board 80 side.

Further, it is assumed that the winning number "7" is won in the drawing by the winning combination drawing means 61, and the "1BB+cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB or the symbol combination corresponding to cherry can be stopped and displayed.
As mentioned above, in a game where the winning number "7" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the symbol combination corresponding to cherry can be stopped and displayed, but the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is not stopped and displayed. It may be configured as follows.
Then, when the start switch 41 is operated, a lottery is performed by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the "1BB+Cherry" condition device is activated, the 1BB activation command and the cherry activation command are sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. Sent. Thereby, it can be determined that the 1BB condition device has been activated on the sub-control board 80 side.

Further, in the game in which the 1BB activation command and the cherry activation command are received, the sub control board 80 performs an effect lottery regarding notification of winning of the 1BB condition device. In this performance lottery, it is determined whether or not to notify the winning of the 1BB condition device, the timing of the notification, the manner of the notification, etc.
Here, for example, let us assume that it is determined by a performance lottery to notify the winning of the 1BB condition device by lighting the performance lamp at the timing of the end of the game. In this case, upon receiving a predetermined command (for example, a game end command), the sub-control board 80 lights up the performance lamp to notify the winning of the 1BB condition device.

In this way, in this embodiment, two reels 31 are stopped, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (last) reel 31 is accepted, and medals are paid out (granted) in a pattern. When the combination is displayed as stopped, even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted, the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is activated. Once completed, the answer to step S1413 is "No", the answer to step S1414 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S291 and subsequent steps. For this reason, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals awarded) is determined and paid out (granted) in the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning.
As a result, even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted, the number of medals to be paid out (number of awards) and the number of medals to be paid out (granted) can be smoothly determined. can be executed.

For example, in a game where the winning number "7" is won in a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the "1BB+cherry" conditional device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, two reels 31 (for example, the left reel 31, In a situation where the middle reel 31) is stopped, the operation of the stop switch 42 (right stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 (for example, right reel 31) is accepted, and the " It is assumed that the symbol combination "cherry" - "ANY" - "ANY" is stopped and displayed on the middle line of the active lines.

In this case, even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted, the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is After the end, the number of medals to be paid out is determined to be "1", and one medal is paid out. At this time, if the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", "1" is added to the number of credits, and if the number of credits has reached the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven, One medal is paid out from the hopper 35. Note that the determination as to whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of awards) is determined, and the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals to be awarded) is determined. ) can be executed, but if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted, "Yes" will be returned in step S1415 and the process will not proceed to step S1416. A prescribed command (for example, a game end command) is not sent to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, on the sub-control board 80 side, no performance is executed based on reception of a predetermined command (for example, a game end command).

Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released (at least when all the stop switches 42 are not operated), "No" is obtained in step S1415, and step S1416 Then, a predetermined command (for example, a game end command) can be sent to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, on the sub-control board 80 side, it becomes possible to execute an effect based on reception of a predetermined command (for example, a game end command).

In particular, in a game where the winning number "7" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the "1BB + Cherry" conditional device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, "Cherry" - "ANY" - "ANY" corresponding to the cherry is activated. ” symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the middle line of the active line, and even after one medal corresponding to the cherry winning is paid out (granted), the stop switch corresponding to the third reel 31 After 42 is released, there is a case where a production lamp is turned on to notify the winning of the 1BB condition device.
Thereby, it is possible to perform a performance related to a game result at a timing desired by the player.

In addition, in a game in which the winning number "7" is won and the "1BB + Cherry" conditional device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, the 1BB is released at the timing when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released. There may also be a case where the operation of the conditional device is not notified.
Furthermore, when the 1BB condition device is activated but the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is not displayed on the active line, winning information of 1BB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped and displayed on the active line.

For example, in a game in which the winning number "7" is won in a lottery by the winning number lottery means 61 and the "1BB+Cherry" conditional device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, the start switch 41 is operated, When the lottery is held and the "1BB+Cherry" condition device is activated, a 1BB activation command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.
Furthermore, the situation in which the operation of the stop switch 42 (for example, the right stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 (for example, the right reel 31) is accepted continues even after the medal payout process is executed. If so, after the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, a game end command is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.

Furthermore, upon receiving the 1BB activation command and the cherry activation command, the sub-control board 80 performs an effect lottery regarding notification of activation of the 1BB condition device. At this time, it is assumed that it is decided to light up the production lamp at the timing of the end of the game to notify the winning of the 1BB condition device.
When the sub-control board 80 receives a predetermined command (for example, a game end command), it lights up the effect lamp to notify the winning of the 1BB condition device.

For example, in a game where the winning number "7" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the "1BB+cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, the third reel 31 (for example, the right reel 31 ) while operating (pressing) the stop switch 42 (for example, the right stop switch 42), another stop switch 42 (for example, the left stop switch 42) is operated (pressed), Assume that the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released while the switch 42 is being operated (pressed).
In this case, when the other stop switches 42 are operated (pressed), the game end command is not sent to the sub-control board 80 (no performance related to the game results is executed), and all stop switches 42 including the other stop switches 42 are operated (pressed). When the stop switch 42 is released, it becomes possible to send a game end command to the sub-control board 80 (it becomes possible to perform effects related to the game results).

In addition, when the hopper motor 36 is driven and actual medals are paid out from the hopper 35, the medals collide with each other and make a loud sound, and a payout effect sound is outputted, indicating the operation of the 1BB condition device. Although it becomes difficult to hear the sound of the performance (performance related to the game result), in this embodiment, if you continue to operate the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31, even if the medals are paid out, the game will not be played. The performance related to the result is not executed, and then when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the performance related to the game result is executed.
Therefore, after the medals are paid out, the performance related to the game result can be executed, so that the sound of the performance can be easily heard.

Further, in this embodiment, during the four-phase excitation output, "Yes" is determined in step S1413, and the process does not proceed to step S294. Therefore, during the 4-phase excitation output, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and after the 4-phase excitation output ends, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed.
As a result, the hopper motor 36 is not driven during the 4-phase excitation output, and the hopper motor 36 is driven after the 4-phase excitation output ends, making it possible to secure the current necessary to drive the hopper motor 36. can.

In the present embodiment, the main control board 50 first acquires the data of input port 0 after the number of bets that can be executed for the game is placed, and determines whether the acquired data is "10000000 (B)". Decide whether or not.
Then, when the acquired data is "10000000 (B)", it is determined that only the start switch signal is on, and rotation start control of the reel 31 is executed based on the operation of the start switch 41.

On the other hand, for example, if the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted in a situation where the operation of the 3-bet switch 40b is accepted, the data of input port 0 becomes "11000000 (B)". In this case, it is determined that the start switch signal and a signal other than the start switch signal (3 bet switch signal) are on, and control to start rotation of the reels 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.

As a result, after the number of bets that can be executed for the game have been bet, and in a situation where the operation of the bet switch 40 (1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b) is accepted, the start switch 41 cannot be operated. If the request is accepted, the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 can be prevented from being executed.

Furthermore, this embodiment also includes the setting key switch 152 as described in the eleventh embodiment and the nineteenth embodiment (A).
Then, as described in the eleventh embodiment and the nineteenth embodiment (A), with the power turned on and no bet number placed, the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on. If you turn on the setting key switch 152 by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 151 and turning it, for example, 90 degrees clockwise (when the signal of the setting key switch 152 turns on), the setting confirmation state is displayed. (Settings confirmation mode).

Note that when the number of bets has been bet, "Yes" is returned in step S274 of FIG. 41, and the process does not proceed to the medal insertion waiting process of step S275. Therefore, even if the setting key switch 152 is turned on, the setting confirmation state is not reached. Does not migrate.
In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (even if the setting change switch 153 is operated, the setting value does not change), but the current setting value can be confirmed. The current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73. When the setting key is rotated counterclockwise and the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state is ended.

Further, in this embodiment, the signal from the setting key switch 152 is not input to input port 0.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when controlling the rotation start of the reel 31, the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked.

For example, the data of the input port to which the setting key switch 152 signal is input is not checked, the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the setting key switch 152 signal is input is not checked, and the setting key switch 152 is not checked. Among the data of the input port to which the signal of 152 is input, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked, and the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input. Among them, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 may not be checked.

Therefore, the signal from the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal from the setting key switch 152 is on) after the number of bets that can be executed for the game (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) has been placed. If the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off) and the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 can be executed. shall be.

Here, even if the bet switch 40 is released after operating the bet switch 40, there is a possibility that the operation of the bet switch 40 will continue to be accepted due to deterioration of the bet switch 40.
While the operation of the bet switch 40 is still being accepted, in this embodiment, even if the start switch 41 is operated, the rotation start control of the reels 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.

Thereby, even if the player operates the start switch 41, the reels 31 do not rotate, so the player can recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10. When the player informs the hall clerk of this fact, the hall clerk can also recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10.
Note that even if the operation of the bet switch 40 continues to be accepted, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 issues an error notification. This is because if an error notification is made in such a case, there is a risk that the player will feel troubled.

Furthermore, it is normally unthinkable that the setting key switch 152 turns on (the signal of the setting key switch 152 turns on) during the game, and even if the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 turns on). 152 signal is on), it is likely to be noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) when the number of bets that can be executed for the game (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) is bet. If the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted in a situation where the front door 12 is closed (door switch 17 is off) and the front door 12 is closed (door switch 17 is off), the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is performed. be executable.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted due to noise.

On the other hand, in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, external signal 4 for notifying an error etc. By outputting the format shown in FIG. 33)), it is possible to notify the hall computer, etc. Therefore, a hall clerk or the like can understand that some kind of error has occurred in the slot machine 10 that outputs the predetermined external signal.
Note that in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal that can specify that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on (for example, external signal It may be configured to output external signals (other than external signals 1 to 5)).

In addition, in this embodiment, the main control board 50 acquires the data of input port 0 in step S1411 of FIG. It is determined whether any of the bits (third stop switch signal) is on.
Then, when only one of the D0 to D2 bits is "1", stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is executed.

On the other hand, when two or more of the D0 to D2 bits are "1", or in addition to one of the D0 to D2 bits, one or more of the D3 to D7 bits is "1". At this time, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is not executed.
In particular, when one or more of the D5 to D7 bits in addition to one of the D0 to D2 bits is "1", the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is performed. Not executed.

As a result, in a situation where the plurality of reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and the operation of the bet switch 40 (1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b) or start switch 41 is accepted, the ## stop switch 42 is activated. When the operation is accepted, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 can be prevented from being executed.

Similarly, in a situation where a plurality of reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and an operation of the left stop switch 42 is accepted, if the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted, the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is Based on this, the stop control of the middle reel 31 can be prevented from being executed.

Further, in this embodiment, the signal from the setting key switch 152 is not input to input port 0.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when executing the stop control of the #th reel 31, the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked.
For example, the data of the input port to which the setting key switch 152 signal is input is not checked, the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the setting key switch 152 signal is input is not checked, and the setting key switch 152 is not checked. Among the data of the input port to which the signal of 152 is input, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked, and the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input. Among them, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 may not be checked.

Therefore, the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on), and the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off). ), if the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is accepted, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 can be executed.

Here, even if the start switch 41 is released after the start switch 41 is operated, there is a possibility that the operation of the start switch 41 will continue to be accepted due to deterioration of the start switch 41.
Then, while the operation of the start switch 41 is still being accepted, in this embodiment, even if the #stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #stop switch 42 is executed. do not.

Similarly, even though the bet switch 40 is released after operating the bet switch 40 (1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b), the operation of the bet switch 40 continues to be accepted due to deterioration of the bet switch 40. Even when the state is reached, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is not executed even if the #th stop switch 42 is operated.

Thereby, even if the player operates the ##th stop switch 42, the ##th reel 31 does not stop, so that the player can recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10. When the player informs the hall clerk of this fact, the hall clerk can also recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10.
Note that even if the operation of the bet switch 40 or the start switch 41 remains accepted, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 issues an error notification. This is because if an error notification is made in such a case, there is a risk that the player will feel troubled.

Furthermore, it is normally unthinkable that the setting key switch 152 turns on (the signal of the setting key switch 152 turns on) during the game, and even if the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 turns on). 152 signal is on), it is likely to be noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed, the signal from the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal from the setting key switch 152 is on), and the front door 12 is closed ( When the operation of the ##th stop switch 42 is accepted under the condition (the door switch 17 is off), the ##th reel 31 can be stopped based on the operation of the ##th stop switch 42.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted due to noise.

On the other hand, in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, external signal 4 for notifying an error etc. By outputting the format shown in FIG. 33)), it is possible to notify the hall computer, etc. Therefore, a hall clerk or the like can understand that some kind of error has occurred in the slot machine 10 that outputs the predetermined external signal.
Note that in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal that can specify that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on (for example, external signal It may be configured to output external signals (other than external signals 1 to 5)).

Although the 33rd embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
(1) FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing a modification of the main processing (M_MAIN) by the main control board 50 in the 33rd embodiment.
In the flowchart of the modification of the 33rd embodiment shown in FIG. 252, steps that are different from those in FIG. 251 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 251 are assigned the same step numbers. .
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 251 will be mainly explained.

In the modification of the 33rd embodiment shown in FIG. 252, when the display determination in step S291 is performed and the result is "No" in step S292, and the process in step S293 is performed, the process advances to step S1417, and the main control board 50 Determine whether the condition device is activated.
Here, the state in which the specific condition device is operating is, for example, a state in which the winning number "6" is won by the winning lottery means 61 and the "1BB + watermelon" condition device corresponding to the winning number "6" is operating. , and a state in which the winning number "7" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the "1BB+Cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated.

Then, when the specific condition device is operating (the winning number "6" or "7" is won), "Yes" is determined in step S1417, and the process proceeds to step S1415, and the specific condition device is not operating. When (a predetermined condition device different from the specific condition device is operating), “No” is determined in step S1417, step S1415 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S294.
Note that the state in which the predetermined condition device is operating includes, for example, a state in which the winning number "3" is won by the winning lottery means 61 and the watermelon condition device corresponding to the winning number "3" is operating, and For example, the winning number "4" is won by the means 61 and the cherry condition device corresponding to the winning number "4" is activated.

Proceeding to step S1415, the main control board 50 determines whether the signal at input port 0 is off. That is, it is determined whether the operation of any switch including the stop switch 42 is accepted.
If it is determined that any switch operation is accepted, the process of step S1415 is executed again, and if it is determined that any switch operation is not accepted, the process advances to step S294.

Proceeding to step S294, the main control board 50 executes medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning. That is, the payout (granting) of medals is executed. At this time, if the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added, and if the number of credits has reached the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven and the actual medal is is discharged from the hopper 35. Note that the determination as to whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49. Then, the process advances to step S1416.
Proceeding to step S1416, the main control board 50 sets a game end command in the command buffer. As described above, once the game end command is set in the command buffer, it is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the interrupt processing that is executed thereafter.

In this way, in the modified example of the 33rd embodiment shown in FIG. It is determined whether the device is operating or not, and when it is determined that the specific condition device is operating, it is then determined whether or not the operation of any switch is accepted. If it is determined that no switch operation has been accepted, the process advances to step S294.
Therefore, in a game where the specific condition device is operating, if you continue to operate the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31, medals will not be paid out, and the stop switch corresponding to the third reel 31 will not be paid out. When 42 is released, medals are paid out.

On the other hand, in a game where the specific condition device is not operating, medals are paid out even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continued to be operated.
As a result, medals are paid out even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continued to be operated, or medals are paid out when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continued to be operated. When the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released without being paid out, it can be determined whether the specific condition device is operating or not depending on whether the medals are paid out or not.

For example, in a game where the winning number "4" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the cherry condition device corresponding to the winning number "4" is activated, the symbols "Cherry" - "ANY" - "ANY" corresponding to the cherry are activated. When the combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, medals are paid out even if you continue to operate the stop switch 42 (for example, right stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 (for example, right reel 31). .

On the other hand, in a game where the winning number "7" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the "1BB + Cherry" conditional device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, "Cherry" - "ANY" - corresponding to the cherry When the "ANY" symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, the stop switch 42 (for example, right stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 (for example, right reel 31) is continuously operated. And the medals are not paid out. Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, medals are paid out.

As a result, when the symbol combination "Cherry" - "ANY" - "ANY" corresponding to the cherry is stopped and displayed on the active line, even if you continue to operate the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31. It is possible to determine whether the 1BB condition device has been activated or not, depending on whether or not medals have been paid out.

(2) In the above embodiment, in step S1415, the operation of any one of the first stop switch 42, second stop switch 42, third stop switch 42, 1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b, and start switch 41 is accepted. However, this is not limited to this.
For example, in step S1415, it may be determined whether or not only the first stop switch 42, the second stop switch 42, and the third stop switch 42 are operated.

(3) In the above embodiment, the game end command is set in the command buffer in step S1416. Then, a game end command was sent to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 side controlled the effects related to the game results. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, effects related to game results may be controlled on the main control board 50 side. Then, in step 1418, the main control board 50 may perform an effect regarding the game result.

(4) In the above embodiment, when stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, a four-phase excitation output is performed to the motor 32 (stepping motor), but the present invention is not limited to this.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, for example, one-phase excitation output, two-phase excitation output, or three-phase excitation output may be performed. Also, first, a two-phase excitation output is performed to apply a weak brake, and then the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32 is stopped by switching from the two-phase excitation output to a four-phase excitation output and applying a strong brake. You may also do so.
(5) The first to thirty-third embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to thirty-third embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<34th embodiment>
In the 34th embodiment, a # reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) capable of storing data indicating the drive state of the reel 31 is provided for each reel 31, and data is stored in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS). Executes a logical product (AND) operation between the data in the file and "40 (H)", and when the result is "0", it is determined that the index has been detected, and the result is not "0". When this happens, it is determined that the index has not been detected.

Then, when the result of performing the AND operation of the data stored in the # reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) and "40 (H)" is not "0", the stop switch 42 is operated. Even if the reel 31 is stopped, the stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is not executed.

The symbol arrangement of the reels 31, the active line, the type of winning combination, the symbol combination of the winning combination, the number of payout pieces, the condition device, the winning combination, RT, and the main game state are the same as in the twenty-third embodiment.
253 and 254 are diagrams showing main data according to the 34th embodiment among the data stored in the RWM 53 in the 34th embodiment. Note that the data shown in FIGS. 253 and 254 are some data, and various data other than the data shown in the figures is stored in the RWM 53.
Note that in FIG. 254, "D0" to "D15" respectively indicate bits D0 to D15 of 16-bit data.

In FIG. 253, the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) at address “F067(H)” is a storage area that stores data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the first (left) reel 31.
The D0 bit indicates whether or not deceleration is occurring due to 4-phase excitation. "1" indicates deceleration is occurring due to 4-phase excitation, and "0" indicates not decelerating due to 4-phase excitation. .
The D1 bit indicates whether or not deceleration is occurring due to 2-phase excitation. "1" indicates deceleration is occurring due to 4-phase excitation, and "0" indicates not decelerating due to 4-phase excitation. .
The D5 bit indicates whether or not the vehicle is decelerating; "1" indicates that the vehicle is decelerating, and "0" indicates that the vehicle is not decelerating.

Even during deceleration due to four-phase excitation, the D1 bit becomes "1".
Further, the D5 bit becomes "1" both during deceleration due to two-phase excitation and during deceleration due to four-phase excitation.
As a result, during deceleration due to two-phase excitation, the D0 bit becomes "0" and the D1 bit and D5 bit become "1".
Further, during deceleration due to four-phase excitation, the D0 bit, D1 bit, and D5 bit all become "1".

In this embodiment, when the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for stopping position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) become the same value, first, a two-phase excitation output is generated. I do. This applies a weak brake to the motor 32. Thereafter, the two-phase excitation output is switched to the four-phase excitation output. As a result, a strong brake is applied to the motor 32 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32.
In this way, in this embodiment, the load on the motor 32 is reduced.

Further, when the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) become the same value, the D5 bit becomes "1".
Further, when the D5 bit is "1" and the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of one symbol on the #th reel 13 is less than "16", two-phase excitation output is performed. At this time, the D1 bit becomes "1". That is, the motor is decelerating by two-phase excitation, and the D0 bit becomes "0" and the D1 bit and D5 bit become "1".

Then, when the D5 bit is "1" and the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of 1 symbol on reel #13 becomes "16" or more, the 2-phase excitation output is switched to the 4-phase excitation output (2-phase excitation deceleration ends). At this time, the D1 bit and the D5 bit remain "1" and the D0 bit becomes "1". That is, the motor is decelerating by four-phase excitation, and the D0 bit, D1 bit, and D5 bit all become "1".

Note that the two-phase excitation deceleration period during which the two-phase excitation deceleration is in progress may be timed (counted), and after the two-phase excitation deceleration period has elapsed, the four-phase excitation deceleration may be started.
In addition, not only when the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for stopping position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) become the same value, for example, The symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for stopping position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) are the same value, and the step number of 1 symbol on # reel 13 (_NB_RL#_STEP ) reaches a predetermined value (for example, "3"), two-phase excitation output may be performed to apply a weak brake to the motor 32, and the D5 bit may be set to "1".

The D2 bit indicates whether or not the speed is constant; "1" indicates that the speed is constant, and "0" indicates that the speed is not constant.
When the acceleration process ends, the D2 bit becomes "1".
Start of deceleration (after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the # reel 31 is accepted, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for the stop position) (_NB_RL #_STPPIC) becomes the same value), the D2 bit is "1" during deceleration, during deceleration due to two-phase excitation, and during deceleration due to four-phase excitation.

Furthermore, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to reel #31 is accepted, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for stopping position) (_NB_RL# _STPPIC) becomes the same value and the step number of one symbol on reel #13 (_NB_RL#_STEP) reaches a predetermined value (for example, "3"), the deceleration starts, and during that time, The D2 bit may be set to "1".

The D3 bit indicates whether or not it is being accelerated; "1" indicates that it is being accelerated, and "0" indicates that it is not being accelerated.
The D4 bit indicates whether or not it is in a state of preparation for rotation; "1" indicates that it is in a state of preparation for rotation, and "0" indicates that it is not in a state of preparation for rotation.
The D6 bit indicates whether or not it is before index detection; "1" indicates that it is before index detection, and "0" indicates that it is not before index detection (after index detection).

When the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, "50 (H)"("01010000(B)") is set in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS).
Thereafter, when the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 starts accelerating, the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) is set to "48(H)"("01001000(B)").
The period from when the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted until the motor 32 of the ##th reel 31 starts accelerating is a state of preparation for rotation. During this time, the D4 bit becomes "1". Then, when the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 starts accelerating, the D3 bit becomes "1" and the D4 bit becomes "0".
Thereafter, when the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 detects the index, the D6 bit changes from "1" to "0" at the rise of the #th reel sensor signal.

The D7 bit indicates whether or not the deceleration is starting. "1" indicates that the deceleration is starting, and "0" indicates that the deceleration is not starting.
When the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the #th reel 31 is accepted, the D7 bit becomes "1".
After the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to reel #31 is accepted, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL#_PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for stopping position) (_NB_RL#_STPPIC) are displayed. The period until these become the same value is the state in which deceleration begins.
The D7 bit is also "1" during deceleration, deceleration by two-phase excitation, and deceleration by four-phase excitation.

In FIG. 253, the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) at address "F068(H)" is a storage area that stores data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the second (middle) reel 31, The third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) of "H)" is a storage area that stores data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the third (right) reel 31. These contents are the same as the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) of address "F067(H)".

In FIG. 254, the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) at address “F090(H)” is the first stop switch signal (D0 bit) and second stop switch signal (D1 bit) input to each bit of input port 0. ), 3rd stop switch signal (D2 bit), 1 bet switch signal (D3 bit), 3 bet switch signal (D4 bit), start switch signal (D5 bit), and settlement switch signal (D6 bit) are turned on/off. This is a storage area for storing data.

The ## stop switch signal is turned on when the ## stop switch 42 is operated (the stop button 42a is pushed in), and the ## stop switch signal is turned on when the ## stop switch 42 is released (the pressed stop button 42a is released and returned to its original state). position) and turns off.
Similarly to the #stop switch signal, the 1 bet switch signal, 3 bet switch signal, start switch signal, and settlement switch signal are turned on when the corresponding switch is operated, and turned off when the corresponding switch is released. Become.
Then, in interrupt processing, the signals input to each bit of input port 0 are read, and the on/off status of each signal is determined. If it is on, "1" is stored in the corresponding bit, and when it is off, If so, "0" is stored in the corresponding bit.

In FIG. 254, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at address “F095(H)” is a storage area that stores data indicating whether or not the operation (stop operation) of the stop switch 42 corresponding to each reel 31 has been accepted. be.
The D0 bit indicates whether or not the stop operation for the first (left) reel 31 has been accepted; "1" indicates that the stop operation has not been accepted; and "0" indicates that the stop operation has been accepted. (accepted).
Furthermore, the D1 bit indicates whether or not the operation to stop the second (middle) reel 31 has been accepted, and the D2 bit indicates whether or not the operation to stop the third (right) reel 31 has been accepted. These contents are similar to the D0 bit.

Each time a game is started, an initial value "00000111 (B)" is set in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP).
When the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 is accepted, the D0 bit of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is set to "0". Similarly, when the operation of the second (middle) stop switch 42 is accepted, the D1 bit is set to "0", and when the operation of the third (right) stop switch 42 is accepted, the D2 bit is set to "0". Set.

FIG. 255(a) is a diagram showing the stop switch determination table (TBL_STPBTN_CHK). The data stored in the stop switch determination table (TBL_STPBTN_CHK) is compared with the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD), and depending on whether the two data match or not, the stop switch 42 is This is used when determining whether or not the operation is valid.
FIG. 255(b) is a diagram showing a suspension acceptance determination table. The data stored in the stoppage acceptance determination table is used to check whether each reel 31 is before or after index detection, and through this check whether it is possible to accept the stoppage of the reel 31. This is used when determining whether or not.

FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the 34th embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 in the 23rd embodiment.
In the flowchart of the 34th embodiment shown in FIG. 256, steps that are different from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 139 are assigned the same step numbers.

Also, in the main processing (M_MAIN) of the 34th embodiment, the processing from step S295 to step S300 in FIG. 139 is executed, but the illustration of the processing from step S295 to step S300 is omitted in FIG. 256.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly explained.

As shown in FIG. 256, in the 34th embodiment, after the start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) in step S751 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1421.
Proceeding to step S1421, the main control board 50 executes a reel stop reception check. This process is the process shown in FIG. 257, which will be described later. When the reel stop reception check in step S1421 is completed, the process advances to step S291.

Proceeding to step S291, the main control board 50 executes display determination.
Specifically, it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line. Further, when a symbol combination for which medals are paid out (awarded) is stopped and displayed on the active line, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of awards) is determined. Then, the process advances to step S292.
Note that the determined number of medals to be paid out may be stored (saved) only in a predetermined register and not stored in the RWM 53, or may be stored in the RWM 53.

Further, if "No" is determined in step S292 and the process in step S293 is executed, the process advances to step S1422.
Proceeding to step S1422, the main control board 50 determines whether any stop switch signal is on (operation of any stop switch 42 is accepted).
Specifically, in step S1422, the main control board 50 first stores the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (FIG. 254) at address "F090(H)" of the RWM 53 in the A register. do.
Next, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation on the A register value and "00000111 (B)", and determines whether the result is "0" (the zero flag is "1") or not. to judge. Thereby, it is determined whether any of the stop switch signals is on, that is, whether the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted.

When the result of the above logical AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), one of the stop switch signals is on (the operation of one of the stop switches 42 is accepted). The determination result is "Yes" in step S1422, and the process of step S1422 is executed again. That is, the process of step S1422 is repeated.
On the other hand, when the result of the above AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), all stop switch signals are off (no operation of any stop switch 42 is accepted). The determination result is "No" in step S1422, and the process advances to step S294.

Here, when the operation of at least one of the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, and right stop switch 42 is accepted, at least one stop switch signal is turned on, and the input port 0 level data ( At least one of bits D0 to D2 of _PT_IN0_OLD) becomes "1".
Further, when at least one of the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) is "1", the result of the above-mentioned AND operation does not become "0" (the zero flag does not become "1").
If the result of the above logical AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), "Yes" is determined in step S1422, and the process of step S1422 is repeated. In this case, the process does not proceed to step S294 and subsequent steps, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning is not executed.

On the other hand, when the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, and right stop switch 42 are all released, the left stop switch signal, middle stop switch signal, and right stop switch signal are all turned off. , the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) all become "0".
Furthermore, when the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) are all "0", the result of the above-mentioned AND operation is "0" (the zero flag becomes "1").
If the result of the above logical AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), "No" is determined in step S1422, and the process proceeds to step S294.

Proceeding to step S294, the main control board 50 executes medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) upon winning. That is, when the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added, and when the number of credits has reached the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven and the actual Dispense the medals from the hopper 35. Note that the determination as to whether the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50" is made, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49.

Here, in this embodiment, a display determination is performed in step S291, and then, in step S1422, it is determined whether any stop switch signal is on, and when any stop switch signal is off, Proceeding to step S294, a medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed.
For this reason, even if the operation of the third (last) stop switch 42 continues to be accepted, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of awards) can be determined; If it has been accepted, the answer is "Yes" in step S1422, and the process does not proceed to step S294, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed. Then, when all the stop switches 42 are released, "No" is returned in step S1422, and the process proceeds to step S294, where the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning becomes executable.

Also, for example, in a situation where the operation of the third (last) stop switch 42 (for example, the right stop switch 42) is accepted, another stop switch 42 (for example, the left stop switch 42) is operated, and then the other stop switch 42 is operated. Assume that the third (last) stop switch 42 (for example, the right stop switch 42) is released while the third (last) stop switch 42 (for example, the left stop switch 42) is being operated.
In this case, even if the operation of the other stop switch 42 (for example, the left stop switch 42) continues to be accepted, it is possible to determine the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals awarded). 42 (for example, the left stop switch 42) has been accepted, the answer is "Yes" in step S1422, and the process does not proceed to step S294, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.

In this manner, in a situation where the operation of any one of the stop switches 42 is accepted, "Yes" is determined in step S1422 and the process does not proceed to step S294, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.
Then, when all the stop switches 42 are released, "No" is returned in step S1422, and the process proceeds to step S294, where it becomes possible to execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning.
Thereby, the number of credits can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing the reel stop reception check in step S1421 of FIG. 256.
In step S1431, the main control board 50 determines whether the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (FIG. 254) of the address "F090(H)" of the RWM 53 is "0".
Specifically, the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (Fig. 254) of the address "F090 (H)" of the RWM53 is stored in the A register, and the A register value is "0" or not. Decide whether or not.

If it is determined that the value is not "0", the result is "No" in step S1431, and the process of step S1431 is executed again. That is, the process of step S1431 is repeated until the answer is "Yes".
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is "0", the result is "Yes" in step S1431, and the process proceeds to the next step S1432.

In this way, in this embodiment, it is determined in step S1431 whether the data of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) is "0", and when it is determined that it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1432. .
As a result, in a situation where the signal of any switch input to input port 0 is on (operation of any switch is accepted), stop control of the reel 31 is not executed. .
Note that in step S1431, instead of acquiring the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) of the RWM 53, the data of the signal input to the input port 0 may be directly acquired.

Proceeding to step S1432, the main control board 50 executes a stop acceptance check. This process is the process shown in FIG. 258, which will be described later. When the stop acceptance check in step S1432 is completed, the process advances to step S1433.
Proceeding to step S1433, the main control board 50 determines whether there is inspection data.
Specifically, in step S1433, it is determined whether the zero flag is "1". That is, it is determined whether the result of the logical product (AND) operation in step S1454 in FIG. 258, which will be described later, is "0".

If the zero flag is not "1", it is determined that there is test data, the result is "Yes" in step S1433, and the process advances to step S1439, a stop acceptance test.
On the other hand, when the zero flag is "1", it is determined that there is no test data, the result is "No" in step S1433, and the process advances to step S1434.
Proceeding to step S1434, the main control board 50 determines whether the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (FIG. 254) of the address "F090(H)" of the RWM 53 is "0".

Specifically, the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (Fig. 254) of the address "F090 (H)" of the RWM53 is stored in the A register, and the A register value is "0" or not. Decide whether or not.
If it is determined that the value is "0", the result is "Yes" in step S1434, and the process returns to step S1432. This causes the processing from step S1432 to step S1434 to be repeated.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not "0", the result is "No" in step S1434, and the process advances to the next step S1435.

Proceeding to step S1435, the main control board 50 determines that the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) matches any of the data stored in the stop switch determination table (matching data exists). Determine whether or not.
Specifically, first, it is determined whether the data stored in the A register in step S1434 matches "00000100 (B)" stored at the beginning (first line) of the stop switch determination table. .
When it is determined that they match, it is determined that the operation of the third (right) stop switch 42 has been accepted, and the process advances to the next step S1436.

On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match, then check whether the data stored in the A register in step S1434 and "00000010(B)" stored in the second line of the stop switch determination table match. Decide whether or not.
When it is determined that they match, it is determined that the operation of the second (middle) stop switch 42 has been accepted, and the process advances to the next step S1436.
On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match, then check whether the data stored in the A register in step S1434 and "00000001(B)" stored in the third row of the stop switch determination table match. Decide whether or not.

When it is determined that they match, it is determined that the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 has been accepted, and the process advances to the next step S1436.
On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match, it is determined that they do not match any data stored in the stop switch determination table (no matching data), and the process returns to step S1431. As a result, the processes from step S1431 to step S1435 are repeated.

For example, when the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 is accepted, the data of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) becomes "00000001 (B)".
In this case, since it matches "00000001(B)" stored in the third line of the stop switch determination table, it is determined that the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 has been accepted, and the process advances to step S1436. .

Further, for example, if the operations of the first (left) stop switch 42 and the second (middle) stop switch 42 are accepted at the same time, the data of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) becomes "00000011 (B)".
In this case, since it does not match any data stored in the stop switch determination table, it is determined that there is no matching data, and the process returns to step S1431.

In this way, in this embodiment, when operations of a plurality of stop switches 42 are accepted simultaneously, or when the stop switch 42 and other switches (1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b, start switch 41, settlement switch 43) If these operations are accepted at the same time, it is determined in step S1435 that there is no matching data, and the process returns to step S1431.
As a result, in this embodiment, when a plurality of stop switches 42 are operated at the same time, or when the stop switch 42 and another switch are operated at the same time, the stop control of the reel 31 is not executed.

In other words, even if all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and the indexes are being detected and the stop switches 42 can be operated, if multiple stop switches 42 are operated at the same time, , when the stop switch 42 and another switch are operated at the same time, it is determined in step S1435 that there is no matching data, the process returns to step S1431, and the stop control of the reel 31 is not executed.

Proceeding to step S1436, the main control board 50 determines whether the stop switch signal for the reel 31 for which stop has been accepted has been turned on (the operation of the stop switch 42 has been accepted).
Specifically, a logical product (AND) operation is performed between the data stored in the A register in step S1434 and the data of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at address "F095 (H)" of the RWM 53, and the result is "0". ” (the zero flag is “1”).

When the result of the above logical product operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that the stop switch signal for the reel 31 for which stop has been accepted is turned on, and in step S1436 " Yes”, and the process returns to step S1431. As a result, the processes from step S1431 to step S1436 are repeated. In this case, the process does not proceed to step S1437, so the stop control of the reels 31 is not executed.

On the other hand, if the result of the above AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), it is determined that the stop switch signal for the reel 31 for which stop has not been accepted (stop can be accepted) is turned on. However, the result in step S1436 is "No", and the process advances to step S1437. In this case, stop control of the reel 31 can be executed.
In this way, in this embodiment, stop control is not executed for the reels 31 corresponding to the stop switches 42 for which the stop operation has already been accepted, and for the reels 31 corresponding to the stop switches 42 for which the stop operation has not yet been accepted. I am trying to perform stop control for this.

Proceeding to step S1437, the main control board 50 executes processing when accepting a stop. In this process, the stop position of the ## reel 31 is determined based on the winning combination result of the current game and the position of the ## reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the ## stop switch 42 is accepted, and the determined stop position is determined. The symbol number corresponding to the position is stored in the # reel symbol number (for the stop position). Furthermore, the stopped symbol data for determining the symbol combination to be stopped on the active line is updated.

More specifically, in the process at the time of accepting the stop in step S1437 of FIG. 257, the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the twenty-fifth embodiment is executed. That is, for the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 determined to be on in steps S1434 to S1436, the winning combination result of the current game and the operation of the stop switch 42 are accepted by the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. 194. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the reel 31 is stopped, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stop position is stored in the reel symbol number (for the stop position). Furthermore, by processing corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. 194, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) for determining the symbol combination that stops on the active line is updated.

Note that the # reel symbol number (for passing position) and the # reel symbol number ( When it is determined that the values (for the stop position) have become the same value, the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 is decelerated by two-phase excitation, and then switched to deceleration by four-phase excitation.

In addition, the # reel symbol number (for the passing position) and the # reel symbol number (for the stop position) will be the same value, and the step number (_NB_RL#_STEP) of 1 symbol on the # reel 13 will be the same value. When the value (for example, "3") is reached, the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 may be decelerated by two-phase excitation, and then switched to deceleration by four-phase excitation.

After executing the stop reception process in step S1437, the process proceeds to step S1438, where the main control board 50 determines whether all the reels 31 have stopped.
Specifically, it is determined whether the data of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at the address "F095(H)" of the RWM 53 is "0".
Here, when the data of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is not "0", it is determined that one of the reels 31 is not stopped, "No" is obtained in step S1438, and the process returns to step S1431. This causes the processing from step S1431 onwards to be repeated.

On the other hand, when the data of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "0", it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the result is "Yes" in step S1438, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended.
When the process according to this flowchart is completed, the process advances to step S291 in FIG. 256, and display determination is performed. Then, in the display determination in step S291 of FIG. 256, it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, and the symbol combination for which medals are paid out (granted) is stopped and displayed on the active line. If so, the number of medals to be paid out (number of medals awarded) is determined.

As described above, even if the operation of the third (last) stop switch 42 continues to be accepted, the process proceeds to step S291 in FIG. 256, so the number of medals to be paid out (number of medals awarded) can be determined. be.
However, if the operation of the third (last) stop switch 42 continues to be accepted, "Yes" will be returned in step S1422 of FIG. 256, and the process will not proceed to step S294 of FIG. Do not execute medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY).
Then, when all the stop switches 42 are released, "No" is returned in step S1422 of FIG. 256, the process proceeds to step S294 of FIG. 256, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning becomes executable.

Further, when the process advances to step S1439 in FIG. 257, the main control board 50 executes a stop acceptance check. This process is the process shown in FIG. 258, which will be described later. When the stop acceptance check in step S1439 is completed, the process advances to step S1440.
Proceeding to step S1440, the main control board 50 determines whether there is inspection data.
Specifically, in step S1440, it is determined whether the zero flag is "1". That is, it is determined whether the result of the logical product (AND) operation in step S1454 in FIG. 258, which will be described later, is "0".

If the zero flag is not "1", it is determined that there is test data, "Yes" is determined in step S1440, and the process returns to step S1439, which is a stop-acceptable test. As a result, the processes in step S1439 and step S1440 are repeated.
On the other hand, when the zero flag is "1", it is determined that there is no test data, the result is "No" in step S1440, and the process returns to step S1431. This causes the processing from step S1431 onwards to be repeated.

FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the stop acceptance check in step S1432 and step S1439 in FIG. 257.
In step S1451, the main control board 50 sets a stop acceptance determination table (FIG. 255(b)). Then, the process advances to the next step S1452.
Proceeding to step S1452, the main control board 50 acquires the number of inspections from the stop acceptance determination table. Specifically, the number of inspections "3" stored at the top (first line) of the stop acceptance determination table is acquired and stored in the B register. Then, the process advances to the next step S1453.

Proceeding to step S1453, the main control board 50 acquires the mask data and the lower address of the inspection RWM address from the stop acceptance determination table. Specifically, the mask data "40 (H)" stored in the second to fourth rows of the stop acceptance determination table is acquired and stored in the C register, and the lower address "LOW_WK_RL1_STS" of the inspection RWM address is acquired. ” to “LOW_WK_RL1_STS” (“67(H)” to “69(H)”) are acquired and stored in the A register. Then, the process advances to the next step S1454.

Here, in the first inspection, the mask data "40 (H)" stored in the second line and the lower address "LOW_WK_RL1_STS"("67(H)") of the inspection RWM address are acquired, and the second In the test, the mask data "40 (H)" stored in the third line and the lower address "LOW_WK_RL2_STS"("68(H)") of the test RWM address are acquired, and in the third test, the mask data "40 (H)" stored in the 3rd line is acquired. The mask data “40(H)” stored in the address and the lower address “LOW_WK_RL3_STS” (“69(H)”) of the inspection RWM address are acquired.
Note that, after performing the first test, if the result in step S1456 described later is "No", the second test is performed next, and if the result is "No" again in step S1456, then the third test is performed. conduct. In this way, each reel 31 is inspected (checking whether it is before or after index detection).

Proceeding to step S1454, the main control board 50 acquires data in the storage area indicated by the test RWM address. Specifically, data stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 whose lower address is the A register value is stored in the A register. Then, the process advances to the next step S1455.
Here, in the first test, data of the first reel drive state (WK_RL1_STS) is stored in the A register. Furthermore, in the second test, data on the second reel drive state (WK_RL2_STS) is stored in the A register, and in the third test, data on the third reel drive state (WK_RL3_STS) is stored in the A register.

Proceeding to step S1455, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation on the data acquired in step S1454 and the mask data. Specifically, in step S1455, the data of the #th reel drive state (WK_RL#_STS) stored in the A register in step S1454 and the mask data "40 (H)" ("01000000" stored in the C register in step S1453) are combined. (B)''). Then, the process advances to the next step S1456.

Here, when the rotation of the #th reel 31 reaches a constant speed but before the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 detects the index, the D6 bit of the #th reel drive state (WK_RL#_STS) is It is "1". Therefore, the result of the above logical AND operation does not become "0" (the zero flag does not become "1").
Further, when the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 loses synchronization after the rotation of the #th reel 31 reaches a constant speed, re-acceleration processing is performed. At this time, the D6 bit of the #th reel drive state (WK_RL#_STS) is set to "1" and re-acceleration processing is performed. In this case as well, the result of the above logical AND operation does not become "0" (the zero flag does not become "1").

On the other hand, when the rotation of the #th reel 31 reaches a constant speed and the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 detects the index, the D6 bit of the #th reel drive state (WK_RL#_STS) is It is "0". Therefore, the result of the above logical AND operation becomes "0" (the zero flag becomes "1").
Proceeding to step S1456, the main control board 50 determines whether there is inspection data. Specifically, it is determined whether the result of the AND operation executed in step S1455 is "0", and if it is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that there is no test data. However, the result in step S1456 is "No", and the process advances to the next step S1457.

Here, when the rotation of the reel 31 has reached a constant speed and after the reel sensor 33 has detected the index, when the four-phase excitation output is being performed to stop the reel 31, and when the reel 31 has stopped When it is completed, the D6 bit of the #th reel drive state (WK_RL#_STS) is "0", so the result of the above-mentioned AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"). In this case, "No" is determined in step S1456, and the process advances to the next step S1457.
On the other hand, when the result of the above-mentioned AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), it is determined that there is test data, "Yes" is determined in step S1456, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

Proceeding to step S1457, the main control board 50 determines whether the number of inspections has been completed. Specifically, "1" is subtracted from the B register value and the result is stored in the B register. Then, it is determined whether the B register value is "0" or not, and if it is "0", it is determined that the number of tests has been completed, and the result is "Yes" in step S1457, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended. .
On the other hand, if the B register value is not "0", it is determined that the number of tests has not been completed, the result is "No" in step S1457, and the process returns to step S1453. In this case, the processing from step S1453 onwards will be repeated.

Further, when the result in step S1456 is "Yes" (inspection data is present) and the process according to this flowchart is completed, the result is "Yes" in step S1433 in FIG. 257, and the result in step S1440 in FIG. 257 is also "Yes". Therefore, the process does not proceed to step 1437 in FIG. 257, so the stop control of the reel 31 is not executed. That is, before the reel sensor 33 detects the index, the stop control of the reel 31 is not executed.

Further, for example, the first (left) reel 31 has already stopped, the second (middle) reel 31 is rotating at a constant speed and after index detection, and the third (right) reel 31 is also rotating at a constant speed. It is assumed that the index is inside and after the index is detected.
In this case, since the D6 bit of the first reel drive state (WK_RL1_STS) is "0", the data of the first reel drive state (WK_RL1_STS) and "40 (H)"("01000000 (B )"), the result of the AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1").

In addition, since the D6 bit of the second reel drive state (WK_RL2_STS) is also "0", in the second inspection, the AND operation of the data of the second reel drive state (WK_RL2_STS) and "40 (H)" is The result will be "0".
Furthermore, since the D6 bit of the third reel drive state (WK_RL3_STS) is also "0", in the third inspection, the AND operation of the data of the third reel drive state (WK_RL3_STS) and "40 (H)" is The result will be "0".
Then, in the third inspection, the answer is "No" in step S1456, and the answer is "Yes" in step S1457, thereby ending the process according to this flowchart.

Further, for example, the first (left) reel 31 has already stopped, the second (middle) reel 31 is rotating at a constant speed and has not yet detected the index, and the third (right) reel 31 is also rotating at a constant speed. It is assumed that the index is inside and after the index is detected.
In this case, as described above, in the first test, the result of the AND operation of the data of the first reel drive state (WK_RL1_STS) and "40 (H)" becomes "0".

However, since the D6 bit of the second reel drive state (WK_RL2_STS) is "1", in the second inspection, the AND operation of the data of the second reel drive state (WK_RL2_STS) and "40 (H)" is The result is "01000000(B)" (not "0").
Then, in the second test, the answer is "Yes" in step S1456, and the process according to this flowchart ends.

In this way, in the stop acceptance test shown in FIG. 258, it is checked (checked) whether the index is before or after the index is detected for each reel 31. Since each reel 31 can be inspected by a common process, the process can be simplified and the amount of ROM used by the program can be reduced.

As described above, in this embodiment, each reel 31 is provided with a #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 253) in which data indicating the drive state of the reel 31 can be stored. Further, in step S1455 of FIG. 258, a logical product (AND) operation is performed between the data stored in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) and the mask data "40 (H)".
Here, when the rotation of the #th reel 31 has reached a constant speed and the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 has detected the index, the D6 bit of the #th reel drive state (WK_RL#_STS) is "0". Therefore, the result of the above logical AND operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"). At this time, it is determined that the index has been detected, and the result is "No" in step S1456 of FIG. 258.

On the other hand, when the rotation of the #th reel 31 reaches a constant speed but before the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 detects the index, the D6 bit of the #th reel drive state (WK_RL#_STS) is "1". Therefore, the result of the above-mentioned logical AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is "1"). At this time, it is determined that the index has not yet been detected, and the result is "Yes" in step S1456 in FIG. 258.
If the result of the above logical product operation is not "0" (the zero flag is "1"), "Yes" is obtained in steps S1433 and S1440 in FIG. 257, and the process does not proceed to step S1437, so the stop switch Even if the stop switch 42 is operated, stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is not executed.

That is, the #th reel drive state (WK_RL#_STS) stores information regarding the drive state of the reel 31 that allows it to be determined whether it is before or after index detection even in a constant speed state. When a predetermined calculation is performed using the data of the #th reel drive state (WK_RL#_STS), the result of the predetermined calculation is different before and after index detection.
Then, based on the result of the predetermined calculation, it is determined whether the index is detected before or after the index is detected, and by determining whether or not the reel 31 stop control can be executed, the reel 31 stop control is performed by simple calculation processing. It is possible to determine whether or not it is executable.

In the present embodiment, the main control board 50 first controls the input port 0 of the address "F090 (H)" of the RWM 53 after the number of bets that can execute the game (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) has been placed. The data stored in the level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (FIG. 254) is acquired, and it is determined whether the acquired data is "0" or not.
Furthermore, when it is determined that the acquired data is not "0", next, a logical product (AND) operation is performed between the data of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) and "11011111 (B)", and the result is It is determined whether or not is "0".

When it is determined that the result of the above-mentioned AND operation is "0", it is determined that only the start switch signal is on, and rotation start control of the reel 31 is executed based on the operation of the start switch 41.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the data of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) is "0", and when it is determined that the result of the above AND operation is not "0", the Rotation start control of the reel 31 is not executed.

As a result, after the number of bets that allow the game to be executed (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) has been bet, the bet switches 40 (1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b), (left, center, right) To prevent rotation start control of a reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 from being executed when the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted in a situation where the operations of the stop switch 42 and the settlement switch 43 are accepted. I can do it.

Furthermore, this embodiment also includes the setting key switch 152 as described in the eleventh embodiment and the nineteenth embodiment (A).
Then, as described in the eleventh embodiment and the nineteenth embodiment (A), with the power turned on and no bet number placed, the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on. If you turn on the setting key switch 152 by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 151 and turning it, for example, 90 degrees clockwise (when the signal of the setting key switch 152 turns on), the setting confirmation state is displayed. (Settings confirmation mode).

Note that when the number of bets has been bet, "Yes" is returned in step S274 of FIG. 41, and the process does not proceed to the medal insertion waiting process of step S275. Therefore, even if the setting key switch 152 is turned on, the setting confirmation state is not reached. Does not migrate.
In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (even if the setting change switch 153 is operated, the setting value does not change), but the current setting value can be confirmed. The current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73. When the setting key is rotated counterclockwise and the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state is ended.

As described above, when executing the rotation start control of the reel 31, the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) is checked. data is not checked.
For example, the data of the input port to which the setting key switch 152 signal is input is not checked, the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the setting key switch 152 signal is input is not checked, and the setting key switch 152 is not checked. Among the data of the input port to which the signal of 152 is input, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked, and the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input. Among them, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 may not be checked.

Therefore, the signal from the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal from the setting key switch 152 is on) after the number of bets that can be executed for the game (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) has been placed. In addition, when the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted in a situation where the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off), rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 can be executed. do.

Here, even if the bet switch 40 is released after operating the bet switch 40, there is a possibility that the operation of the bet switch 40 will continue to be accepted due to deterioration of the bet switch 40.
While the operation of the bet switch 40 is still being accepted, in this embodiment, even if the start switch 41 is operated, the rotation start control of the reels 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.

Similarly, even if the start switch 41 is operated when the stop switch 42 (left, middle, right) or the payment switch 43 has deteriorated and these operations are still being accepted, the start switch 41 will not be activated. Rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation is not executed.
Thereby, even if the player operates the start switch 41, the reels 31 do not rotate, so the player can recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10. When the player informs the hall clerk of this fact, the hall clerk can also recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10.
Note that even if the operation of the bet switch 40, (left, center, right) stop switch 42, or settlement switch 43 is still accepted, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub control board 80 will issue an error notification. will not be carried out. This is because if an error notification is made in such a case, there is a risk that the player will feel troubled.

Furthermore, it is normally unthinkable that the setting key switch 152 turns on (the signal of the setting key switch 152 turns on) during the game, and even if the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 turns on). 152 signal is on), it is likely to be noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) when the number of bets that can be executed for the game (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) is bet. If the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted in a situation where the front door 12 is closed (door switch 17 is off) and the front door 12 is closed (door switch 17 is off), the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is performed. be executable.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted due to noise.

On the other hand, in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, external signal 4 for notifying an error etc. By outputting the format shown in FIG. 33)), it is possible to notify the hall computer, etc. Therefore, a hall clerk or the like can understand that some kind of error has occurred in the slot machine 10 that outputs the predetermined external signal.
Note that in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal that can specify that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on (for example, external signal It may be configured to output external signals (other than external signals 1 to 5)).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the main control board 50, in step S1435 of the reel stop reception check in FIG. It is determined whether or not any of the data matches (matching data exists).
When it is determined that the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) and "00000100 (B)" stored at the beginning (first line) of the stop switch determination table match, the It is determined that the operation of the 3 (right) stop switch 42 has been accepted, and the process advances to step S1436.

Also, when it is determined that the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) and "00000010 (B)" stored in the second row of the stop switch determination table match, the second (intermediate) ) It is determined that the operation of the stop switch 42 has been accepted, and the process advances to step S1436.
Furthermore, when it is determined that the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) and "00000001(B)" stored in the third row of the stop switch determination table match, the first (left ) It is determined that the operation of the stop switch 42 has been accepted, and the process advances to step S1436.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the data does not match any of the data stored in the stop switch determination table (there is no matching data), the process returns to step S1431.
As a result, when the plurality of reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, when the operation of the ## stop switch 42 is accepted, the operation of the ## stop switch 42 is The stop control of the #th reel 31 based on this is not executed.

In addition, as described above, when executing the stop control of the # reel 31, the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) is checked, but the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is Port data is not checked.
For example, the data of the input port to which the setting key switch 152 signal is input is not checked, the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the setting key switch 152 signal is input is not checked, and the setting key switch 152 is not checked. Among the data of the input port to which the signal of 152 is input, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked, and the level data of the RWM 53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input. Among them, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 may not be checked.

Therefore, the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on), and the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off). ), if the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is accepted, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 can be executed.

Here, even if the start switch 41 is released after the start switch 41 is operated, there is a possibility that the operation of the start switch 41 will continue to be accepted due to deterioration of the start switch 41.
Then, while the operation of the start switch 41 is still being accepted, in this embodiment, even if the #stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #stop switch 42 is executed. do not.

Similarly, even though the bet switch 40 is released after operating the bet switch 40 (1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b), the operation of the bet switch 40 continues to be accepted due to deterioration of the bet switch 40. or when the operation of the settlement switch 43 continues to be accepted due to deterioration of the settlement switch 43 even though the settlement switch 43 is released after operating the settlement switch 43. Also, even if the #th stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 is not executed.

Thereby, even if the player operates the ##th stop switch 42, the ##th reel 31 does not stop, so that the player can recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10. When the player informs the hall clerk of this fact, the hall clerk can also recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10.
Note that even if the operations of the bet switch 40, start switch 41, and settlement switch 43 are still accepted, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 issues an error notification. This is because if an error notification is made in such a case, there is a risk that the player will feel troubled.

Furthermore, it is normally unthinkable that the setting key switch 152 is turned on (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) during the game. 152 signal is on), it is likely to be noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed, the signal from the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal from the setting key switch 152 is on), and the front door 12 is closed ( When the operation of the ##th stop switch 42 is accepted under the condition (the door switch 17 is off), the ##th reel 31 can be stopped based on the operation of the ##th stop switch 42.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted due to noise.

On the other hand, in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, external signal 4 for notifying an error etc. By outputting the format shown in FIG. 33)), it is possible to notify the hall computer, etc. Therefore, a hall clerk or the like can understand that some kind of error has occurred in the slot machine 10 that outputs the predetermined external signal.
Note that in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal that can specify that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on (for example, external signal It may be configured to output external signals (other than external signals 1 to 5)).

Although the 34th embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned content, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
(1) In the above embodiment, when the plurality of reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, when the operation of the ##th stop switch 42 is accepted, It is assumed that the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 is not executed.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the operation of the ## stop switch 42 is accepted under a situation where the plurality of reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, Stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #stop switch 42 may be made executable.

As a result, for example, even though the left stop switch 42 was operated first and the middle stop switch 42 was operated second, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, due to deterioration of the start switch 41, etc., the start switch 41 continues to be accepted, it is possible to prevent it from being determined that the middle stop switch 42 has been operated first.

In particular, in an AT machine, if it is determined that the middle stop switch 42 was operated first even though the left stop switch 42 was operated first, there will be a mistake in the order of presses, which will put the player at a disadvantage. However, even if the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, by making it possible to execute the stop control of the ##th reel 31 based on the operation of the ##th stop switch 42, it is possible to prevent a situation where the push order is incorrect during AT. Occurrence can be prevented.

Note that, as in this modification, even if it is possible to execute the stop control of the ##th reel 31 based on the operation of the ## stop switch 42 in a situation where the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the setting key Regardless of whether the signal of the switch 152 is on or off, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 may be made executable. Further, when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #th stop switch 42 may not be executed.

(2) In the embodiment described above, when operations of a plurality of stop switches 42 are accepted, stop control of the reels 31 is not executed.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation of the first stop switch 42 is accepted, and then, under the situation where the operation of the first stop switch 42 is still accepted, the operation of the second stop switch 42 is In addition to making it possible to accept the request, based on the operation of the second stop switch 42, the stop control of the corresponding reel 31 may be made executable.

As a result, for example, even though the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 have been operated in this order, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated, due to deterioration of the stop switch 42, etc., the left stop switch 42 continues to be accepted, it is possible to prevent it from being determined that the right stop switch 42 has been operated second.

In particular, in an AT machine, when the stop operation is performed in the order of the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, and right stop switch 42, even though the middle stop switch 42 is operated second, the right If it is determined that the stop switches 42 have been operated, the order of presses will be incorrect and the player will be disadvantaged. By making it possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42 and to execute the stop control of the corresponding reel 31 based on the operation of the other stop switch 42, it is possible to prevent mistakes in the pressing order during AT. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.

Note that, as in this modification, even if the stop control of the reels 31 based on the operation of the second stop switch 42 is made executable under a situation where the operation of the first stop switch 42 is still being accepted, The stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 may be made executable regardless of whether the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on or off. Further, when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, the stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 may not be executed.

(3) In the above embodiment, when stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32 (stepping motor), first a two-phase excitation output is performed, a weak brake is applied, and then a two-phase excitation output is output to a four-phase excitation output. , and apply stronger brakes, but this is not limited to this.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, for example, one-phase excitation output, two-phase excitation output, three-phase excitation output, or four-phase excitation output may be performed. Good too.
(4) The first to thirty-fourth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to thirty-fourth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<35th embodiment>
The 35th embodiment stores information for determining which stop switch 42 can perform stop control of the reel 31 when operations of a plurality of stop switches 42 are accepted simultaneously. A stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) (Fig. 259) is provided.

In a situation where the plurality of reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, the operation of the first (any one) stop switch 42 and the operation of the second (one other different from the first) stop switch 42 are performed. If the operation is accepted at the same time, stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the first stop switch 42 can be executed based on the information acquired using the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN).

Further, the reel 31 corresponding to the first (any one) stop switch 42 stops, and the reel 31 corresponding to the second (one other different from the first) stop switch 42 rotates at a constant speed. In a situation where the operation of the first stop switch 42 and the operation of the second stop switch 42 are accepted at the same time, based on the information acquired using the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN), Stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the second stop switch 42 can be executed.

The symbol arrangement of the reels 31, the active line, the type of winning combination, the symbol combination of the winning combination, the number of payout pieces, the condition device, the winning combination, RT, and the main game state are the same as in the twenty-third embodiment.
The 35th embodiment also includes a reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at the address "F0AD(H)" of the RWM 53, similar to the 25th embodiment shown in FIG. 173.
The reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is a storage area that stores data indicating whether or not the operation (stop operation) of the stop switch 42 corresponding to each reel 31 has been accepted.
The contents of each bit are the same as in FIG. 173 of the 25th embodiment.

Each time a game is started, an initial value "00000111 (B)" is set in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP).
When the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 is accepted, the D0 bit of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is set to "0". Similarly, when the operation of the second (middle) stop switch 42 is accepted, the D1 bit is set to "0", and when the operation of the third (right) stop switch 42 is accepted, the D2 bit is set to "0". Set.

FIG. 259 is a diagram showing the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN).
The data stored in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) indicates which stop switch 42 can perform stop control of the reel 31 when operations of multiple stop switches 42 are accepted at the same time. It is used when making decisions.
In addition, in FIG. 259, “00000001 (B)” is data indicating that the stop control of the first (left) reel 31 is executed, and “00000010 (B)” is data that indicates that the stop control of the first (left) reel 31 is executed. This is data indicating that stop control is to be executed, and “00000100 (B)” is data indicating that stop control of the third (right) reel 31 is to be executed.

Next, control processing in the thirty-fifth embodiment will be explained using a flowchart.
FIG. 260 is a flowchart showing a reel stop reception check in the 35th embodiment. In the 35th embodiment, instead of the reel stop acceptance check in step S752 in FIG. 139, the reel stop acceptance check in step S1460 in FIG. 260 is executed.
In step S1461, the main control board 50 acquires the data stored in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at address "F0AD(H)" in FIG. 173, and stores it in the B register. Then, the process advances to the next step S1462.

Proceeding to step S1462, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the rotating reel 31 has been accepted.
Specifically, first, the data stored in the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) at address "F017(H)" in FIG. 133 is stored in the A register.
Next, a logical product (AND) operation is performed on the A register value and the B register value, and the result is stored in the A register. That is, an AND operation is performed on the data stored in the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) and the data stored in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP), and the result is stored in the A register.

If the result of the above logical AND operation is not "0" (the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the rotating reel 31 has been accepted, and "Yes" is determined in step S1462. Therefore, the process advances to the next step S1463.
On the other hand, when the result of the above logical product operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the rotating reel 31 is not accepted, and the step The result in S1462 is "No", and the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Proceeding to step S1463, the main control board 50 sets the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN). Specifically, "1100(H)" (reference address), which is obtained by subtracting "1" from the start address "1101(H)" of the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN), is set in the HL register. Then, the process advances to the next step S1464.

Proceeding to step S1464, the main control board 50 sets designated address data. Here, the HL register value ("1100 (H)") at the time of proceeding to step S1464 is set as the reference address, and the A register value is set as the offset value. Further, the address obtained by adding the offset value to the reference address is set as the designated address. In step S1464, first, the A register value (offset value) is added to the HL register value (reference address), and the result (designated address) is stored in the HL register. Next, the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (designated address) is acquired and stored in the A register. The A register value at this time indicates the reel 31 that performs stop control. Then, the process advances to the next step S1465.

Proceeding to step S1465, the main control board 50 executes processing when accepting a stop. Here, the A register value at the time of proceeding to step S1465 indicates the reel 31 that is subject to stop control. Then, in step S1465, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined for the reel 31 indicated by the A register value based on the winning combination result and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the corresponding stop switch 42 is accepted. , the symbol number corresponding to the determined stop position is stored in the reel symbol number (for stop position). Then, the process advances to the next step S1466. Furthermore, the stopped symbol data for determining the symbol combination to be stopped on the active line is updated.

More specifically, in the process at the time of accepting the stop in step S1465 of FIG. 260, the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the twenty-fifth embodiment is executed. That is, for the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 determined to be on in step S1462, the winning combination result of the current game and the operation of the stop switch 42 are accepted by the processing corresponding to steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. 194. The stopping position of the reel 31 is determined based on the instantaneous position of the reel 31, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stopping position is stored in the reel symbol number (for stopping position). Furthermore, by processing corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. 194, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) for determining the symbol combination that stops on the active line is updated.

Note that the reel symbol number (for the passing position) and the reel symbol number (for the stop position) are set by the interrupt processing executed after the process of step S1465 (the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the 25th embodiment). When it is determined that the values have become the same, four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 is started.
When the reel symbol number (for passing position) and reel symbol number (for stopping position) become the same value, and the step number of one symbol on reel 13 reaches a predetermined value (for example, "3") , a four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 may be started.
Proceeding to step S1466, the main control board 50 updates the reel stop flag. Specifically, the bit of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) corresponding to the reel 31 indicated by the A register value is updated (rewritten) to "0". Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Here, it is assumed that all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and all the stop switches 42 can be operated. At this time, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000111 (B)".
Under such a situation, it is assumed that the operations of the first (left) stop switch 42 and the second (middle) stop switch 42 are accepted at the same time.

Here, both the D0 bit and the D1 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (Fig. 133) at the time of the previous interrupt processing are "0", and the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) at the time of the current interrupt processing When both the D0 bit and the D1 bit of the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) are "1", "1" is stored in both the D0 bit and the D1 bit of the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP). Thereby, it is determined that the two operations of the first stop switch 42 and the second stop switch 42 are accepted at the same time.
In this case, input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "00000011 (B)", so in step S1462, the A register value (input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) )), the result is "00000011(B)".

Furthermore, when this "00000011(B)" is added to the reference address ("1100(H)") as an offset value, the result (designated address) becomes "1103(H)".
The data corresponding to address "1103(H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000001(B)" as shown in FIG. 259. As described above, this "00000001 (B)" is data indicating that the stop control of the first (left) reel 31 is to be executed, so when the process proceeds to step S1465, the stop control of the first reel 31 is executed. be done.

In this way, when the operations of the first stop switch 42 and the second stop switch 42 are accepted at the same time in a situation where all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is used. Based on the acquired information, stop control of the first reel 31 corresponding to the first stop switch 42 is executed.

Also, the first reel (left reel 31) stops, the second (middle) reel 31 and the third (right) reel 31 rotate at a constant speed, and the second (middle) stop switch 42 and the third (right) reel 31 rotate at a constant speed. Assume that the stop switch 42 is in a state in which operation can be accepted. At this time, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000110 (B)".

Assume that under such a situation, the operations of the first stop switch 42 and the second stop switch 42 are accepted at the same time. In this case, input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is "00000011 (B)", so in step S1462, the A register value (input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) )), the result is "00000010(B)".
Furthermore, when this "00000010(B)" is added to the reference address ("1100(H)") as an offset value, the result (designated address) becomes "1102(H)".

The data corresponding to address "1102(H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000010(B)" as shown in FIG. 259. As described above, this "00000010(B)" is data indicating that the stop control of the second reel 31 is to be executed, so when the process proceeds to step S1465, the stop control of the second reel 31 is executed.
In this way, in a situation where the first reel 31 is stopped and the second reel 31 and the third reel 31 are rotating at a constant speed, the operations of the first stop switch 42 and the second stop switch 42 are not accepted at the same time. When this happens, stop control of the second reel 31 corresponding to the second stop switch 42 is executed based on the information acquired using the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN).

Further, it is assumed that the operations of the first stop switch 42 and the third stop switch 42 are simultaneously accepted in a state where all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and operations of all the stop switches 42 can be accepted.
In this case, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000111 (B)" and the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is "00000101 (B)", so in step S1462, the A register value (input port When the rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) are logically ANDed, the result becomes "00000101 (B)".

Furthermore, when this "00000101(B)" is added to the reference address ("1100(H)") as an offset value, the result (designated address) becomes "1105(H)".
The data corresponding to the address "1105 (H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000001 (B)" as shown in FIG. 259, and the stop control of the first reel 31 is executed. Since the data indicates this, when the process advances to step S1465, stop control of the first reel 31 is executed.

It is also assumed that the operations of the second stop switch 42 and the third stop switch 42 are simultaneously accepted in a state where all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and operations of all the stop switches 42 can be accepted.
In this case, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000111 (B)" and the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is "00000110 (B)", so in step S1462, the A register value (input port When the rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) are logically ANDed, the result becomes "00000110 (B)".

Furthermore, when this "00000110(B)" is added to the reference address ("1100(H)") as an offset value, the result (designated address) becomes "1106(H)".
The data corresponding to the address "1106 (H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000010 (B)" as shown in FIG. 259, and the stop control of the second reel 31 is executed. Since the data indicates this, when the process advances to step S1465, the stop control of the second reel 31 is executed.

Further, it is assumed that all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and the operations of all the stop switches 42 are accepted at the same time in a state where the operations of all the stop switches 42 can be accepted.
In this case, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000111 (B)" and the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is also "00000111 (B)", so in step S1462, the A register value (input port When the rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) are logically ANDed, the result becomes "00000111 (B)".

Furthermore, when this "00000111(B)" is added as an offset value to the reference address ("1100(H)"), the result (designated address) becomes "1107(H)".
The data corresponding to the address "1107 (H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000001 (B)" as shown in FIG. 259, and the stop control of the first reel 31 is executed. Since the data indicates this, when the process advances to step S1465, stop control of the first reel 31 is executed.

Further, the first reel stops, the second reel 31 and the third reel 31 rotate at a constant speed, and the first stop switch 42 is in a state where the second stop switch 42 and the third stop switch 42 can be operated. It is assumed that the operations of the third stop switch 42 and the third stop switch 42 are accepted at the same time.
In this case, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000110 (B)" and the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is "00000101 (B)", so in step S1462, the A register value (input port When the rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) are logically ANDed, the result becomes "00000100 (B)".

Furthermore, when this "00000100(B)" is added to the reference address ("1100(H)") as an offset value, the result (designated address) becomes "1104(H)".
The data corresponding to the address "1104 (H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000100 (B)" as shown in FIG. 259, and the stop control of the third reel 31 is executed. Since the data indicates this, when the process advances to step S1465, the stop control of the third reel 31 is executed.

Further, the first reel stops, the second reel 31 and the third reel 31 rotate at a constant speed, and when the second stop switch 42 and the third stop switch 42 can be operated, the second stop switch 42 It is assumed that the operations of the third stop switch 42 and the third stop switch 42 are accepted at the same time.
In this case, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000110 (B)" and the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is also "00000110 (B)", so in step S1462, the A register value (input port When the rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) are logically ANDed, the result becomes "00000110 (B)".

Furthermore, when this "00000110(B)" is added to the reference address ("1100(H)") as an offset value, the result (designated address) becomes "1106(H)".
The data corresponding to the address "1106 (H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000010 (B)" as shown in FIG. 259, and the stop control of the second reel 31 is executed. Since the data indicates this, when the process advances to step S1465, the stop control of the second reel 31 is executed.

Here, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000000(B)", "00000001(B)", "00000010(B)", "00000100(B)", "00000011(B)", "00000101(B)". ),” “00000110(B),” and “00000111(B).”
In addition, the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is also found to be ``00000000(B)'', ``00000001(B)'', ``00000010(B)'', and ``00000100(B)'' when focusing only on the signals of the three stop switches 42. )", "00000011(B)", "00000101(B)", "00000110(B)", and "00000111(B)".

Therefore, the results of ANDing the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) and the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) are also "00000000 (B)," "00000001 (B)," and "00000010 (B)." , "00000100(B)", "00000011(B)", "00000101(B)", "00000110(B)", and "00000111(B)".

If the result of the above logical AND operation is "00000000 (B)", the result in step S1462 is "No" and the process does not proceed from step S1463 onwards, so the reference address ("1100 (H)") is The offset value to be added is one of "1(D)" to "7(D)".
Therefore, no matter what the driving state of each reel 31 is, and no matter what combination of multiple stop switches 42 are operated simultaneously, based on the information acquired using the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN), Stop control of any one reel 31 can be appropriately executed.

<36th embodiment>
In the 36th embodiment, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first (any one) reel 31 is operated at the first timing, and then, before the first reel 31 stops, the stop switch 42 is operated at the second timing. When the stop switch 42 corresponding to the second (different from the first) reel 31 is operated, the first reel 31 may stop after the second reel 31 stops. .

Furthermore, the symbol arrangement of the reels 31, the active line, the type of winning combination, the symbol combination of the winning combination, the number of payouts, the condition device, the winning combination, RT, and the main game state are the same as in the twenty-third embodiment.
Then, as a result of the first reel 31 stopping after the second reel 31 has stopped, the symbols constituting a specific symbol combination (for example, "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR") are aligned in a straight line. When the first reel 31 is stopped and displayed, a predetermined effect (for example, tenpai sound) can be outputted according to the timing at which the first reel 31 stops.

261 to 263 are schematic diagrams showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop switch 42, the stop order of the reels 31, the stop display of symbols, and the output of the tenpai sound in the 36th embodiment.
In the present embodiment, after the operation of any one of the stop switches 42 is accepted, before a predetermined period for outputting four-phase excitation to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 has elapsed (for example, four-phase excitation At the timing when the output is being performed or the timing before the 4-phase excitation output is performed, the operation of the other stop switch 42 is accepted and the 4-phase excitation output is sent to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the other stop switch 42. Configured to be executable.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the order in which the stop switches 42 are operated and the order in which the reels 31 are stopped may be reversed.

For example, if the winning number "25" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the 1BB condition device corresponding to the winning number "25" is activated, and the winning number "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" corresponding to 1BB is activated. In a game where symbol combinations can be stopped and displayed on the active line, as shown in FIGS. 261(a) to 261(c), when the three reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, the left stop switch 42, It is assumed that these are quickly operated in the order of the middle stop switch 42. It is also assumed that the operation of the left stop switch 42 is first accepted, and then, before the left reel 31 stops, the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted. At this time, the number of moving symbols (number of sliding frames) from when the operation of the left stop switch 42 is accepted until the left reel 31 stops is set to "4", and from when the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted until the left reel 31 stops is set to "4". It is assumed that the number of symbols to be moved until the reels 31 stop is set to "0". In such a case, the middle reel 31 may stop first, and then the left reel 31 may stop.

Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 stops first, "Blue BAR" is stopped and displayed in the middle row as shown in FIG. 261(b), and then when the left reel 31 stops, as shown in FIG. 261(c). Assume that "Blue BAR" is displayed in the upper row as shown in FIG. In other words, it is assumed that the symbols constituting the symbol combination "Blue BAR"-"Blue BAR"-"Blue BAR" are stopped and displayed on a straight, downward-sloping active line.

Here, when two reels 31 are stopped and the remaining one reel 31 is rotating, the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination are stopped and displayed on the active line, and the remaining one reel 31 When the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination stops and the symbols forming the symbol combination corresponding to that winning combination are stopped and displayed on the active line, the situation in which the symbol combination corresponding to that winning combination stops being displayed is called "Tenpai". . That is, when the two reels 31 are stopped, a part of the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, which is called tenpai.
In addition, when there are four reels 31, when the three reels 31 stop, part of the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, which is called tenpai. That is, when there are N reels 31, when N-1 reels 31 stop, part of the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, which is called tenpai.

As shown in FIG. 261(c), as a result of the left reel 31 stopping after the middle reel 31 has stopped, the symbols constituting the symbol combination "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" are on the right. When it is stopped and displayed on a falling active line, the timing when the left reel 31 stops, not the timing when the middle reel 31 stops, is determined based on the timing when the left reel 31 stops. Outputs a tenpai sound, which is a unique sound effect during tenpai. That is, the tenpai sound is output based on the order in which the reels 31 are stopped, not on the order in which the stop switches 42 are operated.

For example, if the winning number "25" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the 1BB condition device corresponding to the winning number "25" is activated, and the winning number "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" corresponding to 1BB is activated. In a game where symbol combinations can be stopped and displayed on the active line, it is assumed that "Blue BAR" is set to be stopped and displayed on the upper row of the left reel 31 only when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time. .
In this case, when the left reel 31 first stops and "Blue BAR" is stopped and displayed on the upper row of the left reel 31, the player can select "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR". It can be recognized that the condition device corresponding to the symbol combination is activated.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the left reel 31 stops for the first time, if "Blue BAR" is stopped and displayed on the upper row of the left reel 31, "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" A confirming performance (for example, a performance that outputs a sound such as "Ichikakuu~" or "Congratulations") indicating that the conditional device corresponding to the symbol combination is activated is executed.
However, in a game where the condition device corresponding to the symbol combination "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" is activated, the left stop switch 42 , If the middle reel 31 and the left reel 31 are stopped in that order even though the middle stop switch 42 is operated in that order, even if "Blue BAR" is stopped and displayed on the upper row of the left reel 31, the confirmed effect will not be played. Not executed.

Further, in this embodiment, when symbols constituting a specific symbol combination are stopped and displayed on a linear invalid line, a sound effect similar to that when tenpai is output is output.
For example, in a game where the winning number "2" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the replay B condition device corresponding to the winning number "2" is activated, and either replay 01 or 02 can win, as shown in FIG. As shown in (a) to (c), when the three reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, it is assumed that the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 are quickly operated in this order. Then, the left stop switch 42 was operated at the first timing (the number of moving symbols on the left reel 31 was set to "4"), and the middle stop switch 42 was operated at the second timing (the number of moving symbols on the left reel 31 was set to "4"). The number of symbols is set to "1").

Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 stops first, as shown in FIG. 262(b), "Replay" is stopped and displayed in the middle row, "Blue BAR" is stopped and displayed in the lower row, and then the left reel Assume that when 31 stops, "Replay" is stopped and displayed in the upper row and "Blue BAR" is stopped and displayed in the lower row, as shown in FIG. 262(c). That is, assume that the symbols constituting the symbol combination "Blue BAR"-"Blue BAR"-"Blue BAR" are stopped and displayed on the linear invalid line at the bottom. In such a case, a sound effect similar to that at the time of tenpai is output not in accordance with the timing in which the middle reel 31 stops, but in accordance with the timing in which the left reel 31 stops.

For example, in a game where the winning number "2" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the Replay B condition device corresponding to the winning number "2" is activated, and either Replay 01 or 02 can win, FIG. As shown in (a) to (d), when the three reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, and right stop switch 42 are quickly operated in this order. Suppose that Then, the left stop switch 42 is operated at the first timing (the number of moving symbols on the left reel 31 is set to "4"), and the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the second timing (the number of moving symbols on the middle reel 31 is set to "4"). It is assumed that the right stop switch 42 is operated at the third timing (the number of moving symbols on the right reel 31 is set to "0"). In such a case, the middle reel 31 may stop first, the right reel 31 may stop second, and the left reel 31 may stop last.

Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 stops for the first time, "Replay" is stopped and displayed in the middle row, "Blue BAR" is stopped and displayed in the lower row, and the second right When the reels 31 stop, as shown in FIG. 263(c), "Replay" is stopped and displayed in the lower row, "Blue BAR" is stopped and displayed in the middle row, and finally, when the left reel 31 stops, As shown in FIG. 263(d), it is assumed that "Replay" is stopped and displayed in the upper row and "Blue BAR" is stopped and displayed in the lower row.

In the example shown in FIGS. 263(a) to 263(d), "Blue BAR" is stopped and displayed in the lower row of the left reel 31 and the lower row of the middle reel 31, so if the operation order of the stop switch 42 is the same as that of the left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31 in this order, when the middle reel 31 stops, the same sound effect as when tenpai is output is output.
However, unlike the operating order of the stop switch 42, when the reels 31 stop in the order of middle reel 31, right reel 31, and left reel 31, when the right reel 31 stops second, the "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" ” - Since the symbols constituting the symbol combination of “Blue BAR” are not stopped and displayed on the straight invalid line, the same sound effect as when tenpai is not output.

FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the 36th embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 in the 23rd embodiment.
In the flowchart of the 36th embodiment shown in FIG. 264, steps that are different from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 139 are given the same step numbers.

Also, in the main processing (M_MAIN) of the 36th embodiment, the processing from step S295 to step S300 in FIG. 139 is executed, but the illustration of the processing from step S295 to step S300 is omitted in FIG. 264.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly explained.

As shown in FIG. 264, in the thirty-sixth embodiment, after the start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) in step S751 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1441.
Proceeding to step S1441, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a stop request has been received. That is, it is determined whether the operation of any one of the first to third stop switches 42 to 42 has been accepted.

Specifically, the main control board 50 inputs the D0 bit (left stop switch signal), D1 bit (middle stop switch signal), and D2 of the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) at address "F017 (H)" in FIG. Determine whether any of the bits (right stop switch signal) are on. Here, if it is determined that the operation of any of the stop switches 42 has been accepted, the process advances to the next step S1442. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation of any stop switch 42 has not been accepted, steps S1442 and S1443 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1444.

Proceeding to step S1442, the main control board 50 executes processing when accepting a stop. In this process, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the winning combination result and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stop position is set on the reel. Set the symbol number (for stop position) (Figures 135 to 137). Furthermore, the stopped symbol data for determining the symbol combination to be stopped on the active line is updated.

More specifically, in the process at the time of accepting the stop in step S1442 of FIG. 264, the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the twenty-fifth embodiment is executed. That is, for the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 determined to be on in step S1441, the winning combination result of the current game and the operation of the stop switch 42 are accepted by the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. 194. The stopping position of the reel 31 is determined based on the instantaneous position of the reel 31, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stopping position is stored in the reel symbol number (for stopping position). Furthermore, by processing corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. 194, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) for determining the symbol combination that stops on the active line is updated.

Note that the reel symbol number (for the passing position) and the reel symbol number (for the stop position) become the same value due to the interrupt processing executed after the process of step S1442 (the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194). When it is determined that the motor 32 of the reel 31 is stopped, a four-phase excitation output is started to stop the motor 32 of the reel 31.
Also, when the reel symbol number (for passing position) and the reel symbol number (for stopping position) become the same value, and the step number of one symbol on reel 13 becomes a predetermined value (for example, "3") At times, four-phase excitation output may be started to stop the motor 32 of the reel 31.

After executing the stop acceptance process in step S1442, the process proceeds to step S1443, where the main control board 50 sets a stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the stop switch 42 has been accepted in the command buffer.
Here, the stop acceptance command may include, for example, information indicating which stop switch 42's operation was accepted, and information indicating the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42's operation was accepted. , information indicating which stop switch 42 has been operated, and information from which the stop position of the reel 31 at which the stop switch 42 has been operated can be determined.
Note that the stop acceptance command set in the command buffer is transmitted to the sub control board 80 by the interrupt process executed after the process in step S1442.

After executing the stop acceptance command set process in step S1443, the process proceeds to step S1444, where the main control board 50 determines whether the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 has been started. . Here, when it is determined that four-phase excitation output has started for the motor 32 of any reel 31, the process advances to the next step S1445. On the other hand, when it is determined that the four-phase excitation output has not been started for the motor 32 of any reel 31, step S1445 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1446.

Proceeding to step S1445, the main control board 50 sets a stop command in the command buffer indicating that four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 has been started.
Here, the stop command includes information indicating which motor 32 of which reel 31 has started four-phase excitation output.
Note that the stop command set in the command buffer is transmitted to the sub control board 80 by the interrupt process executed after the process in step S1445.

Proceeding to step S1446, the main control board 50 determines whether all reels 31 have stopped.
If it is determined in step S1446 that at least one reel 31 is not stopped, the process returns to step S1441. In this case, the processing from step S1441 onwards is repeated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1446 that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to display determination in step S291.

Here, when a winning number is drawn by the winning combination lottery means 61 and a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated, the main control board 50 sends a condition device command corresponding to the activated condition device to the sub control board 80. Send to. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 can determine which conditional device is activated.
In the example shown in FIGS. 261(a) to 261(c), a stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the left stop switch 42 has been accepted is first transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. , Next, a stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the middle stop switch 42 has been accepted is transmitted, then a stop command indicating that the middle reel 31 is to be stopped is transmitted, and finally, the left reel 31 is stopped. A stop command is sent indicating that the

Furthermore, upon receiving the stop acceptance command from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 can determine which reel 31 should stop at which position based on the condition device command and the stop acceptance command. . As a result, it is determined, for example, that the "Blue BAR" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper row, or that the symbols constituting the symbol combination "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" are tenpai. can do.

Furthermore, upon receiving a stop command from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 can determine the order and timing of stopping each reel 31.
Then, the sub-control board 80 outputs a tenpai sound based on the stop position of each reel 31 determined from the condition device command and the stop acceptance command, and the stop order and stop timing of each reel 31 determined from the stop command. , it is possible to output the same sound effects as during tenpai.

In the example shown in FIGS. 261(a) to (c), the sub-control board 80 determines the stop timing of the left reel 31 based on a stop command indicating that the left reel 31 is to be stopped, and Outputs tenpai sound at the stop timing.
Thereby, even if the order of operation of the stop switch 42 and the order of stopping the reels 31 are different, the tenpai sound or the same sound effect as the tenpai can be output at an appropriate timing that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

In the example shown in FIGS. 263(a) to 263(c), a stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the left stop switch 42 has been accepted is first transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. Next, a stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the middle stop switch 42 has been accepted is transmitted, and then a stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the right stop switch 42 has been accepted is transmitted. Next, a stop command indicating that the middle reel 31 stops is sent, then a stop command indicating that the right reel 31 stops, and finally a stop command indicating that the left reel 31 stops. is sent.

Furthermore, the sub-control board 80 determines that the "Blue BAR" of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle row based on the stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the right stop switch 42 has been accepted, and then Based on the stop command indicating that the reels 31 will stop, it is determined that the right reel 31 will stop second.
Then, when the right reel 31 stops, the sub control board 80 determines that two "blue BARs" are not aligned in a straight invalid line, and does not output the same sound effect as when tenpai. I can do it.

Here, in the example shown in FIGS. 263(a) to 263(d), "Blue BAR" is stopped and displayed on the lower row of the left reel 31 and the lower row of the middle reel 31.
Therefore, if the reels 31 stop in the same order as the operation order of the stop switch 42, that is, the left reel 31, the middle reel 31, and the right reel 31, the "Blue BAR" will be displayed in the lower row when the middle reel 31 stops. It will be stopped and displayed on a straight invalid line.
However, in the examples shown in FIGS. 263(a) to 263(d), the middle reel 31 first stops, so if a sound effect similar to that for tenpai is output at this point, it will give the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 263(a) to (d), the second reel to stop is the right reel 31, and at this point it is confirmed that the two "blue BARs" are not aligned in a straight invalid line. Therefore, if the same sound effect as when playing tenpai is output, it will give the player a sense of discomfort.
In this embodiment, the sub-control board 80 determines that the reels 31 are to be stopped in the order of the middle reel 31, the right reel 31, and the left reel 31 based on the stop command for each reel 31, and the middle reel 31 is stopped first. Even when the right reel 31 stops, it determines that the two "blue BARs" are not aligned in a straight invalid line, and does not output the same sound effect as when tenpai. , it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, in the slot machine 10 where the main control board 50 controls and manages the AT, the main control board 50 sends winning numbers and condition device commands to the sub control board 80. Send the production group number without sending it.
In this case, the stop position of the reel 31 cannot be determined from the production group number and the information indicating the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted.

Therefore, in the slot machine 10 where the AT is controlled and managed on the main control board 50 side, the main control board 50 sends the sub control board 80 information indicating which stop switch 42 has been operated, and the stop switch 42. A stop acceptance command including information that allows determining the stop position of the reel 31 whose operation of the switch 42 has been accepted is transmitted.
Then, the sub-control board 80 can determine which reel 31 should stop at which position based on information included in the received stop acceptance command and which can determine the stopping position of the reel 31. As a result, it is determined, for example, that the "Blue BAR" on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the upper row, or that the symbols forming the symbol combination "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" are tenpai. can do.

Although the thirty-sixth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
(1) In the above embodiment, the sub-control board 80 determines the stop order and stop timing of each reel 31 based on the stop command received from the main control board 50, and adjusts the ten-pai sound and the ten-pai time at an appropriate timing. A similar sound effect was output.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop position, stop order, and stop timing of each reel 31 may be determined based on the condition device command and stop acceptance command received from the main control board 50, for example. Then, based on the stop position, stop order, and stop timing of each reel 31 determined from the condition device command and the stop acceptance command, a tenpai sound or a sound effect similar to the tenpai time may be output.
In this case, the stop command for each reel 31 may not be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.

(2) In the above embodiment, when stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, a four-phase excitation output is performed to the motor 32 (stepping motor), but the present invention is not limited to this.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, for example, one-phase excitation output, two-phase excitation output, or three-phase excitation output may be performed. Also, first, a two-phase excitation output is performed to apply a weak brake, and then the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32 is stopped by switching from the two-phase excitation output to a four-phase excitation output and applying a strong brake. You may also do so.

(3) In the twenty-ninth to thirty-sixth embodiments, three reels 31 are provided, but the number of reels 31 is not limited to three, and may be, for example, four or more.
(4) In the twenty-ninth to thirty-sixth embodiments, the slot machine 10 is used as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention applies to parrots that use game balls as game media, enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines) that use electronic information (electronic medals) without using physical (tangible) medals, and casino machines. The invention can be applied.
(5) The first to thirty-sixth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to thirty-sixth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<37th embodiment>
Next, a thirty-seventh embodiment will be described.
The 37th embodiment is a slot machine designed to avoid winning of the special winning combination (1BB), which carries over winnings, depending on the order of the presses.
In the 37th embodiment, the meanings of "RT", "non-RT", "winning number", and "condition device number ("accessory condition device number" and "winning and replay condition device number") are the same as in the 23rd embodiment. It is similar to
In addition, similar to other embodiments, the operation of the instruction function and the suggestion of the push order can be executed only during the advantageous section, and the operation of the instruction function and the suggestion of the push order can be executed in the non-advantageous section (normal section). Unable to execute performance. Therefore, in the following, when the instruction function is activated and the push order suggestion effect is executed, it is assumed that the area is advantageous.
Furthermore, in the 37th embodiment, similarly to the 23rd embodiment, a 1BB game (1BB operating state) and an RB game (RB operating state) are provided as special games (accessories operating state). Strictly speaking, 1BB games (1BB operating state) and RB games (RB operating state) are not included in RT, but they may be one type of RT.
In addition, in the 37th embodiment and the embodiments described later, "when the accessory is not activated" includes a state where the accessory has been won but has not yet activated. For example, if you have not won 1BB, or if you have won 1BB and are in 1BB, but you are not playing 1BB, it is called "1BB inactive", and if you are playing 1BB, it is called "1BB inactive". "When in operation." The same applies to RB.

Furthermore, the RB in the 37th embodiment is a winning combination that is drawn during the general game of the 1BB game (meaning games other than the RB game in the 1BB game), and the RB is won during the general game of the 1BB game. , RB wins, the normal game shifts to the RB game during the 1BB game. For this reason, RB is also referred to as shift RB (SRB).
In the 37th embodiment, similarly to the 23rd embodiment, the lottery of winning numbers is performed by the winning combination lottery means 61. The winning numbers of the 37th embodiment include winning numbers "0" to "100"("0" corresponds to a non-winning (so-called loser)), as shown in FIGS. 286 and 287, which will be described later.
When the winning number is determined, a "conditional device number" corresponding to the winning number is generated. For example, in FIG. 286, when the winning number "4" is determined, the accessory condition device number "1" (FIG. 275) and the winning and replay condition device number "2" (FIG. 276) are generated.

FIG. 265 is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in the 37th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 265, in the 37th embodiment, each reel 31 consists of 20 frames. In addition, in FIG. 265, symbol numbers are also shown as in FIG. 114.
Further, in the 37th embodiment, the maximum number of symbols to be moved from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to "4".

Therefore, similarly to the twenty-third embodiment, if four specific symbols are arranged at intervals of five symbols on one reel 31, no matter where the stop switch 42 is operated, the specific symbols will always be placed on the active line. It becomes possible to stop. Specifically, on the left reel 31, “Replay” is placed at No. 5, No. 10, No. 15, and No. 0. That is, the "replay" on the left reel 31 is arranged with four symbols at intervals of five symbols. Therefore, for the left reel 31, no matter at what timing the left stop switch 42 is operated, the "replay" can always be stopped at the active line. Note that such a symbol arrangement may be referred to as a "PB=1" arrangement. On the other hand, a case where such a symbol arrangement is not used may be referred to as a "PB≠1" arrangement.

On the left reel 31, "Replay" and "Bell A" are each arranged in "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, "Replay", "Bell A", and "Bell B" are each arranged in "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Bell A", and "Bell B" are each arranged in "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, the 1st "Blank", the 6th "Black BAR", the 11th "Red 7", and the 16th "Cherry" are arranged in "PB = 1" with the total of these 4 symbols. be. Therefore, no matter at what timing the middle stop switch 42 is operated, any one of "Blank", "Black BAR", "Red 7", or "Cherry" can be stopped on the effective line. The same applies to the right reel 31.

Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, "Watermelon A" or "Watermelon B" is arranged in "PB=1" with the sum of these two symbols.
Further, on the right reel 31, "Blue BAR", "Watermelon A", or "Watermelon B" are arranged in "PB=1" in total of these three symbols.
Furthermore, the effective lines in the 37th embodiment are the same as in the 23rd embodiment shown in FIG. 115 (one line from "upper left row" to "middle middle row" to "lower right row"), so illustration is omitted.

FIGS. 266 to 273 are diagrams showing types of winning combinations (such as winning numbers corresponding to the winning numbers drawn by the winning lottery means 61), symbol combinations, number of coins to be paid out, etc. in the 37th embodiment.
First, as shown in FIG. 266, the gaming states of the 37th embodiment include when the accessory is not activated, when the RB (accessory) is not activated when 1BB is activated, and when the RB is activated. The prescribed number is set to "3" in both cases.
In FIGS. 266 to 274, "3 pieces (1)" corresponds to the time when the accessory is not activated, and particularly in the 37th embodiment, corresponds to games other than the 1BB game.

Moreover, "3 pieces (2)" corresponds to the time when RB is not activated while 1BB is in operation (during 1BB game). Furthermore, "3 pieces (3)" corresponds to when 1BB is in operation (during 1BB game) and RB is in operation (during RB game).
For example, in Figure 266, 1BB with the winning number "001" is eligible for lottery when the specified number is 3 (1) (when the accessory is not activated), but when the specified number is 3 (2) and the specified number is 3. (3) means that it is not eligible for lottery.

In FIG. 266, the winning numbers "001" to "003" correspond to special winning combinations (official objects). In this embodiment, one type of 1BB and two types of RB (RBA and RBB) are provided as special winnings.
If 1BB is won and 1BB is won when the accessory is not activated, no medals will be paid out in the current game, but the next game will shift to 1BB activation (1BB game) corresponding to a special game.
Further, during 1BB operation (1BB game), RB is drawn. If the RB wins and the RB wins during the 1BB operation, no medals will be paid out in the current game, but the next game will shift to the RB operation (RB game) during the 1BB operation (1BB game).

Note that the time when the 1BB is in operation and the RB is not in operation may be referred to as a "general game of the 1BB game." In the general game of the 1BB game, the state in which the RB is not won is sometimes referred to as 1BB in operation and RB not inside, and the state in which RB is won is sometimes referred to as 1BB in action and RB inside.
When the termination condition of the RB operation is satisfied, when the termination condition of the 1BB operation is satisfied, the 1BB operation is terminated and the game shifts to the time when the accessory is not activated (normal game). On the other hand, when the termination condition for RB operation is satisfied, but when the termination condition for 1BB operation is not satisfied, the process shifts to 1BB operation (and when RB is not activated).

The winning numbers "004" shown in FIG. 266 to the winning numbers "149" shown in FIG. 269 all correspond to replays (replayed winnings). In the 37th embodiment, replays 01 to 15 are provided as types of replays. As shown in Figures 266 to 269, when the accessory is not activated (3 pieces (1)) and when the RB is not activated when 1BB is activated (3 pieces (2)), replays 01 to 15 are all drawn. Targeted. On the other hand, when RB is activated (3 pieces (3)) when 1BB is activated, replay is not drawn.
Further, in both replays, the symbol combination is set to "PB=1". For example, the symbol combination of Replay 03 is "Cherry" - "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" - "Bell A", but "Cherry" on the left reel 31 and "Bell A" on the right reel 31 are This is a "PB=1" arrangement. Furthermore, “Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry” on the middle reel 31 has a “PB=1” arrangement with the sum of these four symbols.

FIGS. 270 to 273 show small winning combinations of the 37th embodiment. As the small winnings of the 37th embodiment, small winnings 001 to 118 are provided.
For minor winning combinations 001 to 008, the number of coins to be paid out at the time of winning is set to 7, which is the maximum number of coins to be paid out among the minor winning combinations. The small winning combinations 001 to 008 are the winning combinations that will be the higher bells when the so-called push order bells are won (described later).
In addition, the small winning combinations 009 to 117 have the number of coins to be paid out at the time of winning a prize set to one, and are so-called winnings such as low bells when the push order bell is won.
Furthermore, the small winning combination 118 is a special winning combination drawn only when 1BB is activated and when RB is activated, and the number of coins to be paid out at the time of winning is set to 1.

In each of the above-mentioned winnings, there are winnings that are carried over from the next game onwards and winnings that are not carried over, but these are the same as in the other embodiments described above. 1BB and RB are roles that can be carried over to the next game or later, and small roles and replays are roles that cannot be carried over to the next game or later.

FIG. 274 is a diagram showing pattern symbol combinations in the 37th embodiment. In the 37th embodiment, when the push order bell is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in an incorrect push order, the above-mentioned one-card winning combination will be won, and the winning combination will not be won (missing). has. If the winning combination is non-winning, one of the pattern symbol combinations shown in FIG. 274 is displayed. The pattern design combination is also referred to as a koboshime. Although details will be described later, the pattern symbol combination is set as one of the RT transition conditions.
In FIG. 274, the pattern symbol combinations are not the winning combinations themselves, but for convenience of explanation, winning numbers are also attached to the pattern symbol combinations as serial numbers in FIGS. 266 to 274.

275 to 285 are diagrams showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc.
First, the winning numbers are drawn in the winning combination lottery means 61. The winning numbers include winning numbers "0" to "100", as shown in FIGS. 286 and 287, which will be described later, for example. For example, if the winning number "4" in FIG. 286 is won, the condition device "1BB" corresponding to the accessory condition device number "1" (FIG. 275) and the winning and replay condition device number "2" ( The condition device "Replay B" corresponding to FIG. 276) becomes operational.

FIG. 275 shows the accessory (particularly 1BB and RB in the 37th embodiment) condition device.
The 1BB condition device corresponding to accessory condition device number "1" is a accessory condition device that becomes operable when 1BB is won. When this 1BB condition device is activated, it becomes possible to win the winning combination of 1BB.
In addition, the remarks column in FIG. 275 shows the operation end conditions of the accessory condition device. The 1BB condition device continues until the number of acquired medals exceeds 218, and when the number of acquired medals exceeds 218, the operation termination condition of the 1BB condition device is satisfied and the operation of the 1BB condition device is terminated.
Similarly, both the RBA condition device and the RBB condition device end based on 8 wins or 12 games, or the end of operation of the 1BB condition device.

Figures 276 to 285 show winning and replay condition devices. Among the winning and replay condition device numbers, “1” to “19” are condition device numbers related to replay, and “20” to “98” are condition device numbers related to small winnings.
For example, the winning combination of the replay A condition device corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number “1” includes replays 01 to 07 (seven types of replays). In this way, when one conditional device includes a plurality of winning combinations, when the conditional device is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to all the winning combinations may be stopped, or some (at least some) of the winning combinations may be stopped. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination (1) may be stoppable.
In this embodiment, even if multiple types of replays are won multiple times, only one of the replays wins a prize. Similarly, as will be described later, multiple types of small roles may be won repeatedly, but in this case, in this embodiment, there is no case where multiple small roles are won, and only one of the small roles wins. It becomes possible.

In the Replay A condition device to the Replay K condition device, the notes column also shows the relationship between the push order and the stop symbol combination (replay type). In the notes column, for example, "left 1st" means the first stop on the left.
In the 37th embodiment, replay wins in any order of pressing (left first stop, middle first stop, right first stop).
In addition, in the notes column for Replay A condition device to Replay I condition device, "?" and "○" indicate whether the "Blue BAR" can be stopped in the middle stage during the first stop on the right ("○" indicates , "Blue BAR" can be stopped in the middle row, and "?" indicates that "Blue BAR" cannot be stopped in the middle row. A detailed explanation will be omitted, but in the 37th embodiment, during the 1BB operation, when the Replay A to Replay I condition devices are activated, the effect is to press right (right first stop) and aim the "Blue BAR" at the middle stage. is output, and a performance suggesting an advantage is output according to the reel 31 and the number of "Blue BAR" stopped in the middle row.

The Replay A condition device includes Replays 01 to 07 as winning combinations, and when the Replay A condition device is activated, in this embodiment, when the left or middle first stop, Replay 01 or Replay 02 is stopped, and the right first stop is stopped. When stopped, replay 01 is stopped.
The symbol combinations of Replay 01 are the winning numbers “004” to “007” in FIG. 266. Therefore, when Replay 01 wins, "Replay" - "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" - "Bell A" stops on the valid line. When the middle reel 31 stops and "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" stops on the effective line (middle middle row), "Replay" stops on the middle upper row. Further, when the right reel 31 stops and "Bell A" stops on the active line (lower right row), "Replay" stops on the upper right row. Therefore, when the symbol combination of Replay 01 stops on the valid line (Replay 01 wins), "Replay" - "Replay" - "Replay" (upper replay) stops on the upper line (invalid line).
On the other hand, when Replay 02 wins, "Replay" - "Replay" - "Replay" stops at the valid line.

Note that since both Replay 01 and Replay 02 have "PB=1", any one can be stopped. Therefore, when the device is operated under Replay A condition, when the left or middle first stop is performed, depending on the pressing order and operation timing of the stop switch 42, the case where Replay 01 is stopped and the case where Replay 02 is stopped are assigned. The stopping results are diversified. This similarly applies to the first stop on the left or center when the device is activated under Replay B to Replay K conditions, which will be described below.

Further, when the replay A condition device is activated, the "blue BAR" does not stop at the middle stage of any reel 31 at the first stop on the right. When the right reel 31 is stopped, if you operate the right stop switch 42 aiming at the No. 4 "Blue BAR" in the middle row, the No. 3 "Bell B" will not stop at the lower right row, but the No. 5 "Bell A" will stop. It stops at the bottom right. Similarly, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, if you operate the middle stop switch 42 while aiming at the 19th "Blue BAR" in the middle row, the 19th "Blue BAR" will not stop in the middle row, but the 1st "Blank" ” stops in the middle.
Furthermore, in the same way, when the left reel 31 is stopped, if you operate the left stop switch 42 while aiming at the 16th "Blue BAR" in the middle row, the 17th "Cherry" will not stop in the upper left row, but the 0th "Replay" ” stops at the top left. This causes Replay 01 to stop.

The Replay B condition device includes Replay 01 to Replay 08 as winning combinations, and its stop control is the same as when the Replay A condition device is activated. Furthermore, when the reverse button is pressed, the "Blue BAR" does not stop at the middle stage, similar to when the Replay A condition device is activated.
The Replay C condition device includes Replay 01 to Replay 07 and Replay 09 as winning combinations, and when the Replay C condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the left or middle first stops, and the right first When stopped, replay 04 can be stopped.

When the replay C condition device is activated, at the first stop on the right, only the right reel 31 stops with the "blue BAR" in the middle stage, as shown in FIG. 276. When the right reel 31 is stopped, aim at the No. 4 "Blue BAR" in the middle row and operate the right stop switch 42, the right reel 31 will stop at that position, and the No. 3 "Bell B" will move to the lower right row (effective line). Stop at. Further, in the middle row, "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" is stopped, and "Blue BAR" is not stopped. Furthermore, "Cherry/Bell A" is stopped in the upper left row, and "Blue BAR" is not stopped in the middle left row.

The Replay D condition device includes Replay 01 to Replay 07 and Replay 10 as winning combinations, and when the Replay D condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the left or center first stop, and the right first stop. At this time, replay 05 of winning number "021" can be stopped.
When the right first stop occurs when the Replay D condition device is activated, only the middle reel 31 can stop the "Blue BAR" in the middle row. On the other hand, when the right reel 31 stops and you aim for the No. 4 "Blue BAR" in the middle row, it will not stop at this position (the No. 3 "Bell B" will not stop at the lower right row), but will move to the lower right row. "Bell A" stops. In addition, "Replay" is stopped in the upper left row, and "Blue BAR" is not stopped in the middle left row. As a result, replay 05 of winning number "021" is stopped.

The Replay E condition device includes Replay 01 to Replay 07 and Replay 11 as winning combinations, and when the Replay E condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the left or center first stop, and the right first stop. At this time, replay 03 can be stopped.
At the first right stop when the Replay E condition device is activated, only the left reel 31 can stop the "Blue BAR" in the middle left row. When the "Blue BAR" stops at the middle left row, the "Cherry" stops at the upper left row (valid line). Further, on the right reel 31, "Bell A" stops on the active line, and on the middle reel 31, "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" stops on the active line.
The Replay F condition device includes Replay 01 to Replay 07 and Replay 12 as winning combinations, and when the Replay F condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the left or center first stop, and the right first stop. At this time, replay 05 of winning number "022" can be stopped.

When the right first stop occurs when the replay F condition device is activated, the "blue BAR" can be stopped at the middle stage of the right and middle reels 31. When the "Blue BAR" stops on the middle row of the right reel 31, the "Bell B" stops on the lower right row. When the middle reel 31 stops, the "blue BAR" stops at the middle stage. Furthermore, when the left reel 31 stops, "Replay" stops at the upper left row, and "Blue BAR" does not stop at the middle left row. As a result, replay 05 of winning number "022" is stopped.

The Replay G condition device includes Replay 01 to Replay 07 and Replay 13 as winning combinations, and when the Replay G condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the left or center first stops, and the right first stop. At this time, replay 04 can be stopped.
When the right first stop occurs when the replay G condition device is activated, the "blue BAR" can be stopped in the middle row of the right and left reels 31. When the right reel 31 stops, "Blue BAR" stops at the middle right row, and "Bell B" stops at the lower right row. Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, if you aim for the "Blue BAR" in the middle row, the "Blue BAR" does not stop, but the "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" stops. Furthermore, when the "Blue BAR" stops at the middle left row when the left reel 31 stops, "Cherry" stops at the upper left row.

The Replay H condition device includes Replay 01 to Replay 07 and Replay 14 as winning combinations, and when the Replay H condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the left or middle first stop, and the right first stop. At this time, replay 05 can be stopped.
When the right first stop occurs when the replay H condition device is activated, the "blue BAR" can be stopped in the middle row of the middle and left reels 31. When the right reel 31 stops, "Bell A" stops at the lower right row, and "Blue BAR" does not stop at the middle right row.
Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, if you aim at the "blue BAR" in the middle row, it will stop at that position. Furthermore, when the left reel 31 is stopped, if you aim at the "Blue BAR" on the middle left row, it will stop at that position, and the "Cherry" will stop on the upper left row. As a result, replay 05 of winning number "023" is stopped.

The Replay I condition device includes Replay 01 to Replay 07 and Replay 15 as winning combinations, and when the Replay I condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the left or center first stop, and the right first stop. At this time, replay 05 can be stopped.
When the right first stop occurs when the Replay I condition device is activated, the "blue BAR" can be stopped in the middle row of the right, middle, and left reels 31. When the right reel 31 stops, if you aim for the "Blue BAR" on the middle right row, it will stop at that position, and the "Bell B" will stop on the lower right row.
Furthermore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, if you aim at the "blue BAR" in the middle row, it will stop at that position. Furthermore, when the left reel 31 is stopped, if you aim for the "Blue BAR" on the middle left row, it will stop at that position, and the "Cherry" will stop on the upper left row. As a result, all the "Blue BARs" appear on the middle line, and the replay 05 of the winning number "024" is stopped.

The Replay J condition device includes Replay 01, Replay 02, and Replay 15 as winning combinations, and when the Replay J condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the left or middle first stop occurs, and the right first stop occurs. At this time, the replay 15 can be stopped.
Furthermore, when the right first stop occurs, “Red 7” can be stopped at the middle stages of the right, middle, and left reels 31. When "Red 7" stops on the middle row of the right reel 31, "Bell A" stops on the lower right row. Also, if you aim for "Red 7" on the middle row of the middle reel 31, it will stop at that position. Furthermore, if you aim for "Red 7" on the middle row of the left reel 31, it will stop at that position, and "Bell B" will stop on the upper left row. As a result, the replay 15 of the winning number "147" is stopped, and the "Red 7" arrangement is stopped in the middle row.
For example, if a condition that is advantageous to the player is established, such as winning a lottery related to AT (adding the number of AT games, etc.), when the Replay J condition device is activated, the player is asked to press "Red 7". Output the effect to make the "Red 7" match appear.

The Replay K condition device includes Replay 01 and Replay 02 as winning combinations, and when the Replay K condition device is activated, Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped when the left or center first stops, and Replay when the right stops first. 01 can be stopped.
Furthermore, when the right first stop occurs, "Red 7" can be stopped at the middle stage of the right and middle reels 31, but "Red 7" does not stop at the middle stage of the left reel 31. When "Red 7" stops on the middle row of the right reel 31, "Bell A" stops on the lower right row. Furthermore, “Red 7” can be stopped at the middle stage of the middle reel 31. Furthermore, when aiming at "Red 7" on the middle row of the left reel 31, the 15th "Replay" stops on the upper left row and "Red 7" does not stop on the middle left row. As a result, replay 01 of winning number "005" is stopped.
Even when the replay K condition device is activated, similar to when the replay J condition device is activated, an effect that makes the user press the "red 7" is output to prevent the "red 7" from being shown.

When the replay L condition device is activated, the replay 08 is stopped at the valid line. Here, when replay 08 is stopped on the effective line, "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" - "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" - "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" can be stopped on the effective line.
Further, when the replay M condition device is activated, the replay 09 is stopped at the effective line. Here, when replay 09 is stopped on the active line, the watermelon symbols are not aligned on the active line, but "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" is placed on the "upper left row" - "middle middle row" - "upper right row" - "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" - "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" can be stopped.

When the Replay N condition device is activated, Replay 06 can be stopped, and the chance number consisting of "Replay" - "Bell A/Bell B" - "Bell A/Bell B" is stopped on the active line.
When the Replay O condition device is activated, Replay 07 can be stopped, and the active line consists of "Replay" - "Bell A/Bell B" - "Bell A/Bell B", similar to when the Replay N condition device is activated. Stop the chance.
When the replay P condition device is activated, the replay 10 can be stopped, and the chance line consisting of "Replay" - "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" - "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" is stopped on the active line.
The reliability of the chances is "strong chances>chances A≒chances B". In FIG. 286, which will be described later, when winning numbers "16" to "18" are won, a chance eye appears and an AT lottery is executed. Therefore, the AT winning expectation is "winning number '18'> winning number '16'≒'17'".

The Replay Q condition device includes Replay 11 and Replay 12 as winning combinations, and when the Replay Q condition device is activated, Replay 11 or Replay 12 is stopped. When the left reel 31 is stopped, if you aim for the "cherry" in the upper left row (replay 11), the reel will stop at that position. Furthermore, when the left reel 31 is stopped, if you aim for "Bell A" on the upper left row (replay 12), it will stop at that position, and "Cherry" will stop on the lower left row. The stopped form of "cherry" (square cherry) in the upper left row or lower left row represents a weak cherry.
The Replay R condition device includes Replay 11 to Replay 13 as winning combinations, and when the Replay R condition device is activated, either Replay 11 or Replay 13 is stopped. When the left reel 31 stops, it is possible to stop the number 8 or 18 "Blank" (Replay 13) in the upper left row, or the "Black BAR" (Replay 13) number 3, and the "Cherry" can be stopped in the middle left row. do. This stopped form (middle cherry) represents a strong cherry.
The Replay S condition device includes Replay 11 to Replay 14 as winning combinations, and when the Replay S condition device is activated, any one of Replay 11, Replay 13, or Replay 14 is stopped. Similar to when the Replay R condition device is activated, it is possible to stop a "cherry" (strong cherry) in the middle left row.

In the replay condition device described above, as shown in FIG. 286, Replay A wins alone and does not win multiple times with 1BB.
On the other hand, Replay B to Replay S are always won twice with 1BB in non-internal matches. In games where the 1BB condition device and the Replay B to Replay S condition device operate at the same time, the reel stop control based on the Replay B to Replay S condition device takes priority, and one of the Replays always wins, and 1BB never wins. .
On the other hand, in internal games after winning a 1BB (Fig. 290, Fig. 292), the 1BB condition device is also activated in the game when the replay A to replay S condition device is activated, but the replay prize has priority and the replay is always There is no case where 1BB wins and 1BB wins.

When 1BB is in operation and inside RB, as shown in Figure 296, in the game when Replay A to Replay S condition devices are activated, there is no case where accessory condition devices are activated at the same time (Replay A to Replay S are won alone). ), replays always win.
When 1BB is operating and inside RB, in a game when the Replay A to Replay S condition device is activated, the RBA or RBB condition device will also be activated at the same time, but Replay's winnings will have priority, and Replay will always win, and RBA or RBB will be activated. There is no chance of winning.

The so-called push order bell condition devices are comprised of the following types.
Minor role A group condition device: Minor role A01 condition device ~ Minor role A24 condition device Minor role B group condition device: Minor role B01 condition device ~ Minor role B24 condition device Minor role C group condition device: Minor role C01 condition device ~ Small role Win C24 condition device For example, in a game in which the winning number "22" is won in FIG. 286, which will be described later, the small win A01 condition device is activated.
First, the relationship between the small win A01 condition device to the small win A24 condition device and the correct answer pressing order is as follows.
Minor role A01 condition device ~ Minor role A04 condition device: Correct answer press order 123 (left center right)
Small role A05 condition device ~ Small role A08 condition device: Correct answer press order 132 (left and right middle)
Small role A09 condition device ~ Small role A12 condition device: Correct answer press order 213 (middle left and right)
Minor role A13 condition device ~ Minor role A16 condition device: Correct answer press order 231 (middle right left)
Minor role A17 condition device ~ Minor role A20 condition device: Correct answer press order 312 (right left middle)
Minor role A21 condition device ~ Minor role A24 condition device: Correct answer press order 321 (right middle left)
Hereinafter, some condition devices will be selected and reel stop control when the condition devices are activated will be explained.

In FIG. 277 (the same applies to the figures after FIG. 278), for example, in the notes column of the small win A01 condition device, "123" indicates the push order 123 (left middle right). Further, for example, "2--" indicates that the first stop is "2 (medium)" and the second and third stops are optional.
In FIG. 277, the small winning combination A01 condition device includes winning winning combinations of small winning combinations 001, 009 to 016, 025, 026, 041, 042, 065, and 066 (15 pieces in total), and each This is a conditional device that allows a predetermined small winning combination to be won.
When the small winning combination A01 condition device is activated, when the push order is 123, the small winning combination 001 is won with "PB=1 (1/1)". On the other hand, when the push order is 132, small winnings 009 to 016 can be won at a rate of "1/2". In other words, when the push order is 132, the winning combination is non-winning at a rate of "1/2", and the above-mentioned pattern symbol combination appears.
When the small winning combination A01 condition device is activated, at the time of the first left stop, "Replay", which is the left reel symbol of the small winning combination 001, is stopped at the upper left row. Next, at the time of the middle second stop, "Bell A" is stopped at the middle middle stage. Furthermore, at the third stop on the right, "Watermelon A/Watermelon B/Blue BAR" is stopped at the lower right stage. As a result, the small winning combination 001 is won with "PB=1".
In addition, when winning small role 001, "Replay" - "Bell A" - "Watermelon A / Watermelon B / Blue BAR" will stop on the active line, but "Bell A" - "Bell A" - will stop on the middle line. "Bell A" stops.

On the other hand, after stopping "Replay" in the upper left row at the first stop on the left, when the second stop is on the right, in order to make it possible to win any of the small winnings 009 to 016, the "replay" is placed on the lower right row. Stop "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry". Since the total arrangement of these four symbols is "PB=1", when the second right stop is made, one of these symbols is always stopped at the lower right row.
Next, at the middle third stop, "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" is stopped at the middle middle row in order to make it possible to win any of the small winnings 009 to 016. Then, when the symbols corresponding to the small winning combination cannot be stopped, the symbols corresponding to the pattern symbol combination are stopped.

For example, firstly, when it is "Replay" - "Rotating" - "Black BAR", if you can stop "Black BAR/Red 7" in the middle row, the small winning combination 010 or the small winning combination 012 will be played. However, if "Black BAR/Red 7" cannot be stopped in the middle row, the winning combination will be non-winning.
In the case of "Replay" - "Rotating" - "Black BAR", the rate at which "Black BAR/Red 7" stops when the middle reel 31 stops is "1/2".
When the stop form becomes "Replay" - "Black BAR/Red 7" - "Black BAR", the winning result will be Minor Win 010 or Minor Win 012.
On the other hand, in the case of "Replay" - "Rotating" - "Black BAR", if "Black BAR/Red 7" cannot be stopped when the middle reel 31 stops, "Bell B" is stopped. let As a result, the stop pattern becomes "Replay" - "Bell B" - "Black BAR", resulting in pattern 02 (hand number "301").

Second, when "Replay" - "Rotating" - "Red 7", if you can stop "Black BAR/Red 7" in the middle row, you will win the small prize 009 or small prize 011. However, if "Black BAR/Red 7" cannot be stopped in the middle row, the winning combination will be non-winning.
In the case of "Replay" - "Rotating" - "Red 7", the rate at which "Black BAR/Red 7" stops when the middle reel 31 stops is "1/2".
When the stop type becomes "Replay" - "Black BAR/Red 7" - "Red 7", the winning result will be Small Win 009 or Small Win 011.
On the other hand, when "Replay" - "Rotating" - "Red 7" is displayed, if "Black BAR/Red 7" cannot be stopped when the middle reel 31 stops, "Bell B" is stopped. let As a result, the stop pattern becomes "Replay" - "Bell B" - "Red 7", resulting in pattern 02 (hand number "300").

Thirdly, when it is "Replay" - "Rotating" - "Blank", if you can stop "Blank/Cherry" in the middle row, you will win Small Win 013 or Small Win 015. , if the "blank/cherry" cannot be stopped in the middle middle row, the winning combination will be non-winning.
In the case of "replay" - "rotating" - "blank", the rate at which "blank/cherry" stops when the middle reel 31 stops is "1/2".
When the stop form becomes "Replay" - "Blank/Cherry" - "Blank", the winning result is Minor Win 013 or Minor Win 015.
On the other hand, in the case of "Replay" - "Rotating" - "Blank", if "Blank/Cherry" cannot be stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Bell B" is stopped. As a result, the stop pattern becomes "Replay" - "Bell B" - "Blank", resulting in pattern 02 (hand number "302").

Fourthly, when it is "Replay" - "Rotating" - "Cherry", if you can stop "Blank/Cherry" in the middle row, you will win Small Win 014 or Small Win 016. , if the "blank/cherry" cannot be stopped in the middle middle row, the winning combination will be non-winning.
In the case of "Replay" - "Rotating" - "Cherry", the rate at which "Blank/Cherry" stops when the middle reel 31 stops is "1/2".
When the stop form becomes "replay" - "blank/cherry" - "cherry", the winning result is small winning combination 014 or small winning combination 016.

On the other hand, in the case of "Replay" - "Rotating" - "Cherry", if "Blank/Cherry" cannot be stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Bell B" is stopped. As a result, the stop pattern becomes "Replay" - "Bell B" - "Cherry", resulting in pattern 02 (hand number "303").
From the above, at press order 132 when the small win A01 condition device is activated, small roles 009 to 016 are won at a rate of ``1/2'', and pattern 02 stops at a rate of ``1/2''. ).

In addition, when the small winning A01 condition device is activated, when the middle first stop occurs, as shown in FIG. The ratio will result in a winning combination (stopping of pattern symbol combinations).
Specifically, when the middle first stop occurs, "Bell B" is stopped at the middle middle stage (PB=1). Also, when stopping on the left after the middle first stop, "Red 7" is drawn into the upper left row. Since "Red 7" on the left reel 31 is provided at only one location, the pull-in rate, that is, the stop rate is "1/4".
Furthermore, when stopping on the right after the first stop in the center, "Red 7/Black BAR" is drawn into the lower right row. Since the "Red 7/Black BAR" on the right reel 31 is provided at one location each at an interval of 5 symbols, the pull-in rate, that is, the stop rate is "1/2".
On the other hand, in the case of "Rotating" - "Bell B" - "Red 7/Black BAR", if you cannot stop "Red 7" when stopping on the left, select "Replay" (PB = 1). make it stop.

In addition, in the case of "Red 7" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", if "Red 7/Black BAR" cannot be stopped when stopping on the right, "Bell A" (PB = 1) to stop.
From the above, the ratio at which "Red 7" - "Bell B" - "Red 7/Black BAR" stops when the middle first stop is "1/8".
In addition, the stop form when small winnings 025 to 026 do not win is,
"Replay" - "Bell B" - "Red 7/Black BAR" (Pattern 02)
"Red 7" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (Pattern 03)
It will be one of the following.

Furthermore, when the small win A01 condition device is activated, when the right first stop occurs, as shown in FIG. The winning combination will be non-winning (the pattern symbol combination will stop) at a ratio of .
Specifically, when the right first stop is made, "Bell B" is stopped at the lower right stage (PB=1). Also, when stopping on the left after the first stop on the right, "Red 7" is drawn into the upper left row. As mentioned above, the attraction rate of "Red 7" is "1/4".
Furthermore, at the middle stop after the right first stop, the "Red 7/Black BAR" is drawn into the middle middle stage. As mentioned above, the attraction rate of "Red 7/Black BAR" is "1/2".
On the other hand, in the case of "Rotating" - "Red 7/Black BAR" - "Bell B", if you cannot stop "Red 7" when stopping on the left, select "Replay" (PB = 1). make it stop.

In addition, in the case of "Red 7" - "Rotating" - "Bell B", if you cannot stop "Red 7/Black BAR" during the middle stop, select "Replay" (PB = 1). make it stop.
From the above, the ratio at which "Red 7" - "Red 7/Black BAR" - "Bell B" stops at the first right stop is "1/8".
In addition, the stop form when small winnings 041 to 042 do not win is,
"Replay" - "Red 7/Black BAR" - "Bell B" (Pattern 05)
"Red 7" - "Replay" - "Bell B" (Pattern 04)
It will be one of the following.

Next, when the small winning combination A01 condition device is activated, the RB inside during the 1BB game (during the general game) is controlled to stop so that the small winning combination 001 is won regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. The stop control when winning the small winning combination 001 is the same as the correct answer press order 123.
On the other hand, when the small prize A01 condition device is activated, during the general game during the 1BB game (RB non-internal), the stop control is performed so that the small prize 065 or the small prize 066 is won regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. . Small role 065 and small role 066 do not stop during the normal game (when the role object is not activated), but since they are winning combinations included in the small role A01 condition device, only during the 1BB game, the small role 065 or the small role Role 066 can be stopped. This is because the winning combination of the minor combination included in the condition device needs to be able to appear in any of the game states. This is the same for the small winning combinations 067 to 112 of the small winning combination A02 to small winning combination A24 condition devices.
In addition, the winning combinations such as small winnings 065 and 066 that can be won during general play (inside RB) during 1BB gaming are "PB ≠ 1"("Red7" on the left reel 31 is " The symbols on the middle and right reels 31 are "PB=1". Therefore, the winning ratio is "1/4".

Even when the small winning combination A02 to small winning combination A04 condition device is activated, the small winning combination 001 (high bell (7-card winning combination)) is won when the correct answer press order is 123, similarly to the above. In addition, if the first stop press order is correct (left) and the second stop press order is incorrect (right), a 1-card winning combination will be won at a rate of "1/2", and a winning combination will be awarded at a rate of "1/2". It is controlled so that it is not captured (pattern design combination display).
In addition, if the first stop is pressed in the wrong order (middle or right), a 1-card winning combination will be won at a rate of ``1/8'' and a winning combination will be won at a rate of ``7/8'' (pattern symbol combination display). control so that

When the small win A05 condition device is activated, when the correct answer press order is 132, the small win 002 is won with "PB=1". When winning small role 002, "Replay" - "Bell A" - "Replay" stops on the active line, but "Bell A" - "Bell A" - "Bell B" stops on the middle line. .
On the other hand, at press order 123, the small winning combinations 009 to 016 are won at a rate of ``1/2'', and the winning combinations are non-winning at a rate of ``1/2'' (stopping of pattern symbol combinations).
When the small winning combination A05 condition device is activated, at the time of the first stop on the left, the left reel symbol "Replay" of the small winning combination 002 is stopped at the upper left row. Next, at the second stop on the right, the "replay" is stopped at the lower right stage. Furthermore, when stopping at the middle third stage, "Bell A" is stopped at the middle middle stage. As a result, the small winning combination 002 is won with "PB=1".

On the other hand, after stopping "Replay" in the upper left row at the first stop on the left, when it is the second stop in the middle, in order to make it possible to win any of the small winnings 009 to 016, in the middle middle row, Stop "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" (total "PB=1").
Next, at the third stop on the right, the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination that is in full swing is stopped in the lower right row, and if it is not possible to stop the symbol that corresponds to the small winning combination that is full, the pattern symbol combination is Stop the corresponding symbol.
In this case, even if all the symbols "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" are stopped in the middle row, the ratio of being able to stop the busy small winning combination is "1/2". For example, if it becomes "Replay" - "Red 7" - "Rotating", "Red 7/Black BAR" will be stopped at a ratio of "1/2" and Small Win 011 or Small Win 012 will be won. be able to.
Therefore, at press order 123 when the small winning A05 condition device is activated, small winnings 009 to 016 are won at a rate of ``1/2'', and the pattern symbol combination stops at a rate of ``1/2''. ).

In addition, when the small win A05 condition device is activated, when the middle first stop occurs, as shown in FIG. The ratio will result in a winning combination (stopping of pattern symbol combinations).
Specifically, when the middle first stop occurs, "Bell B" is stopped at the middle middle stage (PB=1). Also, when stopping on the left after the middle first stop, "Red 7" is drawn into the upper left row (ratio "1/4").
Furthermore, when stopping on the right after the first stop in the center, "Red 7/Black BAR" is drawn into the lower right row (ratio "1/2").
On the other hand, the stop form of small winnings 033 to 034 when they do not win is,
"Replay" - "Bell B" - "Red 7/Black BAR" (Pattern 02)
"Red 7" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (Pattern 03)
It will be one of the following.

Furthermore, when the small win A05 condition device is activated, when the right first stop occurs, as shown in FIG. 277, the small win 049 to 050 will be won at the rate of "1/8", and it will be "7/8". The winning combination will be non-winning (the pattern symbol combination will stop) at a ratio of .
Specifically, when the right first stop is made, "Bell B" is stopped at the lower right stage (PB=1). Also, when stopping on the left after the first stop on the right, "Red 7" is drawn into the upper left row. As mentioned above, the attraction rate of "Red 7" is "1/4".
Furthermore, at the middle stop after the first right stop, "Blank/Cherry" is pulled into the middle middle stage. The attraction rate of "Blank/Cherry" is "1/2".
From the above, the ratio at which "Red 7" - "Red 7/Black BAR" - "Bell B" stops at the first right stop is "1/8".
On the other hand, the stop form of small winnings 049 to 050 when they do not win is,
"Replay" - "Red 7/Black BAR" - "Bell B" (Pattern 05)
"Red 7" - "Replay" - "Bell B" (Pattern 04)
It will be one of the following.

Furthermore, when the small winning combination A05 condition device is activated, the RB inside during the 1BB game (during the general game) is controlled to stop so that the small winning combination 002 is won regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. The stop control in this case is the same as the correct answer press order 123.
On the other hand, when the small winning combination A05 condition device is activated, during normal gaming during 1BB gaming (RB non-internal), stop control is performed so that small winning combination 075 or small winning combination 076 is won regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. .

Even when the small winning combination A06 to small winning combination A08 condition device is activated, the small winning combination 002 (high bell (7-card winning combination)) is won when the correct answer press order is 132, similarly to the above. In addition, if the first stop press order is correct (left) and the second stop press order is incorrect (middle), a 1-card winning combination will be won at a rate of ``1/2''; It will be missed (pattern design combination display).
Also, if the first stop is pressed in the wrong order (middle or right), one card will win at a rate of ``1/8'' and will be lost at a rate of ``7/8'' (pattern symbol combination display). Become.

When the small win A09 condition device is activated, when the correct answer press order is 213, the small win 003 or 004 is won with "PB=1". On the other hand, at press order 231, the small winning combinations 025 to 032 are won at a rate of ``1/2'', and the winning combinations are not won at a rate of ``1/2'' (stopping of pattern symbol combinations).
When the small win A09 condition device is activated, at the first stop in the middle, the middle reel symbol "Bell B" of the small win 003 is stopped in the middle middle row (PB=1). Next, at the second left stop, if the "Blue BAR" or "Bell B" (both "PB≠1") can be stopped, the "Blue BAR" or "Bell B" is stopped, respectively. When "Blue BAR" or "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Bell A" (PB=1) is stopped.
Next, at the third stop on the right, if "Bell A/Blue BAR" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped at the lower right stage (PB=1). As a result, the small winning combination 003 is won.

Further, when the third stop on the right side is "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped at the lower right stage (PB=1). As a result, the small winning combination 004 is won.

When winning the small winning combination 003, "Bell A/Blue BAR" - "Bell B" - "Bell B" stops on the active line.
Furthermore, when the small winning combination 004 is won, "Bell B" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (all bells) stop on the active line.
In addition to the above-mentioned small win A09 condition device activation, there are two types of small win that can be won, such as when the correct answer press order is 312 when the minor win A17 condition device is activated, which will be described later. There are cases where only a minor role has "PB = 1", but in order to diversify the stopping results, if it is possible to stop a minor role with "PB≠1", that minor role will be stopped. There are cases.

On the other hand, after stopping "Bell B" in the middle middle row at the first stop in the middle, when it is the second stop on the right, in order to make it possible to win any of the small winnings 025 to 032, it is placed in the lower right row. , "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" is stopped ("PB=1" in total).
Next, at the third stop on the left, the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination that is full is stopped in the upper left row, and if it is not possible to stop the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination that is full, the pattern symbol combination is Stop the corresponding symbol.
In this case, even if any of the symbols "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" is stopped in the lower right row, the ratio of stopping the busy small winning combination is "1/2". For example, if the result is "Rotating" - "Bell B" - "Red 7", "Red 7/Blue BAR" will be stopped at a ratio of "1/2" and you will receive a small prize of 025 or 027. can be done.
Therefore, at press order 231 when the small winning A09 condition device is activated, small winnings 025 to 032 are won at a rate of ``1/2'', and the pattern symbol combination stops at a rate of ``1/2''. ).

In addition, when the small win A09 condition device is activated, when the first stop is on the left, as shown in FIG. The ratio will result in a winning combination (stopping of pattern symbol combinations).
Specifically, when the left first stop occurs, the "replay" is stopped at the upper left stage (PB=1). Also, when stopping in the middle after the first stop on the left, the "black BAR" is drawn into the middle middle stage (ratio "1/4").
Furthermore, when stopping on the right after the first stop on the left, "Red 7/Black BAR" is drawn into the lower right row (ratio "1/2").
On the other hand, the stop form of small winnings 009 to 010 when they do not win is,
"Replay" - "Bell B" - "Red 7/Black BAR" (Pattern 02)
"Replay" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (Pattern 03)
It will be one of the following.

Furthermore, when the small win A09 condition device is activated, when the right first stop occurs, as shown in FIG. This will result in non-winning (stopping of pattern symbol combinations).
Specifically, when the first right stop occurs, "replay" is stopped at the lower right stage (PB=1). Furthermore, when stopping on the left after the first stop on the right, "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" is drawn into the upper left row. The attraction rate of "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" is "1/2".
Furthermore, when stopping in the middle after the first stop on the right, a "black BAR" is pulled into the middle middle stage. The attraction rate of "Black BAR" is "1/4".
From the above, the rate at which "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" - "Black BAR" - "Replay" stops at the first right stop is "1/8".
On the other hand, the stop form of small win 057 when it does not win is,
"Watermelon A/Watermelon B/Red 7/Blue BAR" - "Replay" - "Replay" (Pattern 04)
"Replay" - "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" - "Replay" (Pattern 01)
It will be one of the following.

Next, when the small winning combination A09 condition device is activated, the RB inside during the 1BB game (during the general game) is controlled to stop so that the small winning combination 003 or the small winning combination 004 is won regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. The stop control in this case is the same as the correct answer press order 213.
On the other hand, when the small win A09 condition device is activated, during the general game during the 1BB game (RB non-internal), the stop control is performed so that the small win 081 or the small win 082 is won regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. .

Even when the small win A10 to small win A12 condition device is activated, in the same way as above, when the correct answer press order is 213, the small win 003 or the small win 004 (high bell (7 card role)) is won, and the first stop press order is If the answer is correct (middle) and the second stop pressing order is incorrect (right), a 1-card winning combination is won at a rate of "1/2", and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of "1/2".
Further, if the first stop pressing order is incorrect (left or right), a one-card winning combination is won at a rate of "1/8" and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of "7/8".
Furthermore, in the same way as above, when the small winning combination A13 to small winning combination A16 condition device is activated, the small winning combination 005 (high bell (7 pieces)) is won when the correct answer press order is 231, and the first stop pressing order is correct. (middle) and if the second stop pressing order is incorrect (left), a 1-card winning combination is won at a rate of "1/2", and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of "1/2".
Further, if the first stop pressing order is incorrect (left or right), a one-card winning combination is won at a rate of "1/8" and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of "7/8".

When the small win A17 condition device is activated, when the correct answer press order is 312, the small win 006 or 007 is won with "PB=1". On the other hand, at press order 321, the small winning combinations 041 to 048 are won at a rate of ``1/2'', and the winning combinations are not won at a rate of ``1/2'' (stopping of pattern symbol combinations).
When the small winning combination A17 condition device is activated, when the right first stop occurs, "Bell B" which is the right reel symbol of the small winning combination 006 and small winning combination 007 is stopped at the lower right row. Next, when stopping the second left, if it is possible to stop the "Blue BAR" or "Bell B" (both "PB≠1"), stop the "Blue BAR" or "Bell B" in the upper left row, If "Blue BAR" or "Bell B" cannot be stopped, "Bell A" (PB=1) is stopped at the upper left row.
Furthermore, when stopping at the middle third stage, if "Blue BAR/Bell A" - "Rotating" - "Bell B", "Bell A" is stopped at the middle middle stage. As a result, the small winning combination 006 is won.
On the other hand, when the middle third stop is "Bell B" - "Rotating" - "Bell B", the "Replay" is stopped at the middle third stage. As a result, the small winning combination 007 is won.

On the other hand, after stopping "Bell B" in the lower right row at the first stop on the right, when it comes to the second stop in the middle, in order to make it possible to win any of the small winnings 041 to 048, it is placed in the middle middle row. , "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" is stopped ("PB=1" in total).
Next, at the third stop on the left, the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination that is full is stopped in the upper left row, and if it is not possible to stop the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination that is full, the pattern symbol combination is Stop the corresponding symbol.
In this case, even if any of the symbols "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" is stopped in the middle row, the rate at which the busy small winning combination can be stopped is "1/2". For example, if the result is "Rotating" - "Red 7" - "Bell B", "Red 7/Blue BAR" will be stopped at a ratio of "1/2" and a small winning combination of 042 or 044 will be won. can be done.
Therefore, at press order 321 when the small win A17 condition device is activated, small roles 041 to 048 are won at a rate of ``1/2'', and the pattern symbol combinations stop at a rate of ``1/2''. ).

In addition, when the small win A17 condition device is activated, when the first stop is on the left, as shown in FIG. Depending on the percentage, the winning combination will be non-winning (stopping of pattern symbol combinations).
Specifically, when the left first stop occurs, "replay" is stopped at the upper left stage (PB=1). Also, when stopping in the middle after the first left stop, "Black BAR/Red 7" is drawn into the middle middle row (ratio "1/2").
Furthermore, when stopping on the right after the first stop on the left, "Red 7" is drawn into the lower right row (ratio "1/4").
On the other hand, the stop form when small winnings 009 or 011 do not win is:
"Replay" - "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" - "Replay" (Pattern 01)
"Replay" - "Bell B" - "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry" (Pattern 02)
It will be one of the following.

Furthermore, when the small win A17 condition device is activated, when the middle first stop occurs, as shown in FIG. The winning combination will be non-winning (the pattern symbol combination will stop) at a ratio of .
Specifically, when the middle first stop occurs, "Bell B" is stopped at the lower right stage (PB=1). Furthermore, when stopping on the left after the middle first stop, "Watermelon A/Watermelon B" is pulled into the upper left row (retraction rate "1/2").
Furthermore, when stopping on the right after the first stop in the middle, "Red 7" is pulled into the lower right row (pull rate "1/4").
On the other hand, the stop form when small winning combination 037 or small winning combination 039 does not win is:
"Watermelon A/Watermelon B/Red 7/Blue BAR" - "Bell B" - "Bell A" (Pattern 03)
"Replay" - "Bell B" - "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" (Pattern 02)
It will be one of the following.

Next, when the small winning combination A17 condition device is activated, the RB inside during the 1BB game (during the general game) is controlled to stop so that the small winning combination 006 or the small winning combination 007 is won regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. The stop control in this case is the same as when the pressing order is correct 312.
On the other hand, when the small prize A01 condition device is activated, during the general game during 1BB game (RB non-internal), regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, the small prize 097 or the small prize 098 (winning ratio "1/4") ) is controlled to stop so as to win the prize.

Even when the small winning combination A18 to small winning combination A20 condition device is activated, in the same way as above, when the correct answer press order is 312, the small winning combination 006 or small winning combination 007 (high bell (7-card winning)) is won, and the first stop pressing order If the answer is correct (right) and the second stop pressing order is incorrect (middle), a one-card winning combination is won at a rate of "1/2" and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of "1/2".
Further, if the first stop pressing order is incorrect (left or middle), a one-card winning combination is won at a rate of "1/8" and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of "7/8".
In addition, when the small role A21 to minor role A24 condition device is activated, when the correct answer press order is 321, the small role 008 (high bell (7-card role)) is won, and the first stop press order is correct (right) and the second If the stop pressing order is incorrect (left), a 1-card winning combination is won at a rate of ``1/2'', and the pattern combination is stopped at a rate of ``1/2''.
Further, if the first stop pressing order is incorrect (left or middle), a one-card winning combination is won at a rate of "1/8" and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of "7/8".

The small role B01 to minor role B24 condition devices are similar to the minor role A01 to minor role A24 condition devices, respectively, and like the minor role A01 to minor role A24 condition device, the correct answer pressing order requires a 7-card role. If the first stop press order is correct and the second stop press order is incorrect, a 1-card winning combination will be won at a rate of ``1/2'', and the pattern symbol combination will be stopped at a rate of ``1/2''. .
Further, if the first stop pressing order is incorrect, a one-card winning combination is won at a rate of "1/8", and the pattern symbol combination is stopped at a rate of "7/8".
The small role B01 to minor role B24 condition devices are each the minor role A01 to minor role A24 condition device, with the small role 116 added as a winning role, and the other conditions are the minor role A01 to minor role A24 condition device. is the same as
Further, the small winning combination B01 to small winning combination B24 condition devices are the same as the correct pressing order and the incorrect pressing order when the accessory is not activated, respectively, to the small winning combination A01 to small winning combination A24 condition device. Furthermore, the small winning combination B01 to small winning combination B24 condition devices can be used for the small winning combination A01 to small winning combination A24 condition devices, respectively. The same applies to the winning combinations and their winning rates.

For example, the small winning combination B01 condition device is the same as the small winning combination A01 condition device in that in the correct answer pressing order 123, the small winning combination 001 is won with "PB=1".
Further, the small winning combination B01 condition device is the same as the small winning combination A01 condition device in that it is possible to win small winning combinations 009 to 016 at a rate of “1/2” in the incorrect release pressing order 132.
Furthermore, the small winning combination B01 condition device is the same as the small winning combination A01 condition device in that it is possible to win small winning combinations 025 to 026 at a rate of "1/8" at the first stop during the incorrect release order. .
Furthermore, the small winning combination B01 condition device is the same as the small winning combination A01 condition device in that it is possible to win small winning combinations 041 to 042 at a rate of "1/8" at the first stop on the right in the order of incorrect release.

On the other hand, the small winning combination B01 condition device to the small winning combination B24 condition device are different from the small winning combination A01 to small winning combination A24 condition device in the winning combination when the accessory is activated.
In the small winning combination B01 to small winning combination B04 condition device, during 1BB operation, when the left first stop is performed, the small winning combination 001 is won with "PB=1".
Further, in the small winning combination B05 to small winning combination B08 condition device, during the 1BB operation, when the left first stop is performed, the small winning combination 002 is won with "PB=1".
Furthermore, in the small winning combination B09 to small winning combination B12 condition device, during the 1BB operation, when the first stop is in the middle, the small winning combination 003 or the small winning combination 004 is won with "PB=1".
Furthermore, in the small winning combination B13 to small winning combination B16 condition device, during the 1BB operation, when the middle first stop is performed, the small winning combination 005 is won with "PB=1".
Further, in the small winning combination B17 to small winning combination B20 condition device, during the 1BB operation, when the right first stop is performed, the small winning combination 006 or the small winning combination 007 is won with "PB=1".
Furthermore, in the small winning combination B21 to small winning combination B24 condition device, during the 1BB operation, when the right first stop is performed, the small winning combination 008 is won with "PB=1".

The small role C01 to small role C24 condition devices are similar to the small role B01 to small role B24 condition devices, respectively, and like the small role B01 to small role B24 condition device, when the role object is not activated, the correct answer is This is a conditional device in which a 7-card winning combination is won in the pressing order, and a 1-card winning combination or a loss in the incorrect pressing order.
The small role C01 to small role C24 condition devices are the minor role A01 to small role A24 condition device, with the small role 117 added as a winning role, and the other conditions are the minor role A01 to small role A24 condition device. is the same as
Furthermore, the small winning combination C01 to small winning combination C24 condition devices are condition devices in which the same stop control as the small winning combination B01 to small winning combination B24 condition device is executed, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 287 and 289, the minor role D01 to minor role D04 condition devices operate simultaneously with the 1BB condition device in the 1BB non-internal medium game (either 1BB or minor role D1 to minor role D4). There is a case where one person wins multiple times).
In addition, the small role D01 to D04 condition device operates in the internal medium game of 1BB (game in which the 1BB condition device is activated) (the small role There is a case where any one of D1 to D4 is won individually.
Furthermore, the small winning combination D01 to small winning combination D04 condition devices may operate during the 1BB operation, as shown in FIGS. 295 and 297.

The small winning combination D1 condition device stops small winning combinations 025 to 040 with "PB=1" when the left first stop occurs when 1BB is not activated (non-internal and internal).
On the other hand, when 1BB is not activated, 1BB is displayed at its maximum when the center or right first stop occurs. Here, "maximum display of 1BB" is a stop control that stops the symbol combination of 1BB on the active line as much as possible. For example, when it is the middle first stop, "Watermelon B" is stopped at the middle middle stage. Thereafter, when stopping on the left, "Bell B" is stopped at the upper left stage, and when stopping on the right, "Bell A" is stopped at the lower right stage. Here, “Bell B” on the left reel 31 and “Watermelon B” on the middle reel 31 are “PB≠1”. On the other hand, “Bell A” on the right reel 31 is “PB=1”. Therefore, the symbol combination of 1BB is "PB≠1".

For example, in the case of "Rotating" - "Rotating" - "Bell A", if "Watermelon B" cannot be stopped when the middle reel 31 stops, "Black BAR/Red 7/Blank/Cherry ” (total “PB = 1”), and when the left reel 31 stops, “Red 7 / Blue BAR / Watermelon A / Watermelon B” (total “PB = 1”) is stopped, and the small role Win 115.
On the other hand, in the case of "Bell B" - "Rotating" - "Bell A", if "Watermelon B" cannot be stopped when the middle reel 31 stops, "Blue BAR/Watermelon A" is stopped. (“PB=1” in “Watermelon B/Blue BAR/Watermelon A”), and win the small prize 113.
Similarly, in the case of "Rotating" - "Watermelon B" - "Bell A", if "Bell B" cannot be stopped when the left reel 31 stops, "Cherry" is stopped (" ``Cherry/Bell B'' with ``PB=1''), and a small role of 114 is won.
Therefore, when 1BB cannot be stopped, any of the small winning combinations 113 to 115 can be stopped, so no winnings (non-winnings) occur.

In addition, when the small winning combination D1 condition device operates 1BB, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, the small winning combination D1 condition device allows a single winning combination to be won with "PB=1". In this case, the minor roles 025 to 040, "Red 7/Blue BAR/Watermelon A/Watermelon B" - "Bell B" - "Red 7/Black BAR/Blank/Cherry" are stopped (in total "PB=1").

The small winning combination D2 condition device stops small winning combinations 025 to 040 with "PB=1" when the middle first stop occurs when 1BB is not activated.
On the other hand, when 1BB is not activated and the left or right side is first stopped, 1BB is displayed at its maximum. When 1BB cannot be stopped, small winnings 113 to 116 are won (no winnings are missed).
In addition, when the small winning combination D2 condition device operates 1BB, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, the small winning combination D2 condition device allows a single winning combination to be won with "PB=1". In this case, the small winning combinations 025 to 040 are stopped.

The small winning combination D3 condition device allows the small winning combination 115 to be won with "PB=1" when the push order is 312 when 1BB is not activated. On the other hand, when 1BB is not activated, if the push order is not 312, 1BB is displayed at maximum. When it is not possible to stop 1BB, the small winning combination 113 to 115 or the small winning combination 117 is won (no winnings occur).
In addition, when the small winning combination D3 condition device operates 1BB, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, the small winning combination D3 condition device allows a winning winning of one winning combination with "PB=1". In this case, the small winning combinations 025 to 040 are stopped.

The small winning combination D4 condition device allows the small winning combination 115 to be won with "PB=1" when the push order is 321 when 1BB is not activated. On the other hand, when 1BB is not activated, if the push order is not 321, 1BB is displayed at maximum. When 1BB cannot be stopped, small winnings 113 to 117 are won (no winnings are missed).
In addition, when the small winning combination D4 condition device operates 1BB, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, the small winning combination D4 condition device allows a single winning combination to be won with "PB=1". In this case, the small winning combinations 025 to 040 are stopped.

The small role E condition device includes small roles 009-023, 025-039, and 041-055 as winning roles, but even if you add up the symbol combinations of all these roles, "PB≠1" due to the symbol arrangement. There is. Therefore, when the small win E condition device is activated, it is necessary to press the eye, and the win is "PB≠1".
The small winning combination F condition device includes all the small winning combinations 001 to 117 except the small winning combination 118 as the winning combination, and regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, any 7-card winning combination (small winning combination 001 ～Small role 008) is won (PB=1). Further, depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed, for example, the small winning combination 001 is won when the pressing order is 123, the small winning combination 002 is won when the pressing order is 132, and so on.
The small winning combination G condition device includes small winning combinations 001 to 117 and a small winning combination 118 drawn only during 1BB operation as winning winning combinations. Since the small winning combination 118 is drawn only during the 1BB operation, the small winning combination 118 is sometimes referred to as an "increasing winning combination". When the small winning combination G condition device is activated, a small winning combination 118 (one-card winning combination) is won with "PB=1".

286 to 299 are diagrams showing number tables (winning probability for each winning number) in the 37th embodiment. The number table shows the number for each RT (gaming state) and each set value. Dividing the numerical values shown in FIGS. 286 to 299 by "65536" gives the probability of winning. For example, in FIG. 286, the winning number "4" is set to "1524" in common to all settings, and the winning probability is "1524/65536."
Among the winning numbers "0" to "100", the winning number "0" corresponds to not winning, and the winning numbers "1" to "100" correspond to winning any of the roles.
In FIGS. 286 to 299, for example, if the winning number "4" in FIG. The Replay B condition device (FIG. 276) is enabled and Replay 01 or Replay 02 can be stopped.
Note that the setting values are the same as in the other embodiments described above.

In addition, in each number table, the presence or absence of a lottery for an advantageous section (a lottery for shifting to an advantageous section) is also displayed. "○" means that the advantageous section lottery will be executed when the winning number concerned is won, and "?" means that the advantageous section lottery will not be executed when the concerned winning number is won. "-" means that it is not a lottery target for the advantageous section because it is not a lottery target (because the number is "0"). Further, in the 37th embodiment, when the advantageous section lottery is executed, it is set so that the probability of winning the advantageous section is "1/1".
In the 37th embodiment, the advantageous section lottery is not executed when the lottery is not won, when RBA, RBB, Replay A, 1BB and Replay B, and small winning combination G are won.

Here, for winning numbers that have different winning probabilities for non-internal and internal winning numbers, it is set so that the lottery in the advantageous section is not performed. For this reason, for example, when winning number "3" (replay A) is won, which has different winning probabilities between non-RT non-internal and non-RT internal, the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed.
In addition, when the winning number "4" is activated (1BB is in operation), the winning probability is different between when the RB is not inside and when it is inside the RB (see Figures 294 and 296). At this time, the advantageous section transfer lottery will not be executed.

Similarly, the winning numbers "1" and "2" have different winning probabilities when the accessory is activated (1BB is in operation), when the RB is not inside the RB, and when the RB is inside the RB. In the event of winning, the lottery for shifting to advantageous areas will not be performed.
Furthermore, since the probability of winning the winning number "100" differs depending on whether 1BB is in operation and RB is in operation (FIG. 299) and in other gaming states, the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed when the winning number "100" is won.
Furthermore, in the number table for each gaming state, the last part shows the total value of 1BB, replay, and small winning combination.

First, FIGS. 286 and 287 are diagrams showing the numbers of winning numbers "1" to "100" in non-RT and non-internal (1BB non-internal). In non-inside, 1BB (winning numbers ``4'' to ``21'' and ``94'' to ``97'') will be drawn for accessories, but RB (winning numbers ``1'' and ``2'') will be drawn by lottery. Not done. The RB is drawn among the RB non-internals during the 1BB operation, which will be described later.
Furthermore, in non-RT, the winning number "3" (replay A) is not drawn, unlike in RT1, which will be described later. Replay B to Replay S other than Replay A are set to be won in duplicate with 1BB.
In addition, all winning numbers "22" to "93" corresponding to the bells to be pressed are drawn by lottery. Furthermore, small prizes D01 to D04 as rare minor prizes are set to be won in duplicate with 1BB (winning numbers "94" to "97").
Furthermore, the winning numbers "98" and "99" are drawn as rare minor prizes, but the winning number "100" is not drawn. The winning number "100" is drawn only during 1BB operation and RT operation, which will be described later.

FIGS. 288 and 289 are diagrams showing the numbers placed in RT1 and non-internal. The difference between RT1 and non-internal is that the winning number "3" (Replay A) is drawn. Also, since the number "3638" corresponding to the non-winning probability for non-RT and non-internals is the winning number for the winning number "3", the non-winning probability for RT1 and non-internals is "0". be.
FIG. 290 and FIG. 291 are diagrams showing the number of non-RTs and inside 1BB. If 1BB is inside, 1BB will not be drawn, so winning numbers "4" to "21" will be single wins in the replay. Similarly, the winning numbers "94" to "97" are single winnings of the small winning combination D. The winning numbers "4" to "21" and "94" to "97" are the same in non-RT non-internal and 1BB internal.
In addition, when winning numbers "4" to "21" or "94" to "97" are won internally, the condition device corresponding to the winning number is activated while the 1BB condition device is activated. do. Therefore, there is a combination of conditional devices that operate when the winning numbers "4" to "21" or "94" to "97" are won in non-internal situations, and a conditional device that operates when the winning numbers are won in internal situations. The combinations are the same.

FIGS. 292 and 293 are diagrams showing the numbers placed inside RT1 and 1BB. Similarly to the above, winning numbers "4" to "21" are single wins for replays, and winning numbers "94" to "97" are single wins for small role D. The winning numbers "4" to "21" and "94" to "97" are the same in non-internal portions of RT1 and in internal portions of 1BB.
FIGS. 294 and 295 are diagrams showing the numbers set when 1BB is in operation and RB is not inside. While 1BB is in operation, 1BB and Replay are not drawn, so all winning numbers "3" to "21" are set to "0". Furthermore, among RB non-internals, RBA and RBB are drawn by lottery. Furthermore, the number of winning numbers "22" to "100" corresponding to the winning of the small winning combination is the same as in the 1BB when the 1BB is not activated. Furthermore, the non-winning probability is "0".

FIGS. 296 and 297 are diagrams showing the numbers set during 1BB operation and inside RB (RT2). Since the RB is not drawn when it is inside the RB, the numbers set for the winning numbers "1" and "2" are both "0". Also, unlike RB non-internal matches, all replays (single winnings) are drawn by lottery (winning numbers "3" to "21"). Here, the numbers set for the winning numbers "3" and "4" differ by "1" from those in RT1 and 1BB. Furthermore, the winning numbers "22" to "100" corresponding to the winning of the small winning combination are the same as when 1BB is in operation and RB is not inside. Furthermore, the non-winning probability is "0".
FIG. 298 and FIG. 299 are diagrams showing the number of settings during 1BB operation and RB operation. In this gaming state, only winning numbers "99" and "100" are drawn. The probability of not winning is "17291/65536".

Next, RT transition in the 37th embodiment will be explained.
FIG. 300 is a diagram showing RT transition in the 37th embodiment. First, when the RWM 53 is initialized, it shifts to non-RT. "RWM initialization" here indicates initialization of the entire range of the RWM 53, and includes information on winning 1BB and the RT status. When the data in the RT state is initialized, it becomes "0", but when the data in the RT state is "0", it corresponds to non-RT.
The first non-RT is non-RT and 1BB non-internal. While it is not RT and 1BB is not inside, it is maintained until the push order bell is won and the pattern symbol combination stops, or until 1BB is won. If you win 1BB before the pattern symbol combination stops while it is non-RT and not inside 1BB, it becomes non-RT and inside 1BB, and even if the pattern symbol combination appears in this non-RT and inside 1BB, it will not be RT1. will not migrate.

On the other hand, when a pattern symbol combination appears before winning 1BB during non-RT and 1BB non-internal, the game shifts to RT1 and 1BB non-internal. When transitioning to RT1, there is no transition to non-RT unless the game goes through the 1BB game. If you win 1BB while RT1 and 1BB is not inside, you will become RT1 and 1BB inside.
Non-RT and inside 1BB and RT1 and inside 1BB are maintained until 1BB is won.

Here, since the probability of winning 1BB among non-RT and non-internal 1BB is the set number "16682" as described above (see FIG. 287), the winning probability is relatively early.
On the other hand, the total value of the winning numbers of the pressing order bells (the winning numbers "22" to "93" are "45216", and the proportion of pattern symbol combinations appearing among them is:
0 x 1/6 + 1/6 x 1/2 + 1/3 x 7/8 + 1/3 x 7/8
≒0.667
It is.
Therefore,
The rate of winning the push order bell and the pattern symbol combination appearing (number equivalent value) is
45216×0.667
≒30159
becomes.

Therefore, "proportion of pattern symbol combinations appearing"/(proportion of pattern symbols appearing + percentage of winning 1BB)
=30159/(30159+16682)
≒0.644
becomes.
Therefore, among non-RT and 1BB non-internal, about 64% of the time it is RT1 and 1BB non-internal, and about 36% of the time it is non-RT and 1BB internal.

If 1BB is won in non-RT and inside 1BB, or in RT1 and inside 1BB, the game shifts to 1BB operation. When 1BB is in operation, initially, 1BB is in operation and RB is not internal. When 1BB is activated and RB is not inside, RB is drawn by lottery. When the RB is won, 1BB is activated and the RB is inside, and this gaming state becomes RT2. Then, in RT2, when RB wins, 1BB is activated and RB is activated.
As shown in FIG. 275, the 1BB operation ends with the payout of more than 218 medals. Furthermore, when 1BB is in operation and RB is in operation, the game ends after winning 8 or 12 times. When the termination conditions for 1BB operation and RB operation are satisfied, and the termination conditions for 1BB operation are not satisfied, the process shifts to 1BB operation and RB non-internal mode again.
When the condition for ending the 1BB operation is satisfied in the 1BB operation, the 1BB operation is ended and the state shifts to non-RT.

FIG. 301 is a diagram showing the instruction function in the 37th embodiment. The instruction monitor uses one 7-segment in the 37th embodiment. Therefore, the instruction monitor may use the lower digits of the acquisition number display LED 78, as in the other embodiments described above, or may be a separate dedicated display.
The instruction function is activated (lighting of the instruction monitor) when the start switch 41 is operated. More specifically, when the start switch 41 is operated, a winning combination is drawn, and a winning number is determined, it is determined that the operating conditions for the instruction function are satisfied in the game.
Further, the operation of the instruction function ends (the instruction monitor turns off) after all stops (here, this corresponds to when all the stop switches 42 are released from the player's fingers).

The push order instruction numbers include "A1" to "A7". “A1” to “A6” correspond to “123 (left middle right)” to “321 (right middle left)” in the 6-selection pressing order. For example, when the small win A01 condition device is activated, the push order instruction number "A1" is selected and the push order instruction information "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor.
For example, when the push order instruction number "A1" is selected and the push order instruction information "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, the sub display content (the content displayed on the image display device 23) is "1. 2, 3" or "left, middle, right."

In addition, the push order instruction number "A7" is the push order instruction number when winning 1BB in a game when the small role D1 to D4 condition device is activated when AT is executed in non-RT and inside 1BB. , and "7" is displayed on the instruction monitor.
As shown in FIG. 285, when the small win D1 condition device is activated, 1BB is displayed at the maximum except for the left first stop. In addition, when the small winning combination D2 condition device is activated, 1BB becomes the maximum display except for the middle first stop. Furthermore, when the small winning combination D3 condition device is activated, 1BB becomes the maximum display other than the push order 312. Furthermore, when the small winning combination D4 condition device is activated, 1BB becomes the maximum display other than the push order 321.
Therefore, when winning 1BB when the minor role D1 condition device is activated, "7" is displayed on the instruction monitor and the sub-display content is a reverse press ("←" is displayed). Suggest (inform). On the other hand, when the small winning combination D2 to small winning combination D4 condition device is activated, "7" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and a forward push ("→" is displayed) is suggested as the sub-display content. Furthermore, in addition to the above display, a suggestion (notification) by voice and/or display such as "Aim!" may be performed.

FIG. 302 is a diagram showing an example of an image display when the small role D condition device is activated during execution of AT in non-RT (when 1BB is not activated) and an attempt is made to win 1BB.
In the example of FIG. 302, first, the winning symbol combination of 1BB, "Bell B (upper left row)" - "Watermelon B (middle middle row)" - "Bell A (lower right row)" is displayed.
Further, on the left side, the symbol arrangement of the reels 31 of the gaming machine is displayed as an image, and the position of the symbol to be aimed at for each reel 31 is displayed as an image. In this example, the left reel 31 is number 12 (Bell B), the middle reel 31 is either number 4 or 14 (Watermelon B), and the right reel 31 is number 5, 10, 15, or 0. This indicates that you should aim for (Bell A). In addition, in FIG. 302, the symbols on the symbol arrangement of the reels 31 are shown only by numbers, but in reality, the symbols are displayed.
Furthermore, in the case of executing the notification to encourage winning of 1BB, when the small role D1 condition device is activated, a reverse arrow is displayed as an image along with the words "Please aim". On the other hand, when the small role D2 to minor role D4 condition device is activated, the words "Please aim" are displayed along with an image of an arrow for pressing the order.

In the 37th embodiment, both the non-RT and the RT1 execute the AT lottery, and when they win the AT lottery, they execute the AT after a predetermined number of games have been played. The initial number of AT games is determined when the AT is won or when the AT is started, and the number of AT games is added during the AT. Details regarding the AT lottery method and the like will be omitted in the 37th embodiment.
During AT, when the small winning combination A01 to small winning combination C24 condition device is activated, the correct pressing order for winning the 7-card winning combination is announced. To notify the push order, on the main control board 50 side, the push order instruction information shown in FIG. 301 is displayed on the instruction monitor by activating the instruction function. Further, on the sub-control board 80 side, the image display device 23 displays an image of the correct pressing order (“1, 2, 3”, “left, middle, right”, etc.).

If you win 1BB during non-RT and 1BB non-internal, if you win winning numbers "4" to "21" in Figure 286 and Figure 287 (if you win 1BB and Replay twice), and This is a case where numbers "94" to "97" are won (a case where 1BB and small role D are won twice).
In non-RT and non-1BB games, in games where winning numbers "4" to "21" are won (games in which 1BB and Replay win multiple times), Replay always wins and 1BB never wins. Further, in this game, there is no case where an instruction function is activated or a specific pressing order is suggested on the image display device 23.

In a non-RT and 1BB internal game, when a winning combination is not won (when the winning number is "0"), only 1BB is the operating conditional device, so 1BB can be won in the game. However, since the symbol combination of 1BB is "PB≠1", 1BB will not win if you do not press it. In addition, in a non-RT and 1BB internal game, when a winning combination is not won, 1BB can be won by aiming at the symbol combination of 1BB, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.
In a non-RT and 1BB internal game, when 1BB wins when a combination is not won, the game shifts to 1BB operation, and when 1BB does not win, the non-RT and 1BB internal game continues from the next game onwards.
In the non-RT and 1BB internal game, when the winning combination is not won, operation information of the stop switch 42 for avoiding winning of 1BB is not notified. However, when a combination is not won in a non-RT and 1BB internal game (a game in which 1BB can be won), an effect (such as a reel flash) indicating that 1BB can be won may be performed.

In addition, in non-RT (non-internal or internal), when the small win D condition device is activated (when winning numbers "94" to "97" are won), 1BB may be won. As shown in FIG. 285, for example, firstly, when the small winning combination D1 condition device is activated, if the left first stop is "PB=1", any of the small winning combinations 025 to 040 (1 card winning) is This is because 1BB will be displayed at its maximum when the prize is won, but when the first stop is in the middle or on the right.
In this case, the content of the notification differs depending on whether the game is in AT mode or not.

In non-RT, when AT is not being executed, when the small winning combination D condition device is activated, the pressing order for winning a 1-card winning combination is notified in order to avoid winning a 1BB winning combination. For example, when the small win D1 condition device is activated, the left first stop is notified. Specifically, the main control board 50 selects either the push order instruction number "A1" or "A2" in FIG. 301. An example of a selection method is to select "A1" or "A2" by lottery with a probability of 50%. Then, press order instruction information corresponding to the selected press order instruction number is displayed on the instruction monitor (operation of instruction function).
Further, the sub-control board 80 displays an image of the push order corresponding to the push order instruction number. For example, when the selected push order instruction number is "A1", the sub control board 80 displays the push order ("1, 2, 3", "left, middle, right", etc.) on the image display device 23. Display the image.

In addition, in non-RT, when AT is not being executed, when the small winning combination D2 condition device is activated, the middle first stop is notified in order to avoid winning of 1BB. Specifically, the main control board 50 selects either the push order instruction number "A3" or "A4" in FIG. 301. As a method of selection, selection may be made by lottery in the same manner as above. Then, the push order instruction information corresponding to the selected push order instruction number is displayed on the instruction monitor (operation of the instruction function), and the image display device 23 displays an image of the push order corresponding to the push order instruction number.

Furthermore, in non-RT, when AT is not being executed, when the small winning combination D3 condition device is activated, the push order "312" is notified in order to avoid winning 1BB. Specifically, the main control board 50 selects the push order instruction number "A5" in FIG. 301. Then, the push order instruction information "5" corresponding to the selected push order instruction number "A5" is displayed on the instruction monitor (operation of the instruction function), and the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number "A5" is displayed on the image display device 23. "312" is displayed as an image.

Furthermore, in non-RT, when AT is not being executed, when the small winning combination D4 condition device is activated, the push order "321" is notified in order to avoid winning 1BB. Specifically, the main control board 50 selects the push order instruction number "A6" in FIG. 301. Then, the push order instruction information "6" corresponding to the selected push order instruction number "A6" is displayed on the instruction monitor (operation of the instruction function), and the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number "A6" is displayed on the image display device 23. Display “321” as an image.
As described above, in non-RT, when AT is not in progress, when the small winning combination D condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated to notify the pressing order for winning a 1-card winning combination. If the stop switch 42 is operated in accordance with the order, 1BB, which has a winning number, will not win in the game.

On the other hand, in non-RT, when AT is being executed and the small role D condition device is activated, in order to win 1BB, there is an effect that suggests the push order to win 1BB (the operation mode for winning 1BB is perform a performance that is understandable to the public.
Here, in non-RT, if the small role D condition device is activated after winning AT and before the AT is executed (during the AT precursor), an effect that suggests the push order to win 1BB will be executed. Whether or not to do so is optional. If an effect suggesting the push order to win 1BB during the AT precursor is executed, the player can know that the AT will be won (that the AT will be executed from now on). Therefore, if you want to avoid players from knowing about the winning of AT, after the start of AT, in a game where the small role D condition device is activated, you can perform an effect that suggests the push order to win 1BB. . Alternatively, if a performance suggesting the push order for winning 1BB is executed during the AT precursor and the performance is used as an AT winning confirmation performance, the performance may be output during the AT precursor.

As a method of executing an effect that suggests the push order to win 1BB when the small winning combination D condition device is activated, the content shown in FIG. 302 described above is displayed as an image.
Further, in this case, the push order instruction number "A7" is selected, and "7" in FIG. 301 is displayed on the instruction monitor.
In non-RT, if AT is being executed and 1BB is won when the small winning combination D condition device is activated, 1BB will be activated and AT from the next game.

In addition, the total number of winning numbers "94" to "97" is "7360" (winning probability is approximately "11.2"%), so in most cases, winning numbers "94" to "97" are placed during AT. It is thought that if you win one of ``97'', you will be given a chance to win 1BB. However, if the winning numbers "94" to "97" are not won during the AT, the AT is executed without RT.
Furthermore, even when AT is executed without RT, the number of non-winning positions for the winning combination is "3638", so when it becomes a non-winning game for the winning combination, there is a possibility that 1BB will win. . Even if AT is in progress, in a game where the winning combination is not won, a performance suggesting that 1BB will be won will not be executed, but if 1BB is won, as above, if 1BB is in operation and AT is The game progresses in this state.
However, in a game where the winning combination is not won during AT, an effect (such as the above-mentioned reel flash) suggesting that 1BB will be won may be executed. This is because if the player shifts from non-RT to RT1 (via 1BB game) earlier, it will be advantageous for the player in the long run.

Regardless of whether AT is being executed or not, when the operation of 1BB is finished, it transitions to non-RT and non-1BB internal state. If the pattern symbol combination stops before 1BB is won, it will shift to RT1 and 1BB not inside, and if 1BB is won after that, it will become RT1 and 1BB inside.
On the other hand, if you win 1BB before the pattern symbol combination stops, it will be non-RT and 1BB is inside, and after that, it will be non-RT until you win AT and 1BB is won based on the execution of AT. And the inside of 1BB is maintained.

Further, as described above, the ball payout rate is different between non-RT and inside 1BB and RT1 and inside 1BB. Therefore, after finishing the 1BB operation and moving to non-RT, there will be an advantage/disadvantage in the payout rate depending on whether the ball is moved to non-RT and inside 1BB, or whether it is moved to RT1 and inside 1BB. Specifically, the ball payout rate is lower in non-RT than in RT1.
Therefore, in the 37th embodiment, in order to bring the ball payout rate close to that of RT1 and 1BB inside when it is non-RT and inside 1BB, when the push order bell is won (when the small winning combination A01 to small winning combination C24 condition device is activated) The correct press order is notified at a predetermined rate (instruction function is activated).
In addition, in non-RT, there is a non-winning of the winning combination, and in non-RT and non-AT, it is necessary to keep an eye on the winning combination to avoid winning the 1BB when the winning combination is not won. Therefore, in order to encourage the transition from non-RT to RT1, when AT is started in non-RT, an instruction is given to win 1BB in a game where 1BB can be won.
Note that the number set inside RB while 1BB is in operation is approximately the same as the number set inside RT1 and 1BB. Therefore, if AT is executed while 1BB is in operation and inside RB, the same ball payout as when AT is executed while RT1 and 1BB is inside can be obtained.

Here, the ball payout rate and the like in non-RT and RT1 will be explained.
For non-RTs, as mentioned above, the non-winning probability is "3638/65536". On the other hand, the non-winning probability in RT1 is "0". Furthermore, the probability of winning a small winning combination is the same for non-RT and RT1. Therefore, the ball payout rate is higher in RT1 than in non-RT.
Here, the "ball output rate" is defined as "number of out coins/number of in coins" as in the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment. The "number of coins in" refers to the number of coins bet (specified number), and is "3" when the accessory is not activated.

Furthermore, the "number of coins out" refers to the expected value of the number of coins to be paid out. For example, when the pressing order bell is won, it is assumed that the correct pressing order is at a rate of 1/6 and a winning combination of 7 cards is won. In addition, if the first stop is correct and the second stop is incorrect (ratio ``1/6''), a 1-card winning combination will be won at a rate of ``1/2'', and a winning combination will be missed at a rate of ``1/2''. shall be. Furthermore, in the case of an incorrect answer at the first stop (ratio "2/3"), it is assumed that a one-card winning combination is won at a ratio "1/8" and is lost at a ratio "7/8".

Furthermore, when the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the first method is to set the number of out pieces in the current game to ``0'' and the number of in pieces in the next game to ``0''. A second method is to set the number of coins out in the current game to "3" and the number of coins in for the next game to be "3". In the example below, the latter is used for calculation.
Furthermore, although the ball payout rate differs depending on settings 1 to 6, the ball payout rate is calculated using setting 1 as an example.

The expected value of the number of coins to be paid out for non-RT is as follows.
(a) Expected number of coins paid out based on replay 8978/65536
(b) Expected number of coins to be paid out based on pressing order bell 45216/65536 x (7 x 1/6 + 1 x 1/2 x 1/6 + 1 x 1/3 x 1/8 + 1 x 1/3 x 1/8)
(c) Expected number of payouts based on small role D 1840/65536×1×4
It should be noted that when the small winning combination D condition device is activated, it is assumed that the 1-card winning combination is "PB=1" and a prize is won.
(d) Expected number of payouts based on minor role E and minor role F 340/65536×1+4/65536×7
It should be noted that when the small winning combination E condition device is activated, it is assumed that the 1-card winning combination is "PB=1" and a prize is won.
From the above, the expected value of the number of coins to be paid out in non-RT is approximately "1.4488".
Therefore, the ball payout rate is
1.4488/3≒0.4829 (48.29%)
becomes.

On the other hand, in RT1, only the replay winning probability is different.
In RT1, the expected value of the number of coins paid out based on replay is:
12616/65536
It is.
Therefore, the expected value of the number of coins to be paid out in RT1 is approximately "1.6153".
Therefore, the ball payout rate is
1.6153/3≒0.5384 (53.84%)
becomes.

Also, the difference in the expected number of payouts between RT1 and non-RT is as follows:
1.6153-1.4488=0.1665
becomes.
Therefore, in order to increase the expected value of the number of coins paid out by "0.1665" when the push order bell is won, if the correct push order is announced once every x times,
45216/65536×7×1/x=0.1665
All you have to do is satisfy.

Note that with the above calculation formula, it is not possible to calculate an accurate value to make the non-RT ball payout rate and the RT1 ball payout rate the same (if the probability of hitting the correct answer increases, the Since the probability of the correct pressing order is low, it is necessary to subtract that amount from the probability of the incorrect pressing order.) However, in order to simplify the calculation formula, an approximate value is calculated.
Therefore,
x≒29
becomes.
In other words, if the correct pressing order is announced once every 29 times (approximately 3.45%) when the pressing order bell is won, the expected value of the number of coins to be paid out (ball payout rate) will be approximately the same for non-RT and RT1. It becomes possible to

Therefore, in the 37th embodiment, in RT1 and outside of 1BB, unless AT is in progress, the correct pressing order is not announced (the instruction function is not activated) when the pressing order bell is won. On the other hand, in non-RT and non-inside 1BB, the correct pressing order is notified (the instruction function is activated) at a rate of about 3.45%.
In addition, in order to control in this way, for example, when the push order bell is won, a lottery with a probability of winning of about 3.45% is executed, and when the lottery is won, the correct answer press order is announced. .

Second, since the total number of pressing order bells is "45216" as mentioned above, the correct pressing order is announced for the number corresponding to "1560", which is about 3.45%. An example of this is to set it in advance.
For example, since the sum of the number "1520" of the small win B24 and the total value "10 x 4" of the small win C15 to C24 is "1560", the small win B24 and the small win C15 to small An example of this is setting in advance to notify the correct pressing order when winning combination C24.

In the 37th embodiment, when it becomes RT1 and 1BB inside, it is assumed that the game is played without winning 1BB and with 1BB inside.
Furthermore, within RT1 and 1BB, the non-winning probability is "0" as described above, so there is no case where 1BB wins based on the winning combination. Among RT1 and 1BB, 1BB has a possibility of winning when the small win D condition device is activated. Therefore, when the small winning combination D condition device is activated, the pressing order is to prevent winning of 1BB, and the pressing order to win winning of 1 winning combination (PB=1) is notified. This point is the same as during non-RT.

In addition, based on the fact that the pattern symbol combination has stopped during non-RT and 1BB non-internal, after becoming RT1 and 1BB non-internal, the following will occur.
First, during RT1 and 1BB non-internal, in games where winning numbers "4" to "21" are won (games where 1BB and Replay win multiple times), Replay always wins and 1BB never wins. Further, in this game, no instruction function is activated or a specific pressing order is suggested on the image display device 23. Therefore, in this game, Replay always wins regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed, and there is no case where 1BB wins. Then, from the next game, it will be RT1 and 1BB inside.
In addition, during RT1 and 1BB non-internal, in games where winning numbers "94" to "97" are won (games where 1BB and small role D are won at the same time), the pressing order to avoid winning the 1BB is instructed. Therefore, if you follow the pressing order, there is no chance that 1BB will win.

As described above, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, the following is performed as a suggestion effect of the operation of the instruction function and the order of pressing. Note that the operation of the instruction function and the presentation suggesting the push order can be executed only during the advantageous section, and the operation of the instruction function and the presentation suggesting the push order cannot be executed during the non-advantageous section (normal section). In the following, it is assumed that the instruction function is activated and the push order suggestion effect is performed in an advantageous section.
(1) During non-RT a) During non-AT When the small winning combination D condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated in order to win a 1-card winning combination (not to win a 1BB winning combination), and the press order for winning a 1-card winning combination is notified. .
In addition, when the small winning combination A1 to small winning combination C24 condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated at a predetermined rate (in the above example, once every 29 times) in order to get the ball payout rate close to that of RT1, and a 7-card winning combination is activated. Notify the order in which to press the button. However, as will be described later, there may be cases where the instruction function is not activated.
b) During AT When the small winning combination A1 to small winning combination C24 condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated to notify the pressing order to win the 7-card winning combination. However, as will be described later, there may be cases where the instruction function is not activated.
Further, when the small winning combination D condition device is activated, a push order suggestion effect for winning 1BB is executed (it may be executed during the AT precursor). In this case, "7" is displayed on the instruction monitor.

(2) During RT1 a) During non-AT When the small winning combination D condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated in order to win a 1-card winning combination (not to win a 1BB winning combination), and notifies the pressing order for winning a 1-card winning combination.
b) During AT When the small winning combination A1 to small winning combination C24 condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated to notify the pressing order to win the 7-card winning combination. However, as will be described later, there may be cases where the instruction function is not activated.
Further, when the small winning combination D condition device is activated, an instruction function is activated to win a 1-card winning combination (not to win a 1BB winning combination), and the pressing order for winning a 1-card winning combination is notified.

The instruction-inclusive accessory ratio needs to be less than 70% in 175,000 games. Therefore, if the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio in 175,000 games is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 68% or more), the push order indicator will change until the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio reaches the predetermined ratio (for example, less than 65%). An example of this is not executing the instruction function at the time of winning.
Alternatively, a conditional device is provided such that when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct order, a 1 piece small winning combination or a 3 piece small winning combination is won, and the proportion of the designated winning parts is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 68% or higher). ), the instruction function is not activated for a 7-card combination, but the instruction function may be activated when a conditional device that makes it possible to win a 1-card combination or a 3-card combination is activated.
In addition, if the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio is more than a predetermined value (for example, 68% or more), the instruction function will not be activated, but for example, when the small role A1 condition device is activated, an image will be displayed as "1・?・?" However, it is possible to carry out a notification that increases the probability of winning a 7-card combination compared to the case where the instruction function is not activated.

If the specifications are set as in the 37th embodiment, the replay winning probability can be set low even within 1BB. As a result, the probability of winning the push order bell can be increased accordingly, so that the gaming machine can have a high instantaneous winning rate.
In addition, when the small role D condition device is activated, it is possible to avoid winning a 1BB by activating the instruction function, so it is easier to avoid winning a 1BB compared to a specification that avoids winning a 1BB by pressing the eyes. can. However, when compared with the 38th embodiment described later, the possibility that 1BB will be won by mistake is higher than in the 38th embodiment.

Note that, as is clear from the thirty-seventh embodiment, the instruction function may be activated even during non-AT. On the other hand, the instruction function may not be activated even during AT.
Therefore, "non-AT" is not necessarily a gaming state in which the instruction function is not activated. Similarly, "AT" is not necessarily a gaming state that activates the instruction function.
However, it is clear that during non-AT, when a winning number that enables the instruction function to be activated is won, the proportion of the instruction function not being activated is higher than the proportion of the instruction function being activated.
Similarly, during AT, when a winning number that allows the instruction function to be activated is won, it is clear that the proportion of the instruction function being activated is higher than the proportion of not operating the instruction function.
Here, the above-mentioned "ratio of activating (not activating) the instruction function" particularly indicates the ratio when the small winning combination A to small winning combination C condition device is activated (when the push order bell is won).
In other words, the ratio (100%) of activating the instruction function to avoid winning 1BB when the small role D condition device is activated in a non-AT, and the rate (100%) of activating the instruction function when the minor role D condition device is activated in an AT. 100%) means the same. Here, in AT and RT1, when the small winning combination D condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated to avoid winning 1BB. On the other hand, in non-RT and AT, when the small winning combination D condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated to encourage winning of 1BB.

Note that the ratio of activating the instruction function in non-ATs is not always constant, and in the 37th embodiment, the ratio of activating the instruction function in non-ATs is higher than in RT1. Specifically, in RT1, as a general rule, the ratio of operating the instruction function when the small winning combination A to small winning C condition device is activated during non-AT is "0". On the other hand, in non-RT and non-AT, the instruction function is activated at a predetermined rate (in the above example, about once every 29 times) when the small win A to small win C condition device is activated.
In addition, the above interpretation includes a case where the instruction function can hardly be activated even during AT because the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio in the 175,000 games has always been a predetermined value (for example, 68% or more). Very rare cases are excluded.

The non-AT of the thirty-seventh embodiment as described above (a state in which the proportion of not operating the instruction function is higher than the proportion of activating the instruction function when a winning number that allows the instruction function to be activated is won) is defined as `` This state may also be referred to as "first notification control state".
Further, the AT of the 37th embodiment (a state in which the proportion of operating the instruction function is higher than the proportion of not operating the instruction function when a winning number capable of activating the instruction function is won) is defined as "second notification". Sometimes referred to as "control state".
In any case, in the 37th embodiment, "non-AT" is a gaming state that has both a case where the instruction function is not activated and a case where the instruction function is activated. Similarly, "AT" is a gaming state that has both a case where the instruction function is not activated and a case where the instruction function is activated.

<38th embodiment>
In the 38th embodiment, in the first game of the advantageous section, it is confirmed which RT the current RT is, and a decision regarding AT (preferential treatment, cold treatment, etc.) is executed according to the RT. In the following example, the "decision related to AT (preferential treatment, preferential treatment, etc.)" is related to the number of AT ceiling games.
In the 38th embodiment, an AT ceiling game count is provided. Here, the "AT ceiling number of games" refers to the maximum (upper limit) number of games that can be reached without winning an AT in a non-AT in an advantageous section. When the number of AT ceiling games is reached in a non-AT, it is decided to execute AT (here, meaning "first stage AT" which will be described later), and the (first stage) AT is activated. Furthermore, when the AT ceiling number of games is reached, the AT (first stage) may be activated immediately, or the AT (first stage) may be activated via a sign of the predetermined number of games. Good too.
Further, in the thirty-eighth embodiment, the AT includes a first stage AT and a second stage AT. The first stage AT is an AT that is selected by lottery when 1BB is not activated. Then, when the first stage AT is won and the game moves to the 1BB game, the first stage AT is executed during the 1BB game, and the second stage AT is drawn by lottery during the 1BB game. The first stage AT ends with the end of the 1BB game. When the second stage AT is won, the second stage AT is executed when the 1BB is not activated after the 1BB game ends.

FIG. 303 is an RT transition diagram in the 38th embodiment.
Here, in the 37th embodiment, only when the gaming state is non-RT, 1BB is allowed to be won after the AT is executed, but 1BB is not allowed to be won when the player is staying in RT1.
On the other hand, in the thirty-eighth embodiment, within 1BB (RT2 in FIG. 303), when it is an advantageous section and the first stage AT has not been won, 1BB is not allowed to win. For example, similar to the 37th embodiment, when the small winning combination D condition device is activated, the pressing order that does not allow winning of 1BB is notified.
On the other hand, when winning the first stage AT in 1BB (RT2 in Figure 303), win 1BB no matter which RT you stay in and execute the first stage AT in the 1BB game. . Furthermore, during an AT and 1BB game (particularly during RT3, which will be described later in RB), whether to execute the second stage AT is determined by lottery or the like. Then, when winning the lottery, the second stage AT is executed in RT1 or RT2 after the 1BB game ends. On the other hand, when the lottery is not won, the first stage AT ends at the end of the 1BB game. That is, in this case, the process does not proceed to the second stage AT.

As shown in FIG. 303, non-RT, RT1, and RT2 are provided as RTs when 1BB is not activated (during normal gaming). Non-RT is a gaming state (a type of RT) that transitions after RWM initialization, and RT1 is a 1BB non-internal RT that transitions after the 1BB game ends. RT2 is an RT within 1BB that is transferred when 1BB is won in a non-RT or RT1.

When 1BB is won in RT2, the game shifts to 1BB operation and RB non-internal state. In the 1BB game of the 38th embodiment, a general game is first executed, and an RB lottery is executed in this general game. If you win RB, you will move to RT3 (1BB activated and RB inside). Then, when the RB that carries over winning wins, the system shifts to 1BB operation and RB operation.
The 1BB operation is set when the number of coins acquired in the 1BB game reaches a predetermined number. Further, the RB operation ends after two games or two winnings, and if the termination condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied at the end of the RB operation, the RB operation shifts to the 1BB operation again and the RB is not inside.
When the conditions for ending the 1BB operation are met, the 1BB operation is ended and the process moves to RT1 (RT after 1BB). If you win 1BB in RT1, move to RT2.

Although the description of the type and number of condition devices in the thirty-eighth embodiment will be omitted, it is possible to use the same condition devices and number of conditions as described in the thirty-seventh embodiment, for example.
For example, in FIG. 303, the number of non-RTs (RT after RWM initialization) may be set to the numbers shown in FIGS. 286 and 287. Further, in FIG. 303, the number of RT1 (RT after 1BB) may be set to the number shown in FIGS. 288 and 289. Furthermore, in FIG. 303, the number of RT2 (RT inside 1BB) may be set to the number shown in FIGS. 292 and 293.

Furthermore, in FIG. 303, the numbers set in 1BB operation and RB non-internal may be set to the numbers shown in FIGS. 294 and 295.
In addition, in FIG. 303, the setting number of RT3 (1BB operating and inside RB) may be set to the setting number shown in FIGS. 296 and 297.
Furthermore, in FIG. 303, the numbers for 1BB operation and RB operation may be the numbers shown in FIGS. 298 and 299.

In the 38th embodiment, when AT is won in non-RT or RT1, the player waits until 1BB is won.
Further, in RT2, when the first stage AT is not won, when the small winning combination D condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated to avoid winning 1BB as in the 37th embodiment.
When the first stage AT is won, when the small role D condition device is activated, a performance suggesting a 1BB win (a performance that allows the player to understand the operation mode for winning the 1BB) is executed. .
The same thing applies when you win AT in non-RT or RT1 and then win 1BB.

In addition, if you win the second stage AT while 1BB is active and inside RB (RT3), end the 1BB game and move to RT1, and execute the second stage AT in this RT1, Even if you win 1BB during the execution of stage AT and move to RT2, the effect for winning 1BB will not be output when the small role D condition device is activated, and you will not win the first stage AT. In the same way as when there is no prize, the instruction function is activated to avoid winning 1BB.

In the 38th embodiment, even if the power is turned on/off or the settings are changed, the winning information of 1BB is not deleted. Therefore, even if the power is turned on/off or the settings are changed, it will not shift to non-RT. The transition to non-RT after factory shipment is limited to when the entire range of the storage area of the RWM 53 is initialized when an unintended event occurs, such as when the RWM 53 is inserted or removed. Note that when the RWM 53 is inserted or removed, the entire range of the storage area of the RWM 53 including setting value information is initialized as a countermeasure against misbehavior.
Here, in this embodiment, the main CPU 55, RWM 53, and ROM 54 in FIG. erased). Therefore, if the entire range of the storage area of the RWM 53 has been initialized, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act such as a fraudulent act has been committed.

FIG. 304 is a time chart showing the relationship between RT transition, the start and end of the advantageous section, and the presence or absence of AT winning in the 38th embodiment.
In the example of the RT transition diagram shown in FIG. 303, when the RB wins while 1BB is active and inside the RB (RT3), it is shown that the RB moves to the 1BB and RB inside (RT3). To continue a game with 1BB operating and RB inside without winning a prize.

In addition, as mentioned above, if the first stage AT lottery is executed in an advantageous section and 1BB is not activated (non-RT, RT1, or RT2) and the first stage AT lottery is won, 1BB will be won. Then, the game is shifted to a 1BB game, and a second stage AT lottery is executed inside the RB of the 1BB game. When winning the second stage AT lottery, the second stage AT starts at RT1 after the end of the 1BB game. On the other hand, when the second stage AT lottery is not won within the RB of the 1BB game, the first stage AT ends with the end of the 1BB game (1BB operation), and the second stage AT is not executed.

In FIG. 304, "non-advantageous" indicates a non-advantageous section (normal section). Similarly, "advantageous" indicates an advantageous section. In addition, in the example of FIG. 304, for the sake of simplicity of explanation, it is assumed that in the non-advantageous section, the lottery for moving to an advantageous section is won in the first game, and when the transfer to the advantageous section is determined, the next game will be an advantageous section. . However, in reality, in the non-advantageous section, the advantageous section transfer lottery is performed based on the winning combination of the game, so it is not necessarily the case that the player wins the advantageous section transfer lottery in the first game of the non-advantageous section.
In the normal route, non-RT occurs only at the time of initial shipment from the factory. The first non-RT game is a non-advantageous section, but if the first game wins an advantageous section transfer lottery and the transfer to the advantageous section is determined, the second game will be transferred to the advantageous section. Also, if you win 1BB in non-RT, you will move to RT2 (1BB internal RT) from the next game. Then, when winning the first stage AT lottery in RT2, 1BB is awarded. When 1BB wins, the game shifts to the RB non-internal state of the 1BB game. In the non-internal medium game of the 1BB game, the second stage AT lottery is not executed in this example. If the player wins the RB and moves into the RB of the 1BB game, the second stage AT lottery is executed.
Inside the RB of the 1BB game, FIG. 304 shows four types of routes: route A, route B, route C, and route E.

Route A shows an example in which the second stage AT is won during the RB of a 1BB game. In this case, when the 1BB game is finished and the game moves to RT1, the second stage AT is started. In this example, the player wins 1BB during the second stage AT, moves to RT2, and then ends the second stage AT at RT2. When ending the second stage AT in RT2, the advantageous section is ended at the same time. Then, in the next game, the advantageous section transfer lottery is executed again, and when the advantageous section transfer lottery is won and the transfer to the advantageous section is determined, the transfer is made to the advantageous section.
In the 38th embodiment, when intentionally ending the advantageous section, as shown in FIGS. 149 and 150 (23rd embodiment), the advantageous section end preparation ( M_ADVEND_STBY) saves "1" in the advantageous section clear counter. As a result, in the advantageous section clear counter management, the advantageous section clear counter value after subtraction becomes "0", and the advantageous section end processing (RWM area related to instruction function (for example, storage area for main game state, difference counter, etc.) initialization) is executed.
In the case of route A, the first game in the advantageous section is RT2. When the first game in the advantageous section is RT2, the AT ceiling game count is set high (for example, to "777" games).

Route B shows an example (1) when the second stage AT is not won within the RB of a 1BB game. In this case, even if the 1BB game ends and the game moves to RT1, the second stage AT does not start. Then, when the AT of the second stage is not won within the RB of the 1BB game, a lottery at the end of the advantageous section is executed. Route B is an example in which the lottery at the end of the advantageous section was not won. In this case, as shown in route B, the advantageous section ends when 1BB is won in RT1 (at the end of RT1). Then, in the first game of RT2 of the next game, an advantageous section transfer lottery is executed, and when the advantageous section transfer lottery is won and transfer to the advantageous section is determined, the transfer is made to the advantageous section. In this case, like route A, the first game in the advantageous section is RT2, so the number of AT ceiling games is the same as route A (eg, "777" game).

Route C shows an example (2) when the second stage AT is not won within the RB of the 1BB game.
Routes B and C both show examples where the second stage of AT is not won within the RB of a 1BB game, but route C, for example, executes a production in which the main character loses in a special way. This is an example in which a player wins a lottery to decide whether or not to play, and the performance is executed. In such a case, the AT ceiling game count is set to be given preferential treatment. Here, there is a flag (AT ceiling preferential treatment flag) for determining whether to give preferential treatment to the number of AT ceiling games. When a special performance such as is executed, the AT ceiling preferential treatment flag is turned on.

In route C, like route B, AT does not start even if the 1BB game ends and moves to RT1. However, in route C, since the AT ceiling preferential treatment flag is turned on, the advantageous section is set to end at the end of the 1BB game. In other words, when the AT ceiling preferential treatment flag is off, it is set to maintain the advantageous section at the end of the 1BB game.
Then, after the 1BB game ends, it moves to RT1, but in the first game of RT1, an advantageous section transition lottery is executed, and when the advantageous section transition lottery is won and the transition to the advantageous zone is determined, the transition to the advantageous zone is decided. Migrate. In this case, unlike route B, the first game in the advantageous section is RT1, so the number of AT ceiling games is set low (for example, to "333" games).

Route E shows an example of an irregular bonus. As mentioned above, when winning the first stage AT lottery in RT2, 1BB is awarded, but in route E, 1BB is awarded even though the first stage AT lottery is not won in RT2. This is an example of when you (accidentally) win a prize. In this case, within the RB of the 1BB game, the second stage AT lottery is not executed or is given a cold treatment, and the advantageous section end lottery is also not executed. Therefore, even if the game moves to RT1 and then to RT2 after the 1BB game ends, it remains in the advantageous section.

Route D indicates a special route different from the above-mentioned normal route.
As described above, when the setting change is executed, the RT information and the 1BB winning carryover information are maintained. However, since the information related to the advantageous section is deleted due to the setting change, the section shifts to the non-advantageous section. Therefore, as shown in RT2 at the beginning of the normal route, if the settings are changed when RT2 is in the advantageous section, the first game will be in the non-advantageous section, but in this first game, the lottery to move to the advantageous section will be performed. If the player wins the advantageous section shift lottery and decides to move to the advantageous section, the player will move to the advantageous section from the next game.
Therefore, if it becomes non-RT after being installed in the hall, there is a high possibility that it is a fraudulent act (rogue act). Therefore, when the advantageous section transfer lottery is executed in non-RT and the transfer is made to the advantageous section, the AT ceiling game count is set high (for example, to "777" games) as in route A.

Furthermore, when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section in a non-RT, the RT information of the first game in the advantageous section is stored, and the first step is to move to a 1BB game, and then to the RB inside (RT3) of the 1BB game. When the transition is made, the candidate will not be elected to the second stage of AT (AT not elected (3)). Furthermore, after ending the advantageous section within the RB of the 1BB game and making it a non-advantageous section, an advantageous section transfer lottery is executed in the non-advantageous section, the advantageous section transfer lottery is won, and the transfer to the advantageous section is determined. Then, the next game will be shifted to the advantageous section. When shifting to an advantageous section during the RB of a 1BB game, the number of AT ceiling games is set high.
By setting in this way, it is possible to prevent balls from being easily acquired unintentionally due to fraudulent acts.
Note that even when the special route is selected, if a setting change is executed after winning 1BB and becoming within 1BB, it is possible to shift to RT2 (normal route).

As described above, in the example of FIG. 304, the number of AT ceiling games is varied depending on which RT is the first game in the advantageous section.
in particular,
When the first game in an advantageous section is non-RT (special route): AT ceiling high When the first game in an advantageous section is RT1 (route C): AT ceiling low When the first game in an advantageous section is RT2 (Route A, B): AT ceiling height When the first game in the advantageous section is a 1BB game (Route D): AT ceiling height is set.
By setting in this manner, the expected value until AT winning can be varied depending on which RT is the first game in the advantageous section.

Therefore, for example, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to give preferential treatment to decisions related to AT, and when the lottery is won, a predetermined flag is turned on. When the predetermined flag is on, the advantageous section is ended at a predetermined RT (in the above example, inside the RB of a 1BB game). Then, by setting the lottery to win the advantageous section transition immediately after the end of the advantageous section, it is possible to transfer to the advantageous section at a desired RT. This makes it possible to arbitrarily give preferential treatment to AT-related decisions.

In addition, in the above example, when the first game in the advantageous section is RT1, the AT ceiling is lowered, and when the first game in the advantageous section is RT other than RT1, the AT ceiling is raised, but this is not limited to this. For example, when the first game in an advantageous section is RT1, the AT ceiling is set low, when the first game in the advantageous section is RT2, the AT ceiling is set to normal, and the first game in the advantageous section is set at RT1 and RT2. If the RT is other than that, the AT ceiling may be made higher, etc., and the AT ceiling may be made more detailed. In addition to the AT ceiling, when the first game in an advantageous section is RT1, the AT winning probability is set as a high probability, and when the first game in an advantageous section is RT2, the AT winning probability is set as a normal probability. When the first game is an RT other than RT1 and RT2, the AT winning probability may be set to a low probability.
In addition, in the 38th embodiment, an example was shown in which a decision related to AT (preferential treatment, cold treatment, etc.) is executed according to the RT of the first game in an advantageous section, but the present invention is not limited to this. AT-related decisions may be made depending on the operating conditional device or RT.
Further, the RT information at the time of transition to the advantageous section may be held, and a decision regarding AT (preferential treatment, cold treatment, etc.) may be executed in accordance with the RT information in the first game of the advantageous section.

<39th embodiment>
In the thirty-seventh embodiment described above, the specified number of coins when the accessory is not activated is "3" regardless of the gaming state (RT) (see FIG. 266, etc.).
On the other hand, in the 39th embodiment, the game is executed with the specified number "2" until winning 1BB, and after winning 1BB (within 1BB), the game is executed with the specified number "3". Assumed.
When winning 1BB with the specified number "2", 1BB can be won only in games with the specified number "2". In other words, after winning 1BB with the specified number "2", when playing a game with the specified number "3", the 1BB will not win even if the game is played when the winning combination is not won. .
Therefore, in the 39th embodiment, after winning 1BB with the specified number "2", a game is executed with the specified number "3". In the 1BB internal game with the specified number "3", there is no case where 1BB wins, and non-AT and AT are repeated with 1BB internal. Note that the specifications for preventing 1BB from winning due to the different prescribed numbers are the same as in the twelfth embodiment (FIG. 58) described above.

The symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in the 39th embodiment is the same as that in the 37th embodiment (FIG. 265).
Furthermore, in the 39th embodiment, the winning combination is different from that in the 37th embodiment.
FIGS. 305 to 311 are diagrams showing symbol combinations of winning combinations, the number of payouts, etc. in the 39th embodiment.
In the 39th embodiment, two types of 1BBA and 1BBB are provided as 1BB. As shown in FIG. 305, when the accessory is not activated, 1BBA is 1BB drawn in a game with a specified number of "3", and 1BBB is 1BB drawn in a game with a specified number of "2".
Furthermore, in the 39th embodiment, while the 1BB is in operation, the RB is of a type that operates continuously (without stopping the symbol combinations corresponding to the RB), so no symbol combinations corresponding to the RB are provided.

In the 39th embodiment, replays are provided as replays 01 to 12.
Here, Replay 01 of the role number "003" to Replay 07 of the role number "027" are the same symbol combinations as Replay 01 of the role number "004" to Replay 07 of the role number "028" of the 37th embodiment. be.
Furthermore, Replay 08 with role number “028” to Replay 12 with role number “091” are the same symbol combinations as Replay 11 with role number “086” to Replay 15 with role number “149” in the 37th embodiment. .

The small winnings include small winnings 001 to 117. Small winning combinations 001 to 008 are different from the 37th embodiment in that they are 15-card winning combinations.
In addition, the minor winnings 001 of the winning number "092" to the minor winnings 112 of the winning number "215" are the same as the minor winnings 001 of the winning number "150" to the minor winnings 112 of the winning number "273" in the 37th embodiment. It is a pattern combination.
Furthermore, the small winnings 113 with the winning number "216" to the small winnings 117 with the winning number "262" are small winnings specific to the 39th embodiment.

312 to 318 are diagrams showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, etc. in the 39th embodiment.
First, FIG. 312 shows the accessory (particularly 1BBA and 1BBB in the 39th embodiment) condition device.
The 1BBA condition device corresponding to accessory condition device number "1" is a accessory condition device that becomes operable when winning 1BBA. When this 1BBA condition device is activated, it becomes possible to win the winning combination of 1BBA.
Similarly, the 1BBB condition device corresponding to the accessory condition device number "2" is an accessory condition device that can be activated if 1BBB is won, and when the 1BBB condition device is activated, 1BBB can be won.

When the 1BBA condition device is activated, the RBA is activated continuously, and the termination condition is satisfied when more than 33 coins are paid out. Therefore, no accessory condition device number corresponding to the RBA is provided.
Similarly, when the device operates under the 1BBB condition, RBB operates continuously, and the end condition is satisfied when more than 7 coins are paid out. Therefore, no accessory condition device number corresponding to RBB is provided.
Further, both RBA and RBB end with two games or two wins, or end with the end of 1BB operation.
When the operation of RBA or RBB is completed and the operation termination condition of 1BB is not satisfied, RBA or RBB is activated again.

Figures 313 to 318 show winning and replay condition devices. Among the winning and replay condition device numbers, “1” to “16” are condition device numbers related to replay, and “17” to “70” are condition device numbers related to small winnings.
The condition device numbers “1” to “9” related to replay have some winning combinations that are different from the condition device numbers “1” to “9” related to replay in the 37th embodiment, The types of replays that can be stopped depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed are the same as in the thirty-seventh embodiment. Further, the same applies to the reel 31 that can stop the "blue BAR" at the first stop on the right side.

The condition device number “10” related to the replay is different from the condition device number “10” related to the replay in the 37th embodiment in that the replay that stops when “red” is aligned at the first right stop is replay 12. differ.
The condition device number “11” related to replay is the same as the condition device number “11” related to replay in the 37th embodiment.

The condition device number “12” related to replay is different from the condition device number “14” related to replay in the 37th embodiment, although the winning combinations included are different from the 37th embodiment, the chance that can appear is the 37th. This is the same as the condition device number "14" related to replay in the embodiment.
Similarly, the replay-related condition device number "13" is different from the replay-related condition device number "15" in the 37th embodiment, although the winning combinations included are different from those in the 37th embodiment. is the same as the condition device number "15" related to replay in the 37th embodiment.
The condition device numbers “14” to “16” related to replay are different from the condition device numbers “17” to “19” related to replay in the 37th embodiment, although the winning combinations included are different from those in the 37th embodiment. , the stop shapes that can appear (upper left cherry or middle left cherry) are the same as the condition device numbers "17" to "19" related to replay in the 37th embodiment, respectively.

The condition device related to the push order bell in the 39th embodiment includes a small role A01 to small role A24 condition device and a small role B01 to small role B24 condition device, but in the 37th embodiment, the small role C01 to small role B24 condition device are provided. A small role C24 condition device is not provided.
The winning combinations included in the minor winning combinations A01 to minor winning combination A24 condition devices and the winning winning combinations corresponding to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 are the same as the minor winning combinations A01 to minor winning combination A24 condition devices in the 37th embodiment, respectively. is set to . However, in the 39th embodiment, during 1BB operation (RBA operation and RBB operation), there is no case where the small winning combination A01 to small winning combination A24 condition devices are activated (as shown in FIGS. 331 to 334 described later, This differs from the 37th embodiment in that the winning numbers "19" to "42" are not drawn during the 1BB operation.

Furthermore, the small winning combination B01 to small winning combination B24 condition devices are different from the small winning combination B01 to small winning combination B24 condition devices in the 37th embodiment in that the winning combination includes the small winning combination 113, and the winning combination includes the small winning combination 116. This is different from the 37th embodiment in that it is not included. However, in the minor winning combination B01 to minor winning combination B24 condition devices, the winning possible combinations corresponding to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 are set to be the same as in the minor winning combination B01 to minor winning B24 condition devices in the 37th embodiment. There is. In addition, in the 39th embodiment, during 1BB operation (RBA operation and RBB operation), there is no case where the small winning combination B01 to small winning B24 condition devices are activated (as shown in FIGS. 331 to 334 described later, This differs from the 37th embodiment in that the winning numbers "43" to "66" are not drawn during the 1BB operation.

The small winning combination C condition device includes small winning combinations 113 and 114 as winning winning combinations, and is a conditional device in which “PB≠1”. When the small role C condition device is activated, it is possible to stop "Watermelon A/B" - "Watermelon A/B" - "Watermelon A/B" (watermelon set) by pressing the button.
The small winning combination D condition device includes the small winning combination 115 as a winning combination and is a condition that makes it possible to stop the strong chance A, "Watermelon A/B" - "Watermelon A/B" - "Replay" (Watermelon alignment collapse) It is a device. Strong chance number A corresponds to a small hand of 115 (3-card hand).
The small winning combination E condition device includes the small winning combination 116 as a winning winning combination, and is a condition that makes it possible to stop the strong chance item B "Replay" - "Watermelon A/B" - "Watermelon A/B" (watermelon alignment collapse) It is a device. Strong chance number B corresponds to a small winning combination of 116 (3-card winning combination).

The small winning combination F condition device includes small winning combinations 009 to 056 (one-card winning combination) as winning combinations, but even if the symbol combinations of all these winning combinations are added up, "PB≠1" is established in the symbol arrangement. Therefore, when the small win F condition device is activated, a push is required, and the win is "PB≠1".
The small winning combination G condition device includes all the small winning combinations 001 to 116 except the small winning combination 117 as the winning combination, and regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, any of the 15 winning combinations (small winning combination 001 ～Small role 008) is won (PB=1). Further, depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed, for example, the small winning combination 001 is won when the pressing order is 123, the small winning combination 002 is won when the pressing order is 132, and so on.
The small winning combination H condition device includes small winning combinations 009 to 114 and a small winning combination 117 drawn only during 1BB operation as winning winning combinations. Since the small winning combination 117 is drawn only during the 1BB operation, the small winning combination 117 is sometimes referred to as an "increase winning combination". When the small winning combination H condition device is activated, a small winning combination 117 (one-card winning combination) is won with "PB=1".

319 to 334 are diagrams showing number tables (winning probability for each winning number) in the 39th embodiment. In the 39th embodiment, when the accessory is not activated, the game can be played with either the specified number "2" or the specified number "3". Therefore, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, in the game state when the accessory is not activated, the number table for both the prescribed number "2" and the prescribed number "3" is shown.
In the 39th embodiment, in a non-RT and non-internal game, the game is executed with a specified number of "2", and if 1 BBB is won, the next game is shifted to RT1. Then, in RT1, a game is executed with the specified number "3".

First, FIG. 319 and FIG. 320 are diagrams showing the number set in non-RT, non-internal, and specified number "2".
In FIG. 319, for non-RT, non-internal, and specified number "2", only 1BBB is drawn as 1BB (1BBA is not drawn). Further, in the replay, only replay A is drawn. Since the probability of winning 1BBB is ``16384/65536'' for non-RT, non-internal, and specified number "2", 1BBB will be won early.
Note that in a game that is non-RT, non-internal, and has a specified number of "2," in a game where 1BBB is won, 1BBB may be won. If 1BBB is not won in a game in which 1BBB is won, the game will move to RT1 and 1BBB from the next game, and 1BBB will not be won after that. ). On the other hand, when 1BBB is won in a game in which 1BBB is won, the game returns to the non-RT and non-internal game via the 1BB game.
FIG. 321 and FIG. 322 are diagrams showing the number set in non-RT, non-internal, and specified number "3". As mentioned above, in a non-RT and non-internal setting, it is desirable to play a game with the specified number "2", but it is also possible to play with the specified number "3". Therefore, when a game is executed with the specified number "3" in non-RT and non-internal play, the winning probabilities are as shown in FIGS. 321 and 322.

In addition, in the number table, when the specified number is unintended in the game state, it is written as "irregular".
For non-RT, non-internal and specified number "3", 1BBB is not drawn, but 1BBA is drawn. Since the probability of winning 1BBA is "17065/65536", you will win 1BBA early. The details will be described later, but if you win 1BBA during non-RT and non-internal play and carry over the winning of 1BBA, the next game will remain non-RT and will not shift to RT1.

FIGS. 323 and 324 are diagrams showing the number set in RT1 and 1BBB and the specified number "3".
Here, it is set so that 1BBB won with the specified number of "2" will not be won unless the game has the specified number of "2". Similarly, the 1BBA won with the specified number "3" is set so that it will not be won unless the game is played with the specified number "3".
Therefore, if you win 1 BBB with a non-RT, non-internal, and specified number of "2", and if you become RT 1 and 1 BBB internal, if you play the game with the specified number of "3", you will win 1 BBB. There isn't.

As shown in Figure 323, with RT1 and 1BBB inside and the specified number "3", the probability of winning is "17065/65536", but even in a non-winning game, the specified number is "3", so 1BBB will not win. .
In the 39th embodiment, it is assumed that the game continues to be played with RT1 and 1BBB inside and the specified number "3", and when the AT lottery is executed in this gaming state and the AT is won, the AT is set to the end condition. Run until satisfied. In other words, it is assumed that non-AT and AT are repeated within RT1 and 1BBB and in the specified number "3".

FIGS. 325 and 326 are diagrams showing the number set in non-RT and inside 1BBA and the specified number "3". In non-RT and non-internal, 1BBA is won in the game with the specified number of "3", so in non-RT and in 1BBA and in the game with the specified number of "3", when the hand is not won, 1BBA is won. It is possible to win.
FIG. 327 and FIG. 328 are diagrams showing the number set in non-RT and inside 1BBA and the specified number "2". As mentioned above, 1BBA is a special winning combination with the specified number of "3", so in the game state with the specified number of "2", 1BBA will not win even if the winning combination is a non-winning game.

FIG. 329 and FIG. 330 are diagrams showing the number set in RT1 and 1BBB and the specified number "2". As described above, the thirty-ninth embodiment is based on the assumption that the game is played with RT1, 1BBB inside, and the specified number "3". However, within RT1 and 1BBB, it is possible to play even with the specified number "2", so the number corresponding to the specified number "2" is also determined.
When RT1 and 1BBB are inside and the specified number is "2", the non-winning probability of the winning combination is set to "0". Therefore, even if the stipulated number is "2", there is no case where 1BBB, which carries over the winnings, wins the prize.

Here, the ball output rate in RT1 and 1BBB inside and the specified number "3" (FIGS. 323 and 324) is as follows.
(a) Expected number of coins paid out based on replay 8978/65536×3 (≒0.411)
(b) Expected number of coins to be paid out based on pressing order bell 38472/65536 x (15 x 1/6 + 1 x 1/2 x 1/6 + 1 x 1/3 x 1/8 + 1 x 1/3 x 1/8) (≒ 1 .565)
(c) Expected value of number of coins paid out based on small role C 656/65536×1 (≒0.01)
In addition, when the small winning combination C condition device is activated, it is assumed that the winning combination is "PB=1" with one card winning.
(d) Expected value of number of coins paid out based on minor role D and minor role E 164/65536×3×2 (≒0.015)
(e) Expected value of number of coins paid out based on small role G 37/65536×15 (≒0.00847)
From the above, the expected value of the number of coins to be paid out at RT1 and 1BBB inside and the specified number of coins is "3" is approximately "2".
Therefore, the ball payout rate is
2/3≒0.67
becomes.

On the other hand, the ball payout rate in RT1 and 1BBB inside and the specified number "2" (FIGS. 329 and 330) is as follows.
(a) Expected value of number of payouts based on replay 25632/65536×3 (≒1.173)
(b) Expected number of coins to be paid out based on pressing order bell 9600/65536 x (15 x 1/6 + 1 x 1/2 x 1/6 + 1 x 1/3 x 1/8 + 1 x 1/3 x 1/8) (≒0 .391)
(c) Expected value of number of coins paid out based on small role F 30754/65536×1 (≒0.4693)
It should be noted that when the small winning combination F condition device is activated, it is assumed that the 1-card winning combination is "PB=1" and a prize is won.
From the above, the expected value of the number of coins to be paid out when RT1 and 1BBB is inside and the specified number is "2" is approximately "2".

Therefore, the ball payout rate is
2/3≒0.67
becomes.
As a result, within RT1 and 1BBB, the ball payout rate is substantially the same regardless of whether the number is "2" or "3", so there is no advantage/disadvantage in the ball payout rate.
However, the advantageous section transfer lottery and the AT lottery are executed only in games with a specified number of "3". Therefore, there is no benefit to the player even if he plays the game with the specified number "2".

FIGS. 331 and 332 are diagrams showing the number set at the specified number "3" during RBA operation. Note that while the RBA is in operation, it is possible to play only with the specified number "3".
When playing a game with the specified number "3" in a non-RT game and within 1BBA, if you press the symbol combination of 1BBA when the combination is non-winning, you can win 1BBA. If 1BBA wins, 1BBA will be in operation from the next game. While 1BBA is in operation, RBA is in continuous operation.
Note that the ball payout rate during RBA operation is as follows.
(a) Expected value of number of coins paid out based on replay 1571/65536×3 (≒0.0719)
(b) Expected value of number of coins paid out based on small role G 6450/65536×15 (≒1.476)
(c) Expected value of number of coins paid out based on small role H 33045/65536×1 (≒0.504)
From the above, the expected value of the number of coins to be paid out during RBA operation is approximately "2".
Therefore, the ball payout rate is
2/3≒0.67
becomes.

As a result, even if you intentionally execute a game with the specified number of "3" in a non-RT and win 1BBA, and win 1BBA in a non-RT and within 1BBA and execute a 1BBA game, the ball payout rate is Since the value does not exceed 1, there is no benefit to the player.
Furthermore, in the 39th embodiment, the AT lottery is not executed during non-RT and non-internal games, non-RT and 1BBA internal games, and 1BBA operation. As a result, the player cannot receive the benefit of AT winning in these gaming states, so there is no merit in playing the game in these irregular states.

However, during RT1 and 1BBB, if a player attempts to insert three medals but due to an operational error, only inserts two medals and then operates the start switch 42, or if the player operates the start switch 42 after inserting only two medals, or In the case where the start switch 42 is operated after only 2 operations, the game may be executed with the specified number "2". However, this game has the disadvantage that the AT lottery is not executed. Furthermore, in this case, the player is informed that he or she has played the game with the specified number of "2" by means of an effect to be described later.

FIGS. 333 and 334 are diagrams showing the number set at the specified number "3" during RBB operation. As mentioned above, within RT1 and 1BBB, 1BBB will never win. However, in a game that is non-RT, non-internal, and has a prescribed number of "2," 1BBB wins alone, as shown in FIG. 319. Therefore, if you hit the symbol combination of 1BBB in a game where you win 1BBB alone, you can win 1BBB. When 1BBB is won, the game shifts to 1BB game. In the 1BB game based on the winning of 1BBB, the RBB operates continuously as described above. While the RBB is in operation, a lottery is executed according to the numbers shown in FIGS. 333 and 334.

FIG. 335 is a diagram showing RT transition in the 39th embodiment.
When RWM initialization is executed, it transitions to non-RT (and non-internal). Note that "RWM initialization" in FIG. 335 means RWM initialization that is performed during the setting change process when a power-off recovery cannot be performed normally (when an unrecoverable error occurs).
In other words, the RWM initialization shown in FIG. 335 is executed when the RWM 53 is inserted/removed (a rough act) or when the entire range of the RWM 53 is initialized based on the occurrence of an unrecoverable error. be. In other cases, such as turning the power on/off or normal setting change processing, the 1BB winning carryover information is maintained without being erased. However, when the setting change process is executed, the 1BB winning carryover information may be deleted.

When the RWM initialization shown in FIG. 335 is executed, the RT information is also erased and becomes non-RT and non-internal.
In non-RT and non-internal play, as mentioned above, it is assumed that the game is played with the specified number of "2". When playing a game with the specified number of ``2'' while being non-RT and non-internal, the non-RT and non-internal status is maintained until 1 BBB is won. Then, when winning 1BBB, the next game will proceed to RT1 (inside 1BBB). Furthermore, when you win 1BBB in a game where you win 1BBB, 1BB will be in operation (RBB in operation) from the next game. As mentioned above, in a non-RT, non-internal game, and a game with a specified number of "2", there is a case where 1BBB is won in a game where 1BBB is won, so in FIG. 335, 1BBB is won and 1BB is in operation. The diagram shows the case where the transition is made. When 1BBB wins and the game shifts to 1BBB operation, RBB continues to operate. When the termination conditions for 1BBB operation are met, the transition is made to non-RT and non-internal state.

On the other hand, if you win 1BBB in a game that is non-RT, non-internal, and has a specified number of "2", and you do not win 1BBB in that game and move to RT1 and 1BBB internal, as described above, if you win 1BBB in a game with a specified number of "2", In both cases of ``2'' and the specified number ``3'', the symbol combination of 1BBB will not be stopped and displayed. Therefore, unless RWM is initialized, RT1 and 1BBB are maintained. In the market, RT1 and 1BBB internal conditions continue.

On the other hand, if a player plays a game with an unintended specified number of "3" during non-RT and non-internal play and wins 1BBA, the player remains non-RT and shifts to non-RT and 1BBA from the next game. When the game becomes non-RT and within 1BBA, it will not shift to RT1 unless you win 1BBA and go through the 1BBA game.
During non-RT and 1BBA, it continues until the 1BBA symbol combination is stopped and displayed (winning). When the 1BBA symbol combination is stopped and displayed, 1BBA is in operation. While 1BBA is in operation, RBA is in continuous operation. When the termination conditions for 1BBA operation are met, the transition is made to non-RT and non-internal state.

Next, control processing in the thirty-ninth embodiment will be explained. The control processing described below shows the difference between the specified number "2" and the specified number "3".
FIG. 336 is a flowchart showing the start time processing for each main game state in the 39th embodiment. This process is a process executed after a determination of "Yes" is made in step S278 in the main process, for example, FIG. 41 (eleventh embodiment). Note that it is assumed that the winning combination lottery process is executed before the process of FIG. 336 is executed.
In FIG. 336, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the player won 1BB in the current game. As mentioned above, winning 1BB is during non-RT and non-internal games. When it is determined that 1BB has been won in the current game, the process according to this flowchart is ended, and when it is determined that 1BB has not been won, the process advances to step S2602. Note that in step S2601, if the player won 1BB before the current game and is already within 1BB, the determination is "No".

In step S2602, it is determined whether the current game is in 1BB operation. When it is determined that 1BB is in operation, the process according to this flowchart is ended, and when it is determined that 1BB is not in operation, the process advances to step S2603.
In step S2603, it is determined whether the specified number of coins for the current game is three. When it is determined that the prescribed number is three, the process advances to step S2604, and when it is determined that the prescribed number is not three (in other words, it is two), the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S2604, it is determined whether the main game state of the current game is "0". In the 39th embodiment, it is assumed that the main gaming state is "0" when it is a non-advantageous section (normal section), and the main gaming state is "1" or more when it is an advantageous section. Therefore, in step S2604, it is determined whether or not the current game is in an advantageous section. When it is determined in step S2064 that the main gaming state is "0", the process advances to step S2606, and when it is determined that the main gaming state is not "0", the process advances to step S2605.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 319 and 320, the advantageous section lottery is not executed in a game that is non-RT and non-internal and the specified number is "2", so for example, based on RWM initialization, it is determined that it is non-RT and non-internal. When this happens, it is a non-advantageous section (normal section). Then, when you win 1BBB and move to RT1 and 1BBB inside and the specified number "3" from the next game, as shown in FIGS. An advantageous section lottery will be executed. Furthermore, in the 39th embodiment, the advantageous section transition lottery is set so that the probability of winning is "9000/16384" when winning Replay C to P, and "12000/16384" when winning small prizes A to G. is set. Therefore, it is set so that if you play one or two games, you will win the advantageous section.

In FIG. 336, in step S2605, instruction processing is executed. Here, it is determined whether or not the current game corresponds to a game that activates the instruction function, and when the game is a game that activates the instruction function, processing related to the instruction function is executed. This process includes, for example, the push order instruction number setting process shown in FIG. 48 (eleventh embodiment). Then, the process advances to step S2606.
In step S2606, start processing is executed according to the main game state. For example, when the current game is in the main game state "0" (non-advantageous section), an advantageous section transition lottery is executed, when it is an advantageous section and non-AT, an AT lottery is executed, and when it is an advantageous section and AT, an AT lottery is executed. Execute an AT additional lottery. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

As is clear from the process in FIG. 336, when the specified number of sheets is "3", the start process according to the main game state is executed, but when the specified number is not "3" (when it is "2") In this case, the start processing according to the main game state is not executed.
Specifically, when the predetermined number is "2", firstly, the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed even if it is a non-advantageous section. This is also clear from FIGS. 319 to 330. Secondly, regardless of whether it is an advantageous section or not, a lottery regarding AT is not executed. Furthermore, thirdly, even during AT, a lottery related to AT (such as an additional lottery for the number of games played during AT) is not executed.

FIG. 337 is a flowchart showing the main game state-based all-stop processing in the 39th embodiment. This process corresponds to the main process, for example, the game end check process in step S301 in FIG. 41 (eleventh embodiment). The full stop process corresponds to the game end check process in step S301, as shown in FIG. 50, and includes clearing processes for various flags, etc., but FIG. 337 only shows processes related to the thirty-ninth embodiment.
In FIG. 337, in step S2611, it is determined whether or not the player won 1BB in the current game. This process is similar to step S2601. If it is determined that 1BB has been won in this game, the process advances to step S2615, and if it is determined that 1BB has not been won, the process advances to step S2612. Note that in step S2611, if the player won 1BB before the current game and is already within 1BB, the determination is "No".

In step S2612, it is determined whether the current game is in 1BB operation. This process is similar to step S2602. When it is determined that 1BB is in operation, the process advances to step S2615, and when it is determined that 1BB is not in operation, the process advances to step S2613.
In step S2613, it is determined whether the specified number of coins for the current game is three. This process is similar to step S2603. When it is determined that the prescribed number is three, the process advances to step S2614, and when it is determined that the prescribed number is not three (in other words, it is two), the process advances to step S2615.

In step S2614, a full stop process is executed depending on the main game state. This process includes, for example, updating the main game state, updating the AT (AT game counter, AT flag, pullback game counter, CZ game counter, etc.). This processing corresponds to, for example, the processing of steps S951 to S956 in FIG. 149 in the twenty-third embodiment. Then, the process advances to step S2615.
In step S2615, advantageous section clear counter processing is executed. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In the above process, the full stop process according to the main game state is executed only when the specified number is "3", and is not executed when the specified number is "2". Therefore, for example, when a game is executed with the specified number "2" during AT, the AT game number counter will not be updated. However, as described later, the number of AT acquisitions (a value based on a difference counter as described later) is updated.
On the other hand, regardless of whether the predetermined number is "2" or "3", the advantageous section clear counter management process in step S2615 is executed, so the advantageous section clear counter and the difference counter, which will be described later, are updated.

FIG. 338 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section clear counter management process in step S2615 of FIG. 337. The advantageous section clear counter management process here is almost the same as that in FIGS. 51 and 52 (eleventh embodiment), but will be explained again.
In step S2621, "1" is subtracted from the advantageous section clear counter. Next, the process advances to step S2622, and it is determined whether the advantageous section clear counter value before being subtracted by "1" in step S2621 is "0". When it is determined that it is "0", the process advances to step S2623, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process advances to step S2625.

In step S2623, it is determined whether the main game state is "0". As mentioned above, when the main game state is "0", it means that it is a non-advantageous section (normal section). Furthermore, even if the main game state is "0" at the start of the current game, if the transition lottery for the advantageous section is won, the main game state is a value other than "0" at the time of step S2623. .
When it is determined that the main game state is "0", the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the main game state is not "0", the process advances to step S2624. In step S2624, the upper limit value (initial value) of the number of games in the advantageous section "1500 (D)" is stored (set) in the advantageous section clear counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends. When the advantageous section clear counter value before subtraction is "0" and the main game state is not "0", it means that the player has won the advantageous section transition lottery in the current game.

On the other hand, in step S2622, it is determined that the value before subtraction is not "0", and when the process proceeds to step S2625, it is determined whether the subtraction result (advantageous section clear counter value after subtracting "1") is "0". do. If it is determined that it is "0", the end condition for the advantageous section (the number of games played is "1500") is satisfied, so the process advances to step S2629. On the other hand, if it is determined that the subtraction result is not "0", the process advances to step S2626.
In step S2626, it is determined whether a replay was displayed in the current game. This is because the difference counter is not updated when a replay is displayed. When it is determined that the replay is displayed, the process advances to step S2628, and when it is determined that the replay is not displayed, the process advances to step S2627.

In step S2627, "number of payouts - prescribed number" is added to the difference counter to update the difference counter value. When the difference counter value after addition becomes negative, it is corrected to "0". That is, the lower limit value of the difference counter is "0". Then, the process advances to step S2628.
In step S2628, it is determined whether the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)". Note that when displaying a replay, step S2628 may be skipped because the difference counter has not been updated in the current game, but similarly to the 11th embodiment, the upper limit value of the difference counter is determined for confirmation. are doing.

When it is determined that the difference counter value exceeds "2400", the process advances to step S2629 in order to satisfy the conditions for ending the advantageous section. On the other hand, when it is determined that the difference counter value does not exceed "2400", the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S2629, all parameters related to the instruction function are set to "0". This process is, for example, the same process as step S435 in FIG. 51 (eleventh embodiment). Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, the advantageous section clear counter management process is executed regardless of whether the specified number is "2" or "3", so the advantageous section clear counter and the difference counter are always updated. Here, the number of coins acquired during AT is counted based on the difference counter. For example, the difference counter value (usually "0") of the first game of AT is calculated as the number of gains "0". As a result, the number of acquired images displayed on the image display device 23 during AT is a value based on the difference counter value. The difference counter will be updated regardless of whether the specified number is "2" or "3", so the number of coins acquired during AT will be updated regardless of whether the specified number is "2" or "3". be done. On the other hand, as mentioned above, when a game is played with the specified number "3" during AT, the number of AT games is updated, but when a game is played with the specified number "2" during AT, the AT game count is updated. The count is not updated. However, even in this case, the number of AT games is displayed on the image display device 23 although it is not updated.
Also, if you play a game with the specified number of "2" during AT, the number of games played during AT will not be updated, so the AT end condition based on the number of AT games will not be met, but the advantageous section clear counter and difference will not be updated. Since the number counter is updated, the AT and advantageous section may end by satisfying the condition for ending the advantageous section based on the advantageous section clear counter or the difference counter.

Next, specific control when a game is executed with the specified number "2" will be explained.
(1) Display of a unique image in a game with a specified number of “2” When a game is started with a specified number of “2”, an effect unique to the specified number of “2” (for example, a still image or a unique image similar to a still image) is displayed. (Hereinafter, an image unique to the specified number "2" will be referred to as a "specific image."). Furthermore, in this case, text such as "2-card game in progress" may be displayed as an image. If the particular performance is executed only when the specified number is "2", the player can immediately know that he has played the game with the specified number "2" by mistake. Furthermore, by outputting the unique image, it is possible to suggest to the player that the AT lottery will not be executed.
Note that the "unique image" in this embodiment is sometimes referred to as a "single picture" or the like, but is not limited to a completely still image, and includes cases where part of the image is moving. For example, when a character is displayed as a unique image, the character's hair may be waving in the wind, or the character may blink periodically.

Incidentally, when the game is executed with the specified number "2", the production command may not be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. By doing this, in the game of the specified number "2", the performance of the previous game continues to be output as is. Alternatively, when outputting the effect corresponding to the specified number "2", a specific command indicating that the game has been executed with the specified number "2" may be transmitted.

Here, in a game with a specified number of "2" in RT1 (during non-AT), a special image is displayed, but in a game with a specified number of "2" in non-RT (during non-AT), a normal effect (during 1BB internal) is displayed. An example of this is to output the same effect as the effect when the game is played with the specified number "3". In this embodiment, since it is assumed (normally) that the game is played with the specified number "2" in order to win 1 BBB during non-RT, it is assumed that the game is played with the specified number "2" during non-RT. It is possible to judge whether or not the game is staying in a normal gaming state based on the performance that is executed at the time.
Furthermore, an addictive prevention display may be output at the end of the AT or the end of the 1BB game. When a game is executed with the specified number "2" while the addictive prevention display is displayed, the addictive prevention display is output before the special image (between the unique image and the addictive prevention display, the layer of the addictive prevention display is placed in front) ). As a result, the immersion prevention display is not blocked by the unique image, so that the immersion prevention display can be reliably displayed.

Further, when a game is executed with the specified number "2", the specified number is determined by operating the start switch 41, so a unique image is displayed at the same time as the start switch 41 is operated (simultaneously with the start of the game). This unique image continues at least until the third stop switch 42 is operated (when it is completely stopped), and the display of the unique image may end when the payout process is completed or when the bet process for the next game is executed. Can be mentioned.

(2) Image display during non-AT One example is to award "1" or more points for each game (the number of points awarded differs depending on the winning combination, etc.), and to execute an AT lottery according to the number of accumulated points. It will be done. In this case, points are awarded for games with a specified number of "3", but no points are awarded for games with a specified number of "2". Therefore, in a game where the specified number is "2", the number of points is not updated.

(3) AT ceiling game counter Counts the number of games played during non-AT, and when the number of games reaches a predetermined value, it has a ceiling function that activates AT, the AT ceiling counts the number of games played up to the ceiling. As for the number of games counter, it is updated in games with a specified number of "3", but not updated in games with a specified number of "2".

(4) Precursor Counter During the false premonitory and the real premonitory, the remaining number of games until the scheduled AT activation may be displayed as an image. This number of games is managed by a precursor counter. Then, in a game with a specified number of "3", the precursor counter is updated and the remaining number of games (image) is updated, but in a game with a specified number of "2", the precursor counter is not updated and the number of remaining games (image) is updated. Not updated.
(5) Lottery related to AT During non-AT, as described above, the specified number "3" allows the lottery related to AT to be executed, but the specified number "2" does not execute the lottery related to AT.

(6) Performance when the start switch 41 is operated When the start switch 41 is operated, a winning combination lottery is executed and a performance corresponding to the winning combination lottery result is executed, and when the game is started with the specified number "3", The performance corresponding to the winning combination lottery result is executed, but when the game is started with the specified number "2", the performance corresponding to the winning combination lottery result is not performed. However, when the game is started with the specified number "2", a special effect (display of the above-mentioned unique image, etc.) corresponding to the start of the game with the specified number "2" may be executed.
In addition, while a continuous performance is being executed, if the performance is set to advance (develop) when the start switch 41 is operated, and the game is started with the specified number "3", the continuous performance will proceed. , When the game is started with the specified number "2", the continuous performance does not proceed. In this case, the previous performance (at the end of the previous game) may be maintained, or a unique performance corresponding to the start of the game with the specified number "2" may be executed.
Furthermore, during the execution of the continuous performance, after a game is played with the specified number "2", when the next game is played with the specified number "3", the continuous performance is executed in the next game.
Specifically, in a case where a continuous performance between three games can be executed, when the first game is played with a specified number of "3", the continuous performance of the first game is executed. Next, when the second game is played with the specified number "2", the continuous performance of the second game is not performed, but a unique performance is performed. Then, when the third game is played with the specified number "3", the continuous performance of the third game is executed.

(7) Performance during AT If a game is played with the specified number "2" during AT, the number of AT games is not updated as described above. That is, the AT game number counter is not updated. As a result, the remaining number of AT games is not subtracted, so even if the player mistakenly plays a game with the specified number "2", the number of AT games will not be lost. Although the AT game count counter is not updated, the AT game count itself is displayed during AT.
Also, during AT, the number of acquired coins is continuously displayed, and the number of acquired coins during AT is updated at the start of the game and at the end of the game. The number of coins acquired during AT is updated based on the difference counter value as described above. However, the invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to provide an acquired number of coins counter on the sub-control board 80 and update the number of acquired coins during AT based on the acquired number of coins counter of the sub-control board 80 (independently on the sub-control board 80 side). It is.

(8) When displaying an image of the number of acquired coins during AT (for example, "Get 1000 coins!"), if the number of acquired coins reaches 1000 coins with the specified number "3", "Get 1000 coins!" will be displayed. etc., but when the number of acquired sheets reaches 1000 sheets with the specified number "2", an image such as "Get 1000 sheets!" may not be displayed.
In this case, the message "Get 1000 coins!" is displayed as an image in subsequent games with the prescribed number of "3". For example, a flag is provided to indicate whether or not the fact that the number of acquired coins has reached 1000 has already been displayed. Then, when the number of acquired coins reaches 1000 coins with the specified number "3", the flag is turned on, but when the number of acquired coins reaches 1000 coins with the prescribed number "2", the flag is not turned on. After that, a specified number of games "3" is played, an image "Get 1000 coins!" is displayed, and the flag is turned on. After reaching 1000 pieces in a game with the specified number of ``2'', in a game with the specified number of ``3'', the image ``Get 1000 pieces!'' will be displayed even if the replay is displayed or the winning combination is not won. Good too. Of course, the image ``Get 1000 pieces!'' may be displayed after waiting for the winning combination in the subsequent game with the specified number of ``3''.

(9) When there is an ending flag Based on the advantageous section clear counter, the ending flag is set when the number of games played in the advantageous section is about "1400" to "1450", and if the AT is in progress, it will be set soon. The player may be notified that the AT will end or that the AT of the next set will not proceed. Here, as a result of playing the game with the specified number of "2", when the number of games for which the ending flag should be set is reached, the ending flag may or may not be set. When the ending flag is set, the performance can be switched to the ending, so even if the game is played with the specified number "2", the player can be informed that the end of the advantageous section is approaching. On the other hand, when the ending flag is not set, the production does not switch to the ending. However, when a game is played with the specified number "3" after that, the ending flag is set. In this case, the number of times the game is played from the time the performance is switched to the ending until the AT ends is smaller than the case where the game is played with the specified number "3" all the time.

Further, based on the advantageous section clear counter, a countdown display may be executed when the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section (1500 games) is approaching. This countdown may also be executed with a specified number of "2". However, it is possible to display different images depending on the countdown when the specified number is "2" and the countdown when the specified number is "3". For example, the countdown when the specified number is "2" may be performed by displaying the above-mentioned unique image.

(10) Performance at the end of advantageous section When the final game of the advantageous section is the specified number "2", the end screen of the advantageous section may be displayed as an image, or may not be displayed as an image.
(11) Performance after the end of the advantageous section When the first game in the non-advantageous section is executed with the specified number of "2" after the end of the advantageous section, the effect (image display) indicating that the period has shifted to the non-advantageous section will be displayed. Execute. Further, when the second game in the non-advantageous section is also executed with the prescribed number of "2", the performance of the first game in the non-advantageous section is maintained. Thereby, when shifting from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section, the player can be notified of this even if the specified number of games is "2".

(12) When winning 1BB in non-RT and winning 1BB in the game, a unique image indicating that the 1BB game is in progress and the number of acquired coins are displayed until the 1BB game ends. The number of acquired coins will also be updated. Also, during the 1BB game in this case, even if the game is played with the specified number "3" (the 1BB game of the 39th embodiment is limited to the specified number "3"), during the normal 1BB game The performance is not performed. As in this case, the normal performance may not be executed even if the specified number is "3". By controlling in this manner, it is possible to notify the player that the 1BB game is an irregular game.

<40th embodiment>
The 40th embodiment relates to effective management of push buttons (also referred to as "effect switch,""effectbutton,""subbutton," etc.).
Although push buttons are not shown in FIG. 1 (first embodiment) and FIG. 95 (nineteenth embodiment (A)), the push buttons are actually electrically connected to the sub-control board 80. ing. Furthermore, the sub-control board 80 and the push buttons are configured to enable bidirectional communication.
The push button is used to advance (develop) the performance based on the push button being operated. When the performance is to be advanced based on the operation of the push button, the push button is displayed as an image and the performance at that time is maintained. Then, when the push button is operated, the image display of the push button is erased and the performance is advanced. Hereinafter, such an effect will be referred to as a "push button effect" as needed. Note that the push button effect may be executed once in one game, or may be executed multiple times in one game.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 1 and 95, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are one-way communication from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. Here, although the sub control board 80 is illustrated as a single board in FIGS. 1 and 95, it can be used not only as a single board but also as a sub main board ( In some cases, it is divided into a first sub-control board) and a sub-sub board (second sub-control board). On the other hand, the sub-control board 80 may be composed of a single board including a sub-main board (first sub-control board) and a sub-sub board (second sub-control board). When the sub-control board 80 is divided into a sub-main board (first sub-control board) and a sub-sub board (second sub-control board), the sub-main board (first sub-control board) and sub-sub board (second sub-control board) are separated. 2 sub control board) is configured to allow bidirectional communication.
Note that the main control board 50 is also referred to as a main control means 50, a main control board 50, or a main control means 50.
Further, the sub-control board 80 is also referred to as sub-control means 80, sub-control board 80, or sub-control means 80.
Furthermore, the sub-main board is also referred to as a first sub-control board, first sub-control means, effect control board, or effect control means.
Further, the sub-sub board is also referred to as a second sub-control board, second sub-control means, image control board, or image control means.

Furthermore, when a sub-main CPU and a sub-sub CPU are mounted on one sub-control board 80, it goes without saying that the sub-main CPU and sub-sub CPU are configured to be able to communicate bidirectionally. .
Hereinafter, the "sub-main board (first sub-control board) or sub-main CPU" will be simply referred to as "sub-main", and the sub-sub-board (second sub-control board) or sub-sub CPU will be simply referred to as "sub-sub".
Note that the sub-main is a board (CPU) that supervises and controls the entire performance. Further, the sub-sub is a board (CPU) that belongs to the lower level of the sub-main and is specialized for controlling images in the production.

When the sub-main executes the performance lottery and determines the performance, it sends to the sub-sub a performance designation command (a command that allows the sub-sub to specify the performance to be executed) corresponding to the determined performance. Upon receiving the production designation command, the sub-sub selects a video according to the production designation command and displays the video as an image. Here, a delay (time lag) occurs between the time when the sub-main sends the production designation command and the time when the sub-main starts displaying the video image. This is because video output processing and the like require a certain amount of time.
Further, in the sub-main, the push button is not always enabled, but is enabled within a predetermined time range. For example, like the stop switch 42, the on/off state of the push button is detected at all times, but when it is not valid, its operation is ignored even if it is turned on.

Here, when the sub-main sends a production designation command to the sub-sub, the push button is enabled, and the sub-sub displays an image of the push button (this image indicates to the player that the push button is enabled). ), there is a discrepancy between the timing when the sub-main activates the push button and the timing when the sub-sub starts displaying the image related to the push button. occurs. Therefore, in the 40th embodiment, the following method is adopted in order to eliminate this deviation.

The first method is to enable a push button based on a sub-main timer value (timer management). Specifically, a storage area for storing timer values is provided in the RWM 53, and the timer value (initial value) is set in the storage area when sending the production designation command (before, at the time of, or after sending). do. Then, the timer value is subtracted at regular intervals (for example, for each interrupt processing), and when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0"), it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, and the push button is activated. Make it. On the other hand, if the sub-sub displays the video at the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed since receiving the production designation command, it is possible to substantially match the display timing of the video and the timing at which the push button is activated. Note that the timing at which the push button is activated may be slightly earlier than the timing at which video display starts.
Furthermore, in the case of timer management, push button effects may be executed multiple times in one game.

Note that depending on the performance, in one game, the push button may be activated when N1 seconds (for example, "3" seconds) have elapsed, and then the push button may be activated when N2 seconds (for example, "10" seconds) have elapsed. In this case, store the timer value corresponding to N2 seconds in the above storage area, enable the push button when the timer value reaches a value corresponding to the elapse of N1 seconds, and then When the value corresponding to (for example, "0") is reached, the push button is enabled.
Furthermore, there are cases where the push button is enabled when N1 seconds (for example, "3" seconds) have elapsed, and cases where the push button is enabled when N2 (for example, "10") seconds have elapsed. In this way, when the timer value differs depending on the effect specification command, the value corresponding to the elapse of N1 seconds and the value corresponding to the elapse of N2 seconds are stored in the above storage area, but in this case, the storage area is the same. It is a storage area.

In the case of timer management, if a power outage occurs while the timer is measuring time,
(1) Method of restarting timer measurement after returning from a power outage (in this case, the timer value at that point in time is held when the power is off, and the relevant timer value is also held when the power is turned off) and,
(2) When returning from a power outage, set the initial value of the timer value (the initial value of the timer value determined by the production specification command selected before the power outage), and use the timer to measure the time after returning from the power outage. how to get started and
(3) A method of clearing the timer value upon recovery from a power outage and not counting the timer value after recovery from a power outage (in this case, the push button effect is not executed).
Here, in the case of (2) above, when the initial value of the timer value is set, the effect designation command is retransmitted to the sub-sub.
In the case of (3) above, there are two cases: a case where the push button is assumed not to have been operated and the push button returns, and a case where the push button is assumed to have been operated and the push button returns. If the push button is deemed to have been operated and returns, an effect corresponding to the operation of the push button is executed.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs while the timer is measuring time, and the gaming state at the time of the power outage is a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player (such as CZ or the final game of a sign, etc.), the power When returning from a disconnection, a specific image (such as the above-mentioned "single picture") is displayed. In order to control in this way, for example, upon recovery from a power-off, the judgment is made by referring to the data of the main game state and the value of the precursor counter.
The storage area for the main gaming state and the storage area for the precursor counter described above are provided in both the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 and the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80. The main control board 50 transmits information on the main game state and the precursor counter value to the sub control board 80 during each game, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated. When the sub-control board 80 receives this information, it stores it in the RWM 83 on the sub-control board 80 side. Therefore, when the sub-control board 80 side retains information on the main gaming state and the precursor counter value when returning from a power-off, the sub-control board 80 side determines the main gaming state and the precursor counter value before the power-off. can do. Therefore, in this case, when the main control board 50 returns from a power-off, the main game state information and the precursor counter value are not sent again to the sub-control board 80.

Furthermore, if the power is cut off after the start switch 41 is operated and the correct press order is notified by the operation of the instruction function, but before the first stop switch 42 is operated (while all reels 31 are rotating), When the reel returns from the power cut, all the reels 31 return to the rotating state again. In this case, the instruction function is activated again, and the sub-control board 80 displays an image of the correct pressing order. Therefore, in this case, the specific image is not displayed.
On the other hand, if a power outage occurs after all the reels 31 have stopped and before the next game bet is placed, a specific image is displayed when the power is restored from the power outage. A stop command for the reel 31 is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80, and the sub control board 80 stores information based on the stop command. Therefore, when the sub-control board 80 returns from a power-off, based on the information based on the stop command (information stored in the sub-control board 80), whether the sub-control board 80 returns while all the reels 31 are rotating or when all the reels 31 are being rotated. It can be determined whether or not to return to the stopped state of No. 31.

Note that the display of the specific image does not have to be limited to the time being measured by the timer. When the power is restored from a power outage (as described above, this corresponds to the case where a power outage occurs when all reels 31 are stopped and before a bet is placed, and the power is restored from the power outage). If displayed, the hall manager and the players can see at a glance that the gaming state at the time of power cut-off was a specific gaming state advantageous to the players. In addition, if the power is cut off unintentionally by the player during a specific advantageous gaming state, and the normal screen is displayed when the player returns from the power cut, a reset will be applied based on the power cut, and It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the gaming state has been cleared (transferred to the normal gaming state).

A second method is a method in which the submain does not have the above-mentioned timer and uses a feedback command. Specifically, when selecting a video (before, at the start, or after the start of video output processing), the sub-sub sends a feedback command to the sub-main (indicating that video generation related to the push button has been completed). command). The submain then activates the pushbutton when it receives this feedback command. In particular, in the first method, it is necessary to provide a storage area in the RWM 53 to store the timer value, but in the method of transmitting a feedback command, there is an advantage that there is no need to provide such a storage area. In addition, with the timer management method, it is necessary to set a timer value for each production specification command, but with the method of sending feedback commands, even if the number of production specification commands increases, it is possible to manage each timer value. This is no longer necessary, and the capacity can be reduced.

In the second method, it becomes easier to synchronize not only the push button effect but also the video display start timing, the lamp lighting mode change timing, and the volume change timing.
Here, when displaying an image, the sub-main sends commands to the sub-sub related to background (stage screen) production (also referred to as 2-type production) and character production (also referred to as 4-type production). and send such commands. When each sub-sub receives a command related to background effect, it executes image generation related to the background, and when it receives a command related to character effect, it executes image generation related to the character.

When the generation of both the background and character images is completed, the sub-sub sends a feedback command (video completion command) to the sub-main. When the sub-main receives this feedback command, it performs effects corresponding to the start of displaying the video, such as changing the lighting mode of a lamp or changing the volume. Therefore, it becomes possible to more accurately synchronize the video with the lamp and audio.

Further, among the push button effects, a fade effect may be executed. Note that whether or not to execute the fade effect is determined by the effect designation command. Here, the push button fade effect is an image display of the push button in a mode other than the final display mode during the introduction effect (initial stage of the effect), and the push button is not yet activated at the time of this image display. This is a performance in which there is no such thing. In this introduction performance, for example, a performance indicating that a push button performance will occur is performed.
After executing the fade effect, the sub-sub sends a feedback command to the sub-main when displaying the final push button image (before displaying, when displaying, or after displaying). When the submain receives this feedback command, it activates the pushbutton.

When the sub-main determines that the push button has been operated, it sends a command indicating that the push button has been operated to the sub-sub. Furthermore, when the submain detects that the push button has been operated, it disables the push button. Here, if the push button is operated once, it is determined that the push button has been operated and the push button is disabled, and how many times is the predetermined time from enabling the push button to disabling the push button. There are cases where the push button operation is valid even if it is operated. In the latter case, the effect may be changed each time the push button is operated.

Then, once the push button is disabled, during the subsequent push button disabled period, no push button operation command is sent to the sub-sub even if the push button is operated by the player.
Further, when the push button effect is executed, if the player does not operate the push button, the push button remains valid until the next game. Here, "until the next game" means, for example, if the replay does not stop in the current game, it corresponds to "until the bet is placed in the next game", and if the replay stops in the current game, it means "until the next game bet is placed". This corresponds to "until the start switch 41 is operated in the next game".
Note that the timing of "until moving to the next game" may be the same when the replay does not stop in the current game and when the replay stops in the current game. For example, both timings may be set to "until the start switch 41 is operated in the next game".

FIG. 339 is a time chart showing an example of a slot machine in which push buttons are effectively managed by a timer in the 40th embodiment. In the figure, two dashed two-dot lines are lines that indicate the division between the main side and the sub-main side, and the division between the sub-main side and the sub-sub side (the same applies to FIGS. 340 to 344, which will be described later). ).

In FIG. 339, when the start switch 41 is operated by the player, the main (main control board 50) detects the signal and executes the lottery. Then, the lottery result command is sent to the submain. The sub-main executes a performance lottery according to a lottery result command (the result of the lottery result of the current game). In this example, it is assumed that an effect having a push button effect is determined (the following examples are similar). The sub-main sends a production designation command corresponding to the determined production to the sub-sub. Furthermore, at the same time as the production designation command is transmitted, a timer value (measurement of time until the push button is activated) corresponding to the determined production is started. The measurement time is determined by the determined performance, and is time T01 in this example.

When the sub-main determines that the timer has measured time T01, it activates the push button.
On the other hand, upon receiving the production designation command, the sub-sub starts production (video processing). Further, the effect designation command received by the sub-sub specifies that the display of the push button is to be started after the elapse of time T01 from the start of the effect. Accordingly, the sub-sub starts displaying the push button after time T01 has elapsed from the start of the performance in accordance with this performance designation command. Thereby, the timing at which the push button becomes effective and the timing at which the display of the push button starts can be made substantially the same from the start of the performance.
When the push button is operated by the player, the signal is transmitted to the sub-main. When the submain receives this signal, it disables the pushbutton. Further, the sub-main sends push button operation commands to the sub-sub. When the sub-sub receives the push button operation command, it develops the effect (executes the effect corresponding to the push button operation). Furthermore, the display of the push button is ended.

Note that the timing for transmitting the production designation command is not limited to when the start switch 41 is operated, but also when the stop switch 42 is operated (first stop, first stop, etc.) as long as it is before the production execution timing specified by the production specification command. (either at the second stop or at the third stop). This also applies to the following examples.
Further, it is conceivable that the player performs other operations (operations other than the push button operation), such as operation of the stop switch 42, between when the start switch 41 is operated and before the push button is operated. In this case, even after the other operations by the player, the performance is developed by operating the push button. In other words, the development of the performance by operating the push button is not affected by the other operations by the player. This also applies to the following examples.

FIG. 340 is a time chart showing an example of a slot machine in which push buttons are effectively managed using feedback commands in the 40th embodiment. In the example of FIG. 340, unlike the example of FIG. 339, the submain does not have a timer for measuring the time to enable the push button.
In FIG. 340, when the start switch 41 is operated by the player, the main detects the signal and executes the lottery. Then, the lottery result command is sent to the submain. The sub-main executes an effect lottery according to a lottery result command (a winning lottery result of the game). The sub-main sends a production designation command corresponding to the determined production to the sub-sub.

Upon receiving the production designation command, the sub-sub starts production (video processing). Furthermore, the effect designation command received by the sub-sub specifies that the display of the push button is to be started after the elapse of time T01 from the start of the effect. Accordingly, the sub-sub starts displaying the push button after time T01 has elapsed from the start of the performance in accordance with this performance designation command. When the sub-sub starts displaying the push button, it sends a feedback command (a command indicating that the display of the push button has been completed or that the display of the push button has started) to the sub-main. When the submain receives this feedback command, it activates the pushbutton. Thereby, the timing at which the display of the push button is started and the timing at which the push button is activated can be made substantially the same.

When the push button is operated by the player, the signal is transmitted to the sub-main. When the submain receives this signal, it disables the pushbutton. Further, the sub-main sends push button operation commands to the sub-sub. When the sub-sub receives the push button operation command, it develops the effect (executes the effect corresponding to the push button operation). Furthermore, the display of the push button is ended.

341 to 344 are time charts showing push button validity management when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Similarly to the slot machine 10, the pachinko gaming machine also includes a main, sub-main, and sub-sub. Specifically, "main" corresponds to the main control board 530 in FIG. 99 (nineteenth embodiment (B)). Further, in FIG. 99, the sub-control board 540 has a sub-main and a sub-sub. The sub-main controls the output of the production lamp 541 and the speaker 542, and the sub-sub controls the output of the image display device 543.

FIG. 341 is a time chart showing an example 1 of effective management of push buttons in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the 40th embodiment, and is an example of enabling the push buttons by timer management. Therefore, FIG. 341 is an example corresponding to FIG. 339 of the slot machine 10. This FIG. 341 and FIG. 342, which will be described later, show an example in which the push button is activated twice during one game.
In FIG. 341, when a game ball enters the starting port 532 (FIG. 99) and the starting port switch 533 (FIG. 99) is turned on, the main controller starts changing the special symbol display device 531 (FIG. 99) and , execute a jackpot lottery or a fluctuating pattern lottery. When the main determines the variation pattern, it sends a variation pattern command to the submain.

The sub-main executes a performance lottery based on the received variation pattern, determines a performance, and transmits a performance designation command corresponding to the determined performance to the sub-sub. In this example, it is assumed that the specified performance is a performance that is output in the order of previews A to D → normal reach → super reach. Note that the "notice" is a performance that suggests the frequency of subsequent appearance of normal reach and super reach, and the degree of expectation of winning, depending on the type. Furthermore, "normal reach" is a performance that suggests that the expectation of winning is low to medium depending on the type. Furthermore, "super reach" is a performance that suggests that the expectation of winning is medium to high depending on the type. During execution of each of these performances, the performance symbols are varied. Further, the sub-main measures the time from the time of sending the production designation command using a timer. Then, after time T11 has elapsed, the push button is activated.

When the sub-sub receives the production designation command, it executes the production (video) in the order of previews A and B → preview C and D → normal reach → super reach.
Furthermore, when the sub-sub determines that time T11 has elapsed from the start of the performance based on the performance designation command, it starts displaying the push button. In this example, the display of the push button is started in the middle of the previews C and D. The effect specifying command sent from the sub-main to the sub-sub is specified to start displaying the push button after a time T11 has elapsed from the start of the effect. This makes it possible to substantially match the activation timing of the push button in the sub-main and the display start timing of the push button in the sub-sub at time T11 from the start of the performance.

Furthermore, this example shows an example in which the player did not operate the push button during the first push button performance (the same applies to FIG. 342, which will be described later). When the push button is activated, the submain uses a timer to measure time from the time the push button is activated. In this example, the valid time of the push button is time T13, and if the push button is operated before time T13 has elapsed since the push button was activated, an effect corresponding to the push button operation is executed, If the push button is not operated even after time T13 has elapsed since the push button was activated, the push button is deactivated.
Since the push button has not been operated even after time T13 has elapsed since the push button was enabled, the sub-main disables the push button. Then, a command to disable the push button is sent to the sub-sub. As a result, the sub-sub finishes displaying the push button.

Although not shown in FIG. 341, if the push button is operated before time T13 has elapsed since the push button was enabled, the submain disables the push button and also disables the push button. Send operational commands to sub-subs. When the sub-sub receives this command, it develops the effect (executes the effect corresponding to the operation of the push button) and ends the display of the push button.

Furthermore, the sub-main continues to measure the time from the time of transmission of the production designation command with a timer, and activates the push button after time T12 has elapsed from the transmission of the production designation command. Then, when the push button is activated, the sub-main uses a timer to measure time from the time the push button is activated. In this example, the valid time of the push button is time T14, and if the push button is operated before time T14 has elapsed since the push button was activated, the effect corresponding to the push button operation is executed. If the push button is not operated even after time T14 has elapsed since the push button was activated, the push button is deactivated.

On the other hand, when the sub-sub determines that time T12 has elapsed from the start of the performance based on the performance designation command, it starts displaying the push button. In this example, the display of the push button is started in the middle of the super reach. The effect specifying command sent from the sub-main to the sub-sub is specified to start displaying the push button after a time T12 has elapsed from the start of the effect. As a result, similarly to the above, at time T12, it is possible to substantially match the display start timing of the push button in the sub-sub with the activation timing of the push button in the sub-main.
In this example, the push button is operated by the player before time T14 has elapsed since the push button was activated.
Note that in FIG. 341, if the push button is operated within time T14 (valid time), the timer ends counting time T14. In FIG. 341, the range of the effective time of time T14 is illustrated for convenience (this point also applies to time T14 in FIG. 342, time T14 in FIG. 343, and time T43 in FIG. 344). .

When the push button is operated by the player, the signal is transmitted to the sub-main. When the submain receives this signal, it disables the pushbutton. Further, the sub-main sends push button operation commands to the sub-sub. When the sub-sub receives a push button operation command, the sub-sub switches the effect (executes the effect corresponding to the push button operation). Furthermore, the display of the push button is ended.
Thereafter, the sub-sub continues to perform the performance based on the performance designation command received from the sub-main, and ends the performance in accordance with the performance designation command.
On the other hand, when the main stops the fluctuation of the special symbol display device 531, it sends a fluctuation stop command to the sub-main. Furthermore, this fluctuation stop command is also sent from the sub-main to the sub-sub. This allows the sub-main and sub-sub to know that the fluctuation on the main side has ended.

FIG. 342 is a time chart showing an example 2 of effective management of push buttons in the Pachinko gaming machine according to the 40th embodiment. This example differs from FIG. 341 in that the push button is activated by a feedback command without using a timer for activating the push button. The rest is the same as in FIG. 341.
In FIG. 342, the main part starts the variation of special symbols and executes the jackpot lottery and the variable pattern lottery. When the main determines a variation pattern, it sends a variation pattern command to the submain.
The sub-main executes a performance lottery based on the received variation pattern, specifies a performance, and sends a performance designation command to the sub-sub.

When the sub-sub determines that time T11 has elapsed from the start of the performance based on the performance designation command, it starts displaying the push button. Then, when the display of the push button is started, a feedback command (a command indicating that the display of the push button has been completed or that display of the push button has started) is sent to the submain. When the submain receives this feedback command, it activates the pushbutton. Thereby, without using a timer, the activation timing of the push button by the sub-main and the timing at which the sub-sub starts displaying the push button can be made substantially coincident at time T11 from the start of the performance.

Further, when the push button is activated, the sub-main uses a timer to measure time from the time the push button is activated. After time T13 has elapsed, the submain disables the push button. Then, a command to disable the push button is sent to the sub-sub. As a result, the sub-sub finishes displaying the push button.

Similarly, when the sub-sub determines that time T12 has elapsed from the start of the performance based on the performance designation command, it starts displaying the push button. Then, when the push button is displayed, a feedback command is sent to the submain. When the submain receives this feedback command, it activates the pushbutton. The subsequent processing is the same as that shown in FIG. 341 described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 343 is a time chart showing example 3 of effective management of push buttons in the pachinko gaming machine according to the 40th embodiment, and this example is an example in which the push buttons are enabled by a feedback command as in FIG. 342. .
In FIG. 343, the main part starts the variation of special symbols and executes the jackpot lottery and the variable pattern lottery. When the main determines the variation pattern, it sends a variation pattern command to the submain.

The sub-main executes a performance lottery based on the received variation pattern, specifies a performance, and sends a performance designation command to the sub-sub. In the example of FIG. 343, unlike the example of FIG. 342, the effect designation command is divided and transmitted. The first production designation command is for outputting previews A and B. Upon receiving this production designation command, the sub-sub executes the production related to previews A and B. Further, the sub-main starts measuring time with a timer at the same time as sending the first production designation command.
Next, when the sub-main determines that time T31 has elapsed, it transmits an effect designation command for outputting previews C and D to the sub-sub. Upon receiving this performance designation command, the sub-sub executes the performances related to previews C and D.
Furthermore, when the sub-main determines that time T32 has elapsed since the transmission of the first production designation command, the sub-main transmits a production designation command for outputting a normal reach to the sub-sub. Upon receiving this performance designation command, the sub-sub executes the performance related to normal reach.

Further, when the sub-main determines that time T33 has elapsed since the transmission of the first production designation command, the sub-main transmits a production designation command for outputting a super reach to the sub-sub. Upon receiving this performance designation command, the sub-sub executes the performance related to super reach.
In this way, the sub-main transmits the production designation command to the sub-sub four times, and the sub-sub sequentially switches the production each time it receives the production designation command.
Furthermore, when the sub-sub determines that time T12 has elapsed from the start of the performance based on the performance designation command, it starts displaying the push button. The subsequent processing is the same as the example shown in FIG. 342, so the explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 344 is a time chart showing example 4 of effective management of push buttons in the pachinko gaming machine according to the 40th embodiment. In this example, the push button has the function of popping out toward the ceiling. This push button can be pushed in the same way as a normal push button. Further, the push button protrudes toward the ceiling, deforms into a lever shape, and is configured so that the player can operate the lever.
In FIG. 344, the main starts variation, executes various lottery draws, and sends variation pattern commands to the submain. When the sub-main receives the variable pattern command, it determines the performance by lottery and sends the performance designation command to the sub-sub. The outline of the effect designation command is the same as that shown in FIG. 341.

The sub-sub sends a feedback command to the sub-main based on the performance designation command at a timing when time T41 has elapsed since the start of the performance. This feedback command requests the submain to transform the push button into a lever shape. When the submain receives this feedback command, it starts transforming the push button into a lever shape. When the sub-main completes transforming the push button into a lever shape, it sends an effect designation command to the sub-sub. This effect designation command is a command indicating that the transformation of the push button into a lever shape has been completed. Further, the sub-sub starts displaying the lever at a timing when time T42 has elapsed from the start of the performance based on the performance designation command. Furthermore, the sub-sub sends a feedback command to the sub-main on the condition that it has received the above-mentioned production designation command (command indicating that the transformation of the push button into a lever shape has been completed) from the sub-main. This feedback command is a command to enable the lever.

When the sub-main receives the feedback command, it activates the lever. Furthermore, the measurement of the effective time of the lever starts from the moment the lever is enabled. In this example, the effective time of the lever is set to time T43.
In this example, the lever is operated by the player before time T43 has elapsed since the lever was activated.
When the lever is operated by the player, the signal is sent to the sub-main. When the submain receives this signal, it disables the lever. Further, the sub-main sends a lever operation command to the sub-sub. When the sub-sub receives a lever operation command, it develops a performance (executes a performance corresponding to the lever operation). Furthermore, the display of the lever is ended.
Thereafter, the sub-sub continues to perform the performance based on the performance designation command received from the sub-main, and ends the performance in accordance with the performance designation command.

On the other hand, when the main stops the fluctuation of the special symbol display device 531, it sends a fluctuation stop command to the sub-main. Furthermore, this fluctuation stop command is also sent to the sub-sub. This allows the sub-main and sub-sub to know that the fluctuation on the main side has ended.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 344, the sub-main executes a process after disabling the lever and returning the lever to its original shape by returning it to its original shape by the end of the game.

Although the thirty-seventh to fortieth embodiments have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
A. 37th Embodiment (1) In the 37th embodiment, in non-AT non-RT and RT1, in non-RT, the correct pressing order is notified when the pressing order bell is won at a predetermined rate, and in RT1, the correct answer pressing when the pressing order bell is won. The order was not announced. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even in non-AT and RT1, the correct pressing order may be notified at a specific rate when the pressing order bell is won. During non-AT, if there is a case where the correct press order is notified when the press order bell is won for both non-RT and RT1, it is possible to inform the player whether the current RT is non-RT or RT1. can be made difficult to understand. In this case, let "x" be the ratio of notifying the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won in non-AT and RT1, and "y" be the ratio of notifying the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won in non-AT and non-RT. In this case, "y=x+the predetermined ratio (in the embodiment, about 3.45%)" may be used.

(2) During AT, if the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio in 175,000 games is more than a predetermined value (for example, 68% or more), until the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio reaches the predetermined ratio (for example, less than 65%) , it is not necessary to activate the instruction function when the push order bell is won. However, in such a case, instead of not operating the instruction function at all, the operating ratio of the instruction function may be reduced. For example, it may be determined whether or not to activate the instruction function by lottery. In other words, during AT, when the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio in 175,000 games is more than a predetermined value (for example, 68% or more), the operation percentage of the instruction function is not set to "0%" but is set to "100%". It should be less than %.

(3) In AT and non-RT, when the small role D condition device is activated, a performance that suggests a 1BB prize is executed, and when the role is not won (when the winning number of the game is "0"), a 1BB prize is executed. did not execute a performance that suggested winning a prize. However, this is not limited to this, and when a winning combination is not won in AT and non-RT, it is possible to win 1BB within the range that does not violate the rules (it is possible to win 1BB). It is also possible to perform a presentation that can be understood by a person. In this way, in AT and non-RT, it becomes possible to win 1BB without waiting for the operation of the small win D condition device.

(4) In AT and non-RT, after winning 1BB, while the 1BB game is being executed, the performance during AT will continue unless the AT end condition is met. Therefore, when the player wins the push order bell during the AT and 1BB game, the correct push order is notified by operating the instruction function.
On the other hand, if the AT end condition is satisfied during a 1BB game, the next game will be a non-AT and 1BB game. In this case, even if the push order bell is won, the instruction function will not be activated. Therefore, the correct answer pressing order is not reported.
Furthermore, during an AT and 1BB game, in a game in which the RB is won, an effect may be performed that suggests that the RB should be avoided. This is because when the RB wins and the game shifts to the RB game, the ball payout rate decreases.

(5) In AT and RT1, if the player accidentally wins 1BB when the small role D condition device is activated, there are two cases: to continue the AT as it is, or to terminate the AT as a penalty. .
In the former case, as in the above-mentioned AT and 1BB game, unless the AT end condition is satisfied, when the push order bell is won, the correct push order is notified by operating the instruction function. On the other hand, if the AT end condition is satisfied during a 1BB game, the next game will be a non-AT and 1BB game. In this case, even if the push order bell is won, the instruction function will not be activated. Therefore, the correct answer pressing order is not reported.
In the latter case, it will be a non-AT and 1BB game. In a non-AT and 1BB game, the instruction function is not activated even if the push order bell is won. Therefore, the correct answer pressing order is not reported.

(6) In the 37th embodiment, it is possible to win 1BB when the small win D condition device is activated. For this reason, during non-RT and non-AT, or during RT1, an instruction function is activated so as not to win 1BB when the small role D condition device is activated, and during non-RT and AT, when the small role D condition device is activated, the instruction function is activated. The instruction function was activated to encourage winning. However, this is not limited to this, and the instruction function to prevent winning of 1BB when the small role D condition device is activated is not activated during non-RT and non-AT, or during RT1, and the small role D is not activated during non-RT and AT. It is also possible to not operate the instruction function for prompting the player to win 1BB when the conditional device is activated. Furthermore, although the instruction function is not activated, it is possible to execute a presentation suggesting to avoid winning 1BB or a suggestion presentation (performance using reel flash, audio, etc.) to encourage winning 1BB.
In this case, the instruction function is not activated when the small win D condition device is activated, and the instruction function is activated only when the small win A to C condition device is activated. Therefore, in this case, during non-RT and non-AT, the instruction function is activated when the small role A to C condition device is activated at a predetermined rate (approximately once every 29 times in the above example), but when RT1 and In a non-AT, it is also possible to set the rate at which the instruction function is activated to "0".

(7) In the 37th embodiment, in order to make the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio in 175,000 games less than 70%, when the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio in 175,000 games becomes, for example, 68% or more, AT It is allowed to restrict the operation of the instruction function even when the vehicle is inside. However, such regulation is arbitrary, and the ratio of operating the instruction function during AT may be set to "100"%.
From the above, the "rate of operating the instruction function" may be "0" or "100"%.

B. 38th Embodiment (1) In the 38th embodiment, although FIG. 303 is shown as an example of RT transition, the present invention is not limited thereto. It is possible to change the advantageousness of the lottery regarding AT depending on whether the period has shifted from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section.
Further, in the 38th embodiment, the AT lottery was executed while the RB was inside the 1BB game, but the AT lottery could be executed not only when the RB was not inside the RB or while the RB was in operation. Furthermore, it is possible to arbitrarily set how the advantage regarding AT is changed in which gaming state and when what conditions are satisfied.
For example, when a special winning combination is drawn during a 1BB game and the special winning combination is won, preferential treatment may be given to a lottery related to AT. In addition, if it is predetermined that AT-related lottery will be given preferential treatment when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section in a specific gaming state, when a special winning combination is won during a 1BB game, the system will then shift to a specific gaming state. Sometimes, it is sufficient to shift from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section.

C. 39th Embodiment (1) In the 39th embodiment, when the specified number of non-RTs is "2", the same effect as when the specified number of RT1 is "3" is executed, and the game I tried to show it to people. Here, in a non-RT game where the specified number is "3," the player may be informed that the specified number is unintended by displaying a unique image or the like.
(2) When a game is played with a specified number of "2" in non-AT and RT1, the AT lottery is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the AT lottery itself is executed, it is also possible to ignore the AT winning probability (the winning probability exceeds "0", but the probability of winning is almost zero).
In addition, when executing an additional lottery for the number of games played during AT, if the specified number of games is "2", the additional lottery will not be executed, or the additional lottery itself will be executed but the additional winning probability will be ignored. Examples include cases.

D. 40th Embodiment (1) In the 40th embodiment, as an example of transmitting a feedback command from a sub-sub to a sub-main, the display of an image of a push button is started.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, firstly, the feedback command may be transmitted at the timing when the display of the above-mentioned 4-system effect is completed. This makes it possible to change the lighting mode of the lamps and the volume in accordance with the start timing of the 4th system performance.
A second method is to transmit a feedback command at the start timing of the push button fade effect described above. This makes it possible to change the lamp lighting mode and volume in accordance with the start timing of the fade effect.

Thirdly, in the Pachinko game machine, by displaying an image corresponding to the held ball on the image display device 23 and changing the image corresponding to the held ball (for example, changing the color), it is possible to win the jackpot with the held ball. There is a case where a reserved ball promotion effect indicating that expectations are high is executed. In this case, a feedback command may be transmitted at the start timing of the reserved ball promotion effect. This makes it possible to change the lamp lighting mode and volume in accordance with the start timing of the reserved ball promotion performance.
Fourthly, in the pachinko game machine, there are cases where a V display effect indicating a confirmed jackpot is executed. In this case, a feedback command may be transmitted at the start timing of the V display effect. This makes it possible to change the lamp lighting mode and volume in accordance with the start timing of the V display effect.

E. Others (1) The first to fortieth embodiments and the modified examples of each of these embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.
(2) In the 37th to 40th embodiments, the slot machine 10 and the pachinko gaming machine 500 are used as examples of gaming machines, but for example, casino machines and medals used for gaming are not used as gaming media. It is also possible to apply it to enclosed game machines (medalless game machines), etc.

<41st embodiment>
In the 41st embodiment, as in the 19th embodiment (A), as shown in FIG. 95, a power switch 11, a door switch 17, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, and a setting change (reset) switch It is equipped with 153.
Further, the door switch 17, the setting key switch 152, and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51.

The power switch 11 is a switch operated to turn on/off the power.
In the following description, turning on the power switch 11 is sometimes referred to as "turning on the power", "turning on the power", or "resuming the supply of power".
Furthermore, turning off the power switch 11 is sometimes referred to as "turning off the power" or "cutting off the supply of power."

The door switch 17 is a switch that detects opening of the front door 12 (see FIG. 22), and is attached to the cabinet 13 (see FIG. 22) or the front door 12.
The front door 12 is normally closed, but is opened, for example, when power is turned on, when settings are changed, when settings are confirmed, when an error occurs, when medals are replenished, etc.

When the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 is turned off, and when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on. Thereby, opening of the front door 12 can be detected.
Note that by setting the door switch 17 to be turned on when the front door 12 is closed and turned off when the front door 12 is open, the front door 12 can be turned off. The opening may be detected.

The setting key switch 152 is in a setting change state in which setting values can be changed (also referred to as "setting change mode" or "setting changing") or in a setting confirmation state in which setting values cannot be changed but can be confirmed ("setting confirmation mode"). (Also referred to as "setting confirmation in progress").
By inserting the setting key from the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 152 is turned on (also referred to as the "first mode"), and from this state, the setting key cannot be pressed. By rotating the setting key switch 152 90 degrees counterclockwise, the setting key switch 152 is set to be turned off (also referred to as "second mode").

The setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that also serves as the setting change switch 153, the reset switch 153, and the RWM clear switch 153.
The setting change switch 153 is a switch operated when changing a set value in a setting change state.
Further, the reset switch 153 is a switch that is operated to return to the state before the error occurred (cancel the error state) after removing the error that has occurred.
Furthermore, the RWM clear switch 153 is a switch operated when initializing (clearing) a predetermined storage area in the RWM 53.

In the following explanation, there will be cases where it will be referred to as the “setting change (reset) switch 153,” “setting change switch 153,” “reset switch 153,” and “RWM clear switch 153.” has.
In addition, when various switches such as the setting key switch 152 and the setting change switch (reset switch/RWM clear switch) 153 are in the on state, it is referred to as "being operated", and when in the off state, it is referred to as "being operated". There are cases where it is referred to as "not being carried out".
Note that in this embodiment, the setting change switch 153, reset switch 153, and RWM clear switch 153 are integrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting change switch 153, reset switch 153, and RWM clear switch 153 may be provided separately. You can.

Furthermore, in the 41st embodiment, the "gaming section" includes a "normal section" and an "advantageous section."
The "normal section" is a game section in which it is prohibited to send signals related to the instruction function to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-control board 80), and it does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (instruction function is not activated) during the game period. That is, the normal section is a game section in which the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 is not notified. Note that the normal section is sometimes referred to as a "non-advantageous section."
The "advantageous section" is a game section that has performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated). That is, the advantageous section is a game section in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (for example, the order in which the correct answer is pressed) can be notified.

Furthermore, the 41st embodiment includes an advantageous section display LED 77 that can display to the player that it is an advantageous section. In the normal section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, and in the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. That is, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is off, it indicates that it is a normal section, and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, it indicates that it is an advantageous section. In this way, in the 41st embodiment, the display mode of the advantageous section display LED 77 (lights off or on) and the game section (normal section or advantageous section) correspond in a one-to-one relationship.
For example, as shown in FIG. 31, the segment P of digit 4a of the acquisition number display LED 78 can be used as the advantageous section display LED 77. Further, an advantageous section display LED 77 may be provided separately from the acquisition number display LED 78.

Note that even when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on immediately, but after the transition to the advantageous section, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 is (When starting the notification), the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on. In this case, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, it indicates an advantageous section, but when the advantageous section display LED 77 is off, there are two cases: a normal section and an advantageous section.

FIG. 345 is a diagram illustrating the configurations of the main CPU 55, ROM 54, and RWM 53 in the 41st embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 95 of the nineteenth embodiment (A), a main CPU 55, an RWM 53, and a ROM 54 are provided on a main control board 50.
Further, as shown in FIG. 345, a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "chip") is mounted on the main control board 50, and a main CPU 55 is provided within this chip. Furthermore, the main CPU 55 has a built-in memory, and this built-in memory includes a (built-in) ROM 54 and a (built-in) RWM 53. Furthermore, the addresses of the ROM 54 and RWM 53 are consecutive.

The storage area of the ROM 54 has a used area and an outside area, and the used area and the outside area each have a control area and a data area.
Here, the "use area" is a storage area in which information related to the progress of the game is stored.
Further, the "control area" is a storage area in which various programs executed by the main control means 50 are stored, and is also referred to as a "program area."
Furthermore, the "data area" is a storage area where information other than the program is stored, and is a storage area where data used when executing the program is stored.

Furthermore, the "outside use area" is a storage area in which information not related to the progress of the game is stored, such as a program for controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74, which will be described later, a program used during testing, and This is a storage area where programs for preventing fraud are stored.
Furthermore, the "outside of the used area" includes a control area and a data area, similar to the used area. The control area of the used area is sometimes referred to as a "first control area" or "first program area," and the control area outside the used area is sometimes referred to as a "second control area" or "second program area."
Furthermore, the program stored in the control area (first control area, first program area) of the used area is referred to as the "first program", and the program stored in the control area (second control area, second program area) outside the used area is referred to as the "first program". The program stored in the second program may also be referred to as the "second program."

While the program (first program) stored in the control area of the used area of the ROM 54 is being executed, reference (access) to data stored in the data area of the used area of the ROM 54 is permitted, while the used area of the ROM 54 is Reference to data stored in external data areas is prohibited.
Similarly, while the program (second program) stored in the control area outside the used area of the ROM 54 is being executed, reference to the data stored in the data area outside the used area of the ROM 54 is permitted, but the Reference to data stored in the data area of the used area is prohibited.

Like the ROM 54, the storage area of the RWM 53 has a used area and an outside area, and the used area and the outside area each have a work area and a stack area.
As shown in FIG. 345, addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" are used areas, addresses "F200(H)" to "F20F(H)" are unused areas, and addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" are outside the usage area.

While the program (first program) stored in the control area of the used area of the ROM 54 is being executed, reference (access) and rewriting (overwriting) of data stored in the used area of the RWM 53 are permitted. However, data stored outside the used area of the RWM 53 is allowed to be referenced but not rewritten.
Similarly, while the program (second program) stored in the control area outside the used area of the ROM 54 is being executed, reference and rewriting of data stored outside the used area of the RWM 53 is permitted. , the data in the used area of the RWM 53 is allowed to be referenced but not rewritten. This is to prevent the processing from becoming complicated.

In addition, in order to prevent the data in the used area of the RWM 53 from being rewritten (overwritten) due to a runaway program while a program (second program) outside the used area is being executed, the used area of the RWM 53 is An unused area is provided between the area and the outside area.
Furthermore, if an interrupt process occurs while a program (second program) outside the used area is being executed, the data in the used area of the RWM53 may be rewritten (overwritten) by the interrupt process. While the (second program) is being executed, interrupt processing is prohibited.

Further, as shown in FIG. 345, the ROM 54 has a program management area and the like as other areas in addition to the used area and the outside area.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 345, the RWM 53 has an unused area and the like in addition to the used area and the unused area.

Further, among the storage areas of the entire built-in memory, areas other than the ROM 54 and RWM 53 include a built-in register area, an unused area, and the like.
Further, the built-in register area is provided with, for example, A register to L register, a transmission register, and the like.

FIG. 346 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored in the used area of the RWM 53 in the 41st embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 35 of the 11th embodiment.
The address of the used area is set in the range of "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" as shown in FIG. 345.
Note that the data shown in FIG. 346 is for use in explaining the 41st embodiment, and the data stored in the used area of the RWM 53 is not limited to these.
Hereinafter, regarding FIG. 346, description of the same data as in FIG. 35 of the eleventh embodiment will be omitted, and data different from FIG. 35 of the eleventh embodiment will be described.

Address “F001(H)” is a 1-byte storage area where setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) is stored. As described in the eleventh embodiment, when the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored in address "F000(H)" as setting value data (_NB_RANK). Then, "N" obtained by adding "1" to the setting value data (_NB_RANK) is stored at address "F001(H)" as setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP).

In this embodiment, the set values are "1" to "6", and the address "F000(H)" has set value data (_NB_RANK) of "0(D)" to "5(D)". Any value from "1(D)" to "6(D)" is stored in address "F001(H)" as set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP), and , the value of the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 as the setting value.

Address "F044(H)" is a 1-byte storage area in which status display LED lighting data is stored.
As shown in FIG. 349(A), which will be described later, in the 41st embodiment, the status display LEDs 79 on the display board 75 include a 1 bet display LED 79a, a 2 bet display LED 79b, a 3 bet display LED 79c, a game start display LED 79d, and a game start display LED 79d. It includes six LEDs: a display LED 79e and a replay display LED 79f.
The status display LED lighting data is data indicating whether or not to light up three of the six LEDs: the game start display LED 79d, the input display LED 79e, and the replay display LED 79f.

As shown in FIG. 346, the D0 bit of the status display LED lighting data is assigned to the game start display LED 79d, the D1 bit is assigned to the input display LED 79e, and the D2 bit is assigned to the replay display LED 79f. There is. Each bit of this status display LED lighting data matches each bit of the LED display counter 1 in FIG. 353(A), which will be described later.
Then, "1" is set in the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned on, and "0" is set in the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off.
For example, when the game start display LED 79d is turned on and the input display LED 79e and replay display LED 79f are turned off, "00000001 (B)" is stored as the status display LED lighting data.

Address “F051(H)” is a 1-byte storage area where LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is stored.
The LED display counter 1 is a counter for determining which digit among digits 1 to 5 is to be lit, and is continuously updated every interrupt.
Here, "digit" means a display unit (display), and in this embodiment, it is composed of one 7-segment display. Among the digits of this embodiment, digit 1 corresponds to the upper digit of the credit number (storage number) display LED 76, and digit 2 corresponds to the lower digit of the credit number display LED 76. Furthermore, digit 3 corresponds to the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78, digit 4 corresponds to the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78, and digit 5 corresponds to the setting value display LED 73.
Further, each bit of the LED display counter 1 is assigned to the D0 bit as a digit 1 signal, the D1 bit as a digit 2 signal, . . . , the D4 bit as a digit 5 signal. In the first interrupt processing, dynamic lighting of digits 1 to 5 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit set to "1" in the LED display counter 1 is lit.

In the 41st embodiment, the LED display counter 1 takes a value of "00010000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter 1 is updated so that the bit "1" of the LED display counter 1 is shifted to the right by one digit as the interrupt progresses from "1" to "2" to... (for each interrupt). . In addition, at the next interrupt after interrupt "5", the LED display counter 1 is shifted to the right by one digit and becomes "00000000 (B)". Set counter 1 to "00010000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter 1 repeats the values of "5" → "4" → . . . → "1" → "5" → "4" → . . . for each interrupt process. That is, five interrupts constitute one cycle.

From the above, the value of LED display counter 1 is
"N" interrupt number: 00010000 (B)
“N+1” interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
“N+3” interrupt: 00000010 (B)
“N+4” interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
“N+6” interrupt: 00001000 (B)
:
becomes.

In the 41st embodiment, five interrupts constitute one cycle, and digits 1 to 5 are dynamically lit. Specifically, when the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)", a digit 5 signal is output. Then, by outputting the digit 5 signal, digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) can be lit (digits 1 to 4 are turned off). At the time of the next interrupt processing, the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)", outputs the digit 4 signal, and indicates that digit 4 (lower digit of acquisition number display LED DD78) can be lit (digits 1 to 3 and 5 are off). Become.

Address "F052(H)" is a storage area for the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag takes a value corresponding to normal mode, setting change, or setting confirmation.
In the 41st embodiment, during normal operation, digits 1 to 4 are lit and digit 5 is not lit, so it takes the value "00001111 (B)". Furthermore, while changing settings and confirming settings, digit 5 is lit and digits 1 to 4 are not lit, so the value is "00010000 (B)".

The 48-byte storage area at addresses "F1D0(H)" to "F1FF(H)" is a stack area of the used area.

Here, the management information display LED 74 is also called a "rotation ratio monitor" or a "ratio display", and is composed of four LEDs (digits 6 to 9 in order from the left side).
Furthermore, among the four LEDs that make up the management information display LED 74, the two LEDs on the left (digits 6 and 7) are also called "identification segments" and are used to display the type of information. The two LEDs on the right (digits 8 and 9) are also called "ratio segments" and are used to display the calculated ratio.

Furthermore,
Digit 6: Upper digit of the identification segment Digit 7: Lower digit of the identification segment Digit 8: Upper digit of the ratio segment Digit 9: Sometimes referred to as the lower digit of the ratio segment.

In the forty-first embodiment, the management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the following six items of information 1) to 6) as management information at predetermined time intervals.
1) Ratio of accessories including instructions (cumulative total) (7 pages)
2) Continuous role ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Accessory ratio (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Continuous role ratio (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Accessory ratio (cumulative total) (7A.)
6) Condition ratio of accessories, etc. (cumulative total) (5H.)

For example, when displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative total), if the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." indicating the accessory ratio (cumulative total) is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed. Display in the ratio segment.
Here, the "cumulative total" refers to the total sum of numerical values that have been counted up to that point, and in this embodiment, counting is continued until the number of games has reached at least "175,000".
When the cumulative total is less than ``175,000'' number of games, the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment, for example, by blinking display, and when it is more than ``175,000'' number of games, the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment, for example, by lighting display.
Even after the total number of games exceeds "175,000", it continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
Furthermore, "6000 games" is the total number of games played for 15 sets, where one set is "400" times.

The "instruction-inclusive accessory ratio" is the value obtained by dividing the sum of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
In addition, in a slot machine that is not equipped with an accessory, the "instruction included accessory ratio" is the value obtained by dividing the number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
Further, the sum of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated is counted by the instruction-included accessory counter.

Regarding the "number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function was activated," for example, when a 15-card winning combination is won based on the stop switches 42 being operated in the displayed pressing order in the game in which the instruction function is activated. adds the payout number "15" to the instruction-included accessory counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter.
To explain using FIG. 124 of the 23rd embodiment as an example, the small winning combination condition device A1 to small winning combination A6 condition device are activated during the 1BB game, and the instruction function is activated (correct answer press order (15 winning combination presses) When the stop switch 42 is operated in the displayed press order (correct press order) and a 15-card winning combination (any of the small winning combinations 01 to 06) is won, the indicated winning combination is played. Add the payout number "15" to the item counter and total payout (cumulative) counter.

On the other hand, in a game where the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different push order than the displayed push order, for example, when a 3-card winning combination is won, the instruction included accessory counter and the total payout ( Cumulative total) Add the payout number "3" to the counter.
To explain using FIG. 124 of the 23rd embodiment as an example, in a game in which the small winning combination condition devices A1 to Small winning combination A6 condition devices are activated during the 1BB game and the instruction function is activated (the correct answer pressing order is displayed), the display When the stop switch 42 is operated in a different pressing order (incorrectly pressed order) than the original pressing order, and a 3-card winning combination (any of the small winnings 13 to 24) is won, the instruction included winnings counter and Add the payout number "3" to the total payout (cumulative total) counter.

In addition, in a game where the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different push order from the displayed push order and the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won), the instruction-inclusive role counter and The total payout (cumulative total) counter has the same value as the previous game.
In the example of FIG. 124 of the 23rd embodiment, when the stop switches 42 are operated in an incorrect pressing order, a 3-card winning combination is won; however, for example, when the stop switches 42 are operated in an incorrect pressing order, the winning combination is It is also possible to configure it so that no prize is won (none of the winning combinations is won). Then, during a 1BB game, the small winning combination condition device A1 to small winning combination A6 condition device were activated and the instruction function was activated (the correct pressing order was displayed). When the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) because the stop switch 42 is operated in the previous game, the values of the instruction-included accessory counter and the total payout (accumulation) counter will be the same value as the previous game. .

In addition, in this embodiment, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different push order from the displayed push order and a winning combination is missed, the instruction-included role counter and the total payout are By executing the process of adding the payout number "0" to the (cumulative) counter, the values of both counters are made to be the same value as the previous game.
When a winning combination is missed, the process of adding up the number of paid-out coins may be skipped, but in this case, before the process of adding up the number of paid-out coins, a process is included to determine whether or not a winning combination has been missed, and it is determined that the winning combination has been missed. In this case, it is necessary to configure the program to skip the process of adding up the number of coins to be paid out, which increases the usage of the ROM 54 and increases the processing load on the main CPU 55.
Therefore, in this embodiment, when a winning combination is missed, a process of adding the payout number "0" to both counters is executed. As a result, the values of both counters can be set to the same values as in the previous game without including the process of determining whether or not a winning combination has been missed, so the usage of the ROM 54 can be reduced, and the processing of the main CPU 55 can be reduced. The burden can also be reduced.

"Continuous accessory ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when the first type special accessory (RB) is activated to the total number of payouts.
For example, if the total number of payouts in the number of games played is ``6000'' is ``2000 pieces'', and the number of payouts when the ``Class 1 special bonus (RB)'' is activated is ``500 pieces'', then The ratio (6000 games) is 25 (%).

The "accessory object ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated to the total number of payouts.
Here, the term "accessory object" refers to the above-mentioned first-class special accessory (RB), second-class special accessory (CB), and MB (also referred to as 2BB). Device. CB (continuous operation), SB (single bonus) are included.

The "accessory object status ratio" is the value obtained by dividing the sum of the number of games played when the accessory object is activated and the number of games played when the accessory continuous operation device is activated by the total number of games played.
Further, the sum of the number of games played when the accessory is activated and the number of games played when the accessory continuous operation device is activated is counted by the accessory status counter.
In addition, in the above six items, if a gaming machine is not equipped with a function corresponding to that item, the ratio segment is displayed as "--" by lighting up.
For example, if "RB (Class 1 special accessory)" is not provided, there is no continuous accessory ratio, so when displaying ratio display numbers "2" and "4", the ratio segment is set to "--" ” is displayed on the display.

According to the regulations, the ratio of designated accessories should be set to less than 70%, the ratio of accessories should be set to less than 70%, the ratio of continuous accessories should be set to less than 60%, and the ratio of accessories, etc. status should be set to less than 50%. There is.
By looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information is within the legal range.

Further, in order to enable equipment external to the slot machine 10, such as the hall computer 300, to grasp various ratio information, the various ratio information may be configured to be outputtable as an external signal.
For example, the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio data, continuous accessory ratio (cumulative total) data, accessory ratio (cumulative) data, and accessory state ratio data displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) are used as external signals. It may be configured to be outputtable. At this time, a predetermined number of games (for example, "17,500 times" for continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) data and accessory ratio (cumulative) data, accessory ratio data including instruction, and accessory state ratio data (for example, "175,000 times"), predetermined information different from the current ratio information (for example, "FF (H)", etc.) is output as an external signal, and the predetermined number of games is played. If the conditions are met, various ratio information may be output as external signals.
Furthermore, advantageous section ratio data that is not displayed on the management information display LED 74 (rotation ratio monitor) may also be configured to be outputtable as an external signal. In this case, an advantageous section game count counter for counting the number of games played in the advantageous section and a storage area for advantageous section ratio data indicating the ratio of the number of games played in the advantageous section to the total number of games may be provided outside the usable area of the RWM 53.

347 and 348 are diagrams showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored outside the used area of the RWM 53 in the 41st embodiment.
Addresses outside the used area are set in the range of "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" as shown in FIG. 345.
Note that the data shown in FIGS. 347 and 348 are for use in explaining the 41st embodiment, and the data stored outside the used area of the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

The 400 game counter at address "F210(H)" adds the number of games played every 400 games. This 400 game counter is a counter that cycles from "0" to "399 (D)" and is incremented by "1" every game. If "1" is added when the value of the 400 game counter is "399 (D)", the value of the 400 game counter becomes "0".

Note that, contrary to the above, "399 (D)" may be set as the initial value of the 400 game counter, and "1" may be subtracted every game. In this case, when the value of the 400 game counter becomes "0", it is determined that 400 games have been played. Then, when the value of the 400 game counter is "0", "1" is subtracted, and the initial value "399 (D)" is set in the 400 game counter.

The ring buffer number at address "F212(H)" is used to specify, when medals are paid out in the game, to which ring buffer the number of medals to be paid out is to be added.
Specifically, address "F212(H)" stores any one of "0" to "14(D)" as a ring buffer number.

Addresses “F213(H)” to “F230(H)” are storage areas of total payout ring buffers 0 to 14. The total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 are composed of 15 ring buffers. Each total payout ring buffer consists of 2 bytes. For example, the total payout ring buffer 0 consists of addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", where the address "F213(H)" is the lower digit and the address "F214(H)" is the upper digit. In FIGS. 347 and 348, for storage areas where the number of bytes is "2" or more, the lowest address number is displayed.

One ring buffer stores the total number of coins paid out during 400 games. For example, the number of payouts for the 1st to 400th games is stored in addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", and the number of payouts for the next 401st to 800th games is stored at the address "F215(H)". H)” and “F216(H)”.
Here, whether or not the 400th game has been played is determined by referring to the 400 game counter at the address "F210(H)" mentioned above. Further, to which ring buffer value the number of medals paid out in the game is to be added (updated) is determined by referring to the ring buffer number of the address "F212(H)".

When the total number of payouts from the 1st game to the 400th game is stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 of addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", the total number of payouts from the 5601st game to the 6000th game is stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 of addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)". The number of payout coins is stored in the total payout ring buffer 14 at addresses "F22F(H)" and "F230(H)". Next, at the end of the 6000th game, the data stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 of addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)" is cleared, and the number of payouts for the 6001st to 6400th games is cleared. are stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)".

Note that the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 each consist of 2 bytes. If the maximum number of coins paid out in one game is "15", the maximum number of coins paid out during 400 games is 6000 coins, which can be stored with a storage capacity of 2 bytes.
This point is the same for successive accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14 and accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14, which will be described later.

Further, addresses "F231(H)" to "F24E(H)" are storage areas of continuous accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14.
Furthermore, addresses "F24F(H)" to "F26C(H)" are storage areas of accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14.

The total number of games counter at addresses "F26D(H)" to "F26F(H)" is a counter that stores the number of games played (total), and is composed of 3 bytes. Since it is necessary to count "175,000 (D)" games as the total number of games played, the total number of games counter is made up of 3 bytes.
The total number of games counter continues counting even if the number of games exceeds "175,000 (D)" games, and stops counting when it reaches 3 bytes full ("FFFFFF(H)").

The instruction-included accessory counters at addresses "F270 (H)" to "F272 (H)" are counters that count the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in games where the instruction function is activated, It consists of 3 bytes.
The total payout (6000 times) counter at addresses "F273(H)" to "F275(H)" is a counter that counts the total number of medals paid out during 6000 games. Even if 15 medals are paid out for each game in 6000 games, the total will be 90000 medals, so it can be counted in 3 bytes (continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter and accessory medals described later). The same applies to the payout (6000 times) counter.)

The continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter at addresses "F276(H)" to "F278(H)" is a counter that counts the number of coins paid out when consecutive accessory objects are activated during 6000 games.
The accessory payout (6000 times) counter at addresses "F279(H)" to "F27B(H)" is a counter that counts the number of coins paid out when the accessory is activated during 6000 games.

Then, when there is a payout when the continuous accessory is not activated and the accessory is not activated, only the total payout (6000 times) counter is updated (added), and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter and the accessory payout counter are updated (added). (6000 times) The counter is not updated.
In addition, when there is a payout when the continuous accessory is not activated and the accessory is activated, the total payout (6000 times) counter and the accessory payout (6000 times) counter are updated, and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter is updated. is not updated.
Furthermore, when there is a payout during continuous accessory object operation, the total payout (6000 times) counter, the accessory payout (6000 times) counter, and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter are all updated.

The values of the total payout (6000 times) counter, the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter, and the accessory payout (6000 times) counter are updated every 400 games.
First of all, when there is a payout of medals from the first game to the 6000th game, the total payout (6000 times) will be determined depending on when the continuous accessory is activated/non-activated, and when the accessory is activated/non-activated. ) counter, continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter, and accessory payout (6000 times) counter.
At the end of the 6000th game, the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) and the accessory ratio (6000 times) are calculated. After this calculation, the number of payouts during the 400 games from before "400 x 15-1" games (5999 games) to before "400 x 15-400" games (5600 games) is calculated as follows: times) counter value, continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter value, and accessory payout (6000 times) counter value.

For example, when it is the 6000th game, the total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H) to F214(H)) value is subtracted from the total payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H) to F214(H)) value is cleared. Further, the number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is added to the total payout ring buffer 0 and the total payout (6000 times) counter.

Similarly, when the 6000th game is played, the continuous accessory payout ring buffer 0 (F231 (H) to F232 (H)) value is subtracted from the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of the continuous accessory payout ring buffer 0 is cleared. Further, the number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game when the continuous accessory is activated is added to the continuous accessory payout ring buffer 0 and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter.

Similarly, when the 6000th game is played, the value of the accessory payout ring buffer 0 (F24F(H) to F250(H)) is subtracted from the accessory payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of accessory payout ring buffer 0 is cleared. Further, the number of payouts when the accessory is activated from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is added to the accessory payout ring buffer 0 and the accessory payout (6000 times) counter.

To explain more specifically, for example, the total payout ring buffer stores the number of coins paid out during the following number of games.
Total payout ring buffer 0: "1" game to "400" game Total payout ring buffer 1: "401" game to "800" game Total payout ring buffer 2: "801" game to "1200" game Total payout ring buffer 3: "1201" game to "1600" game Total payout ring buffer 4: "1601" game to "2000" game Total payout ring buffer 5: "2001" game to "2400" Game total payout ring buffer 6: "2401" game to "2800" game Total payout ring buffer 7: "2801" game to "3200" game Total payout ring buffer 8: "3201" game to "3600" ” Game total payout ring buffer 9: “3601” game to “4000” game Total payout ring buffer 10: “4001” game to “4400” game Total payout ring buffer 11: “4401” game to “ 4800'' game total payout ring buffer 12: ``4801'' game ~ ``5200'' game total payout ring buffer 13: ``5201'' game ~ ``5600'' game Total payout ring buffer 14: ``5601'' game ~ "6000" game total payout (6000 times) counter: "1" game to "6000" game

Assuming that the 6000th game has been completed, all of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 store the number of coins paid out during each number of games.
Further, the value of the total payout (6000 times) counter and the sum of the values stored in the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 match.
Here, if the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this point is Σ1, and the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 is Z1,
Total payout (6000 times) counter = Σ1-Z1
Execute the calculation.
Also,
Total payout ring buffer 0 = 0 (clear)
Execute the calculation.
In other words, the value "Z1" of the total payout ring buffer 0, which stores the number of payouts during the 400 games from before 5999 (400 x 15-1) games to before 5600 (400 x 15-400) games, is calculated as the total payout ( 6000 times) The process of subtracting from the value "Σ1" stored in the counter is executed.

Next, the process of clearing the value "Z1" of the total payout ring buffer 0, which stores the number of payouts during the 400 games from before 5999 (400 x 15-1) games to before 5600 (400 x 15-400) games. Execute.
After calculating in this way, the 6001st game is started. When there is a payout from the 6001st game to the 6400th game (here, it is assumed that the accessory did not operate from the 6001st game to the 6400th game), it is added to the total payout ring buffer 0, and, Total payout (6000 times) is added to the counter.

Next, assuming that the 6400th game has been completed, the total payout ring buffer stores the number of payout coins for the following number of games.
Total payout ring buffer 0: “6001” game to “6400” game Total payout ring buffer 1: “401” game to “800” game:
Total payout ring buffer 14: "5601" game to "6000" game Total payout (6000 times) counter: "401" game to "6000" game, and "6001" game to "6400" game

Similarly to the above, if the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this point is Σ2, and the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 1 is Z2, then
Total payout (6000 times) counter = Σ2-Z2
shall be.
and,
Total payout ring buffer 1 = 0
shall be.
After calculating in this way, the 6401st game is started. When there is a payout from the 6401st game to the 6800th game (here, it is assumed that the accessory did not operate from the 6401st game to the 6800th game), it is added to the total payout ring buffer 1, and, Total payout (6000 times) is added to the counter. Repeat the above process.

Further, although the total payout ring buffer and the total payout (6000 times) counter have been described, the same processing as above is performed when the accessory is activated or when the continuous accessory is activated.
Specifically, when the accessory is activated, the total payout ring buffer 0 to 14 is replaced with the accessory payout ring buffer 0 to 14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with the accessory payout (6000 times) counter. Execute processing. Note that when the accessory is activated, as described above, any of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 and the total payout (6000 times) counter are also updated.

Similarly, when the continuous accessory is activated, the total payout ring buffer 0 to 14 is replaced with the continuous accessory payout ring buffer 0 to 14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter. Execute the specified processing. In addition, during continuous accessory operation, any of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14, any of the accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14, the total payout (6000 times) counter, and the accessory payout (6000 times) counter. Updates will also be made.

The total payout (cumulative) counter at addresses "F27C(H)" to "F27E(H)" is a counter that counts the cumulative number of payouts, and counts the total number of payouts during at least "175,000 (D)" games. .
Similarly, the consecutive accessory payout (cumulative total) counters at addresses "F27F(H)" to "F281(H)" are counters that count the cumulative number of payouts during continuous accessory object activation, and similarly to the above, At least "175,000 (D)" The number of payouts when continuous accessory objects are activated during the game is counted.

Furthermore, similarly, the accessory payout (cumulative total) counters at addresses "F282(H)" to "F284(H)" are counters that count the cumulative number of payouts when the accessory is activated, and similarly to the above, at least "175,000 (D)" Counts the number of payouts when the accessory is activated during the game.
Note that the three types of payout (6000 times) counters mentioned above subtract the number of payouts from 5999 games ago to 5600 games ago every 400 games, but these three types of payout (cumulative) counters subtract the value. There's nothing to do.

Note that the three types of payout (cumulative) counters are composed of three bytes. For example, assuming that in 175,000 games, 15 coins were paid out for each game, the result would be "175,000×15=2,625,000", which is smaller than the value that can be stored in 3 bytes. Therefore, it can be stored with a storage capacity of 3 bytes.

The accessory status counters at addresses "F285(H)" to "F287(H)" are counters that count the total number of games played when the accessory is activated and the number of games played when the accessory continuous activation device is activated. Yes, it consists of 3 bytes.
The instruction-inclusive accessory ratio data of the address "F288 (H)" is the ratio of the total number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated, to the total number of payouts. This is a storage area for storing physical ratios.

The continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) data at the address "F289(H)" is a storage area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when continuous accessory objects are activated to the total number of payouts during 6000 games.
The accessory ratio (6000 times) data at address "F28A(H)" is a storage area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated to the total number of payouts during 6000 games.

The continuous accessory ratio (cumulative total) data at address "F28B(H)" is a storage area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts during continuous accessory object activation to the total number of payouts in the total number of games.
The accessory ratio (cumulative total) data at the address "F28C(H)" is a storage area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated to the total number of payouts in the total number of games.

The accessory state ratio data of the address "F28D(H)" is the ratio of the total number of games when the accessory is activated and the number of games when the accessory continuous operation device is activated, to the total number of games. This is a storage area that stores state ratios.
The calculation result buffer at address "F28E(H)" is a storage area that temporarily stores calculation results during ratio calculation processing.

The count upper limit flag of address "F28F(H)" is the total number of games counter (addresses "F26D(H)" to "F26F(H)") or the total number of payouts (cumulative) counter (addresses "F27C(H)" to This flag is turned on when the storage capacity of "F27E(H)" is at the upper limit value (3 bytes full, that is, "FFFFFF(H)").
Of the 1 byte (8 bits) data, the "D0" bit is assigned to the upper limit flag for the number of games played, and the "D1" bit is assigned to the upper limit flag for the number of coins to be paid out. Bits “D2” to “D7” are unused in the 41st embodiment.
For example, when the total number of games counter has reached the count upper limit value, the value of the count upper limit flag becomes "00000001 (B)".

If the payout number upper limit buffer at address "F290 (H)" exceeds 3 bytes full when the number of payouts in the game is added to the total payout (cumulative) counter, the value after addition will be 3 bytes full. This is a storage area that stores the value of .
For example, if the total payout (cumulative) counter value before the payout in the game is "FFFFFE (H)" and the number of payouts in the game is "8 (H)", the counter value is set to "8 (H)". )” will result in overflow. Therefore, in order to prevent overflow of the total payout (cumulative) counter value, a value is calculated to make the total payout (accumulation) counter value 3 bytes full, and the calculation result is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.
In the above example, "FFFFFE(H)"+"1(H)"="FFFFFF(H)", so "1(H)" is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.

The flashing request flag at address "F291(H)" is a flag for specifying an object that satisfies the flashing display condition when displaying the identification segment and the ratio segment.
For the designated accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio (cumulative), accessory ratio (cumulative), and accessory status ratio, if the total number of games (value stored in the total number of games counter) is less than "175,000" If so, the identification segment is controlled to blink.
Regarding the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) and the accessory ratio (6000 times), if the total number of games (value stored in the total number of games counter) is less than "6000", the identification segment will be displayed blinking. control to do so.

The ratio of designated accessories, continuous accessory ratio (cumulative), accessory ratio (cumulative), and accessory status ratio should originally be the ratios over 175,000 games (to reduce variation). is the ratio calculated based on the number of games played less than 175,000 games, the identification segment is displayed blinking to indicate this.
Similarly, the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) and the accessory ratio (6000 times) are originally ratios for 6000 times, but when they are calculated based on the number of games played less than 6000 times, To indicate this, the identification segment is displayed blinking.

In addition, for the designated accessory ratio, accessory ratio (cumulative), and accessory ratio (6000 times), when the displayed value is "70" or more, the ratio segment is controlled to blink. .
Furthermore, regarding the continuous accessory ratio (total) and the consecutive accessory ratio (6000 times), when the displayed value is "60" or more, the ratio segment is controlled to blink.
Furthermore, regarding the state ratio of accessories, etc., when the displayed value is "50" or more, the ratio segment is controlled to be displayed blinking.

The reason why the slot machine of this embodiment is set as described above is that the designated accessory ratio and accessory ratio are designed to be less than 70%, and the continuous accessory ratio is set to 60%. It is designed to be less than 50%, and the condition ratio of accessories etc. is designed to be less than 50%, and when the actual measured value is not within the designed value range, the ratio segment will blink. This is to let people know that by doing so.

In addition, in the blinking request flag, the D0 bit corresponds to the instructed accessory ratio blinking flag, the D1 bit corresponds to the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) blinking flag, ..., the D7 bit corresponds to the 175000 times blinking flag.
For example, when the calculated accessory ratio with instructions is less than "70", the D0 bit of the blinking request flag is "0", and when it is greater than "70", the D0 bit of the blinking request flag is "1". ”.
Similarly, when the calculated continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) is less than "70", the D1 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "0", and when it is greater than "70", the D1 bit of the blinking request flag The bit becomes "1".

In addition, when the calculated accessory state ratio is less than "50", the D5 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "0", and when it is greater than "50", the D5 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "1". ”.
Furthermore, when the total number of games counter value is less than "6000", the D6 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "1", and when it is greater than "6000", the D6 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "0". Become.
Furthermore, when the total number of games counter value is less than "175,000", the D7 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "1", and when it is greater than "175,000", the D7 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "0". .

The ratio display number at address "F292(H)" is a storage area that stores a number corresponding to the ratio to be displayed in the interrupt process.
When the ratio to be displayed in the interrupt process is the designated accessory ratio, "1" is stored in the ratio display number of address "F292(H)". Similarly, when it is a continuous accessory ratio (6000 times), it stores "2", when it is an accessory ratio (6000 times), it stores "3", and when it is a continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) "4" is stored, when it is the accessory ratio (cumulative total), "5" is stored, and "6" is stored when it is the accessory state ratio.

The blinking switching flag at address "F293(H)" is a flag for determining whether to turn on or off when displaying the identification segment or ratio segment blinking during the interrupt processing.
In this embodiment, when displaying blinking, it is set to repeat lighting and extinguishing every approximately 0.3 seconds. Then, for about 0.3 seconds while the lights are on, the blinking switching flag is "0" (value indicating lighting), and for about 0.3 seconds while the lights are off, the blinking switching flag is "1" (value indicating lights off). It is set so that

The display switching time of address "F294(H)" is a counter that counts approximately 5 seconds, which is the time for displaying one ratio, and is updated by "1" every time an interrupt process is performed.
In this embodiment, display of accessory ratio with instructions (approximately 5 seconds) → accessory consecutive ratio (6000 times) display (approximately 5 seconds) → ... → accessory ratio (cumulative) display (approximately 5 seconds) → Object condition ratio display (approximately 5 seconds)→instruction accessory ratio (approximately 5 seconds)→... continues to be displayed repeatedly.
Therefore, the display switching time is stored in order to determine whether approximately 5 seconds have elapsed, that is, whether the display ratio switching time has been reached.

As mentioned above, the blinking switching time of address "F296(H)" is a counter that counts approximately 0.3 seconds when displaying the identification segment or ratio segment, and every time an interrupt process is performed. This is a counter that is updated to "1".

Address "F297(H)" is a 1-byte storage area where LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is stored.
The LED display counter 2 is a counter for determining which digit among digits 6 to 9 is to be lit, and is continuously updated every interrupt. Regarding each bit of the LED display counter 2, the D0 bit is assigned to a digit 6 signal, the D1 bit is assigned to a digit 7 signal, the D2 bit is assigned to a digit 8 signal, and the D3 bit is assigned to a digit 4 signal. In the first interrupt processing, dynamic lighting of digits 6 to 9 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit set to "1" on the LED display counter 2 is lit.

In the 41st embodiment, the LED display counter 2 takes a value of "00001000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter 2 is updated so as to shift the bit "1" of the LED display counter 2 to the right by one digit as the interrupt progresses from "1" to "2" to... (for each interrupt). . In addition, at the next interrupt after interrupt "4", the LED display counter 2 is shifted to the right by one digit and becomes "00000000 (B)". Set counter 2 to "00001000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter 2 repeats the value "4" → "3" → "2" → "1" → "4" → . . . for each interrupt process. That is, four interrupts constitute one cycle.

From the above, the value of LED display counter 2 is
"N" interrupt number: 00001000 (B)
"N+1" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
"N+2" interrupt: 00000010 (B)
“N+3” interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N+4" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00001000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
“N+5” interrupt: 00000100 (B)
:
becomes.

In the 41st embodiment, four interrupts constitute one cycle, and digits 6 to 9 are dynamically illuminated. Specifically, when the value of the LED display counter 2 is "00001000 (B)", a digit 9 signal is output. Then, by outputting the digit 9 signal, digit 9 (lower digit of the ratio segment) can be lit. At the time of the next interrupt processing, the LED display counter becomes "00000100 (B)", a digit 8 signal is output, and digit 8 (higher digit of the ratio segment) can be lit. Also, when the LED display counter is "00000010 (B)", the digit 7 signal is output and digit 7 (lower digit of the identification segment) can be lit, and when the LED display counter is "00000001 (B)" , a digit 6 signal is output, and digit 6 (upper digit of the identification segment) can be lit.

The RWM checksum data (_SW_SUM_CHK) at address "F2A0(H)" is a storage area in which RWM checksum data calculated by RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) during power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is stored.
Here, "RWM checksum data" is also referred to as "complement data,""error detection data," or "error detection information," and is from the address "F000(H)" of the used area of the RWM 53. When added to the data of "F1FF(H)" and the data of addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") outside the used area, it becomes "0". The value is
In other words, the data of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM53 and the data of addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)"("F2A0(H)") outside the used area are When the "RWM checksum data (complement data)" of "F2A0(H)" is added to the added value of the data of "F2A0(H)", it becomes "0". In other words, the added value of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" becomes "0".

The power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) at address "F2A1(H)" is a flag for determining whether the power-off processing has been executed normally, and is stored at the time of the power-off processing.
When the power-off process is executed normally, "55 (H)" is stored as the power-off process completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF), and when the power-off process is not executed normally, the power-off process completed flag is stored. A value other than "55 (H)" is stored as (_SF_POWER_OFF).

The power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) at address "F2A2(H)" is a flag for determining whether the checksum calculation result of RWM53 and the power-off processing completed flag are normal, and is used to start the program. It is stored during processing.
The checksum calculation result of RWM53 is normal (the RWM checksum data (complement data) of "F2A0(H)" is added to the sum of the data in the used area and outside the used area of RWM35 (excluding "F2A0(H)"). If the result of adding is "0") and the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value ("55 (H)"), "55 (H)" is set as the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON). is memorized.
On the other hand, if at least one of the RWM53 checksum calculation result and the power-off processing completed flag is not normal (abnormal), "00 (H)" is set as the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON). be remembered.

The stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (_SB_STACK2) at address "F2A3 (H)" is a storage area (_SB_STACK2) where the stack pointer of the used area is stored (saved) when a program (second program) outside the used area is executed. buffer).
Here, the "stack area" refers to a storage area of the RWM 53 in which data such as various registers and program return addresses can be temporarily saved (stored).
Furthermore, the "stack pointer" is used to hold an address indicating the save (storage) destination of data in the stack area.

Then, when executing a program (second program) outside the used area, the stack pointer of the used area is stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2, and the program (second program) outside the used area is terminated. When returning to the program (first program), the stack pointer of the used area is restored from the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2.

The 24-byte storage area at addresses "F3E8(H)" to "F3FF(H)" is a stack area outside the used area.

Next, initialization of the used area of the RWM 53 and data outside the used area will be explained.
The data in the used area and outside the used area of the RWM 53 is not initialized and maintained only by cutting off/resuming the power supply (turning the power on/off, turning the power switch 11 on/off).
Further, even when returning from a recoverable error state, the used area of the RWM 53 and data outside the used area are maintained without being initialized.

Furthermore, it is assumed that an operation for transitioning to a setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on) is performed, and it is determined that a power-off recovery abnormality has occurred. In this case, the answer is "Yes" in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354, which will be described later, and the process proceeds to step S2711, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the time of starting the setting change at the time of power-off recovery abnormality is set. Also, since this is a power-off recovery abnormality, "Yes" is determined in step S2712 in FIG. 354, and the process proceeds to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.
Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ”), and the entire range outside the used area (addresses “F210(H)” to “F3FF(H)”) are initialized.
Even when returning from an unrecoverable error state, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed in the same range as when it is determined that a power-off recovery abnormality has occurred after performing an operation for transitioning to a setting change state.

Further, it is assumed that an operation for transitioning to a setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal. In this case, the answer in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. The conversion range is set.
Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ” to “F3FF(H)” initialization processing is executed.

Therefore, when the operation to shift to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM53 and the address "F210 ( The data of "H)" to "F291(H)" are maintained without being initialized.
In other words, the address "F292(H)" (ratio display number) of the RWM 53 is initialized. For this reason, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), turn off the power, and then switch to the setting change state. When the operation is performed and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the management information display LED 74 will display the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio data (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of various ratio information. is started.

Further, it is assumed that the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal. In this case, the answer in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. The conversion range is set.
Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ” to “F3FF(H)” initialization processing is executed.

In other words, the address "F292(H)" (ratio display number) of the RWM 53 is initialized. Therefore, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), turn off the power, and then turn off the setting key switch 152. and turn on the power with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and when it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the management information display LED 74 will display the first display item of various ratio information. Display starts from certain instruction-included accessory ratio data (ratio display number "1").

Therefore, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the operation to shift to the setting change state is performed. The initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed in the same range as when it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal.
Therefore, even if you do not have the setting key or do not move to the setting change state, the range is the same as when the power-off recovery is determined to be normal after performing the operation to change the setting state. Then, the RWM 53 can be initialized.

Furthermore, at the end of the advantageous section, initialization processing is executed for a predetermined range of the used area of the RWM 53 (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in FIG. 346) in which data regarding the advantageous section is stored. Ru.
Furthermore, even if the advantageous section ends, the address "F292(H)" of the RWM 53 is not initialized. For this reason, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (winning ratio monitor) displays the accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), the advantageous section ends and the data regarding the advantageous section is stored. Even if initialization processing is executed for a predetermined range of the used area of the RWM 53 (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in FIG. 346), the display items displayed on the management information display LED 74 will not be displayed. Following the accessory ratio (cumulative total) data is accessory state ratio data (ratio display number "6").

Further, it is assumed that the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned off, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal. That is, assume that the power is turned on and off normally. In this case, since the initialization process of the RWM 53 is not executed, the used area and data outside the used area of the RWM 53 at the time of power-off are maintained.
For this reason, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), turn off the power, and then press the setting key switch 152 and reset. When the power is turned on with both switches (RWM clear switch) 153 in the off state, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the state will be restored to the state at the time of power-off, so the management information display LED 74 will first display the The object ratio (cumulative) data is displayed, and then the accessory condition ratio data (ratio display number "6"), which is the next display item after the accessory ratio (cumulative) data, is displayed.

Further, assume that the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned off, and it is determined that a power-off recovery abnormality has occurred. In this case, "Yes" is determined in step S2708 in FIG. 354, and the process proceeds to step S2801, where the irreversible error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is executed (an irreversible error state occurs), so the initialization process of the RWM 53 is not executed. . Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801 is executed, interrupt processing is prohibited (step S1490 in FIG. 356), and the outputs of output ports 0 to 7 are turned off ( Step S1495 in FIG. 356).
For this reason, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), turn off the power, and then press the setting key switch 152 and reset. When the power is turned on with both switches (RWM clear switch) 153 off, and it is determined that a power-off recovery error has occurred, interrupt processing is prohibited and the outputs of output ports 0 to 7 are turned off. The management information display LED 74 remains off.

Note that, for example, in the irreversible error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, "8" may be displayed in each of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74. In this case, turn off the power, then turn on the power with both the setting key switch 152 and reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off, and if it is determined that a power failure recovery error has occurred, the management information display LED 74 "8888" is displayed.

Further, for example, even if the process moves to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, interrupt processing may not be prohibited, and the outputs of output ports 0 to 7 may be maintained without being turned off. In this case, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), turn off the power, and then press the setting key switch 152 and reset. Even if the power is turned on with both switches (RWM clear switch) 153 in the off state and it is determined that a power-off recovery abnormality has occurred, the management information display LED 74 will first display the accessory ratio (cumulative) data. Next, accessory state ratio data (ratio display number "6"), which is the next display item after accessory ratio (cumulative total) data, is displayed.

FIG. 349(A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display board 75 in the forty-first embodiment, and FIG. 349(B) is a diagram showing the management information display LED 74 in the forty-first embodiment. This FIG. 349 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 31 of the eleventh embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 349(A), in the forty-first embodiment, a credit number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79 are provided on a display board 75.
The credit number display LED 76 is composed of digit 1 (upper digit) and digit 2 (lower digit), and the earned number display LED 78 is composed of digit 3 (upper digit) and digit 4 (lower digit). Furthermore, digits 1 to 4 use a 7-segment display without dot segments.
Note that digits 1 to 4 may be configured using a 7-segment display with dot segments, but the dot segments may not be lit.

In addition, the status display LED 79 includes a 1-bet display LED 79a, a 2-bet display LED 79b, a 3-bet display LED 79c, a game start display LED 79d, an input display LED 79e, and a replay display LED 79f, which are composed of six LEDs. .
Furthermore, although the advantageous section display LED 77 does not appear in FIG. 349, it is constructed using a segment P of digit 4, as shown in FIG. 350.
Furthermore, although the set value display LED 73 does not appear in FIG. 349, it is provided on the main control board 50 as shown in FIG. 1, and is composed of digit 5. Digit 5 also uses a 7 segment display without dot segments.
Note that digit 5 may be configured using a 7-segment display with dot segments, but the dot segments may not be lit.

As shown in FIG. 349(B), the management information display LED 74 displays digit 6 (upper digit of the identification segment), digit 7 (lower digit of the identification segment), digit 8 (upper digit of the ratio segment), and digit 9 (lower digit of the ratio segment). digit).
Further, digits 6 to 9 use a 7-segment display with dot segments (segment P).
Furthermore, the segment P of digit 7 (lower digit of the identification segment) functions as a digit separator display LED. The digit separator display LED is used to clearly mark the separator between the information type (identification segment) and the ratio (ratio segment).

FIG. 350 is a diagram illustrating details of digits and segments in the forty-first embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 32 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the 41st embodiment, the 7-segment display of digits 1 to 5 itself consists of segments A to G and does not include a dot segment (segment P).
However, the segment P of digit 1 constitutes the game start display LED 79d, the segment P of digit 2 constitutes the input display LED 79e, the segment P of digit 3 constitutes the replay display LED 79f, and the segment P of digit 4 constitutes the game start display LED 79d. constitutes an advantageous section display LED 77.

FIG. 351 is a diagram showing output ports 2 to 7 in the 41st embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 33 in the 11th embodiment.
In the 41st embodiment, there are two output ports (output ports 3 and 6) that output digit signals, and two output ports (output ports 4 and 7) that output segment signals. It is characterized by
The 41st embodiment differs from the 11th embodiment in that digits 1 to 9 are provided.
Furthermore, the segment for digits 1 to 5 is referred to as segment 1 (segments 1A to 1P), and the segment for digits 6 to 9 is referred to as segment 2 (segments 2A to 2P).

Further, in the 41st embodiment, the output port 3 is an output port that outputs digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digits 1 to 5 signals), and the output port 6 is an output port that outputs digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digits 1 to 5 signals). This is an output port that outputs signals (6 to 9 signals).
Furthermore, in the 41st embodiment, the output port 4 is an output port that outputs segment signals for digits 1 to 5 (segment 1A to 1P signals), and the output port 7 is an output port that outputs segment signals for digits 6 to 9 (segment signals). This is an output port that outputs 2A to 2P signals).
When digits 1 to 5 are turned on, the digit signal is output from the output port 3 and the segment 1 signal is output from the output port 4.
Further, when lighting digits 6 to 9, the digit signal is output from the output port 6, and the segment 2 signal is output from the output port 7.

Next, external signals will be explained. The "external signal" is a signal output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (the hall computer 200, a data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external centralized terminal board 100.
As shown in FIG. 351, in the forty-first embodiment, external signals 1 to 6 are output from output port 5. Specifically, a "settings changing signal" is assigned to the D0 bit (external signal 1) of the output port 5, and a "settings checking signal" is assigned to the D1 bit (external signal 2). The signals shown in FIG. 351 are also assigned to bits D2 to D5.

The "settings changing signal" is an external signal indicating that settings are being changed and that settings have been changed. The setting change signal is generated during the setting change and at the end of one game after the setting change (all reels 31 stop and medal payout processing (processing corresponding to "medal payout due to winning" in step S294 in FIG. 41)). The output continues until the end of the process. This is to ensure that external parties are informed that the settings have been changed. When the D0 bit of the output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the setting change signal is on (the setting is being changed, or one game after the setting change is not completed). Further, when the D0 bit is "0", it indicates that the setting change in progress signal is off (the setting is not being changed and it is not before the end of one game after the setting change).

The "setting confirmation signal" is an external signal indicating that the settings are being confirmed. The setting confirmation signal is output during setting confirmation. When the D1 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the setting confirmation signal is on (the setting is being confirmed), and when the D1 bit is "0", the setting confirmation signal is off. Yes (settings are not being checked).

"Fraud detection signal 1" is an external signal indicating that there is a possibility of fraud. For example, when the door switch 17 is on (when the opening of the front door 12 is detected), the fraud detection signal 1 is output. When the D2 bit of the output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the fraud detection signal 1 is on (the door switch 17 is on, the front door 12 is open), and the D2 bit is "0". This indicates that the fraud detection signal 1 is off (the door switch 17 is off, the front door 12 is closed).

"Fraud detection signal 2", like fraud detection signal 1, is an external signal indicating that there is a possibility of fraud. For example, when a recoverable error state occurs, the fraud detection signal 2 is output. When the D3 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the fraud detection signal 2 is on (recoverable error state), and when the D3 bit is "0", the fraud detection signal 2 is off. (not a recoverable error state).

"Fraud detection signal 3", like fraud detection signals 1 and 2, is an external signal indicating that there is a possibility of fraud. For example, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, the fraud detection signal 3 is output. When the D4 bit of the output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the fraud detection signal 3 is on (an unrecoverable error state), and when the D4 bit is "0", the fraud detection signal 3 is turned on. Indicates that it is off (not in an unrecoverable error state).

The "security signal" is an external signal indicating that any one of the settings changing signal, settings confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3 is on. When outputting any of the settings changing signal, settings confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3, a security signal is also output at the same time. When the D5 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the security signal is on (one of the settings changing signal, settings confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3 is being output); When the D5 bit is "0", it indicates that the security signal is off (none of the settings changing signal, settings confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3 are output).

As described above, the setting change in progress signal is continuously outputted until the end of one game after the setting change. Therefore, if the setting confirmation state is entered before the end of the first game after the setting change, both the setting change in progress signal and the setting confirmation in progress signal are output. Specifically, for example, assume that the setting change state is finished and a situation is reached in which medals (game media, game value) can be bet. At this time, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on in a state where the number of bets is "0", both a setting changing signal and a setting confirming signal are output.
Furthermore, when outputting any one of the settings changing signal, settings confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3, a security signal is also output. Therefore, if the setting confirmation state is entered before the end of the first game after the setting change, the D0 bit, D1 bit, and D5 bit of the output port 5 are turned on (“1”). After that, if you end the setting confirmation state before the end of the first game after changing the settings, the D0 bit and D5 bit of output port 5 will remain on ("1"), and the D1 bit will be off ("0"). become. When the first game after the setting change is completed, the D0 bit and D5 bit of the output port 5 are also turned off ("0").

Next, lighting control for digits 1 to 9 will be explained.
The lighting of digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, set value display LED 73) is controlled by LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 362, which will be described later. Further, the LED display control process (I_LED_OUT) is a process performed by the program (first program) of the used area.

On the other hand, the lighting of digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) is controlled by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) of FIG. 364, which will be described later. Further, the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is a process performed by a program (second program) outside the usage area.
In the 41st embodiment, digits 1 to 5 control lighting according to the program in the used area (first program), and digits 6 to 9 control lighting according to the program outside the used area (second program). The output ports used are separated.

FIG. 352 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the 41st embodiment.
In the 41st embodiment, the segment has digits 1 to 9, and the segment of digits 1 to 5 is defined as segment 1 (segment 1A to 1P), and the segment of digits 6 to 9 is defined as segment 2 (segment 2A to 2P). .
Segments 1A to 1G of digit 1 constitute the upper digits of the credit number display LED 76, and segment 1P of digit 1 constitutes the game start display LED 79d.
Further, segments 1A to 1G of digit 2 constitute the lower digits of the credit number display LED 76, and segment 1P of digit 2 constitutes the input display LED 79e.

Furthermore, the segments 1A to 1G of digit 3 constitute the upper digits of the acquired number display LED 78, and the segment 1P of digit 3 constitutes the replay display LED 79f.
Further, segments 1A to 1G of digit 4 constitute the lower digits of the number-of-achievement display LED 78, and segment 1P of digit 4 constitutes the advantageous section display LED 77.
Further, segments 1A to 1G of digit 5 constitute a setting value display LED 73.
Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 6 constitute the upper digits of the identification segment of the management information display LED 74.

Further, segments 2A to 2G of digit 7 constitute the lower digits of the identification segment of the management information display LED 74, and segment 2P of digit 7 constitutes a digit separator display LED.
Further, segments 2A to 2G of digit 8 constitute the upper digits of the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74.
Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 9 constitute the lower digits of the identification segment of the management information display LED 74.

FIG. 353(A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and the signal output from the output port 3 in the 41st embodiment. Further, FIG. 10B is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) and the signal output from the output port 6 in the 41st embodiment. Furthermore, FIG. 3C is a diagram showing the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) in the 41st embodiment.
In this example, LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) (address "F051(H)" in FIG. 346) is provided in the area used by RWM 53, and LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) (address "F051(H)" in FIG. 348) is provided outside the area used by RWM 53. Address "F297(H)") is provided.

The LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is a counter for outputting a digit 1 signal to a digit 5 signal for each interrupt, and is a counter with 5 interrupts per period.
Further, the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is a counter for outputting the digit 6 signal to digit 9 signal for each interrupt, and is a counter with 4 interrupts per period.
In this manner, in the forty-first embodiment, an LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and an LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 are provided separately and independently.
Furthermore, since the one cycle of the LED display counters of both are different, the lighting timing of digits 1 to 5 is different from the lighting timing of digits 6 to 9.

The LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) is data indicating a digit whose lighting is permitted, and is stored at address "F052(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 (see FIG. 346).
As shown in FIG. 353(C), the LED display request flag is 8-bit data in which the D0 bit corresponds to the digit 1 signal, the D1 bit corresponds to the digit 2 signal, ..., the D4 bit corresponds to the digit 5 signal. be. Each bit of the LED display request flag is made to match the bit of output port 3 shown in FIG. 351.
In addition, as shown in Figure 353(C), digits 1 to 4 can be lit during normal operation (digit 5 is off), and digit 5 can be lit while changing settings or checking settings (digits 1 to 4 are off). (lights out). In addition. "Normal" refers to waiting for games and during games.

Then, in the interrupt processing, the value of LED display counter 1 in the used area and the value of the LED display request flag are ANDed, and the digit corresponding to the bit that becomes "1" is the digit that lights up in the current interrupt processing. Become.
For example, if the value of LED display counter 1 of the used area is "00001000 (B)" and the value of the LED display request flag is "00001111 (B) (normal medium)", if the two are ANDed, "00001000 (B)", and only the digit 4 signal becomes "1".
Also, while changing settings or checking settings, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal turns on (LED display counter 1 in the used area is "00010000 (B)"), a segment signal is output from output port 4, The setting value display LED 73 (digit 5) can be lit.

Next, recoverable errors and unrecoverable errors will be explained.
A "recoverable error" is an error that can be recovered from without turning the power on or off. For example, as a recoverable error,
"HP" error: Medal jamming (retention) error in the hopper 35 "HE" error: Empty medal error in the hopper 35 "H0" error: Abnormality in the payout sensor 37 of the hopper 35 "CE" error: Medal retention error in the medal selector "CP" error: Error in incorrect passage of medals in the medal selector "CH" error: Abnormality in the passage sensor 46 located in the medal selector "C0" error: Malfunction in the input sensor 44 located in the medal selector " Examples include "C1" error: Abnormal medal insertion error "FE" error: Sub tank full "dE" error: Front door 12 opened.
Note that recoverable errors are not limited to those described above.

In step S457 of interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 359, which will be described later, reading processing of the input port 51 is executed, and input signals of various switches (start switch 41, etc.) and various sensors (throwing sensor 44, etc.) are read. Thereafter, various types of data (level data, rising data, falling data) are generated based on the read input signal and stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53. After that, in step S463 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR), input error check processing is executed, and when any recoverable error is detected by referring to the above various data, an error detection flag indicating the detected recoverable error is set. is stored at a predetermined address in the RWM 53.

In addition, in the main process (M_MAIN) (the main process of the 41st embodiment is the process shown in FIG. 41), the timing before the detection of the operation of the start switch 41 and after all the reels 31 have stopped. Then, the error detection flag is checked, and if any bit of the error detection flag is "1", it is determined that a recoverable error has occurred, the game progress is stopped, and the game is placed in a recoverable error state. .
Furthermore, if a recoverable error occurs between when the start switch 41 is operated and when all the reels 31 have stopped in a situation where the specified number of medals have been bet, all the reels 31 will have stopped. After all the reels 31 have stopped, the game progress is continued until the medal payout process (processing corresponding to "medal payout due to winning" in step S294 in FIG. It may be stopped and placed in a recoverable error state.
Further, when it is determined that a recoverable error has occurred, error information about the recoverable error that has occurred is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. This error information display (error display) is performed in the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 359.

When a recoverable error occurs, when the cause of the recoverable error is removed by the administrator (hall clerk) and the reset switch 153 is operated, the recoverable error state is canceled and the progress of the game is resumed. .
In this manner, when a recoverable error occurs, the cause of the recoverable error is removed and the reset switch 153 is operated without turning the power on/off or operating the setting key switch 152. It is possible to cancel the recoverable error state and return to a state in which the game can proceed.

On the other hand, an "unrecoverable error" cannot be recovered unless the power is turned off and an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on). This is a serious error. For example, as an unrecoverable error,
"E1" error: When recovery from power off is not normal (when recovery from power off is abnormal) (when "Yes" in step S2712 of FIG. 354, which will be described later)
"E5" error: When the stopped symbols are not normal when the reel 31 stops (when a display error occurs)
"E6" error: When the set value is not within the normal range (when a set value error occurs) (when "No" in step S458 in Figure 359)
"E7" error: When a random number error occurs (when "Yes" in step S460 in Figure 359)
etc.
Note that unrecoverable errors are not limited to those described above.

No matter which non-recoverable error occurs, error information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. For example, when an "E1" error occurs, "E" is displayed in digit 3 and "1" is displayed in digit 4. The same message is displayed when other non-recoverable errors occur.
In addition, the process in step S2715 in the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354 (program of used area (processing by the first program)).
Furthermore, when the reels 31 stop, it is determined that the stopped symbols are not normal (a display error has occurred), and the "E5" error is determined during the main processing (M_MAIN) (corresponding to the processing in FIG. 41). This is the process of step S292 (processing by the program (first program) of the used area).

On the other hand, it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range (a set value error has occurred), and the "E6" error is determined in step S458 during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. (processing by the program (second program)).
Similarly, it is determined that the random number value is not normal (a random number error has occurred), and the "E7" error is determined in the process of step S460 during the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. (processing by a second program).
When it is determined that an unrecoverable error has occurred in the program (first program) in the used area, unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) of FIG. 356, which will be described later, is executed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that an unrecoverable error has occurred in a program outside the used area (second program), unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 363, which will be described later, is executed.

When an unrecoverable error occurs, the power supply is cut off (turn off the power, turn off the power switch 11), and then the power supply is restarted (by turning on the setting key switch 152). Turn on the power and turn on the power switch 11). As a result, "Yes" is determined in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354, and the process advances to step S2711. Further, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) of FIG. 360, which will be described later, is not executed, so "Yes" is determined in step S2712 of FIG. 354, and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731.

Furthermore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ), and the entire range outside the used area (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)") are initialized. After that, the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 in FIG. 357. If the set value is reset here, the unrecoverable error state is canceled and the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) of step S248 (FIG. 41).
In this way, when an unrecoverable error occurs, by turning off the power and then turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on, the unrecoverable error state can be canceled and the game can proceed. can be restored to a state where it is possible.

Furthermore, when a recoverable error occurs, the error is displayed by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in Figure 362, but when an unrecoverable error occurs, the interrupt process (I_INTR) in Figure 359 is not executed, and therefore the LED Display control (I_LED_OUT) is also not executed. When an unrecoverable error occurs, the error is displayed by the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 356 or the unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 363.
Furthermore, when returning from a recoverable error state, the used area of the RWM 53 and data outside the used area are maintained without being initialized, but when returning from an unrecoverable error state, the used area and the used area of the RWM 53 The entire range of data outside is initialized.
Note that when returning from a recoverable error state, data such as an error detection flag stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 may be initialized.

FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50 in the 41st embodiment.
When the power is turned on (power switch 11 is turned on, power supply is restarted), the program starts from the program start process shown in FIG. 354.
In FIG. 354, when the program is started in step S2701, in the next step S2702, the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53. .

Next, the process advances to step S2703, and the main control board 50 executes checksum calculation processing for the RWM 53.
Specifically, in step S2703, the data of addresses “F000(H)” to “F1FF(H)” in the used area of the RWM 53 and the data of addresses “F210(H)” to “F3FF(H)” outside the used area are Add data.
That is, data of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 and addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are added.
When the result is "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 is normal, and when the result is not "0", the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 is judged to be abnormal (abnormal). ).

In addition, in step S2703, it is determined whether the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) of the address "F2A1 (H)" of the RWM 53 is "55 (H)". , it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is normal, and when it is not "55 (H)", it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is not normal (abnormal).
Here, in this embodiment, during power-off processing, a power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is set in the address "F2A1 (H)" of the RWM 53 (step S2784 of RWM checksum set (S_SUM_SET) in FIG. 361). . Then, in step S2703, it is determined whether the power-off processing completion flag set during the power-off processing is a normal value ("55 (H)").

In addition, in step S2703, the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 is normal (the result of adding the data in the used area and the data outside the used area of the RWM 35 is "0"), and the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is normal. When the value is ("55 (H)"), "55 (H)" is stored in the address "F2A2 (H)" of the RWM 53 as power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON).
On the other hand, in step S2703, if at least one of the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 and the power-off processing completed flag is not normal (abnormal), the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is set to "00 (H )” is stored in the address “F2A2(H)” of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to the next step S2704.

Proceeding to step S2704, the main control board 50 restores the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) saved in step S2702. Then, the process advances to the next step S2705.

Here, the program for the program start process is stored in a control area (first control area, first program area) of the used area of the ROM 54. That is, the program for the program start process is the first program.
On the other hand, the program for the checksum calculation process of the RWM 53 in step S2703 is stored in a control area (second control area, second program area) outside the used area of the ROM 54. That is, the program for the checksum calculation process in step S2703 is the second program.

Therefore, in FIG. 354, in the program start process which is the process by the program (first program) in the used area, when the process proceeds to step S2703, checksum calculation of the RWM 53 which is the process by the program (second program) outside the used area. When the process is executed and the checksum calculation process is completed, the process returns to the program start process, which is the process by the program (first program) of the used area.
Also, when transitioning from processing by a program in the used area (first program) to processing by a program outside the used area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is used by the RWM53. The AF register is saved to the stack area of the area, and when processing by a program outside the used area (second program) is finished and returning to processing by a program in the used area (first program), the AF register is restored.

Proceeding to step S2705, the main control board 50 acquires the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) from the address "F2A2(H)" of the RWM 53 and stores it in the A register. Then, the process advances to the next step S2706.

Proceeding to step S2706, the main control board 50 determines whether the door switch signal is on. As described above, when the front door 12 is open, the door switch 17 is turned on and the door switch signal is turned on. If it is determined that the door switch signal is on (the front door 12 is in an open state), the process advances to the next step S2707. On the other hand, if it is determined that the door switch signal is off (the front door 12 is in a closed state), the process advances to step S2715.

In step S2707, the main control board 50 determines whether the setting key switch signal is on. As described above, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and the setting key switch signal is turned on. If it is determined that the setting key switch signal is on, the process advances to step S2711. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key switch signal is off, the process advances to step S2708.

Proceeding to step S2708, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a power-off recovery abnormality. Specifically, when the value of the A register (power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) acquired in step S2705) is "55 (H)," it is determined that there is no power-off recovery abnormality, and the process proceeds to the next step S2709. . On the other hand, when the value of the A register is "00 (H)", it is determined that the power-off recovery is abnormal, and the process proceeds to step S2801, which is an unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP). Note that the specific contents of the irreversible error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) will be described later.

In step S2709, the main control board 50 sets reset determination data. Specifically, "7" is stored in the D register. Then, the process advances to the next step S2710.
Proceeding to step S2710, the main control board 50 determines whether the reset switch signal is on. As described above, in this embodiment, the setting change switch 153, the reset switch 153, and the RWM clear switch 153 are configured as an integrated switch. Then, when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the reset switch signal is turned on, and the process advances to step S2713. On the other hand, when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the reset switch signal is turned off, and the process proceeds to power return processing (M_POWER_ON) in step S2721. Note that the specific contents of the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) will be described later.

Proceeding to step S2711, the main control board 50 sets the initialization range of the RWM 53 for the power-off recovery abnormality. In this embodiment, when the power-off recovery is abnormal (the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is "00 (H)"), the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 is included. The used area and the entire range outside the used area (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)") are set as the initialization range. Note that the initialization range is specified by the start address of the initialization range and the number of bytes. Then, the process advances to the next step S2712.

In step S2712, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a power-off recovery abnormality. Specifically, it is the same as step S2708. When it is determined that there is no power-off recovery abnormality, "7", which is the data for determining the setting change state, is stored in the D register, and the process proceeds to the next step S2713, where it is determined that there is a power-off recovery abnormality. If so, the process advances to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. Note that the specific contents of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) will be described later.

Proceeding to step S2713, the main control board 50 sets the initialization range of the RWM 53 for normal power-off recovery. In this embodiment, when the power-off recovery is normal (the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is "55 (H)"), the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM53 and the usage Addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the area are maintained without being initialized (cleared). Therefore, in step S2713, the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 and the addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are initialized. Set as . As described above, the initialization range is specified by the start address and the number of bytes of the initialization range. Then, the process advances to the next step S2714.

In step S2714, the main control board 50 determines whether the settings can be changed. In this embodiment, the settings cannot be changed during the start switch reception process (step S279 in FIG. 41) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 41), including while the reels 31 are rotating. , the settings cannot be changed flag is turned on. Then, in step S2714, it is determined whether the settings can be changed by determining whether the settings change prohibition flag is on. When it is determined that the settings cannot be changed (the settings cannot be changed), the process advances to the next step S2715, and when it is determined that the settings can be changed, the process advances to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731. The specific contents of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) will be described later.
It should be noted that the settings may be always enabled to be changed without providing a period during which the settings cannot be changed, and therefore without providing a setting change prohibition flag.

Proceeding to step S2715, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a power-off recovery abnormality. Specifically, it is the same as step S2708. If it is determined that a power-off recovery error has occurred, the process advances to step S2801 for an unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP), and if it is determined that a power-off recovery error has not occurred, the process proceeds to power-off recovery process (M_POWER_ON) in step S2721. . Note that the specific contents of the power return processing (M_POWER_ON) and the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) will be described later. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 355 is a flowchart showing the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in step S2721 in FIG. 354.
First, in step S2722, the main control board 50 restores the stack pointer. In this embodiment, the stack pointer is saved during power-off processing (step S2774 of power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 360). Then, in step S2722, the stack pointer saved at the time of power-off processing is restored.

Proceeding to the next step S2723, the main control board 50 executes the input port 51 reading process. This updates each data in the input port 51 to the latest data.
In the next step S2724, the main control board 50 clears the power-off processing completion flag. Then, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41) of step S248, and the process according to this flowchart ends.
Note that in this embodiment, after executing the process in step S2724, the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 359 is started at a timing before proceeding to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248.

FIG. 356 is a flowchart showing unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).
The program for unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is stored in the used area of the ROM 54, and the program for unrecoverable error handling 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is stored outside the used area of the ROM 54. That is, the program for irreversible error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is the first program, and the program for irreversible error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is the second program.

Furthermore, in unrecoverable error processing, interrupt processing is prohibited.
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that does not normally occur, and processing based on abnormal data (such as updating data in the RWM 53 based on an input signal from the input port 51 or sending a control command to the sub-control board 80) , control based on the signal output from the output port based on the data of the RWM 53), etc., interrupt processing is prohibited in unrecoverable error processing.

Here, the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is a process performed by the first program, and when the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is started, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is first executed in step S1490, which disables interrupts. prohibited.
On the other hand, unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is a process performed by the second program, and since execution of interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited while the second program is running, unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) There is no processing to disable interrupts after the start.

In FIG. 356, when the process advances to step S1491, the main control board 50 sets error display data for the lower digits of the unrecoverable error. This process is a process of storing data for lighting up digit 4 (data in which only the digit 4 signal is set to "1") ("00001000 (B)") in the H register.
Next, the process advances to step S1492, and the main control board 50 sets error display data for the upper digits of the unrecoverable error. This process is a process of storing data for lighting digit 3 (data in which only the digit 3 signal is ``1'') (``00000100 (B)'') in the D register.

Furthermore, in step S1492, the main control board 50 stores segment data ("01111001B") for displaying "E" in the upper digit (digit 3) of the irrecoverable error in the E register.
Note that before proceeding to unrecoverable error processing, segment data for displaying the lower digit of the unrecoverable error is stored in the L register. For example, when the unrecoverable error is an "E1" error, the lower digit (digit 4) is "1", so the L register contains segment data ("00000110B") for displaying "1". is memorized.
In the following example, it is assumed that the current unrecoverable error 1 is an "E1" error.

From the above, the D, E, H, and L register values are as follows at this point:
D register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to “1”) (“00000100 (B)”)
E register value: Segment data (“01111001(B)”) to display “E” in the upper digit (digit 3) of unrecoverable errors
H register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000 (B)")
L register value: Segment data to display "1" in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error ("00000110 (B)")
becomes.

In the next step S1493, the main control board 50 sets the address of the output port to be cleared and the number of output ports. In this embodiment, the output ports to be cleared in unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) are output ports 0 to 7, and since an address is set for each output port, the address and the number of output ports (8 ).
In the next step S1494, the main control board 50 sequentially turns off the outputs of output ports 0 to 7. Specifically, for output ports 0 to 7, the output is turned off (“00000000(B)”) one by one.

In the next step S1495, the main control board 50 sets the address of the next output port. That is, the address indicating the output port is incremented by "1". For example, when the address of output port 0 is "00F1(H)", the address of output port 1 "00F2(H)" is set as the next address.
Next, the process advances to step S1496, and the main control board 50 determines whether the outputs of all output ports have been turned off, that is, whether the outputs up to output port 7 have been turned off. If it is determined that the process has not finished, the process returns to step S1494, and if it is determined that the process has finished, the process proceeds to step S1497. In this way, the processes of steps S1494 to S1496 are repeated until the outputs of all output ports are turned off, and when it is determined that the outputs of all output ports are turned off, the process advances to step S1497.

By turning off all output ports in this way, all active signals that were output before this process is executed are turned off. As a result, all the LEDs including digits 1 to 9 (credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, set value display LED 73, management information display LED 74) are turned off, so that burn-in of the LEDs can be prevented.

Additionally, if an unrecoverable error occurs while the excitation signal for the motor 32 is being output, unless the output port is turned off, the excitation signal for the motor 32 will continue to be output until the unrecoverable error is cleared. However, by turning off all output ports, the excitation signal for the motor 32 is turned off, so that seizure of the motor 32 can be prevented.
Furthermore, if an unrecoverable error occurs while the blocker signal is being output, unless the output port is turned off, the medal detection process will not be executed, but the blocker 45 remains on (medals are not sent to the hopper). However, by turning off all output ports, the blocker 45 is turned off and the inserted medals are returned, so the medals are swallowed. Swallowing can be prevented.

In the next step S1497, the main control board 50 outputs error display data from the output ports 3 and 4 in order to display an error in the upper digits. Output port 3 outputs the data stored in the D register, and output port 4 outputs the data stored in the E register.

Next, the process advances to step S1498, and the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent flickering of the LED. Here, the length of time to wait depends on the performance of the LED, but it may be set to about "0.1 ms", for example. Here, for example, a predetermined value (for example, "255") is stored in the B register, and this value is subtracted by, for example, the internal system clock. When the B register value becomes "0", it is determined that the waiting time has elapsed. Then, the process advances to the next step S1499.

In step S1499, the main control board 50 turns off the outputs of the output ports 3 and 4 (“0”). This process is for preventing afterimages.
Next, the process advances to step S1500, and the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent flickering of the LED. This is a process to ensure that the LEDs are extinguished after the outputs of output ports 3 and 4 are turned off (“0”).

Next, the process advances to step S1501, and the main control board 50 switches between the upper digit and the lower digit.
Specifically, the DE register value and HL register value are exchanged. This results in
<Before replacement>
D register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to “1”) (“00000100 (B)”)
E register value: Segment data (“01111001(B)”) to display “E” in the upper digit (digit 3) of unrecoverable errors
H register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000 (B)")
L register value: Segment data to display "1" in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error ("00000110 (B)")
<After replacement>
D register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000 (B)")
E register value: Segment data (“00000110 (B)”) to display “1” in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error
H register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100 (B)")
L register value: Segment data (“01111001(B)”) to display “E” in the upper digit (digit 3) of unrecoverable errors
becomes.

Then, the process advances to step S1502, and the main control board 50 outputs error display data from the output ports 3 and 4 in order to display an error in the lower digits. Similarly to step S1497, output port 3 outputs the D register value, and output port 4 outputs the E register value. As a result, output port 3 outputs "00001000 (B)" (data with only digit 4 signal as "1") that lights up digit 4, and output port 4 outputs a segment to display "1". Data “00000110(B)” is output.

Next, the process advances to step S1503, and the main control board 50 executes a standby process to prevent flicker. This process is similar to step S1498.
Next, the process advances to step S1504, and the main control board 50 turns off ("0") the outputs of output ports 3 and 4, similarly to step S1499.
In the next step S1505, the main control board 50 executes a standby process to prevent flickering. This process is similar to step S1500. Then, the process returns to step S1497.

As a result of the above processing, for example, in the case of an "E1" error, the display of "E" by digit 3 and the display of "1" by digit 4 are alternately and repeatedly displayed at predetermined time intervals.
Note that the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed by the interrupt process (I_INTR), but as described above, in the event of an unrecoverable error, the interrupt process (I_INTR) is not executed (prohibited), and as shown in FIG. As shown, an irreversible error is displayed by arithmetic processing using registers and a hardware configuration.

FIG. 357 is a flowchart showing the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731 in FIG. 354.
The main control board 50 first initializes the specified address of the RWM 53 in step S2732, sets (specifies) the next address in the initialization range of the RWM 53 in the next step S2733, and then proceeds to the next step S2734. After proceeding, it is determined whether initialization has been completed for the entire initialization range of the RWM 53. If it is determined that the initialization has not been completed, the process returns to step S2732, and if it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2735. As a result, the processes of steps S2732 to S2734 are repeated until the initialization of the entire initialization range of the RWM 53 is completed.

As described above, in step S2711 or S2713 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354, the initialization range (start address and number of bytes of the initialization range) of the RWM 53 is set.
Then, in steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), initialization is performed for the initialization range of the used area out of the initialization range of the RWM 53 set in step S2711 or S2713.
Note that the processing of steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) is executed by the program (first program) of the used area. Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), initialization is executed only for the initialization range of the used area among the initialization range of the RWM 53.

If it is determined in step S2734 that the initialization has been completed, the main control board 50 proceeds to the next step S2735 and saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53. let
Proceeding to the next step S2736, the main control board 50 initializes the initialization range outside the used area among the initialization range of the RWM 53 set in step S2711 or S2713 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354. Execute.

As described above, in steps S2732 to S2734, the used area of the initialization range of the RWM 53 is initialized, but in step S2736, the area outside the used area of the initialization range of the RWM 53 is initialized. .
Note that the process of step S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) is executed by a program (second program) outside the used area. Therefore, in step S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), initialization is executed only for the initialization range outside the used area among the initialization range of the RWM 53.
When the initialization of the initialization range outside the used area is completed in step S2736, the process proceeds to the next step S2737, where the main control board 50 stores the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) saved in step S2735. ) is restored. Then, the process advances to the next step S2738.

In step S2738, the main control board 50 determines whether it is time to reset. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the answer is "Yes" in step S2710 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354. In this embodiment, in step S2709 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354, "7" is stored in the D register as reset determination data. Furthermore, when "Yes" in step S2710 of FIG. 354, "7" is maintained in the D register, and when "No" is determined in step S2710 of FIG. 354, the D register is cleared ("0" is stored). . Then, in step S2738 of FIG. 357, it is determined whether or not the D register is "7", and if the D register is "7", it is the reset time ("Yes" in step S2710 of FIG. 354). It is determined that this is the case, and the process advances to step S2739. On the other hand, when the D register is "0", it is determined that it is not the reset time ("No" in step S2710 in FIG. 354), and step S2739 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2740.

Proceeding to step S2739, the main control board 50 sets the display at the time of reset. Specifically, "70 (H)" is stored in the acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT) of the address "F011 (H)" of the RWM 53. As a result, "70" can be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S2739, and the administrator (hall clerk) is notified that it is time to reset. be able to.

Proceeding to the next step S2740, the main control board 50 sets the setting command in the control command buffer of the RWM 53. The setting command set in step S2740 indicates whether to reset or change settings. As a result, the setting command set in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S2740, so the sub-control board 80 side can determine whether it is a reset or a setting change. can be determined by

Note that in this embodiment, after executing the process in step S2740, the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 359 is started at a timing before proceeding to the process in step S2741. In other words, the process of initializing the initialization range of the RWM 53 (the processes of steps S2732 to S2734 and S2736 in FIG. 357) has been completed before the interrupt process (I_INTR) starts. With this configuration, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prevented from being executed while the RWM 53 is being initialized. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the contents of the RWM 53 from being changed (rewritten or overwritten) due to interrupt processing (I_INTR) while the RWM 53 is being initialized.

Proceeding to the next step S2741, the main control board 50 determines whether it is time to reset. Specifically, it is the same as step S2738. If it is determined that it is not time to reset, the process proceeds to step S2742, and if it is determined that it is time to reset, step S2742 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2743.
When proceeding to step S2742, the main control board 50 executes a setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL). The specific contents of this process will be described later. When the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) is finished, the process advances to the next step S2743.

In step S2743, the main control board 50 determines whether the standby time has elapsed. This waiting time is for waiting for the setting command to be sent. If it is determined that the standby time has elapsed, the main control board 50 proceeds to the next step S2744, sets the initialization wait time, and executes a 2-byte time wait process (wait process) in the next step S2745. . The processing in steps S2744 and S2745 is for waiting for the initialization of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 to be completed.

When the 2-byte time waiting process is completed, the process advances to the next step S2746, and the main control board 50 sets the setting command in the control command buffer of the RWM 53. The setting command set in step S2746 indicates that the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) has been completed and the setting value. As a result, the setting command set in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S2746, so it is confirmed that the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) is completed and the setting The value can be determined on the sub-control board 80 side.

Proceeding to the next step S2747, the main control board 50 clears (stores "0") the acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT) of the address "F011(H)" of the RWM 53. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S2747.
When the clearing of the acquisition number data in step S2747 is completed, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41) in step S248, and the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 358 is a flowchart showing the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 in FIG. 357.
When the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is started, first, in step S2751, the main control board 50 acquires the setting value data (_NB_RANK) from the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53, and Store in A register. Then, the process advances to the next step S2752.

Proceeding to step S2752, the main control board 50 generates set value display data. Specifically, in step S2752, the A register value is first stored in the C register, and then "1" is added to the A register value. Then, the process advances to the next step S2753.
As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the setting values are "1" to "6", and the setting value data is managed as "0" to "5", and when the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as set value data. Therefore, "N" obtained by adding "1" to the setting value data "N-1" is used as the setting value display data.

Proceeding to step S2753, the main control board 50 stores the generated setting value display data. Specifically, in step S2753, the A register value is stored in the set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) of the address "F001(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to the next step S2754.
In step S2754, the main control board 50 executes interrupt wait processing. This process is a process that waits until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) has elapsed. This is to wait for the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 to turn off (“0”) by waiting for the interrupt process (I_INTR) to be executed once.

In other words, when the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is operated (turned on), the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 turns on ("1"). Thereafter, if the interrupt process (I_INTR) is executed even once, the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is turned off (“0”).
However, after the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 turns on (“1”), the processing of steps S2752 to S2758 is looped multiple times before the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed. If this happens, the process of adding "1" to the set value data will be repeated.
Therefore, by waiting for the interrupt process (I_INTR) to be executed once in step S2754, the processes in steps S2752 to S2758 are looped multiple times, and the process of adding "1" to the set value data is repeatedly executed. This prevents this from happening.
Then, in step S2754, the process waits until one interrupt time has elapsed, and then proceeds to the next step S2755.

Note that when the level data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 was "0" during the previous interrupt processing, and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 was "1" during the current interrupt processing, , the rising data of the signal of the reset switch 153 becomes "1".
Furthermore, if the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1" during the previous interrupt processing, and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1" during the current interrupt processing, the reset switch 153 The rising edge data of the signal becomes "0".

Similarly, if the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "0" during the previous interrupt processing, and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "0" during the current interrupt processing, the reset switch 153 The rising edge data of the signal becomes "0".
Further, if the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 was "1" during the previous interrupt processing and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 was "0" during the current interrupt processing, the reset switch 153 The falling data of the signal becomes "1".
Other switches such as the start switch 41, stop switch 42, and setting key switch 152 are also similar to the reset switch (setting change switch) 153.

In step S2755, the main control board 50 determines whether it is time to start setting confirmation. This process is a process for determining whether it is time to confirm settings or change settings. In this embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on in a state where the number of bets before the start of the game is "0", "1" is stored in the D register. In step S2755, the D register value is first stored in the A register, and then it is determined whether the A register value is "1". When the A register value is "1", it is determined that it is time to confirm the settings, and the process proceeds to step S2760. If the A register value is not "1" (the D register value is "0" or "7") ), it is determined that it is not the time to confirm the settings (it is the time to change the settings), and the process advances to step S2756. After determining whether the A register value is "1", the C register value is stored in the A register. As described above, since the A register value is stored in the C register in step S2752, the set value data is stored in the C register. Therefore, when the C register value is stored in the A register, the A register value becomes set value data.
Note that when the power is restored (when the power is turned on and program start processing (M_PRG_START) is started), the A register to L register are at the initial value (“0”).

Proceeding to step S2756, the main control board 50 refers to the rising data of the signal of the start switch 41 stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Then, when the rising data of the signal of the start switch 41 is "1", that is, when it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process advances to step S2759. On the other hand, when the rising data of the signal of the start switch 41 is "0", that is, when it is determined that the start switch 41 is not operated, the process advances to step S2757.

In step S2757, the main control board 50 refers to the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Then, when the rising data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1", that is, when it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been operated, the process advances to step S2758. On the other hand, when the rising data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "0", that is, when it is determined that the reset switch 153 is not operated, the process returns to step S2752.

Proceeding to step S2758, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the set value data. Specifically, "1" is added to the A register value. As described above, at the end of step S2755, the A register value is set value data. Then, when "Yes" in step S2757, that is, when it is determined that the setting change (reset) switch 153 has been operated, "1" is added to the setting value data. Note that when the A register value becomes "6" due to the addition, the A register value is rewritten to "0". Then, the process returns to step S2752.

Further, when proceeding to step S2759, the main control board 50 stores the setting value data. Specifically, the A register value is stored in the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53. As described above, at the end of step S2755, the A register value is set value data. Then, even when the answer is "Yes" in step S2756 and the process proceeds to step S2759, the A register value remains the set value data. Then, in step S2759, the A register value is stored in the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53. Thereby, the setting value data can be stored in the RWM 53.

Proceeding to the next step S2760, the main control board 50 refers to the falling data of the signal of the setting key switch 152 stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Then, the process of step S2760 is repeated until the falling data of the signal of the setting key switch 152 becomes "1", that is, until the setting key switch 152 is turned off. When becomes "1", that is, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the process advances to step S2761.

In step S2761, the main control board 50 clears (to "0") the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at the address "F001(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Moreover, when the process according to this flowchart is completed when changing settings, the process proceeds to step S2743 in FIG. 357.

Here, the transition to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation in progress) will be explained.
In this embodiment, when the power is turned on (on), the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open), and the number of bets is "0", the setting key switch is When 152 is turned on, "1" is stored in the D register, and the state shifts to a setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (the setting value does not change even if the setting change switch 153 is operated), but the current setting value can be confirmed. Further, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73. Then, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends and the state returns to the state in which medals can be bet.

More specifically, in the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41), the main control board 50 determines whether the setting key switch 152 is on at a timing before the operation of the start switch 41 is detected. Then, when the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) and the number of bets is "0", if it is determined that the setting key switch 152 is on, the setting change confirmation shown in FIG. 358 is confirmed. Proceed to processing (M_RANK_CTL). Further, steps S2751 to S2754 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in FIG. 358 are as described above.

Furthermore, in the 41st embodiment, when the number of bets before the start of the game is "0", when the setting key switch 152 is turned on, "1" is stored in the D register. ing. Then, when the process proceeds to step S2755 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in FIG. 358, the main control board 50 determines whether it is time to start setting confirmation. Specifically, first, the D register value is stored in the A register, and then it is determined whether the A register value is "1". When the A register value is "1", it is determined that it is time to start setting confirmation ("Yes"), and the process advances to step S2760.

Thereafter, the process of step S2760 is repeated until the setting key switch 152 is turned off. Meanwhile, the current setting value continues to be displayed on the setting value display LED 73. If it is determined in step S2760 that the setting key switch 152 is off, the process proceeds to step S2761, where the main control board 50 clears the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001(H)" of the RWM 53 0”). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In addition, when the process according to this flowchart is finished when confirming the settings, the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41) determines whether or not the setting key switch 152 is on (whether to shift to the setting confirmation state). Proceed to the next process.

In this manner, in the forty-first embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process can be executed by the same module. That is, the setting change state and the setting confirmation state are created by the same module. Based on the information stored in the D register, it is determined whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.
Note that it may be determined whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state based on information stored in other registers instead of the D register, and also based on information stored in the RWM 53. It may be determined whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

FIG. 359 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 in the 41st embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 53 in the 11th embodiment.
In FIG. 359, steps that are different from those in FIG. 53 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 53 are assigned the same step numbers.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 53 will be mainly explained.

In the interrupt processing (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 359, the process advances to step S2770 after step S452, and the main control board 50 determines whether a power outage has occurred. If it is determined that a power-off has occurred, the main control board 50 proceeds to step S2771 and executes a power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN). On the other hand, if it is determined that a power outage has not occurred, step S2771 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S454.
In this way, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in the interrupt process (I_INTR). Therefore, when interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed because interrupts are disabled or because a program (second program) outside the used area is being executed, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) ) is also not executed. Note that the specific contents of the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) will be described later. When the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is completed, the process advances to step S454.

In the interrupt processing (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 359, the process proceeds to step S2821 after step S455, and the main control board 50 executes LED display control (I_LED_OUT). In this way, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed in the interrupt processing (I_INTR). The specific details of the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) will be described later.
When the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is finished, the process proceeds to step S2765, where the main control board 50 saves the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the RWM 53's used area. Then, the process advances to step S2221, and the main control board 50 executes a ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).

Here, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is a process for controlling the lighting of the credit number display LED 76, the acquisition number display LED 78, the set value display LED 73 (digits 1 to 5), etc. ) is executed by
On the other hand, the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is a process for controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9), and is executed by a program (second program) outside the usage area. The specific contents of the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) will be described later. When the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is completed, the process advances to step S458.

In step S458, the main control board 50 determines whether the set value is within the normal range. Specifically, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) stored at the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 is read and stored in the A register. Next, a comparison operation is performed between the A register value and "5" ("5" is subtracted from the A register value), and it is determined whether the carry flag is set to "1". Then, when the carry flag ≠ "1", it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range (the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5"), and when the carry flag = "1" determines that the set value data is not within the normal range. Then, when it is determined that it is within the normal range, the process advances to step S459, and when it is determined that it is not within the normal range, the process advances to unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) of step S2811.

In the interrupt processing (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 359, if "No" in step S458 or "Yes" in step S460, the process advances to step S2811, and the main control board 50 performs the unrecoverable error processing 2. Execute (S_ERROR_STOP). The specific contents of unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) will be described later.
Furthermore, in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 359, if "No" in step S460, the process advances to step S2766, and the main control board 50 saves the AF registers (A register and F register) in step S2765. flag register)). Then, the process advances to step S457.

Here, in the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 359, the processes of step S2221, step S458, step S459, and step S460 are executed by a program (second program) outside the used area.
Then, when transitioning from processing by a program in the used area (first program) to processing by a program outside the used area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is set in step S2765. The AF register is saved in the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53, and when finishing the processing by the program outside the used area (second program) and returning to the processing by the program in the used area (first program). Bring it back.

FIG. 360 is a flowchart showing the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 in FIG. 359.
When the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 is started, first, in step S2772, the main control board 50 saves the register. This process is a process for saving various registers to the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53.

Proceeding to the next step S2773, the main control board 50 clears all output ports 52. This turns off the output of all output ports 52, and for example, when the motor 32 is driving (while the reels 31 are rotating) or the hopper motor 36 is driving (while paying out medals), Stop its drive.
In the next step S2774, the main control board 50 stores the stack pointer at a predetermined address in the work area of the RWM 53's used area. Note that the stack pointer saved in step S2774 is restored in step S2722 of the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in FIG. 355.

Proceeding to the next step S2775, the main control board 50 saves the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to step S2776, and the main control board 50 executes RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET). The specific contents of the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) will be described later. When the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) is completed, the process advances to the next step S2777, and the main control board 50 restores the AF register saved in step S2775. Then, the process advances to the next step S2778.

Note that the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) is executed by a program (second program) outside the used area.
Then, when transitioning from processing by a program in the used area (first program) to processing by a program outside the used area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is set in step S2775. The AF register is saved in the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53, and when finishing the processing by the program outside the used area (second program) and returning to the processing by the program in the used area (first program), the AF register is saved in the stack area of the used area of the RWM53. Bring it back.

Proceeding to step S2778, the main control board 50 prohibits access to the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to the next step S2779, and the main control board 50 is placed in a reset wait state (loop processing state). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 361 is a flowchart showing the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) in step S2776 in FIG.
When the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) in step S2776 is started, the main control board 50 first saves the stack pointer (SP register) to a specific address in the work area outside the used area of the RWM 53 in step S2781. In the next step 2782, the stack pointer ("F400(H)") outside the used area is set, and when the process proceeds to the next step S2783, a plurality of registers are saved to the stack area outside the used area of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to the next step S2784.

Here, in step S2781, the stack pointer (SP register) is stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F2A3(H)" in FIG. 348).
As mentioned above, RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) is a process performed by a program outside the used area (second program), so while the program outside the used area (second program) is being executed, the program in the used area is The stack pointer used in the (first program) is saved, and the stack pointer is restored when returning to the program (first program) in the used area.
Furthermore, in step S2782, the stack pointer (address "F400(H)") outside the used area is stored in the stack pointer (SP register).
Furthermore, in step S2783, various registers are saved to a stack area outside the used area.

Proceeding to step S2784, the main control board 50 sets a power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) at address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53. Here, when the power-off processing is executed, "55 (H)" is stored as the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF).
Note that when the power is restored, the power-off processing completed flag is cleared (set to "0") in step S2724 of the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in FIG. 355. Therefore, after executing the process of step S2724, the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 becomes "00(H)". If the power-off process is not executed, the power-off process completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is not set, so the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 remains "00(H)".
Proceeding to the next step S2785, the main control board 50 clears (to "0") the RWM checksum data (_SW_SUM_CHK) at the address "F2A0(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to the next step S2786.

Proceeding to step S2786, the main control board 50 sets the start address (“F000(H)”) of the used area of the RWM 53 in an address specification register (for example, B register), and proceeds to the next step S2787. , sets the number of bytes of the used area of the RWM 53 (checksum calculation number) in the register for the number of calculations (for example, C register), and proceeds to the next step S2788. , set initial data ("00000000(B)").

Then, the process advances to the next step S2789, and the main control board 50 executes checksum calculation processing for the used area of the RWM 53.
In this embodiment, the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the range of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)", and in the next step S2790, the checksum is applied to the address "F1FF(H)" of the RWM 53. The processes of steps S2789 and S2790 are repeated until it is determined that the calculation process has ended. As a result, the checksum of the used area of the RWM 53 (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)") is calculated.

More specifically, in this embodiment, in step S2789, the data indicated by the address designation register (B register) value is subtracted from the checksum calculation register (D register) value. In the next step S2790, the value of the register (C register) for the number of calculations is updated (subtracted by "1"), and it is determined whether the result is "0". When it is determined that the value is "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation process for the used area of the RWM 53 has been completed, and the process advances to step S2791. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not "0", the value of the register for address designation (B register) is updated ("1" is added), and the process returns to step S2789.

When the checksum calculation process for the used area of the RWM 53 is completed, the process advances to step S2791, and the main control board 50 sets the start address outside the used area of the RWM 53 ("F210(H )"), and in the next step S2792, the number of bytes outside the used area of the RWM 53 (number of checksum calculations) is set in the register for the number of calculations (C register).

Then, the process advances to the next step S2793, and the main control board 50 executes checksum calculation processing for the area outside the RWM 53's use area.
In this embodiment, the areas outside the RWM 53's use area are set to addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)", and the checksum is calculated up to the address "F3FF(H)" of the RWM 53 in the next step S2794. The processing in steps S2793 and S2794 is repeated until it is determined that the processing has ended. As a result, the checksum outside the used area of the RWM 53 (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)") is calculated.

More specifically, in this embodiment, when the process advances to step S2793, the checksum calculation result of the used area of the RWM 53 is stored in the checksum calculation register (D register). Then, in step S2793, the data indicated by the address specification register (B register) value is subtracted from the checksum calculation register (D register) value. In the next step S2794, the value of the register (C register) for the number of calculations is updated (subtracted by "1"), and it is determined whether the result is "0". When it is determined that the value is "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation process for the area outside the used area of the RWM 53 has been completed, and the process advances to step S2795. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not "0", the address specification register (B register) value is updated ("1" is added), and the process returns to step S2793.

In this manner, in this embodiment, RWM checksum data (also referred to as complement data, error detection data, or error detection information) is calculated by executing the processes of steps S2785 to S2794.
As mentioned above, this RWM checksum data (complement data) includes data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53, and address "F210(H)" outside the used area. It is a value that becomes "0" when added to the added value of the data of ~ "F3FF (H)" (excluding "F2A0 (H)").

When the checksum calculation process outside the area used by the RWM 53 is completed, the process advances to step S2795, and the main control board 50 stores (saves) the RWM checksum data (complement data) at the address "F2A0 (H)" of the RWM 53. )do.
Proceeding to the next step S2796, the main control board 50 restores the register saved in step S2783, and in the next step S2797, restores the stack pointer saved in step S2781. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 362 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S2821 in FIG. 359.
First, in step S2822, output ports 3 and 4 (FIG. 351) are turned off. The output port 3 is an output port corresponding to the digit 1 signal to the digit 5 signal, and the output port 4 is an output port corresponding to the segment 1A to segment 1P signals. By outputting "00000000 (B)" for these output ports 3 and 4, output of digits 1 to 5 is temporarily disabled. This prevents different LEDs from appearing to be lit at the same time (overlapping display) even for a moment when switching the LED display (afterimage prevention).

In the next step S2823, the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) of the used area (FIG. 346 and FIG. 353(A)) is updated. Updating the LED display counter 1 is a process of shifting the bit "1" by one digit to the right. This updated value is stored in the address "F051(H)" (FIG. 346) of the RWM 53. Then, the process advances to step S2824.

In step S2824, it is determined whether the value of LED display counter 1 is "00000000 (B)". If it is determined that the value is "00000000(B)", the process advances to step S2825. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not "00000000(B)", step S2825 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2826.

In step S2825, the LED display counter 1 is initialized. Here, the value of the LED display counter 1 is set to "00010000 (B)" and is stored at the address "F051 (H)" of the RWM 53 (FIG. 346). Then, the process advances to step S2826.
In step S2826, the values of the LED display counter 1 (address "F051(H)" in FIG. 346) and the LED display request flag (address "F052(H)" in FIG. 346) stored in the RWM 53 are acquired. Here, the value of LED display counter 1 is stored in the E register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the A register.

Next, the process advances to step S2827, and a segment display confirmation set for the digit to be displayed this time is performed. In this process, the A register value (the value of the LED display request flag) and the E register value (the value of the LED display counter 1) are ANDed to create data for the LED to be lit this time.

for example,
LED display counter value: 00001000B
LED display request flag value: 00001111B
After AND operation: 00001000B
becomes.
Or, for example,
LED display counter value: 10000000B
LED display request flag value: 00001111B
After AND operation: 00000000B
becomes.
Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register. Furthermore, the value stored in the A register is stored in the D register.

Next, the process advances to step S2828, and it is determined whether the A register value (the value obtained by ANDing the value of the LED display counter 1 and the value of the LED display request flag) is "0". Here, if it is "0", it is determined that there is no display request ("No"), and the process advances to step S2844. On the other hand, if it is not "0", it is determined that there is a display request ("Yes"), and the process advances to step S2829.

In step S2829, error display data is acquired. When an error occurs, error display data is stored at a predetermined address in the RWM 53. Then, in step S2829, error display data is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the B register.
In the next step S2830, LED segment table 2 is set. This embodiment includes an LED segment table 1 that stores data for displaying alphabetic characters on a 7-segment display, and an LED segment table 2 that stores data for displaying numbers on a 7-segment display. These are stored in the used area of the ROM 54. Note that a description of the specific configurations of the LED segment tables 1 and 2 will be omitted. Then, in step S2830, the start address of the LED segment table 2 is read and the value is stored in the HL register.

Next, the process advances to step S2831, where the setting value display data (address "F001(H)" in FIG. 346) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S2832, and it is determined whether there is a request to display a set value. Specifically, it is determined whether the D4 bit (bit corresponding to digit 5) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1"("00010000(B)"). When the D4 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a setting value display request ("Yes"), and the process advances to step S2843. On the other hand, when the D4 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no setting value display request ("No"), and the process advances to step S2833.

In step S2833, the credit number data (address "F010(H)" in FIG. 346) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
In the next step S2834, an offset for upper digits is obtained. This process executes an operation to divide the A register value (credit number data obtained in step S2833) by "10 (decimal number)", stores the quotient value in the A register, and stores the remainder value in the C register. This is the process of

In the next step S2835, it is determined whether there is a request to display the upper digits of the number of credits. Specifically, it is determined whether the D0 bit (bit corresponding to digit 1) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1". If the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit number ("Yes"), and the process advances to step S2843. On the other hand, when the D0 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the upper digits of the credit number ("No"), and the process advances to step S2836.

Proceeding to step S2836, it is determined whether there is a request to display the lower digits of the number of credits. Specifically, it is determined whether the D1 bit (bit corresponding to digit 2) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1". If the D1 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the lower digits of the credit number ("Yes"), and the process advances to step S2842. On the other hand, when the D1 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digits of the credit number ("No"), and the process advances to step S2837.

In step S2837, the acquisition number data (address "F011(H)" in FIG. 346) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
In the next step S2838, it is determined whether an error is being displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the B register value is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that an error is not displayed ("No"), and the process advances to step S2840. On the other hand, if the B register value is not "0", it is determined that an error is being displayed ("Yes"), and the process advances to step S2839.

In step S2839, LED segment table 1 is set. At the time of proceeding to step S2839, the HL register stores the start address of LED segment table 2 for displaying numbers on the 7-segment display, but when an error is displayed, the 7-segment display displays the error type. Display the corresponding alphabetic character. Therefore, in step S2839, the start address of the LED segment table 1 for displaying English characters on the 7-segment display is read and the value is stored in the HL register. As a result, the start address of LED segment table 1 is set in the HL register instead of the start address of LED segment table 2 set in step S2830.

In the next step S2840, the offset for the upper digits is obtained. At the time when the process advances to step S2840, the acquisition number data obtained in step S2837 is stored in the A register, and the error display data obtained in step S2829 is stored in the B register. If no error has occurred, execute the operation of dividing the acquired number data stored in the A register by "10 (decimal number)", store the quotient in the A register, and store the remainder in the C register. do. On the other hand, when an error occurs, the error display data stored in the B register is divided by "10 (decimal number)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the C register.

In the next step S2841, it is determined whether there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED 78. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit (bit corresponding to digit 3) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1". If the D2 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition number ("Yes"), and the process advances to step S2843. On the other hand, when the D2 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the upper digits of the acquisition number ("No"), and the process advances to step S2842.

In step S2842, an offset for lower digits is obtained. This process is a process for storing data stored in the C register in the A register. At the time of proceeding to step S2842, the quotient calculated by the division in step S2834 or S2840 is stored in the A register, and the remainder calculated by the division in step S2834 or S2840 is stored in the C register. Then, in step S2842, the C register value (remainder of division) is stored in the A register.

Next, the process advances to step S2843 to obtain segment output data. Specifically, the data stored in the HL register (the start address of LED segment table 2 stored in step S2830 or the start address of LED segment table 1 stored in step S2839) and the data stored in the A register ( (offset value corresponding to the display data) is added, and data corresponding to the address after the addition is obtained from the LED segment table 1 or 2 of the ROM 54 and stored in the D register.

Next, the process advances to step S2844, and it is determined whether there is a request to display segment P.
Specifically, first, the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 (E register value) is "1" (lighting timing of digit 4), and the advantageous section display LED flag (address "F062 (H )") is "1". Then, when the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is "1" and the D0 bit of the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", it is determined that there is a display request for segment P ("Yes"), and step Proceed to S2845.
On the other hand, when the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is "1" and the D0 bit of the advantageous section display LED flag is not "1", it is determined that there is no display request for segment P ("No"), and step S2845 is skipped and the process advances to step S2846.

Next, if the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is not "1", the process proceeds to the following.
AND operation is performed on LED display counter 1 (E register value) and status display LED lighting data (obtained from address "F044 (H)" of RWM53 in Figure 346), and it is determined whether the AND operation result is "0" or not. . If the AND operation result is not "0", it is determined that there is a request to display segment P ("Yes"), and the process advances to step S2845. On the other hand, when the AND operation result is "0", it is determined that there is no display request for segment P ("No"), step S2845 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S2846.

Proceeding to step S2845, segment P output data is set. Specifically, the segment output data (D register value) acquired in step S2843 and "10000000 (B)" are ORed, and the OR operation result is stored in the D register. As a result, the D7 bit (bit corresponding to segment P) of the segment output data becomes "1".

Then, the process advances to the next step S2846, where the digit signal is output from the output port 3 and the segment signal is output from the output port 4. Specifically, the data stored in the E register (LED display counter 1) is output as a digit signal from the output port 3, and the data stored in the D register (segment output data) is output as a segment signal from the output port. Output from 4. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 363 is a flowchart showing unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP).
As mentioned above, the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is a process performed by the second program, and since the execution of interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited during the execution of the second program, it is impossible to recover from. No interrupt disable processing is provided after the start of error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP). Other than this point, unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 363 is similar to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 356.
Note that in FIG. 363, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 356.

FIG. 364 is a flowchart showing preparation for ratio display (S_DSP_READY) in step S2221 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 359.
Ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is executed during interrupt processing (I_INTR). Also, in a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, between the start switch reception process (step S279 in FIG. 41) and the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 41) (during a game), and in a recoverable error state, Since the interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed, so that various ratio information can be displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

When the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) process is started, the main control board 50 first stores the stack pointer (SP register) in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F2A3 (H)" in FIG. 348) in step S2461. to be memorized.
As mentioned above, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is a process performed by a program (second program) outside the used area, so while the program (second program) outside the used area is being executed, the program (second program) in the used area is executed. The stack pointer used in the first program is saved, and the stack pointer is restored when returning to the program in the used area (the first program).

In the next step S2462, the main control board 50 sets the stack pointer outside the usage area. This process is a process of storing "F400(H)" in the stack pointer (SP register).
In the next step S2463, the main control board 50 saves the register. This process saves various registers to a stack area outside the used area.
Next, the process advances to step S2464, and the main control board 50 executes flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH). This process is shown in FIG. 365, which will be described later, and is a process for updating the blinking request flag (address "F291(H)").

In the next step S2465, the main control board 50 updates the ratio display timer (S_RATE_TIME). This process is shown in FIG. 367, which will be described later, and includes the blinking switching flag (address "F293(H)"), display switching time (address "F294"), and blinking switching time (address "F296(H)") This is the process of updating the .
In the next step S2466, the main control board 50 performs ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT). This process is shown in FIG. 368, which will be described later, and is a process for actually displaying (turning on or off) the ratio in the interrupt process.

Next, the process advances to step S2467, and the main control board 50 restores the register. This process is a process for restoring the various registers saved in step S2463.
In the next step S2468, the main control board 50 restores the stack pointer. This process is a process of storing the stack pointer saved in step S2461, that is, the data stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2, in the stack pointer (SP register). In other words, this process causes the tap pointer to indicate the address of the used area. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, the settings change state, the settings confirmation state, the start switch reception process (step S279 in FIG. 41) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 41) (during the game), and return Even in a possible error state, interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed, so ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed.
Therefore, even in the setting change state, setting confirmation state, start switch acceptance processing (step S279 in FIG. 41) to game end check processing (step S301 in FIG. 41) (during gaming), and in a recoverable error state, the ratio By the display preparation process (S_DSP_READY), it is possible to sequentially display various ratios regarding information types and game results on digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (winning ratio monitor).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can be executed regardless of whether the door switch 17 is on or off (the front door 12 is opened or closed). That is, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is executed both when the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) and when the door switch 17 is off (the front door 12 is closed). It is possible.
Therefore, the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is performed both when the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) and when the door switch 17 is off (the front door 12 is closed). Accordingly, it is possible to sequentially display various ratios regarding information types and game results on digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (winning ratio monitor).

In response, an unrecoverable error occurs, and the unrecoverable error state (unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 356 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 363 is executed, and the game progresses. In the stopped state), interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited and ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is not executed. Therefore, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) are Various ratios related to game results will no longer be displayed.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, in an unrecoverable error state, in step S1494 of unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. Turn off outputs 0 to 7 (“00000000(B)”).

As a result, in an unrecoverable error state, the output from output port 6 (output port for digit 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) is "00000000 (B)". Therefore, all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off until the irreversible error state is canceled and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is restarted.
The fact that all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off is a characteristic of an unrecoverable error state. You can let us know what happened.

FIG. 365 is a flowchart showing flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) in step S2464 of FIG. 364.
When starting the flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) process, the main control board 50 first sets the number of repetitions and initial values in step S2481. This process is a process of storing "6 (H)" in the B register and "0" in the C register.
Here, the number of repetitions "6" is a value for determining whether or not the ratio segments of six items blink.

In the next step S2482, the main control board 50 sets the address of the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table. This process is a process of storing the start address of the flashing/non-applicable item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in the DE register.
FIG. 366 is a diagram showing a blinking/non-applicable item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH). The blinking/non-applicable item determination value table defines predetermined values for the ratios of six items, respectively. For example, the instruction-included accessory ratio of "70" means that the display is made to blink when the instruction-included accessory ratio is "70" or higher.
As shown in FIG. 366, the start address of the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table is "2500 (H)". Therefore, "2500 (H)" is stored in the DE register.

Furthermore, "non-applicable item" refers to the fact that the function (performance) corresponding to the item is not provided. For example, in a gaming machine that is not equipped with "RB (first class special accessory)", the continuous accessory ratio is not displayed, so when the continuous accessory ratio is displayed, "--" is displayed in the ratio segment by lighting.
In the 41st embodiment, the ratios of all six items are displayed, but when there is a non-applicable item, "DE( H)".

For example, in a gaming machine that is not equipped with "RB (Class 1 Special Accessory)", the addresses "2502(H)" and "2504(H)" are replaced with "60(H)" in FIG. 366. , "DE(H)" is stored.
In this way, no matter what kind of gaming machine it is, such as one that is not equipped with a "RB (Class 1 Special Accessory)", you can manage it by simply modifying some data in the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table. Control processing is included to enable lighting control of information. Therefore, the control program can be easily used in other products.
Note that the value corresponding to the non-applicable item is not limited to "DE(H)".

In the next step S2483, the main control board 50 sets the RWM address of the ratio data. This process is a process of storing the address ("F28D(H)" in FIG. 348) where the accessory state ratio data is stored in the HL register.
Next, the process advances to step S2484, and the main control board 50 acquires the blinking or non-applicable item determination value. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data at the address indicated by the DE register value in the A register.
(2) Subtract "1" from the A register value.

In the next step S2485, the main control board 50 determines whether the item value is not applicable. In this process, "DD(H)" is subtracted from the A register value, and when the operation result is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the item value is not applicable.
In other words, when the item is not applicable, as described above, "DE(H)" is stored in the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table, so "1" is subtracted from "DE(H)". After that, if "DD(H)" is further subtracted, it becomes "0" and the zero flag becomes "1".

Note that when a predetermined value other than "DE (H)" is stored as a value corresponding to a non-applicable item, for example, "predetermined value - 1 - (predetermined value - 1)" is calculated, and the calculation result is "0". (Zero flag=“1”), it is determined that the item value is not applicable.
In addition, the "predetermined value" may be a value exceeding "70 (H)" in the case of the designated accessory ratio, the accessory ratio (cumulative), and the accessory ratio (6000 times), and the continuous accessory ratio ( In the case of the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times), the value may be more than "60 (H)", and in the case of the accessory state ratio, the value may be more than "50 (H)".
If it is determined that the item value is not applicable, the process proceeds to the next step S2486, and if it is determined that the item value is not applicable, the process skips step S2486 and proceeds to step S2487.

In step S2486, the main control board 50 acquires ratio data. This process is a process of storing data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
In the next step S2487, the main control board 50 stores the ratio data or non-applicable item values. This process is a process of storing the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value. Note that this process has the following meaning.

When there is a non-applicable item, no data is stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 where the ratio data is stored before the above storage process.
For example, if "RB (Class 1 special accessory)" is not provided, continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) data (address "F289 (H)") and continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) data (address ""00(H)" is stored in "F28B(H)").

Although the details will be described later, when displaying the ratio in the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74, the ratio is displayed based on the information stored in the address. At that time, if "00 (H)" is stored in the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) data, when displaying the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times), the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74 will be "00" is displayed. In order to prevent this, "--" is displayed by storing the value of the A register ("DD(H)" in this embodiment) obtained in step S2485 as ratio data.
Note that this program processing is also designed so that it can be used in common by gaming machines that have non-applicable items and gaming machines that do not have non-applicable items.

In the next step S2488, the main control board 50 performs a blinking determination. This process is a process of subtracting data at the address indicated by the DE register value from the A register value. It should be noted that if the result of this calculation is a downgrade, the carry flag becomes "1".
Although the details will be described later, when the carry flag = "1", it means that the item is lit in a non-blinking manner when displaying the item, and when the carry flag = "0", This means that it lights up in a blinking manner when displaying the item.

Next, the process advances to step S2489, and the main control board 50 generates a blinking request flag. This processing performs arithmetic processing to rotate and shift the carry flag and C register value to the left.
Specifically, if the carry flag value is "CY" and the C register value is "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0",
"CY", C register value "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0"
of,
"D7", C register value "D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0, CY"
Perform the calculation as follows.

For example, when the C register value is the initial value "00000000 (B)" as shown in step S2481, and the carry flag = "1" in step S2488,
"1", C register value "00000000 (B)"
of,
"0", C register value "00000001 (B)"
Perform the calculation as follows.
Therefore, the C register value becomes "00000001(B)".
This C register value ultimately becomes the blinking request flag.
In other words, the process in step S2488 registers information for determining whether or not to blink the ratio segment of the item by calculation based on the ratio data and the specific value stored in the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table. (storage area).

In the next step S2490, the main control board 50 sets the RWM address of the next ratio data. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value.
For example, the HL register value in the first blinking determination is "F28D(H)" (accessories state ratio data) as described above. Here, if "1" is subtracted, the HL register value becomes "F28C(H)" (accessory ratio (cumulative) data), which is the subject of the second blinking determination.

In the next step S2491, the main control board 50 sets the address of the next blinking/non-applicable item determination value table. This process is a process of adding "1" to the DE register value. For example, when "2500 (H)" is initially stored as the DE register value, this process changes it to "2501 (H)".
Here, as shown in FIG. Blinking/non-applicable item determination values are stored in addresses "2500 (H)" to "2505 (H)" in order of accessory ratio.
As a result, a loop process (step Through S2484 to S2492), the target address can be specified, thereby simplifying the process.

Next, the process advances to step S2492, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the repetition has ended. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value.
(2) When the B register value is not "0", it is determined that the repetition has not ended.
Here, since the B register value is set to "6" in the first step S2481, the number of repetitions is "6". If it is determined that the repetition has ended, the process advances to step S2493, and if it is determined that the repetition has not ended, the process returns to step S2484.
As described above, six items of blinking judgment are performed.

When the flashing determination of the six items is completed and the process proceeds to step S2493, the main control board 50 acquires the total number of games counter value. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the value of the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games counter (address "F26D(H)") in the HL register.
(2) Store the value of the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter (address "F26D(H)") in the A register.
As described above, the total number of games counter is composed of 3 bytes, and "F26D(H)" is the storage area for storing the first digit, and the value is stored in the L register.
Further, "F26E(H)" is a storage area for storing the second digit, and its value is stored in the H register.
Furthermore, "F26F(H)" is a storage area for storing the third digit, and its value is stored in the A register.

In the next step S2494, the main control board 50 determines whether the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter is "0". This process determines whether the A register value stored in step S2493 is "0". When it is determined that the value is "0", the process advances to step S2495, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process advances to step S2496.
In step S2495, the main control board 50 determines whether 6000 games have passed. This process subtracts "6000 (D)" from the HL register value (lower 2 byte data of the total number of games counter). As a result of this calculation, if there is a downgrade, the carry flag becomes "1". When the carry flag is "1", it is determined that 6000 games have not been played, and the process advances to step S2497.
On the other hand, if it is determined that 6000 games have elapsed, the process advances to step S2496.

In step S2496, the main control board 50 updates the flashing request flag data. This process is to set the D6 bit of the C register to "1". Here, the C register value is set to a value corresponding to the flashing request flag at address "F291(H)" in FIG. 348 (however, at this point, the bit is in an inverted state). Therefore, when 6000 games have passed, a process is executed to set the D6 bit to "1".

In the next step S2497, the main control board 50 determines whether the upper one byte of the total number of games counter exceeds "2" ("3" or more). Here, processing is performed to subtract "3" from the A register value. If there is no downturn in this subtraction, the carry flag≠“1”. When the carry flag≠"1", it is determined that the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter exceeds "2" ("3" or more).

The reason for doing this is to first compare the upper 1 byte with "3" in order to determine whether or not the number of games has reached 175,000. Here, "175000 (D)" is "2AB98 (H)" in hexadecimal, so it is inevitable that the A register value exceeds "2" (A register value is "3" or more). Specifically, it can be seen that the value of the total number of games counter exceeds "175,000 (D)".
In step S2497, if the carry flag ≠ "1", it is determined that the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter exceeds "2" and the process proceeds to step S2500; if the carry flag = "1", the total It is determined that the upper 1 byte of the number of games counter does not exceed "2" and the process advances to step S2498.

In step S2498, the main control board 50 determines whether the value of the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter is "2". In this process, "2" is subtracted from the A register value, and when it is determined that it is not "0", it is determined that the value of the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter is not "2". When it is determined that the value of the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter is not "2", the process advances to step S2501, and when it is determined that the value of the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter is "2", step S2499 Proceed to.

In step S2499, the main control board 50 determines whether 175,000 games have elapsed. Specifically, "AB98(H)" is subtracted from the HL register value, and if there is a downgrade as a result of this operation, the carry flag becomes "1". When the carry flag is "1", it is determined that 175,000 games have not yet elapsed.
If it is determined in step S2499 that 175,000 games have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2500, and if it is determined that 175,000 games have not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2501.

In step S2500, the main control board 50 updates the flashing request flag data. This process sets the D7 bit of the C register to "1". The D7 bit of the C register corresponds to the D7 bit (175000 game blinking flag) of the blinking request flag at address "F291(H)" in FIG. 348. Then, the process advances to step S2501.

In step S2501, the main control board 50 generates a blinking request flag. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store "01111111(B)" in the A register.
(2) Exclusive OR operation (XOR) is performed between the A register value and the C register value, and the operation result is stored in the A register.

Before the process of step S2501 is executed, as described above, among the data stored in the C register, "0" is stored in the blinking item (bit). For example, when 175,000 games have elapsed, the D7 bit is "1" as described above; in other words, when 175,000 games have not elapsed, the D7 bit is "0".
Therefore, by inverting the bits of the C register value, a blinking request flag is generated so that the blinking item (bit) becomes "1".

In the next step S2502, the main control board 50 stores the flashing request flag generated in step S2501. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the blinking request flag (“F291(H)” in FIG. 348) in the HL register.
(2) Store the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value ("F291(H)" in FIG. 348).
As a result, items that blink become "1" and items that do not blink become "0". In this way, the information corresponding to each bit is expressed as "1" or "0", and the blinking request flags regarding eight items, including whether or not to blink, are stored at address "F291(H)" in FIG. 348. be remembered.

FIG. 367 is a flowchart showing the rate display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) in step S2465 in FIG. 364.
When starting the process of updating the ratio display timer (S_RATE_TIME), the main control board 50 first updates the display switching time in step S2511. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address storing the display switching time ("F294(H)" in FIG. 348) in the HL register.
(2) Subtract "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the subtraction result at the address.
This process executes a cyclic subtraction process that cycles between "0" and "2144 (D)" when expressed as a display switching time in decimal notation.

Therefore, if the process is performed when the display switching time is "0", "2144(D)" (860(H)) is stored as the display switching time.
Further, when the process is performed when the flag is "0" and "2144(D)" (860(H)) is stored as the display switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".
Note that since the interrupt process is executed every 2.235 ms, the flag changes from "0" to "2144 (D)" approximately every 4792 ms, and the carry flag becomes "1".
As a result, the ratio display contents are switched approximately every 5 seconds.

In the next step S2512, the main control board 50 determines whether the display switching time has elapsed. This determination is to determine whether or not the carry flag was set to "1" in the process of step S2511, and when the carry flag was set to "1", it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed.
When it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed, the process advances to step S2513, and when it is determined that the display switching time has not elapsed, the process advances to step S2518.

In step S2513, the main control board 50 stores the blinking switching time. This process stores "134(D) (86(H))" at the address (blinking switching time) indicated by the data obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value (ie, "F296(H)").
In other words, when it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed, the blinking switching time is saved. A time of "2.235×134=299.49 (ms)" is stored as the blinking switching time.

Next, the process advances to step S2514, and the main control board 50 turns off the blinking switching flag. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the blinking switching flag (“F293(H)” in FIG. 348) in the HL register.
(2) Store "0" at the address indicated by the HL register value.
As described above, when the data stored in the blinking switching flag is "0", it means the light is on, and when it is "1", it means the light is off.
That is, at the timing when the display switching time has elapsed, the blinking switching flag becomes "0" (lit).

Next, the process advances to step S2515, and the main control board 50 updates the ratio display number. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the HL register value.
In other words, the address of the RWM 53 ("F292(H)" in FIG. 348) corresponding to the ratio display number is stored in the HL register.
(2) Add "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
This process executes a cyclic addition process that cycles between "0" and "5" for the ratio display number. Therefore, if the process is performed when the ratio display number is "5", "0" is stored as the ratio display number. Furthermore, if the process is performed when the ratio display number is less than "5", the carry flag becomes "1".

In the next step S2516, the main control board 50 determines whether the updated ratio display number is "0". Here, when the carry flag = "1", it is determined that the ratio display number is not "0". In other words, if the process of step S2515 is executed when the ratio display number is "5", the carry flag ≠ "1" (= "0"), and at this time, it is determined that the ratio display number is "0". do.

Then, in step S2516, if it is determined that the updated ratio display number is "0", the process advances to step S2517, and if it is determined that it is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S2517, the main control board 50 corrects the ratio display number. This process is a process of adding "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value ("F292(H)" in FIG. 348). Through this process, when "0" is stored in the ratio display number, it is updated to "1". As a result, the ratio display number cycles through "1" to "6". Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

When it is determined in step S2512 that the display switching time has not elapsed and the process proceeds to step S2518, the main control board 50 updates the blinking switching time. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the blinking switching time ("F296(H)" in FIG. 348) in the HL register.
(2) Subtract "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the subtraction result at the address.
This process executes a cyclic subtraction process that cycles between "0" and "134 (D)" when expressed as a blinking switching time in decimal notation.
Therefore, if the process is performed when the blinking switching time is "0", "134(D)" (86(H)) is stored as the blinking switching time.
Further, when the process is performed when the flag is "0" and "134 (D)" (86 (H)) is stored as the blinking switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".

Next, the process advances to step S2519, and the main control board 50 determines whether the blinking switching time has elapsed. This determination is made by determining whether the carry flag is "1" or not, and when the carry flag≠"1", it is determined that the blinking switching time has not elapsed. When it is determined that the blinking switching time has elapsed, the process advances to step S2520, and when it is determined that the blinking switching time has not elapsed, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S2520, the main control board 50 updates the blinking switching flag. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the blinking switching flag (“F293(H)” in FIG. 348) in the HL register.
(2) Add "1" to the stored data at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the added result at the address.
This process executes a cyclic addition process that cycles between "0" and "1" for the blinking switching flag. Therefore, if this process is performed when the blinking switching flag is "1", "0" is stored as the blinking switching flag.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 368 is a flowchart showing the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in step S2466 in FIG. 364.
When the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) starts, the main control board 50 first acquires the value of the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) (address "F297(H)" in FIG. 348) in step S1471. This process is a process of acquiring the value of the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) and storing it in the D register.

In the next step S1472, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a ratio display request. Here, it is determined whether there is a request to display any of digits 6 to 9. Specifically, the value of the LED display counter 2 stored in the D register and "00001111(B)" are ANDed. If the AND operation result is "0", it is determined that there is no ratio display request, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if the AND operation result is not "0", it is determined that there is a ratio display request, and the process advances to step S1475.
Note that in the forty-first embodiment, the result of the AND operation between the value of the LED display counter 2 and "00001111(B)" will never be "0", so the result in step S1472 will never be "No".

In the next step S1475, the ratio display number (address "F292(H)" in FIG. 348) is acquired. This process executes a process of acquiring a ratio display number and storing it in the A register, and further storing the A register value in the E register.
Here, the number of flashing bit tests, which will be described later, is determined based on the ratio display number. For example, here are some examples:
Example 1)
Ratio display number is "1": Obtain the number of flashing bit checks of the instruction-included accessory ratio.
Example 2)
Ratio display number is "2": Obtain the number of flashing bit tests for the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times).
Example 3)
Ratio display number is "5": Obtain the number of flashing bit tests for the accessory ratio (total cumulative total).
Example 4)
Ratio display number is "6": Obtain the number of flashing bit inspections of the state ratio of accessories, etc.
Further, by executing the process of storing the A register value in the E register, the A register value and the E register value become the same value.

In the next step S2531, the address of the flashing bit test count table is set. In this process, an address obtained by subtracting "1" from the start address of the flashing bit test count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK) is stored in the HL register.
FIG. 369 is a diagram showing the flashing bit test frequency table (TBL_FLASH_CHK).
As shown in FIG. 369, a predetermined value (for example, the value corresponding to the designated accessory ratio is "8 (H)") is stored for each ratio.
The first address is "2510(H)". Therefore, "250F(H)" is stored in the HL register.

It should be noted that the "flashing bit test count" is a value indicating how many bits from the D0th bit the bit to be tested is reached in the flashing request flag of the address "F292(H)".
For example, in FIG. 369, "8 (H)" is stored in the designated accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio (cumulative total), accessory ratio (cumulative total), and accessory state ratio. , is a value for determining whether or not the value of the 8th D7 bit counting from the D0 bit is "1" in the blinking request flag. The D7th bit is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of games has not reached 175,000 times, and when this D7th bit is "1", the instruction included accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio The identification segments of (cumulative total), accessory ratio (cumulative total), and accessory state ratio are to be blinked.

In addition, in FIG. 369, "7 (H)" is stored in the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) and the accessory ratio (6000 times), but this is from the D0th bit in the blinking request flag. This value is used to determine whether the value of the seventh D6 bit is "1". The D6th bit is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of games has not reached 6000 times, and when this D6th bit is "1", the continuous role object ratio (6000 times), The identification segment with the accessory ratio (6000 times) will be flashed.

In the next step S2532, the main control board 50 sets the number of identification segment blinking bit tests. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value in the HL register.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the B register.
For example, when the A register value (ratio display number stored in step S1475) is "3",
250F (H) + 3 (H) = 2512 (H) (=HL register value)
7(H) (=B register value)
becomes.

In other words, "250F(H)" becomes the reference address, and the data stored in the ratio display number (address "F292(H)") is used as the offset value to calculate the address of the blinking bit inspection table and store it in the address. This makes it possible to obtain the data that has been
In the above example, "7 (H)", which is the information for determining whether to blink the identification segment when the accessory ratio (6000 times) is stored in the address "2512 (H)", is obtained. be done.

Next, the process advances to step S1476, and the main control board 50 sets an identification segment offset table. This process is a process of storing the start address of the identification segment offset table (TBL_SEGID_DATA) in the HL register. The starting address is "2520(H)", and "251F(H)", which is the value obtained by subtracting "1" from this address, is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S1477, the main control board 50 acquires the identification segment offset value. This process is a process of reading from the identification segment offset table using the ratio display number stored in the A register in step S1475 as an offset value.
Specifically, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value in the HL register.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
As a result, for example, when the ratio display number is "1", "2520(H)", which is "251F(H)" plus "1(H)", is stored in the HL register and stored at the address. "7A(H)", which is the data obtained, is stored in the A register. Also, when the ratio display number is "2", "2521(H)", which is "251F(H)" plus "2(H)", is stored in the HL register, and the data stored at the address is "6B(H)" is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1478, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits) (request to display digit 6). Here, it is determined whether the D0 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of the LED display counter 2) is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits), the process advances to step S1482, and if there is no display request, the process advances to step S1479.

In step S1479, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits) (request to display digit 7). Here, it is determined whether the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of the LED display counter 2) is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits), the process advances to step S1483, and if there is no display request, the process advances to step S2533.

In step S2533, the main control board 50 sets the number of ratio segment blinking bit tests. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the A register.
(2) Store the A register value in the B register.
Here, the ratio display number acquired in step S1475 is stored in the E register. Therefore, the same value is stored in the E register, A register, and B register.
Next, the process advances to step S1480. Note that the process proceeds to step S1480 when there is no request to display the ratio (1000 digits) and ratio (100 digits), that is, when there is no request to display the identification segment (when displaying the ratio segment). Therefore, in step S1480, ratio data is obtained.
In step S1480, the main control board 50 obtains a numerical value corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the E register. For example, when the E register value is "00000001 (B)" corresponding to the ratio display number "1", the instruction-included accessory ratio data is acquired.

Acquisition of specific ratio data is as follows.
(1) In the HL register, store the value (“F287(H)”) obtained by subtracting “1” from the address of the RWM 53 where the designated accessory ratio data is stored (“F288(H)” in Figure 348). do.
(2) Store the data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value in the HL register.
(3) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
In other words, the RWM address where the ratio data is stored is calculated (specified) using "F287(H)" as the reference address and the ratio display number as the offset value, and the data stored at the RWM address is stored in the register (storage area). can be retrieved (memorized).

As a result of this process, the A register contains instructional accessory ratio data, continuous accessory ratio data (6000 times), accessory ratio data (6000 times), continuous accessory ratio data (cumulative), accessory ratio data (cumulative ), an offset value for displaying any one of the accessory state ratios is stored. Note that this offset value (A register value) is used when obtaining ratio display segment data in step S1484.

Next, the process advances to step S1481, and the main control board 50 determines whether there is a request to display a ratio (one digit) (request to display digit 9). This process is a process of determining whether or not the D3 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of the LED display counter 2) is "1". If there is a request to display the ratio (1 digit), the process advances to step S1483, and if there is no display request, the process advances to step S1482.
Note that when there is no request to display the ratio (1 digit) in step S1481, there is a request to display the ratio (10 digits).

Through the above processing, if there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits) or the ratio (10 digits), the process advances to step S1482, and if there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits) or the ratio (1 digit), the process advances to step S1483. .
In step S1482, the main control board 50 sets an offset for upper digits. When the process advances to step S1482, the purpose is to light up the upper digits of the identification segment or the ratio segment. At this point, the A register stores the identification segment offset value (step S1477) or the ratio data (step S1480). Here, the following processing is executed.

(1) Swap the lower 4 bits and upper 4 bits stored in the A register.
For example, if the data before swapping is "0011/1001(B)"("/" indicates the boundary between the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits), the lower 4 bits and upper 4 bits are swapped. Then, it becomes "1001/0011(B)".
(2) Perform an AND operation on the A register value and "00001111(B)" and store the operation result in the A register. This process uses the lower 4 bits of the A register as an offset value, so the upper 4 bits are masked (set to "0").
Of the 1-byte data of the identification segment offset value and the 1-byte data of the offset value for displaying the ratio, the upper 4 bits correspond to the offset value of the upper digit, and the lower 4 bits correspond to the offset value of the lower digit. ing. Therefore, by performing the above processing, an offset value for acquiring the segment data of the upper digits is generated.

In the next step S1483, the main control board 50 sets a ratio display segment data table. This process is a process of storing the start address of the ratio display segment data table in the HL register. The start address is "2530(H)", and "2530(H)" is stored in the HL register. Note that a description of the specific structure of the ratio display segment data table will be omitted.

Next, the process advances to step S1484, and the main control board 50 acquires segment output data. This process adds the A register value (offset value) to the HL register value (the first address of the ratio display segment data table), and stores the data corresponding to the address of the ratio display segment data table after the addition in the E register. It is processing.
Specifically, for example,
HL register value = 2530 (H) (before addition; start address value of ratio display segment data table)
A register value = 5 (H)
When it is,
HL register value = 2535 (H) (after addition)
E register value = 01101101 (B) ("5" display data)
becomes.

Next, the process advances to step S1485, and the main control board 50 determines whether segment P is displayed. In this embodiment, when displaying digits 6 to 9, segment P (dot) of digit 7 is always displayed, so when there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits), it is determined that segment P is displayed. . On the other hand, when there is a request to display a ratio (1 digit), a ratio (10 digits), and a ratio (1000 digits), it is determined that there is no request to display the segment P.

Here, for example, it is determined whether the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is "1" or not, and when it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request for segment P, and when it is not "1", it is determined that there is a display request for segment P. determines that there is no request to display segment P. Specifically, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store "00000010(B)" in the A register.
(2) Perform an AND operation on the A register value and the D register value (the value of the LED display counter 2 stored in step S1471), and if the operation result is not "0", it is determined that there is a request to display segment P.
When it is determined that there is a request to display segment P, the process advances to step S1486, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process advances to step S2534.

In step S1486, the main control board 50 sets output data corresponding to the segment P. Segment P corresponds to bit D7 of the 8-bit data, so the segment data (E register value) obtained in step S1484 is ORed with "10000000 (B)", and the result of the operation is stored in E register. Remember.

In the next step S2534, the main control board 50 acquires the blinking request flag. This process is a process of storing data of the blinking request flag (address "F291(H)" in FIG. 348) in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S2535, and the main control board 50 performs a blinking bit test. This process is a process of shifting the A register to the right by "1" and storing the overflow result in the carry flag. That is, the value of the D0 bit before being shifted by "1" is stored in the carry flag. Therefore, if the value of the D0 bit before shifting "1" is "0", the carry flag = "0", and if the value of the D0 bit before shifting "1" is "1", the carry flag = "1". Become.

In the next step S2536, the main control board 50 determines whether the inspection has ended. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value.
(2) When it is determined that the B register value is "0", it is determined that the test has ended.
When it is determined that the examination has been completed, the process advances to step S2537, and when it is determined that the examination has not been completed, the process returns to step S2535.
Through the above processing, the value of the blinking request flag is shifted to the right by the number of times initially stored in the B register, and the result of overflowing at that time is stored in the carry flag.

For example, when the value of the blinking request flag is "10000000 (B)" (the 175000th blink flag of the D7th bit is on) and the B register value is "8 (H)",
1st time: “10000000 (B)” → “01000000 (B)”, carry flag = “0”
B register value = 8-1 = 7 (H)
2nd time: “01000000 (B)” → “00100000 (B)”, carry flag = “0”
B register value = 7-1 = 6 (H)
3rd time: "00100000 (B)" → "00010000 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 6-1 = 5 (H)
4th time: "00010000 (B)" → "00001000 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 5-1 = 4 (H)
5th time: "00001000 (B)" → "00000100 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 4-1 = 3 (H)
6th time: "00000100 (B)" → "00000010 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 3-1 = 2 (H)
7th time: “00000010 (B)” → “00000001 (B)”, carry flag = “0”
B register value = 2-1 = 1 (H)
8th time: “00000001 (B)” → “00000000 (B)”, carry flag = “1”
B register value = 1-1 = 0 (H)
becomes.

In step S2537, the main control board 50 determines whether the blinking request flag is on. In this process, it is determined whether the carry flag is "1" when it is determined in step S2536 that the inspection has ended, and when it is "1", it is determined that the flashing request flag is on. When it is determined that the blinking request flag is on, the process advances to step S2538, and when it is determined that the blinking request flag is not on, the process advances to step S1487.

In step S2538, the main control board 50 determines whether the blinking switching flag is on. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data of the blinking switching flag (address "F293(H)" in FIG. 348) in the A register.
(2) When the A register value is "0" (second zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the blinking switching flag is not on.
When it is determined that the flashing switching flag is on, the process advances to step S2539, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process advances to step S1487.
Note that from steps S2537 and S2538,
a) If the blinking request flag is off (“No” in step S2537), the process does not proceed to step S2538, so even if the blinking switching flag is on, the light will not go out.
b) Even if the blinking request flag is on (“Yes” in step S2537), if the blinking switching flag is off (“No” in step S2538), the light is turned on.
c) If the blinking request flag is on (“Yes” in step S2537) and the blinking switching flag is on (“Yes” in step S2538), the process advances to step S2539, and the light is turned off.

In step S2539, the main control board 50 clears the segment data. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the E register.
Here, the B register value is always "0" when it is determined in step S2536 that the test is completed. Therefore, this process is a process of setting "0" in the E register. In other words, when the blinking request flag is on (“1”) and the blinking switching flag is on (“1”, i.e., off), the interrupt processing turns off the display to be lit, so the segment In order to set the data (E register value) to "00000000 (B)", the process of step S2539 is executed. Then, the process advances to step S1487.

In step S1487, the main control board 50 outputs the segment signal from the output port 7 and the digit signal from the output port 6 in order to output the digit signal and the segment signal. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Exchange the DE register value and HL register value.
Here, a digit signal is stored in the D register. Furthermore, the E register stores segment signals. and,
Swap the data stored in the D register with the data stored in the H register,
The data stored in the E register and the data stored in the L register are exchanged.
This results in
A digit signal is stored in the H register,
The segment signal is stored in the L register.
(2) Output the L register value to output port 7 and output the H register value to output port 6.
This ends the processing according to this flowchart.

Next, the operation when operating the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the 41st embodiment will be described.
In a situation where the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, if a recoverable error state occurs (for example, medal selector medal retention error ("CE" error), etc.), the reset switch ( It is assumed that the RWM clear switch) 153 is operated and the recoverable error state is canceled.
In this case, as mentioned above, even if the recoverable error state is canceled, the data in the used area and outside the used area of the RWM 53 is maintained without being initialized, so the data regarding the advantageous section is also maintained without being initialized. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 also remains lit.
Note that when returning from a recoverable error state, error-related data such as an error detection flag stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 may be initialized.

On the other hand, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is on and a medal can be bet, and a recoverable error state occurs, the power is turned off and the setting key switch 152 is then turned off. Assume that the power is turned on under the condition that , and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on (operated).
In this case, when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. The result is "No", and the result in step S2710 is "Yes", and the process advances to step S2713, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the time of starting the setting change during normal power-off recovery is set.

Furthermore, since the situation is such that medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off, so the result is "Yes" in step S2714, and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 357, addresses “F001(H)” to “F1FF(H)” in the used area of the RWM 53 and address “F292(H)” outside the used area ~"F3FF(H)" initialization processing is executed. Therefore, the data regarding the advantageous section is initialized, so the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off. However, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of address "F000(H)" is maintained without being initialized, so the setting value is not changed. Further, since it is a reset time, the answer is "Yes" in step S2741 in FIG. 357, and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is skipped, so the setting change state is not changed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41) of step S248, and the state returns to the state where medals can be bet.

In this way, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and a medal can be bet and a recoverable error state occurs, if the reset switch 153 is operated to cancel the recoverable error state, It is possible to maintain the game in an advantageous section.
On the other hand, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is on and a medal can be bet, and a recoverable error state occurs, the power is turned off once and then the reset switch 153 is turned on. When the power is turned on at , the recoverable error state can be canceled and the game can be restarted from the normal section instead of the advantageous section.
This allows the manager (hall clerk) to select whether to maintain the game in the advantageous section or restart the game from the normal section.

Further, for example, suppose that the player stops playing during a game in an advantageous section (in the middle of a game in an advantageous section). In such a case, if the next player plays a game in the middle of the game in the advantageous section, that player will become too advantageous.
On the other hand, changing the settings while the hall is in operation is undesirable because it may arouse the gambling spirit of the players.
Furthermore, if the gaming machines are turned off and stopped operating while the parlor is in operation, the operating rate of the gaming machines will decrease, which is unfavorable for the management of the parlor.
Therefore, in a situation where the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, the power is once turned off, and then the power is turned on with the reset switch 153 turned on. Thereby, the game can be restarted from the normal section without changing the settings.

In addition, under a situation in which medals can be bet, the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is on, and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off (not operated). , suppose the power is turned on.
In this case, it becomes possible to shift to a setting change state (setting change mode, setting change in progress), and then, when the start switch 41 is operated and the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and the setting change state ends, medals can be bet. Return to the situation.

Specifically, in a situation where medals can be bet, the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off (not operated). Under these circumstances, when the power is turned on, "Yes" is determined in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354, and the process advances to step S2711. Furthermore, since this is not an abnormal time for power-off recovery, the answer in step S2712 is "No", and the process advances to step S2713, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the time of starting the setting change in normal power-off recovery is set. Furthermore, since the situation is such that medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off, so "Yes" is determined in step S2714, and the process proceeds to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.

Furthermore, since it is not the time of reset, "No" is returned in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 357, and the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742. Then, since it is not the time to start setting confirmation, the result is "No" in step S2755 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in FIG. 358, and the processes of steps S2752 to S2758 are repeated until the result is "Yes" in step S2756. In other words, the settings are changed. Thereafter, when the start switch 41 is operated, the result becomes "Yes" in step S2756, and further, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the result becomes "Yes" in step S2760, and the setting change state ends. Then, through the processing of steps S2743 to S2747 in FIG. 357, the process proceeds to the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41) of step S248, and the state returns to the state where medals can be bet.

Further, as described above, in the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, the period from the start switch reception process (step S279 in FIG. 41) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 41), including while the reels 31 are rotating. is set so that the settings cannot be changed, and during this time, the settings cannot be changed flag is turned on.
Then, the power is turned off when the setting change prohibition flag is on, and then the power is turned on under a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off. 354, the result is "No" in step S2714 of FIG. 354, so the process does not proceed to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731, and therefore does not proceed to the setting change state.

On the other hand, in a situation where medals can be bet, the settings cannot be changed flag is off, so in such a situation, the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is on, and the reset switch is turned off. (RWM clear switch) 153 is off and when the power is turned on, the result is "Yes" in step S2714 in FIG. It will be possible to move to

Furthermore, as described above, when the power-off recovery is normal, if an operation is performed to shift to the setting change state, the process advances to step S2713 in FIG. ” to “F1FF(H)” and addresses outside the used area “F292(H)” to “F3FF(H)” are set. Further, the initialization range of the usage area of the RWM 53 includes the credit number data (_NB_CREDIT) of the address "F010(H)" and the bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) of the address "F043(H)".

Therefore, in situations where medals can be bet, the number of bets is between "1" and "3", and the number of credits is between "1" and "50", the power is turned off. If the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered. When the game ends and the situation becomes such that medals can be bet, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Further, in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is one of "1" to "3", and the number of credits is "0", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off. is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, if the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered, the setting change state ends and medals can be bet. When this situation occurs, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Furthermore, in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is one of "1" to "50", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch is turned off. 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, if the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered, the setting change state ends and the medal is bet. When the situation becomes possible, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Further, in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is "0", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is on, and the setting key switch 152 is reset. If the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered while the switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, when the setting change state ends and medals can be bet. , the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Further, under a situation in which medals can be bet, the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on (operated). , suppose the power is turned on. In this case, it becomes possible to execute the initialization process of a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and after the initialization process is executed, it becomes possible to bet medals without shifting to the setting change state.

Specifically, the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned off in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. If it is turned on, the result in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. The initialization range of RWM 53 is set. Furthermore, since the situation is such that medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off, so the result is "Yes" in step S2714, and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.

Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 357, addresses “F001(H)” to “F1FF(H)” in the used area of the RWM 53 and address “F292(H)” outside the used area ~"F3FF(H)" initialization processing is executed.
Also, since it is a reset time, the answer is "Yes" in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 357, and the process skips the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 and proceeds to step S2743. Therefore, it does not move to the setting change state. Thereafter, through the processes of steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41) of step S248, and the state returns to the state where medals can be bet.

Furthermore, the power is turned off when the setting change prohibition flag is on, and then the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. Then, since the answer is "No" in step S2714 of FIG. 354, the process does not proceed to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731, and therefore, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is not executed.

On the other hand, under a situation in which medals can be bet, the settings cannot be changed flag is off, and under such a situation, the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is off, and the reset switch ( When the power is turned on in a situation where the RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the result in step S2714 in FIG. Processing is executed.

Further, the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. Then, in step S2713 of FIG. 354, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is set to the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area and the addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF" outside the used area. (H)" is set. This initialization range is the same as the initialization range that is set when an operation for transitioning to a setting change state is performed during normal power-off recovery.

In other words, under the condition that the power-off recovery is normal (not abnormal power-off recovery), the setting key switch 152 is on, and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the power is turned off. When the power is turned on, the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, and the RWM 53 is turned on in the same range as when the power is turned on. Initialization processing is executed.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the setting key switch 152 is not operated, and therefore even if the setting key is not in possession, the operation can be performed within the same range as when the operation for transitioning to the setting change state is performed. , RWM 53 initialization processing can be executed.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the initialization process of the RWM 53 can be executed within the same range as when transitioning to the settings change state without transitioning to the settings change state.

Therefore, in situations where medals can be bet, the number of bets is between "1" and "3", and the number of credits is between "1" and "50", the power is turned off. If the power is then turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and then , when it becomes possible to bet medals, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Further, in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is one of "1" to "3", and the number of credits is "0", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off. Even if the power is turned on in a situation where the RWM 53 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and then medals can be bet. When this happens, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Furthermore, in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is one of "1" to "50", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch is turned off. 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, even if the power is turned on, the RWM 53 initialization process is executed, and then medals can be bet. When this happens, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Further, in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is "0", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off and reset. Even if the power is turned on while the switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and after that, when it becomes possible to bet medals, the number of bets is becomes "0", and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Further, the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. Suppose that That is, it is assumed that the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on. In this case, it becomes possible to shift to a setting change state, and then the start switch 41 is operated, the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and when the setting change state ends, the state returns to a state in which medals can be bet.

As shown in FIG. 354, in the program start process (M_PRG_START), it is determined in step S2707 whether the setting key switch signal is on, and then, in step S2710 it is determined whether the reset switch signal is on. That is, first, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch signal is on, and then it is determined whether or not the reset switch signal is on.
Therefore, when the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on, the answer in step S2707 is "Yes" and the process does not proceed to step S2710. That is, when the power is turned on in a situation where both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on, the setting key switch 152 takes priority. Then, when proceeding to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 357, the answer is "No" in step S2741, and the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742, so that it is possible to shift to the setting change state.

Further, assume that the setting value "M" (for example, "2") is first displayed on the setting value display LED 73 when the setting change state is entered. At this time, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of the RWM53 is "M-1", and the value of the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) of "F001(H)" is "M". It is.
Assume that the setting change switch 153 is then operated and the setting value "N" (for example, "3") is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. At this time, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of RWM53 remains "M-1", and the value of the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) of "F001(H)" is " N”.

Furthermore, assume that the power is turned off without the start switch 41 being operated while the setting value "N" is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. In this case, since the start switch 41 has not been operated, the set value data after the change is not saved (memorized) at the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53, so the value of "F000(H)" is "M -1" is maintained. Furthermore, since the start switch 41 has not been operated and the setting key switch 152 has not been turned off, the power is turned off without completing the setting change state (staying in the setting change state).

It is assumed that the power is then turned on under a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off. In this case, the power is simply turned on and off, and the used area and data outside the used area of the RWM53 are maintained without being initialized, so the settings will return to the same state as when the power was turned off. return to the state. Additionally, “M-1” is stored in the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of address “F000(H)” of RWM53, and “N” is stored in the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) of “F001(H)”. Therefore, when the setting change state is restored, the setting value "N" is displayed on the setting value display LED 73.

On the other hand, assume that the setting value "M" (for example, "2") is first displayed on the setting value display LED 73 when the setting change state is entered. Assume that the setting change switch 153 is then operated and the setting value "N" (for example, "3") is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. Furthermore, assume that the power is turned off without the start switch 41 being operated while the setting value "N" is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. Up to this point, the process is the same as the above case. Next, assume that the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on.

In this case, the result in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354 is "No", and the result in step S2710 is "Yes", so the process advances to step S2731, and the initial state of the RWM 53 at the time of starting the setting change when the power-off recovery is normal. The conversion range is set. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 357, the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 and the address "F292(H)" outside the used area ~"F3FF(H)" initialization processing is executed. Therefore, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 is maintained as "M-1".
Also, since it is a reset time, the answer is "Yes" in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 357, and the process skips the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 and proceeds to step S2743. Therefore, it does not move to the setting change state. Thereafter, through the processes of steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41) of step S248, and a situation is reached in which medals can be bet. At this time, the value of the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 is maintained as "M-1", so the set value becomes "M".

Further, assume that the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, and then the power is turned on under a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on.
In this case, in an unrecoverable error state, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed, and therefore power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed, so when the power is turned off, the power-off processed flag is not set, and the RWM checksum No data is saved either.

Furthermore, since the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off, the result is "No" in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354, and the process advances to step S2708. Furthermore, since the power-off processing completed flag is not set and the RWM checksum data is not saved, the answer is "Yes" in step S2708, and the process advances to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801.
That is, if the power is turned off in a non-recoverable error state and then turned on under a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the power will be turned off again. , an unrecoverable error state occurs.

Although the power is turned on in a situation where the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354 does not proceed to step S2710, so the power-off recovery process (M_POWER_ON ) is never executed, and initialization processing (M_INI_SET) is never executed.
Also, while the second program is executing the process, the interrupt process (I_INTR) is not executed and the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed, so if the power is turned off while the second program is executing the process, then When the power was turned on, the power-off processing completion flag was not set and the RWM checksum data was not saved, so "Yes" was returned in step S2708, and the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) was performed in step S2801. ). In other words, an unrecoverable error state occurs.

Also, while the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is being executed by a program outside the usage area (second program), the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear When the power is turned on in a situation where the switch) 153 is on, the result in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. Therefore, irreversible error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is executed by the program (first program) in the used area.

Similarly, while the program (first program) in the used area is executing unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP), the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch ) 153 is on, even if the power is turned on, the result in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. Therefore, irreversible error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is executed by the program (first program) in the used area.

Further, suppose that the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, and then the power is turned on under a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off.
In this case, "Yes" is determined in step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354, and the process advances to step S2711, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the time of starting the setting change at the time of power-off recovery abnormality is set. Furthermore, since this is a power-off recovery abnormality, "Yes" is determined in step S2712, and the process proceeds to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. and the entire range outside the used area (addresses “F210(H)” to “F3FF(H)”) is initialized. Therefore, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of address “F000(H)” of RWM53 is executed. will be "0", so the set value will be "1".

Also, since it is not the time of reset, "No" is returned in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 357, and the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742, and shifts to the setting change state.
Assume that in this setting change state, the power is turned off without operating the setting change switch (reset switch/RWM clear switch) 153. In this case, since interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed in the setting change state, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed.
It is assumed that the power is then turned on while the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. In this case, since it is not a power-off recovery abnormality, the result is "No" in step S2708 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354. Furthermore, since the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the result in step S2710 is "Yes". Then, the process advances to step S2713, and the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the time of starting the setting change when the power-off recovery is normal is set.

Further, since the setting change prohibition flag is off, "Yes" is determined in step S2714 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354, and the process proceeds to the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) of step S2731. Further, since it is a reset time, "Yes" is determined in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 357, and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 is skipped. Therefore, this time, there is no transition to the setting change state. Thereafter, through the processes of steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41) of step S248, and a situation is reached in which medals can be bet. At this time, the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 is "0" as described above, so the set value becomes "1".

Also, in this embodiment, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in step S2771 of interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 359. Furthermore, in step S2776 of the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 360, RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) is executed. Then, in the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) of FIG. 361, RWM checksum data (complement data) is calculated by executing the processing of steps S2785 to S2794, and the calculated RWM checksum data is transferred to the step S2795. In the process, it is stored in the address "F2A0(H)" of the RWM 53.

As mentioned above, this RWM checksum data includes data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53, and data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area. H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") is a value that becomes "0" when added to the added value of the data.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if a recoverable error occurs and a recoverable error state (a state in which the error detection flag is turned on and the progress of the game is stopped), the interrupt processing (I_INTR ) can be executed. Therefore, even if an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (power is turned off) in a recoverable error state, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) can be executed.
In response, an unrecoverable error occurs, and the unrecoverable error state (unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 356 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 363 is executed, and the game progresses. (stopped state), interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited as described above. Therefore, if an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (power is turned off) in an unrecoverable error state, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed.

In this way, when the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, by not executing the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN), when the power is turned on afterwards, the program start processing (FIG. 354) M_PRG_START), it can be determined in step S2708 that a power-off recovery error has occurred, and the process can proceed to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801.
That is, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, simply turning the power on and off will cause the unrecoverable error state to occur again.
When an unrecoverable error state occurs, unless you turn off the power and perform an operation to transition to the setting change state (turn on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on), It is possible to make it impossible to return to a state in which medals can be bet (a state in which the game can be played).

In addition, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, even if the power is turned off and the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, in the program start processing (M_PRG_START) of FIG. 354, In step S2708, it is determined that a power failure recovery error has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S2801, which is an unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP). Therefore, the process does not proceed to the main process (M_MAIN) (Figure 41), so the medal can be bet. Unable to return to a state where the game can proceed.

Also, even if a recoverable error occurs and the game is in a recoverable error state (the error detection flag is turned on and the game stops progressing), it is possible to execute interrupt processing (I_INTR), but it is not recoverable. When a possible error occurs and an unrecoverable error state occurs (unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 356 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 363 is executed and the game progress is stopped). , interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited.
Furthermore, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) controls the lighting of digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, earned number display LED 78, setting value display LED 73), and the lighting of digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74). The ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is executed in the interrupt process (I_INTR).

Therefore, in a recoverable error state, since the interrupt process (I_INTR) can be executed, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed. Therefore, even in a recoverable error state, error information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT), and management information is displayed by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY). It is possible to sequentially display various ratios regarding information types and game results on the LED 74 (digits 6 to 9).

On the other hand, in an unrecoverable error state, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited, so the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) and the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) are also not executed.
Therefore, during a non-recoverable error state, the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) is displayed by the non-recoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. Display error information.

Also, in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 356 or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. .
As a result, during an unrecoverable error state, the output from output port 6 (output port for digit 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) is "00000000 (B). '', all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off until the irreversible error state is canceled and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is restarted.
The fact that all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off is a characteristic of an unrecoverable error state. You can let us know what happened.

Although the forty-first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible, for example.
(1) In the above embodiment, the output of output port 6 (output port for digit 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) is turned off during an unrecoverable error state. (“00000000(B)”), all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off.
However, the manner in which digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are displayed in an unrecoverable error state is not limited to this.

For example, during an unrecoverable error state, "8" may be displayed in each of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74. That is, the display on the management information display LED 74 may be "8888".
FIG. 370 is a flowchart showing a modification of unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP), and corresponds to FIG. 363.
In FIG. 370, steps that are different from those in FIG. 363 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in FIG. 363 are given the same step numbers.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 363 will be mainly explained.

In the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) shown in FIG. Output.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000001 (B)" (data in which only the digit 6 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111 (B)" (segment 2A to 2G signals). is "1").

Next, the process advances to step S1507, and the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent flickering of the LED. The length of the standby period depends on the performance of the LED, but can be set to about "0.1 ms", for example. For example, store a predetermined value (for example, "255") in the B register, subtract this value using the internal system clock, and when the B register value becomes "0", it is determined that the waiting time has elapsed, and the next The process advances to step S1508.

In step S1508, the main control board 50 turns off the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7 (“00000000(B)”). This process is for preventing afterimages.
Next, the process advances to step S1509, and the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent flickering of the LED. This process is to ensure that the LEDs are extinguished after the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7 are turned off.

Proceeding to the next step S1510, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in the digit 7 from the output ports 6 and 7.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000010 (B)" (data in which only the digit 7 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111 (B)" (segment 2A to 2G signals). is "1") is output.
Steps S1511 to S1513 are the same as steps S1507 to S1509.

Then, proceeding to step S1514, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in digit 8 from output ports 6 and 7.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000100 (B)" (data in which only the digit 8 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111 (B)" (segment 2A to 2G signals). is "1") is output.
Steps S1515 to S1517 are the same as steps S1507 to S1509.

Then, proceeding to step S1518, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in digit 9 from output ports 6 and 7.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00001000 (B)" (data in which only the digit 9 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111 (B)" (segment 2A to 2G signals). is "1").
Steps S1519 to S1521 are the same as steps S1507 to S1509. After executing the process in step S1521, the process returns to step S1497.

In this manner, "8" may be displayed in each of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 during an unrecoverable error state.
The display of all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 as "8" is a characteristic peculiar to an unrecoverable error state, and this causes the administrator (hall clerk) to indicate that it is impossible to recover. It is possible to notify that an error condition has occurred.

Note that the display on the management information display LED 74 may be "---" instead of "8888". That is, only the segments G of digits 6 to 9 may be lit.
Further, the display on the management information display LED 74 may be "...". That is, only the segments P of digits 6 to 9 may be lit.
Furthermore, the display on the management information display LED 74 may be "8.8.8.8." That is, as shown in FIG. 30(a) or (c), all segments of digits 6 to 9 (segments A to G and P) may be lit.

(2) In the above embodiment, during an unrecoverable error state, the output of output port 6 (output port for digit 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) is turned off. (“00000000(B)”), all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off.
However, in step S1494 of unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 356 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 363, the outputs of output ports 6 and 7 are turned off ("00000000 (B)") It may be maintained instead of. In this case, the display of digits 6 to 9 on the management information display LED 74 is as follows.

As described above, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are dynamically lit with four interrupts as one cycle. Therefore, for example, when "7P.65" is displayed in digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74, digit 9 is "5", digit 8 is "6", digit 7 is "P.", Digit 6 "7" lights up sequentially. For example, assume that an unrecoverable error state occurs in a situation where digits 6 to 8 of the management information display LED 74 are turned off and digit 9 is lit with "5". In this case, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) stops while the signals (digit signals and segment signals) that cause digits 6 to 8 to go out and digit 9 to display "5" are being output from output ports 6 and 7. do.

Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00001000 (B)" (data in which the digit 9 signal is "1" and the others are "0"), and output port 7 outputs "01101101 (B)" (segment 2G, 2F, 2D, 2C, and 2A signals are "1" and the others are "0" data), interrupt processing (I_INTR) stops, and then output from output ports 6 and 7. The signals (data) to be rewritten will no longer be rewritten.
Therefore, the output of the signals (digit signals and segment signals) from output ports 6 and 7 is maintained until the irrecoverable error state is canceled and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is restarted. remains off, and digit 9 remains illuminated with "5".

Similarly, for example, assume that an unrecoverable error state occurs in a situation where "7" is lit and displayed in digit 6 of the management information display LED 74 and digits 7 to 9 are turned off.
In this case, the signals (digit signals and segment signals) that cause digit 6 to display "7" and digits 7 to 9 to turn off until the unrecoverable error state is released and interrupt processing (I_INTR) is restarted. Since the output from the output ports 6 and 7 continues, "7" is displayed in digit 6, and digits 7 to 9 remain unlit.

Further, for example, assume that the unrecoverable error process 2 is executed by the second program in a situation where "7" is lit and displayed in digit 6 of the management information display LED 74 and digits 7 to 9 are turned off. Assume that in the unrecoverable error processing 2 by the second program, the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7 are maintained without being turned off. In this case, as described above, the signal (digit signal and segment signal) that causes digit 6 to display "7" and digits 7 to 9 to turn off continues to be output from output ports 6 and 7. "7" is displayed on digit 6, and digits 7 to 9 remain unlit.

When the power is turned off in this state, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 go out. After that, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 in the off state, "Yes" is determined in step S2708 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. Processing is executed. In this case, the process does not proceed to the initialization process in step S2731, so the data in the RWM 53 is maintained without being initialized. Therefore, data regarding the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in the RWM 53 (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of address "F292 (H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297 (H)") etc.) are also maintained without being initialized.

Here, it is assumed that in the unrecoverable error processing by the first program, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is made executable without being prohibited. In this case, since the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 is performed by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) during the interrupt process (I_INTR), digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are first set to The ratio information immediately before the possible error processing 2 is executed, that is, "7P.65" (instruction accessory ratio, ratio display number "1") is displayed.

Further, it is assumed that "7P.65" is displayed in digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 for, for example, "2000 ms" immediately before the unrecoverable error process 2 is executed by the second program. In this case, when the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted in the unrecoverable error process by the first program, "7P.65" is displayed in digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74, and "4791.84ms" is displayed. -Displayed for "2000ms" = "2791.84ms". Thereafter, the display items with the ratio display number "2" onwards are sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).

In this way, when the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted during unrecoverable error processing by the first program, the ratio information will be displayed from where it left off immediately before unrecoverable error processing 2 was executed by the second program. is started (resumed).
On the other hand, if interrupt processing (I_INTR) is disabled in the unrecoverable error processing by the first program, the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) will not be executed, so digit 6 of the management information display LED 74 will be disabled. -9 remains off.

In addition, as mentioned above, regarding the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio (cumulative), accessory ratio (cumulative), and accessory state ratio, if the total number of games is less than "175,000", The identification segment is displayed blinking. Regarding the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) and the accessory ratio (6000 times), when the total number of games played is less than "6000", the identification segment is displayed blinking. Further, when the displayed value is "70" or more for the designated accessory ratio, accessory ratio (cumulative), and accessory ratio (6000 times), the ratio segment is displayed blinking. Regarding the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative total) and the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times), when the displayed value is "60" or more, the ratio segment is displayed blinking. When the displayed value of the accessory status ratio is "50" or more, the ratio segment is displayed blinking. In addition, when displaying blinking, it repeats turning on and off every about 0.3 seconds.

Therefore, all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may be turned off. For example, in a situation where all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are off, that is, when the output from output ports 6 and 7 is "00000000 (B)" (off), it is impossible to recover. Assume that an error condition has occurred.
In this case, the output from output ports 6 and 7 will remain "00000000 (B)" (off) until the irrecoverable error state is canceled and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is restarted, so the management information All digits 6 to 9 of the display LED 74 remain off.

The display mode of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 as described above is a display mode specific to an unrecoverable error state. It is possible to notify that a possible error condition has occurred.

(3) In the above embodiment, the setting key switch 152 is on, and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, provided that the power-off recovery is normal (not the power-off recovery is abnormal). Under the circumstances, when the power is turned on (when transitioning to the setting change state) and under the conditions where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the power is turned on. The initialization process of the RWM 53 was executed in the same range as when it was turned on.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the power is turned on (when transitioning to a setting change state) under a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, The initialization range of the RWM 53 may be different depending on when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on.
For example, when the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initial state of the RWM 53 is the same as that at the end of the advantageous period. You may also perform conversion processing.
Specifically, initialization processing is executed for a predetermined range of the used area of the RWM 53 (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in FIG. 346) in which data related to advantageous sections are stored, and Other ranges (for example, credit number data (_NB_CREDIT) for address "F010 (H)" in Figure 346, bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) for "F043 (H)", etc.) can be maintained without being initialized. .
In any case, the initialization range when the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on is set to be narrower than the initialization range when transitioning to the setting change state. It is preferable.

(4) In the above embodiment, it is determined whether the set value is within the normal range in step S458 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. Proceeded to 2 (S_ERROR_STOP). However, it is not limited to this.
For example, it may be determined whether the set value is within the normal range at the timing immediately after it is determined that the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) in the main process (M_MAIN).
Specifically, for example, when the answer is "Yes" in step S278 of the main processing (M_MAIN) in FIG. When this happens, the process can proceed to step S279 in FIG. 41, and when it is determined that it is not within the normal range, the process can proceed to unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 363.

(5) In the above embodiment, if the power is turned off while staying in the settings change state and then the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, the transition to the settings change state occurs. The medals were moved to a place where they could be bet without causing any problems.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, if the power is turned off while staying in the setting change state, and then the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on. When this occurs, an unrecoverable error state may occur.

Specifically, for example, a setting change state flag is provided, and when the setting change state is entered, the setting change state flag is set in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and when the setting change state termination conditions are met, Clear the setting change status flag.
Then, when the power is turned off in the setting change state and then turned on in a situation where the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, in step S2714 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 354, Determine whether the setting change state flag is on. If it is determined that the setting change state flag is on, the process advances to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, and the process is set to an unrecoverable error state.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the set value from being set even though the operation for finalizing the set value (for example, turning on the start switch 41) has not been performed.

(6) In the above embodiment, the address “F000(H)” of the RWM 53 stores any one of the values “0(D)” to “5(D)” as the setting value data (_NB_RANK). That is, the setting value data was managed as "0(D)" to "5(D)".
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the address "F000(H)" of the RWM53 may store any value from "1(D)" to "6(D)" as the setting value data (_NB_RANK). good. That is, the setting value data may be managed as "1(D)" to "6(D)".

When moving to the setting change state, clear the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 (to "0"), and perform an operation to confirm the setting value (for example, press the start switch 41). When turning on) is performed, any value from "1 (D)" to "6 (D)" is stored as setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000 (H)" of RWM53. Good too.
In this case, if the power is turned off with the settings changed and then turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, the set value will be determined to be outside the normal range in step S458 of FIG. If it is determined that a setting value error has occurred, the process may proceed to unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in step S2811 to set the unrecoverable error state.

(7) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1P signal) is output from output port 4, the digit signal for digits 6 to 9 (digit 6 to 9 signal) is output from output port 6, and the segment signal for digits 6 to 9 (segment 2A to 2P signal) is output from output port 6. It was output from output port 7.
When lighting digits 1 to 5, the digit signal was output from the output port 3, and the segment 1 signal was output from the output port 4. Further, when lighting digits 6 to 9, a digit signal was output from output port 6, and a segment 2 signal was output from output port 7. In other words, the output ports to be used are divided into digits 1 to 5, which control lighting according to the program in the used area (first program), and digits 6 to 9, which control lighting according to the program outside the used area (second program). Ta.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, digits 1 to 5 control lighting according to a program in the used area (first program), and digits 6 to 9 control lighting according to a program outside the used area (second program). , the output port may also be used.
FIG. 371 is a diagram showing a modification of the output port in the forty-first embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 371, segment signals for digits 1 to 9 (segment A to P signals) may be output from output port 3. Also, digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digits 1 to 5 signals) are output from output port 2, and digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digits 6 to 9 signals) are output from output port 4. can do.
In this case, during the unrecoverable error state, by turning off the output of output port 4 (output port for digit 6 to 9 signals) ("00000000 (B)"), digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 You can leave all lights off.

(8) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 353, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) for outputting the digit 1 signal to digit 5 signal is provided in the usage area of the RWM 53, and outside the usage area of the RWM 53, An LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is provided to output the digit 6 signal to digit 9 signal. That is, an LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and an LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 are provided separately and independently. However, it is not limited to this.

FIG. 372 is a diagram showing a modification of the LED display counter in the forty-first embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 372, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) with 5 interrupts per cycle is provided in the area used by the RWM 53, and based on the value of this LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1), digit 1 signal to digit 5 signal In addition to outputting digit 6 signal to digit 9 signal, it is also possible to output digit 6 signal to digit 9 signal. That is, the LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and the LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 may be used together.

In this case, in step S1471 of the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in FIG. 368, the value of the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is acquired and stored in the D register.
In the next step S1472, it is determined whether there is a ratio display request. Specifically, the value of LED display counter 1 stored in the D register and "11110000 (B)" are ANDed, and when the AND operation result is "0", it is determined that there is a ratio display request, and step S1475 If the AND operation result is not "0", it is determined that there is no ratio display request, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

Here, when the value of LED display counter 1 is "00001000 (B)", "00000100 (B)", "00000010 (B)", or "00000001 (B)", the AND operation result is "0". Therefore, it is determined that there is a ratio display request, and the process advances to step S1475.
On the other hand, when the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)", the AND operation result does not become "0", so it is determined that there is no ratio display request, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended. In this case, since the outputs of output ports 6 and 7 are maintained, the display mode of digits 6 to 9 on the management information display LED 74 is the same as the display mode during the previous interrupt processing. For example, if "7" was displayed in digit 6 during the previous interrupt processing, "7" is also displayed in digit 6 during the current interrupt processing.

Note that when it is determined in step S1472 that there is no ratio display request, the output of output port 6 (output port for digit 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) is turned off. (“00000000(B)”) and all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may be turned off.

(9) For example, under the condition that the power-off recovery is normal (not an abnormal power-off recovery), the setting key switch 152 is on, and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off. Even if the initialization range of the RWM 53 is changed depending on when the power is turned on and when the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on, good.
Specifically, when the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, for example, the usage area is set as the initialization range of the RWM 53. Set the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" of the area, and the addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area. In this case, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of address “F000(H)” of RWM53 and addresses “F210(H)” to “F291(H)” outside the used area are not initialized (cleared). maintain.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is set to, for example, the address "F000(H)". The entire range of the used area (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)"), including the setting value data (_NB_RANK), and addresses outside the used area "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" ”. In this case, addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the used area are maintained without being initialized (cleared), but the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of address "F000(H)" Initialize (clear). Note that in this case, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) becomes "0", so the setting value becomes "1". Thereby, the setting value can be changed to "1" simply by shifting to the setting change state.

Also, when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are turned on. Even when the power is turned on while both are on, both can be made to be able to shift to a setting change state.

(10) In the above embodiment, the initialization range of the RWM 53 for normal power-off recovery is the addresses “F001(H)” to “F1FF(H)” in the used area of the RWM 53, and the address “F292” outside the used area. (H)” to “F3FF(H)” were set.
However, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is not limited to the above-mentioned range, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the slot machine 10.

For example, the initialization range of the RWM 53 can be varied depending on the contents of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) of the address “F030(H)” of the RWM 53 in FIG. 346.
Specifically, for example, when the D2 bit of the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of “F030(H)” is “1” and 1BB is in operation, the address “F030(H)” is )” operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) can be removed.
On the other hand, when the D2 bit of the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of "F030(H)" is "0" and 1BB is not operating, the operation state of address "F030(H)" is included in the initialization range of RWM53. Can include a status flag (_FL_ACTION).

(11) In the above embodiment, interrupt processing is prohibited in step S1490 of unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 356. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, interrupt processing may not be prohibited in unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).
Specifically, when the answer is "Yes" in step S2708 or S2715 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. good.

Even while the irrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is being executed, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 359 can be executed, and the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S2821 and the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in step S2221 are executed. It may be possible.
As a result, digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, earned number display LED 78, setting value display LED 73) and digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) are turned on even while unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is being executed. Control may be executable.

(12) In the above embodiment, when the operation for transitioning to the setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on) is performed and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the address of the RWM 53 is "F292(H)" (ratio display number) is initialized. For this reason, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), turn off the power, and then switch to the setting change state. When the operation is performed and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the management information display LED 74 will display the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio data (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of various ratio information. is started.

However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on) and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the management information The display LED 74 first displays specific information different from the ratio information, such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8.", and then displays the instruction-containing accessory, which is the first display item of various ratio information. The display may start from the ratio data (ratio display number "1").
As a result, it is possible to check whether all the segments of digits 6 to 9 are lit, and it is therefore possible to check whether there is a failure in the segment or whether there is a break in the signal line of the segment.
Similarly, when an operation is performed to shift to the setting change state and it is determined that a power-off recovery error has occurred, the management information display LED 74 first displays a ratio such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8." It is also possible to display specific information different from the above information, and then start displaying the instruction-included accessory ratio data (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of the various ratio information.

(13) For example, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 also turned off, the setting key switch 152 is turned on and the reset switch 153 is turned off. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch 153 turned on, the setting key switch 152 is turned on and the reset switch 153 is also turned on. In any case, when the power is turned on with It is possible to display specific information that is different from the .

After that, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) indicate the on/off status of various switches when the power was turned on, and whether it was determined that the power-off recovery was normal or that the power-off recovery was abnormal. Display information accordingly. This makes it possible to check whether all segments of digits 6 to 9 light up when the power is turned on, making it possible to check whether there is a segment failure or whether the segment signal line is disconnected. be able to.

Also, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on and the reset switch 153 turned off, the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch 153 turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on and the reset switch 153 also turned on, "8888" or "8. 8.8.8.'', but when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 also turned off. , it is not necessary to display the above specific information on the management information display LED 74.

(14) In the above embodiment, when the operation for transitioning to the setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on) is performed, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the RWM 53 Initializes data related to lighting control of management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (for example, ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of address "F292 (H)" to LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297 (H)", etc.) did.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an operation is performed to shift to a setting change state and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, data (for example, address " The ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of "F292(H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297(H)", etc.) may be maintained without being initialized.

For example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), turn off the power, and then perform an operation to shift to the setting change state. Assume that it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal. In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is started and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the management information display LED 74 first displays the ratio information immediately before the power is turned off, that is, the accessory ratio ( Cumulative) data is displayed.

Further, it is assumed that accessory ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) for, for example, "1000ms" just before turning off the power. In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is started and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the management information display LED 74 displays the accessory ratio (cumulative) data from "4791.84ms" to "1000ms". ”=displayed for “3791.84ms”. Thereafter, the display items with the ratio display number "6" onwards are sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).
In this way, when the operation to transition to the setting change state is performed and the power-off recovery is determined to be normal and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the ratio information immediately before the power was turned off is Display starts (resumes) from where it left off.

(15) In the above embodiment, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the RWM 53 manages the The data related to the lighting control of the information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of the address "F292 (H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297 (H)") has been initialized. .
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the management information in the RWM 53 The data related to the lighting control of the display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of the address "F292 (H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297 (H)") is not initialized. may be maintained at

For example, when the management information display LED 74 (winning ratio monitor) is displaying the continuous role ratio (6000 games) data (ratio display number "2"), turn off the power, and then turn off the setting key switch 152. , and the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal. In this case, when the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is activated and the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the management information display LED 74 will first display the ratio information immediately before the power is turned off, that is, the continuous accessory ratio. (6000 games) data is displayed.

Also, assume that the continuous role object ratio (6000 games) data (ratio display number "2") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (winning ratio monitor) for, for example, "3000ms" just before turning off the power. . In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is started and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the continuous role object ratio (6000 games) data is displayed on the management information display LED 74 as "4791.84ms" - Displayed for "3000ms" = "1791.84ms". Thereafter, the display items with the ratio display number "3" onwards are sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).
In this way, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted. When the power is turned off, the display starts (resumes) from the continuation of the ratio information immediately before the power was turned off.

(16) In the above embodiment, settings cannot be changed during the start switch reception process (step S279 in FIG. 41) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 41) (during the game), including while the reels 31 are rotating. , and during this time, the setting cannot be changed flag was turned on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the settings may be always changeable without providing a period during which the settings cannot be changed, and therefore without providing a setting change prohibition flag.

(17) In the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not a power outage has occurred in step S2770 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. I_POWER_DOWN), and when it is determined that a power outage has not occurred, the process skips the power outage process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 and proceeds to step S454.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed during the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 359, and the occurrence of a power-off is detected, the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. A separate interrupt process may be executed, and a power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) may be executed in this separate interrupt process.
In this case, if a power outage is detected while the interrupt process (I_INTR) in Figure 359 is being executed, another interrupt process will not be activated while the interrupt process (I_INTR) is being executed, and the interrupt process (I_INTR) will be activated. After the completion of the process, another interrupt process is started, and a power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in this other interrupt process.

(18) In the above embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there are parrots that use game balls as gaming media, enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines) that use electronic information (electronic medals) without using physical (tangible) medals, and casino machines. The present invention can be applied.
(19) The first to forty-first embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to forty-first embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<42nd embodiment>
FIG. 373 is a diagram showing the built-in memory of the main CPU 55 in the 42nd embodiment. In the figure, (A) is a diagram showing an overview of the built-in memory, and (B) is a diagram showing a built-in register area among the storage areas in the built-in memory. In FIG. 373, only a portion of the built-in memory according to this embodiment is shown, and not all of the built-in memory is shown.
Note that the built-in memory is also shown in FIG. 165 (24th embodiment) and FIG. 345 (41st embodiment). Here, in the 42nd embodiment, "inside the usage area" in FIGS. 164 and 345 is referred to as "first", and "outside the usage area" is referred to as "second". Further, the "control area" in FIGS. 164 and 345 is referred to as a "program area." In this way, although the 42nd embodiment has a different name from the 24th embodiment and the 41st embodiment, the actual functions are not different.

Among the areas of the ROM 54, the first program area and the first data area correspond to the used area (area for storing data related to the progress of the game), and the second program area and the second data area correspond to the used area. This corresponds to an area outside the area (an area for storing data unrelated to the progress of the game; in particular, an area for storing data related to the display of the winning ratio monitor).

Similar to FIG. 165, the ROM 54 has an address range of "0000h" to "2FFFh" and a storage area of "12K" bytes. In this storage area, the first program area is set to "4.5K" bytes, and the first data area is set to "3.0K" bytes.
Furthermore, during the RWM 53, the first work area and the first stack area are used (updated, referenced) during the execution of the first program (program related to the progress of the game) stored in the first program area. ) storage area. Similarly, the second work area and the second stack area are used during the execution of a second program (a program unrelated to the progress of the game; for example, a program related to the display of the winning ratio monitor) stored in the second program area. This is a storage area that is updated (updated, referenced).
Further, the first program stored in the first program area cannot update the data in the second work area and the second stack area, but it is possible to refer to the data in the second work area and the second stack area. .
Similarly, in the second program stored in the second program area, data in the first work area and first stack area cannot be updated, but data in the first work area and first stack area can be referenced. be.

In the example of FIG. 345 (41st embodiment), one built-in register area is provided. In the example of FIG. 164 (24th embodiment), a general-purpose register is provided in the built-in register area.
In contrast, in the forty-second embodiment, the built-in register area (synonymous with built-in register area) includes register bank 0 and register bank 1. Each register bank includes a main register (front register) and a sub register (back register). The main register includes a general-purpose register shown in FIG. 164 (24th embodiment).
In the following description, sub-registers will be omitted, and the term "register" refers to the main register.

Each register in register bank 0 is a register used when executing the program stored in the first program area. Similarly, each register in register bank 1 is a register used when executing the program stored in the second program area. For example, A register, F register, etc. are provided in both register bank 0 and register bank 1, respectively. In other words, the A register of register bank 0 and the A register of register bank 1 are different registers.

The A register is an accumulator.
The F register is a flag register, and its structure will be described later.
The B, C, D, E, H, and L registers are general purpose registers.
The IX and IY registers are index registers and are used, for example, when specifying an address.
The SP register is a stack pointer register. The SP register is a register that specifies to which address data is to be saved when saving it to the stack area, and also specifies which address data is to be restored to when restoring data from the stack area.
Specifically, the SP register of register bank 0 specifies the address of the first stack area (range from "F1D0h" to "F1FFh"). Similarly, the SP register of register bank 1 specifies the address of the second stack area (range from "F3E8h" to "F3FFh").

Outside register banks 0 and 1, there are I, R, PC, and IFF registers.
The I register is an interrupt register and is used when executing interrupt processing.
The R register is a refresh register and is used to refresh the RWM 53.
The PC register is a program counter and is a register that holds the address currently being executed in memory.

The IFF register is an interrupt enable register. The IFF register includes an IFF1 register that determines whether to enable or disable a maskable interrupt (INT), and an IFF2 register that restores IFF1 after processing a non-maskable interrupt (NMI). The IFF2 register is used not only for return from non-maskable interrupt processing but also for return by a RETEX instruction (described later) after execution of a CALLEX instruction (described later).
Also, when a non-markable interrupt is accepted or a CALLEX instruction is executed, the IFF1 register is cleared (set to a value (“0”) that disables interrupt processing), maskable interrupts are prohibited, and the IFF2 register is set to the state at this time (non-markable (Whether interrupts were disabled or enabled when an interrupt was accepted or when a CALLEX instruction was executed) is held. Further, by executing the RET instruction or the RETEX instruction, the IFF2 register value is moved to the IFF1 register, and the maskable interrupt acceptance state is restored to the previous state.

FIG. 374 is a diagram showing the detailed configuration of the F register. The F register consists of 1 byte (8 bits, indicated by "D0" to "D7" in the figure). In the 24th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 166(B), a carry flag is assigned to the D0 bit, a zero flag is assigned to the D7 bit, and the D1 to D6 bits are unused.
On the other hand, the structure of the F register of the 42nd embodiment is as follows.
(1) D0 bit: Carry flag (C)
The carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" if a carry or a carry-down occurs as a result of an operation, and becomes "0" if a carry-out or a carry-down does not occur.
(2) D1 bit: Subtraction flag (N)
The subtraction flag is also referred to as a subtract flag. This flag is set to "1" if the instruction executed immediately before is a subtraction instruction, and becomes "0" if it is not a subtraction instruction.

(3) D2 bit: Parity/overflow flag (P/V)
The parity/overflow flag is a flag that becomes "1" if the number of "1" bits (parity) in the calculation result is even, and becomes "0" if it is odd. This flag is set to "1" when an overflow occurs as a result of the calculation, and becomes "0" when no overflow occurs.
(4) D3 bit: Register bank monitor (RB)
The register bank monitor is a flag that becomes "0" when register bank 0 is in use, and becomes "1" when register bank 1 is in use. Therefore, by referring to the D3 bit of the F register, it is possible to determine whether the register bank in use is 0 or 1.

(5) D4 bit: Half carry flag (H)
The half carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" when there is a carry from the lower 4 bits to the upper 4 bits during an operation, and becomes "0" when there is no carry.
(6) D5 bit: Second zero flag (TZ)
The second zero flag is a flag that becomes "1" when the calculation result is "0", and becomes "0" if the calculation result is not "0".
(7) D6 bit: Zero flag (Z)
Similarly to the above, the zero flag is a flag that becomes "1" when the calculation result is "0", and becomes "0" if the calculation result is not "0".
(8) D7 bit: Sign flag (S)
The sign flag is a flag that becomes "0" if the calculation result is positive (plus), and becomes "1" if the calculation result is negative (minus).

FIG. 375 is a diagram showing a stack area in the 42nd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 373, the RWM 53 has a first stack area (“F1D0h” to “F1FFh”) for the first program, and a second stack area (“F3E8h” to “F3FFh”) for the second program. Equipped with
As described above, when storing data in the first stack area (also referred to as stacking, saving, stacking, etc.), data is stacked in ascending order (reverse order) starting from the final address. For example, when 2 bytes of data are first stacked in the first stack area, the data is stored in "F1FFh" and "F1FEh".
The second stack area is also stacked in the same manner as above, starting from the final address (F3FFh).

Furthermore, the SP register stores a value indicating at which address in the stack area data is to be stacked. As shown in FIG. 373, the SP register is provided in both register banks 0 and 1, and the SP register in register bank 0 stores the address in the first stack area at which data is to be loaded. Similarly, the SP register in register bank 1 stores at which address in the second stack area data is to be stacked.

As shown in FIG. 375, the initial value "F200h" is stored in the SP register of register bank 0 by the command "LD SP, F200h" when the power is turned on.
Next, some program (CALL instruction (also referred to as "first call instruction"), CALLEX instruction (also referred to as "second call instruction"), PUSH instruction (also referred to as "register save instruction"), etc. ) is executed and data is stacked in the 2-byte areas "F1FFh" and "F1FEh" of the first stack area, the SP register value of register bank 0 is updated to "F1FEh". Note that the example in FIG. 375 shows an example in which "CALL mn" is executed.
Next, when calling the data stored in "F1FFh" and "F1FEh" of the first stack area, some program (RET instruction (also referred to as "first return instruction"), RETEX instruction ("second return instruction"), ), POP instruction (also referred to as "register return instruction"), etc. Then, this command calls data stored in the 2-byte storage areas "F1FEh" and "F1FFh". For example, when the RET instruction (example in Figure 375) returns to the instruction after the CALL (returns to the program of the program counter saved in the stack area (returns to the program at the return address)), the SP register value of register bank 0 "F1FEh" is updated to "F200h".

The same applies to the second stack area.
The initial value "F400h" is stored in the SP register of register bank 1 by the command "LD SP, F400h" when the power is turned on.
Next, when some program (CALL instruction, PUSH instruction, etc.) is executed and data is loaded into "F3FFh" in the second stack area, the SP register value of register bank 1 is updated to "F1FFh". .
Next, when calling the data stored in "F3FFh" of the second stack area, some program (RET instruction, RETEX instruction, POP instruction, etc.) is executed. Then, the data stored in the 1-byte storage area of "F3FFh" is called by this instruction, and the RET or RETEX instruction returns to the instruction after the CALL, and the SP register value of register bank 1 changes from "F3FFh" to " F400h”.

The details of the instruction will be described later, but in this embodiment, the CALLEX instruction is an instruction that is included in the first program (when register bank 0), and is included in the second program (when register bank 1). This is an instruction that does not have.
Further, the RETEX instruction is an instruction that is not included in the first program (when register bank 0 is used), but is an instruction that is included in the second program (when it is used for register bank 1).

FIG. 376 is a diagram showing main instructions in the 42nd embodiment. In the 42nd embodiment, there are thousands of types of instructions, of which three representative types are shown in FIG. 376.
(A) in the figure shows an LDF command.
In FIG. 376, first, the operation code and operand in the instruction statement will be explained.
As shown in (A) in the figure, when the instruction is "LDF HL, mn", the first half "LDF" is called the opcode (function) and the second half "HL, mn" is called the operand (argument). There is. The LDF instruction is one form (a special form of the LD (load) instruction. The reason why it is special will be explained later). Further, "HL" indicates the HL register, and "mn" indicates the address. The instruction "LDF HL, mn" is an instruction to store the address "mn" value in the HL register.
Note that, as described later, the LDF instruction is not limited to an instruction to store an address value in a predetermined register, but also a predetermined value (however, "predetermined value" is limited to within a predetermined range (described later). ) in a predetermined register.

Specifically, for example, when "LDF HL, 1200h" is executed,
1200h=0001/0010/0000/0000 (“/” is inserted every 4 bits. The same applies below.)
So,
H register value = 0001/0010
L register value = 0000/0000
becomes.

Furthermore, the LDF instruction is limited to an instruction that stores a value in the range of "1200h" to "1DFF" in a register (HL register in this example). For the operation code of other load instructions, "LD" is used instead of "LDF".
That is,
LDF HL, mn (mn=1200h~1DFFh)
LD HL, mn (mn≠1200h~1DFFh)
It is.

FIG. 377 is a diagram showing aspects of the LDF instruction and the LD instruction. As shown in FIG. 373, the range of the first data area is addresses "1200h" to "1DF3h". Therefore, all load instructions that specify the address of the first data area can be executed using the LDF instruction.
On the other hand, the second data area is in the range of addresses "2600h" to "2FBEh". Therefore, in the case of a load instruction that specifies the address of the second data area, the operation code "LDF" cannot be used, and the operation code "LD" is used.
In FIG. 377, (A) shows an LDF instruction that specifies the range of addresses "1200h" to "1DF3h" (first data area), and (B) shows the range of addresses "2600h" to "2FBEh" (first data area). 2 data area).

Furthermore, the load instruction is not limited to an instruction to store a predetermined address value in a predetermined register, but can also be used, for example, to an instruction to store any register value in any other register.
FIG. 377(C) shows "LDF HL, xy" which is an instruction to store a predetermined value "xy" (within the range of "1200h" to "1DFFh") in the HL register using the LDF instruction. In this way, when the value of "xy" is within the range of "1200h" to "1DFFh", the LDF instruction can also be used for the instruction to store the value in a predetermined register.
For example, in the case of an instruction to store the timer value "5000 (D)" (1388h) in the HL register, it becomes "LDF HL, 1388h".
Furthermore, FIG. 377(D) shows an instruction "LD A, (HL)" is shown. In an instruction that copies a predetermined register value to another predetermined register, if the copy source predetermined register value or predetermined value is outside the range of "1200h" to "1DFFh", (LDF instruction LD instructions are used instead.

Further, all instructions such as "LDF HL, mn" and "LD HL, mn" are actually encoded and stored in the program area of the ROM 54.
Here, in the 42nd embodiment, the code size of "LDF HL, mn" is 2 bytes, and the code size of "LD HL, mn" is 3 bytes.
First, in the case of the instruction "LDF HL, mn", the range of "mn" is "1200h" to "1DFFh", but "1200h" and "1DFFh" (both hexadecimal numbers) are each converted to 10 Expressed in base and binary numbers,
1200h=4608(D)=0001/0010/0000/0000(B)
1DFFh=7679(D)=0001/1101/1111/1111(B)
becomes.

Then, when "1200h" is the reference value "0", "1DFFh" becomes "3070 (D)" or "1011/1111/1110 (B)" (12 bits).
Therefore, in the LDF instruction, in the operation code for specifying the address value, "1200h" is set to the value "0". As a result, 12 bits are sufficient to specify the address value "mn"(mn="1200h" to "1DFFh").

Also assume that the total number of instructions is, for example, "3000" and that each instruction is assigned a unique value.
in this case,
3000 (D) = 1011/1011/1000 (B) (12 bits)
Therefore, it can be assigned to "0000/0000/0000(B)" to "1011/1011/1000(B)".
Then, a small value is assigned to a particularly important instruction, specifically, a frequently used instruction. In this embodiment, the code value of "LDF HL" is assigned to "1101" (4 bits).
Therefore, since "LDF HL" is 4 bits and "mn" is 12 bits, the total is 16 bits, or 2 bytes. Therefore, the code size of "LDF HL, mn (mn=1200h to 1DFFh)" is 2 bytes.

On the other hand, if the range of "mn" in the load instruction is outside the range of "1200h" to "1DFFh", especially if the range of the second data area is specified as "2600h" to "2FBEh", the following become that way.
Among the range of the second data area, the largest address value is "2FBEh", so
"2FBEh" - "1200h"
=1DBEh
=1/1101/1011/1110(B)
Therefore, it is 13 bits.
That is, when "1200h" is set as the reference value "0" as described above, "2FBEh" can be represented by 13 bits.
Therefore, when "LD HL" is coded, it is 4 bits like the above "LDF HL", and for "LD HL, mn" (mn≠1200h to 1DFFh), "4+13=17 bits (3 bytes)" Expressed as

Furthermore, even in the case of the other load commands mentioned above, such as "LD A, (HL)", the code size is assumed to be 3 bytes in the same way as above.
Note that if the code size of "LD HL, mn" is 3 bytes, "LD HL" does not necessarily have to be 4 bits, but if it is 11 bits or less, "mn" (mn≠1200h 1DFFh) is 13 bits, the total can be kept within 24 bits (3 bytes).

From the above, in the 42nd embodiment, the code size of the load instruction is
LDF HL, mn (mn=1200h to 1DFFh): 2 bytes (16 bits)
LD HL, mn (mn≠1200h to 1DFFh): 3 bytes (17 bits)
LD A, (HL) (“A” and “HL” are arbitrary): 3 bytes.
As a result, the code size of "LDF HL, mn (mn = 1200h to 1DFFh)", which specifies the address of the first data area and stores it in the HL register, is 1 byte smaller than the code size of other load instructions. Therefore, it is possible to save the storage capacity of the first program area.

In particular, since the first program area stores programs related to the progress of the game, it has a larger capacity than programs stored in the second program area, in other words, programs not related to the progress of the game (programs related to the role ratio monitor). tends to increase. For example, the lottery process related to games, the process to change the game state, the process to drive the reels, the process to give game value (game media) according to the game result (symbol combination that is stopped and displayed), etc. , is executed in the first program. Therefore, by reducing the code size of the load instructions that call addresses "1200h" to "1DFFh" among the load instructions stored in the first program area, more programs can be stored in the first program area. It becomes possible.
On the other hand, among the programs stored in the second program area, the operation codes of load instructions specifying addresses in the second data area are all unified to "LD". Thereby, in the program stored in the second program area, the validity of the program source can be more easily confirmed. In other words, it is possible to design a program that emphasizes program readability rather than reducing program capacity (code size).

Specifically, the above-mentioned LDF command and LD command are used, for example, as follows.
(1) Example 1
In the one-line display determination (M_LINE_JUDGE) shown in FIG. 200, in step S1101, a process of setting a payout number table is executed. This process is a process of storing the start address "1400h" of the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL; FIG. 193) in the HL register. Since the address specified here is "1400h", it can be executed with the LDF instruction. Therefore, this command is
LDF HL, 1400h
becomes.

(2) Example 2
In preparation for starting the reel rotation shown in FIG. 224, in the symbol control data table set in step S1151, a process is executed to store the start address "1200h" of the symbol control data table (TBL_PIC_DAT; FIG. 204(A)) in the HL register. . Since the address specified here is "1200h", it can be executed with the LDF instruction. Therefore, this command is
LDF HL, 1200h
becomes.

(3) Example 3
In the reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET) shown in FIG. 153, the start RWM address request set in step S861 includes a process of storing the C register value in the A register as one of the processes. This process is similar to the process shown in FIG. 377(C), so
LD A,C
becomes.
(4) Example 4
In the reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET) shown in FIG. 153, in the specified address data set in step S862, one of the processes is to store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register. have This process is similar to the process shown in FIG. 377(C), so
LD A, (HL)
becomes.

The data area of the ROM 54 referenced by the second program is outside the range of "1200h" to "1DFFh". Therefore, when specifying the address of the data area of the ROM 54 to be referenced by the second program, "LD HL, mn" (mn≠1200h to 1DFF) is used.
An example of this is shown below.
(5) Example 5
In the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) shown in FIG. 368, in the flashing bit test frequency table address set in step S2531, "1" is set in the HL register from the start address "2510h" of the flashing bit test frequency table (TBL_FLASH_CHK; FIG. 369). Executes the process of storing the subtracted value. The command in this case is
LD HL, 250Fh
becomes.

(6) Example 6
In the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) shown in FIG. 368, in the identification segment flashing bit test count set in step S2532, one of the processes is a process of storing data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the B register. has. The command in this case is
LD B, (HL)
becomes.
(7) Example 7
In the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) shown in FIG. 368, in the identification segment offset acquisition in step S1477, one of the processes includes a process of storing data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register. . The command in this case is
LD A, (HL)
becomes.

In this way, there are a plurality of LD instructions (instructions with LD as an opcode, also referred to as "first load instructions") as instructions constituting the first program, and multiple instructions constituting the second program. . However, although there are multiple LDF instructions (instructions with LDF as an operation code; also referred to as "second load instructions" or "special load instructions") as instructions that make up the first program, the instructions that make up the second program It does not have.
Further, even the LD instruction can be an instruction for storing 2-byte data in the HL register. However, the code size can be reduced by storing 2-byte data in the HL register using the LDF instruction. However, in the case of the LDF instruction, there is a limit to the range of 2-byte data.

Specific examples 1 to 7 of the above-mentioned LDF command and LD instruction are examples of various processes in a slot machine (for example, a reel-type gaming machine under the Entertainment Business Act), but each is applicable only to specific examples 1 to 7. It can be applied to various general-purpose processes in pachinko gaming machines without any problem.
Similar to slot machines, pachinko gaming machines also have a first program area and a second program area.The first program area stores programs related to the progress of the game, and the second program area stores the games. Programs that are not related to the progress of the game (for example, a program related to the base monitor that displays the base (referring to the value calculated by "number of prize balls paid out / total number of balls released x 100" in normal times; the same applies hereinafter)). . Therefore, the capacity of the first program area tends to increase more easily than that of the second program area. Therefore, a capacity reduction effect can be expected by employing the LDF instruction in the program stored in the first program area.

In addition, the programs stored in the first program area of the pachinko gaming machine include, for example, processing related to winning/failure lottery, processing related to special symbol fluctuation stop control, processing related to display of special symbols or normal symbols, and game information ( Processing related to the display of game status, error status, base, etc.), processing related to jackpot control, processing related to movable control of various movable objects (big prize opening, electric accessories that activate the opening extension function, etc.), and payout control. Examples include such processing. LDF instructions can be used for these programs.
In particular, the display control of the base monitor of a pachinko gaming machine and the display control of the role ratio monitor of a slot machine are different in the process of calculating the display contents, but they are similar in that they ultimately display gaming information as data. Display control is performed. Therefore, the above specific examples 5 to 7 can also be applied to display control of a base monitor in a pachinko gaming machine.
Note that the LDF command is not limited to the above, and it is of course possible to use the LDF command in other processes controlled by the main CPU in both slot machines and pachinko games.

The explanation returns to FIG. 376.
FIG. 376(B) shows the CALLEX command. The CALLEX instruction is one of the call instructions.
When the “CALLEX mn” command is executed,
(1) Disable non-maskable interrupts (NMI) and maskable interrupts (INT) regardless of whether interrupts are enabled or disabled at that time;
(2) Switch the register bank to "1",
(3) Call (call) the address specified by mn
do something.
In this embodiment, when executing a program in the second program area from a program in the first program area, the program in the second program area can be executed by executing a CALLEX instruction.

In the load instruction described above, either the LDF instruction or the LD instruction is used depending on the range of mn, but in the call instruction of the 42nd embodiment, the CALLEX instruction is used regardless of the range of mn. The CALLEX instruction is used when reading the second program from the first program.
Here, the second program area is in the range of addresses "2000h" to "25FFh", as shown in FIG. 373. In the CALLEX instruction, when calling the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh" among addresses "2000h" to "25FFh", the code size of "CALLEX mn" is 2 bytes, and the code size of "CALLEX mn" is 2 bytes. The code size of "CALLEX mn" when calling a range other than "" is configured to be 4 bytes.

Here, the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh" is "FFh", that is, 1 byte. In this case, the code value of the address value "2000h" is set to "0h". With this, the code value when calling the address value "20FFh" can be set to "FFh", so no matter when calling any address in the range of "2000h" to "20FFh", the code value of "mn" The size can be set to 1 byte.
Further, when encoding the operation code of "CALLEX", in the 42nd embodiment, the code is set to "0100/1000", that is, 1 byte. This allows the code size of "CALLEX mn" (mn=2000h to 20FFh) to be set to 2 bytes.

FIG. 378 is a diagram showing an aspect of the CALLEX command.
(A) in the figure indicates "CALLEX 2000h". The code value corresponding to "2000h" in this case is "0000/0000" as described above. Further, when the range of "mn" is "2000h" to "20FFh", the code value of "CALLEX" is "0100/1000". Therefore, the code for "CALLEX 2000h" is
0100/1000/0000/0000
becomes.
When this instruction is executed, the instruction at address "2000h" in the second program area is called.

Moreover, (B) in the figure shows "CALLEX 20FFh". The code value corresponding to "20FFh" in this case is "1111/1111". Further, as described above, when the range of "mn" is "2000h" to "20FFh", the code value of "CALLEX" is "0100/1000". Therefore, the code for "CALLEX 20FFh" is
0100/1000/1111/1111
becomes.
When this instruction is executed, the instruction at address "20FFh" in the second program area is called.

Furthermore, (C) in the figure indicates "CALLEX 2100h". Here, when "mn" changes from "20FFh" to "2100h", a carry occurs, and "mn" cannot be expressed in 1 byte, and the code size of "mn" becomes 2 bytes. If "mn" = "2100h", the code of "mn" is
0000/0001/0000/0000
becomes.

Furthermore, the code of "CALLEX" in this case is also different. When the range of "mn" is "2000h" to "20FFh", the code of "CALLEX" is set to 1 byte, but when the range of "mn" is "2100h" to "25FFh", the code of "CALLEX" is set to 1 byte. Instead of using 1 byte as the code, use 2 bytes. As mentioned above, when an opcode consists of one byte, it is limited to 256 instructions out of thousands of instructions, so "CALLEX" when the range of "mn" is "2000h" to "20FFh" A 1-byte code is assigned as the code for "CALLEX", but if the range of "mn" is not "2000h" to "20FFh", a 2-byte code is assigned as the code for "CALLEX". In the example in Figure 378, the code for "CALLEX" in this case is
1010/0000/1000/0000
It is said that
Therefore, the code for "CALLEX mn" when "mn" = "2100h" is
1010/0000/1000/0000/0000/0001/0000/0000
becomes.
When this instruction is executed, the instruction at address "2100h" in the second program area is called.

Further, (D) in the figure shows "CALLEX 25FFh" (instruction for specifying the last address of the second program area). The maximum value when specifying the address of the second program area is "25FFh".
When the code of “2000h” is “0”, “25FFh” is
0000/0101/1111/1111
becomes.
Therefore, the code for "CALLEX 25FFh" is
1010/0000/1000/0000/0000/0101/1111/1111
becomes.
When this instruction is executed, the instruction at address "25FFh" in the second program area is called.

As described above, in the "CALLEX mn" instruction of the 42nd embodiment, if the range of "mn" is within the range of "2000h" to "20FFh", the code size becomes an instruction of 2 bytes; If it is outside the above range, the code size becomes an instruction of 4 bytes.
Therefore, if the instructions that are called more frequently are aggregated within the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh", the number of instructions that require a code size of 2 bytes increases accordingly. This makes it possible to save the storage capacity of the ROM 54 that stores instructions.
Also, by storing the address for calling the second program from the first program in the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh" of the range of addresses "2000h" to "25FFh" in the second program area, , when checking the second program, it can be easily recognized that the second program is called by the first program.

The explanation returns to FIG. 376.
FIG. 376(C) shows a RETEX command. This RETEX instruction is an instruction corresponding to a conventional return instruction.
The RETEX command is
(1) Set the non-maskable interrupt (NMI) and maskable interrupt (INT) to the state before the CALLEX instruction,
(2) Switch the register bank to "0",
(3) Return (RET) (return to the state before CALLEX (the next instruction after CALLEX (program at the return address))
do something.
This makes the program in the first program area executable.
Note that if the state at the time of the CALLEX command is an interrupt enabled state, the RETEX command is used to change the state to an interrupt enabled state. On the other hand, if the state at the time of the CALLEX command is an interrupt-disabled state, the RETEX command sets the interrupt-disabled state.

In a conventional general call/return instruction, a program is called by a call instruction, the program is executed, and then the program returns after the call instruction by a return instruction.
In contrast, in this embodiment, a program is called with a CALLEX command, the program is executed, and then the program returns after the CALLEX command with a RETEX command.
The above points will be explained in more detail.

FIG. 379 is a diagram illustrating an example of a conventional CALL instruction and RET instruction.
In this example, the second program is called while the first program is being executed.
When calling the second program while the first program is being executed, at least the following processes need to be executed.
"1" Interrupt management processing To prevent processing from becoming complicated, interrupt processing is not executed while the second program is being executed.
"2" SP register switching process Since the stack area used in the second program is different from the stack area used in the first program, it is necessary to switch the SP register.
"3" Register management process When a register is used during execution of the second program, it is necessary to take over the register value and prevent the return to the first program.

In order to comply with the above, the program illustrated in FIG. 379 includes the following instructions.
First, when the second program is executed while the first program is being executed, interrupt processing is prohibited. The interrupt disabling instruction is a DI instruction in the figure. This is the command corresponding to "1" above. Note that the EI instruction, which is an interrupt-enabled instruction, is paired with the DI instruction, which is an interrupt-disabled instruction. Note that although maskable interrupt processing can be prohibited using the DI instruction, non-maskable interrupt processing (NMI) cannot be prohibited.

After executing the DI instruction, execute "PUSH AF" to save the AF register. This command corresponds to "3" above. Note that the PUSH instruction is an instruction for storing data in the stack area. That is, an instruction to store the A register value and the F register value in the stack area is executed.
The next "CALL S_CHERR_CHK" command is a command to call "S_CHERR_CHK" (loading/dispensing sensor abnormality management), which is one of the second programs. In this example, "S_CHERR_CHK" is listed as the second program.
When this "S_CHERR_CHK" (second program) is finished, the saved AF register is restored by the "POP AF" command. This instruction is an instruction to call data in the stack area, and corresponds to "3" above. Next, an EI instruction is used to permit interrupt processing (instruction corresponding to the above "1").

In "S_CHERR_CHK" (second program), "LD (_SB_STACK2), SP" is an instruction (in "2" above) to save (store) the SP register value for the first program to a predetermined address in the second stack area. corresponding command).
The next "LD SP, @STACK2" is an instruction (corresponding to the above "2") that sets the SP register for the second program.
Next, "PUSH GPR" and "PUSH QI" are respectively executed to save the registers. Here, "GPR" indicates the type of register to be saved, and corresponds to A, F, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers. Also, since "GPR" does not include the Q and I registers, "PUSH QI" is executed in addition to "PUSH GPR" to save the Q and I registers (instruction corresponding to "3" above). .

Then, after executing the second program, the register and the SP register are restored. "POP QI" restores the Q and I registers. Furthermore, "POP GPR" restores the A, F, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers (these are the instructions corresponding to "3" above).
Next, the SP register is restored by "LD SP, (_SB_STACK2)" (instruction corresponding to "2" above).
Then, by RET, the state is returned to the state before the CALL instruction.

As described above, in the general call/return instruction, in the first program, as the instructions corresponding to "1" to "3" above,
D.I.
PUSH AF
POP AF
E.I.
need to be executed.
Also, in the second program,
LD (),SP
PUSH GPR
PUSH QI
POP QI
POP GPR
LD SP, ()
need to be executed.

On the other hand, the CALLEX instruction in this embodiment includes processing for disabling interrupts and switching the register bank from 0 to 1, as described above. Therefore, the program in the second program area can be executed by the CALLEX instruction (one instruction), and there is no need to independently provide an interrupt disabling instruction (DI instruction) or a register saving instruction (PUSH instruction).
Further, the RETEX instruction includes processing to set the interrupt to the state before the CALLEX instruction, and processing to switch the register bank from 1 to 0. Therefore, it is possible to return to the program in the first program area with the RETEX instruction (1 instruction), and the interrupt enable instruction (EI instruction) to restore the interrupt and the instruction to restore the register (POP instruction) can be independently executed. There is no need to set it up.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the program capacity.

Furthermore, the CALLEX instruction and the RETEX instruction can return to the interrupt state of the first program immediately before executing the second program.
Therefore, if the state immediately before the CALLEX command is the interrupt enabled state, after the second program is executed, the RETEX command can return to the first program in the interrupt enabled state.
On the other hand, if the state immediately before the CALLEX instruction is an interrupt-disabled state, after execution of the second program, the RETEX command can return to the first program in the interrupt-disabled state.

Furthermore, when the CALLEX instruction is executed, the register bank is switched from 0 to 1. Furthermore, when the RETEX instruction is executed, the register bank is switched from 1 to 0.
Therefore, when the CALLEX instruction is executed, the D3 bit of the F register of register banks 0 and 1 is updated from "0" to "1". Furthermore, when the RETEX instruction is executed, the D3 bit of the F register of register banks 0 and 1 is updated from "1" to "0".
Note that when the CALLEX instruction is executed, the D3 bit of the F register in either register bank 0 or 1 may be updated from "0" to "1".

Further, the data stored in each register of register banks 0 and 1, except for the D3 bit of the F register, is not updated by the CALLEX instruction or the RETEX instruction itself.
This point will be explained using a specific example.
In the following description, the A, B, H, and L registers of register bank 0 are referred to as 0A, 0B, 0H, and 0L registers, respectively.
Further, the A, B, H, and L registers of register bank 1 are referred to as 1A, 1B, 1H, and 1L registers, respectively.
It is assumed that the following data is currently stored in each register of register banks 0 and 1.
0A register: 00000001 (B)
0B register: 00000000 (B)
0H register: 11110001 (B)
0L register: 00000001 (B)
1A register: 00000000 (B)
1B register: 00000011 (B)
1H register: 11110010 (B)
1L register: 00000001 (B)

In this state, when the CALLEX instruction is executed, the state changes from the previous state of using the 0A, 0B, 0H, and 0L registers to the state of using the 1A, 1B, 1H, and 1L registers. Immediately before and after the CALLEX instruction, the values of the 0A, 0B, 0H, 0L, 1A, 1B, 1H, and 1L registers do not change. As mentioned above, only the D3 bit of the F register is updated.
Next, by executing the second program, the 1A, 1H, and 1L registers are used, and for example,
1A register: 00000011 (B)
1B register: 00000011 (B)
1H register: 11110001 (B)
1L register: 00000000 (B)
Assume that

Then, when the RETEX instruction is executed based on the end of the second program, the values of the 1A, 1B, 1H, and 1L registers remain as they are, and the state is switched to using the 0A, 0B, 0H, and 0L registers. The values of the 0A, 0B, 0H, and 0L registers at this point are the values immediately before the CALLEX instruction, that is,
0A register: 00000001 (B)
0B register: 00000000 (B)
0H register: 11110001 (B)
0L register: 00000001 (B)
It is.
Note that the 0H register value maintains the value immediately before the CALLEX instruction, and has not been replaced with the 1H register value.
Then, when the first program is executed to add "1" to the 0A register value, for example,
0A register: 00000010 (B)
becomes.

From the above, focusing on a specific register (for example, the A register), if the specific register value immediately before the CALLEX instruction is "x", the specific register value becomes "y" by execution of the CALLEX instruction. This is not because the specific register value has changed due to the CALLEX instruction, but because the specific register used has changed from the specific register in register bank 0 to the specific register in register bank 1.

Assume that the specific register is used and the specific register value is updated from "y" to "y'" by executing the program in the second program area. Thereafter, when the RETEX instruction is executed, the specific register to be used is switched from the specific register in register bank 1 to the specific register in register bank 0. Therefore, the specific register value immediately after the RETEX instruction becomes the value immediately before the CALLEX instruction, that is, "x". Note that even immediately after the RETEX instruction, the specific register value of register bank 1 remains "y'".

Specifically, the above-mentioned CALLEX command and RETEX command are used, for example, as follows.
(1) Example 1
FIG. 380 is a flowchart showing program start (M_PRG_SET) in the 42nd embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 354 in the 41st embodiment. The same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 354. Furthermore, step numbers specific to the 42nd embodiment are underlined.
In FIG. 380, when the program start (M_PRG_START) process is started, first, in step S2851, an initial value is set in the SP register of register bank 0. When the power is turned on, the SP register value of register bank 0 is "0". Here, "F200h" is stored in the SP register of register bank 0 by the command "LD SP, F200h".

The value "F200h" stored here is the value obtained by adding "1" to the last address of the first stack area, as shown in FIG. 375. When the SP register value of register bank 0 is "F200h", it indicates that data is stored (accumulated) in "F1FFh".
Further, in step S2851, secondly, "CALLEX 2000h" is executed. In this example, it is assumed that the start address of the RWM checksum calculation instruction in step S2852 is "2000h".
Next, the process advances to step S2852, and a second program (RWM checksum calculation) is started based on "CALLEX 2000h". When starting the second program for the first time after turning on the power, an initial value is set in the SP register of register bank 1. When the power is turned on, the SP register value of register bank 1 is "0". Here, "F400h" is stored in the SP register of register bank 1 by the command "LD SP, F400h".

The value "F400h" stored here is the value obtained by adding "1" to the last address "F3FFh" of the second stack area, as shown in FIG. 375. When the SP register value of register bank 1 is "F400h", it indicates that data is stored (accumulated) in "F3FFh".
Furthermore, when the RWM checksum calculation is finished, RETEX is executed and the program (instructions) in the first program returns to the program after CALLEX in step S2851 (S2705).
The description of the processing after step S2705 will be omitted.

At the program start (M_PRG_START) of the 41st embodiment shown in FIG. 354, it is necessary to execute "PUSH AF" by saving the AF register in step S2702. Furthermore, it is necessary to execute "POP AF" by restoring the AF register in step S2704. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 354, a RET command is executed after step S2703.
On the other hand, in the 42nd embodiment, since the CALLEX instruction is an instruction that includes register saving, there is no need to separately define register saving instructions ("PUSH AF", "PUSH GPR", and "PUSH QI"). Similarly, since the RETEX instruction is an instruction that includes register restoration, there is no need to separately define register restoration instructions ("POP AF", "POP GPR", and "POP QI").

Furthermore, when the second program is executed for the first time after the power is turned on (step S2852), after storing the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of register bank 1, the process returns to the first program and the second program is executed again. When executing the program, there is no need to store the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of register bank 1 again.
In other words, starting from power-on, when the second program is first executed, a process (instruction) is executed to store the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of register bank 1, but from then on, the second program is executed. Sometimes it is not necessary to execute the process (instruction) of storing the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of register bank 1. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the second program.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a process (instruction) for storing the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of register bank 1 may be executed each time the second program is executed. Alternatively, a process (instruction) for storing the initial value "F400h" in the SP register of register bank 1 may be executed when the second program is executed and a specific condition is satisfied.
Assume that when the second program is executed for the first time after the power is turned on, an initial value "F400h" is stored in the SP register of register bank 1, and the second program is executed. When data is stored in the second stack area during execution of the second program, the SP register value of register bank 1 is updated.

As described above, for example, when 2 bytes of data are first stored in the second stack area, the SP register value of register bank 1 is updated from "F400h" to "F3FEh". Thereafter, data is usually returned from the second stack area before the second program ends. Therefore, at the end of the second program, the SP register value of register bank 1 is usually "F400h".
When the second program ends and returns to the first program, the SP register in register bank 0 is used. The SP register value of register bank 0 maintains the value immediately before the transition to the second program. For example, if the SP register value of register bank 0 immediately before transitioning to the second program is "F1FDh", when the second program ends and returns to the first program, the SP register value of register bank 0 will be "F1FDh". becomes.

(2) Example 2
In the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of the 41st embodiment shown in FIG. 357, if the start address of the RWM initialization 2 instruction in step S2736 is "2020h", the instructions in steps S2735 to S2737 are "CALLEX 2020h". and “RETEX” (Similar to the above, the register save instruction (PUSH instruction) and the register restore instruction (POP instruction) are unnecessary). Although not shown in FIG. 357, the RET command is executed at the end of the program (processing outside the used area) corresponding to step S2736. The instruction corresponding to this RET instruction becomes the RETEX instruction in this embodiment.

(3) Example 3
In the interrupt process (I_INTR) of the forty-first embodiment shown in FIG. It can be configured with an instruction including "RETEX" (register save instruction (PUSH instruction) and return instruction (POP instruction) are not required). Although not shown in FIG. 359, the RET command is executed at the end of the program (processing outside the used area) corresponding to the determination process in step S460. The instruction corresponding to this RET instruction becomes the RETEX instruction in this embodiment.

(4) Example 4
In the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) of the 41st embodiment shown in FIG. 2060h" and "RETEX" (register save instruction (PUSH instruction) and return instruction (POP instruction) are not required). Although not shown in FIG. 360, the RET command is executed at the end of the program (processing outside the used area) corresponding to the processing in step S2776. The instruction corresponding to this RET instruction becomes the RETEX instruction in this embodiment.

Next, a method of using the CALLEX command (an application example) will be described.
FIG. 381 is a diagram showing an example using the CALLEX instruction and the JR instruction (jump instruction).
As mentioned above, the CALLEX instruction can be a 2-byte instruction if the address range to call is from "2000h" to "20FFh", so when calling the second program from the first program, the CALLEX instruction By using as many as possible, the storage capacity associated with the instructions can be saved.

For example, if an instruction "CALLEX 2000h" is provided and this instruction is executed, the program stored at address "2000h" will be called, but the writing (storage) of that program will start from address "2000h" and the If the program occupies most of the addresses "2000h" to "20FDh", it is not possible to provide many CALLEX instructions. To take it to the extreme, if a program starts from address "2000h" and continues to address "20FFh", in other words, if there is only one program in the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh", 2 Only one byte CALLEX instruction can be provided.

Therefore, in the example in Figure 381, a JR (jump) instruction is placed in the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh", and the destination of the JR instruction is specified outside the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh". Moreover, the actual program is stored at the destination of the JR command.
For example, "JR 2200h" is stored in the address "2000h". Note that if the instruction is "JR 2200h", it means to jump to address "2200h". As a result, when "CALLEX 2000h" is executed, the address "2000h" is called, but since "JR 2200h" is stored in the address "2000h", it will further jump to the address "2200h". . If the actual program ("Program A" in Figure 381) is stored after address "2200h", the actual program (Program A) can be placed outside the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh". I can do it.

In this embodiment, the code size required for the "JR mn (mn=2000h to 20FFh)" instruction is 3 bytes. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 381,
2000h JR mn1 (in the example in Figure 381, mn1=2200h)
2003h JR mn2 (in the example in Figure 381, mn2=2250h)
2006h JR mn3 (in the example in Figure 381, mn3=22A0h)
:
JR instructions are arranged in 3-byte increments, as shown in the following.

However, this is not limited to this, and if the code size required for the "JR mn (mn = 2000h to 20FFh)" instruction can be configured from 2 bytes,
2000h JR mn1
2002h JR mn2
2004h JR mn3
:
becomes.
Also, if the code size required for the "JR mn (mn = 2000h to 20FFh)" instruction is 4 bytes,
2000h JR mn1
2004h JR mn2
2008h JR mn3
:
becomes.

In the example of FIG. 381, if taken to an extreme, it is possible to place all JR instructions in the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh". In this case,
(1) 2000h JR mn1
(2) 2003h JR mn2
(3) 2006h JR mn3
:
(84)20F9h JR mn84
(85) 20FCh JR mn85
(86)20FFh JR mn86
It can be done. Therefore, it is possible to store a total of 86 3-byte JR instructions within the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh".

In the example of Figure 381,
2000h JR 2200h
The actual program (program A) at address "2000h" was stored within the range of addresses "2200h" to "224Fh".
Also,
2003h JR 2250h
The actual program (program B) at address "2003h" was stored within the range of addresses "2250h" to "229Fh".

Furthermore,
2006h JR 22A0h
The actual program (program C) at address "2006h" was stored after address "22A0h".
In this way, it is desirable that almost no actual program to be executed by the CALLEX instruction is stored in the address range "2000h" to "20FFh" of the CALLEX instruction, which is possible with a code size of 2 bytes. In other words, the address of the second program called by the CALLEX instruction is within the address range "2000h" to "20FFh". However, as will be described later, the JR instruction does not need to be used for the second program called by the CALLEX instruction, which is the closest to the address "20FFh" in the address range "2000h" to "20FFh". . In this way, if the majority (including "most" or "all") of the instructions of the second program called by the CALLEX instruction use the JR instruction, and the actual program is stored after address "2100h", The second program area can be used efficiently.

For example, if there are only 10 CALLEX instructions, the JR instruction is stored at the addresses corresponding to the 1st to 9th CALLEX instructions, but the JR instruction is stored at the address corresponding to the 10th CALLEX instruction. The actual program may be directly stored without using the JR instruction.
On the other hand, regardless of the number of CALLEX instructions, only JR instructions are stored in the address range "2000h" to "20FFh", and even if the number of JR instructions (CALLEX instructions) is significantly less than the upper limit of 86, The storage area before "20FFh" may be kept vacant as a spare.

As mentioned above, in the CALLEX instruction, the code size is 2 bytes for calls within the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh", and the code size is 2 bytes for calls outside the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh". The code size is 4 bytes.
Therefore, since it is "2 bytes of CALLEX instruction + 3 bytes of JR instruction", the total is 5 bytes, which is larger than the code size (4 bytes) of the CALLEX instruction that calls outside the range of addresses "2000h" to "20FFh".

However, in chips for gaming machines that comply with the regulations of the Entertainment Business Law (such as reel-type gaming machines and pachinko gaming machines), there is not enough storage capacity in the first program area, but there is plenty of storage capacity in the second program area. is the reality.
Therefore, even if the number of JR instructions stored in the second program area increases by 3 bytes, it is more efficient to use the first program area by increasing the code size of the CALLEX instruction stored in the first program area to 2 bytes. This is advantageous in terms of.

Further, at the end nearing the address "20FFh", the program itself may be stored without providing the JR instruction.
As described above, if 3-byte JR instructions are sequentially placed after address "2000h", the instruction "JR mn86" will be stored at address "20FFh". In this case, the instruction "JR mn86" is stored in the 3-byte storage area from addresses "20FFh" to "2101h".

However, it is better to store the program directly from address "20FFh" than to store the JR instruction in the 3-byte storage area after address "20FFh" and store the actual program for the instruction in another storage area. This saves capacity.
Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 381, the JR instruction is not placed at address "20FFh", and the program (program D) is stored from address "20FFh".
As a result, when "CALLEX 20FFh" is executed, program D stored after address "20FFh" will be executed.

Note that, although the above example uses the address "20FFh", it also applies to cases where the JR instruction is placed at the addresses "20FDh" and "20FEh".
Specifically, rather than storing the JR instruction in the 3-byte storage area from addresses ``20FDh'' to ``20FFh'' and storing the program in other storage areas, it is better to store the program directly after address ``20FDh''. can be said to be preferable in terms of saving storage capacity.
Similarly, it is better to store the program directly after address "20FEh" than to store the JR instruction in the 3-byte storage area from address "20FEh" to "2100h" and store the program in another storage area. This can be said to be preferable in terms of saving capacity.

Although the forty-second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned content, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In FIG. 373, the ROM 54 has a program management area and an unused area, but the ROM 54 is not limited to this, and the ROM 54 includes at least a first program area, a first data area, a second program area, and a It is sufficient if it has two data areas. Further, although FIG. 373 shows the start address and end address for each of these storage areas, the storage capacity shown in FIG. 373 is an example and is not limited to this. Therefore, the start address and end address of each storage area shown in FIG. 373 are only examples, and can be set arbitrarily.

Therefore, in the example of FIG. 373, since the address range of the second program area is "2000h" to "25FFh", the address range that allows the code size of the CALLEX instruction to be 2 bytes is "2000h" to "25FFh". 20FFh'' is shown as an example, but if the address range of the second program area changes, the address range in which the code size of the CALLEX instruction can be set to 2 bytes also changes.
For example, if the address range of the second program area is "2150h" to "264Fh", the address range in which the code size of the CALLEX instruction can be set to 2 bytes is "2150h" to "224Fh".

(2) In the example of FIG. 373, the first program area, first data area, second program area, and second data area are arranged in this order in the ROM 54, but the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, the second program area The area and the second data area may be arranged before the first program area and the first data area. Further, a predetermined management area or the like may be arranged at the top address of the ROM 54 (in front of the first program area in FIG. 373).
Similarly, the RWM 53 is not limited to being arranged in the order of the work area and the stack area, but may be arranged in the order of the stack area and the work area. Further, although the first work area, first stack area, second work area, and second stack area are arranged in this order, the arrangement is not limited to this. For example, the second work area and the second stack area are arranged in the first work area. and may be placed before the first stack area. Furthermore, a predetermined management area or the like may be arranged at the top address of the RWM 53 (in front of the first work area in FIG. 373).

(3) In the built-in register area, each register bank is provided with a main register and a sub-register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any structure may be used as long as it includes at least a main register.
(4) In FIG. 374, the register bank monitor is assigned to the D3 bit of the F register, but the register bank monitor is not limited to this and may be assigned to any bit. For example, if the second zero flag is not used, the D5 bit may be used.
Furthermore, instead of assigning the register bank monitor to a specific bit in the F register, it is also possible to provide a register dedicated to the register bank monitor.

(5) In the example of FIG. 373, it has been explained that the address range of the first data area is "1200h" to "1DF3h" and that within this range, the range "mn" can be expressed with 12 bits.
here,
1200h=0000/0000/0000(B)
When
1111/1111/1111(B)=FFFh
It is.
and,
1200h+FFFh=21FFh
It is.
Therefore, if the range of the first data area is within the range of "1200h" to "21FFh", the range of "mn" can be expressed with 12 bits, and the code size of "LDF HL, mn" can be expressed as 2 bytes. It can be configured with

(6) The address ranges and sizes of the first stack area and second stack area shown in FIG. 373 are merely examples, and are not limited thereto. For example, if the range of the first stack area is the address "F1D0h" to "F2FFh", the address becomes "LD SP, F300h" in step S2851 of FIG. 380.

(7) The 42nd embodiment can be applied to both reel-type gaming machines and pachinko gaming machines under the Entertainment Business Law. It can also be applied to, for example, parrots that use game balls, enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines) that use electronic information (electronic medals) without using physical (tangible) medals, and casino machines. can.
(8) The first to forty-second embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to forty-second embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<43rd embodiment>
The 43rd embodiment relates to a pseudo game production.
"Pseudo game production" means that after the reel 31 starts rotating until the rotation speed of the reel 31 becomes constant, the stop switch 42 is activated to activate the rotation stop device for the rotating reel 31. As a result of the operation, the reel 31 is stopped in a pseudo (also referred to as "pseudo". The same applies hereinafter) (stop in this case is also referred to as "temporary stop" or "pseudo stop". Hereinafter, referred to as "temporary stop"). This refers to an effect in which an arbitrary symbol combination is displayed.
The "pseudo game performance" is also referred to as the "reel performance."

On the other hand, in contrast to the above-mentioned "pseudo game performance," a game for displaying a symbol combination as a game result (a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination lottery result) is referred to as a "real game."
The symbol combination temporarily stopped by the pseudo game performance does not display the game result. After the symbol combination is temporarily stopped by the pseudo game performance, the symbol combination is stopped and displayed by the main game, and the game result is displayed.
The pseudo game performance is not limited to one time, but may be performed multiple times in succession.
For example, it may be set as "main game → pseudo game performance → main game", or "main game → pseudo game performance (first time) → pseudo game performance (second time) → main game".

Furthermore, during the pseudo game performance, it may be configured to be able to inform the player that the pseudo game performance is being performed, in other words, that the actual game is not being performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly confusing the pseudo game presentation with the real game. In particular, this is to eliminate the possibility that a player may misunderstand that a game result has been obtained through a pseudo game performance and cancel the game even though the actual game is not being played.
As a method for notifying the player that a pseudo game performance is being performed, for example, a first method is to vary the lighting mode of the stop switch lamp. Here, the "stop switch lamp" is a lamp (for example, an LED provided around the stop switch 42) that indicates whether the operation of the stop switch 42 is valid or invalid, and the operation of the stop switch 42 is valid. An example of this is to emit blue light when it is invalid, and emit red light when it is invalid. Furthermore, the lighting control of the stop switch lamp may be executed by the main control board 50 or by the sub control board 80.

If the stop switch 42 can be operated during the rotation of the reels 31 in the main game, the stop switch lamp is emitted in a predetermined color (for example, blue as described above), but the rotation of the reels 31 during the pseudo game production is If it is possible to temporarily stop the reels 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42, the stop switch lamp is set to a color different from the predetermined color (for example, purple. Especially when the operation of the stop switch 42 is invalid in this game) (for example, red in the above example) or turn off the light.

In addition, when the stop switch 42 can be operated while the reels 31 are rotating in this game, the stop switch lamp is made to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue as described above). If it is possible to temporarily stop the reels 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 during rotation, the stop switch lamp may be changed to a color different from the predetermined color (for example, when the operation of the stop switch 42 is invalid in this game). For example, the light may be emitted in the same color as the emitted light (for example, red in the above example) or turned off.

Furthermore, when the stop switch 42 can be operated while the reels 31 are rotating in the main game, the stop switch lamp is made to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue as described above); If it is possible to temporarily stop the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 during the rotation of the reel 31, the stop switch lamp may be set to the same color as the predetermined color and emit light in a blinking manner.
In this way, in this embodiment, the main game and the pseudo game are made to have different light emitting colors (including turning off) and/or light emitting modes (on, blinking, etc.). This is called changing the lighting mode of the stop switch lamp.

Secondly, during a pseudo-game performance, a lamp that lights up only during the pseudo-game performance (in particular, a lamp that does not have any other function and is used only to indicate that a pseudo-game performance is in progress; will be described later) An example of this is to notify the player that a pseudo game presentation is in progress by lighting up a "pseudo game display lamp 21a"). Furthermore, in addition to the dedicated lamp, it is possible to display an image such as "Pseudo game effect in progress" or "FREE PLAY" on the image display device 23 or the like, or output a sound from the speaker 22 saying "Pseudo game effect in progress". This can be mentioned.
Furthermore, thirdly, when all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped during a pseudo game performance, the reels 31 do not stand still, but the symbols move up and down at predetermined time intervals (so that they slightly vibrate up and down). By driving and controlling the motor 32 (hereinafter referred to as "shaking fluctuation" or "shaking fluctuation control"), it is not a stop that displays the game result in the main game (actual stop), but a temporary stop in a pseudo game production. An example of this is notifying players of the

Here, the fluctuation fluctuation is not limited to fluctuations to the extent that the player can recognize (identify) that the reels 31 are shaking when visually observing the reels 31, but also fluctuations to the extent that the shaking of the reels 31 cannot be recognized by the human eye. It also includes fluctuations.
Furthermore, the "swing fluctuation" in this embodiment corresponds to turning the reel drive signal on and off at intervals of less than or equal to 500 ms.
Note that "turning on the reel drive signal" refers to performing excitation output of the reel 31 in a predetermined pattern.
Furthermore, "turning off the reel drive signal" refers to performing excitation output of the reel 31 in a pattern different from the predetermined pattern (including not outputting excitation).
Furthermore, the swing fluctuation is not limited to being executed only when all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped, but also when the first reel 31 is temporarily stopped and the second reel 31 is temporarily stopped. good.
The swing fluctuation performed when the first reel 31 temporarily stops and when the second reel 31 temporarily stops may be the same control as the swing fluctuation performed when all the reels 31 temporarily stop. Alternatively, the amount of fluctuation of the swing fluctuation performed when the first reel 31 temporarily stops and when the second reel 31 temporarily stops is different from the swing fluctuation performed when all the reels 31 temporarily stop. It may be a small fluctuation (microvibration). Furthermore, when the first and second reels 31 are temporarily stopped, the slight vibration may be so small that the player can recognize that the reels 31 are shaking when looking at the reels 31; The vibration of the reel 31 may be set to such an extent that it cannot be recognized.

Further, any one of the first to third methods described above may be adopted. However, the first and second methods may be adopted at the same time, the first and third methods may be adopted at the same time, the second and third methods may be adopted at the same time, or all of the first to third methods may be adopted simultaneously. may be adopted. By employing a plurality of methods, it is possible to reduce confusion among players between the main game and the pseudo game performance.

FIG. 382 is a diagram showing an example in which "7"-"7"-"7" is temporarily stopped on the middle line by pseudo game performance in the 43rd embodiment.
“Waiting” in the upper left is a state in which the main game has ended and all reels 31 are stopped. Next, an example will be shown in which when the start switch 41 is operated in a situation where a predetermined number of bets (for example, "3") has been bet, all the reels 31 start rotating and a pseudo game effect is started. There is. In the figure, "↓" on the reel 31 indicates that the reel 31 is rotating. When the left stop switch 42 is operated in this state, the left reel 31 is temporarily stopped. In this example, "7" is temporarily stopped in the middle row. Furthermore, similar to the stop control of the reels 31 in this game, the temporary stop control of the reels 31 may temporarily stop the reels 31 within the maximum number of moving symbols "4", and when the maximum number of moving symbols exceeds "4", The reel 31 may be temporarily stopped by exceeding the limit. When temporarily stopping the reel 31 within the maximum moving symbol number "4", "7"-"7"-"7" will not be temporarily stopped unless the reels are pressed correctly. On the other hand, when the maximum number of moving symbols exceeds "4" and the reels 31 are temporarily stopped, "7"-"7"-"7" are temporarily stopped regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42.
In addition, in a state where only the left reel 31 is temporarily stopped, the left reel 31 remains stationary without any swing fluctuation. Therefore, the stopping mode in this case is the same as the stopping mode in this game.

When the middle stop switch 42 is operated, the middle reel 31 is temporarily stopped in the same way as when the left stop switch 42 is operated. At the time when the middle reel 31 is temporarily stopped (when the left reel 31 is temporarily stopped and the right reel 31 is rotating), the left and middle reels 31 are stationary and do not undergo swing fluctuations.
Next, when the right stop switch 42 is operated and the right reel 31 is temporarily stopped (in other words, when all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped), all the reels 31 are caused to swing and fluctuate. This allows the player to be informed that the temporarily stopped "7"-"7"-"7" does not display the game result of the main game. Further, the image display device 23 shows an example of production (an example where "7" is displayed) corresponding to the temporary stop symbol.

Then, when the start switch 41 is operated, all the reels 31 which have been temporarily stopped are restarted and the main game begins. When the reels 31 start rotating when moving to the main game, the rotation start timing of each reel 31 becomes different due to random delay processing described later.
When a specific symbol combination is temporarily stopped by a pseudo game effect, and all reels 31 are rotated simultaneously while maintaining the relative positional relationship of each reel 31 where the specific symbol combination is temporarily stopped, the temporary stop is determined. Depending on the symbol combination, there is a possibility that it will lead to eye push assistance in this game. Therefore, when finishing the pseudo game performance and proceeding to the main game, the rotation start timing of the reel 31 is made random to break the relative positional relationship of the reel 31 temporarily stopped by the pseudo game performance.
As described above, when the left reel 31 is temporarily stopped and when the middle reel 31 is temporarily stopped, the reel 31 is not limited to being stationary, and may be oscillated.

FIG. 383 is a time chart showing drive signal control (of the motor 32) (Example 1) during a pseudo game performance.
FIG. 383 shows an example in which a pseudo game effect is executed when the start switch 41 is operated for the first time. By operating the start switch 41, the drive signals for the first to third reels 31 are turned on, and at the same time all the reels 31 start rotating, a pseudo game performance is started. For example, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the motor 32 of the first reel 31 corresponding to the first stop switch 42 is controlled to temporarily stop, and the drive signal for the first reel 31 is turned off. As a result, the first reel 31 is temporarily stopped. When only the first reel 31 is temporarily stopped, the first reel drive signal maintains the off state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the shaking fluctuation control may be executed at intervals of less than 500 ms or less than 500 ms after the temporary stop.

Similarly, when the second stop switch 42 is operated, the motor 32 of the second reel 31 corresponding to the second stop switch 42 is temporarily stopped, and the drive signal for the second reel 31 is turned off. As a result, the second reel 31 is temporarily stopped. At this point, the second reel drive signal remains off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the shaking fluctuation control may be executed at intervals of less than 500 ms or less than 500 ms after the temporary stop.
Next, when the third stop switch 42 is operated, the motor 32 of the third reel 31 corresponding to the third stop switch 42 is temporarily stopped, and the drive signal for the third reel 31 is turned off. As a result, the third reel 31 is temporarily stopped.
Furthermore, before reaching 500ms (less than 500ms) after the third reel 31 temporarily stops (however, it may be until reaching 500ms (less than 500ms)), swing fluctuation control is executed for all reels 31. do. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 383, for example, control is executed to momentarily turn on and off the reel drive signal. In this example, control is executed such that the motor 32 is driven one step in the forward direction (the pattern moves downward) and then one step in the reverse direction (the pattern moves upward). do. This causes the pattern to move up and down for a moment (swing fluctuation).

Further, such swing fluctuation control is executed at intervals of at least less than 500 ms (or less than 500 ms) after all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped until the reels 31 are restarted. In other words, the reel 31 is controlled so as not to remain at the same position for 500 ms or more. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking this as a stoppage in the main game (real stoppage).
Further, in this example, the drive timing of the swing fluctuations of all the reels 31 is made the same. As a result, all the reels 31 behave in the same way. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drive timings of the swing fluctuations of all the reels 31 may be made different (as shown in FIG. 384, which will be described later).

In the example of FIG. 383, the timing at which the bet switch 40 is operated by the player after all the reels 31 have been temporarily stopped is indicated by a two-dot chain line. Even if the bet switch 40 is operated by the player after the pseudo game performance ends, the bet switch 40 will not be turned on and no medals will be bet. If the start switch 41 is operated with medals bet before the start of the main game and the pseudo game effect, the pseudo game effect will be started with the medals bet in the main game, but the main game is not yet started. Since the bet has not been executed, the medal remains in the bet state.

When the start switch 41 is operated after all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped, the operation of the start switch 41 becomes a trigger for ending the pseudo game performance. For this reason, a random delay time (time until restarting the reels 31) is determined for each reel 31, and when the determined random delay time has elapsed, the rotation of the reel 31 is started and the main game begins. do.
When the shaking fluctuation timing arrives after the start switch 41 is operated and before the random delay time arrives, the shaking fluctuation control is executed. In the example of FIG. 383, after the start switch 41 is operated, the reel 31 is restarted based on the fact that the random delay time has elapsed before the swing fluctuation timing arrives for the first reel 31, Regarding the second and third reels 31, an example is shown in which the swing fluctuation control is executed based on the fact that the swing fluctuation timing has arrived before the random delay time has elapsed.

FIG. 384 is a time chart showing drive signal control (of the motor 32) (Example 2) during a pseudo game performance.
In FIG. 383 above, the swing fluctuation control of all the reels 31 is started after all the reels 31 have temporarily stopped, but in the example of FIG. 384, the swing fluctuation control is sequentially performed for each reel 31 based on the temporary stop. This is an example of execution.
For example, when the first reel 31 is temporarily stopped, the swing fluctuation control is executed at intervals of less than 500 ms before 500 ms has elapsed since the first reel 31 was temporarily stopped. The same applies to the second reel 31 and the third reel 31. Therefore, in this case, in most cases, the drive timing of the swing fluctuation is not the same between the reels 31, but is dispersed. For example, while the second reel 31 and the third reel 31 are stationary, only the first reel 31 swings and fluctuates, and then while the first reel 31 and the third reel 31 are stationary, the second reel 31 Only the vibrations fluctuate.

In this way, the swing fluctuation control after the reels 31 are temporarily stopped may be started after all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped, or may be started every time the reels 31 are temporarily stopped.
Further, the swing fluctuation may be performed at the same timing on all reels 31, or may be performed independently (separately) for each reel 31. However, each reel 31 executes the swing fluctuation control at intervals of less than 500 ms.
Furthermore, the swing fluctuation amplitude when the first and second reels 31 are temporarily stopped (the third reel 31 is rotating) may be different from the swing fluctuation amplitude after the third reel 31 is temporarily stopped. For example, the swing fluctuation amplitude of all the reels 31 after the third reel 31 has temporarily stopped is set to a level that can be easily recognized visually, but when the first and second reels 31 are temporarily stopped (the third reel 31 is rotating) ) can be set to such a level that the swing fluctuation is not noticeable unless the first and second reels 31 are carefully observed.

FIG. 385 is a time chart showing the drive control of the motor 32 of each reel 31 during the pseudo game presentation. Note that FIG. 385 shows an example of the shaking fluctuation control shown in FIG. 383.
In FIG. 385, when the start switch 41 is operated, each reel 31 is brought into an accelerated state and a pseudo game effect is started. After all the reels 31 reach a constant speed state, the stop switch 42 enters an operation acceptance state.
In this way, even during a pseudo game production, all reels 31 are accelerated based on the operation of the start switch 41, and after reaching a constant speed state, the stop switch 42 can be operated. It is similar to a game.
The rotational speed of the reels 31 in the pseudo game production may be the same rotational speed of the reels 31 as in the main game, or may be a different rotational speed of the reels 31 from that in the main game.
Even during the pseudo game performance, the first, second, and third reels are temporarily stopped each time the first, second, and third stop switches 42 are operated, as in the main game. . As described above, when the first and second reels 31 are temporarily stopped and the third reel 31 is rotating, the temporarily stopped first and second reels 31 are in a stationary state. After the third reel 31 is temporarily stopped, all the reels 31 are oscillated.

After all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped, the pseudo game performance is continued until a predetermined time has elapsed since the third reel 31 was temporarily stopped or the start switch 41 is operated. Note that the condition for ending the pseudo game performance is set when a predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined timing, or when the start switch 41 is operated after all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped.
The example in FIG. 385 is an example in which the pseudo game performance is ended based on the start switch 41 being operated. When the start switch 41 is operated, a random delay time for each reel 31 is determined by lottery or the like, and the reels 31 are restarted after the determined random delay time has elapsed. Then, when all the reels 31 are in a constant speed state and the stop switch 42 can be operated, the game can be played.

FIG. 386 is a time chart showing control of various lamps during pseudo game performance. It should be noted that the lamps that are lit during the pseudo game presentation are not limited to those shown in FIG. 386, but may also include, for example, a pseudo game display lamp 21a (see FIG. 391, etc.) which will be described later.
In FIG. 386, when the number of credits is less than the upper limit "50", the input display LED 79e (see FIG. 31(A)) can be lit (step S2868 in FIG. 395, which will be described later).
As described in the eleventh embodiment, the insertion display LED 79e is an LED that lights up when a medal can be inserted. That is, the light is turned on when the game ends and before the medals for the next game are inserted (indicating a so-called bet waiting state). Note that even after the replay is activated, the light is lit when a bet can be made according to the number of credits (for example, when the number of credits is less than the upper limit value ("50")). Then, when the number of bets reaches the upper limit and the number of credits reaches the upper limit, the input display LED 79e turns off. In the example of FIG. 386, it is assumed that the number of credits is not the upper limit value.

Furthermore, when the number of bets reaches the specified number, the game start display LED 79d (see FIG. 31(A)) can be lit (step S2887 in FIG. 396, which will be described later). The game start display LED 79d is an LED that lights up when a predetermined number of medals have been inserted and the start switch 41 can be operated. Therefore, it will not light up if the specified number of medals have not been bet (or have not been automatically inserted based on replay).
Then, when the start switch 41 is operated, the rotation of all the reels 31 is started as described above, and a pseudo game performance is started.
When the start switch 41 is operated, the input display LED 79e and the game start display LED 79d are turned off.

In addition, in this example, the stop switch lamp lights up in purple in a situation where the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted during a pseudo game production, and lights up in blue in a situation where the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted during the actual game, In a situation where the operation of the stop switch 42 cannot be accepted (regardless of whether it is during a pseudo game performance or a real game), the stop switch lamp lights up in red (the lighting mode of the stop switch lamp is changed).
Therefore, before the start switch 41 is operated, all stop switch lamps are lit in red. When the start switch 41 is operated, a pseudo game performance is started, all the reels 31 are brought into a constant speed state, and the stop switch 42 becomes ready for operation, all stop switch lamps are lit in purple.
Furthermore, each time the stop switch 42 is operated, the light emitting color of the stop switch lamp corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is changed from purple to red.

Further, before all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped and the start switch 41 is operated, the input display LED 79e and the game start display LED 79d remain off.
This is because if the game start display LED 79d is turned on again after all the reels 31 have been temporarily stopped, there is a risk of giving a misunderstanding to the player. For example, there is a risk that a pseudo game presentation may be misunderstood as a replay winning game.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when executing a pseudo game performance, the game start display LED 79d may remain lit when the start switch 41 is operated. Then, after all the reels 31 have temporarily stopped, the game start display LED 79d may be turned off when the start switch 41 is operated (when transitioning to the main game).
Alternatively, when performing a pseudo game performance, the game start display LED 79d is turned off when the start switch 41 is operated, but after all the reels 31 have temporarily stopped and before the start switch 41 is operated, the dummy ( As a performance), the game start display LED 79d may be turned on.
In addition, even after all the reels 31 have been temporarily stopped, the blocker 45 remains off even before the start switch 41 is operated (medals cannot be inserted), so the insertion display LED 79e remains off. be.

When the start switch 41 is operated and the pseudo game performance is completed, the reels 31 are restarted through the above-described random delay process. When the reels 31 reach a constant speed state, the stop switch 42 enters an operation acceptance permission state, allowing the game to proceed. Further, in this game, when the reels 31 reach a constant speed state, the stop switch lamp lights up in blue.

FIG. 387 is a diagram showing an example of swing fluctuation control during pseudo game performance. In the figure, the process progresses from (a) to (h).
(a) in the figure shows a state in which the pseudo game performance has started and all the reels 31 are rotating. Next, the process proceeds to (b), when the left stop switch 42 is operated and the left reel 31 temporarily stops, the left reel 31 becomes stationary.
Next, the process proceeds to (c), when the middle stop switch 42 is operated and the middle reel 31 is temporarily stopped, the middle reel 31 becomes stationary. Note that the left reel 31 is still at this point as well.
Next, proceeding to (d), the right stop switch 42 is operated and the right reel 31 is temporarily stopped, and at this moment, all the reels 31 are stationary.

After all the reels 31 have temporarily stopped, all the reels 31 are oscillated at intervals of less than 500 ms, as described above. For example, when all the reels 31 are to be oscillated at intervals of 450 ms, after maintaining the state of (d) for 450 ms, the reels 31 are driven up and down by a predetermined step (for example, 1 step), and then the state shown in (e) in the figure is The motor 32 is controlled to operate as shown in (h). The time periods shown in (e) to (h) in the figure are not particularly limited, but it is desirable to perform the process in an instant. This is because the rest time of the reels 31 can be made longer, and the temporarily stopped symbols are easier to see. When the state shown in (h) in the figure is reached, that state is maintained for 450 ms, and after 450 ms has elapsed, the operations (e) to (h) in the figure are executed again.

Note that the operation is not limited to the operation shown in FIG. 387, but may first be a shaking fluctuation that repeats the state of (e) in the diagram → the state of (f) in the diagram → the state of (e) in the diagram. Or secondly, it may be a shaking fluctuation that repeats the state shown in (f) in the figure, the state shown in (g) in the figure, and the state shown in (f) in the figure.
Further, although the example in FIG. 387 shows an example in which the reels 31 are at rest when the first and second reels 31 are temporarily stopped, the present invention is not limited to this. At the time of temporary stop, it may be a temporary stop accompanied by vibration fluctuation.

FIG. 388 is a diagram showing random delay processing after the end of the pseudo game performance. After all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped, the pseudo game performance is ended based on the operation of the start switch 41, and random delay processing is executed.
When the start switch 41 is operated after all the reels 31 have temporarily stopped, the time required for restarting the reels 31 (referred to as "random delay time") is actually determined by the timer value. equivalent). A storage area (RWM 53) for storing a timer value which is a random delay time is provided for each reel 31, and the timer value of each reel 31 is determined at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated and is stored in each storage area. Then, each timer value is subtracted for each interrupt processing, and when it becomes "0", the rotation of the reel 31 is started.

In the example of FIG. 388, the random delay time of the left reel 31 is determined to be "t1", the random delay time of the middle reel 31 is determined to be "t2", and the random delay time of the right reel 31 is determined to be "t3". This is an example.
Until the timer value reaches "0", the above-mentioned shaking fluctuation control continues, for example, every 450 ms.
In the example of FIG. 388, since "t1<t3<t2", the reels 31 are restarted in the order of the left, right, and middle reels 31. In this way, which reel 31 restarts first varies each time depending on the random delay time.
Then, when the reel 31 that rotated last (the middle reel 31 in the example of FIG. 388) is in a constant speed state and the index of the reel 31 is detected, operation reception of the stop switch 42 is started in this game. be done.
Although the delay time is random, the reels 31 may be restarted in a predetermined order.

In the pseudo game performance, by executing the swing fluctuation control described above, it is possible to notify the player that the reels 31 are temporarily stopped (not stopped to display the game result in the main game). .
On the other hand, the following method may be used to notify the player that a pseudo game performance is being performed.
Below, a method of lighting up the pseudo game display lamp 21a indicating that a pseudo game performance is in progress, and a method of displaying on the image display device 23 that a pseudo game performance is being performed will be exemplified. Any one of the variation controls may be performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any two or all three may be implemented.

FIG. 389 is a diagram showing lighting/extinguishing of the pseudo game display lamp 21a during the pseudo game performance.
The pseudo game display lamp 21a in this example is provided on the right side of the image display device 23 (indicated by an asterisk in the figure). In the pseudo game display lamp 21a, a white star mark indicates an off state, and a black star mark indicates an on state. Note that the position of the pseudo game display lamp 21a is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 389. The position where the pseudo game display lamp 21a can be provided will be described later.
During standby (while all reels 31 are stopped), the pseudo game display lamp 21a is off.
Then, when the start switch 41 is operated and the pseudo game production is started, the pseudo game display lamp 21a is immediately turned on. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the pseudo game performance has started.
Then, the left, middle, and right stop switches 42 are sequentially operated, and the left, middle, and right reels 31 are sequentially temporarily stopped, but during this time, the pseudo game display lamp 21a remains lit (it turns off midway). Never). Then, when the pseudo game production ends based on the operation of the start switch 41, the pseudo game display lamp 21a is turned off.
In addition, in the case where the pseudo game display lamp 21a is provided and the pseudo game display lamp 21a is lit during the pseudo game performance, it is not necessarily necessary to execute the swing fluctuation when the reel 31 is temporarily stopped during the pseudo game performance. In the example of FIG. 389, when the reel 31 is temporarily stopped, the reel 31 is stationary, and there is no fluctuation in swing.
However, after the temporary stop of each reel 31, the reel drive signal is transmitted at intervals of less than or equal to 500 ms so that it is difficult for the player to visually confirm the shaking fluctuations (so that they are not accompanied by shaking fluctuations). You can turn it on or off. By configuring in this way, it is possible to differentiate between the stopping of the symbols in the main game and the temporary stopping of the symbols in the pseudo game effect on the program (on the test).

FIG. 390 is a diagram showing a display indicating that a pseudo game presentation is in progress. Hereinafter, in the description of FIG. 390, this display will be referred to as a "pseudo game display."
The pseudo game display in this example is an example in which "FREE PLAY" is displayed near the bottom of the image display area of the image display device 23. However, the display is not limited to this, and may be displayed as "simulating game performance in progress" or "reel automatic performance in progress".
Further, the pseudo game display is located at the forefront of all layers in the display image. Therefore, the pseudo game display is not hidden by other effects, and the player is prevented from overlooking it.
While waiting for a game (while all reels 31 are stopped), the pseudo game display is not executed.
Then, when the start switch 41 is operated and the pseudo game performance is started, the pseudo game display is immediately executed. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the pseudo game performance has started.
Then, the left, middle, and right stop switches 42 are sequentially operated, and the left, middle, and right reels 31 are sequentially temporarily stopped, but during this time, the pseudo game display continues (the pseudo game display may end midway). Never). Then, when the pseudo game presentation ends based on the operation of the start switch 41, the pseudo game display is ended (erased).
Note that when performing a pseudo game display during a pseudo game presentation, it is not necessarily necessary to perform swing fluctuation when the reels 31 are temporarily stopped during the pseudo game presentation, so in the example of FIG. When stopped, the reel 31 is stationary and shows an example with no swing fluctuation.
However, after the temporary stop of each reel 31, the reel drive signal is transmitted at intervals of less than or equal to 500 ms so that it is difficult for the player to visually confirm the shaking fluctuations (so that they are not accompanied by shaking fluctuations). You can turn it on or off. By configuring in this way, it is possible to differentiate between the stopping of symbols in the main game and the temporary stopping of symbols in the pseudo game effect on the program (on testing).

FIG. 391 is a schematic diagram showing the front appearance of the slot machine 10.
In FIG. 391, the above-mentioned pseudo game display is located below the (upper) production lamp 21 and on the control panel 12c (the part where the medal slot etc. are provided, see FIG. 59), the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, etc. It is provided in the range above the position. This is to ensure player visibility. Therefore, it is possible to display an image such as "FREE PLAY" in the image display area of the image display device 23 located below the (upper) production lamp 21.
Furthermore, a pseudo game display lamp 21a (Example 1) may be provided next to the display window 18 (on the right side in the example of FIG. 391).
Furthermore, a pseudo game display lamp 21a (Example 2) may be provided below the display window 18 and above the upper surface of the control panel 12c.
When the pseudo game display lamp 21a is provided, it is turned on during the pseudo game production while displaying characters such as "FREE PLAY".

On the other hand, the credit number display LED 76 and the earned number display LED 78 may be provided on the control panel 12c as shown in FIG. 31 (11th embodiment), or on the lower side of the display window 18 as shown in FIG. In some cases, it is provided in
The credit number display LED 76 and the earned number display LED 78 are composed of a 7-segment display, and in the example of FIG. 31 (11th embodiment), the DP (decimal point) of the earned number display LED 78 is used as the advantageous section display LED 77. there were.
Therefore, it is conceivable to use at least some segments of the 7-segment display to display that a pseudo game presentation is in progress. However, with such a display, it is not possible to clearly indicate to the player that a simulated game performance is being performed, so the 7-segment display is not used for displaying a simulated game.

For example, the pseudo game display lamp 21a includes a lamp and a lamp description (a display (description) that allows the player to recognize that the lamp is for a pseudo game effect), such as "FREE PLAY", "Pseudo game effect in progress", or "Reel automatic display". It is preferable that one side of the display range including the display area "Providing a performance in progress" (the same shall apply hereinafter) exceeds 10 mm and the area exceeds 642 mm ² .
Further, it is preferable that the lamp description of the pseudo game display lamp 21a occupies "1/3" or more of the display area. By setting the lamp surface and lamp description of the pseudo game display lamp 21a to the above-mentioned size, it is possible to reliably notify the player during the pseudo game performance that the pseudo game performance is being performed.
Furthermore, when the pseudo game display lamp 21a is composed of LEDs, the number of LEDs of the pseudo game display lamp 21a is smaller than the number of LEDs of the ART lamp (lamp indicating that ART is in progress), and the advantageous section lamp (for example, one in the example of the advantageous section display LED 77 in FIG. 31 (eleventh embodiment)).
Further, it is preferable that the lighting color of the pseudo game display lamp 21a is different from the lighting color of the ART lamp and the lighting color of the advantageous section lamp.
As a result, it is possible to ensure appropriate visibility of the pseudo game display lamp 21a, and to correctly notify the player during the pseudo game performance.

In order for the player to easily know that a simulated game performance is being performed, the simulated game display needs to have a certain size.
As shown in FIG. 391, the length (width) in the longitudinal direction of "FREEPLAY" (pseudo game display) displayed by the image display device 23 is "W (mm)", and the length (height) in the transverse direction is "W (mm)". Let it be "H (mm)".
In this case, the length "W" is preferably "10 mm" or more, and the length "H" is preferably "10 mm" or more.
Further, when the area of the pseudo game display is "S (=W×H)", it is preferable that the area S is set as follows depending on the image display area of the image display device 23.

First, when the image display device 23 is less than 7 inches, it is preferable that the area S is 642 mm ² or more.
Second, when the image display device 23 is 7 inches or more, it is preferable that the area S is equal to or larger than “display area of the image display device 23×0.082”.
Thirdly, when the image display device 23 exceeds 16 inches, it is preferable that the area S is approximately 5770 mm ² .
By setting the pseudo-game display to the above-mentioned size, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the pseudo-game presentation is in progress.

FIG. 392 is a time chart showing a pseudo game display lamp and a pseudo game display.
When the start switch 41 is operated and a pseudo game performance is executed, a pseudo game display is output at the same time as the start of the pseudo game performance (in other words, immediately after the start switch 41 is operated). For example, turning on the pseudo-game display lamp 21a or displaying on the image display device 23 that a pseudo-game performance is being performed.
After all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped, when the pseudo game performance is to be ended based on the operation of the start switch 41, the pseudo game display is ended at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated.

In addition, if the player wins the push order bell when the start switch 41 is operated during AT and displays the push order on the instruction monitor (number of wins display LED 78) (activates the instruction function), in the game When performing a pseudo game presentation, the instruction monitor is not turned on (the order of pressing is not displayed) during the pseudo game presentation. However, during the pseudo-game performance, the image display device 23 may display an image indicating the operation timing or an image displaying the push order for the purpose of performance (for example, "Aim for 7!" or "Aim for 7 from the right!"). is possible. The image display does not correspond to the operation of the instruction function.

When all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped and the pseudo game performance is ended based on the operation of the start switch 41, an instruction monitor can be lit at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated. Therefore, after the start switch 41 is operated, the instruction monitor can be turned on even if the reels 31 have not yet restarted because the random delay process is being executed.
As described above, the instruction monitor is turned off while displaying that the pseudo game presentation is in progress. On the other hand, while the instruction monitor is lit, there is no display indicating that a pseudo game performance is being performed. In other words, there is no case where a pseudo game display is output and the instruction monitor is lit. Thereby, when the instruction monitor is lit, the player can know that the main game is being played (not the pseudo game performance being played).
Additionally, if the instruction monitor is turned on during a pseudo game performance, the player may mistakenly believe that he or she cannot obtain an advantageous gaming result unless the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of presses displayed on the instruction monitor during the pseudo game performance. However, by turning off the instruction monitor during the pseudo game production, the risk of misidentification can be eliminated.

FIG. 393 is a time chart showing the pseudo-gaming signal, the pseudo-gaming proceeding signal, and the like.
The test signal is output from the main control board 50 to the test machine 400, but in this case, the main control board 50 is output to the interface board 300 (which relays the test machine 400 and the gaming machine (slot machine 10) to perform the test). A test signal from the main control board 50 can be output to the test machine 400 via the interface board 300.
On the other hand, during the pseudo game performance, the test signal is not transmitted to the test machine 400 side.
When the start switch 41 is operated and a pseudo game performance is started, the main control board 50 turns on the pseudo game in progress signal. As a result, a pseudo gaming signal can be transmitted to the interface board 300. The pseudo game signal is kept on during the pseudo game performance, so it continues to be sent to the interface board 300, but is never sent to the test machine 400.

When the interface board 300 receives the pseudo game in-progress signal, it can transmit a pseudo game proceeding signal to the main control board 50. The pseudo game proceeding signal includes first to third stop switch signals, a bet switch signal, and a start switch signal. By transmitting these operation switch signals to the main control board 50, the main control board 50 can execute processing (temporary stop control of the reels 31, etc.) for proceeding with the pseudo game production.
Note that after all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped, it is not necessary to operate the bet switch 40, so the bet switch signal may be unnecessary as a signal for proceeding with a pseudo game.
However, if the end condition for the pseudo game production is set to the operation of the bet switch 40 and the start switch 41, a bet switch signal is required as a signal for proceeding with the pseudo game.

When the main control board 50 temporarily stops all the reels 31 and receives a start switch signal as a signal for proceeding with a pseudo game from the interface board 300, it is possible to end the pseudo game performance. This turns off the pseudo game signal. In the market, the main control board 50 temporarily stops all the reels 31 and then allows the pseudo game performance to end based on the player's operation of the start switch 41.
When the pseudo game effect is completed and the pseudo game in progress signal is turned off, the conditional device signal is turned on. This conditional device signal corresponds to winning combination information (test signal) when a winning combination is drawn based on the operation of the start switch 41 immediately before the start of the pseudo game performance. In other words, when the start switch 41 is operated and the condition device number for the game is determined, when executing the pseudo game performance, the condition device signal is not output before or during the pseudo game performance. , after the end of the pseudo game production, control is performed to transmit a condition device signal to the test machine 400.

When the pseudo game production is finished and the reels 31 are restarted and are in a constant speed state, the reel stop enable signal is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the test machine via the interface board 300, as before the execution of the pseudo game production. 400. Further, a stop switch signal is output from the main control board 50 to the testing machine 400 via the interface board 300.
On the other hand, when it is an advantageous section, the advantageous section signal is maintained in an on state regardless of whether or not the pseudo game effect is executed. Therefore, if it is in an advantageous section before the execution of the pseudo game effect, the processing for outputting the advantageous section signal continues to be executed, and the advantageous section signal remains on during and after the execution of the pseudo game effect. is maintained. Thereby, it is possible to inform the testing machine 400 that the game is in an advantageous section even during a pseudo game performance.

As described above, when the interface board 300 receives the pseudo-gaming signal, it does not transmit the pseudo-gaming signal to the test machine 400. Further, the interface board 300 has a function for outputting a signal for proceeding with a pseudo game. On the other hand, for gaming machines that are not equipped with pseudo game performance, the interface board 300 does not receive the pseudo game signal, and therefore does not output the pseudo game proceeding signal. For this reason, the interface board 300 is provided with a changeover switch 300a for switching between outputting and not outputting the pseudo game proceeding signal. When the changeover switch 300a is on, the function of outputting a pseudo game progress signal is enabled, and when it is off, the function is disabled.

FIG. 394 is a diagram showing the main storage areas of the RWM 53, which will be explained in the flowchart described later, in the 43rd embodiment.
The bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) at the address "F021(H)" is the same as the bet number data in FIG. 35 (11th embodiment), and is a storage area for the bet number in the current game, ranging from "0" to "3" is stored.
The payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address "F022 (H)" is the same as the payout number data in FIG. 35 (11th embodiment), and when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined. , is a storage area in which a value corresponding to the number of payouts is stored. When a small winning combination is won, payout number data corresponding to the winning small winning combination is stored, and a medal payout process is executed. Here, each time one medal is paid out (adding "1" to the number of credits, or actually paying out one medal (from the hopper 35)), the payout number data is subtracted by "1". That is, it has a role as the number of times the payout process is executed. As a result, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout number data becomes "0".

The payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) at address "F023(H)" is the same as the payout number data buffer in FIG. 35 (11th embodiment), and the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) is the same as the payout number data buffer in FIG. 35 (11th embodiment). Sometimes, it is a storage area for values corresponding to the number of payouts. Here, unlike the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is not subtracted every time one medal is paid out, and the initially stored value is maintained. Then, that value is maintained until the medal payout number update process for the next game. For example, when a small winning combination of 8 pieces is won in the game, "8 (H)" is stored as the payout number data buffer, and in the next game, when no winning combination is won, as the payout number data buffer. "0" is overwritten.

The number of medal bet signal outputs (_CT_MEDAL_IN) at address "F024(H)" is a storage area for the number of outputs of the medal bet (insertion) signal, and values from "0" to "6" are stored. In this embodiment, the number of medal bet signal outputs indicates the number of times the number of bets on medals is output as a signal to the outside, and the number of times the number of bets is doubled is output. Therefore, in this embodiment, since the maximum value of the number of bets is "3", the maximum value of the number of medal bet signal outputs is "6". For example, when outputting the number of bets "3", "On (1st time) → Off (2nd time) → On (3rd time) → Off (4th time) → On (5th time) → Off (6th time)" Become.

The medal payout signal output count (_CT_MEDAL_OUT) at address "F025(H)" is a storage area for the output count of the medal payout signal, and values from "0" to "30" are stored. The number of times the medal payout signal is output indicates the number of times the number of medals paid out is output as a signal to the outside, and the number of times the number of medals paid out is doubled is outputted. This point is similar to the number of medal bet signal outputs described above. Therefore, in this embodiment, since the maximum value of the number of payouts is "15" (see FIGS. 118 to 121), the maximum value of the number of times the medal payout signal is output is "30".

The medal signal data (_PT_MEDAL_IO) at address "F026(H)" is an area for storing medal signal data, and the D6 bit is assigned a medal bet signal and the D7 bit is assigned a medal payout signal. The assignment of these bits is set to be the same as the bit assignment of the medal bet signal and the medal payout signal of the output port for outputting the medal bet signal and the medal payout signal. The medal bet signal is turned on when outputting the medal bet signal to the outside. Similarly, the medal payout signal is turned on when outputting the medal payout signal to the outside.

The LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) at address "F027 (H)" is the on/off state of the game start display LED 79d (D3), input display LED 79e (D4), and replay display LED 79f (D5) among the status display LEDs 79 (Fig. 31). This is a storage area for storing OFF. For example, in a state where medals can be inserted before the game starts, the D4 bit of the LED display data becomes "1", and the insertion display LED 79e becomes in a state where it can be lit. In this case, the lighting process of the input display LED 79e is executed in the interrupt process when the timing for lighting the LED display counter comes.

Similarly, in a state where the game can be started, the D3 bit of the LED display data becomes "1", and the game start display LED 79d becomes in a state where it can be lit. In this case, the lighting process of the game start display LED 79d is executed by the interrupt process when the timing for lighting the game start display LED 79d comes.
Similarly, when the replay operation state is entered (the replay operation symbol is stopped and displayed), the D5 bit of the LED display data becomes "1", and the replay display LED 79f becomes ready to light up. In this case, the lighting process of the replay display LED 79f is executed in the interrupt process when the timing for lighting the replay display LED 79f comes.

In the medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) at address "F028(H)", the D0 bit indicates the start switch 41 acceptance state, and when the start switch 41 is being operated, that is, when the start switch 41 is operable ( For example, it is set to "1" when a medal is bet (before the game starts), and set to "0" when the start switch 41 cannot be operated (for example, while the reels 31 are rotating).

The setting change prohibition flag of the D1 bit is data that becomes "0" when the setting can be changed, and becomes "1" otherwise. In this embodiment, this data is set to "1" when the start switch 41 is operated and the game progresses, and is set to "0" when medal acceptance for the next game is started. . When changing the settings, the value of the setting change permission flag is referred to, and when the setting change prohibition flag is "1", the setting change is not permitted. However, even if the setting change prohibition flag is "1", if it is determined that an unrecoverable error has occurred (for example, an abnormality in updating a random number that is determined for each interrupt process), the setting change will be permitted. Based on this, it becomes possible to cancel the unrecoverable error.

The winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) of the address “F0A9(H)” is the same as the winning and replay condition device number shown in FIG. This is a storage area that stores the number when the replay and winning condition device that operates in the game is determined. As shown in FIG. 126, when winning numbers "1" to "24" are won, "1" to "24" are respectively stored as winning and replay condition device numbers for the game.
The accessory condition device number (_NB_CRRT_BNS) of the address "F0AA(H)" is the same as the accessory condition device number shown in FIG. 138 (23rd embodiment), and when the accessory is won, the accessory condition device number (_NB_CRRT_BNS) is This is a storage area that stores numbers. As shown in FIG. 126, when winning numbers "25" to "41" are won, "1" to "17" are respectively stored as accessory condition device numbers for the game.

The minimum gaming time (_TM2_GAME) of addresses "F0B0(H)" and "F0B1(H)" is the same as the minimum gaming time shown in FIG. 138 (23rd embodiment), and the minimum gaming time for one time is monitored. This is a storage area for timer values, and an initial value is set in order to count the number of interruptions "3672 (D)" when it is determined that the minimum gaming time has elapsed. The minimum game time in this embodiment is set to approximately "4.1" seconds (1.117ms x 3672≈4100ms).
When the minimum game time is set for the current game, a count is performed to subtract "1" for each interrupt process. Then, in the next game, the reels 31 start rotating on the condition that the minimum game time is "0".
Note that "TM2" indicates a 2-byte timer, and "TM1" indicates a 1-byte timer.

The pseudo game performance time (_TM2_FREEPLAY) at addresses "F0B2(H)" and "F0B3(H)" is a storage area for a timer value that counts a predetermined time during the pseudo game performance. In this embodiment, when 20 seconds have elapsed without the player operating the start switch 41 or the stop switch 42, the pseudo game production ends. For this reason, when operating the start switch 41 at the start of a pseudo game presentation or when operating the stop switch 42 during a pseudo game presentation, a timer value "17897 (D)" corresponding to 20 seconds is set as the initial value, Execute a count that subtracts "1" for each interrupt processing. Even if the timer value reaches "0", the start switch 41 is not operated after all the reels 31 have temporarily stopped, or the stop switch 42 is not operated while the reels 31 are rotating during the pseudo game performance. When this happens, the pseudo game performance ends.
For example, when the start switch 41 is operated at the start of a game, the timer value "17897 (D)" is reset. If the first stop switch 42 is operated before the timer value reaches "0", the timer value "17897 (D)" is reset.
Next, when the second stop switch 42 is operated before the timer value reaches "0", the timer value "17897 (D)" is reset. Similarly, when the third stop switch 42 is operated before the timer value reaches "0", the timer value "17897 (D)" is reset.

In contrast,
(1) Before the first stop switch 42 is operated (while all reels 31 are rotating)
(2) After the first stop switch 42 is operated and before the second stop switch 42 is operated (state where only the first reel 31 is temporarily stopped)
(3) After the second stop switch 42 is operated and before the third stop switch 42 is operated (state where the first and second reels 31 are temporarily stopped)
(4) After the third stop switch 42 is operated but before the start switch 41 is operated (state where all reels 31 are temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation))
In each case, when the timer value becomes "0", the pseudo game performance is ended.
When ending the pseudo game performance in the cases (1) to (3) above, the rotating reels 31 are temporarily stopped, and then the reels 31 are restarted after performing random delay processing.
Further, in the case of (4) above, when ending the pseudo game performance, the reels 31 are restarted after performing random delay processing.

However, the control is not limited to the above, and the following control is also possible.
When 20 seconds pass without any stop switch 42 being operated after the start switch 41 is operated, the left reel 31 is temporarily stopped, assuming that the left stop operation has been accepted at that timing.
Next, 20 seconds are counted again from that point, and if 20 seconds have passed without any stop switch 42 being operated, it is assumed that the middle stop operation has been accepted at that timing, and the middle reel 31 is temporarily stopped. do.
Next, 20 seconds are counted again from that point, and if 20 seconds have passed without any operation of the right stop switch 42, the right reel 31 is temporarily stopped, assuming that the right stop operation has been accepted at that timing. . Furthermore, after all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped, swing fluctuation control is executed.
In addition, 20 seconds are measured again from the time when all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped, and if 20 seconds pass without the start switch 41 being operated, the pseudo game effect is performed as if the start switch 41 was operated at that timing. The process ends, a random delay time is determined, a random delay process is started, and the reels 31 are restarted after the random delay process.

The external signal output time (_TM1_OUT_CNT) at the address "F0B4(H)" is a storage area of a timer value for measuring the output time of the medal bet signal and the medal payout signal. In this embodiment, when it is determined that the timer value has become "0", the timer value is set to "92 (D)" again (step S2972 in FIG. 399, which will be described later), and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt processing. Execute the count.
The condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) at address "F0B5 (H)" is a storage area for storing the timer value that measures the output time of the condition device signal, and is set to a predetermined initial value in the start switch reception process described later. is stored (step S2926 in FIG. 397), and thereafter is subtracted by "1" at every predetermined cycle (interrupt processing). Then, in the test signal output (FIG. 400) during interrupt processing, a conditional device signal corresponding to the conditional device output time is outputted as a test signal.

The replay operation status flag (_FL_REPLAY) at address "F0C1 (H)" is a storage area for storing that replay is in operation. When the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed at the end of the game, the replay operation state flag is turned on ("1"). Further, when the replay operation state flag is on, a replay is performed, and the replay operation state flag is turned off (“0”) at the end of the game. In this embodiment, when the replay operation status flag is on, "1" is stored, but if information that can be used to determine whether or not replay is in operation is to be stored, what kind of information should be stored? You may memorize it.

The operating state flag (_FL_ACTION) at address "F0C2(H)" is similar to the storage area corresponding to the operating state flag shown in FIG. 35 (11th embodiment), and stores the operating state flag of the accessory. It can be determined whether or not the accessory is in operation depending on whether any bit corresponding to the accessory is "1". The accessories in this embodiment are 1BB and RB (see FIG. 122), with 1BB being assigned to the D0 bit and RB being assigned to the D1 bit. The operating state flag is updated, for example, in the game completion check process (not shown in FIG. 50).

The re-gaming state identification information flag (_FL_RT_INF) at address "F0C3(H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating whether or not it is the timing to output the re-gaming state identification signal. When the replay state identification signal is output, a value of "FF (H) (ON)" is stored, and at other times, a value of "00 (H) (OFF)" is stored.
The re-gaming state identification information flag is turned on at the start of the game, and turned off at the time of start switch acceptance processing, which will be described later. Note that it may be configured to be turned off after a predetermined period (for example, about 6 ms (6 interrupts)) has elapsed.

The section type number (_NB_ADV_KND) at address "F0C4(H)" is the same as the section type number in FIG. 138 (23rd embodiment), and is a storage area for storing a number indicating whether or not it is an advantageous section. . When it is an advantageous section, "1" is stored, and when it is a non-advantageous section, "0" is stored.
The advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR) of addresses "F0C5(H)" and "F0C6(H)" is the same as the advantageous section clear counter in FIG. 138 (23rd embodiment), and the counter for the number of games in the advantageous section ( This is the storage area for the decrement counter. When shifting to the advantageous section, the initial value "1500 (D)" is set, and during the advantageous section, "1" is subtracted for each game. When the value becomes "0", the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.

The pseudo game production number (_NB_FREEPLAY) of address "F0C7 (H)" is stored with a value other than "0" when it is decided to execute the pseudo game production, and is "0" when the pseudo game production is not executed. ” is the storage area for the flag. In this embodiment, three types of pseudo game effects are provided, and a value corresponding to this storage area is stored depending on which type of pseudo game effect is to be executed.
The types of pseudo game effects include, for example, what kind of symbol combinations can be temporarily stopped, how many times the pseudo game effects are to be executed, and the like.
A predetermined value other than "0" is stored in the pseudo game performance number, the pseudo game performance is executed, and when the pseudo game performance is completed, the pseudo game performance number is updated to "0".

The pseudo game performance state flag (_FL_FREEPLAY) at address "F0C8(H)" is a storage area in which a predetermined value is stored during the pseudo game performance, and "0" is stored otherwise. If the pseudo game performance state flag is not "0", it indicates that the pseudo game performance is being performed, and if the pseudo game performance state flag is "0", it is shown that the pseudo game performance is not being performed.

Next, the flow of information processing in the 43rd embodiment will be explained using a flowchart.
FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing game start set processing (M_GAME_SET) in the 43rd embodiment. The game start set process is described, for example, in FIG. 42 (11th embodiment), but this does not mean that the process in FIG. 42 is not executed; instead, while executing the process in FIG. It executes the processing according to the embodiment.
First, in step S2861, the main control board 50 turns on the re-gaming state identification information flag (_FL_RT_INF). This process is a process of storing a value "FF (H)" corresponding to the output of the re-gaming state identification signal in the re-gaming state identification information flag. In this embodiment, "FF (H)" is stored, but it is possible to determine whether or not a replay state identification signal is to be output (or not a condition device signal is to be output). Any value may be stored as long as it is suitable information.
Next, the process advances to step S2862, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not an interrupt process has occurred. If no interrupt processing has occurred, the process waits until an interrupt processing occurs, and if it is determined that an interrupt processing has occurred, the process advances to step S2863. In step S2863, the same process as step S2862 is executed again. If it is determined that an interrupt process has occurred, the process advances to step S2864.

Through the above steps S2862 and S2863, a standby process (also referred to as "wait process") that waits until two interrupt processes occur is executed. Through steps S2862 and S2863, a waiting process of "2.235 ms" at maximum is executed. Note that interrupt processing is executed even while standby processing is executed.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, steps S2862 and S2863 are configured to execute a standby process that waits until two interrupt processes occur, but the number of interrupts may be one, three or more. It may be about 5 times.
In the next step S2864, the main control board 50 determines whether the replay operation state flag (_FL_REPLAY) is on. When it is determined that the replay operation state flag is on, the process advances to step S2865, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process advances to step S2867.

In step S2865, the main control board 50 sets the prescribed number to the bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). For example, when the specified number for the current game is "3", "3" is stored in the bet number data.
Next, the process advances to step S2866, and the main control board 50 determines whether the number of credits is "50 (D)". When it is determined that the number of credits is "50 (D)", that is, the upper limit number, the process moves to step S2869 (processing at the start of medal acceptance (Fig. 396)), and when it is determined that the number of credits is not "50 (D)" The process advances to step S2867.
In step S2867, the main control board 50 turns on the blocker 45 (a state in which passage of medals is permitted). Note that the blocker 45 is turned off before step S2867. Next, the process advances to step S2868, and the input display LED 79e is turned on. This process is a process of setting the D4 bit to "1" in the LED display data (_PT_STS_LED). Then, the process advances to step S2869 to proceed to medal acceptance start processing.

FIG. 396 is a flowchart showing the medal acceptance start process in step S2869 of FIG. 395.
First, in step S2881, the main control board 50 determines whether the closing switch signal is on. When it is determined that the closing switch signal is on, the process advances to step S2882, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process advances to step S2886.
In step S2882, "1" is added to the bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). Next, the process advances to step S2883, and it is determined whether or not medals cannot be inserted. This determination is made as "Yes" when the number of bets reaches the specified number and the number of credits reaches the upper limit number "50". When it is determined that medals cannot be inserted, the process advances to step S2884, and when it is determined that medals can be inserted, the process advances to step S2886.

In step S2884, the main control board 50 turns off the blocker 45 (a state in which passage of medals is not permitted). Next, the process advances to step S2885, and the input display LED 79e is turned off. This process is a process of setting the D4 bit of the LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) to "0". Then, the process advances to step S2886.
In step S2886, it is determined whether the bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) is a specified number (the number of bets that can start the game). When it is determined that the number is the specified number, the process advances to step S2887, and when it is determined that the number is not the specified number, the process returns to step S2881.

In step S2887, the game start display LED 79d is turned on. This process is a process of setting the D3 bit of the LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) to "1".
In the next step S2888, the main control board 50 determines whether the start switch 41 is turned on. When it is detected that the start switch 41 is turned on, the process advances to step S2889 to execute a start switch reception process (M_START_CTL), and when it is not detected that the start switch 41 is turned on, the process returns to step S2881.
Whether or not the start switch 41 is turned on is determined by determining whether or not the D6 bit of the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_UP) is "1" in FIG. 133 (23rd embodiment). If so, it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated.
Although not shown in FIG. 394, in the 43rd embodiment, similarly to the 23rd embodiment, input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV), input port level data A (previous) (_PT_IN_A_BK), and Input port rise data A (_PT_IN_UP) is provided.

FIG. 397 is a flowchart showing the start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) in step S2889 of FIG. 396.
In step S2901, the main control board 50 turns off the blocker 45. That is, after the start switch 41 is operated, control is performed so that even if a medal is inserted, it will not be accepted. In the next step S2902, the main control board 50 turns off the game start display LED 79d. This process is a process of setting the D3 bit in the LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) to "0".
In the next step S2903, the main control board 50 turns off the input display LED 79e. This process is a process of setting the D4 bit in the LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) to "0". Therefore, the input display LED 79e can be turned off immediately after the blocker 45 is turned off.
When the start switch acceptance process is executed through the above process, the blocker 45 is turned off, and the game start display LED 79d and input display LED 79e are turned off.

Next, the process advances to step S2904, and the main control board 50 turns off the re-gaming state identification information flag (_FL_RT_INF). This process is a process of setting the re-gaming state identification information flag to "0". Note that the re-gaming state identification information flag is on in step S2861 (at the start of the game) in FIG. 395. Furthermore, when the on-state of the start switch 41 is detected, the re-gaming state identification information flag is set to "0" based on the detection of the on-state of the start switch 41 in order to turn off the re-gaming state identification signal. When the re-gaming state identification information flag becomes "0", no re-gaming state identification signal is output in the interrupt process.
In the next step S2905, the built-in random number is stored in a register (random number soft latch register) of the MPU. Here, a random number is latched (acquired), and it is determined in step S2917, which will be described later, whether or not the acquired random number is a random number that corresponds to winning.
In the next step S2906, the start switch acceptance permission flag is cleared. This process is a process of setting the D0 bit of the medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) to "0".
Next, the process advances to step S2907, and the setting change permission flag is cleared. This process is a process of setting the D1 bit of the medal management flag to "1". This makes it impossible to change settings.

In the next step S2908, reading of bet medals is executed. The number of bet medals read here is stored in the A register. In the next step S2909, the main control board 50 sets an output request to start reel rotation.
Next, the process advances to step S2910, and the number of bet medals (A register value) read in step S2908 is set in the E register.

In the next step S2911, control command set 1 is executed. This process is a process of storing the information set in steps S2909 and S2910 in the control command buffer.
In step S2912, reading of bet medals is executed. Then, the read number of bet medals is stored in the A register. Although the bet medals are read in step S2908, the A register value may change depending on the control command set 1 in step S2911, so the bet medals are read in again.
Note that when winning a replay, the number of medals automatically bet is set as the number of bet medals. Next, the process advances to step S2913, and the number of read bet medals is doubled. This process is a process of adding the A register value and the A register value and storing the added value in the A register. Furthermore, the address (F024(H)) of the number of medal bet signal outputs is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S2914, interrupt processing is prohibited. Next, the process advances to step S2915, and the number of medal bet signal outputs is set. This process adds the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (the number of medal bet signal outputs) and the A register (the number of bet medals after doubling), and stores the value after the addition in the A register. This is the process of Furthermore, the value of the A register is stored at the address (F024(H)) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the number of medal bet signal outputs is updated. Then, the process advances to step S2916, and interrupt processing is permitted.

The processing in steps S2914 to S2916 above prohibits interruptions before and after updating the number of medal bet signal outputs. By prohibiting this interrupt, it is possible to prevent an interrupt process from being executed during the update of the medal bet signal and a process for updating the number of outputs of the medal bet signal from being executed. That is, after the process of updating the number of outputs of the medal bet signal is completed, interrupt processing is permitted to update the medal bet signal.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when outputting a medal bet signal, the actual number of medals bet is calculated to be doubled, and that value is set as the number of outputs. The reason for this control is that when the betmelt signal is outputted to the outside as a pulse signal that repeatedly turns on and off, it is controlled so that two times of on and off represent one bet number. This also applies to the medal payout signal. When outputting the medal payout signal to the outside, the number of medals to be paid out is doubled, the value is set as the number of outputs of the medal payout signal, and control is performed so that two times, on and off, represent the number of medals to be paid out. .

Next, the process advances to step S2917, and the winning combination lottery means 61 executes a lottery process for winning combinations. This process is a process of drawing a winning number based on the random number value obtained in step S2905. When the winning number is determined, the winning and replay condition device number corresponding to the determined winning number is stored in the storage area of address "F0A9 (H)", and the accessory condition device number corresponding to the determined winning number is stored. , is stored in the storage area at address "F0AA(H)".

In the next step S2918, the main control board 50 determines the shift to an advantageous section. In this embodiment, the winning number is associated with the presence or absence of winning in the advantageous section transfer lottery, and when the winning number is determined, the lottery result of the advantageous section transfer lottery is determined. Here, when it is decided to move to the advantageous section, the section type number (address "F0C4(H)") is set to "1".

In the next step S2919, processing at the start of the game in the main game state is executed. This process executes processes such as lottery and counter updating according to the main game state of the current game.
In the next step S2920, a symbol stop signal set (S_IF_SET) is executed. This process is a process for outputting a test signal regarding the operation timing and pressing order of the stop switch 42 to the testing machine side, and corresponds to the process shown in FIG. 141 (23rd embodiment).
Note that when the gaming machine is actually installed in a hall (store), the gaming machine is not connected to the testing machine, so the test signal is not actually received by the testing machine. However, since the symbol stop signal set (S_IF_SET) exists in the main processing program, test signals regarding the operation timing and pressing order of the stop switch 42 are sent every game even after the gaming machine is installed in the hall. The processing itself for outputting is executed.

In the next step S2921, a lottery process for a pseudo game performance is executed. This process is a process for determining whether or not to execute a pseudo game effect, and when the pseudo game effect number is "0", the random value obtained in step S2905 and various lottery results in steps S2917 to S2919 are used. Based on the result, it is determined whether or not to execute the pseudo game performance. It should be noted that there is a case where it is decided to execute a pseudo game effect before the current game, and in this case, the lottery (determination) in step S2921 is not executed.
Further, when it is determined in step S2921 to execute the pseudo game performance, the determined pseudo game performance number is stored in the address "F0C7(H)".

Next, the process advances to step S2922, and it is determined whether or not to execute a pseudo game performance in the current game. When it is determined that a pseudo game effect is to be executed in the current game, the process advances to step S2923, and a pseudo game effect process (FIG. 398, which will be described later) is executed. After that, the process advances to step S2924. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2922 that the pseudo game performance is not to be executed, the process advances to step S2924.
Note that even if it is determined in step S2921 to execute the pseudo game effect, it may be executed several games after the current game, and the pseudo game effect is not necessarily executed in the current game.

In step S2924, it is determined whether the minimum gaming time has elapsed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the minimum gaming time timer value of the addresses "F0B0(H)" and "F0B1(H)" is "0".
If it is determined that the minimum gaming time has elapsed, the process advances to step S2925 and the minimum gaming time is set. This process is a process of setting the minimum gaming time timer value "3672 (D)" to the addresses "F0B0 (H)" and "F0B1 (H)". When the minimum gaming time is set in step S2925, from this point on, the timer value is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt, and in step S2924 for the next game, it is determined whether the timer value is "0" or not. Ru.

Next, the process advances to step S2926, and the condition device information output time is saved. This process is a process of storing a timer value "58(D)" at the conditional device output time of address "F0B5(H)". Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the accessory condition device signal and the winning and replay condition device signal are output to the testing machine 400 for a predetermined time period of “58×1.1175ms=64.815ms”. Execute the process. The conditional device output time set here is subtracted by "1" from the next interrupt processing in step S455 (timer measurement) in FIG. 151 (23rd embodiment).
Note that the conditional device signal is a signal to be output to a testing machine, and is not actually output on the market. However, the ROM 54 that stores the program processing necessary for output, the information that is the source of the condition device signal, and the RWM 53 (storage area) that can store the output time of the condition device signal is not compatible with the gaming machine (slot machine 10) on the market. It is also provided in In other words, in the market, the ROM 54 and RWM 53 included in gaming machines execute processing for outputting the condition device signal, but the condition device signal is not output.

Next, the process advances to step S2927, and a push order instruction number set (M_ORG_INF) is executed. This process is similar to the process shown in FIG. 48 (11th embodiment), and when the current game is a game that activates the instruction function (turns on the instruction monitor), the push order instruction number is set to the number of acquisitions in the RWM 53. This corresponds to the process of storing data.
Next, the process advances to step S2928, and an acceleration start state is set. This process is similar to step S768 in FIG. 140 (23rd embodiment), and the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) , is a process of storing "3" (00000011 (B)) indicating the start of acceleration. After this process, the reel 31 starts rotating.

When the pseudo game performance is executed, the reel drive state is set to "3" on the condition that the random delay time has elapsed. For example, as shown in Figure 388,
Random delay time of 1st (left) reel: t1
Random delay time of 3rd (right) reel: t3 (t3>t1)
Random delay time of second (middle) reel: t2 (t2>t3)
If set as
The random delay time “t1” of the first reel has passed ↓
Store “3” in the first reel drive status (_WK_RL1_STS) ↓
The random delay time “t3” of the third reel has passed ↓
Store “3” in the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) ↓
The random delay time “t2” of the second reel has passed ↓
"3" is stored in the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS).

In the above start switch reception process, the processes before and after the pseudo game presentation (step S2923) are as follows.
1. Processing executed before pseudo game performance (1) Output of medal bet signal Since the number of outputs of the medal bet signal is set in step S2915, the interrupt processing executed after this step S2915 (FIG. 151 (23rd In step S466 (external signal output) of the embodiment), a medal bet signal is output. Therefore, even in a game where a pseudo game performance is executed, output processing of the medal bet signal is started before the pseudo game performance.
(2) Symbol stop signal setting The symbol stop signal setting in step S2920 is executed before the pseudo game production. Therefore, before the pseudo game performance, the stop operation position information corresponding to the winning combination of the current game is output to the test machine 400, so it is possible to proceed with the test without waiting for the end of the pseudo game performance. .

2. Processing executed after a pseudo game effect (1) Determining whether the minimum playing time has elapsed and saving the minimum playing time When a pseudo game effect is executed in the current game, when the pseudo game effect ends, the previous It is considered that "4.1 seconds" have elapsed since the minimum game time saving process in step S2925 of the game.
Therefore, there is no problem in determining whether or not the minimum playing time has elapsed after the end of the pseudo game performance.
(2) Saving the conditional device output time After the pseudo game performance in step S2923 ends, the conditional device output time is saved in step S2926. Therefore, no conditional device signal is output to the testing machine 400 during the pseudo game performance. Thereby, it is possible to prevent output of a signal that may cause misunderstanding to the testing machine 400.
(3) Push order instruction number setting After the pseudo game performance in step S2923 ends, push order instruction number setting is executed in step S2927. Therefore, when the push order bell is won during AT, the push order instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor after the pseudo game performance. In other words, the push order instruction information is not displayed on the instruction monitor during the pseudo game production. Therefore, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor, the player can know that the main game is being played.

FIG. 398 is a flowchart showing the pseudo game effect processing in step S2923 of FIG. 397.
In step S2940, the main control board 50 stores "10 (H)" in the pseudo game performance state flag. When the value of the pseudo game performance state flag is "10 (H)", it indicates that the pseudo game performance is being performed.
In the next step S2941, the main control board 50 sets a temporary stop table. This process determines the temporary stop position of the reels 31 during a pseudo game production, and is different from the stop position determination table used in the main game. Also, only one type of temporary stop table may be provided, or a plurality of types may be provided depending on the symbol combination to be temporarily stopped, and the temporary stop table corresponding to the pseudo game performance to be executed may be selected.
Similar to this game, the temporary stop table may set the temporary stop position so that the maximum number of symbols to be moved is within 4 symbols from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, or the maximum number of symbols to be moved is 5 symbols or less. The temporary stop position may be determined as described above.

In the next step S2942, rotation of the reel 31 is started. Next, the process advances to step S2943, and the initial value of the pseudo game production time (timer value) is set to address "F0B2 (H)".
In the next step S2944, it is determined whether the pseudo game performance time has become "0". When it is determined that the pseudo game performance time is not "0", the process advances to step S2945, and when it is determined that the pseudo game performance time is "0", the process advances to step S2954.
In step S2945, it is determined whether the stop switch 42 has been operated. When it is determined that the stop switch 42 has been operated, the process advances to step S2946, and when it is determined that the stop switch 42 has not been operated, the process returns to step S2944.

Although the details will be described later, for example, in this game, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the level data of the start switch 41 is determined, and when the level data of the start switch 41 is "1", that is, the start switch When the stop switch 42 is operated with the stop switch 41 turned on, the operation of the stop switch 42 is not accepted and the reel 31 is not controlled to stop.
On the other hand, in the pseudo game presentation, the level data of the start switch 41 is not determined when the stop switch 42 is operated. Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 is operated while the start switch 41 is turned on, the reel 31 is temporarily stopped. As a result, when the start switch 41 is operated, the stop switch 42 is enabled during a pseudo game performance, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the stop switch 42 is enabled. The player can identify that the player is not playing the main game.

In step S2946, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is temporarily stopped. Then, the process advances to step S2947, and the pseudo game presentation time is reset.
Next, the process proceeds to step S2948, and it is determined whether or not all reels 31 have been temporarily stopped. When it is determined that all reels 31 have been temporarily stopped, the process proceeds to step S2949, and it is determined that all reels 31 have not been temporarily stopped. If so, the process returns to step S2944.

In step S2949, swing fluctuation control is executed for all the temporarily stopped reels 31. Next, the process advances to step S2950, and it is determined whether the pseudo game performance time is "0". When it is determined that the pseudo game performance time is "0", the process advances to step S2952, and when it is determined that the pseudo game performance time is not "0", the process advances to step S2951.
In step S2951, it is determined whether the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process advances to step S2952, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S2949.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2944 that the pseudo game presentation time is "0" and the process proceeds to step S2954, the rotating reels 31 are temporarily stopped. Then, the process advances to step S2952. Note that when the rotating reels 31 are temporarily stopped, the swing fluctuation control that is executed when all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped based on the operation of the stop switch 42 is performed until the reels 31 are restarted. It may or may not be performed.
Further, in step S2954, all the rotating reels 31 may be temporarily stopped, or only one reel 31 may be temporarily stopped as described above.
In step S2952, the pseudo game effect state flag and the pseudo game effect number are cleared ("0" is stored in both storage areas). Next, the process advances to step S2953, where random delay processing is executed, and the processing according to this flowchart ends. Note that the re-fluctuation of the reels 31 is performed sequentially from the reels 31 after the random delay time has elapsed (step S2928 in FIG. 397).
Note that step S2952 and step S2953 may be performed in the opposite order. In other words, the random delay process may be a process that is executed after the pseudo game effect ends (the random delay process is executed after the pseudo game effect state flag and the pseudo game effect number are cleared), or The delay process may be a process during the pseudo game performance (the pseudo game performance state flag and the pseudo game performance number are cleared after the random delay process is completed).

Furthermore, as is clear from FIG. 398, the process of updating the advantageous section clear counter is not executed at the end of the pseudo game effect.
The advantageous section clear counter is updated in step S945 during the game end check process in FIG. 148 (23rd embodiment). In other words, the advantageous section clear counter is updated at the end of the main game (not updated at the end of the pseudo game effect).
Therefore, when executing the pseudo game effect, when the pseudo game effect is executed and the main game is subsequently executed, the advantageous section clear counter is decremented by "1". Therefore, no matter how many times the pseudo game effect is executed, the player will not be disadvantaged.
In addition, even if the pseudo game performance is executed, processing related to instruction functions such as subtracting the number of games in the notification game state (AT) or adding on the notification game state based on the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo game performance will not be executed. It is configured.

FIG. 399 is a flowchart showing external signal output in step S466 of FIG. 151 in the 43rd embodiment.
It is assumed that the interrupt processing in the 43rd embodiment is the same as that in FIG. 151 (23rd embodiment).
In FIG. 399, in step S2971, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address (F026(H)) of the RWM 53 that stores the medal signal data in the DE register.
(2) Store the external signal output time of address "F0B4(H)" in the A register.
(3) When the A register value is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the external signal output time has ended. When it is determined that the external signal output time has ended, the process proceeds to step S2972, and when it is determined that the external signal output time has not ended, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S2972, a timer value "92 (D)" is set as the external signal output time.
In the next step S2973, the following processing is executed.
(1) The address (F024(H)) of the RWM 53 that stores the number of medal bet signal outputs is stored in the HL register.
(2) Store the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
(3) When the A register value is "0", it is determined that there is no medal bet signal output count. If it is determined in step S2973 that the medal bet signal has been output, the process advances to step S2974, and if it is determined that the medal bet signal has not been output, the process advances to step S2976.

In the next step S2974, "1" is subtracted from the value (bet signal output count) stored at the address (F024(H)) indicated by the HL register value.
In the next step S2975, the D6 bit of the C register is set to "1". Here, a predetermined output port for outputting an external signal is provided, and a medal bet signal is output from the D6 bit of the predetermined output port, and a medal payout signal is output from the D7 bit. Then, in order to store the signal output from a predetermined output port in the C register, the D6 bit of the C register is set to "1" in step S2975.

In the next step S2976, the following processing is executed.
(1) Set the address value indicated by the HL register value to "+1". As a result, the HL register value changes from address "F024(H)" indicating the number of outputs of the medal bet signal to address "F025(H)" indicating the number of outputs of the medal payout signal.
(2) Store the value (number of medal payout signal outputs) stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
(3) When the A register value is not "0", it is determined that there is a medal payout signal output count. If it is determined in step S2976 that the medal payout signal has been output, the process proceeds to step S2977, and if it is determined that the medal payout signal has not been output, the process proceeds to step S2979.

In step S2977, "1" is subtracted from the number of medal payout signal outputs. Specifically, "1" is subtracted from the value stored at the address (F025(H)) indicated by the HL register value.
In the next step S2978, the D7 bit of the C register is set to "1". Note that this D7 bit corresponds to the D7 bit (medal payout signal) of the predetermined output port. Then, the process advances to step S2979.

In step S2979, the output bit is inverted on/off. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the value (medal signal data) stored at address "F026(H)" in the A register.
(2) Perform an XOR operation on the A register value and the C register value, and store the operation result in the A register.
(3) Store the A register value at address "F026(H)" (medal signal data).

Here, in the C register value, when the number of medal payout signal outputs is not "0", the D7 bit is always "1". Further, when the number of medal bet signal outputs is not "0", the D6 bit is always "1".
On the other hand, in the medal signal data (F026(H)) which is the A register value, when the medal payout signal is on, the D7 bit is "1", and when it is off, the D7 bit is "0". Similarly, in the medal signal data, when the medal bet signal is on, the D6 bit is "1", and when it is off, the D6 bit is "0".

Therefore, for example, when the medal payout signal is "1" and the medal payout signal output count is not "0",
A register value: 10000000
C register value: 10000000
After XOR operation: 00000000 (A register value after update)
Therefore, the updated medal payout signal becomes "0".
Also, when the medal payout signal is "0" and the medal payout signal output count is not "0",
A register value: 00000000
C register value: 10000000
After XOR operation: 10000000 (A register value after update)
Therefore, the updated medal payout signal becomes "1".

The same applies to the medal bet signal. For example, when the medal payout signal is "0", the medal bet signal is "1", the number of medal payout signals is not "0", and the number of medal bet signal outputs is not "0",
A register value: 01000000
C register value: 11000000
After XOR operation: 10000000 (A register value after update)
Therefore, the updated medal payout signal becomes "1" and the medal bet signal becomes "0".
Similarly, for example, when the medal payout signal is "1", the medal bet signal is "0", the number of outputs of the medal payout signal is not "0", and the number of outputs of the medal bet signal is not "0",
A register value: 100000000
C register value: 11000000
After XOR operation: 01000000 (A register value after update)
Therefore, the updated medal payout signal becomes "0" and the medal bet signal becomes "1".

Next, the process advances to step S2980, and output data of a medal bet signal and a medal payout signal are set. This process is a process of storing the value stored at the address "F026(H)" (medal signal data) in the A register.
Through this process, when the medal payout signal is on, the D7 bit of the A register becomes "1", and when the medal bet signal is on, the D6 bit of the A register becomes "1".
Then, the A register value is stored in the predetermined output port. As a result, the external signal is output from the predetermined output port. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Through the above processing, when outputting the medal bet signal and the medal payout signal, the ON signal is turned on at a period of time (92 x 1.1175 ms = 102.81 ms) corresponding to the timer value "92 (D)" of the external signal output time. The signal and the off signal are repeatedly output. Furthermore, each time the timer value "92(D)" of the external signal output time becomes "0", "1" is subtracted from the number of medal bet signal outputs and the number of medal payout signal outputs.

FIG. 400 is a flowchart showing test signal output in step S842 of FIG. 151 in the 43rd embodiment.
First, in step S2991, the main control board 50 sets the off data of the input request lamp signal. The off data of the input request lamp signal is "00000000(B)". This data is stored in a predetermined register (eg, A register).

In the next step S2992, the main control board 50 determines whether the replay operation state flag (_FL_REPLAY) is on. In this process, the replay operation state flag is read, and when it is not "0", it is determined that the replay operation state flag is on, and when it is "0", it is determined that the replay operation state flag is not on. When it is determined that the replay operation state flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2995, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S2993.

In step S2993, the main control board 50 determines whether the input display LED 79e is on. In this process, it is determined whether the D4 bit of the LED display data (_PT_STS_LED) is "1" or not, and when it is "1", it is determined that the input display LED 79e is on. When it is determined that the input display LED 79e is on, the process advances to step S2994, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process advances to step S2995.
In step S2994, ON data of the input request lamp signal is set. In this embodiment, the ON data of the input request lamp signal is "01000000 (B)" (the 6th bit is "1"). This data is ORed with the data stored in the predetermined register, and the value after the calculation is stored in the predetermined register. Then, the process advances to step S2995. In addition, when the data stored in the predetermined register is "00000000 (B)", the process of simply storing "01000000 (B)", which is the ON data of the input request lamp signal, in the predetermined register is performed. You can also use it as In this case, even if the OR operation is omitted, the same result as the OR operation can be obtained.
As described above, when the replay operation state flag (_FL_REPLAY) is on, the on data of the input request lamp signal is not generated, and therefore the input request lamp signal is not output.

In step S2995, the main control board 50 determines whether the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR) is "0". When it is determined that the advantageous section clear counter is not "0", the process advances to step S2996, and when it is determined that it is "0", the process advances to step S2997.
In step S2996, ON data of the advantageous section signal is set. The ON data of the signal during the advantageous period is "10000000 (B)" (the 7th bit is "1"). This data is ORed with the data stored in the predetermined register, and the result of the operation is stored in the predetermined register.

For example, when the on data of the input request lamp signal is set in step S2993 and "01000000 (B)" is stored in the predetermined register, the on data of the advantageous period signal is "10000000 (B)". In some cases, "11000000(B)" obtained by ORing "01000000(B)" and "10000000(B)" is stored in the predetermined register. Then, the process advances to step S2998.
On the other hand, in step S2997, off data of the advantageous section signal is set. The off data of the signal during the advantageous section is "00000000 (B)". This data is ORed with the data stored in the predetermined register, and the result of the operation is stored in the predetermined register. Then, the process advances to step S2998. Incidentally, since the off data of the advantageous section signal is "00000000 (B)", the OR operation between this data and the data stored in the predetermined register may be omitted.

In step S2998, it is determined whether the replay state activation flag (_FL_REPLAY) is on. This judgment is made by reading the value of the replay activation status flag, and if it is "0", it is determined that the replay activation status flag is not on, and if it is not "0", it is determined that the replay activation status flag is on. do. If it is determined that the replay operation state flag is not on, the process advances to step S2999, and if it is determined that it is on, the process advances to step S3000.
In step S2999, off data of the replaying signal is set. The off data of the replaying signal is "00000000(B)". This data is ORed with the data stored in the predetermined register, and the result of the operation is stored in the predetermined register. Then, the process advances to step S3001. Note that, similarly to step S2997, the OR operation may be omitted.

On the other hand, in step S3000, ON data of the replaying signal is set. The on data of the replaying signal is the value "20 (H)" (00100000 (B)) when the replay state activation flag (_FL_REPLAY) is on (see FIG. 394). This data is ORed with the data stored in the predetermined register, and the result of the operation is stored in the predetermined register. For example, when the data stored in the predetermined data is "11000000 (B)", this value is ORed with the on-data "00100000 (B)" of the replaying signal, and the value is "11100000 (B)". )” is stored in the predetermined register. Then, the process advances to step S3001.

In step S3001, accessory signal data is set from the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION). This process is a process of reading the data of the operating state flag, performing an OR operation with the data stored in the predetermined register, and storing the result of the operation in the predetermined register. When the data stored in the predetermined register is, for example, the above-mentioned “11100000 (B)” and the data of the operating state flag (_FL_ACTION) is, for example, “00000011 (B)” (1BB and RB in operation), "11100011(B)" obtained by ORing both data is stored in the predetermined register.

FIG. 401 shows example 1 of a flowchart following FIG. 400.
Proceeding to step S3002 in FIG. 401, it is determined whether the pseudo game performance state flag (_FL_FREEPLAY) is on. Here, when the pseudo game performance state flag is not "0", it is determined that it is on, and when the pseudo game performance state flag is "0", it is determined that it is off.
When it is determined that the pseudo game effect state flag is not on, the process advances to step S3003, and off data of the pseudo game effect signal is set. Here, the value "00000000 (B)" of the pseudo game effect state flag is ORed with the data stored in the predetermined register, and the result of the calculation is stored in the predetermined register. Then, the process advances to step S3005. Note that, similarly to step S2997, the OR operation may be omitted.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3002 that the pseudo game performance state flag is on and the process proceeds to step S3004, the ON data of the pseudo game performance signal is set. Here, the value of the pseudo game effect state flag "10 (H)", that is, "00010000 (B)" is ORed with the data stored in the predetermined register, and the result of the operation is stored in the predetermined register. Then, the process advances to step S3005.

In step S3005, the data stored in the predetermined register is output as a test signal. Through the above processing, as shown on the right side of step S3005, the 0th to 3rd bits are the operating state flag signal, the 4th bit is the pseudo game performance signal, the 5th bit is the replaying signal, and the 6th bit is input. A request ramp signal and a test signal whose 7th bit is an advantageous interval signal are output. After outputting the test signal in step S3005, the predetermined register is cleared.
Next, the process advances to step S3006, and the main control board 50 determines whether the re-gaming state identification information flag (_FL_RT_INF) is on. When the re-gaming state identification information flag is "0", it is determined that it is not on, and the process advances to step S3008. On the other hand, when the re-gaming state identification information flag is other than "0", it is determined that it is on, and the process advances to step S3007.

In step S3007, replay state identification signal data is set. This process is a process of reading the data of the RT status number (_NB_RT_STS) (see FIG. 133) and storing it in the predetermined register. For example, when the current RT is RT1, the RT status number (_NB_RT_STS) is, for example, "00000001 (B)", so this data is read and stored in the predetermined register. Then, the process proceeds to step S3012, and processing for outputting the data stored in the predetermined register as a replay state identification signal can be executed. This ends the processing according to this flowchart.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3006 that the replay state identification signal is not on and the process proceeds to step S3008, the main control board 50 reads the data of the conditional device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) and adjusts the conditional device output time according to the value of the conditional device output time. , the process advances to steps S3009 to S3011. For example, when the conditional device output time is a value of “58(D)” to “49(D)” or “0(D)”, the process advances to step S3009, and the data of “00000000(B)” is input to the conditional device signal. set.
Here, the conditional device output time has a value of "58 (D)" to "49 (D)" during 10 interrupts (11.175 ms). As a result, processing for outputting "00000000 (B)" as the conditional device signal can be executed for about 10 ms. Therefore, for 10 interrupts (11.175 ms), processing for outputting "00000000 (B)" as a conditional device signal can be executed.
Since the main processing continues even while "00000000 (B)" is being output as the conditional device signal, no delay in the game occurs.

Further, when the condition device output time is between “48 (D)” and “25 (D)”, the process advances to step S3010, and the data of the accessory condition device signal is set.
Here, when setting the data of the accessory condition device signal, the 0th to 5th bits are 0 to 5 bits of the accessory condition device number, the 6th bit is "0", and the 7th bit is "1". data is stored in the predetermined register.

Furthermore, when the condition device output time is between "24 (D)" and "1 (D)", the process advances to step S3011, and data of the winning and replay condition device signal is set.
Here, when setting the data of the winning and replay condition device signal, the 0th to 5th bits are the winning and replay condition device number, the 6th bit is “1,” and the 7th bit is “0.” ” is stored in the predetermined register.
The process then proceeds to step S3012 and outputs the conditional device signal as a test signal.
As described above, in the test signal output, the operating state flag signal, the pseudo game performance signal, the replay signal, the input request lamp signal, and the advantageous section signal are output as the test signals. Next, a conditional device signal is output as a test signal.

In addition, in example 1 of FIG. 401, the 4th bit of the test signal output in step S3005 is assigned to the pseudo game performance signal.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to output the pseudo game performance signal independently, separately from the test signal in step S3005.
FIG. 402 shows example 2 of a flowchart following FIG. 400.
In FIG. 402, a test signal is output in step S3005, and in this test signal, the 0th to 4th bits become the operating state flag signal.

In step S3002 of FIG. 402, if it is determined that the pseudo game effect state flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S3021, and if it is determined that the pseudo game effect state flag is on, the process proceeds to step S3022.
In step S3021, it is possible to execute a process for outputting "00 (H)" indicating that a pseudo game performance is not in progress as a pseudo game performance signal. On the other hand, in step S3022, it is possible to execute a process for outputting "FF (H)" indicating that a pseudo game performance is being performed as a pseudo game performance signal.
Therefore, in example 2, in the test signal output, a 1-byte test signal (operation status flag signal, re-gaming signal, input request lamp signal, advantageous section signal), 1-byte pseudo-gaming performance signal, and 1 Processing for outputting a byte conditional device signal will be executed.

<44th embodiment>
The 44th embodiment relates to clearly indicating the main reel when a video reel, sub-reel, etc. are provided. Note that, in a broader sense, a video reel, a sub-reel, etc. are sometimes referred to as a "performance reel."
Here, the meanings of "main reel", "sub reel", and "video reel" are as follows.
The "main reels" are for displaying symbol combinations as game results, and correspond to the left, middle, and right reels 31 in FIG. The main reel is simply referred to as a "reel" or "reel", and is also referred to as a "main reel". In the following description, the main reel is given the reference numeral "31" and is referred to as "reel 31" or "main reel 31."

A "sub-reel" is one that displays symbols in the same way as the reels 31, but does not display the game result based on symbols or symbol combinations when stopped, but instead displays symbols or symbol combinations as one of the effects. It is. The symbols on the main reel and the symbols on the sub-reels may be the same, similar, or dissimilar.
Note that, like the main reel, the sub-reel is a substantially cylindrical (annular) shaped body as a tangible object. Therefore, the sub-reels do not include intangible objects, such as video reels whose images are displayed by the image display device 23.
The sub-reel may start rotating in accordance with the operation timing of the start switch 41, or may not start rotating.

In addition, the sub-reel may stop rotating in accordance with the operation timing of the stop switch 42, may not stop rotating, or may start rotating if it had been previously stopped.
Furthermore, the sub-reel may rotate and stop during one game, or may not rotate (continue to stop) during one game.
The sub-reel is also called a "production reel", "auxiliary reel", "pseudo reel", etc. In the following description, the sub-reel is given the reference numeral "34" and is referred to as "sub-reel 34."
Note that the number of sub reels 34 may be one, or the number of sub reels 34 may be equal to the number of stop switches 42 (for example, three).
In the 44th embodiment, a sub-reel 34 that may be mistakenly perceived as displaying a game result, and a sub-reel 34 that may not be mistakenly perceived as displaying a game result are exemplified.
Note that even if the sub-reel 34 may be mistakenly recognized as displaying game results, it is not prohibited to provide the sub-reel 34.

Furthermore, the term "video reel" refers to an image displayed by the image display device 23, which imitates a reel, an image that makes one imagine a reel, an image similar to a reel, etc., and which displays a symbol or a combination of symbols as an effect. .
The video reels are not limited to cases in which images are displayed as if the reels are rotating, but also cases in which only symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, when displaying an image imitating the reels, there are cases where the image is displayed three-dimensionally (three-dimensionally) (for example, as shown in FIG. 405 described later), and cases where the image is displayed planarly (two-dimensionally) ( For example, FIG. 407), which will be described later.

Note that the "image display device 23" includes a dot display, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a micro LED display, a quantum dot film display, and the like.
In the 44th embodiment, an image that is displayed in imitation of a reel or the like so that it may be mistakenly perceived as displaying a game result is referred to as a "video reel."
On the other hand, images that are unlikely to be mistakenly recognized as displaying game results are called "decorative variable images" and are distinguished from "video reels."
Hereinafter, the video reel is given the symbol "23a" and is referred to as "video reel 23a." Further, the decorative variable image is given the code "23b" and is referred to as the "decorative variable image 23b".

When displaying an image of the video reel 23a, or when providing a sub-reel 34 that may be mistaken for displaying game results, it is preferable to clearly display the main reel 31. This is to prevent the player from confusing the main reel 31 with the video reel 23a or the sub-reel 34 and mistakenly thinking that the symbol or symbol combination displayed by the video reel 23a or the sub-reel 34 is a game result.
FIG. 403 shows an example in which three reels 31 (main reels) can be seen from the display window (also called "glass plate") 18. FIG. 403 is an example in which "main reel" or the like is displayed (printed, etc.) near the reel 31. In this way, when displaying an image of the video reel 23a or when providing a sub-reel 34 that may be mistaken for displaying gaming results, in order to clearly indicate that the reel 31 is a reel showing gaming results, It is necessary to make a statement as shown in Figure 403.

FIG. 404 shows an example in which the viewing area of the reel 31 is formed within the area of the image display device 23. Also in this case, when displaying an image of the video reel 23a or when providing a sub-reel 34 that may be mistaken for displaying gaming results, clearly indicate that the reel 31 is a reel showing gaming results. In order to do this, the image display device 23 displays an image such as "reel". In this case, the image display such as "reels" is not erased during the game. However, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the game is on standby, if a demo screen or the like is displayed on the image display device 23, it is possible to erase the image display such as "reels".
In the example of FIG. 403, "main reel" is displayed, but "main reel", "reel", "reel", "REEL", etc. may be displayed.
Similarly, although "reel" is displayed in the example of FIG. 404, "main reel", "main reel", "reel", "REEL", etc. may be displayed.
Further, in the display shown in FIGS. 403 and 404, the font size is set to 30 points or more to make it stand out.

FIGS. 405 to 409 are diagrams illustrating whether the above-mentioned “video reel” applies or not. 405 to 407 show examples (Example 1 to Example 3) that apply to the video reel 23a, and FIGS. 408 and 409 show examples (Example 4) that do not apply to the video reel 23a (correspond to the decoration variation image 23b). and Example 5) are shown.
Note that FIGS. 405 to 409 are merely illustrative of one standard; the display formats shown in FIGS. 405 to 407 always correspond to a video reel, and the display formats shown in FIGS. 408 and 409 always correspond to a video reel. That doesn't mean it doesn't apply to reels.
"Applicable to video reels" does not mean that the conditions for whether or not it corresponds to video reels are clearly defined in advance and that the conditions are met; It means that it is judged based on conventional wisdom that there is a risk of misinterpretation.

FIG. 405 shows an example in which the image display device 23 displays the video reel 23a as an image. In this example, like the reels 31, three video reels 23a (three-dimensional reel images) are displayed, and each video reel 23a has three symbols of the upper row, middle row, and lower row, like the reels 31. This is an example of displaying an image.
Then, based on the operation of the start switch 41, all the video reels 23a become rotating images, and based on the operation of the stop switch 42, the video reel 23a corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 becomes a still image. The symbol image on the video reel 23a may be the same as the symbol on the reel 31, may be a similar symbol, or may be a different symbol.
The video reel 23a shown in FIG. 405 has almost the same form as the rule 31, and there is a risk that the video reel 23a may be mistakenly perceived as showing the game result. Therefore, the example shown in FIG. 405 is considered to correspond to a video reel.

FIG. 406 shows an example in which the video reel 23a is displayed as an image by the image display device 23. In this example, like the reels 31, three video reels 23a are displayed as images, but each video reel 23a is an example in which one symbol image is displayed.
In this example, as well as the example in FIG. 405, all video reels 23a become rotating images based on the operation of the start switch 41, and based on the operation of the stop switch 42, the video reel 23a corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is rotated. It becomes a still image. The symbol image on the video reel 23a may be the same as the symbol on the reel 31, may be a similar symbol, or may be a different symbol.
The example shown in FIG. 406, like the example shown in FIG. 405, has almost the same form as Rule 31, and there is a risk that it may be mistakenly interpreted as indicating a game result. Therefore, the example shown in FIG. 406 is considered to correspond to a video reel.

FIG. 407 shows an example in which the video reel 23a is displayed as an image by the image display device 23. The video reel 23a in this example includes a "3x3" matrix-shaped symbol image display area, and nine symbol images vary independently or according to a predetermined rule.
Also in this case, all symbol images become rotated images based on the operation of the start switch 41, and based on the operation of the stop switch 42, a predetermined symbol image corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 becomes a still image. Further, the symbol image may be the same symbol as the symbol on the reel 31, a similar symbol, or a different symbol.
In the example shown in Fig. 407, each symbol image changes independently, so although the form is different from the rotation state of the reels, it uses an expression that imitates the reels, and there is a risk that it may be mistaken as indicating the game result. There is. Therefore, the example shown in FIG. 407 is considered to correspond to a video reel.
No, when displaying images in a matrix, it is not limited to "3x3".

In the example of FIG. 408, a decorative variable image 23b (an image consisting of numbers, letters, figures, symbols, designs, etc.; the same applies hereinafter) is displayed on the image display device 23. In this example, three decorative variable images 23b are provided to match the number of reels 31. Then, based on the operation of the start switch 41, the decorative variable image 23b becomes a variable state, and based on the operation of the stop switch 42, the decorative variable image 23b corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 becomes a static state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there are cases where the value does not change in accordance with the operation of the start switch 41 or the stop switch 42. Further, the decorative variation image 23b is different from the symbols on the reels 31.
It is considered that if three rows of decorative variable images 23b in FIG. 408 are provided, the video reel 23a shown in FIG. 407 will be brought closer. However, in the example shown in FIG. 408, there is no expression imitating the reels, and the target image simply changes, so there is no risk of it being misperceived as showing a game result.
Therefore, the example in FIG. 408 is considered not to apply to video reels.

In the example of FIG. 409, the decorative variation image 23b is displayed on the image display device 23. The image display device 23 in this example is provided, for example, on the left or right side of the display window 18 of the reel 31. Then, based on the operation of the start switch 41, the decorative variable image 23b becomes a variable state, and based on the operation of the stop switch 42, the decorative variable image 23b becomes a static state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there are cases where the value does not change in accordance with the operation of the start switch 41 or the stop switch 42. Further, the decorative variation image 23b is different from the symbols on the reels 31.
In the example shown in FIG. 409, there is no expression imitating the reels, and the target image simply changes, so there is no possibility of it being misperceived as showing a game result.
Therefore, the example in FIG. 409 is considered not to apply to video reels.

405 to 407 are considered to correspond to the video reel 23a, so as shown in FIGS. 403 and 404, the reel (main It is necessary to clearly indicate that the game is a reel, spinning drum) and that it is a display of game results.
On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 408 and 409, the video reel 23a does not apply, so there is no need to clearly indicate the reel 31 as shown in FIGS. 403 and 404. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the decorative variation image 23b as shown in FIGS. 408 and 409 is provided, the reel 31 may be clearly shown as shown in FIGS. 403 and 404.

Next, the sub-reel 34 will be explained.
410 to 414 are diagrams showing examples 1 to 5 of the sub-reel 34.
In example 1 in FIG. 410, like the reels 31, three sub-reels 34 are provided, and the symbols are configured so that they can be seen through the display window 18'. Furthermore, like the reels 31, each sub-reel 34 displays three symbols: an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. Example 1 in FIG. 410 uses the video reel 23a in FIG. 405 as the actual sub-reel 34.
Then, based on the operation of the start switch 41, the rotation of the reel 31 and the sub-reel 34 is started, and based on the operation of the stop switch 42, the rotation of the reel 31 and the sub-reel 34 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is stopped. . Therefore, when all the sub-reels 34 are stopped, symbols or symbol combinations are stopped and displayed by the sub-reels 34.
In this case, since the sub-reel 34 is an effect device having almost the same structure as the reel 31, there is a risk that the sub-reel 34 may be mistakenly perceived as displaying game results.

Example 2 in FIG. 411 has three sub-reels 34, similar to the reels 31, and is configured so that the symbols can be seen through the display window 18'. Furthermore, each sub-reel 34 displays one symbol (this point differs from the structure of Example 1 in FIG. 410). Example 2 in FIG. 411 uses the video reel 23a in FIG. 406 as the actual sub-reel 34.
Then, based on the operation of the start switch 41, the rotation of the reel 31 and the sub-reel 34 is started, and based on the operation of the stop switch 42, the rotation of the reel 31 and the sub-reel 34 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is stopped. . Therefore, when all the sub-reels 34 are stopped, symbols or symbol combinations are stopped and displayed by the sub-reels 34.
In this case, since the sub-reel 34 is an effect device having almost the same structure as the reel 31, there is a risk that the sub-reel 34 may be mistakenly perceived as displaying game results.

In example 3 of FIG. 412, the reel placed on the leftmost side in the figure is the sub-reel 34. Further, a first reel 31 (corresponding to the left reel 31) is provided on the rightmost side, and the display window 18' for the first reel 31 is structured so that only the lower symbols can be seen through.
Furthermore, the symbols on the sub-reel 34 are the same as the symbols on the reel 31. For example, the symbol "7" in the middle of the sub-reel 34 is the same as the symbol "7" in the middle of the second and third reels 31.

Then, based on the operation of the start switch 41, the rotation of the first to third reels 31 and the sub-reel 34 is started.
Further, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the sub reel 34 and the first reel 31 are stopped. Furthermore, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated, the second reel 31 stops. Further, when the right stop switch 42 is operated, the third reel 31 stops.
In this example, the sub-reel 34 is placed right next to the reel 31, and the symbols on the sub-reel 34 also use the symbols on the reel 31, so there is a risk of misunderstanding that the sub-reel 34 is displaying the game result. In other words, there is a risk that the player may mistakenly believe that the game result is displayed by the symbol combination consisting of the sub reel 34, the second reel 31, and the third reel 31.

Since there is a risk that the sub-reels 34 in Examples 1 to 3 above may be mistaken for displaying gaming results, the sub-reels 34 should be clearly displayed in contrast to the (main) reels 31, as shown in FIGS. 403 and 404. I do.

In example 4 of FIG. 413, a display window 18' is provided above the three reels 31, and the sub-reel 34 is arranged so that one symbol of the sub-reel 34 can be seen from the display window 18'. In this case, the rotation axis of the sub-reel 34 is in the vertical direction in the figure. In other words, the symbols on the sub-reel 34 move in the left-right direction in the figure.
In the case of this sub-reel 34, it may not rotate at all during one game. Furthermore, when the start switch 41 is operated, it may rotate and then stop. Furthermore, although it does not rotate when the start switch 41 is operated, it may rotate when the first to third stop switches 42 are operated, and then stop.

Further, the symbols on the sub-reel 34 may be the same as, similar to, or different from the symbols on the reel 31.
In this example, since the sub-reel 34 is placed alone (separately from the reels 31), the sub-reel 34 is not mistakenly recognized as one of the reels 31, and the sub-reel 34 is recognized as a production reel. can do. Therefore, it is thought that there will be no misunderstanding that the sub-reel 34 is displaying game results.

In example 5 of FIG. 414, a display window 18' is provided further to the right of the three reels 31, and the sub-reel 34 is arranged so as to be visible from this display window 18'.
In the case of this sub-reel 34, it may not rotate at all during one game. Further, when the start switch 41 is operated, it may rotate and then stop. Furthermore, although it does not rotate when the start switch 41 is operated, it may rotate when the first to third stop switches 42 are operated, and then stop.
Furthermore, the symbols on the sub-reels 34 are different from the symbols on the reels 31. Note that, as shown in FIG. 414, the base color of the sub-reel 34 may be different from the base color of the reel 31.
In this example, although the sub-reel 34 is arranged side by side with the reel 31, since the symbol on the sub-reel 34 is completely different from the symbol on the reel 31, there is no chance that the sub-reel 34 will be mistaken as one of the reels 31, and the sub-reel 34 can be recognized as a performance reel. Therefore, it is thought that there will be no misunderstanding that the sub-reels 34 are displaying game results.

Since the sub-reels 34 shown in Examples 4 and 5 above are not likely to be misidentified as displaying gaming results, it is considered that the indications shown in FIGS. 403 and 404 are not necessary for the (main) reels 31. . However, even when the sub-reel 34 is provided as in Example 4 or Example 5, the display shown in FIGS. 403 and 404 may be performed.

Although the forty-third and forty-fourth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications as described below are possible, for example.
A. 43rd Embodiment (1) As shown in FIG. 386, the lighting color of the stop switch lamp during the pseudo game performance (when the stop switch 42 operation is accepted) is purple. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the stop switch lamp may be turned off during the pseudo game performance. Alternatively, the lighting color of the stop switch lamp may be the same between the pseudo game presentation and the main game (blue when an operation is accepted, red when an operation is not accepted).
By making the lighting mode (lighting color and lighting pattern) of the stop switch lamp different between the main game and the pseudo game effect, it is possible to determine whether it is a real game or a pseudo game effect based on the lighting mode of the stop switch lamp. It becomes possible.
On the other hand, if the lighting mode (lighting color and lighting pattern) of the stop switch lamp is the same between the main game and the pseudo game production, it is determined whether it is the main game or the pseudo game production based on the lighting mode of the stop switch lamp. It is possible to make it impossible to determine whether the
In addition, in this game as well, the lighting color of the stop switch lamp may be made different between when the push order instruction information is being displayed by the instruction monitor and when it is not being displayed. For example, when an operation of the stop switch 42 is being accepted, the stop switch 42 may be lit in white while the push order instruction information is being displayed, and may be lit in blue while the push order instruction information is not being displayed.

(2) During the game, the time during which the stop switch 42 is not operated is counted, and when the time during which the stop switch 42 is not operated exceeds 60 seconds, an image such as "Please stop the reels." An example of this is displaying information.
On the other hand, if the stop switch 42 is not operated during the pseudo game performance, the following control may be performed.
First, as explained in FIG. 398, when 20 seconds pass without the stop switch 42 being operated, the rotating reel 31 is temporarily stopped. In this way, an example of not displaying an image such as "Please stop the reels" during the pseudo game performance is possible.

Second, if, for example, 30 seconds (shorter time than the actual game) elapse without the stop switch 42 being operated during the pseudo game performance, an image such as "Please stop the reels" is displayed. (In this case, automatic temporary stop will not occur in 20 seconds).
In this way, for example, if you wait 30 seconds without operating the stop switch 42 and an image such as "Please stop the reels" is displayed, it means that a pseudo game is being produced, and the stop switch 42 is not operated. If an image such as "Please stop the reels" is not displayed even after 30 seconds have elapsed without any operation, it can be determined that this is the main game.

In addition, during the pseudo game performance, after an image such as "Please stop the reels" is displayed after 30 seconds have elapsed, the stop switch 42 is not operated even after 10 seconds have elapsed from the time the image was displayed. When this occurs, the reel 31 may be automatically temporarily stopped. Alternatively, similarly to the main game, when an image such as "Please stop the reels" is displayed during the pseudo game performance, the automatic temporary stop of the reels 31 may not be performed.
On the other hand, in both the main game and the pseudo game presentation, when 60 seconds have elapsed without the stop switch 42 being operated, an image such as "Please stop the reels" may be displayed. In this way, it is possible to make it impossible to determine whether the game is a real game or a pseudo game performance based on the timing at which an image such as "Please stop the reels" is displayed.

Furthermore, it is assumed that in the pseudo game performance, the time until an image such as "Please stop the reels" is displayed when the stop switch 42 is not operated is set to 60 seconds, which is the same as in the main game. In this case, after temporarily stopping all the reels 31, wait until 60 seconds for the start switch 41 to be operated, and if the start switch 41 is not operated after 60 seconds, the pseudo game effect is ended, The reels 31 may be restarted through random delay processing. Alternatively, after the temporary stop of all the reels 31, the operable time of the start switch 41 is set to a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds as explained in FIG. 398) shorter than 60 seconds from the time when all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped, and the time is When the time has elapsed, the reels 31 may be restarted through random delay processing.
Further, after all the reels 31 have been temporarily stopped, the pseudo game performance may not end unless the start switch 41 is operated, and the game may wait until the start switch 41 is operated. In this case, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without the start switch 41 being operated, an image such as "Please operate the start switch 41" may be displayed.

(3) In this game, after the start switch 41 is turned on, when the start switch 41 is kept on and the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the reels 31 may or may not be executed. Examples include.
In the former case, when the stop switch 42 is operated, it is determined whether or not the D6 bit of the input port level data A in FIG. 133 is "0". The reel 31 stop control is executed, but when the D6 bit is not "0", the reel 31 stop control is not executed.
On the other hand, in the latter case, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the reel 31 may be executed without determining the value of the D6 bit of the input port level data A.

Further, even during the pseudo game presentation, when the start switch 41 is maintained in the ON state and the stop switch 42 is operated, temporary stop control of the reels 31 may or may not be executed.
In this case, similarly to the present game, in the former case, when the stop switch 42 is operated, it is determined whether or not the D6 bit of the input port level data A is "0", and the D6 bit is When the D6 bit is "0", temporary stop control of the reels 31 is executed, but when the D6 bit is not "0", temporary stop control of the reels 31 is not executed.
On the other hand, in the latter case, when the stop switch 42 is operated, temporary stop control of the reel 31 may be executed without determining the value of the D6 bit of the input port level data A.

Furthermore, the same control may be performed for the main game and the pseudo game performance. For example, in this game, when the start switch 41 is maintained in the ON state and the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 is controlled to stop, the start switch 41 is maintained in the ON state in the pseudo game performance. This is a case where temporary stop control of the reel 31 is executed when the stop switch 42 is operated.
In this way, if the stop control or temporary stop control of the reels 31 is the same between the main game and the pseudo game presentation, the stop control or temporary stop control can be performed using the same control process (module) between the main game and the pseudo game presentation. Since the control becomes executable, the program capacity can be reduced. In addition, by using the same control process for the main game and the pseudo game production, even if it is confirmed whether or not the stop switch 42 can be operated with the start switch 41 turned on, it is possible to It is possible to make it impossible to determine whether a game is being played or a pseudo game performance is being performed.

On the other hand, for example, in this game, when the start switch 41 is maintained in the ON state and the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the reels 31 is not executed, but in the pseudo game effect, the ON state of the start switch 41 is maintained. When the stop switch 42 is operated, temporary stop control of the reel 31 may be executed.
In this way, when different stop control or temporary stop control is used for the main game and the pseudo game production, if it is confirmed whether or not the stop switch 42 can be operated while the start switch 41 is turned on, the main game can be stopped. It becomes possible to determine whether a game is being played or a pseudo game performance is being performed.

(4) A method of controlling the reels 31 to temporarily stop when the stop switch 42 is operated while the reset switch 153 (FIG. 95) is pressed at a predetermined timing during the execution of a pseudo game performance and a method of controlling the reel 31 so as not to temporarily stop it.
Similarly, if the stop switch 42 is operated while the bet switch 40 is being pressed during the execution of a pseudo game performance, there is a method for controlling the reels 31 to temporarily stop, and a method for controlling the reels 31 so as not to temporarily stop. For example, there is a method of controlling.
Furthermore, in the same way, if the stop switch 42 is operated while the payment switch 43 is pressed during execution of a pseudo game production, there is a method of controlling the reels 31 to temporarily stop, and a method of controlling the reels 31 to temporarily stop. For example, there is a method of controlling
As mentioned above, when the reels 31 are not temporarily stopped when the stop switch 42 is operated while the reset switch 153, bet switch 40, and settlement switch 43 are pressed during the execution of the pseudo game performance. In this case, by executing the operation during the pseudo game performance, it becomes possible to determine whether or not these switches are functioning normally.

(5) If a power outage occurs during execution of the acceleration process of the reels 31 in the pseudo game performance, when the power on process is executed thereafter, the main control board 50 accelerates the reels 31 in the pseudo game performance. Execute from the continuation of the process.
However, this is not limited to this, and if a power outage occurs during the execution of the acceleration process of the reels 31 in the pseudo game performance, the main control board 50 will stop the pseudo game performance and perform the acceleration process of the reels 31 in the main game. may be executed.
(6) The period of shaking fluctuations in the pseudo game performance was set to be less than 500 ms as described above. On the other hand, the time for one rotation of the reel 31 is set to 750 ms. Therefore, the period of the swing fluctuation is set to a shorter time (different time) than the one rotation time of the reel 31.
For this reason, for example, when some of the reels 31 are temporarily stopped in a pseudo game production and some of the other reels 31 are rotating, the swing fluctuation control is sequentially started from the temporarily stopped reels 31 (FIG. 384) In this case, there are reels 31 that are temporarily stopped and performing swing fluctuation control, and reels 31 that are rotating. In this case, since the period of the swing fluctuation is different from the rotation period of the reel 31, it is possible to prevent the period of the swing fluctuation from becoming a push-up aid.

(7) The specified number in this embodiment is only "3" because it is based on the 23rd embodiment (see FIG. 116).
On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (twelfth embodiment), it is possible to make the game possible with either the specified number "2" or "3".
In this case, the activation of the instruction function is limited to the specified number of 1, so for example, if the specified number of activation of the instruction function is set to ``3'', in a game with the specified number of ``2'', it is possible to win the push order bell. Even at times, the indication function is inoperable.
Under the above circumstances,
a) Assume that it is determined after how many games a pseudo game effect is to be executed (so-called timed type). For example, when it is decided to execute a pseudo game effect after playing "3", "3" is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and after that, "1" is subtracted for each game and stored in the predetermined storage area. A pseudo game performance is executed in a game where the value becomes "0".

In this case, the value of the predetermined storage area may be subtracted only when the game is executed with the specified number "3". In other words, when the game is executed with the specified number "2", the value in the predetermined storage area is not subtracted.
Therefore, when a game is executed with a specified number of "2" in a game in which a pseudo game effect is scheduled to be executed, the value of the predetermined storage area is not subtracted from "1" to "0" and remains "1". However, in this game, the pseudo game performance is not executed. In this case, the pseudo game performance is carried over to the next game or later.
Then, when a game is executed with the specified number "3" in the next game, the value in the predetermined storage area is subtracted from "1" to "0", and a pseudo game effect is executed in the next game.

b) When determining whether or not to execute a pseudo-gaming effect for the relevant game, the said lottery will be executed when the game is played with the specified number of ``3'', but when the game is played with the specified number of ``2''. When a lottery is held, the lottery may not be executed.
Alternatively, when a game is played with a specified number of "3", a lottery is executed with a predetermined probability of winning, but when a game is played with a specified number of "2", a lottery is performed with a probability lower than the predetermined probability. One example is to perform a lottery.

In addition, when executing a pseudo game effect in a timed manner during an advantageous period, the 1500th game, which is the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous period, is executed with the specified number "2" while the pseudo game effect is latent, and once the normal If the game returns to the zone, it is preferable that the pseudo game effect is not executed even if the game is executed with the specified number "3" from the next game onward. At this time, it is preferable to clear the pseudo game number, etc. that manages the pseudo game performance at the end of the final game of the advantageous section. With this configuration, in the case of transition from advantageous section to normal section to advantageous section, the pseudo game performance that was scheduled to be executed in the advantageous section before the transition to the normal section will be executed in the advantageous section after the transition to the normal section. You can prevent this from happening.

(8) If a recoverable error, an unrecoverable error, or a door open error occurs during a pseudo game performance (if a predetermined error occurs), the pseudo game display lamp 21a is turned on. The light may be turned off or the pseudo game display may be hidden. With this configuration, priority is given to notification of the occurrence of an error, and the player can take measures such as calling a hall clerk.
On the other hand, even if a recoverable error, an unrecoverable error, or a door open error occurs during the pseudo game performance (if a predetermined error occurs), the pseudo game display lamp 21a It is also possible to continue lighting or displaying a pseudo game. With this configuration, it becomes possible to understand that an error has occurred during the pseudo game performance.

(9) The image display device 23 may be provided on the lower panel provided on the front door. In other words, the image display device 23 may be provided at the top when the stop switch 42 is used as a reference, and the image display device 23 may be provided at the bottom when the stop switch 42 is used as the reference. In such a case, during the pseudo game presentation, the notification that the pseudo game presentation is in progress (for example, the display of "FREEPLAY" shown in FIG. It is preferable to display it on the display device 23 (not to display it on the image display device 23 provided at the bottom with respect to the stop switch 42). In this way, when the stop switch 42 is used as a reference, the image is displayed on the image display device 23 provided at the top, and when the stop switch 42 is used as the reference, the image is displayed on the image display device 23 provided at the bottom. Compared to this, it is easier for the player to see the notification that it is a pseudo game performance, making it difficult for the player to confuse the main game with the pseudo game performance. In addition, when the image display device 23 provided at the upper part of the stop switch 42 is used as a reference to notify that a pseudo game performance is in progress, the image provided at the bottom of the stop switch 42 is used as a reference. Even if the display device 23 also provides notification that it is a pseudo game performance, the above-mentioned effect can be obtained.
In contrast, the notification that a pseudo game performance is in progress is not displayed on the image display device 23 provided at the top when the stop switch 42 is used as a reference, but on the bottom when the stop switch 42 is used as the reference. By displaying it on the image display device 23 provided, the player can realize that it is a pseudo game production compared to the case where the stop switch 42 is used as a reference and the image display device 23 provided at the top is used as a reference. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the main game and the pseudo game effect, and when the reels 31 are temporarily stopped during the pseudo game effect, it is possible to give a surprise and increase the interest of the game. .

(10) The 43rd embodiment is not limited to the reel-type game machine under the Entertainment Business Act, but for example, a parrot that uses game balls, or uses electronic information (electronic medals) without using physical medals (as tangible objects). It can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines) and casino machines.
(11) The first to forty-third embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to forty-third embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

B. 44th Embodiment (1) When displaying an image of the video reel 23a, or when providing a sub-reel 34 that may cause misunderstanding of game results, the main reel is clearly displayed. In this case, it is not necessary to clearly indicate that the video reel 23a is a video reel, or to clearly indicate that the sub-reel 34 is a sub-reel. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the video reel 23a may be clearly marked as a video reel, and the sub-reel 34 may be clearly marked as a sub-reel.
(2) In the 44th embodiment, "video reels" are uniformly defined as those that may lead to misidentification of game results. '', it is also possible to divide the video reels into video reels that are likely to misidentify game results and video reels that are not likely to misidentify game results.
(3) As shown in FIG. 404, when the main reel is clearly displayed using the image display device 23, the main reel is not clearly displayed during the setting change, but is displayed in the image display area that clearly indicates that it is the main reel. Information regarding setting changes (for example, setting value information) may be displayed as an image.
Similarly, during the setting confirmation, the main reel may not be clearly displayed, and information regarding setting changes (for example, setting value information) may be displayed as an image in the image display area that clearly indicates the main reel.

(4) Furthermore, the main reel may be clearly displayed even while waiting for a game. Furthermore, in this case, the main reel may be clearly displayed even during the demo screen. When performing a specific display (for example, displaying the name of the manufacturer of the gaming machine) on the demo screen, the main reels may be clearly displayed on the front layer of the specific display.
Furthermore, while an unrecoverable error is occurring, the main reel is not clearly displayed, but information about the error (for example, the contents of the unrecoverable error that is occurring) is displayed in the image display area that clearly indicates that it is the main reel. may be displayed as an image.
Similarly, while a recoverable error is occurring, the main reel is not clearly displayed, and information about the error (for example, the contents of the recoverable error that has occurred) is displayed as an image in the image display area that clearly indicates that it is the main reel. May be displayed.
(5) On the other hand, the main reel may be clearly displayed even while changing the settings, checking the settings, while an unrecoverable error is occurring, or while a recoverable error is occurring.

(6) The swing fluctuation control of the reels 31 in the 43rd embodiment was performed in order to notify the player that a pseudo game performance was being performed. Therefore, in the case where the video reel 23 is displayed as an image or the sub-reel 34 is provided, it is not necessary to shake the symbol image of the video reel 23 or to shake the sub-reel 34 during the pseudo game performance.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to cause the symbol images on the video reel 23 to fluctuate or to fluctuate the sub-reel 34, for example, to create a sense of anticipation.
For example, when the symbol image on the video reel 23 fluctuates or the sub-reel 34 fluctuates, if the reel 31 does not fluctuate (that is, unless it is a pseudo game performance), it is a performance that means that expectations are low. There are many things you can do.
In addition, when the reels 31 shake and fluctuate (during a pseudo game performance), at the same time, the symbol images on the video reels 23 shake and the sub-reels 34 shake and fluctuate, indicating that expectations are high. One example is that.

(7) The 44th embodiment is not limited to the reel-type game machine under the Entertainment Business Law, but is also applicable to, for example, a parrot that uses game balls, or uses electronic information (electronic medals) without using physical (tangible) medals. It can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines) and casino machines.
(8) The first to forty-fourth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to forty-fourth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<45th embodiment>
The forty-fifth embodiment relates to a presentation lamp (decorative lamp section) 541.
Here, "substantially the same" is a concept that includes things that are approximately the same but not completely the same due to manufacturing errors, and things that are not completely the same but appear to be the same visually. Moreover, "substantially the same" is a concept that includes "the same".
Although the description of the 45th embodiment partially overlaps with that of the 19th embodiment (B), it will be explained anew.
FIG. 415 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 500, and FIG. 416 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 viewed from the front side (player side).

417 is a front view of the right base member 650 with the upper parts of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622 removed, and FIG. 418 is a front view of the upper part of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622. 419 is a perspective view of the right base member 650 with parts removed, seen from the right side, and FIG. 419 is a rear view of the right base member 650 with the upper parts of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622 removed. It is.

420 is an enlarged front view of the upper part of the right base member 650 with the upper parts of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622 removed, and FIG. 421 is an enlarged front view of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622. 422 is an enlarged top perspective view of the right base member 650 with the upper part removed, viewed from the left side, and FIG. 422 shows the right base member with the upper parts of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622 removed. 650 is an enlarged view of the upper left side.

423 is an enlarged bottom view of the upper part of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613 removed, and FIG. 424 is an enlarged cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 420.
FIG. 425 is a front view of the right base member 650 with the upper lamp cover 613, the upper part of the right lamp cover 622, and the right lamp board 621 removed, and corresponds to FIG. 417.
FIG. 426 is an enlarged rear view of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613 removed and the right frame lamp cover 622 attached.
FIG. 427 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the lens portion 670 of the right frame lamp cover 622.

As shown in FIGS. 415 and 416, the pachinko gaming machine 500 includes a rectangular outer frame 501 fixed to an island (not shown), and a front frame 502 attached to the front side of the outer frame 501. It is equipped with
Further, a game board 504 is attached to the center of the front frame 502 with a game area (not shown) facing the front side, and a game board 504 is attached to the front side of the front frame 502. A glass door (glass frame) 505 is attached to cover the gaming area of the gaming board 504.

Furthermore, on the front side of the front frame 502 and below the glass door 505, an upper plate 506, a lower plate 507, a firing handle 508, etc. are attached.
Furthermore, a hinge mechanism 503 is provided on the left side of the outer frame 501.
The front frame 502 is attached to the outer frame 501 by a hinge mechanism 503 so that it can be opened and closed, and the glass door 505 is attached to the front frame 502 by a hinge mechanism 503 so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the right side of the front frame 502, and a key insertion slot 521 into which a key for operating the locking device is inserted is provided on the right side of the glass door 505. .
When the front frame 502 is closed to the outer frame 501 and the key is inserted from the key insertion slot 521 to unlock the outer frame 501 and the front frame 502, the front frame 502 It becomes possible to open (move) forward (towards the player) with respect to the outer frame 501 with the hinge mechanism 503 as the central axis.

Further, when the front frame 502 is opened to the outer frame 501, the game board 504, glass door 505, upper plate 506, lower plate 507, firing handle 508, etc. attached to the front frame 502 are Together with the frame 502, it moves forward relative to the outer frame 501 about the hinge mechanism 503 as a central axis.
Note that when the front frame 502 is opened, the frame release switch 523 (see FIG. 99 of the nineteenth embodiment (B)) is turned on, and thereby, the opening of the front frame 502 is detected.

Furthermore, when the glass door 505 is closed to the front frame 502 and the key is inserted from the key insertion slot 521 to unlock the front frame 502 and the glass door 505, the glass door 505 The front frame 502 can be opened forward about the hinge mechanism 503 as a central axis.
Note that when the glass door 505 is opened, the door open switch 522 (see FIG. 99 of the nineteenth embodiment (B)) is turned on, and thereby the opening of the glass door 505 is detected.

Further, in the game area of the game board 504, a starting port 532, a special symbol display device 531, and an image display device 543 are provided (see FIG. 99 of the nineteenth embodiment (B)).
Furthermore, in the center of the glass door 505, two transparent glass plates (not shown) are arranged in parallel with a predetermined interval, and are arranged in the upper part of the front side of the glass door 505, on the right side, and A presentation lamp (decorative lamp section) 541 is attached to the left side so as to surround the glass plate.
Further, when the glass door 505 is closed with respect to the front frame 502, a glass plate is located in front of the game area of the game board 504. Thereby, the game area of the game board 504 can be viewed from the front side of the pachinko game machine 500 through the glass plate.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 415 and 416, the effect lamp (decorative lamp part) 541 includes an upper frame lamp part 610 disposed along the front upper edge of the glass door 505 and a front right edge of the glass door 505. The right frame lamp part 620 is arranged along the front left edge of the glass door 505, and the left frame lamp part 630 is arranged along the front left edge of the glass door 505.

That is, the upper frame lamp part 610 is a decorative lamp part formed in a horizontally long manner from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front surface of the glass door 505.
Further, the right frame lamp portion 620 is a decorative lamp portion formed in a vertically long manner from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front right side of the glass door 505.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp part 630 is a decorative lamp part formed in a vertically long manner from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front left side of the glass door 505.

Furthermore, the right end of the upper frame lamp part 610 and the upper end of the right frame lamp part 620 are continuous, and the left end of the upper frame lamp part 610 and the upper end of the left frame lamp part 630 are continuous.
As a result, the glass plate placed in the center of the glass door 505 has its upper edge, right edge, and left edge surrounded by the upper frame lamp part 610, the right frame lamp part 620, and the left frame lamp part 630. .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 415 and 416, the upper frame lamp section 610 includes an upper frame right lamp board 611, an upper frame left lamp board 612, and an upper frame lamp cover 613.
The upper frame right lamp board 611 has a connector 642a to which a light emitting element (also referred to as "light emitting means") for causing the right side of the upper frame lamp section 610 to emit light and a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element are connected. -b is a mounted lamp board, which is placed on the right side of the upper front surface of the glass door 505, with the mounting surface of the light emitting element facing the front side (player side).

The upper frame left lamp board 612 is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the left side of the upper frame lamp section 610 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element is connected are mounted. It is arranged on the left side of the upper front surface of the glass door 505 with the mounting surface of the element facing the front side.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 417, 420, and 421, four LEDs 641a to 641d are mounted as light emitting elements on the lamp board 611 on the right side of the upper frame. Further, although not shown, four LEDs are mounted as light emitting elements on the upper frame left lamp board 612 as well as the upper frame right lamp board 611. All of these LEDs are full color LEDs.

In addition, full-color LEDs are equipped with three LEDs: one that emits red light, one that emits green light, and one that emits blue light. By adjusting the output of these three LEDs, it is possible to express full color. It is something.
In other words, it is equipped with three light-emitting elements: a light-emitting element that emits red light, a light-emitting element that emits green light, and a light-emitting element that emits blue light, and by adjusting the output of these three light-emitting elements, it is possible to express full color. The means is a full color LED.

Further, the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 are made of white.
Specifically, a white coating film is formed on the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612. Further, the white coating film is formed by applying a white resist or performing silk screen printing (also referred to as silk printing or screen printing).

The upper frame lamp cover 613 is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the upper frame right side lamp board 611 and the upper frame left side lamp board 612, and as shown in FIGS. 415 and 416, it covers the front side of the glass door 505. attached to the top.
Further, the upper frame lamp cover 613 has a horizontally elongated shape extending from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front surface of the glass door 505, and is made of colorless and translucent resin.
Furthermore, the upper frame lamp cover 613 faces the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 is irradiated onto the upper frame lamp cover 613. Thereby, when the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 emit light, the upper frame lamp cover 613 appears to be glowing.

Here, in this embodiment, as described above, the upper frame lamp cover 613 is made of a colorless and translucent resin. Therefore, the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 can be seen through the upper frame lamp cover 613. Therefore, if the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 are made of green or black, for example, the appearance of the upper frame lamp part 610 will be poor when the light emitting elements are turned off. When the light emitting element emits light, it may appear to emit light in a color different from the set color.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 is made of white. Thereby, even if the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 are seen through the upper frame lamp cover 613, the appearance of the upper frame lamp part 610 is not deteriorated. I can do it.
In addition, by configuring the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the upper frame right lamp board 611 and upper frame left lamp board 612 in white, the light emitted from the light emitting element is transmitted to the upper frame lamp cover from the light emitting element mounting surface. It is efficiently reflected toward the 613 side. Thereby, the upper frame lamp cover 613 can be made to appear to shine brighter. Furthermore, by configuring the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element in white, the color development of the light emitting element can be seen clearly. In particular, when the light emitting element emits light, it can be made to appear to emit light in a preset color.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 415 and 416, the right frame lamp section 620 includes a right frame lamp board 621 and a right frame lamp cover 622.
The right frame lamp board 621 is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the right frame lamp section 620 to emit light and a connector 642c to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element is connected are mounted. It is arranged on the front right side of the glass door 505 with the mounting surface facing the front side (player side).

Further, the right frame lamp board 621 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape that is vertically long and extends from near the top end to near the bottom end of the front right side of the glass door 505 .
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 417 and 418, seven LEDs 641e to 641k are mounted as light emitting elements on the upper part of the right frame lamp board 621. Although not shown, a plurality of LEDs are also mounted on the lower part of the right frame lamp board 621 as light emitting elements. All of these LEDs are full color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp board 621 is made of white. As in the case of the upper right lamp board 611, a white coating film is formed on the entire surface of the right lamp board 621 on which the light emitting elements are mounted by applying a white resist or by silk screen printing.

The right frame lamp cover 622 is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the right frame lamp board 621, and is attached to the front right side of the glass door 505, as shown in FIGS. 415 and 416.
Further, the right frame lamp cover 622 has a vertically elongated shape extending from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front right side of the glass door 505, and is made of a colorless and translucent resin.
Furthermore, the right frame lamp cover 622 faces the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp board 621. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 is irradiated onto the right frame lamp cover 622. Thereby, when the light emitting element mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 emits light, the right frame lamp cover 622 appears to shine.

By configuring the entire surface of the right-frame lamp board 621 on which the light-emitting elements are mounted in white, the appearance of the right-frame lamp section 620 is not deteriorated, and the light emitted from the light-emitting elements is The above-mentioned upper frame lamp part 610 makes the right frame lamp cover 622 appear to shine brighter by efficiently reflecting the light toward the cover 622 side, and makes the color of the light emitting elements appear clear. It is similar to

Further, as shown in FIGS. 415 and 416, the left frame lamp section 630 includes a left frame lamp board 631 and a left frame lamp cover 632.
The left frame lamp board 631 is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the left frame lamp section 630 to emit light and a connector to which a harness is connected for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element are mounted, and the light emitting element is mounted. It is arranged on the front left side of the glass door 505 with its surface facing the front side (player side).

Further, the left frame lamp board 631 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape that is vertically long and extends from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front left side of the glass door 505 .
Furthermore, although not shown, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the left frame lamp board 631 as light emitting elements. All of these LEDs are full color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting elements on the left frame lamp board 631 is made of white. As in the case of the upper frame right lamp board 611, a white coating film is formed by coating or silk screen printing a white resist on the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the left frame lamp board 631.

The left frame lamp cover 632 is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the left frame lamp board 631, and is attached to the front left side of the glass door 505, as shown in FIGS. 415 and 416.
Further, the left frame lamp cover 632 has a vertically elongated shape extending from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front left side of the glass door 505, and is made of a colorless, translucent resin.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp cover 632 faces the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the left frame lamp board 631. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the left frame lamp board 631 is irradiated onto the left frame lamp cover 632. As a result, when the light emitting element mounted on the left frame lamp board 631 emits light, the left frame lamp cover 632 appears to shine.

By configuring the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the left frame lamp board 631 in white, the appearance of the left frame lamp section 630 is not deteriorated, and the light emitted from the light emitting elements is The above-mentioned upper frame lamp section 610 makes the left frame lamp cover 632 appear brighter by reflecting the light toward the cover 632 side efficiently, and makes the color of the light emitting element appear clear. It is similar to

Further, the glass door (glass frame) 505 includes a right base member 650 (see FIGS. 417 to 422) and a left base member (not shown).
The right base member 650 is a member that serves as the skeleton of the right side portion of the glass door 505, and the left base member is a member that serves as the skeleton of the left side portion of the glass door 505. Furthermore, the left base member is formed to have a substantially bilaterally symmetrical shape with the right base member 650. The right base member 650 and the left base member constitute the frame of the glass door 505.

As shown in FIGS. 420 to 422, an upper frame right board attachment part 651 to which the upper frame right lamp board 611 is attached, and a right side part of the upper frame lamp cover 613 are attached to the upper front surface of the right base member 650. An upper frame right cover attachment portion 652 is provided.
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 420 to 422, on the front right side of the right base member 650, there is a right frame board attachment part 653 to which the right frame lamp board 621 is attached, and a right frame board attachment part 653 to which the right frame lamp cover 622 is attached. A cover attachment portion 654 is provided.

Although not shown, the upper front side of the left base member includes an upper frame left side board attachment part to which the upper frame left lamp board 612 is attached, and an upper frame left side cover attachment part to which the left side part of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is attached. is provided.
Furthermore, although not shown, the left side of the front side of the left base member is provided with a left frame board attachment part to which the left frame lamp board 631 is attached, and a left frame cover attachment part to which the left frame lamp cover 632 is attached. .

Upper frame right lamp board 611, upper frame left lamp board 612, upper frame lamp cover 613, upper frame right board mounting part 651, upper frame left board mounting part (not shown), upper frame right cover mounting part 652, The upper frame lamp part 610 is constituted by the upper frame left side cover attachment part (not shown).
Note that, as shown in FIGS. 415 and 416, the upper frame lamp cover 613 is attached so as to straddle the upper front surface of the right base member 650 and the upper front surface of the left base member.
Further, the right frame lamp section 620 is constituted by the right frame lamp board 621, the right frame lamp cover 622, the right frame board mounting section 653, and the right frame cover mounting section 654.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp section 630 is constituted by the left frame lamp board 631, the left frame lamp cover 632, the left frame board attachment part (not shown), and the left frame cover attachment part (not shown).

The upper frame right board attachment part 651 is a part to which the upper frame right lamp board 611 is attached, and is provided at the upper front surface of the right base member 650, as shown in FIGS. 421 to 423.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 421 to 423, the upper frame right side board mounting portion 651 is provided with a board support rib 661a shaped along the outer periphery of the upper frame right side lamp board 611. This board support rib 661a is for supporting the lamp board 611 on the right side of the upper frame. When the upper frame right lamp board 611 is placed at a predetermined position of the upper frame right board mounting portion 651, the outer peripheral edge of the upper frame right lamp board 611 rests on the board support rib 661a.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 417, 418, 420, and 421, the upper frame right board mounting portion 651 is provided with three positioning bosses 682a to 682c. These positioning bosses 682a to 682c are used for positioning the upper frame right lamp board 611 at a predetermined position of the upper frame right board mounting portion 651, and are formed in a cylindrical shape.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 424, a screw boss 681 is provided on the upper frame right side board mounting portion 651. This screw boss 681 is used when fixing the upper frame right lamp board 611 to the upper frame right board attachment part 651, and is formed in a cylindrical shape. Further, a screw hole 684 is provided at the center of the screw boss 681.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 424, a positioning hole 685a is provided in the upper frame right lamp board 611 at a position corresponding to the positioning boss 682a. This positioning hole 685a is a hole into which the positioning boss 682a is inserted when positioning the upper frame right lamp board 611 at a predetermined position of the upper frame right board attachment part 651, and is a hole on one side of the upper frame right lamp board 611. It penetrates from one side to the other side.
Further, as shown in FIG. 424, a fixing hole 686a is provided in the upper frame right lamp board 611 at a position corresponding to the screw fixing boss 681. This fixing hole 686a is a hole used when fixing the upper frame right lamp board 611 to the upper frame right side board mounting part 651, and extends from one side of the upper frame right lamp board 611 to the other side. Penetrating.

When the positioning boss 682a is inserted into the positioning hole 685a from the opposite side of the upper frame right lamp board 611 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a, the upper frame right lamp board 611 is positioned at a predetermined position of the upper frame right board attachment part 651. At this time, the position of the screw hole 684 provided at the center of the screw fixing boss 681 matches the position of the fixing hole 686a. Then, insert the screw 683a into the fixing hole 686a from the mounting surface side of the LED 641a on the upper frame right lamp board 611, and screw this screw 683a into the screw hole 684, so that the upper frame right lamp board 611 is attached to the upper frame right board. 651.

As shown in FIG. 424, the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a are provided close to each other.
In this embodiment, the diameter of the screw shaft 688 of the screw 683a is set larger than the diameter of the positioning boss 682a. Further, the fixing hole 686a is formed in a circular shape, and the inner diameter of the fixing hole 686a is set to be approximately the same as the diameter of the screw shaft 688 of the screw 683a.

Furthermore, the positioning hole 685a is formed in an oval shape, and the short axis of the positioning hole 685a is set to be approximately the same as the diameter of the positioning boss 682a, and the long axis of the positioning hole 685a is set to be approximately the same as the diameter of the positioning boss 682a. It is set larger than the diameter of the screw shaft 688.
Furthermore, the opening area of the positioning hole 685a and the opening area of the fixing hole 686a are set to be different. In this embodiment, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a is set larger than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a.

In this way, the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a have different shapes and different opening areas. As a result, when fixing the upper frame right side lamp board 611 to the upper frame right side board attachment part 651, it is possible to avoid mistaking the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a, and the assembly work can proceed smoothly. I'm trying to be able to do that.
Further, since the short diameter of the positioning hole 685a is set smaller than the diameter of the screw shaft 688, the screw shaft 688 cannot be inserted into the positioning hole 685a, and this also prevents the screw shaft 688 from being fixed to the positioning hole 685a. This is done so as not to confuse the hole 686a.

Further, when the positioning boss 682a is inserted into the positioning hole 685a and the upper frame right side lamp board 611 is positioned at the predetermined position of the upper frame right side board mounting part 651, the positioning boss 682a is inserted into the positioning hole 685a, as shown in FIGS. The tip of the LED 641a protrudes toward the mounting surface of the LED 641a on the right lamp board 611 of the upper frame. The tip of the positioning boss 682a that protrudes toward the mounting surface of the LED 641a is referred to as a protrusion 687. This protrusion 687 is formed in a convex curved shape (dome shape). Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 641a is reflected by the protrusion 687 formed in a convex curved shape, so that the upper frame lamp part 610 appears to shine beautifully.

Also, insert a screw 683a into the fixing hole 686a from the mounting surface side of the LED 641a on the upper frame right lamp board 611, and screw this screw 683a into the screw hole 684 to attach the upper frame right lamp board 611 to the upper frame right side board. When fixed to the mounting portion 651, as shown in FIGS. 423 and 424, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a is exposed on the mounting surface of the LED 641a on the right lamp board 611 of the upper frame.
As shown in FIG. 424, the height T1 of the screw head 689 from the LED 641a mounting surface is set larger than the height T2 of the LED 641a from the LED 641a mounting surface.

That is, when the height of the screw head 689 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is "T1", and the height of the LED 641a from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is "T2", it is set to satisfy "T1>T2". .
In other words, the height of the screw head 689 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is set larger than that of the LED 641a.

Further, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a is subjected to a surface treatment that reflects the light emitted from the LED 641a. Specifically, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a is plated with silver as a surface treatment to reflect the light emitted from the LED 641a. Examples of silver plating include silver plating, chrome plating, nickel plating, tin plating, tin cobalt plating, and zinc plating.

In this way, by setting the height of the screw head 689 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a to be larger than the height of the LED 641a from the mounting surface of the LED 641a, and by applying surface treatment to the screw head 689 to reflect light, it is possible to prevent light from emitting from the LED 641a. The emitted light is reflected by the screw head 689 of the screw 683a, so that the upper frame lamp portion 610 appears to shine neatly.

The upper frame right cover attachment portion 652 is a portion to which the right side portion of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is attached, and is provided at the upper front surface of the right base member 650, as shown in FIGS. 420 and 421.
Further, the upper frame right cover attachment portion 652 is provided with a cover fitting groove 662a. This cover fitting groove 662a is a groove into which the upper edge of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is fitted, and is formed along the upper edge of the right base member 650. Then, when the upper end edge of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is fitted into the cover fitting groove 662a and the upper frame lamp cover 613 is screwed from the back side of the right base member 650, the upper frame lamp cover 613 is attached to the upper frame right side cover attachment part 652. Fixed.

The right frame board attachment part 653 is a part to which the right frame lamp board 621 is attached, and is provided on the front right side of the right base member 650, as shown in FIGS. 421 and 425.
Further, as shown in FIG. 425, the right frame board mounting portion 653 is provided with board support ribs 661b to 661e shaped along the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp board 621. The substrate support ribs 661b to 661e are for supporting the right frame lamp substrate 621. When the right frame lamp board 621 is placed at a predetermined position on the right frame board mounting portion 653, the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp board 621 rests on the board support ribs 661b to 661e.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 417, 418, 420, and 421, the right frame lamp board 621 is provided with a positioning hole 685b and a fixing hole 686b adjacent to each other.
The positioning hole 685b is a hole into which a positioning boss is inserted when positioning the right frame lamp board 621 at a predetermined position of the right frame board mounting portion 653, and is a hole into which a positioning boss is inserted when positioning the right frame lamp board 621 at a predetermined position of the right frame board mounting portion 653. It penetrates all the way to the surface.
The fixing hole 686b is a hole used when fixing the right frame lamp board 621 to the right frame board attachment part 653, and penetrates from one side of the right frame lamp board 621 to the other side. .

Although not shown, a positioning boss is provided at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 685b in the right frame board mounting portion 653, and a screwing boss is provided at a position corresponding to the fixing hole 686b. ing. Then, when the positioning boss provided on the right frame board attachment part 653 is inserted into the positioning hole 685b, the right frame lamp board 621 is positioned at a predetermined position of the right frame board attachment part 653. Then, insert a screw into the fixing hole 686b from the mounting surface side of the LEDs 641e to k on the right frame lamp board 621, and screw this screw into the screw boss provided on the right frame board mounting part 653, and the right frame lamp The board 621 is fixed to the right frame board attachment part 653.
Note that in FIGS. 417, 418, 420, and 421, illustrations of the positioning boss and screws are omitted in order to make it easier to see the positioning hole 685b and the fixing hole 686b.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 420, in this embodiment, the positioning hole 685b and the fixing hole 686b are both formed in a circular shape. Furthermore, the inner diameter of the fixing hole 686b is set larger than the inner diameter of the positioning hole 685b. Therefore, the opening area of the fixing hole 686b and the opening area of the positioning hole 685b are different. Specifically, the opening area of the fixing hole 686b is set larger than the opening area of the positioning hole 685b.
Thereby, when fixing the right frame lamp board 621 to the right frame board attachment part 653, the positioning hole 685b and the fixing hole 686b are not mistaken, so that the assembly work can proceed smoothly. .

The right frame cover attachment part 654 is a part to which the right frame lamp cover 622 is attached, and is provided on the front right side of the right base member 650, as shown in FIGS. 420, 421, and 425.
Further, the right frame cover attachment portion 654 is provided with a cover fitting groove 662b. This cover fitting groove 662b is a groove into which the right edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 is fitted, and is formed along the right edge of the right base member 650.

Then, when the right edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 is fitted into the cover fitting groove 662b and the right frame lamp cover 622 is screwed from the back side of the right base member 650, the right frame lamp The cover 622 is fixed to the right frame cover attachment part 654.
As shown in FIGS. 419 and 426, the left edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 (the edge on the game board 504 side) covers the outside of the left edge of the right base member 650 (the edge on the game board 504 side). It is formed like this.

Further, as described above, the right frame lamp board 621 is formed in a vertically elongated substantially rectangular shape (see FIG. 417), and the right frame board mounting portion 653 is shaped along the outer periphery of the right frame lamp board 621. (See Figure 425). The width W1 in the lateral direction of the right frame lamp board 621 (FIG. 417) is configured to be substantially the same as the width W2 in the lateral direction of the right frame board mounting portion 653 (FIG. 425).
That is, when the width of the right frame lamp board 621 in the short direction is "W1", and the width of the right frame board mounting portion 653 in the short direction is "W2", the setting is made to satisfy "W1≒W2". has been done. As a result, the right frame lamp board 621 covers the right frame board mounting portion 653.

The entire surface of the light-emitting element mounting surface of the right-frame lamp board 621 is made of white, and by covering the right-frame board mounting portion 653 with such a right-frame lamp board 621, the light emission on the right-frame lamp board 621 is reduced. The entire mounting surface of the element can function as a reflector, and thereby the color of the light emitting element can be clearly displayed.
Note that "substantially rectangular shape" means "approximately rectangular shape." Therefore, as long as the shape is approximately rectangular, for example, there may be unevenness along the long side or short side, all or part of the long side or short side may be curved or inclined, and Further, the corners may not be right angles, and may be rounded. Furthermore, the term "substantially rectangular" is a concept that includes "rectangle".

Further, the right frame board mounting portion 653 is formed in a shape along the outer periphery of the right frame lamp board 621, and the right frame cover mounting portion 654 is formed in a shape along the outer periphery of the right frame board mounting portion 653. It is formed. The edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 on the right frame cover mounting portion 654 side is formed in a shape along the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp board 621.
Therefore, when the right frame lamp board 621 is attached to the right frame board attachment part 653 and the right frame lamp cover 622 is attached to the right frame cover attachment part 654, the entire inside of the right frame lamp cover 622 is covered with the right frame lamp. It appears to be covered with a substrate 621. Therefore, even if the molding color of the right base member 650 is not white (for example, even if it is black), the entire inside of the right frame lamp cover 622 appears white, and the light emitting element appears to emit light clearly.

Further, as shown in FIG. 416, a lens portion 670 is provided in the right frame lamp cover 622 at a position facing the right frame lamp board 621. As shown in FIGS. 427(a) and 427(b), the lens portion 670 is constructed by joining curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same wall thickness.
427(a) shows a partial sectional view of the lens portion 670 included in the right frame lamp cover 622, and FIG. 427(b) shows another partial sectional view of the lens portion 670 included in the right frame lamp cover 622. It shows.

As shown in FIGS. 427(a) and 427(b), the lens portion 670 has the same wall thickness at all locations, but the curvature differs depending on the location.
In this way, by forming the lens portion 670 into a shape in which curved surfaces with different curvatures but the same wall thickness are joined together, the manufacturing cost of the mold for molding the right frame lamp cover 622 can be reduced, and The light emitted from the light emitting element can be clearly displayed.
Note that the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the left frame lamp cover 632 also have a lens portion at a position facing the lamp board, and the shape of the lens portion is made by connecting curved surfaces with different curvatures but the same wall thickness. The shape is similar to that of the right frame lamp cover 622.

Further, as described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the pachinko gaming machine 500 includes a main control board (main board, main control board) 530 corresponding to the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10, and a main control board 530 corresponding to the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10. It includes a sub-control board (performance control board, production board) 540 corresponding to the sub-control board 80, and a payout control board (prize ball control board) 520.
The main control board 530 controls the progress of the game, the sub control board 540 controls the output of effects, and the payout control board 520 controls the operation of the payout device 524. These control boards are all connected to each other by a harness.

Further, the sub-control board 540, the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 are connected by a harness.
The sub-control board 540 controls the light emission of the light emitting elements mounted on these lamp boards.
Note that connectors mounted on these lamp boards are used for harness connection between the sub-control board 540 and these lamp boards.

Specifically, the sub control board 540 is connected to the main control board 530, determines the presentation content based on commands sent from the main control board 530, and controls the determined presentation to be output. At this time, the sub-control board 540 controls the light emission of the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631.
The sub-control board 540 includes a sub-main board that controls the entire performance and a sub-sub board that controls the image display of the image display device 23.

As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the main control board 530 includes a starting port switch 533 for detecting that a game ball has entered the starting port 532 provided in the gaming area of the game board 504. are connected (see Figure 99). When a game ball enters the starting port 532 and detects that the starting port switch 533 is turned on, the main control board 530 obtains a random number value, executes various lottery drawings based on the obtained random number value, and also activates the special symbol display device. The variable display of special symbols at 531 is started. Then, the main control board 530 determines the fluctuation time and stop pattern of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 531 based on the results of various lottery results, and changes the special symbol in the special symbol display device 531 to correspond to the determination. Control the display.

Specifically, the main control board 530 continues to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the starting port 532 (the starting port switch 533 has been turned on) (step S741 in FIG. 102). Then, when it is determined that the starting port switch 533 is turned on, the main control board 530 acquires a random number value and, based on the acquired random number value, selects a jackpot lottery (a lottery for jackpot or miss), a special symbol A lottery (a lottery to determine which symbol to use as the stop symbol of the special symbols) and a variable pattern lottery (a lottery to determine the time to display the special symbols in a variable manner) are executed (step S742 in FIG. 102).
Moreover, when the main control board 530 executes the above-mentioned various lottery results, it transmits a command indicating at least some lottery results to the sub control board 540. When the sub-control board 540 receives a command indicating the lottery result, it controls the production lamp 541, the speaker 542, and the image display device 543 so as to correspond to the lottery result.

Specifically, when the main control board 530 receives a jackpot in the jackpot lottery, it transmits a command (jackpot command) indicating that the jackpot has been won to the sub control board 540.
When the sub control board 540 receives the jackpot command, the sub control board 540 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 to win the jackpot. emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to .
Further, as a light emitting pattern corresponding to a jackpot, each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element is changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of "0" to "255". This allows the light emitting elements to emit light in so-called rainbow colors, thereby informing the player that they have won a jackpot in the jackpot lottery.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are made of colorless and translucent resin, and the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the lamp board such as the upper frame right lamp board 611 is made of white. Therefore, by causing the light emitting element to emit light in rainbow colors when a jackpot is won, the coloring of the light emitting element can be made to look beautiful.
In addition, when a jackpot is achieved, the light emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may be caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the jackpot. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 may emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to a jackpot, or all the light emitting elements mounted on all lamp boards may emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to a jackpot. The element may be caused to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to a jackpot.

In addition, when a jackpot is achieved, the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 are caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the jackpot, and the right frame lamp board 621 and The light emitting elements mounted on the left frame lamp board 631 may be made to emit white light.
Note that by setting each of the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) output values of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can be caused to emit white light.

As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the door opening switch 522 and the frame opening switch 523 are electrically connected to the payout control board 520 (see FIG. 99).
When the glass door 505 is opened, the door open switch 522 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530. When the main control board 530 detects that the door open switch 522 is turned on, it transmits a command (door open command) indicating that the door open switch 522 is turned on to the sub control board 540.
Upon receiving the door open command, the sub-control board 540 displays the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 in white. Control it to emit light.

Furthermore, when the front frame 502 is opened, the frame release switch 523 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530. When the main control board 530 detects that the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, it transmits a command (frame opening command) indicating that the frame opening switch 523 is turned on to the sub control board 540.
Upon receiving the frame opening command, the sub control board 540 displays the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 in white. Control it to emit light.

As described above, by setting each of the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) output values of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
In addition, when it is detected that the door release switch 522 or the frame release switch 523 is turned on, the light emitting elements mounted on the lamp boards such as the upper frame right lamp board 611 emit white light, so that the glass door 505 and the front frame It is possible to inform the clerk at the hall that 502 is open.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are made of colorless and translucent resin, and the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the lamp board such as the upper frame right lamp board 611 is made of white. Therefore, when the light emitting element emits white light, it becomes noticeable, so that the clerk in the hall can easily notice that the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is open.

Note that when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is open, the light emitting element mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 and the left frame lamp board 631 may emit white light, or the light emitting elements mounted on all lamp boards may emit white light. Good too.
Furthermore, when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened, the light emitting elements may be blinked in a predetermined pattern corresponding to when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 500, when a game ball enters the starting port 532 and detects that the starting port switch 533 is turned on, the main control board 530 acquires a random value, and based on the acquired random value, the main control board 530 acquires a random value. , execute jackpot lottery (lottery to determine whether it is a jackpot or not), special symbol lottery (lottery to determine which symbol to use as the stop symbol of the special symbol), and variable pattern lottery (lottery to determine the time to display the special symbol in a variable manner) At the same time, variable display of special symbols on the special symbol display device 531 is started.

In addition, the main control board 530 determines the fluctuation time and stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 531 based on the results of the above-mentioned various drawings, and the special symbol in the special symbol display device 531 so as to correspond to the determination. Control the display of symbols.
In the pachinko game machine 500, when the game ball enters the starting hole 532 and the turning on of the starting hole switch 533 is detected, one game starts, and the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device 531 ends, One game may end when the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

Moreover, when the main control board 530 executes the above-mentioned various lottery results, it transmits a command indicating at least some lottery results to the sub control board 540. When the sub-control board 540 receives a command indicating the lottery result, it controls the production lamp 541, the speaker 542, and the image display device 543 so as to correspond to the lottery result.
Specifically, when the main control board 530 loses in the jackpot lottery, it transmits a command indicating the loss (lose command) to the sub control board 540.

Further, when the sub-control board 540 receives the loss command, it executes a performance pattern lottery at the time of failure (a lottery to select either performance pattern 1 or performance pattern 2).
The sub-control board 540 is mounted on the upper right side lamp board 611, the upper left side lamp board 612, the right lamp board 621, and the left lamp board 631 in a manner according to the result of the production pattern lottery. In addition to causing the light emitting element to emit light, the red LED mounted on the decorative board on the game board 504 is controlled to emit light.

Figures 428 (a) and (b) show performance patterns when a jackpot lottery results in a loss, (a) is a time chart showing performance pattern 1 when a loss occurs, and (b) , is a time chart showing performance pattern 2 at the time of failure.
In FIGS. 428(a) and (b), "LED1" indicates the LEDs 641e to 641k (all full color LEDs) mounted on the right lamp board 621 of the right frame, and "LED2" indicates the LEDs 641e to 641k (all full color LEDs) mounted on the right lamp board 611 of the upper frame. The mounted LEDs 641a to 641d (all full-color LEDs) are shown.

In addition, in FIGS. 428(a) and (b), "LED3" indicates one red LED mounted on the board included in the decoration on the game board 504, and "LED4" indicates the decoration on the game board 504. 2 shows another red LED mounted on a board provided with the device. The mounting surface of the red LED on the board included in the decoration on the game board 504 is made of green.

In this embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol is set to 10 seconds both when the effect pattern 1 is determined and when the effect pattern 2 is determined.
As shown in FIG. 428(a), when production pattern 1 is determined, LED 1 (LEDs 641e to 641k mounted on the right frame lamp board 621) lights up (turns on) at the same time as the special symbols start changing. , the light goes out (off) before the special symbol changes. Furthermore, in production pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 1 is set to 6 seconds.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 428(a), when production pattern 1 is determined, LED 2 (LEDs 641a to 641d mounted on the lamp board 611 on the right side of the upper frame) lights up after the special symbol starts changing. , before the end of the variation of the special symbol and at the same time as the LED 1 is turned off. In addition, in production pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 2 is set to 1 second.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 428(a), when the performance pattern 1 is determined, the LED 3 (one red LED mounted on the board included in the decoration on the game board 504) changes the special symbol. It lights up after the start and goes out before the special symbol changes. Furthermore, in production pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 3 is set to 2 seconds.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 428(a), when production pattern 1 is determined, LED 4 (another red LED mounted on the board included in the decoration on the game board 504) starts changing the special symbol. It turns on later, at the same time as the LED 3 turns on, and turns off at the same time as the LED 2 turns on, before the end of the variation of the special symbol. Furthermore, in production pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 4 is set to 3 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 428(b), when the production pattern 2 is determined, the LED 1 lights up at the same time as the special symbol variation starts, and the special symbol variation ends, as in the case where the production pattern 1 is determined. lights out earlier. Further, in effect pattern 2 as well, similarly to effect pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 1 is set to 6 seconds.
Further, as shown in FIG. 428(b), when the effect pattern 2 is determined, unlike when the effect pattern 1 is determined, the LED 2 does not light up. Therefore, in production pattern 2, the lighting time of the LED 2 is 0 seconds.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 428(b), when production pattern 2 is determined, LED3 lights up after the start of variation of the special symbol, and before the end of variation of the special symbol, LED1 turns off. The lights go out at the same time. Furthermore, in production pattern 2, the lighting time of the LED 3 is set to 4 seconds.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 428(b), when production pattern 2 is determined, LED 4 lights up at the same time as LED 3 lights up after the start of the variation of the special symbol, and after the end of the variation of the special symbol. The light is turned off before the LED 3 is turned off. Further, in effect pattern 2 as well, similarly to effect pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 4 is set to 3 seconds.

In this way, in the present embodiment, in a game that loses in the jackpot lottery, either performance pattern 1 or performance pattern 2 is determined by the performance pattern lottery, and the LEDs 1 to 4 emit light according to the determined performance pattern. Control.
The LED 1 is turned on (emits light) for 6 seconds when either the effect pattern 1 or the effect pattern 2 is determined.
Therefore, the average value of the time the LED 1 is lit (light-emitted) in a game in which the player loses in the jackpot lottery is 6 seconds.

Furthermore, when the effect pattern 1 is determined, the LED 2 is turned on for one second, and when the effect pattern 2 is determined, the LED 2 is not turned on.
For this reason, the average value of the time during which the LED 3 is turned on in a game that loses in the jackpot lottery is 1 second or less.
Furthermore, regarding the LED 3, when the effect pattern 1 is determined, the LED 3 is turned on for 2 seconds, and when the effect pattern 2 is determined, the LED 3 is turned on for 4 seconds.
For this reason, the average value of the time the LED 4 is turned on in a game that loses in the jackpot lottery is 2 seconds or more and 4 seconds or less.

Furthermore, the LED 4 is turned on (emits light) for 3 seconds when either the effect pattern 1 or the effect pattern 2 is determined.
For this reason, the average value of the time the LED 4 is turned on in a game that loses in the jackpot lottery is 3 seconds.
From the above, the average value of the time that LED 1 is turned on in a game that loses in a jackpot lottery is set to be longer than the average value of the time that LED 2 to LED 4 are lit in a game that loses in a jackpot lottery.

As described above, the entire surface of the right frame lamp board 621 on which the LEDs 641e to 641k are mounted is made of white, and the right frame lamp cover 622 is made of colorless and translucent resin. For this reason, the light emission of LED1 (LEDs 641e to 641k mounted on the right frame lamp board 621) can be displayed clearly, so even in a game where the jackpot lottery is a loss, a beautiful performance using LED1 can be displayed. can.

Although the forty-fifth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the content described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the 45th embodiment, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are made of a colorless and translucent resin, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
The lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be colorless or white and have a translucent portion.

Therefore, the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be entirely colorless and translucent, or may be entirely white and translucent, for example.
Further, in the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613, for example, only the portion corresponding to the front of the light emitting element is colorless and transparent, and the other portions are colored red, blue, etc. and transparent. It is not necessary to have translucency.
Furthermore, in the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613, for example, only the portion corresponding to the front of the light emitting element is white and translucent, and the other portions are colored red, blue, etc. and transparent. It may have optical properties or it may not have translucency.

Further, all or part of the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be configured to be visible in substantially the same color or similar color to one of the full-color LEDs serving as the light emitting means.
Specifically, for example, the LEDs 641e to 641k of the right frame lamp board 621 are set to blue (red (R) output value "0", green (G) output value "0", blue (B) output value "255''), and the entire right frame lamp cover 622 is made of a blue resin that looks almost the same color as when the LEDs 641e to 641k emit light in blue, or a blue resin that looks similar to the blue above. It can be made of resin.

Note that due to manufacturing errors, the color of the right frame lamp cover 622 may vary, for example, with an output value of "0" for red (R), an output value of "0" for green (G), and an output value of "250" for blue (B). The emitted color may be the same as the emitted color when the red (R) output value is "5", the green (G) output value is "5", and the blue (B) output value is "255". It may be the same color.
Taking this point into consideration, the term "substantially the same color" is used.
Note that "substantially the same color" is a concept that includes "the same color." Moreover, "substantially the same color" is a concept that includes colors that are not completely the same color but appear to be the same color visually.
FIG. 429 is a diagram illustrating substantially the same color using a chromaticity diagram based on the CIE (Commission Internationale de Illumination) standard color system (XYZ color system).
In FIG. 429, a range of "substantially the same color" as blue is shown using blue as an example.
In Figure 429, the black circle indicates blue (red (R) output value "0", green (G) output value "0", blue (B) output value "255"), and the circle around the black circle indicates an example of a range of "substantially the same color" as blue.

Furthermore, "similar colors" is a concept that does not include the target color but includes colors in the vicinity of the target color.
FIG. 430 is a diagram illustrating similar colors using a chromaticity diagram based on the CIE standard color system.
In FIG. 430, the range of "similar colors" of blue is shown using blue as an example.
In Figure 430, the white circle indicates blue (red (R) output value "0", green (G) output value "0", blue (B) output value "255"), and the hatching around the white circle The circle marked with indicates an example of the range of "similar colors" of blue.

Furthermore, the range of the blue "similar color" is not limited to the range of the hatched circle in FIG. "similar colors" range.
For example, in the chromaticity diagram based on the CIE standard color system shown in FIG. Since this is a range that is recognized as being blue, it can be set as a range of "similar colors" to blue.

The same applies to the range of "similar colors" of colors other than blue.
For example, in the chromaticity diagram based on the CIE standard color system shown in FIG. 430, if the x-axis is from 0 to 0.3 and the y-axis is within the range of 0.6 or more, the color is green for general players. Since this is the range that is recognized as "similar color" to green, it can be set as the range of "similar colors" of green.
For example, in the chromaticity diagram based on the CIE standard color system shown in FIG. Since this is a range that is recognized as red, it can be set as a range of "similar colors" to red.

Further, in the 45th embodiment, the entire surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting element (light emitting means) on the lamp board such as the upper frame right lamp board 611 is made of white, but at least a part of it is made of substantially white. It would be fine if it had been done.
For example, among the mounting surfaces of the LEDs 641a to 641d on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the peripheral parts of the LEDs 641a to 641d may be substantially white, and the outer peripheral edge of the upper frame right lamp board 611 may be black.
Note that "substantially white" is a concept that includes "white". Furthermore, "substantially white" is a concept that includes a color that is not completely white but visually appears white.

Even when at least a portion of the lamp cover is configured to be visible in substantially the same or similar color to the luminescent color of the light-emitting means, at least a portion of the mounting surface of the light-emitting means on the lamp board is substantially white. With this structure, even if the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the lamp board is seen through the lamp cover, the appearance will not deteriorate, and the color development of the light emitting means can be clearly seen. When the means emits light, it can be made to appear to emit light in a preset color.

(2) In the 45th embodiment, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a is set to be larger than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a, but the invention is not limited to this.
For example, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a may be set smaller than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a.
FIG. 431 is a diagram showing a modification of the cross section taken along the line AA in FIG. 420, and corresponds to FIG. 424. As shown in FIG. 431, the diameter of the positioning boss 682a may be set larger than the inner diameter of the fixing hole 686a. In this case, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a becomes smaller than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a, and the positioning boss 682a cannot be inserted into the fixing hole 686a. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the positioning hole 685a from being mistaken for the fixing hole 686a.

(3) In the forty-fifth embodiment, the positioning hole 685a is formed in an oval shape, but the positioning hole 685a is not limited to this, and may be formed in a circular shape, for example.
(4) In the forty-fifth embodiment, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a is plated with silver as a surface treatment to reflect the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641d, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a surface treatment to reflect the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 641d, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a may be painted white, for example.

(5) In the 45th embodiment, the upper frame lamp section 610 includes two lamp boards, the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one lamp board is provided. It may be provided with only one lamp board, or it may be provided with three or more lamp boards.
Further, the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be one integrally formed member, and for example, a first member located on the right side (upper frame right side member), a second member located on the center part, It may be composed of three members: a member (upper frame center member) and a third member located on the left side (upper frame left side member).

(6) In the 45th embodiment, the right frame lamp section 620 includes only one right frame lamp board 621 as a lamp board, but is not limited to this, and may include two or more lamp boards. .
Further, the right frame lamp cover 622 may be one integrally formed member, and for example, a first member (right frame upper member) located in the upper part and a first member located in the lower part. It may also be constructed from two members: No. 2 (lower right frame member).

(7) In the 45th embodiment, the left frame lamp section 630 includes only one left frame lamp board 631 as a lamp board, but is not limited to this, and may include two or more lamp boards. .
That is, as described in the 45th embodiment and modifications (5) to (7), the upper frame lamp section 610, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630 each include only one lamp board. Alternatively, a plurality of lamp substrates may be provided.
Further, the left frame lamp cover 632 may be one integrally formed member, and for example, the left frame lamp cover 632 may include a first member (left frame upper member) located in the upper part and a first member located in the lower part. It may also be constructed from two members: No. 2 (lower left frame member).

Further, for example, an upper frame right lamp board 611 and an upper frame left lamp board 612 are attached to the upper front surface of the glass door 505, and an upper frame lamp is installed so as to cover the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612. The upper frame lamp section 610 may be configured by attaching a cover 613.
Similarly, a right frame lamp board 621 is attached to the front right side of the glass door 505, and a right frame lamp cover 622 is attached to cover the right frame lamp board 621 to configure the right frame lamp section 620. The left frame lamp section 630 may be configured by attaching a left frame lamp board 631 to the front left side of the glass door 505 and attaching a left frame lamp cover 632 to cover the left frame lamp board 631.

That is, although the decorative lamp (decorative lamp section) 541 such as the right frame lamp section 620 may be made into a unit, it is also possible to directly attach a lamp substrate such as the right frame lamp substrate 621 to a predetermined position of the glass door 505, and to The effect lamp 541 may be configured by directly attaching a lamp cover such as the right frame lamp cover 622 so as to cover the board.

(8) In the 45th embodiment, when it is detected that the door opening switch 522 or the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right side lamp board 611 etc. emits white light, and the glass door 505 The opening of the front frame 502 is notified to the clerk at the hall.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right side lamp board 611 or the like may be caused to emit white light to control the setting change state or setting confirmation state. You can also let the staff at the hall know that you are there.

Here, although the description partially overlaps with the nineteenth embodiment (B), a setting change state and a setting confirmation state will be described.
As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the main control board 530 is provided with a setting key switch 535 having a setting key insertion slot 534 and a setting change (reset) switch 536 (see FIG. 99). .

The setting key switch 535 is a switch into which a predetermined setting key is inserted through the setting key insertion slot 534 and is turned on by turning it clockwise, for example, 90 degrees.
The setting change (reset) switch 536 is a switch that serves as both a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch operated when changing a set value during a setting change state. The reset switch is a switch that is operated to restore the state before the error occurred after the error has been removed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 500, with the power switch 511 turned off (power off state), the setting key switch 535 and reset switch 536 are turned on, and when the power switch 511 is turned on in this state, the setting change state is entered. Transition.
Specifically, when the power switch 511 is turned on, the main control board 530 determines whether the frame release switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is on. (Step S701 in FIG. 100).
When it is determined that the frame release switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is on ("Yes" in step S701 in FIG. 100), the state shifts to the setting change state. (Step S702 in FIG. 100).

When the setting change state is entered, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED.
Furthermore, in the setting change state, each time the setting change switch 536 is operated, the set value is incremented by "+1". In this embodiment, the setting value has six stages from setting 1 to setting 6, and in the setting change state, each time the setting change switch 536 is operated, the setting value changes from "1" to "2". "→...→"5"→"6"→"1"→... and changes cyclically.
Then, when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the set value is determined and the setting change state ends.

Further, when the setting key switch 535 is turned on with the power switch 511 turned off, and the power switch 511 is turned on while the reset switch 536 is turned off, the setting confirmation state is entered.
Specifically, when the main control board 530 determines that the conditions for transition to the setting change state are not satisfied (“No” in step S701 in FIG. 100) when the power switch 511 is turned on, the main control board 530 performs the following: Next, it is determined whether the frame opening switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is off (step S703 in FIG. 100).

If it is determined that the frame release switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is off ("Yes" in step S703 in FIG. 100), the state shifts to the setting confirmation state. (Step S704 in FIG. 100).
In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED. This allows you to check the current setting values.
Then, when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends.

Further, when the state changes to the settings change state, the main control board 530 transmits a command (setting change start command) indicating that the state changes to the settings change state to the sub control board 540.
Then, upon receiving the setting change start command, the sub control board 540 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631. , control the light to emit white light.

Furthermore, when the setting change state ends, the main control board 530 transmits a command (setting change end command) indicating the end of the setting change state to the sub control board 540.
Then, upon receiving the setting change end command, the sub control board 540 ends the control for causing the light emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light emitting element continues to emit white light while the settings change state (step S702 in FIG. 100) continues, and when the settings change state ends, the light emitting element stops emitting white light.

Further, when the state shifts to the setting confirmation state, the main control board 530 transmits a command (setting confirmation start command) indicating that the state has shifted to the setting confirmation state to the sub control board 540.
Upon receiving the setting confirmation start command, the sub control board 540 changes the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 to white. Control the light to emit light.

Furthermore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the main control board 530 transmits a command (setting confirmation end command) indicating the end of the setting confirmation state to the sub control board 540.
Then, upon receiving the setting confirmation end command, the sub control board 540 ends the control for causing the light emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light emitting element continues to emit white light while the setting confirmation state (step S704 in FIG. 100) continues, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the light emitting element stops emitting white light.

As described above, by setting each of the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) output values of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
In addition, by emitting white light from the light-emitting elements mounted on lamp boards such as the lamp board 611 on the right side of the upper frame in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm that the settings are being controlled in the setting change state or setting confirmation state. You can notify the store clerk.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are made of colorless and translucent resin, and the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the lamp board such as the upper frame right lamp board 611 is made of white. Therefore, when the light emitting element emits white light, it is noticeable, and the hall staff can easily notice that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is being controlled.

Note that when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, the light emitting element mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may be caused to emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 and the left frame lamp board 631 may emit white light, or the light emitting elements mounted on all lamp boards may emit white light. Good too.

Further, when controlled to be in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the light emitting elements may be blinked in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the setting change state or setting confirmation state.
Furthermore, when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened, and when the light emitting element is to be blinked when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened. The blinking pattern of the light emitting element can be made different depending on when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is being controlled.

Furthermore, the conditions for transition to the setting change state are not limited to turning on the setting key switch 535 and reset switch 536 with the power switch 511 turned off, and turning on the power switch 511 in this state.
For example, the setting key switch 535 may be turned on while the power switch 511 is turned off, and turning on the power switch 511 in this state may be a condition for transition to the setting change state. That is, it is not necessary that the reset switch 536 is on as a condition for transitioning to the setting change state.

Furthermore, the conditions for transition to the setting confirmation state are not limited to turning on the setting key switch 535 with the power switch 511 off, and turning on the power switch 511 while the reset switch 536 is off.
For example, turning on the setting key switch 535 while the power switch 511 is on may be a condition for transition to the setting confirmation state.

(9) In the 45th embodiment, when it is detected that the door opening switch 522 or the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right side lamp board 611 etc. is caused to emit white light, and the glass door 505 The opening of the front frame 502 is notified to the clerk at the hall.
In addition, in the above modification (8), in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the light emitting element mounted on the lamp board 611 on the right side of the upper frame emits white light to control the setting change state or setting confirmation state. The staff at the hall were informed of this.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when recovering from a power outage, the light emitting element mounted on the lamp board 611 on the right side of the upper frame emits white light to notify the hall clerk that recovery is in progress from a power outage. You can also notify.

As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), in the pachinko game machine 500, when the power switch 511 is turned on (when recovering from a power-off), the process according to the flowchart shown in FIG. 100 is executed. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing when recovering from power-off.
When the power switch 511 is turned off (power off), the main control board 530 stores information at the time of power off in the RWM.
Furthermore, when the power switch 511 is turned on (when recovering from a power-off), the main control board 530 determines whether the information at the time of recovery from the power-off matches the information at the time of the power-off. (Step S707 in FIG. 100).

Then, when the information at the time of recovery from the power-off matches the information at the time of the power-off, it is determined that the RWM is normal ("Yes" in step S707 in FIG. 100), and the state recovery process is executed. (Step S708 in FIG. 100).
On the other hand, if the information at the time of recovery from power-off does not match the information at power-off, it is determined that there is an RWM abnormality ("No" in step S707 in FIG. 100), and RWM clear processing is executed ( Step S709 in FIG. 100).

Further, the state restoration process (step S708 in FIG. 100) is a process for restoring the solenoid state, the state of the special symbol display device 531, etc. to the state at the time of power-off.
Furthermore, the RWM clearing process (step S709 in FIG. 100) is a process for clearing data stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM (processing for initializing the predetermined storage area). If the setting change process (step S702 in FIG. 100) is executed, or if it is determined that the RWM is abnormal ("No" in step S707 in FIG. 100), then the RWM clear process is executed.

Furthermore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the state recovery process (step S708 in FIG. 100), or the RWM clear process (step S709 in FIG. 100 step S710) is executed.
Then, when the process of permitting a timer interrupt is executed, a series of processes executed when recovering from power-off is completed.

Furthermore, when the power switch 511 is turned on (recovering from a power-off), the main control board 530 sends a command (power recovery start command) indicating that the power has returned from a power-off to the sub-control board 540. .
When the sub-control board 540 receives the power recovery start command, the sub-control board 540 activates the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631. , control the light to emit white light.

Furthermore, when the process of permitting timer interrupts is executed, the main control board 530 sends a command (power return end command) to the sub control board 540 indicating that a series of processes executed when recovering from a power-off has been completed. Send.
When the sub-control board 540 receives the power restoration end command, it ends the control for causing the light emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light-emitting element continues to emit white light while a series of processes are being executed when recovering from a power-off, and when the series of processes executed when recovering from a power-off is completed, the light-emitting element continues to emit white light. ends.

As described above, by setting each of the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) output values of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
Furthermore, when the power is restored from a power outage, the light emitting elements mounted on the lamp boards such as the upper frame right lamp board 611 emit white light, thereby informing the hall staff that the power is being restored from the power outage. can.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are made of colorless and translucent resin, and the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the lamp board such as the upper frame right lamp board 611 is made of white. Therefore, when the light-emitting element emits white light, it is noticeable, and the hall staff can easily notice that the system is recovering from a power-off.
Note that during recovery from power-off, the light emitting element mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may be caused to emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 and the left frame lamp board 631 may emit white light, or the light emitting elements mounted on all lamp boards may emit white light. Good too.

Further, during the recovery from the power-off, the light emitting elements may be blinked in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the recovery from the power-off.
Furthermore, when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, and when the light emitting element is blinked during recovery from a power cut, the glass door The blinking pattern of the light emitting element can be made different depending on when the front frame 505 or the front frame 502 is open, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is being controlled, and during recovery from a power-off.

(10) In the 45th embodiment and modifications (8) to (9), when it is detected that the door opening switch 522 or the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, or When the power is restored from a power failure, the light-emitting elements mounted on the lamp board 611 on the right side of the upper frame emit white light to indicate that the glass door 505 and front frame 502 are open and that the settings are changed or confirmed. It is now possible to notify the hall staff that the system is under control or is recovering from a power outage.

However, the emitted light color of the light emitting element is not limited to white. For example, when it is detected that the door release switch 522 or the frame release switch 523 is turned on, when the setting is changed or confirmed, or when the power is restored from a power failure, the The light-emitting elements may be made to emit light in a color that does not emit light during normal gaming.

Further, as a color that is not emitted during normal gaming, for example, a specific red color can be mentioned. Furthermore, as a specific red, for example, when the output value of red (R) is set to "255" and the output values of green (G) and blue (B) are each set to "0", the light emitting element One example is the red color it emits. Such a red color is not emitted during normal gaming, and if the light-emitting element is emitted in such a red color, it will stand out, so make sure that the glass door 505 and front frame 502 are open, that the settings have been changed, or It is possible to make it easier for the hall clerk to notice that the system is being controlled to a setting confirmation state or that the system is recovering from a power-off.

(11) In the 45th embodiment, the presentation lamp (decorative lamp part) 541 in which the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board is white has been described using the case where the gaming machine is the Pachinko gaming machine 500 as an example. The 45th embodiment can also be applied when the gaming machine is the slot machine 10.
FIG. 432 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 10 according to a modification of the 45th embodiment, viewed from the front side (player side).
Although the following explanation partially overlaps with the seventh embodiment (FIG. 22), it will be explained anew.

As shown in FIG. 432, the slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 whose front side is open, and a front door 12 attached to the front side of the cabinet 13 so that the opening can be opened and closed.
Furthermore, a door sensor (not shown) for detecting opening of the front door 12 is provided at a predetermined position of the cabinet 13. When the front door 12 is opened, the door sensor is turned on, thereby detecting the opening of the front door 12.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 22 of the seventh embodiment, a symbol display device 14 in which three reels 31 are arranged in parallel is arranged inside the cabinet 13. At a position corresponding to above the device 14, a main control board 50 housed in a main board case 56 is arranged.
The main control board 50 controls the progress of the game, and includes an input port 51, an output port 52, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like. Further, a door sensor, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a symbol display device 14, a sub-control board 80, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via an input port 51 or an output port 52. ing.

A transparent display window (not shown) is provided in the center of the front door 12. This display window is arranged at a position corresponding to the front of the symbol display device 14. Thereby, the three symbols attached to each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 can be viewed from the front side of the slot machine 10 through the display window.
Further, on the front side (player side) of the front door 12 and below the display window, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a medal slot 47, etc. are arranged. .

Furthermore, an image display device 23 is arranged at the top of the front side (player side) of the front door 12, and production lamps (decorative lamp sections) are arranged at the top, right side, and left side of the front door 12. )21 is attached.
Further, a sub-control board 80 housed in a sub-board case 87 is arranged at the upper part of the back side of the front door 12 and at a position corresponding to the back side of the image display device 23.

The sub control board 80 controls the performance, and includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like. Further, the sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the production lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, the main control board 50, etc. via the input port 81 or the output port 82. Based on the command received from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 determines at what timing and what kind of effect to output, and according to the decision, the effect lamp 21, speaker 22, image Controls the output of the display device 23.

Further, as shown in FIG. 432, the decorative lamp (decorative lamp part) 21 is arranged between an upper frame lamp part 26 arranged along the front upper edge of the front door 12 and an upper frame lamp part 26 arranged along the front right edge of the front door 12. A right frame lamp part 27 is arranged, and a left frame lamp part 28 is arranged along the front left edge of the front door 12.
That is, the upper frame lamp part 26 is a decorative lamp part formed in a horizontally long manner from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front surface of the front door 12.
Further, the right frame lamp portion 27 is a decorative lamp portion formed in a vertically long manner from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front right side of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp part 28 is a decorative lamp part formed vertically from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front left side of the front door 12.

As shown in FIG. 432, the upper frame lamp section 26 includes an upper frame lamp board 26a and an upper frame lamp cover 26b.
The upper frame lamp board 26a is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the upper frame lamp section 26 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element is connected are mounted, and the light emitting element is mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a. It is arranged at the upper front of the front door 12 with the surface facing the front side (player side).
Further, the upper frame lamp board 26a is formed in a horizontally elongated shape extending from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front surface of the front door 12.

Furthermore, although not shown, eight LEDs are mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a as light emitting elements. All of these eight LEDs are full color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the upper frame lamp board 26a is made of white. Specifically, similar to the example of the pachinko game machine 500 of the 45th embodiment, a white coating film is formed on the entire surface of the upper frame lamp board 26a on which the light emitting elements are mounted. Further, the white coating film is formed by applying a white resist or by silk screen printing.

Further, the upper frame lamp cover 26b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the upper frame lamp board 26a, and is attached to the upper front surface of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the upper frame lamp cover 26b has a horizontally elongated shape extending from near the right end to near the left end of the upper front surface of the front door 12, and is made of a colorless, translucent resin.
Further, the light emitted from the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a is irradiated onto the upper frame lamp cover 26b.

As shown in FIG. 432, the right frame lamp section 27 includes a right frame lamp board 27a and a right frame lamp cover 27b.
The right frame lamp board 27a is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the right frame lamp portion 27 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element is connected are mounted, and the light emitting element is mounted. It is arranged on the front right side of the front door 12 with its surface facing the front side (player side).

Further, the right frame lamp board 27a is formed in a substantially rectangular shape that is vertically long and extends from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the front right side of the front door 12.
Furthermore, although not shown, 16 LEDs are mounted as light emitting elements on the right frame lamp board 27a. All of these 16 LEDs are full color LEDs.
Furthermore, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp board 27a is made of white, similarly to the upper frame lamp board 26a.

Further, the right frame lamp cover 27b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the right frame lamp board 27a, and is attached to the front right side of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the right frame lamp cover 27b has a vertically elongated shape extending from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front right side of the front door 12, and is made of a colorless, translucent resin.
Furthermore, the light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a is irradiated onto the right frame lamp cover 27b.

As shown in FIG. 432, the left frame lamp section 28 includes a left frame lamp board 28a and a left frame lamp cover 28b.
The left frame lamp board 28a is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the left frame lamp part 28 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element is connected are mounted, and the light emitting element is mounted. It is arranged on the front left side of the front door 12 with its surface facing the front side (player side).

Further, the left frame lamp board 28a is formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically from near the top end to near the bottom end of the front left side of the front door 12.
Furthermore, although not shown, 16 LEDs are mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a as light emitting elements. All of these 16 LEDs are full color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the left frame lamp board 28a is made of white, similarly to the upper frame lamp board 26a and the right frame lamp board 27a.

Further, the left frame lamp cover 28b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the left frame lamp board 28a, and is attached to the front left side of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp cover 28b has a vertically elongated shape extending from near the upper end to near the lower end of the front left side of the front door 12, and is made of a colorless, translucent resin.
Furthermore, the light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a is irradiated onto the left frame lamp cover 28b.

As in the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, the upper frame lamp cover 26b, the right frame lamp cover 27b, and the left frame lamp cover 28b are formed of a colorless and translucent resin, and the upper frame lamp The appearance of the upper frame lamp part 26, right frame lamp part 27, and left frame lamp part 28 is improved by configuring the entire surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the board 26a, right frame lamp board 27a, and left frame lamp board 28a in white. This is to prevent deterioration and to ensure that the color of the light emitting element is clearly visible.

Although not shown, the front right side of the front door 12 is provided with a right frame board attachment part to which the right frame lamp board 27a is attached, and a right frame cover attachment part to which the right frame lamp cover 27b is attached. .
Furthermore, the right frame lamp board 27a is formed into a vertically long, substantially rectangular shape, and the width of the right frame lamp board 27a in the lateral direction is approximately the same as the width of the right frame board mounting portion in the lateral direction. has been done. Thereby, the right frame lamp board 27a covers the right frame board mounting portion.

The entire surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp board 27a is made of white, and by covering the right frame board attachment part with such a right frame lamp board 27a, the light emitting element on the right frame lamp board 27a can be mounted. The entire mounting surface of the light-emitting device can function as a reflector, thereby making it possible to clearly display the color of the light-emitting element.

Similarly, the front left side of the front door 12 is provided with a left frame board attachment part to which the left frame lamp board 28a is attached, and a left frame cover attachment part to which the left frame lamp cover 28b is attached.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp board 28a is formed in a vertically long, substantially rectangular shape, and the width of the left frame lamp board 28a in the width direction is approximately the same as the width of the left frame board mounting portion in the width direction. has been done. Thereby, the left frame lamp board 28a covers the left frame board mounting portion. The entire surface of the left frame lamp board 28a on which the light emitting elements are mounted functions as a reflector, so that the color of the light emitting elements can be clearly seen.

Further, similarly to the case where the gaming machine is the Pachinko gaming machine 500, a positioning boss is inserted into the right frame lamp board 27a when positioning the right frame lamp board 27a at a predetermined position of the right frame board attachment part. and a fixing hole used when fixing (screwing) the right frame lamp board 27a to the right frame board mounting portion are provided adjacent to each other. The opening area of the positioning hole and the opening area of the fixing hole are set to be different. This prevents the positioning hole from being mistaken for the fixing hole, allowing the assembly work to proceed smoothly.

Further, the positioning boss has a protrusion that protrudes toward the mounting surface of the light emitting element when the right frame lamp board 27a is positioned at a predetermined position of the right frame board mounting portion.
That is, the positioning boss is inserted into the positioning hole from the side opposite to the light emitting element mounting surface of the right frame lamp board 27a, and the tip of the positioning boss protrudes to the light emitting element mounting surface of the right frame lamp board 27a. The tip of this positioning boss is called a protrusion. This protrusion is formed in a convex curved shape (dome shape). Thereby, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the protruding portion formed in a convex curved shape, so that the right frame lamp portion 27 appears to shine beautifully.

In addition, as in the case where the gaming machine is the Pachinko gaming machine 500, when fixing the right frame lamp board 27a to the right frame board mounting part, from the light emitting element mounting surface side of the right frame lamp board 27a to the right frame board mounting part. Fix it by screwing it on. At this time, the screw head is exposed on the mounting surface of the light emitting element in the right frame lamp board 27a. The height of the screw head from the light emitting element mounting surface is set higher than the height of the light emitting element from the light emitting element mounting surface.

Furthermore, as in the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, the screw head is subjected to a surface treatment that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting element.
Thereby, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the screw head, so that the right frame lamp part 27 appears to shine beautifully.

Further, as in the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, a lens portion is provided in the right frame lamp cover 27b at a position facing the right frame lamp board 27a. The lens portion is constructed by connecting curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness. Thereby, the manufacturing cost of the mold for molding the right frame lamp cover 27b is reduced, and the light emitted from the light emitting element is made to appear clearly.
Note that the upper frame lamp cover 26b and the left frame lamp cover 28b also have a lens portion at a position facing the lamp board, and the shape of the lens portion is made by connecting curved surfaces with different curvatures but the same wall thickness. The shape is similar to that of the right frame lamp cover 27b.

As described above, the slot machine 10 includes the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80.
In addition, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are connected by a harness, and information (commands) necessary for outputting the effects can be sent in one direction from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. There is.

Further, the sub-control board 80, the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a are connected by a harness.
Then, the sub control board 80 determines the contents of the effect based on the commands transmitted from the main control board 50, and performs control to output the determined effect. At this time, the sub-control board 80 controls the light emission of the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a.

Further, when the start switch 41 is operated with a specified number of medals bet, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When this signal is input to the main control board 50, the winning combination lottery means 61 acquires a random number value, and draws a winning number based on the acquired random value, and the reel control means 65 All the motors 32 are driven and controlled so that all the reels 31 are rotated.

Thereafter, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When this signal is input to the main control board 50, the reel control means 65 drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 so as to correspond to the lottery result of the winning combination lottery means 61. , the rotation of the reel 31 associated with the motor 32 is stopped.
Then, the game result of the current game is displayed based on the symbol combination when all the reels 31 are stopped. At this time, when a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination stops on the active line, that winning combination becomes a prize, and medals corresponding to the winning combination are paid out.

Further, when a lottery is performed by the winning combination lottery means 61, the main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to the lottery result to the sub control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives a command corresponding to the lottery result, the sub-control board 80 controls the light emitting lights mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a so as to correspond to the lottery result. Controls the light emission of the element.

Specifically, when the winning number corresponding to the special winning combination is won by the winning lottery means 61, the main control board 50 transmits a command to that effect (special winning command) to the sub control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the special winning command, the sub control board 80 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the special winning combination. Make it emit light.
In addition, as a light emission pattern corresponding to the special prize, each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element is changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of "0" to "255". . This allows the light emitting elements to emit light in so-called rainbow colors, thereby informing the player that he has won the special winning combination.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are made of colorless and translucent resin, and the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the lamp board such as the upper frame lamp board 26a is made of white. Therefore, by making the light emitting element emit light in rainbow colors when a special prize is won, the colors of the light emitting element can be made to look beautiful.
In addition, when a special winning combination is won, the light emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may be caused to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the special winning combination. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a may emit light in a pattern corresponding to a special winning combination, or the light emitting elements mounted on all lamp boards may be emitted in a pattern corresponding to a special winning combination. It may also emit light.

In addition, when a special prize is won, the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a are made to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the special prize, and the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a are emitted. The light-emitting elements may be made to emit white light.
Note that by setting each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can be caused to emit white light.

Further, as described above, a door sensor is electrically connected to the main control board 50, and when the front door 12 is opened, the door sensor is turned on and its signal is input to the main control board 50. . When the main control board 50 detects that the door sensor is turned on, it transmits a command to that effect (door open command) to the sub control board 80.
When the sub control board 80 receives the door open command, it controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light. This allows the hall clerk to be informed that the front door 12 is open.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are made of colorless and translucent resin, and the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the lamp board such as the upper frame lamp board 26a is made of white. Therefore, if the light emitting element emits white light, it will be noticeable, so that the clerk in the hall can easily notice that the front door 12 is open.
Note that when the front door 12 is open, the light emitting element mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may be caused to emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a may emit white light, or the light emitting elements mounted on all lamp boards may emit white light. Good too.
Furthermore, when the front door 12 is open, the light emitting elements may be blinked in a predetermined pattern corresponding to when the front door 12 is open.

Furthermore, in the slot machine 10, when the start switch 41 is operated with a specified number of medals bet, one game is started, all reels 31 are stopped, and processes such as medal payout are performed. One game may end at a certain time.
Furthermore, when the winning combination selection means 61 results in a non-winning, the main control board 50 transmits a command to that effect (non-winning command) to the sub control board 80.

Further, upon receiving the non-winning command, the sub-control board 80 executes a non-winning presentation pattern lottery (a lottery for selecting presentation pattern 1 or presentation pattern 2).
Then, the sub control board 80 causes the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit light in a manner according to the result of the performance pattern lottery, and displays The red LED mounted on the board of the decoration around the window is controlled to emit light.

433(a) and (b) show performance patterns when the prize is not won by the role lottery means 61, and (a) is a time chart showing performance pattern 1 when the prize is not won. (b) is a time chart showing performance pattern 2 in the case of non-winning.
In FIGS. 433(a) and (b), "LED1" indicates the LED mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a, and "LED2" indicates the LED mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a.
In addition, in FIGS. 433(a) and (b), "LED3" indicates one red LED mounted on the board included in the decoration around the display window, and "LED4" indicates one red LED included in the decoration around the display window. Another red LED mounted on the board is shown. The mounting surface of the red LED on the substrate included in the decoration around the display window is made of green.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 433(a) and 433(b), "reel rotation start" indicates when the reel 31 starts rotating. "First stop operation" indicates when the first stop operation is performed (when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped first is operated (turned on)). "Second stop operation" indicates when the second stop operation is performed (when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped second is operated (turned on)). "Third stop operation" indicates when the third stop operation is performed (when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped last is operated (turned on)). “Payout” indicates processing time such as payout of medals.

As shown in FIG. 433(a), in a game in which the winning combination is not won by the role lottery means 61, when the performance pattern 1 is determined in the performance pattern lottery, the LED1 (LED mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a) ) is turned on (turned on) when the reel 31 starts rotating, and turned off (turned off) when the second stop operation is performed.
In addition, in production pattern 1, LED2 (LED mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a) is lit after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation, and is turned off during the second stop operation. do. Moreover, LED1 and LED2 are turned off at the same time.

Furthermore, in production pattern 1, the LED 3 (one red LED around the display window) lights up after the start of rotation of the reels 31 and before the first stop operation, and turns off during the first stop operation. .
Furthermore, in production pattern 1, LED 4 (other red LEDs around the display window) lights up after the start of rotation of the reels 31 and before the first stop operation, and after the first stop operation. Therefore, the light goes out before the second stop operation. Moreover, LED3 and LED4 are lit at the same time. Furthermore, at the same time as the LED 2 is turned on, the LED 4 is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 433(b), in a game that is not won by the role lottery means 61, when the performance pattern 2 is determined in the performance pattern lottery, the LED1 (LED mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a) ) is lit (turned on) when the reels 31 start rotating, and turned off (turned off) when the second stop operation is performed, similarly to when the performance pattern 1 is determined.
Furthermore, in the effect pattern 2, the LED2 (the LED mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a) does not light up, unlike when the effect pattern 1 is determined.

Furthermore, in production pattern 2, the LED 3 (one red LED around the display window) lights up after the start of rotation of the reels 31 and before the first stop operation, and turns off during the second stop operation. . Moreover, LED1 and LED3 are turned off at the same time.
Furthermore, in production pattern 2, LED 4 (other red LEDs around the display window) is turned on after the start of rotation of the reels 31 and before the first stop operation, similarly to when production pattern 1 is determined. The light is turned on after the first stop operation and is turned off before the second stop operation. Moreover, LED3 and LED4 are lit at the same time.

In this way, in a game in which the prize is not won by the role lottery means 61, either the performance pattern 1 or the performance pattern 2 is determined by the performance pattern lottery, and the light emission of the LEDs 1 to 4 is controlled according to the determined performance pattern. .
In both production pattern 1 and production pattern 2, the LED 1 lights up when the reels 31 start rotating, and turns off when the second stop operation is performed.
Furthermore, in performance pattern 1, the LED 2 lights up after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation, and turns off during the second stop operation, but in performance pattern 2, it does not light up.

Furthermore, in production pattern 1, the LED 3 lights up after the start of rotation of the reels 31 and before the first stop operation, and turns off during the first stop operation, and in production pattern 2, The light is turned on after the start of rotation and before the first stop operation, and is turned off during the second stop operation.
Furthermore, in both performance pattern 1 and performance pattern 2, the LED 4 lights up after the start of rotation of the reels 31 and before the first stop operation, and after the first stop operation. The light goes out before the second stop operation.

From the above, the average value of the time that LED 1 is turned on in games that are not won by the winning combination lottery means 61 is set longer than the average value of the time that LED 2 to LED 4 are turned on in games that are not won by the winning combination lottery means 61. has been done.
The entire surface of the LED mounting surface of the right frame lamp board 27a is made of white, and the right frame lamp cover 27b is made of colorless and translucent resin. Since the light emitted from the LED (LED mounted on the LED 27a) can be displayed clearly, even in a game in which the prize is not won by the winning combination lottery means 61, a beautiful performance using the LED 1 can be displayed.

Further, even when the gaming machine is the slot machine 10, as in the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a etc. By emitting white light, it is possible to notify the hall clerk that the setting is being changed or confirmed.
In the slot machine 10, when the setting key switch is turned on while the power is off (power off state) and the power is turned on in this state, the slot machine 10 shifts to a setting change state (step S212 in FIG. 38).

When the setting change state is entered, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73.
Furthermore, in the setting change state, the setting value is updated (“+1”) each time the setting change switch is operated (steps S240 to S241 in FIG. 38).
In the setting change state, when the start switch 41 is operated ("Yes" in step S242 of FIG. 38), the setting value is confirmed, and when the setting key switch is turned off ("Yes" in step S243 of FIG. 38), The settings change state ends.

Further, in the slot machine 10, when the setting key switch is turned on while the power is on, the slot machine 10 shifts to a setting confirmation state.
Further, in the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. This allows you to check the current setting values.
Then, when the setting key switch is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends.

Further, when the state changes to the setting change state, the main control board 50 transmits a command (setting change start command) indicating that the state changes to the setting change state to the sub control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the setting change start command, the sub control board 80 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light. do.

Furthermore, when the setting change state ends, the main control board 50 transmits a command (setting change end command) indicating the end of the setting change state to the sub control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the setting change end command, the sub control board 80 ends the control for causing the light emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light emitting element continues to emit white light while the setting change state continues (while the setting change process in FIG. 39 is being executed), and when the setting change state ends, the light emitting element stops emitting white light.

Further, when the state shifts to the setting confirmation state, the main control board 50 transmits a command (setting confirmation start command) indicating that the state shifts to the setting confirmation state to the sub control board 80.
When the sub control board 80 receives the setting confirmation start command, it controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light.

Furthermore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the main control board 50 transmits a command (setting confirmation end command) indicating the end of the setting confirmation state to the sub control board 80.
Then, upon receiving the setting confirmation end command, the sub control board 80 ends the control for causing the light emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light emitting element continues to emit white light while the setting confirmation state continues, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the light emitting element stops emitting white light.

As described above, by setting each of the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) output values of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
In addition, by emitting white light from the light emitting elements mounted on lamp boards such as the upper frame lamp board 26a in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, it is possible to indicate that the hall is being controlled to the setting change state or setting confirmation state. You can notify the store staff.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are made of colorless and translucent resin, and the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the lamp board such as the upper frame lamp board 26a is made of white. Therefore, if the light emitting element emits white light, it will be noticeable, so that the clerk in the hall can easily notice that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is being controlled.

Note that when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, the light emitting element mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may be caused to emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a may emit white light, or the light emitting elements mounted on all lamp boards may emit white light. Good too.

Further, when controlled to be in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the light emitting elements may be blinked in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the setting change state or setting confirmation state.
Furthermore, when the light emitting element is made to blink when the front door 12 is open and when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, The blinking pattern of the light emitting element can be made different depending on the state or the setting confirmation state.

In addition, even when the gaming machine is the slot machine 10, as in the case where the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the gaming machine returns from a power outage, the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a etc. are turned white. By emitting light, it is possible to notify the hall staff that the system is recovering from a power outage.
Here, in the slot machine 10, when the power is turned off (power off), the main control board 50 executes the power off process shown in FIG. 54.

Further, when the power is turned on (recovering from a power-off), the main control board 50 executes the power recovery process shown in FIG. 40.
Furthermore, when starting the power restoration process, the main control board 50 transmits a command to that effect (power restoration start command) to the sub control board 80.
Further, upon receiving the power recovery start command, the sub control board 80 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light. do.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 ends the power restoration process, it transmits a command to that effect (power restoration end command) to the sub control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the power restoration end command, it ends the control for causing the light emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light emitting element continues to emit white light while the power restoration process in FIG. 40 is being executed, and when the power restoration process in FIG. 40 is completed, the light emitting element stops emitting white light.

As described above, by setting each of the red (R), green (G), and blue (B) output values of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
Furthermore, by causing the light-emitting elements mounted on lamp boards such as the upper frame lamp board 26a to emit white light while the power restoration process is being executed, it is possible to notify the hall staff that the power restoration process is being executed. can.

Furthermore, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are made of colorless and translucent resin, and the entire surface of the light emitting element mounting surface of the lamp board such as the upper frame lamp board 26a is made of white. Therefore, if the light emitting element emits white light, it will be noticeable, making it easier for the hall staff to notice that the power restoration process is being executed.
Note that while the power restoration process is being executed, the light emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may be caused to emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 27a may emit white light, or the light emitting elements mounted on all lamp boards may emit white light. Good too.

Furthermore, while the power restoration process is being executed, the light emitting elements may be blinked in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the execution of the power restoration process.
Furthermore, when the front door 12 is opened, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, and when the light emitting element is blinked during execution of the power recovery process, the front door 12 is opened. The blinking pattern of the light emitting element can be made different depending on when the device is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and when the power recovery process is being executed.

(12) In the 45th embodiment, the pachinko game machine 500 is taken as an example of the gaming machine, and in the modification (11), the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of the gaming machine, but the invention is not limited to these.
For example, in Parrot gaming machines, enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines), and casino machines, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp board included in the decorative lamp section is configured in white, and the decorative lamp section includes By forming the lamp cover from a colorless or white transparent resin, the light emitted from the light emitting element can be clearly seen.
Note that "Parrot" is a slot machine that uses game balls as game media.

(13) The first to forty-fifth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to forty-fifth embodiments are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Additional notes>
The inventions stated in the original specification etc. of the present application (original inventions) include, for example, the following original inventions 1 to 85, which are the problems to be solved by the original invention and the problems related to the original invention, respectively. The means and effects of the original invention are as follows. However, the invention described in this specification is not limited to Inventions 1 to 85.

1. Original invention 1
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 1 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that does not execute processing related to gaming media after a power outage occurs.
In conventional gaming machines, by turning off the blocker before executing the backup process as a power-off process, even if medals are inserted during the backup process, the medals are returned to the player via the blocker. Therefore, a technique is known in which the medal addition process is not performed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-173832).
However, for example, if a power outage occurs at the moment a medal is inserted into the medal slot, the medal will pass through the blocker before the power outage process is executed, and the medal will be counted. It was possible. Note that it is not preferable in terms of control to execute medal addition processing (medal bet processing or medal credit processing) after a power outage occurs.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to prevent the addition process of game media from being executed even if a power outage occurs at approximately the same time as the game media are inserted from the game media input slot. .

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 1 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (first embodiment (A)) is
a game media slot (medal slot 47);
It is provided in the path (medal path) for game media (medals) inserted from the game media input port, and is in a state where the game media are allowed to pass (on state) or a state where the game media are not allowed to pass (off state). ) a blocker (45) controllable to
Detection means A (insertion sensor 44a) and B (insertion sensor 44b) which are provided in the path of the game medium input from the game medium input port and can detect the game medium (the detection means B is located downstream of the detection means A) ) and ,
When an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off while the blocker is controlled to allow passage of gaming media, the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected, and the game media is stopped. The time required to control the blocker to a state where passage is not permitted is T1 (T1 in FIGS. 2 and 3),
When a game medium is released from the game medium slot into the inside of the game machine while the blocker is controlled to allow passage of the game medium, the game medium cannot be seen from the front of the game machine. From when it becomes possible (position M2 in FIG. 2) until the detection means B detects the game medium and no longer detects the game medium (position M4 in FIG. 2). When the time is T2 (T2 in FIGS. 2 and 3),
T1<T2
It is characterized by making it so that

(c) Effects of Original Invention 1 According to the original invention, the power is cut off when the gaming media is released from the gaming media slot into the gaming machine and becomes invisible from the front of the gaming machine. In this case, by the time the detection means B no longer detects the game medium, the blocker is controlled to a state where the power supply is cut off and the passage of the game medium is not permitted. , at least not detected by the detection means B.
Therefore, since the game medium is not normally detected by the detection means A and B, the game medium addition process (bet process or credit process) is not executed. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs when the gaming media is no longer visible from the front of the gaming machine, that is, even if the power is interrupted immediately after the gaming media is released inside the gaming machine, the game You can choose not to accept media. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game media addition process from being executed after a power outage occurs.

2. Original invention 2
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 2 The original invention relates to a gate mark on a board case in a gaming machine equipped with a board case in which a control board is housed.
2. Description of the Related Art In conventional gaming machines, a board case that houses a main control board inside is known. Here, since the board case is generally formed by molding, gate marks remain on the board case. A technique has been proposed that uses this gate trace as a landmark (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-042270).
However, since the gate mark on the board case includes a cut portion of the resin, it is unclear when viewed from the outside. Therefore, there is a problem that there is a possibility that the gate remains may be opened and the inside of the main control board may be accessed.
The problem that the invention was originally intended to solve is to suppress the act of tampering that makes use of the gate marks on the board case.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 2 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (second embodiment) is
A predetermined IC (main CPU 55) with a calculation function,
a control board (main control board 50) on which the predetermined IC is mounted on one surface (the surface facing the top surface of the upper cover 57);
A board case (a board case 56 consisting of an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58) that has a plurality of surfaces (a top surface, a side surface, etc.) and houses the control board;
The board case is formed so that the inside thereof is visible,
Arranging gate marks (57b) during molding of the board case on a surface that is outside the board case and faces the one surface of the control board (outside top surface of the top cover 57);
The predetermined IC of the control board is not located in a direction perpendicular to the facing surface from the gate trace.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 2 According to the original invention, since the prescribed IC of the control board is not located in the vertical direction of the gate trace on the board case, the gate trace can be opened illegally and the prescribed IC can be accessed. This can be prevented.
Furthermore, since there are no gate marks on the board case in the vertical direction of the predetermined IC on the control board, the predetermined IC can be visually confirmed without being obstructed by the gate marks. This makes it possible to easily visually confirm whether or not a given IC has been tampered with.

3. Original invention 3
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 3 The original invention relates to processing when communication is restored from the disconnection after a disconnection occurs in communication between the main control board and the sub-control board.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventional gaming machines are known in which a main control board sends commands to a sub-control board, and the sub-control board controls an image display device or the like based on the received commands.
Here, there is a known technique in which the sub-control board compares the command received last time with the command received this time, and determines that there is an abnormality in command reception based on the consistency of these received commands (for example, Publication No. 2014-226503).
However, when transmitting commands from the main control board to the sub control board, disconnection may occur between the main control board and the sub control board. Then, when communication is restored, there is a possibility that the sub-control board will not be able to output normal effects.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to provide an appropriate effect when communication is restored after a disconnection occurs between the main control board and the sub-control board.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 3 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (third embodiment) is
a main control board (50);
a sub-control board (80) that controls the performance based on information received from the main control board;
The sub-control board is capable of receiving information about the operated stop switch (42) from the main control board,
In a predetermined gaming state (AT), the sub-control board is capable of outputting a performance corresponding to the operation of the stop switch based on receiving information about the operated stop switch,
The sub-control board is
When a predetermined stop switch is operated in the "N" game in the predetermined gaming state, when information that the predetermined stop switch has been operated is received, a predetermined stop switch corresponding to the operation of the predetermined stop switch is received. A performance (a performance when the reels corresponding to a predetermined stop switch are stopped) is output, and then, before all the remaining stop switches in the "N" game are operated, information from the main control board cannot be received. , after that, it became possible to receive information from the main control board in the "N+a" game, and then, in the "N+a" game, information was received that a specific stop switch different from the predetermined stop switch was operated. In this case, output a performance that corresponds to the operation of the specific stop switch and is related to the predetermined performance (a performance that follows the predetermined performance and is a performance when the reels corresponding to the specific stop switch are stopped). Then, when predetermined information is received for the "N+a+1" game number, the effect for the "N+a+1" game number is output based on the predetermined information.

(c) Effect of original invention 3 According to the original invention, when communication is restored during the "N+a" game, a performance related to the predetermined performance of the "N" game that had been output until then is output. Therefore, in the "N+a" game, the performance following the "N" game can be output. Since the normal performance is restored when the game moves to the "N+a+1" game, it is possible to prevent the performance from suddenly changing due to the restoration of communication during the "N+a" game. Thereby, it is possible to output a presentation that does not give an unnatural feeling before and after the occurrence of a disconnection.

4. Original invention 4
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 4 The original invention relates to a gaming machine in which a stop switch can be operated at high speed.
In conventional gaming machines, when a stop switch is operated, the reels corresponding to the stop switch are stopped at a predetermined position corresponding to a lottery result. Further, after the reel is stopped at a predetermined position, the motor is kept in an excited state for a predetermined period of time. Here, when the operated stop switch is in the on state or when the motor is in the excited state, the next operation of the stop switch is not accepted.
Here, there is a known technique that does not accept a stop operation even if a second stop switch is operated until the reel status changes to the stopped state after the first stop switch is operated ( For example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-093576).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional technology, if it takes a long time after the stop switch is operated until the next stop switch operation can be accepted, there is a problem that the game cannot be played at a high speed.
The problem initially sought to be solved by the invention is to enable a stop switch to be operated at high speed.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 4 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (fourth embodiment) is
A reel (31) and
a motor (32) for rotating the reel;
a reel control means (65) that drives and controls the motor to stop rotation of the reel based on detection of operation of a stop button (stop button 42a);
Comprising an internal lottery means (winning lottery means 61),
A sensor (detection sensor 42e) that detects the operation of the stop button is turned on until the stop button is pushed to the deepest position (the position shown in FIG. 12(c)), and when the stop button is released, the stop button is turned on. The button is configured to be movable to an initial position (the position shown in FIG. 12(a)) by a biasing force, and the sensor is turned off before the stop button moves to the initial position,
In a game in which the internal lottery means has determined a predetermined result, the stop button is operated on a predetermined reel at a predetermined timing under a situation where all the reels are rotating by the reel control means, and the predetermined result is determined. After detecting that the sensor of the stop button for the reel is turned on, the predetermined reel is brought into an excitation state (4-phase excitation state) for stopping it, and a predetermined time (T12 in FIG. 13) has elapsed since the excitation state was set. When this occurs, the excitation state is terminated.
When the time from the moment when the stop button pressed to the deepest part is released until the sensor turns off is T1 (T11 in FIG. 13), and the predetermined time is T2,
T1<T2
It is characterized by making it so that

(c) Effect of Original Invention 4 According to the original invention, it is assumed that the start of the motor's excitation state when the reel is stopped is the same as the moment when the stop button pressed to the deepest part is released. Sometimes the excitation state ends after the sensor is turned off. Therefore, the next operation of the stop button can be accepted at the timing when the excitation state of the motor ends.

5. Original invention 5
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 5 The original invention relates to control of a medal payout device.
In conventional gaming machines, it is known that it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-214434).
Here, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as the hopper motor to rotate the hopper disk, but when a constant current is passed through the DC motor, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually accelerates from a stopped state. Then, it reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
For this reason, the rotation of the hopper motor's drive shaft gradually accelerates from the time the hopper motor starts driving until the first medal is ejected. The time required is longer than the medal ejection interval when the drive shaft of the hopper motor is rotating at a constant speed, and the player may feel that the first medal ejection is delayed.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to prevent the player from feeling that the first medal is delayed in being ejected.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 5 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (sixth embodiment) is
A hopper (35) for storing medals,
a hopper disk (101) provided in the hopper;
a hopper motor (36) for rotating the hopper disk;
A control means (main control board 50) for controlling the drive of the hopper motor,
The hopper disk is provided with a plurality of (eight) holding parts (102) along the outer periphery of the hopper disk that can hold medals stored in the hopper,
When the hopper motor is driven and the hopper disk rotates, the medals held in the holding part are sequentially ejected from the ejection part (103),
The position of the holding section where the last ejected medal was held at the moment when the last ejected medal in one payout process was ejected from the ejecting section is defined as a first position,
The position of the holding part where the first ejected medal in the next payout process is held at the moment when the last ejected medal in the one payout process is ejected from the ejecting part is a second position,
When the first payout process is finished, the control means controls a state in which the holding part holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process is located between a first position and a second position. The hopper motor is preferably driven so that the hopper disk stops rotating.

(c) Effect of original invention 5 According to the original invention, if the holding part that holds the first ejected medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, the holding part that holds the first ejected medal stops between the first position and the second position. The distance is shorter than when stopped at the second position. As a result, the time it takes to reach the first position is shorter than when stopping at the second position, so even if the rotation of the hopper motor's drive shaft gradually accelerates, the ejection of the first medal will be delayed. It is possible to avoid giving any sensation to the player.

6. Original invention 6
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 6 The original invention relates to the arrangement of the main control board attached to the inside of the cabinet and the sub-control board attached to the back surface of the front door.
Conventional game machines are known that include an electrolytic capacitor for power storage on a sub-control board for controlling effects (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2014-131656).
Here, the electrolytic capacitor for power storage is filled with an electrolytic solution, but if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a malfunction and the filled electrolytic solution scatters and adheres to the main CPU on the main control board, The main CPU may malfunction. Furthermore, there is a possibility that the main CPU may be damaged due to the impact when the electrolytic capacitor ruptures.
The problem initially sought to be solved by the invention is to prevent the main CPU from malfunctioning even if an electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a malfunction and the electrolyte is scattered. Another purpose is to prevent the main CPU from being damaged by the impact even if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures due to a malfunction.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 6 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (seventh embodiment) is
cabinet (13);
a front door (12) attached to the cabinet so as to be openable and closable;
a main control board (50) that controls the progress of the game;
Equipped with a sub-control board (80) for controlling the production,
the main control board is installed inside the cabinet,
The sub-control board is attached to the back side of the front door,
The main control board and the sub-control board are arranged to face each other when the front door is closed,
A main CPU (55) is arranged on the main control board,
The present invention is characterized in that an electrolytic capacitor (86) is disposed on the sub-control board at a position other than the position facing the main CPU.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 6 According to the original invention, since the electrolytic capacitor is arranged in a position other than the position facing the main CPU on the sub-control board, the electrolytic capacitor may explode due to a malfunction and the electrolyte Even if the electrolyte is scattered, it is possible to prevent the scattered electrolyte from adhering to the main CPU, thereby preventing the main CPU from malfunctioning.
Further, even if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures, the main CPU can be prevented from receiving the impact directly, thereby preventing the main CPU from being damaged.

7. Original invention 7
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 7 The original invention relates to the stop control of the reels on the main control board side and the control of the output of effects on the sub control board side.
Conventional gaming machines can perform multiple types of performance contents, and each performance content can be executed when the special role has been won (internal) and when the special role has not been won (non-internal). It is known that the selection probabilities of are different (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-146608).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the performance content is selected regardless of the lottery result of the internal lottery both in the internal game and in the non-internal game.
The problem that the invention initially aims to solve is to appropriately determine the effect to be output according to the lottery result of the internal lottery.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 7 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (ninth embodiment) is
A plurality of reels (31) displaying a plurality of symbols;
a plurality of stop switches (42) operated by a player when stopping each of the reels;
Main control means (main control board 50) that controls the progress of the game;
A sub-control means (sub-control board 80) for controlling the production,
The main control means includes:
An internal lottery in which the drawing is conducted in such a way that there are cases where the first drawing result (for example, "BB" wins alone during a non-internal draw) or a second drawing result (for example, "non-winning" during a BB draw). means (rot lottery means 61);
a plurality of stop position determination tables defining stop positions of the reel corresponding to the position of the reel at the moment when the stop switch is operated;
reel control means (65) for determining the stop position of the reel using any of the stop position determination tables and stopping the reel at the determined stop position;
The reel control means determines the stop position of the reel using the same stop position determination table for a game that has a first drawing result and a game that has a second lottery result,
The sub-control means
A plurality of performance determination tables that define the performances to be output,
A production output control means (91) for determining a production to be output using any of the production determination tables and outputting the determined production;
The performance output control means is characterized in that the performance output control means determines the performance to be output by using different performance determination tables for the game resulting in the first lottery result and the game resulting in the second lottery result.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 7 According to the original invention, the reel control means stops at the same time on the main control means side in the game in which the internal lottery means has the first drawing result and the game in which the second drawing result has occurred. The stop position of the reel is determined using the position determination table, but on the sub-control means side, the performance output control means determines the performance to be output using a different performance determination table.
Thereby, even if the reel stop control on the main control means side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control means side, and effects can be diversified.

8. Original invention 8
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 8 The original invention relates to the gap between the cabinet and the front door.
In a conventional gaming machine, a protruding side that protrudes outward is provided at the edge of the opening on the front side of the cabinet, and the protruding side is configured to be accommodated inside the front door when the front door is closed. Therefore, it is known that the gap between the cabinet and the front door is bent to make it difficult for foreign objects to enter (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-198949).
However, it is conceivable that the front door may be slightly opened so that the protruding side is removed from the front door, allowing foreign objects to enter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.
The problem initially sought to be solved by the invention is to prevent unauthorized acts (goto acts) in which foreign objects enter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door by opening the front door a little.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 8 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (eighth embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door (12) attached to the cabinet so as to be openable and closable;
and a door sensor that detects opening of the front door,
A first closing part (13c) is provided at the lower part of the cabinet, and the first closing part (13c) projects toward the front door when the front door is closed.
A second closing part (12a) is provided at a position below the first closing part in the lower part of the front door, the second closing part (12a) protruding toward the cabinet when the front door is closed;
A third closing part (12b) is provided at a position above the first closing part in the lower part of the front door, and projects toward the cabinet when the front door is closed;
When the front door is closed, the first closing part is arranged between the second closing part and the third closing part,
The position of the front door when the door sensor first detects opening of the front door is defined as a detection start position,
Even when the front door is at the detection start position, the first closing part is arranged between the second closing part and the third closing part.

(c) Effect of original invention 8 According to the original invention, when the front door is opened from the closed state, the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door, and then the second closing part and the third closing part are connected. The first closed part will come out from between. Further, when the door sensor detects the opening of the front door, it becomes possible to notify that the front door is open.
Therefore, the first blocking part does not come out from between the second blocking part and the third blocking part before it becomes possible to notify that the front door is open, and the first blocking part does not come out from between the second blocking part and the third blocking part. Since the gap between the cabinet and the front door has a curved shape even in the position where it is possible to do so, it is possible to prevent unauthorized acts (goto acts) in which foreign objects enter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.

9. Original invention 9
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 9 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with an advantageous section indicator.
Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with advantageous section indicators have been known (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in a conventional gaming machine equipped with an advantageous section indicator, lighting control of the advantageous section indicator upon recovery from a power cut has not been sufficiently studied.
The problem originally intended to be solved by the invention is to appropriately control the advantageous section indicator upon recovery from a power outage.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 9 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification gaming state (AT) in which the operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop button (stop switch 42) can be notified;
an advantageous section in which the informed gaming state can be executed;
An advantageous section indicator (advantageous section display LED 77) indicating that it is an advantageous section;
If the power supply is cut off while the advantageous section indicator is lit, and the power supply is resumed with the setting change switch turned off, the advantageous section indicator is turned on after the interrupt processing is started. Enables processing to turn on the light,
After the power supply is cut off in a situation where the advantageous section indicator is lit, when the power supply is resumed with the setting change switch turned on, processing for turning off the advantageous section indicator; After executing the process, it is possible to proceed to the setting change process.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 9 According to the original invention, it is possible to appropriately control the advantageous section indicator depending on the situation when recovering from a power-off.

10. Original invention 10
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 10 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with four reels and a stop button.
Conventional gaming machines generally have three reels and three stop buttons (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
It has also been proposed to increase the number of reels and stop buttons to four in conventional gaming machines. However, when the number of stop buttons is set to four, there is a problem in that it is easy to make a mistake in operating the stop button during AT.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to make it difficult for errors in operation of the stop button to occur when the number of stop buttons is increased to four.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 10 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (13th embodiment) is
Four reels (31A to 31D) and
and four stop buttons (stop switches 42A to 42D) corresponding to each of the four reels,
A predetermined operation button (24) is arranged above the four stop buttons,
At least a portion of the stop button (stop switch 42A) on the left end side is located vertically downward from the left end of the predetermined operation button,
It is characterized in that at least a part of the stop button (stop switch 42D) on the right end side is located vertically downward from the right end of the predetermined operation button.

(c) Effect of original invention 10 According to the original invention, even when the number of stop buttons is four, it is possible to operate the stop buttons on both the left and right ends using the left and right ends of the operation buttons as landmarks. , it is possible to prevent mistakes in operating the stop button from occurring.

11. Original invention 11
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 11 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that can specify a specified number of games.
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that allow games to be played with any one of a plurality of types of prescribed numbers (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in conventional gaming machines, even if the game can be played with any one of a plurality of types of prescribed numbers, there are cases where an appropriate prescribed number and an inappropriate prescribed number occur.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to make it possible to play a game with an appropriate prescribed number of players.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 11 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (twelfth embodiment) is
Equipped with a notification gaming state (AT) that can notify the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42),
When informing the operation mode in the notification gaming state, information corresponding to the operation mode (press order instruction information) can be displayed on a predetermined display section (obtained number display LED 78),
In the notification gaming state, a game can be started when at least a prescribed number of gaming values (“2” or “3”) are inputted;
In the notification gaming state, information corresponding to a specified number can be displayed on the predetermined display section,
In the notification gaming state, when displaying information corresponding to the specified number on the predetermined display section, the information corresponding to the specified number is displayed at a predetermined timing (in FIG. , displayed in step S322),
When displaying information corresponding to the specified number on the predetermined display section, it should be displayed in a display format that can be distinguished from the information corresponding to the operation mode (if the specified number is "2", "0A" is displayed). Features.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 11 According to the original invention, information corresponding to the specified number can be displayed at a predetermined timing until the start switch is detected to be turned on. , it is possible to notify the appropriate prescribed number for the game.
Further, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the information corresponding to the operation mode and the information corresponding to the specified number.

12. Original invention 12
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 12 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a counter that counts the difference in the number of coins in the notification gaming state.
Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a counter that counts the number of different coins during AT are known (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
In conventional gaming machines, it is required to initialize information regarding the advantageous section when the advantageous section ends. However, after the AT ends, there are cases where the next AT wins early, and there are cases where it is desired to carry over the difference in the number of tickets from the previous AT.
The problem that the invention is originally intended to solve is to initialize the information regarding the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section, while making it possible to carry over the difference in the number of coins from the previous notification gaming state (AT).

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 12 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification gaming state (AT) in which the operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop button (stop switch 42) can be notified;
an advantageous section in which the informed gaming state can be executed;
In the first control means (main control board 50), the cumulative value of the difference number indicating the difference between the number of bets of gaming value and the number of payouts (including addition to credits; the same applies hereinafter), and the minimum value is set to ``0''. ”, a first difference counter (difference counter) that stores the value
The second control means (sub control board 80) includes a second difference number counter (sub difference number counter) that stores a cumulative value of difference numbers indicating the difference between the number of bets and the number of payouts of gaming value;
At the end of the advantageous section, the first difference counter is cleared (step S435 in FIG. 51 or 52), but the second difference counter may not be cleared.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 12 According to the original invention, since the first difference counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous section, it is possible to comply with the rule of initializing information regarding the advantageous section. In addition, the second difference number counter may not be cleared, and in that case, it becomes possible to take over the difference number of sheets from the previous notification game state at the start of the next notification game state.

13. Original invention 13
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 13 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a counter that counts the difference in the number of coins in the notification gaming state.
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that include a counter that counts the number of different coins during AT (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in conventional gaming machines, sufficient consideration has not been given to how to count (update) the difference in the number of coins when a replay prize is won.
The problem that the invention is originally intended to solve is to appropriately execute the process of updating the difference number of coins at the time of replay winning.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 13 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification gaming state (AT) in which the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42) can be notified;
an advantageous section in which the informed gaming state can be executed;
a difference counter that stores the cumulative value of the difference number indicating the difference between the number of bets of the game value and the number of payouts (including addition to credits; the same shall apply hereinafter), with the minimum value being "0";
Equipped with an advantageous section counter (advantageous section clear counter) that counts the number of games played in the advantageous section,
1. At least in a game in which a small prize has been won, after all the reels have stopped (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section ( Step S424 in FIG. 51 or 52),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is started without determining the value of the difference counter (without executing the process of step S434). Enables execution of the process for ending (step S435),
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter does not satisfy the end condition of the advantageous section ("No" in step S424), the update process of the difference counter (steps S428 and W429) is executed. After that, it is determined whether the value of the difference counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (step S434), and when it is determined that the value is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section ("Yes" at step S434). ''), the process for terminating the advantageous section (step S435) can be executed,
2. In a game in which the replay is won, after all reels have stopped (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (see FIG. 51). or step S424 in FIG. 52),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section ("Yes" in step S424), the value of the difference counter is not determined (step S434). processing for terminating the advantageous section (step S435) without executing the processing),
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter does not satisfy the end condition of the advantageous section ("No" in step S424), the difference counter is updated without executing the update process of the difference counter. It is determined whether the value of is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52, if "Yes" in step S426, the process proceeds to step S434), and the value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section is determined. When it is determined that this is the case ("Yes" in step S434), the process for terminating the advantageous section (step S435) is enabled.

(c) Effect of original invention 13 According to the original invention, in a game where a replay is won, the difference counter is updated regardless of whether the value of the advantageous section counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section. Since this is not executed, it is possible to appropriately execute the process of updating the difference in the number of coins in a game in which the replay is won. Furthermore, it is possible to speed up program processing.

14. Original invention 14
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 14 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that is capable of executing processing related to an instruction function in a predetermined number of games.
Conventionally, gaming machines having an instruction function have been known (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in conventional gaming machines, the relationship between the specified number and the processing related to the instruction function and the processing related to the advantageous section has not been sufficiently studied.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately execute the process related to the instruction function and the process related to the advantageous section according to the specified number.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 14 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
a notification gaming state (AT) in which an instruction function to notify the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42) can be executed;
An advantageous section in which the notification gaming state can be executed;
an advantageous section counter (advantageous section clear counter) for counting a predetermined variable related to the advantageous section;
A notification game counter (AT game number counter or AT difference number of sheets counter) for counting a specific variable (for example, number of games played or difference number of sheets) related to the notification gaming state,
It has a game in which at least a first specified number (prescribed number “3”) or a second specified number (prescribed number “2”) can be inputted,
In the game (AT) in the advantageous section, in a game that is started based on the first prescribed number being input, processing related to the instruction function (for example, notification of the correct pressing order) can be executed (in Figure 48). , "Yes" in step S382), and the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed in a game started based on the input of the second specified number ("No" in step S382 in FIG. 48). ,
In the notification game state, in a game started based on the first specified number of inputs, the advantageous section counter can be updated (step S422 in FIG. 51 or 52), and the notification game Enables counter updating (step S333 in FIG. 43),
In the notification game state, in a game that is started based on the second specified number of inputs, the advantageous section counter can be updated (step S422 in FIG. 51 or 52), and the notification game counter is updated. Make the update impossible (“No” in step S332 in FIG. 43)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of original invention 14 According to the original invention, by making it possible to update the advantageous section counter by playing either the first specified number or the second specified number, it is possible to optimize the advantageous section. .
In addition, by not updating the notification game counter in the second specified number of games in which the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed, it is possible to maintain consistency between the execution of the process related to the instruction function and the update of the notification game counter. can.

15. Original invention 15
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 15 The original invention relates to a gaming machine having a signal line for starting.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, it has been known to use a harness consisting of a plurality of signal wires (lead wires) when electrically connecting control boards of gaming machines. One of the signal lines is a signal line related to starting.
In the prior art, since signals related to starting are used for lottery, it is necessary to suppress tampering with signal lines related to starting.
The problem that the invention was originally intended to solve was to make it difficult to specify the signal line related to starting, and to suppress trilling.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 15 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (21st embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (slot machine 10, pachinko gaming machine 500) equipped with a control board (main control board 50, 530),
having a plurality of signal lines (lead wires) electrically connected to the control board,
The plurality of signal lines include at least a first signal line, a second signal line, and a third signal line,
The first signal line is a signal line related to the start of the game (for example, the No. 7 lead wire of harness D in FIG. 111),
The second signal line (for example, lead wire No. 8 of harness D in FIG. 111) and the third signal line (for example, lead wire No. 3 of harness D in FIG. 111) are both: This is a different signal line from the signal line related to starting the game,
The first signal line and the second signal line have substantially the same diameter,
The first signal line and the third signal line have different diameters.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 15 According to the original invention, it can be made difficult to specify which signal line is the signal line related to starting. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the act of tampering with the signal line related to starting.

16. Original invention 16
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 16 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that is capable of outputting a setting change completion sound.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have been known in which any one of a plurality of setting values can be set.
In the conventional technology, the setting change process ends when the setting key is turned off, for example, and it is not possible to easily know from the outside the timing at which the setting change process ends.
Therefore, it is conceivable to notify the user when the setting change process is completed.
However, if you start playing the game immediately after the settings change process ends, if you notify that the settings change process has ended, the notification that the settings change process has ended and the notification output for the game will be the same. There is a risk that the notifications may be output at different times (overlapping), and important notifications output for the game may be difficult to understand.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to appropriately output a termination sound indicating that a setting change state has ended.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 16 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (19th embodiment) is
A gaming machine (slot machine 10, pachinko gaming machine 500) that can change the degree of advantage for the player,
Specific operation detection means for detecting that a specific operation has been performed in order to control either a setting change state in which the advantage level can be changed or a normal state in which the advantage level cannot be changed and a game can be started. (setting key switches 152, 535),
Equipped with a speaker (22, 542) and
In the setting change state, when a condition for transitioning to the normal state is satisfied, an end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended can be output from the speaker for a time T1 ("T01" in FIG. 96). and
The conditions for starting the game (in the case of the slot machine 10, the specified number of bets have been made and the start switch 41 has been operated; in the case of the Pachinko gaming machine 500, the game ball has entered the starting slot 532). In a game where the condition is satisfied, it is possible to end the game at time T2 ("T12" or "T22" in FIG. 96),
In the setting change state, after transitioning to the normal state, at least time T3 ("T11" or "T12" in FIG. 96) is required until the game start condition is satisfied;
When a game is started immediately after transitioning from the setting change state to the normal state, the following formula is established: T1<T2+T3 (T1>0, T2>0, T3>0 )
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of original invention 16 According to the original invention, even if a game is started at the same time as the setting change state ends, an end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended is emitted before the game ends. Since the output is finished, the performance output at the end of the game will not overlap with the end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect outputted at the end of the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended.

17. Original invention 17
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 17 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that can set the net increase number and base value to appropriate values.
Conventionally, gaming machines in which both non-AT and AT are inside 1BB have been known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-029839).
However, in the above-mentioned 1BB internal medium spec, the ball output rate cannot exceed 1 even when playing in the most advantageous push order for the player, so the net increase during AT is increased. The problem is that it is difficult to do so.
The problem that the invention initially aims to solve is to make it possible to achieve a high net increase during AT without increasing the base value.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 17 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In the advantageous section, it is possible to execute a notification gaming state (AT) that can notify operation information (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch,
When the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination (1BB) is stopped and displayed, the special game (1BB game) can be executed,
The first situation (inside 1BB) where the winning information of the special role is carried over in the advantageous section,
and a second situation (1BB in operation) which is an advantageous section and a special game is in progress;
In the first situation, there is no case to execute the notification gaming state,
In the second situation, there is a case where a notification game state is executed,
The ball output rate in the first situation (referring to the value obtained by dividing the number of game media awarded by the number of bets; the same applies hereinafter) is α, the ball output rate in the second situation and non-announcement gaming state is β, and the ball output rate in the second situation and non-information gaming state is β. The ball payout rate in the situation 2 and the notification game state (in a game where the operation information of the stop switch is notified, this refers to the ball payout rate when the stop switch is operated according to the notified operation information) is set as γ. When,
α＜β＜1＜γ
and
Let the probability of deciding to execute the notification gaming state in the non-information gaming state of the second situation be x (a value larger than "0"),
When the probability of deciding to execute the notification gaming state in the non-notification gaming state of the first situation is y (“0” in the 23rd embodiment),
x<y
and
The second situation is characterized in that a predetermined value regarding an advantageous section (advantageous section clear counter value) can be updated in accordance with the execution of a game even in a non-information gaming state.

(c) Effect of original invention 17 According to the original invention, the ball payout rate in the special game increases more than in the non-special game, so by executing the notification game state during the special game, the ball payout rate in the notification game state is increased. rate can be increased. In addition, since the notification game state is not executed in a non-special game, the base value can be lowered.
Furthermore, when you move to a special game in a non-information game state, the ball payout rate does not exceed "1" and the predetermined value regarding the advantageous section is updated, so you do not have the right to a special game state. Even if the player shifts to gaming, it can be made such that there is no benefit to the player. In particular, when transitioning to a special game in a non-information game state, the probability of being determined to the notification game state is set lower than during a non-special game, so transitioning to a special game in a non-information game state is discouraged. can do.

18. Original invention 18
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 18 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that outputs a test signal.
Conventionally, gaming machines in which both non-AT and AT are inside 1BB have been known (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-029839).
However, in the above-mentioned 1BB internal medium spec, the ball output rate cannot exceed "1" even when playing in the push order that is most advantageous to the player, so the net increase during AT is increased. It's hard to let it happen.
Here, various specifications have been proposed that achieve a low base and a high net increase during AT.
In such a low base and AT medium/high net increase specifications, the question is what kind of test signal should be output.
The problem that the invention initially aims to solve is to make it possible to output an appropriate test signal even if the specifications are low base and AT mid-high pure addition.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 18 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
Games in which the winning information of the special role (1BB) is carried over and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role can be stopped and displayed (the accessory condition device number is "1" and the winning and replay condition device number is "0") ”),
When the predetermined conditions are met (main game state "3" and AT standby counter "0"), a test signal (" 0, 16, 7, 2") can be executed,
If the predetermined conditions are not met, it is possible to execute a process to output a test signal ("0, 6, 127, 127") that includes operation information of a stop switch that does not stop displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination. It is characterized by the following.

(c) Effect of original invention 18 According to the original invention, when the predetermined conditions are met, it is possible to output a test signal that can stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination, and when the predetermined conditions are not met, the special Since it is possible to output a test signal that does not stop displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination, it is possible to output a test signal that does not stop displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination. It becomes possible to conduct a test using a different hitting method.

19. Original invention 19
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 19 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that prevents erroneous winnings of special winnings.
Conventionally, gaming machines that execute non-AT and AT in a state inside an MB have been known. In this case, in order to avoid the winning of MB which carries over the winning, it is known to notify the symbol to aim for in order to avoid winning of MB (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-147537).
However, the above-mentioned notification has a problem in that it may mislead the player. Furthermore, even if the notification is made after the MB is at full strength, if the time between the second stop and the third stop of the stop switch is short, the notification may not be made in time and the MB may end up winning.
The problem that the invention is originally intended to solve is to prevent the special winning combination from winning by mistake when the winning is carried over and the special winning combination that should be avoided is full.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 19 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
When the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination (1BB) is stopped and displayed, the special game (1BB game) can be executed,
In a game where symbol combinations corresponding to special winnings can be displayed in a stopped state, special winnings occur when a predetermined reel (third reel 31) is rotating and other reels (first and second reels 31) have stopped. If the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination are displayed in a stopped state (in other words, when the special winning combination is in full swing), the above-mentioned predetermined The reel is characterized in that the predetermined reel is not stopped even if a stop switch corresponding to the reel is operated.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 19 According to the original invention, even if the stop switch corresponding to the reel is operated, the predetermined reel will not stop until the predetermined condition is met, thus preventing erroneous winnings of special winnings. be able to.

20. Original invention 20
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 20 Same as original invention 19.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 20 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
When the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination (1BB) is stopped and displayed, the special game (1BB game) can be executed,
In the special game, it is possible to execute a notification game state (AT) in which operation information (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) can be notified,
In a game in which a symbol combination corresponding to a special winning combination can be stopped and displayed, a stop switch corresponding to a reel other than the predetermined reel (third reel 31) is operated, and a symbol combination corresponding to a special winning combination can be stopped and displayed. If the specified condition is not met (the waiting time has not elapsed) in the event that the special winning is 100% (so-called, the special winning is 100%), the stop switch corresponding to the reel other than the specified reel is operated. From the subsequent predetermined timing (initially when the standby time is saved in step S810 in FIG. 147) until the predetermined reel makes at least one rotation (at least 750.624 ms from the time of step S810 (one rotation time of the reel 31) ) is characterized in that the predetermined reel is not stopped even if a stop switch corresponding to the predetermined reel is operated.
(c) Effect of original invention 20 Same as original invention 19.

21. Original invention 21
(a) Problem to be solved by Original Invention 21 The original invention enables a ceiling function to be realized in a gaming machine provided with an advantageous section.
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that are provided with a ceiling counter and count the number of games that have passed without switching to AT (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-061760).
However, there were cases where the advantageous period ended while the ceiling counter was counting the number of games played. Here, since the ceiling counter is data related to the instruction function, it is considered that the data is cleared when the advantageous section ends. Therefore, if the advantageous period ends while the ceiling counter is counting the number of games played, there is a problem in that the ceiling counter is cleared.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to make it possible to realize a ceiling function even when an advantageous section is provided.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 21 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
A first lottery state (RT1) and a second lottery state (non-RT),
An advantageous section in which a notification gaming state (AT) can be executed that can notify operation information of a stop switch,
When the number of games in the first lottery state satisfies a predetermined condition (reaching 1400 games), it is possible to move to the second lottery state,
In the first lottery state which is an advantageous section, if the end conditions of the advantageous section are satisfied, it is possible to shift to the first lottery state which is a non-advantageous section;
Even when the first lottery state, which is an advantageous section, shifts to the first lottery state, which is a non-advantageous section, the number of games played in the first lottery state is continuously counted.

(c) Effect of original invention 21 According to the original invention, even if the advantageous section ends midway, the number of games played in the first lottery state continues to be counted, so that the number of games played in the first lottery state is counted based on the number of games played in the first lottery state. It becomes possible to provide a ceiling function.

22. Original invention 22
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 22 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that is capable of performing reel effects.
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that perform a reel effect in which the reels are temporarily stopped in a pseudo game (for example, Japanese Patent No. 5709176).
However, the pseudo game in the prior art was a reel performance based on the player's operation of a stop switch.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to execute reel effects without relying on the player's operation of a stop switch and to provide regularity to the timing at which the reels stop.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 22 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
It is possible to execute a reel performance (standby performance) in which each reel (31) is stopped at a predetermined scheduled stop position and a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed (standby performance start (M_TARPIC_EXE)),
When executing the reel effect, for each reel, information regarding the scheduled stop position (information in the reel effect data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT)) and the timer value until the reel can be stopped (reel effect execution timer table (TBL_TARPIC_TM#) ) information) can be stored,
Even if the predetermined reel reaches a timing at which it can be stopped at a scheduled stop position during execution of the reel production, the timer value corresponding to the predetermined reel is a value that allows the predetermined reel to stop. When the reel is not set, the predetermined reel is not stopped.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 22 According to the original invention, it is possible to provide regularity to the timing at which each reel stops in a reel performance using a simple method.

23. Original invention 23
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 23 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that outputs information related to preventing addiction.
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that output information regarding prevention of addiction upon completion of AT (for example, Japanese Patent No. 6288357).
However, the output of conventional information regarding prevention of addiction has been uniform.
The problem that the invention is originally intended to solve is to appropriately output information related to preventing addiction.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 23 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) that can notify operation information (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) is enabled,
In the case where it is determined that a plurality of sets of notified gaming states are executable, there is a case where, during execution of one set of notified gaming states, it is notified that the next set of notified gaming states will be executed,
In a situation where multiple sets of announced gaming states can be executed, if it is announced that the next set of announced gaming states will be executed while one set of announced gaming states is being executed, one set of announced gaming states will be executed. After executing the state and before the next set of notification game states is executed, information regarding prevention of addiction is not output (“Yes” in step S975 in FIG. 160),
In a situation where multiple sets of announced gaming states can be executed, if the notification that the next set of announced gaming states will be executed is not announced during the execution of one set of announced gaming states, After executing the notification gaming state, before the next set of notification gaming states is executed, information regarding prevention of addiction can be output (in FIG. 160, if "No" in step S975, step S978 is executed do)
It is characterized by

(c) Effects of Original Invention 23 According to the original invention, the output of information regarding prevention of addiction can be made to correspond to the notification contents in one set of notification gaming states. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether the next set of notification game states will be executed or not depending on whether or not the information regarding prevention of addiction has been output.

24. Original invention 24
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 24 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that can output a continuation effect based on the operation of a stop switch.
In the prior art, it is known that when sending a presentation message from a control device to a presentation device, a message with a delay function is included to delay the execution of the presentation message after a set time has elapsed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-042759 Publication No.).
In the conventional technology, when delaying the performance at the third stop, it is necessary to transmit a command indicating the delay at the third stop.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to make it possible to delay the output timing of the effect without transmitting a command indicating the delay at the third stop.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 24 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
The timer value from a predetermined timing after a predetermined switch (start switch 41) is operated can be stored (step S993 in FIG. 161),
In a game that outputs a specific effect (the outcome of the effect), when the last operated stop switch is turned from on to off and the timer value has reached the predetermined value ("Yes" in step S995). ) allows a specific production to be output at the timing when the last operated stop switch turns from on to off.
In a game that outputs a specific effect, if the last operated stop switch turns from on to off and the timer value is not the predetermined value, at the timing when the timer value reaches the predetermined value (step It is characterized in that a specific effect can be output (when the result in S995 is "Yes").

(c) Effect of original invention 24 According to the original invention, it is possible to delay the timing of outputting a specific effect. Furthermore, a player who does not want a specific performance to be output immediately can delay the output timing of the specific performance at his/her own will.

25. Original invention 25
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 25 The original invention relates to a gaming machine in which the output volume can be set.
In the prior art, there is known a system in which an administrator (on the store side) sets a standard for the volume of the performance, and further allows the player to set the volume (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-074301). .
However, with the above conventional technology, the volume is often set a little louder by the store, and in this case, even if the player sets the volume to a low level, the volume cannot be reduced to the level desired by the player. The problem is that it is not possible.
The problem that the invention is originally intended to solve is to enable a player who desires a low volume to be able to reduce the volume regardless of the settings made by the store.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 25 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
A first volume setting mode (administrator mode in FIG. 162(A)) and a second volume setting mode (player mode in FIG. 162(B)) are provided as modes for setting the volume,
The first volume setting mode can be executed when predetermined conditions are met (power on/off, setting change state, setting confirmation state),
The second volume setting mode is executable by the player,
The output volume is determined based on the volume set in the first volume setting mode and the volume set in the second volume setting mode,
A predetermined performance sound (for example, a start sound) that is output when a predetermined volume (for example, "loud") is set in the first volume setting mode and the minimum volume (volume 1) is set in the second volume setting mode. The volume of the operation sound of the switch 41, the operation sound of the stop switch 42, the tenpai sound, the winning sound of the role, GBM during AT, etc. ("20" in Fig. 162(C)) and the first volume setting mode. The volume of a predetermined effect sound that is output when the volume is set to a specific volume (for example, "low") and is set to the minimum volume in the second volume setting mode ("20" in FIG. 162(C)). are characterized by being substantially the same.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 25 According to the original invention, the volume is set to a predetermined volume in the first volume setting mode and the volume is set to a specific volume in the second volume setting mode. If the volume is set to the minimum volume, the predetermined performance sound is output at substantially the same volume. Thereby, the volume can be set to the minimum volume in the second volume setting mode without being affected by the volume setting in the first volume setting mode.

26. Original invention 26
The original invention relates to a gaming machine in which the output volume can be set.
In the prior art, there is known a system in which an administrator (on the store side) sets a standard for the volume of the performance, and further allows the player to set the volume (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-074301). .
However, in the above-mentioned conventional technology, it is not possible to determine the specific level of the volume on the volume setting screen, so the administrator cannot try playing a game after setting the volume. It was necessary.
The problem that the invention is originally intended to solve is to make it possible to know the specific level of the volume when setting the volume.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 26 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
A first volume setting mode (administrator mode in FIG. 162(A)) and a second volume setting mode (player mode in FIG. 162(B)) are provided as modes for setting the volume,
The first volume setting mode can be executed when predetermined conditions are met (power on/off, setting change state, setting confirmation state),
The second volume setting mode is executable by the player,
The output volume is determined based on the volume set in the first volume setting mode and the volume set in the second volume setting mode,
In the first volume setting mode, icons corresponding to multiple selectable volume levels are displayed as images, and when any icon is selected, a predetermined sound can be output at the volume corresponding to the selected icon. It is characterized by

(c) Effects of Original Invention 26 According to the original invention, when setting the volume in the first volume setting mode, it is possible to grasp the approximate level of the set volume.

27. Original invention 27
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 27 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that executes predetermined instructions by a program.
It is known that a conventional gaming machine is configured from a plurality of modules (processing) in order to execute gaming control (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-104160).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional technology, the instructions constituting the module are complicated, and there is room for improvement.
The problem that the invention originally seeks to solve is to simplify instructions.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 27 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (24th embodiment) is
It has multiple storage areas (RWM53) that can store data based on program execution,
As a program command,
Store the value of the reference address in a predetermined register (HL register),
A specific instruction (CLRHL ( HL), n),
Even after the specific instruction is executed, the value of the reference address is stored in the predetermined register.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 27 According to the original invention, it is possible to clear all the designated ranges (memorize "0") with one command.
Further, the value of the reference address is stored in a predetermined register, and even after a specific instruction is executed, the value of the predetermined register does not change (the value of the reference address is stored). This allows the value of the reference address to be read based on the value stored in a predetermined register even after a specific instruction has finished, so for example, processing to re-memorize the value of the reference address in a predetermined register can be performed. is no longer necessary, and processing can be simplified.

28. Original invention 28
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 28 Same as original invention 27.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 28 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (24th embodiment) is
It has a storage means (RWM53) having a stack area,
It is possible to execute main processing (for example, FIG. 41) and interrupt processing (for example, FIG. 53) executed at a predetermined cycle,
As a program command,
A predetermined value stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register) and "n (n is an integer)" are compared (for example, "n" is subtracted from the A register value), and the carry is calculated by the comparison operation. When the flag becomes "1", a specific instruction ("RCP C, A, n ”),
Even if the predetermined cycle of interrupt processing arrives during execution of the specific instruction, the interrupt processing is permitted after the specific instruction is completed.

(c) Effect of original invention 28 According to the original invention, since interrupt processing is not executed while a specific instruction is being executed, the value of the carry flag corresponding to the operation by the specific instruction is determined by the operation executed in the interrupt processing. It does not change. This prevents the value of the carry flag from being corrupted by interrupt processing and allows correct processing to be executed.

29. Original invention 29
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 29 The original invention relates to a method for specifying a combination of stopped symbols on an active line.
In conventional gaming machines, even if an abnormality occurs after the stop switch operation is accepted and an unintended symbol combination stops on the active line, the payout process is executed based on the stop switch operation. (For example, Japanese Patent No. 6229810).
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to more appropriately specify the stopping symbol combination.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 29 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (25th embodiment) is
Equipped with a storage area (stop symbol data (1st group) to (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9)) that can store data that can identify stopping symbol combinations,
A predetermined initial value (11111111 (B), 00001111 (B), or 00000011 (B)) can be stored in the storage area at a predetermined timing before the stop switch (42) is operated;
Obtain the stop symbol data (symbol combination data stored in the # reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_#)) corresponding to the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the active line on the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch. It is possible to execute a predetermined process that performs a calculation based on the stop symbol data and the data stored in the storage area, and stores data corresponding to the result of the calculation in the storage area (stop symbol set in FIG. 195). (M_STOPPIC_SET)),
Each time a stop switch corresponding to a rotating reel is operated, the predetermined process can be executed, thereby making it possible to update the data stored in the storage area.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 29 According to the original invention, even if the power is cut off during the game, the stop symbol data up to the middle of the game can be retained. In addition, after the stop position was determined but before the symbols stopped, the reels could not be stopped at the correct position due to an abnormality caused by a power outage or a motor drive abnormality (the correct symbol did not stop on the active line). ), it is possible to execute the payout process by assuming that the payout has stopped at the correct position. Therefore, no disadvantage is given to the player.

30. Original invention 30
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 30 Same as original invention 29.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 30 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (26th embodiment) is
Equipped with a data table (Reel symbol search table No. # (TBL_PICARG_#)) that stores data that can identify stopping symbol combinations,
Each reel is provided with a storage means (symbol array address buffers 1 to 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1 to 3)) capable of storing the address value of the data table,
The address value corresponding to the stop symbol can be stored in the storage means,
data can be obtained from the data table based on the address value stored in the storage means,
It is characterized by being able to execute a predetermined calculation for specifying a stopping symbol combination based on the acquired data.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 30 According to the original invention, even if the power is cut off during the game, data regarding the stopped symbols up to the middle of the game can be retained. In addition, after the stop position was determined but before the symbols stopped, the reels could not be stopped at the correct position due to an abnormality caused by a power outage or a motor drive abnormality (the correct symbol did not stop on the active line). ), it is possible to execute the payout process by assuming that the machine has stopped at the correct position without compressing the storage capacity of the RWM. Therefore, no disadvantage is given to the player.

31. Original invention 31
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 31 Same as original invention 29.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 31 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (28th embodiment) is
The first position of the first reel (for example, "1" in FIG. 230), the second position of the second reel (for example, "5" in FIG. 230), and the third position of the third reel (for example, "5" in FIG. 230). has a predetermined effective line (for example, effective line L1) that passes through "9"),
A first storage area (_WK_PIC_LFT1) that can store the symbol data of the first position, a second storage area (_WK_PIC_CEN2) that can store the symbol data of the second position, and a third memory that can store the symbol data of the third position. Equipped with area (_WK_PIC_RIG3),
The present invention is characterized in that the stop symbol combination of the predetermined active line can be specified based on the symbol data stored in the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area.

(c) Effect of original invention 31 According to the original invention, after the stop position is determined but before the symbols stop, the reels cannot be stopped at the correct position due to an abnormality due to a power cut or a motor drive abnormality. Even if the correct symbol does not stop at the active line, it is possible to assume that the correct symbol has stopped at the correct position and execute the payout process without compressing the capacity of the program. Therefore, no disadvantage is given to the player.

32. Original invention 32
(a) Same as original invention 29.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 32 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (28th embodiment) is
As valid lines in a predetermined game, there is a first valid line (valid line L1) to an Nth (N>1) valid line (valid line L5),
It has a specific storage area (_WK_ALL_PIC) that can store data for specifying the stopping symbol combinations of all active lines in a given game,
In a given game,
It is possible to calculate the first data (_WK_PIC_L1) corresponding to the stop symbol combination of the first active line,
It is possible to calculate the Nth data (_WK_PIC_L5) corresponding to the stop symbol combination of the Nth active line,
The first data corresponding to the stop symbol combination on the first active line to the Nth data corresponding to the stop symbol combination on the Nth active line are synthesized by a predetermined operation (logical OR), and the synthesized data is stored in a specific storage area. It is characterized by being able to be memorized.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 32 According to the original invention, after the stop position is determined but before the symbols stop, the reels cannot be stopped at the correct position due to an abnormality due to a power outage or a motor drive abnormality. Even if the correct symbol does not stop at the active line, it is possible to assume that the correct symbol has stopped at the correct position and execute the payout process without compressing the capacity of the program. Therefore, no disadvantage is given to the player.
Furthermore, since the winning determination is not made for each active line, but the winning judgment is made based on a specific storage area, the number of payout coins can be determined at once.

33. Original invention 33
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 33 The original invention relates to a data table for acquiring symbol data of symbols on an active line.
In conventional gaming machines, it is known to store a symbol arrangement in order to specify symbols on an active line (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-039456).
The problem that the invention is originally intended to solve is to more appropriately acquire symbol data of symbols on the active line.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 33 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (Example 1 of the 27th embodiment (or 25th embodiment)) is
The reels include at least a predetermined reel (left reel 31) and a specific reel (middle reel 31),
The position of the active line of the predetermined reel (upper stage) and the position of the active line of the specific reel (middle stage) are positions that do not match on the horizontal line,
A predetermined data table that stores the symbol data of the predetermined reel (the left reel symbol arrangement table in FIG. 228(B)) and a specific data table that stores the symbol data of the specific reel (the middle, in FIG. 228(B)) Reel symbol arrangement table)
In the predetermined data table, symbol data corresponding to symbol number
In the specific data table, symbol data corresponding to symbol number Y (Y≠X) (symbol number 1) is stored at the top address (1100 (H)) where symbol data is stored. .

(c) Effects of Original Invention 33 According to the original invention, symbol data on the active line can be obtained by a simple method without performing complicated calculations.

34. Original invention 34
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 34 Same as original invention 33.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 34 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (Example 1 of the 27th embodiment (or 25th embodiment)) is
A first position (lower left) which is a reference position of a predetermined reel (left reel 31), and a second position (the second position is different from the first position) which is a symbol position on at least one active line of the predetermined reel. ) (top left),
Equipped with a data table (symbol arrangement table in FIG. 228(B)) storing symbol data,
In a game in which a symbol with a predetermined symbol number (number 0) on the predetermined reel stops at the first position, the symbol data ( The feature is that it is possible to obtain the symbol data of symbol number 2).

(c) Effects of Original Invention 34 According to the original invention, symbol data on the active line can be obtained by a simple method without performing complicated calculations.
In addition, a reference position (reference line) is set up separately from the active line, and the symbols on the active line are specified based on this reference position, so even if there is a change in the active line, the change can be easily accommodated. be able to. In other words, data and programs can be easily modified.

35. Original invention 35
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 35 Same as original invention 33.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 35 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The invention of original claim 1 (Example 1 of the 27th embodiment) is
The reels include at least a predetermined reel (right reel 31) and a specific reel (middle reel 31),
a first position (lower right row) that is a reference position of the predetermined reel and is a symbol position on at least one active line of the predetermined reel;
A second position (the second position and the first position are located on the same horizontal line) (middle and lower row), which is the reference position of the specific reel, and a symbol on at least one active line of the specific reel. and a third position (third position≠second position) (middle middle stage),
A predetermined data table that stores the symbol data of the predetermined reel (the symbol arrangement table of the right reel in FIG. 228(B)) and a specific data table that stores the symbol data of the specific reel (the symbol array table of the middle reel in FIG. 228) array table),
In the predetermined data table, the symbol data of symbol number X (number 0) is stored at the top address where the symbol data is stored,
In the specific data table, the symbol data of symbol number Y (Y≠X) (No. 1) is stored at the top address where the symbol data is stored,
In a game in which a symbol with a specific symbol number on the specific reel stops at the second position, the symbol of the symbol that will stop at the third position on the specific reel is based on the specific symbol number and the specific data table. It is characterized by being able to obtain data.
The invention of original claim 2 is:
The reels include at least a predetermined reel (left reel 31) and a specific reel (middle reel 31),
A first position (lower left row) which is a reference position of the predetermined reel, and a second position which is a symbol position on at least one active line of the predetermined reel (the second position may be the same as the first position) ( upper left) and
A third position (the third position and the first position are located on the same horizontal line) (middle and lower row), which is the reference position of the specific reel, and a symbol on at least one active line of the specific reel. and a fourth position (fourth position≠third position) (middle middle stage),
A predetermined data table that stores the symbol data of the predetermined reel (the left reel symbol arrangement table in FIG. 228(B)) and a specific data table that stores the symbol data of the specific reel (the middle, in FIG. 228(B)) Reel symbol arrangement table)
In the predetermined data table, symbol data of symbol number X (No. 2) is stored at the top address (1000 (H)) where symbol data is stored,
In the specific data table, the symbol data of symbol number Y (Y≠X) (No. 1) is stored at the top address (1100 (H)) where the symbol data is stored,
In a game in which a symbol with a predetermined symbol number (No. 0) on the predetermined reel stops at a first position, the symbol stops at a second position on the predetermined reel based on the predetermined symbol number and the predetermined data table. It is possible to obtain the pattern data of the pattern (design data of pattern number 2),
In a game where a symbol with a specific symbol number (No. 0) on the specific reel stops at the third position, the symbol stops at the fourth position on the specific reel based on the specific symbol number and the specific data table. The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to obtain the symbol data of the symbol (the symbol data of symbol number 1).

(c) Effect of original invention 35 Same as original invention 34.

36. Original invention 36
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 36 Same as original invention 33.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 36 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (Example 2 of the 27th embodiment) is
A first position (upper right row) which is a reference position of a predetermined reel (right reel 31), and a second position (the second position is different from the first position) which is a symbol position on at least one active line of the predetermined reel. ) (lower right),
a storage means (ROM 54 or RWM 53) that stores or is capable of storing information (difference data) for specifying the second position of the predetermined reel from the first position of the predetermined reel;
Comprising a data table (Fig. 229(B)) storing symbol data,
The present invention is characterized in that symbol data of a symbol to be stopped at a second position of the predetermined reel can be acquired based on the first position of the predetermined reel, information in the storage means, and the data table.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 36 According to the original invention, symbol data on the active line can be obtained by a simple method without performing complicated calculations.
In addition, a reference position (reference line) is set up separately from the active line, and the symbols on the active line are specified based on this reference position, so even if there is a change in the active line, the change can be easily accommodated. be able to. In other words, data and programs can be easily modified.
Furthermore, even if there is a change in the effective line, it is only necessary to change the data in the storage means without changing the data table.

37. Original invention 37
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 37 The original invention relates to a method for determining the number of game media to be awarded corresponding to a stopped symbol combination on an active line.
In conventional gaming machines, there is a known method of determining the number of payouts using a payout table when a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination stops on the active line (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-130066 ).
The problem originally intended to be solved by the invention is to more appropriately determine the number of game media to be awarded corresponding to the stopped symbol combinations on the active line.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 37 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (25th embodiment) is
Equipped with a predetermined storage area (stop symbol data (1st group) to (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9)) that can store data for specifying stop symbol combinations,
The data stored in the predetermined storage area and the data for determining whether the symbol combination that gives the gaming value "X" has stopped (stored in the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) in FIG. 195) data) and perform a predetermined calculation (processing shown in FIG. 200),
Based on the calculation result of the predetermined calculation, it is possible to decide whether to give a gaming value "X" (for example, 15 coins);
If it is not decided to give the gaming value "X" based on the calculation result of the predetermined calculation (in FIG. 201, all bits of the stop symbol data (fifth group) and stop symbol data (sixth group) ), if the result is "No" in step S1118), the data stored in the predetermined storage area and the gaming value "Y" (Y≠X) (3 pieces ) is capable of executing the predetermined calculation based on data for determining whether or not the symbol combination that gives the symbol combination is stopped;
The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to determine whether or not to award a gaming value "Y" based on the calculation result of the predetermined calculation.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 37 According to the original invention, since the search is performed in order based on the number of coins to be paid out, it is possible to specify the number of coins to be paid out in a simple manner.

38. Original invention 38
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 38 Same as original invention 37.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 38 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (25th embodiment) is
A predetermined storage area (stop symbol data (first group) to (ninth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9)) capable of storing data for specifying stop symbol combinations;
It is equipped with an award number table (the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) in FIG. 193) that stores data that can specify the number of awarded gaming values,
The award number table stores at least collation data (specified data) for comparing with data for specifying a stopped symbol combination, and data on the number of gaming values awarded (obtained data),
In a situation where predetermined data is stored in the predetermined storage area, the number of game values to be awarded can be determined based on the predetermined data and verification data stored in the number to be awarded table. do.

(c) Effect of original invention 38 Same as original invention 37.

39. Original invention 39
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 39 Same as original invention 37.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 39 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The invention of original claim 1 (25th embodiment) is
Equipped with a predetermined storage area (stop symbol data (1st group) to (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9)) that can store data for specifying stop symbol combinations,
It has multiple symbol combinations (symbol combinations of minor roles 01 to 12) as symbol combinations that give a gaming value of “X” (15 pieces),
It has at least one symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination of small role 13) as a symbol combination that gives the gaming value "Y" (3 pieces),
Among the predetermined storage areas, the data storage area (bits or addresses) for specifying the symbol combination that gives the gaming value "X" is continuous;
Among the predetermined storage areas, there is a data storage area for specifying a symbol combination that provides a gaming value of "Y" between a plurality of data storage areas for specifying a symbol combination that provides a gaming value of "X". Try not to
The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to judge whether a symbol combination that gives a gaming value "Y" has stopped after determining whether a symbol combination that gives a gaming value "X" has stopped.

The invention of original claim 2 (25th embodiment) is
Equipped with a predetermined storage area (stop symbol data (1st group) to (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9)) that can store data for specifying stop symbol combinations,
It has multiple symbol combinations (symbol combinations of minor roles 01 to 12) as symbol combinations that give a gaming value of “X” (15 pieces),
It has at least one symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination of small role 13) as a symbol combination that gives the gaming value "Y" (3 pieces),
Among the predetermined storage areas, the data storage area (bits or addresses) for specifying the symbol combination that gives the gaming value "X" is continuous,
Among the predetermined storage areas, there is a data storage area for specifying a symbol combination that provides a gaming value of "Y" between the plurality of data storage areas for specifying a symbol combination that provides a gaming value of "X". Try not to
The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to judge whether a symbol combination giving a gaming value "X" has stopped after determining whether a symbol combination giving a gaming value "Y" has stopped.

In addition, when the "data storage area for specifying the symbol combination that gives the gaming value 'X'" is in bit units as in the 25th embodiment, the "data storage area for specifying the symbol combination that gives the gaming value 'X'""The data storage area for specifying is continuous," means, for example, that in the stop symbol data (fifth group), 15 symbols are paid out from the D0 bit corresponding to the small winning symbol 01 that pays out 15 symbols. It shows that up to D7 bits corresponding to the small winning combination 08 winning symbol to be issued are continuous.
In addition, "a data storage area for specifying a symbol combination that provides a gaming value of 'Y' does not exist between a plurality of data storage areas for specifying a symbol combination that provides a gaming value of 'X'," ” means, in the stop symbol data (fifth group), from the D0 bit corresponding to the minor winning symbol 01 that pays out 15 pieces to the D7 bit corresponding to the minor winning symbol 08 winning symbol that pays out 15 pieces. , indicates that there is no bit corresponding to the small winning symbol that pays out 3 or 1 coin.

On the other hand, if the "data storage area for specifying the symbol combination that gives the gaming value 'X'" is in units of addresses, as shown in the above-mentioned modification,
Stop symbol data (5th group): Small role 01 winning symbol to small role 08 winning symbol (15 pieces paid out)
Stop symbol data (6th group): Small role 09 winning symbol to small role 12 winning symbol (15 pieces paid out)
Stop symbol data (7th group): Small role 13 winning symbols to small role 20 winning symbols (3 pieces paid out)
Stop symbol data (8th group): Small role 21 winning symbol to small role 24 winning symbol (3 pieces paid out)
Stop symbol data (9th group): Small role 25 winning symbol to small role 32 winning symbol (1 payout)
Stop symbol data (10th group): Small role 33 winning symbol to small role 34 winning symbol (1 payout)
This corresponds to the case where each number of coins to be paid out has a separate address.
In this case, "the data storage area for specifying the symbol combination that gives the gaming value 'X' is continuous" means, for example, the stopped symbol data (fifth group) for paying out 15 pieces and the stopped symbols This indicates that the addresses of the data (sixth group) are consecutive.
In addition, "a data storage area for specifying a symbol combination that provides a gaming value of 'Y' does not exist between a plurality of data storage areas for specifying a symbol combination that provides a gaming value of 'X',"" means that between the address of the stop symbol data (fifth group) that pays out 15 pieces and the address of the stop symbol data (sixth group), the address of the stop symbol data (seventh group) ~ the stop symbol data ( 10th group) address does not exist.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 39 According to the original invention, predetermined operations can be executed in the order of addresses of predetermined storage areas, and programs can be simplified.

40. Original invention 40
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 40 Same as original invention 37.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 40 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (26th embodiment) is
Equipped with an award number table (payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) in FIGS. 220 and 221) for determining the number of gaming values awarded,
It is possible to generate predetermined data based on the stop symbol combination,
The address of the grant number table can be specified based on the bit position having a predetermined value in the predetermined data (steps S1189 to S1192 in FIG. 227);
The number of grants can be determined based on the data stored in the address of the number of grants table (steps S1192 and S1193 in FIG. 227).
It is characterized by

(c) Effects of the original invention 40 According to the original invention, only the bits corresponding to winnings have a predetermined value, so the number of coins to be paid out can be specified with a simple method.

41. Original invention 41
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 41 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that uses a stepping motor as a motor for rotating the reels.
Conventional gaming machines are known to use a stepping motor as a motor for rotating the reels, and to output four-phase excitation to the stepping motor when stopping the reels (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-016110 Publication No.).
Here, in conventional gaming machines, a DC motor (direct current motor) is generally used as a hopper motor for rotating a hopper disk.
However, since a DC motor requires a relatively large current when driving, if it is possible to apply game media while outputting four-phase excitation to the stepping motor, the hopper drive control associated with the application of game media will be affected. There is a possibility that the necessary current cannot be secured.
The problem initially sought to be solved by the invention is to make it possible to secure the current necessary to drive and control the hopper associated with the provision of game media.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 41 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (29th embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31),
When the number of credits is the upper limit ("50"), a predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the winning number "10" is won in the winning lottery means 61, the small prize A1 condition device is activated, and the winning number 15 is won. Either the small winning combination 01, which pays out , or the small winning combinations 13 to 17, which pays out 3 pieces, can be won), and in a situation where "N-1" (2) reels are stopped, When the operation of the stop switch (42) corresponding to the "N" (third) reel is accepted, a specific symbol combination (for example, a small payout that results in a payout of 3 pieces) in which game media (medals) are awarded. In a game where symbol combinations corresponding to winning combination 13 are stopped and displayed, an excitation output for stopping the "N" reel after the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is accepted. Even if the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is released at a predetermined timing before the elapse of the predetermined period for performing It is possible to perform drive signal output processing that outputs
When the number of credits is "0", the predetermined lottery result is obtained, and in a situation where "N-1" reels are stopped, operating a stop switch corresponding to the "N"reel; is received and the specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed, after the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is accepted, excitation for stopping the "N" reel is performed. Even if the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is released at a predetermined timing before the elapse of the predetermined period for outputting, the number of credits is added after the elapse of the predetermined period. It is characterized by being able to execute processing.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 41 According to the original invention, the hopper drive signal can be output after a predetermined period of excitation output for stopping the reels has elapsed, so the hopper is driven when game media are dispensed. The current necessary for control can be secured.
In addition, when the number of credits is the upper limit value and the hopper is driven to give game media, and when the number of credits is "0" and the number of credits is added to give game media, the reel It is possible to perform common processing until a predetermined period of time in which excitation output is performed to stop the excitation output is elapsed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing and reduce the amount of ROM used by the program.

42. Original invention 42
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 42 Same as original invention 41.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 42 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (29th embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31),
When a predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, and the small winning combination 01 becomes a payout of 15 pieces, or a small winning number 01 becomes a payout of 3 pieces. Any of the small winnings 13 to 17 can win), and in a situation where "N-2" (1) reels are stopped, "N-1" (2nd) reel is played. When the operation of the stop switch (42) corresponding to the "N" (third) reel is accepted at a predetermined timing before the elapse of a predetermined period for outputting excitation to stop the reel. Also, it is possible to execute control for stopping the “N” reel,
When the predetermined lottery result is obtained and "N-1" reels are stopped, the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is accepted, and the game media (medals) are released. In a game where a specific symbol combination to be awarded (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 13 that results in a payout of 3 pieces) is stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is not accepted. After that, the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is released at a predetermined timing before the elapse of a predetermined period for performing excitation output to stop the "N" reel. However, after the predetermined period has elapsed, control for awarding game media can be executed.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 42 According to the original invention, it is possible to perform control for dispensing gaming media after a predetermined period of excitation output for stopping the reels has elapsed. The current required for drive control can be secured.
Furthermore, even before the predetermined period for performing excitation output to stop the "N-1" reel has elapsed, the control for stopping the "N" reel can be executed. , the game can proceed smoothly.

43. Original invention 43
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 43 Same as original invention 41.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 43 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (29th embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31),
When a predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, and the small winning combination 01 becomes a payout of 15 pieces, or a small winning number 01 becomes a payout of 3 pieces. Any of the small winnings 13 to 17 can win), and in a situation where "N-2" (1) reels are stopped, "N-1" (2nd) reel is played. When the operation of the stop switch (42) corresponding to the "N" (third) reel is accepted at a predetermined timing before the elapse of a predetermined period for outputting excitation to stop the reel. Also, it is possible to execute control for stopping the “N” reel,
When the predetermined lottery result is obtained and "N-1" reels are stopped, the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is accepted, and the game media (medals) are released. In a game where a specific symbol combination to be awarded (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 13 that results in a payout of 3 pieces) is stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is not accepted. After that, the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is released at a predetermined timing before the elapse of a predetermined period for performing excitation output to stop the "N" reel. even if the predetermined period of time has elapsed, control for awarding game media can be executed;
The present invention is characterized in that the maximum value of current required for excitation output to stop the reel is designed to be smaller than the maximum value of current required to drive the hopper.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 43 According to the original invention, since it is possible to execute control for dispensing gaming media after a predetermined period of time when excitation output is performed to stop the reels, the hopper The current required for drive control can be secured.
Furthermore, even before the predetermined period for performing excitation output for stopping the "N-1" reel has elapsed, the control for stopping the "N" reel can be executed. , the game can proceed smoothly.
Furthermore, the design is such that the maximum current required for excitation output to stop the reels is smaller than the maximum current required to drive the hopper, making it possible to control the stopping of multiple reels at the same time. It can be done.

44. Original invention 44
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 44 Same as original invention 41.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 44 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (30th embodiment) is
"N" (3) reels (31),
Storage means (reel management timer (_WK_RL#_TIME) of RWM53) capable of storing information (data from "0 to 108 (D)") for measuring the period during which excitation output is performed to stop the reel (FIG. 237) ) and ,
When a predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, and the small winning combination 01 becomes a payout of 15 pieces, or a small winning number 01 becomes a payout of 3 pieces. Any of the small winnings 13 to 17 can win), and in a situation where "N-1" (2) reels are stopped, it corresponds to the "N" (third) reel. In a game where the operation of the stop switch (42) is accepted and a specific symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning combination 13 that results in a payout of 3 pieces) for which game media (medals) are awarded is stopped and displayed. , at a predetermined timing after the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is accepted and before the period for performing excitation output to stop the "N" reel has elapsed. , even if the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is released ("No" in step S1314 in FIG. 238), the information stored in the storage means will remain at a predetermined value ("0"). ) (“Yes” in step S1342 of FIG. 241), control for awarding game media (medal payout at the time of winning in step S294 of FIG. 238) can be executed.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 44 According to the original invention, the storage means capable of storing information for measuring the period of excitation output for stopping the reel is provided, and the information stored in the storage means is set to a predetermined value. After that, control for dispensing game media can be executed, so that it is possible to secure the current necessary for drive control of the hopper in conjunction with dispensing game media.
Further, based on the information stored in the storage means, it can be easily determined that the period for performing excitation output for stopping the reels has elapsed.

45. Original invention 45
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 45 Same as original invention 41.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 45 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (31st embodiment) is
"N" (3) reels (31),
A storage means (#th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR#) of RWM53 (_PT_MOTOR#) (FIG. 134)) capable of storing information regarding the excitation output of the motor related to the reel;
When a predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, and the small winning combination 01 becomes a payout of 15 pieces, or a small winning number 01 becomes a payout of 3 pieces. Any of the small winnings 13 to 17 can win), and in a situation where "N-1" (2) reels are stopped, it corresponds to the "N" (third) reel. In a game where the operation of the stop switch (42) is accepted and a specific symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning combination 13 that results in a payout of 3 pieces) for which game media (medals) are awarded is stopped and displayed. , after the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is accepted, information indicating that excitation output is to be performed to stop the "N" reel (deceleration pulse data "00001111(B)'' (4-phase on)) is stored in the storage means ("Yes" in step S1355 of FIG. 242), and the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is released ( If "No" in step S1354 of FIG. 242), control for awarding game media (medal payout at the time of winning in step S294 of FIG. 242) is not executed, and the information stored in the storage means is changed to the predetermined information. (Stop pulse data "00000000 (B)") ("No" in step S1355 in FIG. 242), the control for giving game media can be executed.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 45 According to the original invention, the storage means is provided that can store information regarding the excitation output of the motor related to the reel, and the storage means stores information indicating that the excitation output for stopping the reel is to be performed. When the information is stored in the storage means, the control for awarding game media is not executed, and the control for awarding game media can be executed after the information stored in the storage means becomes predetermined information. It is possible to secure the current necessary to drive and control the hopper as the medium is applied.
Further, based on the information stored in the storage means, it can be easily determined that the period for performing excitation output for stopping the reels has elapsed.

46. Original invention 46
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 46 Same as original invention 41.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 46 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (31st embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31),
When a predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, and the small winning combination 01 becomes a payout of 15 pieces, or a small winning number 01 becomes a payout of 3 pieces. Any of the small winnings 13 to 17 can win), and in a situation where "N-1" (2) reels are stopped, it corresponds to the "N" (third) reel. In a game where the operation of the stop switch (42) is accepted and a specific symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning combination 13 that results in a payout of 3 pieces) for which game media (medals) are awarded is stopped and displayed. , after the stop switch corresponding to the "N"th reel has been released ("No" in step S1354 in FIG. 242), and the excitation output for stopping the "N"th reel has been performed. Even if the number of game media to be distributed is determined (“Yes” in step S1355 of FIG. 242), the number of game media to be distributed can be determined (display determination in step S291 of FIG. 242), and the number of game media to be distributed is determined. After the excitation output for stopping the "N" reel is finished ("No" in step S1355 in FIG. 242), control for awarding gaming media (medals at the time of winning in step S294 in FIG. 242) is performed. It is characterized by making it possible to execute (payout).

(c) Effect of original invention 46 According to the original invention, after the excitation output for stopping the "N" reel is completed, it is possible to execute the control for applying gaming media. It is possible to secure the current necessary to drive and control the hopper.
In addition, if the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is released, even if the excitation output is being performed to stop the "N" reel, the number of game media awarded will be can be determined, it is possible to shorten the time from when the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is released to when the control for awarding game media is executed.

47. Original invention 47
(a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 47 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that awards game media when a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed.
In conventional gaming machines, when all the reels stop, it is then determined whether all stop switches have been released (no stop switches have been operated), and the system determines whether all stop switches have been released. There is known a system that determines whether or not a symbol combination that awards game media is stopped and displayed (winning determination) when it is determined that a game medium is present (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2016-026717).
However, if the winning determination is made after all the stop switches are released, the winning determination processing will be delayed when the player continues to operate the stop switch corresponding to the reel that will stop last.
The problem that the invention originally sought to solve was to shorten the time from when the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is accepted to when the number of game media to be awarded is determined, and to The purpose is to allow the granting to be carried out smoothly.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 47 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (32nd embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31),
When a predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, and the small winning combination 01 becomes a payout of 15 pieces, or a small winning number 01 becomes a payout of 3 pieces. Any of the small winnings 13 to 17 can be won), and when the stop switch (42) is operated in a predetermined operation mode (correct answer press order), a specific symbol combination (in which game media (medals) are awarded) For example, in a game where a symbol combination (corresponding to small winning combination 01 with a payout of 15 pieces) is stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" (third) reel is accepted, and the Even if the switch operation continues to be accepted, the number of game media to be given can be determined (display determination in step S291 in FIG. 244), and after determining the number of game media to be given, It is determined whether or not a predetermined switch including a stop switch corresponding to at least the "N" reel is operated, and if it is determined that the predetermined switch is not operated (in step S1362 of FIG. 244, ""No") is characterized by enabling execution of control for awarding game media (medal payout at the time of winning in step S294 in FIG. 244).
In addition, the original invention was
Equipped with "N" reels,
In a game where a specific symbol combination for which game media is awarded is stopped and displayed when a predetermined lottery result is obtained and the stop switch is operated in a predetermined operation mode, the stop corresponding to the "N" reel Even in a situation where a switch operation is accepted and the stop switch operation continues to be accepted, the number of game media to be given can be determined, and after determining the number of game media to be given, It is characterized in that it is determined whether a stop switch corresponding to the Nth reel is operated or not, and when it is determined that the stop switch is not operated, control for awarding game media can be executed.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 47 According to the original invention, even if the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel continues to be accepted, the number of game media to be awarded can be determined. Therefore, the time from when the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is accepted to when the number of game media to be awarded is determined can be shortened, and the subsequent grant of game media can be executed smoothly. be able to.
In addition, after determining the number of game media to be awarded, it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel has been operated, and if it is determined that the stop switch has not been operated, the control for awarding game media is executed. Since it is made executable, it is possible to provide game media at a timing desired by the player.

48. Original invention 48
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 48 Same as original invention 41.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 48 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (33rd embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31),
In a game in which a predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the winning number "7" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the "1BB + Cherry" conditional device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated), "N-1" In a situation where ``N'' (2) reels are stopped, the operation of the stop switch (42) corresponding to the ``N'' (3rd) reel is accepted, and a specific symbol combination (for example, Cherry (Symbol combination "Cherry" - "ANY" - "ANY" corresponding to the 1-card combination) is stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is accepted. Even if the condition continues, after the excitation output for stopping the "N" reel is completed ("No" in step S1413 in FIG. 251), the game media (medals) are The situation in which the control for awarding game media (medal payout at the time of winning in step S294 in FIG. 251) is enabled and the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is accepted executes the control for awarding game media. If the game continues even after the game is played, a predetermined effect regarding the game result is output after the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is released ("No" in step S1415 in FIG. 251). (The winning of the 1BB condition device is announced by lighting the production lamp.)

(c) Effects of Original Invention 48 According to the original invention, after the excitation output for stopping the "N" reel is completed, it is possible to execute the control for applying gaming media. It is possible to secure the current necessary to drive and control the hopper.
Furthermore, when the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is released, a predetermined effect related to the game result may be executed, so that the predetermined effect related to the game result is executed at the timing desired by the player. You can make it so that

49. Original invention 49
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 49 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a plurality of reels and a plurality of stop switches operated by a player when stopping each reel.
In conventional gaming machines, when the rotation of all reels reaches a constant speed and the indexes of all reels are detected, there is a known system that enables reel stop control based on the operation of a stop switch for all reels. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-026717).
The problem initially sought to be solved by the invention is to enable it to be determined by simple arithmetic processing whether or not the indexes of all reels have been detected.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 49 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (34th embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31),
A storage means (#th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) (FIG. 253)) capable of storing information regarding the reel drive state is provided for each reel,
A predetermined operation (logical product operation of the data stored in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL#_STS) and "40 (H)") can be executed using the information stored in each of the storage means,
Even if multiple reels are rotating at a constant speed, if the index has not yet been detected for any reel, the predetermined result (“0” (zero flag is “1”) even if the predetermined calculation is executed is ”))
Even if a stop switch (42) is operated, if the predetermined result is not obtained as a result of executing the predetermined calculation, stop control of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is not executed.
In addition, the original invention was
Equipped with "N" reels,
Each reel is equipped with a storage means that can store information regarding the driving state of the reel.
A predetermined operation can be executed using the information stored in each of the storage means,
Even when a plurality of reels are rotating at a constant speed, if an index has not yet been detected for any of the reels, executing the predetermined calculation does not result in the predetermined result;
In a situation where the predetermined result is not obtained as a result of executing the predetermined calculation, even if a stop switch is operated, stop control of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is not executed.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 49 According to the original invention, it is possible to judge whether or not the indexes of all reels have been detected depending on whether or not a predetermined result is obtained as a result of executing a predetermined calculation. Through such arithmetic processing, it is possible to determine whether or not the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop switch can be executed.

50. Original invention 50
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 50 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that starts the rotation of the reels based on the operation of a start switch.
In conventional gaming machines, when all the reels stop, it is then determined whether all stop switches have been released (no stop switches have been operated), and the system determines whether all stop switches have been released. There is known a system that determines whether or not a symbol combination that awards game media is stopped and displayed (winning determination) when it is determined that a game medium is present (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2016-026717).
The problem to be solved by the invention is to execute appropriate control in accordance with the type of other input signals when the operation of the start switch is accepted.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 50 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (34th embodiment) is
If the start switch operation is accepted in a situation where the bet switch operation is accepted after the number of bets that can be executed for the game has been placed (RWM53 input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD)) When the result of the logical product operation of the data in FIG.
If the operation of the start switch is accepted after the number of bets that can be executed for the game has been placed and the signal of the setting key switch is input, Enables reel rotation start control,
The present invention is characterized in that when a signal from a setting key switch is input under a specific situation where no bet is placed, a mode can be entered in which the set value can be confirmed.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 50 According to the original invention, when the operation of the start switch is accepted in a situation where the operation of the bet switch is accepted, the rotation start control of the reels is not executed. Players and hall staff can be made aware of the occurrence of an abnormality such as failure to return to its original state due to deterioration of the machine.
In addition, when the start switch operation is accepted while the setting key switch signal is input, the reel rotation start control is executed, but the setting key switch signal during the game is noisy. Since there is a high possibility that the noise occurs, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted by the noise.

51. Original invention 51
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 51 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that stops the reels based on the operation of a stop switch.
In conventional gaming machines, when all the reels stop, it is then determined whether all stop switches have been released (no stop switches have been operated), and the system determines whether all stop switches have been released. There is known a system that determines whether or not a symbol combination that awards game media is stopped and displayed (winning determination) when it is determined that a game medium is present (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2016-026717).
The problem that the invention is originally intended to solve is to execute appropriate control according to the type of other input signals when the operation of the stop switch is accepted.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 51 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (34th embodiment) is
Equipped with multiple (3) reels (31),
If a predetermined stop switch operation is accepted in a situation where a plurality of reels are rotating at a constant speed and an operation of the start switch (41) is accepted, the reels are rotated based on the operation of the predetermined stop switch. Do not execute stop control (because the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (Figure 254) does not match any data in the stop switch determination table (Figure 255), "No" is returned in step S1435 in Figure 257. , do not proceed to step S1437),
If a predetermined stop switch operation is accepted under a predetermined situation where a plurality of reels are rotating at a constant speed and a setting key switch signal is input, the reels will be reeled based on the predetermined stop switch operation. (Even if the setting key switch signal is input, the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (Figure 254) and any data in the stop switch judgment table (Figure 255) can be executed. If they match, “Yes” is determined in step S1435 in FIG. 257, and the process proceeds to step S1437).
The present invention is characterized in that when a signal from a setting key switch is input under a specific situation where no bet is placed, the mode can be shifted to a mode in which the set value can be confirmed.

(c) Effect of original invention 51 According to the original invention, when the stop switch operation is accepted in a situation where the start switch operation is accepted, the reel stop control is not executed. Players and hall staff can be made aware of the occurrence of an abnormality such as failure to return to its original state due to deterioration.
In addition, when a stop switch operation is accepted while a setting key switch signal is being input, the reel stop control is executed, but the setting key switch signal is noise while the game is in progress. Since the possibility is high, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted due to noise.

52. Original invention 52
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 52 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that stops the reels based on the operation of a stop switch.
In conventional gaming machines, when all the reels stop, it is then determined whether all stop switches have been released (no stop switches have been operated), and the system determines whether all stop switches have been released. There is a known system that determines whether or not a symbol combination for awarding game media is stopped and displayed (win determination) when it is determined that a symbol combination that awards game media is present (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2016-026717).
The problem originally intended to be solved by the invention is to execute appropriate control when operations of a plurality of stop switches are accepted simultaneously.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 52 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (35th embodiment) is
Equipped with multiple (3) reels (31),
In a situation where a plurality of reels are rotating at a constant speed, if the operation of the first stop switch (42) and the operation of the second stop switch are received at the same time, the operation corresponding to the first stop switch (42) The reel stop control can be executed (the result of the AND operation of the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) (Fig. 133) and the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) (Fig. 173) is set as an offset value, and this is set to the reference address "1100". (H)" is set as the designated address, and the reel 31 is stopped controlled based on the data indicated by the designated address in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) (FIG. 259));
In a situation where the reel corresponding to the first stop switch is stopped and the reel corresponding to the second stop switch is rotating at a constant speed, the operation of the first stop switch and the operation of the second stop switch are The present invention is characterized in that, if they are received at the same time, it is possible to execute stop control of the reel corresponding to the second stop switch.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 52 According to the original invention, when operations of a plurality of stop switches are received simultaneously, stop control of any one reel can be appropriately executed.

53. Original invention 53
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 53 Same as original invention 52.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 53 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (35th embodiment) is
multiple (3) reels (31);
Equipped with a predetermined table (stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) (Figure 259)),
In a situation where a plurality of reels are rotating at a constant speed, if the operation of the first stop switch and the operation of the second stop switch are received at the same time, the predetermined information is obtained using the predetermined table. (The result of the AND operation of the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) (Fig. 133) and the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) (Fig. 173) is set as an offset value, and this is added to the reference address "1100 (H)". The result is set as a specified address, the data indicated by the specified address is obtained from the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) (Figure 259)), and based on the specified information, it is possible to execute stop control of the reel corresponding to the first stop switch. year,
In a situation where the reel corresponding to the first stop switch is stopped and the reel corresponding to the second stop switch is rotating at a constant speed, the operation of the first stop switch and the operation of the second stop switch are If they are received at the same time, specific information is obtained using the predetermined table, and based on the specific information, it is possible to execute stop control of the reel corresponding to the second stop switch. .

(c) Effects of Original Invention 53 According to the original invention, when operations of a plurality of stop switches are received simultaneously, stop control of any one reel can be appropriately executed.

54. Original invention 54
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention 54 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that stops the reels based on the operation of a stop switch.
In conventional gaming machines, when all the reels stop, it is then determined whether all stop switches have been released (no stop switches have been operated), and the system determines whether all stop switches have been released. There is known a system that determines whether or not a symbol combination that awards game media is stopped and displayed (winning determination) when it is determined that a game medium is present (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2016-026717).
The problem that the invention was originally intended to solve is that a stop switch corresponding to a predetermined reel is operated, and then, before the predetermined reel stops, a stop switch corresponding to a specific reel is operated so that the specific reel stops first. , to later perform appropriate control when a given reel stops.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 54 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (36th embodiment) is
Equipped with multiple (3) reels (31),
A predetermined lottery result has been obtained (for example, the winning number "25" is won by the winning lottery means 61, the 1BB condition device corresponding to the winning number "25" is activated, and the "Blue BAR" corresponding to 1BB - "Blue BAR" is selected). ” - In a game where the symbol combination “Blue BAR” can be stopped and displayed on the active line, the stop switch (42) corresponding to the predetermined reel is operated at the first timing, and then the predetermined reel stops. If the stop switch corresponding to the specific reel is operated at the second timing, the predetermined reel may stop after the specific reel stops;
If the symbols constituting a specific symbol combination ("Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR" - "Blue BAR") are stopped and displayed in a straight line as a result of the predetermined reel stopping after the specific reel has stopped, the predetermined reel is It is characterized by being configured to be able to output a predetermined effect (tempai sound) depending on the timing of stopping.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 54 According to the original invention, even if the order of operating the stop switches and the order of stopping the reels are different, a predetermined performance can be output at an appropriate timing that does not give the player a sense of discomfort. .

55. Original invention 55
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 55 The original invention relates to a gaming machine having a plurality of notification control states.
In the prior art, there is known a gaming machine (slot machine) which notifies the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won during AT, but does not notify the correct pressing order even if the pressing order bell is won during non-AT. Furthermore, there are gaming machines that do not notify the correct press order internally even during AT (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2017-179487, 2014-030674, and 2018-187065). Public notices, etc.).
However, since the ball payout rate differs for each RT based on the replay winning probability, etc., there is a problem in that if the player stays for a long time at an RT with a low ball payout rate, it will be disadvantageous for the player.
The problem that the invention originally sought to solve was to make the ball payout rate almost the same as when staying at other RTs, even when staying at an RT (lottery state) with a low ball payout rate. It is.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 55 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (37th embodiment) is
The first lottery state (non-RT),
and a second lottery state (RT1) in which the probability of winning at least one lottery target (replay) is higher than in the first lottery state,
Specific lottery results that can stop and display symbol combinations with different numbers of game values awarded depending on the operation mode of the stop switch (42) (winning of minor prizes A01 to A24, minor prizes B01 to B24, and minor prizes C01 to C24) ),
In the game that resulted in the specific lottery result, the percentage of not reporting the stop switch operation mode (correct answer press order) that is advantageous to the player is higher than the percentage of notifying the stop switch operation mode that is advantageous to the player. 1 notification control state (non-AT) and the game with the above-mentioned specific lottery result, the ratio of not reporting the stop switch operation mode that is advantageous to the player is higher than the ratio of notifying the stop switch operation mode that is advantageous to the player. A second notification control state (AT) higher than ,
In the first lottery state and the first notification control state, the ratio of notifying the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player in the game that resulted in the specific lottery result is higher than in the second lottery state and the first notification control state. High (non-RT and non-AT will be notified at a rate of approximately 3.45%, but RT1 and non-AT will not be notified)
It is characterized by

(c) Effect of original invention 55 According to the original invention, in the first lottery state and the first notification control state, the player in the game that has a specific lottery result is more likely to Since the rate of notification of the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to ).

56. Original invention 56
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 56 The original invention relates to a gaming machine having a plurality of notification control states.
Conventionally, gaming machines (slot machines) have been known that play a game while the BB is inside and when an AT is won, execute the AT while the BB is inside (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155645 (see publication).
However, in the gaming machine having the above specifications, the BB game may have a specification in which the number of medals decreases. In this case, if the BB is won, there is a problem that the player will be at a disadvantage.
The problem that the invention initially aims to solve is to prevent the medals (game media) from decreasing even if a special prize is won.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 56 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (37th embodiment) is
The first lottery state (non-RT),
and a second lottery state (RT1) in which the probability of winning at least one lottery target (replay) is higher than in the first lottery state,
Specific lottery results that can stop and display symbol combinations with different numbers of game values awarded depending on the operation mode of the stop switch (42) (winning of minor prizes A01 to A24, minor prizes B01 to B24, and minor prizes C01 to C24) ),
In the game that resulted in the specific lottery result, the percentage of not reporting the stop switch operation mode (correct answer press order) that is advantageous to the player is higher than the percentage of notifying the stop switch operation mode that is advantageous to the player. 1 notification control state (non-AT),
In the game resulting in the specific lottery result, a second notification control state ( AT) and .
In the first lottery state and the second lottery state, the winning information of the special role (1BB) can be carried over, respectively.
When the winning information of the special winning combination is carried over in the first lottery state and the state shifts from the first notification control state to the second notification control state, there is a specification that suggests that the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination should be stopped and displayed. Making the production possible,
If the winning information of the special winning combination is carried over in the second lottery state and the first notification control state shifts to the second notification control state, the specific performance is not executed.

(c) Effect of original invention 56 According to the original invention, when the first notification control state shifts to the second notification control state in the first lottery state, it is possible to shift to a special game by enabling execution of a specific performance. Therefore, the special game can be executed only in the second notification state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a transition to a special game in the first notification control state and a decrease in game value.

57. Original invention 57
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 57 The original invention relates to a gaming machine in which it is possible to set conditions for transition to a specific notification control state.
In the prior art, there is a gaming machine (slot machine) that has multiple RTs and increases the probability of winning an AT during the CZ when a CZ is won during the stay of a higher-ranking RT (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019 -005550).
However, since it is not possible to create a relationship between an advantageous section and the next advantageous section, there is a problem that the game tends to become monotonous.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to make it possible to create a relationship between an advantageous section (second section) and the next advantageous section.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 57 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (38th embodiment) is
A plurality of lottery states (non-RT, RT1, RT2) with different winning probabilities for at least one lottery target (replay);
A first section (normal section) in which the operation mode of the stop switch is not notified;
A second section (advantageous section) that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch,
Specific lottery results that can stop and display symbol combinations with different numbers of game values awarded depending on the operation mode of the stop switch (42) (winning of minor prizes A01 to A24, minor prizes B01 to B24, and minor prizes C01 to C24) ),
In the second period, in the case of the specific lottery result, the rate of notifying the stop switch operation mode that is advantageous to the player is higher than the rate of not informing the stop switch operation mode that is advantageous to the player. Equipped with an announcement control state (AT),
Based on which lottery state is the lottery state when the second section is started, at least one of the conditions for transition to the specific notification control state (for example, the number of ceiling games until AT is activated) can be set. It is characterized by

(c) Effect of original invention 57 According to the original invention, if the second section is completed in the desired lottery state and the transition is made to the first section, and then the transition is made to the second section again, the specific notification control state can be entered. It becomes possible to change the transition conditions.

58. Original invention 58
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 58 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that is capable of playing games with at least a first specified number or a second specified number.
In a conventional gaming machine (slot machine), for example, if a game can be executed with the specified number "2" and the specified number "3", and the specified number "3" is the intended specified number, then the specified number "2" It is known that when playing a game, a warning such as "3 cards at a time!" is issued (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-183680).
However, even if the above-mentioned warning is given, there is a problem that, for example, during AT, information regarding games (such as the number of games played) is updated.
The problem originally intended to be solved by the invention is to control the updating of predetermined information regarding games when a game is played with an unintended number of specified numbers.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 58 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (39th embodiment) is
In a predetermined gaming state (when the accessory is not activated), it is possible to play with at least the first prescribed number (the prescribed number "3") or the second prescribed number (the prescribed number "2"),
Depending on the operation mode of the stop switch (42), there may be a specific lottery result (winning of minor prizes A01 to A24, minor prizes B01 to B24) that allows symbol combinations with different numbers of game values to be stopped and displayed. ,
In the game resulting in the specific lottery result, a specific notification control state (AT) is provided that can notify the player of a stop switch operation mode (correct answer press order) that is advantageous to the player,
In a game with a first specified number and a specific notification control state, it is possible to update the display regarding the total number of gaming values awarded in the specific notification control state and the number of games played in the specific notification control state,
In a game with a second specified number and a specific notification control state, the display of the total number of game values awarded in the specific notification control state can be updated, and the display regarding the number of games played in the specific notification control state is not updated. shall be.

(c) Effect of original invention 58 According to the original invention, in a game with a second specified number and a specific notification control state, it is possible to update the display of the total number of gaming values awarded in the specific notification control state. Since the display regarding the number of games played in the control state is not updated, it is possible to prevent the number of games played in the specific notification control state from decreasing in the second specified number. Thereby, even if the player plays a game by mistake in the specified number of games in the specific notification control state, the player can be rescued.
On the other hand, even if the game is played with the second specified number, the total number of game values awarded in the specific notification control state can be updated, so that it is possible to accurately notify the player of the increase or decrease in the game value.

59. Original invention 59
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 59 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that can play games with at least a first specified number or a second specified number.
In a conventional gaming machine (slot machine), for example, if a game can be executed with the specified number "2" and the specified number "3", and the specified number "3" is the intended specified number, then the specified number "2" It is known that when playing a game, a warning such as "3 cards at a time!" is issued (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-183680).
However, even if the above-mentioned warning is given, the performance will continue to be executed as before, so there is a problem in that it is difficult for the player to notice that the prescribed number is unintended.
Furthermore, for example, during AT, there is a problem in that predetermined information regarding games (such as the number of games played) is updated.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to make it easier for players to notice that a game is being played with an unintended number of specified numbers. Another purpose is to control updating of predetermined information regarding games when a game is played with an unintended specified number of games.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 59 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (39th embodiment) is
In a predetermined gaming state (when the accessory is not activated), it is possible to play with at least the first prescribed number (the prescribed number "3") or the second prescribed number (the prescribed number "2"),
a first section (normal section) in which the operation mode of the stop switch (42) is not notified;
A second section where the operation mode of the stop switch can be notified (advantageous section)
Equipped with
Depending on the operation mode of the stop switch, there may be a specific lottery result (winning of minor prizes A01 to A24, minor prizes B01 to B24) that allows symbol combinations with different numbers of game values to be stopped and displayed,
In the second section, when the specific lottery result is obtained, a specific notification control state (AT) is provided that can notify the player of an advantageous stop switch operation mode (order of correct answer presses);
In the first prescribed number of games, a predetermined performance can be executed according to the winning combination result,
In the game of the second specified number, the predetermined performance is not executed according to the winning combination result,
In a game with a first specified number and a specific notification control state, it is possible to update the display regarding the total number of game values awarded in the specific notification control state and the number of games played in the second notification control state,
In a game with a second specified number and a specific notification control state, the display of the total number of game values awarded in the specific notification control state can be updated, and the display regarding the number of games played in the specific notification control state is not updated. shall be.

(c) Effect of original invention 59 According to the original invention, since the predetermined effect is not performed in the game of the second specified number, it is possible to make it easier to notice that the game is the game of the second specified number at the start of the game. can.
In addition, in games with the second specified number and specific notification control state, it is possible to update the display of the total number of gaming values awarded in the specific notification control state, but the display regarding the number of games played in the specific notification control state is not updated. , it is possible to prevent the number of games in the specific notification control state from decreasing in the second specified number. Thereby, even if the player plays a game by mistake in the specified number of games in the specific notification control state, the player can be rescued.

60. Original invention 60
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention 60 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that can play games with at least a first specified number or a second specified number.
In a conventional gaming machine (slot machine), for example, if a game can be executed with the specified number "2" and the specified number "3", and the specified number "3" is the intended specified number, then the specified number "2" It is known that when playing a game, a warning such as "3 cards at a time!" is issued (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-183680).
However, even if the above-mentioned warning is given, a continuous performance or the like may be executed, and there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to notice that the prescribed number is unintended.
Furthermore, for example, during AT, there is a problem in that predetermined information regarding games (such as the number of games played) is updated.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to make it easier for players to notice that a game is being played with an unintended number of specified numbers.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 60 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (39th embodiment) is
In a predetermined gaming state (when the accessory is not activated), it is possible to play with at least the first prescribed number (the prescribed number "3") or the second prescribed number (the prescribed number "2"),
A first section (normal section) in which the operation mode of the stop switch is not notified;
A second section (advantageous section) that can notify the operation mode of the stop switch,
Depending on the operation mode of the stop switch, there may be a specific lottery result (winning of minor prizes A01 to A24, minor prizes B01 to B24) that allows symbol combinations with different numbers of game values to be stopped and displayed,
In the second section, when the specific lottery result is obtained, a specific notification control state (AT) is provided that can notify the player of an advantageous stop switch operation mode (order of correct answer presses);
In a game in which it is determined to execute a continuous performance over a plurality of consecutive games, the continuous performance is allowed to proceed in the first prescribed number of games,
In a game in which it is decided to execute a continuous performance, the continuous performance does not proceed in the second specified number of games,
In a game with a first specified number and a specific notification control state, it is possible to update the display regarding the total number of gaming values awarded in the specific notification control state and the number of games played in the specific notification control state,
In a game with a second specified number and a specific notification control state, the display of the total number of game values awarded in the specific notification control state can be updated, and the display regarding the number of games played in the specific notification control state is not updated. shall be.

(c) Effects of the original invention 60 According to the original invention, since continuous effects are not performed in the game of the second specified number, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that it is a game of the second specified number. .
In addition, in games with the second specified number and specific notification control state, it is possible to update the display of the total number of gaming values awarded in the specific notification control state, but the display regarding the number of games played in the specific notification control state is not updated. , it is possible to prevent the number of games in the specific notification control state from decreasing in the second specified number. Thereby, even if the player plays a game by mistake in the specified number of games in the specific notification control state, the player can be rescued.

61. Original invention 61
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 61 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a production switch.
It is known that in conventional gaming machines (slot machines), a production switch (push button) is provided, the production switch is enabled while a production that prompts the production switch to be operated, and the production is developed when the production switch is operated. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-052111 and Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-057814).
However, there is a discrepancy between the timing at which the display that prompts the user to operate the production switch starts displaying and the timing at which the production switch is activated. The problem is that it may not be enabled.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to match the timing of displaying an image indicating that the production switch is operable with the timing of enabling the production switch.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 61 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (40th embodiment) is
A production control means (sub control board 80) that controls production output;
and a production switch (push button) connected to the production control means,
The effect control means is capable of displaying an image indicating that the effect switch can be operated at a predetermined timing during the effect based on the determined effect,
The effect control means is characterized in that it measures the time until the effect switch is enabled based on the determined effect, and enables the effect switch based on the measurement result of the time.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 61 According to the original invention, the time until the effect switch is activated is measured, and the timing of displaying an image indicating that the effect switch can be operated and the timing of enabling the effect switch are determined. It is to match.

62. Original invention 62
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 62 Same as original invention 61.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 62 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (40th embodiment) is
A production control means (sub control board 80) that controls production output;
and a production switch (push button) connected to the production control means,
The effect control means is capable of displaying an image indicating that the effect switch can be operated at a predetermined timing during the effect based on the determined effect,
The effect control means measures the time until the effect switch is enabled based on the determined effect, and enables the effect switch based on the measurement result of the time,
In the event of a power outage, if the gaming state at the time of the power outage is a specific gaming state (CZ, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, a specific image can be displayed when recovering from the power outage. It is characterized by

(c) Effects of Original Invention 62 According to the original invention, the time until the effect switch is activated is measured, and the timing of displaying an image indicating that the effect switch can be operated and the timing of enabling the effect switch are determined. It is to match.
In addition, when a power outage occurs and the power is restored from the power outage, if the power was in a specified gaming state before the power outage, players, hall managers, etc. I can let you know.

63. Original invention 63
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 63 Same as original invention 61.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 63 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (40th embodiment) is
A production control means (sub control board 80) that controls production output;
and a production button (push button) connected to the production control means,
The performance control means is
A first performance control means (sub-main),
It has a second effect control means (sub-sub) that controls image display,
The second effect control means is capable of displaying a predetermined image indicating that the effect button can be operated at a predetermined timing during the effect based on the effect determined by the first effect control means,
The second effect control means is capable of transmitting a specific command to the first effect control means in conjunction with the start of display of the predetermined image,
The first effect control means is characterized in that it enables the effect button based on receiving the specific command.

(c) Effects of Original Invention 63 According to the original invention, by sending a specific command, the timing of activating the effect switch and the timing of displaying an image indicating that the effect switch can be operated can be synchronized. The timing of both can be matched without measuring time (without having a timer).

64. Original invention 64
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 64 The original invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a reset switch.
Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a reset switch have been known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2018-029668).
Here, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the power is turned on with the reset switch operated (turned on), all contents of the RAM of the main control board are cleared.
However, in a gaming machine that has set values, if all the contents of the RAM of the main control board are cleared, the set values will also be cleared, and the set values will have to be reset, making operations cumbersome. It ends up.
The problem that the invention originally aims to solve is to cause a gaming machine equipped with a reset switch to transition to an appropriate state depending on the type of switch being operated when the power is turned on.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 64 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (41st embodiment) is
As a gaming section,
a first section (normal section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) is not notified;
and a second section (advantageous section) capable of informing an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Equipped with game section notification means (advantageous section display LED 77),
When the game section notification means is in the first notification mode (lights out), it indicates that it is the first section,
When the game section notification means is in the second notification mode (lit), it indicates that it is the second section,
There are cases where a specified error state (recoverable error state) occurs,
When the predetermined error state occurs in a situation where the game section notification means is in the second notification mode and game values (medals) can be bet, the reset switch (153) is operated (turned on). state), when the predetermined error state is canceled, the game section notification means remains in the second notification mode even after the predetermined error condition is canceled;
When the game section notification means is in the second notification mode and the predetermined error state occurs in a situation where the game value can be bet, the power supply is cut off (the power is turned off), and then, When the setting key switch (152) is in a specific state (on state) and the reset switch is operated (on state), the power supply is resumed (power is turned on). In this case, the set value is not changed and the game section notification means is in a first notification state.
In addition, the original invention (41st embodiment) is
As a gaming section,
a first section (normal section) in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) is not notified;
and a second section (advantageous section) capable of informing an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Equipped with game section notification means (advantageous section display LED 77),
When the game section notification means is in the first notification mode (lights out), the game section may be in the first section,
When the game section notification means is in the second notification mode (lit), it indicates that it is the second section,
There are cases where a specified error state (recoverable error state) occurs,
When the predetermined error state occurs in a situation where the game section notification means is in the second notification mode and game values (medals) can be bet, the reset switch (153) is operated (turned on). state), when the predetermined error state is canceled, the game section notification means remains in the second notification mode even after the predetermined error condition is canceled;
When the game section notification means is in the second notification mode and the predetermined error state occurs in a situation where the game value can be bet, the power supply is cut off (the power is turned off), and then, When the setting key switch (152) is in a specific state (on state) and the reset switch is operated (on state), the power supply is resumed (power is turned on). In this case, the setting value is not changed and the game section notification means is in a first notification state.

(c) Effect of original invention 64 According to the original invention, when the power supply is resumed under the condition that the reset switch is operated, the set value is not changed, so there is no need to reset the set value. The performance of the gaming machine can be improved since the operation is not cumbersome.

65. Original invention 65
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 65 Same as original invention 64.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 65 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (41st embodiment) is
Under certain circumstances in which it is possible to bet game value (medals) (for example, under circumstances where the number of bets is between "1" and "3" and the number of credits is between "1" and "50") ), the power supply is cut off (power is turned off), and then the setting key switch (152) is in the first mode (on state) and the reset switch (153) is not operated (off state). ) If the power supply is resumed (the power is turned on), it is possible to enter the setting change mode, and if the conditions for ending the setting change mode are met, the gaming value can be bet. As a situation,
The power supply is cut off under the predetermined situation in which gaming value can be bet, and then the setting key switch is in the second mode (off state) and the reset switch is operated (on state). ), if the power supply is resumed, the specified storage areas ("F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM53, and "F292(H)" outside the used area) )” to “F3FF(H)”), and after executing the initialization processing, the gaming value can be bet without shifting to the setting change mode,
The power supply is cut off under the predetermined situation in which gaming value can be bet, and then the setting key switch is in the first mode (on state) and the reset switch is operated (on state). ) If the power supply is resumed under the situation where the power supply is resumed, it is possible to move to the setting change mode, and when the conditions for ending the setting change mode are met, the game value can be bet. shall be.

(c) Effect of original invention 65 According to the original invention, when the power supply is resumed in a gaming machine equipped with a reset switch, the state is shifted to an appropriate state depending on the type of switch being operated. Therefore, the performance of the gaming machine can be improved.

66. Original invention 66
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 66 Same as original invention 64.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 66 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (41st embodiment) is
Equipped with a predetermined display means (setting value display LED 73) capable of displaying the setting value,
When transitioning to the setting change mode, the setting value "M" (M is a numerical value) (for example, "2") is displayed as the setting value first displayed on the predetermined display means, and then the setting change switch (153) is operated and a set value "N" (N is a different value from M) (for example, "3") is displayed on the predetermined display means, the power supply is cut off (the power is turned off), After that, the power supply is resumed (the power is turned on) under the condition that the setting key switch (152) is in a specific mode (off state) and the reset switch (153) is not operated (off state). ), it is possible to shift to a setting change mode, and a set value "N" (for example, "3") is displayed as the setting value that is first displayed on the predetermined display means when moving to the setting change mode. possible,
When transitioning to the setting change mode, the setting value "M" is displayed as the first setting value displayed on the predetermined display means, and then, when the setting change switch is operated, the setting value "M" is displayed on the predetermined display means. If the power supply is cut off under a situation where "N" is displayed, and then the power supply is restarted under a situation where the setting key switch is in the specific mode and the reset switch is operated. The present invention is characterized in that a situation is established in which gaming values (medals) can be bet without shifting to a setting change mode.

(c) Effect of original invention 66 According to the original invention, when the power supply is cut off in the setting change mode and then the power supply is restarted, depending on whether or not the reset switch is operated, Since it is possible to shift to an appropriate state, the performance of the gaming machine can be improved.

67. Original invention 67
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 67 Same as original invention 64.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 67 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (41st embodiment) is
There may be cases where a specific error state (unrecoverable error state) occurs,
In the specific error state, the power supply is cut off (power is turned off), and then the setting key switch (152) is in the first mode (off state) and the reset switch (153) is operated. If the power supply is resumed (the power is turned on) under the condition (the power is on), the above-mentioned specific error state is established;
In the specific error state, the power supply is cut off, and then the setting key switch is in the second mode (on state) and the reset switch is not operated (off state). When the power supply is resumed, it will be possible to switch to setting change mode.
If the power supply is cut off without operating (turning on) the setting change switch (153) during the setting change mode, and then the power supply is restarted while the reset switch is being operated. , without entering the setting change mode, the game value (medals) can be bet.
In the specific error state, the power supply is cut off, and then the setting key switch is in the second mode (on state) and the reset switch is not operated (off state). In a situation where the power supply is resumed and the mode shifts to a setting change mode, the power supply is cut off without the setting change switch being operated during this setting change mode, and then the reset switch is operated. When power supply is resumed, the setting value information (setting value data (_NB_RANK)) is set to a specific value (“0”).

(c) Effect of Original Invention 67 According to the original invention, in a gaming machine equipped with a reset switch, when the power supply is cut off in a specific error state, and then when the power supply is restarted, the reset switch is operated. Since it is possible to shift to an appropriate state depending on the type of switch present, the performance of the gaming machine can be improved.

68. Original invention 68
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 68 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that has a case where it is in a recoverable error state and a case where it is in an unrecoverable error state.
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that have cases in which a recoverable error state occurs and cases in which a non-recoverable error state occurs (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-192206).
However, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above, the processing when the power is turned off in a recoverable error state and the processing when the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state have not been sufficiently considered. .
The problem that the invention originally sought to solve was to execute appropriate processing according to each state when the power is turned off in a recoverable error state and when the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state. It is to be.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 68 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (41st embodiment) is
There are cases in which a predetermined error state (recoverable error state) and cases in which a specific error state (unrecoverable error state) occurs,
In the power-off process (power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 360), the addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" of the used area of the predetermined storage means (RWM53) and the address "F210(H)" outside the used area are Based on the information stored in "H)" to "F3FF(H)"), error detection information (RWM checksum data) is generated and made memorizable;
In the predetermined error state, if an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (the power is turned off), the system is configured to be able to execute a power-off process,
In the specific error state, if an event in which the power supply is cut off occurs, the power supply cutoff process is not executed.

(c) Effect of original invention 68 According to the original invention, when the power is turned off in a recoverable error state and when the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, appropriate processing can be executed.

69. Original invention 69
(a) Problems to be Solved by Original Invention 69 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that has a case where it is in a recoverable error state and a case where it is in an unrecoverable error state.
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that have cases in which a recoverable error state occurs and cases in which a non-recoverable error state occurs (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-192206).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the display mode of the ratio display means in the case of a recoverable error state or an unrecoverable error state has not been sufficiently studied.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to change the display mode of the ratio display means to an appropriate display mode according to each state when a recoverable error state or an unrecoverable error state occurs. That's true.

(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 69 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (41st embodiment) is
Equipped with a ratio display means (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) capable of displaying multiple types of ratios (instruction-inclusive accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, accessory ratio, etc.) related to game results,
There are cases where it becomes a predetermined error state (recoverable error state) and cases where it becomes a specific error state (unrecoverable error state),
When the predetermined error state occurs, the ratio display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of ratios related to game results,
If the specific error state occurs while displaying predetermined information on a predetermined display of the ratio display means (for example, displaying "5" in digit 9 of the management information display LED 74), the maintaining a display mode so that the predetermined information is displayed on the predetermined display of the ratio display means;
The specific error state is characterized in that it is configured such that it cannot be canceled even by operating a reset switch (153).

(c) Effects of Original Invention 69 According to the original invention, even if a predetermined error state occurs, the ratio display means can display multiple types of ratios related to game results. In this case, the predetermined information remains displayed in the predetermined segment of the ratio display means, so that it is possible to determine which error state is occurring based on the display mode of the ratio display means.

70. Original invention 70
(a) Problem to be solved by original invention 70 Same as original invention 69.
(b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 70 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (41st embodiment) is
Equipped with a ratio display means (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) capable of displaying multiple types of ratios (instruction-inclusive accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, accessory ratio, etc.) related to game results,
There are cases where it becomes a predetermined error state (recoverable error state) and cases where it becomes a specific error state (unrecoverable error state),
When the predetermined error state occurs, the ratio display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of ratios related to game results,
When the specific error state occurs, the display mode of the ratio display means is set to a specific mode (for example, all lights are turned off),
The specific error state is characterized in that it is configured such that it cannot be canceled even by operating a reset switch.

(c) Effect of the original invention 70 According to the original invention, even if a predetermined error state occurs, the ratio display means can display multiple types of ratios related to the game results. In this case, the display mode of the ratio display means becomes a specific mode, so that it is possible to determine which error state is occurring based on the display mode of the ratio display means.

71. Original invention 71
(a) Problems to be Solved by the Original Invention The original invention relates to a gaming machine that allows the use of instructions with a small code size.
In the conventional technology, game control is comprised of a plurality of modules (processing) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-104160).
In the prior art, since the storage capacity of a ROM is limited, instructions that can efficiently use the storage area are desired.
The problem that the invention originally seeks to solve is to use storage space efficiently.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention (corresponding embodiments are written in parentheses).
The original invention was
comprising a ROM area arranged in the order of a first program area, a first data area, a second program area, and a second data area,
A predetermined address value (mn) of the first data area can be stored in a predetermined register (HL register) by the first instruction (LDF HL, mn (mn=1200h to 1DFFh)) of the first program area,
A second instruction (LD HL, mn) in the second program area enables a specific address value (mn) in the second data area to be stored in a predetermined register (HL register);
The first instruction is an instruction using a predetermined operation code (LDF), and the specific address value of the second data area cannot be stored in the predetermined register using the first instruction.
The code size of the first instruction (2 bytes) is smaller than the code size of the second instruction (3 bytes).

(c) Effects of the original invention According to the original invention, since the code size of the first instruction is made smaller than the code size of the second instruction, the first program area can be saved.

72. Original invention 72
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 71.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention (corresponding embodiments are written in parentheses).
The original invention was
comprising a ROM area having a first program area, a first data area, a second program area, and a second data area;
Among the instructions in the first program area, there are a plurality of instructions using the first opcode (LDF),
Among the instructions in the first program area, there are a plurality of instructions using the second opcode (LD),
Among the instructions in the second program area, there are a plurality of instructions using the second opcode,
Among the instructions in the second program area, there is no instruction using the first opcode,
Among the instructions using the first opcode, the first instruction is a 2-byte value that allows a predetermined value within a specific range (1200h to 1DFFh) to be stored in a predetermined register (HL register). can be,
Among the instructions using the second opcode, the second instruction is a 2-byte value and is an instruction that allows a specific value outside a specific range to be stored in a predetermined register (HL register),
The code size of the first instruction (2 bytes) is smaller than the code size of the second instruction (3 bytes).

(c) Effects of the original invention According to the original invention, the code size of the instruction using the first opcode is smaller than the code size of the instruction using the second opcode, so the first program area can be saved. I can do it.

73. Original invention 73
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 71.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention (corresponding embodiments are written in parentheses).
The original invention was
comprising a ROM area having a first program area, a first data area, a second program area, and a second data area;
The operation code (CALLEX) constituting the specific instruction (CALLEX mn) can be executed with the first code size (2 bytes) when calling a program at an address within a specific range (2000h to 20FFh).
The opcode that constitutes a specific instruction is executed with the second code size (4 bytes) (the second code size is larger than the first code size) when calling a program with an address outside the specific range. It is possible and
In the second program area, programs are stored in a range (2000h to 25FFh) larger than the specific range,
When executing a specific program in the second program area from a program in the first program area, the specific program in the second program area is made executable by executing a specific instruction,
The address of a particular program is characterized by being within a particular range.

(c) Effects of the original invention According to the original invention, the code size of a specific instruction that calls a program at an address within a specific range is reduced, so the first program area can be saved.

74. Original invention 74
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 71.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention (corresponding embodiments are written in parentheses).
The original invention was
a ROM area having a first program area, a first data area, a second program area, and a second data area;
an RWM area having a first storage area and a second storage area;
a first register bank and a second register bank;
The first register bank has a plurality of registers (A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L, SP registers, etc.),
The second register bank has a plurality of registers (A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L, SP registers, etc.),
When executing a program in the first program area, the first register bank is used;
When executing a program in the second program area from a program in the first program area, switching from the first register bank to the second register bank by executing a specific instruction (CALLEX mn); enables execution of the program in the second program area (mn);
When returning from the program in the second program area to the program in the first program area, by executing a predetermined instruction (RETEX), switching from the second register bank to the first register bank and The feature is that the program in the program area can be executed.

(c) Effect of the original invention According to the original invention, when a program in a first program area executes a program in a second program area, and from a program in the second program area to a program in the first program area, When returning, register saving processing and restoring processing are not necessary, so the program capacity can be reduced.

75. Original invention 75
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 71.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention (corresponding embodiments are written in parentheses).
The original invention was
a ROM area having a first program area, a first data area, a second program area, and a second data area;
comprising a first register bank and a second register bank,
The first register bank has a plurality of registers (A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L, SP registers, etc.) including a first register (for example, an A register),
The second register bank has a plurality of registers (A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L, SP registers, etc.) including the first register (for example, the A register),
When executing a program in the first program area, the first register bank is used;
When executing a specific program in the second program area from a program in the first program area, a specific instruction (CALLEX mn ) to enable switching from the first register bank to the second register bank and execution of a specific program within the second program area (mn);
By switching to the second register bank, the program can be executed in a situation where a specific value different from the predetermined value (the specific value may be "0") is stored in the first register of the second register bank. year,
When returning from the program in the second program area to the program in the first program area, by executing a predetermined instruction (RETEX), switching from the second register bank to the first register bank and Enables execution of programs within the program area,
The present invention is characterized in that when switching to the first register bank, a predetermined value is stored in the first register.
(c) Effect of the original invention Same as original invention 74.

76. Original invention 76
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 71.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention (corresponding embodiments are written in parentheses).
The original invention was
a ROM area having a first program area, a first data area, a second program area, and a second data area;
comprising a first register bank and a second register bank,
The first register bank has a plurality of registers (A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L, SP registers, etc.),
The second register bank has a plurality of registers (A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L, SP registers, etc.),
When executing a program in the first program area, the first register bank is used;
When executing a program in the second program area from a program in the first program area with interrupts enabled, interrupts are disabled and the register bank is changed from the first register bank to the second register bank by executing a specific instruction (CALLEX mn). enables switching to the register bank of and executing the program in the second program area (mn),
When returning from the program in the second program area to the program in the first program area, interrupts are enabled and the switch from the second register bank to the first register bank is performed by executing a predetermined instruction (RETEX). and execution of the program in the first program area.
(c) Effect of the original invention Same as original invention 74.

77. Original invention 77
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 71.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention (corresponding embodiments are written in parentheses).
The original invention was
a ROM area having a first program area, a first data area, a second program area, and a second data area;
comprising a first register bank and a second register bank,
The first register bank has a plurality of registers (A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L, SP registers, etc.) including the SP register,
The second register bank has a plurality of registers (A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L, SP registers, etc.) including the SP register,
When executing a program in the first program area, the first register bank is used;
When executing a specific program in the second program area (step S2852 in FIG. 380) from a program in the first program area, interrupts are disabled and the first switching from a register bank to a second register bank and executing a specific program within the second program area (mn);
The specific program in the second program area is characterized in that it is configured by a program including at least an instruction to store a specific value (F400h) in the SP register of the second register bank.

(c) Effect of the original invention According to the original invention, when a program in a first program area executes a program in a second program area, and from a program in the second program area to a program in the first program area, When returning, register saving processing and restoring processing are not necessary, so the program capacity can be reduced.
In addition, a specific value is stored in the SP register by a specific program in the second program area, and the specific value is not stored in the SP register in a subsequent predetermined program, so the program can be simplified and the program capacity can be reduced. can.

78. Original invention 78
(a) Problems to be Solved by the Original Invention The original invention relates to a gaming machine that is capable of executing pseudo game effects.
In the prior art, a game in which a pseudo game effect can be executed is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-124417).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional technology, if the control processing during the pseudo game production and the control processing during the main game were made the same, there was a risk that it would be difficult to distinguish between the pseudo game production and the main game. .
The problem that the invention originally sought to solve was to differentiate between a pseudo game presentation and a real game by making specific control processing during the pseudo game presentation different from specific control processing during the actual game. It is to make it possible.

(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention (corresponding embodiments are written in parentheses).
The original invention was
N (3) reels (31),
Equipped with a stop switch (42),
By satisfying a predetermined condition, it is possible to execute a pseudo game effect in which the reels can be temporarily stopped based on the operation of the stop switch,
In a pseudo game production, in a situation where up to "N-1" reels are temporarily stopped, swing fluctuation control is not executed for the "N-1" reels that are temporarily stopped,
In the pseudo game performance, after temporarily stopping N reels, swing fluctuation control can be executed for the N temporarily stopped reels.

(c) Effect of the original invention According to the original invention, since the swing fluctuation control can be executed after all reels have temporarily stopped, it is possible to determine whether or not a pseudo game performance is being performed based on the presence or absence of the swing fluctuation control. can.
Further, since the swing fluctuation control is not executed under a situation where only some of the reels are temporarily stopped, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not it is a pseudo game performance until the middle of the pseudo game performance.

79. Original invention 79
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 78.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention (corresponding embodiments are written in parentheses).
The original invention was
A stop switch (42),
Equipped with a stop switch lamp that indicates whether the stop switch operation is enabled or disabled,
By satisfying a predetermined condition, it is possible to execute a pseudo game effect in which the reels can be temporarily stopped based on the operation of the stop switch,
The lighting mode of the stop switch lamp is made different between a situation where the operation of the stop switch is effective in a pseudo game performance and a situation where the operation of the stop switch is effective in the main game for displaying the game result.
(c) Effects of the original invention According to the original invention, it is possible to determine whether or not a pseudo game performance is being performed by looking at the lighting mode of the stop switch lamp.

80. Original invention 80
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 78.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention (corresponding embodiments are written in parentheses).
The original invention was
By satisfying the predetermined conditions, it is possible to execute a pseudo game effect in which the reels (31) can be temporarily stopped based on the operation of the stop switch (42),
In this game for displaying game results, when the stop switch operation is valid and the stop switch is not operated for a long time, it is possible to execute a notification prompting the stop switch operation,
The present invention is characterized in that during a pseudo game performance, even when the stop switch operation is effective and the stop switch is not operated, a notification to prompt the stop switch operation is not executed.
(c) Effects of the original invention According to the original invention, it is possible to determine whether or not a pseudo game performance is being performed depending on whether or not a notification prompting the operation of the stop switch is executed.

81. Original invention 81
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 78.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention (corresponding embodiments are written in parentheses).
The original invention was
By satisfying the predetermined conditions, it is possible to execute a pseudo game effect in which the reels (31) can be temporarily stopped based on the operation of the stop switch (42),
In a simulated game performance, if a stop switch corresponding to a spinning reel is operated while the start switch remains on, the reel corresponding to the stop switch can be temporarily stopped. Features.
(c) Effects of the original invention According to the original invention, by operating the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reels while the start switch remains on, it is possible to determine whether or not a pseudo-gaming performance is being performed. can be determined.

82. Original invention 82
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 78.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention (corresponding embodiments are written in parentheses).
The original invention was
By satisfying the predetermined conditions, it is possible to execute a pseudo game effect in which the reels (31) can be temporarily stopped based on the operation of the stop switch (42),
In this game for displaying game results, the operation mode of the stop switch is displayed on the instruction monitor (number of wins display LED 78) based on meeting a specific condition (for example, winning the push order bell during AT). possible,
In a game that satisfies both the predetermined condition and the specific condition, the operation mode of the stop switch is not displayed on the instruction monitor during the pseudo game presentation, and the stop switch is displayed on the instruction monitor after the pseudo game presentation ends and the main game begins. It is characterized by being able to display the operation mode of.
(c) Effects of the original invention According to the original invention, since the operation mode of the stop switch is not displayed on the instruction monitor during the pseudo game performance, it is possible to prevent the players from being misled.

83. Original invention 83
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 78.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention (corresponding embodiments are written in parentheses).
The original invention was
Equipped with a predetermined lamp (game start display LED 79d) that can notify that the operation of the start switch (41) is valid based on a specified number of game media being bet,
After the start switch is operated, a pseudo game effect can be executed in which the reels (31) can be temporarily stopped based on the operation of the stop switch (42),
A case where the pseudo game effect is ended based on the start switch being operated under a situation where multiple reels are temporarily stopped and the predetermined lamp indicates that the start switch operation is not valid. It is characterized by having.
(c) Effects of the original invention According to the original invention, when transitioning to the main game after the end of the pseudo game production, a predetermined lamp notifies the player that the operation of the start switch is not valid, giving the player a misunderstanding. It is possible to avoid giving For example, the pseudo game effect can prevent the player from giving the wrong impression that it is a replay winning game.

84. Original invention 84
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 78.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention (corresponding embodiments are written in parentheses).
The original invention was
By satisfying the predetermined conditions, it is possible to execute a pseudo game effect in which the reels (31) can be temporarily stopped based on the operation of the stop switch (42),
If a specific lottery result is obtained in a game in which a pseudo game effect is executed, the process for outputting a test signal corresponding to the specific lottery result is not executed during the execution of the pseudo game effect, and the pseudo game effect is terminated. The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to later execute processing for outputting a test signal corresponding to a specific lottery result.
(c) Effect of the original invention According to the original invention, a test signal corresponding to a specific lottery result is not output during a pseudo-gaming performance, thereby preventing the test machine from outputting a test signal that could cause misunderstandings. I can do it.

85. Original invention 85
(a) Problem to be solved by the original invention Same as original invention 78.
(b) Means for solving the problem of the original invention (corresponding embodiments are written in parentheses).
The original invention was
By satisfying the predetermined conditions, it is possible to execute a pseudo game effect in which the reels (31) can be temporarily stopped based on the operation of the stop switch (42),
Equipped with a counter (advantageous section clear counter) that is updated by playing games in advantageous sections,
In a game in which a pseudo game performance is executed during an advantageous period, processing for outputting a test signal indicating that the game is in an advantageous period and a test signal indicating that a pseudo game effect is being executed can be executed. ,
The present invention is characterized in that the counter is not updated even when a pseudo game effect is executed once.
(c) Effects of the original invention According to the original invention, even if a pseudo game performance is executed, the counter of the advantageous section is not updated, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the pseudo game performance. can.

10 Slot machine (gaming machine)
11 Power switch 12 Front door 12a Second closing part 12b Third closing part 12c Control panel 12d Index 13 Cabinet 13a Bottom plate 13b Back plate 13c First closing part 14 Symbol display device 14a Reel frame 15 Medal payout device 16 Medal payout port 17 Door Switch 21 Performance lamp (decorative lamp part)
21a Pseudo game display lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image display device 23a Video reel 23b Decorative variable image 24 Operation button 25 Operation instruction lamp 26 Upper frame lamp part 26a Upper frame lamp board 26b Upper frame lamp cover 27 Right frame lamp part 27a Right frame lamp board 27b Right frame lamp cover 28 Left frame lamp part 28a Left frame lamp board 28b Left frame lamp cover 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 34 Sub reel 35 Hopper 36 Hopper motor 37a, 37b Payout sensor 38a Fixed shaft 38b Movable shaft 39a Movable piece 39b Spring 40a 1 bet switch 40b 3 bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 42a Stop button 42b Stopper 42c Coil spring 42d Moving piece 42e Detection sensor 43 Settlement switch 44a, 44b Loading sensor 45 Blocker 46 Passage sensor 47 Medal slot 47a Medal guard part 47b Medal holder 48 Chute passage 49 Chute sensor 50 Main control board (main control means)
50a Screw hole 51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
56 Board case (main board case)
57 Upper cover 57a Caulked portion 57b Gate trace 57c Recessed portion 57d Protrusion 57e Protrusion 58 Lower cover 58a Caulked portion 58b Gate trace 58c Boss 61 Role lottery means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Production group number selection means 65 Reel control means 66 Winning determination means 67 Payout means 71 Control command transmission means 73 Setting value display LED
74 Management information display LED (role ratio monitor)
75 Display board 76 Credit number display LED
77 Advantageous section display LED
78 Obtained number display LED
79 Status display LED
79a 1 bet display LED
79b 2 bet display LED
79c 3 bet display LED
79d Game start display LED
79e Loading display LED
79f Replay display LED
80 Sub control board (sub control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 Sub CPU
86 Electrolytic capacitor 87 Sub-board case 91 Production output control means 101 Hopper disk 102 Holding section 103 Discharging section 110 Reel base 120 Reel control board 121 Reel board case 130 Passage forming member 131 Upper medal reception port 132 Return medal passage 133 Lower medal reception port 134 Payout medal passage 151 Setting key insertion slot 152 Setting key switch 153 Setting change (reset) switch 200 Hall computer 300 Interface board 400 Testing machine 500 Pachinko game machine 501 Outer frame 502 Front frame 503 Hinge mechanism 504 Game board 505 Glass door (glass frame)
506 Upper plate 507 Lower plate 508 Firing handle 510 Power supply board 511 Power switch 512 Firing board 513 Firing device 520 Dispensing control board 521 Key insertion slot 522 Door opening switch 523 Frame opening switch 524 Dispensing device 525 External terminal board 530 Main control board 530a Hole 531 Special symbol display device 532 Starting port 533 Starting port switch 534 Setting key insertion port 535 Setting key switch 536 Setting change (reset) switch 537 Setting value display LED
538 Management information display LED (performance display monitor)
539a to 539h Connector 539b' to 539h' Connector foot 540 Sub control board 541 Display lamp (decorative lamp section)
542 Speaker 543 Image display device 550 Board case 560 Upper case 560a Lower edge 561 Cover 562 Caulked portion 563a to 563g Opening 564 Boss 565 Side wall 570 Lower case 570a Outer edge 571 Side wall 572 Caulked portion B to H Harness 610 Upper frame Lamp part 611 top Frame right lamp board 612 Upper frame left lamp board 613 Upper frame lamp cover 620 Right frame lamp part 621 Right frame lamp board 622 Right frame lamp cover 630 Left frame lamp part 631 Left frame lamp board 632 Left frame lamp cover 641a to k LED ( full color LED)
642a-c Connector 650 Right base member 651 Upper frame right side board attachment part 652 Upper frame right side cover attachment part 653 Right frame board attachment part 654 Right frame cover attachment part 661a-e Board support rib 662a-b Cover fitting groove 670 Lens part 681 Screw fixing boss 682a~c Positioning boss 683a~c Screw 684 Screw hole 685a~b Positioning hole 686a~b Fixing hole 687 Projection part 688 Screw shaft 689 Screw head

Claims (1)

has a reel;
Has a start switch,
Has a stop switch,
It has a predetermined lamp that can notify that the start switch operation is valid,
It has an RWM area,
It is possible to execute a predetermined pseudo game effect in which the reels can be temporarily stopped by operating a stop switch ,
In a game in which a predetermined pseudo game performance is performed, and a predetermined lottery result is determined by an internal lottery, a test corresponding to the predetermined lottery result is performed until all reels temporarily stop as a predetermined pseudo game performance. If all reels temporarily stop as a predetermined pseudo game effect without executing the process for outputting the signal, and then the predetermined pseudo game effect ends, a test signal corresponding to the predetermined lottery result is output. Enables processing to be executed,
When the start switch is operated to trigger the internal lottery of the certain game, a predetermined process for outputting an external signal corresponding to the number of bets is executed before a predetermined pseudo game effect execution process. possible,
There is a case where a predetermined pseudo game production is ended by operating a start switch in a predetermined situation where all reels are temporarily stopped as a predetermined pseudo game production,
In certain situations, a specified lamp does not indicate that the start switch operation is valid;
If the game media granting conditions are met, the game media granting process can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images